THE LIBRARY

THE INSTITUTE OF MEDIAEVAL STUDIES

TORONTO
PRESENTED BY

Rev. A. A. Vaschalde, B»S»B»

v'^

I
i '

K
4^

^^Jr^:^^ ^/r

^<l>' .

^^^r^'^i^^
7r

l-.
 Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
University of Toronto

http://www.archive.org/details/handbooktogramOOgree
 HANDBOOK
TO THE

GRAMMAK OF THE GREEK TESTAMENT.

 HANDBOOK
TO

THE GRAMMAR
OF

THE GREEK TESTAMENT

TOGETHER WITH

A COMPLETE VOCABULARY, AND AN EXAMINATION OF THE

CHIEF NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS
ILLUSTRATED BY NUMEROUS EXAMPLES AND COMMENTS

BY

Rev. S. G. GREEN, D.D,

REVISED AND IMPROVED EDITION

FLEMING H. REVELL COMPANY

New York Chicago Toronto
The Religious Tract Society. London
 6^9^2.
riov
\ a 02.0
 PEEFACE.
(See also Xote to Hevised Edition, jj. xi.)

That a knowledge of the New Testament in its original tongue is a thing

to be desired by intelligent Christians none ^'ill question. Such desire has
probably been largely quickened by the appearance of the Revised Version.
Xo book can be thoroughly known in a translation only ; and the Bible,
although *'
the most translatable of books," is no exception.
Many, who would gladly undertake the study, are deterred by the manifold
and unquestionable difficulties of the Greek language. It seems worth while
to ask whether this obstacle cannot, in some measure, be removed.
Undoubtedly, the Greek of the New Testament, as a later dialect of an
elaborate and polished language, can most effectively be studied through
the medium of the elder forms of the tongue. This method, accordingly,
is in general chosen ; and the historians and orators, the philosophers and
poets of Greece, have led the way to the Evangelists and the Apostles.
Yet many persons have no opportunity for studies so extended and difficult.

Are they, therefore, to be forbidden all access, save through translators,

critics, and interpreters, to the words of the Divine revelation ?

In attempting to reply, we note that the Greek of Scripture is, for most
purposes, a language complete in itself. Its forms and rules are definite,

its usages in general precise. Its peculiarities, though best approached from
the classic side, may be reached by a shorter way, and be almost as well
comprehended.
Many circumstances, again, facilitate the special study of the New
Testament tongue. The language of orators and philosophers had descended
to men of simpler mind and less artificial speech. Comparing the Sacred
Volume with Greek literature generally, we find a smaller vocabulary, fewer
grammatical forms, less intricate etymological rules, with scantier lists of
VI PREFACE.

exceptions, and a far less elaborate syntax ; wliile tlie student has tlie

advantage of being confined for the time to one limited, but intensely
interesting, field.

The following pages are then intended as a sufficient guide to Biblical

Greek for English students, that is, for those who have not studied the
classical languages. It may also be of service to those who have made
some progress in classical studies, but who wish to concentrate their chief

regards upon the language and syntax of the New Testament.

The plan of the volume, and the method recommended for its study, are

sufficiently set forth in the Introduction. To specify all the sources,

English and German, from which valuable aid has been derived, would
be unnecessary. Winer's comprehensive work (translated into English, with
large and valuable additions, by the Rev. Dr. Moulton, of Cambridge) has
of course been consulted throughout. Scarcely less useful have been the
researches and discussions of the late Dr. Donaldson. The New Testament
Grammars of the Rev. W. Webster, and of the Rev. T. S. Green, have
afforded some very valuable hints. On Greek Testament Lexicography,
it will suffice to name the Clavis Xovi Testcnnenti by Dr. C. L. W. Grimm,
now translated into English, with additions, by Dr. J. H. Thayer ; also
Cremer's New Testament Lexicon, translated by the Rev. W. Urwick, M.A.
The first Edition of the work was carefully revised in MS. by the Rev.
Dr. Jacob,late Head Master of Christ's Hospital, author of the Bromsyruve
Greek Grammar, and other classical works and, in the proof sheets, by the
;

Rev. R. B. Girdlestone, M.A., and by the late Rev. T. G. Rooke, B.A.,

afterwards President of Rawdon College. To the important suggestions of
those gentlemen the volume owes very much. It is commended to attentive
students of the New Testament, in the hope that it may lead not a few to
the better understanding, and therefore to the higher appreciation of the
Divine oracles.
 INTEODUCTION.

The following work so far differs from other manuals of the Greek
language, both in its method and in the persons for whom it is

intended, that some preliminary words on the plan by which its

several parts sliould be studied will not be out of place.
On Orthography, the sections should be thoroughly mastered,
not only for the sake of facility in reading, but because most of
the and so-called irregularities in the inflection of
difficulties
substantives, adjectives, and verbs depend on letter-changes, of
which the rules are comparatively few, and really simple. To
know these laAvs at the outset is to be provided with a key to
varieties and intricacies which might otherwise prove hopelessly
bewildering. It will be advisable that no student should advance
beyond this portion of the work before being able to read the
lessons on pages 10, 11 with fluency, and accurately to trans-
literate the paragraph on page 12. Great attention should be
paid at this stage to pronunciation, especially to the distinction
between the long and short vowels and those who may be study-
;

ing the work by themselves are strongly recommended to take an

opportunity of reading a chapter or two in Greek to some scholar
who can criticise and correct their mistakes.
In Etymology, the forms must be carefully and completely
learned. Everything in the student's further progress depends
upon this. It is believed that the systematic and progressive plan
on which the substantives and verbs, as the groundwork of the
whole, have been discussed, will but lightly burden the memory,
while the judgment will be kept constantly at work. The chief
point to be noted is the place and power of the stem in Greek

.G5
Vlll INTRODUCTION.

words. The and second declensions of Substantives will be

first

seen to be mainly reducible to the same law the third declension,

;

instead of perplexing the learner by countless varieties, will

exhibit one normal form. The inflection of Adjectives will
appear but a repetition of that of the Substantives while the ;

Peonouns only slightly differ. Of the Verbs, the terminations

should in the first instance be carefully studied. The first

Paradigm exhibits the simplest way in which these terminations

are combined v/ith the verbal root those that follow being but
;

variations on the same model, according to the character of the

Stem. The Verbs in /xt, called here " the Second Conjugation,"
are classified in a way which, it is believed, will give no serious
difficulty to the student.
The Exercises up to this point are simply for practice in
declension and conjugation, consisting almost exclusively of words
occurring in the " Sermon on the Mount " they are fair specimens
:

of the ordinary vocabulary of the language and the learner is

;

strongly recommended to write them out in all their forms, not

neglecting the accents, which, by the help of the rules given
under the several heads, will present but little difficulty.
A stock of words will thus have been acquired, with a know-
ledge of forms of inflection quite sufficient for ordinary cases.
Some chapters of greater difficulty follow (§§ 93 —
99 inclusive),
treating of the Verbs, tense by tense, and exhibiting the chief
variationsand anomalies in particular words. These sections may
be omitted on a first study of the volume, but it will be important
to read them carefully afterwards. The aim has been, so to
classify the verbal forms that the apparent irregularities may be
seen to be, in general, exemplifications of some more extended rule ;

and without trespassing on the more extended field of classical

literature, to leave no word in the New Testament without the
means of ready analysis and explanation.
The Exercises which succeed these sections are for still further
test. Here for the first time some easy sentences are introduced
for translation. Logically, these should no doubt have been
deferred until some rules of Syntax had been laid down but tlie ;
 INTRODUCTION. IX

interest and utility of such Exercises may

be held a sufficient
defence of the irregularities, especially as they contain scarcely
any usages but such as are already familiar to those who have
grammatically studied a-ny language. Here the Vocabulary will
be found necessary.
The chapters on the indeclinable Parts of Speech (§§ 118 138 —
inclusive) call for no remark. Their complete discussion belongs
to Syntax :but it was held necessary to the completeness of the
Etymology to give at least a general view of their formation and
meaning. So far as they extend, these sections should be closely
studied.
The reader will then be prepared for the Syntax, the study of
the intermediate chapters being postponed, if preferred, to a sub-
sequent stage. —
These sections (§§ 139 159 inclusive), on the
different Languages of which the Xew Testament contains the
trace, and on Xew Testament Proper Names, will suggest topics of
interesting inquiry, which, in a manual like the present, could be
pursued only for a very little way.
The Syntax embodies the simplest laws of concord, government,
and the connection of sentences, as well as others of a more special
and less obvious kind. The doctrines of the Article, of the Pre-
position, and of the Tenses, have received careful attention, as
throwing light on many obscure or misunderstood passages. The
arrangement of the Syntax has been adopted with a view to the
learner's convenience, and for the most part follows the order of
the parts of speech.
The student is specially and strongly recommended to study
the order of the whole work, and especially of this part, in the
Analytical Table of Contents. To this Table much care has
been devoted, in the hope that it might be convenient, not only for
ordinary reference, but as an outline and conspectus of the volume;
suggesting at one view the leading principles of the language, and
especially useful in recapitulatory examinations.
The sentences from the Greek Testament, so numerous in this
division of the work, are intended partly to exemphfy the rules
to which they are appended, the illustrative words being printed
:: INTRODUCTION".

ill a thicker type ;

partly also to form together a series of Prepa-
ratory Eeacling Lessons or Pri?)ier, introductory to the Sacred
Volume. The student is therefore earnestly counselled to study
these sentences in order. Most of them, of course, belong to the
easier parts of New Testament Scripture ; others again are more
difficult and unusual in their structure ; while in very many will
be discovered shades or specialties of meaning which the English
Version does not exhibit, and which perhaps no translation could
reproduce. The study, therefore, of these sentences will be an
introduction to Biblical exegesis, which may prepare not a few
readers for more extended inquiries.
A brief discussion of the chief New Testament Synonyms, and a
Vocabulary to the whole New Testament, complete the plan of
the work.
This Handbook claims, be it remembered, to be an Introduction
only. By its means, a not inadequate beginning may be made in
what is surely the noblest of studies. Its aim is to fanuliarise
many readers, who else had despaired of the possibility, with the
words of Christ and of His Apostles. Should its purpose in any
way be accomplished, it will give access also to those criticisms by
which expositors in our own land and age, as in others, have so
variously and nobly illustrated the " living oracles." The labour
followed by such rewards will have been well spent and readers :

of the New Testament in its own tongue, whether they advance or

not to that high critical discernment which only the few attain;
will have found in the acquisition a pure and life-long joy.
 NOTE TO EEYISED EDITION.

The experience of many years, and the numerous testimonies

received to the value of the Handbook, have warranted the
Editor in re-issuing the work in the same general form as here-

tofore. The whole, however, has undergone a very close and

careful revision, results of which appear on almost every page.
The frequent references to the Eevised jSTew Testa^ient Version
of 1881 are indicated by the letters R. V. Improvements have
also been made in the size of the page, and the emphasising of

points of importance by tliick type, that the eye may aid the

mind.
In the former editions the Greek Testament quotations were
made in general from the Eeceived Text ; the various readings

of Griesbach, Lachmann, Tischendorf, and Tregelles, being occa-

sionally given. In order to secure the advantage of a modern

critical text, without discussions that often convey no real help
to the learner, the passages are now mostly cited from the Greek
Testament of Drs. Westcott and Hort, 1881, while cases of

important divergence from the Eeceived Text are always noted.

The Editor begs to acknowledge the courtesy and kindness of

Messrs. Macmillan in permitting the free use of this Text ; and

to add that a school edition has been published, with lists of
xii
NOTE TO REVISED EDITION.

various readings, and a sufficient critical apparatus for learners.

The letters W. H. indicate the references to this work. It should

be added that its orthography has not been implicitly followed, in

the many cases where it differs from that of ordinary Greek.

The Vocabulary has been entirely reconstructed, and is printed

on a new plan, which it is hoped will greatly add to the usefulness

of this important part of the work.

The Editor would only add, that the revision of this Handbook
has been mainly the work of his son, the Rev. S. Walter
Green, M.A., New Testament Professor in Eegent's Park College,
London. Both are much indebted to T. Osborne, Esq., of Stroud,
for his suggestions on the former edition ; and to the Rev. S.

Newth, D.D., late Principal of New College, London, and

member of the New Testament Revision Company, for corrections
and additions in the Vocabulary.

SAMUEL G. GREEN.
 . ——

ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PART I.

ORTHOGRAPHY.
SECT. PAGE
THE ALPHABET. Names, forms, and numeral values of the
I.

2.
letters ...
Notes on the Alphabet ...... 1

2
3. The Vowels : (a) their pronunciation, long and short 2
(6) The diphthongs (regularly long) 2
" breathings " of initial vowels
(c) The

{d) The
(e) The
"breathings" of initial p
lengthening of vowels in inflection
.... . 3
3
3
( /)
The contraction of vowels. Table.
Exercise
{g) Diaeresis
(Ji)
........
1. Vowel
Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding
Contractions

it
. 4
4

1. The nu suffixed {y i<pe\Kv<rTiK6v) 4

2. Elision (apostrophe) 4
...
3.

The Consonants
Crasis

(a) Division into

....
mutes and liquids
4
5
5
(6) Classification of mutes 5
(c) The sibilant cr, and its combinations 5
{d) Rules of consonant combination
1. Labials or gutturals, with a 6
2. Labials or gutturals, with a dental . 6
3. Dentals before cr . . . . 6
4. Mutes before /j. 6
5. Combinations of ^nth other consonants
v 6
6. A sharp mute before an aspirated vowel 6
7.
8.

EKercise
Consonants that may be final
2. On
....
Consecutive syllables not to begin with an aspirate

the Combinations of Consonants.

6
6
6
5.
sion, or insertion ..........
Changes of Consonants by assimilation, dujilication, transposition, omis
XIV ANALYTICAL TABL^ OF CONTENTS.

SECT. PAGE
6. THE ACCENTS 7
(a)

(6)
Use of the accents
The different accents ....
....
7
7
(c) Rules of accentuation
{d, e) Enclitics and Proclitics .... 8
8

7. On the transference of Greek words into Englisli

Latin the usual medium.
Equivalents of /c, i;,
....
ai, 01, ei, ov, initial I and'P
9
9
9
8. Punctuation 10
]\larks of pause, interrogation, quotation, and for "etc' 10
Reading Lessons—
1.

2.

3.
Acts
Rom.
ii.

iv.
1-13
1-16
Matt. V. 1-16, in
......
Roman characters
10
11
12

PART II.

ETYMOLOGY.
CHAPTER L— INTRODUCTION.
9.
10.
The " Parts
THE ROOT
of Speech "
and
..,.».
STEM.... 14
11
•

Pure and (impure) liquid or mute stems 14

(The stem to be marked by thick letters) . 14

CHAPTER II.— THE NOUN OR SUBSTANTIVE.

GENDER, NUMBER, and CASE
11.

12, 13.
General significance of the Cases
The Definite Article and
....
Indefinite
.

Pronoun .
15
15
15
Types of Substantive and Adjective Declension 16
14. Characteristics of all Declensions of Nouns 16
(a) Neuter Nominatives and Accusatives alike 16
Their plural termination always a. 16
{b) The Dative Singular in t (" iota subscript") 16
(c) The Genitive Plural in wv 16
(d) Masculine like the Neuter in Genitive and Dative 16
15. Rules for determining the Gender of Nouns 17
(a) Masculine : names of males, rivers, winds 17
(6) Feminine
nouns ........•••
: names of females, trees, countries, islands, and abstract
17
 '

ETYMOLOGY. XV

SECT. PAGE
15. (c) Keuter : diminutives, indeclinables, and the verbal noun (infinitive) 17
(Note on common and epiccene words)
DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE
16.
Three leading
Illustrations
tj'pes
:
.......
....
ttvKt}, dvOputiros, ttols

Resemblances between the and second

The A and O Declensions
The Separable Declension
first

(parLsyllabic)
(imparisyllabic)
...
.

17. The First Dfx'len.«!Ion (A)

18. Feminine Paradigms {-qt-upa, 56^a, ti/jlt], aKia), and Remarks
19. Masculine Paradigms {fiad-qr-qs, veavla^), and Remarks .

Nouns
20.
21.
Exercise 3. of the First
Irregular forms of the First Declen.sion
The Second Declension (O)
.... Declension

22.
23-
Masculine (X(i7os) and Feminine {bdo^) Paradigms, and Remarks

Neuter Paradigm {(xvkov), and Remarks ....

24.
25- Declension of 'It^o-oOs
Exercise 4. Nouns of the Second Declension
.......
Paradigm of Contracted Nouns in 00-, eo-, vovs, oarovv ( AttoXXws)

26. The Third Declension (imparisyllabic)

Importance of knowing the Stem .....
.....
27.
28.
General Paradigm
Terminations of this Declension
: aiwv, p-rjfxa

.....
.....
29. Paradigms of Third Declension
1. 'Apa\p, K-qpv^, tx^f^J, TToXts .....
....
2.

3.

4.
TTOt/iTjJ',

.......
\i(j}v,

.........
/SacriXct^s, /3oCs

yevos
at'Swj, iraT-qp, dvrip

5. Referred to § 27 .

30.
Exercise 5.
Rules for the Nominative
Nouns
......
......
of the Third Declension

1.

2.
5added to the stem
The stem lengthened ......
....
3.

4.
Digammated stems
Neuter stems in es- (os)
5. Stem unchanged
......
(eu-, av-, ov-)

.......
31. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension
Substantives of Variable Declension
(a) Interchanges between the second and third

(6) The word ad^^arov, Sabbath

(c) Proper names, especially Moses, Jerusalem

Exercise
Hebrew indeclinables
6.
......
Promiscuous List of Nouns .
XVI ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

CHAPTER IIL— ADJECTIVES.

SECT. PAGE
33. THREE FORMS, correspondent with substantive declensions , 34
34. FlllST FoiiM , 34
Paradigms of dyados, diKaios, fxiKpos, and Remarks , 34
35. Contracted Adjectives, XP^<^^^^ 5 Remarks , 35
36.

37.
Skconi) Fokm
General Remarks
Paradigms of
......
....
o^vs, ttSj, iKLov
,

,
36
36
36
38. Participles of this class (declension of eo-rcus) . , 37
39. Adjectives of double form : (leyas, iroXvs 38
40.

41.
Thiki)
......
Fokm
General Remarks
Paradigms of dXT/^Tjs, a(Jo<ppwv
39
39
39
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
42. ......
First Method
Comparison of Triaros, dXrjdrjs, ao(p6s, v^os
40
40
40
43. Second Method 41
Comparison of raxos, alaxpos, KaXos, p-cyas . 41
44. Declension of comparatives in -iwv {fiei^uu) 41
45. Irregular and alternative comparisons . 42
dyados, kukos, /iLKpds, ttoXus 42
46. Defective Comparatives and Superlatives 42
47. Emthattc Methods of Comparison . 42
Exercise 7. Adjectives for Practice 43
NUMERALS
48. The Cakdixal Numbeiis
(a) Signs of numeration
....
....
44
44
44
{b) Disused letters as numeral signs . 44
(c) Composite numerical expressions = 44
49.

50.
Declension of the cardinal numbers
eh, 8vo, rpeh, ricffapes
The Ordinal Lumbers
....
....
44
44
45
Table of Cardinals and Ordinals, and Remark
51.
52. Distkibitive Numbeks .... 45
47

translation ......
Exercise 8. Numbers Numerical symbols, and : phrases for
47

CHAPTER IV.— PRONOUNS.

53. PERSONAL PRONOUNS . 49
1. Substantive-peksonal ("personal") 49
First juTson, (yib, rj/xei^ ; second, av, u/ie?j 49
54. Third person, by airr6s, 17, 6 . $9
 ETYMOLOGY. XVU

SKCT. PAQE
5",. 2. Reflexive 49
First person, ifxain-ov ; second, ffeavroC ,
50
Third, eain-oO (avrov) . '
. 50
56. 3. Adjective-personal (possessive) , 50
(a) 6/^65, rifiirepos, ffds, v/i^epos 50
{b, c) Genitive of the })ersonal pronouns as possessives 50
57. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 51
Framed upon the model of the Article . 51
(a, b, c, d) 65e, outos, iKeTvos, 6 avros . 51
(e) TOLOvTos, Tcxrovros, roaovroi. tvXlkoOtos 52
58. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 52
(a, b) 6s, 77,
6'
;
{c, d) oaris, bairep, oaye 52
(e) Relatives of quality, e]uantitv. number, degree 53
59. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 53
(a) The simple Interrogative, tIs ; ri ;
53
{b) Correlatives of quality, quantity, number, degi'ee 53
(c) Direct interrogatives in indirect construction 53
(d) Interrogatives properlv indirect . 53
60. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS . 54
(a, b) The ordinary Indefinite, tls, and negative compound 54
(c) The old Indefinite, 6 Selua 54
61. DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS 54
(a) &\\os, {b) erepos, {c) aW-rjXcjv, [dj haaTOS 54
62. Table of Correlative Pronouns . 54

CHAPTER v.— THE VERB.

63. THE VOICES

Four things predicated by the Verb
.... 55
55
Threefold modification of the verbal stem 55
Activp, Middle, Passive 55
64. THE MOODS . 55
Four Modes or Moods . 55
1. The Indicative, and its use 55
2. The Imperative 55
3. The Subjunctive 55
4. The Optative (properly a division of the Subjunctive) 56
5. Interrogative Foi-ms 56
6. The Infinitive, \
7. The Pahticiple.s, J Participials 56

65. THE TENSES . 56

Time and State jointly expressed 56
Nine possible Tenses. Scheme 57
XVlll ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

SECT. PACE
65. Seven actual Tenses (in common use, six) 57
" Principal " and " Historical " Tenses 57

66.
67.
Arrangement of Tenses. Tenses of Xuw
NUMBERS
The Two CoxjuaATioxs
and PERSONS .... 57
57
58
Remark on the Greek and English typical forms 58
68. —
The Verbal Stem How ascertained affixes and : suffixes 58
69. Augment and Reduplication" 58
{a) Augment in the historical tenses, indicative 58
1. The syllabic augment —
with initial consonants. 58
2. The temporal augment —
with initial vowels 58
{h) Reduplication in the perfect tenses throughout . 58
An initial consonant repeated, ^^ith e . 59
An initial vowel lengthened (like temporal augment) 59
(c)Augment and reduplication in compound verbs 59
70. Inflectional Tekminations 59
{a) Denoting voice, mood, number, and person
tense, 59

71-
(6)
Normal forms
Tense-characteristics (consonant)
.......
Personal endings originally fragments of pronouns

....
. 59
59
60
Active Future and First Aorist, <r 60
,, Perfect and Pluperfect, k . . . . . 60
Passive Future and First Aorist, 6 . 60
72. Modal Vowels 60
—
73-
Subjunctive lengthened indicative vowels
—
Optative diphthongal forms
Verbal Adjectives
..... . 60
60
61
74- Paradigm of the First Conjugation
KKXTevu}. Principal parts ......
......
: pure uncontracted 61
61

75.
Conjugation throughout
All other forms variations of this type .... 62
70

76.
Exercise 9. On
.....
pure, uncontracted

.......
Verbs of the pure uncontracted class
Possible stem-endings
Verbs 70
70
71
Pure, mute, and liquid verbs .
•
. 71
78. Pure Verbs.
{a)
{h)
Special Rules
The stem-vowels
Contraction with a,
......
e, or
71
71
71
(c) Contraction confined to Present and Imj^erfect Tenses 71
{d) Peculiarities of contraction. Comjiare § 3, / 71

7Q-
80. Note on remaining Tenses .....
Paradigms of rt/idw, 0tX^a>, 8r]\6o}, Present and Imperfect 72
75

81.
82.
Exercise 10. On pure, contracted
Mute Verbs. Special Rules
Stem unaffected by a following vowel
......
....
Verbs 75
75
76
 .

ETYMOLOGY. XIX

SECT. PAGE
^3- a) Tense -characteristics (§ 71) and terminations beginning with I

consonant modify the stem . 76

{*) Rules of modification . . 76
1. As caused by -a after the verbal stem . 76
2. by-^ >> . 76
3. by-r J5 . 76
4. by -/i >> , 76
5. by -ad J> . 77
6. by -vT >> . 77
7. by -K J5 . 77
84. JTE Verbs. Remarks {a, b, c) . 77
Conjugation of T/)i/3a>, 0170), Tret'^o; . . 78
85. Modification of the Present (and Imperfect) , 81
(«) The stem of the Present not always the stem of the Verb . 82
1. Labial verbal stems, that add r . 82
2. Guttural verbal stems, that change the stem-consonant to aa or ^ 82
3. Dental verbal stems, that change the stem-consonant to f 82
All other tenses formed from the verbal stem . 82
Vowels changed to diphthongs in short stem -syllables 83
Here the Future and Perfect formed from the Present stem 83
86. The Secondary Tenses of modified Verbs . 83
In these Tenses, the simple verbal stem always appears 83
87. The Second Aorist 83
Conjugated like the Imperfect Indicative (in other moods as Present) 83
Illustrations from ({)vy- (0ei^7w), tvtt- (ti^tttw) 83
Note on Accentuation 83
Active, Middle, and Passive 84
88. The Second Future (Passive). 84
Illustration from tvtt- (ti^tttoj) . 84
89. The Second Perfect (Active). 85
Illustration from irpa-y- {irpdaacj) 85
90. General Rules for the Second Tenses . 85
1. In what verbs they do not occur 85
2, 3. Seldom found in First Tenses in the same verb, except in Passive 85
4. First and Second Perfects, Active 85
Exercise 11. On mute Verbs 85
91. Liquid Verbs. Special Rules 86
(a) Present stem mostly modified . 86
{b) Future Active and iliddle, contracted 86
{c) First Aorist Active and Middle 86
{d) Perfect Active, variations. 87
{e) Perfect Passive, variations 87
92. Paradigiis of Liquid Verbs . 87
dyy^Ww, Kp'ivo}, atpuj 87
JJxercise 12, On liquid Verbg 91
XX ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTEXTS.

SECT. PAGE
Notes on the Tenses. [TJiese Sections, to the of § 99, dealing
close

chiefly with mimite variations and seeming irregulant ies in ^>«?'^it'«?ar

verbs, may he omitted in the first study of the hook.] 92
94. The Present and Imperfect. I. The Present 92
1-4. Details of modification, as § 85 . 92
5. Modifications of pure and impure stems by v, 93
6. Alternative stems, consonant and e- 93

8.
7. Inchoative forms in
Reduplicated stems
<jk-

....or uji: 93
94
II. The Imperfect
Peculiarities
Double
p-.
of Augment ....
Double augment. Attic augment in 17
94
94
94
95- The Second Aorist, Active and Middle . 94
Contains tlie simple verbal stem .
94
(Reduplicated Second Aorist. Change of short stem-v owel) 94
The Vowel Aorist, as of Second Conjugation 94
96. The Future, Active and Middle 95
(a) Lengthening or otherwise of pure stems . 95
{h) The Attic Future of Verbs in t5- (ifw) 95
(c) The digammated future of verbs in e/- (^w) 96
{d) Future in middle form, with active meaning 96
97. The First Aorist, Active and ]\Iiddle . 96
{a) Connection of Aorist vnth Future stem 96

{h)
(1) In pure and mute
Peculiarities of
Note on Accentuation
(2) in liquid verbs
Augment
;

....
....
96
97
97
98. The Aorists and Futures Passive 98
(a) Modified like the Perfect Passive 98
{h) Vowel stem-endings, lengthened, shortened, or with 98
(c) Transposition of vowel and liquid in short roots 98
{d) Change of a weak vowel into a . . . 98
(c) First and Second Tenses seldom in the same verb 98

99- Perfect and Pluperfect

{a) Variations in reduplication
....
Notes on Irregularities of Augment, and on Accentuation 98
99
99
1. e- before a double consonant 99
2. from Xa/3- {\a/j.^a.vio)
€t\r](pa 99
3. Double reduplication and augment . 99
4. Pluperfect generally omits augment 99
(J) Third person plural Perfect active in -ai^ .
99
(c) The Second Perfect active its special sense : 99
(d) The Perfect passive its peculiarities
: 100

100.
(e)

....
The Future Perfect passive (or mid.)

DEPONENT VERBS ....

Note on accentuation
100
100
100
 .

ETYMOLOGY. XXI

SECT. PAGE
lOO.
lOI.
Active and Passive, as determined by the Aorist
IMPERSONAL VERBS
Their use . . . .
....
.
. 100
101
101
List and usual forms of the chief Impersonals 101
102. DEFECTIVE VERBS 101
Originally caused by redundancy 101
103. Principal Defective Verbs and their Paradigms 102
alpeo), epxoytiai, iadiu), opdu), rp^x^i ^^P^^ dirov 102
Exercise 13. On the Defective Verbs . 104
104. THE SECOND CONJUGATION, or Verbs in -iii 104
The chief peculiarity of these Verbs 104

105.
Future, First Aorist, and Perfect like Verbs in -w
Modifications of the Verbal Stem .... 104
105
(a)
{h)
Vowel of
Reduplication prefixed
a pure stem lengthened
..... . 105
105
(c) The syllable
Two
—
formed
classes thus
-I'l;- [-vvv-) affixed
.... 105
105
106. First Class Paradigms in two divisioris
First Division regular forms— .... 105
105
107.
108.
Paradigms of laTrj/jiL, ridri/xi,
Remarks on the Paradigms
1. First Aorist Active, with
....
didio/xt. .

-k- [TidTjfju, didufu)

106
114
114
2. Peculiarities in augment of laT-rj/Mt, 114
—their difference
109.
3.

4.

List of
Active Aorist of
The verb
Verbs in
(TTrjKd}

this division
.....
'iarrjixL

.
. 114
114
114

no.
A-stems a. Active h. Deponent
:

E-stems Deponent only

:

—
Second Division Stems i(T- (dfil), l-{dfu),
;

.... e-{iT]fu).
114
115
115
Conjugation of et>t (eli/at), to be . 116
III. ,, elfJLi {tevai), to go . 117
112. ,, 177/ii in its compound dcpirnxL 118
—
Second Class Verbs
Remarks ....... in -w/jli or -vpvimi . 120
120
114.

116.
Paradigms of and ^uvvvim
Remarks on Paradigms
deiKuv/xi

New T&stament Verbs like deiKvvfiL

.... . 121
124
124
117. New Testament Verbs like ^wwvfxi 125
A-stems. E-stems, 0-stenis . 125
Exercise 14. On the Verbs in -fit . 126
Exercise 15. G-eneral,on the Verbs (from 2 Thess 126
Exercise 16.
i.

ii.
The Beatitudes
Parts of John i.
Short Sentences.
.....
....
127
127
128
iii. Selected Sentences 129
xxu Analytical taBlE o'B contents.

chafter yl— prepositions.

PAGE
THE THREE CASES
ii8. :

Prepositions extend these relations indefinitely

Tliey may govern the Genitive^ Dative, or Accusative
....
general relations of place, etc.

;
.

one, two, or
131
131

all 131
U
119.
120.
121.
Prepositions
Prepositions
Prepositions
governing
governing
governing
the
the
the
Genitive only, duTl, dwo,
Dative only, tV, avv
vVccusative only, dvd,
.... ei's .
(f^),

.
tt/jj

.
131
132
132
122. Prepositions governing the Genitive and Accusative, bid, Kard,
fierd, irepi, virep, vird . . . . . . . . . .132
123.

124.
i-rri, irapd, 7rp6s ...........
Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative,

Synoptical Table of the Prepositions

132
133
125. Note on the various meanings of the Prepositions 13-i

CHAPTER YIL—ADYERBS.
126. Adverbs in their Original Form, from Substantives 135
{a) As an Accusative Noun, Adjective, or Pronoun 135
(6) As a Dative ,, ,, . 135
(c) As a Genitive

{d) As a
,, ,,

Preposition, with its Case .... 135

135

127.
128.
(c) Old Case-endings in
Adverbs from Adjectives
Comparison of Adverbs
....
-6ev, -6t,

......
(in -us)
and -de . 135
135
136
129. Pronominal Adverbs. Table, with Correlatives 136
130. Numeral Adverbs (in -ts, -/cts, or -a/cts) 137
131. Adverbs from Yerbs
Ancient verbal forms, devpo, Bevre
Derivatives from Yerbs in -i^u)
....
.....
137
137
138
132. Adverbs from Prepositions (or in -w) 138
133. Prepositive Adverbs ("improper Prepositions"). List 138
134. Negative Adverbs, ov and fx-^ 139

CHAPTER YIII.— CONJUNCTIONS AND OTHER PARTICLES.

135. Meaning of the word Particles .
140
136. Classification of Conjunctive Particles 140
1. Conjunctions of Annexation 140
2. ,, Comparison . 140
3. ,, Disjunction 140
4. ,,
Antithesis . 141
5. ,, Condition . 141
 ETYMOLOGY. XXlll

SECT. PAGE
136. 6. Conjunctions of Cause . , 141
7. ,, Inference . 141
8. ,, Intention or Result , 141
^7- {a) Emphasis, ye, 8r], -Trep, -rot
Particles of , 141
(6) Particles of Interrogation, d, ij, dpa , 141
13S. Interjections . 141
{a) Natural instinctive sounds . , 141
(b) The Interjection tde, idov, behold ! . , 142

CHAPTER IX.— ON THE FORMATIOX OF WORDS.

[CJmpters IX., X., XL, XII may be omiltccl in the first reading of the book.]

139. 1.

2.
ROOTS,
Classes of ^Vords
Avitli

.....
primary, secondary, tertiary, etc., formations 143
143

140.
3. Modification of Stem-endings
Classes of Substantives .... 144
144
(«) First
1.
Declension
Masculine, in
.

....
-r-qs
. . . . 144
144

(6)
2. Feminine, in
Second Declension
1. MavSculine, in
.....
-ia,

....
-/xos
-cxyvvi] . 144
144
144
2. Neuter, in -rpov, -lov [-ap.ov, -Iolu:') . ]44

(c) Third Declension .....

3. Masculine and Feminine Diminutives, -ktkos, -icr/n; 145
145
1.

2
3.
Masculine,
Feminine,
Neuter,
-evs,

-o-is,

-jxa, -os
-Trjp,

-tt/s ....
.
-Tt:p

. . .
145
145
145
141-
142.
Scheme of Terminations of Derivative Nouns
Classes of Adjectia'es ..... 145
146
1. First
{a) In
Form

In
-ic;, (-la), -lov .... 146
146
(6)
(c) In
-iKos,

-Ivo^,
-77,

-7],
-ov

-Of ...
. . .

.
147
147

(d)
(So -eos,

In -pos, -pd, -pbv

(c) In -((r)t/Aos, -ov
....
contr., -ovs, -ow)

. .
.

. .
147
147
147
if) Verbals in -ros and -reos 147
2. Second and Third. Forms 147

143-
{a) In -77s, -es
{b) In -p-oiv, -/jLov

Scheme of Terminations of Derivative Adjectives

..... 147
147
148
144. Classes of Verbs 148
(a) Verbs from subst. or
Tlieii" principal terminations
adj. roots
.... ("denominative"^ 148
148
Xxiv ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

SECT PAGE
144. {b) V^erbs from verbal stems — " Inceptives," " Frequentatives " (or

145. General
emphatic), "Causatives,"
Remark on Derivation ........
etc. 149
149

CHAPTER X.— ON THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS

146. " Parathetic " and " Synthetic " Compounds ....
....... 150
147. PAitATHETic Compounds
The former element a Particle ......
(a) Significance of the Preposition in Composition
150
150
151
{h) ,, Adverbs ,,
151
(c) „ I'lisejxij-ablc Particles in Comiiosition 151
{a, Compound Nouns and Adjectives generally from Verbs) 152
{b, c, Adverbs
except
and
d-)

Combination of Prepositions)
........
Inseparable Particles not found with Verbs
. 152
152
148.
{d,

Synthetic Compounds
The former element a Noun
...
or
.

Verb
.

.
. .

. 152
152
Connective vowels -0-, -i- 152
Com pound Verbs usually from Compound Nouns 152

149.
The
Illustrations ....
chief significance in the latter element

Derivation and Composition illustrated by the Variations

153
153

Kpiv-, to separate, to judge .........

and Combinations in the New Testament of the root /cpt, verbal stem
153

CHAPTER XL— FOREIGN WORDS IN NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

150. Languages of Palestine : Hebrew . 155
What was the "Hebrew tongue " in New Testament times ? . 155

151.
Question as to St. Matthew's Gospel
The introduction of Greek
Various influences contributing to this
.... .
.

.
155
155
155
Greek the usual language of our Lord
The
Difference of
Dialect of Galilee
New Testament
.... AVi-iters
.

in style
.

.
156
156
156
152. Infusion of Latin . 156
Influences contributory to this . 156
Classes of words derived from Latin . 156
/53. Aramaic (Hebrew) Words and Phrases . 156
{a) Assimilated words . 157
{b) Indeclinable words . 157
1. Proper Names . 157
2. Common Nouns . 157

3. Special Phrases . 158

 SYNTAX. XXV

SECrr.
154' Latin
(a)
Words
Names of Coinb c .
, .... PAGE
158
158
(b) Judicial terms . . . .159
(c) Military terms 159
(d) Political terms .159
(e) Articles of Dress . . . . . . . . . .159
(/) General terms 159

CHAPTER XII.— NEW TESTAMENT PROPER NAMES

155. These Names fi'om the three languages (Chapter XI 160
156. Hebrew Names 160
(a) Indeclinable Hebrew forms 160
(&) Indeclinable and assimilated . 160
(c) Assimilated, Hebrew, -ah ; Greek, -as 161
(d) Later forms, Hebrew, -a ; Greek, -aj \z\
*;m» Double Names lej
(o) Greek the translation of the Hebrew 161
[h) ,, vocal miitation ,, 161
{c) Name and Surname 161
1. The latter being characteristic . lei
2. ,, patronymic 161
3. ,, local lei
[d) Different names of the same man among Jews and Greek, 162
158. Greek Names 162

159.
(a) Pure Greek— "The Seven

(6) Contracted forms

Latin Names
.... " . 162
162
162
{a) In connection with Rome 162
ih) Names of the Emperors . 163
(c) The name of "Paul" . 163
(d) Contractions, " Luke" " Silas" etc. 163

PART III.

SYNTAX.
CHAPTER I.— CONSTRUCTION OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
J 60. A knowledge of the general laws &f Grammar necessary .184 . . .

]6i. —
The Sentence as consisting of Propositions 16-4
162. —
The PiiOPOSJTiON Subject and Predicate 184
163. The Subject— a Substantive or its eq^uivalent '384

h 2
XXVI ANALYTICAL TABLE 0? CONTENTS.

SECT. paqe!
—a Substantive,
164.
165.
166.
The Predicate
The Copula a — ....
Adjective, or equivalent

.......
tense of the verb " to be "
Omission of the Copula
1G4
lb4
165
167.
168.
The Verbal Predicate
Tlie Substantive verb as Predicate .....
.....
165
165
169.

170.
Omission of the Pronominal Subject
Its insertion for emphasis. Examples....
Omitted in third person plural, " generalised assertion " .
166
166
166
"
171. Omitted in third person singular, " impersonals 166
172. The Nominative the case of the Subject . . , . . 167
THE FIRST CONCORD 167
y^^. Exceptions, (1) Neuter plural Nominative with singular Verb 167
374. Variations in this idiom, a, b, c, d . 167
775. (2) " Rational Concord." Collective singular Subject with plural
Verb, a, b 168
J 76. Comljined Nominatives, a, b 169
177. Agreement of substantival Predicate with the Subject 170
Law of Apposition 170
17S. Agreement of adjective Predicate with the Subject . 170
THE SECOND CONCORD 170
179. "Rational Concord,"
Adjective ........(1) Collective singular Subject with plural
170
180.
181.
182.
(2)
Mule for Cojndative Verbs
Complements of the simple Sentence
.......
Masculine or Feminine Subject with Neuter Adjective

.....
171
171
171
183.
184.
Extension of the Subject
,,
Substantival Predicate ....
....
171
172
185.
186.
,,

,,
Adjective-Predicate
Verbal Predicate ..... 172
172
187.
188.
i'89.
Accessory Clauses
Co-ordinate
Subordinate
.........
. . . . . .
172
172
172
190. Methods of introducing subordinate Clauses 172
—illustrated
191.
192.
Difficulties in the resolution of Sentences
Hale for ilie resolution of CofapouThd Sentences .... 173
173

CHAPTER II.— THE ARTICLE.

Construction of the Article 174

Employed with Substantives by the Second Concord 174
193. ;

Originally a Demonstrative Pronoun 174

194.
Showm by its often standing alone 174
195.
By its being followed by a Genitive 175
196.
i75
197. Or by a Pre])osition and its Case
By its construction with Adverbs 175
198.
 SYNTAX. XXVU

SECT.
199.
200.
The Article with Adjectives
With Participles
....
.... ,

.
PAGE
176
17«
Often enuivaleut to a Relative and Verb . 17^
201. With the Infinitive, in all the Cases . 177
Note on the verbal in -ing (Lat., genind) . 177
202. With Phrases or Sentences . 171
203. With Pronouns. (See § 220) .

204. Substantivised Words or Phrases . 178

205.
206.
Significance of the Article
The Article strictly definite
The Article marks the Subject
....
....
: its insertion or omission .

.
178
178
178
207. Definition of the Predicate by the Article . 179
208. (The Article may be omitted before words already defined) . 179
209.
210. For iiulividiud emphasis ....
Use of the Article icith Monadic Substantives

....
. .

.
179
180
211.
212.
In collective expressions
To iruike renewed mention
(This sometimes implicit)
.... .
.

.
180
18i
181
213.

214.
from the original .....
Passages where the Article, omitted iu the A.Y

The Article with Abstract Substantives, a, b, c

should be suji plied

181
183
215. The Article as an Unemphatic Possessive . 185
216. The Article with Proper Names . 18D
217. With the
(a) Gcds,
(ft) Kvpios,
Divine
God
Lord
.....
Names
.....
. 188
186
187
(c) vibs

{d) 'Irjaovs,
(e)
Qeov, Son of

XptcTTos,
Jesus .....
God

Anointed, Christ
187
188
188
(/) Hvevna Holy Spirit
(dyiov), 189
218. Monadic Xoiuis (as Proper Names) without the Article 190
219. Prepositional Phrases without the Article 190
220. The Article with Demonstrative Pronouns . 191
221. Omitted with ^Kacros, tocoutos . 192
222. The Article with avros, the sanu 192
223.
224.
With Possessive Pronouns
With ttSs, irdvTet, all ....
.....
192
192
225.
226.
227.
With 3Xos, lohole
With 5XXos, 'erepos, other
With iro\v, much ; -rroWoi, many
.... 194
194
194
228. With the Nominative for Vocative 195
229. The Article separated from its Substantive by qualify ingw ords 196
{a) A Preposition with its Case . 196
{h) An Adverb 195
230. Repeated after its Substantive for emphasis . 196
{b) Sometimes where no Article precedes 197
XXVUl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

SECT
231.
232.
The
The
Article with Participles
Article in Enumerations ....
....
197
198

233-
(a)
(b)
Combined Enumeration
Separate Enumeration
The Omission of the Article marks Indefinitenesa
.... .... .

•
.

.
•

•
.

b
198
198
199
234. The Article with vojxos, laiv illustrations — • • • • 200

CHAPTER III.— THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE.

235. NUMBER 232
Singular and Plural used as in other languages 202
236. Singular Nouns for a whole class 202
237. Nouns predicated of several individuals (as (xu>/j.a, Kapoia] 202
238. Abstract Substantives in the Plural 202
239. The Plural, by a speaker of himself 202
240. Plural to denote a single agent or object . 203
(a) As viewing it in its constituent parts 203
(h) As generalising the statement, (1), (2) 204
CASE 205
The Nominative and Vocative . 205
241. Nominative as Subject and Predicate 205
242. The Suspended Nominative 205
243. The Elliptical Nominative 206
(a) After Idov, behold / . . . 206
(b) ,, ovofia, name . . ' . 206
(c) The phrase, 6 ibv koI 6 rju Kal 6 ipxa/J-evos 206
244. Nominative foran elliptical usage
Vocative : 206
245. The Vocative, with and without u) . 207
The Genitive 207
246.
247.
248.
Primarily signifying ??io^io?i/ro?H

I.
Modifications, 1-7
Genitive of origin
....
....
207
207
208
After Substantives, to denote the source or author 208
249. After Verbs of sense or mental affection 208
(a) Of sense, as hearing, taste, touch 208
(b) Of affection, sls desire, caring for, despising 209
(c) Oi remembrance 2i\\(\. forgetting 210
250. After Verbs of accusation, condemnation, etc. 210
251. After Verbs and Adjectives of plcnftf, want, fulness, etc. 210
252. II. Genitive of separation or ablation >";io

253. Genitive of comparison

After Verbs
....
After Verbs of removal, difference, hirulraiKc, etc.

......
210
211
211
After Adjectives in tlio Comparative Degree 211
 ,

SYNTAX. XXIX

SECT. PAGE
254. III. Genitive of Possession . 212
"
After Substantives " the Possessive Case 212
255. The Genitive Personal Pronouns so used 212
1—
256.
257.
"Words of kindred,
Attributive Possessive Genitive
etc.,

....
omitted before Possessive,

.....
,

,
212
213
258.
259.
260.
Special Possessive phrases
The Genitive of Apposition
Position of the Genitive
.... .

.
213
214
215
\a) Generally aftei^ the governing Substantive . . 215
{!)) Instances where the Genitive ^/'cc^f^cs . . 215
261.
262.
IV. Genitive of Partition
After Partitive Adjectives
Pronouns
......
........
.

.
215
216
216

263.
Numerals
Superlatives
After Verbs of ^^^''^^Hng
.......
.

......
. . . . . , . .

.
216
216
216
264. After Verbs of taking hold of, attaining, etc. . 216

265.
266.
Aher Adverbs of time
Partitive Phrases of Time
......
Different usage of Active

.... or Place
and Middle .

.
217
217
217
267. Partitive Genitive after Verb to be . . 217
268. V. Genitive of Object . 218
May be expressed by various Prepositions : Illustrations . 218
269. Phrases that may be Possessive or Objective . 218
270. VI. Genitive of Relation . 219

271.
272.
In
MtQT
respect of, as
Adjectives, gewQVdAly
shown by the context

Specially after Adjectives of ?ror^Ai«g5S,/i?i€55, etc.

..... : Illustrations

.
.

.
219
220
220
273. Genitive of pi'ice, penalty, etc . 221
274. Genitives of different relations with the same Substantive . 221
275. VII. The Genitive Absolute . 221
Originally eausal . 222

276.
The Dative
Primarily ^igwiiymg juxtaposition
Modifications, 1 —4 . ,
.....
.....
.

.
222
222
222
277. I. Dative of Association . 223
(«) After Verbs of intercourse, comjmnionslnp, etc. . . 223
{b) After Verbs and Adjectives of likeness, fitness, etc. . 223
(f) After the Substantive Verb : to express property . 223
\evh sometimes omitted . . 223
278. II. Dative of Transmission . 223
(a) After Verbs of grm7igf( Indirect Object) . 223
(6) ,,
information, command, etc. . 224
(c) ,, succour, assistance, etc. . 224
\d) ,
mental affection, obedience, faith . 224
Distinction from Genitive . . - . . 224
XXX ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

SECT. PAQE
279. in. Dative of Reference . . . . 225
May be expressed in English hy for (or against) . 225
280. IV. Dative of Accessory Circumstance . 226
(a) Expressing the modes of an action . . 226
{b) Sometimes repeating the notion of the Verb (Hebraism) . 226
(c)

(d)
Da.tive of cause ov motive
,, instrument ..... .

.
226
227

(e)

(/)
Dative after
Dative of agent (rare)
,
,
x/x^o/xat, to

sphere, that in
.....use

which a quality inheres

.

.
227
227
228
(gr)
,, ti7ne . 228
(1) A space of time : for — (2) A point of time at, . 228
281. The Accusative
Primarily signifying motion towards
Hence used as the Object of Transitive Verbs
.... .
.

.
229
229
229
{a) Verbs intransitive in English, transitive in Greek . 229
{h) The same Verbs sometimes transitive and intransitive, . 230
(c) Especially those denoting faculty . 230
{d) The direct Object omitted after certain Verbs . 230
"
282
283
The intevTial Object of Verbs, or
Accusative of Definition
Dative of Accessory more common
...... " cognate Accusative

.
.

.
230
231
231
284, The Double Accusative, "nearer" and "remoter Object' . 231
285, The Accusative as Subject of Infinitive Verbs . 232
To be rendered as Nominative with that . . 232
Generally dilferent from the Subject of the principal Verb . 233

286
Accusative with the substantivised Infinitive
Accusative of
(a) Space
Time
: Distance
and Space ....
.....
.

.
. 233
233
233
{b) Time: (1) a Point; (2)Duration . 233
287 The Accusative in Elliptical, or unusual constructions . 234
288 THE CASES WITH PREPOSITIONS . 234
Two elements to be considered, the Preposition and the Case . 234
Variety of combinations hence resulting . . 234
289. Interchangeable Prepositions : not identical . 235
290. Note on the correspondence of words
Table of Prepositions
Prepositions with the Genitive only
...... in different languages

.
.

.
235
236
236
291. against : opposition as an equivalent
avri, over . 23e

292. awb, from

Hence,
the exterior

(1) from;
,

......
Hence, instead of for ; adverbial phrase, avO'

(2) of; (3) on account

Cov

of; (4) elliptical us:

.

.
236
236

293- iK, i^, from

Hence,
(5) use with Adverbs
the interior

(1) out of ; (2) from

...... ; (3) hy ; (4) made of ; (5) belonging to
.'

.
236
237

(6) springing /7W«. ; (7) tem})oral use 237

 SYNTAX. XXXI

SECT
294. trpo, in front of ......
Hence, before in (1) time (2) place ; (3) degree ;
. ,

,
PAGE
238
238
Prepositions with the Dative only 239
295. ir, m , 239
Hence, (1) in, of place ; (2) among ; (3) "the eV of investiture ;" (4)

in "the sphere;" (5) special uses, by ; (6) adverbial phrases

'

296. avv,
(7) temporal use (8) " constructio prsegnans "
in conjunction with (co-operation)
;

.......
.......
. . . . 239
241
Hence, with, together vnth (beside)
Prepositions with the Accusative only ..... 241
242
297.

298.
avd,

eis,
up to, up by .

Only in special phrases in the New Testament

to the interior
..... . . 242
242
242
Hence (1) of place, into ; (2) unto, to ; (3) toivards, against ; (4) in
order to, for ; (5) into, a state ; (6) for, as, of equivalence ; (7)
up to ; (8) "
of time, during, or constructio praegnans " . . 242
Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusative . . . 245
299. 5td, through 245
o. Genitive: (l) through, of place ; (2) of agency ; (3) of time, during
or after 246

300. Kara,
/S.

a.
down
Accusative

Genitive
............
:
:

(1)
on account of

downfrom ; (2) against ; (3) by ; (4) throughout, as

247
248

Accusative 248 . . .

/3. Accusative: (1) throughout; (2) over against; (3) at tlic time of;

301. /Ltcrd,

a.
..........
(4) distributive use
in association tcith
Genitive: (1) with,
(5) according to ; (6) adverbial phrases
;

among ;
248

(2) together with; (3) "with and on

.

250

behalf of" 250

302. Trepi,
p.
around
a. Genitive
............
Accusative: after {beyond)

: about, con/xjiiing
250
250
250

303. vwip, over

/3. Accusative:
reference to ......... (1) around; (2) about, of time; (3) about, in
.

.
251
251
a. Genitive : (1) on behalf of; (2) for the sake of; (3) in reference

/S.
to

Accusative ........
............
: beyond, above
251
253
304. inr6, under
a.

jS.
Genitive : ........
by, of the
upon
Accusative: (1) under; (2)
Agent
close
253
253
253

305. iiri, upon

a. Genitive
............
Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative

: (1) on, of basis ; (2) over, of superintendence ; (3) upon,

. 254
254

fig. ; (4) before ; (5) i/i the time of; (6)

" constructio praegnans". 254
XXXll ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTEXTS.

SECT. PAGE
305- {iiri) p. Dative : (1) 07i, of basis; (2) over, of superintendence ; (3) upon,
fig. ; (4) m addition
" constructio prseguans
to ; (5)
"
255
7. Accusative: (1) ujyon, motion implied; (2) over; (3) to (for,

306. irapd, beside

against)
of time ...........
(4) with regard to ; (5) up to, of quantity

............
; ; (6) during,
256
258
a. Genitive from, of persons only
: 258
j3. Dative : near j (2) in the esteem or 2)ower of
(1) icith, . 258
7.
consequence ..........
Accusative: (1) hy, near; (2) contrary to; (3) above;

.... .......
(4)
259
307. 7rp6s, toicards
a.

/?.
Genitive
Dative :
.......
..........
:

oiear
conducive to .
259
259
260
7. Accusative : (1) to ; (2) ivith; (3) mental direction ; (4) estimate ;

(5) intention 260

On the I^'TERCHAXGE OF CERTAIN PilEPOSITIOXS . 261
308. Mutual approach in meaning real distinction ; 261
309- Interchange of 5id with e/c, diro, ev [eis, iwi, Kara) 261
310.
311-
312.
Interchange of e/c and dxo
,,

,,
ip and the simple Dative

eis with irpos, eiri, and Dative (also

..... eV)
262
263
263

313. ,,
Note on 2 Cor. iv, 17
Trepi with did and virep ..... 264
265
314- Repetition or otherwise of Prepositions governing several Avords
Note on Verbs compounded with Prepositions .... 265
266

CHAPTER IV. ADJECTIVES.

315. SECOND CONCORD, re-stated . 267

316. Omission of Substantives 267
Occasional ambiguities 267
List of Substantives frequently omitted 267
317- " Rational Concord " in Number and Gender 268
318. Adjectives referring to several Substantives 269
319. Adjectives in adverbial relations 269
The Degrees of Comparison . 270
The Comparative ... 270
320. Followed by a Genitive of Object 270
321. Or by ij, than, as a Conjunction 270
Employed in special cases 1, 2, 3 270
Omitted before Numerals after more, less 271
Tj after the Positive, sometimes after a Substantive
{fidWov) or Verb. 271
322. Comparative strengthened by inrep or -rrapd 272
Emphatic Comparatives, as in § 47 . 272
 SYNTAX. XXXlll

SECT. PAGE
3^3' Comparative without expressed Object . . 272
(1)Where the context supplies it . . . , 272
(2)Where the Comparative is a familiar phrase . 272
(3) Where the Object may be supplied mentally . 272

324-
325-
The Superlative
General significance......
......
Emphatic Superlatives
,

.
273
273
274

326.
327-
Use of wpuTos ........
Followe'l by irduTuv, preceded by

......
Hebraistic Superlatives
ws, otl . .

.
274
274
274
(1) By Preposition (?v after simple Adjective . . 274
(2) By Adjective repeated in the Genitive . 274
Other so-called Hebiaisms to be rejected . . 275
The Numerals . 275
328. Special uses of the Cardinal eh, one . . 275
(1) As an Indefinite Pronoun (Indefinite Article; . 275
(2) For tlie Correlatives, one ... other . 275

329-
(3) Its
(4) Ordinal /7*5Hnstead of
Adverbial Particles with Numerals
it ....
proper Negative combined with the Predicat

....
.

.
275
276
276
330- Omission of Names of Quantity after Numerals . 276
331- The Ordinals in Enumerations . 276

CHAPTER v.— THE PRONOUNS.

332.
The Personal Pronouns
Subject to the rules for Substantives
.... 277
277
Omission of Pronominal Subject 277
333. Possessive Genitive of Pronouns instead of the Adjective 277
Possessive Adjective Pronoun instead of the Genitive 277
334. Redundant or repeated Personal Pronoun 278
335. Use of avTos, self, in apposition 278
As a Nominative, always emphatic . 278
[The reflexive eavroO for the Second Person 279
,, iavrCbv for First and Second] 279
—
"Rational Concord," with avrbs Gender Number — 279
The Possessive Pronouns
336. Their various uses exemjilified ....
In apposition Mith a Genitive Substantive
. 280
280
280
337. Unemphatic Possessive Pronouns by the Article 280
Emphatic Possessive Pronouns by Ibios, own . 280
The Demonstrative Pronouns. 281
338. Use of otiros, this (near), and iKeivos^ that. 281
339. Use of 65€, this (here) 281
XX XIV ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENT^.

SECT. tAGE
340. Exceptions to the ordinary use of odros,
iKelfos, the Emphatic Denionsirafive .....
c/ceti/os. .

.
281
282
341.
342.
Emphatic (or
.......
redundant) Demonstrative Constructions
Special uses of tovto, Tavra
The Relative Pronoun
. .

.
282
282
283
THE THIRD CONCORD
3\3-
344-
Agreement of the Relative.
A clause as Neuter Antecedent...... .

.
283
283
345-
346. Attraction .........
— —
" Rational Concord" with the Relative

(a) Attraction of the Relative to the Predicate

Gender Number .

.
28;?

281
2S4
(b) Attraction of the Relative to the Antecedent . 284

347-
348.
Demonstrative Antecedent omitted
avToscomplementary to the Relative
.....
Inverse Attraction (transposed Antecedent)

(a Hebraism) .
.

.
285
285
286
349- The Compoimd Relative, Scrns, strictly
But also exjdicative, and logical
Used often with Proper Names
....
....
Indefinite .

.
286
287
287
The Interrogative and Pronouns
350- Various uses of the Interrogative, ....
Indefinite
7-''s ;
.

.
287
287
(1)
(2) Elliptically, as tVa rt ; ....
Simply, with or witliout a Substantive

.......
16"% .?
.

.
287
287
(3)
(4)
Adverbially, liow !

In alternative questions
The Interrogative in indirect questions
......
...
.

.
288
288
288
351. .

352-
Uses of the Indefinite, ris
(1) Simply, with or without a Substantive
.....
Transition from the Interrogative to the IndeliniLo .

-
.

.
288
289
289
(2) Emphatically, somebody ! . . 289
(3) As "a kind of" , 289
(4)
(5)
" Some " approximately with numbers
In alternative expressions
(6) [Negatives of ris, i.e., ovdeis,
..... /jirjdels] .
. 290
290
290

CHAPTER VI.— THE VERB.

VOICE 291
353- Voice : the distinction in form and significance 291
354. The Active Voice 291
Intransitives used as Transitives 291

355. TiiE
Special use of e'xw
Middle Voice : its
......
Variations in meaning according to form

three senses .
{'Icttiixi) 292
292
292
1. Middle")
i^c/eajiw (the "Accusative . 292
But Pronouns generally employed with Active 292
 SYNTAX. XXXV

SECT. PAGE
355. 2. Ap2)r02mative (the ^'DatiYe 'Middle"). 293
The direct Object of tlie Active retained . 293
3. Causative (nearly resembling the Passive) . 293
This meaning sometimes becomes reciprocal 294
356. The Passive Voice 294
Its Sulijcct. The primary or secondary Object of the Active 294

357.
358.
Agent .....
(In the latter case, the primary Object remains in the
after Passive Verbs
Frc(|ueiit diliiculty of distinguishing Passive and Middle
Ac

,
295
295
295
THE MOODS AND TENSES
359. ......
Significance of the
—
Moods
The Indicative Declarative and Interrogative
296
296
296
360. The Tenses. The six employed (the three others essential to complete-
ness) *' Historical " and " principal " Tenses . , 296
361. The Present Tense .

General meaning, and Illustrations

. .

..... . ,

,
297
297
{a)
{h)
A
An
state as now
habitual or usual act .....
existing, a process , 297
297
(c)

{d.) Certain futurity .......

Past time, in vivid narration (the Historical Present) , 297
298
362. The Imperfect Tense
General meaning, with Illustrations
(a) An act unfinished at a past time.
.... 298
298
298
(J) An act statedly repeated 298
(c)

{d)
(e)
An inchoative act ......
To be distinguished from the Aorist

Potential sense from the Inchoative

.

.
299
300
300
(/) The "resolved Imperfect" 301
363. The Future Tense
General meaning, -wdth Illustrations
{a) Indefinite futurity
....
......
301
301
301
{h) Command, especially in prohibitions . 301
(c) General truths or maxims, "Ethical Future" 302
(c?) Future -snth ov fir] (see § 377) 302
(c) The "resolved Future," or Future Imperfect
(/) The Future Auxiliary, /iAXw
Use of 6^\w, to will, emphatic with Examples
....
;
302
302
302
The Aorist Tenses
364.
General meaning, with Illustrations
{a) The absolutely past, "Preterite"
.... 303
303
303

(&)
(c)
The Aorist. as Pluperfect
The " Epistolary Aorist "
.....
Distinction between Aorist, Imperfect, and Perfect 303
304
304
{d) Sometimes equivalent to our Present Indicative . 305
(e) Marking the completeness of an act . 305
XXXVl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

SECT.
365. TiiE Perfect Tense
General meaning, and
....
Illustrations
.

.
PAGE
305
305
(«.) A completed action, or one whose consequences remain . 305

366.
(b)

The Pluperfect Tense

Rare in the New Testament
....
Distinction between the Perfect and Aorist

: an act repeated in the past

.

.
305
306
306
367.
368. Interrogative Forms ....
The *' Perfect Present," and corresponding Pluperfect .

.
306
307
With or without interrogative words
Elliptic questions .... . .

.
307
308
369.
370.
Peculiar forms of affirmative reply
Negative questions
(ft) With 01) ;
(b) with
.... fi-q ; (c)
.

with /xrjTL
.

.
308
308
308

The Imperative Mood . 309

371. Used for command or entreaty . 309
firi its }»roper negative Adverb . . 309
372. Employed in simple permission . 309
373. Tenses of the Im2)erativc . 309
{a) The Present—generality, continuity, repetition . 309
—
(&)
(c)
The Aorist instantaneousness, completeness
The Perfect (very rare)
Contrast between Present and Aorist illustrated
.... .

.
310
310
310

374- The Subjunctive Mood . 311

Always really dependent. Elliptical forms . 311
375- The Subjunctive in independent sentences . 311
1. As a hortatory Imperative First Person — . 311
2. As the Imperative in prohibitions . 311
376. 3. In questioning or doubt, " Deliberative Subjunctive" . 312
377. 4. In strong denial (Aorist), with ov jx-q . 312
5. For the Future Perfect (Aorist) . . 313

378. The Optative Mood . 313

Always really dej^endent . 313
The Optative in independent sentences . 313
1. To express a wish . 313
So with fi-r] {fXTj yevoLTo I) . . 313
2. AVith dv for Potential .
. 314
The Moods in Dependent Clauses . . 314
379. Different kinds of Subordinate Clauses .
. 314
380. Mood and Tense in such Clauses .
. 314
The Subjunctive after words compounded with &v . 314
381. Object Sentences . 314
OTL with the Indicative . 315
382. {a) Direct quotation : Pleonastic on . 315
(b) Indirect quotation : **Oratio obliqua" . 315
 SYNTAX. xxx'sai

SECT. PAQT?
382. (c) Indirect interrogation 315

383-
Use of the Indicative, the Subjunctive, and the Optative
(d) Object and Objective Sentence after some Verbs
Conditional Sentences
.... . . 316
317
317
The " Protasis " and " Apodosis "
Four forms of the Conditional Sentence
a. The supposition of a /rtc^ (ct, Indicative)
......
....
317
317
317
/3.

7. Entire uncertainty
5. A condition unfulfilled
{el, ......
The supposition of a jjos^ij 27 lYy (ed J', Subjunctive)
Optative)
{el, Indicative past ...
.

ctj'.
.

Indicative
. 318
318

384.
past)
Intentional Clauses expressive of pm'pose or design
: ....
......
319
320

(rt)
The Intentional Particles {tva, 6tu}s, ixtj)
With the Subjunctive, .....
to express intention
320
320
(Distinction between Intentional
Does tVa ever mean so that
Passages relating to Scriptui'e prophecy
.?........
.....
and Object Sentences) . . . 320
321
321
The negative intentional particle 322
{b) "With the Indicative Future (infrequent), conveying emphasis,
force 323
An ajyparent Indicative Present in Intentional Sentences . . 323
385. The Infinitive 324
(a) Properly a Verbal Substantive . . . . . . .324

386.
(&)
(c)
Negative Adverbs with the Infinitive
The Infinitive governs the same cases as the Verb
Tenses of the Infinitive
.... 324
324
324

387.
388.
Present, Aorist, Future, Perfect
Subject of the Infinitive {eom\)aive ^ 286).
The Infinitive as Subject (substantivised)
..... 324
325
325
389. The Infinitive as Object 325
{a) After Verbs denoting faculty, act, assertion, etc. . . 325
{b) To denote intention or result 326
(1) After a Verb 326
(2) After a Substantive 326

390. The
(3) After an Adjective
Infinitivfc in oblique cases (as Lat., gerund) .... 326
326
(a) Genitive,

(1)
(2)
with toO
After Substantives
After Verbs
.......
........
326
326
327
(3) To express design . 327
(6)
(c)
Dative, with
.....
"With Prepositions {tov,
t^j, to express cause
t(^, to)
. . . .327
. 327

391-
392.
Infinitive of result,
Illustrations

Infinitive as Imperative
with
:

......
did,

..,...,..,
els, ev,

Coart (so Indicative^

fierd, trpo, -rrpos, dvri . . 328
328
329
XXXVlll ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

^'.Xl PAGE
The Participles
Properly verbal Adjectives
Negatives with the Participles
......
.....
. ,

,
329
329
330
Subject of a Participle (Genitive Absolute) , 330
}94- Peedicative uses of Participles , 330
1. After tJie Substantive Verb: " the resolved Tenses 330
2.
3.
Complementai^ to the verbal Predicate
Adjuncts to the verbal Predicate .... . ,

,
331
332
(«)
{b)
Modal
Temporal .......
(1) Contemporaneous (Present Participle)
,

,
332
332
332
(2) Preceding (Aorist Participle) 332
(3) Succeeding (Future Participle) . , 333
(c) Relations of cause, condition, etc. 333
{d) Intensive (Hebraistic) 333

395-
A Predicative Participle
Attkibutive use
may
of Participles
Epithetic (like Adjectives)
.....
be modified by ws

.....
333
334
334
396. "With the Article : like the Relative and a Finite Verb 334
The Temporal reference sometimes lost 335

397-
Usual force of the Present Tense
Particijiles in broken constructions
Anacolouthon (compare § 412)
..... 335
385
336

CHAPTER VII.— ADVERBS.

398.
399-
Their general use
Adverbial phrases
(a) A
......
Substantive with or without Preposition
337
337
337
{b)

(c)

{d)
An
A
Adjective
Partici})le
The combination
..... of two Verbs .
337
337
338
400. Adverbs as Prepositions (see § 133) . 338
Combinations of Adverbs . 338
401. The Negative Adverbs, ou and /x?? 338
Combinations of Negatives 339
Comparison sometimes expressed as denial 339

CHAPTER VIIL— CONJUNCTIONS.

402. Rule for words connected by Conjunctions 340

403. Conjunctions of Annexation especially : Kai, and 340
 SY^'TAX. XXXIX

SECT. PACK
403. Special iises of /cat . . 340
(a) For rhetorical emphasis . 340
(b) In the enumeration of- particulars (with re) . 340
(c) Marking points of transition . 341
"
(rf)

(c)
Explanatory
As also, even
:
"
.....
/cai

Frequently in comparisons, and in the rismjg climax

epexegetic .

.
341
341
342
404. Conjunctions of Antithesis especially aXKa, Se : . 342
1. dWd, hut, marks opposition, interru ption , transition . 342
(1) To throw emphasis on its clauses . 343
(2) In the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence, yet . 343
(3) After a negative, dW ij, except . 343
2. 5c, hut, uueinphatic adversative . . 344
Often may be rendered, and, then, noiv, etc. . 344
Koi ... 5^, yea ... moreover . 344
Antithesis with /to' ... M , . 344
/x4v occasionally without 5^ (three cases) . 345
405. The Disjunctives : especially ij, ehe . . 345
-^

ij
...

Kal,
ij,

^ "interrogative"
iJTOi ...r}, etre

or even ......
.....
... elrz . .

.
345
345
346
406. The Inferential Conjunction.^ : especially apa. . 346
Their distinction. Slighter meanings . 346
Other Inferential Particles . 346
407. The Causal Conjunctions : especially 'yAp . . 347
(a) Relative Conjunctions, as on, because . 347
(b) The Demonstrative Causal yap, for . . 347
Introduces a direct reason . 347
Or the reason of some fact implied. . 347
(c) Sometimes refers to a suggested thought . 347
{d) The combination kuI yap, its two senses . 348
408. Asyndeton
(a) Of the
: or the omission of Conjunctions
Copulative ....
....
.

.
348
348
{h)

(f)

id)
Of /cat,
Of the
Of the
Epexegetic
Antithetic
Causal Particle
.... .

.
348
349
349

CHAPTER IX.— OX SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE STRUCTURE OF

SENTEXCES.

409. The Arrangement

{a)
(b, c)
General rules
of Words
......
Emphasis gained by variety of arrangement
350

350
xl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

skct. page
410. Special Forms of Ellipsis 351
1. Aposiopesis 351

411.
2. Zeugma

Apparent Redundancy
Inartificial collocation of Clauses ...... 351
351
352
{a) For special emphasis frequently in three ways
; ; . . . 352
{b) Object and Object-sentence (see §382) 352
412. Anacolouthon
(Not to be hastHy assumed) .......
.....
352
352
(a)
{b)
Transition from indirect to direct speech
....
Transition from a Participle to a Finite Verb
352
353
(c)

{d)
Nominative Participles standing alone
A sudden change of structure
{e) The non-completion of a Compound Sentence
.......
....
(see § 397) . . . 353
353
353
413. Attention to Sound and Rhythm
{a) Paronomasia ..........
Simple alliteration
, » 354
354
354

(b) Parallelisms, after the

Christian hymns
.....
Alliteration associated with kindred meanings

........ manner of Hebrew

. . . 354
354
354
Rhythmic constructions in passages of strong emotion . .354
"Chiasmus" 355
(c) (1) Quotations of Greek poetry in the New Testament . . 355
(2) Metrical lines apparently unconsciously introduced . . 356
Analytical Exercise on 2 Thessalonians
On some New Testament Synonyms
Introductory Remarks
........ 357
369
369
List of Words illustrated 371
I.
II.
Verbs in ordinary use
Words
III. Theological
......
chielly expressive of moral quality
and Ecclesiastical Words .
. . . .374
377
380
IV. Miscellaneous . 583
VOCABULARY 387
 —

PAET I.

ORTHO GR APHY.
1. The Greek Alpliabet contains twenty-four letters, arranged
and named as follows :

Name. Capital. Small. Sound. Numerical value.

Alpha A a a 1
Beta B ^or^ b 2
Gamma r <y sometimes r g (hard) 3
Delta A h d 4
Epsllon .. E e e (short) 5
Zeta z Ko^i z 7
Eta H V e ao"3) 8
Theta e ^or^ th 9
Iota I i i 10
Kappa K K k 20
Lambda A \ I 30
Mu M /A m 40
Nu N V n 50
Xi H 1 X 60
Omicron O (short) 70
Pi n TT sometimes xn p 80
Eho P p ox
q
T 100
Sigma X (T final 9 S 200
Tau T T sometimes } t 300
Upsilon T- V u 400
Phi <E> <#> jph 500
Chi X y Ch (guttural) 600
Psi ^ -./r ps 700
Omega fl ft) Gong) 800
2 notes on the alphabet — the vowels. [§ 2, a.

Notes on the Alphabet.

2. The word Alphabet is derived from the names of the
CL' first

two letters, alijJia, beta. The forms of the Greek letters, which, it will
be seen, greatly resemble those of our own language (the Koman letter),

were originally modified from the Phoenician.

h. The second forms of certain letters are used interchangeably with

the first, but Those of gamma and tau are almost
less frequently.
obsolete. The final always employed at the end of
s, besides being
words, is often placed in the middle of compound terms when a part of
the compound ends with sigma. Thus, Trpos^cpo).

c. For an explanation of the numeral use of letters, and especially of

omissions in the list, see ^ 48.

The Vowels.

3. The vowels are a, e, % t, o, v, w.

In this country they are generally pronounced according to the

a.
English sounds. The Continental pronunciation of a, tj, i, is undoubtedly
the more strictly correct but the matter is of little practical importance.
;

Absolute conformity to the ancient mode is unattainable, and it is most

convenient to adopt the method of pronunciation current among scholars
of our own country.
T| and 0) are long vowels. Care must be taken to distinguish them
from the short c and o. Thus, /xev is pronounced like the English men ;
fjLYjv, like mean. In roi/, the o is pronounced as in on/ in twv, as in ovm;
a, t, V, may be either long or short.

b. The diphthongs are at, au, «, ev, ot, ov, pronounc3d as in English
also a, r), <j> (or, with capitals, Ai, Ht, Ot), where the i occurs with a
long vowel, and is not pronounced, being, therefore, written underneath
the vowel (excepting in the case of capitals), and called iota subscript.
It will be important to note this in the declension of nouns and the
conjugation of verbs.
r}v is pronounced like ev, eu; and vi like wi.

C. Every vowel, when standing as the first letter of a word, has what
 — ,

§ 3, /.J THE VOWELS. 3

is called a breathing over it, written as an apostrophe, either turned

outwards, as (
*
), or inwards, as ( ' ). The former termed the soft
is

breathing, and shows that the vowel is simply to have its own sound

the latter the hard breathing, and is equivalent to the English h

aspirated. To note the latter is most necessary for correct pronunciation.
Thus, 6, 7} must be pronounced Ao, he.
The initial v is always aspirated. So, vTrcp, huper.

d. At the beginning of a word, the consonant (or semivowel) p

always takes the aspii'ate, becoming rh. When two p's come together
in the middle of a word, the aspirate and soft breathing are successively
employed. Thus, pew, rhed ; dpprjrosy arrhetos. When a word begins
with a diphthong, the breathing is placed upon the second letter :

avTOVy auton ; avrov, hauton.

In the lengthening of vowels for purposes of inflection or deriva-

e.

tion, & becomes d, or more generally r\ e becomes t], or ci i, v, become ; ;

respectively i, 5; o becomes «, or ov.

/. Two vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, occurring together

in different syllables are often contracted into one, according to the
following Table :

followed by. . . a c 1 o (1) ai CI Tl 01 u OV

tt becomes .... . . a a a (i> b)

"h
a a fa> (U (a

^ M a or 1] Ck
T ov to
Tl
Cl Tl
01 b> ov

0) ov a> ov (0 b) oil 01 01 b) ov

The left perpendicular line in this table gives the former vowel in each com-
bination, the upper horizontal line the latter, and the result of the contraction
will easily be found. Thus, eo gives ov ; ae, long a ; and so of the rest. It
must be noted that where the letter o- occurs in inflection between two short
vowels, it is generally dropped, and conti'action takes place according to the
table.
It wiU be observed by inspection of the table that an o sound always
preponderates in contraction with the other vowels ; that an a sound, when
first, prevails over an e sound following it, and vioe versa. Some special and
exceptional methods of contraction will be found noticed in Etymology.

* Or ov, when the et is the contraction of ee, as in the infinitive of contracted

verbs in o.
-i
VOWELS — CONTRACTIONS —HIATUS. [§ 3, /.

Exercise 1.— Vowel Contractions.

Write tlie contracted forms of rt/xao), Tt/x.a€t9, n/xact, Tt/tao/jicv, Ti/xacrc,

<^iXe(u, ^tXcet?, ^tXeet, (faXio/xev, (fnXeere, SrfXou), 8>y\o€ts, St/Aoci, 8rj\oo/x€V,

SrjXo€T€i (fiiXerjS, TCfiaoLj 87]Xor]T€, voos, voov, ycveos, aiSoa, opea, ^ao'tXcc^,

^. Diaeresis is the opposite of contraction, and is expressed by two

dots (" ) over the second of two vowels which are to be separately
pronounced. Thus, KatVav, Ca-i-nan, not Cai-nan.

h. Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding it. —The hiatus {i.e. yawning)
caused by the meeting of vowels at the end of one word and the
beginning of the next is often prevented by one or other of the following
ways :

(1.) The pv i<p€\KV(XTLK6v, or nu-sufflxed. This v is added to datives plural

ending in and to the third persons of verbs ending in € or i, when the following
i,

word begins with a vowel, or at the end of a sentence. These words will be
marked in declension and conjugation by a bracketed (v) thus, alu}<n{v), ;

iTri<rTevff€(v). In a similar manner, ovtco, fi^pi, and &xpi-j a^s a rule add s when
followed by a vowel. In the last two words, however, the New Testament text
is not by any means uniform and on all three the best MSS. greatly differ.
;

The negative ov becomes ovk when the next word begins with a vowel, ^ and
the preposition iK becomes ^^.

(2.) Elision marked by an apostrophe. —

The following words lose their final
vowel before an initial vowel in the next word the prepositions airb, Std, M,
:

Trapd, fierd, and the conjunction 6.W6. ; with (occasionally) the particle M and
its negative compound ovM ; also (before S)v) the preposition olvtL When the
initial vowel is aspirated, tt, t, become <|>, (see § 4, h). Thus, airb airwv
becomes air axnuiv, and airb iavrwu, &(f iavrcSv so for fxera aWriXiap, /xer
;

d\\7)\ci}v, but for fierd tj/juSv, fxed' ijfxoSp and for avrl dv, avd' Siv.
;

This elision was, in classical Greek poets, used much more frequently in words
ending in a, e, t, o.

(3.) Orasis. — An hiatus

is sometimes prevented by a Crasis (lit. a "mixing'')^

or the union of the two words the vowels forming a long vowel, or diphthong.
;

Tliis takes place but rarely, and only when the former word is very short and
closely connected with the latter. The breathing of the vowel in the second
word is retained, to mark the fusion, and is then called a Ooronis. Thus, foi

* Compare § 4, d, 6.
 — ;

§ 4, d.] mE CONSONANTS. 5

TO. airrd, the same things, rairrd is sometimes written ; for koI iyd), and 7, Kayib ;

for TO ivavTLoVf the contrary, rovvavTiov j and once for rh 5i'ona, the name,
ToCvofia (Matt, xxvii. 57).

The Consonants.
4. ci. As in the orthography of other languages, the four consonants,
\, fx, V, p, are termed liquids; the nine consonants, /?, y, 8, tt, k, t,

<f>, Xi ^j Q-re mutes.

b. The mutes may be evidently arranged according to the organs of

speech specially concerned in their formation.

Thus TT, P, (pj are labials (^sounds)

Kj y, Xy ^^® gutturals (A;-sounds) ; l^y^**-*^^**"^^^^

r, 8J 6, are dentals (^-sounds).

Each of these divisions has, it is also plain, a sharp, a flat, and an

aspirate consonant. Hence the highly important classification of the
following Table :

Sharp. Flat. Aspirate.

Labials . . .
IT
P ^-sounds.
Gutturals . . K X A:-sounds.
Dentals . . . T 8 e ^sounds.

The guttural 7 is pronounced, before a A;-sound or |, like the nasal ng.

Thus, dyycXos, ang-gelos (the second 7, as always, being hard) ; dyKvpa,
ang-kura.

c. a- is the simple sibilant, which, in combination with a ^sound, gives

if/='rrcr, per, or (jxr ; in combination with a ^'-sound gives i=K<r,ya;\tr;
in combination with S gives C=8<r; these three, ^, |, \j/y being double
letters.

The following eight rules must be carefully observed, as they

d.
relate to the changes which are imposed by the necessities of orthogi-aphy
on the conjugation and declension of words, and will explain much here-
after that would otherwise be found very perplexing.
6 COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. [§ 4, d.

1. As above, a labial followed by or becomes ^ ; a guttural followed by o*

becomes |.

2. A labial or guttural before a dental must be of the same order, i.e.

must be changed, if not already so, into a sharp, flat, or aspirate, according to
the nature of the dental.
3. A dental followed by <r disappears.
4 Before the letter |jl p. a guttural becomes -y
a labial becomes a dental
; ;

becomes o-.
5. The letter v becomes fx before labials ; y before gutturals ; before a liquid

is changed into the same liquid and before o- or f is dropped.

;

The combination o-f v with a dental and the sibilant, as vra, liecomes simply
(T, with compensation by the lengthening of the preceding vowel e becoming ;

€t, and 0, ov. Thus,

yiyavrai becomes 7i7d(ri

iXfjLipdcri ,,
eX/Mffi ;

TvcpdevTci ,, TV(f)6€L<TL ;

TVTTTOVTCn „ TVTTTOVffl.

6. A sharp mute before an aspirated vowel

is changed into the corresponding

aspirate. Sometimes this change will take place when the mute occurs at the
end of one word, and the vowel at the beginning of the next. Thus, d^' wu for
CLTT Cjv 0^; opau) for ouk bpaoj.
7. When
two consecutive syllables of the same word begin with an aspirate,
the former often loses its aspiration. Thus, Opixo^ is changed into rpixos ; and
exw into ex^- But affixes generally lose their aspiration in preference to the
stem, whether they are placed first or last as, ti-6€-tl for di-de-di., where the
;

last syllable is a mere adjunct to the root.

8. No consonant can end a Greek word, except v, p, a, ^, xp; the last two being

compounds of s. The preposition €k before a consonant, and the negative adverb

o^uK before a vowel, are apparent exceptions but, having no accent, they may be
;

counted as parts of the following words.

Exercise 2.— On tlie Combination of Consonants.

Mule 1. —Write down the proper forms of ypac^o-et, tvtto-w, Xeycrov, e;(o-w,

crTp€(l>cr€L<s, rpL^cro/xev, Acytras, Tr^ixnorov.

^\ Of irct^cro), i\7n8(T€L<s, aScovrcs, avvra-CL.

^K Of reTpi/Jrat, yeypac^rat, AeXeyrat, (Se^pexraL, lrpip6r]Vy 7r\€K$rjvaLf

XeyOrjvai, cTre/XTr^T/v.

4. Of riTpiPfJLaij yeypacfifiai, jSe/SpexfJ^aL, imraOp.ai, yvvT/xat, ttcttXck/xou.

5. Of 7rav7roA.vs, cri>i/<^r;/xt, (rvvyvwfXTj^ avvx'^^P^i o-w^vyos, <TvvaTpaTHDTr]s

also of TravTS, XvovTCTLj XvOevTaLV.

 ;

§ 6, b.] THE ACCENTS. 7

5. Some other changes of consonants may be noticed, though they do

not so invariably conform to general rules as the preceding.

1. AssimiJniion. —The labials ir, p, <[> before ix, and v before the other

liquids, are regularly assimilated to the following letters ; i.e. changed

into the same letter (see § 4, cZ, 5). Sometimes a latter consonant is

assimilated to a former one ; as, oAAv/xt for 6X-vvfXL.

2. Duplication. —The letter p is regularly doubled when a vowel is

placed before it. Thus, d7ro-pt7rra> becomes airoppLTTru).

Sometimes X is doubled, to compensate for the loss of a vowel ; as,

fjLaXXov for fxaXiov, dyyeXXw for dyycXeo). In comparatives and in verbs,

<r<r or TT is sometimes put for a guttural k, y, x with a following vowel
as, rjcra-ov for tjklovj rapaa-(Tisi for Tapa^^oi. In some words, t appears
instead of <r<r ; as, /xet^cov for /xcyiwv.

3. Transposition. —A vowel with a liquid is often transposed ; as,

OvrjCTKU) for Oav-a-KU).

4. Omission. —Any consonants which make a harsh sound may be

omitted in the formation or inflection of words.

5. Insertion. — Sometimes, though rarely, a consonant is inserted to

assist the sound ; as, from avrip, gen. (avepos, av-po<5) dvZpo^ ; so, avOpioiros
is from dvyp w\}/, making dv-pojiroSf and, with 6 inserted, avQpoiiros.

The Accents.
a. Every Greek word, except the proclitics and enclitics, which
6.
willbe noticed under their respective parts of speech, has an accent
expressed on one of its last three syllables. The accents are employed
in writing,but mostly disregarded in pronunciation. Their use was
to mark a certain stress (or " rising " or " falling " inflection) on the
syllables where they are placed. It is said that they were invented by
Greek grammarians, as a guide to foreigners in pronouncing the language.
Some linguists of our own day have endeavoured to reinstate them as
helps in this respect, but without much success.

6. The accents are the acute (

' ),
the grave (
'
), and the circum-
flex C^).
The accent is marked upon a vowel, and in diphthongs upon the latter
vowel ; as, avros, ovtws. The acute and grave are placed after the
8 CONSONANT CHANGiES —THE ACCENTS. [§ 6, 5.

breathing, and the circumflex over it as, og, ovto<s. The acute on the
;

last syllablebecomes grave, unless the word ends a sentence except tls, ;

the interrogative, which always keeps its acute. Every unaccented

syllable is said to have the gi^ave tone ; but the grave accent is not
marked, except where it stands for a final acute.

Words are called, with reference to accent Oxytone (lit. sharp-toned)^

c.

when the acute is on the last syllable, as IXttl^ Paroxjrtone, when the ;

acute is on the penultima (last but one), as ovtws; Proparoxytone,

when the acute is on the antepenultima (last but two), as ^tXtos ;

Perispomenon drawn-out), when the circumflex is on the last
(lit.

syllable, as avrov Properispomenon, when on the penultima, as ovros-

;

The circumflex cannot be farther back than the penultima, nor the
acute than the antepenultima.
If the last syllable of the word contains a long vowel, the acute
accent must be on the last or last but one, the circumflex only on the
last. Should, therefore, the final syllable of a proparoxytone be length-
ened by declension, the accent is thrown forward, i.e. the word becomes
paroxytone thus, av^pwTro?, dvOpoyirwv.
; But if the final syllable of a
properispomenon is lengthened, the accent is changed to the acute, i.e.
the word becomes paroxytone ; thus, Xt^eprti/os, Xi/SepTLvwv.
It should be observed that the circumflex accent is always the result
'
of contraction, i.e. of an acute and grave ( ' ) —
not of a grave and acute
(
^

'
) —
as will be shown under Etymology.

d. word immedi-
Enclitics are words which merge their accent into the
ately preceding, which word is aff'ected as follows A proparoxytone or :
—
properispomenon takes an acute accent on the last syllable also thus, ;

avOpdiTTos Tt5, oi/cos Tt?. Au oxytouc that would otherwise (see above)
take the grave accent retains the acute; thus, fiaOrjTi^s rts. Paroxy«
tones and perispomena show no alteration.

e. Proclitics lose their accent in the words following. In an emphatic

position, a proclitic becomes oxytone. Thus, ov with a verb is not ; ov
alone, no t A proclitic followed by an enclitic is also oxytoned ; as, ov
Tis. The two may be written as one word.

Special rules of accentuation will be given under the sections of Etymology

The learner is recommended to accentuate from the first, in writing Greek ;
 — ;

§ ?.] ORTHOGllAPHY, GREEK AND ENGLISH. 9

especially as the accent of very many words can only be known by acquaintance
with the words themselves, and if neglected at fii'st, will be extremely difficult

to acquire afterwards.

On the Transference of Greek Words into English.

Most proper names, and some few other words, are literally tran-
7.
scribed from the one language into the other. The medium of transference
is almost always the Latin, and therefore the orthography conforms to

Latin rules. For the most part, the Greek letters are represented by the
equivalents given (§ 1). The following exceptions must, however, be
noted :

K is always c, the letter Tc not being found in the usual Roman

alphabet. Where the c would be soft in ordinary English pronunciation,
it is generally so in Greek names, as ILvprjv-r], Cyreite. ' In some words of
infrequent use, good speakers sometimes deviate from this rule, saying,
e.g. AA-eldama, not Aseldama.
The vowel v is represented by y, as ^vpCa^ Syria.
The diphthong at becomes ce, as Katcrap, Ccesar. Occasionally, the
diphthong is made simply e ; so, Atyv7rT(o9), Egypt; Tpv(f>aLi'a, Ti^pliena.
The diphthong oi becomes q3, as ^ol/^tj, Phoebe ; sometimes, as above,
only e: thus, ^otvt/07, Phenice.
The diphthong becomes e or ?,
ct as AaoSt/ccia, Laodicea ; ©vdreLpa,
ThyaUra : sometimes (in practice) t, as SeXcvKcta, Seleucia. But the i
ought really to be long, or long e ; so Attalia.

The diphthong ov appears as w, as AovkS?, Luke; or, before a vowel,

as V, as StXovavo's, Silvanus.
The initial I before a vowel becomes J, as 'lovSa?, Judas.
The initial P, always aspirated in Greek (§ 3, d), is generally without
the aspirate in English. Thus, 'Pa^/3i', Bahbi. But 'Prjytov, Khegium
'PoSry, Rlioda ; and *Pd8os, Rhodes^ are exceptions, being original Greek
words.

Changes in the terminations of these transferred words belong to Etymology.

No rule can be given but usage why some should have their endings changed,
while others are exactly transcribed. Occasionally, the same word appears in
two forms. Thus, Marcus and Mark, LiLcas and LuTce. The learner is recom-
mended to read carefully parts of the New Testament where many proper names
occur, comparing the English with the Greek. No better portion for the pmpose
could b>e found than Romans xvi.
10 punctuation —reading lessons. [§ 8.

Punctuation.
8. Four marks of punctuation are used for the division of sentences
the comma, the colon, the period, and the note of interrogation.
The comma ( ,
) and the period ( .
) are like our own.

In modern typography it is very usual not to begin new sentences with

capital letters ; reserving these for proper names, for the commencement of
quotations, and for the beginning of paragraphs.

The colon (sometimes called semicolon) is expressed by a point above

the line, thus (
•
).

Interrogation is marked by a sign, after the question, resembling our

semicolon ( ;
).

Inverted commas, as marks of quotation, are sometimes, though rarely,

employed in printed Greek.
The Greek equivalent for etc., et ccetera^ is in the initials k. t. X., for
Koi TO. Xonrd, and the rest.
The following sentence exhibits the different marks of punctuation
(John ix. 40) :—
Kal eXirav avT(p, Mrj kuI rifieh TV(p\ol ea-jxev; elirev avTols (6) 'I'qcovs, Ei TV(j)\ol ^re,
oiiK &y etx^T€ ajxapriap. vvv de Xiyere otl, 'BXeTO/xev' i] a/xapria V/xuv jxivei,

READING LESSONS.
I. Acts ii. 1-13.

Write the following in Roman letters, carefully inserting the initial

aspirate wherever it occurs, and discriminating between the long and the
short and e, as in Lesson III. below :

K<xl ev Tft) av/JL7r\r]povo'dac rrjv^ rjixepav Trj<; TrevTrjKoarrjf;,

2 ^aav irdvTe^i 6/jlov iirl to avro,^ ^k iyevero dcfiva) sk tov

ovpavov ^%09 wairep ^epofxevr)^ irvorj<; ^iaLa<; Kac eTrXrjpwcrev
3 oXov TOV oIkov ov Tjaav KadrjixevoL, Kal a>(f)6rjaav avTOi<; Stafiepc-

^ofievac yXojacrat (her el 7rvpb<;, Kal eKaOiaev ecf)' eva eKaaTov

4 avTMv, Kal eirXTjadr^aav 7rdvT€<i 7rv€v/iaT0<; dyiov, Kat rjp^avTo
\aXelv 6Tepat<; y\oiiacraL<; Ka6(b<; to irvevfia iSlSov diro^Oey-

^ According to what rule is the accent on the final syllable made grave f
^ Why does this accent remain acute /
 — ;

§§ 1-8.] READING LESSONS. 11

5 tyeo-Bai avroU. ^Ha-av Be (cr) 'lepovcaXrjfju f€aTOCfCovvT€<;

^lovBatOL, avBpe^ euXa^et? airo iravTO'i eOvov^ tmv viro rov

6 ovpavov yeyo/jLevT)^ Be Trj<; (f)covr]^ ravrrff; crvvrfKOe to ifKrjOO'i

yX^f^ KOI avve^vurfr on tjkovov el? €KaaTO<; rfj IBla BtakeKTCp

7 XakovvTwv avTMV e^Laravro Be koX eOavfia^ov Xeyovre^;, Ou;)^l
8 IBov TTCLvre^ ovtol^ elaiv oi \aXovvTe<i VaXtXatoi, ; Kai 7rw9
r)fiel^ oLKovo/jLev cKaaro^ rfj IBia BloXIkto) rjficov ev fj
e<yevvr}6'ii-

9 fjiev ; HdpOoc koX y\.r)BoL Koi 'EXa/i-etTat, koI ol KaroiKovvre^

TTjv MecroTrora/jbLav, ^lovBaiav re Kal J^aTTTraBoKtav, Tlovrov
10 Kal ^pvyiav re koI TlaiJb<f>v\tav, AlLyvirrov, Kai ra
TTjv ^Kcriav,

fiipT) T?}? Ai^VT)^ Trj<; Kara Kvp^vrjVy Kal ol i7nBrj/jLovvTe<;

11 ^VcdjjbaloL, ^YovBatoi^ re Kal Trpoo-rjXvroL, Kp^re? Kal"Apa^e<;,

aKovofiev XaXovvrayv avroiv ral^ r}/jL&repaL<i yXcocraacf; ra fie-
12 yaXeta rod ®eov. e^iaravro Be Traz^re? Kal BLrjTropovvro, aXXof;
7rpb<; dXXov Xeyovre^, Tt OeXei tovto elvai ; erepoc Be
13 Bia'^Xevd^ovT€<i eXeyov otl, TXevKov<i /jLefjuearco/xevot, elaLv.

II. KoMANS iv. 1-16.

Read the following, carefully attending to the punctuation, which in

this passage is marked with unusual decisiveness ;

Tt ovv epovfiev ^Affpadfi rov irpoiraTopa rjpLOiv Kara adpKa

2 ei yap ^A^pad/ju i^ epywv iBiKatoodT], e^et Kav'^rjixa' dX}C
3 ov irpo^ 6eov, tI yap rj ypa^rj Xeyei ; '^FiTTLcrrevaev Be
'^A^padfi To3 6ea), Kal eXoyiaOi] avrS eh BLKatoavvrjv.^
4 tS Be epya^opLev(p 6 pbLcr6o<; ov Xoyi^erai Kara X^P''^ dXXd
5 Kara ocfyelXrjfjba' toS Be firj epya^o/juevq), Trtarevovn Be €7rl

TOP BiKatovvTa rov dae/Srj, Xoyl^eraL rj TTLaTL^; avrov eh

6 BiKatoavvTjv, KaOdirep Kal AavelB Xeyet top /jLaKapcafMov
rov dv6p(i)7rov w 6 6eo<^ Xoyi^erai BtKaLoavvrjv %6>/3i9 epycov,

7 *
yiaKdpiOL oiv dcjiedrjaav at dvo/jLiaL Kal mv eireKaXix^Orfaav
8 '
at afiaprlaL, fiaKdpco<; dvrjp (ou) ov fjur) Xoyiarjrai, K.vpto<%
9 *
dfiapTiavJ /jLaKapccrfjLo<; ovv ovro^ eTrl Tr)v irepLTOiirjv
rj Kal eTrl rrjv aKpo^variav ; Xeyo/xev yap, '^EiXoyiadr} roS
10 *
^A^padfjL T] iridTL^i eh BcKaLoa-vvrfv.^ ttw? ovv eXoyladr)

^ Why has this word two accents I

12 READING LESSONS. [§§ 1-8.

6v irepLTO/jbrj ovtl tj ev aKpo/Svaria ; ovk ev irepCTO/jifj

11 aW ev aKpo^varia' koX '
(77j/jl6lov* eXa^ev '
TrepLTO/iij^;,^

a^payl^a rrj^i hiKaiocrvvrj^; t?}9 'Tri(TTeai<; T7]<; ev '

rrj aKpo-
^vcTTLa, €69 TO ecvac axjTov irarepa irdvTwv rwv Tna-revovrcov
Bl dKpo^v(TTia<;, et? to Xoyca-Orjvat avTol<; (rrjv) BiKacoavvTjv,
12 KUL iraTepa 7repcT0/JL7]<; Tot9 ovk ck TrepiTOfxrjf; /jlovov dWd
{koI rot?) crTOij(ov(TLV toI<^ t'^vecnv Tr}<; ev aKpo/SvaTia
13 7rK7T6ft)9 Tov TvaTpo^ Tj/jicov ^A^pudfi. Ov ydp Scd VOflOV
rj €7rayye\la tcS 'Afipadfju rj to3 airepfxaTL avTOVy to KXypo-
vo/JLOv avTOV etvat Koafiov, dWd Scd BiKaLoavvr}^ TrlaTeco^'
14 et yap ol ex vofxov KXrjpovo/jLot, KeKevcoTat rj irt(TTL<; teal

15 KaT7]py7}Tat> tj eirayyeXia, o ydp v6/jL0<i 6pyr)v KaTepyd^eTat,

16 ou Be OVK ecTTLv v6fio<;, ovBk 7rapd^aaL<;. Aid tovto ck
iricrTeay^y Xva KaTd '^dpcv.

The quotation marks (inverted commas) introduced in verses 3, 7, 8, are

used, as is the practice in some editions of the Greek Testament, to indicate a
citation from the ancient Scriptures.

III. Matthew v. 1-16.

Write the following in Greek characters, punctuating the sentences,

inserting the soft and aspirate " h'eathings" but not attempting accentu-
ation. The usual marks ( " ) and ( " ) discriminate the long and the short
vowels. In the diphthongs, the short a and e are to be used. Where
an iota is to be subscribed, the vowel is italicised thus, o = w. ;

1 Idon de tous ochlous anebe eis to oros ; kai kathisantos autou

2 proselthan (auto) hoi mathetai autou ; kai anoixas to stoma autou
3 edidasken autous legon, Makarioi hoi ptochoi to pneumati, hoti auton
4 estin he basileia ton ouranon. makarioi hoi penthountes, hoti autoi
5 paraklethesontai. makarioi hoi praeis, hoti autoi kleronomesousi ten
6 gen. makarioi hoi peinontes kai dipsontes ten dikaiosunen, hoti
7 autoi chortasthesontai. makarioi hoi eleemones, hoti autoi eleethe-
8 sontai. makarioi hoi katharoi te kardia, hoti autoi ton theon
9 opsontai. makarioi hoi eirenopoioi, hoti (autoi) huioi theou
10 klethesontai. makarioi hoi dediogmenoi heneken dikaiosunes, hoti
11 auton estin he basileia ton ouranon. makarioi este hotan oneidisosin
humas kai dioxdsin kai eiposin pan poneron kath' humdn pseudomenoi
§§ 1-8.] READING LESSONS. 13

12 heneken emou ; chaiiute kai agalliasthe, hoti ho misthos humon

polus en tois ouranois ; houtos gar edioxan tous prophetas tous pro
humon.
13 Humeis este to halas tes ges ; ean de to halas moranthe, en tini

halisthesetai ? eis ouden ischuei eti ei me blethen exo katapateisthai

14 hupo ton anthrop5n. humeis este to phos ton kosmou, ou dunatai
15 polls krubenai epan5 orous keimene ; oude kaiousi luchnon kai
titheasin auton hupo ton modion all' epi ten luchnian, kai lampei
16 pasin tois en te oikia. houtos lampsato to phos humon emprosthen
ton anthropon, hopos idosin hum5n ta kala erga kai doxasosin ton
patera humon ton en tois ouranois.

The Greek Testament wiU furnish many other exercises, which should
h2 repeated until the learner can read the language with perfect facility.

A little care and time now devoted to this point, even before the uieaning
of a single word is understood, will very greatly contribute to future
progress.
 14 [§ 9.

PAET II.

ETYMOLOGY.
Chapter I. INTEODUCTIOK
9. Etymology treats of the classification, the derivation, and tlie
inflection of words.

a. The of speech in Greek, and in

;parts all other languages, are sub-
stantially the same.

h. More important than any others are the Noun and the Vei^h.
These, as the necessary elements of a sentence, will be treated of, in
first

their various inflections. With the ISToun are closely connected the Artidey
the Adjective, and the Pronoun. The Verb also has its noun, the Infinitive,
and its adjective, the Participle Of these two the latter only is inflected.

10. The elementary part of every word is called its STEM*

as every inflection presupposes it, and branches from it.

The Root of a word is its yet simpler element in the same or another
language. With this, practical grammar has comparatively little to do ;

but to know the stem is of the utmost importance in the analysis of any
word. Throughout the Etymology the stem wiU be marked by thick
letters, with a hyphen indicating the (general) incompleteness of the

stem until some letter or syllable be added by way of inflection.

The last letter of a stem is called the stem-ending. If the letter is a
vowel, the stem is caUed " vowel," or pure. So a stem ending with a
liquid is called a liquid stem ; ending with a mute, a mute stem. Liquid
and mute stems are sometimes called impure.
§ 12.] ETYMOLOGY —THE NOUN. l6

Chapter II. THE NOUISr, or SUBSTANTIVE.

11. Nouns have three genders, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter ;

also three numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural. The dual number
denotes two, or a pair of anything ; but as it is not found in the
Greek Testament, it will not be noticed in the forms of declension
given.

There are five cases : the Nominative^ or case of the Subject ; the
Genitive, or Possessive ; the Dative, or Conjunctive ; the Accusative,
or Objective ; the Vocative, employed in direct address.

Strictly speaking, the Nominative and Vocative are not cases: the
word implying dependence. Of the three true cases, often called
ohliqiLS,^ the Genitive originally signifies motion frorriy then, more
generally, separation ; the Dative, rest in, hence conjunction with ; the
Accusative, motion towards, hence denoting simply the object of the
transitive verb. This general description of the three cases, for the
further illustration of which see Syntax, Avill explain most of their uses.

In the paradigms of Nouns Substantive, a convenient English rendering of the

Genitive is by the preposition of, and of the Dative by to. It must, however,
be remembered that these words are used for the sake of distinction merely,
and not as intimating that such are the most correct or usual renderings.

12. Before proceeding to the inflection of Nouns, it will be con-

venient to give the Definite Article in its numbers, genders, and
cases. This must be thoroughly committed to memory.

There no indefinite article in Greek, the nearest equivalent being the

is

indefinite pronoun tl<s, any.^ This is also subjoined, chiefly for the
reason that the two words together furnish a model, nearly complete, of
the declension of all suBSTANTrvES and adjectives.

* Ohliquey or slanting, from the habit among old grammarians of expressing the

forms of the noun by a diagram, the nominative being an upright stem, from which
the cases branched at different angles.
* Or the numeral els, one.
16 FORMS OF THE NOUN. [§12.

Definite Article, the. Stem, m. n. TO-•y fern, ra-

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. ^r. F. N.
N. 6
^ t6 01 ai Td
G. TOV TOV
Tf)S TWV Toiv TWV
D. T<S TW TOts Tats TOIS
A. TOV nrjv T^ TOVS Tcls TCI

Accentuation. —The nominative, masculine and feminine, singular and plural,

is proclitic; the genitive and dative of both numbers a.ve perispomena ; the rest
oxytone.

13. Indefinite Pronoun ; an^, a certain, a. Stem, tlv^

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. and F. N. M. and F. N.
N. TIS Tl TIV€S Ttva
G. TIVOS TIVOS TtVWV TlVCtfV

D. TlVl TlVl TlO-t TlO-l

A. Ttva Tt Tivas Tiva

Accentuation. —The word is generally enclitic, as here given ; the accent being
regarded as transferred to the previous word (§ 6, d). When accented, the
forms are oxytone, except the genitive plural, which is perispomenAm. Thus,
TLvbs, rial, rivQv.

14. A
comparison of the two forms now given will show four
particulars, applicable to all nouns, adjectives, and pronouns and, ;

therefore, at the outset, important to remember.

Neuters have but one form in each number for the nominative
a.

and accusative. Perhaps this might have arisen from things without
life being regarded as objects only. Neuters plural, ULmiinative and
accusative, always end in a (short), except when contracted, as reixy} for
T€txca (Heb. xi. 30).

h. The dative singular always ends in i ; though, where the letter

preceding is a long vowel, the iota is subscript (§ 3, b).

c. The genitive plural always ends in «v.

d. Masculine and neuter forms are always alike in the genitive

and dative.
 —

§ 16.] GENDER AND DECLENSION. 17

Gender of Substantives. General Kules.

15. Many names of inanimate objects are of the masculine or feminine

•gender. This no doubt, arose from the habit of personification,
fact,

common in early ages. The English, indeed, is the only great language
in which masculine and feminine, with almost undeviating strictness,
denote male and female. The French idiom, in the opposite extreme,
entirely rejects the neuter.

Considerable difficulty, therefore, is felt by beginners in determining

the gender of many nouns. In some cases, it will be necessary to
consult the Lexicon ; in others, the termination of the word will be a
guide, as is shown under the several declensions.

The following rules, however, are of general application :

a. The names of males are Masculine ;^ so of rivers and -winds, which

were regarded by the early Greeks as gods.

h. The names of females are Feminine;^ so also of trees, countries,

islands, most tovms, and abstract terms.

c. Diminutives in -ov are Neuter, even though the names of persons.

To the class of neuters also belongs the verbal substantive, or infinitive
verb, with indeclinable nouns generally.

Declension of Nouns Substantive.

16. There are three leading types of inflection, under one or other
of which all declinable nouns may be classified. These are called the
Three Declensions, and, as has been stated, the model of each may be
traced in the Article and the Indefinite Pronoun.
The First Declension corresponds with the feminine of the article, rj.
The Second Declefnsion corresponds with the masculine or neuter of the
article, 6, xq. The Third Declension corresponds with the form of the
indefinite pronoun, rts, rt.

A model of each declension is here given.

* The generic names of animals are sometimes common, i.e. of either masc. or
fem. gender, according to circumstances (so also irah, child) ; more frequently
rpicoene, i.e. of one gender, used indilferently for both sexes. Thus, in Greek, 'H'olJ
is always masc, /ac always fem., even in Luke xiii. 32.
18 LEADING FORMS OF THE DECLElfSIONS. [§16.

First Declension.
TTvXr}, a gate. Stem, TTvXa-
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
K. TrvXt], a gate (suhj.) irvXac, gates (s^^^/)
G. 7rv\r]<;, of a gate TTvXwVy of gates
D. irvXrjy to a gate 7ryXat9, to gates
A. 7rvX7]v, a gate (ohj.) TTvXa^, gates (o&y.)
V. TTvXrj, gate ! irvXac, gates 1

Second Declension.

dvOp(07ro<;, a man. Stem, avOpcoiro-

SINGULAR.
N. dvOpcoTTo^;, man (suhJ.)
a dvOpcoTToc, men (stihj.)
G. dvOpcoTTov, of aman dvOpcoTTcov, of men
D. dvdpcoTTM, to a man dv6pQ)7roc<;, to men
A. dvOpcoTTov, a man (o&y.) dvOpcoTTovf;, men (o6/*.)
V. dvdpcoTre, man ! dv6 pwiroi, men !

Accentuation. —The reason why the place of the accent varies in the genitive
and dative is explained, § 6, c.

Third Declension.
7rat9, a c7w/c?, &oy, servant. Stem, TratS-
( Accent of this word irregular.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. rrah, a child {subj.) TratSe?, children {subj.)
G. TracBo^;, of a child iralBcov, of children
D. TratBl, to a child iralo-L, to children
A. TratSa, a child (06;*.) iralBa^, children (06/'.)

V. Trat, child ! TralSe^, childi'en !

These three paradigms having been committed to memory, the several

and variations,
declensions, with their rules of formation, their analogies
may now be more p'articularly discussed.
A certain likeness will, on examination, be detected between the First
and Second especially in the plural number.
f The plural termmations
may be set side by side, thus :
 .

jj 18.] THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 19

N. and V. First Declension, -ai Second Declension, -oi

G. »> -<av » -<DV

D. » -ats j> -ois

A. )> -as » -ovs

In the former, the predominant vowel is evidently a ; in the latter,

o. So in the singular, the first declension in the dative has r\ (for a
lengthened, § 3, e) ; the second, w (for o lengthened). In the accusative,
the first has av, or tjv ; the second, ov.

The two may accordingly be discriminated as the A declension and

the O declension ; a distinction which the further examination of their
structure makes yet more plain.
Both, again, are distinguished from the third by admitting the termin-
ation which marks the case into the last syllable of the word ; while
the latter adds the termination as a distinct syllable.
The First and Second Declensions are, on account of this last pecu-
liarity, called the Inseparahle^ or Parisyllahic ; the Third, the Separable,
or Imparlsyllahic declension.
All three admit, however, of many variations, as will now be shown in
detail.

17. FIRST (INSEPARABLE), OR A-DECLENSIOK

This declension includes both masculine and feminine nouns.
The stem invariably ends in a. As the feminine has already been
given as containing the typical form, that may be placed first.

18. Feminine Paradigms. First Declension.

rj/juepa, day. So^a, opinion..

Stem, ijjjiepa- Stem, So Ro-

SIXG ULA R. PL URA L sing ifLA R. PLURAL.
N. t)/JL€pa Tj/jiepai, So^a Bo^at
G. rjfiepaf; rjfjuepMV

D. y)P'€pa ^/jL€paL<i

A. r)/jLepav rjiiepas 86^av B6^a<s

y. r}fjL€pa 7)fi€pai j
Bo^a Bo^ai
20 THE FIRST DECLENSION. [§18

TLfir), honour. <TKldy shadow.

Stem, TLfxa- Stem, (TKLa-
SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. TLfJuri TC/jLai aKLO. (TKiai
G. TLfXTj^ TtfJLCOV (TKid^; (TKtCJV
D. Tl/JL'p TLfJLat<; CFKLCi
I
(TKtal^
A. Ti/jLl]V TlfJbd<; (TKLCiV (TKtd's

V. Tifji-q Tifiai (TKid OKial

REMARKS.
a. The stem-ending a becomes and accusative
tj in the nominative
singular whenever pi^eceded hy a consonant ; except by the Hquid p, the
double consonants, or <r, sometimes v preceded by a diphthong or long
vowel. In these cases, the a remains, long after p, short in the other
cases. Preceded by a vowel, the a remains, generally long. Thus we
have the nominatives ei/roArJ, o-vi/aywyT/, xl/v^ri ; but Ovpa, S6^a, yXCxraa,
/?ao"tAtcrcrtt, Xeati/a, cTKid, fSaaiXetd, dXyjOeia.
b. In the genitive and dative singular, the stem-ending a, when not pre-
ceded by a vowel or p, becomes t]. After a vowel or p, it remams. Thus,
N. ho^a ; G. S6^r]<; ; D. S6$rj ; but rj/Jicpa, r;/x€pa9, rjfxepa, and (TKia, (TKias, o-klo..

c. The plural terminations in all forms of this declension are exactly

alike, the a in -as of the accusative being long (contracted for -av<s).

d. Accentuation.
—"Whatever syllable is accented in the nominative retains
the accent throughout, so long as the laws in § 6, c, permit. The only apparent
exception is in the genitive plural, Avhich in this declension is always pcrispo-
menon. This, however, is accounted for by its being a contraction of -dcDV.
Oxytone words become perispomenon in the genitive and dative of both numbers.
For purposes of accentuation, the termination ai in the plural nominative i'^

considered short.

19. Masculine Paeadigms. Pir&t Declension.

fiadrjTijf;, disciple. v€avia<i , a youth.
Stem, /laOrjra- Stem, veavLa-
SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. fiaOrjrr]^ fiaOrfral veavia^ veaviac
G uaOrjTov fiaOrjTMV veavlov veaviMv
1). fiaOyrfj fiaOijTai^ veavia veaviai^
A. fiaOr}T})V fjLadyjTa^ veavlav veavia'^
V. fiaOyT(t fxaOi]TaL veavia veavia i
§ 20, a.] THE FIRST DECLENSION. 21

REMARKS.
a. All masculine nouns of the first declension form the nominative
from the stem by adding s, lengthening a into r\ after all consonants
except the liquid p, and retaining a after vowels and p. The vowel of
the nominative is retained in the dat. and ace. sing.
b. The genitive singular of all masculine nouns of this declension ends

in ov, originally ao. The vocative gives the simple stem. Other cases
conform entirely to the feminine type.
e. Accentuation. —The remarks under the feminine paradigms are applicable to
masculine also.

Exercise 3.— Nouns of the First Declension, for Practice.

(Selected from the *'
Sermon on the Mouut.")

1. Masculine.
KpLTrj^, judge Te\dovr)<;, tax-gatherer, " pub-
"
o^etXerrj^;, debtor lican
irpo(\}rjTr]<;, prophet V7rr)peTr]S, attendant, servant

2. Feminine.
PaaCkela, kingdom head
K€(f)aX7j,
htKaioavvrj, righteousness Xv^via, lampstand
evToXrjy commandment oLKia, house
i^tiiTjy life werpa, rock
6vpa, gate ylrv-^rj, soul, natural life

The learner should commit these words to memory, with their meanings, and
should then write them down in different numbers and cases, with and without the
correspondmg articles, until all the forms are mastered. So with the other Exercises.

Irregular Forms of the First Declension.

20. Masculine proper names in a? of this declension form the
a.
genitive in a, excepting when 2'>'>'GC£ded by a voice!. Thus, 'Iwva?, Jonahs
gen. 'Iwva; Ki](f)a<s, Ce2)ha.S, gen. Kr}(l>a ; Bap^a^as, gen. Bapvd/Sa ; 'Iov8a<s,
Judah The accent of the genitive corresponds
or Judas, gen. 'Iov8a.
with that of the nominative. But 'AvSpea?, Andrew, makes 'AvSpcov;
'Ho-aia?, Isaiah, 'Horaiov. These names are from the Hebrew, with tho
exception of 'Ai/Spcas.
22 THE SECOND DECLENSION. [§ 20 h.

b. In Acts V. 1, we find SaTr^etp?/, dative of the proper name

Sappliira ; and in Acts x. 1, <T7reLprj<s is used as the genitive of o-Trctpa,

cohort — in both instances contrary to the rule in § 19, a. Similar varia-

tions from the regular form are found in good MSS. in the case of other
substantives.

21. SECOND (INSEPARABLE), OR O-DECLENSIOK

This declension contains masculine, feminine, and neuter nouns.
The stem invariably ends in o, to which -s is added to form
masculine and feminine nominatives, and -v to form the neuter.

22. Masculine and Feminine Paradigms. Second

Declension.

X670?, word, masc. 6S69, luay, fem.

Stem, Xoyo- Stem, 080-

SIXtJULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. Xo'yo9 \oyoL 6B6(; 68oL
G. Xoyov Xoycov oSov oocov
D. Xoyoy \oyoL<; 000) 6BoL<;
c

A. Xoyov Xoyov^ 686v 6Bov<;

V. Xoye XoyoL oSe oBol

IIEMARKS.
a. As before noticed, this paradigm corresponds with that of the
first declension, o- being substituted for a-. The differences are, that
in the nominative singular the stem-vowel is not lengthened, and that
the vocative singular changes this vowel into €. In the accusative
plural, the termination -ovs is for -ovs (§ 4, c?, 5), as in the first declen-
sion -ds is for -avs; in each case, s being added to tlie accusative
singular,

b. Accentuation. —The remarks on the first declension are mostly applicable.

The syllable accented in the nomhiative retains the accent throughout, wherevei
possible ; oxytones becoming perispomena in the genitive and dative of both
numbers. The genitive plural of other nouns is not,, as in the first declension,
perispomeiion. In the nominative plural, the termination 01 is tieated with
reference to the accent as a short syllable.
8 24.] SECOND DECLENSION —CONTRACTED NOUNS. 23

23. Neuter Paradigm. Second Declension.

avKov, fig-tree. Stem, ctvko-

SING ULAR. PL URA L.
N. avKov avKa
G. avKov (TVK(OV
D. (TVK(p avKot^i
A. avKov avKa
V. crvKov crvKa

REMARKS.
The only difiference between this paradigm and that of the mas-
culine and feminine is that already stated, § 14, a. The accusative
of all neuters is the same form with the nominative and vocative ; and
in the plural these cases end in o.

Accentuation. — For the accontnal changes in the declension of avKov,

see § 6, c.

24. Paradigm of Contracted Nouns. Second Declension.

Nouns of this declension whose stem-vowel o- is preceded by e or

o, generally suffer contraction, according to the scheme in § 3, /.
Thus, voog, mind, becomes vov?; oariov, hone, octtovv. The contracted
forms of these words are not invariably employed in the Septuagint or
New Testament. On i/oi)?, see Variable Nouns, § 32, a.
head may also be referred some nouns in
To this -w?, like the proper
names, 'AiroAAw?, Kw?.

v6o<ii mind, m. Stem, voo- oareov, hone, n. Stem, bcrreo-

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SIXGULAR. PLURAL.
N. iyoos:) vov<; (vooi) vol (oareov) ocrrovv (oarea) oard
G. (yoov) vov (vocov) VOiV {pareov) oarov (oarecov) 6arQ>i>
D. {yo(p) v(p {v6oL<;) voL<; (ocTTew) oaro) (oareotf;) 6aroL<s
A. iyoov) vovv (v6ov<;) vov<; {oareov) oarovv (oarea) oarci
V. (voe) vov (vooi) vol (oareov) oarovv (oarea) oard
24 SECOND AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. K2 '^i

'AttoXXco?, Apollos.

N. 'ATToWft)?
G. 'AttoWo)
D. 'AttoXXcG
A. 'AttoXXwi/, or 'AttoXXco (irreg.)
V. 'AttoWo)

25. The word 'l7;o-ou9, Jesus, is thus declined :

N. 'l7;crou9 A. ^1t](70vv

G. ^Irja-ov V. 'I7;(70i/

D. *l7;cro0

Exercise 4.— Nouns of the Second Declension, for Practice.

(Selected from the "Sermon on the Mount.")

1. Masculine.
aSeXi^o?, brother XvKo<;, wolf
e^Opo^:, enemy vojxof;, law
avOpcdiro^, man 6(j)6a\fji6<;, eye
7]\lo<;, sun TTOTa/jiofiy river

2. Feminine.
afifiofi, sand 8oa:o9, beam
3. Neuter.
Saypov, gift Kpivov, lily
epjov, work irpoparov, sheep
/jueTpov, measure TeKPOv, child

26. THIED (OE SEPAEABLE) DECLENSION.

Nouns in this declension are masculine, feminine, or neuter.
Tlie stem may end in any consonant (except fi, and the double
consonants f, f, yfr), and in the vowels and i v. These varieties
necessitate the giving of several paradigms, although all are
reducible to a simple form, already illustrated in the indefinite
pronoun ns, and shown in the two nouns declined below.
 —

§28.] THE THIKD DECLENSION. 25

The one essential thing, in this declension especially, is to know

the stem, which may end in a consonant {impure, mute or liquid),
or in a vowel {picre). From this the nominative, as well as every
other case, is derived ; but the stem-ending is better seen in the
genitive, which, in Vocabularies and Lexicons, is therefore given
with the nominative.
The termination of the genitive singular in this declension is
always os. Take this away, and the remaining part of the word
is the stem.

27. General Paradigm of the Third Declension.

M. or F. N.

al(ov, age, duration, masc. prj/iia, vjord.

Stem, alcoj^- Stem, prifiOLT-

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. aldiv alo3ve<; pijfjia pij/xara
G. alcjvof; alcovoyp pr^fiaro'^ prjfiarcdv
D. aloyvi aloiaiiy) prjixan pi]fJLa(Tl(v)

A. aloiva alSyva^ prjfia pi'jfiara

V. alcov al(t)i/e<; prjfia prjfjbara

AccoUuation. —The accented syllable of the nominative, as in other nouns,

retains the accent tliroughout, wherever possible. For a special rule respecting
monosyllables, see § 29. In the above paradigm, aiuy in the nominative is
written for alwv.

Terminations of the Thied Declension.

28. These paradigms are essentially alike lq termination, setting

aside the invariable differences between neuter and other forms (§ 14, a).

We thus find that the termiuations of the third declension are, in the
SINGULAR

Genitive, os, appended to the stem.

Dative, i, also appended to the stem.

26 THE THIRD DECLENSION. [55 28.

Accusative, o. This, however, a suhstitute for v, which we

is really
find in the first and second declensions, and which in pure stems often
appears in the third also.

Vocative^ the stem, subject to necessary modifications (§ 4, d, 8), or like

the nominative.
In the PLURAL
Nominative, €s,appended to the stem.
Genitive, wv, appended to the stem.
Dative, <rt, added to the stem, with necessary modifications (§ 4, d, 1, 5).

On the vv i(f>€\KvarTLK6v, see § 3, /i, 1.

Accusative, os, the a short, or s added to the accusative singular. Com-

pare the First and Second Declensions, § 35, a.

Vocative, like the nominative.

Table of Terminations.
SING ULAR. PL URA L.
N. s, or none es, a

6. OS uv

D. I ct

A. a, V as, a
V. as Nom. «s, a

29. ' Paradigms of Third Declension (see § 30).

I. The letter s affixed to the stem.

a. Consonant Stems {mute), labial and guttural.

"Kpa^^, Arabian, masc. Krjpv^, herald, masc.

Stem, A/)a/3- Stem, KypVK-

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. "Apa'\lr "Apa^€<i KTjpV^ K7]pVK€<;
G. "Apa^o<; ^Apd^cov Kr)pVKO<; KTjpVKCOP
D. "Apa/Sc "Apayjri{v) K7]pVKL K7]pv^l{u)
A. "Apaffa "Apa^a<; KTjpvKa KrjpvKa^^
V. "Apayfr "Apa^6<; Kr)pV^ K^pVK€<i
§29.] THIRD DECLENSION —PARADIGMS. 27

For example of a dental stem Paradigm of

(neuter), see Introductory

the Declensions, § 16. The feminine noun x^P^? (xapir-), favour, makes
ace. '^^€^'^) ^*<^j iQTD.. (kXciS-) has ace. sing. xActSa ace. plur. by
x^P^^ '>
;

syncope and contraction, kAcis (Rev. i. 18) ; but also xActSas (Matt,
xvi. 19).

h. Vowel Stems.

i'^Ov^yfish, masc. iro\t<;, city, fern.

Stem, l^Ov- Stem, ttoXl-

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SING ULAB. PL WRA L.
N.

G. IxOvcov TToXecO? (Attic gen.) TToXeWI/

D. I'^Ovo'L (v) (TToXet) TToXei 7r6\ecrL(v)

A. TToXiv (TToXea?) TroXet?

V. TToXt (TToXee?) TroXef?

REMARKS.
Stems in -t, and some in -v, change to -c before the case-endings (§ 37,

note).

One neuter noun, a-lva-m, mustard (singular only), is declined like

TToAts, excepting that the accusative is, of course, like the nom.

Accentuation. —For
accentual purposes, the genitive termination, -eojs or
'€0}v in these nouns, is considered as one syllable, and does not, therefore,

require the acute accent to be thrown forward.

11. The vowel of the last syllable stem lengthened.

TTOLfirjv, shepherd, masc. Xecov, lion, masc.

Stem, TTOifiep- Stem, XeovT-

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR PLURAL,
N. iroLfirjv iroifieve'i Xecov XiovT€<;
G. irot/iievo^ nroijjLevoiv \60VT0<; XeovTcov
D. iroL/xevi 7roi/jL6at{v) \eOVTL Xeovai{y)
A. TTOifieva TTOLfievaf; XeovTa Xeovra^
V. TTOlfjUT^V 7roLfieve<; Xecov Xeovre'i
28 THIRD DECLENSION —PARADIGMS. [§29

atSa>9, modesty, fern. Stem, alSo^^

SINGULAR ONLY.
N. al8(o^
G. (alS6(a)o<;) atBov<;
D. (atSo(cr)t) alSol
A. (aLS6{(r)a) alScj

Syncopated Nouns of this Form.

irarrjp, father. avTjp, man.

Stem, irarep- Stem, avep-

STNGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR, PLURAL.
N. irarrjp 7raTep6<; dvrjp dvSpe^
G. irarpos irarepwv dvSpof; dvBpcbv
D. irarpC 'irctTpdo-i(j') dvhpi dvhpdcniv)
A. TTarepa irarepaf; avhpa dvSpa<i
V. Trdrep dvep dvhpe^

REMARKS.
The syncopation takes place in the g. and d. sing, and d. phir.
To this class belong uyrrjp, mother ; Ovydrrfp, daughter ; yaa-Tiqp, belly.

Lar-qp, star, has a.a-rpa(TL{v) in the dative plural, but is not syncopated
in any other case.

Accentuation. —These
words are paroxytone in the cases that retain e, and
througliout the plural (excepting avrip, which is irregular). The syncopated
cases of the singular are oxytone, and the vocative throws back its accent as far
as possible.

III. Nouns in -avs, -cvs, -ovs, with original digamma.

fiaaiXeix;, king, masc. Stem, ^aatXeF^

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. ^aaikev^i (^aaL\e€<;) ^aa-LXeh
G. ffaaiX€0)<; ^aaiXecov
D. {^acnXii) ^aaCkel Pa(TLkevaL{v)
A. ^aatXea fiaacXea^, ^aaikel<;
V. iSaaCKev {^aaiXees:) ^aatXel^
§29.] THE THIRD DECLENSION. 29

fiov<i, ox, masc. Stem, jBoF-

SINGdLAR. PLURAL.
N. /3ot'9

G. l3o6^
D. l3oi ^OV(Tl{v)
A. ^ovv
V. /8oi} /3oe9

REMAEKS.
Noims in -€vs form the accusative singular in -ea (the a long) ; those
ill -avs and -ovs take v.

Accentuation. — Nouns in -eus are all oxytone in the noniiaative singular, and
perispomenon in the vocative.

rv. Neuter nouns in -os, from the stem-ending -€s.

761/09, race. Stem, yeves-

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. 761^09 {'yeve{cr)a) yevrj

G. (7ei/e(cr)o9) yevov^; fyevecDv and yevcov

D. {j€V€(a)c) <yevei yeveai{v)
A. yevo<; ('yive{a)a) yevii
V. 761/09 {yeve{cr)a) yevrj

V. The simple stem as nominative. See alwv and prjiJ.a, already

given, § 27.

Exercise 5.— Nouns of the Third Declension, for Practice.

(Selected from the " Sermon on the Mount.")
*^* The learner should assign each noun to its proper class.

Masculine.
ypa/jLfiaT€V(;, -6&)9, scribe |
oSoi;9, o3oi'to9, tooth
'X^iTcovy -0)1/09, vest, inner gar- <

6(f)i^, 6(f)€0)^, snake

ment
Feminine.
Bvva/jLt<;, -60)9, power KpicTi^, -60^9, judgment
6pi^, Tpij^o^^, hair ^6/p, ^€ip6<;, hand, daL plur,
Xepo-L
30 VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION. L§ 29.

Neuter.
eOvo^, -ou?, nation opo9, -0V9, mountain
OeXrj/jia, -aro^, will TTvp, TTvpo'i, fire
ovojjLa, -aTo<;, name (^w9, (fxDTOf;, light

30. A careful inspection of the paradigms of § 29 yields the following

rules of the third declension.
First Rule. —
The most usual termination of the nominative singular
is s added to the stem in accordance with the orthographic law, § 4, c.
—
Thus (1) A labial stem makes the nominative in ^,

Examples.
"Apaif/, Arabian, from dpap., gen. dpajSo^;
AWloiJ/, Ethiopian, „ alGioir-, gen. aW lottos

(2) A guttural stem makes the nominative in {.

Examples.
(f)\6^, flame, from <}>\o7., gen. cfiXoyos
Krjpv^, lierald, KT]pVK-, gen. KrjpVKO^
vv^, night, VVKT-, gen. VVKTOS
6pi$, hair. gen. rptxos
epiX-, (§ 4, d, 7)

(3) A dental stem drops the stem-termination before s.

Examples.
Trats, child, from 7rai8-, gen. TratSos
opvLs, bird, „ 6pvi9-, gen. 6pvL0o<i
Xapt9, favour, „ XapiT-, gen. XOipLTO<^

68ov9, tooth, „ 680VT-, gen. oSoVtos (§ 4, rf, 6)

Vmvel stems add s simply.

Examples.
TToAts, city, frem iroXi-, gen. 7roAc(o9, for TroXto?
ixOv^, fi-^h, „ IxGv., gen. tx^vo9

Second Rule. — Stems ending in v and vt {gene rally), in p {almost

always), and in s {invariably, except in neuters), form the nominative by
lengthening the vowel preceding the termination.
§ 30.] VAEIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION. 31

Examples.
TTOLfirjv, shepherd^ from iroi|ji€v-, g^n. 7roLfxevo<s

XcW, Uon^ „ XcovT-, gen. Xcovros

pTfTiop, orator, „ pTjTop-, gen. pr/ropo^
al8(i)s, modesty, „ alSos-, (gen. atSoVo?)

The genitive of this last word is contracted by dropping the s between

two short vowels, and combining them ; aiSoos, aiSovs- (See § 3, /, Table
and Note.)
Certain nouns with the stem-ending p preceded by c are syncopated,
i.e. omit this vowel in some of theu* ca9«s. One, avTJp, man, av€p-, in

omitting e, inserts the letter 8 between v and p. (See § 5, 5.) The dative
plural of these nouns also adds a after p. (See the Paradigms.)
Third Ride. — Steins in while adding s in the nominative
ev, av, ov,

singular, according to the first rule, drop the v in the genitive singular
and other cases, thus forming an apparent exception to the rule that the
genitive gives the stem by taking away the termination os. The irre-
gularity only apparent, as the v of the stem
is is in reality the old
consonant v (written in Greek F, and called, from its shape, digamma),
which originally belonged to the genitive, like the other consonant
stem-endings. Thus, /3ovs, ox, po/-, gen. /So/'o<s, now written /3o6<;. Some
of the cases of these nouns are also contracted, as the paradigm will
show. Stems in ev take a special form of the genitive singular, called
the " Attic Genitive," ending in €«s.

Fourth Rule. —Neuter stems in €s change this termination in the

nominative into -os ; in other cases they drop the s of the stem, and
suffer contraction by § 3, /.
—
Example. 6po<;, mountain, opes-, gen. (6p€(To<;, opeos) 6pov<;, nominative
and accusative plural (opecra, opea) oprj. (See Paradigm.)
Fifth Rule. —
Other neuter nouns, together with those masculines and
feminines which have liquid stems preceded by a long vowel, retain the
stem in the nominative unchanged, save by the general orthographic
law. Thus, aiu)Vy prjfia, already given. The latter becomes prjp-a from
pi)|iaT., according to § 4, d, 8.

Accentuation. —
Monosyllabic neuters are oxytone in all their dissyllabic forms,
except the genitive plural, which is perispomenon. Masculine and feminine
monosyllables accent the penultimate in the accusative singular and nominative
and accusative plural ; in other cases follow the rule of neuters.
32 irregulak and variable nouns. [§ 31.

Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension.

31. These are irregular chiefly in the nominative. Thus, yvvrj,

woman, takes gen. yvvatKo?, and forms all its cases from the stem Y^vaiK-
the vocative being ywat by § 4, d, 8.
yoVv, knee, is declined regularly as from the stem yovar- (neuter), gen.
yoVaros, nom. plur. yoVara, etc.
Kvtov, dog (masculine, also feminine in singular), is declined as from
KVV-, gen. Kvv6<;, etc. ; but voc. sing, kvov, dat. plur. kv(tl{v).

lxdpTv<s, witness (masculine), is from the stem (laprvp-, which it follows

throughout, except in dat. plur. fxdpTV(TL{v).
vSojp, water, is declined regularly as from the neuter stem vSar-, gen.
vSaros, nom. plur. vSara, etc.

Some neuter stems in -ar- form the nominative by changing the t into s,

instead of dropping it. Thus, Kcpar-, liorn, nom. sing. Kepa?, nom. plur.

Kepara, gen. Kepdroiv; Kpcar, Jlesh, nom. sing. Kpeas, nom. plur. Kpca, by
syncope from Kpiara ; Tcpar-, prodigy, nom. sing, repas, nom. plur.
Tc/aara, dat. Tepacniv).
The accusative plural form, a.pva<s, lambs, is once found (Luke x. 3),
and may be referred to the stem iipcv-, nom. sing, ap-qv, the e dropped in
inflection by syncope.
In one passage, the name of the Greek deity Zeus is found (nom. Zcvs)
gen. Atos, ace. Ata (Acts xiv. 12, 13).

Nouns of Variable Declension in the New Testament.

32. «• A few substantives in

found with forms both of the
-os are

second declension and of the third (neuter stem -€s like ycvos). Thus,
ttXovtos, wealth, is properly masculine of the second, but is found in good
MSS. neuter of the third, vovs, mind (see § 24), second declension,
occasionally takes a genitive and dative as of the third declension ; vock,

voi (Eom. vii. 25 ; 1 Cor. i. 10, xiv. 15). So, ttXoos (Acts xxvii. 9) for
ttXov.

h. The word (idppaTov, sahhath, is a r(\L^\ilar noun, second declension,

neuter, except in the dative plural, which in the New Testament is

ad(3fta(n (as if from crappar-, o-dp/Sa). But the Septuagijit has also

a-aftft(i.T(u<; (1 Chron. xxiii. 31).

 —

?, 32.1 NOUNS OF VARIABLE DECLENSION. 33

c. In proper names much irregularity exists. Mwo-^s (or Mcovo^s),

MoseSy is thus declined :

G. Mwo-€0J9
D. MoKrci, or Mtocr^
A. MoKTca, or MtuoSJv
V. Ma>o^ (LXX.)

The name of Jerusalem is found in a threefold form : (1) 'Icpovo-oArJ/x,

inddcUnabley a transcript of the Hebrew word ; (2) 'Icpoo-oXv/xa, neuter
plural, second declension ; (3) 'lepoa-oXvfia, feminine singular (Matt. ii. 3,

only). Many proper names analogous in form to nominatives of the

different declensions are indeclinable. So, Kava, BrjOaaLBd, B-qOf^ayq^
roAyo^a, *Pa/i,a, 'Aaptuv, ^v/xctov, KcSpoiv, 'Icpix^ti' To this class may be
referred the indeclinable neuters, Trao-xa, passover ; a-Uepa^ strong drink
(Luke i. 15). The last two are, in fact, but adaptations of Hebrew
words, tarra, jot (Matt. v. 18), aA,<^a and S> /xcya (Rev. i. 8), thenames
of Greek letters, are also treated as neuter nouns without inflection.

Exercise 6.— Promiscuous List of Nouns, for Practice.

*,* The genitive case is given, to show the declension and the stem. Learners
should, wherever possible, infer the gender from the form.

aero 9, ov, m. eagle Ouydrrjp, Tp6<;, daiighter

alfia, aTo<;, blood KaKLa, a9, vice
dvOo<;, ov<;, flower KiOdpa, a9, harp
dpvLov, ov, lamh fidarc^, Lyo<;, f. scourge
^ovXtj, ^9, counsel fjLepof;, ov<;, part
yovev^, 609, parent 6(f)i<;, €0)9, m. serpent
BaKpv, V09, tear 7roXtT7;9, ov, citizen
BevSpov, ovy tree TTovo^, ov, m. lahour
StSa<r/ca\o9, ov, teacher TTpay/jLa, aro<;, thing
€\7rl<i, tSo9, f. hope o-dXTTcy^, i/yyo<;, trumpet
eoprrjy r}<;, festival (TTOfia, aro^, mouth
'Hpa>S7;9, oVf Herod wpa, a9, hour
34 ADJECTIVES. [§33.

Chapter III. ADJECTIVES.

33. Adjectives in Greek follow precisely the inflection of substan-
tives. Every declension, almost every form, reappears, but in
different combinations.

In respect of form, adjectives are divided into three classes :

1. Those which combine the first and second declensions.

2. Those which combine the first and third.
3. Those which follow exclusively the type of the third.
In the first two, the form of the first declension is feminine.

34. First Form. Paradigms. (Stems, o- m. a- f. o- n.)

ayaOo-y -a-, good.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
N. dya6o<; wyaOr] dr^aOov diyaOoi dr^aOai dryadd
G. dyadov drfa6rj<!i dyaOov drya6a)v djyaOoiv dyaOcov
D. (hyado) wyaOfj drfa6(p d/yadol'^ dyaOal^i dyaOoi<:
A. dyaOov dyaOrjv dpfaOov dfyadoix; dyadd^; dyadd
v. d/yaOe cuyaOrj dr^aOov dyadoc dyadal dryaOd
All participles in -jjicvos are declined like dya^os.

SlkouO", -a-, just

N. SiKala hUaiov BiKaioi BUaLac BUaia
G. BiKalov BcKaLa<; Blkulov BtKaiwv BiKamv BiKamv
D. BiKaLO) BcKalot^ BiKaiaL<; BiKaioLf;
c

A. BUacov hiKalav BUaiov SLKalov; BcKalaf; BUaia

V. BcKala BUaiov BiKaCOL BUaiaL BUaia

fJLCKpO-, -a-y
' little.

N. jJLlKpO^ fJLCKpd fJblKpOV jJLVKpoL fiiKpal /JLlKpd

G. flLKpOV flLKpd^ fJLLKpOV flCKpCOV flCKpWV /JLlKpcbv

D. flLKpO) fJLLKpa fllKp^ fJLf,KpOL<; fiiKpal<; flLKpoU

A. flLKpOV fMLKpaV flLKpOV fjLiKpOV<; fiLKpd<; fjbtKpd

V. fXLKpe flLKpd jJLlKpOV fJLLKpol fiLKpai flLKpd

§35.] ADJECTIVES —FIRST FORM. 35

REMARKS.
a. The femmine singular of these adjectives, as will be seen in the
above paradigms, is formed in strict analogy with the usage of the first

declension. The rule is, by a

that where the masculine has -os preceded
vowel or p, the feminine ends in d, which vowel is preserved through all

the cases of the singular, os preceded by a consonant becomes t], which

also runs through the singular,

h. Several adjectives belonging to this first form employ the masculine

terminations for the feminine also, conforming thus throughout to the
second declension. This is especially the case with polysyllables and
compound words. But as there is no definite rule to distinguish
these adjectives of two terminations from those of three, it will be
necessary in doubtful cases to consult the Vocabulary or Lexicon.

c. Accentuation. —The rules in § 18 are strictly observed. Note, however,

that the feminine plural is not, like that of the first declension, necessarily
perispomenon, but, like the other cases, follows the stem of the word. Thus,
from Skaios, f. pi. gen. diKuiuv (the accent being thrown one syllable forward
—
by the terminal long syllable § 6, c) but /xiKpds makes /iiKpCiv.
;

Contracted Adjectives of the First Form.

35. Adjectives in eo- and oo- belong to this class. The explanations
given with contracted substantives (§ 24), and the scheme in § 3 /, will
sufficiently show the reason of each contraction.

yjpvaeo-j -a-, golden. By contraction, 'xpvo-ov<; (eo?), -rj (erjj,

-ovv (eov).
SINGULAR, PLURAL.
M. f. N. M. F. N.
N. Xpvo-ov*; Xpv(^V Xpvo'ovv Xpyo-oL Xpvo-al Xpvaa
G. ')(pvaov Xpyo-r}"^ Xpvo'ov Xpvacjv Xpvaojv Xpvacjv
D. ^(pvaS Xpvo-y Xpyo'(p ')(pvcrol<; Xpv(7al^ XpvaoL<:
A. ')(pV(TOVV Xpvo-'fjv Xpyo'ovv Xpvcrov^ Xpvo-a,<; Xpv<rd
V. 'Xpy(yee xpyo-v Xpva-ovv XpvaoX Xpvcral Xpvo'oi
36 ADJECTIVES — SECOND FORM. [§ 35, a.

REMARKS.
a. apyvp€o<s, silver (adjective), occurs in N.T. in two forms : ace. plur.
dpyvpovs, neut. nom. and ace. plur. dpyvpa.

These adjectives occur very infrequently. It will be observed that

b.

the feminine of ^(pvorco? is formed irregularly as -os preceded by a vowel, ;

according to rule, requires -a. The adjective ore/acos, ca, coV, fiimy is

declined without contraction.

c. Accentuation. —The final syllable in these adjectives, when contracted, is

circumflexed throughout. Thus we have not only dTrXous from airXdos, simple
(regular, see § 6, c), but XP^^^^^ from xP^^^^^t ^iid af/yvpous from df/yvpeos,
anomalous.

36. Second Form. General Eemarks.

Masculine. —The formed from the stem, according to
nominative is

the methods of the third declension. Thus, 6|v- gives nom. masc. 6|v?,
sha7'p (§ 29, first rule, 4) iravT- becomes irds, all (§§ 29, first rule, 3 ;
;

4, d, 5) ; and Ikovt- gives ckwi/, willing (§§ 29, second rule ; 4, d, 8).

Feminine. —The nominative always ends in a ; the other cases in the

singular follow the model of the first declension (§ 18, a). The stem-
ending V becomes -cia, as 6^v<;, o^eta ; VT- becomes -<ra, as ttS?, Trao-a, and
e/cwv, kKovcra. But stems in -v- insert an i before that consonant, as
fieXa?, hlach, (icXav, f fxiXacva . ; and or- (originally for) becomes -via. Thus,
AcAvKws (participle), having loosened, XcXvkot-, f. AcAvKvIa.

Neuter, —The neuter nominative contains the simple stem, altered

only by the general euphonic rules ; as, o^, ttSlv, €k6v, /xe'Aav, AcAvkos,

37. Paradigms of the Second Form.

o^V', -eia-, sharp.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
1 c- «
f. /
t
N. o^eta o^et9
if. «
G. o^€La<; 0^609 o^ecov
D. 0^61 o^eia 0^6 L 6^6(rt{v) o^eaiiy)
A. o^euav o^et9 0^€ta9
W o^ela 0^€t9
 —

§38.] ADJECTIVES —SECOND FORM. 37

Note. —The stem-ending v becomes c in the genitive and dative

singular, and throughout the plural el*, dative singular, being contracted
:

into €t; and ccs, ca?, in the plural, into ets. But co?, genitive singular,
and ea in the neuter plural, are uncontracted. A very few substantives
also change v into € the only instance in the New Testament being
;

TTT/x^v (John xxi. 8 ; Rev. xxi. 17) for Trrjx^oiv, from 7rrj)(ySj cubit

TrapT-, -aaa-, all, every.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
•

M. F. N. M. F. N.
N. Tra? iraaa irav iravre^ Trdaat Trdvra
G. iravTO^ 7rda-7j<; Trai/TO? irdvTwv Traawv Trdvreov
D. IT ami Trda-rj iravTi 7rd(rL{v) irdaaL^; 7rdcn(v)
A. Trdvra iracrav irdv '7rdvTa<; Trdaa^ Trdvra
V. Tra? iraaa irav 7rdvT6<; Trdo-ac irdvra
Participles in -as are similarly declined (stem, avr-) as AvVa?,
having loosed. The participial stem-ending €vt- makes, nom. -€is, -et<ra,

-ivj gen. ^vTos, cCotis, 4vtos, etc. ; as ySovXcv^et?, having been counselled.

eKOVT-^ -ovaa-, willing.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.

N. €KCOV eKovaa eKov eKovre^ eKovaai eKovra

G. eK6vro<; €KovaTj<; eKovro^ eKovrwv eKovcrcov i/covrcjv
D. eKovn €Kovay eKovri eKOvcniv)
eK0V(7L{v eKovaai^ €kov(7l(v)
A.. eKovra eKovaav 6K0V eKovra^ eKovaa<; e/covra
V. €K(l)V eKovaa 6k6v eK6vre<i e/covaac eKovra
Participles in -wv, -ovo-a, -ov, are declined on this model.

38. The declension of adjectives like /xeXas, ^iXatva, /xeXav, black,

gen. /xeA.avo9, fj,€\aLvrj<s, /xeXavo?, dat. plur. m. and n. /xeXacrt(v), and of
participles like AcAvkw?, XcXv/cvta, XcXvkos, having loosened, gen. AcAvkotos,
AeAvKvia?, AcAvkotos, will not now present any difficulty. One participle,
k(TT-qK0i<s, having stood, from the verb ta-TrjfML, takes the alternative form,
cVtws, the result of syncope and contraction, and is thus declined :
38 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES3 — SECOND FORM. [§38.

SINGULAR. PLURAL,
M, F. N. M. F. N.
N. e(7T&)9 ecrrcoaa earof; Icrrwre? earcoaac karcoTa
G. k<TTOiTO<^ €(7Tcoa7]<; earcoTO^; eO-TCOTCOV €(TT(Oa(OV ecrrcoTcov
D. e(TT(x)TL earcoarj eo-rcort k(7T(t)(TL{y) eo"Ta>(7at9 €crTa)(ri(v)
A. earcbra earTcoaav eo"T09 ecTTOiTa^ €<Trci)cra<i earcora

The contraction is from lo-raws. (See § 3, /.)

Accentuation. — Oxy tones circumflex tlie feminine. Adjectives of the second

class otherwise follow the ordinary rules. It mil be observed that in the
genitive and dative singular, masculine and neuter, Trds takes oxytone forms,
otherwise accenting the stem-syllable throughout.

39. Two adjectives of common occurrence are irregular in the

singular masculine and neuter, owing to a combination of forms. Their
declension is as follows :

1. jieya- {fxeyaXo-^ fieyaXa-), great

Sing. M. F. N.

N. fieya^ fieyaXrj fieya

G. fjL€<yd\ov fjueyaXr}^ fieyaXov
D. fieydXa) fieydXy fjLeydXo)

A. /jbiyav jjLeydXrjv fieya

Plural regular, as if from fieyaXos.

2. TToXv- (ttoXAo-, TToXXa"), many.

Sing. M. F. N.

N. 7ro\v<; TToWrj TTOXU

G. TTOWOV 7roW^9 iroKKov

D. TToXXft)
t
TToWy iroXk^
A. TTOkvV TToXKrjv TToXv

Plural regular, as if from ttoAAos,

§41.] ADJECTIVES —TRIED FORM. 30

Third Form. General Eemarks.

40. Adjectives of this class being altogether of the third declension,

have no special form for the feminine, and are, therefore, of two termi-
nations or (sometimes) of only one. (Compare tls, § 13.)

For the most part, the declension of these adjectives is without

peculiarity. It should be noted that an adjective in -«v (nominative
singular) may be from one or other of the stem-endings ovt and ov. If
from the latter, it belongs to the third class. Thus, ckcuv, from Ikovt-,

has three terminations ; but crwc^poav, from (rw<|)pov-, only two.

By far the largestand most important class of adjectives in this
division are those in neut. -es, where the stem-ending es is not changed
-qs,

into OS in the nominative and accusative singular, as ia the corresponding

class of substantives (§ 29, iv.), but where similar contractions take

place in the other cases.

41. Paradigms of the Third Form.

aXTjOeS", tni^e.

SINGULAR.
M. and F. N.

N. aKri6r}<; 6X7)6 e^
G. (aXTjdeo^;) a\r]dov<; a\7)6ov<^
D. (a\7]6ei) aXrjdel aX7)6el
A. {6X7)6 ea) okTjdrj a\7)6h
V. aXT]de<: aXT]6i<!

PLURAL.
M. and F. N.

N. (aXT^^ee?) akrjdeh (a\7)6ea) 6X7)61)

G. (aXrjdicov) d\7]6a)V a\7)6a)v
D. aXr)6eai{v) 6\7)6eaL{v)
A. {akrjOeas:) a\r)det<; {aX7)6ia) 6X7)67)
V. (aX7;^e€9) dXT/^et? (^6X7)6ea) 6X7)67)
40 AiDJECTlVfiS —COMPARISON. [§ 41.

acocbpoP'^ sober-minded.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. and F. N. M. and F. N.

N. o'(0(l)p(t)v cr(0(l)pov (T(o<f)pov€<; aa)(f)pova

G. aa)(f)povo<; a(o^povo<; (TQXppovcov acocfypovcov
D. <T(£>(^pOVi a(O(f)p0VL (roi)(f)po(rc (Toi)<f)pO(T(,

A. a(0(f>pova (ra)<f)pov (TCi}(f)pova(; adx^pova

V. (Tc!)(j>pOV (TOJCJ^pOV <T(i}^pove<; a(o(j>pova

To this class belong comparatives in «v. (See § 44.)

COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES.
42 There are two regular methods of forming the Greek
comparative and superlative.
The and most usual is by adding to the stem of the posi-
first

tive the further stem-ending rcpo- for the comparative, xaro- for the
superlative. These forms are then declined exactly like the first
form of adjectives (§ 34).

Thus, from ttio-tos, faithful, stem irwrro-, we have

Comparative, nom. sing. Trto-Torcpos, Tria-roTepa, Tna-Torepov,

Superlative, nom. sing. TrtcTOTaTos, Tna-Torarrj^ Tno'ToraTov*

From oAt/^t}?, true, stem dXriOts-

Comparative, aX-qBi<TT€.po<i, aXrjOecrripa, aXrjOka-Ttpov,

Superlative, oX-qOicTTaTO^i, akrjBicrTaT-q, aX.rj6i(TTaT0V.

Adjectives of the first class which have a short syllable before the
stem-ending o- change this vowel into «.

Thus, (T0(j)6'i, wise, makes

Comparative, a-oc^oinpo'^, crocfxaripa, cro<f)U)T€pov.

Superlative, (To<l>(i)TaTO';, a-oKfxDTaTrj, cro<f}(i)TaTov,

From veos, Tiew, we have, in like manner —

Comparative, vewrcpos, vcwrepa, veionpov.
Superlative, vcwraro?, vcwTarry, v€<i)Tarov.

Accentuation. — Comparatives and superlatives of this form are always proparoxy-

tone, except when the final syllable is long ; then paroxytone. In other words, the
accent is thrown back as far as possible.
§ 44.] ADJECTIVES-—OOMPAEISON. 41

43. The second form of comparison is by adding, generally to an

abbreviatedform of the positive stem, -i«v (stem-ending lov-for the
comparative, and -wrros (stem-ending ktto-) for the superlative.

Examples.
Ttt^s, SJijift^ ra^Lwv,^ Td)(L(TTo<;

aurxpos, disgraceful, alcr^Loiv, olcryLa-To^

KoXos, fair koAAiojv KaAAicrros

/xeya?, great, fi€L^o)v (for /xcytW), /xeyto-ros

Accentuation. — In these, as in other comparative and superlative forms, the accent

if5 thrown back as far as possible.

Paeadigm of Comparatives in -i«v or -«v.

44. These follow the third form of adjectives (see a-uxfjpoiv, § 41),

but are sometimes contracted by the omission of the v before a or c, and

the combination of this vowel with the o of the stem. This contraction
is, however, infrequent in the Kew Testament.

fiet^cou, fxel^op, greater.

SINGULAR.

M. and F. N.
N. fxel^cov fiel^ov
G. fiet^ovof; fiel^ovo^
D. fiei^ovc fiel^ovL
A. fiei^ova or fiel^co fxet^ov
V. /jLel^ov fiel^ov

PLURAL.
M. and F. N.
N. fjL€l^ov€<; or fiei^ov^i fjL€L^ova or fiel^o)
G. fiet^ovcov fl6i^6v(OV
D. fJL€l^O(n(v) fl6L^0(n(v)
A. fi€l^ova<i or fjL€i^ov<; fl6L^0Va or /JL€L^(0

V. fiel^ove^ or fjuei^ov^ fiei^ova or fiel^co

^ See John xx. 4 (jaxeioi'). In classic Greek, daTTuiv is the form generally
used. »
42 ADJECTIVES —COMPARISON. [§ 45.

45. To this form of comparison belong several irregular com-

paratives and superlatives, of which the following list will
suffice :

dya06<s, good, comp. yScXriwv, sup. /SeXTto-ros

„ KpcLcroroiVf „ Kpa.TiaTO'i

KaKO<s, hadf „ KaKLwVy „ KaKLcrros

„ X€Lpoiv, „ x^'P'o^os
jtuKpos, ZzY^/e „ fUKporepos (regular)

„ eXacrcwv, „ cAa^to'TOS

iroXvs, manyy „ ttXcuuv or ttXcwv „ ttXcio'tos

Some adjectives, it will be seen from the above, have an alternative

comparison, having recourse to different roots for the purpose. The
respective forms are now interchangeable, or nearly so. For shades of
difference between them, see Vocabulary and the chapter on Synonyms.

46. The following comparatives and superlatives have no answer-

ing positives :

(From avo), adv. up) dvcircpos, upper ; avwraros, topmost

(From KctTO), adv. down) KaTon^po^, lower ; KaTwraro?, lowest

(From ccrw, adv. within) ia-iorepos, inner ; iawrarosy inmost

(From TTpOy prep, he/ore) Trporcpos, former ; 7rpu)To<Si first

Many of these forms are but seldom used.

Emphasis in Comparison.

47. (<^) An emphatic comparative is made by the adverb fxaWov, more.

So Mark ix. 42, kuXoV Io-tlv avrw /taXXov, "it is far better for him." The
same adverb is sometimes prefixed to a comparative, as in Mark vii. 36,
/AoXXov Trepto-o-oTcpov, "much (Ut. more) the more abundantly." In
Phil. i. 23, yet another adverb of intensity is affixed to /xaXXov with the
comparative, ttoXXw /xoXXov Kpila-a-ov (ht. "by much the more better").
§ 47.] ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON—EXERCISE. 43

Compare " most unkindest cut of all " in Shakspeare (Julius Caesar, iii. 2).

So Psa. ix. 2 (Prayer Book version), " Thou Most Highest."

(b) Another form of securing emphasis is by affixing a comparative

termination to a comparative or superlative form. Thus, from /xet^wv,

greater (iii. John, 4), fX€L^0T€pav ovk e^o) " -^ have no greater (more
x'^P°-^^
greater) joy ;" and from cA-axtorros, least (Eph. iii. 8), tw IKaxLo-roripia

irdvTwv Twi/ dytcjv, well rendered in E. V., " less than the least of all

saints."

Exercise 7.— Additional Adjectives, for Practice.

(Selected from the " Sermon on the Mount.")

First Form.

07^09, holy 7rTft)^o9, poor, pauper

a8t/co9, unjust o-Tei/09, narrow
ap'^alof;, ancient reXeio^y full-grown, perfect
Ka6ap6<;, pure ^avepo^, evident
irovrjpo^, wicked (ppovLfMos, prudent

Second Form.

aTra?, airao-a, airav, all, altogether

fie\a<;, fieXacva, fieXav, black
7rXaTU9, TrXarela, TrXarv, broad

Third Form.

apira^y -ar/o<;, rapacious | iXerjficov, -ovo<;, merciful

In practising with these forms, they should be combined with the nouns of the
previous Exercises. The adjectives should also be put into the different forms of the
comparative and superlative. Almost countless combinations will thus result, by
which the learner, either Avith or without the aid of an instructor, may become
versed in these parts of speech.
44 NUMERALS. [§ 48, a.

NUMERALS.
The Cardinal Numbers.

48. {o) -For the signs of the respective numbers, the letters of the
Alphabet are used, according to the list in § 1. When a letter is

employed numerically, an acute accent is appended. Thus, a\ 1 ;

f^, 2, and so on. To express thousands, an accent is placed beneath

a, 1,000 ; fi, 2,000 ; /, 10,000, etc.

(6) It will be seen that the places of some numbers are vacant, owing
to letters having dropped, in very ancient times, out of the Greek
Alphabet : the Digamma (f ) having come between « and t, ; while the
space between tt and p was occupied by Koppa (9), a guttural with a
hard ^-sound, the original of the Latin and English letter q. As the
alphabet ends with o>', 800, another discarded letter, Sampi C/T)) was
used for Three signs have therefore been added, as follows
900.^
r (the sign of a double consonant, sty used instead of f ), 6 ; ^\ 90
^', 900.

(c) Combinations of tens and units, or of hundreds, tens, and units,

are expressed, not as in our Arabic numeration, by the collocation of
unit-signs, but by addition.; 12; Thus,
pS*, 104; ta', 11 t/S', Ky', 23 ;

1868 ; x^r' (Kev. xiii. 18), 666.

p.(M^r}\ In these expressions, the
numeral accent is only written once, excepting with thousands.

49. The cardinal numbers, eh, one ; hvo, two ; rpeh, three
recrcrape?, four, are declined as follows. The rest are indeclinable
up to two hundred, which, with the other hundreds, follows the
plural of the first form of adjectives in -oi, -ai, -a.

eZ?, ^la, €v (stems kv-j t^OL-\ one.

M. F. N. M. F. N.
f 1

N. eh fila €V D. evi, fxia

f t A f / tt 1 tf

G. €1^09 /jLca<; €1/09 A. eva yuiav €V

^ Hebrew students will recollect that these are the places of Vav, QopJi, and
Skill respectively.
§51.] NUMERALS. 45

Like tU are declined its compounds, ovSci?, no one (absolutely), and

fir}8€L<s, no one (hypothetically). The accentuation of all three is irregular,
as seen above.

Bvo, two,
N. G.^ and A. Svo |
D. BvaL{v)

T/3et9, Tpla, three.

M. and F. N. M. and F. N.
N. TpeU Tpia D. rpiaiiy) TpLcri{v)
G. TplCOV rpicov A. Tp€i><; Tpia

T6(T(7ap

M. and F. N. M. and F. N.

N. Tea-aapef; Teaaapa D. reaaapaL^v) rea-(7ap(Ti{v)

G. Teaaapcov Tcaaapcov A. Teaaapa^ reaa-apa

The Ordinal Numbers.

50. l^ov first, the superlative f orm Trpwros (§46) is used. The succeed-
ing ordinals are derived from the stem of their cardinal numbers, and are
declined like adjectives of the first form. Cardinal numbers are some-
times used instead of ordinals in reckoning the days of the week, etc.

(See Syntax.)

51. Table of Cardinals and Ordinals.

CARDINAL. ORDINAL.
1, el?, P'ia, €v 7rpc!)T0<;, first

2, Bvo BevTepo^, second

3. TpeU, Tpla T/)tT09, third
4. Tea- crapes, Tecraapa T6TapT0<;, fourth
5, irivTe TreyLtTTTO?, fifth

^ III classic Greek the gen. is Svciiv or dvdv (dual forms). So also the dative,
sometimes.
46 NUMERALS. [§5

CARDINAL. 1
ORDINAL.
1

6, 1
€KTo^, sixth
7, CTrra e^Bofiof;, seventh
8. OKTCO 07S009, eighth
9, evvea €vvaTo<i, ninth
10, heKa BeKaro<;, tenth
11, evBcKa evBeKaro^ etc.

12, BooBeKa, or BeKa^vo B(oBeKaTo<i

(Acts xix. 7)
13, TptcTKaLheKa Tpi<rKatBeKaTO<;
14, Tecaapea-KaiheKa, or BeKa- Te(T<7apaKaiBeKaTo<^
Te(T(Tap6<; (Matt. i. 17)
15, irevreKaiheKa, or ^eKairevT6
< irevreKaiBeKaTOf;
(John xi. 18)
16, eKKaiheKa eKKaiBeKaro^
17, eTTTa/calBeKa 67rTaKacBeKaT0<;
18, oKTcoKaiBeKa, or BeKa Kol 6KT(OKaLBeKaTO<:
OKTO) (Luke xiii. 4)
19, ivveaKalBeKa ivveaKaLBeKaTO<i
20, etKoa-iiv) elK0(Tr6<i

21, eiKoai Kal ehy fila , ev elKO(no<^ KoX irpSiTO^

22, eUoa-L Kal Bvo €Iko(tto<; Koi SeuTe/309
30, TpLCLKOVTa TpLOKOCTTOfi

40, Tea-aapaKovTa Te(Ta-apdK0(n6<i

50, irevTrjKovra TrevTTjKoarofi

60, e^rjKOvra e^rjKoo-TOf;

70, e^BofiriKOvra e^BojJbrjKoaTO'i

80, 6yBoi]KovTa 6yBor}KO(rT6<:

90, ivevrJKOvra ev€vr)K0<rT09

100, EKarov eKarocTO^

200, BidKoatoL BiaK0(TL0(TT6<i

300, TptdKoo-iot T piaKocTLOcno^;

400, TerpaKocTLOL Te€raapaKoaio<TT6<i
600, nrevTCLKocrtoi TrevTaKoa-LocTTO^
 ;
:

2.] NUMERALS. 47

CARDINAL.^ ORDINAL.
600, e^dKoa-tOL e^aKoa-LOdTO^
700, eirTCLKocnoi eirTaKocTLOcrTO^

800, oKTaKoaiot, oKTaKoa-ioa-TO^

900, ivcLKoaLOL evaKocTioa-TO^

1,000, '^tkcoc '^iXL0(rT6<;

2,000, Eict'^iXloi hia"^CKto(TT6^

3,000, TpKT'X^LXlOC TpKT'^CkLOCTTb^

4,000, T€TpaKL(T'^l\lOL T€TpaKL(7'^c\tO<7T6^
0,000, fJLVpiOt, fJLVpi0<7T0<;

Eemark. —In
compound numbers, the largest is placed first, ^ and
the smaller follow in order, with or without the conjunction Kal, and.
The smaller numbers are in many copies treated as enclitics, and attached
to the larger as one word.

Examples. — Tio-crapaKovra Svo, " forty-two " (Rev. xi. 2, xiii. 5)

€KaTov irevrrjKovTa rpiuiVy ''of a hundred and fifty-three" (John xxi. 11) ;

6p6voi ciKocrt Tco-o-apcs, " twenty-four thrones " (Rev. iv. 4) ; r€ar(rapa.Kovra

Koi ti €T€(rtv, ''for forty-six years" (John ii. 20); hCtv oySoi^Kovra
" of eighty-four years " (Luke ii. 37) ; Sexa kol oktw Iny,
T€o-crapo>v,
" eighteen years " (Luke xiii. 16) ; ra wevrJKovra cwca, " the ninety-nine"

(Matt, xviii. 12 ; Luke xv. 4).

Distributive Numbers.
52. The distribution or repetition of a number is variously expressed.
In Mark vi. 7, the simple cardinal is repeated : 8vo Svo, "two and two ;"

Luke X. 1, for the same thing, more classically employs a preposition,

dva 8vo ; Mark xiv. 19 combines another preposition with the cardinal
€15 Kara cts, " one by one."

Exercise 8.— Numbers.

1. Interpret the following numerical symbols : —^, irfy kS', /otr', pt^,

2. [Vocdbulai-y. — w/sa, -as, hour; rjfjiipa, -as, day; crd/SpaTovy -ov (lit.

^ The rule in classic Greek is to place the smaller number first with Koi, or the
larger without Kcd.
48 NUMERALS. [§ 52.

sabbath), week, sing, or pliir. ;

/tijv, firjvos, m. month ; tro^, -ov9, n. year ;
irXetW, comp. adj. more; koX, and ; y]^or ; cv (prep., proclitic), m, govern-
ing the dative.]

Translate the following :

1. kv €T€L TrevTCKatScKaro).

2. €V TO) /X?;]/t Tip Ikto).

. 1^ ojpa iy 0€KaTr).

4. cv T<3 €vi Ktti €^aKocriocrT<p Irct, iv r<a Scvrcpo) /r»;vt'.

5. rj fJLLa (rjixepa) twv (raf^j^aruiv. (See Jolin XX. 1, etc.)

6. 7] TTpoiTrf o-a^ySaTov. (See Mark xvi. 9.)

7. TJ rpLTTj rjfxipa. Supply ow, to express the force of the dative.

8. rjfiepaL TrXeiovs o/cto) rj ScKa. Supply thaUy after the comparative.

10. iTTj oySoT^KOvTa Tccrcrapa.

3. Render the follomng into Greek :

1. Thirty years.

2. Eleven months.
3. In the fourth month, on the sixth day. (See 7, above.)

4. Twelve hours in the day.

5. On the first day of the week.^

^ In what two ways might f^rst aud week respectively be expressed ? (See 5, 6,
above.)
 ) —

5 55.] PKONOUNS —PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVK 49

Chapter IV. PKONOUNS.

Personal Pronouns.

53. These are divided into (1) the simple substantive-pronoun

(2) the reflexive, and (3) the adjective-personal. or possessive.

The Substantive Pronouns of the first Two Persons.

First Person- Second Person

1

SINGULAR. PLURAL. ,
SINGULAR, PLURAL.
> T you
N.
'
€70), 1 rjfieU, we (TV, thou v^iel<^,

G. i^OV OT fJLOV rjficov (TOV or (TOV VflCOV

D. i/jLOL or fiot rifitv (Toi or a^oL vfiLV

A. ifii or fi€ 'niJia<; (T6 or (Te vfia<;

Accentuation. — In the singular, genitive, dative, and accusative, the uuem-

phatic pronoun is enclitic. (See § 6.

54. For the third personal pronoun, he, she, it, the New Testa-
ment employs the three genders of the adjective-pronoun avro^;,
self (avTO-, -a-).

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
N. auT09 avT^ avTo avroL avTal avrd
G. avTov avTrj<; avTov avTCJV avTO)v avTOJV
» «
D. avT(o avrrj avTco avToU avraU avTol^
A. avTov avrrfv avTO avTov^ avTd<i avrd

The nominative of this pronoun, when used in the personal sense, ia

always emphatic.

Reflexive Pronouns.
55. These are formed by the combination of the personal pronouns
with the oblique cases of auros. In the singular, the two are written as
one word.
 50 PRONOUNS —REFLEXIVE AND POSSESSIVE. [§55.

SINGULAR.
G. i/iavTov, -'^9, of myself aeavTov, -t}?, of thyself
D. ifiavTO), -rj, to myself creavTm, -rj, to thyself

A. i/iavToVy -1JV, myself {obj.) creavTov, -r^v, thyself (obj.)

The plurals of these forms are written separately. Thus, ruidv avrwv,
of ourselves ; v/mv avrols, to yourselves, etc.

Third person (from* the old stem, e-, him), of himself, herself, itself
etc.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. ..
^^^'^^ F. N.

^-liJL^ G. eavTOV eavrrj^ eavTOV iavTwv eavTcov kavTOiv

D. eavTM iavry eavTco 1,
eauTot? kavTol^ kavTol^
A. eavTov eavTTjv iavTo eai>T0V9 kavrd^ eavrd

This reflexive pronoun is sometimes written without the e, as avrovy

avTov, etc., and is only distinguished from the cases of avrds by the
aspirate.

Wliere there no risk of ambiguity, this reflexive pronoun may be

is

used for the and second persons likewise. Thus, iv cavrot?, " in
first
X.'wTCt.,
'ourselves " (Rom. viii. 23) ; ryy iqA^<x)y crioTyptav, " your own salvation "
(Phil. ii. 12).
^ez^,^^ <^vt„r»—

Possessive, or Adjective-Personal Pronouns.

56. (a) These are declined precisely like adjectives of the first form,
and are as follows :

First person, cjios, cja^, cjaov, my

,,
f||ieT€pos, iq|i€Tcpa, f|(ji€T«pov, our
Second person, o-ds, o-f\, <r<Jv, thy
^ {lfl€T€pOS, V|l€T€pa {)}ieT€pOV, yOUr

There is no possessive pronoun in the New Testament for the

(b)

third person singular or plural, the genitive case of avrds or of eavrou

being used instead. Thus, vlo<^ iavrov, or avrov, his oivn son, i.e., the son
of the person who is subject of the sentence ; vlds avrov, his son, i.e.,
 — —

§ 57, e.] PRONOUNS —POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTRATIVE. 51

the son of another person. In Heb. i. 3, tw pTJ/xart t^s Svva/xccos avrov is

**
by the word of His power," i.e., that of God the Father ; avrov, the
reading of some editors, would denote " of His own power," i.e., that of
Christ Himself. Again, 1 John iii. 3, t^v iXTriSa i-rr avrw, " the hope in^
Him," i.e.f in Christ, not avT<2, which would have referred the hope to
the subject of the sentence, "every one."
(c) The genitive cases of the other personal pronouns are also used
most frequently with the force of the possessive.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

57. The chief original demonstrative was the article, already given
(§ 12), and all other demonstrative pronouns are formed upon its model.

They are (a) 88e, ijSe, toSc, this (here)

(h) oStosi cUJti], tovto, this (near)

(c) lK€tvos, €K€tvT], cKcivo, that (youdcr)

(d) 6 avTos, T| avTTj, TO auTo, th£ same

(a) oSc is simply the article declined with the enclitic 8c.

(6) ovTos is thus declined (stem, tovto-) :

SINGULAB. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.

N. 0UT09 aUTTJ TOVTO OVTOL avTai TavTa

G. TOVTOV TavT7]<; TOVTOV TOVTCOV TOVT(DV TOVTCOV
D. TOVTO)
t
ravrrj TOVT(p TOVTOl^i TavTac<; TOUTOt?
A. TOVTOV TavTrjv TOVTO TOVTOV!; TavTa^ TavTa

Care must be taken to distinguish the feminine of the nominative

singular and plural, avny, avrcu, from the corresponding cases of avros.
VIZ., avnjf airrat.

(c) cKctvos is declined exactly like the article.

(d) 6 avros in all its cases is only avros (§ 54), with the definite artiole
prefixed. The neuter plural, nominative and accusative, is sometimes
written ravra, being distinguished by the coronis over the v (§ 3, ft, 3), as
well as by the accent, from ravra, these, neuter plural of ovros.

^ The preposition employed in this passage further marks this meaning. See
Revised Version: "this hope set on Him."
52 PRONOUNS —DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE. [§ 57, t.

(e) The demonstrative pronouns of quality, quantity (number), and

degree are declined like (b) preceding :

Quality, toiovtos, roiavrr], toiovto, SUch

Quantity, too-oOtos, Too-avn], Too-ovTo, SO great
Number, too-ovtoi, Too-avrai, TocravTa, SO many
Degree, T-qXiKovros, T^XtKavrq, rqXiKovTo, so very great

The last-mentioned pronoun is found only in 2 Cor. i. 10 ; Heb. ii. 3 ;

James iii. 4 ; Rev. xvi. 18.

The Relative Pronoun.

58. {a) The relative os, % i, who or ivhich, is thus declined :

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
•r/ if
N. 09 1 ot at a
*
G. od ov 0)2/ ft) J*

*
D. 5 CO
4,
0I9 al? 069
rf Tf
A. ov riv ou? a9 a
(&) The similarity between this pronoun and the article will be seen at
once. In the nominative singular feminine, and the nominative plural
mascidine and feminine, the only difference is that the article is proclitic.

The stem of the relative is 6-, while that of the article is to-.

(c) An indefinite relative, ivhoever, whatever, is made by affixing the

enclitic rts to os, rj, o. Both parts of the word are declined, as
follows :

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. V.
tt
N. ocrTi9 r}TL<; 0,Tt o'iTive<; a'iLTLve<i CLTLVa
G. ovrLvo<; TjCTTLVO^ OVTLVO^ OyVTLVOJV MVTIVCOV WVTCVCOV
D. WTLVL fjTLVL (pTLVL ol(TrL(TL alarcat, ola-Tio-i

A. ovTLva riVTLva 0,TL ovaTtva<; aaTcva<; ariva

The neuter singular, nominative and accusative, is divided as above

(sometimes by a space without the comma), to distinguish the word from
the conjunction oti,, that.
The genitive masculine singular is sometimes written otov, used in the
New Testament only in the adverbial phrase ecus otov, as long as, until
(Matt. V. 25, etc.).
§ 59, d.] PRONOUNS —RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE. 53

(d) Sometimes the relative is declined with the particle irep (marking
emphatic identity), and means the very one icho. Other indeclinable
suffixes are often used, e.g., ocryc (Rom. viii. 32), oo-Sttitotc. (See Syntax,
on the Particles.) For the relative adverb ov, consult § 129.

(e) Derivative relative pronouns are employed to express quality,

quantity, and number.
f e
Quality, olos, s?/c7i as. '^^-crf^ o\^Gi/\

Quantity, 6<ros, so great as. ^ j

^^

Number, 6<roi, plural of otro?, so many as.

Also the relative of degree, iqXikos, of ivhat a size, used only in two
passages (Col. ii 1 ; James iii. 5).

Interrogative Pronouns.

59. {a) The simple interrogative is tis ; rL ; who ? or lohat ? The

declension of this pronoun is identical with that of the indefinite tl<s

(§ 13), except that in the interrogative the i of the stem syllable is

accented throughout, the dissyllabic forms being paroxytone.

For the adverbial interrogative form, ixyJtl, see § 134, c.

(h) Other interrogative forms are employed, correlative to the relative

pronouns under § 58, e, and, like them, denoting quality, quantity,
num,her, and degree. They all prefix the letter ir- to the relative forms.

Quality, iroios, of what kind?

Quantity, ird<ros, how great ?

Number, irdo-oi, how many ?

Degree, irT]\iKos, how great ? used in the New Testa-

ment only indirectly: Gal. vi. 11, "with how large letters" (probably
to mark emphasis) ; Heb. vii. 4.

(c) Direct interrogatives are often themselves used in the indirect

construction, as John v. 13, "ZTe that was healed knew not who (rts) it
was."

(d) The properly indirect interrogatives prefix the letter 6- to the

direct forms beginning with the letter tt. ottoio?, of lohat kind ? is the
only one of these employed in the New Testament.
54 pronouns —indefinite, and table of correlatives. [§ 60.

Indefinite Pronouns.
60. («) The ordinary indefinite pronoun ns, any, a certain one, has
been given, § 13. The genitive and dative singular are occasionally roVf
Tw, enclitic.

(b) Compounds of this are oih-is, n^ns, no one. For the distinction
between them, see § 134, b, and compare under ets, § 49.
(c) The old indefinite pronoun Sciva, such a one^ used with the article,

is once found (Matt. xxvi. 18).

Distributive Pronouns.
61. These are mostly declined like adjectives, and are as follows :

(a) dXXos, AXXtj, dXXo, another (numerically)

Plur. dXXoi, dXXai, dXXoi, others
(b) '^T€pos, €T€pa, ^Tcpov, othcv (different)
Plur. ^Tcpoi, ^Tcpai, '^T€pa, others

For the force of the article with these pronouns, see Syntax.
(c) oXXtjXwv, of each other, only used in the genitive, dative, and accusa-
tive plural.
{d) ^KatTTos, iKdoTTj, ^KatTTov, each, uscd only in the singular; with a
doubtful exception, in Phil. ii. 4.

62. The number of the pronouns being so limited, it is un-

necessary to give exercises for further practice. The foregoing
forms and inflections must be very accurately committed to
memory, and the distinctions between similar words carefully
marked.
The following Table of Correlative Pronouns will be found useful
as a summary :

Dependent
Demonstra- Interroga-
Relative. Interroga- Indefinite.
tive. tive.
tive.

Simple 0VT09 TL^

Quality . . TOLOVTO^i oi,o<i TTOfcO? QITOIO'!;

Quantity ... TOO'OVTO'i iroao^ ^ • • • - "T^*

'''

Degree rrjXiKOVTO^ XIkc

TrrjfitKO^
 — —

§ 64] THE VERB —VOICE AND MOOD. 55

Chapter V. THE VERB.

The Voices.

63. There are four principal things which verbs are employed
to predicate concerning a given subject:
1. Its state. 'A.^t
2. Its actionupon an object.
3. Its actionupon itself.
4. The action of the object upon it.

Hence arises a fourfold division of verbs : into neuter (or intransitive),

active (or transitive), reflexive^ and passive.

The Greek language employs a threefold modification of the

verbal stem to express these varieties of meaning. The modi-
fications, or " voices," are named as follows :

The Active Voice, as Xvw, / loosen.

The Reflexive, or Middle Voice, as Xvoixai, I loosen myself.
The Passive Voice, as Xvofxai, I am loosened.
Neuter verbs borrow the Active or the Middle form, as 7rao-;(a), I suffer;
(^oyXofxaLj I wish.

The Moods.
64. The Greek verb has four modes, or moods -A the Indicative,
Imperative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive.
1. The Indicative asserts absolutely, as IXvo-a t6v SeV/xtov, / loosened
the prisoner.

2. The Imperative commands, as Xvere t6v SeV/^tov, loosen (ye) the

prisoner /

3. The Subjunctive asserts conditionally, as orav XvarjTi rov Sia-fjuov,

when you have loosened the prisoner. A subjunctive clause, it is

evident, requires another to complete its meaning ; hence the name

1 Compare " Handbook of the English Tongne," § 277.

50 MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VERB. [§ 64.

of the mood, the "subjoined" mood. It is often also called the

*'
Conjunctive."

4. A division of the Subjunctive is called the Optative Mood, because

sometimes employed to express a wish, as in the frequent phrase, fxri

ykvoiTo (rendered E. Y. " God forbid "), may it not he ! It is really the
subjunctive of the historical tenses. Thus, in the phrase, He asks if it
he so, the verb 5e, subjoined to the principal tense " asks " (present),
would, in Greek, be subjunctive. He asked if it were so, would require
were to be in the optative after the historical tense " asked " (aorist). For
further detail, the Syntax must be consulted.

5. For the Interrogative, either the Indicative or the Subjunctive

may be employed, according to the nature of the question. (See
Syntax, §§ 368, 376.)

6. The Infinitive expresses the action or state denoted by the verb, as

in itself an object of thought, as Xvctv t6v Sda-fiLov, to loosen the pi'isoner,

i.e., " the act of loosening him." The Infinitive, it is plain, partakes of

the nature of a substantive, and is often called the verbal noun ; being,
moreover, employed as an uninflected singular neuter, with the article in
all its cases. (See Syntax, §§ 201, 388, 390.)

7.To the Moods must be added the Participles, which are verbal
adjectives, and agree with substantives expressed or understood, as
6 BicTfxLos \vO€L<s, the p'isoner, heing loosened; 6 XcAou/tevos, hs who has heen
washed.

As the Infinitive " partakes " the nature of the substantive, and the
Participle that of the adjective, they are sometimes both called partici-
pials. It is, however, more common to distinguish them by the phrase
*'the infinitive verb," the remaining moods being known as "the finite

verb."

Both the Infinitive and the Participles are used in different tenses, for

which see the paradigm of the Verb.

The Tenses.
65. a. Time \^ present, past, smd future. In each an action may
be predicated as indefinite (i.e., having regard to the act itself rather

than to its completedness or otherwise), imperfect {i.e., going on),

 — —

66.] TENSES, NUMBERS, AND I-ERSONS OF THE VERB. 57

or perfect (i.e., finished). Hence nine possible tenses, of which the

Greek language has seven, as follows :

Indefinite state. Imperfect state. Perfect state.

Present time -(I write) Present (I am writ- Perfect (I have writ-

ing) ten)
Past time Aorist (I WTote) Imperfect (I was Pluperfect (I had writ-
writing) ten)
Future time Future (I shall (I shall Future-perfect^ (I shall
write) be writing) have ^mtten)

h. More names of which the

detailed exposition of these tenses, the
table gives in itahcs, will befound in the Syntax, § 360, seq.^ where it
will also be explained how the meaning of the deficient tenses, the Present
Indefinite and the Future Imperfect, is supplied.

The Aorist (doptaro?, indefinite) is properly an indefinite past^ but it

has other uses, which will also be afterwards explained.

e. Of the above, the Present, and Future-perfect are
Perfect, Future,
called principal tenses ; the Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluperfect, historical
tenses.

d. The tenses are usually arranged as foUows :

1. Present, / loosen.
Avcj,

2. Imperfect, tXvovy I was loosening.

3. Future, Xvcruiy I shall or will loosen.
4. Aorist, e\v(ra, I loosened.
5. Perfect, XeAv/ca, I have loosened.
6. Pluperfect, {k)\€KvKuv, I had loosened.
7. Future-perfect, found only in the passive or middle,
XcXvcro/Acu, / shall have been loosened.

Numbers and Persons.

66. There Greek verb three persons, corresponding with
are in the
those in other languages, and three numbers, the singular, dual, and
plural, of which the dual is not used in the Xew Testament. (See § 11.)
Only the singular and plural, therefore, are given.

^ Very rare. See d, 7.

58 forms of the verb. [§ 67.

Conjugations.
67. There are two principal forms of conjugation. In the most
ancient, the first person singular, present indicative active of the verb
has the termination jii ; in the later, the termination w. The latter
being the easier, the more symmetrical, and embracing the far larger
number of verbs, is usually given first, and is called the First Conju-
gation. The other is termed the Second Conjugation, or, more generally,
" the verb in -|xi."

REMARK.
The first person singular, present indicative active, is the form of the verb
given in almost all Vocabularies and Lexicons, and is generally explained by the
English infinitive. Thus, Xvu, to loosen ; more properly, / am loosening.

The Verbal Stem.

68. The chief thing necessary to be known in a verb is the stem,
which is found by abstracting from any given verbal form the
easily
adjuncts of mood and tense. Thus, a glance over the forms of the
verb " to loosen," in § 65, dy will at once disclose its stem, Xv-.

Additions to the stem are made either at its beginning or its end. An
addition at the beginning termed augment or reduplication
is an ;

addition at the end, the inflectional termination. The former belongs

alike to the two conjugations ; in the latter, the conjugations vary.

Augment and Reduplication.

69. a. The augment characterises the historical tenses (§ 65, c) in
the indicative mood.
(1) Verbs beginning with a consonant prefix the letter i, called the
syllabic augment. Thus, from Xvw, imperfect eXvovj aorist eXva-a.

(2) Verbs beginning with a short vowel augment by lengthening it

a- into T]-, 6- into tj- (in a few cases into «-), t- into l-, v- into v-, and o-

into W-. This is termed the temporal augment. Verbs beginning with
the (" changeable ") diphthongs ai, av, oi, are augmented by changing the
former vowel. Thus, ai- becomes t|-, av- is changed to t]v-, and oi-
becomes oj-. Sometimes, also, cv- is augmented into y]v-. The other
diphthongs and the long vowels are (" unchangeable," i.e.) incapable of
augment.
b. The reduplication, i.e.^ the repetition of the initial consonant of
 — ;

§ 70, h.] THE VERB — ITS INFLECTIONS. 59

the stem with «, belongs to those tenses which mark a completed action
(the perfect, pluperfect, and future-perfect), and is continued through
all the moods. It takes place, in general, only when a verb begins with
a single consonant or a mute and a liquid. Thus \4-XvKa, perf. from Xvw
Pc-^ovXcvKtt, from ^ovXevu) ; -ye-ypa^a, from ypdcfxi).

In verbs beginning with a vowel, only the Temporal Augment is em-

ployed in these tenses, but it is continued through all the moods. To
distinguish this augment from that of the historical tenses, it is some-
times called the improper reduplication.
Verbs compounded with prepositions almost invariably take the
c.

augment or reduplication after the preposition and at the beginning of

the proper verbal stem. Thus, from €K-A.va>, to set free^ comes the Aorist
eieXva-a (ck changed into e^ by § 3, h, 1), and from aTro-Xvw, to dismiss,
the Aorist is aTriXva-a, the o disappearing by elision before the augment
vowel (§ 3, h, 2). The prepositions ttc/di and npo, however, do not elide
their vowels ; and a few other exceptions will be noted in their place.

Inflectional Terminations.
70. a. As a verb is distinguished by voice, mood, tense, number, and
person, five different elements will evidently concur in fixing the termi-
nation in any given case. Thus, if the phrase, we were being loosened,
is to be translated into Greek, it will be necessary to fix "the personal
ending" of the first person plural passive, the "tense-characteristic" of
the imperfect, and the " modal vowel " of the indicative.
h. The Personal endings are no doubt the fragments of ancient
personal pronouns, afiixed to the verb;^ but the original forms are in a
great measure disused or lost. The attentive student will observe the
recurrence of -s in the second person singular, and of -jiev, -re, in the first

and second persons plural, throughout the active. It will be seen, also,
that in the active principal tenses the third person plural ends in -o-i (-<riv

before an initial vowel in the next word), and in the historical tenses in
-V. In the passive and middle, the normal forms are, for the principal
tenses — Sing., -y-ai, -<rai, -rai ; Plur., -|i.c9a, -<r0€, -vrat ; historical tenses
Sing., -ji-nv, -0-0, -TO ; Plur., -fieOa, -<r0€, -vTo. Study of the Paradigms which
follow will suggest other points of comparison.

* See Miillers "Lectures on tlie Science of Language," first series, especially

p. 272, seq.
60 THS VERB — ITS INFLECTIONS; VERBAL ADJECTIVES. [§71.

71. The Tense-characteristics most important to be noticed are the

following :

a. The Future and (First) Aorist Active have -o--. So, from the
verbal stem iritrrru- we have the Future stem irKrrevo-. When the verbal
stem ends with a short vowel, it is generally lengthened in the Future :

thus, from \v- is formed Xv<r- from Tipa-, ti|xt]o- (see § 3, e) ; and from
;

S-qXo-, 8t]Xwo-,

The Perfect and. Pluperfect Active take -k-. Thus, irKrrcv- (with
&.

the reduplication, § 69, ^), makes irciriorTcvK-. Here also a final stem-vowe]
is usually lengthened ; as from TijAa-, t€tijitik-, and from 8t]Xo-, ScSiiXwk-v

But Xv- makes XcXvk-.

c. The Future and (First) Aorist Passive take -9-, lengthening the

vowel where lengthened in the Perfect Active. Thus, from the verbal
stems already given, irio-TeuG-, Xv9-, nix-qG-, 8tiX«0-.

In the Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive the normal

d.

forms (see § 70, &) are affixed to the verbal stem without any connecting
letter.

The successive paradigms will show how the tense-characteristics are modified
by the consonants of the verbal stem.

72. The Modal Vowels will be sufficiently traced in the Paradigms.

It will be especially noted how the Subjunctive throughout lengthens

the vowels of the Indicative, and how the Optative abounds in diph-
thongal forms. In the third person plural it will also be seen that the
Subjunctive takes the termination of the principal tenses, the Optative
of the historical.

The Imperfect and Pluperfect tenses occur only in the Indicative

Mood;i \\^Q Future, also, is absent from the Imperative and Sub-
junctive.

>
It will be seen under Syntax, § 378, that the Optative mood really is the
historical Subjunctive.Hence the Present and Perfect Optative are the Imperfect
and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The ordinary names have, however, been retained to
prevent unnecessary ditficulty to tlie learner.
8 74] VERBS IN a> : 7naT€vco. 61

The Verbal Adjectives.

73. Many verbs have, in addition to their passive participles, a kind of
participial adjective, to signify either caiiahility or dutij. The former is
generally expressed by the termination -tos, -tVj, -tov, appended to the
verbal stem the latter by the termination -reos, -rca, -t€ov.
; Thus, from
Xv- may be formed Avto's, capable of being loosened ; Avrcos, that ought to
be loosened.

74. Paradigm of the First Conjugation, or of

"THE Verb in -«."

The verb ttio-tcvo) has been chosen as a model, because it is a character-

istic word of the New Testament, and because all its forms contain the

unaltered stem. The verb ^ovXcvw, to advise, employed by Kiiliner and

others, only occurs in the New Testament in the middle voice and ;

Xvo), to loosen, chosen by Professor Curtius and Principal Greenwood,

though easy to conjugate, has the disadvantage of having the stem long
in some forms, and short in others, although unaltered to the eye.

The learner will have little difficulty in discovering throughout the

paradigm the root (iria-nv-), the augment or reduplication, the connecting
and the tei'mination. As a help, however, the augment
letter (a- or k),

and terminations are printed in a darker type.

Stem, TncrreV'y to believe or trust ; Mid., to trust one^s self or to

confide ; Pass., to be entrusted.

a. Principal parts.
Present Indicative Active, incrrevco
Future „ „ Tna-revaco
Perfect „ „ ireirio-TevKa
Perfect Indicative, Mid. and Pass., ireTrlaTevfiaL
(First) Aorist Indicative Passive, eTna-TevOr^v

To know these five parts thoroughly, with the addition, in many verbs,
of the Second Aorist (§§ 86-88), is to know the verb.
62 THE VERB IN -w : ACTIVE VOICE. L§74.

Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. / am helieving.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTLCTTCVia 7rtCrT€V0|X€V

TTtO'TeuClS 7rtO"T€U€T€

TTttrret'ci 7rto"Tevov<ri(v)

Imperfect. I loas helieving.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
67rt(TT€VOV €7rtO'T€VO}l€V

CTTtCTTCVeS CTTtO'TCVCTC

€7rt(rT€V6(v) C7r«rT€V0V

Future. / shall or will believe.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTLCTTevaoi 7n(TT€V(T0\LiV

Trttrreuo'cis 7rL(TT€V(TtTi

7rtcrT€uo'ov<rt( V )

Aorist (First Aorist^). I believed.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
iTTtCTTCVCra €7rt(rT€ucra|i€v

€7rio"T€va'as €7rto"T€v(raTC

€7riO'T€V(r€(v) eTrttrTCixrav

Perfect. / 7ia?;c believed.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTCTTto'TCv/ca 7re7ri(rT€uKafi.6v

TTCTTlO'TCVKaS TrCTTtOTeVKaTC

7rc7rto"TevK€(v) 7r€7rto'T€VKdc-i(v)

Pluperfect.^ / had believed.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
i7r€7n(TT€VKH.V CTreTTtCTTCl 'Aftl^WV

€7re7rt(rT€VK€is €7rt7rt(TT€t'K€lTf

€7r€7rt(rT€WK€l ^7rc7rt(rT€u/c€(i)aav

1 Sec § 86.
' Augment generally omitted in N. T. in j lupf. act. and pass.
§74] THE VEKB IN -« : ACTIVE VOICE. 63

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Present Tense. Believe (continuously')

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
2nd pers. TTLcrrev^ TTLcrrecfm

3rd pers. Trto-Teve'rw irt(rT€V€T«o-av

Aorist. Believe (at once).

SING ULAR. PL URAL.

TTwrrcvcrov 7rto'T€V(raT€

irtoTCuo'dTa) irtcrreuo'dTwo'av

Perfect. ^a-Z/'e believed (i.e., remain so).

SINGULAR. . PL URAL.
7r€7riCrT€VK€ 7r€7rtO"TevK€T€

ir€7rCOT€VK€T« 7r€7rL(TT€VK(r(Ji<raV

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present Tense. / may believe.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7ricrTev«|iev

irt(rT€UT|s 7rt<JTeVT]T6

7rto'T€vw<ri(v)

Aorist. / 7nai/ believe, or shccll have believed.

SINGULAR. I PLURAL.
in<TTeV(Tbi TTtCTeVCrCDIJLCV

irtOTCUO'TJ 7rto'T€vcr«<ri(v)

Perfect. / 7nay have believed.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rc7rtO"TevK« TreTTiCTTev/cwjicv

ir€7rtOT€t ACJJS ir€»rt(rT€VKT]T6

;re7r«rr€VK'n •T€7rtO'T€VKft)(rt(vj
 04 THE VERB IN «*: ACTIVE VOICE. t§74

OPTATIVE MOOD.
{Or, SUBJUNCTIVE OF HISTORICAL TENSES.)
Present (or Imperfect). / might believe.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTtO'TCVOlJl.l Trifrrcvotucv

7rt(rr€vots

Tnarevoi 7rt(rT€V0l€V

Future. / should believe.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rtO'T€VO'Ol|il 7rtcrTcvcroi|tev

TTttTTCVO'OlS TTtOTevCOlTC
TrioTiva'oi Tn(TT€VCrOl€V

Aorist. / might or am to believe.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rt(rT€V(rai(ii 7naT€V(Tai\L€v

TTtOTTevcrais TTtO'TCVCaiTC

Tnarrevcrai TnoTivaaiiv or -ciav

Perfect (or Pluperfect). / might have believed.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7r€7rt(rTCuKoi|j.t 7r€7rt(rT€UKOC}l€V

7r€7rt(rT€VKois TTCTTtarCUKOtTC

7rC7riO"T€VKOl 7r€7rtOTCVKOl€V

INFINITIVE.
Present, Trtcn-cveiv, to believe (be believing). '

Future, Tnareva-fiv, to be about to believe.

Aorist, TTtoTcvo-ai, to believe.

Perfect, TrcTrtorcvKcvai, to have believed.

PARTICIPLES.
Present nom., Tricrrcvwv, Trto-rcv'ovo-a, m-to-rcvov, believing; stems,
Tri<rT€vovT- (m. and n.), vrioTivova-a- (f.).

Future nom., Trtarcva-wv, TTto-Tcvcrovcra, ^Krrcvcrov, about to believe ;

stems, irwrTevo-ovT- (m. and n.), irwrrcvo-ovo-a- (f.).

^ The form in -eiav (^Eolic) is found only once in N. T. (Acts xvii. 27).
 ;

§74.] THE VERB IN -« : MIDDLE AND PASSR'E. 65

Aorist nom., Trto-Tevcras, TTtcTTcvcrdo-a, TncTTevcraVf having helieved

stems, irio^euc-avT- (m. and n.), TrwrrtiKrao-a- (f.).

Perfect nom., 7r€7rtoTcvK(&s, irtma-revKvla.^ TreTncTTevKS^, having now

helieved ; stems, iren-KTrevKor- (m. and n.), ireirwrrcvKvia- (f.).

Middle and Passive Voices— Forms common to both.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Present Tense. / am confiding (trusting myself), or

am heing entr listed}
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
irta"T€t'o|xai 7rL(JT€v6\i.iQ<X

7rtOTCV€<r0€

irtOTCV€Tai TTtCTTCrOVTai

Imperfect. / was confiding, or was bein^ entrusted.

SINGULAR, PLURAL.
k7rtaTev6\kr]v €7rtcrT€rdp.€0a
^
iTTtcrrcvov

iTTioTcvero CTTtOTCVOVTO

Perfect. / have confided, or have been entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TreirtoTCvuat 7r€7rtaT€i'p.€0a

TrCTTlCTTCVO-Ot 7r€7r6CrT€VO-0«

TrCTTlOTCVTai, TrcTTicrTCvvTai

Pluperfect. / had confided, or had been entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
6Tr€7rtOTCVJtT]V €7r€7rta"T€vp.60a

l7rc7rtcrT€v<ro e7re7rto"Tev<r0€

6ir€7riOT€VTO €7r€7rtaT€WTO

* The collocation am being is doubtlessly inelegant ; but the true force of the timae
could be given in no other way. The Greek language has no present indefinite.
' Contracted from -ccrot. The contraction into -« is very rare.
' Contracted from -e(ro.
66 THE VERB IN -« : MIDDLE AXD PASSIVE. [§74
IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Present. Confide, or he thou entricsted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
^
2nd pers. iricrTevov 7rtOT€V6(r0€

3rd pers. TrtorcveVOw ino'Tcv€<r0«<rav or -^crOwv

Perfect. Have confided, or Aare been entrusted (i.e., remain so).

SINGULAR.
TrCTTiVTeixro 7r€7rtoT€v<rQ«

TTCTTtOTCVOrOw 7rc7rtGrTcv<r0w<rav or -<r6«v

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present. / may confide, or 6e entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rtcrT€v«|JLai TTtcTTruwfteOa

•TrtO-TCVTJ 7rtorTCTrr]<r0€

7rtcrT€VT]Tau irtaTCvwvTai

Perfect. / may have confided, or have been entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rC7rtO'T€V|Jl6VOS <S2 7r€7rtcrT€V(i^voi wucv
7r€7rtcrTru|i€vos ijs TreTTtCTTeVJl^VOl T)T6

ir€7riOTCV}l€VOS tj
7rc7rt(rT€v|i^voi w<ri(v)

OPTATIVE MOOD.

(Or, SUBJUNCTIVE OF HISTORICAL TENSES.)

Present. / might confide, or he entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rto-T€T;oCjii]v 7ri(rT€Vof|i.€0O

TTttTTCVOtO 7riOT€vot<r0«

TTltTTCVOlTO TTKTTCVOIVTO

^ Contracted from -eo-o.

^ These forms are made by the perfect participle, with the substantive verb
"^0 6e" as an auxiliary.
 THE VERB IN -« MIDDLE. 67
§74] :

Perfect. / might Jmve confided, or been entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTCTTtO'Tei'JlCVOS 6lT]V 7r€7rio'T€V|icvot 6iii|iev

7r€7riOT€VJJL€VOS i^y\9 7r€7riO-T€V|l€VOl €'l11T€

irc7rto-TCvp.€VOi cl'-qo-av
TTCTTtOTCVJt^VOS eiTJ

IXFIXITIVE.

Present, Tna-Tevta-Qai, to coTifide, or be entrusted.

Perfect, 7r€7rto-Tcvo-0at, to have confided, or have been entrusted,

PARTICIPLES.

Present, Trto-Tcvojievos, Trto-TevonevT), Trto-Tcvdjievov, confiding, or 5cm^

entrusted.
Perfect, TreTrto-TcvpLc'vos, TrcTrtcTTcviJievT), 7rc7ri(rTcr|icvov, having confided, or
having been entrusted.

Forms peculiar to the Middle.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Future Tense. / shall or will confide.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TrtoTcrcoficOa

TTto-Tcvo-xi 7rt<TTCvcr€<r06

7rtOT€va€Tai Trto-TevcrovTai

(First) Aorist. / confided.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
CTncTevo-dnTiv €7rto'T€vcrdp.€0a

€7rto'T€vcra)^ CTrttTTCucao-Oe

c7rto'T€V(raTo €7rtO'T€VO'aVTO

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Aorist. Confide (at once).
SINGULAR. PLURAL,
2nd pers. TrtcrTeixrai irto-Tcvo-ao^c

3rd pers. Trto'TcwTdcrGw TTtOTTCvcrdo-Gwo-av 01 -d<r6«v

^ Contracted from -acro.

C8 THE VERB IN -« : MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. [§74.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Aorist. / may confide, or shall have confided.

SINGULAR. PLURAL
TTtoTcvcrwiiat 7rLcrT€V(Td>\LeQa

TTLarevaxi '7n(rT€Vcrr]<rQi

TTio-TCvo-riTot TTtOTCVcrwvTat

OPTATIVE MOOD.
(Or, SUBJUNCTIVE OF HISTORICAL TENSES.)
Future. / shoidd confide.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rtO'T€VO-Ol|JLT]V TTtO'TCVO-oCp.tOa

irtCTTevcroio irtoT€vcroi(r06

jricrrcvtroiTo 7rt(rT€vcroivTO

Aorist. / might or am to confide.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rto'T€V(rai(iT]v

7rc(rT€vo"aio 7riorT€V(rai(r06

TrtoTTcvcraiTO TTlCTTCVCraiVTO

INFINITIVE.
Future, Trto-Tcvo-ea-eai, to he about to confide,

Aorist, TrtGTTcvo-ao-eai, to confide immediately.

PARTICIPLES.
Future, rrtorcvtroiicvos, Tnanvcro^ivT], 7rtcrT€va"<J}i€vov, obout to confide.
Aorist, 7r(,o'T€vo-dfi€vos, 7rt(7T€vcra|ji€vii, 7r6o-T€vcrd(jL€vov, having confided.

Forms peculiar to the Passive.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
(First) Future Tense. / shall he entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTurTcvOrjao^f, 'jn(TT€v9r}(T6\it9a,

ina'TfvOya'xi VKTTcvOrjcrta^f

VLorevOrjarirat. TTLortvOi^a-ovraK
§H] THE VEEB IN -« : PASSH^E. 69

(First) Aorist. / was entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
«7rtcrT€V^T]V iin(rT€.v6y\^(v

€7rtOrT€v'^TJS €7riCrT€V^TlT€

kTnaT€vdr\ eTrtorcv'^Tjo-av

IMrERATIVE MOOD.

Aorist. Be thou entrusted (at once).

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
2nd pers. inaT€v6y\r\.

3rd pers. ttio-tcv^tjtw Tncm.v$i\TUia-o.v

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Aorist. / may he or shall have been entrusted,

SINGULAR. I PLURAL.
I

7rtcrTruC7«[i.€v

7rtCrT€f^f]T6

TrtO"T€V^«0-l(v)

OPTATIVE MOOD.

Future. / slwuld he entrusted.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7n(rT€v6r]croi\i.r\v irL(TT€v6TJ(T0i\i.iQa

7n(rT€v6T^(TOiO TTLcrTevO-qaoifrQf.

TncTevO-qcroiro

Aorist. / might he or am to he entrusted.

SINGULAR. I PLURAL.
7rt(rT€V^€lT}|l€V

7ricrT€v^€tT]s

7rt<7TCV^6l€V

INFINITIVE.

Future, Trto-Tev^TJo-co-eai, to he ahout to he entrusted,

Aorist, 7rtoTcu6'7)vai, to he entrusted.
70 THE VERB IN -« : EXERCISE. [§ 74.

PARTICIPLES.

Future, Trto-Tcv^T/o-diicvos, -rj, -ov, ahouf to he entrusted.

Aorist, 7rtoT€v^€is, -€io-a, -ev, having been entrusted ; stem, irio-TcvecvT-

(m. and n.).

VERBAL ADJECTIVE.
7rto-T€VTos, -T^, -Tov, capobU of eutrusting, or 0/ SeirZ;^ entrusted;
7rto-T€VT€os, -Wa, -T*ov, ^Aa^ oi^^/z-^ ^0 6e entrusted,

75. The learner who has thoroughly mastered the different

forms of ina-Teva) now given is ready to encounter with compara-
tive ease the manifold variations of verbs in -«. First, however, let
the following Exercises be written :

Exercise 9.— On Pure Uncontracted Verbs.

1. Write out the whole of the regular verb ySovXcvw: active, to advise;
middle, to deliberate^ to advise oneself ; passive, to be advised,

2.[Vocabidary of Verbs selected from the ^'Sermon on the Mount." —

cLKovu), to hear; SovXcvo), to serve; Xva>, to loosen (compound derivatives,

aTToXvo), to put away ; KaraXvoi, to abrogate) j vrja-Tevo), to fast ; 7rpoc{>r)T€vw,

to prophesy; <^ov€vw, to murder.^

Analyse and translate the following forms :
SovXevav, KaraXCcrat,
Xvcry, 7jK0V(raT€, (jioveva-eis, <^ov€.v(Trj^ aTroXuo-T/, (XTroXcXv/xet'Tyv, VYj(rT€V7)T€,

vr](TT€vovTe<s, 7rpoe<jir]Tev(rafji,€V.

Also the following ; KareXvOr), aTroXeXvrat, i/r/o-Tcucrov, 7r€(f>ov€VKa(nv,

XeXvKivaL, KaraXcArKtos, vrjcrTevcro), Trpof^rfrcvcroVy 7rpo(f>7)T€vov(Taif Trpotfu/jrev-

y]T€, SeSovXevKa/xcv, SovX€vovt€S, eSovXcvtrcv, SovXcvcrwcrav, (XTroXv^evTcs,

a.7roX€Xi;(r^at, oLTreXvovTO,

76. The verbs in the foregoing Exercise, as well as the conju-

gated verb TTto-reuo}, are all distinguished by a vowel stem-ending,
which, in the great majority of cases, is the letter v in a diph-
thongal or simple form. They are, therefore, called pure verbs;

and inasmuch as the stem appears throughout without contraction

or alteration, they are further termed uncontracted.
§ 78, d.] ftRE VEKBS IN -ft*. 71

To the class of pure uncontracted verbs belong most with the stem-
ending V or I, but no others. It is, therefore, necessary to see how the
verbal terminations are to be adapted to other kinds of stem ; and to do
this thoroughly in the case of all regular verbs, little else is needed than
the remembrance and application of the elementary laws of euphony, as
stated in § 4.

most be noted by the learner that, when the terminations of the voices,
It
moods, and tenses are once known, and a very few simple general rules of con-
jugation impressed on the memory, the acquisition of all the multifarious
•*
classes" and ** species" of verbs in -« is a matter of euphony and nothing
else.

77. Let us take the possible verbal stem-endings according to

the alphabet. It will appear that the stem may terminate (1) in
a vowel or (2) in a consonant ; and that the consonant may be
(i) a mute, (2) a liquid, or (3) a double letter. The last may be
rejected from the account, as no verbal stems, in fact, do so
terminate. We have, then, three main divisions : the PURE
verbs, the MUTE, and the LIQUID.

78. PuEE Verbs. — Special Eules.

a. A verbal stem may end in o, c, i, o, or u ; i.e., in any short voweL

Those in i and v, the uncontracted, have been considered already.

b. From the rules and tables given under § and the partial illus- 3, /,
trations of them given in the nouns and adjectives, it has been seen that
when o, c, or o precedes a vowel, long or short, it is generally contracted
with it into one syllable. Hence, verbal stems ending in these vowels
form a second class of pure verbs — viz., the contracted.

c. As, however, it appears from the paradigm that the last letter of
the stem precedes a vowel only in the Present and Imperfect tenses, it
follows that the contraction willbe confined to these parts of the verb,
and that there will be no deviation in other parts from the general form
of TTICTTCVO).

For the Table of Contractions, see § 3, /. Note especially that

d.

with -ow the stem-vowel a- makes «-, while e and o- disappear before the
diphthong. In the Infinitive, also, the combination -o€iv becomes -ow.
 72 CONTRACTED VEEBS IN -o». [§ 79.

79. The following paradigms will now present no difficulty :

1. A-stem, Tijido), to honour.

2. E-stem, <j)i\€w, to love.
3. 0-stem, Si^Xdw, to Tnanifest.

Stem, rZ/xa- (J)l\€' 8r]Xo^

Active.
Indicative —Present.
-tt TLfxC) ^tXoj 8i;Xo)

-619 T6/x,as ^tXcts Sr]\oL<s

-€l TLfia <j>Lk€L SrjXoi

-OJJl€V Tt/AW/XCV (fnXov/icv Br]\ovfi€V

-en TL/xaT€ ^iXctre BqXovre

-ov(ri(v) Tt/xa)crt(v) ^tXo9(rt(v) BrjXovcniv)

Imperfect.

€- . . -OV iTLfxoyv €^tAovv iSrjXow

-CS cTi/xas c^iActs iS-qXov;

-€ CTi/xa c^tAa iS-^Xov

-OJICV iTL/XWfJLCV i<f>LXoVfX€V iSrjXovixcy

-€T6 iTLfiare iffaXcLTc iSrjXovTi

-OV iTLfXHiV icftiXovv iSrjXovv

Imperative — Present.

-€ TLjXa <f)iX€L SrjXov

-(to TLfiaTO) <J>lX€LT(1) StjXoVTiJ}

-6T6 TLfxare (ficXetTe 8r]Xovr€

-CTwo-av TLfxaTOidav f^iXuTinaav SrjXovTwa'av

SuBJ UNCTivB — Present.

-«> Tt/XCO ^ <f>iXii) 8r]XCi

-43

-US TLfiaS 03
o (fyiX'fj'S SrjXoLS
'S SrjXol
-Tl
Ti/xa <l>LXrj

-<i)\LtV TLjXWfJLiV <^tA(o/x.cv hrjXCjfX€V

-T]T€ TLfxarc a>

C^tA^TC 8rjXu)T€

-«<ri(v) TLfXW(rL(v) 13
^tA(o(n(v) hr]Xui(rL[v)
§79.] CONTRACTED VERBS IN -w : MIDDLE AND PASSIVK 73

Stem, TL/JLa- 0rAe- StjXo'

Optative —Present.
-Ol(tl TLfJiWfXL or -lorjv (fnXoLfJLL or 'OLTJV BrjXoLixL or -Oi-qv^
-OlS Tt/xws or •
wr]^ (fnXoLS or -onys SrfXoLS or -otrys
-01 Tt/xo) or -<
k (faXot or -017/ BtjXoL or 'OLTJ

-OlfJlCV TL/X(2/x€v or -lorjixcv <^t\ot/xev or -OLr]fji€V SrjXoifLev or -ot7//>t€V

-OITC TLfx&re or 'Wr)T€ (jiikoLTi or -0L7p-€ SrjXoiTi or -otT/re

-Ol€V TtftWCV <f>LX0L€V Si/Xotcv

Infinitive —Present
-CIV TLfJLaV <}>l\€IV St/Xouv

Participle —Present.
-(i)V TLfltOV <f>LXC>V St/Xwv
f. -ouo-a TLfiwcra <l>LXov<ra 8r;Xovcra
n. -ov TLfLOiV <f>LX0VV SiyXovv

Middle and Passive.

Indicative —Present
-Oftai TLfioifiai ^t\ov/xcu 8i;Xov/xat

-Tl,
-" TLjXa. ^tA.^ or -ct SiyXot
-CTttl TLfxarat <^tA.€tTat SrjXovrai
'0|ie9a TLflWfXcOa ^tXou/X€^a hrjXovfitOa
-€<re6 TLfxaa-Oe ^tXctc^e Br)Xovcr6e
-ovrai TiyiuiVTOx <f3LX0VVTaL BrjXovvTaL

Indicative —Imperfect
€- . . -<Jp,t]V ^TLfXWfirjV i<f>(,Xovfnjv iSrjXovfxrjV

-ov irLfiu) icfaXov iSrjXov

-€T0 iTLfiaro iffuXeiTO iSrjXovTO

-on€0a iTLfi(i)fJi€6a i(f>LXovfic6a iSrjXovfxeOa

-€006 €Tt/Aacr^€ iffxXeta-Oe iSr]Xov(r6€
-OVTO iTLjJMVTO i<f>LXovvTO iSrjXovvTo

^ The latter are the more usual terminations.

74 CONTRACTED VERBS IN -« : Mtt)DLE A^) PASSIVE. [§ 79.

Stem, TLfia- 0^X6- SrjXo"

Imperative —Present.
-ov Tt/XW ^tXov SrjXov

-la-Oca TLfidcrOoi f^iXucrOiii SrjXovcrOo)

-60-06 TiixaorOe ^iXeLcrOe SyjXoxxrOe

-|o-0a)(rav TLfxdcrOoicrav fjuXiia-Odicrav Sr]Xovcr6(t)(rav

or -(V0WV TifJidarOoiV tfiiXiicrOuyv SrjXova-OuiV

Subjunctive —Present.
-(i)[iai TLfJbWfiaL cfuXCj/xaL Sr]Xu)fiaL

-n TLfXa cjaXfj BrjXol

o
-ilTat TLfxaTai '3 cfuXrJTai SrjXwraL
h5
-w(jLe0a TLJXWfXCff^a o <f)LXo)/X€6a SrjXwiiiOa
-T](r06 TifjiacrOe cfytXrjcrOi SrjXdaOe
r^
-wvrai TLjxCjVTaL 3 ^tXtOI'Tttt SrjXuivraf,

Optative —Present.
-o{|iiiv TLixiofirjy ^LXoLjxrjv SrjXoLiMrjv

-oio TLfXWO (f>LXoto SrjXoLO

-OITO TLflWTO <f>lXoLTO SrjXoLTO

-oi|i€0a TLfjuofjieOa <f}LXotfJi€6a SYjXoLfxcOa

-ot(r06 TLfXiZcrOe <f>LXoi(T6€ SrjXola-Oi

-OIVTO TifllOVTO <f>LXoLVTO Sr]XoLVTO

Infinitive —Present.
-6(r0ai Tt/xao-^at fjaXeLaOaL SrjXovcrOai

Participle.

m. -d|i.6Vos TLfJi(i)fX€VO<S <jiLXoVfX€VO<; Sr]XovfJi€VO^

f. -OJJ16VT] TLfJLWixivrj K^LXovfxiv'q SyjXovfJiivr)

11. -0|16V0V TL^dilXCVOV <fiLXovfJi€VOV Sr]XovfJi€vov

 — —

§ 81.] mute vekbs : special rules. 76

Note on the Kemaining Tenses.

80. These are regularly formed. The lengthening of the vowel

before the future, aorist, and perfect tense-endings must be marked.
Principal tenses of TL/xdWf of ^tXco), of BrjXooi —
Present active TLfJL(i> (f>LX(i) SrjXC!)

Future active TLfX-qcr(j) (fjiX-qcTiji 8r]X<ji)(T(j)

Perfect active T€TLfJL7]Ka 7r€(f>LXr]Ka SeST^XwKtt

1st Aor. passive iTl/J,T]Or]V €<f>LXi^Orjv iBrjXwOrjv
Perf. mid. and pass. TiTLfxrjuaL 7r€<f>LXr]fJiaL ScSTyAoj/u-at

Exercise 10.— On pure Contracted Verbs.

[Vocabulary of Verhs^ selected from the ^^

Sermon on the Mount." —
dyaTTao), to love ; ahio)^ to asTc ; Snf/d(Dy to thirst ; ^cao/xat, to hehohl
(dep.i) ; ^€/xeXto(o, to found ; ^lyTeo), to seek ; /xcTpew, to measure ; /xLcrew,

to hate ; otKoSo/xeco, to build ; o/xoLooiy to liken ; Trctvaw, to hunger ; irotew,

to do, make.^

Analyse and translate the following words : — TrctvwvTc?, Sti/^wvre?, Trotet,

ayaTrrj<T€L<s, fjna-rjcreLSy a,ya7rrjcrrjT€j dyaTroii/Ta?, Trot^crat, uoto^cn, TrotctTe,

TTOulvj OeaOijvaiy Troths, air^crat, ^Tyretrc, fjL€Tp€LTe, alTT^arj, alTovcnv (dat. %^

plur.)j TTOLUiCTLVy -TTOLOVV, 6fJLOL(i)(r(J), (OKoh6fXr)(T€y TC^C/XcXtWo, O/XOtW^T^aCTat.

Also the following :

OedcacrOaLy rediaraL, yiydir-qareVy dyaira, -^yaTrrj-

fiivrjVj dyaTT^Vy atrctcr^c, yrovvrOy 'pr-qcravTOy alTw/x€Vy it.7]TovVy tpr^ruiVy

^r}T€iT(Oy e^r/TctTO, ofuoLijjOTjjxiVy lircLvaa-a (see § 96, a), Tretva, iBcij/Tjcra,

Mute Verbs. — Special Eules.

81, The large class of mute verbs comes next in order i.e., verbs
whose stem-ending (or "characteristic") is either a labial, tt, p, <|) ; a
guttural, K,
Y, X i
or a dental, t, 8, 0. It will be convenient to retain

^ Deponent, i.e., middle /or/n with active meaning : an active form not being used.
See § 100.
76 MUTE VERBS —THEIR CONJUGATION. "[§ 82.

the names of (§ 4, b) ^-sounds (labials), /i>sounds (gutturals), and ^-sounds

(dentals). The cross-division, into sharjp, Jlat, and asj)irate, must also
be remembered.

82. Whenever, in the conjugation of a verb, the stem is fol-

lowed immediately by a vowel, the mute stem-ending is unaffected.
In the Present and Imperfect tenses, therefore, the mute verb
precisely resembles TnaTeixo.

SS. ct' Many tense forms, however, begin with a consonant : as

those of the Future and First Aorist with -o--, that of the Perfect
with -K-, that of the First Aorist passive with -0- ; while in the
different parts of the Perfect middle and passive there occur four
several consonants immediately following the stem, the termina-
tions being -jiai, -o-ai, -rai, -|i€0a, -crQi, -vrau So with the Pluperfect.

b. The rules, therefore, in § 4, c?, will be applied to modify the mute

stem-endings.

1. Thus, with -o- (Fut. act.. First Aorist act. and mid., Perf. mid.
and pass., second person sing., and imper.)
IT-, p-, <}>-, become ^j'*

K-, Y-j X-> » i *

T-, 8-, 0-, disappear,

2. Before -0 (pass. Fut. and First Aor.)

V- and p- become c^.

K- and Y- „ x«
T-, 8-, 0-, „ (T.

3. Before -t (mid. and pass. Perf. ind., third person sing.)^

p- and 4>' become ir.

•y- and X- » •*•

T-j 8-, 0-, „ • <r,

4. Before -|i (mid. and pass. Perf., first person sing, and plur., and
Perf. participle)
IT-, p-, <!>-, become |i.

K- and X- »» Y»
T-, <r.
8-, 0-, „
 ;

§ 84, c] MUTE VERBS —THEIR CONJUGATION. 77

5. Terminations commencing with -<r0 drop the <r after a consonant

the remaining affecting the mute according to rule. Thus, from rplp-,

Ti-Tpi/S-a-Oe (mid. and pass. Perf. ind., second person plur.) becomes first

ri-TpLp-6t, then TcVpK^^c.

6. The combination -vt in the terminations of the middle and passive

Perfect (-vrai) and Pluperfect (-vto) is impracticable after a consonant.
Hence the form dropped altogether, and the perfect Participle, with
is

the substantive verb, put in its stead, as in the Perf. subj. and opt.
Thus, Tpip- would regularly give the combination (third person plur.,
Perf. mid. and pass.) Te-TptyS-vrat, which cannot be dealt with by any of
'

the foregoing laws.^ The compound form TerpLfxfxivoL €Lcn(y) is therefore

employed.

7. There only remains the -k- of the Perfect active. Before this letter
the dentals t-, 8-, 0-, are dropped. Thus, Tri-iraO-Ka becomes TreVctKa.

But when the stem-ending is a labial or a guttural, the k is treated as an

aspirate orhard hreathing^ the mute being changed into its corresponding
aspirate, and k disappearing. So ayo> gives r^xa for ^y-Ka = ^y-d, and
Tpipm gives ri-Tpl'<fi(iy from T€-Tpt/3-Ka = Tc-rpi^-d.

Paradigms of the Mute Verbs.

84. a. To facilitate comparison, all the tenses are given. It has not,
however, been thought necessary to go through all the numbers and
persons, excepting in the Perf. mid. and pass.

h. It will be seen that the sharp labial, the flat guttural, and the aspi-
rate dental have been selected. No difficulty will be found in applying
the laws of inflection to mutes of the kindred classes.

c. The verb aytu, beginning with a vowel, takes the temporal augment
instead of the reduplication in the Perfect tenses. See § 69, h.

^ In the older Greek writers, the v is sometimes replaced by the aspirate a. Thus
the word would become rerpiipaTai ; but this usage is not confined to mute verbs or
to the Perfect tense.
78 MUTE VERBS —ACTIVE. [§84.

LABIAL. GUTTURAL. DENTAL.

_p-sounds. A;-soiinds. ^sounds.
Stem, rpIIS- ay- ireiO-

Active.
INDICATIVE.
Present, -« TpL^iD, I rub ayo), / lead TTCiOiDy I persuade
Imperf. i- . . -ov trpiPov ^yov (.TriiOov

Future, -o-w rpLxj/oi aiii) TTCtVo)

1st Aor. t- . . -era erpn/^a rji^ cTTCKra

^
Perf. redup. -a rerptc^a TJxa TTCTretKa

Plup. redup. -ctv (i)T€TpL(f>aV VX^^^ {ijimriLKiiv

IMPERATIVE.
Present, -€ Tpipc aye TTCt^C

1st Aor. -(Tov Tpl\{/ov aiov TTCtO-OV

Perf. redup. -1 T€Tpi(f>€ iriiTiLKi.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present, -w rpL^ui ayo} TreiOo)

1st Aor. -<r» rpCxpta aid) Treioro)

Perf. redup. -w TeTpicf}(a TrCTTClKO)

OPTATIVE.
Present, -oi(ii Tpi/SoL/XL ayoL/u TreiOoL/xL

Future, -<roi|xi Tptlf/OLfJLL a^oLfxi TTiLCrOLIU

1st Aor. -(TaijjLi TpLif/aLflt aiai/xL TreLcraifXL

Perf. redup. -olfii T€TpL(f>OllXL TTCTreLKOLjU

INFINITIVE.

Present, -€tv rpL/ScLv ay€iv iriiOcLV

Future, -<r€iv TpLlf/CLV a^ctv 7r€LCr€LV

1st Aor. -o-at TpliJ/aL a^at TTCicrai

Perfect, -«voi T€TpL(fi€Vai Tj-xivai TTCTTClKcVat

* In labials and guttiuals. See § 83, i, 7.

§84] ^lUTE VEEBS —ACTIVE, MIDDLE AND PASSmi. 79

Stem, TpL^' ay- irei 6-

PARTICIPLES.

Present, -«v Tpl^oiV ayiov TTClOoiV

Future, -<rwv rpixf/oiv a^oiV veicroiv

1st Aor. -<ras Tpiij/a? a^as TTClVa?

Perf. redup. -«s T€Tpl(f>(i><S "7X^5 TreireLKw^

Middle and Passive.

INDICATIVE.

Present, -ojiai TpifSo/JiaL ayo/xcu TTCtdofXaL

Imperf. e- . . -o|M]v iTpi/Sofxrjv rjyofirjv kiruBoix-qv

.-(JiaL TiTpiflfiaL ^y/xat TrcTrcKr/iat

-<rai T€TpL\f/aL T]$aL TreTTCKrat

Perf. -TOl Terpvirrdx T]KTaL TreVcioTai

redup. -fjLcOa rerpLfXfxeOa iqyixeOa ireKiicrp.iOa
-(<r)9. r€TpL(fi6€ rixOi TreireLcrOi

-(VTOI) T€TpifXfxivOl €iCrt(v] yyfxevoL €tcri(v \ 7r€7r€L(TfJL€VOL cicri(v)

-I^TIV (e)T€Tpi>/X7;V vyn-w (e)7r€7r€tV/xr;v

-0-0 (€)TeTptl/^0 (c)7r€7rcio-o

Plup. ii) -TO {i)T€.rpLTrTO ^KTO (i)7reTr€LcrTO

^

redup. -|i€6a (i)T€TpLIXlJ.€Oa TjyfjLiOa (i)7r€7r€Lcrfi€6a

-(<r)0. (^i)TeTpL<f>6€ (€)7re7r«o-^€
rixO^
L-(vTo) T€TpL^lxivoL rjcrav yy/xivoL yj(rav imrcLo-fiivoL rjorav

IMPERATIVE.

Present, -ov TpL^OV dyov tt^lBov

-<ro rirpLxl/o V^o TriiriKTO

Perf. -(o-)0w T€TpL(f>0(xi rJxOoi •77 ilT €10-9(0

redup. -(<r)9. TiTpLcfiOi rjxO€ TreTreLo-Oe

-(<r)0«crav T€TpL<{>Oix}(TaVf or rjxO^crav^ or TreTTCtcr^cucrav, or

T€TpL(f>6(i)V rjxOiiiV TTCTretcr^cuv

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, -«(iai Tpt'ySaJAtat aywfiaL wcii^cojLiai

Perf. p£irt. with(S ! T€TpLfi.fJi€VO'S U> yiy[xivo<i w TTCTTCtCr/XcVoS U)

80 MUTE VERBS —MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. [§84.

Stem, Tplfi- ay Tree e-

OPTATIVE.

Present, -o\,^y\v TpLJSoLjxrjv dyoLjJLrjv trCLOoLflTjV

Perf. part, with \ 7rc7rcicr/x.cVos tlrjv

IXFINITIVE.

Present, -€<r6ai rpi^ecrOaL ayccrOcu TTfLOca-Oax

Perfect, -(<r)0ai T€Tp1<j>6(U 1Q)(6(U ircTTCto-^ot

PARTICIPLES.

Present, -o|i€vos TpL/36fX€vos dy6fi€vo<; TTCt^O/XCVOS

Perf. redup. -|i€vos T€TptfifX€vos yjyixivo^; 7rc7rcto-/jteVo?

Middle only,
INDICATIVE.

Future, -<ro|jLat TpLxf/ofiai d^o/xaL ir€L(TOjxax

1st Aor. €-.. -<rd|n]v irpLxf/dfxrjv ri^dynfjv €7r€LCrdfL7]V

IMPERATIVE.

1st Aor. -o-ai Tplx^ai d^ax TTCIO-CU

SUBJUNCTIVE.

1st Aor. -<r«|iat TpLij/uyfxaL d^oifuu TetoroiiKU

OPTATIVE.

Future, -<roC}iT]v rpLxj/OLixrjv d^OLfjLtjv 7r€L(T0LfXrjV

1st Aor. -o-aCjjLTiv Tpuj/aLfjLfjv d^atjxrjv TreLCTaLfjiTjv

INFINITIVE.

Future, -<r€<r0ai Tpix^idOaL d^io-Oai TreicricrOcu

1st Aor. -<ra(r0ai Tptxj/aaOaL d^aaOcu TTiLcraa-Oax

PARTICIPLES.

Future, -o-<{|jicvos TpL\f/6p,€V0^ d$6fl€V0^ TTCtCrO/X.O'OS

1st Aor. -ordjievos TpL\f/dfX€VO^ d^dfxevo^ TTCicra/iCVOS

§ 85.] AiUfE VEliBS —PASSIVE. 81

Stem, Tpl^~ ay- TreLd-

Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
Future, -0TJo-o|iai TpL(f)6-qcrofJiaL axOi^a-OfJiaL TTUu-OrjcroiKn
1st Aor. €- . . -0T1V iTTiLO-Qriv

IMPERATIVE.
1st. Aor . -0tlTl rpicfiOTjTL axOrjTi TT^iaO-qri

SUBJUNCTIVE.

1st Aor. -0w TTUa-dtii

OPTATIVE.
Future, -9r]<roC\Lr]v rpi<ji07](roLfX7]v dxOrjcroLfjirjv iraa-O-qa-otpLtjv

1st Aor. -0€lT]V Tpi<^6€.Ly]v oixOeLrjv '7r€L(T6€Lr]V

INFINITIVE.

Future, -0iqo-£o-0ai TpL<f>6T^<i€cr6ai axO-qcrecrOaL TTU(T6rj(T€a-6(U

1st Aor. -0T]vak TTCtcr^^vat

PARTICIPLES.
Future, -0TJ(rojJL£VOS TpL(f)6r}(r6fJLevos axOrja-ofXivo^ 7r€L(r9r](T6fJi€voi

1st Aor. -0€lS TpL<f>6€LS d)(6€LS TTCia^CtS

VERBALS.
-Tos and -TC'OS TptTTTOS aKTOS TTCKTTOS

TptTTTCOS aKTCOS Trctcrreos

Note.—The Future Perfect, "Paulo-post Future" (see § 65, d, 7), is

once found in the Xew Testament (rec. text) : K^Kpd^ovrai (Luke xix. 40),
from Kpa^w (stem Kpa^-, § 85, a, 2, ii.). But as this is the only
instance, the tense has not been given in the paradigm. (W. H. read
Kpd^OV(TLV.)

85. Before treating of the remaining class of consonant- verbs,

i.e., those with a liquid stem-ending, it is necessary to notice a
most important modification to which very many mute verbs, as
well as those of other classes, are subjected.
82 MUTE VERBS : MODIFIED STEMS. [§ 85, a.

a. In the examples given, the stem appears full and unaltered in the
Present tense, rpi^ui is from the stem rpip-, ayw from 0,7-, and Trct^w from
irciO-. There are, however, many verbs in which the stem is modified
in the formation of the Present. It is therefore requisite to note two
main points first, the stem of the Verb, from which aU the tenses are
:

derived and secondly, the stem of the Present^ as found in Lexicons and
;

Vocabularies.

Labial stems are modified by the introduction of -t- before the

1.

termination. Thus : —
stem tvtt-, strike^ Present tutttw stem pXap-, hurt^ ;

Present pXairro) (for pXa/S-T-u), § 4, d,2)\ stem pi<j)-, throw Present ptWw ^

(for pJ(^-T-a), § 4, d, 2).

2. Guttural stems are modified by changing the stem-ending (i.)into —

-orer-, or its equivalent -rr- thus from the stem rav-, set in order, we
;

have Present racrcroi or tutto) : (ii.) into -S-, e.g., stem Kpa^-, cry out,

Present Kpdt,(D.

Dental stems are modified by changing the stem-ending into

3. -I- :

thus, from the stem <})pa8-, tell, comes the Present <^pa^w.

It will be seen that, as the Present termination -fw may be derived either
from a guttural or a dental stem, a knowledge of the verb will be required
before deciding to which of the two to refer it.^

b. The of these "strengthened" verbs, as they are called,

tenses
are formed from the verbal stem, according to the rules before given.
Thus—
TVTTTOi, to strike, TVTT- fut. TV\{/0) perf. reVv^a
(SXaTTTU), to hurt. pXap- >)
/iXaxj/ui /?e/3Aa^a
1 3 t 1

pLTTTd), to throw. ^i<J,- )> pLXJ/ili eppLqta

Tacro-o), to arrange. Ttt-y- >J rdifji T€Ta)(a

Kpd^O), to cry. Kpav- » Kpd$(i} KiKpaxa

</>pa^w, to tell, (}>pa8- >J (fipdcrw 7ri<f)paKa

^ The original modification of guttural and dental stems was probably by the
insertion of a sliort vowel (i or c) after the characteristic. So, ray-, rayiu:, Tda-aw ;

<J)pa8-, 0pa5^w, (fypd^a:. The softening occasioned by the vowel may be compared
with the effect of i upon i in the termination -iioju
§ 87.] MODIFIED VERBAL STEMS —SECOND AORIST. 83

c. Every class of mute verbs (as well as others, on which see hereafter)
may receive modification by the insertion of a vowel in a short stem-
syllable, so as to form a diphthong. Thus, <j>vy-, flee, gives ^eiryw, and
XiTT-, leave, XctTrcD. Only, in this case, the Future and Perfect are formed
from the stem of the Present, as AetVo), Aet'i/^w, XiXeicfta.

86. The most important point connected with the modification

of the stem is the introduction, into the verbs so characterised, of
a set of '' secondary " tenses, in which the unmodified stem appears.
These tenses, except in special cases, are of precisely similar mean-
ing to the corresponding "primary" tenses. For example, the
difference between the First and the Second Aorist is a difference
of form only. The same remark can hardly be applied so unre-
servedly to the First and Second Perfect; but the instances of
different meaning belong rather to the Lexicon than to the
Grammar, and will be explained in the Vocabulary.
Afew unmodified verbs, as ^x^} have a Second Aorist, as will be afterwarda
noted. Occasionally, too, the Second Aorist differs in meaning from the Fu'st.
The above rule, however, is general.

Second Aokist.

87. a. The Second Aorist Active in the Indicative resembles

the Imperfect, in the other moods the Present, except that the
Imperfect is taken from the modified, the Second Aorist from the
original stem.

Thus, from <^evyo> (^tvy-), to flee —

Imperfect, cc^cvyov, cc^euyc?, €<^€vy€(v), i(f}evyo/x€v, k.t-X.
Second Aorist, €<f>vyov, €<^uycs, c<^i7€(v), i^fivyofxev, k,tX
The augment and the terminations of the two tenses will be seen to
be exactly alike.

In the moods after the Indicative, the Second Aorist drops the
augment and follows the Present in termination, but accentuates the
final syllable of the Infinitive (perispomenon) and Participle (oxytone).
84 THE SECOND AOEIST. [§ 87, a.

With these explanations, the Second Aorist Active paradigm will

present no difficulty.

TyTTTO), to strike. XetTTci), to leave.

Stem, TfTT- AtTT-

Indicative, ervTTOv eXcTTov

Imperative, TVTre \iire
Subjunctive, TVTTCO XiTTO)

Optative, TVTTOLfjLt XtTTOLflt

Infinitive, Tvirelv Xnrelv
Participle, TVTTCOV, -
ovcra, -6v XCTTOOV

b. The Second Aorist Middle follows exactly the same analogy. The
Imperative, however, is perispomenon, the Infinitive paroxytone.

Indicative, €TV7rOfJL7]V iXcTTo/jLrjv

Imperative, Txrirov XtTTOV

Subjunctive, Tvircofiac XiTTcofiac
Optative, TV7rOLfJL7]V Xcttol/jltjv

Infinitive, TxnreaOai XiTriaOaL

Participle, TV7r6/JL6VO<; XL7r6/j,evo<;

c. Second Aorist Passive. — Here the mood and tense-endings are like
those of the passive Pii-st Aorist, the difference being that the unmodi-
fied root is used instead of the aspirated form with -0-. First Aorist,
€Tv(fi6T]v Second Aorist, irvTrrjv. In the Imperative second person, -0i
;

is found instead of -ru One paradigm of this tense will suffice :

Indicative, irvTrrjv Optative, rvireiriv

Imperative, TvirTfOt, TV7n]Tco Infinitive, rvTrr/vac
Subjunctive, tuttw Part. TU7ret9, Tinrelcra, rvirev

Second Futuee.

88. In the Passive voice there is a Second Putnre connected

with the Second Aorist, exactly as the First Future is connected with
the First Aorist. —
Thus, from Tvirrtu wc have First Aor. pass., iTv<j>d-qv ;
 — —

§ 90.] SECOND FUTURE AND SECOND PERFECT. 85

First Fut., TV(f>0rj(TOfjLaL ; Second Aor., Irvirqv ; Second Fut., nnrqcro^at.

The paradigm is as follows :

Indicative, Tmrrjaofxai Infinitive, TVTnja-eadac

Optative, TVTnjaoijjLTjv Participle, TU7nja6fMevo<;

Second Perfect.
89. The Second Perfect belongs Active voice only, and is
to the
distinguished from the ordinary Perfect of mute verbs by having the
unmodified stem without the aspirate. Thus tvttto) (tvit-), First Perl, :

T€TV(f>a ; Second Perl, rervTra. The tense is of rare occurrence, and its

special significance willhave to be explained in individual cases. It

occurs in some verbs that do not modify their stem. The Second Plu-
perfect accompanies it where found. One paradigm here also will be
sufficient. Second Perfect of irpaaa-ui (irpaY-), ^^ ^^ •*

Indicative, ireirpw^a Optative, nreTrpar/oifii

„ Plup. (i)'7T€7rpcuyeLv Imperative, ireirpa'ye

Subjunctive, ireirpouya) Infinitive, TreTrpayevat

Participle, TreTrpayco';, -via, -09.

90. General Kules for the Second Tenses.

1. These do not occur in the pure verbs, or in verbs having a dental,
T| 8, (t), for their characteristic.

2. The same verb very seldom takes both First and Second Aorist
in the Active or Middle.
3. The Passive may have both First and Second Aorist and Future.
4r. When both First and Second Perfect active are found, the former
is often transitive, the latter intransitive. TreVpaxa, / have done;
ircTrpaya, / have fared (compare English, " How do you do ?").

—
Remark. For the vowel-modifications of the second tenses, see the
sections on Tense-formation, §S 93 99. —
Exercise 11.— On Mute Verbs.
[Vocahularyy from the "Sermon on the Mount." — (1) Labial Stems :

^XcVo), to see ; dXct'^co, to anoint ; OXt/Soi, to straiten ; K/ovVroj, to

hide ; yiTmo, to wash ; a-rpefjiii), to turn ; rpi<\>ui (Op€<|>-), to nourish*
86 MUTE AND LIQUID VERBS. [§ 90.

(2) Guttural Stems : aya>, to lead ; Slwko), to purme ; €x<o (kx), to

have; Xeyw, to say; Trpoo-cvxo/xat, to pray (dep.). (3) Dental Stems :

\J/ev8ofxaL, to lie (dep.) ; oi/etSi^w, to reproach ; So^a^w, to glorify;

voixLt,(iiy to suppose; vrjOiHy to spin; dyia^w, to hallow."]

Analyse and translate the following words : — SeStwy/teVot, ovciStVcjo-tv,

Stto^ovai, xj/cvSo/xevoLy eStw^av, Kpv(3rjvaL, So^dcroiCTL, vo/jtto-iyrc, c^ct, crrpixj/ovy

'jrpo(T€vx^o'0€y Stw/covTwv, c^CTe, ^XeVwv, Trpocrevxi), Trpoo-ev^at, Trpoarevxo/J.cvoL^

ayiacr^T^Tw, aActi/^at, viif/aL, ySAeVwv, KAeVrovai, VT/^et, XcyovTC?, arpdcjievTe^
(see § 98, tZ), Te^Xi/A/AeVvy.

Also the following : ^Xenf/c, rj-yLaa-jxivoL, dyiatrat, eSi'wKov, KeKpvfjLfiiva^

Xeyd/xevos, Xe^Oct'Si Trpoarjvx^'^^f Trpocrcv^d/xevoL, 6pii}/u).

Liquid Verbs.

91. Verbs with the stem-endings X, |a, v or p, present many

variations from the foregoing models, which will be*noticed in the
sections on Tense-formation. It will be sufficient, as introductory
to the paradigms, to observe

a. The stem of these verbs is generally modified in the Present

e.g., stem ayyA-j announce^ Present act. dyyeXXw ; <j)av-, appear, Pres.

h. The Future active originally ended in -^<r«, middle -^orofiai ; but

the <r being dropped (see a similar case in Nouns, § 30, iv.), two vowels
are brought together, and contraction ensues. Thus, dyycX-, Put.
(dyyeXe-c-a), dyyeXe-w), dyyeXw J
middle (dyyeX-e-(r-o/xat, dyycX-e-o/xat),

dyycXov/Atti. The Future active and middle of liquid verbs is therefore

declined like the Present of contracted pure verbs with stem-
ending €-.

c. The First Aorist active and middle follows the Future in the
omission of the o-, but lengthens the vowel of the preceding syllable.
Thus :—
tfiaiVd) «j>av-, fut. <f>av(o 1st Aor. €<f>rjva

dyyeXXo) ayyiK-, „ dyycXw » •^yyaXa

Kptvu) Kpiv-, ,, KplvOi j>
€Kplva
avpa) a-vp-, „ (rvpij>
j>
ta-vpa,
§92.] LIQUID VERBS —THEIR CONJUGATION. 87

d. In the Perfect active, as v- and y.- cannot come before -k, various

expedients are adopted. KptVw, to judge, kXlvo), to bendy irAvvw, to wash,

drop the v (Ke/<ptKa, etc.). Other verbs, as <^atvw, adopt a Second Perfect,
lengthening the vowel as in the Aorist (7re<f>7]va). Others, again, form

the Perfect as from a pure root in €-, as /xevo), to remain, fxejjLivrjKa, as

if from fjL€V€(j).

In the Perfect passive, v- is changed into o-- or into |i- before -jiat;
e.

thus, from <}>av-, 7rec/!)acr/xat instead of 7r€<jiav-ixai, and from ^iipav-, i^-qpaiMfxaL
instead of i^-qpav-ixaL. The three verbs which drop v- before -Ka in the
Perfect active, lose it also in the Perfect and First Aorist passive. Thus,
KiKpLfxai, iKpcO-qv. Those verbs which assume a root in e- for the Perfect
active, construct the passive Perfect and First Aorist after the same
analogy.

92. Paradigms.

Stem, ay/eX- KpiV- dp-

Strengthened, dyyeXX- Kplv- alp-

Active.
INDICATIVE.

Present, ayyiXXo) Kplvco atpco

Imperfect, '^yyeWov CKpiVOV TJpOV

Future sing. ayyeXSt) Kpcvco dp(o

}> » ayy6\€L<; Kpi,vel<i dpel<i

» » ayyeXel KpLvel ap€t

„ plur. ayyeXov/iev /CpLV0VfJL6V apOVfjL€V

» M a/yyeXeLTe KpLvelre dpelre

» » ayyeXovcn(y) Kpivovaiiy) dpovcn>(v)

1st Aorist, rjyyeiXa €Kplva ^pa

Perfect, TjyyeXKa KeKpXKa fipKa
Pluperfect, rjyyeXKecv (i)K6KpLKeLV fjpKeLV
2nd Aorist, 7]yyeXov TjpOV
88 LIQUID VERBS —PARADIGMS. [§92.

Stem, ayyeX- KpXv- dp-

Strengthened, ayyeXk- Kplv^ alp-

IMPERATIVE.

Present, dyyeWe Kplve alpe

1st Aorist, djyeiXov Kpivov dpov
Perfect, 7]<y<y6\K6 KeKpUe ypK€
2nd Aorist, dyyeXe ape

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present, dyyiWo) KplvCO aUpco

1st Aorist, dyyeiko) Kpivoi dpCD
Perfect, '^yyeXKCo KeKpUco fjpKCO

2nd Aorist, dyyiXd) dpoa

OPTATIVE.

Present, a/yyeXKoijxi KpLVOlflt aipocfit

Future, dyyeXoLfit oi -OITJV KpLVolfJbL or -OLTJV dpolfll

•
or -OLTJV

1st Aorist, dyyelXaLfiL KpivaifiL dpatfjLi

Perfect, rjyyekKOHii, KeKpLKOOflC fjpKOipt,

2nd Aorist, dyyiXoLfic dpotfJLC

INFINITIVE.

Present, dyyeXKetv KpiveiV aipeiv

Future, dyyeXetv KpLvelv dpelv
1st Aorist, dyyelXat Kplvat, dpac
Perfect, rjyyeXKevaL KeKpCKevai rjpKevat

2nd Aorist, dyyeXetv dpelv

PARTICIPLES.

Present, dyyeTCXcov Kpivu)v atpayv

Future, dyyeXoiv KpiVCOV dpcov
1st Aorist, dyyelXa^i KpLva<; dpa<;

Perfect, rjyyeXKoyf; KeKpLKoa^ ypKm

2nd Aorist, dyyeX(t)V dpcov
§92.] LIQUID VERBS —PARADIGMS. 89

Stem dyyeX- Kptv- ap-

Strengthened, ayyeXK' Kplv- alp-

Middle and Passive.

*

INDICATIVE.

Present, dyyeWo/iai, Kpivofiat alpofiai

Imperfect, '^yyeWo/jLTjv eKptvofirjv rjpofiTjv

Perfect, 7]y<y€\ijLat K6KpXfiaL 'Spfiai

Pluperfect, Tjyyek/jLTjv {i)K6KpL/n)v rjpfiTjv

IMPERATIVE.

Present, dyyiWov Kpivov aXpov

Perfect, 7]yye\(ro, -6(o KeKpLCo, -aOco ypcTo, flpdoy
K.rJk,

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present, ayyeWcofiaL Kpivwfiai atp CO fiat,

Perfect, '^yeX/Jbivo^ w K6Kpifievo<; w fipfxevo^ w
OPTATIVE.

Present, dyyeWoLjjLrjv Kpcvolfirjv alpoLfi7)v

Perfect, rjyye\^ivo<i etrjv KeKpifjuevo^ ellrjv TjpflivO^ €LT]V

INFIXITIVE.

Present, ayyeXKeaOaL KplveaOai alpecrOai

Perfect, rjyyiXOai KeKpicrOai, flpSai

PARTICIPLES.
Present, ayyeXKofievo^ KpLvofievof; alp6fi6vo<:
Perfect, riyy€\fiivo<: KeKpLfiivo^ ypp,ivo<:

Middle only.
INDICATIVE.

Future, ayyeXovfiac Kpivovfiac dpovfiai

1st Aorist, 'qyyeiXdfirjv eKpcvdfiJjv r/pdfjLTjv
gnd Aorist, dyyeXofjLTjy vpoprjv
90 LIQUID VERBS —PARADIGMS. L§92.

Stem, ayyeX- KpLV- ap-

Strengthened, dyyeXX- Kplv- alp'

IMPERATIVE.

1st Aorist, ayyeCkaL Kplvai apai

2nd Aorist, dyyeXov dpov
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 i A -_ '^i. > /-v >/

1st Aorist, dyyelXayfiai Kplvco/JLac apco/JLai

2nd Aorist, dyye\o)p>ao dpcojJLat

OPTATIVE.

Future, dyyeXoL/jLTjv Kpivoip.rjv dpOL/xrjv

1st Aorist, dyyeCkaiii7)v KpLvalp,7jv dpalfirjv

2nd Aorist, dyyeKoip^rjv dpol/JLTjv

INFINITIVE.

Future, dyyekelaOai KpLvelaOa dpetadai

1st Aorist, dyyeiXaaOai KpivacrOai dpaaOai
2nd Aorist, dyyeKeaOat dpecrOai

PARTICIPLES.

Future, dyyeXovfievo^ KpLVovfievo^i apovp.6VO<;

1st Aorist, dyyeiXdiievo^ Kpivafxevo^ dpd/JL€VO<i

2nd Aorist, dyy6X6fjL€vo<; dp6jJL6VO<;

Passive only.

INDICATIVE.

dyyeXO^CTO/xai KpiOrjcrofiai dpOrjaofiai

1st Future,
TjyyeXOrjv iKpldrjv 7]pdrjv
1st Aorist,
TjyykXrjv 7]pr)v
2nd Aorist,
dyyeXtjaofiai dpi](70/JLaL
2nd Future,
IMPERATIVE.

1st Aorist, dyyeXOrjTL KplOijTL dpOrjTt

2nd Aorist, dyyeXydi dprjdt

§92.] LIQUID VERBS. 'Jl

Stem, ayyeX- Kpiv dp-

Strengthened, ayyeXK- Kplv alp-

SUBJUNCTIVE.

1st Aorist, dyyeXdco KpiOoy dpOco

2nd Aorist, dyyeXo) dpoi

OPTATIVE.

1st Future, cuyyeXdrjaoLfMTjv KpLOrjaoLfjLTjv dp6rj(7ol/JLr]V

1st Aorist, dyyekdeiT}V Kpidelrjv dpOelrjv

2nd Aorist, dyyeXelrjv dpeirjv

2nd Future, dyy€\T]aoL/jL7}v dprjaoiprjv

INFINITIVE.

1st Future, dyy€\6rjcr6(T6aL KpiOrja-ecrOai, dpOrjaeadai

1st Aorist, dyyeXOrjvac Kpidrjvac dpdrjvac
2nd Aorist, dyyeXrjvaL dprjvat.

2nd Future, dyyeXrjaeadai, dpjjaeadac

PARTICIPLES.

1st Future, dyy6X67](r6fjLevo<; KptOrjo-opevo^ dpd7]a6/jLevo<i

1st Aorist, dyyeXdei<i Kpidet^i dpdeh
2nd Aorist, dyyeXei^; dpeh
2nd Future, dyyeXrjdo^evo^ dp7]a6/jL6VO<;

VERBALS.
dyyeXT6<i KpLT6<^ dpT6<i
dyyeXTio<; Kpirio*; dpTeo^

*^* It is not to be supposed that all the above forms are actually
in use. They are given as TrapaSety/xaTa, examples, of words that may
occur.

Exercise 12.— On Liquid Verbs.

[Vocahulary, from the "Sermon on the Mount." — avidvoj, to groin,
to increase ; /SdXXo), to throw, cast ; OiXm, to will (augment with t], comp.
§ 94, II.) Kpivoi, to judge ; /xoapaivo), to corrupt ; cnrdpoi, to soic ; cfiaiviOf
;

to show (Second Aorist, passive or middle, appear) x'^^P^y ^^ rejoice.]

;
^2 LIQUID VERBS. [§ 92. <

Analyse and translate the following forms :

x^V'^^^j fioipavOrj, /SX-qOrjvaL
(see § 98, c), jSXrjOrjcrr]^ /JaXc, ^XrjOr}, OiXovTLy KpiOrjvai, <^av^s, tTTTCipovcrtv,
av$aLV€L, ^aXXofxevov, KpiOTJre, KpiO^a-ea-Oi, jSdXrjTCy Oik-qre.

Also the following : — ^eXct, riOiXov^ yOeXrja-a, ^cXovrcs, /cptVet, Acpivct,

KpLvaT€, ifxtopdvOrja-av, c/Acopavcv, (TTrcLpdiv, (nrapeCsy la-irapfxkvov^ c^avi/,

0aiVco-^€, ^avetrat, ^aAc, (SXrjOTjTiy ^dWeiVf /JaXctf, ^oAXcd, paXd,

Notes on the Tenses.

93. The foregoing paradigms have fully given the typical forma
of the First Conjugation, i.e., and of
of the great majority of verbs,
most of the tenses in all verbs. must Manv minute variations
now be noticed, with apparent irregularities, which for the most
part can themselves be reduced to rule, or explained by some early
usaijje of the lanouacje.

Accentuation. — It may be repeated at the outset from § 73, that verbal forms
mostly retract tJie accent, i.e., throw it back as far as possible. Exceptions are
noted below under the different Tenses. When the accent falls on the penulti-
mate, e.g., in dissyllables, a long vowel is circumflexed, in certain forma, as has
been already shown.

The Present and Imperfect: Active, Middle, and Passive.

94. I. The Present Indicative Active, first person (the form usually
given in Lexicons, Vocabularies, and Concordances i) contains the verbal
stem, often modified.

The principal forms of modified stem are as follows :

1. Labial stem-endings, strengthened by t-. (See § 85, a, 1.)

2. Short stem-syllables lengthened. (See § 85, c.)

3. The euphonic <r<r-, tt-, for a guttural characteristic ; I- for a dental,

or occasionally for 7-. (See § 85, a, 2, 3.)

4. XX- for the characteristic X-. (See note^ § 85.)

^ Pruder's Concordance^ 4to (Tauchnitz), gives the Present InfinUive,

 : :

§ 94.J ON TENSE-FORMATION. 03

5. The letter v- affixed to the stem-syllable.

This may take place in different ways.

a. To a pure stem, simply affixed :

Thus, from 0^a-, (pddpo), to anticipate,

from TTt-, vivoj, to drink.

b. Two consonant stems follow this model

from Kafj.-, Kd/xv(a, to he weary,
from 5aK-, daKvu, to bite,

c. One affixes ve-, i<f)LK-, d(piKve6iJiai, to arrive.

d. To a pure stem lengthened, two verbs only

from /3a-, /SatVw, to go,

from eXa-, iXavvio, to drive.

e. To a consonant stem, with connective a:

from d/j-apT-, dfiaprdvu}^ to sin,

from Xa/3-, Xafi^dvu, to take.

In the last-mentioned verb it will be seen that fi is also inserted in the stem-syllable.
This (made /* before a labial, § 4, d, 5). So iiavddvb), to learn,, from ^a^-,
is for -v-

and other verbs. The stem appears in the Second Aorist, rmaprov, ^\a/3ov, (fuidov.

6. An alternative pure stem in c-.

This appears generally in the Future, Aorist, and Perfect.

Thus, ^x^ *iid <^X^-i to have, ^w, e^w, or crxv<^(^> ^(^XV^o-', Second Aor., ?<txov.
6e\- and deXe- (also ideX-), to will, ^e\a>, deX-qa-o}, ideXrjaa.
fiev- and fieve-, to remain, /n^vu), /xefievrjKa.

Occasionally the e-stem appears in the Pres. Thus, doK- and Sokc-, to appear, So/cw
(5o/c^w), 56|w, ido^a.

Some of the verbs under 5, «, have a similar alternative stem. Thus, from d/JLaprdput
we find dfiaprqcroj, T)/xdprT]Ka.

7. The inchoative form (so called because some verbs of this class
denote the beginning of an action), in ck- or wtk-.

Pure stems add -<rK-, generally lengthening a short stem-vowel. So, Ova-, trans-
posed from 6av-, to die, dvfjffKCj, ?^a»'Oj', Perf. ridv-qKa,
Consonant stems add -ktk-, and
have an alternative stem in c-.
often, as in 6,
Thus, irdax^y to suffer {irad-, with
cyp-, tupc-, to find, evpiaKU), evprjau, evprjKa, eiipov.
alternative stem, vevd-), has Second Aor. iiradov, Second Perf. Triirovda. diddaKcj, to
teach, originally from 5a-, assumes a mute guttural stem: Fut, diSd^u; First Aor.
pass., iSiddx^v-
Verbs of this class are very various in form, as exhibited in the Lexicon or
Vocabulary.
94 ON TENSE-FOEMATION. [§ 94.

8. Reduplicated stems, the initial consonant repeated with t.

Four verbs of this class are of very common occurrence.

a. yivofiai (deponent intransitive), to become, stem yep-, by reduplication yiyev-,
shortened into yiyv-, the second y- being dropped for the sake of euphony; Impf.,
iytvofiTjw; Inf., ylvecrdai; Second Aor., iyevo/xTjv, yeveadai.

b. yivdjffKO}, to become acquainted with,

to Tcnoiv. Stem yvo-, which becomes ypuxTK-,
after the model of then by reduplication yiyuwaK-, when y- is dropped, as in
class 7 ;

the last instance; Fut., ypiocrofiai; Perf., eypuKa; Second Aor., ^pojp (like second
conjugation).
c. fiifxPT^aKOfiat, to remember (deponent), from fipa-, fiprjcrofiai, ifjLPrjcrdrjp, fie/jLPrjfiai.

d. TriTTTO}, to fall. This

not a labial verb strengthened by t-. Its root is Trer-,
is

by reduplication irnreT-. The weak vowel -e- is then dropped, leaving ttlttt: Second
Aor., ^ireaop, the <r- being softened from t- Fut., Tre<rovfuii ; Perf., TreTrrw/ca. (Compare
;

§ 96, d.)

II. The Imperfect Texse always follows the stem of the Present,
the Augment being prefixed.
For the Augment, consult § 69. After the Augment, an initial -p- is
doubled, as from pvo/xai ; Impf., ippvo/x-qv First Aor., ippvcrOrjv. A few ;

verbs have the Attic double augment t] instead of €. Thus, /xeAAw, to he

about to do a thing, has efxeWov and •^/acXA.oi/ interchangeably, opaw, to
sec, has a double augment also : Impf., koiptav j Perf., cwpdKo. (See
further under the Aorist, § 97.)

The Second Aorist, Active and Middle.

95. This the simplest of the Tenses (see § 87), and in general con-
is

tains the exact verbal stem. Hence it is mainly found in verbs whose
Present-stem is modified. So Imperf., hvinov', Second Aor., h-mrov.
In one verb, ayco, to where the Present-stem is unmodified, the
lead,

Second Aorist is distinguished from the Imperfect by a reduplication :

Impf., y]yov ; Second Aor., ^yayov ; Inf., dyayctv.

2\^ole, — Some short stem-syllables with e- change this into a- in the Second Aorist,
as from a-ireipw, to sow {airep-), eawapop.

The Vowel Aorist. —A few pure stems (like the second conjugation,
or " verbs in -pt") affix the tense-endings to the stem, with lengthened
vowel, rejecting the usual modal vowel.
Thus, yLvw(TK(i> ("yvo-, see § 94, 8, b), eyviav.

8ui/(o, to set (as the sun) (8v-), eSw.

jSatVto), to (JO (Pa-), (.p-qv.

 —

§ 96, h.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 95

For the conjugation of these forms, see paradigms of verbs in -|jli.

Accentuation. —The Second Aorist active infinitive circumflexes the final

syllable: rvwelv; in the participle accents the stem-syllable -ovt, with a circum-
flex on the fem. where possible: tvttQv, rvwova-a, rvirbv. In the middle the
imperative is perispomenon, tvkov ; the inf. paroxytone, Tviricdau

The Future, Active and Middle.

96. For the relation between the Future stem and the simple stem
of the verb, consult § 85, &, c.

a. In pure stems, the vowel is lengthened before the Future charac-

teristic -<r-. The stem-endings a- and €- become r\- ; o- becomes w- i- and ;

V- are made long. Thus, rt/xdw, tlix-^o-id ; ^tAew, (jaX-qcro); St/Xow, SrjXwaoi;
Xv(o, Xv(r(i).

Exceptions : (i.) a- becomes d- after a vowel or p. Thus :—

id(D, to permit^ Fut. idcroixaL.

idofxaif to Ileal, ,, IdaofxaL.

TreLpdo/xat, to try, ,, TreLpda-ofxaL*

So, ireLvdo), to hunger, ,, Tretvaorw.

^aXdo), to loosen, ,,
;j(a\a(r(o.

But xpdojxai, to use, makes ^(pT^crofxaL.

(ii.) The following verbs do not lengthen their stem-endings for the
Future 1 :

a-forms : yeXao), to laugh, Fut. yeAacrw.

kXclo), to break. KAacro).

€-f orms : dpKew, to suffice, apKcVw.

c7rati/€(o, to praise. €7ratv€o-a).

KoXioi, to call. KoXeoro).

reXim, to finish, TeXecru).

<j>op€(i), to carry. cf)op€(roi.

Verbs in ila (stem i8-) usually drop the -a-- Future characteristic,
b.

replacing it by a contraction similar to that of the liquid verbs. This

form is called the Attic Future.

^ Some of these verbs are regular in classic Greek.

oc ON tENSE-FOilMATIOl^. f § 96, K

Thus : d(f)opL^<j}, to separate^ lakes Fut. d<^opio).

))
iX-jnoi.

Ko/jLi^uij to carry >) Kopxui, mid. KOfxiovyLOL.

KaOapt^w, to purify, »»
KaOaptw and Ka^apcVo).
ySttTTTt^w, ^0 baptize, M /?a7rTto-(o only.
aaXiTL^oi, to sound a trumpet, J n o-oXttiVo) only.^

But the verbs of this class which drop -a- in the Future, resume it in the First
Aorist ; so far differing from the liquid verbs.

c. Three verbs in -i<a, originally -€/«, show the digamma (see § 29, iii.)

in inflection as v :

7rA.€0), to sail, Fut. 7rA.€vcro/i,at.

ir|/€0>, to hloiO, „ TTJ/CVCO).

pew, to flow, „ p€V(TiD.

Another digammated verb, xcw> io pour, omits the o- altogether, and

conforms to the Attic Future, retaining, however, the c before the circum-
flexed final iKx^o), I ivill pour forth (Acts ii. 17).
:

In this class the First Aorist characteristic conforms to that of the Future. So
iTTveuera. From efcxew is formed First Aor. i^ex^a, uncontracted.

To the digammated verbs may be referred Kaiw, to burn, Fut. Kauo-w

KXato), to iceep, Fut. Kkava-m and KXavcro/xat (Luke vi. 25 ; Kev. xviii. 9).

(See d.)

d. Several active verbs of frequent occurrence have a Future in the

middle form, still with active meaning ; as

aKovia, to hear, Fut. aKovaro/xaL, or aKOvaro).

^ao), to live, f,
^-qao/xaL, or ^rjcro).

XafjL/3dv(j}, to take, X-qxJ/ofjLai (from XaP", Xi]ij/-).

6avfxd^w, to wonder, 6av/JLd(T0fxaL, once,

^cvyw, to flee, ^cu^o/xat.
•KLVdi, to drink. TTtOfiaL, -€Orai, -€TaL (Lukc XVll. 8).

The First Aorist, Active and ^Iiddle.

97. Connection of the Aorist stem with that of the Future.

a-

(1) In the pure and mute verbs, the o- of the Future is retained.
(2) In the liquid verbs, the Aorist lengthens a short vowel before the

^ In classic Greek, aaXiriy^u}, from stem o-aX7ri77-,

g 97, h.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 97

stem-ending. Thus, cnrcp-, to soio; Fut., a-rrepQ); First Aor., ecTretpa; and
from ayvcX-, -^yyetAa,

Verbs in aivw, from the stem -av-, generally have d in the Future, a in the First
Aorist. So, Xfu/caiVw, ^o whiten; Fut., Xei'A:d;'u;; First Aor., eXei/Kdva. arjfmlvu}, to

signify; First Aor. inf., <n)ixd.vai (Acts xxv. 27). Similarly, i-n-Kpavai (Luke i. 79),
from iiri, (paivu,^ to show, appear. But Kepda'.vw, to gain, Fut. Kepbdvu), makes
iKepdrjca, as from an alternative pure root, Kepda-,

b. Peculiarities of Augment. —The double augment is occasionally

found dvotyo), to
: also rjvoi^a. Compound verbs prefix
open, aviio^a,
the augment to the verbal stem but where the compound has lost its
;

force, or has usurped the place of the simple verb, the augment may

precede the whole verb. Thus, from irpo<f>r)T evoi, lirpocfi^Tevcra, instead of
Trpocc^rjrcvcra. The prefix €v,icell, is sometimes augmented into -qv-,
sometimes left unaltered. But a verbal stem after ev, beginning with
a, €, o, is itself augmented. So, from evayycAt^o/xai, to preach the Gospel^
we have evrjyycXLo-d/xrjv, not rjvayycXLcrdfJirjv.

The root makes First

dy-, to break (second conjugation, AyvvfiL (with prefix Kara-,
Aor. Karea^a (John xix. 32), instead of But as the e is found in the
Karrj^a.
Future of the same verb (Karect^et, Matt. xii. 20), and in the Second Aor. subj.
pass. (KaTeayCoffi, John xix. 31), it may mark a collateral form of the verb, and not
be intended as an augment.^
The Aorist augment of the verb atpu (see § 92) is variously printed y or ^. The
stem which is lengthened.
latter is correct, as it is the simjylc
N^ote. —
Some verbs in the LXX. have a kind of compound Aorist tense ("Alexan-
drian"), like the First in termination, but like the Second in tense-form: i.e.,
attaching First Aorist terminations to the simple verbal stem. So in classic Greek,
ijveyKov or ijveyKa. (See § 103, 6.) An instance in the Xew Testament of the Alex-
andrian Aorist is Heb. ix. 12, evpdfxevos. Many others occur in the most ancient
MSS., and have been adopted into critical editions, as eireaav (compare § 94, 8, d),
and ctTra in different numbers and persons; in imper., dirdrwaav (Acts xxiv. 20).
Accentuation. —The active First Aor. Infinitive accents the penultima, cir-
cumflexing diphthongs and long vowels, as <pv\d^ai, iriaTevaai. The act.
all

Optative third person sing, has an acute accent on the same syllable, the at being
here regarded as long, as Tna-Tevaai. The same form again is found in the middle
Imperative the at, as usual, being treated as short, and the accent thrown back,
;

as wiffTevffai. Only in monosyllabic stems, where the accent must be on the penul-
tima, a long vowel is circumflexed, as XOo-ai. To present the three cases at one
—
view: Act. Opt., 1st Aor., third pers. sing., iriffTeijaai Xi)<rat <f>v\d^ai.
Active, 1st Aorist, infinitive, iriffTevffai \vffai <pv\d^ai.
Middle, 1st Aorist, imperative, irloTevaai \vaai. 0i5Xa|ai.

^ The classical First Aor. of (paivco is ^(pTjva.

' Or it may be simply to distinguish the forms from those of /cardyw, to lead dowiu
H
98 on tense-formation. [§ 98.

The Aorists and Futures Passive.

98. d' The First Aorist, Future and Perfect (with the Pluperfect)
Passive, have generally the same modification of the verbal root.
Thus, from Ti|xa-, eTLfxrjOrjVj Teri/AT^/xai ; from Xv-, iXvOrjv, XWrjcroixai,
XiXvfxai and from irctO-, CTrctV^r^v, TTCLo-OrjoroixaL, TreTreic/xai.
; To know
one of these Tenses is, therefore, a help to the knowledge of the rest.
But o-to^oj, to save, makes icrioOrjv and a-ecroyo-fjLaL.
b. The chief variation in the stem-syllable of these tenses from the
ordinary model is in the case of pure verbs. Usually, these lengthen
the vowel stem-ending. In several verbs, however, the short vowel
remains, as in IhiO-qv, IXvOrjv, and others. In many, again, the letter o- is
inserted after the stem, as in IrfXia-O-qv (Perf., TereAecr/xat), ixaXda-Orjv
(2 Cor. xi. 33), and from pvofxai, to deliver, ipva-Orjv (2 Tim. iv. 17).
Thus, also, from aKovti), to hea?', yKovaOrjv, aKovadi^a-ofxaL, rJKOvcr/xaL,

c. The transposition of a vowel and liquid, in short monosyllabic

roots, is very common in these tenses. Thus, paX-, to throw, becomes
pXa-, and gives i^XrjOrjv, pXrjOrjarojxaL, Pe^Xrj/xaL. The rOOt koXc-, to call,

is treated as koX-, KXa-; First Aor. Pass., iKXrjOrjv ; Fut., KXrjOrjarofiaL

Perf., K€KXrj/jLat.

d. A weak vowel in a short liquid stem is often changed into a.

This rule generally applies to the Perfects Active and Passive, and to
the Aorists and Futures Passive (sometimes also to the Second Aorist
Active : see § 95, note). Thus, from dTroo-reAAo), to send forth ((ttcX-),

airka'Ta.XKa, a7rco"Ta\/xat, a.TTf.cTTa.X'qv, a.irocrTaXrj(ro^ai. The verb ttlvio, to

drink (KaraTriVo), to swallow), changes t into o. So we find ueVcoKa,

KareTroOrjv, KaTairoOi^cro/xaL.

e. The First Aorist and Future Passive are chiefly found in pure stems

and derivative verbs the Second in original consonant-verbs. Where,

;

too, the First would give an inharmonious concurrence of letters, the

Second will generally be employed. Both are seldom used in the same
verb. But a verb that has the First Aorist in the Active may have
the Second in the Passive, and vice versa.

For the usage of particular verbs, consult the Vocabulary. irX-qacu}, irXrjy-, to
strike,makes second Aor. iifkiiyriv but in compounds rj becomes a, as e^eirXdyrjaav
;

(Luke ii. 48) 0i5w, to.grow, has the Second Aor. participle <f>viv (Luke viii. 6, 8).
;

Irregularities of Augment in the Aorists Passive. — KaTei\rj(f>dr], in many copies of

John viii. 4; direKaTeaTddr) (e after both prepositions): Matt, xii 13. From avoiyo)
 —

§ 99, c] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 99

(compare § 99, a, 3) we find rivolxOW} avei^x^V^t v^'^VX^V^ 5 3-^^ Second Aor, iivoiytjv,

with Second Future dpoiy-^cro/xai.

AccentuaMon. —The Aorists Passive circumflex the Subjunctive mood-vowel
throughout, and the penultima of the Inf. -rjvai. The participle accents the
stem-syllable -evr throughout, with a circumflex on the fern, wherever possible.
Thus: \v6eis, Xvdeiffa, \v6lv,
\v6hT0i, XvdeiarjSy \vdivTOi, k.t.\.

The Perfect and Pluperfect, Active, Middle, and Passive.

99. a. For the Reduplication, see § 69. The following variations

must be noted :

1. A
verb beginning with two consonants, other than a mute fol-
lowed by a liquid, or with a double consonant, takes c Thus, o-T€<^avo(i),
to crown, icTTefjxxvuiKa, i(TT€(f>dv(ofJiaL ; ^T/paiVto, to Wither, iit^pafifxaL. So
when V follows -y-, as from 7V0-, eyiw/ca.

2. The verb Xd/x/Savo), Xap-, takes el- instead of the reduplication,^

€iXrj(f)a.

3. Some verbs beginning with a, «, or o take a double reduplication

in the active.

aKOvct), to hear, aKrjKoa.

{kXvB-), to come, iX-^XvOa (see § 103, 2).

The verb dvot-yw (see §§ 97, 98) may have a double reduplication in
the perf. pass., -^ucioyfjiivr} (Rev. iv. 1).

4. The Pluperfect New

Testament generally omits the aug-
in the
ment, taking only the reduplication, as Te^e/xeXtwTo, it had been founded
(Matt. vii. 25).

h For the termination of the Active Perfect third person plural,

many MSS. frequently give -av, like the First Aor. In John xvii. 7
the rec. text reads eyvcuKav.
c. The Second Perfect active takes the termination of the First with-
out the characteristic -k- or aspirate, and often modifies a vowel in the
stem-syllable, preferring o. Thus, XetVo), XiXoL-n-a, irdcrxo) (alternate stem,
ir€v6-), TTCTTOV^a.

This tense is often intransitive ; as from weidu}, to persuade, First Perf. triireiKa,
I have persuaded; but Second Perf. ireToida, I have confidence, Ifully believe. To

^ So in classic Greek some other verbs, as XaTxcivw, e^XT^xa.

100 TENSE-rOEMATIOX. —DEPU^'ENT VERBS. [§ 99, C.

the class of Second Perfects belong the forms &t/ca, / am like (/t/c-) ; oT5a, / know
{ri5-). (See § 103.)

When the stem-ending' of the verb is an aspirate —mute, labial or

guttural —the Perfect is in the Second, or unaltered, form: as from ypa.^-,

to write, ykypa<^a.

d. Some peculiarities of the Perfect Passive have been noted under

the head of the Aorist. Vowel changes in the stem-syllable are given in
the Lexicon or Vocabulary. So, also, the insertion or otherwise of -o--

after a vowel stem-ending.

E.g., Tp€(f)(ii, to nourish (0p€(f>-), rerpo^a, TcOpa/xfjiaL. Again, Opavoi,
to crush, makes TeOpavo-fjLat (Luke iv. 18) ; but Travo/xai, to cease,

TreVav/xat (1 Pet. iv. 1).

e. The Future-Perfect (passive in classic Greek ; called often the

Paulo-post Future) is but the middle Future reduplicated. Luke xix. 40
is the only instance in the New Testament : KiKpaiovrai, tvill immediately
cry out. (But W. H. read Kpd^ovartv).
Accentuation. —The Perfect Infinitive accents the peniiltima -Ivai.. In the
active participle the stem-syllable, masc. -or, fem. -vi, is accented all through,
the latter circumflexed wherever possible.
XeXuKcis, \e\vKvta, XeXy/c6s,
\e\vK6T0^, \e\vKviai, XeXv/coroj.

In the middle and passive, the Infinitive accents the penult., circumflex on
diphthongs and long vowels, pe^ovXevadai, TeTi^rjcxdai, rervcpdai. The participle
accents the penultima as Xe\v/x4vos, XeXv/x^vrj, XeXi/^ef ov.
;

Deponent Verbs.
100. Deponent verbs have no active voice, but may be either
middle or passive in form. This is decided by the Aorist.

Thus : Si)(Ofxai, to receive; First Aor., iScidfxrjv (middle).

/3ov\ofxaL, to wish; First Aor., i/SovXi^Orjv (passive).

alcrOdvoixaL, to perceive; Second Aor., T^o-Oojurj]' (middle).

Some verbs have both Aorists, middle and passive, with the same
meaning : as dTroKptVo/xat, to answer ; First Aor., aTnKpLvdixyjv and
aTreKpiOrfv, I ansvjered.
Deponent transitives often have each tense with its proper force.
to heal; tao-a/xryj/, / healed; IdOrjv, I was healed.
to reckon; iXoyio-djxrjv, I reckoned; iXoytcrOrjv, I ivas
 — .

IMPERSONAL AND DEFFCTIVE VEEBS. 101

^ 102.]

The verb ytyvo/xat, or yivofxai, to become (^ev-, see 94, 8, a), has the

forms— Fut., yevrjo-o/xat ; First Aor., lyevrjO-qv; Second Aor., iycvofirjv;

Perf., yiyova (Second Perf.) ; rarely yeyivrjfiaL,

Impersonal Verbs.
101. Impersonal verbs are used only in the Third Person
singular, and are generally rendered into English with the pro-
noun it.

For the grammatical construction of impersonals, see § 171.

The chief impersonal verbs are Set, it is necessary^ one ought; XPV^ ^'^

is expedient or fitting ; Trpiira^ it lecomes ; hoKet, it seems ; fxeXet, it is a

care.

The following forms of these verbs almost all occur in the New Testament. The
participle, it will be observed, is neuter. Some of the verbs are also found per-
sonally :

Indie. Pros. 5et, XPV, Trp^Trei, So/cet, fi4\ei.

Imperf. idei, ^PW, ^Trp€Tre{v), i86Kei,

First. Aor. ... ... ... ^^o^eC"),

Subj. 5e77,

Inf. deiv, XPVvo.1;

Part. Pros. Mov, . irpeirou, 5okovu,

From elfjLi, the substantive verb, is formed the impersonal i^ean, it is

lawful; part., Uov.

Defective Verbs of the First Conjugation.

102. The explanations given under the several Tenses have

sufficiently accounted for most of the so-called " irregularities" in
the conjugation of verbs in -«.

Some verbs, hov^ever, of very frequent occurrence, are anomalous

in another way.
The ancient Greek tongue, like all early languages, while desti-
tute of words expressing the more complex ideas, had a redundancy
of terms denoting some of the simplest actions. Hence arose many
synonymous words, some of which, being evidently unnecessary,
were afterwards dropped. But in several instances of two or three
verbs with the same meaning, different tenses were discontinued
in each, so that forms of distinct verbs had to be brought together
 102 DEFECTIVE VERBS. [§ 102.

to constitute a whole. Compare in English go, without a Preterite,

and went, without a Present, except in some phrases, wend.
Occasionally, again, where the same tense of two synonymous
verbs has been retained, it expresses two different shades of
meaning.

103. The following are the principal verbs which thus derive
their forms from different roots:
1. atpeo), to take (in comp., KaOatpiu), to take down; Trpoatpioyy to take
heforehandy etc.); Mid., alpov/xaL, to choose; Principal Tenses, at/DTJo-w,

alpTjcrofxaL, yjprjKa, '^prj/xat, ypiOrjv, alpeO-^o-o/xaL. Prom stem IX-: Second

Aor. act., elAoi/; Inf., cA.etvj mid., elXo/uirjv', Inf., cXeV^at.

2. epxo/JLaL, to go, come; Impf., ypxofxrjv. Other tenses from stem

cXvG-, lengthened into cXevO- (Put.), contracted into i\Q- (Second Aor.):
Put., e'Aet'o-o/xat ; Perf., cXT]XvOa', Plup., iXrjXvOeiv; Second Aor., rjXOov;
in the several moods, eXOe, tXOw, eXOoLfxi, iXOeiv, iXOwv. So, many
compounds.
3. ia-Olwyto eat; Impf., tJo-Olov', Second Aor. from 4>o.y-, t<^ayov, ^ayetv;

Put., (fxiyojxaL, <f)dy€(raL, cfidy€Tai, k.t.X. So, Kareo-Oto), to devour,

4. opdoi, to see; Impf., eojpwv; Perf., iwpdKa. Tenses from stem 6ir-,

oTTT- : Put., 6xf/ojxaL, 6i{/€L, 6{j/€TaL', Pirst Aor. subj., oxf/oifxat (once, Luke
xiii. 28); Pirst Aor. pass., w<f)6r)v, ocfiOrjvaLj Pirst Put. pass., 6(f>6y(ToixaL.

Tenses from fiS-: Second Aor., elSov, tSw, ISclv, iSayv (tSov, an old Im-
perfect middle used as an interjection, behold!)', Second Perf., I knoio
( = have seen) oTSa, oTSa?, ot8e(v), ot8a/>tei/, otSare, ot'Sao-t(r) (in Imp., Icrdi,

icrre; Subj., etSw; Inf., ctSeVat; Part., ciSws; Plup. ind., / knew, -^hav))
Put., ct^TJo-w, shall know (Heb. viii. 11).

5. tpk^^, to run; Second Aor. from Speji-, IS/aa/toi/; Put., SpafjLov/xai.

(LXX.).
6. (f>€p(D, to bear; Put. from stem ot-, ota-io. Tenses from cvcyK- or

€V6K-: Pirst Aor. act., ^veyKa', Second Aor., i^veyKov, iveyKeiv Pirst ',

Aor. pass., yvlx'^rjv; Perf., eVrji/oxa, with double rcduphcation. Compare

Trpocr^epo), elcrcfiepa), k.t.X.

7. Second Aor., / said (supphes Present and Imperfect from

etTTov;

<fir]fxi, second conjugation); stem, eV-; Pirst Aor., ctTra. Tenses from
€p-: Put., ip€0}, ipu); Perf., ilpyjKa] Perf. pass., itprj/xaL. Tenses from pe:
First Aor. pass., ippiOrjv or IpprjO-qv; Part., prjOeLs.
§ 103.] SUMMAKY OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 103

a a
2: 5=" o

^ 2 -, ^ O • 5i
I-
.9.
-A- -e- »2 X ^ .^

ss
2k
O ;^ <^ •

3 • O • • • • •

o
•tw
X' 3. ^ ^w d
p. OQ
.^ CO
h *w t-
O
>
•iH
W d
<c ;:^

3 o
GO
a
:t
o^ * *
\ rik
1
h
«
•» 3 3
o
;^
o « w
b
;^
::k^ v^ ^ ^d •
• • •
•
?> ^5?-

^3 1- S CO CO W CO -d & o -6-
^i- CO "J i-H
> *3
^O vyy *o "3 "W "VW w O w «o i»o w a "O
aJ '^ CQ
o •1-1 QQ
© 03
o
t—t
•
s
w -d
-2 J ?:
: : : :

'd •

.t- .fe
3
^
;^

• •
d
: p •
b
o
g
•
X.
^5> <3i
X. X.

<0 c d
. to 1-
« : 3 • • (C • • •
b
• d 9 5=",^
v3 • vfe.
o i^ '
o ^P- ^o b
"3^
"«» ^w
i<. .s- .s- ^2- :^ ':< VS-
« ti ^i=; m; m d d *?i O W vt4; "fa d

Pi "^
t^
,U>
2 O O t;
5^ ^ ^o t: o q a> <^
o
<D
o
<1 <1
ffj t+H I
*^ C cc ^ •— 2 ^ ~-' ^ ^ ^ < '->
D
Ui O)
^^ -Tii
c3
ru
;3
PhI—lpHi-lP-lP^C<J<MPHf2HhH(M<M Ph Ph pSH <^> CM
 iiji DEFECTIVE VERBS. K 103.

These forms are not all actually found in the New Testament, though
most of them are. Other forms occur in Greek authors, and, if required,
may easily be formed by the usual analogies.

Exercise 13.— On the Defective Verbs.

[The following forms, which should be carefully analysed, are all

from the " Sermon on the Mount," and illustrate the frequency with
which this class of verbs occurs.
In addition to the meanings of the verbs given in their paradigms,
and unnecessary, therefore, to repeat, it must be noted that the prefix eis
denotes into; ii, out of; irapa, by or aside (TrapcpxojjLaL, to pass away);
and Trpos, in addition to. For further details, see § 147, a, and the
Vocabulary.]

Forms. — oxpovrai, tSwctv, oTSe, oiSarc, ctTrwo-t, ippiOrj, CiTrrj, epctg, ipova-t,

rjXOov, TrapeXOrj, ilcriXOrjTe, IkOwv, €$€XOr]S, etaeXOe^ IXBiroi, ctcreA^crc,

elcrep^oiJievoL, elcreXev a erai, TrpocrcfiepYjS, Trpoacfyepe, ela-eveyKy^, ^^^Xe, cfidyrjTC^

cfidyiofiev.

THE SECOND CONJUGATION, OE VEEBS IN -|iu

104. The chief peculiarity of the Second Conjugation is that the

Present and Imperfect tenses, and in many verbs the Second Aorist
active and middle,the ancient terminations (see § 70)^ to the
affix

stem, without a connecting vowel. The mood- vowels, however, of

the Subjunctive and Optative are retained. The old Infinitive
ending, -vai, reappears.

The other tenses conform to the paradigm of the First Conjugation,

with occasional exceptions that will be noted in their place.

^ These terminations are, in the Active, for the Present (as a principal tense),
singular, -fii, -<n, -tl ;
plural, -ixiv, -re, -vci. for the Imperfect and Second Aorist

(as historical), singular, -v, -s, -v (generally dropped) ; phu-al, -fiev, -re, -cav. The
ancient Imperative ending -6l also appears. In several cases the terminations are
slightly modified, as the paradigms will show. The analogy to the Aorists Passive of
the First Conjugation will be observed throughout, in form and accentuation.
§ 106.] VERBS IN -jxi. 105

MODiriCATIOI^fS OF THE StEM.

105. Verbs in -\ii modify the verbal stem in one or more of

three ways.

a. A pure stem lengthens the vowel in the active Indicative

singular. Thus, from <j)a-, say, we have first person cfirj-fxi; third person,
<f}r]-crL,

b. Most stems prefix a reduplication in the Present and Imperfect

tenses. Thus, 8o-, give, first becomes 8w-, as above ; then, St-S(o-/xt. So,
TLOrffML, from 06-, put. The vowel preferred in this reduplication is i.

The root (rra-, place, accordingly makes lorrrj/xi, and I-, se7id, irjfxL. Some-
times the stem is reduplicated within itself (the Attic reduplication,
see also § 109, a), as, from 6va-, profit, ovLvy/xt. In other cases, a nasal

-V- is inserted, modified before labials into -|i- ; thus, irpa-, burn, gives
irijXTrprjixL.

c. Several verbs add the syllable -w- to the stem before the personal
endings in the Present and Imperfect tenses. Pure stems take -vw-.
Thus, 861K-, sJioio, gives huKvvjxi ; and oTpo-, strew or spread (with
lengthened vowel, as above), o-rpcovvu/xt.

It is convenient, then, to mark two chief classes of verbs in -jn.

The first exhibits the simple lengthened stem, generally with redupli-
cation preceding.

The second inserts -w- or -vw- between the stem and the personal
endings.

Paradigms of the First Class.

106. These also faU into two divisions. The former exhibits the
normal forms ; the latter contains a few verbs, with short monosyllabic
stems, somewhat irregular in their conjugation, and, from their importanc(i,
requiring separate treatment. To the latter class belongs the substantive
verb: et/xi', / am; eTvau, to be.
106 VERBS IN -jti— FIRST CLASS —PARADIGMS. [§ 107.

107. Eegular Forms, Stems A-, E-, 0-.

The tenses conjugated like those of verbs in -w will be given at the end of the
paradigms. The accent throughout is generally thrown back as far as possible.
Exceptions will be noted.
i
La-T7}fii, to place. TL6r)fiL, to put. BiBcofii, to give.

Stem, (Tra- de- So-

Active.
INDICATIVE.

Present, i(7T7]flC Tidrjfic SlBcofic

i(TTr)<; tlOt)^ SlBq)^

icrrTjcTL^v) Ti6r](Tl(v) SiB(ocrt(v)

'lardfiev TiOefiev BlBo/jL6V

lardre rlOere SlBoT€

L(rTdaL(y) Tt6eaaL[u) BtS6a(Tt(v)

Imperfect, lO-TTjV eriOriv eSlBcov

'lg-tt)^ irWr}^ e'StSft)?

larr} irLdrj or eTiOet^ iSlBco or iBiBov'

to-Ta/jLev iriOefJLev eBlBofiev
L(TTdT€
r/ .
irldere iSlBore i
laraaav irlOeaav^ iSlBoaav
2nd Aorist, 6(TTr)V

earrj
€(7T7J/JLeV eOefiev eSofiev
earrjre eOere e8oT6
eo-TTjaav eOeaav eSocrav

^ 2 Cor. iii. 13, Acts iii. 2, have irldti, iriOovv, as from forms of the First Conju-
gation contracted.
^ Matt. xxvi. 26, etc. As from a form of the First Conjugation contracted.
§ 107.] VERBS IN -(Ai — FIRST CLASS —PARADIGMS. 107

Stem, crra- 6e- So-

IMPERATIVE.

Present, 'laTT} for XaraOi TiOeL (for TiBeri) BiSov (for Bl^oO
la-TCLTa) TiOeTO) BcBoTco
Xcnare riOere Sl8oT€
lardrcoo-av Ttdercoaav BiBoTcoa-av
2nd Aorist, (tttjOl or ard ^
Oh (for Oeri) So9 (for B66i)
crTrjTco Oerco Bora)
(TTrjre 6 ere B6t€
(TTTJTCOCraV dercocrav BoTwaav

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present, larco TtOcj BiBco

l(TTTJ(; Tt6fj<; 8tSco9

Lcrrr) TlOfl BcBo)
L

laTCdfxev zi6o)fiev BiBoifiev

laTpJTe Ttdrjre BiBo)Te

l(TT(Oai{v) Tt6(jj<7c{v) BiBa)ac{v)
2nd Aorist, CTTW, K.T.X. 6a), K.T.X. Bo), K.r.X.

like Pres. like Pres. like Pres.

OPTATIVE.

Present, l(TTair]v TiOeCriv BtBolrjv

laTair}^ TL6eLrj<; BLBoirj<;

l(TTaLr] TideiTj BlBoLTJ

l(TTaL/jL€V TiOelfiev BiBolfiev

l(TTalT€ TiOelre BiBolre
[(TTolev TiOelev BcBotev
2nd Aorist, qTairjv Oelrjv BoLTjv or Ba)r]v

arair)^ 6eiri<; BoLr)<; or B(pr}<;

G-rairj 9 €17} Bolt) or Bmtj

* Only in compound verbs, as dpoLara (Acts xii. 7 ; Eph. v. 14), and similar words.
108 VERBS IX -jjii —FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS. [§ 107.
1
Stem, (TTa- 6e~ 80-

OPTATIVE—-continued.

2nd Aorist, aralrifiev OeLTj/jLev BoL7]/jLev

aralrjre OelrjTe BoLTjre

CTTalev Oelev Bolev

INFINITIVE.
I
Present, lardvaL TiOevat BtBovai
2nd Aorist, arrjvai delvac BovvaL
1
PARTI CirLES.

Present, lard';, -aaa, -dv TiOel^, -elora, -ev BiBov<;, -ovcra, -6v

2nd Aorist, cnd^, -d(Ta, -dv 6 eh, -elaa, -ev Bov^y -ovaa, -6v

Middle and Passive.

INDICATIVE.

Present, iLO-rafiai TidefJiaL BlBo/jLat

iaraaaL TiOecrai or riOr] BiBoaai

laraTat rlderai BiBorat
[(Trd/jbeOa TiOe/jbeda BiBo/jieOa

iaraaOe TiOecrOe BiBoaOe

XcnavTai TidevTai BlBovrac
Imperfect, lardfjur^v iTidiiJiijv eBtB6/j.7]v

XcTTaao erldeao or irlOov iSi^ocro or iBiBoif

icrraro eriOero iBlBoTO
la-rdfjbeda eTidefJieOa eBiBofjbeOa

laraade eriOeaOe iBlBoaOe

laravTO iridevTO iBlBovTO

IMPERATIVE.

Present, L(TTa(To or 7aT(0 TiOecro or riOov BlBocTo or BiBov

lardaOco TideaOco BtBoado)

'laraaOe TideaOe BiBoade
lardadcoaav TiOeo-QoxTav BiBoaOwaav
§ 107.] VERBS IX -|JLi —FIRST CLASS —PARADIGMS. 109

Stem, CFTa- Se- So-

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, larcjfiat Ti6a)/jLaL BcScofiac

l<TTf} Tief) BlBS

laTTJrai, TLOrjTat ScScoraL
larco/jLeda rtdcofjbeda SiBco/jLeOa

larria-Oe TtOrjaOe BcBcjaOe

l(TT(OVTat BihcovraL

OPTATIVE.
Present, l(7TaL/jLrjv TcOeLflTJV 8tBoL/jLl]V

laralo TiOelo BiBoio

laralro Tidelro BlBolto
ia-TalfxeOa Ttdei/ieOa BiBoL/xeOa
laralaOe riOelaOe BiBotaOe
LGTalvro TcOelvTO BlBoIvto

INFINITIVE.

Present, BlBoaOau
PARTICIPLES.

Present, Bi,Bo/jL€vo<;

Middle only.
IN DICATIVE.

2nd Aorist, iB6/jL7]V

edov (-e(7o) eBov (-oao)

edcTO eBoTO
iOifieOa eBofJueOa
WecrOe eBoade
eOevTo eBovTO
IMPERATIVE.
2nd Aorist, 60V (-€(T0) Bov (-ocro)
OeaOco BoaOco
OeaOe Boade
OeaOwaav Bocrdcocrav
1 10 VERBS IN -|xi— FIRST CLASS —PARADIGMS. [§ 107.

Stem, (TTa- 6e- do-

SUBJUNCTIVE.

2nd Aorist, 6cx)/JLaL Bcofiai

Ofi Boy

BrjTai Ba)Tai,

OcofjieOa Bco/xeda
erjaOe Sa)a6e
Ocovrac Bcovrac

OPTATIVE.

2nd Aorist, Oeiixrjv BoifjLTJV

Oelo Solo
Oelro SoIto
OelfjieOa BolfieOa
•
OelaOe Sola 6 e
OelvTO SolvTO

INFINITIVE.

2nd Aorist, deaOat, SoaOai

PARTICIPLES.

2nd Aorist, defjLevo<i Sofievof;

Tenses after the Model of the First Conjugation.

Active.
INDICATIVE.

Future, (TT^(TCO 6rj(T()) Scbo-CO

1st Aorist, earrjaa €07] K a eScoKa

Perfect, 6<TT7]Ka reOeLKa, SiScoKa,

ecrrrjKa^; /C.T.X. K.T.X,

6aT7JK€{v)
earrjKafiev
or earafjLev'^ 1

1 This syncopated or shortened form is very usual. So in Perf. Inf. and Part.
 —

§ 107.] VERBS IN -HI— FIRST CLASS —PARADIGMS. 111

Stem, (TTa- Oe- So-

INDICATIVE continued.

Perfect, ecTrJKare
or ecrraTe
€(TTl]Ka(7L(v)

or €cnaa-i{v)
Pluperfect, 6LcrTi]K€Lv OT {e)Te6eUeLv (e)S€S(OK€tV
e<nriKeLV

IMPERATIVE.
1st Aorist, (TTrjarov

Perfect, BiBcoKe

SUBJUXCTIVE.
1st Aorist, (TTrjO-Oi BcDO-Q)^

Perfect, €<rTrJK(o redeiKO) BeSMKO)

OPTATIVE.
Future, cnrjcroLfiL Otjo-ol/jLL BcocroifiL

1st Aorist, cTTTjaai^L

Perfect, iaTiJKOifjLi TedeUoifii SeBcOKOLflt

INFINITIVE.

Future, (TTrjO-etv OrjaeLV Bayaecv

1st Aorist, (TTrjcrai,

Perfect, k<TT7]Kevai redeiKevat SeBwKevaL

or ka-rdvaL

PARTICIPLES.
Future, (TTTjo-wv 6r)aoiv B(t)(TO)V

1st Aorist, a-TTjaa^

Perfect, 8eB(0Ka)<;

or e(TTco<;, -cocra,
1

^ See John xvii. 2; Rev. viii. 3, xiii. 16, in which passages the form Swo-tj occurs.
\y. H., however, read duxrei, fut. indie.
' See § 38, Some grammarians contend for the neuter form ia-Tws.
 12 VERBS IN -HI— FIPtST CLASS —PARADIGMS. [§ 107.

Stem, ara- 6e~ 80-

Middle and Passive.

INDICATIVE.

i^erfect, eara/jbat, reOetfiaL BeBofiat

Pluperfect. ea-rdfiTjv (i)T€OeL/jiTjv (ejBeBofiTjv

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Perfect, €crTa/jL6vo<; w reOeiiievo^; co BeBofiivo^ 0)

OPTATIVE.
Perfect, i(7TaiJL6V0<; eXr^v redet/jbivo^ eirjv SeBofievof; eiTjv

INFINITIVE.

Perfect, eo-Tao-Oat, reOetaOaL BeBoaOai

PARTICIPLES.
Perfect, earafjuevo^ reOeifJievo'i BeBofiivo^:

Middle only.
INDICATIVE.

Future, (TTrjcroiJbai Orjaofiai B(0(TO/JLai

1st Aorist, iaTrjad/jbrjv

IMPERATIVE.
1st Aorist, (TTrjo-ai

SUBJUNCTIVE.
1st Aorist, a-T')]ao)/jLai

OPTATIVE.

Future, (TT7]<T0ifir]V 6ri<T0ifJi7]V Bo)(TOi/jLVV

1st Aorist, crTrjaalfirjv

INFINITIVE.

Future, (TTrjaea-Oai drjaeadai BcoceadaL

1st Aorist, ar^aaaOai
PARTICIPLES.

Future, (TT7ja6/jievo<; Orjaofievo'^ B(0(T6fievo<i

1st Aorist, o-Tr]O'dfjb€V0<;

§ 107.] VERBS IN -HI— FIKST CLASS —PARADIGMS. ils

Stem, (TTa-- Oe- So-

Passive only.
INDICATIVE.

Future, (TTaOrjcroiJLaL TeOrjcrofJuaL hoOrjaofxai

1st Aorist, iaTadrjv ireOriv iBoOrjv

IMPERATIVE.

1st Aorist, (TTd67]TL TedTJTI, h66r}Ti

SUBJUNCTIVE.

1st Aorist, (TTa6(b reOcj hoOo)

OPTATIVE.

Future, crTa6r}(TOLfjL7]v reOrjaoifiTjv BoOrjaoLfjLTjv

1st Aorist, aTadelrjv reOeirjv BodeLTjv

INFINITIVE.

Future, (TTaOrjaeo•6aL reOrjaeaOai BoOrjaeo-Oai,

1st Aorist, GTadrjvai TeOrjvai hoOrjvai,

PARTICIPLES.

Future, araOrjao/jLevo^ TeOrjaofxevo^; Bo6r]<r6fJL€vof;

1st Aorist, a-TaOel^, -elcra, TeOei^, -elaa, hoOei^, -elaa,

iv
VERBALS.

GTaro^ BoTo<;
<TTaTeo<; Borio^

Note. — It will be observed that several Aorist forms are omitted, the alternative
tense being in use. For example in the Active Indicative of ridrjfii and didco/u, the
:

First Aorist is employed for the singular, the Second for the plural, while in the
Middle throughout laTTjfii has the First, ridrjfjn and diSufxi the Second. The Active
First Aorist of iar-qfn is trajisitive, the Second Aorist intransitive, as will be shown
hereafter.
114 VERBS IN -|ii—FIRST CLASS —REMARKS. [§ 108.

Eemarks on the Paradigms.

108. 1. The First Aorist Active of riO-qixi and StSwfit, and, as will
be seen hereafter, of uy/xt also, takes -k- instead of -<r- for tense-charac-
teristic. This peculiarity is confined to these three verbs and their ;

First Aorist is found only in the Indicative mood.^

2. The Perfect tenses of to-TTy/xt, from the stem (rra-, take the hard

breathing, with €- as an "improper reduplication:" lar-qKa. The aug-

mented tenses have €-, as ecrTi;i/; but the Imperfect retains U.

3. The First Aorist of la-T-q^i is transitive, the Second intransitive,

in meaning: ca-Trja-a, I placed; eo-rrjv, I stood.
4. A verb, o-tt^ko) (intransitive), to stand, of the First Conjugation,
derived from the Perfect of found in a few forms in the New
o-Ta-, is

Testament. It must be distinguished from the Perfect forms of lo-ttj/jll.

Verbs belonging to this Class.

I
109. The number of verbs which conform to the above paradigms
is very small. The principal are subjoined.

A-STEMS. —Like v<rTT]p.i, are conjugated the following:

a. 1. oviv-qjxi, to benefit (stem ova-, with Attic reduplication), only

once in the New Testament; Second Aorist, Optative, middle, ovatfxrjv

(Phile. 20), mai/ I have joy!

2. 7rt/x7rp77/xi, to hum (stem irpa-, reduplicated, with /x), only once in the
New Testament, Present Infinitive, passive, Tri/xTrpao-^at (Acts xxviii. 6),
to he burned or inflamed.

3. <^>7/>tt, to say (stem c}>a-). The Present Indicative is usually enclitic,

except second person singular, otherwise oxytone; third person singular,
xf>r](rL(v); plural, ^ao-t(v); Imperfect, e^^i/; third person singular, €<f>rj.

(See § 103, 7.)

^ To this remark there is one exception if the reading ddjff'^ (on which see note,
$. Ill) be genuine.
 ;

§ 110.] VERBS IN -|ii—FIRST CLASS —REMARKS. 115

4. xp^) ii ^s fitting (stem xpo--)) impersonal. (See § 101.) Once in

the New Testament (James iii. 10).

h. Deponent Verbs. — 1. Svvafiaiy to he able (stem Swa-). Present

Indicative, -/xat, -o-at (or in MSS., SvvyJ), -rat, k.t.X.; Imperfect, iSvvd/xrjv,

or (with double augment) ySwafxriv ; Present Subjunctive, Svvw/xat

Optative, 8vvat)ar/v; Infinitive, Bvvaa-OaL; Participle, Swa/xevo?; Verbal,

8waT09, possible^ capable; Puture, Sw^o-o/xat; First Aorist, IhwTqOtjv^ or
^Sw-^Or^v (occasionally in MSS., ySwda-Orjv).

2. cTTto-Ta/i-at, to knoio, or to feel sure^ "to take one's stand upon"

i.e.y

(stem €7rt', preposition, and -o-ra-, but without aspiration), only in Present
in New Testament; Indicative, -/xot, -crat, -rat, -/xe^a, -cr^c, -vrat; Participle,

€7ri(rTa/>tcvos.

3. Kpe/xa/xat, fo Tiaw^r, neuter (stem Kpcjjia-); Present Indicative, third

person, Kpe/xarat; plural, Kpe/xavrat; Participle, Kpc/xa/xei/os ; First Aorist,
iKp€ixd(T6r]v ',
Subjunctive, Kp€iJ,acr6o>; Participle, Kpifxaa-O^U.

E-STEMS. Deponent Verbs. — 1. -^/xat, to be seated (stem I-), pro-

perly a Perfect middle or passive, as from cw,I set or seat; eo/xai, I seat
myself; rj/xai, I have seated myself and so ain now sitting. Only found
in the New Testament compounded with the preposition /cara, down.
KaOrjfjLaty I am sitting down, second person, KaOfj^ for KaOrja-ai', Impera-
tive, kolOov, for Kd67](To ; Infinitive, KaOrjadai \ Participle, KoB-q^fvo^i ;

Imperfect Indicative, eKaOrjixrjv, properly a Pluperfect.

2. Kelfiai, to lie down (stem kci-), properly also a Perfect, "I have
laid myself" or "have been laid down;" Infinitive, Kcto-^at; Participle,

Kci/xcvos; Imperfect Indicative, eKct)u.?;v, -cro, -to.

110. The three stems, eV-, 1-, and e, being marked by special
peculiarities, must be placed alone. The first of the three is by
far the most important, as the stem of the substantive verb, esse,
to be. With the personal termination, -fit, the stem (ia-fMi)
becomes elfxi, I am; and with the Infinitive ending, -vat, elvai,,
to be.
116 VEKBS l^ -(ti— FIRST CLASS —SPECIAL FOKMS. [§ 110.

Several tenses are wanting in the conjugation of this verb, which is as

follows :

Stem, ea-

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Present, am.

ia-fiiv

el (for iaal) ecrre

eCTTO elaiiv)

Imperfect or Aorist, was.

^v or 7]/jbt]v r/fiev or 7

rjaOa 7JT€
'9

rjarav

Future, shall he.

€(TOfJLaL eaofieda
if
ear) eo-ecrde

eaTac (for ecreraC) eaovrai

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Be tJiou.
it
XaOi e(TT6

e<TT(0 or 7]T(0 earcoaav

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present, may be.

(0 a)fiev

v^ ^re
Ci)(Tc(v)
V
OPTATIVE MOOD.

l^resent, might be.

€17]V eLTjfiev

etrjf; elrjTe

ecv eirjaav
 —

§111.] VERBS IN -|ii— FIEST CLASS — SPECIAL FORMS. 117

INFINITIVE.

Present, to he, elvai. Future, to he ahout to he, ecreaOai,

PARTICIPLES.

Present, heing, cov, ovaa, 6v ;

gen. 6vto<;, ov(T7j<;, ovto^, k.t.\.
Future, ahout to he, i<r6fievo<;, -rj, -ov; gen. -ov, -rj^, -ov, k.t.\.

—
Note on Accentuation. In the Present Indicative, with the exception of the
second person singular, this verb is an enclitic, excepting (1) where it follows a
paroxytone, when it retains its accent as above and (2) in the third person,;

where it is b, predicate, when it becomes paroxytone, as '^ari 6e6s, there is a God.

It is also paroxytone after ws, ovk, d Kal, tovt, dW, Thus, ovk ^ctti, it is not;
TovT* ^<TTi, that is to say.

111. Not unlike the substantive verb in conjugation, and there-

fore tobe carefully distinguished from it, are the verbs elfic (stem 1-),
go, and tT/yitt (stem e-), send. Neither of them is found in the New
Testament,^ except in composition. It will suffice to give a few
forms of eJfic, to show the differences between it and the substan-
tive verb ; while the most important compound of ltjjjll is subjoined
in fuU.

Forms of elfii, to go (stem l-) :

Ind. — Pres. el/juc

9
6t CLCTL ijieV IT€ La(Tl[y)

„ Imp. yecv fj€i> y€t/JL6V 7JetT€ fjecrav

V
Imper. tTG) tre iTcoaav
SuBj.— Pres. LQ)
if V
icofiev trjT6 Lcoai(v)
Opt.— Pres. locfit Tot?
J/
LOL Locfiev LOLTe toiev
Inf.— Pres. livat,

Part. —
» /
Pres. loov lovcra lov

* Some MSS. read in John vii. 34, 36, for elixl, I am, etfii, I {will) go. This Pre-
sent tense has in classic Greek a Future significance, equivalent to the English idiom,
/ am going.
118 VERBS IN -}ii —FIRST CLASS. [§ 112.

Conjugation of Xtjixl, to send, in its Compound, d^LTj/jn,.

112. The stem is I-, which, reduplicated, gives LrjfXL, Prefixed is the
preposition aTro, from, away from; the o being lost before i, by elision,
and the w changed by the aspirate into <}>.

Hence d<}>iT]}ii, to send away, let go (permit), forgive.

The tenses which follow the analogy of the First Conjugation arc included, so
far as necessary, in the following paradigm, and will readily be traced.

Active.
INDICATIVE.

Pres., sing., d^LTjfjLc, -irjf; or -6t9,^ -i7j(Ti(y)

„ plur., -le/jbev -tere -i,d<7c(v) or d(f)Lov(Tc{v)

Impf., sing.,^ 7](f>Lov 7](f)Le<; Tjc^ue

Fut., d(f)^crco 1st Aor., dcf)7]Ka. (See § 108, 1.)

Perf., a(/)et/ca Pluperf., d(^eiKeLv
2 Aor., sing., wanting. Plural, dcjielfjuev a(/)6tT€ d<j>el(Tav

IMPERATIVE.

Pres., d(j)[6L, dipteTO) Plural, d(j>leTe, d(j>teT(0(Tav

2 Aor., d(f>6^, d(l)iTCD » d<l>eTe, d(j)eT(0(Tav

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Pres., d<l)t(0, -Lrj<;, -L'Q -LM/JLeV, -crjre, -L(oai,(v)

2 Aor., d(j)M,
-fi^, -fj
-cojiev, -Tjre, -SxTiiy)

OPTATIVE.

Pres., d(j)Lei'r]v, -779, -7j d(f>t€ifjLev, -eLT€, -6L6V

2 Aor., d(f)eirjv, -rj<;, -tj d<j)eLjjLev, -elre, -elev

INFINITIVE.

Pres., d(f)LevaL 2 Aor. d(f>e2vat

PARTICIPLES.

Pres., d(f)L€i<;, -elaa, -ev 2 Aor., d(f)eL<;, -ecaa, -ev

1 Rev. ii. 20, W. H.

' Preposition augmented. Plural wanting.
§ 112.] VERBS IN -fii— FIRST CLASS. 119

Middle and Passive.

INDICATIVB.

Pres., a(f>L€/jLat,, -crai, -rat Plural, a<j>L€/jL66a, -o-^e, -vtul

Impf., a(^iefi7]Vi -ao, -to „ dcfyiifieda, -a6e, -vro
Perf., sing., ac^elfiai a(^elcraL acpelTai

„ plur., a(f)6ifjLeda acpetaOe dcpecvTat or dcpecovTac'*

Plup., d(j)eL/JLTJV d(j)6L(T0 d(j)6lT0, K,T.\,

IMPERATIVE.
Pres., d(f)L€(7o or d(l>Lov dcpteadco, k.t.\.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., d<f)i(ofiac, -ifj, -irjrai, k.t.X, -ccofMeOa, -iTjcrde, -Icovrai

OPTATIVE.

Pres., d(f)L0L/JL7)v or d(^Lei^r}v, -olo or -eto, -olro or -€lto, ac.t.X.

INFINITIVE.

Pres., d(l)[€(rdai

PARTICIPLE.

Pres., d<j)L€fievo^

Middle only.
INDICATIVE.

Put., d(j)i]<70fiai 2 Aor., dtpelfirjv, as Plup.

IMPERATIVE.
2AoT.yd<f)ov, d<f)e(r6co acpeade, dcpecrdcoaav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
2AoT.,d(f)(OfjLai, -fjy
-rjraL, /c.r.X.

OPTATIVE.
Put., d(f>7j(rol'fi7)v 2 Aor., dtpotfirjv, -oio, -olto
INFINITIVE.
Put, d^i]a€<T6ai 2 Aor., dcpiaOai,
PARTICIPLES.
Put., d(l>7ja'6fi€V0f! 2 Aor., d<f>€/jL€VO<;

* This is the more common form, and is taken from the Doric dialect.
 120 ^^RBS IN' -|ii— FIRST CLASS. [§112

Passive only.
INDICATIVE.

Fut., d(}>€6i](T0/jLai, 1 Aor., dcpeOrjv

IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., d(f)€dr]TC

SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., a^e^w
OPTATIVE.

Put., d(j)€d7](roLjjL7jv 1 Aor., d(f)e6ei7]v

INFINITIVE.

Flit., d^eOrjo-eaOai 1 Aor., d^eOrjvai

PARTICIPLES.
Fut., dcfieOrjcrofievo^ 1 Aor., d<f>e6el^

VERBALS.
a<j)6T0f: d(f)€T60f^

Second Class. Verbs in -w/jlo or -wvfii,

113. 1. These verbs have no Second Aorist.^

2. Most of them have a kindred form of the First Conjugation,

in or -vvvw.
-vvci) From this form are taken often, the Indicative Pre-
sent and Imperfect, with the Present Infinitive generally, the Present ;

Participle and always, the Subjunctive and Optative moods. Thus,

;

from 8€iK-, show, we sometimes find the forms SeLKvvo), -€ts, -«, SeiKvveiv,
SuKvvoiv ; while the only Present Subjunctive recognised is SeLianxa, -779,

•7/ ; and the only Present Optative, ScLKvvotfjLL.

In the paradigms, these forms of the First Conjugation are marked by a

dagger (t).

3. All the tenses but the Present and Imperfect are formed from
the stem (without -w-). These are placed separately for comparison.

* With one exception, in classic Greek, ff^hpvfu, to qiiench; Second Aor., ^<r^r}v.
§ 114.} VERBS IN -|ii —SECOND CLASS. 121

114. Paradigms of heUw^i, to show, and ^oovw/jlc, to gird.

Stem (consonant), decK- (vowel), ^o-

Active.
INDICATIVE.

Pres., Bel/cvvfic or f^eiKvvo) ^(ovvvfit or f^covvveo

ScLKW^ BeLKvvec<;, ^(tivvv; ^(ovvvecfii k.t.X.

helKvvaiiv) k.t.X.
BeUvvfjiev
BeUvvre ^(OVVVT€
BeLKvvai^v)
Impf., eBelfcvvv or feSeiKvvov i^covvvv or fi^covvvov
eheiKVUf; iSeLKwe^;, i^(ovvv<i i^oovvves, k.t.X.
iSeiKvv K.T.X, e^covvv
iBeiKvvfiev i^covvvfJLev
€0€LKVVT€ i^a)vvvT6
iSeiKvvcrav

IMPERATIVE.

Pres., heiKvv or BeUvvOi ^davvv or ^covvvOt

SeLKVVTCO ^a)vvvT(o
helKvvre ^(t)VVVT€
BeiKvvTcoaav ^covvvTcoaav

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Pres., iheLKvvto

OPTATIVE.

Pres., fBeLKpvoifii

INFINITIVE.

Pres., BeiKvvvat or fBeiKPvetv ^(ovvvvai or f^cDvvveiv

PARTICIPLES.

Pres., BetKvv^, -vo-a^orfSecKvixov ^(ovvv<;, -vera, or "f^cavvvcdv

122 VERBS IN -|ii — SECOND CLASS. [§ 114.

Stem, SeLK- Co-

Middle and Passive.

INDICATIVE.
Pres., BeiKvvfjiat BetKvv/jbeda ^covvu/jLai, ^covvvfJLeOa
BeLKVvaat BeiKwaOe ^covvva-ac ^(ovvva-de
BeiKVvrai SeL/cvvvrat t(ovvvTac KoivvvvTai
Impf., iSeiKVv/irjv iSetKVV/xeda e^cavvv fxr^v i^covvv/jLeOa
eoeiKvvao eoeiKvvaoe e^oovpvao e^covvvo-oe
iBeUvvTO iBeiKvvvTO i^covvvTO i^covvvvro
IMPERATIVE.

Pres., BeiKvvao BeLKVvaOe ^covvvao ^oovvvaOe

SecKVvadco BecKVvadcoaav ^covvvaOco ^(ovvvaOcoaav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., fBecKvvcofjLat, "f^covvvco/jLat,

OPTATIVE.
Pres., fBeLKVvolfiTjv f^covvvoifirjv

INFINITIVE.

Pres., BeiKwa-QaL OT'fBeiKvveaOai ^(ovvvaOai or f^covvveo-dat

TENSES AETEK THE MODEL OP THE

FIRST CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE.
Active.

Fut., Bei^co fa)cr&) 1 Aor., eBet^a e^coa-a

Perf., SeSetp^a e^coKa Plup., (i)B€B6L')(^€LV i{c)^(OK€LV

IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., Bet^ov

SUBJUNCTIVE.
it, f
1 Aor., Bel^co ^axrco Perf., 8eSe/;;^a) egcdKco

OPTATIVE.
Put., Bel^Olflt ^(OCTOL/ill 1 Aor., Bel^atfii ^(oaatfit,

Perf., BeBel^x^oc/jLL
§ 114.] VERBS IN -|xi —SECOND CLASS. 123

Stem, 8eLK- ^o-

INFINITIVE.

Fut., Bel^etv ^coo-ecv 1 Aor., Bet^ac ^axrai

Perf., BeBei^evat i^coKevai

Middle and Passive.

INDICATIVE.

Perf., BeBecyfiat e^axTfiaL Plup., iBeBelyfiTjv i{c)^a)(r/jLr}p

IMPERATIVE.
Perf., BeBei^o BeBel'^do),
K.T.X.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perf., B€B6t,yfievo<; a> €^(oafJLevo<; a>

OPTATIVE.

Perf., BeBecy/jLevo^; etrju

INFINITIVE.

Perf., BeBe'l')(6ai

Middle only.
INDICATIVE.

Put., Bei^ojxai ^(oa-ofiai 1 Aor., iBei^d/xrjv i^coadfirjv

IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., Bel^ai ^coaai

SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., Bel^cofiac ^(oo-cofiat

OPTATIVE.

Fut., Bei^Oi/JLTJV ^COCTOLflTJV 1 AOT., Bet^aLflTJV ^COO-aLfJLTjV

INFINITIVE.

Fut., Bel^eadac ^coa-eaOai, 1 Aor., Bei^aaOai ^axraaOaL

PARTICIPLES.

Fut., Bei^ofievo^ ^coaofxevo^ 1 Aor., Bet^d/jL6vo<; ^wadfievo^

124 VEP.BS IN -lAi— SECOND CLASS. [§ 114.

Stem, SeLK- Co-

Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
Fut., Bet'^d'tjaofMac ^coadijcro/jLac 1 Aor., iBei')(p7}v i^axj-drjv

IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., Sel'^OrjTi,
, ^(oadrjTL

SUBJUNCTIVE,
1 Aor., Sec^Oco
, ^coadct)

OPTATIVE.
Fut., B6L')(6r)(T0L^7}V ^(O(TBr)G0lfl7}V
1 Aor.,

INFINITIVE.

Fut., Bei^OrjaeaOcu ^(0(T6rj<rea6ai

1 Aor., Bei'^Orjvac
,
^(Dcrdrjvac

VERBALS.
BecKTo^ Set/creo? t(0(TT6<; t(OC

Eemarks on the Paradigms.

115. a. The quantity of the v is marked in a sufficient number of

cases to indicate the rest. Where, in the first class of verbs in -^t,

the stem-vowel a, €, or o is made long, the v of the second class is also

lengthened. Thus, TiOy/jLL, SetKvv/ja, but TiOe/xev, SetKvvfxev.

b. Verbs of this class seldom occur in the New Testament, with the
exception of SiUw/jLL and aTroXXv/xt. (See below.)

Verbs with Consonant- stems, like SeUwfii,

116. 1. /xtyvv/xt, to mix (stem, [t-iy-), only found in the New Testament
in forms like the First Conjugation. First Aorist, c/xt^a; Perfect Passive,

fi,€fXLyfxaL.

2. oXXvfxtf to destroy, to lose (stem, 6\- orhence 6\-wfXL and

oXe-;

with the V assimilated, oXXv/xt), only found in the New Testament with
 ! — —

§ 117.] VEEBS IN -Jit — SECOND CLASS. 125

the prefixed preposition, airo. Present Indicative, d7roX\v/xt; Middle

and Passive, aTroAAv^at. Cliiefly found in tenses derived from collateral

stem a-TToXc- Active Puture, dTroXeVo), once aTroXoi]^ First Aorist, aTrwAeo-a;
:

Perfect, witli neuter meaning, / jpefi'ish ! dTrdXwXa ; Middle Puture,

aTToXovyotat ; Second Aorist, aTrwXo/xT/v ; Present Participle, o\ aTroXXvfMevot

often, the peiishing.

3. ofxvvfjii, to szvear (stem, 6\i- or ojio-). The forms used in the JS'ew

Testament are Present, as of Pirst Conjugation, o/xvvw, o/xvveiv (but in

Mark xiv. 71, W. H. read d/xvwat); Pirst Aorist, wfxoaa; Infinitive,
d/jtofrat, from 6|xo-.

4. pr/ywfxi, to tear (stem, pav-). Present Passive Indicative, third

person plural, p-qyvvvrat (Matt. ix. 17); but generally with forms as from
p-q<r(T<i)y pT^idi.

Verbs with Vowel-stems, like ^cowv/jit

117. !• A-Stems. KcpdvwfxL, to mix (stem, K€pa-). Only twice, First

Aorist, cKepao-a (Rev. xviii. 6) ; Perfect Participle Passive, KeKepao-ixevos
(Rev. xiv. 10).

2. E-Stems. — Ivw/xt, to clothe (stem, fk-), only found with the prefixed
preposition, d/x^t, about. Present Active Indicative, third person
singular, d/x<^i€Vvvo-t(v) (Matt. vi. 30), and Perfect Passive Participle,
with augment prefixed to the preposition, yix(f>L€(7/x€vov (Matt. xi. 8 ;

Luke vii. 25).

KopevvufjiL, to satisfy (stem, Kope-). First Aorist Passive Participle,

KopeaOeLs (Acts xxvii. 38) ; Perfect Passive Participle, KCKopeafiivos
(1 Cor. iv. 8).

a-pivvvixL, to extinguish (stem, o-pc-). Future Active, o-piaia ; Future

Passive, a/S^o-Oi^crofxaL.

0-Stems. pwvwixi, to strengthen (stem, po-), found only in the

3.

Perfect Middle Imperative, eppwcro plural, eppwaOe, he strong/ i.e., ]

Farewell

1 1 Cor. i. 19, from LXX.

126 VERBS IN -fjii— SECOND CLASS. [§ 117.

a-TpwvvvfiL, to strew or spread (stem, o-rpo-). Present forms as from

o-Tpwvi/vo) ; First Aorist Active, ea-rpwa-a; Perfect Participle Passive,
€a'Tp(DflivO<S.

If the above verbs, with their significations, are now committed to memory,
some trouble may be saved at subsequent stages.

Exercise 14.— On the Second Conjugation, or Verbs in -fxi.

[The following examples of verbs in -|it occur in the " Sermon on the
Mount," and are here presented for analysis. In addition to explanations
already given (see Exercise 13, on the Defective Verbs), it must be
noted that the prefix aTro- (from, away from) with the verb StSco/xt has
the sense of return: a7ro8i8(u/xt, to give hack; and kin- with the same
verb may be rendered over; ovti signifies against.]

Forms. — ia-nv, co-tc, ccrrat, lctOl, el, co-to), icrea-Oe, y, oVra, ovtc?, ri^eao-tv,
7rpo(T$€ii/aL, 7rpo(TTeOrj(T€TaL, avTLCTTTJvai, 809, Soto), SiSov, aTToSws, 7rapa8(3, So)T€,

€7rt8(jocret, So^ryorerat, StSovat, a<^e9, a(fii€fx€v, acfirJTe, ac^rjcrei, hvvacraL, Svj/arat,

hvvao'Oe, K€LfX€vr], airoXrjraL, ofxoa-ai, 6jx6crrj<;, piq^oicnv, apic^Uvvvcriv.

Exercise 15.— General, upon the Verbs.

*^* The learner should now be expert in tracing any verbal

form to its stem. As a test of proficiency, the following list of

verbs is subjoined, taken in order from the Second Epistle to the

Thessalonians. Let the stem, conjiigation class, voice, mood, tense,

and, when necessary, the number and person, of every one be written
down if possible, without reference to any paradigm. Prefixes
;

not belonging to tlie root are printed in thick type. The Vocabu-
lary or Lexicon must be consulted for the meaning of the words.

CHAPTER I.

3. €v;(api(rT€tv, irXeovd^ei.
o<^€tXo/x€v, 4. Kav^aaOai (how
vTrtpav^dviL,

do you distinguish in such a word between the First and Second

Conjugations?), dve;)(€(r^e. 5. Koaa^naOrivai, 7rdcr)(€T€. 6. dvTairooowai,

OXi^ovcTiv (Participle). 7. OXt/Sofxivot'S. 8. SiSoVto?, ciSocrt, \maKovov(Ti

§ 117.] EXEKCISES. 127

(Participle). 9. t'hjovg-lv. 10. tX6r}^ IvSo^ao-^rJvai, Oavfiaa-OrjvaLj TnoTev-

ova-Lv (Participle), €7n(TTev6rj. 11. 'irpo<reu;)(o/x€^a, d^Koorry, TrXrjpoxry.

12. ivBoiaaOy.

CHAPTER II.

1. ipoyToyfiev. 2. craXevOrjvaL, OpoiZaOai, kvicTTrjKev. 3. k^a7raTy]crrj,

^\0r), CL'jroKa\v(f)Orj . 4. avriKet/x-evo?, virepatpo/xevo?, Xcyo^cvov, KaGtcrat,

diroSei/cvtVra. 5. fxvqfJiOvevcTe, eXeyov. 6. KaTe;(OV, otSare, a.iroKa\v(f)$rjvai.

7. evcpyetrat, Kare'^^wv, yivqrat. 8. diroKaXut^^T^crcTat, dvaXcucret, KarapyrjcreL.

10. diroAAv/>t€v069, eSe^avTO, crco^^i/at. 11. Trifxij/eL, Trtcrrcvo-at (distinguish

tliis from Optative forms, as in ver. 17). 12. Kpt^uJo-t, TrtcrTcvcravTcs,

€v8oKr;crai/Te9. 13. o(^etXo/x€V, €v;(apt(rT€rv, rjyaTrrjixevoL, elXero (eiAaro is

read by W. H. ; see § 97, rzo^e), 14. cKoAeo-ev. 15. o-rrjKere (see § 108, 4),

KpareLTC, iSiSaxOyre. 16. dya7r77cra9, 8oi;s. 17. irapaKaAeVat (Optative),

(TT-qpi^ai (Optative).

CHAPTER m.

1. 'n'poflrcv;(€cr^e, rpiyrj, So^d^Tyrat. 2. pvcrOio/xcv. 3. 0"n)pL^€L, (jyvXa^eL,

4. 7re7rot'^ap,ev, irapayyeAAo/xev, TrotetTc, TrotT^crcrc. 5. KaTci/^wat (Optative).

6. (rreAAccr^at, irepiTrarovvTO?, irapeAa^e. 7. ixL/x€L(rOaL, ^raKTi^a-afjLev (from
draKTea)). 8. e^dyo/X€V, ipya^ofxcvot, i-ni^aprjc ai. 9. exop-ev, 8oj/xcv.

10. ^p.€V, irapT/yyeAAo/xev, ^e'Aei, ipyd^ccrOat, icrOUTU). 11. aKoro/xcv,

cpya^o/xevovs, irepiepyo^o/xei/ov?. 12. irapaKoAov/Aev, icrOtoicnv. 13. ^K^a-

K-qcTjTC, KoXoTTOtovvTe?. 14. viraKOvci, (rrjp.eiov(r6€y o-uvava/xtyvvcr^e, kvrpair^.
15. riyeiaOe, vovOeTCLTe. 16. Scui;. 17. ypdcfxn.

Exercise 16.— Short Sentences.

I. The Beatitudes (Matt. v. 3-10).

These and the following sentences are given chiefly as practice in

applying the rules of conjugation and declension. As the clauses
are complete in sense, they necessarily involve the principles of S}Titax
;

but no difficulties in construction will be found. For the use of the

Cases, see § 11. The references in the Notes to succeeding parts of the
work will also be useful.
Observe that throughout the Beatitudes the substantive verb are inust be
supplied with the predicate, fxaKdpioi, hlessccL (See § 166.) 6'rt is because
(§ 136, 6).
128 EXERCISES. K 117.

1. MttKaptot ol TTToy^oi tcu TrvevfxazL'^ ort avTwi/- €(ttIv rj jSacrtActa twv

2. fiaKapiOL ol 7r€vOovvT€^'^ OTL avTol 7rapaKXr)6rj(TOVTaL.

3. fxaKapiOi OL Trpaets* on avrol KXrjpovo/Jiya-ovcn r-qv yyjv-

4. jxaKapioi ol 7reLV(x)VT€<5 kol Sti/^wvTes* rrjv SiKaioa-uvrjv' on avrot X^P"

Tacr6r]crovTaL.

5. fJiaKOLpLOL ol iX€r]jxove<S' otl avTol IXi-qQ-qcovTai.

6. fxaKapioi ol KaOapol Trj KapBia' on avrol tov 0eov oxf/ovrau^

7. [XaKOipiOi ol ilprjVOTTOLOL' OTL avTol vlol^ 0€OV K\r]6rj(T0VTaL.

8. /xaKapLOL ol SeSttoy/AeVot eve/ccv^ StKatoo-vnys *

oTiavTwv icrrlv rj f^aaikua
Toiv ovpavwv.

II. From John i.

Prepositions. Adverb ttsed as Preposition,

d-TTo, with Gen., /roT/i, o/ (a place). Xwpts, with Gen., ivithout.

Sid, „ by means of,

€K, out Negative Adver'bs.

„ of.

iv, with Dat., in, with plural, ov, not.

among. ovSe, not even.

irapdj with Gen., /?'om (of persons).

Conjunctions.
TTpos, with Ace, WTj^o, with {§ 307,

r. 2).
Kttt, and (§ 136, 1).

Further details, Ch. VI., and Syntax. 0)9, as (§ 136, 2).

Verses 1-5.

"El/ apx]7 "V*^

o Xoyos, /cac 6 A-oyos r]v Trpos tov 0€OV, Kat 0eos ^j' o
Xoyos.^ ovTO<; yjv Iv o.py;rj irpo^ tov ®e6v. TravTa 8l avTOV eyevero,^ Kat

^ Dative : in (the) spirit, as hereafter explained, § 280, /. Compare tt/ Kapdla, 6

2 Of til em = theirs.
^ The mourning ones = <^05c wJio mourn, § 200. Compare the Participles in
sentences 4, 8.
* Hungering and thirsting /or righteousness (ace), § 281, a.
6 See § 103, 4.
^ Nominative after a copulative verb. See § 165, note.
7 For the sake of (gen.), § 133.
^ 6 Xd7os is the subject, § 206.
* Singular verb, with plural neuter nominative, § 173.
§ 117.] EXEKCISES. 121)

Xwpt? avTOv iyev€TO ovSc Iv o yeyovev. iv avrw t,(j)rj rjv, kol rj t,oir] rjv

TO (^ojg tCjv av6pu}7r(x)Vf kol to <f>(i)S €v ttj o-kotlo. (^atVci, kol rj (TKoria avro

ov KOTeXajSev,
Verse 14.

Kat 6 Xo'yo? aapi eycVero, kol €(TK-qvo)(r€V iv rj/xiv (kol iOeacrdfieOa ttjv

So^av avTOV, B6$av ws /xovoyevoCs Trapa Trarpos') 7rXt]pr]<? ^dptTO^ Kat

aXrjOi.ia'i.

Verses 45, 46.

EvpL(TK€L ^L\i7nro<; Tov 'SaOavaTjX, Kal Xiyet avTw} ''^Ov'^ €ypaif/e MwvcttJs
iv TW VOfJiCO KOL OL TTpOC^T^Tttt^ €Vpi^KafJL€V, 'Ir](T0VV^ vloV TOV 'I(jO(T^0 TOV^
dirb Na^apeV. Kat cTttcv avT<}^ Na^ara^X, 'Ek Na^aper Swarat Tt dya^oif

cti'at;^ Xcyet avraj^ ^tXtTTTros, ''Ep;>(Oi; Kat tSe.

III. Selected Sentences.

Prepositions (additional). Conjunctions,

€is, with Ace, into. 8e, hut.

(TTL, „ to. oTt, thai.

IxcTa, with Gen., together with.

1. 'Erot/xacraTe'^ t^v oSop' Kvptov.

2. 'iTyo-oi), i\€r}a'6v' fie.

3. ®dp(T€ij^ eyeipaij <f>u)veL (re,

4. H TTLCTTLS (TOV (T€CrOiK€ (Tf.

5. A^ewvrat (Tov at d/xaprtat.

6. ^vviSpo-fii^ Trpos auTOvs vras 6 Xao9,

7. M€TCKaX€0"aTO Tovs 7rp€(r^vT€povs T^s eKKX>/crtas.

8. MaKaptoi/ ccTTt StSdvat /jtctAXov 17 Xafx^dvecv.

9. KatVapa^ CTTtKCKXrycrai, CTTt KatVapa 7rop€V(rrj.

^ To him, dative after the verb of saying, § 278, 6.

- Understand him as antecedent: "him whom," § 347.
•*
Understand eypaxpav.
* (Namely) Jcsiis, in apposition (§ 177) with the antecedent (2) above.
•^
Simply refers to viov (§ 230, a), not to be translated.
^ The infinitive dependent on duvarai (§ 389, a), can anything good he ?
^ For the sense of the Aoiist Imperative, and its distinction from the Present,
§ 373 may be consulted.
8 See § 103 (5).
' To Cajsar: prep, implied in verb (§ 281, a). See ("*) on the Beatitudes.
K
130 EXEKCISES. [§ 117-

10. Avd(TTr]6i,^ KOL (TTrjOt^ CTTt TOv<s TToSa? aov.

11. H 7rto"Tts vfiiov KarayyeA-Aerat iv oXo) tw Kocr/xu).

12. FiV<l>pdvOr]Te,^ Wvr}, fx,€Ta rov Xaov avTOv.

13. Q<s (ro<:f)6<i dp)(^LT€KT(DV Oe/jiiXLov TeOeiKa, dWos Se cTrotKoSo/xet.
14. ^detpovatv riOrj ^^crO'^ 6/xtXtat KaKaL
15. H dyaTrr) rov ^pi(rTov (Tvvi')(€i rjixas.

16. Xa)/)7j(raT€^ Ty/xas, ovSeVa ^St/<>;o-a;u,ei/, ovSeVa i(fi6eLpafji€V, ovSeVa

eTrXeoveKTT^ca/xev.

17. IlavTa 3oKt//,a^€Tc •

^ to KaXoi/ Karep^ere*^ (xtto Travros ct8ovs Trovvpov^
dir€)(^ea6e.^

18. IIto"Tos* 6 Xoyos Kttt Trdcrrj'i d7ro8o)(yj<i^ agios, ort Xpto"Tos 'It^o^oC";

^XOev €is rov KocTfJLOv a/xaprwXous o'wa'at.^

19. 'HvotyT^ 6 vao<s Trj<s aKr]urj<s rov fxapTvptov iv tw ovpav<^.

1 For the sense of the Aorist Imperative, and its distinction from the Present,
§ 373 may be consulted.
2 See § 3, h,
^ From every form of evil, 1 Thess. v. 22,
^ Understand e(XTi. Compare on the Beatitudes, prefixed note.
^ Genitive, by a^ios, worthy of (§ 272).
^ Infinitive, expressing ^wr^osc, as in English. (See § 389, ?>, 1.)
 —

§ 119.J PREPOSITIONS. 131

Chapter YI. PEEPOSITIONS.

118. It was stated in § 11 that three forms of inflection, or

" cases," in Nouns are used, to denote three several relations of
place : the Genitive implying motion from ; the Dative, rest in, or

and the Accusative, motion toiuards. The cases

connection loith ;
thus severally answer the questions, Whence ? Where ? Whither ?
With this general distinction are connected very many other
relations, which are expressed by the same three cases, with the
aid of Prepositions.

To Syntax it belongs to exhibit the various meanings of the preposi-

tions, and their place in sentences. For the present, it Avill suflice to
give a list of the chief of them, with their general significations. This
is necessary, partly because several adverbs (see § 132) are derived from
prepositions ; but chiefly because of the important place which preposi-
tions hold in the composition of verbs. (See Chapter X.)

Prepositions may govern

1. The Genitive only : Wlience, ?-

2. The Dative only Where ?

:

3. The Accusative only Whither: .?

4. The Genitive and Accusative : Mlience ? Whither?

5. The Genitive, Dative, and Accusative : Whence ? Wliere ?

TVTiither ?

119. Prepositions governing the Genitive only.

avTL (opposition, equivalent), ovei' a(jainst, ojyposed to, indead of.

ttTrd (motion from the exterior), from, away from.
Ik, i^ (motion from the interior), from, oid of.
TTpo, before, whether of time or place.

To these may be added most of the " improper" prepositions, as they

are often called ; being really adverbs with a prepositional government.
(For a Hst of these, see § 133.)
132 ITvEPOSlTICNS. [§ 120.

120. Peepositions governing the Dative oni.v.

iv, in, of time, place, or element ; among.

(Tvv (union of co-operation ; compare /-tcra), ivitli.

121. Prepositions governing the Accusative only.

ava (up in), used in tlie phrases ava fxiaov, in the midst of ; di^a fX€po<i,

in turns (1 Cor. xiv. 27).

C4S (motion to the interior), into, to, unto, with a view to.

122. Prepositions governing the Genitive and Accusative.

Sid, through. Gen. (through, as proceeding from), through, by means

of. Ace. (through, as tending towards), on account of, owing to.

Kara, down. Gen. (down from : so, literally, 1 Cor. xi. 4), against.

Ace. (down towards), according to, throughout, during, over.

ixerd (union of locality ; compare o-w). Gen., together with, among.

Ace., after.

irepi, around. Gen., about, concerning, on behalf of; once, above

(3 John 2). Ace, about, round about.
vTrif), over. Gen., above, on behalf of for. ,
Ace, beyond.

vTTo, under." Gen., by (of the agent or efficient cause). Ace, under,
in the ]iower of, close u;pon (as Acts v. 21, close upon morning, i.e., "very
early").

123. Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative, and

Accusative.

cTTt (superposition). Gen., upon (as springing from), over, in the pre
sence of, in the time of. Dat., upon (as resting on), in addition to, on
account of. Ace, up to (used of place, number, aim), overr (of time,
place, extent).

irapd (juxtaposition). Gen. (from beside), from, used of persons, as

ttTTo of places. Dat. (at the side of), near, ivith, of persons only, except
[§ 124. J PREPOSITIOXS. 133

John xix. 25. Ace. (to, or along the side of), beside, compared witli^ z.e.,

so as to be shown beyond, or contrary to, instead of.

irpos (in the direction of). Gen., in favour of, only in Acts xxvii. 34.
Dat., at, close by. Ace, towards, in reference to.

124. Synoptical Table of the Peepositioxs.

The Prepositions are here exhibited, in groups, both because their meaning
may thus be more easily remembered, and because the comparison, both in
meaning and form, suggests some interesting points of relationship. For further
details the student may consult Goodwin's Greek Grammar (Macmillan). Only
the general meaning of every preposition is given in the following table and ;

the initial capitals denote the cases governed. Cases found with certain preposi-
tions in classic Greek, but not in the New Testament, are l)racketed.

Q. ttTTo, in reference to the exterior, from.

C G. Ik, in reference to the interior, from, proclitic.
\ D. Iv, „ „ iJi, ,.

( A. €19, „ „ to, „
( (d.) a. dvd, up; opposite of Kara.
( G. A. Kara, down ; opposite of dra.
/ G. D. A. Ittl, superposition, up>on.

I
G. D. A. Trapa, juxtaposition, beside.

G. D. A. Trpo'?, propinquity, toioards.

G. (d.) a. TTcpt, circumvention, entire ; around.
(q. d, a. ) d/x,<^i, circumvention, partial ; about.

{G. A. virip, ove\' ; {super).

G. A. vTTo, under; (sub).

{G. A. ix€TOL, association, with, after

D. arvv, co-operation, with.

{G. dvTL, opposition, specific, over against

G. TTpo, opposition, general, in front of, before.

G. A. Stix, through, kindred with Si-o, and regarding the object as

divided into two parts.

a/x<^t is not found in the New Testament, except in composition. In

Greek its use is comparatively
classic rare. With all three cases it

means about, or around.

Accenttuition. — The Prepositions are all oxytcne except the proclitics, eh,
ix, iv.
134 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 125.

125. For further details as to the meaning and use of the

prepositions, see Chapter X., especially the Table, § 147, a; also
Syntax.

In explanation of the very various significance which may belong to

the same preposition, two points should be noted: (1) that its meaning
will be necessarily modified by the signification of the verb that it may
follow, and by that of the noun which it governs, as also b)'' the case of
the latter; and (2) that as all languages have a far smaller number of
words than there are shades of thought to express, one Avord must often
have many applications. Then, as no language is exactly parallel, word
for word, with any other, the variations of meaning included under one
Greek term, for instance, will not be the same as those embraced by the
nearest English equivalent. Thus, may
often he translated /o?' /
v-n-ip

but the applications of the two words, though perhaps equally various,
are very far from being identical
 :

§ 127.] ADVERBS. 135

Chapter YII. ADYEKBS.

126. The simplest, and perhaps the form of an Adverb, original

is some case of a substantive, a pronoun, or an adjective agreeing

with a noun understood fixed absolutely in that shape to express

;

some quality, manner, place, or time.

a. The Accusative is very often thus employed, as d/cyiiTJv (Matt. xv. 1 6),
yet^ lit., "up to (this) point ;" irepav, on the other side. In like manner
is used the accusative neuter of many adjectives, both singular and plural;
often with the article : as, to AotTrov, furthermore (once, tov Xolttov, Gal.
vL 17); TO. TToAAa, for the most part. So, possibly from obsolete adjec-
tives, crrjixipov, to<laij ; avptov, to-morroio ; x^^'?? yesterday.

h. The Dative (sometimes found

in an obsolete form) is also frequently
as i8ia, privately ; Tr^lrj, Here the iota subscript is often
by land.
omitted : Travrrj, always (Acts xxiv. 3, in some copies, TrdvTrj) eiK^, ;

mthout a cause.
c. The Genitive occurs in avrov, there, as well as in other forms which
will be noticed inunediately.
d. In some instances, a preposition tvith its case written as one word
is used adverbially, as Trapaxprjfj.a, immediately, lit., " along with the
business;" e^at^vr;?, suddenly, lit., "from a steep descent;" KaOe$7]<s, in
order, lit., "according to a special course."
e. The older form of the language
employed the terminations -0€v, -9i,
and -8€ as Dat., Ace), and when they
case-endings of nouns (Gen.,
became obsolete in ordinary declension, they were retained as adverbial
terminations to denote whence, where, and whither. Thus ovpavoOev, :

from heaven; TraiSioOev, from childhood (Mark ix. 21) Tripvcrt (the -cri ;

standing for the older -0i), last year (2 Cor. viii. 10; ix. 2). These ter-
minations are also found in adverbs derived from prepositions and other
adverbs, on which see § 132.

Adverbs in -ws.

127. The most common form of adverbs is, however, that in -cj§.

This termination, which answers exactly in meaning to our finaJ

136 ADVERBS. [§ 127.

syllable -ly} is affixed to adjective-stems of all forms, the stem-

ending, where needful, being modified.

For example :

First form (§ 34), SiKaLo<;, Just, 8iKaio-; StKatMS, justly.

Second form (§ 37), Tra?, all, iravr- ; Travro)?, wholly.

Third form (§ 41), aXrjOrj^, true, dXTjOeo-- ; aXrjOCjs, truly.

Participles may also use this adverbial form, as oVtws (from wv, stem
ovT'), really.

Sometimes an adverb made from an adjective appears in two forms: as

Ttt^v and raxews, quickly ; evOvs (probably a corrupt form of cvOv) and
€v6eiD<;, immediately.

Comparison of Adverbs.

128. The comparative of adverbs is generally the neuter singular

accusative of the corresponding adjective ; the superlative, the neuter
plural. Thus :raxews (or ra^v), quickly ; Ta^iov^ more quickly (John
XX. 4); 2 TaxiOTTa, most quickly (Acts xvii. 15); €v, ivell (probably from
€i5s,an old equivalent of dya^o?); P^Xtlov, better (2 Tim. i. 18). Adverbs
of other than adjective derivation conform to this model. So from av<o
(see § 132) is found avoixepov.

Some comparatives take the termination -w?, as Trepia-a-oTipo)';, more

ahundantly.

An irregular comparative and superlative are iwXkov, more ; /xaXio-Ta,

most. So, acro-ov, nearer (Acts xxvii. 13), attributed to the adverb (in
classic Greek) ayx^ near; superlative, a-yyicrja..

Pronominal Adverbs, used also as Conjunctions.

129. Several adverbs are formed indirectly or directly from pro-

nouns and, like pronouns, are demonstrative, relative, interrogative,
;

dependent interrogative, and indefinite (enclitic).

^ It is possibly an old dative plural : -a;j = -ots. The accentuation generally follows
that of the genitive plural of the adjective ; as oiKaioju, diKaicos, dXrjOQy, d\T}6(oi.
* But W. H. read rdxciou. Cf. § 43, note.
 — ;

ADVERBS. 137
§ 131.]

The following Table gives the chief pronominal adverbs found

in the New Testament :

Dependeut Indefinite.
Demonstrative. Relative. Interi-osative.
Interrogative.

Time ... rbre, then 5t€, when TTOTe; when? biroTe, when TTore, some-
vvv, vvvi, now TjviKu, when time
Placo ... avTov, here o5, where Kov', U'hcre? oTTov, where TTov, some-
(35e, here where
e/ce?, iKeiae,
there, thitlier
ivddde, hither
hrevdev, hence, 66 €v, whence TTodev, whence?
thence
Manner oi!tw(s), thtis, so ws, as TT'is; how? oTTWs, how 7rw(s), some-
irdrepov, wliethcr how

The correlatives in the above Table Avill be immediately perceived.

For further details compare undei* Pronouns, especially § 62, and Syntax.
oxjTta^ so, becomes ovTui<i before a vowel, and the indefinite ttw is always
7rw9, except in composition.
It will be observed that the scheme of adverbs is incomplete in the
relative and interrogative divisions, by the omission of the (accusative)
form whithefi\ Greek supplies the omission by the words oX, ttol ;
Classic
oTTot, but these are not found in the New Testament, the genitive forms

ov, TTov; OTTOV bclug uscd. Compare in English the tendency to say
" Where are you going 1" for " Whither are you going V

Numeral Adverbs.

130. Numeral adverbs end in -is, -kis, or -aKis, as St?, twice; rpi^ thrice;
cTTTaKt?, seven times; ifSho/jLTjKovTdKi^, seventy times (Matt, xviii. 22);
TToXAaKts, viany times, aira^, once for all, is exceptionally formed
ocraKLs, 08 often as (1 Cor. xi. 25, 26), is from the relative.

Adverbs from Verbs.

131. Ancient verbal forni.s, used as adverbs, are Sevpo, hither, with its
plural, hevTt.These are generally employed as imperatives, " Come thou
13S ADVERBS. [§131-

(or ye) hither /^^ The imperative aye is also employed as a kind of
adverb, Go to ! (James iv. 13 ; v. 1).

Some verbs in -{X,<a, expressing national peculiarity, form an adverb in

-KTTi. Tims, from eAAiyvt^w, we find eXXrjvLo-TL, in the Greek language;
similarly, ifSpaicrTi, in the Hebrew language.

Adverbs from Prepositions.

132. Many prepositions have a corresponding adverb in -« (paroxy-

tone). Thus, from avd is formed avw, upioards ; and from Kara, Karw,
doimiiuards. So, lo-o), within; c^w, without. The termination -0€v is
added to these adverbs also, with a genitive force ;as arw^er, from above;
e^oiOev, from toithout.

Once, a preposition without change is employed as an adverb (2 Cor.

xi. 23), virlp iyo), I (am) more^

Prepositive Adverbs, or Improper Prepositions.

133. Several adverbs may be used like prepositions to govern nouns,

and are then termed "improper" or "spurious" prepositions. The
following is an alphabetical list of the principal found in the New
Testament :

a/xa, together with.

avevj without.

axpi(9), or fii)(pL(^), until.

iyyv'5, near (in time or space).
efXTrpocrOev, before.

IvavTLov^ in front of againd.

€V€Ka (-ev), for the salce of
ivioTTLovy before, in the presence of
€^<o, without.
l-rraviii, above.
€(r(i}, within.
€W9, as far as.

fX€(Tov, in the midst o/(Phil. ii. 15).

fjLGTa^v, betioeen.

* So, 7r/)6j, ton, often in classical Greek.

§ 134. C] ADVERBS. 189

OTTora), oTTLaOeVy behind, after.

6i}/€, at the end of (iNFatt. xxviii. 1).

vXrjvy excejyt.
TrXrjaiov, near ; TrapaTrXrjcrLOV, vei'y near.

vTTcpeKctva, beyond (2 Cor. x. 16).

X^-P^^i ^V fd'^our of, for the salce of.

Xwpis, separated from, without.

Some of the above, it is evident, are originally adverbial forms of

adjectives and substantives. All govern the Genitive, except a/xa
(Matt. xiii. 29), and TrapairX-qaiov (Phil. ii. 27),^ which take the Dative;
as does eyyu? sometimes.

Negative Adverbs.

134. «. The negative adverbs are ov (before a vowel, ovk ;

before an aspirated vowel, oup^), not, and jxr), not.

Accentuation. — ov is proclitic, excepting where emphatic; as ov, JVo ! (John

i. 21).

b. For an explanation of the difference between these two words, see

Syntax. It must suffice now to say that ov denies facts, /xrj mental con-
ceptions. The former is called the " categorical " or " objective" nega-
tive; the latter, the "conditional" or "subjective." Both words are
used in composition with rts, tl (see § 60); also with the indefinite
adverbs in the Table, § 129, as ovTray, not yet ; ix-rj-n-oTe, never in any case.

c. fiTj is also used as an interrogative adverb, expecting the answer,

no; and, in composition with the interrogative tis, adds a kind of appeal
to the hearers, as though enlisting their assent to the negative : thus, fxrJTt

cyw; (Mark xiv. 19), Is it I? i.e., " It is not I, is it?"

* But W. H. read irapaTXrjcriov Oavarov,

140 coNjuNCTioxs. [5:5 135.

CHArTER VIIT. COXJUNCTION'S AND OTHER

PAETICLES.

135 Besides the Conjunctions properly so called, used, as in other

languages, to unite words and sentences, there are in Greek several inde-
clinable words, employed sometimes separately, often in combination
with other words, for the purpose of empliasis. These cannot always
be translated, the degree of emphasis being too slight for the words of
less flexible languages to convey.

These indeclinable words, together with the conjunctions them-

selves (and sometimes the primitive adverbs), are generally called
Particles.

It belongs to Syntax to discuss the place and power of the particles in

a sentence. All, therefore, that is now necessary is, to classify the chief
of them, and to indicate their general meaning.

Classification of the Conjunctive Particles.

136. The Conjunctions denote (1) annexation, (2) comparison,

(3) disjunction, (4) antithesis, (5) condition, (6) reason, (7) inference,
or (8) result. The relative forms of the adverbs (see § 129) are also
really conjunctions.

1. Annexation. —The copulative conjunctions are /cat', and, also, even;

re, and, also. The latter is generally subordinate : rc.Kat, both...andf
not only .. .hut ; sometimes Kat... tc, or tc...t€. Very commonly, however,
both... and is expressed by Kat... Kat', as in 1 Thess. ii. 14, 15, etc.

2. Comparison. —As conjunctions of comparison, the particles ws, as;

loa-rrep, just as; Ka6ui<;, like as, are used ; mostly in correlation with the
adverb ovrm, so. (Compare § 129, Table.)

3. Disjunction. —The disjunctive particles are rj, 07'; -7... -7, either... or

(in general); r;rot...r;, either. ..or (as an exclusive alternative), ctrc.ctTe,

whether... whet her.
 ,;

§ 138, a.] CONJUNCTIONS —INTEKJECTIONS. 141

4. Antithesis. —The antithetic conjunctions are dAAa (originally neuter

plural of oAAos) and 8e, both signifying but. The adversative sense is

much stronger in the former than in the With Se the particle

latter.

fxiv often stands in the precedmg sentence, and may be rendered indeed^
or on the one hand (8e, on the other), or, more frequently, may be left
untranslated, marking simply that two clauses stand in real or formal
tlie

antithesis. Etymologically, /xiv is (probably) 'the first thing;" 8e, " the
second thing:" the antithesis is, therefore, often very slight, a distinction
rather than opposition.

5. Condition. —The conditional particles are et, if; ciye, if at least

ctTTC/o, if at all ; idv (ct av), if (possibly). For the important rules as to
their use with verbs, see Syntax.
6. Cause. — Particles expressive of a reason (causal) are, ort, that,
because; yap, for ; Scort, because ; tVet (see § 407, a), since.

7. Inf&i'ence. — The chief inferential particles are ovv, therefore; tolvvv,

then ; apa, consequently ; 8td, wherefore ; rocyapovv, accordingly.

8. Result. —The " final " conjunctions are tva, in order that ; u)s and
OTTCDS, so that; /x-^, that not, lest.

Particles of Emphasis and Interrogation.

137. ^. The chief emphatic particles are ye, at least, indeed (enclitic)
and hrj, certai7dy, noio. To these may be added the enclitics Trep, very,
verily, and toi, certainly, found in combination with other words, as
cTretSryTrcp (Luke i. 1), since verily ; /xeVrot, hotceoer.

b. As inteiTogative particles the following are employed : ei, if, used

elliptically, "Tell us if — ;"
^, simply denoting that a question is asked,
and requiring no English equivalent save in the form of the sentence
and apa (not to be confounded with apa, § 136, 7), which makes the
question emphatic (only in Luke xviii. 8 Acts viii. 30 Gal. ii. 17). ; ;

Eor the interrogative adverbs, see § 129; and for the structure of interro-
gative sentences, consult the Syntax.

Interjections.

138. a. An Interjection is generally but the transcript of a natural

instinctive sound, and therefore scarcely ranks among the "parts of
142 INTERJECTIONS. [§ 138, a.

organised speech." Words of this kind in the New Testament are w, 0!

oh ! ca, ah ! expressive of pain and terror (Luke iv. 34) ; ova, ah
expressing scorn and hatred (Mark xv. 29) ; ouat, woe ! alas ! often
governing a dative ; oval vfjlv, woe unto you ! alas for you

h. The imperative form, tSc, see, is often treated interjectionally, but

still more frequently the old imperative middle of the same verb is

employed, accented as a particle : tSov, lo 1 behold I

 ;

§ 139.] W01lD-rOKjlATlU.\ — SUBSTANTIVES. I'Ao

Chapteu IX. ON THE FOEMATION OF WOKDS.

139. 1. Roots. — Words of all kinds are derived from some Koot.
For the distinction between root and stem^ see § 10. The root is that
part which remains after taking away from a whole family of kmdred
words all the parts which are different in each. Thus AK- is the root
of aK-fx-q, OLK-po<i, aK-av9a.
The root expresses the leading idea, or general meaning, which runs
through all the kindred words, though differently modified in each ;
thus,

AK- expresses the general meaning of " sharpness" or " pointedness."

In the formation of words, some are derived directly from the root
as oLKfjLrj, from AK-. Others take as a ("secondary") root the stem of
words already formed ; as d/c/xa^w, from ctK/xTJ (dKjia-).

Hence we find primary, secondary, tertiary, etc., formations.^

Thus :—
Primary. Secondary. Tertiary.

'AK-fXTj, point 'AKp,-aCw, to flourish.

"AK-pos, poirded 'AKpt-^rys, accurate 'AKpi'pc-ia, accuracy.
*AKpip-cos, accurately.

2. Classes of Words. —
Without attempting here any extended state-
ment of the methods and laws of derivation, it will be useful to specify
some of the leading terminations which occur in the formation of Greek
words. Each of these terminations has a particular force and meaning
of its own, whatever be the root or stem to which it is joined thus, :

Kpi-TTJs, ^TyXw-Trj?, kXc'tt-tt/s, TToXi-Trj'i, have all the same termination,

-rqs, and with the same meaning.

Classes of Avords may thus be formed, by arranging togetlier those
which liave the same terminations, and marking their signification and ;

this may be done with words of all kinds —

substantives, adjectives,
pronouns, verbs, and particles.

^ See, for greater dotail, Goodwin's Greek Grammar, §§ 128 — 132.

144 WORD-FOllMATIOX — SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 139.

3. Modification of Stem-endings. —
The final vowel or consonant of the
root or stem will be affected by the termination according to the general
usages of the language, as illustrated especially in the inflections of the
verbs. Thus, 7roLr]-T^<;, from iroic- (compare § 96, a, etc.), and KaXvTr-Tw,
KaXvjx-jxa (see § 4, cZ, 4), from Ka\v(j>- or KaXvp-.

Classes of Substantives.

140. a. First Declension. — 1. Masadine Nouns. —The termination

-TTis expresses a male agent. Thus, KplTy'is, a judge ; 7rof/;T>7s, a maker^
doer, imet. Some nouns of this termination are formed from the root of
simpler nouns : as 7roXLTr}<; (TrdAts), citizen ; oik€ti)<; (oTkos), domestic.

Accentuation. —Dissyllables of this class, and polysyllables with short penul-

tima, throw back the accent as far as possible, except Kpir-^s. So xpivarris,
deairdTrji, xpevcrTai, deavora (voc). The rest are oxytone, except TroXtTT^s.

2. Feminine Nouns. — i. The termination -id (paroxytone) expresses

quality. Adjective stems in cs- or oo- give the forms (pro-paroxytone)
-€ia, -Old. So, (TOcfiLa, wisdom (credos) aX-^Oeca, truth ', [aXrjOi^s) ',
evvota,

good-will (€vvov<s). A few nouns in -eid (paroxytone) are from verbal

stems in -cv, and denote the result of action ; as /5ao-tXcta, kingdom
(^ao-tXevoj) ; TratSeta, instruction (TraiSevo)).

ii. Substantives in -oo-vvtj connected with adjective stems in ov-, rarely

in 0-, also denote quality ; as o-w^poo-vVry, prudence, from aaxfifmv, stem
ov- ; iXerjjxoa-vvrj, compassion (eX^rjfjiwv) ; StKatocrvvr}, righteousness (StKaios);
ay Lwo-vvrj, holiness (aytos), the o- becoming -w, because of the short pre-
ceding syllable. (Compare § 42.)

—
Second Declension. 1. Masculine Nouns. The termination -jids
b. —
(oxytone) appended to verbal stems denotes action as from ^vw (Ov-), ;

to rage, Ovfjtos, passioyi. Sometimes o- intervenes, as in 8€o-/>io9, hond^

from Be-, Sew, to hind; or 0, as KXavOixos, lamentationy from KXaf-,
KAato), to loeep. (See § 96, c.)

2. Neider Nouns. — i. The ending -rpov, from verbal roots, denotes

instrument. Thus, \v-, Avw, to release ; Xvrpovy ransom.

ii. The termination -lov, diminutive as

from substantive stems, is :

from Trals (iraiS-), a child; TratStW, a little child. To -tov is sometimes

prchxed tlie syllabic ap- or i8- as TraiSdpiov, a Utile hnij; kXlvlSloi', a
:
§ 141.] WORD-FORMATION —SUBSTANTIVES. 145

little bed, from kKlvtj^ a couch; dcrcrdpLov, a farthing, from Latin, as.

(See § 154, a.)

Diminutives in -lov must be distinguished from neuters of adjectives in -tos,

used as substantives : e.g., IXaaT-qpiov, propitiatory.

The masculine and feminine terminations -io-kos, -iVkt] are also occa-
sionally used as diminutives. Thus, vcavias (stem a-), a youth; v€avL(TKo<s,

a lad. So, iratBLorKYj, a damsel.

Accentuation of A^euters. —
Neuter nouns generally retract the accent. Dimi-
nutives in 'lov are, however, paroxytone, except when a short syllable precedes
this termination.

c. —
Third Declension. 1. Masculine Nouns. i. The suffix -evs (oxy- —
tone), stem if-, denotes an agent as ypa/^/xarcv?, a scribe, from YpainxaT-,
:

ypa/z/xa, a letter. (For the declension of these substantives, see § 30, iii.)

ii. The terminations -ririp (oxytone) and -rwp (paroxytone, stem rop-)
also signify an agent : as ^coo-r-^p, luminary, from c^ois, light; prp-u^p, aii

orator, from pe- (iu the obsolete verb pew, to speak).

2. Feminine Nouns. — i. The ending -<rts (gen. -o-ews, stem o-t-), from
verbal stems, expresses action. Thus, SiKaio- (SiKacow, to justify) gives

St/caitocns, justification ; and irpaY- (Trpao-o-w, to do), Trpa^ts, action. Tliese

nouns, a very numerous class, retract the accent. (For their declension,
see § 30, i. b.)

ii. The termination -rqs (gen. -rr]Tos, stem •n]r-) denotes quality, and is

attached to adjective stems. Thus, L(ro<;, equal, gives loroTrjs, equality;

ayios, holy, dyL6rr}<s, holiness. These also retract the accent.

3. Neuter Nouns. —i The termination -\ia. (stem jiar-) denotes the

result of action, and is affixed to verbal stems. Thus, Trpao-o-o), irpaY-,

gives irpdyfxa, a thing done, an action; and the obsolete pew, pe-, forms
p-^/xa, a thing spoken, a word.

ii. The ending -os (from stem es-, see § 30, iv.) denotes, from verbal
stems, result; from adjective stems, quality. Thus, from Second
/IS-,

Aor. cTSov, I saw (see § 103, 4), we have eT^os, an appearance; and from
Pa0v-, in Pa.6v<s, deep, p6Bo<s, depth.

141. The following scheme exhibits at one view the principal termi-
nations of derivative nouns. The nominative and genitive endings
146 WORD-FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 141.

are given as in Lexicons and Vocabularies ; but the stem and declension
will easily be traced.

Sisrnification. Nom. and Gen. Terminations. Gender.

Agent -6VS, -ims M.

Do. -TTIS, -TOW M.
Do. -tVjp, -TTJpOS M.
Do. -TWp, -TOpOS M.
Instrument -TpOV, -rpov N.
Action -JAOS^ -|XOV M.
Do. -<ris, -crews F.

Eesult -€ia, -eias F.

Do. lia, -Haros N.

Do. OS, -ovs N.

Quality TTJS, -rqTOS F.

Do. -La, -£as P.

Do. -o(rvvt], -0(rvvT]S F.

Do. -OS, -ovs N.

Diminutive -lOV, -Cov N.

Do. -lO-KOS, -la-KOv M.
Do. -la-KT], -ICTKTJS F.

Classes of Adjectives.

142. 1. The most common derivative Adjectives are of the First

Form, and the usual terminations are the following :

a. From substantive roots, the ending -tos (-^a^), -tov, is possessive, i.e.,

has the sense belonging to. Thus, from ovpavo-, ovpavo^, heaven,
of, or
is derived ovpdvLO';, heavenly; from njia-, Tt/xrj, honour, rt/xto?, honourable,

precious. The i of this termination sometimes forms a diphthong with a

final stem vowel ; so, from SUrj (8iKa-), justice, comes SUaLo^, just; from
uyopa, marJcet-j^lace, dyopaios, public. To this class also belong the

* Occasionally with prefix -6 or -a.

? Some gf t^ege ftdjectives »rg

^*
pf two terminations." (See § 34, h.
§ 142.] WOED-FORMATION — ADJECTIVES. 147

adjectives formed from the names of cities or countries, and denoting

their inhabitants. Thus, 'E^cVios, Ephesian (''E</)coro9); 'lovSato?, Jew
('lovSata).

Accenttiation. —The diphthongal forms are gert^rally properispomenon ; the

others are proparoxytone, i.e., retract the accent.

h. The termination -ikos, --^j -6v (oxytone), from verbal or substantive

roots, marks ability or fitness : as kpltlkoSj capable of judging {Kpivm) ;
^acTLXiKos, royal (^ao-tXcvs).

c. The ending -tvos, -t], -ov (proparoxytone), from substantive roots,

expresses the material of which anything is made : as $vXivo<s, wooden

Note. —The same substantive stem may have a derivative of each of the two
last-mentioned forms. Thus, from aapK- {<rap^-), flesh, are formed aapKivos,
made of flesh, "fleshy;" and aapKiKds, of the nature of fl^sh, "fleshly." The
former is only found in the received text of the New Testament in 2 Cor. iii. 3 ;

but on the authority of j\ISS., many critics substitute it for the latter in Rom.
vii. 14; 1 Cor. iii. 1 Heb. vii. 16 (so W. H.).
;

Sometimes the termination -cos (contr. -ovs) denotes material : as

dpyvpeos, apyvpovi of silver (apyvpo<s).

d. The termination -po?, -pa, -p6v (oxytone) denotes the complete

possession of a quality, like the English -ful or -able : as, from lo-xv-,

i(r!(vs, strength^ Icrxypo^j powerful.

e. Adjectives ending in -tfios, -ov, -<ri|jLos, -ov (proparoxytone) are occa-

sionally formed from verbal stems, and express ability or fitness as :

8oKt/xo9, receivable, current (of coin); so, approved, from 8€x-, Sexofxai, to
receive; ^rfcnixos, useful, from xp^^-j XP°^°/^^^ ^^ '^^^- Some proper names
are of this class, as 'Ovijo-t/xos (lit. profitable, see Philem. vers. 10, 11).

/. The verbals in -tos and -t^os have already been noticed (§ 73, p. 61).

2. Second and Third Forms. — Here the derivative stem-endings -€s

and need only be noticed.

-|jiov

a. Adjectives in -tis (see § 41) are generally correlative to nouns in -os

(cf. § 140, c. 3, ii.), the stem of which, it will be remembered, is also in €s-

(§ 30, iv.). So \l/evBo<s, falsehood; i/^cvSTJg, false.

b. Adjectives in -jicdv, derived from verbal stems, attribute the action

of the verb to the person : as kXa-, cAeew, to pity; iXei^fXiov, compassionate.
148 WORD-FORMATION— ADJECTIVES. [§ 143.

143. Scheme of Derivative Adjectives.

Signification. Terminations of Nom. Sing.

Quality -IIS, -€S

Do. complete -pos, -p&, -pov

Attribute, locality -los (-atos, -€ios, -otos) -la , -tov

Property -IKOS, -iKirj, -iKdv

Material -IVOS, -CVT], -IVOV

Do. (-€os) -ovs -€a ,

(-€ov) -ovv

Fitness -(<r)t|ios, -((r)iji.ov

Attribute -)jia>v, -jtov

Possibility (verbal) -Tos, -nrj, -TOV

Obligation (verbal) -T€OS, -T^a, -T^OV

Classes of Verbs.

144. Verbs from substantive or adjective roots ("denominative

ci.

verbs") may signify the being, doing, or causing that which the noun
imports. Verbs in -dw, -i<a, -cvw, generally denote simply state or action
verbs in -ow, -aivw, -vvw, causation. Thus, SovXevw, I am a slave; SovXoa), i
I make a slave of another, I enslave. The distinction is not always
observed ; for instance, irXrjOvvo) may be either / multiply, transitive, or

/ abound, intransitive. Verbs in -ilu often have the sense of becoming

or acting that which the noun denotes. Thus, 'lovSalos, a Jew; lovSdt^ui^
I act the Jew (Gal. ii. 14).
The principal denominative verbal terminations are as follow :

-aw, as Tifxadiy to honour (rt/xry).

7ro\€/jL€(i), to make war (iroXifio^;).

-6<a, BovXooy, to enslave (SovXos).

-dtw, ipyd^o/xai, to icork (^epyov).

-ttw, iXTTL^ia, to ho2ie (IXttis).

-aivo). XcvKaiW, to 'wJiiten (XevKo's).

jSaoriXevw, to reign (/SacnXiv^).

'WW, ttXtjOvvu), to abound, multij^ly (ttX^^os).

§ 145.] WOIID-FOKMATIOX —VEEBS. 149

h. Verbs from simpler verbal stems are inceptive s in -o-kw, as

yrjpaa-Kio, to grow old; frequentatives or emphatic verbs, as /SaTrrt^w,

to baptise (/JaTrrw); and causatives, as /xc^vo-kco, to intoxicate (/xeOvw);

ya/jLL^oi or yafjiL(TK(o, to give in marriage (yajxew). To these, as anomalous

derivatives from Perfects, may be added o-ttJko), to stand, from the Per-
fect €(TTr]Ka; and yprjyopiu}^ to watch, from iyprjyopaj the reduplicated
Second Perfect of eyeipw.

Geneeal Remaek ox Depjyatiox.

145. It often happens that the original of a derivative does not

appear in the language in its simpler form ; and still more frequently,
that it is not found in the Xew Testament. On the other hand, the
actual derived forms are far fewer than the possible. The copiousness
and fertility of the Greek as a hving language depended especially on
the power which it possessed of expressing new thoughts and shades of
thought by words framed according to strict analogy, and therefore com-
petent to take their place at once without question in the vocabulary.
The language of science among ourselves —which, borrowed
in fact, is
from the Greek — furnishes an same power to accom-
illustration of the
pany, with equal step, the progress of knowledge and of thought.
150 WORD-FORMATION —COMPOUNDS. [§ 146

Chapter X. ON THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND

WORDS.
146. Compound words are either parathetic or synthetic in
their formation.
In parathetic^ compounds, both words retain their form and
meaning, subject only to the laws of euphony. They are, there-
fore,merely placed side hy side, as it were, though they are written
as one word. This is the case with all verbs compounded with
prepositions, as i/c^dXka), from eV and /SdWco direp')(Ofjbai,, from ;

diro and epyofxai KaOlcrTrjfjic, from Kara and Xarrjixt

; crvy^^^aipa), ;

from avv and yaipw. (The changes in the terminations of some

of the above prepositions need no explanation.)
In synthetic^ compounds, the former word, a noun or a verb,
loses all inflection while the latter often takes a form which it
;

could not have had out of composition. The words are therefore
placed in close union, and really make one word; as (j)iX6o-o(po<;,
from ^tXo9 and ao^la.

Parathetic Compounds.

147. The former word of a parathetic compound is ahnost always

in the New Testament a particle, e'.e., a preposition or an adverb; never
a verb.
The signification of many compounds can be satisfactorily ascertained only
from the Lexicon, as the meaning of the prefix is often modified by that of the 1
principal word.^ It will, however, be helpful to the learner to have at one view
the chief significations of the particles used in composition. The following
table {a) should be compared with that in § 124 and a little thought will trace
;

the connection in each case between the primitive significations (printed in

italics) and the secondary meanings that follow.

^ From Trapd and 6e- {Tidr]}xi), "set side by side."

2 From <jijv and Be-, " set together or com-posed."
^ So in English : e.g., the particle over varies its meaning in the words overthrow,
overtake, overrun, overtime, overhearing; the fundamental signification being, how-
ever, discernible in all.
§ 147, c] WOED-FOKMATION — COMPOtTNOS. 151

a. The Prepositions, as used in CompositioiL

d|i4»'-, rotmd about.
dva-, zip, back again.

dvTi-, instead of, against, in return for.

diro-, atvay from, dismission, completeness.
8ta-, through, thorough, between.
€ls-, into.

€K- (e|- before a vowel, 67- before a guttural), oul of, forth, utterly.

ev- (cfi- before a labial mute, or p.), in, upon, intrinsically.

e-iri-, wpoTi, to, in addition.
Kara-, dovm, downright, against.
ft€Ta-, with, participation, change.
irapa-, beside, beyond, along.
ircpi-, around, over and above, excess.
irpo-, before, forward.
irpos-, towards, in addition to.

<rvv- (<rv[i- before a labial mute, or (x ; <nry- before a guttural), ivith,

association, compression.
vir€p-, above, excess.
viro-, under, concealment, repression.

b. Separable Particles (Adverbs) in Composition.

d- (from afxa), together, as airas (-vt-), all together.

dpTi-, lately, only in dprtyo^nyTo?, neio-born (1 Pet. ii. 2).

6V-, well, prosperously.

iroXiv-, again, only in TraXtyycvecrta, regeneration (Matt. xix. 28 j

Titus iii. 5).

irav-, all (from neuter of iravr-).

TTjX6-, afar off, only in Tr)\avyC)<;, distinctly (Mark viii. 25).

c. Inseparable Particles in Composition.

d- (from avd), intensive : perhaps only in arevL^o), to gaze steadfastly.

d- or dv-, not, the usual negative prefix, answering to our unr.
8vs-, hardly or ill, like our dis-, mis-, or un-,
^Hi-, half (Latin, semi-), only in rjfjitOavrjs, half-dead, and rjfUiJipiov, half
an hour.
 152 WORD-FOKMATION —COMPOUNDS. [§ 147.

The Pretositions (Table a), when used in the composition of nouns

and adjectives, generally mark a secondarij formation, t.e., a derivation
from a compound verb. Thus, aTroo-roXo?, apostle, is not from oltto and
o-ToA.09, but from aTroorreXXo), to send forth ; so, airooToXriy apostlesliip.

Again, from cKXeyo/xat, to clioose out, come iKXiKTo^i, chosen^ elect; and
iKXoyrj, election. Some such nouns and adjectives, however, are found
without any corresponding compound verb.
The Adverbs and Inseparable Particles (Tables b, c) (except a-
negative) are generally used with substantives and adjectives, not with
verbs.
Two Prepositions may be combined in the fonnation of a word, the
characteristic formative force of each being retained. Thus, KaOia-Tiqixi,

to establish, dTroKaOto'TrjfjLL, to restore; Trapa/caXeo/xat, passive, to be com-

forted,'^ o-vfjLTTo.paKaXeofxaL, to be comforted together; ela-dyw, to introduice,
irapaa-dyo), to introduce by the bye (2 Pet. ii. 1). So irapucrrjXBev (Rom.
V. 20), entered by the way. Again, dvTtXa/x/3avo/zat is to help, generally
(lit., " to take hold of, over against"), but o-vvamAa/x/Jai/o/xat is to help
by coming into association with (as Luke x. 40; Rom. viii. 26).

Synthetic Compounds.

148. In synthetic compounds the former word is a noun or a verb,

never a particle.
When the former word is a noun, if its stem does not already end in
-o, the vowel -o- is commonly added as a connective, when the latter
word begins with a consonant, as from KapSla, Kaph-o-yvixxrrrj^.

When the former word is a verb, the connecting vowel is usually -i-,

as from dpx<Jiy dpx-i-crvvdyiDyo^ ; but sometimes -a-, as iOeX-o-Oprja-K^La.

The form of a verbal noun is often employed, as from SetSw (Seto-ts),

Compound verbs of this class usually take their form from a compound
noun ; the verb thus appearing in a shape which it cannot have out of
composition : as, cvxapto-rctu, to give thanlcs, from cv^dpLo-ro^, not from ev
and xapto-rew ;
^iXort/xeo/xat, to be ambitious, from ^tXoVi/xos, not from
tf}LXos and T6/xeo/xat.

^ Literally, to be called to one's side: i.e., for purposes of consolation, or, it niiglit
be, of exhortation or advocacy. Hence the word UapdK\r)Tos has the threefold
meaning of Comforter, Exhorter, Advocate. (Sec John xiv. 16, 26; 1 John ii. 1.)
 — —

§ 149.] WORD-FOKMATION — COMPOUNDS. 153

In synthetic compounds the word generally has the leading

latter

significance, and is defined or modified by the former.

The following compounds illustrate the foregoing remarks :

olKo-S€(r7r6Tr]<;, hottseholder.
KttK-ovpyos, evildoer (xaKog tpyov).
alixaT-€K)(y(rLa, hloodshedding (at/xa, c/c^^ro-ts from Ik and ;;(€(f)a)).

KapSL-o-yv(x)(TTr)<s, one who knows the heart.

apx-t'-o'vvdyoiyo<s, ruler of the synagogue.
fxaKpo-Ovixo's (adjective), ixaKpoOvp-la (substantive), long-suffering.

ScoSc/ca-^vA-ov (neuter-substantive), ten tribes (Acts xxvi. 7).

SevTepo-TTpoyro?, second-first (Luke vi. 1), probably " the yi»^^ sahhath
in the second year of the sabbatical cycle of seven years." See Wieseler's
" Clironological Synopsis of the Four Gospels," u. ii. 4. Wicseler fixes
the year as 782 a.u.c.^

Illustkation of the Varieties of Dejiivatiox and Composition.

149. The root Kpi-, verbal stem Kpiv-, primary meaning to separate,
may be taken as illustrating the variations and combinations of a Greek
word.
First we have simple derivatives, formed as in Chapter IX. :— -

KpLvoij to separate, or judge.

KpL(TLS, the process of separation, ot judgment.
KpLfxa, the act or result of judgment, sentence.
Kpirrjpiov, a standard of judgment, or tribunal.
KptTT^s, Q. judge.
KpLTLKos (adjective), able to judge, a discovei'er (Heb. iv. 12).

Next we note the composition of the verb with different prepo-

sitions :

avaKptVo), to inquire, estimate.

8iaKptVa>, to distinguish, separate, decide; middle, to hesitate,
iyKpLvio, to judge, or reckon, among (2 Cor. x. 12).
cTTtKptVo), to adjudge (Luke xxiii. 24).

* But W. H. aud the Revisers' Text omit the word altogetlier.

154 WORD-FORMATION —COMPOUNDS. [§ 149.

KaTaKpLvu), to give judgment against, condemn.

(TvyKpCvwy to judge together, compare.
aTTOKpLvo/xai, to aTiswer.

avTaTTOKpLvofxaL, to answer against (Luke xiv. 6 ; Rom. ix. 20).

wroKpLvojjLaL, to dissemble (Luke xx. 20).
(TvvvTroKpivofjLaLj to dissemble with any one (Gal. ii. 13).

We may then note the various compound substantives, which may

be compared with the corresponding verbs : —
dva/cpto-t?, an examination (Acts xxv. 26).
(XTroKpto-t?, an answer.
8LaKpL(rL<;, the act of distinguishing, discernment.
KaTdKpL(TL<s, condemnation.
vTroKpLCTL';, dissimidation, hypocrisy.
aTTo/cpt/xa, a sentence^ as of death, or response (2 Cor. i. 9).
KaTaKpLfia, a sentence of condemnation.
TTpoKpcfxa, di prepossession, prejudice (1 Tim. v. 21).
v7roKpLTT^<;, lit. a stage-player, a lujpocrite.

We now take a group of negative compounds :

dStaKpiTos, not subject to distinction, impartial or si?icei'e (James

iii. 17).
aKaraKptTo?, uncondemned.
avvTTOKpLTos, unfeujned.

Finally, the JSTew Testament contains three instances of the composi*

tion of this root with nouns and pronouns :

avTOKaTctKptTo?, self-condemned (Titus iii. 11).

elXiKpLvr)^ (perhaps from €l\rjy cognate with ^Atos), judged of in the
sunlight, ^w?"e, sincere (Phil. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 1).

€tXiKpti/€ta (from the above), sincerity.

Many other compounds of this root exist, but these are all which the
New Testament contains.
§151.] LANGUAGES OF PALESTINE. 155

Chapter XI. FOEETGN WOEDS IN NEW

TESTAMENT GEEEK.
Languages of Palestine. —Hebkew.
150. Two languages were spoken and understood in Palestine. Tlie
one, called in the New Testament "the Hebrew tongue" (Acts xxii. 2 ;

xxvi. 14), was in reality a very considerable modification of the Old

Testament Hebrew, and is generally now termed " the Syro-Chaldaic,"
or '*
Aramaic" (from Araw,, the Hebrew word for Syria). This was the
language of the people, and, to some uncertain extent,^ remained in
colloquial use until the destruction of Jerusalem.
Some Matthew's Gospel was originally written
critics believe that St.
in Aramaic, and that the book as it appears in the New Testament is a
more or less literal translation. In this opinion we do not concur ; but
there can be no doubt that in the days of our Lord the ancient language
was still most fondly cherished by the people. Expressions that fell
from the Saviour's lips in moments of deep emotion, in the performance
of signal miracles, in Gethsemane, and on the Cross, are carefully recorded ;
and other words of technical character, or religious association, or homely
use, are also found in the native tongue of IsraeL

Introduction of Greek.

151. But as a direct result of the conquests of Alexander the Great

and his successors, the Greek tongue had been carried into almost all the
countries of the civilised world, and had become the medium of commer-
cial intercourse, the language of the courts, and, in fact, the universal
literary tongue of the provinces afterwards absorbed in the Koman
Empire. The natives of Alexandria and of Jerusalem, of Ephesus, and
even of Rome, alike adopted it ; everywhere with characteristic modifi-
cations, but substantially the same. Hence
had become a necessity to
it

translate the Old Testament Scriptures into Greek and as this great
;

^ See on the whole subject, Dr. Roberts' " Discussions on the Gospels."
156 Li^NGUAGES OF PALESTINB. [§ 151.

work was executed by Alexandrian Jews, its language not only shows
the influence of the Hebrew original, but contains special forms and
peculiarities of expression indigenous to Egypt. This translation, or
"the Septuagint,"^ naturally became the basis of all subsequent Jewish
Greek literature, and in particular of the IS'ew Testament, which, how-
ever, to the Egyptian superadds Palestinian influences. It was in the
Greek of the Septuagint thus modified that, in all probability, our Lord
and His apostles generally spoke. The dialect of Galilee (Matt. xxvi. 73)
was not a corrupt Hebrew, but a provincial Greek.
The New Testament writers, it should be noted, differ considerably
from one another in style. The Book of Revelation, for instance, is very
unlike the waitings of the Apostle Paul. All, again, vary greatly from
classical models, both in vocabulary and syntax, exchanging the elaborate
harmonies of Attic Greek for simpler constructions and homelier speech.

Infusion of Latin.

152. The Roman conquest and tenure of Palestine may be thought

have stamped some lasting traces on the language. Such traces
likely to
undoubtedly appear in the New Testament but, considering the might ;

of the dominant people, these are marvellously few. The Romans could
impose their laws, their polity, their military power, upon vanquished
nations, but not their speech. Certainly, there are some Latin words in
the New Testament ; but these are almost wholly nouns denoting mili-
tary rank or civil authority, coins, or articles of dress : a valuable historic
testimony, were there none beside, how ''
the sceptre had departed from
Judah, and a lawgiver from between his feet."

By way of illustration to the foregoing remarks, lists are here appended of

the chief Aramaic (or Syro-Clialdaic) and Eoman terms contained in the
New Testament.

Hebrew and Aramaic Words and Phrases.

153. The Hebrew root is few cases assimilated to the forms of
in a
the Greek language ; but is oftener simply transcribed and used with-
out declension or conjugation.

1 That is " the Seventy" (often (juoted as LXX.), from the traditional number of
translators.
 — ——

§ 153,5.] LATIN AXD HEBREW IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 157

a. Assimilated words are the following :

Metro-ia?, MESSIAH, "the Anointed." This word occurs only in John

i. 42, iv. 25 ; the Greek equivalent, Xpto-ros, from xpiw, to anoint, being
everywhere else employed.
<I>apto-ato9, Pharisee, from a Hebrew word meaning to separate, and
SaSSovKatos, Sadducee, from another, meaning to be righteous, are of
constant occurrence
— "Separatists" and "Moralists."
/xa/A/Acova? (gen. -a, dat. -a), mammon, riches (Matt. vi. 24 ; Luke xvi.

9, 11, 13). Its derivation is uncertain; but there is no reason for sup-
posing that it was anywhere the name of a false deity.
appa/Swv, -wvos, a pledge, or earnest (2 Cor. i. 22, v. 5).
On crdpiSaTov, sabbath, see § 32, b.

yiewa, from two words signifying valley of Hinnom ; hence, meta-

-7}<;,

phorically, for the place of future punishment (see 2 Kings xxiii. 10;
Isa. XXX. 33; Jer. vii. 31).

b. Indeclinable words are more numerous.

i. The following may rank among proper names, on ^vhich class of

words see further, § 156:

'AKeXSafid, field of blood (Acts i. 19).

BccX^c^oA, lord of dung (Matt. xii. 24, etc.), perhaps a contemptuous
turn to the name of the Ekronite god Beelzebub, " lord of flies " (see
2 Kings i. 2, 3). Hence " prince of the demons."
Sons of thunder (Mark iii. 17).
Boav€/oy€9,
TappaOd, the Pavement, or Tribunal (John xix. 1 3).
VoXyoOd, the Place of a of sJadls (Matt, xxvii. 33
skull, or Mark ;

XV. 22; John xix. 17), called in Greek Kpaviov (Luke xxiii. 33), where
our word Calvary is taken from the Vulgate.
'P€/x(^aV, probably the planet Saturn (Acts vii. 43, from Amos v. 26,

LXX.).

ii. Other Sjrro-Chaldaic nouns are as follow :

'A^^a, Father, in confidence, endearment, or entreaty (!Mark xiv. 36 ;

Rom. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6).

Koppav, gift (Mark vii. 11), Koppavaq (decl. INIatt. xxvii. 6), treasicry.
fxdwa, lit. "what is thisf manna (Exod. xvi. 15; Jolm vi. 31, 49,
58; Ileb. ix. 4: Rev. ii. 17).
158 HEBREW WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. [§153, h.

fi(j)pi, fool I (Matt. V. 22) may be a Greek vocative (/xwpos), but is more
probably an Aramaic word of similar sound, denoting utter mental and
moral worthlessness.
7raor;(a, Passover.
pajS/Si, my master/ lit. "my great one!" (Matt, xxiii. 7, etc.) So,
pa/SfSovL (Mark x. 51), and pappowi (John xx. 16).^
paKtt, a term of contempt, from a Hebrew root signifying emptiness^ or
vanity (Matt. v. 22).

cra/3aw^, hosts, i.e., the hosts of heaven (Rom. ix. 29 ; Jas. v. 4).
(TLK€pa, strong drink (Luke i. 15).
X^pov/Sifji, cherubim, Hebrew plural of cherub (Heb. ix. 5).

c. Aramaic Phrases.
dXXyjXoma, praise ye Jehovah ! (Rev. xix. 1, 3, 4, 6.)

d/A^v, after ascriptions of praise, so let it be ; before assertions, verily.

icf>cf>a6d, be opened/ (Mark vii. 34.)
'HXi, 'HXt, Xafxa aapaxOavL ; My God, my God, why hast Thou for-
saken me? (Matt, xxvii. 46,) from Ps. xxii. 1; the last word being the
Aramaic equivalent of the original Hebrew verb. 'HAt is my God, from
the Hebrew El. Mark xv. 34 reads 'EAwt.
fxapavaOd, Tlie Lord Cometh/ (1 Cor. xvi. 22.) (The word preceding,
avdOefjLa, accursed, is pure Greek, and should be followed by a colon or
period. W.H. Mapav dOd.)
write
raXiOa Kovfu, maiden arise/ (Mark v. 41.)
wo-awa, save now/ (Matt. xxi. 9; Mark xi. 9, 10; John xii. 13,)
taken from Ps. cxviii. 25.

I.ATIN WORDF^.

—
154. a. Names of Coins. KoSpdvrr]^, "quadrans," farthing (Matt.
V. 26 Mark xii. 42), the fourth part of the
;

da-a-dptov, "as" (diminutive term), also rendered farthing in E.V.

(Matt. X. 29 Luke xii. 6), the sixteenth part of the

;

^vdpiov, " denarius," rendered penny (as in Matt, xviii. 28, etc.), silver

coin worth about 7^d.

^ W. H. read in both passa.sjes '?a^^ovve(.

§ 154,/.] LATIX WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 159

b. Judicial. — " sicarius," assassin (Acts xxi. 38).

o-tAcapio?,

<f>payi\\iov, t^paycXAow, " flagellum, flagello," scourge (noun and verb)

(John ii. 15 ; Matt, xxvii. 26 ; Mark xv. 15).

c. Military. — Kcvrvpioiv, " centiirio," centurion (Mark xv. 39, 4-4, 45).

Elsewhere the Greek e/carovTapxo? (or -X^^) is employed.

Kova-ToiSia, " ciistodia," giiard (Matt, xxvii. 65, 66; xxviii. 11).

AcycW, "legio," legion (Matt, xxvi 53 ; Mark v. 9, 15; Luke viii. 30).

-rrpaLTUipiov, " praetorium," officei^'s or governor's quarters, palace (Matt,

xxvii. 27 ; Phil. i. 13, etc.).
cnriKovXaTiop, " speculator," member of the royal guard (Mark vi. 27).

d. Political. — Kriva-o<Sj "census," tribute (Matt. xvii. 25 ; xxii. 17).

KwXwna, "colonia," colony (Acts xvi. 12).

Xt/JepTtvot, " libertini," freedmeii (Acts vi. 9).

e. Articles of Dress. —XcVnov, " lenteimi," toicel (John xiii. 4, 5).

"semicinctium," ap'on (Acts xix. 12).

ctl/jllklvOlov^

o-ov8aptov, "sudarium," handkerchief (LxikQ xix. 20, etc.).

/. General. — ^t^aviov, "zizanium," if;^7cZ cZa/'weZ, "lolium" (Matt. xiii.

25-40).
KpdppaTo^f "grabbatus," mattress or small couch (Mark ii. 4, etc.).
/MttKeXXov, " macellum," shambles, meat-market (1 Cor. x. 25).

fxefiPpavT}, " memhiaiia" parchment (2 Tim. iv. 13).

fuXLovy " milliare," mile (Matt. v. 41).
/x.o8to5, " modius," a measure (about an English peck) (Matt. v. 15, etc.).

ii(TTr)<s, " sextus, sextarius," a small 77ieasure (about a pint and a half
English), pitcher (Mark vii. 4).

peSrj, "rheda," chariot (Rev. xviii. 13).

Ta/3epr»7, " tabema," tavern (Acts xxviii. 15).

TtVXos, "titulus," title, superscription(John xix. 19, 20).
<f)6pov, "forum," part of the name AppH Forum (Acts xxviii. 15).
\aprr)% " charta," ^a^er (2 John 12).

(For Latin Proper Karnes, see Chap. XII.)

 160 PROrER NAMES. [§ 155.

Chapter XII. NEW TESTAMENT PEOPER NAMES.

155. The personal names New

Testament are in general
of the
derivative or composite words, originally with a specific meaning.
—
They belong to three languages Hebrew, Greek, and Latin (com-
—
pare Chap. XI.) a circumstance which causes some little diffi-
culty and confusion, especially since the Hebrew names sometimes
appear in the forms of the Greek declension, sometimes, as in their
original shape, indeclinable. Our translators, too, have occasionally
adopted various renderings of the same Greek name, and in many
cases have made the New Testament English form different from
that in the Old.

Hebrew Names.

156. rt. The original indeclinable Hebrew forms may end in almost
any letter ; as, e.g.^ 'A^tovSj 'A^/aaa/x, 'lo-paT^A, 'EAtcra^er, 'lecfiOai, Nwc,
*Ho-au, 'Icpt;(a). Such forms are generally oxytone. So, 'EfxjxavovijX, God
WITH us.

b. The following names are found both in indeclinable and declinable

forms :

'lepovcraXi^fji and 'Icpoo-oAv/xa, -o)v,^ Jei'usdlem,

2aovA and 2avAo9, Saulr

'IttKw^, Jacob (Old Testament), and 'IaK(o/?o9, James (New Testament).
^v/x€(iji/, Simeon (Old Testament), and St/xwv, -wvos, Simon^ (New
Testament).
Acvi, Levi (Old Testament), and Acvts, Levi (Matthew, New Testa-
ment). (Compare § 32, c.)

^ Once, "[epoadXvfxa appears as a feminine singular (Matt. ii. 3 ; so, perhaps, iii. 5).
''
The Hebrew form occurs only in the accounts of Saul's conversion (Acts ix.,
xxii., xxvi.); except xiii. 21, where the reference is to the Old Testament king.
^ Twice, however, the apostle bears the Old Tebtanient name (Acts xv. 11;
2 Pet. i. 1).
g 157, c] PKOPER NAMES. 161

c. Hebrew names in -ah appear in the form Those

-as (see § 20, a).

in -iah, or -Jah, a form of the name of the Supreme Being, Jehovah, are
rendered into Greek by -Las : as 'HAta?, Elijah ; 'Hcrata?, Isaiah. These,
however, take a genitive in -ov. (Mecrcrtas, Anointed^ is of a different
derivation.)

d.The circumflexed termination -as (gen. -a) marks some names

belonging to the later Hebrew (or Aramaic) as K>;</)a9, BapayS^a?. To :

these must be added, 'Icuva?, Jonah, Jonas, or Jona.

Iklore frequently, however, -ds indicates the contraction of a Greek or
Latin name, as shown §§ 158, h, 159, d.

Double Names.

157. CL- ^Vlien two names are applied to the same person, one is

sometimes the Hebrew (or Aramaic) appellation, the other its translation
into Greek. Thus, Tahitha (Hebrew) and Dorcas (Greek) both signify
" gazelle ;" Thomas (Hebrew) and Didijinus (Greek) both stand for
" twin." So also Cephas (Hebrew) is translated by Peter, " stone."

h. Some Greek names mere vocal imitations of the Hebrew, the

are
sound being imperfectly transferred. Thus, Judah, or Judas, becomes
Theudas (Acts v. 36) while Levi may have given rise to the form
;

Lehhoius. Some, again, have thought Alphams (Matt. x. 3, etc.) and

Clopas (John xix. 25) to be only two forms of the same Hebrew word.
Cleopas (Luke xxiv. 18) is a different name from the latter. It is possible
that Paid, ILavXos, may in like manner have sprung from the Hebrew
Saul ; or it had a Latin origin. (See § 159, c.)

c. In many where two names are borne, one is a surname,

cases, again,
either (1) from some characteristic circumstance, as Cephas or Peter of
Simon, and Barnabas of Joses ; or (2) a patronymic formed by the
Aramaic Bar, " son," as Bar-Jesus (son of Joshua, 'Ir;crovs) of Elymas, and
possibly Bar-tolmai, Bap^oAo/xato?, of Xathanael ; or (3) a local appella-
tion, as Iscariot (Hebrew, " a man of Kerioth," see Josh. xv. 25) and
Matjdalene (Greek, "a woman
of Magdala"). Observe that Canaanite
(R.V., Cananiean), properly " Kananite," Kavavtrv;? (Matt. x. 4 Mark ;

iii. 18), is not a local name, but probably the Greek form of the Hebrew
word for zealot^ rendered (Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 1 3) Z7;A.wt7Js.
M
162 PROPER NAMES — GREEK. [§ 157, d.

d. When the name of the same person appears in a Graecised and a

Hebrew style, the former would naturally be employed among the
Gentiles and Hellenists ; the latter among the Palestinian Jews. So
Said becomes Paul when he on his first missionary tour (Acts
starts
xiii. 9), and ever afterwards retains the name, (See § 159, c.)

Greek Names.

158. a. Pure Greek names are common, whether of Hellenists (i.e.y

Greek-speaking or foreign Jews) or of Gentile converts. It has often

been noticed that the names of all " the seven" (Acts vi.) are Greek. So
throughout most of the Epistles. " Euodias," EvoSta (Phil. iv. 2), is a
feminine form, and should have been rendered Euodia (R.V.).

h. Many Greek composite names are contracted into forms in -as : as

Epaphroditus into EpajyJiras (Col. 7; 12); Artemidorus into Artemas
i. iv.

(Titus iii. 12); Nymphodorus into Nymphas (Col. iv. 15); Zenodorus
into Zenas (Titus iii. 13); Olympiodorus into Olympas (Rom. xvi. 15);
Hermodorus into Hei^mas (Rom. xvi. 14). The termination -doi^s is
from hCipovy gift ; and the former parts of these compounds are from the
Greek mythology.
Other contractions are Parmenas^ for Parmenides (Acts vi. 5) Denias, ;

probably for Demetrius; Antipas, for Antipater; AjmUos, for Apollonius.

^wTrarpos (Acts XX. 4) and ^Swa-tTrarpos (Rom. xvi. 21) seem to be the
same name in different forms.

Latin Names.

159. a. The Latin names occur chiefly where we might expect them,
in letters written to or from Rome. The chief are Cornelius^ Aquila,
Priscilla or Prisca, Caius (i.e., Gains), Urban,^ Rufus, Jidia, Tertius,
Quartus, Fortunatus, Marcus or Marl; Clement (KXTJ/xr/s, -ivroq), Pudens,
Claudia, and perhaps Linus (2 Tim. iv. 21). Some have thought that
the last-mentioned was a Briton, Lin, of the household of Caractacus.

^ Rom. xvi. 9. This name is written in A.V. "Urbane," but it must be pro-
nounced as a dissyllable. The R.Y. has "Urbauus."
§ 159, d.~\ PKOPER NAMES — LATIX. 163

b Three name^ of Eoman Emperors found in the Xew Testa-

are also
ment in a Latin form, Augustus, Avyovo-ros (Luke ii. 1 ; but the Greek
equivalent, 2c/3acrT09, is found, referring to Xero, Acts xxv. 21, 25);
Tiberius, Tt/5eptos (Luke iii. 1); and Claudius, KXavStos (as Acts xi. 28).
The surname Ccesar, Kalaap, is applied to Augustus (Luke ii. 1), to
Tfberius (Luke iii. 1, etc.), to Claudius (Acts xi. 28), to Xero (Acts
xxv. 8 ; Phil. iv. 22, etc.). Caligula is not mentioned.

c. If the word IlavAos be not, as is most likely, an imperfect Greek

transcript of the Hebrew name Said, it must also be referred to the class
of Latin words, as in Eome
was the name of a noble house. Some
it

have thought that the apostle's family, on receiving the rights of Roman
citizenship, had been adopted into this house others, with even less
;

likelihood, connect his assumption of the name with the conversion of

Sergius Paulas (Acts xiii. 7-12).

d. Latin names, like Greek, may be contracted. Thus, Luke, AovKas

(rendered l^wcas in Philem. 21), is an abbreviated form of the Latin name
Lucawws. Similarly, Silvanus (StXouavos) and Silas denote one person.
Amplias (Rom. xvi. 8) is probably a contraction of the Roman name
AmjMatus.
For the significance of these various names, the Lexicon may be
consulted.
.64 SUBJECT—COPULA— PKEDICATE. f§ 160.

PAET III.

SYNTAX.
Chapter I CONSTEUCTION OF THE SIMPLE
SENTENCE.
Subject — Copula—Predica te.

160. The laws of Universal Grammar, with regard to the con-

struction and arrangement of Sentences, should be clearl}^ borne in
mind, that their special exemplifications in tlie Greek language may
be understood. For the most part, it will be convenient to show
the application of these laws under the heading of the parts of
speech or forms of inflection severally affected by them. A brief
summary may, however, first of all be given, with the essential
rules of construction.

161. A Sentence, or " thought expressed in words,'' consists of one

or more Propositions.

162. The essentials of a Proposition are, the Subject and the

Predicate.

163. The Subject expresses the person or thing of which something

is affirmed, desired, or asked^ and must, therefore, be a noun substantive,
or the equivalent of one.
Equivalents to nouns substantive are (1) personal pronouns, or (2) substanti-
vised expressions, for which see § 202.

164. Tlie Predicate expresses that which is affirmed, denied, or

asked respecting the subject; and in its simplest form it is (1) a noun
substantive or its equivalent, or (2) an adjective or its equivalent.
The equivalent of an adjective is a participle.

165. The simplest form of Proposition is that which connects

Subject aud Predicate by a tense of the substantive verb to be, called
the Copula.
§ 168.] SUBJECT —COPULA— PREDICATE. 165

Acts xxiii. 6 : eyw ^a/jicrato? elfii, I am a Pharisee.

Matt. xvi. 18 : crv A IleTpo?, tliou art Peter.

Matt. xiii. 38 : 6 ayp6<i lo-ny 6 Koa/xo';, the field is the icorld.

Phil. iii. 3 : r^fxtU €o-p,€v 17 TreptTOfjLrj^ we are the circumcision.

Acts xix. 15 : v/xets rtVcs l<rT€ ; u'ho are ye ?

Eph. V. 16 : al rj/xipai TTovrjpaL elori, the days are evil.

Luke V. 1 : avros ^v co-rcu?, he teas standing.

Luke xxi. 24 : 'lepova-aXrjfx 'icrrai Trarovfjievr], Jeimsalem shall he trodden
down.
The verb dfj.i, to he, is the true copula ; but some other verbs admit a similar
construction, such as uTrdpxw, to he essentially ; yiyuofiai, to hecome; (paivofiai, to
appear; KaXovfiai., to he called; Kadiarafxai, to he set doicn as or constituted.

These are called Copulative Verbs, as they agree with et/t' in their construction,
although in reality embodying part of the predicate. See § 181.

166. The Copula is often omitted, where ambiguity is not likely

to arise from its absence.

Matt. V. 5 : fxaKapioL 01 Trpact?, blessed (are) the meek.

2 Tim. ii. 11 : ttlctto^ 6 \6yos^ faithful (is) the word.

Heb. xiii. 8 : 'iT/crovs X/dictto? ... 6 avTo?, Jesus Clirist (is) the same.

For the way to distinguish between an attributive adjective and a predicate in

such cases, see § 206.

167. The Copula and Predicate are most generally blended in a verb,
which is then caUed the Predicate. Thus, eya> •ypd4>«, / write, is very
nearly equivalent to eyco elp-i 7pd(})«v, / am writing.

The term predicate is applied to the

careful student will observe that the
adjective and the verb in different senses. In the latter case it really means
copula and predicate combined. An adjective or substantive predicate is some-
times called the "complement" of the verb with which it stands connected.

168. The substantive verb may become itself a Predicate, involving

the notion of existence.
John viii. 58 : ... eyw eljii, Before Abraham was, I am.
Rev. xxi. 1 : t) OaXaa-cra ovk t<mv ^ Irt, the sea is 710 more.
But the phrase, 670) el/xi, it is I, occurring in the Gospels (as Matt. xiv. 27 ;

Mark vi, 50 John vi. ; 20, xviii. 5, 6, 8), may mean one of three things : iyd)
being (] ) subject or (2) predicate, or (3) the verb being predicate. (Cf. Isa. xli.

4, LXX.)
^ For the accent see § 110, note.
166 SUBJECT AND PHEUICATR. [§ 169.

169. The Subject, when a personal pronoun, is generally omitted,

if no special emphasis or distinction is intended ; the number and
person of the verb itself showing its reference, § 332.

Thus, Xeyo) vfuv (Matt. v. 18, 20; viii. 10, 11, etc.), I say unto yoti, is

unemphatic ; but in ly<a Aeyw I say

(v. 22, 28, 32, 34> 39,
v/xtv, unto you
44), our Lord pointedly contrasts His own teaching with th-at of the
Rabbis. So (v. 21), ov <f>ov€v(T€L<s, thou shaJt not murder. Had the
reading been <rv ov cf>..., the meaning would have been "thou, in parti-
cular," shalt not. In Luke x. 23, 24 we read, " Blessed are the eyes
which see the things that ye see" (/JAeVerc, unemphatic) :
*'
for I tell you
that many prophets and kings have desired to see those things which, ye
see" (v|Ji€is ^XeVere, emphatic, by way of antithesis to "prophets and
kings"). Again, orwo-a is he shall save; avrbs o-wo-ct, he (emphatic, and
none other) shall save (Matt. i. 21). See also Mark vi. 45, " until he
(avTos) should send away the people," for no one else could do it.

Observe also the repetition of avroC, they, in the Beatitudes (Matt.

V. 4-8).
The empliasis conveyed by the insertion of the pronominal subject is often too
subtle to be expressed by translation but it is always worth noting. (See
;

Acts iv. 20 ; 1 Cor. xv. 30, etc.) The emphatic eyw (John xvi. 33 ; 1 Cor. ii.
1, 3) is very noticeable. So in many other passages.

170. The omitted Subject of the third person plural is often to be

understood generally. Compare the English expressions. They say, etc.
Matt. V. 11 : oTav 6v€i8C(rw(riv v/xa<s kol 8i«|w(ri, tchen they reproach and
persecute you; i.e., men in general.
John XX. 2 : %av rov YLvpiov, they have taken away the Lord; i.e., some
persons have.
See also Matt. viii. 16, Mark x. 13, they loere h'inging (i.e., from time
to time); Luke xvii. 23, John xv. 6 (A.Y. " men," RY. "they"), Acts
iii. 2, etc.

171. Verbs in the third person singular, without a Subject expressed,

frequently imply some necessary or cenventionally understood Subject of
their own.

1 Cor. XV. ,52 o-aXir^o-ci, lit., he shall sound the trumpet, a classical
:

expression, implying 6 a-aXTTLyKTrj^, the trwnpeter, equivalent, as A.V., to

the trumpet shall sound.
 —

§ 174, a.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 167

To this head are to be referred many so-called impersonals as pp^x"> :

it rains (in First Aorist, James v. 17). The Greeks originally understood
and sometimes expressed Zcv?, or 0eos, with all such words. " He rains,

thunders," etc. ; hence passing into the impersonal usage. Again <}>Ti<ri,

\iyii, he or it says; once, cVpiiKc, he or it hath said (Heb. iv. 4) ; once, elirc,

he or it said (1 Cor. xv, 27), are used as formulas of quotation :

^ ypa^ri,
the Scripture, to be supplied (compare Kom. iv. 3, etc.); or 6 ©co9, God
(see Matt. xix. 5).
See, for Xe'-yci, 2 Cor. vi. 2, Gal. iii. 16, Eph. iv. 8, etc. ; for <}>ticri,

1 Cor. VL 16, Heb. viii. 5.

Once, 4)T)ori seems to be used jn the general sense, as plural, they say

(2 Cor. X. 10) ; but many MSS. (W. H., marg.) there read ^aa-L

172. The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and the Subject and
Predicate must correspond in number and person ; whence the gramma-
tical rule called the

First Concord. A Verb agrees with its nominative case in number

and person.
For other uses of the Nominative, see §§ 242-244. All these are connected
with its true use as Subject. It cannot be too strongly impressed upon the
learner that the key to every proposition, however compHcated, is in the nomi-
native case and verb ; that is, in the Subject and Predicate. To these all the
other words are only adjuncts.

173. The great apparent exception to the First Concord is that a

Neuter Plural nominative often takes a singular verb.
John ix. 3 : Iva <j>av€p«0]g rd ^pya tov 0€ov, that the works of God may
he manifested.

Acts i. 18 : cIcxvOt] Trarra to, <nrXdYxva avrov, all his howels gushed out.
2 Pet. ii. 20 : yiyovv/ rd 'ifryjxTo. ^'^ipova, the last tilings have become
worse.

So in many other passages.

The reason for this idiom is undoubtedly that, as neuters generallj" express
things without life, the plural is regarded as one collective mass.

174. Variations in this idiom are as follow :

a. When the neuter nominative plural denotes animated beings, the

verb is commonly in the plural number.
168 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 174, a.

Matt. X. 21 : liravaorTTJo-ovToi riKvo. ... koI 8avaT<£<rov<rtv, children shall

rise up against ... and kill.

James ii. 19 : ra Saijidvia irio-Tevovo-iv Kat <j)pCo-o-ovo-tv, the demons believe

and tremble.
b. The usage, however, is by no means fixed. Thus, things without
life are occasionally associated with a plural verb.

Luke xxiv. 1 1 : €^dvTi<rav ...to. pi^iiara, the loords appeared.

John xix. 31 : tva KaT6a7«<riv ra <rKeXr], that the legs might be broken.

c. Living Subjects are also found with a singular verb.

1 John iii. 10 : cjiavepd ccttiv to, rcKva, k.t.X,, the children of God and
those of the devil are manifest.

Luke viii. 30 : Saijiovia iroXXa cla-fjXOcv, many demons entered.

d. In some passages the singular and plural seem used indiscriminately

with the same Subjects.
John X. 4 ra Trpopara avr<2 clkoXovGci on
: ol'8a<rtv, k.t.X.^ the sheep follow
him because they knoiv his voice.
Ver. 27 : to. irpopara ... aKovei (W. H., dKOvovcTLv) kol olkoXovGovo-C /x,ot, the

sheep hear my voice and follow me.

1 Cor. X. 11 : Tavra iravra (rvvc'Paivov (W. H., -€v) ... 6Ypd<}>Tj 8c, all these

things happened . . . and were ivritten.

The uncertainty of the usage in this matter has been a fruitful source of
various readings. It is often difficult, if not impossible, to decide whether the
.singular or the plural formed the original text.

175. ct. When the Subject is a collective noun in the singular,

denoting animate objects, the verb may be put in the plural number.
This construction is known as Rational Concord.^

Matt. xxi. 8 : 6 Se TrXeio-Tog 6x\os ^o-Tpwcrav, k.t.X., the gi'eater part of

the multttude strewed their (plural) garments in the way.

Luke xix. 37 : *ip|avTo aTrav ro irXf]0os, k.t.X., all the multitude of the
disciples began to praise God, rejoicing (plur. masc).
Rev. xviii. 4 : cleXGeTc, 6 Xa<5s /xov, Come forth^ my people !

^ Constructio ad sensum, or Synesis.

§ 176, b.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 169

h. The Singular and Plural are combined in some passages.

John vi. 2 : -fjKoXovGct ... ©xXos ttoXv? ort 60€wpo\jv, a great multitude was
folloiving ... because tliey loere seeing.

Acts XV. 12 : e<riYno"6v 8€ Trav to irXiiOos /cat <]kovov, tlie ivliole number
became silent , and icefre listening.

The singular, however, is the more usual construction.

176. <^' When two or more nominatives, united by a copulative con-

junction, form the Subject, the verb is generally in the plural.

If the nominatives are of different persons, the first is preferred to

the second and third, the second to the third ; that is, / (or we) and
you and lie are resolved into we ; you and he into yoti.

Acts iii. 1 : IIcTpos l\ koX 'Iwdv-^s ave'paivov, Peter and John icere going up.
John X. 30 : c-yw koX 6 irar?|p Iv eVjjtcv, / and my Father are one.
1 Cor. ix. 6 : e-yw /cat Bapvdpas ovk Ixok-^v, k.t.A.., have not I and Barnabas
authority] etc.

1 Cor. XV. 50 : o-dp^ Kat atjxa ...ov SvvavTai,^ flesh and blood cannot inherit
the kingdom of God.

b. The verb, however, often agrees with the nearest Subject.

In this case the Predicate is to be understood as repeated with the
other Subjects, or that with which the verb agrees is thrown into pro-
minence, the others being subordinate.
It should be observed that in this construction- the Greek verb icsually pre-
cedes the nominatives.

Acts xvi. 31 : (r«0Tj<rTj <rv Kat 6 oikos (tov, thou shalt be saved and thy
house.
1 Tim. vi. 4 : e^ wv YCvcrai <|)0ovos, ^pis, pXa(r<|)Ti|xiai, k.t.A.., from which
comes envy, strife, railings, etc.

In these two cases the "verb is repeated in thought.

John ii. 12: KarepTi . . . avrbs Kat ot fia0T]Tal avTov, He went down to
Capernaum, Himself and His discij^les.

Here the one Subject is throAvn into prominence ; and the construction is the
common one when the principal Subject is placed nearest the verb. Compare
Matt. xii. 3; Luke xxii. 14; John ii. 2, iv. 53, viii. 52, xviii. 15, xx. 3; Acts
xxvi. 30 ; Philemon 23, 24, where the approved reading is do-Trdferai.

^ W. H. read duvarai,.
17 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 177.

177. When the Predicate of a simple sentence is a noun or pronoun,

united to the subject by the copula, it corresponds with the Subject by
the law of apposition, viz. :
,

A substantive employed to explain or describe another, under the

same grammatical regimen, is put in the same case.
John XV. 1 : 6 IlaTTjp jxov 6 y€oipy6^ i(TTL, my Father is the husbandman.
It is not necessary that the substantives should correspond in gender or
number.
2 Cor. i. 14 : Kavx^H^o- v/xtov cV/acv, ive are your boast.

2 Cor. iii. 3 : ecrre eirio-ToX'fi Xptarov, ye are Chrisfs epistle.

178. When the Predicate is an adjective, including adjective pro-

nouns and participles, its agreement with the Subject comes under the
Second Concord, viz. :
•

Adjectives, pronouns, and participles agree with their substantives

in gender, number, and case.
For further exemplitication of this Concord, see Chapters IV., V., §§ 315, sqq.

In simple sentences the case is, of course, the nominative. The agree-
ment in gender and number may be illustrated by the following :

Matt. vii. 29 : ^v 8i8d<rK«v, he was teaching.

Matt. xiii. 31, etc. : 6|xoia ka-riv r/ pao-tXeia, k.t.A., the kingdom of heaven
is like, etc.

Mark v. 9 : iroXXoi Icrix^v, we are many.

Luke xiv. 17 : ^Toijid co-rt iravra, all things are ready.
John iv. 1 1 : to 4>p€ap eVri pa0v, the toell is deep.

1 John V. 3 : at IvroXal avrov papctai ovk ctcrti/, His commandments are

not grievoiLs.
Kev. vii. 14: olroL da-tv oi cpxofJ^evoi, k.t.X., these are they that are
coming out of the great tribulation.

179. When the Subject is a collective noun, the adjective Predicate

is sometimes plural. (Compare § 173.)

John vii. 49: 6 6xX-os ovto? . . . eirdparoC ciVtv, this multitude are
accursed.
 —

§ 183.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 171

180. An adjective Predicate is occasionally generalised by being put

in the neuter gender, though the Subject is masculine or feminine.

1 Cor. vi. 11 : ravrd nves ^t€, lit., some of you we)'e this (these things).

1 Cor. vii. 19 : 17 ircpiroixT^ ovSe'v eo-rt, drcumcision is nothing.

181. The laws of apposition and concord, as above applied, may be

re-stated in the form of the following rule :

Copulative verbs require the Nominative case after as well as

before them.
For the chief copulative verbs, see § 165, note.

John i. 14 : 6 A070S €7€V€to o-dpl, the Word hecame flesh.

Acts xvi. 3 : "EXXiiv iixfjpxev, he was (originally) a Qreek.
2 Cor. xiii. 7 : tva rijitis Sokijioi 4>avwp.€v, that we should appear app'oved^
or "be manifestly approved."
Matt. V. 9 : viol 0€ov KXTiOrjo-ovTai, theij shall be called sons of God.

Acts X. 32 : St/xwva, 8s 4'iriKaX€iTai IXcTpos, Simon (accusative), loho is

suimamed Peter.

Rom. v. 19 : afJtapTwXol KaT€<rTd0T](rav ol iroXXoC, SiKaioi KaTa<rTa0^(rovTat

01 iroXXof, the many were made sinners, the many shall be made righteous.

182. Hitherto the rules and examples given have been designed to
show the main elements alone of the simple sentence. Other words,
however, are very generally added to the Subject, to the Predicate, or to
both, for the purpose of further explanation. These words are called
the complements of the simple sentence, and are variously said to com>-
plete, to extend, or to enlarge the Subject or the Predicate, as the case
may be.

183. The Subject,which is essentially a noun substantive, may be

extended (1) by another noun in apposition, (2) by the qualifying
force of adjectives, pronouns, or the article, (3) by dependent nouns, or
(4) by prepositional phrases.

For Apposition, see § 177.

For Adjectives, see Chapter TV., §§ 315, sqq.
For the Article, see Chapter II., ^ 193, sqq.
172 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 183.

For the dependence of nouns one upon another, and for prepositional
phrases^ see Chapter III.

184. The Predicate, when a noun, may be extended in the same

manner as the Subject.

185. When an adjective is Predicate, it may be extended by depen-

dent nouns, by adverbs, or by prepositional phrases.

186. Verbal Predicates may be variously extended. Any verb may

be qualified by an adverb. Prepositional phrases may be employed in
this connection also. Especially, the meaning of a verb transitive
requires to be completed by the Object or Objects, direct or indirect.
For the direct Object^ see § 281.
For indirect Objects, see on the Genitive and Dative cases, §§ 246, sqq.

187. The complements of a simple sentence cannot include a verb, as

this would introduce a distinct predication. Verbal clauses, therefore,
forming part of a period are termed accessory clauses^ and a sentence
with one or more accessory clauses besides the principal one is called
a COMPOUND SENTENCE.
Accessory clauses, as related to the principal, are either co-ordinate or
subordinate.

188. Co-ordinate accessory clauses are similar in construction to

the principal, and are often connected with it and with one another by
conjunctions. (See § 402, sqq.)

189. Subordinate clauses are dependent upon the principal or upon

the accessory clauses, or upon single words or phrases in either.
It is plain that subordinate clauses may be co-ordinate with one
another.

190. The methods of introducing subordinate clauses are very

various. The chief are, (1) by the Kelative Pronoun (§§ 343, 344),
(2) by the use of the Participials (participle or infinitive) (§§ 385-396),
and (3) by the Particles (§§ 383, 384).
Otherwise : subordinate clauses are Substantival, Adjectival, or Adverbial.
A substantival clause expresses tiie subject or object of a verb, or stands in
apposition, and usually employs the infinitive ; an adjectival clause, qualifying
a word or sentence, is introduced by a relative pronoun or conjunction, or
employs a participle ; and an adverbial clause is introduced by a conjunction,
or employs a participle or the oblique case of a noun.
§ 192.] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 173

191. It is often difficult to determine whether a certain phrase is a

complement of the Subject, or of the Predicate.
Many illustrations might be given from the Epistle to the Komans.
For instance ch. i. 17 (Hab. ii. 4.), 6 St/<atos ck ttco-tcw? ^TJo-erat, lit., the
:

righteous (man) from faith shall live. Are we to understand the prepo-
sitional phrase Ik TrtVreajs as the complement of the Subject o SiKato?, or
of the Predicate ^TJa-eTat? In other words, are we to translate "The
righteous man from faith (he that is righteous, or justified by faith) shall
live?" or, "The righteous man shall live from faith?"
Again, iv. 1 are we to attach the prepositional phrase, Kara cap/ca,
:

according to the flesh, with the word irpoTrdTopa, forefather, in apposition

with Abraham, the Subject of the accessory clause, or to the Predicate
liath found 1 —
that is, does the Apostle ask, " "What shall we say that
Abraham, our father as pertaining to the flesh, hath found ?" or, " A^Tiat

shall we say that Abraham our father hath found as pertaining to the
flesh r'
The true connection of accessory clauses is also occasionally doubtful.
For instance, in Acts iii. 21, it may be fairly discussed whether the
relative clause, ivhich God hath spoken by the mouth of all His holy
prophets, belongs to the word time^, or to all things.

Such questions of interpretation are not proposed for consideration here ; their
settlement must often depend not only on the laws of construction, but on the
signification of individual words. Reference is made to them only to shoAv the
necessity, to a right interpretation of a passage, of distinctly analysing the parts
of every compound sentence, and of assigning to each its right position. In our
own language this is comparatively easy, as the order of the sentence in general
indicates the mutual relation of its parts ; in Greek, through the number and
variety of the inflections, the order is of little importance to the structure of
the sentence, though of much to its emphasis.

192. As hints for disentangling a compound sentence, the fol-

lowing may be valuable: —
Search first for the predicate, or thing affirmed — usually, of course, a
verb, —then for the subject. Th-ese once fixed, every other verb will mark
an accessory clause, which wdl have to be regarded apart. The remaining
words, generally in close grouping with the Subject and Predicate, must
be assigned to tliem respectively as their complements, according to the
usages of the several parts of speech and forms of inflection. To tliese
it is now necessary to turn, in order,
174 THE ARTICLE AS DEMOXSTEATIVE. [§ 193.

Chapter II. THE AliTICLE.

Latin, Articulus ; Greek, apOpov (a joint). Hence, anarthrous,

" without an article."

Construction of the Article.

193. The Article, 6, t|, to, the (see § 12), is usually employed, as
in other languages, with nouns substantive. The Second Concord
appHes to this relation the article agrees with its noun in gender,
;

number, and case.

194. This general usage, however, admits of many variations,

attributable to the fact that the Article was originally a demonstra-
tive pronoun.i
Its demonstrative use is clearly seen in the Apostle Paul's quotation (Acts I
xvii. 28), Tov yap /cat yivos ea/ji^v, we arc his offspring.

195. A remnant of the old demonstrative use is, that the Article
often stands without a noun expressed, like our this, that; the sense of
the phrase showing who or what is to be understood.
For example, the phrase 6 jjl^v . . . 6 hi signifies this . . . that, or the one . .

the other.

Acts xiv. 4 : ot y.\v rja-av (Tvv rots *IovSat'ois, oi 84 avv tols d7rocrToA.ots,

some were with the Jews, others with the apostles.

In Matt. xiii. 23 Se is repeated : 6 |iiv e/carw, 6 84 k^rjKovTa, 6 84 rpta-

Kovra, some a hwidred, some sixty, some thirty.

See also Matt. xxii. 5 ; Mark xii. 5 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; Gal. iv. 22 ; Eph.
iv. 11 ; Phil. i. 16, 17 ; Heb. vii. 20, 21.

^ The student may be reminded that the English article the, the German dcr, the
French le, are also ori;'iuai demonstratives. iSo in other lanffi;a<'es.
 —

§ 198.] THE ARTICLE AS DEMOXSTRATR^E. 175

When 6 64 is used in narration, even without a preceding 6 fj-^f, it ahvays

implies some other person previously mentioned, as

Matt. ii. 5 : ot 5e etTroi', and they said.

Mark xiv. 61 : 6 5^ ia-iuira, but he was silent.

Acts xii. 15 : ij de dua-xvpiteTo, but she steadfastly asserted.

So in innumerable passages.

196. The Article, disconnected from a noun, is often followed by

a genitive.
Matt. X. 2 : 'laKw^o? 6 tov ZepeSaCov, James the (son) of Zehedee.
Mark xii. 17 : aTro'Sore rd Kaio-apos, rende)' the (things or rights) of
Ccesar.

Gal. V. 24 : ot rov Xpwrrov, the (servants or disciples) of the Christy i.e.,

of the Anointed one.

2 Pet. ii. 22 : to t^s d\r]6ov<; irapoifiias, the (saying) of the truthful
proverb.

The plural neuter rd is very frequently used in this construction, as in

the second of the above instances. So rd tov v6p.ov, the things of the law;
Ttt TOV nv€v(taTos, the things of the Spirit; Td cavT«v, their ovm interests
(lit. the things of themselves), and so on.

197. Similarly, the Article precedes a Preposition with its case.

Matt. V. 15 : tois Iv Tig oiKi'a, to those in the house.

Mark i. 36 : ^t/xojv /cat oi jict avTov, Simon and those with him.

Luke ii. 39 : Td KaTd tov vo|iov, the (things) according to the law.

Eph. i. 10 : Td €v Tois ovpavois ... Td c-iri ttjs Yfjs, the (things) in the
heavens ...the (things) on the earth.
Acts xiii. 13 : ot irepl IlavXov, those about Paid, including himself (by
a classic idiom), i.e., Paul and his associates.

Any of the prepositions may follow the Article ; for their several
significance, see Chapter II. § 288, etc.

198. A construction essentially similar is that of the Article with

Adverbs, the noun being supplied in thought.
Instances of this are : rh vvv, the (thing) note : the present (Matt. xxiv.
21 ; Luke v. 10) ; rj onr|}i€pov, to-day ; i\ aiJpiov, the morrow (feminine), as
if from rjfxipa, day; Matt. vi. 34; xxvii. 62). So, in many passages,
176 THE ARTICLE AS DEMOXSTRATIVE. [§ 198.

6 TrXT](rlov, tlie (man who is) near, one^s neighhour; rd 4v«, the (things)
above; rd Kdrw, the (things) beneath; ot ?|«, ^/i06'e (people) loithout; rd
oirCo-w, ^/le (things) behind; rd ?|XTrpoo-0€v, ^/le (things) before, etc.

199. The Article is frequently placed before Adjectives, the sub-

stantive being implied.
This construction belongs to all genders, and to both numbers. In-
stances of its occurrence are very frequent. Thus :

Mark i. 24 : 6 ^7105, the Holy (one).

i\Iatt. vii. 6 : to Ayiov, the holy (thing).

Matt, xxiii. 15 : t^v iiipdv, the dry (land).

Luke xvi. 25 : rd dYaSd, the good (things).

Eph. i. 3 : kv rots t-n-ovpavCois, in the heavenly (places).
1 Thess. iv. 16 : ol vtKpol iv Xpio-rw, the dead in Christ.
Titus ii. 4 : tva auifjipovi^isicn rds v€as, that they may instruct the young
(women).

Compare the ordinary English phrases, the good, the great, the ivise, with the
abstracts, the true, the right, the heautiftd. In Greek, however, the usage is

much more extended, and is exemplified also by anarthrous adjectives.

200. The Article is commonly also used before Participles; the

sense again supplying the noun.

Matt. i. 22 : TO pT]0€v, the (thing) spoken.

Matt. V. 4 : ot ir€v0ovvT€s, the (persons) mourning.

Matt. xi. 3 : 6 epxop.€vos, the coming (one).

Matt. xiii. 3 : 6 oTreipwv, the (man) sowing, i.e., " a sower."

Matt, xxiii. 37 : tovs dirca-ToXixe'vovs, the (persons) having been sent.

2 Cor. ii. 15 : kv tois o-w^opvois ... cv tois diroXXvfie'vois, in the (persons)

being saved . . . in the (persons) ^perishing.

from these and other instances that the most convenient way
It will appear
of translating the Article with the participle will often "be by changing
the phrase into a relative and finite verb. Thus, in the last two examples,
we idiomatically and accurately render, those who Jmve been sod, and those who
arc being saved . . those who are perishing.
For further details on this frequent and important construction, see Chap.
YI. § 396.
§ 203.] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 177

201. The iDfinitive Mood iii all its tenses is treated as an indeclin-
able neuter substantive, and is often thus qualified by the Article,
the phrase expressing the abstract notion of the verb. (See ChajD. YL
§§ 388—390.)
Matt. XX. 23: to KaGio-au €k Se^twv, the sittiiKj (lit., "the to-sit ") on
my right hand.

Matt. xiii. 3 : toO crrreipeiv, (for the purpose) of do icing.

Matt. xiii. 4 : ev tw inrcipeiv, in the sowing.

Mark xiv. 28 : ^era to €7€p0f]vai, after the rising.

Phil. i. 21 : TO li]v Xpicrros ... to a-n-oGavetv k€/dSo9, Living (is) Christ ...

dying (is) gain.

This consti'uction under the head of the luhu-

-will be more fiilly illustrated
itive. One caution bere may not be out The English form in -ing of place.
may be either an adjective or a substantive. Thus we may say, a living man,
or Living is enjoyment. In the former case the word is a participle in the ;

latter an infinitive and in rendering into or

; from Greek, the two must bo
carefully discriminated.

202. Sometimes, again, whole phrases or sentences are qualified

by a neuter Article; especially quotations, before which some such
word as saying, piwei'b, command, may be supplied, or expressions of a
question, problem, or difficulty.
Quotations are as in Matt, xix, 18 : rh ov 4>ov€vo-€is, ov jioixcvo-eis, the
(command) " thou shalt do no murder, thou shalt not commit adultery.^^
See also Luke xxii. 37 ; Rom. xiii. 9 ; Gal. iv. 25, to "Ayap, the (name) Hagar;
Eph. iv. 9 ; Heb. xii. 27.

Expressions of the latter class are as in Luke i. 62 : to tC &v OeXoi

KoXeto-Gat, the (question) ichat he would like (him) to he called.

Luke ix. 46 : to tCs dv d'r] |i€tt«v, the (dispute) loho shoidd he greater'.

Luke xxii. 4 : to irois avTov irapaSw, the (scheme) how he might hetray
him.
Rom. viii. 26 : to ti irpoo-€v|«(jL€0a, the (manner) how we should pray.
See likewise Luke xix. 48 ; Acts xxii. 30 ; 1 Thess. iv. 1, and a few other
passages.

203. The employment of the Article with Pronouns is reserved for

discussion in § 220.

IT
178 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 204.

204. Generally, an Infinitive, Participle, Adjective, or other word or

phrase, qualified by the Article, is said to he mhstantivised^ i.e., made
virtually a Noun, and treated similarly in the sentence.

Significance of the Article : its Insertion or Omission.

205. The Article is strictly definite ; and is used, as in other

languages, to mark a specific object of thought.

Matt. vi. 22 : 6 Xvxvos tov o-to/xaros Icmv 6 6<j>0aXfios, the lamp of the
body is the eye.

206. Hence arises the general rule, that in the simple sentence the
Subject takes the article, the Predicate omits it.

The subject is definitely before the mind, the predicate generally denotes the
class to which the subject is referred, or from which it is excluded, but the
notion of the class is itself indeterminate.

Matt. xiii. 39 : ol Z\ ecpio-ral ^yyi\oL elcrtv, the reapers are angels.

John iii. 6 : rh ye^(€vvr\^ivov Ik. Tr]<s o-ap/co? <rdp| i(TTLv, that which is hom
of the flesh is flesh.

John xvii. 17:6 X070S 6 <rbs dXriGcid Icttlv, thy word is tndh.
John i. 1 : 0€bs tJv 6 Xoyos, the Word ivas God.
1 John iv. 8 : 6 0cbs a-ydirTj ia-TLVy God is love.

The Copula being frequently omitted (§ 166), the presence or absence

of the Article with a nominative adjective will often decide whether it is

a Predicate or an attribute of the Subject. Thus, -rrto-Tos 6 X^^os, 2 Tim.

ii. 11, must be rendered faithfid is the ivord; 6 ttictto? Xoyo? would have
been the faithfid loord.

Matt. V. 5 : |iaKdptot ot irpaeis, hlessed (are) the meek.

Rom. vii. 7 : 6 vdp.os dp.apTia ; is the law sin?

From an examination of these examples, it will appear that the use of the
Article with the Subject, and its omission with the Predicate, is no grammatical
expedient, but arises from their respective definiteness. Had the article been
employed with the Predicate would have read
in the above case, the sentences
thus T/ie reapers are the angels, the whole host iJint which is horn of the
: ;

flesh is the flesh, i.e., is the part of human nature so denominated; Thy Word
is the Truth, and nothing else can be so described the Word icas the entire God- ;

head, and God and Love are identical, so that in fact Love is God the blessed ;
§ 209.] yiGXIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 179

are the meek, and none others ; is Hie Laio Sin? (see on the Article with abstracts,
§ 214,) i.e., are Sin and Law the same thing? The meaning of every proposition
would thus have been materially altered.

207. When the Article is found with the Predicate, an essential

identity with the Subject is asserted.^

John i. 4 : T| tw-f) r^v to c}>«s rOiv av6po)7r(Dv, the life ivas the light of men^
the only light.
2 Cor. iii. 17 : 6 Be Kvpios to irvevjid Icttlv^ the Lord is the spirit^ to
which the passage relates.

1 John iii. 4 : t| ajiapTia eo-rtv t| dvojiia, sin is transgression of laio ; and

conversely, transgression of law is sin.

Personal and other pronouns are very frequently the Subject when the Pre-
dicate is thus defined. (Matt. v. 13, xvi. 16, xxvi. 26, 28; Acts xxi. 38, etc.)

208. When by some other expression occurring

a word is defined
with it, the Article may be omitted. So in English, we may say, "The
house of my father," or " My father's house," the word father's in the
latter phrase rendering house definite.
This most frequently occurs in Greek when the qualifying word, being
a substantive, omits the Article.

Matt. i. 1 : pipXos vcvc'o-ews, the hook of the generation,

1 Thess. iv. 15: Iv \6y<a Kvpfou, in the icord of the Lord.

But 1 Thess. i. 8 : o Xoyos tov Kvp{ov, the word of the Lord.

209. In the four following cases, the Article, in conformity

with the general rule, marks definiteness.

(1) Monadic Nouns. Objects — of which there is but one of the kind,
or only one of which is present to thought, are usually defined by the
Article.

Thus, 6 ovpavos, heaven; i\ 71], earth; i\ ddXao-o-a, the sea; 6 fieyas pao-i-

Xcvs, the great king.

Exceptions to this usage, and their reason, will be noted further on.

^ This form of sentence answers to the affirmative proposition (in Sir W. Plamilton's
Logic), in which the Predicate is " distributed."
180 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 210.

210. (2) Individua] Emphasis. —When some member of a class is

singled out as bearing a distinctive character, the Article is employed.

Examples. — t| Kp^o-is, the judgment^ i.e., the final judgment, as Matt,

xii. 41, 42; Luke x. 14.

f| 7pa<}>iq, at ypa^aC, the writing, writings, i.e., the Holy Scriptures, as

Matt. xxii. 29 ; John x. 35 ; Eom. iv. 3, xv. 4.

T| ^pTifxos, the desert, i.e., that of Judaea, Matt. xi. 7 ; or that of Sinai
John iii. 14, vi. 31 ; Acts vii. 30 ; and perhaps Matt. iv. l.i

o ircipatwv, the temjiter (participle, according to § 200), i.e., Satan.

Matt. iv. 3 ; 1 Thess. iii. 5.

o Ipxofievos, the coming one (participle, present), i.e., the Messiah

Matt. xi. 3, xxi. 9, xxiii. 39 Heb. x. 37. Compare Rev. i. 4, 8, iv. 8.
;

211. (3) Singular for Collective. A noun in the singular number —

with the Article occasionally stands for the whole class. Compare such
English expressions as " he looked the king," " the good man is a law
to himself."

Matt. xii. 35 : o dyaQos fivOpwiros, the good man, denoting good men
generally.

Matt. xii. 29 : tov 'wrxvpoO, of the strong man, any one who possesses
that attribute.

Matt. XV. 11 : tov &v0p«irov, the man, whoever he may be.

Matt, xviii. 17 : 6 IOvikos koI 6 t€Xwvt]s, the heathen man and the
publican.

Luke X. 7 : o epYart]?, the labourer, generally.

2 Cor. xii. 12 : o-ry/xeta tov diroo-ToXov, signs of the ap)Ostle, i.e., of aiiy
rightful claimant of that character.

Gal. iv. 1 : 6 KXTjpovojios, one who is heir.

^ Strong reasons have been assigned for the belief that ** the wilderness" of our
Lord's temptation was the same as that through which the Israelites journeyed to
Canaan. See Mark i. 13, and compare our Lord's quotations with their original
reference. Note also the parallels between our Lord's history and those of Moses
and Elijah. Webster ami Wilkinson on Matt. iv. 1 may be usefully consulted on
these points.
§ 213.] SIGXIFICAXCE OF THE ARTICLE. 181

James v. 6 : tov SiKatov, the righteous man, generally.

To tliis head also, perhaps, belongs John iii. 10, av el 6 SiddaKaXos; art thou
which thou hast been appointed? Or,
the teacher? i.e., is that the position to
as in the preceding instances, the word may mark a special emphasis, Nicodemus
having in some eminent way the character of Rabbi.

212. (1) Renewed Mention. —A person or thing is often made

definite by mention (without the Article) in a paragraph, the Article
being employed in subsequent reference.

Matt. ii. 1 : there came wise men, jjid-yoi. Yer, 7, Herod having called
the wise men, tovs jidYovs.

Matt. xiii. 25 : the enemy came and sowed tares, titavm. Ver. 26, then
appeared the tares, tA tt^dvia.

In like manner compare Luke ix. 16 with ver. 13 ; John iv. 43 with ver. 40 ;
XX. 1 with xix. 41 Acts xi. 13 with x. 3, 22 James ii. 3 with ver. 2
; 2 Thess. ; ;

ii. 11, the falsehood, referring to ver. 9, (lit.) wonders of (in support of) a
falsehood.

Sometimes the reference is implicit, the second expression, bearing the

article, being equivalent to the former, though not identical.

Acts XX. 13 : cVt to ttXoiov, 07i board the ship, implied in ver. 6, "we
sailed away."
Heb. V. 4 : ti?|v Tip-riv, the honour, referring to the first verse, " that he
may ofier gifts and sacrifices."

1 Pet. ii. 7 : t| r\.\u% k.t.X., the preciousness is for you who believe, i.e.,

that spoken of in the previous verse, " a corner-stone, elect, p)recious."

213. It is a mark of great importance (AYiner) that " it is utterly

impossible that the Article should be omitted where it is decidedly
necessary, or employed where it is quite superfluous or preposterous."
" It would be a revolution of the laws of thought to express as definite
that which is conceived indefinitely," Attention to this will add vivid-
ness and suggestiveness to many a passage in which our Authorised
Version has failed to reproduce the force of the original. From a great
number of texts to which this remark applies, the
'
following may be
selected. The Revised Aversion renders the force of the Article except in
the cases indicated.
182 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 213.

Matt. i. 23 (Isa. vii. 14) : rj irape^vos, the virgin, i.e., the personage so
denominated.
Matt. V. 1 : TO 6pos, tlie mountain ; the high ground overlooking the
spot. (See also Lnke vi. 12.)

Matt. V. 15 : tov fidSiov, r-f^v XvxvCav, tlie modius, the lamp-stand, recog-
nised articles of furniture in every house.
Matt. XV. 26 : tois KwapCots, to the little dogs, i.e., belonging to the
household. (So Mark vii. 27.)
Matt. xvii. 24 : to. 8i8paxH.a, the half-shekels, the well-known customary
payment.
Matt. xxi. 12 : rds ircpio-Tcpas, the doves, the accustomed offerings of the
poor.

Matt, xxiii. 24 : tov Kwvwrra, t^v KajiiiXov, the gnat, the camel, of some
popular fable or proverb.
Luke xii. 54 : t^v v€<j)eXT]v,^ the cloud, " rising out of the west," of that
peculiar character which foretells much rain. (1 Kings xviii. 44, 45.)

Jolin iv. 22 : i^ <rwTt]p£a, the salvation, expected by Israel. (R.V.

salvation.)

John xiii. 5 : tov vwrTfjpa, the basin, used on such occasions.

John xvi. 13 : iraa-av t^v aX-qOctav, all the truth, in reference to this
particular subject. (Compare Mark v. 33.)

John xviii. 3 : t^v o-ireipav, the hand, on duty at the time.

John xxi. 3 : t6 irXoiov, the ship, belonging to the disciples, or hired

for their use.

Acts xvii. 1 : f| Krvvo.y<ayi\ Toiv louSatoji',^ the synagogue of the Jeivs, i.e.,

the chief or only synagogue of that particular district.

Acts XX. 9 : eVt tt]s 0vpi8os, at the window, or open lattice of the apart-

ment.

Acts xxi. 38 : tows TCTpaKio-xiXiovs, the four thousand, the notorious

band of desperadoes.

Acts xxiv. 23 Tw iKaTovrapxti, the centurion, i.e., the captain of the

:

cavalry who had sole charge of the Apostle when the infantry (xxiii. 32)
had returned to Jerusalem.

^ liev. Text and W. H. omit the article.

J
§ 214.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 183

1 Cor. i. 21 : 8ta t^s /xwpias tov KiipvyjjLaTos, hy means of the foolishness

of the proclamation, i.e., by the (so-called) folly of the preached Gospel.

1 Cor. iv. 5 : o ^iraivos, tlie pi'aise, which is due, respectively, to each.

(So R.y., his p)'aise.)

1 Cor. Y. 9 : iv rfi l-rritrToX^, in the lettei\ referred to thus as well known

by the Corinthians. AA^iether the Apostle speaks of the letter he is now
writing, or of some previous one, is a question of interpretation. (Com-
pare 2 Cor. vii. 8.)

1 Cor. X. 13: t^ ?Kpao-Lv, the escape, the appropriate means of

deliverance.

1 Cor. xiv. 16 : TO *A|jltjv, the Amen, the appointed and usual response
in Christian M'orship.

1 Cor. XV. 8 : wo-Trepet t<3 €KTp«|j.aTL, as to the one " horn out of clue
time," the one Apostle specially bearing that character. (R.V. 07ie

horn, etc.)

2 Thess. ii. 3 : rj diroo-rao-io, the falling aicay, or apostasy, which the

Thessalonians had been taught to expect.
1 Tim. vi. 12 : rov KaXov ayCjva tt]s Tritmuis, the good fig]it of the faith,
the Christian faith.
Heb. xi. 10 : r^v roiis OtficXiovs t-xovaav irdXtv, the city which hath the
foundations, i.e., the Xew Jerusalem.
Heb. xi. 35 : ov TrpocrSe^dfjicvoL tt|v dTroXijTpwo-iv, not accepting the deli-
verance, proffered as the re^vard of apostasy.

James i. 11 : avv t<3 Kav<r«vt, with the hurning u'ind from the east, fatal
to vegetation. (Compare Matt. xx. 12 ; Jonah iv. 8 ; Luke xii. 55.)
Rev. ii. 10 : tov crT^>avov TTis t^^s, the croicn of the life, the 23romised
crown of the life immortal.
Rev. vii. 14 : ck tVJs 0Xir|/€ws Tfjs jxrydXiis, out of the great trihulation
(lit., the tribulation, the great one), the reference being to a special
trial.

In ascriptions of praise, also, the Article is generally found. Thus,

Rev. iv. 11, T^v So^av KoX TTjv TifjLTjv, thc glory and the honour ; v. 12, 13;
vii. 12.

214. Before abstract nouns the Article denotes that the conception
is an object of thought. It is often difficult to trace
individualised, as
184 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 214

the distinction, and it may even be impossible to say in some instances

whether the insertion or the omission of the Article before abstracts
would give the better sense ;^ but there are many cases in which the
difference is clearly marked. For example, the Article is employed :

a. When the abstraction is personified.

1 Cor. xiii. 4 : t^ dYdin] fxaKpo6vfji€L, k.t.X., Love suffereth long, etc.

Acts xxviii. 4 : ov i\ Sikt] ^r^v ovk etao-ei/, whom Justice permitted not
to live.

1 Cor. xi. 14: ovh\ t) <j>v(ris avry] SiSdcrKa ; doth not Nature itself
teach ?

So when the abstract term is used for the whole mass of individuals.
Rom. xi. 7 : i] Se €k\oyt|, the election, i.e., the mass of the elect.

Phil. iii. 3 : i\ ircpiToiiT], the circumcision, i.e., the community of the

circumcised.
h. When the abstraction is made a separate object of thought.
1 John iv. 10 : iv tovtio icrrlv i] ayain], in this is love, i.e., not merely
" this is an act of love," but, herein Love in its very essence stands
revealed.

1 Cor. XV. 21 : 8l dvOpwirov 6 GdvaTos, hij man (came) death, the uni- I
versal fact, apart from the consideration of special instances.
Matt. V. 6 : 7ravo)VT€<s kol 8ti//^oL>i/r€? t-^v SiKaioo-uvqv, hungering and
thirsting after righteousness, as in itself a good to be obtained.
c. But where the abstract word expresses merely a quality of some i
further object of thought, the article is omitted.

Matt. V. 10 : ol SeSiwy/xei/ot Iv^kcv 8iKaio(rvvT]s, the persecuted for

righteousness^ sake, such being an element in their character.
Rom. V. 13 : d|xapTia rjv iv Kocr/xio, si7i was in the world, i.e., as an
attribute of human conduct ; illustrating the more general assertion of
verse 12, that Sin, in the abstract, i\ dfiapT^a, entered into the world.

1 Cor. xiii. 1 : lav ... iy.ya.i7y\v fjirj e^Wj Lf •• I have not love, as a feature
in my character.
In determining the reason of the omission or the insertion of the Article before
abstract nouns in any given case, it should be considered whether there is any

^ In fact, the subtlety of this distinction has given rise to a large number of
various readings.
 ^ ;

§ 216.] AETICLE WITH PROPER NAMES. 185

grammatical rule requiring it, apart from the meauing of the term. (See
especially § 212.)

215. A definite attribute or property of an object is marked in

Greek by the Article.
Thus, instead of saying, He has large eyes, the Greeks would say, He Jms the
eyes large. But when the connection was only accidental, the Article would be
omitted thus. He liad a dee}) icouiid would be expressed without the Article,
;

unless the wound had been previously mentioned, when the case would come
under § 212. The Article may, therefore, in such sentences as the following
be rendered by the possessive pronoun.

Acts xxvi. 24 : 6 ^-JJo-ros fxeydXy ttj <j>ft)vfj cf>r]a-Lv, Festus says with his
voice upraised, or " with a loud voice," as A.V. So chap. xiv. 10.

1 Peter iv. 8 : Ti\v cts eavrovs d-ydiriiv iKTivrj €;)^ovt€s, having your
love to one anotJier fervent.

Heb. vii. 24 : dwapdl^aTov l^et rfjv t6p«o-vvT]v, R.V. He hath his priest-
hood unchangeable.
The Article, in eflfect, must often be rendered as an unemphatic possessive
the Greeks saying the, where we say his, her, its, their.

216. With proper names, the Article may or may not be employed.
The only rule, probably, that can be safely laid down on the subject is
that a name does not take the Article on its first mention, unless in the
case of personages well known or specially distinguished. For the rest,

the habit or taste of the writer seems to have decided his usage.
may, however, be noted that indeclinable names in the oblique
It
cases most frequently employ the Article. Thus we find tov, t«, tov,
'lo-paTjX.So also in the genealogies.
When a name is followed by some title or descriptive word, the
Article is generally inserted. So, Mapta t) Ma78aXT]VTj, Mary the Mag-
dalene ; 'lo^jSas o *I<rKapiwTT]s, Judas the Iscariot ; '^oj(T6ivrj<; 6 dScXcjxjs

(1 Cor. i. 1), Sosthenes the brother.

Of geographical names, those of countries, generally feminine in
a, almost always take the Article. The probable reason is that they

^ Thus, in the Acts, the name of Paid almost always has the Article that of ;

Pc^^"?' much more seldom, but still frequently. Both in the Gospels and the Acts
the names of the other a2)ostles usually omit the article.
186 ARTICLE AVITH PROPER NAMES. [§ 216.

were originally adjectives, agreeing with 7^, land. Thus, rj 'lovSaia,

Judoia, properly "the Judaean land," or "land of the Jews." AI'yvtttos,

Egypt, is always used without the Article.

!N'ames of cities greatly vary in their use, most generally omitting the
Article after prepositions. 'lepovo-aXr)}! (indecl.), 'lepocroXviia (neut. plur.),

Jerusalem, is almost always anarthrous.

217. The Divine Xames appear to be somewhat irregular in their

use or rejection of the Article.

a. We with 6 ©eos. It
find 0€os, God, almost interchangeably is

certain, however, that an explanation may very commonly be found in

the rules already given.
Apart from these, the general distinction seems to be that the name
without the Article throws the stress rather upon the general conception
of the Divine character
—
" One who is Omnipotent, All-holy, Infinite,
etc."^ —
whereas the word with the Article (the ordinary use) specifies the
revealed Deity, the God of the New Testament. Parts of the Epistles to

the Corinthians may be taken by way of illustration :

1 Cor. ii. 1 : The testimony of God, tov Gcov.

Ver. 7 : We
speak the loisdom of God, ©eov (without the Article), i.e.,
the wisdom of an Infinite and Perfect being, as contrasted with the
world's wisdom, ivhich God, 6 0€6s (the God revealed in the Gospel),
foreordained.

Chap. iii. 6-9 : 6 0€bs rjviavev, (our) God caused the seed to grow . . . for
we are God^s fellow-icorkers, ye are God's husbandry, God's building. In
these three clauses the word is used without the Article, as though the
Apostle reasoned, "It is a God for whom^ we are labouring, a God who
;"
ismoulding you, training you for Himself resuming, then, in verse
10 with the Article, ^^
accoi'ding to the grace of God, toO 0€ov, which is
given me."

Thus, again, 2 Cor. v. 18-21: "All things are of God, (tov 0€oO, our
God) . . . who hath given to us the ministry of reconciliation, that God,

1 Compare a line of Dr. Watts's

" This was compassion like a God.''
^ Or, wiUi wltom.
§ 217, C.] ARTICLE WITH THE DR^INE NAMES. 187

(0€ds — all we can understand by that Xame) was in Christ . . . AVe are
ambassadors, then, as though this God, (tov 0€ov,) were beseeching ... Be
ye reconciled to this God, (tw 0€<3) . . . Him who knew not sin, He made
sin on our behalf, that we might become (StKatoo-wry 0€ou,) God^s right-
eousness, {i.e., partakers of a Divine righteousness,) in Him."

The name Kvpios, Lord, generally prefixes the Article.

h. The
contrary usage, when not accounted for by ordinary rules, arises from
this word having been adopted in the Septuagint as the Greek equivalent
for the Hebrew name Jehovah. In the Gospels it usually signifies God;
in the Epistles it commonly refers to Christ.^ Instances of its occurrence
without the article are (1) in direct renderings from the Old Testament,
as 1 Cor. iii. 20, Kvptos ytvojcrKct rov^i StaXoytc/xov?, k.t.X., Jehovah knows
the thoughts, etc. So 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Heb. vii. 21, xiii. 6. In 1 Pet. i. 25

it is substituted for the other Hebrew Divine name (LXX., 0€ov);

(2) after prepositions, as in the ordinary phrase, Iv Kvpiw ; (3) preceding

the appellation, 'I-qo-ovs Xpio-r^s, Jesus Christ (generally in the gen. case),

as in the superscriptions (Eom. i. 7 ; 1 Cor. i. 3 ; Gal. i. 3). So in Eph-

vi. 23, and strikingly Phil. iii. 20.

c. The title vlbs 06ov, a or the Son of God (more emphatically, 0eov
vios, God's Son), is found both with and without the Article. The
usual form is 6 vlbs tov 0€ov, the Son of the (revealed) God (comp. under
06ds). Ytbs TOV 06oO occurs, as in the Tempter's interrogatory (Matt.
iv. 3),where the supremacy of the revealed Deity is recognised, but the
exclusive relationship of our Lord to the Father is at least left an open
question while vlbs 0€ov expresses a view altogether less definite of our
;

Lord's dignity. Thus, in i\iQ\Y first confession, the disciples said, " Truly
thou art Son of God,^^ 0€ov vlos. But afterwards Peter acknowledges,
"Thou art the Son of the living God," 6 vlbs tov 0€ov, k.t.X. (Matt.
xvi. 16). The centurion amid the miracles of Calvary expresses a certain
measure of faith " Truly this man is Son of God," 0€ov vlos, without
:

an Article to either (Matt, xxvii. 54 Mark xv. 39 compare Luke ; ;

xxiii. 47). But we read of Saul, the convert, how he preached at once
in the synagogues of Damascus that " this man is the Son of God,'' 6 vlbs
TOV 0€ov (Acts xi. 20).2

^ The Name above every name, Phil. ii. 9, is Ki/ptos, Jehovah.

- Apparent exceptions to this course of remark occur Luke i. 35 — ; Rom. i. 4 — Avliich
may be left to the thoughtful reader.
188 ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. [§ 217, d.

The name 'Itio-oOs, Jesus, when used alone, in the Gospels and
d.

Acts, almost always has the Article. The reason undoubtedly is that
the word is strictly an appellative, being but the Greek form of the
Hebrew for " Saviour." To the disciples, therefore, and the Evangelists,
the significance of the word was ever present the Savioiir. When :

others employed the name, or it was used in converse with them, the
Article might be omitted. See John vi. 24 (where for the moment the
point of view taken is that of the spectators). So viii. 59 (and, in
critical edd., xi. 51, xviii. 8);^ Acts v. 30, xiii. 23, 33, and a few other
passages. When the name stands in apposition with others, as Kvpios
or XpwTTos, the Article is generally omitted. In the Epistles this
combination is most usual. The Apostle Paul, for instance, only has
6 Itio-ovs alone four times, and 'It)o-ovs nine ; his preference being for the
appellative Xpto-Tos, while his fervour adopts many variously-combined
titles for the Lord his Saviour.^
6. The employment of the Article with Xpiorrds, " the Anointed One,"
Christ, shows a remarkable difference between the Gospels and the
Epistles. Strictly speaking, the name is a verbal appellative, the Greek
equivalent of the Hebrew word Messiah^ "Anointed." Hence in our
Lord's time it was customary and natural to speak of the Christ. This,
accordingly, is the almost invariable form of speech in the Gospels and
the Acts. Thus, Matt. ii. 4, we should read, " where the Clirist is

born ;" Matt. xi. 2, *'the works of the Christ" i.e., such works as attested

his possession of that character ; Matt. xxii. 42, " what think ye of the
Christ?" John xii. 34, ^' the Christ abideth for ever;" Acts xvii. 3,
" that it behoved the Christ to suffer."

1 So W. H.
^ Mr. Rose, in his edition of " Middleton on the Greek Article," gives a list of the
appellations used by St. Paul, with the number of times they respectively occur.
They are —in the rec. text (but in some the readings vary)
6 'It/ctoCs 4 times. 6 Kvpios 'It^ctoCs .. ... 10 times.
'It^ctoOs 9 5> 'Irjaovs 6 K6pios .. 1 „
6 X/)t(rr6s 95 >5
6K. 'I. Xpiards .. 5 ,,

'KpicTbs 122 JJ
Kijpios 'I. X. ... 17 „
^\7]aom b 'X^picfTos 1 ))
6 X. 'I. 6 Kvpios.. 1 „
6 Xpiarbs 'Irjcrovs (read- Xpia-Tos 'I. K. ... 1 „
ings doubtful) 4 JJ
'I. X. 6 K. rjfxuiu..

'LiCroUS XpKXTOS 39 " 6 K. ijiiiQv 'I. X... ... 35 „

T.pi7T6s 'lyjaovs 58 JJ
X. 'I. 6 K. ijfxoju.. ... 9 .,
§ 217,./'.] APvTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. 189

however, the tendency was at work which in later days

Already,
changed this appellative into a recognised proper name. Traces of this
may be 1 ; Mark i. 1, ix. 41
seen in Matt. i. Acts ii. 38 ; and in the Epistles
;

of Paul the usage appears entirely reversed, the omission of the Article
being the rule (in the forms Xpio-rds alone, 'Iii<rovs Xpio-ro's, and Xpio-rbs
and its retention the exception. The descriptive title, " the
'Itjo-ovs),

Anointed," has not been wholly lost, but the personal name of Christ
has laid a yet deeper hold on the mind and heart of the Church. Some-
times, again, the Apostle employs one form in close repeated recurrence,
as in Col. iii. 1-4 " If ye be risen with the Christy seek the things that
:

are above, where the Christ sitteth ... your life is hid with the Christ ...
when the Christ shall be manifested." Without the Article, we have
the name thus recurrent in Phil. i. 18-23 after speaking of those :

who preach the Glirist out of envy and strife, the Apostle adds, as with a
more personal love, "nevertheless C/msMs preached"... uttering then
his earnest hope " that Christ shall be magnified for me to live is . . .

Christ ... yet to depart and to be with Christ is far better."

It is not asserted that the thoughtful reader will always 'tliscern the reason of
the employment or the omission of the Article in connection with these sacred
names. Often, however, unquestionably, most interesting and valuable sug-
gestions will arise ; and the whole subject is worth the most painstaking
investigation.^

/. The name of the Hotij Spirit, nvcvjia ei-yiov, requires the Article
when He is spoken of in Himself; but when the reference is to His
operation, gifts, or manifestation in men, the Article is almost invariably
omitted. In other words, " the Spirit" regarded objectively takes the
Article, regarded subjectively is frequently anarthrous.

Apparent exceptions to this rule are but instances of more general grammatical
when the term, although definite, follows a preposition or
laws, as, for instance,
precedes a genitive.

Accordingly, when disciples of Christ are said to be jilled loith the

Spirit, to receive the Spirit, to ivalk in the Spirit, the Article is omitted.
See, e.g., Luke i. 15, 41, 67, ii. 25, xi. 13 ; John iii. 5, xx. 22 ; Acts i. 5,
ii. 4, iv. 8, vi. 3,viii. 15, 17 (the Article in 18 is a case of renewed mention).

^ See a striking essay on "The Greek Testament" in the Quarterly Review iox
January, 1863.
190 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 217,/.

xi. 16 ; Eom. viii. 9, ix. 1, xv. 13, 16 ; 1 Cor. ii. 4, 13, vii. 40 ; 2 Cor.
iii. 3 ; Eph. v. 18, vi. 18 ; Col. i. 8 ; 2 Thess. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 2; 2 Pet.
i. 21 ; Jude 19 ; Rev. i. 10, etc.
An instance of the force of the Article maybe seen in John xiv. 17, 26,
XV. 26, xvi. 13, in all of which passages we read to nv€v|xa. But when
the Spirit imparted^ the Article disappears (xx. 22), XdjSeTi
is IlvevjJitt

d^iov, ^^ Receive ye (the) Holy Ghost."

218. Some monadic nouns (see § 209), being regarded as proper

names, may be used with or without the Article. Such are -flXtos,

Sim; Ko<r|xos, loorJcl; ovpavo's, ovpavoi, heaven or heavens; ^f), earth, or

land; 0dXao-<ra, sea; T||ji€pa, day ; vv|, night; €KK\T]<r£a, church, and some
others. The iVrticle, however, is most generally inserted.

219. Some prepositional phrases omit the Article ; in most

instances denoting time, place, or state. Compare the English expres-
sions, at Jiome, on land, by day, in church.

Examples. — dir' d-ypov, from the country (Mark xv. 21 Luke xxiii. 26) ;

els d^pov, into the country (Mark xvi. 12); Iv d^pft), in the countiy (Luke
XV. 25).

ev dpxfi)
^'^ l^^*^ beginning (John i. 1, 2; Acts xi. 15); dir* dpxrjs, from
the begijining (Matt. xix. 4, 8; 2; Jolin Luke i. viii. 44; 1 John i. 1,

etc.); kl dpxTjs, from the beginning (John xvi. 4).

Ik St^iwv ...ki dpwTTcpwv, on (lit., olf ) the right . the left (Mark x, 37
Luke xxiii. 33, etc.).

«ls oiK^av, into tlte house (2 John 10).

€v £KK\T](r{a, in (the) church (1 Cor. xiv. 19, 28, 35).

eirl irpdo-wTTov, on the face (1 Cor. xiv. 25).

dirb dvaToXwv, /?^om the East (Matt. ii. 1, xxiv. 27); dirj) hva-^S^v, from
the West (Luke xii. 54; Rev. xxi. 13; both phrases combined. Matt,
viii. 11 ; Luke xiii. 29); ^ws Svo-nwv, unto the West (Matt. xxiv. 27).

€K v€Kpwv, from the dead. This phrase is of constant occurrence, as

Matt. xvii. 9, etc. Occasionally, airo is employed ; very rarely the
Article is found. Perhaps the omission is intended emphatically to
mark the condition, "from dead 'persons" — those, indefinitely speaking,
ivho are in that state.
§ 220.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 191

Other instances of this idiom niight be added. The student, hovrever, must
be cautioned against supposing that the preposition is itself a reason for the
omission of the Article before a term intended to be taken as definite.^

220. Nouns defined by the demonstrative pronouns, ovros, this,

l<€Lvo^, that, directly agreeing with them, take the Article, wliich
always immediately precedes the noun the pronoun being placed ;

indifferently, first or last. Thus we may have 6 AvOpwiros o5tos (Luke

ii. 25), or oOtos 6 fivepwiros (xiv. 30), this man, but never 6 ovros av^pwTros

and scarcely ever av6po)7ro<s ovro?.^

or ovTo<: avOpcoTTo^,
When the Article is omitted with the noun and demonstrative pro-
noun, the latter implies a predicate. Thus (Rom. ix. 8), ov ... ravra tc'kvol
Tov 0€ov, these are not children of God.
These rules apply for the most part to proper names, as Acts xix. 26^
6 IlavXos oStos, this Paul ; Heb. vii. 1, oStos 6 McXxwreSeK, this Mel-
chisedek; John vi. 42, ovx oStos ia-nv 'It^o-ovs, Is this not Jesus ? ^ ovtos
after a name often implies contempt : Acts vii. 40 ; xix. 26.
The pronoun toiovtos, Toiavrq, TotovTo, snch, is found with the Article
when the person or thing which is the subject of comparison is definitely
before the writer's mind the omission of the Article shows that the
;

reference is more general, to quality or attribute.

Matt. xix. 14: twv toiovtwv, k.t.A., of such (as these children) is the

kingdom of heaven.
2 Cor. ii. 6 : iKavov t<3 toioxIto), sufficient to such a man (as the offender
of whom I write).
Matt. ix. 6 : l^ovo-iav Toiavrr]v, s^ich (kind of) power.
John ix. 16 : roiavra <n](i,€ia, such (kind of) miracles.
It is observable, however, that the two forms of expression, being separated
by so slight a shade of difference, may often be used indifferently. The Article
is generally omitted in the Gospels, generally inserted in the Epistles, except
that to the Hebrews.

^ See, for instance, Alford on Matt. i. 18, ck irvei''fiaros ayiov. The Article is

omitted, not on account of the preposition, but according to the distinction illustrated
in §217,/.
The demonstrative Sde only once occurs in the adjective construction, and follows
*

the same rule: James iv. 13, els rrjvde ttjv irdXiv, into this city.
^ The learner should be cautioned against rendering, " Is this Jesus not the son of

Joseph?" which would have required 6 'It^ctous. The comma at /esa^s in the R.V.
conveys the proper stress.
192 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 221

221. The distributive pronominal adjective '^Katrxos, each, never takes

the Article in the Xew Testament.

Before too-ovtos, so much (plur., so many), the Article is not found in

the New Testament, with the exception of Rev. xviii. 17, 6 too-ovtos

irXovTos, the wealthy which teas so great.

222. The Article prefixed to the pronoun avros gives it the

meaning of the same. (See § 57, d.)

2 Cor. iv. 13 : to avTo irveOiJLa, the same Spirit.

But Rom. viii. 26 : avTo to irveviia, the very Spirit, the Spirit Himself.

The New Testament MSS. often vary between the contracted plural Tavra and
raura (plur. neut. of oSros). See Luke vi. 23, 26, xvii. 30 ; 1 Thess. ii. 14.

223. ci. A possessive pronoun agreeing with a noun not a Pre-

dicate invariably takes the Article.
John xvii. 10 : to, Ijaol iravra era ecrrtv kcu to, o-d e/xa, all (things) mine
are thine, and thine are mine.
Acts xxiv. 6 : Kara tov iqp.€T€pov v<5p.ov, according to our law.

John vii. 6 : 6 Kaipos 6 {)|jL€'T€pos, your opportunity.

h. The possessive sense is, however, generally given by the genitive of

the personal pronoun ; the article preceding the noun, as 6 iraT^jp (lov,

my father ; ol iraTcpes v|itov, your fathers.

224. a. The adjective iras, all, in the singular number, without

the Article, signifies every; with the Article, it means the ivhole of

the object which it qualifies. Thus, irdo-a iroXis is every city; irdo-a y\

iroXis, or r\ irdo-a iroXts,^ the whole of the city. r\ irdXis irdo-a would have a
meaning slightly different the city, all of it, " the city in every part."

So with abstracts.
Luke iv. 1 3 : crwreXeo-a? irdvTa ireipao-jxdv, (the devil) having ended every
temptation, i.e., every form of temptation.

2 Cor. iv. 2 : Trpos irdo-av a-vvd%'r\a-\.v avOpuiiroiv, to ever^y conscience of

men, i.e., to every variety of human conscience.

^ A construction only twice found: Acts xx. 18, rby irdvTa xP<i^ov; and 1 Tim.
i. 16, tV Trdaau (W. H. d-rraaav) fiaKpodvfiiay.
§ 224, b.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 193

Eph. iii. 15 : ira<ra iraTpid, k.t.X., every family in heaven and on earth.

Some critics have questioned this translation on the authority of chap. ii. 21,
where they read Trao-a oiKo^tofirj, and render the u'hole building. This, however,
is quite contrary to usage. The R. V. correctly renders eaxih several building.

2 Tim. iii. 16 : irdo-a 7pa<j)T| ^co'ttvcvctto?, k.t.A., evei^y icriting (i.e., of

those just mentioned, ver. 15) is divinely inspired,'^ etc., or every divinely
inspired writing is also profitable^ etc.

Luke ii. 10 : iravrl t« \a«, to all the people of Israel.

The phrase in chap. ii. 31 is different: '"'before the face of all the peoples," i.e.,

the nations of mankind.

1 Cor. xiii. 2 : lav e^t*^ irdo-av t^v mo-Ttv, k.t.X., if I have all the faith
requisite for such a task.

Col. i. 23: €v irdcTT] T^ KTia-ix.^ in all creation, R.V. ; not "to every
creature," as A.Y. Compare ver. 15, irdo-iis KT^<r€«s, where the rendering
is accurate, of evei'y creature.

1 Tim. i. 1 6 : t^v irdo-av |xaKpo0u}xiav, all the longsuffering which belongs

to the Divine character. R.V., all his longsuffering.

John V. 22 t^v Kp^o-iv irdo-av, k.t.X.,

: the judgment (of men), all of it.

The Father has committed this wholly to the Son.

With proper names, as of countries, cities, etc., the Article after ttSs
may be omitted by § 216 ; the signification being still the ivhole. (Matt,
ii. 3 ; Acts ii. 36.)

b. The plural, irdvrcs, almost always has the Article when the sub-
stantive is expressed almost always omits it when the substantive
;

is implied. The few exceptions to the former are chiefly w^hen the noun
is &v9p«iroi, men.^ The exceptions to the latter are w^here the idea is
collective. Thus, irdvra is all things, severally ; rd irdvra, all things, as

constituting a whole.

Phil. iv. 13: irdvra tor;;(vo>, / can do all things.

^ Middleton R. V. marg. ; ,

2 Ellicott; R.V.
=*
W. H. and Rev. Text omit the Article.
^ See also Acts xvii, 21, xix. 17; 1 Cor. x. 1 ; Heb. i. 6; 1 Pet, ij. i.

O
194 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 224, b.

Col. i. 16 : Toi irdyra €f atro), k.t.A., all things were created in Him
(Christ). See also 1 Tim. vi. 13; Heb. ii. 8, etc.

The usual positiou of the plural, Travres, is before the Article and substantive.
Twice (Acts xix. 7, xxvii. 37), with a special meaning, it stands between them
01 iravTes dvdpes, the men in all; at iraaai i/'i'xctt, the souls (persons) in all.
Occasionally, employed after the Article and substantive, it takes a strong
emphasis: as John xvii. 10, ra i/xa wavra ad iari, mi)ie are all thine.

225. The construction of 6\os, tvhole, in respect of the Article, is

similar to that of 7ra?. Generally the Article stands between it and its

noun, as o\os 6 Koo-fjios, the lohole loorld (Rom. i. 8). Occasionally the
noun and Article precede^ with an added emphasis on SXos, as 6 Koo-p-os

{JXos, the worlds (y^a,) the -whole (of it) (Matt. xvi. 26).^ A few times it is

found without the Article, and its force is expressed by the English
indefinite, as John vii. 23, SXov dvOpwirov, a whole man I have restored to
health. The other instances are Acts xi. 26, xxi. 31 (before a proper
name), xxviii. 30; Titus i. 11.

226. The employment of the Article with the adjective pronouns

dXXos, other (numerically), and '^T€pos, other (properly implying some
further distinction), is analogous to the English idiom.- Singular, the
other; plural, the others (^T€pos only once so used — Luke iv. 43).^

John XX. 3 : 6 dXXos /Aa^r/rrj?, the other disciple.

John XX. 25 : ot dXXot ixaQ-qraly the other disciples.

Matt. vi. 24 : rov 'inpoy dyaTn^aeL, the other (master) he tvill love.

Luke iv. 43 : rais ercpais TToXecTLv, to the other cities.

227. The
Article with the neuter iroXv (*' the much") is equivalent
to " the abundance " (see 1 Pet. i. 3). More common, however, is its
use with the plural, iroXXof, xoXXaC, iroXXd, many, to wliich it gives the

1 The observant reader may trace the emphasis in the other passages where this
order is found Matt. xxvi. 59
: Mark i. 33, ; viii. 36 ; Luke ix. 2.5, xi. 36 ; John
iv. 53 ; Acts xix. 29, xxi. 30 Rom. xvi. 23 ; ; 1 Cor. xiv. 23 ; 1 John v. 19 ; Rev.
iii. 10, xii. 9, xvi. 14.
^ In classical Greek, 6 fiXXos means the rest of.
3 Probably also Matt. xi. 16 (W. H. ; Rev. Text).
 — —

§ 228.] SIGXIFICAXCE OF THE ARTICLE. 195

significaiice of the mani/, the generality, the whole mass of the particular
objects of thought. The only instances are the following :

Matt. xxir. 12 :
17 ayaTT-r] t«v iroXXoiv, the love of the many shall wax
cold.

Luke vii. 47: at d/zapxiat . . . al iroXXai, her sins — the many, i.e., the
whole of them — are forgiven.

Acts xxvi. 24 : TO, iroXXa ypd/jL/jLaTa, the many letter's ; the mass, the
quantity of thy learning.
Eom. xii. 5 : 01 iroXKoi, the many of us — the whole mass — are one body
in Christ. (So 1 Cor. x. 17.)

1 Cor. X. 33 : to t«v iroXX«v, the (advantage) of the many.

2 Cor. ii. 17 : w? ol iro\Xo£, (we are not) as the many.
Rev. xvii. 1 : rtov vharuiv t«v ttoXXwv, of the many icaters.

Rom. V. 15-19 : This most important passage, containing this idiom, has
been thus ti'anslated by the Revisers :

[We have noted by italics the Articles which the A.Y. omits.]

15 But not as the trespass, so also is the free gift. For if by the trespass of
theone the many died, much more did the grace of God, and the gift by the
grace of the one man, Jesus Christ, abound unto the many.
16 And
not as through one that sinned, so is the gift: for the judgment came
of one unto condemnation, but the free gift came of many trespasses unto
justification.
17 For if, by the trespass of the one, death reigned through the one ; much
more abundance of {the^) grace and of the gift of {the^)
shall they that receive the
righteousness reign in life through the one, even Jesus Christ.
18 So then as through one trespass [the judgment came] unto all men to
condemnation even so through one act of righteousness [the free gift came]
;

unto all men to justification of life.

19 For as through the one man's disobedience the many were made sinners,
even so through the obedience of the one shall the many be made righteous.

228. AMien the Nominative is used for the Vocative in direct

address, the Article is prefixed. (For an explanation of the idiom, see
§ 244.)

Matt. xi. 26 : vai, 6 iraTrip, even so, Father/

Luke viii. 54 : i] irais, cyetpov, Damsel, arise !

^ In the Greek, but not in R. V.

196 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 228.

John xix. 3 :
x^^P^ ° pao-iXcvs, hail, King !

John XX. 28 : 6 Kvpids /xov koX 6 ©cos /xov, my Lord and my God !
Heb. i. 8 : 6 Opovo^ aov 6 ©eds, Thy throne, God ! (See also ver. 9,
and X. 7.)

229. The Article is often separated from its substantive by qualifying

or explanatory words.

a. These are, generally, a preposition, with its case, other dependent

words being sometimes added.
Matt. vii. 3 : t-^iv 8c Iv tw o-w o^^aX/xaJ SoKdv, hut the beam in thine
otcn eye.

Luke xvi. 10 : 6 cv iXaxto'no dSiKos, the (man) unjust in the least.

1 Pet. i. 14 : rats Trporepov iv ry ayvota vfxtov €iri6v|i.CaiS| according to

the former (lit., formerly) lusts in your ignorance.

b. Adverbs also are often thus employed :

2 Tim. iv. 10 : dyaTrrjo-ag tov vvv aicova, having loved the present (lit.,

now) wo7'ld.

230. a. The Article is very frequently repeated after its noun,

to introduce some attributive word or phrase.
Clearly, this is a result of the original demonstrative force of the Article.
The phrase introduced may be an adjective or participle, a preposition with
an adverb.
its case, or (rarely)

The Article so employed gives the attributive a certain prominence or

emphasis.

Matt. xvii. 5 : 6 vlos fiov 6 d-yainiTds, my beloved Son^ lit., my Son,

the beloved.
Titus ii. 11 : rj
x^P'-^ ''"o^ ®€ov ij^ o-wrifjpios, the grace of God that bringeth
salvation, lit., the grace ... the salvation-bringing.
Heb. xiii. 20 : tov Troi/Acva twv irpopaToiv tov (i^^av, the great Shepherd
of the sheep.
The absence of the Article before an attributive phrase is often significant.
Thus, Rom. viii. 3 Kar^Kpive tt]v a/xapTiav iv rrj aapKi, He condcinncd sin in the
:

flesh. The phrase depends upon KariKpipe. Had it been tt}v h rri aapKl, in the
fl^sh would have qualified sin.

^ W. H. omit the article.

 "

g 231.] EMPHATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 197

1 Pet. i. 25 : to pyjfxa to tvayyikia-Qiv, the loord that loas preached^ lit.,

the word, the spoken-as-glad-tidings.

Matt. V. 16 : rov Uarepa vfxCjv tov kv tois ovpavois, you7' Father in the

heavens.
Luke XX. 35 : t^s dvacTacrcws tt]s ck v€Kp«v, of tlie resurrection from
the dead.

Rev. xi. 2 : t^v avXr^v t^v ^|«0ev, the older court.

b. Occasionally, this emphatic form of expression is employed when

the noun has no Article preceding.

Luke xxiii. 49 : ywaiKc? at o-uvaKoXov0ovo-ai avTw, (there stood) icomen,

those who accompanied Him.

Jolin xiv. 27 : ilp-qvqv t^v l^^v BlSwijll vjxLv, peace, (which is) mine, I
give to you.

1 Tim. V. 3 :
XVP°-'^ '"'^H-^'-
"^^-^ ^vt«s x^P*S) honour widows, those who are
wtdoics indeed.
Rom. ix. 30 : hiKaiocrvv-qv 8c r^v « irfo-Ttws, (he obtained) righteousness,
yea, that (which is) hy faith.

James i. 25 : cts vojxov rekaov tov ttjs tXcvOcpias, (whoso looketh) into a
perfect laiv, that of liberty.

In passages like these, the former |lause contains the general description the ;

latter limits it to a particular case. See also Gal. ii. 20, iii. 21 1 Pet. i. 10, ;

" prophets, those who prophesied;" Jude 6, "Angels, (even) those, namely, that
kept not their first estate.

231. The defining clause being frequently participial, it may be

remarked, in anticipation of the account to be given of Participles
(§§ 393-396), that with the Article the participle qualifies the noun,
as a simple epithet, while without the Article it implies a predicate.
Thus, 6 0€os 6 iroi^oras tov Koa-fxov is, God who made the icorld; 6 ©cos
iroi^o-as, K.T.X., would be, God having made, or ivhen He had made, etc.
In 2 Pet. i. 18,^ again, we render, not "the voice which iras borne from
heaven," but " the voice as it was borne."
Sometimes it will be important to observe the force of the anarthrous
participle.
Thus, in a much controverted passage, 1 Pet. iii. 19, 20,^ roh ev <pv\aKy

^ In these passages the R.V. is not exact.

198 THE ARTICLE IX ENUMERATIONS. [§ 231.

TTvevfiaai . . whatever be the true interpretaticm, the words must

aTeiO-qcaal wore,
be translated, not who were once disobedient, " but the
'
' the spirits in prison ' *

spirits in prison when once they disobeyed.

This usage will be further illustrated in the sections on Participles.

232. In the enumeration of several persons or things, joined by a

connective particle, an Article be/are the first only intimates a connection
between the whole, as forming one object of thought. This is termed
*'
combined enumeration." The repeated Article, on the other hand^
implies a separation, in themselves, or in the view taken of them.
Sometimes, however, the separation seems to be chiefly gi-ammatical, different
genders requiring the repeated Article.

a. Combined enumeration. —Eph. ii. 20 : eVt rw OefxeXiw twv airoa--

ToXwv Kol 7rpo(firjT<x)v, upon the foundation of the apostles and prophets,
all together constituting but one basis.
Eph. iii. 18 : tl rh TrXaro? kol fxrJKo<s kol f3d9o<s kol v\j/o?, what (is) the
breadth and length and depth and height, one image of vast extension
being before the mind.
Col. ii. 22 : ra. ivTaX/xaTa kol StSaaKaAtas twv dvOpuiiraiV (obs. the
different genders), the commandments and teachings of men, together
constituting one system.

2 Pet. i. 10 : t^v kXyjctiv kol iKXoyrjv, (your) calling and election, each
mutually implying the other.
Matt. xvii. 1 : rhv Herpov kol 'laKoi^ov kol 'lindwrjv, Peter and James
and John, one inseparable group.
Titus ii. 13: Ti\v /xaKapiav iXiriSa kol i7n(f>dv€Lav Trjs So'^s tov /xeyaXov
@€ov KOL (T(x}Trjpo<s ^/xwv 'Irjo-Qv XpLCTTov, the hUssed hope and manifestation
of the glonj of our great God and Saviour Jesus Christ.
Here are two cases of enumeration, each with a single article: (1) the "mani-
festation" is but another expression for the "hope;" and (2) the latter phrase
may imply, on the above-stated principle, either that God (the Father) and
Jesus Christ the Saviour are so inseparably conjoined that the glory of each is

the same (R.V., marg.)j or else, as the R.V. has it, and as Ellicott renders it

in the translation above, that God in this passage is, like Saviour, an epithet
of Christ. Comp. Eph. v. 5 2 Thess. i. 12 ; ; 2 Pet. i. 1. See also the phrase,
''the God and Father of our Lord Jcsils Christ,'' Eph. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 3; Rom.
XV. 6; 2 Cor. i. 3, xi. 31 (1 Cor. xv. 24): not God, even the Fatlier, etc.

b. Separate enumeration. —Luke xii. 11 : IttI rds o-vi/aywya? koX tAs

dp;(as KoX TOLs i^ovaia^, to the synagogues, and the rulers, and the autho-
§ 233.] OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 199

rities, three different classes of tribunal. The reader may compare

Mark xv. 1, where the elders and scribes are spoken of as constituting
but one class, i.e., in the Sanhedrin.

James iii. 11 : to jXvkv kol to inKpov, the sweet and the bitter, from
their very nature separate.

2 Thess. i. 8 : tois ^rj etSoo-t (s)c6v, koI tois /x^ vTraKovovcrt, k.t.X., to those

toho knoto not God, and to those u'ho obey not the Gospel of our Lord
Jesits Christ; two distinct classes, incurring different degrees of punish-
ment.
Heb. xi. 20 evXoyrja-cv 'IcraaK tov 'laKoifS kol rhv 'Hcrav, Isaac blessed
:

Jacob and Esau. Both received a blessing, but not together, and not
the same.
The same enumeration may be found in different places with and "snthout the
separating article. This arises from a difference in the wTiter's point of view in
each particular case. So in 1 Thess. i. 7, the Apostle ^^Tites ttj MaveSovt^ koL
TT] 'Axaia but in ver. 8, ry 'MaKedopig. Kal "Axai'g.
; In the former verse he seems
to contemplate the different directions in which the influence of Thessalonian
Christianity spread ; in the latter, the uniforvi spread of that influence.
Such distinctions may be slight, but they are real, and must be noted for an
accurate understanding of the "Word of God.

233. The omission of the Article marks indefiniteness, which in

translation may be represented by our Indefinite Article in the singular,
and by the anarthrous plural. This point, also, has occasionally been
neglected in the A.V., and generally (not always) observed by the R.Y.
Matt. xii. 41, 42 : AvSpes NivemTat ... pao-i\io-o-a votov, men of Nineveh
... a queen of the south. (R.Y., the men, the queen.)
Luke ii. 12 : evpya-ere pp6<j>os, i/e shall find a babe, which shall be the
sign that the promise is fulfilled.

Acts i. 7 : xpovovs rj Kaipovs, times or seasons, generally.

Acts xvii. 23 : dYvwo-TO) 0€<3, to an unknown God.

Acts xxvi. 2, 7 iyKaXov/xat vtto 'lovSa^wv,
accused by Jews; that
: / am
they should bring such a charge being the wonderful feature in the case.
(R.Y., the Jeivs.)

Rom. ii, 14 : orav yap ^0vt], k.t.A.., For tvhen GentiUs do the things
contained in the law ; not the Gentiles, as though the case were ordinary,

1 Cor. iii. 10 : e^jxeXiov WrjKa, I laid a foundation.

200 ARTICLE WITH vofios, LAW. [§ 233.

1 Cor. xiv. 4 : cKKXtio-iav otKoSo/xa, edifies an assembly, antithetic to

lavTov, himself. (R.Y., the church.)
2 Cor. iii. 6 : SiaKovovs Kaivfjs SiaGTJKTis, ministers of a new covenant.
Gal. iv. 31 : ovk ia-jxlv Trai8io-KT|s reKva, we are 7iot children of a hond-
woman.
Phil. iii. 5 : 'E/SpaLo<s ii 'Eppaiwv, a Hebrew of Hebrews, i.e., of Hebrew
parents,

1 Thess. iv. 16 : ev <^iiivrj apxav^cXou, amid the voice of an archangel.

(R.Y., tvith the voice of the archangel.)
Heb. i. 2 : iXdXrjcrev rjfjuv iv vi<a, God spake to us by (in) a Son, i.e., by
one possessing that character, in contradistinction to the proj)hets of
former ages.

234. The use of the word vd|xos deserves special attention.

With the Article, it invariably denotes the Mosaic law, except where its
meaning is limited by accompanying words. Without the Article, in
cases where the omission is not required by grammatical rule, the term
appears to have a wider significance sometimes referring to the Mosaic ;

law as the type of law in general, and sometimes to law in the abstract,
including every form of Divine command or moral obligation. In the
following passages the R.V. generally has the laic in the text, and law in
the margin.

Rom. ii. 12 : octol iv vo^ta y/xaprov, k.t.X., as many as sinned under

law shall be judged by law.
Rom. ii. 23 : og kv voixw Kavxaa-ai, k.t.X., who maJcest thy boast of law,
or of a law, through breaking the law, etc. (renewed mention).

Rom. ii. 25 : iav vojiov Trpao-o-Ty?, if thou keepest law, i.e., if thou dost
obey, in general ; so the verse continues, but if thou be a breaker of
laio, etc.

Rom. iii. 20 by deeds of law shall no flesh be

: i^ tpymv vdjxov, k.t.X.,

justified for by law is the

. . . knowledge of sin. The omission of the
Article shows the truth to be universal, applicable to all men and to
every form of law. Compare ver. 28, Gal. ii. 16, iii. 2, 5, 10, in all
which passages the Article is consistently omitted.
A few passages further need only be mentioned.
Rom. iii. 31 : "Do we make law void ? ... yea, we estabhsh law."
§ 234] AETICLE ^VITH v6|ios, LAW. 201

Rom. V. 20 :
" there came in by the way a law.''

Rom. vii. 9 : "I was once alive withmit law."

Rom. X. 4 : " Christ is the end of law."

Rom. xiii. 10 :
" love is the fulfilment of law."
Gal. ii. 19 : "I
through law died to law that I might live to God."
Gal. iii.
" For if the inheritance is of law, it is no more of promise."
18 :

James iv. 11 " He that speaketh evil of his brother, and judgeth his brother,
:

speaketh evil of law, and judgeth law ; but if thou judgest law, thou art not a
doer of law, but a judge."

These passages, taken in connection with the numerous instances in which the
Law is specifically spoken of, Mill illustrate the importance of a constant atten-

tion to the usage of Scriptui'e in respect to the Article.

202 THE NUMBERS OF ^^OUKS. [§ 235.

Chapter III. THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE.

NUMBER.
235. The ordinary usage of the Singular and Plural needs no
detailed illustration, but the following rules,explaining some
peculiarities, must be noted.

236. A Masculine Singular Noun, with the Article, often represents

a whole class.

Instances have been given already, § 211. The omission of the Article in
passages like Rom. i. 16, ii. 9, 10, 'Invdaico re KaVEWrjui., to both Jew and Greek,
is owing to the antithetic form. (See § 233.

237. Some words, like <r«|jLa, body, KapSia, heart, when predicated
of several individuals, are occasionally employed in the singular. The
plural, however, is more common. Thus we read, rh o-oina vfxdv and
TO, o-wfiara v/xwr, yoUT body or bodies; r\ KapSia or al KapSiai avruiv, their
heart or hearts.

The word wpoa-wirov, face, is always singular in such phrases as they fell upon
their face, except in the Revelation, vii. 11, xi. 16.

238. Many abstract nouns are used in the plural, for repeated
exemplifications of the quality denoted.

Mark vii. 22: irXeovcliai, iroviipCat, covetousnesses, loickednesses.

James ii. 1 : Iv irpoo-wiroXTnixl/iais, in regard (regards) to persons.

2 Pet. iii. 11: iv dytats dvao-Tpo4>ais kol tva-€^dais, lit., m hoIy conducts
and godlinesses.

239. The plural is occasionally used, like the English rhetorical tve,

by a speaker of himself. See especially the passage 2 Cor. ii. 14

vii. where the Apostle changes incessantly from singular to plural.
16,
The reason, however, may be that sometimes he is conscious of speaking
on behalf of himself and his associates sometimes, again, for himself ;

alone. In any case the idiom in question is not a common one.

 —

§ 240, a.] THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. 203

240. In some instances, where only one agent or object is

actually meant, the plural is employed.

Strictly speaking, these cannot be called instances of the plural put for
the singular, but arise, either (a) from the object being regarded in its

constituent parts, or (h) from the writer having formed the conception
generally, without limitation.

a. A familiar instance of the former kmd is in the plural names of

cities, as *A0f]vai, Athens, KoXo<r<rai, Colossce, where the words expressed
in the first instance the several districts of the place, or the difi'erent
tribes which formed its population. So, in Greek, Jerusalem is often
*l€po(roXv(ia (neut. plur.).

Analogous words are avaroXaC, east; Svo-^aC, icest;'^ tA 8€|id, the right;
TO, dpio-T£pd or €v(ovv}jLa, the left, where some such word as ^jarf6" may be
supplied. These words are also found in the singular.
Some miscellaneous terms to be explained in a similar way are

Luke xvi. 23 Ad^apov h tois koXttois

: airrov, Lazarus ill his (Abraham's) hosmn.
In ver. 22 the singular had been used.
John i. 13: ovk i^ aifiaToov, not of blood, lit., bloods —a peculiar phrase, with a
reference, perhaps, to both parents.'^

Heb. ix. 12, etc.: ets rd dyia, into the Sancticary, "the Holies," sometimes,
as in ver. 3, dyia ayiuv, Holies of holies,^ suggesting that every spot and every
object there was consecrated.
Names of festivals are sometimes plural
iyKaivta, feast of dedication (John
:

X. 22) ; of unleavened bread (Matt. xxvi. 17, etc.); yeveaia, birthday

d^vjxa, feast
feast (Matt. xiv. 6; Mark vi. 21). So ydfioi, Tnarriage feast, from the various
observances and festivities accompanying.
aiwj/es, ages, is plm-al, to mark the successive epochs of duration, especially of
the Divine plan ; the singular either referring to one such epoch, or including all
as one Hence the phrase for ever may be represented either by
mighty whole.
ets Tov aiwva (Matt. xxi. 19; John vi. 51, 58; 1 Pet. i. 25, from Isa. xl. 8, etc.),

or by ets rous aiCJva^ (Luke i. 33; Rom. i. 25, ix. 5; Heb. xiii. 8, etc.); while
the emphatic /o?" ever and ever is expressed by ets rous alCovas tCjv alibvcjv, to the
ages of ages (Heb. xiii. 21 1 Pet. iv. 11; and Rev. ^^a^siwi). (See Vocabulary.)
;

^ Or perhaps the plural in these words may denote repetition. The sun rises or
sets there " again and again."
2 Of the plural in this sense there is no other instance in the Scriptures, and only

one in the classics. The phiral of blood is often found in the LXX. (from the Hebrew),
where violent bloodshedding is denoted.
In this expression (not in the other), some would read dyla (fem.), as referring to
"*

a noun, like X'^/sa, place. This is, however, most unlikely.

204 THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. [§ 240, a.

ovpauoi, heavens, is found with meaning indistinguishable from oi/pdvos, heaven.

The plural usage probably arose from the Hebrew, where the word always
is

plural: "the parts of the firmament." There is also "the third heaven."
Matthew almost always has the plural ; Luke, almost always the singular Mark, ;

most usually the singular ; John, the singular always, except in Rev. xii. 12.
The other 2)arts of the New Testament vary between the two almost equally.
Other plurals of this kind will be sufficiently explained in the Vocabulary.

b. 1. In the second above-mentioned class maybe included those cases

where persons are said generally to do what was really done by one of
their number. Thus, Matt. xxvi. 8, " his disciples said. To what pur-
pose," etc. while in John xii. 4 we read, " one of his disciples, Judas"
;

Compare Mark vii. 17 with Matt. xv. 15; Matt. xiv. 17 and Mark vi. 38
with John vi. 8, 9 ; Matt. xxiv. 1 with Mark xiii. 1 Matt, xxvii. 37 ;

with John xix. 19; Matt, xxvii. 48 and Mark xv. 36 with John xix. 29.
So in Luke xxii. QQ, Xcyovt^s, when in all probability only one is meant.
See also the same idiom in John xi. 8; Luke xx. 21, 39, xxiv. 5 (tlirov);
Matt. XV. 1, X^YovTcs ; xv. 12, Xc'-youo-iv.^

These instances will help to explain apparent discrepancies. Thus it may be

that only one of the crucified malefactors actually blasphemed, notwithstanding
the plural in Matt, xxvii. 44 and the narrative of the cure of the blind men at
;

Jericho (Matt. xx. 30-34 Mark x. 46-52 Luke xviii. 35-43) may possibly be
; ;

harmonised in a similar way, although some expositors have thought that two
different transactions of the kind then took place. ^

2. Somewhat from the above, yet related under the same

different
head, are those cases in which a general statement suffices, although a
particular one might also have been made.

John vi. 45 Acts xiii. 40 the pro2)liets is a general reference,

; : as
when we (juote from "the Bible" without specifying a particular part.
Matt. ii. 20 : nOvrjKaa-iv oi tiiTovvTes, k.t.X., they are dead who seek, etc.,

when Herod specifically is meant. (See Exodus iv. 19.)

Matt. ix. 8 : rov hovra i^ovaiav roiavT-qv tois avOpwirois, 'Who gave such
power to men, i.e., as instanced in the case of Christ.

Rom. i. 4 : c^ tti/ao-rao-ctos veKpQ)v, by the resurrection of the dead; the

^ Stuart's "
Xew Testament Syntax."
- Lee on Inspiration, p. 393 Burgon's " Inspiration and Interpretation," p. 67.
•

See, however, " Bible Handbook," part ii., § 148 Trench on the Miracles, ;

p. 429.
§ 242.] NOMTXATIYE AND VOCATIVE CASES. 205

context showing the reference to he to the one great illustration, in the

case of Christ, of this general fact. It is, however, incorrect to interpret
1 Cor. XV. 29, on the authority of this passage, as referring to baptism
" in the name of Him who was dead, z.e., Christ."

Heb. ix. 23 : Kpdrroa-i. 0v<riais, with better sacrifices, i.e., whatever

those sacrifices might be ; the question being, as it were, left open for a
moment, although the aim was to show that in reality only one sacrifice
could avail.

For the use of singular adjectives, pronouns, etc., in agreement or apposition

with plural nouns, or the contrary, see § 317.

CASE.
The Nominative and Vocative.

241. The Nominative properly the case of the Subject hence is ;

also of the Predicate after copulative Verbs. See §§ 163-165.

242. In some passages a Nominative is found, unconnected \\'ith the

grammatical structure of the sentence; calling attention, emphatically,
to the thing or person spoken of. This is called a Suspended Nomina-
tive (" nominativus pendens ").

Matt. xii. 36 : irdv pTJjia apyhv . . . aTroSwcrovcrt Trepl avTOv Aoyov, every
idle word . . . they shall give account of it.

Acts vii. 40 : 6 Mw<ri]s oStos ... ovk oiha^ev, k.t.X., this Moses ... toe

knoiv not, etc.

Rev. ii. 26 : 6 vikwv koI 6 rrjpwv ... Stoao) aurw i^ovciav, he that over-
cometh, and that keepeth ...to him I will give authority. So iii. 12, 21.

So also Matt. x. 42 ; Luke xii. 10 ; John vii. 38, etc.

A "suspended Nominative" is occasionally employed in expressions of time.

Matt. XV. 32: Sri, ijdT] rj/xepai rpeTs, TrpoapLevovai fj.oi, because they continue icith
Me now three days. So Mark viii. 2.^

Luke ix. 28 : iyivero . . . Cicd ijnepai oKTib, it came to pass, about eight days after
the sayings.

^ In both passages the ordinary text has ijfi^pai, the usual case in such construc-
tion. (See § 286.) But aU critical editions give the Nominative
206 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE CASES. [§ 242.

Snch cases may possibly be resolved into ellipsis, as, in the former instance, of
the substantive verb some such word as 5id(rr77/xa, interval, the
; in the latter, of
true Subject of tyevero and in apposition with ijfxepai..
;

Some so-called "suspended Nominatives" are really instances of apposition.

Thus (Mark vi. 40), Trpaaiai frpaaLai, rank by rank, is in apposition with the
Subject of aveireaov.^
In ver. 39, (rvp.wb<na is in the Accusative in apposition with iravTas.

243. The Nominative is sometimes elliptically used, as in tlie

cases following :

a. The Nominative after the adverb i8ov, heJiold.

Matt. iii. 17: tSov, <|>«vtj ck twv ovpavtoi/, helioJd (there was heard) a
voice out of the heavens.

Heb. ii. 13 : Ihov iy<a koI to, iraiS^a, K.r.X., behold, (here am) I, and the
children which Thou gavest Me.
h. The word ovo|ia, introducing the name of a person or place, is

generally found in the Dative, oi/o/xart, bfj name, (See § 280.) Occa-
sionally, however, it occurs in the Nominative, with the name as predi-
cate, and the copula omitted. So John i. 6, eyeVero avOpojiroq ... 6vo\ia

avT<2 there was a man

'IoDaj/i/77?, . . . his name (was) John.
Luke xxiv. 13 ets : KoifjLrjv ...-^ 6vo\ia 'E/x/xaous, to a village ... whose
name (was) Emmaus.
c. A peculiar Nominative phrase is used in the Revelation as an inde-
clinable noun, equivalent to the Hebrew name Jehovah (chap. i. 4), airo
6 tov Kal 6 Tjv Kal 6 €pxoK"€vos, from Him icho is, and icho ivas, and who
Cometh.

244. The use of the Nominative for the Vocative has been
already noted, § 228, where see examples.
The usage is in fact elliptical, the true Vocative being in the personal
pronoun, crv or {i/xcis, omitted : Thou . . . who art I or, Ye ... loho are I

Matt. vii. 23 : airoxoipeiTe ... oi cpYatofievoi tyjv avojxiav, depart, (ye who
are) the workers of iniquity !

Mark xiv. 36 tt/3/5a 6 irar^p, Abba, (Thou who art) the Fathei'
:

So when the Nominative adjective is in apposition with the Vocative

case.

1 See Rev. T. S. Green's "Greek Testament Grammar," p. 86.

 ! —

§ 247.] THE GENITIVE CASE. 207

Rom. ii. 1 : w avOpoiTrc, irds 6 Kpivwv, man ! (thou) who juchjest,

(I mean) every one I

In Luke xii. 20 the Article is omitted, "kt^pwv, and, accordingly, we must

understand, not a direct address, as A. A"., Thou fool ! but an exclamation,
" How foolish thou art!" A parallel instance is to be found in Rom. vii. 24 :

ToKalirwpos 670? &v6pcjiros, v:rctch€d man tliat I am ! and xi. 33, w ^6.60%
irXovTov, the depth of the riches !

245. With the Vocative proper, the interjection « is employed,

chiefly in vehement expressions.
Matt. XV. 28 : « Tvvai, /xeyoAT/ <rov r] Trccrrtg, woman, great is thy
faith !

Acts xiii. 10 : <S irXripT]? ?ravTos SdXov, full of all deceit

Gal. iii. 1 : » 6.v6x\ro\. raXdrai, foolish Galatiaus !

Sometimes, however, the interjection is employed (as in classical Greek) where

no special vehemence is intended. So Acts i. 1, xviii. 14. But in such cases S3
is more usually omitted (Luke xxii. 57 Acts L 16, xiii. 15, xxvii. 25). ;

The Genitr^e.
246. The Genitive Case (see § 11) primarily signifies motion from,
answering to our question, Whence ? From this general meaning
arise many modifications, including the several notions expressed
in English by the prepositions of ox from.

247. These modifications may be classed imder the following heads :^

1. Origin. 4. Partition.
2. Separation. 5. Object.
3. Possession. 6. Relation.
7. The Genitive Absolute.
The Genitive with Prepositions will be treated of hereafter. (See § 291, sqq.)

^ These significations are again reduced, by Dr. Donaldson and others, to three :

1. Ablation. 2. Partition. 3. Relation.

The name of the case, yeviKri, designates it as expressive of the genus to which any-
thing whether as belonging to
is referred, it or classed under it (Max ^iiiller); or,
according to others, the source from which it is generated, or supposed to spring.
208 THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN, [§ 248.

I. Origin.

248. The Genitive is often used after substantives, to mark the

source or author.
1 Thess. i. 3 : fxvrifMOV€vovTe<; v/jliov tov epyov ttjs irCcTews kol tov kottov
TT]s dYd-rrris kol t^9 v7rofiovy]<; Tf]s c\irC8os, remembering your work of faith ^

and labour of and endurance of hope, i.e., the work springing

love,

from faith, the labour prompted by love, the endurance sustained by

hope.
2 Cor. xi. 26 : klv^vvols iroTap,wv, KLvhvvoL<; X-jicttcSv, in dangers of rivers^
in dangers of robbers, i.e., occasioned by them.
Rom. iv. 13 : ha. StKaLoa-vvrjs rnVr^ws, through the righteousness of faitJi.

Rom. XV. 4 : 8ta rrys Tra/oaKXrjo-ccos twv Ypa<|)wv, through the comfort of
the Scriptures.

Col. i. 23 : ttTTo T^? eXTTtSog tov cvayycX^ov, from the hope of the Gospel.

Col. ii. 12: 8ia r^? ttio-tcw? rfis cvcp-ytCas tov ®€ov, through the faith of
the mighty working of God, i.e., mightily wrought by Him.

249. The Genitive, after many verbs expressive of sense or

mental affections of various kinds, indicates the source from which
the sensation or affection proceeds.
The full force of the Genitive is evident also in these cases. Thus, to smell a
flower, really means to receive a certain impression from the flower. Compare
the ordinary phrase, to taste o/diflerent viands. In another use, the object of
sense itself becomes subject of the verb, and its quality is expressed by the
following Genitive, as this rose smells of musk.
Again, to recollect is to remind myself of the object of thought; the influence
being regarded as passing from the object to the person. In like manner may
be explained the phrases denoting other mental aflections.

a. Verbs of Sense. (1) dKovw, to hear :

Mark ix. 7 ; Luke ix. 35 : avrov aKoverc, hear him I

John X. 3 : to, Trpo^ara rr\<i <|)wvf]s avrov clkovcl, the sheep hear his voice.

Luke XV. 25 : ^kovctc <ru|jL<|>u)vias ^at x°P"v, he heard music and dancing.

It Avill be seen that this verb is construed with a Genitive either of the
person or the thing. Generally, however, the thing is in the Accusative, as tlic
immediate object (especially \byov, \6yovs, Matt. vii. 24, xiii. 20, etc. ). When
both are expressed together, the thing is in the Accusative, and the person in
the Genitive (Acts i. 4); sometimes with a preposition (2 Cor.xii. 6 Acts x. 22). ;
 : )

§ 249, h.] THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. 209

The Genitive of the thing probably inclines to the partitive sense. Compare
Acts ix. 7, where of Saul's companions it is said, aKovopres ttjs (pcovrjs, hearing the
voice, with chap. xxii. 9, ttjv (pwvriv ovk -rjKovaav, they heard not the voice. They
heard of the voice, i.e., its souml, but not ivhat it said.

(2) 7€vop,ai, to taste :

Luke xiv. 24: ovSets ... yevo-crai fjLov tov Seiin'ov, no 07ie shall taste of
my supper.

Mark ix. 1 ov /x^ ycvo-tovrat Gavdrov,

: shall hij no means taste of death.
So Luke ix. 27; John viii. 52 Heb. ii. ; 9.

In Heb. vi. 4, 5, the Genitive and Accusative are used in successive

clauses, ycvcra/xei/ovg rfjs Swpcds, having tasted of the gift ; yevara/jL^vov^

®€ov pTi|xa, having tasted the tcord of God.^

(3) eiYyavw, to touch:

Heb. xii. 20 : kolv OrjpLov Oiyrj toO 6povs, and even if a beast touch the
mountain. So xi. 28.

\l/r]\a^d(i}, to handle, to touch closely, governs the Accusative (Luke xxiv. 39 ,•

Acts xvii. 27 John i. 1). "A (mount) that might be touched" (Heb. xii. 18),
; 1

where this word is used, does not contradict v. 20, as it simply refers to the
nature of the mountain, paljxiblc or ''material." (See R.V. marg.

h. Verbs expressive of mental aflfections; as desire, caring for,

despising

Acts XX. 33 : dp'yupiov rj xpvtriov tj ijxaTto-|xov ov^€.vo<i iTreOv/xrjcra, I desired

no one^s silver or gold or raiment.

Titus iii. 8 : ha <^/3ovTt^wcrt koXwv ^p^wv, tliat they 7nay be zealous of

{careful to maintain, E..V.) good loorks.

1 Tim. iii. 5 : ttcos €KK\T]<rias ©eov iTnfjieXi^creTaL, hoio shall he take care
of the church of God ?

Heb. xii. 5 : ^xr] oXtywpct TraiSeias Kvptov, do not slight the cliastisement
of the Lord.

^ Mr. Jelf (Kiihner's Greek Grammar) explains the difference simply as a vaiiation
in themode of expression the Accusative calling attention rather to the action,
;

the Genitive to the material, as in English, "He eats some meat" (Gen.); "He
eats meat" (Ace). " 'The gift,' " he
Bengel's view of this passage is more subtle.
says, "can be only partially received in this life; while 'the word' essentially
belongs to us now." But see Alford's note, comparing the Accusative with that
in John ii. 9.
210 THE GENITIVE OF OlilGIN. [§ 249, C.

c. Verbs of remembrance and forgetting

Luke xvii. 32 : fxvrjixoveveTe ttjs "ywaiKos Awt, remember Lofs wife.

Hob. xii. 5 : iKXeXrjo-Oe Tfjs irapaKXTio-ews, j/e have entirely forgotten the
exlLortation.
Many grammarians prefer to class the Genitive after all these verbs
under the head of " Partition." (See § 261, sqq.)

250. Verbs of accusing, condemning, etc., take a Genitive of

the charge, i.e., of the suurce of the accusation.

Acts xix. 40 : eyKaXetcrOaL crTa<r€ws, to be accused of sedition.

The Genitive of the person is used after KarT/yopew, to accuse, lit., " to

assert ai^ainst one."

Matt. xii. 10 : Iva. KaT-qyoprfcrmcnv avrov, that they might accuse him.

251. Adjectives and Verbs signifying plenty, want, fulness, and

by a Genitive of that from which another is
the like, are followed
filled, etc.

John i. 14 : 7rXi]pr]<; xaptTos kol a\r\Q€ias, full of grace and truth.

John xxi. 11 : TO Slktvov ... jx^cttov lx0v«v, the net ...fall of Jishes.

Luke i. 53 : TretvcuvTas iv€7r\r](T€v d-yaOwv, He filled the liuugry with good

things.

John ii. 7 : ye/xtcrare tcls vSptas iiSaros, fill the water-j^ots with water.
Rom. iii. 23: Travre^ . . .va-TepovvraL tt]s 86|t]s tov ®€oZ\ all ...come short
of the glory of God.
James i. 5 : ci rt? vfxiov /Venrerat o-o0ta?, if any of you lacketh icisdom.
This GLMiitive is referred by some to the head of " Separation ;" by others to
" Partition."

II. Separation, or Ablation.

252. Verbs of separation, as those denoting removal, difference,

hindrance, and the like, take a Genitive as the case of their
secondary object. (See § 186.)
Prepositions, however, are more generally inserted.

Acts xxvii. 43 : tKuiA-Do-ei/ avrovq tov povXT||iaTos, he restrained them

from their purpose.

I'ph. ii. 12 : dTrrjXXoTpHjifJiivoL Tr\s iroXndas tov ^lapa-qX, alienated Jrom

the commonwealth of Israel.
 -

§ 253.] THE GENITIVE OF SEPAKATION. 211

1 Tim. i. 6 : <Sv rtve? acrTox'qcravTe';, from which some liaviwj (jonc wide
in aim.^

1 Pet. iv. 1 : TTCTrairrat ajtoprias, he liatli ceased from sin.

253. Under this head may be placed the important rule, that the
object of comparison is expressed by the Genitive, whether after

verbs, or, more usually, after adjectives in the comparative degree.

See on the Comparative, § 320. This Genitive, also, is one of Separation the ;

two things compared being mentally set apart from each other. So in Latin,
the Ablative case is employed.
AVlien tlie word than is expressed in Greek (by the conjunction 17), the thing.s
compared are put in ai3i3osition.

After Verbs implying comparison :

1 Cor. XV. 41 : aa-njp yap do-repos Sia<f>ip€L, for star differeth from star.

The verb diacpepu} often implies superiority.

Matt. X. 31 : woWQv arpovdiuv 5ia<p€peTe vfjieh, ye arc of more value than many
sparrows.
So, vi. 26, xii. 12; Luke xii. 7, 24; Gal. iv. 1, "is no better than a slave."

After Adjectives in the Comparative degree :

John xiii. 16 : ovk €(ttl bovXos fxcL^oiv tov Kvpiov avrov, a servant is not
greater than his master.

John xxi. 15 : dyaTra? fx€ ttXclov tovtwv ; lovest thou me more than
these ?

1 Tim. V. 8 : ea-nv airifrrov ;)(etp(ui/, he is worse than an unbeliever.

The subject of comparison is sometimes repeated by implication in the

object.

Mark iv. 31 ; ixiKponpov ov irdvrwv t«v o-ireppidTCDv, being less than all
the seeds, although itself a seed. So Matt. xiii. 32.

1 Ellicott.
' The Hebrew language yet more clearly identifies comparison and separation, by
its use of the preposition /Vyy// with the simple adjective. Thus, "greater than he"
would be expressed by the phrase, "great from him;" the Hebrews "conceiving
pre-eminence as a taking out, a designating from the multitude" (Gesenius). So in
Homer, ck wclvtuv, inorc fhau all. In modern Greek the preposition airo is ubed after
the comparative.
212 THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. [§ 253.

1 Cor. xiii. 13: /xct^wv he tovtcov y dyaTn;, loue is f/reater than these;
love, nevertheless, being one of the three.

A coini)arative and superlative are combined in Eph. iii. 8, so that the fol-
lowing Genitive may be referred to this rule or to the partitive construction :

€1x61 Tip iXaxi-CTOT^pii} irdvTwv ayiiav, to me, who am less than the least of all saints.

III. Possession.

254. The most frequent use of the Genitive is as the Possessive

case, generally with substantives.
Here also the fundamental meaning of the case as denoting whence is very
apparent. From the notion of origination, by an easy transition, comes that of
possession. Thus, " the sons of Zebedee" may be taken as " the sons begotten
5?/ Zebedee," or "the sons belonging to Zebedee;" "the kingdom of heaven"

may mean " the kingdom set up by heavenly powers," or "the 'kingdom governed
by these powers." So, again, the notion of "belonging to" attaches to the
Genitive where that of " originated by" has disappeared.^

Mark i. 29 rj\6ov ets t-^v olKiav

: Stuwvos koI 'AvSpiov, they came into the
home of Simon and Andrew.
Rom. i. 1 : na{)Aos SoCAos *Iiio-ov Xpto-rov, Pauly a servant of Jesus
Christ.

255. The Genitives of the personal pronouns are mostly employed in

this sense instead of the possessive adjectival forms. So, rj Ovydrrjp |iov,

mi/ daughter; ol fiaO-qTol avrov, his disciples. (See § 333.)

256. Words denoting kindred, etc., are often omitted before a

Possessive Genitive, especially when they would stand in apposition
with a proper name. Sometimes the Ai'ticle of the omitted noun is

inserted. (See §§ 194, 196.)

1. vios. Matt. iv. 21 : 'laKwySov t6v tov ZeySeSatov, James the {son) of
Zebedee.
John vi. 71: tov 'lovhav ^t/xwi/os, {the) Judas {son) of Simon.
John xxi. 15, 16, 17 : '^lixcdv 'Iwva, Simon {son) of Jonas.

2. iraTTjp. Acts vii. 16 : 'Efxfxop rov ^i^x^V' ^f ^«^'^^^' ^^^^ {fathei') of

Shechem.

1 Compare Mliller's " Lectures on the Science of Language," vol. i., p. 105.
 —

g 258.] THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 213

3. |i^rr]p. Luke xxiv. 10 : Mapta r] ^IaK0)j3ov, Mary the {mother) of

James. So Mark xv. 47, xvi. 1.

4. d8cX(j>os.Luke vi. 16 ; Acts i. 13 : 'lovSa? 'laKM/Sov, Judafi (the

brother) of James (See Jude 1).

5. -yvW). Matt. i. 6 : e/c Trj<i rov Ovpcov, from the (wife) of Uriah. So
John xix. 25.

6. oI'k€ioi. 1 Cor. i. 11 : viro tu)v XXot/?, by the (kinsfolk) of ChJoe.

7. oTkos or 8a)|j.a. Mark v. 35 : a-Tro rov dpxf-o-vvaywyov, from (the house)

of the ruler of the sijnayogue. This is clear, as the ruler Avas himself
with Jesus. So, perhaps, John xviii. 28.

Acts ii. 27, 31 : ct? aZov} "thou wilt not abandon my soul" to (the
habitations) of Hades — a classical phrase ; or, " to (the power) of the
unseen world." In Ps. xvi. 10 some copies of the LXX. read aSov,
others a^Y}v.
In Luke ii. 49, h
roh rov irarpos fiov has been variously read, in my Father's
business (A.V.), or in my Father s house (R.V.) (plural, as in John xix. 27, ra
tdia). The former gives the wider significance " among my Father's matters" :

(Alford). So all the versions of the English Hexapla, Luther, De Wette.

257. Attribute or quality is often expressed by the Possessive

Genitive of an abstract substantive.

In such cases the person or thing is spoken of as belonging to the virtue, vice,
or other abstraction. The phrase may often be idiomatically rendered by turning
the Genitive into an adjective. Thus, Luke xvi. 8, rov oIkovoixov rijs ddiKias, the
steward of injustice, may be read the unjust steward. But such renderings lose
the force of the original.

Rom. i. 26 : Tra^r; artjifas, lusts of dishonour.

Heb. ix. 10 : Stxatw/xara o-apK<$s, ordinances of flesh.
James i. 25 : d/cpoar^s liriXTio-p.ovTis, a hearer of forgetfulness^ " a forgetful
hearer."

James ii. 4 : KpiraX 8iaXo"yi(r|iwv Tro\y\p(aVi J2idges of evil thoughts^ " evil-
thinking judges."

258. To the strictly Possessive Genitive belong several phrases which

have been otherwise interpreted

^ W. H. read aS-qv.
214 THE rOSSESSIVK GENITIVE. [§ 258.

2 Cor. iv. 6 t^s yviba-eui ttjs do^Tjs rod Qeov, of the knowledge of the glory of
:

God, i.e., the glory Avhich belongs to God, and which He reveals in Christ; not,
certainly, '*
the glorious God."
Eph. i. 6 : els ^iraivov So^rjs riji x^P^"^^^ airrov, to the praise of the glory of His
grace, i.e., the glory which characterises Divine grace; not "glorious praise" or
** glorious grace."
Col. i. 11 : Kara to Kparos ttjs 86^r]s, according to the might of His glory (R.\.);
"not 'His glorious power' (A.V,, Beza, etc.), hut 'the power which is the
peculiar characteristic of His glory' ; the Genitive belonging to the category of
the Possessive Genitive" (EUicott).
i. 3: tw p-Zj/xan rrjs dvydfxeojs ain-ov, by the word of His power ; belonging
Heb.
to as its true utterance, " not," says Alford, " to be weakened into the com-
it,
"
paratively unmeaning 'by His powerful word.'
See also Rom. vii. 24 ; Col. i. 13 ; Rev. iii. 10.

259. The Genitive is occasionally used by way of apposition, as if

with some such ellipsis as contiinting of, or bearing the name of. Com-
pare the English idiom, the city of Jemsaleniy where Jerusalem is the
city.

This rule is an exception to the ordinary construction. The usual idiom in

Greek is the city, Jerusalem.

2 Pet. ii, 6 : ir^Xeis 21o8o|x«v Kal Fojiidppas, {the) cities of Sortom anrf
Gomorrah.
John ii. 21 : Trept tov vaov tov otwimitos avrov, concerning the temple of
his body.

Rom. iv. 11: <rTi}i€iov cXa^c ircpirofjLijs,^ he received the sign of circum-
cision . So Acts iv. 22.
2 Cor. V. 1 : Tj oUCa tov o-ki^vovs, the house of our tabernacle,

2 Cor. V. 5 : rhv appapwva tov irvcvfiaTos, the earnest of the Spirit. So

chap. i. 22. Compare Rom. viii. 23.-

See also Eph. vi. 14-16 ; Heb. vi. 1 ; and many other passages.
The difficult phrase, Eph. iv. 9, cts to. Karurrepa /x^pi} ttjs yrjs, has by many
interpreters been regarded as an instance of the Genitive of Apposition ;
" to
the lower earth," "to earth beneath," contrasted with such phrases as "the
height of heaven" (Isa. xiv. 14). See Bishop Ellicott's note, in which the
opposite view (the descent into Hades) is maintained.

^ W. H. marg. irepLTOfx-qv.
- "The Hrstfruits (of our inheritance) consisting of the Holy Spirit" (Dr. Vaughau
on Rom. viii. 23. So Winer.).
 J — — — — —

§ 2 6 2. THE PARTITIVE riENITIVE. 215

Position of the Genitive.

260. «• The Genitive is usually jjlaced after the governing noun.

"When both nouns have the Article, each is usually preceded by its own. In
classic Greek the Article of the governing noun usually stands first in the
phrase then the governed Article and Genitive
; and lastly, the governing ;

noun. This arrangement is very rarely followed in the New Testament 1 Pet. :

iii. 20, 7] Tov Qeov fxaKpodv/jua, tlie longsuffering of God; Heb. xii. 2, rbv r^s
iriareus apxfiyov, the author of the faith. Occasionally the Article of the
governing noun is rejjcated before the Genitive ; also a classic idiom : 1 Cor.
i. 18, 6 X670S 6 TOV ffravpoO, the doctrine of the Cross. For another arrangement,
see § 196.

b. But the Genitive precedes

1. When one Genitive belongs to more than one substantive
Acts iii. 7 : avrov ai ^daeis /cat to. a<pvpd, his feet arid ankle-hones.

2. "When the word in the Genitive is emphatic. The emphasis may

arise

(a) From antithesis

Phil. ii. 25 : rbv (TvaTpaTnarqv fiov, v/xuiv 8e aTroffToXov , my fellow -soldier,

hit your messenger. See also Eph. vi. 9 ; Heb. vii. 22, etc.

(ft) From the Genitive containing the principal notion

Rom. xi. 13 edv<2v dirb<XTo\os, of : the Gentiles an apostle. See also 1 Cor.

iii. 9 ; Titus i. 7 ; James i. 26, etc.

In Heb. vi. 2, §airTL(Tp.(2v bibaxv^^ it has been questioned which word is the
governing one, doctrine of baptisms, ov baptisms of doctrine. Winer favours the
latter (Grammar, § xxx. 3, note 4).

lY. Partition.

261. Closely connected with the fundamental notion of the

Genitive is that of participation. The part is taken from the whole.
1 Pet. i. 1 : cVAcKTot? Trape-mSi^/xoL^ Siao^opds, to elect sojourners of {the)
dispersion.

Matt. XV. 24 : Ttt Trpo^ara to. aTroXwAoTa oikov 'IcrpaTyA, the lost sheep of
the house of Israel.

262. This Genitive most commonly fonnd after (1) partitive adjec-
is

tives, (2) the indefinite and interrogative pronouns, (3) the numerals, and
(4) adjectiATs in the superlative degree.

^ W. H. and R.V. marg. read didaxW'

216 THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. [§ 262.

1. Partitive Adjectives :

Matt. iii. 7 : ttoXXov? t«v 4>api(raL(»)v kol 2a88ovKai«v, many of the Pha-
risees and Sadducees.
Luke xix. 8 : ra rjixLo-r] t«v virapxovTcov, the half (halves) of my goods.

Acts xvii. 12 : dv8pwv ovk oXtyoi, of men not afeu\

Matt. XV. 37 : to Trepia-a-ivov twv KXao-fxdTwv, the remaining [part) of the
hrol'en pieces.

2. Pronouns
Matt. ix. 3 : Ttve? t«v YpafifAar^wv, some of the Scribes.

Acts V. 15 : eTna-Kidcrr) tlvI avrcSv, might overshadoio some one of them.

Luke X. 36 : rU tovtwv ; ^oho of these?

3. Numerals — Cardinal, Ordinal, Negative :

Matt. V. 29 : tv twv jjlcXwv ctov, one of thy members.

Acts X. 7 : <j>o)vi^Gras Svo T«v oiK€T«v, having called two of his house-
servants.

Kev. viii. 7 : to Tpirov rr\s yf\9, the third of the land. So vers. 8-18.
Mark xi. 2 : ot-Set? dvOpwirwv, lit., no one of men.
But the preposition eV is more frequently used after numeral adjectives.

4. Superlatives :

1 Cor. XV. 9 : 6 IXdxtcrTo^; twv diroo-ToXwv, the least of the apostles.

263. Verbs of partaking are followed by a Genitive.

1 Cor. x. 21 : Tpair^t^s Kvptov /xeTe'xctv, to partake of the table of the
Lord. Once this verb is found with Ik, ver. 17.

Heb. ii. 14 : to. TratSt'a KeKOLv^vrjKev alijiaTos kol (rapKos, tJie children are
partakers of flesh and blood. This verb is found also with a Dative
Rom. XV. 27 ; 1 Tim. v. 22 ; 1 Pet. iv. 13 ; 2 John 11.

Heb. xii. 10 : /xcTaXa^eti/ ttjs ol^iottitos avrov, to partake his holiness.

264. So also verbs which signify to take hold of, to attain,

when a part is implied.
Luke XX. 35 : tov alwvos Udvov rvx^'iv^ to attain that world.

Luke viii. 54 : KpaTrja-a^ tt]s x^'-P^s avrrjs, having taken hold of her
hand.
The strictly partitive sense is well illustrated by this verb. When the ivhole
is grasped, Kpariw takes an Accusative, as in Matt. xiv. 3, etc.
 —

§ 267.] THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 217

Some verbs Middle voice by a parti-

of this class are followed in the
tive Genitive, whereas in the Active they would take an Accusative.

Matt. vi. 24 : Ivos av^e^erat, he will cleave to the one.

Matt. xiv. 31 : iireXdISeTo avrov, he took hold of him.

For the force of the Middle, see § 355. "Holding one's self by the given
object" is implied.

265. Adverbs of time and numeral adverbs are followed by a

partitive Genitive.

Matt, xxviii. 1 : oij/e 8e o-appdrwy, and at the end of the Sabbath.

Heb. ix. 7 : aTra^ tov cviavrov, once in the year.

So Luke xvii. 4, xviii. 12. Compare the English colloquialism, late of an

evening.

266. Certain Genitive phrases are used, in the partitive sense,

to denote time or place.

So Matt. ii. 14: wktos, by night; Luke xviii. 7: rijicpas koI vvktos,
day and night; Gal. vi. 17: tov Xonrov, /o?^ the rest (future); Luke
V. 19 iroCos (oSov) elcrcveyKoja-Lv avrov, by ichat {icay) they might bring
:

him in.
Prepositions are, however, more generally employed to define these relations.

267. The verb to be is often followed by a Genitive in the

partitive sense.

Heb. X. 39 : i^/xets Se ovk iafxkv viroo^oXfjs . . . dWa ttiotcws, but toe are
not of a desertion (literally), but of faith.

Kom. ix. 9 : lirayycXias yap 6 Xoyos ovro?, for this loord was one of
promise.

The Genitive in this connection may, however, have other significations, as,
e.g., that of Possession
1 Cor. iii. 21 : Trdura v/jlup ia-riv, all things are ymirs.

1 Cor. vi, 19 : ovk eare eavrcSv, ye are not your oivn.

In general, the verb to he, followed by a Genitive, implies an ellipsis, such as

^rt, characte7'istic, property, etc.
 218 THE OBJECTR^E GENITIVE. [§ 208.

V. Ohjed.

268. The Genitive case is often objectively employed, ^ that is, it

expresses the object of some feeling or action, and may be ronderecj

by various prepositions, as below.

The fundamental meaning of the Genitive is here also very apparent, tlie
object of a sentiment heing, in another view of it, the source or occasion of its
existence. Thus, ^x^'''^ iriaTiv Qeov (]\[avk xi. 22), have faith in {or toivards)
(rod, really means, "have such faith as his character excites." Compare
Col. ii. 12

Luke vi. 12 : iv t-^ 'irpo(r€vxxi tov 0€ov, in prayer to God.'^

John ii. 17: 6 X,r^o<i tov oI'kov (tov, the zeal concerning thy house. Com-
pare Titus ii. 14.

John xvii. 2 : c^ovo-Cav irdo-rjs o-apKos, power over all flesh. For similar
constructions of c^ovo-ia, see Matt. x. 1 ; Mark vi. 7 ; 1 Cor. ix. 12.

Acts iv. 9 : cTTt €v€p7€<ria dv9p«Trov ao-Ocvovs, as to the benefit conferred

on an impotent man.
Heb. xi. 26 : tov 6v€t8i<r|xbv tov Xpio-Tov, the reproach in connection
with the Christ (as the hope of Israel).

1 Pet. ii. 19 : 8ta o-vv€£8t]o-iv 0€ov, on account of conscience toward God.

Eom. X. 2 : yf^ov 0€ov Ixouo-tv, they have a zeal toward God.
2 Cor. X. 5 : €ts tt|v viraKo^v tov Xpio-Tov, fo the ohedience rendered to
Christ. But viraKo-fj irio-Tcws, Rom. i. 5, is ohedience springing ivom. faith.

Col. ii. 18: 0pT]o-K€£a twv dyycXwv, worship paid to anrjels. (See Ellicott,
in loc.)

269. Some phrases are susceptible of either a possessive (attri-

butive, subjective) or an objective signification. Thus, rj dYdirT) GcoC,
the love of God, may mean, the love which Cod possesses as His attri-
bute, that which He bears to us, or that which is borne towards Him.
A few important passages may be subjoined by way of illusti'ation.

^ Compare Angus's " Handbook of the English Tongue," § 384.

- Some, less naturally, interpret the phrase, in the idacc of jyraycr to God, com-
])aring tlie passage v.ith Acts xvi. 13: "where we supposed there was a place of
prayer.'' (R.V., reading tvofxi^oix^v trpocrevxw "''"' with AV. II. The A.V. has
" where prayer was wont to be made," ivo/xi^ero wpoaevxv ehai).
 — —

§ 270.] THE OBJECTIVE GENITIVE. 219

Passages with aydxr} and a siihjective Genitive

2 Cor. xiii, 11 : the love of God ...be v.-ith you.

Rom. viii. 35 : what shall separate us from the love of Christ ? So ver. 39.

Eph. iii. 19 : to know the love of Christ, which passeth knowledge.

2 Cor. V. 14 : the love of Christ constraineth us. Not our love to Christ,
but His love to us.

In the following the Genitive seems objectively used

John v. 42 : ye have not the love of God in you. So 1 John ii. 15.

1 John ii. 5 : in him hath the love of God been perfected.

2 Thess. iii. 5 : the Lord direct your hearts into the love of God.

In Rom. v. 5, "the love of God hath been shed abroad in our hearts," Dr.
Vaughan WTites of the subjective and objective interpretations, that tlie two
ideas may be included. See 1 Jolin iv. 16, v. 3 :
" the two are but ojiposite
aspects of the same love the sense of God's love
; is not the cause only, but the
essence of ours. 1 John iv. 19."

2 Cor. V. 11 : eiboTes tov <f>b^ov tov Kvpiov, TcTWwing the fear of th^ Lord (R.A".),
generally taken as subjective, as A.V., "the terror of the Lord," belonging to
Him as Judge but everywhere else the phrase is objective fear, i.e., reverence
; —
towards Him. So Alford renders here, conscimis of the fear of the Lord but ;

doubtfully. For other passages, see Acts ix. 31 Rom. iii, 18 2 Cor. vii. 1 ; ; ;

Kph. V. 21.

YI. Relation.

270. Closely connected with the objective use of the Genitive

are cases where a more general relation is signified; some sucli
prepositional phrase as in respect of being applicable, while the context
shows the kind of relation intended.
This general way of expressing relation is often not so much ambiguous as com-
prehensive. Thus, in the frequent phrase, to evayyiXiov tov Xpiarov, the Gosjyel
of Christ, it is needless to ask whether the meaning be the Gos2)el from Christ
as its author,^ about Christ as its subject,- or in the prerogative of Christ as its
administrator.^ Each of these thoughts is but one element in the analysis of
the phrase.

Mark i. 4 : pdTma-fxa ficTavotas, a baptism which had reference to

repentance.

^ So the Gospel of God, Rom. i. 1, etc.

^ Compare the phrase, Gospel of the Kiiujdom, Matt. iv. 23. ix. 3.').

^ In the language of the Apostle Paul, my Gospel is evidently the Gospel entrusted
to and ^n-eadifd by me (Roi.u, ii. 16 ; xvi. 2.5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 8).
220 THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. [§ 270.

John V. 29 : dvacrrao-tv X<af\s ... dvacTTacnv Kplo-cws, resurrection in order

to life ... in order to condemnation.
John vii. 35 t^v Stao-Tropav twv : 'EXXi^vwv, the dispersion (of the Jews)
among the Greeks (Gentiles).
Rom. V. 18 : StKatwcrcv Xfiir\% justification in order to life.

Rom. vii. 2 : aTro rev vofjiov rov avSpos, from the law of her husband, i.e.,

that which defines the relation. ^

Rom. viii. 36 : Trpo/Jara o-<j>a7f)s, sheep doomed to slaughter.

Eph. iv. 16 : Sta Trao-T^? acfj^s ttjs lirixopTiYias, through every joint (which
is) for the purpose of the supply. See Ellicott, in loc, who compares
the phrase with ra (TK€vrj Trj<: Acirovpyta?, Heb. ix. 21, the vessels of the
ministering.

Phil. iv. 9 : 6 0eo9 rf^s €ip'/ivT]s, the God who bestows peace ; or perhaps
a Genitive of quality.

In most of these instances a preposition with its case would be an equally

idiomatic usage.

271. The Genitive used after adjectives, as after nouns

is also

(§ 254), to denote various kinds of relation. Examples of this in the

general sense are such as the following :

Heb. V. 1 3 : a-Tretpos Xd-yov StKaioo-wiys, xoithout experience of the word of

righteousness ( R. V. )
Heb. iii. 12 : KapSta Trovrjpa dirio-TCas, a heart loicked in respect to
imbelief (Winer).
James i. 13 : dTretpaa-ro? KaKwv, unversed in things evil (Alford. R.Y.
marg., untried in evil).

272. Adjectives, especially, signifying worthiness, fitness, or

their opposites, take a following Genitive. So also their adverbs.

Matt. iii. 8 : Kapirbv d|iov ttJs [icravoCas, fruit ivorthy of your repentance.
Matt. X. 10 : fi^ios 6 ipydTr]<; Tf]s Tpo<|)f]s avrov, the toorkman is woiihy

of his maintenance.

^ Sec Winer, who quotes Old Testament parallels, Lev. vii. 1, xiv. 2, xv. 32;
Numh vi. 13, 21.
§ 275.] THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. 221

1 Cor. vi. 2 : dva|ioC ecrre Kpti-qpCwv IXayia-TOiv ; are ye unwovtliy of

(incompetent for) the least decisions ?

Rom. xvi. 2 : d|iws tcov a-yiwv, icortliily of the saiiits (R.Y.).

See also Eph. iv. 1 ; Phil. i. 27 ; Col. i. 10 ; 1 Thess. ii. 12 ; 3 John 6.

273. So, in general, price, equivalent, penalty, and the like,

are expressed by the Genitive.

Matt. X. 29 : ov^t ^vo a-Tpovdta d<r<rapiov TrwXetrat ; are not two sparrows
sold for a fartldng ?

Rev. vi. 6 :
x^*-^*^^
(tltov 8Tjvapiov koI rpets x^'^^'-'^c? KpiO<x)v Si^vaptov, a
measure of ivheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny.

274. In a few instances one noun governs two Genitives in different

relations.

Acts V. 32: ijixeh eafiev avrov fxdprvpei tCov p-qixdriav ro&ruu, we are his (jiossess.)
witnesses of (remote obj.), or in respect to, tJiesc things.^

2 Cor. V. 1 : 17 iiriyeLos i]fj,Qv ot/ci'a tov oK-qvovs, our (possess. ) earthly house of
the taherTuicle (appos.).

Phil. ii. 30 : to vjxwv mriprjixa tt}? Xeirovpyia^, your lack in respect of the
service.

2 Pet. iii. 2 : ttjs t<2v diroffroXuv vfju3u evroXris tov Kvpiou, the commandment of
the Lord (orig.), through (remote obj.) your apostles (R.V.). The Text. Rec. has
r]fi(2v, but even then the reading of A, V. is inadmissible.
The two Genitives in John vi. 1, t) daXaaaa ttjs VdXiXaias, r^s TtjSepictSos, are
virtually in apposition, the sea of Galilee (as the Jews call it), of Tiberias (as
the Gentiles), one name denoting the countiy, the other the city. So we might
say, "the Lake of the Four Cantons, of Lucerne."
The dependence of successive Genitives on each other is frequent, as many
foregoing examples will show.

VII. The Genitive Absolute.

275. A Genitive noun, in agreement with a participle expressed

or understood, often occurs in a subordinate sentence absolutely, i.e.,

without immediate dependence on any other words. The noun, in

these cases, is to be translated first, without a preposition, then the

^ But W. H. and Rev. Text omit airroO, VN-ith (iu) ain($ in marg.
222 THE CrEXITIVE ABSOLUTE. [§ 275.

participle. In idiomatic English, a conjunction must often be supplied,

either temporal (iclum), causal {since), or concessive (although).

It will be observed that the Genitive in this construction must refer to some
other than the Subject of the principal sentence.
Etpiivalent idioms are in English the nominative absolute, in Latin the
ablative absolute.

Matt. i. 18 : \i.vr](mvQd<rr]s ... Maptas, Mart/ haviiig been hetr<>thed.

Matt. i. 20 : raOra Se avrov cv0u|j.t]0€'vtos, and he having reflected on these
thing-^, i.e., when he reflected.

Matt. ii. 1 : tov 'Itjo-ov y€vvt]0€'vtos, Jesus liaving been horn, i.e., when
Jesus was born.
^latt. ii. 13 : avax«p'n<rdvT«v h\ avrwv, and they having returned, i.e.,

when they returned.

^latt. xvii. 9 : Karapaivovrwy ovtwv iK tov 6pov<;, they descending from
the mountain, i.e., while they were descending.
Heb. iv. 1 : KaTaX€nro}jL€'vi]s lirayycXias, a promise being (still) left. (See
Alford's note.)

The Genitive Absolute, says Dr. Donaldson, is originally causal, in conformity

with the primary notion of the case. Hence arise, by way of analogy, its other
uses as denoting accessories of time, manner, or circumstance. The tense of
the participle greatly determines the force of the phrase. (See § 393.)

The Dative.

276. In its primary local sense (see ^ 11), the Dative implies
juxtaposition.^ Hence the various modifications of its meaning,
which may be classed as follows :

1. Association. 3. Reference.
2. Transmission. 4. Accessory.

The Dative in a sentence is generally an indirect complement of the

Predicate, or a "remote object." (See § 186.)

^ The Greek Dative is therefore diametrically opposed to the Genitive. 1. The

latter signifies separation, the former proximity. 2. The latter denotes subtraction,
the former addition. 3. The latter expresses comparison of ditl'erent things, the
former equality, or sameness. Dr. Dunaldson.
§ 278, a.] THE DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION. 223

I. Association.

277. (I. Verbs signifying intercourse, companionship, and the

like, are often followed by a Dative.
Matt. ix. 9 : aKoXovdet poi, follow me.
Luke XV. 15 : iKoXXrjOrj kv\ twv ttoXltCjv, he attached himself to one of
the citizens.

Acts xxiv. 26 : w/i-tXet avrw, he convei'sed with him.

Rom. vii. 2 : tivSpl Se'Serat, sJie is hound to her hushajid.

James iv. 8 iyyia-are tw : 06«, /cat cyytcret v|iiv, draw near to Gody and
He will draw near to y(ju.

h. Likeness, fitness, equality, and their opposites, are marked by

a Dative after adjectives, verbs, and participles.

Matt, xxiii. 27 : n-apo/xota^erc Td(j>ois KCKovia^Aevois, ye resemble whited

sepulchres.

Luke xiii. 1 8 : tivi ofxoKtxro) avrrjv ; to what shall I liken it 1

James i. 6 : lotKe kXv8wvi OaXdcra-rjs, he is like a wave of the sea.

Eph. V. 3 : KaOuis Tr/aeVct o-yCois, as it hecometh saijits.

Matt. XX. 12 : icrous avrov? Tjjitv eTrotT/ca?, tltou madest them equal
with itfi.

c. After a substantive verb, the Dative often denotes possession

or property.

Matt, xviii. 12 : eav yivrp-aC tivi avOpwirw cKarov TrpofSara, if a man have
(if there be to any man) a hundred sheep.

Acts viii. 21 : ovk ecrn <roi fnpls ovbk KX.rjpo<s iv tw Xoyw tovt(o, thou
hast 7iot (there is not to thee) paH noi' lot in this matter.

The verb is sometimes omitted after a word of "association."

2 Cor. vi. 14n? yap fxeroxT] SiKaioo-vvT) : /cat avojiC<j ; for wliat fellowship
have ricjhteov^mess and lawlessness ?

11. Transmissicni.

278. a. Verbs of giving, whether active or passive, are followed

by a Dative of the person.
224 THE DATIVE OF TRANSMISSION. [§ 278, a.

After the active verb, the thing (Accusative) is the direct^ the person
(Dative) the indirect object. (See § 186.)

Matt. vii. 6 : /x-^ Score TO aytov tois kvo-i, give not that ivhich is hob/ to
the dogs.

Matt. vii. 7 : atretre, koc hoOrja-eraL v|iiv, ask, and it shall he giveii unto
you.

Rom. i. 11 : tva n /xeraSco ;!(a/3to-/xa vjiiv TrvevfiaTiKOV, that I mag impart

to you some spiritual gift.

Heb. ii, 5 : ov yap dyyeXois vTrera^e rrjv otKOv/xevrjv rrjv /JiikXovcrav, for
not unto angels did he subject the tvorld to come.

The Dative
h. also indicates the receiver of information, tidings,
command.
So in the common \iya vi|iiv, / say unto you.

Matt. xiii. 3 : kkaX-qa-ev avrots TroAAa, he sp)ake many things to them.

1 Cor. V. 9 : €ypa\(/a v\uv iv ttj iTTLo-ToXrj, I ivrote unto you in my letter.

Lnke iv. 18 cvayyeXiVao-^at tttwxois, to preach glad tidings

: to the
poor ; LXX., Isa. Ixi. 1 (also with Accusative, Luke iii. 18, etc.).
Acts i. 2 : ei/T€tXa/Aei/os tois dirocrrdXois, having given commandment to
the apostles.

But KeXcvw, to order, governs the Accusative in the N.T.

c. Words denoting assistance, succour, etc., are followed by a

Dative.
Matt. iv. 1 1 : koI ScrjKovovv avraJ, and they ministered unto him.
Matt. XV. 25 : Ki^pte, /Soi^OeL [loi, Lo7'd, help me!
d. The object of a mental affection, as esteem, anger, worship,
etc., also obedience and faith, is often expressed by a Dative.

The Genitive in a similar connection expresses the source of the feeHng. (See
§249.)
But the construction with prepositions is generally preferred, as giving addi-
and emphasis.
tional precision

Matt. vi. 25 : {xrj /aept/xvare ttj xj/vx^, care not for your life. So T^uke
xii. 22. But with Trcpt, Matt. vi. 28, Luke xii. 26 with vTrep, 1 Cor.
;

xii. 25 ; with Accusative, 1 Cor. vii. 32-34.

 .

§ 279.] THE DATIYE OF TEANSMISSION. 225

Matt. V. 22 : 6 6pyL^6fji€vo<s tw d8€X<}>^, he who is angry with his brother."^

With cTTt, Kev. xii. 17.

Gal. i. 10 : t,r}Tw dvOpcoirois apicTKav ; do I seek to please men ?

Matt. ii. 2 : rjXOofxev Trpoa-Kwrja-ai avrw, ive are come to worship him;
always with Dative in Matt., Mark, and Paul (except Matt. iv. 10, from
LXX.), in other books with Dative or Accusative.

Matt. xxi. 25 : ovk eTrtcrrevcraTc avT<3 ; believed ye him not ? also with
iv and im (Dative), im and els (Accusative).

Acts v. 36, 37 : oo-ot Itt^lOovto avrw, as many as obeyed him.

Rom. X. 16 : ov TrdvTes vTrrJKovcrav tw ivayy^ii?, they did not all obey the
gospel.

III. Reference.

279. The person or thing in respect of whom or which any-

thing is done, whether to benefit or injure,^ or in any other way,
may be expressed by the Dative. This reference may generally be
expressed in English by the preposition for.

Matt. iii. 16 : aveioxOricrav avr^ ot ovpavoi, the heavens were opened for
him.
Matt. xvii. 4 : ttol-qctu) wSe rpcts CKiyvas, col fxtav kol Mwvo-et fxtav kol
'HX£<j /xiav, let me make here three tabernacles, one for thee, and one for
Moses, and one for Elijah.

Rom. vi. 2 : otrtvcs dire^avo/Acv rfj a|iapT£ci, we who died to sin.

2 Cor. V. 1 3 : €lt€ yap iiea-rrjixev, 0c(p, ctre (roxfypovov/JLev, vjiiv, for whether
we were beside ourselves, (it was) for God, whether we are sober, (it is) for
you.

James iii. 18: KapTro? . . , a-Trciperat rots iroiovcriv elprjvrjv, the fruit of
righteousness is sown for them that make peace.
Heb. iv. 9 : apa dTroXeiTreTat (Taf^^aTia-fio'; tw Xaw tov ©eov, there re-

maineth therefore a sabbath rest for the people of God.

Matt, xxiii. 31 : /xaprvpctrc lavTots, ye bear witness against yourselves.
See also James v. 3 ; and compare 1 Cor. iv. 4.

^ The following word «'/c^, witho^it a caiise, should probably be omitted. (W. H.,
Rev. Text.)
' Latin, DatiiMS commodi vel incommodu
226 THE DATIVE OF EEFERENCE. [§ 279.

Rom. vi. 20 : cXev^cpot ^re rjj 8iKato<ri»vT), ye ivere free in regard to

righteousness; not simply "from righteousness," which would have
required the Genitive.
To this use of the Dative may be attributed the phrase, rC lixoX koX
col; what have I to do with thee? lit., what is for me and thee] i.e.,

what have we in common ^ Mark v. 7 (Matt. viii. 29) ; John ii. 4, etc,

IV. Accessory Circumstance.

280. a. The mode of an action is expressed by the Dative.

Acts xi. 23 : TrapcKaXct Travras r^ irpoO^o'ei T7J<s KapStas Trpocr/jtevcti/ to)

KvpLw, he began exhorting all to cleave to the Lord ivith the purpose of the
heart.

1 Cor. X. 30 : ct cyw \6.p\.r\. /xcTexo), if I partake ivith thankfulness.

Phil. i. 18 : iravrl rpoirw, €tT€ irpo()>d(rci, ctrc dXT]0€{a, liLpKno^ KarayyeAXcrai,

in every loay, ivhether in pretence or in truth , Christ is preached.

See also Acts xv. 1 ; 2 Cor. iii. 18 ; Eph. v. 19, etc.

h. A modal Dative sometimes emphatically repeats the notion of

the verb. See an analogous idiom with the Accusative (§ 282), and
with the Predicate Participle (§ 394, 3, d). This Dative may have a
qualifying adjective.
James v. 17 : -irpoa-cvxxj Trpoa-qv^aTo^ he prayed with prayer ^ i.e., he
prayed earnestly.
Mark v. 42 : l^ia-T-qa-av koT-do-ci (JLCYdXt], they wefre astonished ivith a
great astonishment, i.e., were greatly astonished. See also 1 Pet. i. 8.

For other examples, see Matt. x%. 4 ; Luke xxii. 15 ; John iii. 29 ; Acts iv. 17,

V. 28, xxiii. 14.

For modal Datives that have become actual Adverbs, see §§ 126, 399, a.

c. The Dative is used to denote the cause or motive.

Rom. iv. 20 : oi SuKpiOrj rg dirnrrCq, dAA* iviSwafxtoOr) tq iricmi, he hesi-
tated not through unbelief, but ivas strengthened through faith.

Gal. vi. 12 : Iva /xrj t« a-ravpa tov XptcrTov SnoKiovTai, that they may not
be persecuted for the cross of Christ.

1 Pet. iv. 12 : fxr} ^ivit^tcrO^ t^ Iv vplv irupwo-ci, be not surprised (lit.,

"be not as strangers") at the conflagration (which has broken out) among
you,
§ 280, e.] THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. 227

d. The Dative is also the case of the instrument.

Matt. iii. 12 : to Sk axvpov KaraKavcreL irvpl a(r^i<rr(o, but the chaj^ he

will hum with fire unquenchable.
Acts xii. 2 : av^lXf. hi 'Iukw/Sov . . . jwtxaCpij, and he slew James with
(the) sword.

Rom. i. 29 : TmrXrjpoyfJLivovs tkio-tj dSiKCa, iroviipCa, irX€ove|C<j, KaKCq,, being

by all unrighteousness, depravity, greed, malice.
filled (utterly engrossed)
" Filled with" would have required the Genitive. (See § 251.^) Comp.
2 Cor. vii. 4.

Eph. ii. 5, 8 : \6.pvTl ia-re <T€(T(j)(Tfi€voL, by grace ye have been saved. In

Rom. viii. 24, rg yap tXirfSt €(To)97}fjL€v may be rendered, for we were
saved by hope (instrumental), or in this hope (modal).

2 Pet. i. 3 : tov KaXco-avTO? 7]/Ma<; IZCa 8(J|xi "^^^ 0'P*''~n> ^f ^^'^'^ ^'^'^ called
us by his own glory and virtue (R.Y.). The reading is that of Lachmann,
Tischendorf, Rev. Text, andW. H. marg., but the Received Text gives the
same meaning. "To glory and virtue" (A.V.) is manifestly incorrect.
(See Alford's note.)

See further 1 Cor. xv. 10; Eph. i. 13; Titus iii. 7; 1 Pet. i. 18; and many
other passages.

Hence the verb xpaofiai, to use as an instrument, is followed by a

Dative.
2 Cor. iii. 12 : iroXXiJ ira^pT]<r£q, )(pu)fx€6af we employ much boldness.

So Acts xxvii. 3, 17; 1 Cor. ix. 12, 15; 2 Cor. i. 17 ; 1 Tim. i. 8, v. 23. In
1 Cor. vii. 31, the best MSS. (W. H.) read the Accusative, tov Koa/xdv.

e. From denoting the instrument, the Dative sometimes appears to

take the signification of the agent, being used after Passive verbs
where we might expect the more usual vtto with a Genitive (for which
see § 304).

Luke xxiii. 15 : ovSev a^iov Oavdrov icrrl TrcTrpay/xcvov avrw, nothing

worthy of death has been done by him.

2 Cor. xii. 20 : Kayw evpeOC) vjiiv, and I should be found by you. Com-
pare 2 Pet. iii. 14, and Rom. x. 20, from Isa. Ixv. 1, LXX.

* In Eph. iii. 19, cts conveys a different notion again, ^^that ye may be filled up to
all the fulness of God,"
228 THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. [§ 280, e.

Luke xxiv. 35 : ws iyvixicrOrj avrots, how he was known by them. Com-

pare Phil. iv. 5.

The passive Aorist of opdoj, to see {&(p6r)v, see § 103, 4), is generally construed,
with the Dative, as 1 Tim. iii. 16, CocjidT] dyyiXoLs, he toas seen by angels. Here,
however, the notion is rather that of appearing to (Luke xxiv. 34), so that the
Dative is regular. And in some of the other instances a somewhat similar
explanation may be given, as in the last: *'he was made known to them."

In Matt. V. 21, ippWrj rots dpxaiois, the E.V. rightly renders, it toas said
to them of old time, not " by them," as A.V.

/. That in which a quality inheres, *'

the sphere," is expressed
by the Dative.
Matt. V. 3 : ol Trrw^^ot t« irvevjiaTt, the poor in spirit. Ver. 8 : ot KaOapol
TT] KopSla, the pure in heart.
Acts xiv. 8 : dSuVarog rots iroo-iv, impotent in his feet.
1 Cor. vii. 34 : iva y dyta kol a-w^ari Koi irvcvpaTi, that she may be holy
both in body and spirit.

1 Cor. xiv. 20 : fiiq TratSid yivccrde rats <}>p£o-tv dAAa ttJ KaKCa vrjTna^eTe,
be not children in understanding, but be infants in malice (Dative of
mode).
Eph. ii. 3 : -^/xc^a reKva ^va-ii, 6pyrj<Sy we were in nature children of
wrath.
This use of the Dative evidently springs from its original local import. The
"local Dative" is not found in the New Testament, excepting (1) in the phrase

by the loay, or ways, 6d(^, oSols, where the way is regarded as the instrument :
James ii. 25 ; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; and (2) connected with the figiirative use of
iropetJOfMai, irepLiraTiu}, to walk, as Acts ix. 31, xiv. 16 ; 2 Cor. xii. 18, etc.

g. Accessories of time are marked by the Dative, as

(1) A space of time, for.

Acts xiii. 20 ws : 'ino-i TcrpaKoo-Cois kol ttcvH] kovtu, for about four hundred
and fifty years.

See also Luke viii. 29; John ii. 20 Acts viii. 11 Rom. xvi. 25.
; ;

The Accusative is more frequently used. (See § 286 also the Genitive under
;

Std, § 299.)

(2) A point of time, at, on.

Mark vi. 21 : 'HpwST/g rots Y«v6(r£ois avrov Scittvov iiroC-qa-e, Herod on Jiis

birthday made a banquet.

 — .

§ 281, a.] THE ACCUSATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS. 229

Matt. XX. 19 : t^ rpCrrn Ti(ji€p<j iyepdrjarcTaiy on the third day he shall he

raised.

Luke xiv. 3 : ct e^co-rt tw o-appaTw OepaTrevetv ; is it laivful to heal on

the Sabbath ?

The preposition iv is frequently inserted for the same purpose. (See § 295, 7.)
But when only the time within which, not the point of time, is specified, the
Genitive is used. (See § 266.)

The Accusative.

281. The Accusative primarily denotes towards whichthat

motion is directed. Hence its use to complete the notion of the
Predicate.!
The Accusative expresses the immediate Object of a transitive verb.
Matt, i V. 21: elSev dXXovs 8vo d8€\({>ovs . . . kol iKaXea-ev avTovs, he saw
othe^' tivo brothers . . and he called them (transitive active).

Acts i. 18 : iKT-^a-aro x^p^ov, he purchased afield (transitive deponent).

a. It should be noted that some English are verbs which in
intransitive, i.e., complete in themselves as predicates, and which extend
their meaning by the use of prepositions, are transitive in Greek, and
therefore require an Accusative to complete their meaning.

Thus, English :
" whosoever shall be ashamed of me and of my words."
Greek : os lav iTrato-xwOrj |Ji€ koI tovs ejiovs Xo-yovs (Mark viii. 38). See
also Rom. i. 16 ; 2 Tim. i. 8.

Acts xiv. 21 : evayyeXLcrdix^voi re tt|v iroXiv €K€tvT]V, Koi fjLaOrjrevcravTeg

iKavovs, having both preached the Gospel in that city and made many
disciples, lit., "having evangelised that city anddiscipled many."
The two verbs in this passage, however, with some others, vary in their use.
(See Vocabulary.)

^ "The Accusative," says Dr. Donaldson, ''has the following applications in

Greek Syntax :— It denotes {a) motion to an object {h) distance in space (c) duration ; ;

in time {d) the immediate object of a transitive verb; (e) the more remote object of
;

any verb, whether it has another Accusative or not (/) the Accusative of cognate ;

signification, i.e., the secondary predication by way of emphasis of that which is

already predicated by the verb itself {g) an apposition to the object of the whole ;

sentence; {h) the subject of the objective sentence, when this is expressed in the
infinitive mood." Greek Ch-ammar, p. 497.
230 ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. [§ 281, b.

h. Generally, the employment of the same verb in different places

as transitive and neuter may be explained by change of meaning, or a
variation in emphasis.

So 1 Cor. vi. 18 : ^cuycre t^v tropvilav, flee fornication, avoid it.

1 Cor. X. 14 : ^cvyerc airb Tr\s clScoXoXarpeCas, flee from idolatry, make

good your escape from it.

Matt. X. 28 : /xr] <f)o(3r)6rJT€ dirb twv diroKTCivovrwv to criojia, k.t.X. . .

(f>oft€Lcr$€ Se jxaWov tov 8wd|i€vov, k.t.X., be not afraid of those ivho kill
the body . . . but the rather fear him who is able, etc.

c. Some verbs, denoting the exercise of a faculty, may be read either

transitively or intransitively, according to the nature of the expression.
So in English we may say, " / see," or " I see you."

Matt. vi. 4 : 6 pXiiroiv iv tw Kpv7m2, he that seeth in secret.

Matt. vii. 3 : tC 8e ^AeVets to Kdp<j)os ; but why seest thou the splinter ?

Mark iv. 24 : ^XiireTe tl aKouerc, look to (take heed) what ye hear.

In Mark viii. 15, xii. 38, /SAeVcTc d-n-o — lit., ''look away from"
signifies beware of But in Phil.
2, /SXi-rreTe tovs kvvus, k.t.X., literally iii.

signifies "Zoo^ to the dogs, look to the evil-workers, look to the concision;"
caution being implied.^

d. The immediate Object is omitted after certain verbs, which are

nevertheless strictly transitive ; as Trpoa-exin, to apply (add tov vovv, the

mind), to give heed.

Luke xvii. 3 : '7rpo<r€X€T€ eavrot?, give heed to yourselves.

With diro, to beivare of, lit., to give heed (so as to turn) from. Matt,
vii. 1 5 : irpo<r€'x€T€ dirb t^v xl/€vSo7rpo<f)T]Tii)v, beware of the false prophets.

Other verbs similarly used are eTrix<^ (add rbv vovv), to observe, Luke xiv. 7
Acts iii. 5 ; dtarpi^o} (add rbv xp^vov), to sojourn^ Acts xv. 35 ; iTriTidrifit (add
rds x^^P^^)) ^0 attack, Acts xviii. 10.

282. Any verb, whether transitive or intransitive, may extend its

meaning by Accusative." a " cognate

This Accusative is always
connected with the verb in signification, often in etymology.

1 Ellicott.
 —

§ 284.J ACCUSATIVE OF DEFINITION. 231

For a similar use of the Dative, see § 280, 6 ; and of the Participle,

§ 394, 3, d.

Matt. ii. 10 : exdpyjcrav xapdv jirydXiiv, lit., ihcy rejoiced a great joy, i.e.,

" rejoiced greatly."

Luke ii. 8 : (f>v\a.(r(rovT€<; 4>vXaKds t^5 vvktos, lit., icatcliing the icatches

of the night, i.e., keeping watch by night.

Col. ii. 19 : av^a t^v a<5|Ti<riv rov ©eov, incveoseth the increase of God,
i.e., yields the increase given by God.
See also John vii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 14, etc.

Eph. iv. 8 : ^Jx/^aAcoTevo-ev alxjioXwo-tav, he led captive a captivity, i.e.,

a train of captives. Ps. Ixviii. 18.^

283. An Accusative is often used by way of more exact defini-

tion of the Predicate.^

John vi. 10 : dvcTrcaav ol avSpe?, tov dpiOjibv ws Tr€.vTaKia")(LXioi, the men

sat doiun, in number about jive tho2Lsand.

Phil. i. 11 : TreTrXrjpwfjievoi Kapirbv StKaiocrvvrys, jUIed U'ith the fruit of

righteousness. So Col. i. 9. Compare under Genitive, § 251, and Dative,
§ 280, d. The Accusative strictly denotes the respect in which fulness is

attained.

More generally, however, the Dative of accessory circumstance, § 280,

is employed. In Acts xviii. 3, " by their occupation they were tent-
makers," W. H. and Kev. Text read tq Te'xvn, the Eeceived Text tvv
T€)(yr]v.

284. Many transitive verbs may have two objects, and be,
therefore, followed by two Accusatives ;
generally of a person (" the

^ This passage is rather an instance of a cognate external object, the abstract noun
representing a multitude (Numb. xxxi. 12, LXX., "they brought the captivity").
So Ostervald's translation, **il a mene captive une grande multitude de captives ;"
and De "Wette's, "er fiihrte Gefangene."
2 This Accusative is often said to be governed by kutol, in respect of, understood.
"It is only a variety of the cognate Accusative. It defines more exactly the act or
state described by a verb or adjective by referring it to a particular object, or part
affected. It is the Accusative of an equivalent notion the part wherein the act or —
state consists." Dr. Jacob.
232 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 284.

external object") and a thing (" the internal object"). So verbs of asking",
teaching, clothing and unclothing, anointing, with many others.
This Accusative of the " internal object" is analogous to the cognate accus.
(See §282.)

Matt. vii. 9 : 8v atTT^o-ct 6 vtos avrov dprov, ivliom Ms son shall ask for
a loaf. (Occasionally the person with the prepp. Trapa, aTrd.)
John yiv. 26 cKctvos vp-ds StSa^ei iravTa, he
: will teach you all things.
(Once with Dative of person, Rev. ii. 14.)
Mark xv. 17 : Ivhi^va-Kovcnv avrbv 'irop<})xipav, theij clothe him in purple.
(The preposition ev sometimes found, as Matt. xi. 8.)

Heb. i. 9 :
<ixP^(T€ ore . . . 'A.atov dyaAAtacrco)?, he anointed thee with the
oil of gladness^ Ps. xlv. 8, LXX. (But the Dative of material is some-
times used, Acts X. 38, and with a\€C<|>« always.)
The Passive retains the Accusative of "the internal object."
Luke xvi. 19: evedidvaKeTo iropcp^pav /cat ^ijaaov, he was clothed with jpurple
and fine linen.

Acts xxviii. 20 : tt]v a\vcri.v ra^Tr]v irepiK€i/Mai, I am hound with this chain.
(See Heb. V. 2.)
2 Thess. ii. 15: Kparelre rds Trapadoaeis 8ls edLdaxOv'^, holdfast the instriictions
which ye ivere taught.

1 Tim. vi. 5 : ducpdap/xiuuv dpOpibwuv rhv vovp, of men corrupted in mind.

The same remark applies to verbs which in the Active express "the remoter
object" by the Dative.
1 Cor. ix. 17: oUovofjilav ireTr'KTTevfj.ai, I have been entrusted with a stewardship.
So Rom. iii. 2; Gal. ii. 7; 1 Thess. ii. 4; 2 Thess. i. 10; 1 Tim. i. 11.

285. The Subject of an Infinitive Verb is put in the Accusative.

In translation, the Infinitive is generally to be rendered as a finite
verb, and the Accusative as the nominative, with the conjunction that
prefixed.
For the Infinitive, see § 387. It is really a verbal noun, and is used
to complete the predication. The Accusative thus becomes an Accusative
of definition! (§ 283).

1 Tim. ii. 8: /SovXo/xaL . ."I wish for... a praying;"

. trpoa-ivxia-Oai,

fSovko/xat TTpocTivxiarQai tovs dvSpas, " I wish for a prayhig on the part of
men," / wish men to pray.

^ Compare Dr. Donaldson's Grammar, § 584.

 — — .

§ 287.] THE ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 233

Luke xxiv. 23 : ot Xiyovo-iv avrbv t^v, ivJio say that he is alive.

Acts xiv. 19 : I'o/xiJovTes avrbv T€0vi]K€vat, thinking that he luas dead.

1 Cor. vii. 10, 11 : Trapayye'AAtu . . . yuvaiKa (ztto dvSpos jJi-q \<>ipia^r\vo.\. . .

Koi &v8pa yvvalKa /jltj d<J>t€vai,, / enjoin that a wife should not he separated
from her husband, and that a man should -not put away his wife.
Luke i. 74 rov Sov vat rjfuv
: pvo-Gevras, . . . Xarpevciv avrco, to grant unto US
that ice being delivered (ii|xas implied in pvcrOevras) should serve him.

When the Subject of the Infinitive and of the principal verb is

the same, it is not repeated except for emphasis, and adjectives,
etc., in agreement with it are put in the nominative case.
Eom. XV. 24 : eXTri^w Stairopcvop.cvos 0€d(racr0at v/xa?, / hope that wlien I
pass through I shall see you. See also 2 Cor. x. 2.

But Phil. iii. 13: cyw cp-avrbv ov Xoyt^o/xat KaT6i\T](|>€vai, / do uot reckofh
that I myself have attained. So Kom. ii. 19; Luke xx. 20.
When the Infinitive is substantivised (see § 201) by the Article, the relations
expressed by the Genitive after nouns are denoted by the Accusative.
Inf. gen., Acts xxiii. 15 : irpb tov eyyiiJaL avrbv ^ before his approach.
Inf. dat.. Matt. xiii. 4: h ti^ a-rreipeiv avrbv, in his solving. So xxvii. 12,
Inf. ace. , Matt. xxvi. 32 : /aerd to iyepdrjval fie, after I am raised.

286. Relations of space and time are denoted by the Accusative.

a. Space. —Luke xxii. 41 : aTreairacrOr] (xtt' avToiV wcrel XlOov PoXtjv, he
withdrew from them about a stone's cast.

John vi. 19 : iX-qXaKOTes ovv ws crraStovs cI'koo-i Trivn y rpiaKOvra, having

therefore rowed about twenty five or thirty stadia.

h. Time. — (1) An (approximate) point of time

Acts X. 3: €tSev wo-et wpav evvdn^v, he saw, about the ninth hour,
. . .

W. H. read Trepi, which is the more usual construction. But see John
iv. 52 ; Kev. iii. 3.

(2) Duration of time

Luke XV. 29 : roo-avra iTr\ ^ovXevui cot, SO many years am I serving
thee.
See also Matt. xx. 6; John i. 40, ii. 12, v. 5, xi. 6; Acts xiii. 21, etc.

287. The Accusative is sometimes found in elliptical or apparently

irregular constructions.
234 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. [§ 287.

Matt. iv. 15: 65bv dd\aa-<xijs, the way of the sea, stands apparently without
government. The regimen is to be sought in its Old Testament connection,
Isa. ix. 1, from which it is a citation. ^

Luke xxiv. 47 ap^afievov a-rrb 'lepova-aXrifi, beginning at (from) Jerusalem, the

:

Accusative neuter participle in apposition with the objective sentence. (W. H.

and Rev. Text read dp^dfievoL.)
Acts xxvi. 3: yvdxrTvv 6pTa ae, The Accusatives here seem to stand
k.t.X.
without any dependence. A verb probably to be understood from TJo^/iat, in
is

the preceding verse : especially as I regard thee as being acqiminted, etc.

Rom. viii. t6 dduvarov rov vbfiov, the impossibility of the law.

3 : The phrase
is either (1) a nominative absolute (nominativus pendens) (see § 242) (2) Accu- ;

sative, in apposition to the object of the sentence, ^ or governed by iirolrjaev

understood; or (3) an anacolouthon (§ 412, d.)
1 Tim. ii. 6 : to iJ.apTijpi.ov KuipoTs idiots, the testimony to be set forth in its own
seasons, an Accusative, perhaps, in apposition with the preceding sentence.^

ON THE CASES AS USED WITH PREPOSITIONS.

288. Prepositions, as already stated (§ 118), govern the Genitive,
Dative, or Accusative, and are auxiliary to the significance of these J
cases.

Sometimes a preposition is simply emphatic, i.e., it is used where the case

alone would have expressed the same meaning, although with less force. More
frequently, however, it denotes a relation which the case of itself would be
insufficient to specify.

Two points must be considered in relation to the prepositions first, :

theirown original force and secondly, the significance of the case or

;

cases to which they are severally applied.

—
Thus, Trapd is beside, denoting with the Genitive, fr'om (from beside)
with the Dative, at or near (by the side of); with the Accusative, towards
or along (to or along the side of). From these meanings, again, others
through the application of physical analogies to mental relations.
arise
Some prepositions from their meaning can govern only one case, as €/c,
out o/(Gen.); Iv, in (Dat.); cts, into (Ace). Others may govern two, as

^ "We often make similar quotations almost unconsciously: e.g., " Christ and Him *

crucified' is the theme of the faithful minister." Him in that sentence appears
plainly ungrammatical until we turn to the connection, 1 Cor. ii. 2.
^ Webster.
' Ellicott. The difficulty here is that the preceding sentence is not objective. It
would seem better to take the Accusative as more directly dependent on Soi/s.
 — —

§ 290.] PREPOSITIONS. 235

implying different directions of motion, "but excluding the idea of rest, as

Kara,dowmoards; with the Gen., doion from; with the Ace, down upon.
Others are found with all three cases.
Every preposition probably denoted at first a relation of place. (See
the scheme in § 124.) Hence by an easy transition their reference to
time^ and their use for purely mental relations. It will be seen in the
following sections that most prepositions have this threefold use.

289. Certain prepositions are very nearly allied in some of their

significations. Hence it may be a matter of indifi'erence which is
employed, the same circumstance being regarded from slightly different
points of view. Thus it might be said of a commission given to a
servant, that the, act was executed hy him or through him. It will be
seen, however, that there exists a real distinction in the notions, although
they meet in one transaction. We could not, for instance, infer that the
words through and hy were synonymous, or that one was used for, or
interchanged with, the other. Such mistakes, however, have often been
made in New Testament criticism ; and it is especially necessary, even
where these important parts of speech appear most nearly alike in
meaning, to observe their real distinction. (See further, § 308.)

290. No mistake is so common with learners as that of supposing that the

words of one language must correspond individually to those of another. The
fact is, that every word, as it were, fences off a particular enclosure from the
great domain of thought and each language has its own method of division.
;

The ways in which the English and the Greek, for example, have mapped out
the vast territory do not mutually correspond. Perhaps, therefore, no one word
of the former claims a province that has its precise counterpart in the latter. Or,
to adopt another illustration, the words of two languages do not run in equal
parallel lines, thus :

G.
E.

Were it so, translation would be easy work. Rather may they be represented
thus:

G.
E.

where in each language there are words that overlap those of the other, some-
times containing more meaning, sometimes less*; and a single word in one often
including the significance or part of the significance of two or three in the other.
236 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 290.

Table of Pkepositions.
One Case. Two Cases. Three Cases.
avTi,,OVER AGAINST \ 8ld, THROUGH ^ eirC, UPON \Gen.
dird, FROM (exterior) I Kara, down irapd, BESIDE pat.
'Dat.
FROM (interior) "®^' with
€K, j
(iCTo, (esso- irpos, TOWARDS ) Acc.
Gen.
wpo, in FRONT OF ) ciation)
Acc.
ircpi, AROUND
IN ^
vircp, OVER
<rvv, WITH (co-ope- r Dat.
Oird, UNDER
ration)

ava, UP TO
Acc.
INTO

Prepositions governing the Genitive only.

dvTi, diro, €K, irpo.

291. avrC, OVER against/ Containing the notion of opposition, as an

equivalent : instead of, for.

Matt. V. 38 : ot^OaXiwv dvTt 6<j>0aX(iov, an eye for an eye.

Matt. xvii. 27 : 80s avrots dvrl e/Aou koX (Tovy give to them for thee and
me.
Matt. XX. 28 : Xvrpov dvrl iroXXwv, a ransom for many.
I
Heb. xii. 2 : dvri Tfjs 7rpoK€LjX€vr]<s avrw x^P^-Sj if^ return for the joy set
before him.

John i. 16 : iXd^oiiev ...

x^P'-^ ^^tI x^ptTos, tve received grace for grace,
i.e., grace within, as correspondent with grace without, the Divine gift
being as the Divine source or (with most commentators), one measure
;

of grace to succeed and replace another " grace upon grace." ^

:

This preposition is employed with the neuter relative phiral in the adverbial
phrase, avd^ &V (in return for which things) = because. (Luke i. 20, xii. 3,
xix. 44; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Thess. ii. 10.)

292. airo, FROM THE EXTERIOR.

1. Separation, the preposition expressing removal, the governed noun
showing the point of departure : from.

^The primal significance of each preposition will be shown by small capitals,

the several applications of this by thick type.
^ " Unuuterbrochene, immer sich erueuerude Guade." Winer.
§ 293, 1.] PKEPOSITIOXS WITH THE GENITIVE, aiTO, efC. 237

Matt. i. 21 : o-wo-ct ... airb t«v ajiaprioiv avTwv, lie shall save ...from

their sins.

Matt. iii. 13 : dirb rfis TaXiXatas, from Galilee,

Matt. ix. 22 : airb rfjs wpas iK€Lvr]<;, from tlmt hour.

Matt. vi. 13 : pvaai ^/xas dirb tov iroviipov, deliver us from evil, or, the

evil one. Compare 2 Tim. iv. 18.

2. Derivation, source, descent : from, of.

Matt. vii. 16 : dirb rpipiJXwv a-vKa,flgs from thistles.

Matt. xi. 29 : fxaOere dir' Ijiov, leaim of me.

3. Hence, especially, cause, occasion : from^ on account of.

Matt. xiv. 26 : dirb tov <j>opov tKpa^av, they cried out far fear.

Matt, xviii. 7: omt...dirb t»v <rKav8dX«v, woe, on account of the

offences !
tt]s eiJXa/Setas, heard for his
So, according to R.V., Heb. v. 7, elaaKova-dels awb
godly fear. Some, however, understand "heard (and delivered) from his fear,
i.e., from the calamity which he apprehended.^

4. This preposition is sometimes used after transitive verbs elliptically,

a word like some (as the real object of the verb) being understood.
John xxi. 10 : iveyKare dirb t«v o^^apioiv, bring of the fishes.
Acts ii. 17 : eK;(€(u dirb tov irv6v|iaTos /mov, I will pour out of my Spirit.

5. diro is frequently joined with adverbs, as dirb ron, from then,

Matt. iv. 17, etc. ; dir* dpTi, henceforth, Matt, xxiii. 39, etc. ; dirb |jtaKpo0€v,

from afar; dirb dvcoOev, from above; dirb tov vvv, from now, etc. In all

these cases, a substantive of place or time is really understood.

293. €K, €|, FROM THE INTERIOR (opposite tO Cts).

1. Out of, locally.

Matt. iii. 17 : (}>wvr} U t«v o{ipavuv, a voice out of heaven.

Matt. viii. 28 : Ik t«v |ivii|ji€iwv iicpxo/JievoL, coming out of the tombs.
To this meaning may be assigned the phrase, iK de^icSv, on the right hand,
literally, "off from the right-hand parts" (Matt. xx. 21, etc). But ev 5e|t^ is
also employed ; see § 295, iv, 1.

^ The verb c/o-a/cojJw has a similarly extended meaning in Ps. cxviii. 5, LXX. But
see Alford in loc, who cites Luke xix. 3, xxiv. 41 ; John xxi. 6; Acts xii. 14, xx. 9,
xxii. 11, as passages where airb lueans on account of.
238 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, €K, [§ 293, 2.

2. Originating in, as place, parentage, from, of.

Matt. iii. 9 : Ik t«v Xl0«v tovtwv, of these stones.

John iv. 7 : 70;^^ « tt^s Sa^apclas, a ivcmian of Samaria.
Phil. iii. 5 : *E/3/oato? ii 'Eppatwv, a Hebrew of Hebrews, i.e., of Hebrew
descent.

3. Originating in, as the source, cause, or occasion, from, by.

Luke xvi. 9 : TrotTycrarc cavrots <^iXovs Ik tov (la^wva t^s dStKia?, maA;e ^0
yourselves friends by means of the mammon of unrighteousness (R.Y.),
i.e., by (the proper use of) your wealth.
Rom. V. 1 : SiKatw^eVrcs Ik irtcrrcws, being justified by faith. So in many
passages.

1 Cor. ix. 1 4 : Ik tov evoyytXtov ^ijv, to live from the gospel.

4. The material or mass from which anything is made or taken, of.

Matt, xxvii. 29 : crrkt^avov || dKavGwv, a crown of thorns.

5. Belonging to a class, of; often with abstract nouns.

John xviii. 37 : 6 wv Ik Tf]? dXii0€Cas, he ivho is (on the side) of the
truth.

Rom. ii. 8 : ol l| IpiOelas, they who are of a self-seeking spirit.

Gal. iii. 9; Tit. i. 10: 61 Ik irlfrrews' ol Ik irtpirojiTis, they who are of

faith —of circumcision, i.e., who range themselves under these opposite
symbols. So Rom. iv. 14, ol kKvo^ov, they who are of law, etc.

This meaning is closely allied with (3).

6. Springing from : of the state of mind giving occasion to any action,

from, out of
2 Cor. ii. 4 : Ik ttoXXtis 6Xt\|/€«s eypa\f/a, out of much affliction I wrote.
1 Thess. ii. 3 : y irapaKX-qa-L'; rjfxuiv ovk Ik irXdvi]S, ovSe l§ dKa6ap<rCas, 0?*?*

exhortation was not from deceit nor from uncleanness.

7. Used of time, from, the future being infolded in, and spriuging out
of the present.
John vi. 66 : Ik tovtov, from this time.

A.cts ix. 33 : l§ It«v 6kt«, for eight years,

S94. 'n"P<5, IN FRONT OF.

1. Before, in respect of place or person.
§ 295, 2.] PREPOSITIONS. 239

Acts xii. 6 : <f>v\aK€^ vph rfis 6vpas, guards before the door. So ch.

xiv. 13 j James v. 9.

Matt. xi. 10 : irpJ) irpoo-wirov cov, before thy face from ^ LXX. So Mark
i. 2 ; Luke i. 76, etc.

2. Before^ in respect of time.

John xvii. 24 : irpb KaTapoXijs Koa-fiov, before the foundation of the

toorld.

1 Cor. iv. 5 : firj irph Kaipov Tt KpLV€T€, judge nothing before the time.
2 Cor. xii. 2 : irpb Itwv ScKaTco-o-dpwv, fourteen years ago (lit., before
fourteen years, i.e., counted backward from the present time). See also
John xii. 1.

3. Before, by way of superiority.

Only in the phrase irpb ir6cvr<av, befm'e, or above all things. Luke
xxi. 12 Col. i. 17;James ; v. 12 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8.

Prepositions governing the Dative only.

€V, <rvv.

295. «v, IN, correlative with cts and ex.

1. Of place, in; so icithin, on, at.

Matt. ii. 1 : iv Bi]9X6^(i r^s 'lovSatas, in Bethlehem of Judcea.

Matt. XX. 3 : €v -ng d^opo, in the market-place.
John XV. 4 : ev rg dnireXo), in the vine.

Heb. i. 3 : cv Sc^i^ tt}? /ieyoAoxrvi/Ty?, on the right hand of the majesty.'^

Rev. iii. 21 : tv tw 0p<Jv<{) fiov, ow wiz/ throne.

2. Among, with plurals or collective nouns.

Matt. ii. 6 : €v rots r\'^i^6<r\.v 'lovSa, among the princes of Judah; LXX.,
Micah V. 2.

Luke xiv. 31 : ev 8^Ka xi^iao-iv, among ten thousands, i.e., attended by

such a troop. See Jude 14 ; also Acts vii. 14.

Acts ii. 29 : la-rlv iv i^Llv a^pi t^s rjixipas ravri;?, it (the sepulchre) is
among u^ unto this day.

1 Pet. V. 1, 2 : 7rpc(r/3irrepovs tov's iv v[uv ... to iv vjiiv ttol^ivlov, the

elders who are among you . . . the little flock among you.

^ Compare the use of e/c, § 293, 1.

MO PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE, iv. [§ 295, S.

3. " The €v of investiture," in or with; as when we say, " The general

came in his sword, the peers in their robes." The Greek of the New
Testament extends this use of the preposition to accompaniments which
do not literally invest. ^

1 Cor. iv. 21 : ^v pdpSw eXOoi 7rpo<s vfia? ; am I to come to you with a

rod ?

1 Cor. V. 8 : fxi] Iv t,v^y\ iraXaia . . . aXX iv dtv[JLois, not in the old leaven
. . hut in the unleavened.

1 Tim. i. 18 : tva a-Tparevrj Iv avrals, that thou may est fight in them
(prophesyings), i.e., armed with them.
Heb. ix. 25 : 6 dp^^tcpevs cla-epx^Tai ... iv ai^iiaTi. dXAoTptiu), the high priest
enters ... in the blood of others. Compare ch. x. 19 with xiii. 12.

So, perhaps, Eph. vi. 2 : ivroXr] irpdiTt] kv eirayytXCq,, the first command-
ment in, or ivith promise.

To this notion of investiture that of action is sometimes superadded (Luke i.

51), Hence '^

the \v instrumental."
Luke xxii. 49: d Trard^ofiev iv fiaxaipq,; shall ive smite with the sword? See
§ 368, b.

See also Heb. xi. 37, and Rev. frequently, as ii. 16, vi. 8, xiii. 10, xiv. 15.
In Matt, V, 13, Mark ix, 50, iv rivi; may be rendered wherewith?

4. The sphere in which the subject is concerned, as dwelling or

acting, in.

So the phrases Iv djiapTfq,, in sin ; Iv •wCa-ni, in faith ; Iv <ro<|>C<j, in

wisdom ; kv dYdirr), in love ; kv irvcvjiaTi, in spirit ; kv nvcvjAaTi, in the
Spirit (217,/). Matt. xxii. 43; Kev. i. 10, etc.

The frequent phrase, iv Xpia-T(3 (so iv Kvpicfj, etc.), means, not simply attached
to Christ as a follower, but in Christ, in the most intimate abiding fellowship.^
So "Christ in you, me," Rom. viii, 10; Gal. i. 16; ii. 20, etc. A similar
phrase is used of the revelation of God himself, "in us," 1 John iii. 24, iv. 13.

2 Cor. V. 19 : 0e6s 9}v iv Xpicrri^, k.t.X., God was in Christ reconciling, etc.

Eph. iv. 32: o 0e6s iv Xpicrrip ixapiaaro vfuv, God in Christ forgave you.

See also Acts xvii. 31 : in a man whom he hath appointed.

i
^ A
usage infrequent in classic Greek, and in the N. T. due to the influence of the
Hebrew preposition 3, in, with, by, etc., for which the LXX. constantly uses iv.
^ "Nicht bios durch Chr. ben£.ficio Christi, sondern in Chr., in geistig kraftiger

Gemeinschaft mit Chr." Winer.

 —

§ 296.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE, eV, (JVV, 241

h. In the power of, hy.

Matt. ix. 34 : ev tw dpxovri twv Sat/xovtojv, hy the piHnce of the demons.

Matt. V. 34, 35 : cv t<3 ovpavw ... Iv -ng YQ) ^1/ heaven ...by earth. So
elsewhere in asseverations.
In Matt. iv. 4 some MSS. read Iv iravrl pTJiian, hy every icord (W. H.,
€irt). Compare 1 Thess. iv. 15.

€v €|jioC, 1 Cor. ix. 15, xiv. 11 ; Mark xiv. 6, may be rendered in my

case.

6. This preposition with its case is often equivalent to an adverb.

Compare (4) preceding. So we may render Iv Swdjici, in poicei\ or
'powerfully ; kv 8oXw, craftily ; Iv rdxei, speedily, etc. In John xviii. 20,

€v Kpvirrw is in secret , secretly y different from Iv tw Kpxnrrw, Matt, vi 18.

7. Of time, in.

Matt. ii. 1 : Iv rifilpats 'HpwSov, in the days of Herod.

Matt. X. 15 : Iv T|jtep<j KpLcr€(x)<s, in the day of judgment ; xii. 36, etc.

Often with the infinitive treated as a noun.

Matt. xiii. 4 : Iv t« <nr€tp€iv avrov, while he was sowing.

With the relative pronoun, iv y, whilst, as Mark ii. 19 ; h oh, whilst, as

Luke xii. 1. The only difference between the singular and the plural is that
the latter is more general.

8. Const ricctio prcegnans. —This preposition seems occasionally to

include the sense of ds, and so is used after verbs implying motion :

" into, so as to be in."

Matt. xxvi. 23: 6 e|Ap*^*s ... Iv tw rpv/JAtu), he ivho dipped... in the

dish.

Luke xxiii. 53 : ^$tik6v avro Iv Mvrj/xaTt Xa^evrw, he laid it in a rock-

hewn sepulchre.

Rom. ii. 5 : Grjo-avpt^cis ccaurw opyrjv Iv rj/Mepa opyrjs, thou treosurest

to thyself wrath (to be poured forth) in a day of wrath.

296. II. o"vv, CONJUNCTION WITH (union, or co-operation).

With, together with.

Matt. xxvi. 35 : o-vv <rol a-jroOavdv, to die with thee.

R
242 PKEPOsiTioNs. [§ 296.

Luke viii. 45 : Uerpos koI ol o-vv avrw, Pete)' and those with him.

Not merely coexistence, but association is generally implied (see tiera).

Hence, avv is used of the fellowship of believers with Christ, etc. (Rom. vi. 8
Col, ii. 13, 20, iii. 3 ; 1 Thess. iv. 17, v. 10). There is the further suggestion of
co-operation in such passages as 1 Cor, v. 4, xv. 10.
In Luke xxiv. 21, toqetJtcr with becomes nearly equal to beside; dWct ye koL
cvv vdai TouTois, Yea, and beside all this (R.V.). Compare Neh. v. 18, LXX.,
"yet for all this" (A.V., R.V.).

Prepositions governing the Accusative only.

dvd, els.

297» avd, UP TO, or, UP Wi}

This preposition is of infrequent occurrence in the New Testament,
and always has a special meaning, generally distributive.

1. dvd }ji€Vov, through the midst ofy Matt, xiii, 25 ; Mark vii. 31 ; in
the rtiidst of] Rev. vii. 17 ; hetween^ 1 Cor. vi. 5.

2. dvd fi^pos, hy turn, 1 Cor. xiv. 27.

3. "With numerals or measures of quantity or value, apiece, Matt. xx.

9, 10; dvd Siivdptov, a denarius apiece. Compare Mark vi. 40; Luke ix.

14, X. 1 (dvd 8vo, two hy two)] John ii. 6 ; Rev. iv. 8.

4. In Rev. xxi. 21, dvd cts '^Kaorros, the preposition must be rendered
as an adverb, each one separately.

298. €ls, TO THE INTERIOR (oppositc to eV, and correlative with eV).2

1 . Of place, into ; so, figuratively, of a state.

Matt. ii. 11 : eA^oVres «ls r^v oUCav, having come into the house.
Matt. V. 1 : avi^-q €15 rh 6pos, he icent up into the mountain.

Matt. vi. 13 : ^xr) €tcrev€yKr]s rifjia<: els triipao-iJKJv, lead us not into tempt-
ation.

So with collective words.

In some ancient Greek poets, with a Genitive and Dative.

^

Latin, the preposition in includes the notions of eh and h, taking the

^ In

Accusative and Ablative respectively ; and ds (really tVj), in fact, is only another
form of iv, as c^ of ex.
§ 298.] PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, et9. 243

Acts xxii. 21 : cU ?0vi] e^aTroo-TeXw ere, / will send thee forth into the
community of Gentiles.

2. UntOj to, where the context or the nature of the case limits the
movement to the exterior.

Matt. xvii. 27 : iropevOih ds 6dXa<r<rav, having gone to the sea.

John xi. 38 : epxirai els to |xvt]|x€iov, Jie cometh to the tomb. So xx.
1, 3, 4 (ver. 5, "he went not in").

Matt. vi. 26 : iix^Xlif/are els rd ircTtivd, look to the birds.

Luke vi. 20 : cVa/Da? tovs 6(fi0aXfjLovs els tovs (laG-qras, having raised his
eyes to his disrij^les.

Rev. X. 5 ; ^pc ttjv x^tpa aurov els tov ovpavov, he lifted his hand toicards
the heaven.

3. The meaning towards found in relation to persons, is especially

marking direction of thought, speech, etc. Sometimes this implies
hostility, against ; sometimes mere reference, in regard to.

Rom. xii. 16 : to avro els dXXTjXovs <^povovvT€<s, being of the same mind
one toicards another.
Luke xii. 10 ttSs os cpet Xoyov els t6v
: ulbv tov avOpwirov, every one who
shall say a tcord against the Son of man.
Acts ii. 25 : Aa/?t8 yap Xeyct els avTov, for David says in reference to
him.

4. Towards, with respect to a certain result, in order to, for.

Matt. viii. 4, x. 18, etc.: els jxapTvpiov avTots, /b;* a testimojiy to them.
Matt. xxvi. 2 : TrapaSt'SoTat els to (rTavpw0f)vai, he is surrendered to be
criicijied.

1 Cor. xi. 24 tovto : TrotctTC els t^v ejii^v dvdjivrjo-iv, this do for the
remembrance of me.
2 Cor. ii. 12 : iX6o)v cts t^v TpwaSa, els to evayycXiov, having come into
Troasfor (the preacliing of) the gospel.

5. Into, symbolically, as marking the entrance into a state or sphere

(see under cv, 4).

So we enter els Xpio-rov, into Christ, actually by faith, symbolicaDy by

baptism, Christians being ev Xpurrw, in Christ.

Rom. vi. 3, 4 : ocrot efiaTTTLadrjfxev els Xpio-rbv 'IiycoCv, els tov OdvaTOV
244 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, ek. [§ 298.

avTov ipaTTTta-Orjixevy as many of lis as were baptised into Christ Je^us^ were
haptised into his death.

Compare Matt, xxviii. 19, "into the name," etc. Acts xix. 3 1 Cor. i. ; ; 13,
X. 2, xii. 13 ; Gal. iii. So Acts ii. 38, eis rrjv &(f)€<nv afxaprnSv, into
27. th6

remission of sins, or, according to some interpreters, as (4).

6. This preposition is used in some important passages to denote

equivalence,^ and may be rendered for, or as.

Matt. xix. 5 : taovrai . . . €ls o-apKa |iCav, they shall become one flesh. So
Mark x. 8 ; 1 Cor. vi. 16 ; Eph. v. 31 ; from LXX., Gen. ii. 24.

Matt. xxi. 42 : iyev-qOrj ds kc^xxX-^iv ywi/tag, it became the head of the

corner. So Mark xii. 10 ; Luke xx. 17 ; from LXX., Ps. cxviii. 22.

Compare Luke iii. 5 (from Isa. xl. 4), xiii. 19; John xvi. 20; Acts vii. 21,

xiii. 22 Rom. xi.

; 9 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 22, xv. 45 (see Gen. ii. 7, LXX.) ; 2 Cor. vi. 18,

viii. 14 ; Heb. i. 5 ; James v. 3.

Acts xix. 27 : to ... Upov els ovSev Xoyto-^^vat, the temple to be esteemed

as nothirig.
Rom. ii. 26 : ov^l rj aKpo^vrrTia avrov els irepiTop.'fiv Aoyta"^r;(7€Tat ; shall
not his uncircumcision be accounted as circumcision 1

Rom. ix. 8 : Aoyt^crat els (nre'piia, it is accounted for a seed.

Rom. iv. 3, 5, 9, 22 ; Gal. iii. 6 : iXoyia-Orj aur<p els 8iKaio<rvvT}v, it IVOS

accounted to him fm' righteousness.

7. When referring to time, et? may mark either (a) the interval up to

a certain point, during; or (b) the point itself, regarded as the object of
some aim or purpose, up to, for.

a. Luke i. 50 : els veveds vevewv, or els Yeveas Kal Yeveds (W. H.), unto,

during generations of (or and) generations.

Matt. xxi. 19 : els rhv alwva, for ever, lit., "unto or during the age,"
John vi. 51, 58, "for ever." els tovs alaivas, lit., "unto the ages," "for

ever," Rom. i. 25 ; 2 Cor. xi. 31. els tovs alwvas t»v alwvwv, unto the

ages of the ages, " for ever and ever," Gal. i. 5 ; 1 Tim. i. 17. 2 Pet.
iii. 18, €19 rjfjiipav alwvo?, " to the day of eternity" (§ 259).

So in the adverbial phrases, eh rh jxiWov, hereafter, Luke xiii. 9 ; 1 Tim. vi. 19 ;

eh rb dir)v€K^s, continuously, perpetually, Heb. x. 12.

^ This answers to a common Hebrew use of the preposition h (equivalent to iii)

after copulative verbs.

§ 299.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, ek. 245

b. Matt. vi. 34 : fxrj ovv fxcpLfjLVQa-rjTe €is tt^jv a<lpiov, be not therefore
anxious for (lit., "project not your anxieties into") tlie morrow.

Phil. i. 10 : €ls T||i^pav Xpicrrov, unto the day of Christ. So 2 Tim.

i. 12. Eph. iv. 30 is slightly different, expressing more prominently the
intent of the Spirit's " sealing."
Rev. ix. 15 T^Toi/xaa/xei/ot els t^v «pav Kat T|(jLepav /cat |xfiva koX lviavT<Jv,
:

prepared for (or unto) the hour and day, and month and year, i.e., for
the precise time appointed.
Acts xiii. 42: cis to /xera^v ad^^aTov presents a little difficulty, as "on the
next Sabbath" (A.V. andR.V.) seems rendering the preposition with undue
licence. We must interpret either "for the next Sabbath" the Gospel being —
regarded as a treasure reserved for that time (and perhaps, by construct io
prcegnans [see 81, %ip to and on) —or during the intervening week (A.V. marg. ).

8. Constructio prcegnans. — See under iv (8). As iv in a similar

double construction implies the previous els, so ek here implies the
following iv.

Mark xiii. 16 : 6 els rbv dypov &v,^ "he who is into the field," i.e., who
has grme into the field and is in it. Matt. xxiv. 18 has iv.

Acts viii. 40 : ^tAiTTTros 6vp^0T] els "A^wrov, Philip ivas found (to have
been led) to Azotus.

Acts xxi. 13 : airoOavetv els 'lepovcraki^ix, "to die into Jerusalem," i.e.,

to go into Jerusalem and die there.

Heb. xi. 9 : irap«KTi<r€v els y^v, " sojourned into the land," i.e., travelled
into the land and sojourned in it.

In one passage, 6is is apparently followed by a Genitive : Acts ii. 27, 31

(LXX., Ps. xvi. 10), cis ci5ou,- to The phrase contains a classical
Hades.
ellipsis oMav, Imhitation,
; being understood, and Hades being personified,
" Thou wilt not abandon my soul to the realm of the Unseen."

Prepositions governing the Genitive and Accusative Cases.

8id, Kara, (i^erd, irepC, virep, trird.^

299. 8«i, THROUGH, from the notion of separation, disjunction.

* W. H. and Rev. Text omit &v, —a reading which more vividly illustrates this
construction.
2 W. H. q-S-qv (see § 2.56, 7, note).
^ In classic Greek, irepi and vTr6 may take a Dative ; also fxerd in poets.
246 hd, AVITH THE GENITIVE. [§ 299.

a. With the Genitive.

1. In reference to place : through^ literally, i.e.^ " through and from."

John iv. 4 : eSct Se avTov Sup^^eadat 8id tt)s 2a|iap€ias, and he must needs
go through Samaria.
John xiv. 6 : ovSet? €p;(€Tat Trpos rov Trarepa €i /u,^ St* Ijiov, no one cometh
to the Father hut through me —the Way.
1 Cor. iii. 15 : o-uidrja-eraL ... ws 8ia tov irvpos, he shall be saved as (one
who has passed) througli the fire.
1 Cor. xiii. 12 : pX^Trofxev yap apri 8t* eo-oirrpov, for we see noio through
a miiTor (the image appearing to be on the opposite side).

2. In reference to agency : through^ by means of.

Matt. i. 22 : p-rjOlv vtro Kvptov 8ia toO 'irpo<|)TJTov, spohen by the Lord
thi'ough the pvphet. Here mark the distinction between vtto and 8ta,

and compare vtto, § 304 (a).

1 Cor. iii. 5 : Slolkovol 8t' wv c7rto*TcvcraTc, ministers through whom ye

believed.

2 Thess. ii. 2 : p^rfe 8ia irvcvjJtaTOS, ixrjTC 8ia Xoyou, fxrjTe 8i' eiric^oXTjs, u)9

8t* Tifiwv, neither by spirit, nor by loord, nor by letter as from us (through
us as the mediate authors).

Eph. i. 1, etc. : 8td eeXrijjiaTos 0€ov, by the loill of God.

Eph. ii. 8, etc. : a-eaojcrixivoL 8td rfjs mo-Tcws, saved by faith.

2 Cor. V. 10 : rd 8ttt tov <rw|xaTos, the things (wrought) by means of the

body.
3 Jolm 13 : ov OiXio 8id ji^Xavos /cat KaXd|j.ov ypacf>€Lv, I do not wish to
ivrite ivith ink and pen.

This preposition is used, especially in such phrases as 5ia 'Irjeov Xpca-Tov, of

Christ's mediatorial work in all its manifestations. ^ (Rom. ii. 16, v. 1 ; 2 Cor.
i. 5; Gal. i. 1 ; Eph. i. 5; Phil. i. 11 ; Titus iii. 6.)

Very rarely it seems to indicate the primary agent. 1 Cor. i. 9 : Triarbs 6

Geos dC ov iK\^67)T€, k.t.X., God is faithfal, by [li.\ ., through) ichoin ye were
called, etc. Yet even here the proper force of 8id is not lost. The Father is

represented as acting on behalf of his Son, to bring Christians into fellowship

with Him.

^ Winer.
 :

§ 299.] 8cd, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 247

3. In reference to time, it marks the passage through an interval

(a) during, or (b) after the lapse of.

(a) Luke v. 5 : 8i* 6Xt)s Tfjs wktos, all night.

Heb. ii. 15 : 8id iravrbs tov tTJv, all through their life.

The phrase 8id (t^?) wktos denotes hy night, i.e., during its lapse, no
particular hour or hours being specified, Acts v. 19, xvi. 9, xvii. 10,

xxiii. 31. So Acts i. 3 : 8t' T)(X€pwv Teo-a-apdKovTo, at intei'vals during forty

days.

(&) Malt. xxvi. 61 ; Mark xiv. 58 : 8id rpiwv ruitpwv, three days after-

tvards.

Gal. ii. 1 : 8id 8€KaT€<r(rdp«v Itwv, fourteen years after. (Cf. 2 Cor.
xii. 2.)

Compare Mark ii. 1 ; Acts xxiv. 17.

p. With the Accusative.

0?i account of: as in the frequent phrase 8id tovto, "on this account."

So "because of," " for the sake of."

''"With the Genitive, 8td notes the instrument of an action; with

the Accusative, its ground, ratio.'' '^

Matt. X. 22, etc. : 8id t6 ovo|id fiov, for my name's sake.

Matt. xxiv. 12 : 8id to TrX^OvveTjvai ryjv avofxtav, because of the ahoimding
of the laivlessness.

Eph. ii. 4 : 8id ti^v ttoXKtjv a.yatn\v avrov, on account of his great love.

John vi. 57 : cya> ^w 8id tov iraTcpa, / live because of the Fathei', i.e.,

" because he liveth."

Heb. V. 12 : 8id tov xp^^vov, on account of {i.e., considering) the time

that you have been Christians.
Rom. viii. 11: 8id to cvoikovv avrov irv€v(ta, on account of his indwelling
Spirit.

The distinction between the Genitive and the Accusative should be marked in
such passages as Rom. xii. 3, xv. 15. "I say to you," writes the Apostle in the
former, 5ta tt}s x°-P^'^<>^> through the grace given to me, i.e., "the favour
bestowed is the power by which I WTite;" but in the latter, dia ttjv x<^^> on
account of the grace given me, "that I may worthily vindicate its bestowal."

^ Winer.
248 Kara, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [§ 299, fi.

An instance of a different kind is in Heb. ii. 10 5i' ov rd iravTa /cat bC od to, ;

wavra, for ivliom are all things and through whom arc all things, i.e., for his
honour and by his agency. Compare also 1 Cor. xi. 9 and 12: 5id tt]v ywaiKa,
for the sake of the woman; 5id ttjs yvvaLK6s, by the woman, i.e., in birth.

300. Kara, DOWN.

a. With the Genitive, " down from."

1. Literally, of place, down.

Matt. viii. 32 : wpfxrjcre Kara, tov Kpr]\i.vov, rushed down the steep. Mark
V. 13 ; Luke viii. 33.

1 Cor. xi. 4 : Kara Ke<})aXTis cx'^'^' having (something, i.e.^ a veil, de-
pending) from the head.
See also Mark xiv. 3 ; Acts xxvii. 14 ; 2 Cor. viii, 2.

Hence the more nsual

2. signification, against^ in opposition to (the
reverse of vTrep, which see, § 303).
Mark xi. 25 : et n e^eTe Kara tivos, if ye have anything against any
one.

Acts xiv. 2 : eTrryyctpai/ Kara twv d8€X<|)a)v, they raised up ... against the
brethren.

3. Occasionally in asseverations, hy.

Matt. xxvi. 63 : i^opKL^u) crc Kard tov 0€ov, / adjure thee hy God.
So Heb. vi. 1 Cor. xv. 15 is probably to be referred to the same rule
13-16.
"We have by God," though the rendering against might be admissible.
testified
" 0/God," (A.V. and R.V.) is plainly incorrect.

4. As with the Accusative, over^ throughout, a usage confined to Luke,

and to the following passages :

Luke iv. 14 : Ka0* (JXtjs rr\% ircptxwpov, through all the region round
about.

Luke xxiii. 5 ; Acts ix. 31, 42, x. 37.

p. With the Accusative.

1. Throughout, among, with singular or plural.
Luke viii. 39 : Ka6' 6\t]v rf|v irtJXiv, through the whole city.

Acts viii. 1 : Kard rds x"P*5 T7J<s 'lovSaia?, throughout the regions of
Judwa.
Acts xxvi. 3 : tCjv Kard 'Iov8aCovs WCjv, of the customs among the Jews.
§ 300.] Kara, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 249

2. Over against^ locally.

Luke ii. 31 : Kara irpoo-wirov iravroiv twv Xawv, before the face of all the

peoples.

So Acts ii. 10; Gal. ii. 11, iii. 1, etc.

3.In reference to time, at or in^ "correspondent with," "at the period

of" Clover against").
Matt. i. 20, etc. : Kar Svap, in a dream.

Acts x.vi. 25 : Kara TO |jL€(rovvKTiov, at midnight.

Kom. V. 6 : Kara Kaipov, in due time.

4. Of place or time, distributively, from one to another.

Mark xiii. 8 : a-aa-ixol Kara rdirovs, earthqnaJces in divers places.

Luke viii. 1 : StwScvc Kara iroXiv, he VMS journeying from city to city.

So Kar ^TOi, year by year, Luke ii. 41 kut oTkov, at different houses, Acts ii. 46,
;

V. 42 Kara irav (xd^^aTov, every Sabbath, Acts xv. 21

; Kad' ijfxepav, daily, ;

Matt. xxvi. 55, etc. (and the phrase Kad' els, or Kadeis, one by one, for eis Kad' eva,
Mark xiv. 19 ; John viii. 9 ; Rom. xii. 5).

5. From the meaning " over against" arises that of according to, in
reference to some standard of comparison, stated or implied.

Matt. ix. 29 : Kara t^v itCo-tiv v/xcov yevrjOrJTia^ according to your faith
be it unto you.

Luke ii. 39 : ra Kara tov vofiov Kvpcov, the things according to the laio
of Jehovah.

So in the phrases /car dvdpurov, as a man; Kar ^fie, according to my ability or

vieiv; /card x°-P'-^> according to favoiir; Kar i^ox^v, by way of pre-emiiience,
Acts xxv. 23, etc. The phrase /card Qedv means, w accordance ivith the character
and will of God, "divinely," as 2 Cor. vii. 9, 10, 11. Thus also, Rom. viii. 27,
He (the Spirit) divinely intercedes;'^ Rom. xiv. 15, Kar dydTrijp, according to love.
Heb. xi. 13: /card iriffTiv dir^davov, they died according to faith, i.e., in a way
consistent with, corresponding to the spirit of faith ; contented, though they had
not seen the blessing.

6. Phrases like the foregoing often pass into an adverbial meaning.

Matt. xiv. 13, etc.: kut ISiav, alone.

Acts XX viii. 16 : Ka0' lavrdv, by himself.

^ Winer here prefers the rendering before, as (2) above, but, as it seems, without
sufficient reason.
250 fierd, irepL [§ 301,

301. ^i'^o,, IN ASSOCIATION WITH (locally), distinguished from a-vvy

which implies co-ojjeration, and is not necessarily local.

a. With the Genitive, " with and from," or separable connection.^

1. Of persons, ^^-iY/i, amidst, among.

Matt. i. 23 : 'E/A/xavov^X ... |i60' t||jl»v 6 0co9, Emmanuel, God with us.

Matt. xii. 3, etc. : ol (1€t avrov, those loith him, his companions.

So of two parties to a conversation or controversy.

John iv. 27 : nerd -yuvaiKos cXaXct, Jie was talki7ig with a ivoman.
See also Matt. xii. 41, 42, etc.

2. Of attendant circumstances, objects, states of mind (not instru-

mental), together icith.

Matt. XXV. 4 : ixcrd twv XaiAirdSwv avriov, ivith their lamps.

Mark vi. 25 : cia-eX^ovcra \Lira. <nrov87]s, going in with haste.
Heb. xii. 17 : (icrd SaKpvwv lKt,y}Tr)(ra<i^ having sought with tears.

1 Tim. iv. 14 : |1€t lirieio-ews twi/ x«t/><^v, loith (not hy) the laying on of

the hands.

Matt, xxvii. 66 : jierd rfjs Kovo-rwSCas, together with the watch.

3. The object of a deed of love, mercy, or the like, is sometimes

spoken of, by this preposition, as associated with the agent.

Luke X. 37 : 6 Trot^cra? to eXcos |1€t avrov, he who wrought the compas-

sionate deed ivith him, i.e., " who showed mercy towards him."
So in Acts xiv. 27, xv. 4 ; 1 John iv. 17.

p. With the Accusative, after, of time or place.

Matt. xxvi. 2 : ^crd 8vo ii|A€pas, after tivo days.

Luke V. 27, etc. : fi€Td ravra, after these things.

Luke xxii. 20 : jicrd rh 8cMrvT]<rai, after supper; 1 Cor. xi. 25.

Heb. ix. 3 : licrd t6 Scvrcpov KaTaireTcurjjLa, beyond the second veil,

302. TTcpC, AROUND.

a. With the Genitive, " around and separate from."
About, concerning; chiefly as the object of thought, emotion, know-
ledge, discourse, etc.

^ Donaldson. fieTo, is connected with jxiaos, midst.

§ 303, a.] 'rrepi, virep, 251

Acts viii. 12 : cvayycXt^o/xcVu) trepl rfis pao-iXeCas rov 0€ov (they believed
Philip), preacMiig concerning the Mngdom of God.
Matt. vi. 28 : irepl iv8v|JiaTos ri /xepLixvaTe ; lolty are ye anxious about
raiment ?

Luke ii. 18 :t«v XaXTi0€VTwv, they wondered about the

iOav/xacrav irept

things tlmt ivere spoken (this verb more generally has liri, " to wonder
at").

Matt. ix. 36 : iairXayxvLcrOr] ircpl avrwv, he was comjnssionate about

them (also more generally with cTTi, Dative or Accusative).
1 Thess. v. 25, etc. : Trpoa-ivxta-Of. irepl t||jl«v, pray for us.

Rom. viii. 3 : 6 0eo9 t6v iavrov vlov Trc/xi/^a? . . . ir€pl dp-apTCas, God
having sent his oivn Son... for sin. Compare Heb. x. 6, 8, 18, 26;
1 John ii. 2, iv. 10 ; also, perhaps, Gal. i. 4.^ (See under virip^ § 303,
a, 2.)

/?. With the Accusative, " around and towards."

1. Around, of place.
Matt. viii. 18 : iSwv ... o;(Xovs uepl avrov, seeing multitudes around him.
Used of dress, etc.. Matt. iii. 4 : irepl ti?|v 6<r^vv avrov, aboid his loins.

So xviii. 6 ; Rev. xv. 6^.

For the idiomatic expression, ot irepl IlavXov, see § 197-

2. About, of time.

Matt. XX. 3 : -ircpl TpCrrjv wpav, about the third hour.

3. In reference to, aboid, of any object of thought.

Luke X. 40 Trcptco-TraTo : ircpl iroXX^v SiaKoviav, she was cumbered aboid
much serving (ver. 41).
1 Tim. i. 19 : ircpl Tf|v ttCo-tiv ivavdyrja-av, they made shipwreck in
reference to the faith.

See also Mark iv. 19 ; Acts xix. 25 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4, etc.

303. vir€p, OVER.

a. With the Genitive, " over and separate from."

1. On behalf of as though bending " over" to protect (the opposite of

,

Kara). Of persons.

* W. H. read virlp with Trepi in marg.

252 virep, with the genitive. [30^, a.

Matt. V. 44 : 7rpoo-cvx«<^^c vir^P twv 8iwkovt«v vfxas, pray for^ tJiose who
are pei'secutinr/ you.
Mark ix. 40 : os yap ovkta-ri Ka& yj/jlwv \m\p f||x«v i<TTLv, he who is not
against 21s is for us. Compare Rom. viii. 31.
2 Cor. V. 14, 15 : inr^p irdvrwv aTreOaveVy he died for all. So Rom.
V. 6, 7, 8 ; Gal. ii. 20, iii. 13 ; Eph. v. 25 ; Heb. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 21, etc.
Philemon 13: iva vir^p o-ov /xot SLaKovrj, that he might minister to me
for thee.
As a service is often rendered on heJmlf of another by being offered in his
stead, the notion of'virip may become interchangeable with that of avri, as in the
last passage. The distinction is, that virip of itself leaves undetermined the way
in which the service is performed, simply affirming the fact avri, on the other
;

hand, is definite. See Winer, § 47, I, n. 2.

2. Of things, for their sake, in various ways.

John xi. 4 : vir^p tt)s So^tis tov @€ov, for the glory of God, i.e., to
promote it.

Rom. XV. 8 : v-n-^p dXT]8€Cas @€ov, for the truth of God, i.e., to confirm
his promises.

2 Cor. xii. 19: virtp Tfjs vixwv oiKoZo\i.f[s, for your edification, i.e., to
minister to it.

Phil. ii. 13 : virip rr\s €v8oKCas, for (his) good pleasure, i.e., to accom-
plish it.

Acts V. 41 : vir^p TOV ovofiaTos, on behalf of the name of Christ, i.e.,

to glorify it. Compare ix. 16 ; 3 John 7, etc.

1 Cor. XV. 3 : dniOavcv <m\p twv duapTiwv rj/xiov, he died for our sins,

i.e., to take them away. Compare Heb. v. 1, Gal. i. 4, etc. ; and see
under Trcpt, § 302, a.

3. About, " in reference to," simply ; the notion of benefit or service

having disappeared.
2 Cor. viii. 23 : eirc iirlp Tirov, whether (you inquire) about Titus.
2 Thess. ii. 1 : virip Tfjs irapovo-Cas rov KvpLov, in reference to the coming
of the Lord.
The passage, 1 Cor. xv. 29, paxTi^d/ievoL virep tQv veKpuv, baptised for, or on
behalf of or in reference to the dead, possibly refers to some observance (perliaps
local) in connection with the act of baptism, of which the trace is lost.

^
More emphatic than irtplin the same connection.
§ 304.] virep, viro. 253

p. With the Accusative, " over and towards."

Beyond, above, used in comparison.

Matt. X. 24 : ovk icm ixaOr}Tr)<i inrip tov 8i8a<rKaXov, a disciple is not

above his teacher.
2 Cor. i. 8 : (nrJp 8vva(iiv i/3ap-q6r]iJi€v, we were oppressed beyond our
strength.

So occasionally after a comparative adjective to add emphasis (Luke

xvi. 8 Heb. iv. 12).
;

Here, too, may be referred the use of vwip with adverbs, as 2 Cor. xi. 5, xii. 11,
virkp \iav or virepklav, beyond measure; also the "improper preposition" virepdpu
(from dvd), up over, governing the Genitive (Eph. i. 21, iv. 10; Heb. ix. 5).

See under vwd, § 304, j8, 1.

304. viro, UNDER.

a. With the Genitive, " beneath and separate from."

This preposition marks that from which a fact, event, or action springs,
i.e., the agent ; hence its meaning, by, especially after passive verbs.

Matt. iv. 1 : avrj^Or] virb tov irv€v|iaTOS TreLpacrOrjvai viro tov 8iap6\ov, he
was led up) by the Spirit to be tempited by the devil.

Matt. V. 13 : KaraTrareto-^at virb t«v av0pwir«v, to be trodden under foot

by men.
Note. —The Agent is signified by xmb.
The Instrument, by the Dative alone.
The Minister of another's will, by 5td, with the Genitive.
The Motive or Cause, by 5id, with the Accusative.
The Occasion may be signified by dTo.

p. With the Accusative, " under and towards."

1. Under, locally or figuratively.

^latt. V. 15 : TiOcacTLv avrov virb Tbv fjL68tov, they put it under the
modius.
Rom. vi. 14 : ov yap ia-re vnrb vd|iov d\)C virb X'^-P''*'* f^'^ V^ <^^6 f^ot under
law, hut under grace.

In this sense, joined with the adverb Kartu (from Kara), viro forms the
"improper preposition" {utokoLtw, down unde)', followed always by a
Genitive, as Mark vi. 11, etc.
254 VTTO, WITH ACCUSATIVE — eVt, WITH GlilNrnVE. [§ 304, yS.

2. Close upon ("under," as, e.g.^ under a wall, hill, etc.), like the Latin
suh, applied in the Xew Testament to time only, and in one passage
Acts V. 21 : virb Tov <{p0pov, close upon the daivn, "very early in the

Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative.

iiriy Trapd, irpds.

305. t-n-C, UPON.

a. With the Genitive, " upon, and proceeding from," as, e.g.^ a pillar
upon the ground.
1. On, upon, locally.

Matt. vi. 10, etc. : cm tt)s Yf)s, on the earth.

Luke viii. 13 : 61 h\ itrX Tfjs ireVpas, and those upon the rock.

John xix. 19 : ItcX tov (rravpov, upon the cross.

Acts xii. 21 : Ka^tVas lirl tov p^p.aTos, sitting upon the throne (lit.,

judgment-seat, tribunal). So xxv. 6. Compare Rev. iv. 9, 10, v. 13,

vi. 16, etc. In Matt. xix. 28, Ittl in this sense has both the Genitive
and the Accusative.

2. Ovei', of superintendence, government, etc.

Acts vi. 3 : ovs KaTaa-Trja-ofxcv «irl Tfjs XP«^*S ravrrjs, whom we Will set

over this business.

Rom. ix. 5 : 6 tov IttI irdvruv, ivho is over all

3. On the basis of, liguratively, upon.

John vi. 2 : to, (j^/Acta a IttoUl kirX twv d<r6evo\ivT«v, the miracles which
he teas loorldiig uj)on the afflicted.

Compare Gal. iii. 16, etc.

Here, too, maybe referred the phrase, eV dXrjdelat, vi truth (Mark xii. 14;
Luke iv. 25, etc.), i.e., "on a basis of truth."

4. In the presence of, especially before a tribunal.

1 Cor. vi. 1 : KpivcfrOai itr\ r&v aS^Kcav koI ov\l cirl t«v aY^wv, to be

judged, before the unrighteous, and not before the hohj.

So Acts xxiii. 30, xxiv. 19, xxv. 9, 26, xxvi. 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. 13.
§ 305.] eiriy WITH THE GENITIVE AND DATIVE. 255

1 Tim. V. 19 : cirl 8vo r} Tpiwv liap-nupwv, before two or three witnesses.

But see 2 Cor. xiii. 1 cm upon the testimony (mouth), : oTofiaTos, k.tA.,

where the preposition, from the LXX., denotes basis ; as in (3), above.

5. In the time of.

Luke iii. 2 : eirl 6.pxi€p4ws "Awa, in the high-jyriesthood of Annas (R.Y.).

Acts xi. 28 : €irl KXavSlov, in the days of Claudius.

Matt. i. 11 : lirt rfjs iieroiKeo-^as Ba/SvkCjvos, at the time of the deporta-

tio7i to Babylon.
Rom. i. 10 : iirX t«v irpoo-evxwv /xov, at the time of my jprayefi's; 1 Thess.
i. 2 ; Philemon 4,

1 Pet. i. 20 : hr €<rxdT«v Twv xpovwv, ill the last times; Heb. i. 2 ; 2 Pet.
iii. 3; Jude 18 (W. H.).

In Mark xii. 26; iirl tov ^drov, at the Bush, means, "at the Old Testament
"
section entitled 'The Bush.'

6. Construdio prKri7ians. —This preposition with the Genitive some-

times (see under ev, 8) implies the foregoing motion.

Matt. xxvi. 12 : ^oXovo-a ... to fxvpov tovto €irl tov <r«p,aTds /xov, having
poured . . . this oiidment on my body,

Mark xiv. 35 : ^xiirrcv e'lrl Tfjs y^s> he fell upon the ground.

p. With the Dative, " resting upon."

1. Oriy upon^ locally; like the Genitive, except that the point of view
is different. (See a, 1, also y, 1.)

Luke 44 ovk a(f>r](rov(nv ... \l6ov eirl Xl0«j>,i they

xix. : will not leave ...

stone resting upon stone. See also chap. xxi. 6.

2. Over^ of snperintendence, etc. (See a, 2, also y, 2.)

Luke xii. 44 : €irl tois virapxov<ri, over the goods.

3. 071 (at), as the groundwork of any fact or circumstance.

Matt. iv. 4 : ovk err' dpTw /xoVo) ^TJo-cTat, shall not live on breads alojie.

Luke V. 5 : eirl tw pr\\x.ari crov ;^aA,acra) to Siktvov, at thy toord I will let
down the net.

^ But AV. H. read \iBov (cf. y, 1). In Luke xxi. 6 the Dat. is undisputed, and
the student will note that in the one case the verb is attive (implying motion), in
the other passive.
256 eVt, WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [§ 305, /S.

Acts xi. 19 : r^s OXi\}/€(D'; t^s y€yofji€vr]<s cVl ST€<j>dv&), ^Tie aflicHon that
arose about Stephen.
Mark ix. 37, etc. : lirX tw ovojiarC /xov, m my name. (Compare Matt,
xxviii. 19 -with Acts ii. 38.)

Eom. viii. 20 : cir* cXirtSt, in hope, i.e., "resting on the basis of a hope
that," etc.

2 Cor. ix. 6 : eir' €vXo7lais, on a groundwork of blessings, i.e., "bounti-

fully."

1 Tliess. iv. 7 : ov yap iKoXea-tv rjfjia^ 6 ©cos eirt 6,Ka0af <rt(j,, for God called
US not on the ground of impurity, or perhaps as (5). (R.V., for unclean-
ness.) ^
So the phrase e0' c^, "on the condition being realised that," wherefore^
because(Rom. v. 12, etc.).

4. Over and above, in addition to; as by one fact resting upon

another.

Luke xvi. 26 : eul irdo-i toutois, beside all these.

2 Cor. vii. 13 : eirl tt| irapaKXrio-et rjfxwv, (W. H.) ill addition to our
comfort.

5. Constructio prwgnans. — (See a, 6.) The force of the Accusative

also is sometimes implied.
Matt. ix. 16: ouSets tiripdXXei . . . Itri tjiarto) -iraXaKu, no one putteth . .

U2:)on an old garment.

y. With the Accusative, " upon, by direction towards."

1. Upon, with motion implied.

Matt. v. 15 : TiOeaoTLv cirl t^v XvxvLav, they put (it) upon the lampstand.

Matt. vii. 24 : loKoSojxrja-ev cirl t-^iv ir^rpav, he built upon the rock.
Matt. xiv. 29 : TrepuTrdTrja-ev cVi rd iiSara, he walked upon the loaters.

Matt. xxiv. 2 : Xt^os eVt XtGov. See the Dative in the same connection,
ft 1, note. The notion there is of rest, simply here, i)erliaps, of down-
;

ward pressure.

So after the verb eXTrifw, to hope; irl, with the Dat., 1 Tim. iv. 10; with the
Ace, V. 5. In the one case, the hope is said to rest upon, as a fact; in the
other, to be placed upon, as an a(;t. So after irddoj, 2 Cor. i. 9, compared with
ii. J^. Tlio dittereuce is so sliglji, that the expressions are easily interchangeable.
 .

§ 305.] e7^^, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 257

Gonstruciio iwcegnans. —In Matt. xix. 28; 2 Cor. iii. 15, and some
other passages.

2. Over, of authority, superintendence.

Luke i. 33 : paa-cXeva-eL cirt rhv oIkov 'la/cwyS, he shall reign over the house

of Jacob.
Heb. ii. 7 : KaricrT-qu-a^ avrbv eirl rd '4pya, k.t.A.., thou didst set hint over
the icorks of thy hands.

The three cases with this meaning seem "interchangeable," i.e., the notions
which they respectively express are so nearly allied that any of them may be
employed without materially altering the sense. The Dative, however, and not
the Accusative, is used when the preposition folloAvs a verb of existence the ;

Accusative, and not the Dative, when the verb is transitive. The Examples (a,
2) show that the Genitive may be with either.

3. To, implying an intention (for, against).

Matt. iii. 7 : ipxofjievov^ eVl to pairTio-jxa, comiJig for his baptism.

Mark v. 21 : aw^x^V ox\os ttoXvs eV avrov, a great midtitude icas
gathered togetlier to him.

So Luke xxiii. 48.

Matt. xxvi. 55 : w? eirl XT)<rTi?|v l^rjXOarc ; are ye come out as agaitist a

robber ?

4. Toicards, the direction of thought, feeling, speech.

Luke vi. 35 ; auro? XPl^"^^^ Icttlv eirl Tous dxapio-Tovs koI irovtipovs, he is
kiiid to the unthanlfid and wicked
2 Cor. ii. 3 : TreTrot^ws eirl iravras vfids, having confidence with regard to
you all.

Mark ix. 12 : yeypaTrrat eirl tov viov tov avOpioTrov, it is written with
regard to the Son of man.
Matt. XV. 32 G-TrXayxyi^opiaL em tov ^x^o^j I have compassion on the
:

multitude. This verb and preposition arc also found with the Dative
(see ft 3); i.e., the compassion may be conceived as moving towards, or
as resting on, the multitude, Luke vii. 13. The verb has also Trept (Gen.),
concei^ned about the multitude, Matt. ix. 36.

6. Of number or quantity, ujy to.

Acts iv. 17: eirl irXciov, to a farther point, "any further."

258 eV/, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE irapd. [§ 305.

Rev. xxi. 16 : tVl trraSCovs SwScKa x^^'-^iSov, to twelve thousands of

stadia.

Matt. XXV. 40, etc. : €<|>' So-ov, inasmuch as. So of time, as long as,
Matt. ix. 15, Rom. vii. 1.

With numeral adverbs, Acts x. 16, xi. 10. So in the compound adverb,
iipdira^, once for all, at once (Rom. vi. 10; 1 Cor. xv. 6; Heb. vii. 27, ix. 12,
X. 10).

6. Of time, over, during, on.

Luke x. 35 : cVl t^v ailpiov, in the course of the moirow.

Luke xviii. 4 : ovk yOeXrja-iv cttI xpovov, he would not for a time.
Acts xiii. 31 : uifjiOtj eirl T|)iepas irXctovs, he was seen during several days.

So in the phrase, eTrt to avrb, at the same place, or time, "together" (Luke
xvii.35 ; Acts ii. 1 ; 1 Cor. vii. 5, etc. ).

306. irapd, BESIDE (of juxtaposition).

a. With the Genitive, "beside and proceeding from."

With persons only from, : generally with the notion of something

imparted.

Matt. ii. 4 : iTrvvOdvero trap' avrwv, he inquired of them.

Phil. iv. 18 : Se^a/xci/os irop' 'E7ra<|>po8iTov ra -jrap' iijicov, having received

of Epaphroditus the tilings from you.

John xvi. 27 : irapd toS irarpos iirjXOov, I came forth from the Father.
Compare John i. 14.

Matt. xxi. 42 : irapa Kvpiov eyeVcro avrrj, this was from Jehovah — "his
doing," from LXX., Ps. cxviii. 23.

Mark iii. 21 : ot irap' avroO, those from him, i.e., from his home or
family, his friends.

p. With the Dative, " beside and at."

1. With, near, of persons only, except John xix. 25.

John xiv. 1 7 : irap' {i|iiv /xeVct, he remains toith yo?i.

Acts X. 6 : ^€vi^€Tai irapd rivt SCp,«vi, he lodges with one Simon.

John xix. 25 : irapd t<3 o-ravpw, near the cross.

2. With, in the estimation or power of.

§ 307.] irapd, WITH ACCUSATIVE — 7r/>09, WITH GENITIVE. 259

Matt. xix. 26 : irapa dvOpwirois .. dSvvaTov, irapd Sk 0€« iravTa hwardy

with men . . . impossible ; hut icith God all things are possible.

Rom. ii. 13: SUaiOL irapd tw 0€(5, jtist with God.

Rom. xii. 16 : (fypovLjxoi -rrop' lavrots, wise in your oion esteem.

y. With the Accusative, " to or along the side of."

1. By, near, after verbs impl}aiig motion ; also rest by an extended

object, as the sea.

Matt. xiii. 4 : cTrccre irapd rf|v 68dv, it fell along the way, or path.

Acts iv. 35 : ^tlOovv irapd tovs irdSas twv ctTrocrToXojv, they laid them at
the apostle^i^ feet.

Acts X. 6 :
<J
eo-Ttv oiKia irapd 0d\a<r(rav, wliose house is by the seaside,

2. Beside, as not coinciding with, hence contrary to.

Acts xviii. 1 3 : irapd vdp.ov, contrary to law.

Rom. i. 26 : irapd 4>v<riv, contrary to nature.

Rom. iv. 18 : irap* cXiriSa, contrary to hope.
Rom. i. 25 : irapd tov KTiVavra, instead, of the Creator ; or possibly,
rather than, as (3) (R.V.).

3. Beside, with the notion of comparison, superiority, above. '^

Luke xiii. 2 : d/xaproDAot irapd irdvxas, sinners above all.

Rom. xiv. 5 : Kpiva 17/xepav irap' T|p.€pav, esteems day above day, i.e., one
above another.
Heb. ix. 23 : KpeLTToo-t OvcrLaLs irapd ravras, with better sacrifices than
these. So i. 4, iii. 3, xi. 4, xii. 24 ; Luke iii. 13.

4. From juxtaposition arises the notion of consequence,- in the phrase

irapd TovTo, 1 Cor. xii. 15, 16, therefore.

307. '"•pds, TOWARDS.

a. With Genitive, " hitherwards."

Belonging to the part or character of,^ conducive to, in one instance

only—
^ See virep. The difference is, that vwep affirms superiority, irapd institutes
comparison, and leaves the reader to infer superiority.
" So in Latin, propter, because of, from prope, near.
' So in classical Greek, irpos /ca/coO oLvSpdi.
260 77/309, WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [§ 307.

Acts xxvii. 34 : tovto yap irpos rfjs ii|i€T€pos orwrr]pias vwdp^a^ for this is

for your health.

p. With Dative, " resting in a direction towards."

Near^ hard bi/ —
Luke xix. 37 : irpos ttJ Kardpacrci, close to the descent.

John xviii. 16 : irpos tt| Ovpq. I^w, close to the door outside.
eJohn XX. 12 : eVa irpos rfj Ke4)aXT) kol eVa irpos Tots iroo-Cv, one at the head
and the other at the feet.

Rev. i. 13 : irpos tois jxaorTois, about the breast.

These are the only undoubted instances in the New Testament. W. H. and
Rev. Text add Mark v. 11, John xx. 11, in the same sense.

y. With the Accusative, "hitherwards."

1. Unto, of literal direction.
Matt. xi. 28 : Sevre irpds (i€, co7ne unto me.

Matt, xxiii. 34: aTroa-TeWo) irpos v|i.ds 7r/30(/»;ra?, I send unto you prophets.
Luke i. 1 9 : Xakriaai irpos <r€, to speak unto thee.

1 Cor. xiii. 12 : TrpocnoTrov irpos irp6<rwirov, face to face. 2 John 12 ;

3 John 14.

2. After tlie substantive verb {constructio prcegnans), icith.

Matt. xiii. 56 : ovxt iracrai irpos T|p.ds etcrt ; are they not all loith us ?

John i. 1 : 6 Aoyos tjv irpos ^ tov ©cbv, the Word was with God.
3. Of mental direction, toicards, ayainst.

Luke xxiii. 12 : €v ^xOpa 6vt€<s irpos lavroiis, being in enmity towards

themselves ; i.e., the one with the other.
1 Thess. V. 14 : fxaKpoOvfji€LT€ irpbs iravras, be long-suffering towards all.

Acts vi. 1 : yoyyvcr/xos irpbs tovs 'Eppaiovs, a murmuring against the

Hebrews.
Col. ii. 23 : ovk kv Tt/xrJ ni/t irpbs ir\iio-p,ovV "^^ (rapK6s,not of any value
against the indulgence of thefiesh (R.V.).

4. From the general notion of mental direction arises (i) that of

estimation or proportion, in consideration of.

Matt. xix. 8 : irpbs t?|v o-KXi]poKap8£av v/xwv, in consideration of the

hardness of your hearts.

^ Very siffiiificant h(M"e as implying mofi'ni and life.

 ;

§ 309.] 7r/J09, WITJI THE ACCUSATIVE. 261

Luke xii. 47 : irpbs to eeXtijia avrov, in consideration of (in accordance

with) his will.

Rom. viii. 18: ovk a^ta . . . Trpbs t^v (AcXXovcrav 8o|av a.TroKaXv(f>6rivai^

umoorthy (of thought) ... in consideration of the (jlorij that is to he

revealed.

5. Also (ii.) that of intention, in order to, especially with the Infin-
itive

1 Cor. X. 1 1 : iypdcfir] Se irpbs vovGccriav rjfxwVy and they were loritten for
our admonition.
Matt. vi. 1 : irpbs rb 0€a0Tivai avrot?, in order to he gazed at hy them.

ON THE INTERCHANGE OP CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS.

308. Although no two prepositions are synonymous, they often
approach one another so nearly in meaning as to be apparently
interchangeable. It is sometimes important to notice the distinc-
tion at other times it appears to be of little or no importance.
;

Yet it is always safer to look for a real diiference in meaning. Compare

what has been said on the meaning of eTri in the government of the three cases.
(See also §289.)

Without entering into over-refined or needless details, it will be

sufficient here to cite some of the principal instances of real or
seeming interchange, with such brief explanations as may indicate
the general principles on which these cases are to be judged.

309. Bid, with the Genitive, is especially subject to these alternations

of expression.

1. With €K. Rom. iii. 30 : cts 6 0€O9, os StKatwcrct TreptTO/x^v €k irCo-Tews,

Kttt oLKpo/Sva-Ttav 8td Tfjs irio-T€ws, God is one, ivho ivill justify the circum-
cision hy faith, and the uncircumcision hy means of the (same) faith. In
the former case the source of the justification is more distinctly marked

in the latter, the means.

See also 2 Pet. iii. 5, etc.

2. With (XTTo. Gal. i. 1 : na{iA.05 airoaroXo^ ovk ctir* dv0pwTr«v oi'Se 8i*

dvOpwirov, Paul au ajpostie neither (originally commissioned) from men.

262 INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 309.

nor through (the intervention of) amj man; the latter particular being
added to show how absolutely independent his designation had been
even of human instrumentaliti/. The ordination to the ministry, in
general, is dirb 0€ov, but 8i' dvepci-rrwv.

3. With iv. 2 Cor. iii. 11: ct yap to KaTapyovjxevov 8id 8o|t]s, ttoAAw
/AttXAov TO jjLivov €v 8o|t), for if that which is being done away (was) by
means of (through the intervention of) glory (i.e., a glorious display),
mucJi more that ivhich abideth (is) in glory.

Other instances are in Heb. Rom. iv. 11, where ev

xi. 2 (compare with 39) ;

6.Kpo§v(TTia refers to that period in Abraham's

when, though in uncircum- life

cision, he believed but 5i' aKpo^vcrrias being ruled by irKTrevovTuv, sets forth the
;

possibility of men believing, through the state of uncircumcision, from age to

age. Rom. v. 10. "For if, being enemies, we were reconciled to God through
the (merits of the) death of his Son, much more we shall be saved by (his inter-
cession, with the teaching of) his (resurrection) life." 1 John v. 6. In 1 CJor. i. 21
the distinction is plain : in the wisdom of God, i.e., according to the wise
appointment of Him who left mankind to make the effort, the world by (did) its
wisdom, i.e., by the exercise of its reason, kiiew not God (including both failure
and perversion).

4. In Romans xi. 36 the respective meaning of ex, 8ta, ets (the starting-
point, the course, the goal), are finely marked : €^ avrov Kal 8i' avrov kol
els avrov ra iravTa, all things are from him as their author, through him
as their controller, to him as their end.

See also 2 Cor. i. 16.

Eph. iv. 6 presents a somewhat dififerent antithesis : 6 cirl irdvrwv koI

8id irdvTwv kol ev irdtriv, who is oveo" all and through all and in all. 1 Cor.
xii. 8, 9, has another combination 8id rov irveviiaros Kara rh ainh
— "the word
: . . .

TTvcvfia . . . €v Tw avrw irvevjiari, wisdom is given through the

of
Spirit; the word of knowledge according to the same Spirit; faith, in
thesame Spirit": the Spirit bestowing the gift according to His own love
and might, while He himself becomes the element of the Christian
life.

310. €K and dir<J may sometimes be interchanged without injury to

the general sense ; although the distinction is real.

Matt. vii. 1 6 : ixtJtl o-vWcyovcnv dirb dKavOwv (rTa(f)v\d<s ; surely they do

not gather hu7ic]u's (f grapes from off tlLorvx ?
 — .

§ 312.] INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. 263

Luke vi. 44 : ov yap i^ dKavOwv crvXXeyovcrt arvKa, for they do not

gathei- figs out of thoi'n-hushes.
Heb. vii. 2 : hcKar-qv dirb irdvrwv, a tithe of all. Yer. 4 : Sckcitt/v . .

€K T«v dKpo0iv(«v, a tithe out of the spoils.

1 Thess. ii. 6 : ovt€ ^tjtovvtc'S c| dvOpwirwv So^ai/, ovtc d<j)' v\imv ovt€
dir' dWwv, no?' seeking glory from men, either of you or of others.

See also Jolin xi. 1. In these passages it is immaterial Avliether the phrase
^^ out of B. thing" or ^^from a thing" be employed; but in the follo^^•ing there is
an evident distinction :

John vii. 42 in tov : (rv^pfMaroi Aaj3i'5 Kai dfro BrjOXe^/jL, out of the seed of David
and from Bethlehem.
2 Cor. ill. 5 : ovx 6'Tt d<p' iain-cSv iKauoi ea/xev Xoyiaaadai ti ws i^ airnav, not that
we are sufficient of ourselves to think anything as from ourselves.

311. €v is occasionally interchanged with a simple Dative.

So Col. ii. 13: v€Kpo\ ev^ tois irapairTwuao-i, dead in transgressions;

Eph. ii. 1 : viKpoX tois irapairTwjjLaon. So Matt. vii. 2 ev w (i^Tpo) fxerpeLTCy
:

in lohat measure ye mete Luke vi. 38 <^ yap

; : (iCTpa) yLicrpetre, with u-liat

measure ye mete. Again, Luke iii. 16: iiSan /JaTrrt^o), / baptise with
water ; so Acts i. 5, xi. 16; but ev iihan, in water, Matt. iii. 11 ; John
i. 26, 33. The expressions are evidently equivalent, however the act be
understood.
The opposites eV and e/c may in some cases be used in the same connection.
Thus, Matthew (xxii. 37) gives "the great commandment" as, Thou shalt love
the Lord thy God in {ev) all thy heart, etc. Mark (xii. 30), out of (e^) all thy
;

heart ; the love being regarded in one case as abiding in the heart, in the other
as manifested by it. The LXX. (Deut. vi. 5) has i^,

312. cU may often be interchanged with other forms of expression.

1. With TTpos. Rom. iii. 25: els 2v8€i|iv . . . ver. 26: irpos ttiv ^vSci^iv

T-^s StKaLoavvrjs avrov, 171 order to the manifestation... tending to the mani^
festatyjn of his righteousness. The former expression refers to a com-
pleted manifestation, the latter to one still in progress.
Philemon, ver. 5 : " thy love and thy faith," irpos- tov Kvpiov 'Itio-oCv

1 But W. H. omit iv.

^ W. H. read ets with wpos marg. The similarity of meaning between different
prepositions has occasioned many various readings, transcribers having caught at the
general sense without noting the finer shades of meaning.
 264 INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 312.

Kol ds irdvTas rovs ayCovs, towards the Lord Jems and unto all the
sainf.^.

This seems nothing more than a variation in expression, although by some

it isexplained on the principle of reverted parallelism
"thy love
and thy faith
towards the Lord Jesus
and to all the saints,"
i.e., love to the saints, and faith towards the Lord Jesus.

2. AVitli eVt. These instances are very frequent, and need no special
remark.

Matt. xxiv. 16 : (f>€vyeTO)crav eirl^ to. opi], let them flee up to the 7)ioun-
tains. Mark xiii. 14 : </)€vyera)o-ai/ ds to, <{pt], let them flee into the
mountains.
Rom. iii. 22: hLKaioorvvrj 0cov... els Travras /cat eirl iravras- rov<i ttlct-

revovra^, the righteousness of God unto all and upon all wIlo believe, i.e.,
" so communicated to as to abide up)on."

3. Interchanged with a simple Dative.

Matt. V. 21, 22: tvo^o<i rfj Kpio-ct . . . €i^o;(0? els ti'*|v •y^cvvav tov irvpo^,
liable to the judf/ment ... liable to (up to the point of) the Gehenna of
flre.

Rom. xi. 24: iv€KevTpi(Tdr]<; els KaWiiKaiov . . . iyKcvrpLcrOrjcrovTaL t^ iSCa,

eXaiq., thou wast grafted into a good olive tree . . . they shall be grafted on
their oivn olive.

4. The remarkable phrase, 2 Cor. iv. 17, in wliicli et? is combined

with Kara in one rhetorical expression, claims a reference here Ka0' :

vireppoXriv els vireppoXTjv, A.V., "far more exceeding," R.Y., "more and

more exceedingly," literally, according toabundance (on a scale of vastness)

unto an abundance (to the realisation of that which is immeasurable).

5. The many instances in which eU seems to be used for iv, and vice
versa, may be explained by constructio prcegnans. (See § 295, 8.) The
two prepositions are found in the same connection Matt. iv. : 18, com-
pared with Mark i. 16 ; Mark xi. 8, with Matt. xxi. 8 ; Mark xiii. 16,
with Matt. xxiv. 18.

^ W. H. e^s with lirl marg.

" W. H. omit Koi iirl irdvTai.
 ——

§ 314.] IXTEKCHANGE OF PEEPOSITIONS. 265

313. -n-epi, about (with Genitive), may be substituted for a more

definite preposition, and the converse, e.g. —
1. For 8ia (with Accusative). John x. 32 : our Lord asks, 8id irotov

avrCiv 2p7ov Ifik Xi^a^ere ; for u'hirTi work of these do ye stone me ? The
answer is, ver. 33 : irepl koXov ^p-yov ov XiBai^o^iv ae oAAa ircpl pXaar(j>T]|ilas,

for a good icork ice stone thee not, hut for hiasphemy.

2. For virip. See under vTrep and Trepi, §^ 302, 303.

Verbs signifying prayer, thanksgiving, etc., may be followed by either

indifi'erently. / pray about you, irept, "you are the subject of my
prayers ;" or, / j^i'ay for you, imip, " your welfare is the object of ray
prayers."
So in the many passages in respect of the death of Christ, which theo-
logical inquirers will do well to examine. In some, as in Gal. i. 4, the
reading of good MSS. varies between imip and irepC.

314. A Preposition governing several words in one regimen is

repeated before each of them if a distinction, severally, between

them is to be marked; but if they are combined in one notion,
the preposition is not repeated.
This rule is analogous to that respecting the repetition of the article (§ 232).
Yet the article is often repeated where the preposition is not.

Thus with the repeated preposition

Matt. xxii. 37 : ev oXrj KapSta crov, kol €V oA.7y rrj ^v)(y crov, kol cv 0X17
rrj SiavoLCL crov, with all thy heart, and icith all thy soid, and ivith all thy
undei'standinri. Compare Mark xii. 30 (e^, see § 311, note).

For other instances, see Mark vi. 4 (ev) ; Luke xxiv. 27 (ciTro) ; 1 Thess. i. 5
{iv) ; John xx. 2 [irpbs), etc.

With the preposition not repeated

John iv. 23 : cv Trvev/xart kol aXyjOeia, in sjnrit and tmth, one state of
mind, 'viewed under a twofold aspect. In manner we interpret
like
iii. 5, ii vSarog kol Trveu/xaros, of one spiritual baptism, not of two things
(as the outward and the inward). So Matt. iii. 11.

For other instances, see Luke xxi. 26 (diro); Phil. i. 15 (Sia); and very
frequently with proper names when closely connected, as Phil. i. 2, Acts
vi. 9, etc.
266 IJ^TERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 314.

Where the nouns after the preposition are connected by the dis-
junctive (vr, the preposition is always repeated; as also where they
stand in antithesis. Acts iv. 7 : cv ttolo. Svvd/xeL rj ev ttoio) ovo/xart
€7roLT](raT€ tovto v/jl€l<s; in icliat power or in what name did ye this?
John vii. 22 : ovx on ck tov Mtovcrea)? la-rivy dX\' €k twi/ TraTcpcDV, not
that it is from Moses, but from the fathers. But where the antithesis
isformed by two adjectives agreeing with the same noun, the preposition
need not be repeated. 1 Pet. i. 23 ovk Ik o-7ropas <ji0aprrrj<;, aXKh. onfiOdprov,
:

not of corruptible^ but of incorruptible seed.

Note ox Vekbs compounded with Prepositions.

For the general meaning of the Prepositions in composition, see § 147. In most
cases the preposition has a simple and evident force. The verb contains the general
notion, the preposition indicates originally some space relation (§§ 124, 288) the ;

compound verb expresses the general verbal notion limited to that definite space
relation.
Thus, ^pxofxai, to come ; e'KripxofJuii, to come in, enter. /SatVw, to go ; Trapa^aiuu, to

go beside, transgress. x^'-P^, ^o rejoice; ffvyxclpoj, to rejoice with.

The prepositions d-jro, e/c, /card have often an intensive force.
As to tlie cases after compound verbs (1) the Preposition may blend : so intimately
with the verb as to form a practically simple transitive verb governing the Accusative ;

or (2) the Preposition may retain its distinct prepositional force, when the verb
(a) is followed by the same preposition (6) is followed by a preposition of kindred
;

meaning ;
(c) is not followed by a preposition, but governs the case appropriate.

Examples : 1. axoSidu/xi, to give away from one's self, bestow, pay back ; followed
like the simple didcofii by ace. of thing, dat. of person.

2. (a) iiripdWu) (ras x^'pas) iiri riva, to lay (hands) upon. Matt. xxvi. 50.

(b) iKjSdWo} diro rivos, to cast out from, ]\Iark xvi. 9 ; Acts xiii. 50 (gene-
rally with e/c).

(c) (TVfx^dWw Tivi, to dispute with. Acts xvii. 18.

The usage of particular verbs must be gathered by observation.

 —

§ 316.] ADJECTIVES — CONCOED. 267

Chapter IV. ADJECTIVES.

315. Adjectives, as also Participles and Adjective Pronouns,

agree with their Substantives in Gender, Number, and Case
(according to the Second Concord, § 178).
An adjective may be an Epithet (attribute) or a Predicate, the rule
applying in both cases. For the adjective as predicate, see §§ 178-180.

316. Where the reference of the Adjective is plain, the Sub-

is often omitted.
stantive Compare § 199.
Matt. xi. 5 : tv<J)\oI dvafi\e7rov(TLV kol \(a\ol TrepLTraTOvartv, XcTrpol KaOa-
*
pi^ovrai KOL K<t)^oi olkovovctlv, kol vcKpol iyeipovraL kol tttwxoI cvayyeAi^ovrai
blind (men) are restored to sight and lame (men) icalk, lep'ous (men) are
cleansed and deaf (men) hear^ and dead (men) are r'aised and destitute
(men) have glad tidings brought to them.

Rom. V. 7 : /xoAts yap vn-cp SiKaCov rts aTroOavcLTaL •

vTrcp yap tov d'yaOov

Ta^a Tis KOL ToXfjia aTroOaveiv for scarcely for a righteous (man) will one
•

die, for on behalf of the good (man) one pei'chance even dares to die.
1 Cor. ii. 13 : irveuiiaTiKois irvcviiaTiKot arvyKpCvovTcs, putting together
spirituals tcith spirituals, i.e., "attaching spiritual words to spiritual
things " (Alford) ; or, "interpreting spiritual things by spiritual;" or,
" explaining spiritual things to spiritual men" (Stanley, R.V. marg.) ; or,
" adapting spiritual language to spiritual matters " (Beza).

The last example shows how an occasional ambiguity will arise. In general,
however, the application of the adjective will be perfectly plain.

Among the substantives most frequently omitted after Adjectives,

beside the words for man, tvoman, thing, with the three genders respec-
tively, are the following

X€tp, hand, as t| Sella, "the right."

yrj, land, as t| oIkovjicvt], the inhabited, "the world" (Rom. x. 18, etc.).

rjfjLipa, day, as ttj lirtovo-T], " on the morrow."

v8tup, watei', as iroTTipiov ij'vxpou, " a cup of cold " (Matt. x. 42 ; com-
pare James iii. 11.)
268 ADJECTIVES —CONCORD. [§ 316.

Acts xix. 35 is peculiar: tov Aiottctovs, of that which fell from Zeus:
not "an image," — probably a great meteoric stone.
For the neuter article, especially, as substantivising the Adjective, ?.e.,

making it an abstract noun, see § 199.

Matt. vi. 13: pv<jai r]/xa<s a-n-b tov iroviipoO, deliver us from evil. So
chap. V. 37, 39 ; John xvii. 15.^ Some with less appropriateness render
" the evil one." In 1 John ii. 13, 14, the adjective (Accusative) is
certainly masculine ; in Rom. xii. 9 (Accusative), certainly neuter ; but
as the Genitive and Dative of both genders are alike, passages like Eph.
vi. 16 ; 2 Thess. iii. 3 1 John iii. 12, v. 19, can only be determined by
;

the context.
Ill Matt. xix. 17 the best editors (W. H.) concur in the remarkable reading,
Tt fie epojTas irepl rod dyadov ; ivhy askcst thou me concerning that ivhich is
good? (R.V.) instead of why callest thou mc good? In Mark x. 18, and Luke
xviii. 19, the received reading stands without any variation.

317. The number and gender of adjectives, participles, and pro-

nouns are often determined (according to Sj-nesis, or Rational Concord)
by the sense rather than the form of their substantives. Compare
^ 1T5, 179.

Acts iii. 11 : crvveSpafxe Tras 6 Xabs . . . ^K0a[ipoi, all the iwople ran to-

gether, greatly vondering.

Acts V. 16 : o-DviypxeTo . . . TO TrX-qOos . . . <})€povT€s, K.T.A.., the multitude rariie
togethe?', bringing, etc. So Luke xix. 37, etc.

Eph. iv. 17, 18: rd ^9vtj Tre/otTraTei . . . €o-KOTwjt€voi . . . 6vt€s, dTn^XXoTpitoji^voi,

the Gentiles walk . . . hei7ig darkened, estranged.

Luke ii. 13 : ttXtjOo^ o-Tpands ovpaviov, alvovvrwv tov ®€ov koL XrydvTwv,
a imdtitude of a heavenly host, praising God and saying.

Rev. xi. 15 : eyeVovTo <})wval /xeyaXai . . . Xc'yovtcs,- there iL'ere great voices,
saying.

In Matt. xxi. 42, irapa Kvpiov iyevero avr-q Kal ^art OavfiaaT'fi, this (thing) was
from the Lord, and is ivonderfid, the feminine gender is to be explained by the

^ The R.V. in every instance takes the adjective as masc, rendering tM evil one

(Matt. V. 39, hivi tliat is evil) with evil in marg. For a discussion of the phrase in
Matt. vi. 13, see pamphlet by Canon Cook On the Revised Version of the Lord's
Prayer.
'^
W. H., Rev. Text (Received Text, X^yovaaC).
§ 319.] ADJECTIVES —CONCORD. 269

Hebrew idiom. That language, having no neuter, employs the feminine for

abstract notions. See Ps. cxviii, 23 (LXX., cxvii.).

For Synesis with Pronouns, see §§ 335, 345.

318. An Adjective referring to two or more substantives, if an

commonly agrees with the nearest, or is repeated before
epithet,
each if a predicate, is properly in the plural number, and follows
;

the rule, § 179.

Luke X. 1 : eh irdo-av ttoXlv koI tottov, info every city and place (dif-

ferent genders, agreeing with nearest).

James i. 17 : irao-a Sdcrts ojyaOiq koI irdv S<jiiprjjxa reXetov, every good and
evefi'y -perfect yift. So Mark xiii. 1 ; Acts iv. 7 (difierent genders,
repeated).

Matt. ix. 35 : OepaTreviDV irao-av voarov kol irdo-av fxaXaKcav, healing every
(kind of) disease and every (kind of) infirmity (same gender, repeated).
Matt. iv. 24 : iroiKCXais vocrois koX ^ao-ctvot?, loith divers diseases and
torments (same gender, not repeated).
When two adjectives stand as epithets to one substantive, a conjunction
generally stands between them. Thus, for "many other," the Greeks say,
"many and other." This rule, however, is not invariable in the New Testament.
John XX. 30 : iroWa fxev ovv Ka\ dWa arj/xeia, many otlier signs Oierefore.
Acts XXV. 7 : TToXXa koX /3apea aiTijofiara, inan,y heavy charges.

See also Luke iii. 18 ; and on the contrary. Acts xv. 35 (substantive omitted).

319. An Adjective is often employed in Greek where the

English idiom requires an Adverb.
Mark iv. 28 : avro|j.drr) -q yrj Kap7ro<^opet, the earth yields fruit sponta-
neously.
Luke ii. 2 avrrj a7roypa<f>rj irpwrq
: eyeVcTO, k.t.X., this enrolment was
first made^ (compare John xx. -i).

For the adverbial use of adjective forms, see § 126.

^ Other translations have been proposed to escape the chronological difficulty.

Thus, "the enrolment lirst took effect, when," etc., it having been originated some
yeai's before or *' the enrolment icas made before Quirinus was governor " (compare
;

wpuTos i. 15).
fjiov, But Dr. Zumpt has recently shown the gi'eat probability
John
of Quirinus having been governor of Syria at this early date, as well as a.d. 6,
on the deposition of Archelaus. (See Smith's " Dictionary of the Bible," Art.
" Cyrenius.") R.V. renders "this was the first enrolment made when Quirinus was
governor of Syria."
270 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. [§ 320.

THE DEGBEES OP COMPARISON.

The Comparative.

320. An Adjective in the Comparative degree usually takes the

object of comparison in the Genitive case. In English the con-
junction than is to be supplied.

See § 253, with observations and examples.

The object, as expressed by the Genitive, sometimes corresponds, not

with the precise subject of the comparison, but with the general notion
of the sentence.

Matt. V. 20 : irXciov t«v YpajifiaTcW koX #api<ratwv (your righteousness),

lit,, more than the scribes and Pharisees.

John V. 36 : cyw 8c c^w rrjv fiaprvptav [lelt^ toi) 'Iwdvvov, the witness 1

have is greater than John.

1 Cor. i. 25 : to fJLOipOV TOV ©COV 0-O(f>(OT6pOV TWV dvOpwiTWV eCTTt, K.T.X., the
foolishness of God is wiser than men, etc.

The beginner must beware of translating these genitives as possessives

governed by an understood object of the comparative "than John's (testi- :

mony)," "than men's (wisdom)," etc. This the construction will not admit.
*
The form of expression is one of the utmost generality God's foolishness is : '
' '

wiser," not only than men's wisdom, but " than men " themselves, with all that
they are or can do. So of the other passages,^

321. The comparative particle % than, may also be employed;

the object then being in the same case with the subject of com-
parison.

Luke ix. 13: ovk €l(rlv rj/juv irXetov ^ aproL 7r€VT€ koX t;(^ves 8vo, ive have
no more than five loaves and two fishes.

1 Cor. xiv. 5 : licl^uv 6 7rpocf>rjT€v(i)v ^ 6 XaXwv yXwcrcrat?, greater is he

who pi'ophesies than he who speaks with tongues.

This particle is specially employed (1) after the comparative adverb

fiaWov, more.
Acts iv. 19 : v/xoiv olkovhv |iaXXov 'f\ tov ©ecu, to hear you rather than
God.

^ Winer, § xxxv. 5,

f
§ 321.] ADJECTR'EvS —COMPARISON. 271

It may be hardly necessary to remind the learner that GeoG is in the Genitive,
not because it is the object of comparison, but because coupled by ^ with vfiwv,
Gen. after aKoveiv, by § 249, a.
So ;Matt. xviii. 13 ; John xii. 43 (ij-rrep), etc. fiaXKov ij may connect two
adjectives, as 2 Tim. iii. 4, where a Greek classical idiom, of which there is no
instance in the New Testament, would have admitted two comparatives.

(2) WTien the object of comparison is a clause.

Rom. xiii. 1 1 : ffyvrepov . . .

^^ 8t6 eirio-Tevo-ajiev, nearer (our salvation) than
ichen we believed.

(3) ^\Tien a comparative governs, as an adjective, words other than

its object.

Matt. X. 15: dvcKTorcpov lo'Tttt yrj SoSd/xcov . . . i^ tt) WXct cK€£vt|, it shall
be more tolerable for the land of Sodom (Dative, by § 279) than for that
city.

After irXcfwv, TrActov, more^ and IXdTTwv, eXarTov, less^ the particle may
be omitted before numerals.
Acts xxiv. 11 : ov irXcCovs ilcrL fxot iwUpai 8d>S€Ka, k.t.X., lit., there are to
me no more days (than) twelve. So iv. 22, xxiii. 13.
Matt. xxvi. 53 : irXeCw SwScKa Xryidivas, more than twelve legions.
In some of these passages the Received Text has ^.

A peculiar comparative is occasionally made by jidXXov after the

positive.

Mark ix. 42 : koXov Icttlv avrio jidXXov, k.t.X., it is better for him.
Acts XX. 35 : (uiKdpidv iarrt (idXXov 8i8oVat i^ Xafi/Sdveiv, it is more blessed
to give than to receive.

Sometimes ^aXXov is omitted.

Matt, xviii. 8, 9 : KaXov croi Icrnv ilcTiXOiiv ... '^ ... pX-qOrivai, it is better

for thee to enter ... than ... to he cast', Ut., " it is good ... rather than."
So Mark ix. 43-47. Compare also Luke xviii. 14 (rec, but W. H. read
Trap* iKilvov ; 306, y, 3).
§
Hence also a comparative notion may be expressed by ^ after a noun
or verb.

Luke XV. 7 : x^^Lpo, ... k-rrl hi ... ^ irrl evcvT/Kovra cwca, there shall be joy
. . . over one . . . (rather) than over ninety-nine.
Luke xvii. 2 Xuo-ltcXci avrw : . . . •i^ Tva crKarSaAtcrry, it is profitable for
him ... (rather) than that he should offend.
272 ADJECTIVES —COMPAKISON. [§ 321.

1 Cor. xiv. 1 9 : GeXw TreWe \6yovs tw vol /xov XaXrjaai ...^ /xvptov^ Xoyovs
iv yXcotro-T/, / would (rather) speak Jive words with my understanding . .

than ten thousand loords in a tongue.

322. For the Comparative as strengthened by the prepositions v-n-ip

and Trapa, see §§ 303, 306.

Other emphatic modes of comparison are specified, § 47.

323. A Comparative is often found without any expressed

object of comparison.
a. The object may be supplied by the context, as Acts xviii. 26 : dKpi-
P€crT€pov arrru) iiiOevTO rrjv bSov tov ©eov, thei/ expounded to him the way
of God more accurately, i.e., than he had known it before (ver. 25).
Compare John xix. 11 ; Eom. xv. 15; 1 Cor. xii. 31 ; Phil. ii. 28;
Heb. ii. 1, etc. So in correlative expressions, Rom. ix. 12 ; Heb. i. 4.

b. Comparative may be a familiar phrase, as ot irXeCoves, the

The
;"
majority, Acts xix. 32 1 Cor. xv. 6 ; 2 Cor. ii. 6 (R.V., " the many
;

A. v., wrongly, "many"), etc.

c. The object is to be supplied mentally, according to the general sense

of the passage.^

Matt, xviii. 1 : rtg apa ixcL^wv iorrlv iv rfj /Jao-tXcia twv ovpavoiv ; who
then (of us) is greater (than the rest) in the kingdom of heaven ?

So Markix. 34 ; Luke ix. 46, xxii. 24. In Matt. xi. 11, 6 /juKporepos may be
rendered, he that is less than all others, i.e., " lie that is least," as A.V. (R.V.,
he that is but little), or he that is less than John (in fame and outward honour),
i.e., Christ himself; the sentiment being that of John i. 15.-

The following examples further illustrate this usage of the compara-

tive :

John xiii. 27 : that thou doest^ do more quickly, rdxiov, i.e., than thou
seemest disposed to do.
Acts xvii. 21 : hear sortie neicer thing, n
to tell or to Kaivorcpov, than
the last things that they had heard, " the later news."

Acts xvii. 22: ye men of Athens, I perceive that in all things ye are
more addicted to loorship, 8€io-i8ai|iov€(rTepovs, i.e., than heathen nations

^
See Winer, § 35, 4.
- This latter is the interpretation of many of the Fathers, but is disallowed by
most modern critics. (Sec Alford's note.)
§ 324.] ADJECTIVES —COMPARISON. 273

generally (not merely, like them, worshipping recognised deities, but

even the " unknown ").i
Acts xxiv. 22 : the matters pertaming to the wai/ (the Christian doc-

trine) inore accurate!//, dKptpto-Tcpov, than to need detailed information. .

Acts XXV. 10 : to the Jeics I have done no wrong, as also thou knoicest
better, koXXiov, than thou choosest to confess. Alford compares our
current phrase, to know better. So 2 Tim. i. 18, better even than I do.
Acts xxvii. 13 : they steered closer by Crete, do-<rov TrapeXeyovro tijv

KprjTTjVy i.e., than they had done before ; ver. 8.

On Eph. iv. 9, see § 259.

Phil. i. 12 : rather, |xdXXov, /or the furtherance of the gospel than for
its hindrance as we feared.

1 Tim. iii. come unto thee more quicMy, raxtov, than to

14: hoping to
make such injunctions needful. (W. H.,cv raxn.) Comp. Heb. xiii. 19, 23.
2 Tim. i. 17: he sought me out more diligently, cnrovSaioTcpov, than if I
had not been in captivity. (W. H., a-TrovBaiws.)
2 Pet. i. 19 : kol l)(0^€v pePaiorepov rov TrpotfirjTLKOv \6yov, lit., and v:e

have more sure the prophetic ward, we hold that word with a surer
i.e.,

confidence even than before, inasmuch as we received a confirmation of

itstestimony " upon the holy mount."
2 Pet. ii. 11 : angels which are greater in 'power and might, neL^oves,

either greater than other angels, ^ as the archangel, Jude 9, or (with more
probability) greater than these presumptuous, self-willed men.^
Fromthe above explanations it Avill be seen that the Comparative in such cases
isnot to be explained as "put for the Superlative," or as expressing the notions
of " too " or " very," but retains its true and proper force.

Tlie Superlative.

324. The Superlative denotes the highest quality of any kind,

and may be used when the objects of comparison are not explijcitly
intimated.
2 Pet. i. 4 : to. TLfua kol (ifywrra eVayycX/iara, the precious and greatest
promises, or as A.Y. happily, "exceeding great and precious.""*

^ "Too superstitious," therefore, misses the true meaning both of the word and
the grammatical form; R.Y. has scnncivJuit superstiticms (marg. religious).
2 Huther. 3 Winer, Alford, R.Y., etc.
* R.Y. {his precious and exceeding great promises) well renders the force of the
article, but unnecessarily transposes the adjectives.
T
274 ADJECTIVES —THE SUPERLATIVE. [§ 324.

Ill Luke i. 3 we read Kpario-rc 0€o<^tA.€, most excellent Theox)hilus ; in

Acts xxiii. 26, xxiv. 3, the same title is applied to Felix, and in xxvi. 25
to Festus. It was simply a designation of rank.

325. For the Superlative followed by a partitive Genitive, see

§ 262. An emphatic Superlative is made by the addition of irdvrwv, Mark
xii. 28, the first commandment of all (not iracroiv, as Received Text).
The particle tis (JJn, 6irws), with a Superlative, means " in as great
a degree as possible." Acts xvii. 15 : Xva ws T6.\\.frro. IkOma-i irpos avrov,
ihat they would come unto him as speedily as ])ossihle.

326. The Superlative 7rpioTo<;, firsts may be used where but two
things are compared.
Acts i. 1 : Toi/ jxkv irpwTov koyov liroL-qcra^yjv^ the first (former) treatise I
made. So John xix. 32 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 30 ;^ Heb. x. 9.

So the expression irpwrds /aou, before me^ John i. 15, 30 ; irpwros {in<3v,

before you, xv. 18. The Genitive is analogous to the Genitive after the
Comparative. On Luke ii. 2 see note, § 319.

327. In Hebrew there two principal ways of expressing the

are
Superlative :
— (i.) by the use of the preposition in^ among, after tlie

simple adjective, as Prov. xxx. 30, a lion, strong among beasts, i.e., the
strongest of beasts ;2 (ii.) by the repetition of an adjective or noun in the

Genitive relation, as in the common appellation of the holiest part of the

Temple, the holy of holies^ and Gen. ix. 25, a servant of servants, i.e.,

utterly enslaved.^
The New Testament has instances of both these idioms :
— (i.) Luke
i. 42 : 6vXoYTi|i4ni oru \v yvva.\iji, blessed art thou among v)omen, i.e., most
blessed, (ii.) Heb. ix. 3 : d-yia d^Uv, the holy of holies. Compare 1 Tim.
vi. 15 ; Rev. xix. 16.
Neither of these constructions is confined to the Hebrew, althougli their
occurrence in the New Testament may fairly be assigned to Hebrew influence.

1 But perhaps here the mental comparison might be, net simply with tlie second
speaker, but with the rest of the assembly.
2 Compare the use of a Hebrew preposition to give the force of the comparative

(§ 253).
3 There is yet a third method, i.e., the emphatic use of the adjective with the I
article, as Gen. ix. 24, his son, the young, i.e., his youngest. But perhaps there is

no example of this in t\\Q New Testament, though see Luke x. 42,

 —

§ 327.] ADJECTIVES —THE NUMERALS. 275

Other so-called Hebraisms must be rejected.^ Thus, Acts vii. 20, darelos r^j
QecS, must not be rendered, as in A.Y., R.Y., "exceeding fair," but beautiful

heforc God, in His eyes. Much less must the Divine name be taken as giving a
simple superlative force in such passages as Luke i. 15; 2 Cor. i. 12 Col. iL 19 ; ;

Rev. XV. 2, etc,

NUMERALS.
328. The Cardinal ds, besides its ordinary use, is employed in
the following ways :

i. As an indefinite pronoun, ^ nearly equal to rt?.

Matt. viii. 19 : cts ypa/x/xarcvs ctTrev avrcp, a scribe said to him.

Matt. xxvi. 69 : irpoo-rjXOev avT<2 ^£a TraLSia-Krjy there came to him a maid-
servant. 4
John vi. 9 : lo-rt TraiSapLov tv wSc, there is a lad here. (W. H. omit ev.)

So Matt, xviii. 24, xix. 16 Mark x. 17, xii. 42 Rev. viii. 13, etc. Often
; ;

with a Genitive following, as Matt. xvi. 14 Mark v. 22. Sometimes with e/c, ;

as Matt. xxii. 35, xxvii. 48. Occasionally, eh ns combined, as Luke xxii, 50.

ii. For the correlatives, one . . . the othe)\ cts is sometimes employed in
both clauses.
Matt. XX. 21 ; Mark x. 37 : cts Ik Sc^twv koX ets e^ rucuvv/xwv crov, one on
thy Hght hand, and the other on thy left.

Matt. xxiv. 40, xxvii. 38 ; John xx. 12 ; Gal. iv. 22. But 5\Xoj, ^repos, are
more frequently used in the second clause, as Matt. vi. 24 ; Rev. xvii. 1 0.

iii. For not one (ovSci'?, /A'/ySct'?), the New Testament writers, following
the Hebrew idiom, sometimes say one . . . not, combining the negative

with the predicate.

Matt. X. 29 : tv i^ avrwv ov TrccrctTac, one of the7n shall not fall, i.e., not
one of them shall fall. So chap. v. 18 ; Luke xii. 6.

But the adjective Tra?, every, is still more frequently employed in such
expressions. Thus, " everything is not ..." means " nothing is."
Luke i. 37 : ovk aSwarrja-eL trapa tw ©cu^ irdv prj/j-a, everything shall not
he impossible loith God, i.e., nothing shall be impossible.

^ See Winer and others.

^ The indefinite article in the European languages is but a form of the numeral
"one." We say " a or an ; " we should rather say " an or a," the longer being the
original form, and an = Scottish ane = oiu. So French, un ; German, dn, etc.
' W. H. read rod GeoD. So R.V., tw woi'd from God shall he void of power^
276 ADJECTIVES —THE NUMERALS. [§ 328.

So Matt. xxiv. 22 ; Mark xiii. 20; John iii. Rom. iii.

15, 16, vi. 39,xii. 46 ;

20 ; 1 Cor. i. 29 ; Gal. ii. 16 ; 1 John ii. 21 The idiom is

; Rev. xviii. 22.
frequent in Hebrew ;
^^
forget not all his bemfits " (Ps. ciii. 2) of course means
"forget not a7iy.'' But when ov is connected with 7ra5, the meaning is simply

not all. So Matt. vii. 21, ov ttSs 6 Xeyu}^ ... eiaeXeOarerai, not every one ... shall
colter.Had the reading been irds 6 \eyuv . . . ovk elaeXeucreTai, it would have
meant "no one ... shall enter." See ]\Iatt. xix. 11; 1 Cor. xv. 39 ; Rom. x. 16:
ov xavres vir-qKovaav, not all obeyed. iravres ovx virrjKovaau would have been
**
they all disobeyed."

iv. Instead of the ordinal 7rpu)To<?, the cardinal ct? is used in the design-
ation of the first day of the week (another Hebraism).
Matt, xxviii. 1 : ctg jiCav o-ajBpaTwv, lit., toioards the day one of the
week.

So Mark xvi. 2 (but ver. 9, TrpojTri) ; Luke xxiv. 1 ; John xx. 1, 19 ; Acts
XX. 7 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 2. In Titus iii. 10 ; Rev. vi. 1, 3, ix. 12, we find one and the
second as correlatives.

329. The particles ws, wo-cC, irov, about, etc., are used with numerals
adverhiallyj i.e., without affecting the case. Matt. xiv. 21 ; Mark v. 13 ;

Rom. iv. 19, etc. So with cirdvo), above, which in other connections is

followed by a Genitive.

1 Cor, XV. 6 : (jh^Otj eirdvo) 'Tr€VTaKO(riois d8€\4>ois, he loas seen by above

five hundred brethren. So Mark xiv. 5 (where the Genitive is that of
price).

330. The names of measures and coins may be omitted after numeral
designations. Acts xix. 19 : dp-yvpiov [ivpidSas irtvTc (five myiiads), fifty
thousands of silver, i.e., Spa)(jj.wv = denarii. Elsewhere the plural dp^vpia
(pieces of silver) is used, as Matt. xxvi. 16, etc.

331. The Greeks used the phrase " himself third," for " he and
two others," avrbs rpCros. So avTos T^rapros, he and three othei's, etc.

Sometimes avVo? was omitted. This idiom occurs once in the New
Testament. 2 Pet. ii. 5 : ^y^oov Nwc . . . c^vAa^cv, he preserved Noahy
and seven others.

The Distributive Numerals have been sufficiently explained, § 5.

§ 333.] PRONOUNS —PERSONAL 277

Chapter V. PEOXOUXS. •

The Personal Pronouns.

332. The rules respecting the cases of nouns, and employment

their
with prepositions, for the most part apply to the personal and other
substantive Pronouns also.
For the oblique cases of the third personal pronoun, in both numbers
and all genders, forms of the adjective pronoun avros are employed.
For the other uses of avrb^, see § 335.

The Nominative of the personal pronoun, when the subject of a

verb, is omitted, except where emphasis is required. (See § 169.)

333. The Genitive of the personal pronoun is very frequently-

used in a possessive sense ; the adjective possessive pronoun being
comparatively rare. (See § 255.)

Matt. vi. 9, 10 : ndrcp T|fi<3v 6 Iv rots ovpavotg, ayLacrBrfTia to Svofid <rov,

fXBdToi T| pao-iXeia <rov, k.t.X., Our Fathei' ichich art in heaven, Itallowed
be thy name, etc.

Matt. vii. 3 : rt 8c ^Xeircts to Kap^os rb ev t<3 6cf>6a\fi^ tov d8€X4>ov o-ov

(personal pronoun), rrjv he ev t<3 o-« 64)9aX(i,w (adjective possessive) Sokov
ov Karavoels ; and ichy seest thou the mote in the eye of thy brothe)', but
discernest not the beam in thins oivn eye ?

The only possessive for the third person in the New Testament is the
Genitive of avros.
Conversely, an objective genitive may be expressed by the possessive
adjective pronoun.

Luke xxii. 19 ; 1 Cor. xi. 25 : tovto Trotctrc ets r^v i\L^v dvdfivi]o-iv, this
do for my remembrance, i.e., "for remembrance of me." So Rom. xi. 31,
throiigh mercy shown to you; xv. 4 ; 1 Cor. xv. 31, ^^ my glorying in,

you; xvi. 17, the lack of you.

278 PRONOUNS —PERSONAL. [§ 333.

John XV. 9 : /xetj/arc iv tt) 0,7011171 rf] 6|ifi> ctbidG in my love, has some-
times been taken in a similar sense ;but it seems better to take the
pronoun there as a true possessive. (Compare § 269.)
In one striking passage, Eph. iii. 18, there seems the omission of a
genitive pronoun, '' ichat is the breadth?" etc., i.e., "of the love of
Christ."!

334. Occasionally, in a lengthened sentence, a seemingly redundant

personal pronoun is found. ^

Matt. Vlll. 1 : KaTaf3dvTL Sk avra oltto tov 6pov<s yKoXovOrjaav avrw 6)(Xol
TToAAoi, and ivhen he had come down from the moimtain, great multitudes
followed him.

Acts vii. 21 : iKXiBivTa Se avrbv di/ctXaro avrbv y] OxryaTrjp ^apaw, and

when he teas cast out, the daughter of Pharaoh took him up.

Where the object of a verb is expressed in tbe nominative absolutely, for the
sake of emphasis, its place in the sentence is supplied by a pronoun. (See § 242.)
Rev. iii. 12 : 6 vt/cwv voirjao} avrbv <tt6\ov, he tliat overcometh, I will nmke him
a ^nllar.

335. As means very, self it is used in apposition

avTos properly
with nouns of both numbers and of all cases and genders, as well
as with the personal pronouns of the first and second persons.
When employed in the nominative for the third person, it is always
emphatic, 3 i.e., not he simply, but he himself.

Rom. vii. 25 : avrbs e-yw ... SovXcvo), I myself serve.

John iv. 42 : avrol yap aK-qKoafxiv, for we ourselves have heard.

1 Thess. iv. 9 : avrol yap vpeis OeoStSaKTOL ia-re, for ye yourselves are
taught by God.

(!) The pronoun of the third person may be used for

reflexive
that of the other persons where no ambiguity would be likely to
occur.

1 See Ellicott.
' W. H., however, in both passages cited read a Gen. Abs., Kard^avTos S^ airrov^
(KTcdevTo^ 5k avTOv.
^ See Winer.
 . .

§ 335 (3).] pRo^^ouNS— auT09. 279

a. Singular (never for ifxavrov).

John xviii. 34 :
a<f)' eavrovi (tv tovto Xcycts; say est thou this of thyself ?

So in some other passages where the reading varies ; as in quotations of Lev.

xix. 18 (Matt. xix. 19 ; Mark xii. 31 ; Luke x. 27 ; Rom. xiii. 9, where the
approved reading is ceavrbv).

h. Plural (more frequently).

2 Cor. iii, 1 : ap^ofxiOa ttoXlv lavrovs crvvLcrTavav ; are ice beginning
again to commend ourselves?

2 Cor. xiii. 5 : eavrovs -rrupat^ir^. . . lavTovs SoKt/xa^cre, try yourselves . .

test yourselves.

So in the frequent phrase 'irpoWx€T€ lavrots, or pXcVcTc lavrovs, taJie heed

to yourselves. Luke xii. 1, xvii. 3, xxi. 34 ; Acts v. 35 : and Mark
xiii. 9 ; 2 John 8.

For the use of auros with the Article, see § 222.

(2) In respect of gender and number, avros often follows the rule
of rational concord (synesis). (See § 317, and for a similar usage with
the relative pronoun, compare § 345.)

a. Gender.
Matt, xxviii. 19 : fxaOrp-eva-aTe Tvavra tol ?0vt], fSaTTTL^ovTiS avrovs, disciple
all the nations, baptising them.

Col. ii. 15: aTreKSuo'a/xevos ras dp\ds ^at ras i|ov(rias ... Opiajx^cvcra^
avTovs, having stripped away from himself the principalities and the
powers . . . having triumphed over them.
Mark v. 41 : Kparr/cra? tt}? xupof; tov TraiSiov, A.ey€t avT^, having talieil

hold of the child's hand^ he saith to her.

h. Number.
Matt. i. 21 : crwo-ct tov Xabv avrov airo tCjv ap,apTL(jiV avroiv, he will save
his people from their sins.

3 John 9 : typa\f/d Tt np €KKXT]<ria, oAX' 6 <^tXo7rp(OT€uo>f avT«v AtoTp€(/>7;9,

K.T.X., I icrote somewhat to the church, but Diotrephes who loves pre-
eminence over them.
So in reference to o)(\o^, ttXtjOo^, etc.

(3) This pronoun may also refer to a substantive implied in some

previous word or phrase.

^ W. H. have aeavrov even here —a reading not commonly accepted.

280 PRONOUNS avTO^ ; POSSESSIVE. [§ 335.

Matt. xix. 13 : ot 8e fiaOrjTal lircTLfxricrav avrois, hut the disciples rebuked

tJiem, i.e., those that brought the children ; Mark x. 13.

John viii. 44 : \f/€v(rTrj<s ccrrt koI 6 Trarrfp avTov, he is a liar and the
father of it, i.e., of lying.

So Matt. iv. 23 ; Acts viii. 5; 2 Cor. v. 19, 'Ho them" i.e., the inhabitants
of the world. Rom. ii. 26, the concrete implied in the abstract, aKpo^varia.
Eph. V. 12, "by those who walk in the darkness," or (Ellicott) •*
the children of
disobedience," ver. 6.

Possessive Pronouns.

336. On the possessive use of the Genitive of Personal Pronouns,

and the employment of the Possessives as equivalent to the objective
genitive, see § 333. For the Article with possessive pronouns, see
§ 223,
The various use of the Possessives as Adjectives, epithetic and predi-
cative, may be exemplified by the following phrases :

John V. 30 : 17 KpiVts i\ €^^ ScKaCa ia-Tiv, my judgment is jlist.

Kom. X. 1 : 17 cvSoKia rfjs €|xt]s KapSta?, tJte desire (goodwill) of my
heart.

Phil. iii. 9 : fxij t^inv k\L^v StKaioo-vvT/v rr)v Ik vojxov, not having a right-
eousness of my own, ichich is from law.

John xvii. 10 to. ejAa : iravTa era ccrTt, kol to. tra. i|id, 7ni7ie are all thine,
and thine are (all) mine.
The possessive adjective pronoun appears to have a greater emphasis than
the genitive of the personal. Thus 1 John ii. 2, he is (lie propitiation for our
sins, rjfjiuu, a general declaration ; but in the next clause this is thrown into
strong antithesis not for ours onhj, bid, etc. ; and here, accordingly, the ad-
jective pronoun is employed, ov irepi tQv ij/jLeTipuiu di fiovov.

The genitive of a noun is sometimes found in apposition with the

genitive notion in the possessive pronoun.

1 Cor. xvi. 21 :
-nJ €|i^ x*'P^ IlavXov, hy my hand (that is) of me Paul.
Col iv. 18; 2 Thess. iii. 17.

337. For a possessive pronoun, entirely unemphatic, the Article

is often employed (see § 215), and on the other hand an emphatic pos-
sessive is expressed by the Adjective tStos, oivn.
 ;

§ 340.] PRONOUNS—DEMONSTRATIVE. 281

John i. 41 : €vpi(TKtL ovrov irpiiirov tov aScX^ov tov ICSiov 2t/xcova, this

man Jindeth first his own brother Simon.

See also Matt. ix.1, xxv. 15 Luke vi. 44; John

; iv. 44, v. 18: ''said
that God was his own father ;" Acts xx. 28 Gal. vi. 9 ; : 'Hts own season;"
also 1 Tim. ii. 6 ; Titus i. 3 ; 2 Pet. i. 20, and many other passages.^

Demonstrative Pronouns.

338. The demonstratives ovto<;, avr?/, tovto, this (the nearer, connected
with the second person), and ckcIvo?, €K€LV7jy cxctvo, that (the more remote,
connected with the third person), with the correlatives (see § 62), obey
the laws of adjectival concord.
For the use of the demonstratives with the article, see § 220. ovtos
generally precedes its substantive, tKeTyos follows ; but to this rule there are
many exceptions.

Luke xviii. 14 : KarifSrj olros ScStKaiw/xcvo? cts tov oTkov avrov Trap'

iK€Lvov, this man (the latter) icejit down Jtcstifi£d to his house rather than
that (the former).

339. The demonstrative oSc, this ("this, here," connected with the
first person), is found only Luke x. 39 ; James iv. 13 ; and in the phrase
ToSc X^Y**-! i^^u^ (these things) saith^ Acts xxi. 11, and the beginnings of
the letters to the seven churches. Rev. ii., iii.

o5e marks a closer relation than oh-o^. In Greek narrative generally, IXe^e
TttOra is, he said this that precedes ; iXe^e rdde, Tie said this that follows.
There are a few other passages in which the Received Text has ode, but where
the best editors (so W. H.) adopt other readings, as Acts xv. 23 2 Cor. xii. 19 ;

Luke xvi. 25, where we should read, here he is comforted (R.V.).

340. In some passages, (n}To<: seems to refer to the remoter subject.

Acts viii. 26 : aiirr] eo-Ttv ^frqfios, it (the road, not the city of Gaza,) is
desei't.

2 John 7 o^^s larnv 6 TrXavos kol 6 avri-xpicTo^, this is

: the deceive)'
and the antichrist, i.e., he who bears the character described at the com-
mencement of the verse.

* Winer notes the following passages as without emphasis (but query?): Matt.
xxii. 5, xxv. 14 Titus ii. 9 John i. 41 Eph. v. 22 ; Titus ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iii 1, 5.
; ; j
282 PRONOUNS —DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 340.

So cKctvos may refer to the nearer.

John vii. 45 : kol cittoi/ avrots ckcivoi, and they (the chief priests and
Pharisees just mentioned) said to theniy the officers spoken of before.

employed as an emphatic demonstrative, and sometimes on that

iKe7vos is
account seems appUed to the nearer antecedent. Thus 2 Cor. viii. 9 Ye :

knoio the grace of the Lord Jesus Christy that for your sahes he beca'oic poor,
rich as he was, that ye, through His (e/cetVou) poverty might he enriched. So
Titus iii. 7. Compare Acts iii. 13.
2 Tim. ii, 26 is difficult : e^coyprjfx^voi utt' airrou, els to eKcivov 9e\rjiJ.a. The two
pronouns can hardly refer to the same subject (compare iii. 9) ; and it seems best
to connect the clause beginning with etj with dvavrjxpoxnv, taking t^coyfyrj/xivoi vir

avTov as parenthetical. " aud that they tnay return to soberness out of
Ellicott :

the snare of the devil {though holden captive by him) to do His tvill," i.e., God's.
For other explanations, see Alford, Ellicott, etc. R.V. refers the avrov back to
"the Lord's servant " (ver. 24), and the tKdvov to God.

341. A Demonstrative often repeats the notion already expressed

by a substantive. The pronoun thus occasionally seems redundant, but
perhaps was always intended to convey some additional emphasis.

Matt. xiii. 20-23 : 6 Se ... o-Trapet'? ... ofirds €o-rtv, that tvhich teas sown
... this is he, etc.

So X. 22, xiii. 38, xv. 11, xxvi. 23 ; John vi. 46 ; John i. 18, 33 [cKelvos),
V. 11, x. 1, etc.
1 Cor, vi, 4, TovTovs ; Rom. vii. 10 : compare Acts i. 22 ; 1 Cor. v. 5 ; 2 Cor.
xii. 2.

The Demonstrative itself may be repeated in a sentence. John vi. 42 : ovx

odrhs €<TTiv 'Irjaovs 6 vibs 'laj(r^0 ... ttws odv Xe7ei oSros ;^ /c.r.X. , Is not this Jesus,
tJie son of Joseph ? ... how then saith this man ? etc. (See also Acts vii. 35-38.)

342. A neuter singular Demonstrative sometimes stands as equi-

valent to a clause.
Acts xxiv. 14 : 6/xoAoyto 8c tovto o-ot, iJn, k.t.A,., hut this I confess to thee,

that, etc.

So xxvi. 16 ; Eph. iv. 17, etc.

The neuter plural may be employed for a single object of thought.

John XV. 17 : ravra ivriXXofxai v/xtv, I'va aYairaTC dXX-^Xor^s, this I com-
mand you, that ye love one another. (But see R.V. and § 384, a, 1.)

* But \V. H. read ttcJj vvv X^ei 6'Tt.

§ 345.] PRONOUNS—KELATIVE. 283

3 John 4 : fxeiloTcpav tovtwv ovk c^w yapav (W. H., ;(apiv), a more
surpassing joy than this I have not. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 11: koX Tavrd
Ttv€s 5t€, and this were some of you^ or " such in some degree were you."
(See §§ 180, 352, iii.)

In Heb. xi, 12, the phrase koL ravra, k.t.\., must be rendered, and that, too,

of Mm who was as good tis dead. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 8, Received Text.

In Rom. xiii. 11 ; 1 Cor. vi. 6 ; Phil. i. 28 ; 3 John 5 (W.H.), kuI tovto is

similarly resumptive.
On Eph. ii. 8, rrj y&p xciptTt icrre ceaua-fxivoi 5ia TrtVrews '
Kai tovto ovk e^ vfiwv,
K.T.X., see § 403, d.

For the ellipsis of the Demonstrative before the Relative, see § 347.

The Eelative Pronoun.

343. The Relative Pronoim agrees with its Antecedent in gender,

number, and person. This rule is termed the TJurd Concord.
The clause in which the Relative stands is called the Relative Clause, and is

Adjectival (see § 190), as qualifying the Antecedent.

The Case of the Relative is determined by the structure of its own

clause.

Matt. ii. 9 : 6 acrrrip 8v etSov Iv tq i.vaToXy Trporjyev avrovSi the star

which they saw in the East, guided them forward.

Rom. ii. 6 : tov ®€ov, 8s aTroSwo-et, K.T.X., of Gody who will recompense,

etc.

344. A clause, or clauses, may form a neuter Antecedent to the

Relative. So with the Demonstrative (see § 342).
Acts xi. 29, 30 : Zpicrav eKacrro^ avVoiv els SiaKoviav Tr€'|x\|/ai rots Karoi-
Kova-iv €v TT) *Iou8a£q. a8€X<J>ois' 8 kol iTToi-qarav, they determined, each of
them, to send, to the brethren dwelling in Judcea for (their) relief ; ichich
they also did.

See also Gal. ii. 10 Col. i. 29 ; Heb. v. 11, ; etc. ; and with plural relative,
Acts xxiv. 18 {h ah), xxvi. 12 ; Col. ii. 22.

345. Synesis, or rational concord, is very frequent with the

Relative. (See § 317.)
2S4 PRONOUNS—RELATIVE. [§ 345.

a. Gender.
Acts XV. 17 : Travra to, ^Ovt] €<|>' oOs, ac.t.X., all the Gentiles, upon wliom,
etc. So xxvi. 17; Gal. iv. 19; 2 John 1.

b. Number.
Phil. ii. 15 : ^evcds CKoXtas /cat 8L€<TTpaiijX€vr]<;y iv ois ^atVccr^c, k.t.X., o/
a crooked and perverted generation^ among icliom ye appear, etc.

A plural may
be implied in a singular phrase ; hence sometimes a plural
relative wth Acts xv. 36 Kara irbXiv iroiaav, iv ah,
a singular antecedent. :

through every city, in which {cities). So 2 Peter hi. 1.

On the contrary, a singular may be impHed in a plural phrase. Acts xxiv, 11;
TjfxipaL dwdcKa d<p' ijs, twelve days from that oiiichich ; Phil. iii. 20: oipavoh ...

t'^ o5. But here e^ ov may be adverbially taken, whence.

In John i. 42, 6' agi-ees with 6pofia, name, implied.

346. The Relative is often drawn, or **

attracted,'* out of its
proper gender or case by some other word.
Attraction is of two kinds.
a. Attraction of the Relative to the Predicate. —The Relative Subject
may take the gender of its own Predicate rather than that of the
Antecedent.
Mark xv. 16 : eo-cu tt]s avXijs ^ eo-rt irpaiTcopiov, ivithin the hall which is

the Proitorium.

Gal. iii. 16 : t<S xnrip^a.rl crov, 6s i(TTL Xpio-rds, to thy seed, ichich is
Christ.

Eph. vi. 17: t^v fxa^aipav rov Trvev/xaTO?, o ecrrt prjfxa 0eov, the stvord
of the Spirit, which is the word of God.
Col. i. 27 : Tov |jiv<rTr]pCov tovtov ... iJs^ icrn Xpitrrbs iv vfxlv, k.t.X., of

this mystery . . . ichich is Christ in you, etc. This text explains the
meaning of 1 Tim. iii. 1 6, provided this reading be adopted ; con-
fessedly greatis the mystery of godliness, Ss^ c<|>avcp(o0Ti kv o-apKl, k.t.X.,

who icas manifested in flesh, i.e., the Mystery is Christ.

h.Attraction of the Relative to the Antecedent. Relative which —A

would properly, by the rules of Its own clause, be in the Accusa-
tive case, may conform to a Genitive or Dative Antecedent.

» W. H., 6 with 5s marg.

- So W, H., and R.V. (He who was manifested, etc.).
§ 347.] PE02>"0UNS — RELATIVE. 285

Luke iii. 19 : Trept iravrwv »v iiroLrjcre Trovrjpwv, for all the evil things

ivhich he did.

John iv. 14 : e/c rov ilSaros o5 eyw Scocro) airrw, of the water which I Will
give to him.

Acts i. 1 : TTcpt irdvTwv wv r^p^aro 6 'IrycroOs Trotetv t€ Kat 8i8a(7K€tv, COTl-

cerning all things ichich Jesus began both to do and to teach.

Luke ii. 20 : liri irdo-iv ols ^Kovo-av, for all things ichich they heard.

Acts ii. 22 : Swdfico-t /cat r^pao-i /cat <rr]|j.€iois, ots eTroLrjcre, k.t.X., by mighty
deeds and wonders, and signs ichich (God) wrought, etc.

So in a great number of passages. The Kelative is occasionally

"attracted" out of other cases than the Accusative, See Acts i. 22;
2 Cor. i. 4.

Sometimes the Antecedent is put in the case of the Kelative. This is

called inverse attraction.

In other words, the noun to which the Relative belongs is understood in the
antecedent clause, and expressed in the relative, instead of being (as usual)
expressed in the former and understood in the latter.

Mark vi. 16 : 8v eya> air€K€(f>d\Lcra 'Iwdvi^v, ovTO<i yy epOrj, this John

whom I beheaded is raised, instead of ov ... ovro<; 'luidwr}';.

Rom. vi. 17 vTrrjKovcraTe ... cts 8v 7rape860r)T€ rvirov 8tSa^^9, ye obeyed

:

the fanu of doctrine into ichich ye icere delivered, for vtttjk ... t<Z rvino
... CIS ov.

See also Luke xii. 48 ; Acts xxi. 16, xxvi. 7 ; 1 Cor, x. 16, etc. ; and the
repeated quotation from Ps. cxviii. 22 : Xidov 6v dvedodfjiaaav ... odros iyevrfdr],
K.T.X., Matt. xxi. 42; Mark xii. 10; Luke xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (in this last
passage W. H. have XiOos).

347. When the Antecedent would be a demonstrative pronoun,

it is very often omitted, being implied in the Eelative.
So in English, for "he gave me that which I asked for," we say, "he gave me
what I asked for;" the relative form "what" implying both words. But m
Greek the same form is used whether the demonstrative antecedent is expressed
or implied.

Matt. X. 27 : 8 Xcyw vpuv €v rfj (tkotlo. ... Kat 8 cts to o*s d/covcrc, what
I say to you in the darkness . . . and what ye hear (into, § 298, 8) in the ear.

The Relative and the implied Antecedent may be in different cases.

286 PKONOUNS —RELATIVE. [§ 347.

Luke vii. 47 : a Sk oXtyov d^c'erat, oXtyov dyaTra, but (he) to idiom little

is forgiven^ loveth little.

John iv. 18 : 8v ex^'? ov'*^ ^ort o-ou avrip, (he) whom thou now host is not
thy husband.
Heb. V. 8 : e/xaOev a(f> wv e-rraOe ty]v vnaKorjv, he learned obedience from
those things ichich he stiffered.

348. The pronoun avro? is occasionally inserted in apposition with

the Relative, as a kind of complement to it.

This is a Hebrew idiom ; the relative in that language being indeclinable, and
requiring to be complemented by a pronoun.

Matt. iii. 12 : ol to tttvov iv rrj x^tpi avrov, tvhos&fan is in his hand.

Mark vii. 25 : % cT^c to OvyaTpiov avTfjs Trvevfia aKaOapTOVy ivhose little

daughter had an unclean spirit.

Acts XV. 17 : l<^ ofts liriKeKX-qTaL to ovo/xd jxov lir ovtovs, upon whom
my name has been called; Amos ix. 12, LXX.
So also Mark i. 7 ; Luke iii. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 24 (not W. H.), etc.

349. The Compound Relative, 6o-tis, is strictly indefinite. Thus,

Trds 8s oLKovei, every one ivho Jiears, would denote " every one who is now
hearing;" but Trds JJo-ns d/covct, as Matt. vii. 24, is " every one, whoever
he be that hears."
Matt. V. 39 : (Jo-ns paTri^ct . . . 8<rTts ayyapevcrcLy ivhosoever smites . . . who-
soever shall impress.
Luke X. 35 : iJ,Tt av Trpoo-SaTravTyo-r;?, ivhatsoever thou shall have spent
more (for mood see § 380). John ii. 5, xiv. 13, xv. 16, etc.^
From the indefinite meaning of Stms arises a suggestion of
character^ kindj reason, as marking the class to which this Relative
is applied.
For example, oort?, and not os, is used in the following passages :

Matt. vii. 15 : "beware of the false prophets, who come to you," i.e.^

such as come.
Matt. vii. 24, 26 "a wise man who built his house upon the rock, a
:

foolish man who built his house upon the sand;" in each case the kind
of man who did what is described.
* The instances of 8, n, neuter, are very few ; and there is much variation of
reading, 8ti, conj., being often preferred (as, e.g., in 2 Cor. iii. 14).
 — —

§350,ii.] PRONOUNS relative : interrogative. 287

Matt. XXV. 1 :
" ten virgins iclio having taken their lamps went forth to
meet the bridegroom," i.e.^ who acted in accordance with their function.

In this way the compound Relative acquires a kind of logical force.

Rom. vi. 2 :
" we who died to sin, how shall we longer live therein!" z.e.,

inasmur.h as we died. Compare Phil. iv. 3.

With proper names, 6(xti^ is frequently preferred to os. See Luke 11. 4, ix. 30,
xxiii. 19 ; John viii. 53 ; Acts viii. 15, xvi. 12 (on the attraction, see § 346),
xvii. 10, xxviii. 18 Rom. xvi. 6, 12 Gal. iv. 26 2 Tim. ii. 18. In
; ; ; all these
passages there is an implied reference to character, position, calling;.

Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns.

350-. The interrogative pronoun tIs; ri; is used in various ways.

i. Simply, with or without a Substantive, or with an Adjective used
substantively
Nominative. Matt. iii. 7 : tis vTreSet^cv vfxiv ; u'lio waimed you ?

Genitive. Matt. xxii. 20 : rlvos rj etKwr avrr] kol rj i7nypa(j)rj ; tvhose is

this image and supei'scription ?

Dative. Luke xii. 20 : a Se rfToifxao-a^;, tIvi lorat ; now the riches'

which thou didst ainass, for ichom shall they he ?

Accusative. Matt. v. 46, 47 : rfva fxia-Oov ^x^'''^ > ••• tC irepLcra-ov TrotctTc;

what reward have ye ? ... what do ye over and above ?

With Prepositions. Matt. v. 1 3 : Iv t£vi dAto-^rjo-eTat ; icherewith shall

it he salted ?

Matt. ix. 1 1 : 8id ti ^ /xera ruiv tcXcovcov kol afxaprwXwv iaOUc ; ichere-

fore eateth he with the publicans and sinners ? So Matt. xiv. 31 ; Mark
xiv. 4 ; John xiii. 28.

ii. Elliptically, with im, that (" that what may happen ?•" or where-
foi-e ?)—
Matt. ix. 4: Xva tC ivOvfieLcrOe -rrovrjpd ; wherefore are ye imagining
malignant things ?

1 Cor. X. 29 : Xva ri yap rj iXevOepLa fxov KpiveraL ; for wherefore is my

liberty judged, 1

In quotations from the Old Testament, some editors (not W. H.) have \va.r[
;

Matt, xxvii. 46 ; Acts iv. 25, vii. 26.

^ Some editors (not W, H. ) read 5tar/.

288 PRONOUNS — THE INTERROGATIVE rt?. [§ 350, iiL

iii. Adverbially, neuter, tl ; why? (or as an exclamation, how/) tl on

hoiv (is it) that ? —
Matt. vi. 28 : irepl cVSv/xaros rC jxepLfivaTi ; why are ye anxious about
raiment 1

So vii. 3, viii. 26, xvi. 8, etc.

Matt. vii. 14 (Lachmann, etc.) : tI crrivr] rj irvXr) ! how narrow is the

gate ! But this rendering is doubtful, as well as the reading itself

(\V. H., In).

Luke ii. 49 : ti oti c^t/tcitc /itc ; hoxo (is it) that ye loere seeking me ?

See also Acts v. 4, 9.

iv. In alternative questions, where the classical idiom requires .TroTcpos,

a, ov ; whethei' of the two ? the New Testament employs rts

Matt. ix. 5 : ri yap iariv €VK07ro)T€pov ; for luhich of the two is

easier ?

Matt. xxi. 31 : t£s iK twv Svo ciroir/o'C to 6iK-qp.a rov Trarpog; which of ^

the tivo did the ivill of his father- ?

So xxiii. 17, 19, xxvii. 17, 21 ; 1 Cor. iv. 21 ; Phil. i. 22 (see § 382, c).

351. The simple interrogative, rts, ti, is also used in indirect ques-
tions, and after verbs of knowing, thinking, etc., in objective sentences.

See § 382, d. The classic Greek idiom requires dans, 6,ti, though not without
frequent exceptions.

Matt. XX. 22 : ovk otSaTc ri aiTcto-^c, ye knoio not what ye ash.

Luke vi. 47 : vttoSci^w vpXv tCvi icrrXv o/Aotos •
/ will shew you to whom
he is like.

John xviii. 21 : iptiiTrjaov tovs (XKi/KooTas ri ikaXrja-a avrots •

a>sk those

toho have heard what I said to them.

So in many other passages.

352. The from the interrogative to the indefinite pronoun

transition
can easily be traced. It comes to almost the same thing whether we
say, " What man is there among you who will give his child a stone for
bread ?" or, " Is there any man among you who will ?" etc.

Thus the only difference between the forms of the two is in accent
and the position in the sentence.
 — —

§ 352, iii.] PRONOUNS-^THE INDEFINITE Tt9. 289

The indefinite, rts, rt, may be used (i.) simply, with or without a
Substantive expressed

Luke i. 5 : kyeviTo . . . tepevs tis, there teas ... a certain priest. So, very
often, AvOpwiros ns, a certain man.
Luke xxii. 35 : /xtJ tivos vo-Tcp^o-arc ; did ye lack anything 1

Acts iii. 5 : TrpoaSoKwv ti Trap avrojv Xa^cir, expecting to receive some-

tlting from them.
Luke xvii. 12 : u(T^p\oix.€vov avrov ets nva Kwfir]v, as he was entering
into a cert a ill village.

Acts XV. 36 : jjura 8e rivas rjfiepaSj and after certain days.

Phil. iii. 15 : koX ct ti cTipm^ cf)pov€iT€, and if in anytliing ye he other-

wise minded (for Ace, see § 283). So ppaxv ti, for some shmi time,
Heb. ii. 7 ;
y.ipo% n, in some paH, partly, 1 Cor. xi. 18.

With a Genitive following

1 Cor. vi. 1 : roXjxa tis vfJL(Dv ; dares any one of you ?

Acts iv. 32 : ti twi/ virapxovTwv avrw, aiiy of his goods.

So V. 15, etc. "With airb, Luke xvi. 30 ; with iK, Heb. iii. 13.

(ii.) Emphatically; "somebody important," " something great," "any-

thing "—

Acts V. 36 : Xiymv eTvat Tiva eairroi^, saying that lie was somebody.
Compare viii. 9.

Gal. vi. 3 : ct yap 8oKet rts civat Tt p.y]h\v wv, (^pcvaTrara eavrov, for if
any one thinks he is anything, being nothing, he deceives himself.

See also 1 Cor. iii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 6 aud (of things) 1 Cor. x. 19 ; Gal. vi. 15.
Compare Heb. x. 27.

(iii.) " A kind of"—

James i. 18 : cts to ctvat r]fx.a<s aTrap^^r/v tiv(i, tJiat we might he a kind of
jirstfruits.

See also (in the opinion of some interpreters ; not R.V.) 1 Cor. vi. 11, such
in some degree were you.^ But see § 342.

i
Wahl.
U
290 PRONOUNS —THE INDEFINITE TL<;. [§ 352, iv.

(iv.) "With numbers, " some," approximately (or perhaps simply

redundant)

Luke vii. 19 : 7r/30(rKou\co-a/Acvos Svo rivas twv /xa^T/Ttuv, having called

some two of his disciples.

Acts xxiii. 23 : 7rpo(TKa\€(TdfX€vo9 Bvo rivds twv €KaTovdp)(wv, having

called some two of the centurions.
These are the only instances for the construction in Acts xix. 14
; is different.
For efy, one, instead of rts, and in conjunction with it, see § 328, i.

(v.) In alternative expressions we find both rtvcs ... rtves and rts ...

€T€po<; —
Phil. i. 1 5 : nv^s fxev /cat Sta c}>06vov . . . rivh Sk /cat Sc evSoKtav, some
indeed even from envy ... hut others also from goodioill.

Compare Luke ix. 7, 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 24.

1 Cor. iii. 4 : orav yap Xiyrj ns ..^ ^repos Se, for lohen one saith ... and
another.

(vi.) The negatives of rt? are ovBcCs, firiSci's, no one. For their con-
struction, and for the Hebraistic negative, ov Tras, see § 328, iii.

The compounds, oxjtls, firiTis, are not found in the New Testament. The latter,
in John iv. 33 (Rec.) should be /xr) ris (W. H.). For the interrogative /MrjTi,
see § 370.
 ;

§ 354] THE VERB —VOICE. 291

Chapter VI. THE VERB.

VOICE.

353. The distinction of " voices," in respect oifonn (Active, Middle,

and Passive), belongs to Etymology. The Verb in Syntax is considered
as transitive, intransitive, reflexive, or passive.
Transitive verbs may be of Active or Middle form. A transitive

Active verb may in its middle voice retain the transitive meaning with
certain modifications, or may become intransitive or reflexive. The
passive sense is conveyed by the Passive form.
Intransitive, or " neuter " verbs, in like manner, may be Active or
Middle in form.

The Active Voice.

354. An intransitive Active verb sometimes takes a transitive

1
meaning.

Matt. V. 45 : tov yXtov avrov dvarcXXti, he causes his sun to arise

dvareXXo) being generally to arise, as 2 Pet. i. 19, etc.

Matt, xxvii. 57 : €|i*®^'^^°'^ (Rec.) is intransitive, he was a disciple.

"W. H., however, read €|jLa9i]T€v0T] (though with e/xa^rjrcvo-e marg.) ; and
elsewhere the verb is transitive, chap. xiii. 52, xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21.

av|dvw, to grow, is usually intransitive. Matt. vi. 28 ; but in 1 Cor.

iii.6, 7, 2 Cor. ix. 10, is transitive. The Englisli verb is similarly used
(" wheat grows ;" " he grows wheat"). So of many others.
<rTp^<}><D, to turn, generally intransitive in the Middle, once in the Active
also. Acts vii. 42.

^ may often mark the influence of

In the change of intransitive to transitive, we
the Hebrew, language attaches to neuter verbs a causative conjugation
wliieh
(Hiphil). In the LXX., both the neuter and the Hiphil are often rendered by the
simple verb. So 1 Kings i. 43, e^acxiXevae, he made (Solomon) king ; although
l^aaiXfvu} properly means to be a king.
292 THE VERB — ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. [§ 354.

Some verbs vary between the transitive and intransitive meaning,

according to form. Thus, Vo-ttjjjli, a regularly transitive or causative verb,
has (with some few others) an intransitive sense in the Perfect (with
Pluperfect) and the Second Aorist. (See § 108, 3.) &70), to lead, has
imperative, A-yc, go ; subjunctive, &7«jjl€v, let us go. The intransitive
imperative only occurs in the New Testament interjectionally, go to!
(James iv. 13, v. 1).
The verb ?x*^j becomes neuter before an adverb, through the
i^ have,
ellipsis of a pronominal object, "to liace one's self in such a manner;"
hence " to be so," the adverb being often translated as an adjective.
Matt. iv. 24 : rov^ kukms ^xo^^as (those having themselves evilly), those
who icere ill; Mark v. 23 : to Bvyarpiov fxov ccrxaTws 'dxa, my little

daughter is at an extremity. So Acts xv. 36 : Trais ^x^^^^s how they do.

(See also John xi. 17; Acts vii. 1 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5, etc.). So in the parti-
ciple, TO vvv ^xov, the present time (that which has itself now).
For variations in other verbs, see Vocabulary.

The Middle Voice.

355. As compared with the Active Voice, the Middle generally
expresses one of three things:

1. Action upon one's self: the refiejcive sense.

2. Action for one's self: the appropriative sense.

3. Action, as caused or permitted : the causative sense. ^

1. The reflexive sense of the Middle is comparatively rare ; reflexive

pronouns being usually employed with the Active.
Act. ^latt. viii. 25 : ij^cipav avVoi/, they aroused him.
Mid. Matt. xxvi. 46 : €7€tp€<r0€, aywftci/, rise, hi us go.

Act. 1 Pet. iii. 10 (LXX.) : iravo-aTw ttjv yXwcrcrav diro KaKov. let him
refrain his tongue from evil.

Mid. 1 Cor. xiii. 8: ctre yXwcrcrat, Travo-oyrai, whether {^xave, be) tongues
tht'y f<]iall cease.

Soe also Matt, xxvii. 5 ; Mark vii. 4 , Luke xiii. 29 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1. In tliis

sense the Active is transitive, the ]\Ii(ldie intransitive.

* Dr. Donaldson, § 432. (1) may be called the Accusative middle ; (2) the Dative
middle. (See 2.
§ 855.] THE YEEB —ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 293

2. As the reflexive sense is equivalent to tlie Active with the imme-

diate pronominal Object (Ace), so the apjiropriative sense corresponds
with the Active and the remote Object (Dat). Thus, Luke xvi. 9,

cavTots iroi^o-aTc might have been fully expressed by the one word,
iroii^o-ao-Oc.

Act. John xvi. 24 : oXnln koX X-qij/ea-Oc, ask^ and ye shall receive.

j\Iid. Matt. XX. 22 : ovk otSare tl alrcio-Oc, ye hnoio not what ye ask (for
yourselves).

Act. Acts xxii. 20 : <|)vXd(ro-wv to. IfidTLa, watching the clothes (of
Stephen's murderers).
Mid. 2 Tim. iv. 15 : ov kol a-v <|>\»Xd(r<rov, of whom do thou also heicare,
i.e., watch him with a view to thy own safety.

Act. and Mid. 2 Pet. i. 10 : o-TrovSaorarc /Jc^atav v^dv ttjv kXtjo-lv kol
€K\oyrjv 'iroi€i<r9ai *
ravra yap irotovvrcs, k.t.X., give diligence to make your
calling and election sure for yourselves ; for doing these things, etc.

For other instances of the IMidcUe of ttoi^cj, see Luke v. 33, xiii. 22 ; Acts
i. 1, XX. 24, XXV. 17, xxvii. 18 ; Rom. i. 9, xiii. 14, xv. 26 ; Epli. iv, 16 ; Phil.
i. 4 ; Heb. i. 3, and a few other passages.

In this sense, the Middle is transitive, retaining the direct object of

the verb. Hence the difficulty of always distinguishing between the.

Active and the Middle signification ; as to perform an action, and to

perform it for one's self are notions that may approach so as almost to
coincide. Compare, for instance, Trapcixc (Acts xvi. 16) with Tra.piC\iro

(xix. The same object, Ipyaa-iav,

24). gain, follows in both cases.
Demetrius had undoubtedly a more direct interest in his gains than the
damsel in hers.

It is doubtful whether the Middle is ever to he taken as simply conveying an

intensive force. Compare John i. 5, tlie darkness cmnprchended it not (act.,
KUT^Xa^ev), with Eph. iii. 18, that ye may comprelcend (mid., KaraXa^ia-dai.) vjifh
what is the breadth, etc. The appropriative sense is here very decided.
all saints,
The careful student may note the middle verbs in ilatt. xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3,
LXX.) John xiii, 10 (compared with the rest of the passage) Matt, vi. 17
; ; ;

Luke x. 42 Acts ii. 39, v. 2, 13 ix. 39 (eViSet/cj'uyaej'at)

; Rom. iii. 25 Acts
; ; ;

XX. 28 ; Gal. iv. 10 ; Eph. v. 16 ; Phil, i, 22 ; 2 Thess, iii. 14, and many other

passages. In 1 Tim, iii. 13 the dative pronoun is added to the Middle verb.

3. The causative Middle expresses the interest of the Subject in the

result, and yet implies a mediate agency :
" to allow a thing to be done,"
294 THE VERB —MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICE. [§ 355.

"to have it done," " to provide for its being done." Here the Middle
partakes more nearly of the nature of the Passive.^

Luke ii. 5 : diroYpd\(/a<r0at avv Mapia/x, to get enrolled tvith Mary.

1 Cor. X. 2 : cpa-n-TCo-avTOj^ they got baptised. Compare Mark vii. 4,

and especially Acts xxii. 16.

Hence, too, in some words a change of signification ; both voices

taking the accusative Object. dTroStSco/At, to give off or a way; diro8(8o|iat,
mid., to sell, i.e.,
off' auuy for one^s self, i.e., to get money by the
give or
act. Compare Matt, xviii. 26-34 with Acts v. 8, vii. 9. Sam^w, to
horroiv ; Savci^ojiai, to lend., Matt. v. 42 Luke vi. 34, 35. ;

The causative meaning in some cases becomes reciprocal: "to do...

and cause others to do."
John ix. 22 : (twcWOcivto ot *IovSatot, the Jews had agreed amongst
themselves.

See also Matt. v. 40 and 1 Cor. vi. 1 : Kplvecdai, to contend at law; Rom. iii. 4:
KoX viK-qa-rjs ev Tt^ Kpiveadai <re, and that thou mayest overcome when thou comcst
into trial, i.e., with the chikh'en of men ; the image being that of two parties to
a suit —not, when thou judgest, as A.V., Ps. K. 4, nor ivlieii thou art judged, as
in the NewTestament quotation.'^
For the special meanings of different verbs the Vocabulary must be consulted.
The threefold division now given covers most of the relations of the Middle with
the Active.

The Passive Voice.

356. As other languages, the direct Object

in of the Active
verb becomes the Subject of the Passive.
But in Greek, the remoter Object of the Active may also become
the Subject of the Passive.
Genitive. Acts xxii. 30 : KarTi-yopcirai vtto tCjv *IovSaiojv, he is accused
hy the Jews (for the gen. with Kar-qyopia), see § 250).

Dative. Rom. iii. 2 : i'in<rrtvQr]<rav ra \6yia Tov @€ov, they were entrusted
with the oracles of God.
So 1 Cor. ix. 17 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Thess. ii. 4, etc.

^ ; Germ., sich lasscn.

Lat., curare So "Winer, § xxxviii. 3
'"
W.
H. liave e^avTiaOrjaav in marg
^ TheR.V. retains A.V. in O.T. passage, but in Romans lias correctly ivhen thou

comest into judgment.

 —

§ 358.] THE VERB —PASSIVE VOICE. 295

Heb. xi. 2 : iiu>.prvpy]Qr](rav ol Trpeo-^irrcpot, the elders obtained a good

report (lit., were attested to).

So Acts XVI. 2, xxii. 12, etc.

Heb. viii. 5 : Ka^w? K€)(jpr\Y.o.T\.<nt».\. Mcdvo-tJ?, according as Moses has been

divinely commanded.
For the dative after the Active of such verbs, see § 278, a.

Where the Active governs two Accusatives (pei-son and thing), or

a Dative of the person and an Accusative of the thing, the Passive
may take also the Accusative of the thing. (See § 284.)
2 Thess. ii. 15 : KparctTe ras TrapaSoorets ds iStSaxOiiTc, hold fast the
instructions which ye ivere taught.

See also Mark xvi. 5 ; Acts xviii. 25, etc., for verbs of the former class.
For verbs of the latter class, note Rom. iii. 2, quoted above, with the con-
nected passages.

357. After Passive verbs, the agent is marked by viro with the
Genitive ; occasionally by other prepositions, as ciTro, Ik, irapa, Trpos )

sometimes by the Dative without a preposition. (See §§ 280 e, 304.)

358. As many forms Middle and Passive are alike, it is some-of the
times decide which
difficult to intended. In considering this question, is

regard must chiefly be had to the usage of the particular verbs, and to
the general construction of the sentence.
The following is a selection of instances :

Matt. xi. 5 : Trrwxot evayycXitovrai, poor men preach the gospel, or have
the gospel preached to tliem. The verb may be middle or passive,^ but
the sense of the passage seems decisively for the latter.
Rom. iii. 9 : t'l ovv ; •irpo€xoH.€0a ; ivltat then? are we superior? (mid.),
or, are we surpassed ? (pass.). The context requires the former meaning.
Some, however (see Dr. Yauglian), prefer the passive, but render are
we prefeiTed ? a sense without authority elsewhere. For other sug-
gested renderings, see Alford's note. The R.V. has are loe in wm'se case
than they ? with marg. do we excuse ourselves ?

* For the middle, see Luke i. 19, ii. 10, iii. 18, iv. 18, 43, and many other passages;
for the passive (\nth a personal subject), Heb. iv. 2, 6. The passive is also found,
Luke xvi. 16; Gal. i. 11; 1 Pet. i. 25, iv. 6, the subject being that which was
preached.
296 THE VERB —MOODS AND TENSES. [§ 358.

1 Cor. i. 2 : cvv Tract rots eiriKaXovp,evoL9 to ovofia tov Kvpt'ov, 7cith all
iclio call upon the name of the Lord, or tvho are called bf/ the name. The
usage of the word clearly pronounces for the former. Compare Acts
vii. 59, ix. 14, 21 ; Rom. x. 13 (Acts ii. 21), compared with ver. 14 ;

1 Pet. i. 17, etc. Acts xv. 17 (from LXX., Amos ix. 12) is quite
different.

2 Cor. ii. 10 : koL yap eyw b Kex.dpi(r|iai, ct tl Kcxapia-jiai, 8t* v/Act?. Some
render the verb here as pass., I have been forgiven; but ;)(api^o/xat nowhere
else means " to be forgiven," and the ordinary rendering gives a sense

harmonious with the context.

Eph. vi. 10 : evSwajtova-Gc iv Kvpiu). This verb is always passive in
the New Testament : ^'be .strengthened." (See Ellicott.)

THE MOODS AND TENSES.

359. The Indicative Mood is objective, describing that which
is; the Subjunctive and Optative are subjective, describing that
which is conceived to be. Hence the various usee of the three
Moods in independent and subordinate sentences.

The Indicative.

The Indicative Mood is used in declaration^ whether affirmative or

negative, and in interrogation.
ft

-360. As the force of the Tenses will be best seen in the first instance
by their use in the Indicative, an account of them is here introduced.
See the Table of Tenses, § 65. Let it be remembered that Tense
expresses both time and state. Time is present, past, and future ;

state is imperfect, perfect, and indefinite.

The Tenses to be considered are
1. The present imperfect;, or "Present."

2. The past imperfect, or " Imperfect."

3. The future indefinite, or "Future."
4. The past indefinite, or " Aorist."
5. The present perfect, or " Perfect."

6. The past perfect, or "Pluperfect."

 ;

§ 361, c] THE TENSES — PRESENT. 297

The future imperfect, the present indefinite, and the future perfect,
are expressed in other ways.
The three past tenses are termed " historical tenses," the others
"principal tenses."

The Present Tense.

361. The present expresses a
«. state or action as now existing
as Xryoj ifXLv, I say unto you.

Matt. iii. 10 : 17 a^ivq Trpos T7]v pt^av rdv SevSpcov Kcirai, the axe is lyinff
at the root of the trees.

John iii. 36 : 6 Trta-Tevwv cts rov vlov ixi\. t^iarjv alwvLOVy he that heHevetli
on the Son hath life eternal.

Matt. XXV. 8 : at Xa/xTraSe? yjixdv o-p€vvvvTai, mir lamps are going out
(R.Y.); not "are gone out," as A.Y.
Gal. i. 6 : Oavfxd^ui ort ovtu) Ta;(€(u? (i€TaTi0€(rO€, I marvel that ye are so
soon changing.
h. It is also used to denote an habitual or usual act.

Matt. vi. 2 : wcrvrcp 61 vTroKpiTal iroiovo-iv, as the hypocrites do.

Matt. vii. 8 : ttSs 6 atrwv Xajipdvei, koX o t^-qrCiv €vpio-K6i, every one icho
asJiS receives, and he tcho seeks Ji7ids.

c. In vivid narration the Present is employed of past time

(Historic Present).
]Matt. iii. 1 : iv Se rais rj/JLipaL^; cKciVat? irapa-yCvcTai 'Iwavv^?, a7ld in those

days cometh Jolin.

John i. 29 : t^ iiravptov pXeirci tov ^Irjcrovv ... kol Xfyti, 0)1 the next day
he seeth Jesus, and saith.
Sometimes the Historic Present is ueed with Aorists in the same
narration.

!Mark v. 14, 15: ?<|)V'yov koL airriyyctXav . . . /cat ^X0ov . . . Kat ^pxovrai . . , Kai
0€wpov(rt ... Kat €<|>opTiOi]<rav, and
they fed, related ... and came ... and they
come ... and he!told ... and they feared.
Variations may here be noted in the comparison of different evangehsts in the
same narrative. Thus, ^latt. xxi. 23, xxii. 23, we read, irpoa-TjXdoi', they came to
him ; Mark xi. 27, xii. 18, ^pxovrai, therj comc.^ Compare also Matt. xxiv. 40 ;

Luke xvii. 34.

^ As a rule, the narrations of Mark are more vivid than those of the other
evansjehsts.
298 THE TENSES —PRESENT. [§ 361, i.

d. The Present is employed to express certain futurity, as when

we say, To-morrow is Sunday."
**

Matt. xxvi. 2 : ^cra Svo rjfxepa'i to Traor^a Yivcrai, kol 6 vto9 tov avOpwTrov
irapo.StSoTai, after two days is the passover, and the Son of man is betrayed'.

Luke xix. 8 : ra rj/xLcna fiov twv virap-^ovrtav Kvpie tois Trrto^^ot? 8C86)p.i,

the half of my goo(h. Lord, I give to the poor; not "I am in the habit
of giving" now; but "I will give," immediately.

John XX. 17 : dvapatvw, I ascend. Compare xvi. 16.

John xxi. 23 : on 6 /xaOr}T7]<: e/ccti^o? ovk diro0vTi<rK€t, that that disciple

dieth not, i.e., is now and will be exempt from death.
1 Cor. XV. 26 : lo-xaro? l^Opo^ KarapYciTai 6 6dvaTo<;, death the last
enemy is destroyed, or more lit., is being destroyed. In this case, and in
some others, the notion of futurity is perhaps associated with that of the
process now being conducted.
The verb meaning, carries with the present tense a
^pxofj.ai, because of its

future reference. coming.'' "lam

(See Luke xii. 54
So in English, 1 Cor. ;

xiii. 11.) So Matt. xvii. 11 'HXt'as kpx^rai, Elijah is coming; and especially
:

John xiv. 3 irdXiv ^pxofJ.ai Kai 7rapa\7ji/'0/iat vfids, I ani coming again, and ivill
:

receive you. 1 Cor. xvi. 5 : Ma/ce5oj/taj/ 5iepxofJ.aL must be rendered, / (am about
to) pass through Macedonia, not "I am passing through," which would be
contrary to The participle of this verb, 6 €px6/j,€vos, tJie coming one, is a
fact.

frequent the ]\lessiah (see § 210), and in the Revelation denotes the
title of

eternal self-existence of Deity, who wast, and art, and art to corne, lit., "who
comest."
On the other hand, the verb, ^/cw, in the present, has a perfect signification:
/ am come. Luke xv. 27 : 6 ddeX^os aov iJKei., thy brother is come ; John ii. 4 ;

Heb. X. 9 (not simply " Lo, I come," but Lo, I am come) ; 1 John v. 20.

The Impeefect Tense.

362. a. The Imperfect expresses what was in progress at a
definite past time ; as iK-qpva-a-i to cvayyeA. lov, he loas 2>r('ac/ting the
gospel ; tpairrCtovTo, they were being baptised
b. Hence the Imperfect may refer to an action not continuous,
but statedly repeated; also to anything customary. •

Acts iii. 2 : ov IrL^ow KaO' rjfxipav, ichom they used to lay day by day.
Mark xv. 6 : Kara h\ kopTrfv onreXv^v avTo7<s Iva SicTfXLOVj a7id at each
passover he used to release to them one prisoner.
See also 1 Cor. xiii. 11
§ 362, c] THE TENSES —IMPERFECT. 299

c. The Imperfect should be carefully distinguished from the

Aorist, or simple Past, although the A.V. generally confuses the two
tenses.^ The R.Y. is far more exact, and the use of the Parallel X.T.
(A.y. and R.V.) will often suggest instructive references to the Greek.
So Luke xxiv. 32 : icas not our liPaH bu/minr/ withm us (cliile he was
talking icith us hy the way, and openina to us the scriptures ?

Matt. ii. 4 : Herod was inquiring of the priests and scribes, not once
for all, but repeatedly and when they had
; replied, he asceiiained
(Aorist, one act) of the Magi what they had seen.

Luke xiv. 7 : how they were selecting the chief seats.

John V. 16 : tlie Jews icere persecuting Jesus, and icere seeking to kill

him, because he was doing (used to do) these things.

Acts xvi. 4 : as they icei'e going through the cities they were delivering
the decrees to the churches.

Matt. iv. 11 : ayycAot irpoo-i^XOov kol Sitjkovovv avnZ, angels came and
icere rainistering to him.

Matt. xiii. 8 : other seed fell (^ireo-cv) upon the good ground, and was
yielding (cSiSov) fruit.

Matt. XXV. 5 : they all fell asleep (cvvo-ralav), and icere slumher^ijig
(€Kd0€v8ov).

Mark vii. 35 : Ids ears icere opened (8n]votx0'no-av),- and the bond of his
tongue teas loosed (cXvOi]), and he teas speaking (eXdXct) plainly.

Luke viii. 23 : a whirlwind came down (KaWpi]), and they were filling
(«rvv€ir\T]povvTo) and were in danger (eKiv8vv€vov).

1 Cor. iii. 6 : / planted, Apollos (catered, God was giving the increase.
The transitory acts of human teachers are expressed by Aorists, the con-
tinual bestowal of Divine grace by the Imperfect. So, 1 Pet. ii. 23, 24,
we have three Imperfects to denote continual and repeated acts ; but an
Aorist to denote an act (" he bare our sins") once for all.

See further, Matt. xxi. 8-11; Mark xi. 18 ; John vii. 14, xi. 13, xx. 3-5 ;

* It may be noted, however, that the absence of any tine Imperfect in English, and
the necessity of employing a somewhat cumbrous circumlocution, often makes it

dilticult to render the Greek tense without loss of elegance, and has led to the loose
eiiiploynient of the English preterite,
* W. H. read fjvoiyijffay.
300 THE TENSES — IMPERFECT. [§ 362, f.

Acts xi. 6 ; 1 23 {the night on which he was being betrayed)

Cor. x. 3, 4, xi. ;

Gal. ii. 12 ; and many other passages.

James ii. 22,
In parallel passages we occasionally find different tenses. Compare Matt. xix.
13 and ^lark x. 13, where the one writer regards the action as momentary, the
other as continuous. Some common verbs, as \^7w, are generally used in the
Imperfect rather than in the Aorist.

d. The Imperfect sometimes denotes an inchoative act, i.e., one

begun, but not carried out.

Matt. iii. ,14 : SickwXvcv avrov, he teas hindering him, i.e., was doing so
until checked by our Lord's words.
Luke i. 59 : koX eKoXow avTo . . . Za;(aptai/, and they began to call him
Zacharias.
Luke V. 6 : Sit^p^-ywro Se to Blktvov avTiov, and their nH was hreahing,
began to give way.
Luke xxiv. 27 : SnipfiTjvcvcv,^ began to interpret, entered upon the
explanation, rather than " expounded " all, as A.Y.
Heb. xi. 17 : tov fxovoyevrj irpo<rc(|>cp€v, he was offering wp his only
begotten, when the angel's voice arrested him.

e. From the inchoative sense arises a peculiar usage, in which the

Imperfect of verbs expressing desire seems to take a kind of
potential sense : / v:}as icishing, i.e., " I was on the point of wishing,"
nearly equivalent to " I could (almost) wish," " I should like."
Acts XXV. 22 : €Pov\o)jli]v koI auro? tov avOpwTrov aKOvcraL, I should lilce

also to hear the man myself.

Sometimes the wish is one which cannot be carried out.

Gal. iv. 20 : <j0€\ov Se irapuvai -rrpo^ v/xas a/art, / could wish to be present

with youjiist now.

Or there may be a moral impossibility in the way.
Kom. ix. 3 : iivxoh^IV yap dvdOeixa tivai avro? cyw aTro tov XpicrTOi) vTrtp
Toiv d8€X<j>u}v fiov, I could even myself pray to be anathema from Christ on
behalf of my brethren.

Some critics take this as a simple imperfect, referring to the apostle's un-
converted state. "There was a time when even I myself (as you do now) begged
to be anathema from Christ;" this l)eing a parenthesis, and the words "on
behalf of my brethren" being attached to verse 2. The exposition deserves

* W. H. and Rev. Text read 5n)pfi-oyev<r€v.

55 363, h.'\ thp: tenses —future. 301

attention as an attempt to evade a moral difficulty, but is a forced and im-

probable one.

/*. A compound (or "resolved") Imperfect (imperf. of ci/xt', and

pros. part, of the verb) throws emphasis on the continuity of the
action. See instances in § 394, i. 1.

For the Imperfect in conditional expressions, see § 383.

The Futube Tense.

363. a- The Future expresses, in general, indefinite futurity ;

as Swo-b), / will give; and is employed in prophecies, promises, etc.

Matt. V. 5 : aurot irapaKXTjOTjo-ovTau^ 6o in all the Beatitudes, save

vers. 3, 10.

Pliil. iii. 21 : o? fi.€Ta<rxTjfiaTt<r6i to (rw/xa Trjs Ta7reti/<ocrccus rjfiijjv, who icill

tramform the body of our humiiiation.

Rom. vi. 14 : afiaprla yap vfiiov ov Kvpicvo-cij /or sin shall not have
dominion over you. Isot a command, but a promise.
2 John 3 : ^crrai /xc^' rjiiiliv xap!-?, grace shall he icith us, as R.Y.

In Matt, xxvii. 4, 24, Acts xviii. 15, the second person future has the force
of a threat :
^^
you shall see to Vtat.'' But compare next paragraph.

h. Commands are often expressed by the Future second person

(by the third, if speaking of the person commanded).
Matt. i. 21 : koX^o-cis to ovo/ta avVov 'Ir/crovr, thou shalt call his name
Jesus. Luke i. 13, 31.

So Matt. V. 48, xxii. 37, 39 (and parallels, as Rom. xiii. 9 ; Gal. v. 14) ;

1 Cor. V. 13, rec. text ; W. H., etc., read imperative.

In 1 Tim. vi. 8 the expression of a resolution as to the future is indirectly a
command : roi^rois ipKeadijffofMcda, we will be content with these things.

Especially in prohibitions (from the Old Testament, but not only so).

Matt. vi. 5 : ovk i(<r«<r6€ wa-nep ot viroKpLrai^ ye shall not he as the

hypocrites.

So ch. iv. 7, V. 21, 27, 33 ; Acts xxiii. 5 ; Rom. vii. 7, etc.'^

* So W. H. marg. ; text KXijpovofirjaovffi.

^ The between this and the classic idiom is, that in the latter the future,
ditierenee
with ov, is the mildest form of prohibition. In Hebrew (and so in New Testament
Greek) it is the special language of legislative authority, and is the idiom used in the
Decalogue. So Winer.
302 THE TENSES —FUTURE. [§ 363, C.

c. The Future sometimes denotes what is usual, and is employed

in maxims, expressions of general truths, and the like (** ethical
future ").

Epll. V. 31 : KaTaX€l\|/€t avOpuywos Trarepa Kal firjTepa^ k.tA., a man shall

leave father and mother^ etc.

Gal. vi. 5 : l/cao-Tos yap ro tStov ^opriov /Sao-rao-ct, for each man shall
hear his own load.

So wifh a negative. Rom. iii. 20 : i^ ^pyiov v6/xov oi SiKatcod-fia-eTai irda-a (rdp^,

by works of laio sJiall no flesh he justified.

d. A strong negative is expressed by the Future with the double

negative infj. ov The Subjunctive, however, is more generally employed

and the idiom will be found explained, § 377.

Instances with the Future are, Matt. xvi. 22 : this shall never he !

Mark xiv. 31 : / icill never deny thee ! Luke x. 19 : nothing shall ever
harm you.

e. A
Future imperfect (*' resolved future ") is formed by the
Future of the verb €ijj.c with the Present participle.
Luke i. 20 : io-r\ o-iwircSv, thou shalt he silent.

So Matt. X. 22, xxiv. 9 ; Mark xiii. 25 ; Luke v. 10, xvii. 35 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 9.

(See §394,1.)
The Future Perfect has been sufficiently explained, § 101, i.

/. Auxiliary Future Verbs are (icXXw, to he ahout to ; and e^Xw, to loill.

The former, which is scarcely over represented in the A.V., gives emphasis
to the notion that the thing is to happen, and hence is often used of '

fixed and appointed purpose.^ Tli£ reader may study the following
passages in which /xeXXto occurs, noting especially the R.V.
Matt. ii. 13, xvii. 12, 22, xx. 22, xxiv. 6 ; Mark xiii. 4; Luke vii. 2
[was at the point of death), ix. 31,44, x. 1 ; John vi. 6, xiv. 22, xviii. 32 ;

Acts V. 35 {lohat ye are ahout to do), xvii. 31 ; Rom. viii. 13 (you are sure
to die) ; 1 Thess. iii. 4 ; Heb. xi. 8 (tvhich he was to receive), and many
other passages, to jacXXov, part, neut., is " the future." Once the verb is

used in the sense of delay, rt fxcXXas ; why tarriest thou ? Acts xxii. 1 6.

Still more important is it to mark the use of 0A.w, as implying con-

scious volition. The English auxiliary, will, ought here to be read as
emphatic.

* See Ellicott on 1 Thess. iii. 4.

 ;

§ 364, a.] THE TENSES —AOEISTS. 303

Matt. V. 40 man wills to do so), xi. 14, xvi. 24, 25 if any

(if any :

wan u'ills to come aftei' me ...for whosoever wills to save his life will
(future) lose it ... but whosoever shall lose his life for my saJfe will find it
(simple futurity). So exactly Mark viii. 34, 35 ; Luke ix. 23, 24 ; John
V. 6, 40, vii. 17 if any man wills to do his will, he shall know of the
:

doctrine; viii. 44 the lusts of your father ye choose to do; Acts xvii. 18
:
:

tchat does this babbler icant to say ? Eom. xiii. 3 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 35 : if
they tvish to, or, as in other passages, if they icoidd learn anything
1 Tim. V. 11 : they leant to marry ; James ii. 20 : wiliest thou to know ?

3 John 13, etc.

The Aorist Tenses.

364. a. The Aorist denotes what is absolutely past, and answers

to the English Preterite, as dvepT] cis to ilpos, he went up into the moun-
tain.

The First and Second Aorists have precisely the same meaning, except in the
few cases specified, §§ 100, 108, 3.

The between the Aorist and the Imperfect

distinction is noted, § 362, c,
between the Aorist and the Perfect, § 365, b.
When the past time is not strongly marked, the English idiom often includes
a past act in a period reaching to the present time, and hence uses the Perfect,
where in Greek the Aorist is the usual tense.

Luke i. 1 : iTretSi^Trep ttoXXoI cirex^ipTio-av . . .forasmuch as many

^So^c KafxoL,

undei'tookj it seemed good also to me (" have undertaken," "it has seemed
good").

Luke i. 19 : aTrto-raXiiv XaXrjdat Trpos (xi, I (Gabriel) icas sent to speak

unto thee ("have been sent").

Luke ii. 48 : T€Kvov, tl e-n-oiTicras rjfXLV ovtws ; child, ichy didst fhou thus
deal u'ith u^ ? (" hast thou dealt").

Matt, xxiii. 2 : IttI rrj^ Mwvo'eoos Ka^eSpas eKadio-av ol ypa/x/tarets Kac ol

KfyapicraLOL, the scribes and the Pharisees seated themselves in the chair of
Moses (not " sit," simply). " They found the seat virtually empty, and
occupied it."i

1 T. S. Green.
304 THE TENSES —AOKISTS. [§ 364, a,

1 John iv. 8 : he lolio loves not, never got a knowledge of (iyvui) God;
experimentally, —not having at any time known what love is.^

See also Luke xiv. 18, 19 ; John viii. 29, xvii. 4 ; Rom. iii. 23, all shincd,
aiid so are coming short, etc. ; 1 Cor. vi. 11.

2 Cor. V. 1 5 : ets virlp iravTiav air^Oavev *

apa ol 7rdvT€<s dircOavov *
one died
for all, therefore all died. Compare 2 Tim. ii. 11.

Phil. iii. 8 : / suffered the loss of all things, i.e., at the crisis of his
life, ver. 12. James i. 11 (a vivid, descriptive delineation). So ver. 24
(a Perfect interposed).

2 Pet. i. 14
knoivhig that the putting off of miy tabernacle cometh
:

swiftly, even as our Lord Jesus Christ signified unto me (R.V.). By the
^^hath showed me" (of A.V.) we lose altogether the special allusion to an
historic moment in the Apostle's life, to John xxi 18, 19, which would
at once have come out had iZr^fatri /xot been rendered, ^showed me.""^
h. In narration, an Aorist that starts from a time already past
may be translated by the Pluperfect
Matt. XX viii. 2 : o-etcr/xos c-yevtro /xcya?, there had heen a great earth-
quake.
Luke ii. 39 : ws crcXco-av TrdvTa, when they had accomplished all things.

See also Matt. xiv. 3 ; John vi. 22, xL 30, xviii. 24 (?), etc.

c. The Epistolary Aorist, so called (as ^Ypai|/a), takes the reader's

point of view, in which the writing of the letter is viewed as past. Our
idiom requires us to take the writer's point of view, ^^ I have ivritteii."

Rom. XV. 15; 1 Pet. v. 12 (referring to the whole letter); 1 Cor.

ix. 15 : 1 John ii. 21, and perhaps 1 Cor. v. 9, referring to a part of it.^

Gal. vi. 11, referring either to the whole or to part, according to the
interpretation adopted.
But ^paxf/a has, in other cases, its ordinary Aorist force, referring to a former
letter, "/ wrote," 2 Cor. ii. 3, 4, 9, vii. 12 ; probably 3 John 9 ; and perhaps
1 Cor. V. 9.

The word ^-rrcixxj/a also exemplifies the Epistolary Aorist, ^^ I have sent,"

1 Cor. iv. 17 ; 2 Cor. ix. 3 ; Eph. vi. 22 ; Rev. xxii. 16.

^ Other passages in which fyj/wj/ has been regarded as standing for the Present may
be ex})lained in a similar way.
- Arch])ishoi) Trench on the Authorised Version of the New Testament, p. 146.
^ See EUicott on Gal. vi. 11.
§ 365, ^.J THE TENSES —PERFECT. 305

d. In classical (ireek, the Aorist is frequently used to describe

an act which has taken place in time past, and may take place
at any time again. Here in English the Present is the usual tense.
Accordingly, in the Xew Testament there are a few passages where the
Aorist may best be translated by the Present.
Matt. iiL 17 : cv w ev86KT]<ra, in whom I am ivell pleased^ i.e., "I was,
and am." So in parallel passages.

Rom. viii. 30: IkAXco-^ . . . eSiKalwo-c . . . e8<J|a(r€, 7ie calls ... justifies ..,
glorifies; "he did, and does."^

e. The completeness of an act is occasionally marked by the

Aorist.
John xiii. 31 : vvv eSo^ao^i] 6 vtos rov dv^pwTrou, now is the Son of man
glorified ; the whole series of events being brought to a crisis.

1 Cor. vii. 28 : thou didst not . . . she did not commit a sin.

Sq in several of the parables wfioiwOr], is likened (Matt. xiii. 24,

:

xviii. 23, xxii. 2), " a9 if the mould had already received its shape,
"^
though the cast was yet to issue.

Compare Luke i. 51-53 ; John viii. 29.

The Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses.

365, The Perfect denotes an action or event as now com-
a.

plete its point of view is, therefore, in the present, as 6 yiy^a.^a,

;

YeypcwfKi, ivhat 1 have icritten, I have written. It denotes also a past act
whose consequences remain, as -YeypairTai, " it has been written, and
abides ;" it is ivi'itten.^

b. The distinction between the Aorist and Perfect is thus very

marked. Thus, Te0vTJKa<ri (Matt. ii. 20), they are dead ; 20avov {aTriOavov)
would have been, they died. Compare Mark xv. 44. Even where either
tense would be suitable, the proper force must be given to the one
employed.
Matt. ix. 13 : ov yap ^Xdov KaXccat SiKatovs, for I came not to call
righteous persoTis.
Luke V. 32 : ovk cX-^XvOa KoXiaai 8t/catov9, / am not come, etc.

1 Alford interprets differently. See his note.

2 T. S. Green.
^ Luther, stcht geschrieben.
306 THE TENSES —PERFECT. [§ 365, &.

In the following passages, among many others, the distinction of

tenses is strikingly apparent :

Mark iii. 26 : et 6 iSaraj/a? dve'cm] i(f> cavrov, /cat ]i.i[Lip\.<rrai,^ for if Satan
rose up against himself and has become divided.

Acts xxi. 28 : he hrought (clo-^va-yev) Greeks into the temple^ and has
profaned (k^koIvwkc) this holy place ; the single act, the abiding result.
1 Cor. XV. 4 : koX 6tl €Td<|)T], koL on e-y^^epTai, a7id that he was buried,
and that he is risen again. So The simple all through this chapter.
historical fact is announced by the aorist, "fiyepBi], Matt, xxviii. 6, 7
Mark xvi. 6; Luke xxiv. 6, 34 (John xxi. 14); Eom. vi. 4, etc. For
the perf. part., see 2 Tim. ii. 8, compared with the aor. part., 2 Cor. v. 15.

Col. i. 16 : on iv avTw kKri<r9r\ to. Trdvra ... to, Travra St' avrov kol cts avrov
^KTiorrat, because in him were all things created ... all things have been
created by him and for him.
Col. iii. 3 : dircGdvcTc yap, Kat 7] ^oir] v/xwv KiKpynrrai . . . for ye died^ and
your life remains hidden.
Kev. V. 7 : ^XBc Kat 6\;Xti4>€, he came, and he hath taken the book (which
he still retains, as Lord of human destiny).

See also Luke iv. 18 ; John viii. 40 ; Heb. ii. 14 ; 1 John i. 1.

366. The but rarely used in the

Pluperfect, or Past Perfect, is

New Testament. It denotes that which was completed at some

past time as, t€0€(1€XI«to cttI ttjv Trerpav, it had been founded on the
;

rock.

Acts xiv. 23 : irapiOevTO avrovs T(3 Kvpio) €.U ov ircirio-TcvKcio-av, they

commended them to the Lord, on whom they had believed.

367. The Perfects of many verbs are used as Presents ; and

correspondingly the Pluperfect takes a Past signification. Tliis
arises in each case from the simple meaning of the verb, as coming into a
state Perf., being in (having come into) that state.
:

So KTOLO/xai, to gain ; K^Krrj/xai, to possess, which (h)os not, however, occur in the
New Testament. See Luke xviii. 12: irdvTa oca KTw/xai, not of all that I possess,
but of all that I gain — the income, not the capital. So xxi. 19, " ?/c shall win
your souls " (R.V.).

1 But W. H. and Rev. Text read ifieplaO-^.

 ——

§ 368, b.] THE INDICATIVE— LVTERROGATIVE FOEMS.

307
For example, Ka0tt«, Kd0T,jtai. Mark xi. 7 UdQicev, he mounted.
:
Luke
xvui. 35, etc.: ^K(i07,To, he was sitting. I fall asleep; K€Kot|iT„iai,
Koi^dojiai,
lam aslee2\ 1 Cor. xi. 30: Koi,i«vTat I/cavot, many are falling asleep.
Jolin XI. 11 Ad^apos K€Koi>r]Tai, Lazarus sleepeth.
: ...
ol8a, / have seen:
hence I know. (See g 103.)
r<rTT||Ai and its compounds especially exhibit this " Present Perfect."
«<miKa, I stand, as Acts xxvi. 6. So kvi<m^Ki, is imminent, 2 Thess 2 •
ii
dvG^o^Ke (trans.), resisteth, Rom. ix. 19, xiii. 2; ^<|>^o-Tt,Kc ^^^ a^ /.a^
2 Tim. IV. 6. Prom Icrr-qKa comes a new Present (intrans.), arViKa),
Rom. xiv. 4, etc.
/' i
^

For other words used in a similar sense, see

Vocabulary.

Interrogative Forms.
368. The several tenses of the Indicative are employed interroga-
tively, each with proper force.
The interrogative may be indicated
its
by the appropriate pronouns or particles, or simply by the
order of
the words, or the general sense of the passage.

a. With interrogative words

Matt. XXV. 37 ttotc a-e tlhofxtv ircLvCjvTa; when saw we
:
thee hungry ?
John i. 19 : crv tCs ct ; who art thou ?
John V. 47 rr&s rots ifxols prjiiaaL Trio-TevVcTc how
:
; will ye believe mu^
words?
John xi. 34 : irow TeOeUaTe avrov whei'e have ye laid him
; ?
Acts vin. 30 dpd : y€ yivwo-Kcts a dvayii/wcTKas ; unde)'standest thou then
what thou readest ?
Luke xviii. 8 ; Gal. ii. 17.

b. Without interrogative words

Matt. IX. 28 Trto-revcTc otl Bvvafiai
able to do this
:
tovto Troi^crai ; believe ye that lam
?

Rom. vii. 7 : 6 v6fxo<s a^apTia ; is the law sin ?

So John xiii. 6 ; Acts xxi. 37 , Rom. ii. 21-23.
Hence arises occasional ambiguity.
1
Lachmann
Cor. i. 13 fxefi^piffTai 6 Xpiards
:

reads this as an assertion

; is Christ divided? (R.V., W H marg )
: Christ is divided, i.e., by your dissensions,*
which rend asunder his body (R.V. marg., W. H.).
Rom. viii. 33, 34. Many critics read this as a series of questions, not question
and answer, as A.V. - Who shall lay anything to the charge of God's
elect ?
308 THE INDICATIVE —INTERROGATIVE FORMS. [§ 368, h.

"
Shall God who justifieth ? "Who is he that condemneth ? Is it Christ who died ?
etc. (So R.V. marg. See Alford's note on the passage.)

An elliptic question is made by the use of the particle A, if,

some siicli phrase as say, or tell us, being understood. In this case the
sentence is really dependent. (See § 383.)
Matt. xii. 10: €l c^co-ti toIs a-dp/Saa-L 6epa7r€V€Lv ; is it lawful to heal
upon the sahhath ? (tell us if — ).

Acts xix. 2 : el Trvev/xa aytoi/ iXd^€T€ 7ri(rT€vcravTcs ; received ye the Holij

Ghost when ye believed ?

So Acts vii. 1 ; xxi. 37 ; xxii. 25.

369. An affirmative answer is given, in a few passages, by the

formula o-v X^^eis, thou sayest y with or without addition : Matt, xxvii. 11
Luke xxii. 70 ; xxiii. 3 ; John xviii. 37. o-v etiras, thou didst say, is

similarly used, Matt. xxvi. 25, 64.

370. Negative questions are framed according to the answer

expected.

a. ov presumes an affirmative reply.

Matt. vii. 22 : ov tw cru) oi/o/xart iTrpocfyyTevcrafXiv ; did we not prophesy
in thy name ?

1 Cor. ix. 1 : ovk ei/xt Ik^vOcpos ; ovk eljxl aTrdcrToXos ; k.t.X., am I not
free ? am I not an apostle ? etc.

Acts xiii. 10 : ov Travarrj Stacrrpe^cDj/ ; Wilt thoit not ceose from pervert-
ing ? the affirmative answer being intimated as that which ought to be
given. So Mark xiv. 60 : dost thou not answer anything ?

Once ovKovv is found. John xviii. 37 : thou art not then a king, art
thou ?

h. Y-'h
expects a negative answer.
Matt. vii. 9 : |jl^ XiOov eViSojo-ct avTio ; will he give him a stone ?

Rom. ix. 14: ii-rj dSiKia Traph. tu) 0e(p ; is thei'e unrighteousness with
God ?
c. fji^Ti suggests an emphatic negative.
j\latt. vii. 16 : JJh^ti (rvWiyovaLv utto aKai'OCjy (rTa(f>vXa<; rj d-nro Tpt/3oAa>»'

a-vKu; men do not gather grape-dusters of thorns, or figs of thistles, do

they?-
 ^

§ 373, a.] THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 309

Matt. XX vi. 22, 25 : {xtjti eyw etyut, Kvpte ; (from the disciples), iitjti eyw
€t/ti, pa;^/?t'; (from Judas), it is not /, is it, Lord?— is it, Rabbi ?

See also Mark iv. 21 ; John xviii. 35 ("/a Jew ! ").

^
would sometimes appear as though dawning conviction would fortify re-
It
sistance by a strong negative. So ]\ratt. xii. 23 may be understood /i^n ovtos :

i<TTLv 6 vios Aa/3.5 this is never tJie Son of David?

;

The Imperative Mood.

371. The Imperative is used for command or entreaty.
Matt. V. 44 : dYa-jrdTc tov<; i^Opovs v/jlwv, love you7' enemies.
Matt. viii. 25 : Ki^te, o-oiorov, aTroXkvfjieOa, Lord, save, tve perish /

The negative with imperative forms is always |i^. (See § 375.)

John vi. 20 eyw dfxi (if| f^o^da-Qe, it is
: •
I, be mt afraid.

372. The form of command is sometimes employed where simple

permission is intended.

Matt. xxvi. 45 Kae€v86T€ Xoiirhv koX Avairaveo-Oc, sleep

:
on now, and take
your rest.'^

See also 1 Cor. vii. 15, xiv. 38. ''Rev. xxii. 11 is a challenge {Aufforderung):
* the fate of all is as good as already determined.' "

373. Of the Imperative tenses, the Present implies present con-

tinuance or repetition.
The Aorist expresses a command generally, or implies that the
action single or instantaneous.
is

The Perfect (very rare) refers to an action complete in itself,

yet
continuous in its effect. Its meaning coincides with that of the
Pre-
sent in verbs where the Perfect indicative has a present
meaning.
a. The Present.
Matt. vii. 1 : (a^ Kptvcrc, judge not.
Cor. IX. 24 ovrw rpixtre Zva KaTaXdpT]T€, so run that ye
1 :
may obtain.
Thess. V. 16-22
1 : Trai/rorc x*tp«T€, dStaActTrra)? irpoo-€vx€<r0€, h iravrl

^ Winer, xliii. 1.
- Bengel. " Sleep, if you feel at liberty to do so ; " not in irony, not (as some) a
question.
310 'iHE IMPERATIVE MOOD. [§ 373, a.

€vxapi<rT€iT€, K.T.X., vejoice evermore ; pi'ay without ceasing; in everything

give thanks, etc.

h. The Aorist.

Matt. vi. 6 : el'o-cXOc ets to ra/xtetoi/ aov KaX . . irp6a-fv^aij enter into thy
chamber . . . and pray.
Matt. vi. 9-11 : in the Lord's Pra^yer, a^iao-GiiTa) ... y€VTj0TJTw ... 80s ...

John xi. 44 : Xvo-arc auroi/, Kat &<J)€T€ avTov VTrdycLV, loose him^ and let

him go.
c. The Perfect.

Mark iv. 39 : o-tojTra, 'ir€<j)t(ia>(ro, peace! he still f

The contrasted force of the Present and Aorist is shown where both
are used in the same passage.
John V. 8 : dpov rov KpapaxTov aov kcu 'ir€piirdT€t, take up thy bed and
walk.
Rom. vi. 13 : ix-qh\ Trapto-TdvcTc to. fxiXy v^xuiv oirXa dStActa? rrj d/xapria,
aXXh. Trapa<rTi]o-aT€ kavTov<s tw 0€(3, yield not your members (as tlie habit of
your lives), as instruments of unrighteousness, unto sin, but yield, yoiir-
selves (a single act, once for all) unto God.
For the employment of the Future Indicative in commands and prohibitions,
see § 363, h.

For the similar use of the Subjunctive, especially in prohibitions, see § 375.
The Infinitive may also be employed. (See § 392.)

In many instances the force of the Aorist and that of the Present
seem nearly identical. The former is the more vigorous expression.

Matt. V. 16 ovrw Xap.t{/dTa) to ^ais v/xwi/, k.t.X. Here the Present

might have been employed — "let your
:

: light beam continuously." The

Aorist simply gives the general command, without the further thought of
continuance.
John xiv. 15 : eav dyaTrare /xc, ras hroXa.<; ra.<; ifxas r^p-fjo-OTCjl if y^ love
me, keep) my commandments : adopt this as the law of your lives.

Kom. XV. 11 : alvctrt, Trdvra to. tOvr], rov l^vpiov, koi ^iraiveo-dTuxrav avrov
7rdvT€? ot Xaoi, praise the Lord, all the nations ; and let all the peoples
burst into a song of praise to him.

^ W. H. and Rev. Text read rrjp'^aeTe, yc wlli keep.

§ 375.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 311

See also John ii. 8, 16 ; 1 Cor. xv. 34.

The consideration of such examples will bring to light many subtle beauties'
of expression, which no translation, perhaps, could accurately represent.

The Subjunctive Mood.

Subjunctives in Independent Clauses.

374. The Subjimctivo, strictly speaking, cannot stand in an indepen-

dent sentence. Where it appears to do so, there is in reality an ellipsis.

Thus, Loy/xevy let us go, is really a final clause (Iva understood) dependent
on some implied verb or phrase. In such cases as the following, how-
ever, this distinctionmay be disregarded, and the sentences taken as to
all intents and purposes independent.

The tenses in the Subjunctive and Optative are distinguished as in § 373.

Compare also § 386. The Present implies continuity, the Aorist co)n2)Ietiou.

375. The Subjunctive is used as a hortatory Imperative of the

first person.

John xix. 24 : |x^ <rxio-w|x,€V avrov, aWa Xax^H-^^j ^^^ '^^^ '^^^ ^'^^^^ ^^) ^^^

let us cast lots.

Rom. V. 1 : dp-qv-qv ix(a\i.iv TTpos Tov ©cov,^ let us have peace with God;
and ver. 2, 3 : KavxwjieOa, let us glory.

So 1 Cor. XV. 32 ; 1 Thess. v. 6.

The Subjunctive Aorist is used instead of the Imperative in

prohibitions.'

^ W. H,, R.V. The MS. evidence for this reading is very strong ; indeed, in any
ordinary case would be overwhelming. On internal grounds, however, Tischendorf
and others prefer the rec. text, ive have peace. case, even the testimony of In such a
MSS. must be taken with great caution as seems to have been a practice with
; it
some ancient transcribers to make Scripture, as they thought, more emphatic by
turning a declaration or a promise into an exhortation. It could easily be done, as
nothing more was needed than to change the o of the indicative into the w of the
subjunctive. So John iv. 42, "let us believe " Rom. v. 10, *'l€t us be saved ;" ;

Rom. vi. 8, "let us believe ;" 1 Cor. xiv. 15, " let me pray " 1 Cor. xv. 49, "let ;

us bear the image of the heavenly" (so W. H.); Heb. vi. 3, "this let us do;"
James iv. 13, " let us go, "etc.; and many similar passages. (See Alford's note on
Rom. V. 1.)
" This is the regular classical idiom.
'Sl'2 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [§ 375.

Matt. i. 20 : (i^ <|>oj3TidTJs, fear not.

^latt. V. 17: ji-i^ voixio-iiTc, tliink not.

Matt. vi. 2 : y.^ (raXirio-Tjs, sound not a triunpet.

This usage also depends upon the ellipsis of some phrase like "see," "take
heed," etc., with Xva. In a few instances, a positive command is expressed by
IVa with the subjunctive (Mark v. 23 2 Cor. viii. 7 Eph. v. 33). For the ; ;

complete phrase, see 1 Cor. xvi. 10 and with ellipsis of IVa, Matt. viii. 4. ;

But the third person of the Aor. Imp. may be used with jirj (]\Iatt. vi. 3 ;

Mark xiii. 16).

376. The Subjunctive used in questions expressive of deli- is

beration or doubt thus, t'l iroiwiicv (John vi. 28) ichat are we to do ?
:
;

but ri iroiovjicv (Jolm xi. 47) ivhat are we doing? " what are we about '?"
;

and TL TrotT|<r€i (Matt. xxi. 40) u'hat icill lie do ?

;

Mark xii. 14 : 8«}j.€v tj fxrj 8wp.€v ; are ive to give^ or not to give ?
Matt. xxvi. 54 : ttcos ovv irXTipwOwo-iv at ypacfiai, Jioic then slioidd the
scriptures he fidfilled ?

1 Cor. xi. 22 : rt cl'irw vfuv ; ^iraivc'o-w v/xas ; ichat am I to sat/ to goii ?

am I to pyraise you ?

The second of these verbs might be the fut. indie, the connection only showing
it to be aor. subj. As the two tenses are alike in the first pers. sing., it is often
doubtful which is meant. So in the pres. of contracted verbs, rt ttoiw ;

377. A strong denial is expressed by the Subjunctive Aorist

with ov |JLTJ, as ov Y-'h ^^ "-v"? o^^' ®^ V-'h ^^ cYKaraXCTTw (Heb. xiii. 5), / will
assuredly not leave thee, nor will I at all forsake thee.

This idiom arises from a combination of two phrases ix-q, with the subjunctive :

elliptical, "fear lest'' (see § 384) preceded by ov, wdth the word (understood) ;

on which fi-q depends. "There is not any fear or possibility lest I should."

Matt. V. 18 : twra ci' 17 fita Kcpata ov \i^ irapeXO-n, one iota (the smallest
letter of the alphabet), or one tittle (the fragment of a letter^) shall hy no
means pass.
Matt. V. 20 : ov fx^ €l<r6X0TiT<, ye shall in no icise enter.

Mark xiv. 25 : ovkItl ov nf| irCw, never will I drink at al/.^

^ As, for instance, that which distinguishes A from A, or in Hebrew, n from n.

- The additional negative adds strength to the negation.

§ 378, a.] THE OPTATIVE MOOD. 313

See also Matt. xxiv. 2 ; ]Mark ix. il ; Luke vi. 37 (twice), xviii, 17, xxii. 67,
68 ; John \'i. 37, viii. 51, x. 28, xiii. 8 ; Acts xxviii. 26 (tAnee, from the LXX.;
so elsewhere); 1 Cor. viii. 13 ; 1 Thess. iv. 15 {ahull by no means irrcccdc), v. 3;
Heb. viii. 11, 12 (LXX.) ; 2 Pet. i. 10 ; Rev. xviii. 21-23 ;with uiauy other
passages. The study of these emphatic negatives of Scripture is fraught with
interest.

In the following passages only (in the best MSS. and edd. ), the future is found
(see § 363, d) Matt. xvi. 22, xxvi. 35 Mark xiv. 31 Luke x. 19 (\\ H. niarg.
: ; ; .

abiKyjffT}) ; John iv. 14, x. 5, xx. 25 (ambiguous).^

For the Aorist Subjunctive in a Future-perfect sense, see § 383, p.

The Optative Mood.

Optative in Independent Clauses.

378. a. The Optative is used in independent sentences to ex-

press a wish, as 2 Pet. i. 2 :
x^P'^ v^jiiv koI elp-qvrj irX-qBuvQciT], ijracfi and
peace be multiplied unto you !

As stated with regard to the Subjunctive (§ 374), the independence of the

sentence seeming only, a verbal notion on which the Optative depends beiug
is

implied, as desire, iirax]. The Optative is in fact only another form of the Sub-
jective mood, "the Sulijunctive of the historical tenses." But this characteristic
is almost lost in the Xew Testament, where the Optative is comparatively rare.

Rom. XV. 5 : 6 8e 0eos ... 8«t] v/xtv, now may God grant unto you!
Philemon 20 : vat, dSeXt^e, eyw crov ovatix-qv Iv Kvpiio, yea, brother, let

me have joy of thee in the Lord !

So Acts viii. 20; 1 Thess. iii. 11, 12; 2 Thess. iii. 5, etc.

So with the negative, /u,rj.

Mark xi. 14 : ixtikcti ...Ik <toO jjtT|8€is Kapirbv cjwxyoi, let no one ever eat
fruit of thee.

2 Tim. iv. 16 :
n^ avTots Xo-ywrOctT], may it not be laid to their charge !

The formula fi-?! -ycvoiTo, may it not come to pa^s ! rendered in A.V.
(and R.V., except Gal. vi. 14) " God forbid !" illustrates the same usage.
Luke XX. 16 ; Rom. vi. 2, 15, vii. 13, etc.

^ The future indie, with oi5 /A/7 has no perceptible diiference of meaning from that
of the aor. subj. {Madvig, § 124, a, 3). Probably the future realises to the mind
with greater vividness the possibility which is denied.
314 I'HE OPTATIVE MOOD. [§ 378, a.

But a wisii respecting something past is sometimes expressed by 6<t)e\ov (really

representing an old Second Aorist of a verb, I ought, and in classic Greek followed
by an infinitive) used in the New Testament as a particle with the Indicative.
1 Gor. iv. 8; 2 Cor. xi. 1 ; Gal. v. 12; Rev. iii. 15.

h. The particle dtv gives a potential ssnse to the Optative, both

in affirmations and in questions.
Aots xxvi. 29 : 6v|alfiT]v &v to3 ©ew, / could icish to God.
Acts viii. 31 : ttcos yap dv 8vvat}iT]v ; nay, for hotv could I?

The Moods in Dependent Clauses.

379. A Compound Sentence (see § 187) consists of co-ordinate clauses,
or of a principal clause with subordinate (dependent) ones.
Subordinate clauses may be infinitive or participial, or they may be
connected Avith the principal sentence by relatives or conjunctions.
For the Infinitive and Participle, see §§ 385-397. For the Relative, see
§§ 343-349. For the Conjunctions uniting co-ordUmte clauses, see §§ 403-407.

380. As a general rule, the moods and tenses in subordinate

clauses are used as in principal ones.
It must be especially noted that relatives or conjunctions, with
Av (edv), the hypothetical particle, generally take the Subjunctive.

Matt. V. 19 : 8s eav ovv Xvo-rj, tohosoever therefore shall break.

Matt. V. 20 : edv (et av) fxy -rrepio-o-tvo-T), if it shall not surpass.

Matt. vi. 2 : (Jrav (ore av) iroiTJs iX.€r]fj,o(rvvyv, when fhou doest alms.
For oT€ Avith Indicative, see ^latt. vii. 28.

Matt. xvi. 28 : ^ws dv l'8«cri, until they shall have seen.

So with many other passages.

But the Imperfect Indicative is occasionally found when a matter of

fact is spokenMark vl. 56 Acts ii. 45, iv. o5 1 Cor. xii. 2.

of. ; ;

The use of the moods in object-sentences^ in conditional sentences,

and in intentional clauses, demands separate consideration.

Object-Sentences.

381. When the dependent clause expresses the object of any of

the senses, or the matter of knowledge, thought, belief, etc.,^ it is

^ That is, when it folloAVs one of the " verha sentiendi et declarandi."
§ 382, c] DEPENDENT CLAUSES —OBJECTIVE. 315

often introduced by 8ti with the Indicative ; although the Infinitive

is more usual (§ 389, a).

Luke xvii. 15 : iSwv 8ti IdOi], seeing that he was healed.

Matt. ix. 28 : Tna-revcre 6ri Svvajiat tovto TrotrjcraL ; believe ye that I am
able to do this?

Mark V 29 : cyvw ... 8ti larai, she perceived that she is healed. So John
xi. 13, XX. 14.

When the verb in the principal clause is in past time, the subordinate verb

may still be in present time {Iiulicativc), or else may change to the Optative.

382. a. In the New Testament, quotation is generally direct,

and is introduced without any conjunctive particle.

Matt. viii. 3 : yij/aro avrov, Acycov GcXw, KaSapio-G-r^Ti, he touched him^

sayinff^ ^^ I will, be thou clean."

The particle on, however, is often used to introduce the quoted words,
and is in tliis case not to be translated, as it answers exactly to our
inverted commas ('' ").

Matt. vii. 23 : ofxoXoyqa-ai avrois, Srt ovScTrore lyi'ajv vfxa's, I will avow
unto them, "I never knew you."

Luke viii. 49 : Ipxeral rts Trapa tov ap\L(Tway(liyov Xcycov, 8x1 rWvrjKiv rj

dvyar-qp <tov, fxrjKirL orKvXXe tov StBacTKaXov, then cometh one from the house

of the ruler of the synagogue, saying unto him, ^*'Thy daughter is dead,
trouble the Master 7io more."

In indirect quotation (oratio obliqua) the substance of the

b.

speech is given, not the words. Here, also, the Indicative is gene-
rally employed.

Mark iii. 21 : c\cyov yap 8ti ct«o"'"l, for they said that he teas beside
Imnsdf. It is, however, possible that the verb liere is a direct quotation
(Aorist, see § 364, d), they said, "ZTe is beside himself."

Of the Optative in the oratio obliqim, so common in classic Greek, there is no

example in the New Testament except in indirect interrogations, as in the follow-
ing paragraph, c, y.

c. Indirect interrogations, another form of the oratio obliqua, may be

connected with the principal clause by interrogative pronouns or adverbs,
or by the particle cl, if, whether.
316 OBJECTIVE CLAUSES —INTEKKUGATION. [§ 382, C,

In such clauses, either (1) the verb same as in the cor- is precisely the
responding direct interrogation, when (a) the Indicative shows that the :

inquiry concerns matter of fact; (fS) the Subjunctive (^ 376) expresses

objective possibility —
what may or should take place and always has —
respect to present or to future time ; or (2) when the principal verb is in
a past tense, either (a) or (/3)may become (y) the Optative, denoting
subjective possibility — that which may be conceived to exist — and
referring especially to the past.

a. Mark xv. 44 : iOavfjcaa-iv el ^^^r; tcOvt^kc, he icondered wliethei' he icere

already dead.
Acts xii. 18 : ^1/ rapa^os ovk oXtyos iv rots (TTparLwraL^ rC iipa 6 HeVpos
l7€V€To, the7-e teas no small stir among the soldiers — ichatever had become
of Peter.
Acts X. 18 (Pres. after Imperf.): cirvvOdvovTo^ d "^tixiDv . . . ivOdSe ^wllirai,
they loere asking whether Simon ...lodges here.

Luke xxiii. 6 (Pres. after Aor.) : eirtipciTTicrtv d 6 oiv6po)7ros FaXtXatos

eo-Ti, he asked if the man is a Galilean.
For the Future in the dependent clause, see Mark iii. 2 ; 1 Cor. vii. 1 6
Phn. i. 22.

p. Matt. vi. 2d : firj yotept/xvare ... tI <j>a7i]T€ ^ tL ttititc, be uot anxious ...

what you are to eat and what you are to drink. Compare Luke xii. 22.

Luke xix. 48 : ovx rjvpta-Kov to rC irotiria-wartv, they found not tchat they
should do. Compare Mark xv. 24.

In Kom. viii. 26, the reading varies between irpoo-cvlwjjLeOa (rec, W. H.,
Lachmann) and 'Trpo(r€v|o|A€9a (Tischendorf ).

y. Luke i. 29 : SieAoyt^ero iroraTrbs cI't] 6 (xo'7ra(r/xo? ovT09j she U'as discuss-

ing with herself of tchat kind this sahdation might be.

Acts xvii. 1 1 : dvaKptVoi/rcs ras ypa^as €l ^xoi ravra ovrw?, searching the
scriptures if these things icere so.

Acts xvii. 27: t.-qr^lv rov ©eoi/,'^ A dpa 76 x(/T]Xa<})T](r€tav avrov koI ciJpouv,

to seek God, if by any chance they 'might feel after him and find hi)ii.

The Indicative and Optative constructions are combined in Acts xxi. 33

i7rvv6dv€To rts fi.v Ar\ Koi ri co-ti TrtTroiriKws, he asked u'ho he might bcy and

' W. H. marg. ; text iirudovTO.

- Uii([uestioiiably the true reading, not t6v Kvpiov, as rec.
 — — ;

§ 383, a.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 317

tuhat he had done. He must have done something, this was clear ; but
who he was seemed altogether uncertain.

d. After verbs of perceiving, knowing, declaring, and the like,

both an object and an objective sentence are often found.
Luke xix. 3 : e^^/rei tSetv tov 'I-qo-ovv, t£s co-ti, he was seeking to see
Jesus, icho he was (is).

1 Cor. iii. 20 : Kvpto? ytvwcrKet tovs 8ittXo7to-|iovs rwv (to^ojv in clo-l

(jLaraioi (LXX.), Jehovah knoiceth the reasonings of the wise^ that they are
vain.

See also Mark xi. 32, xii. 34 ; John iv. 35, v. 42, vii. 27 ; Acts iii. 10, xv. 36
2 Cor. xii. 3, 4, xiii. 5; 1 Thess. ii. 1, etc. Compare 1 Cor. xv. 12.
A similar construction is occasionally found with
'
' intentional " clauses, as
Col. iv. 17 ; Gal. iv. 11.

Conditional Sentences.

383. A conditional or " hypothetical" sentence contains two clauses,

often called "protasis," or condition, and " apodosis," or consequence.
The former expresses the condition ; the latter, the thing conditioned.
Of these two the protasis is really the dependent clause, though the
apodosis contains the dependent fa^t.

Protasis {condition). Apodosis (conseqioence).

a. If he speaks, I always listen.

p. If he speak, I will listen,
y. If he should speak, I should listen.
fs If he spoke, I would listen.
J
I If he had spoken, would have listened.
*
I

These four sentences illustrate four kinds of hypothesis

a. The supposition of a fact.
)8. ,, „ of a possibility.

y. ,, „ of uncertainty.
S. ,, „ of something unfulfilled.
Hence arise four distinct forms

a. The conditional particle A, if, with the Indicative, in the

protasis, assumes the hypothesis as a fact. The apodosis may have
the Indicative or Imperative. [So the Subjunctive with ov /xrj, equi-
valent to future Indicative ; or, in exhortations, equivalent to Imperative.]
;318 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 383, a.

Matt. iv. 3 : d vlo<s d rov ©eov, etirc, k.t.X., if thou art the Son of God,
command, etc., i.e., assuming that thou art.

Acts xix. 39 : d 8c rt Trepatrepco iTriX,r]rtiT€, iv rrj evvofjuii €KK\rj(Tia iiri-

Xv0ii<r€Tai, hut if ye inquire anything further, it shall he determined in the

legal assemhlij.

1 Cor. XV. 16 : el yap veKpol ovk lydpovrai, ouSe Xpio-ros iyr\yiprai, for if
the dead arise not, neither has Christ arisen.

Rom. iv. 2 : d 'A/3paa/x c^ epyoiv iSiKamQt], €\eL Kav^i^/xa, if Ahraham

was justified hy works (assuming that he was so), he hath a ground of
hoasting.

See also many other passages, e.g., Matt. xix. 17; John vii. 4 (present, con-
dition; imperative, consequence); Rom. viii. 25; 1 Cor. vi. 2 (pres. pres.); John
V. 47 (pres, fut.); 2 Pet. ii. 20 (pres. perf.); Matt. xii. 26 (pres. aor.); Matt,
xxvi. 33 (fut. fut.); Acts xvi. 15 (perf. imperf.); 2 Cor. v. 16 (perf. pres.);
John xi. 12 ; Rom. vi. 5 (perf. fut.) ; 2 Cor. ii. 5 (perf. perf.), vii. 14 (perf. aor.)

Rom. xi. 17, 18 (aor. imperf.); 1 John iv. 11 (aor. pres.); John xv. 20 (aor. fut.);
Rom. V. 15 (aor. aor.). (1 Cor. viii. 13 has pres. ind. and aor. subj. with oi firj;

Gal. V. 25, pres. ind., pres. subj.)

yS. Possibility, or uncertainty with the prospect of decision, is

expressed by €dv = €t dv (very rarely by el alone i) with the Subjunc-
tive in the conditional clause, and the Indicative or Imperative in
the apodosis.
The condition hence refers to fature time. The Subj. Aor., with Hv, may be
rendered in most cases by the Future Perfect.

Matt. xvii. 20 : cdv ^XT""* ttlo-tlv w5 kokkov (rtvaTretu?, epetrc, k.t.X., if ye

have faith as a grain of mustard seed, ye shall say, etc.

John iii. 3, 5 : edv jiij tis ^cvvrjOp avayOev, ov Svvarai iSctv rrjv /Jao-tXeiav

Tov ©€oi>, excepting one shall have been horn again, (or from ahove)y he

cannot see the kingdom of God.

2 Tim. ii. 5 : edv 8e koX bA\-^ rt?, ov aT€<f>avovraL edv (jli?| vofXLfjLU)<; ii0Xi]<rt|,

and if any one strive in a contest, he is not crotvned except he shall have
striven according to rule.

y. The Optative in a conditional sentence expresses entire uncer-

—
tainty a supposed case. Here the particle d is always used.
1 Cor. xiv. 10 d tvxoi, if it should chance. Soxv. 37.
:

* See 1 Cor. xiv. 5 ; Phil. iii. 12 (Luke ix. 13), and a few various reading, as
Rev. xi. 5.
 )

§383,^.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 319

1 Pet. iii. 14 : €l /cat irdcrxoiTc Sto. SiKaioarvvrjv, fiaKapLoi, if ye even sliould

suffer for righteousness' sake, happy (are ye). See ver. 17.

Acts xxiv. 19, xxvii. 39 : €l Svvaivro, if (by any possibility) they could.

S. When spoken of as unfulfilled, the Indicative

the condition is

is used in both clauses, with the particle ci in the protasis, and

Av in the apodosis.

1. The Imperfect (in the apodosis) with av points to preseiit time, "If
this were so now (which it is not), this other thing would be.^'

Luke vii. 39 : ovtos, d ^v TrpotfjrJTrj'S, ^ivw<rK€v &v tl<; kol TroraTnj rj

yvvrj, this man, if he were a prophet, icould knoic who and ivhat the
woman is.

John V. 46 : cl yap eirto-TcvcTc Mwi^crct, eTri<rT€V€T€ &v e/xot, for if ye believed

Moses, ye would believe me.

Heb. iv. 8 €l yap avrov? ^Vqcrov*; KaTcVavercv, ovk &v Trcpt oAAt^? eXdXci,
:

for if Joshua had given them rest, he would not speak of another day.
So (with Impf. in the protasis) John viii. 42, ix. 41 Acts ; xviii. 14 ; 1 Cor.
xi. 31 Heb. xi. 15 (with Aor. in the protasis) Gal. iii. 21,
; ; etc. Sometimes
&v is omitted. See John ix. 33, xv. 22, etc.

The Aorist with av points to the past, " If this had been so then
2.

(which it was not), this other thing would have been." Sometimes the
Pluperfect is used, more emphatically, in the same sense.

John xiv. 28 : €i fiYairdW /xe, lx6.pr\Ti dv, if ye loved me, ye icould

have rejoiced. " Ye would rejoice " would have been expressed by
c;(aip€T€.

So with the Impf. in protasis : Luke xii. 39 ; John xviii. 30 ; Acts xviii. 14.

1 Cor. ii. 8 : cl yap ^yvoxrav, ovk dv Tov ILvpiov rrj^ So^rj^ eo-ravpoxrav, for
had they known, they ivoidd not have crucified the Lord of glory.
So with the Aor. in protasis : Matt. xi. 21 ; Mark xiii. 20 ; Rom. ix. 29.
(Matt. xii. 7 has plup.

John xi. 21 : Kvpcc, el fjs wSe, ovk &v 6 aZ^Xi^o'i fJLOv ereOvi^Kci,^ Lord, if
thou hadst been hei'e, my brother ivoidd not have been dead. Mary (ver. 32)
uses the Aorist.

See 1 John ii. 19.

^ W. H. and Rev. Text read diridaueu.

 320 INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. [§ 383.

John xiv. 7: d cyv^KtiTc /x€, /cat tov Trarcpa /jlov dv iiSciTC (W. H.), i/ ye
had known me^ ye icould have knoiun my Father' also.

Intentional Clauses.
384. Intentional (final) clauses are those which express a purpose or
design, following the particles iva, to the end that (with emphasis on
result); 6ir«s, in order that (emphasis on method); [xtj, {that) 7iot, or lest.

a. (1) In intentional clauses, the Subjunctive is employed in its

general meaning to signify objective possibility or intention.^
Matt. xix. 13: 7rpo(Trjv€\6rj(Tau ...Xva ras \€Lpa<; eiriflg avTOL<s kol irpo-
<r€v|T]Tai, they were brought . . that he might put his hands upon them and
pray.
Luke vi. 34 : ^av^tlovcnv tva inroXapaxriv, the]) lend that they may receive
hack.

Matt. ii. 8 : dTrayyeiAare fXOL, Strws Kayo) iXOiov irpoo-KWijcra), bring nie
back word, that I also may come and worship.
Matt. vi. 16: a^anfovert ... Sirws <}>avw<n,, they disfigure ... that they
may appear.
So in a great number of passages.

The final intentional clause with a particle of design must be distinguished

from the objective clause with oti. So \iyo} vfuv on, I say to you that, intro-
duces the matter of the communication ; but eiirbv tva (Matt. iv. 3), say that,
specifies the purpose of what is said, and therefore implies command. Now, after
verbs expressive of desire, prayer, and the like, where the matter is coincident
with the purpose, the final and the objective particles seem equally appropriate.
As a matter of fact, however, it will be found that while hope has 6tl, prayer
has 'iva, oirus. eXTTifw on, I hope that, i.e., "such is the object presented to my
hope ; " euxofJ.a.1 'iva, I pray that, i.e., " such is the purpose to be secured by my
prayer" (2 Cor. i. 13 Philemon 22 Phil. i. 9 2 Thess. iii. 1, etc.) In
; ; ;

2 Thess. i. 11, 12, tva marks the primary, and Sttoj? the secondary result. In
1 Cor. xiv. 13, it is not meant that the disciple is to pray for the power to

interpret, but that his gift of prayer is to be so exercised as to involve the power
of interpretation. Again, 2 Cor. xiii. 7, the matter of the prayer is expressed
by an infinitive clause the intention by two clauses with tva.
;

The Evangelist John often (with, occasionally, others of tlie New Testament
writers) employs tva as explanatory (^M?7Jor<, rather th&n purpose). Thus, xvii. 3 :

'
' this is kfe eternal, that they should know thee," etc. So xv. 8 ; 1 John iii. 1,

^ The distinction of classic Greek, that after a past tense a final clause generally
has the Optative, does not hold in N.T,
 —

§ 384 (2).] INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. 321

etc. (often epexegetic of oStos) ; but in other passages the usual meaning of the
particle may
be taken, as 1 John iii. 1.
Compare Matt. x. 25 Luke xvii. 2 ; ; even Phil. ii. 2. {" Fill up my joy by
being of the same mind." T. S. Green.)

has been a question with grammarians whether Uo. ever means

(2) It
merely so that, expressing event without any reference to puiyose. The
former presumed use of the particle has been called its eventual (or

ecbatic) sense, the latter its final (or tehc^). Most, however, now agree
that (with the exception above noted) the final significance is generally
discernible. 1 Thess. v. 4 has been cited as " losing the notion
;
of finality in the eventual sense " ye are not in darkness^ that
the day should overtake you as a thief. But it would seem appropriate
enough to represent it as the intention of darkness that those surrounded
with it should be suddenly surprised. Again, in John xii. 23, xvi. 2, 32,
"
Meyer justly remarks, that which shall happen in the wpa is regarded
as the object of its coming." On Gal. v, 17, Bishop Lightfoot says,
" Ua here seems to denote simply the result, whereas in classical writers
it always expresses the purpose." But surely this is unnecessary.
Bishop Ellicott renders, to the end that ye may not [R.Y., that ye may
not\ not so that ye cannot, A.Y. but with the usual and proper telic ;

force of iva. " The object and end of the to dvTiKcto-^at (the antagonism)
on the part of each principle is to prevent a man doing what the other
principle would lead him to do."

For other passages in which the final sense has been questioned, but where
"Winer and most modern critics maintain it, see Luke ix. 45 (purposely hidden,
as a part of the Divine plan) ; John iv. 36, vii. 23, ix. 2, xi. 15 ; Rom. ix. 11,
xi. 31 ; 2 Cor. i.Eph. ii, 9, iii. 10.
9, v. 4 ; In these, and in many similar
texts, sound criticism seems to require the meaning, not so that it was, but in
order that it might be.^

The importance of the discussion is chiefly seen in relation to the

passages which speak of a Divine purpose, in prophecy or otherwise.
For instance, the words of Old Testament prediction, Isa. vi. 10, are
quoted. Matt. xiii. 15; Mark iv. 12; Luke viii. 10; John xii. 40;
Acts XX viii. 27 (Matt, and Acts have from the LXX. iit^ttotc, the rest

^ tVa eK^ariKov (from e/c/SatVoj, to issue from) ; tVa ts\lk6v (from reXos, endJ).
- Undoubtedly in the later forms of the language the ecbatic sense became esta-
blished. Thus, in modern Greek the Infinitive itself has become superseded by a
form of the verb with the particle vd for 'iva.

Y
 322 INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. [§ 384 (2).

I'va . . . fii]). Is the passage to be read, in order that seeing they may not
see, etc., or, so that seeing they see not, or even, because seeing they
see not ? We believe that the former interpretation is the only one
admissible. The blindness is represented as judicial —a punishment
inflicted by God on disobedience and hardness of heart.
Again, in the phrase, I'va (otto)?) irXiipt&OT], that it (the Old Testament
prophecy) might he fulfilled (Matt. i. 22, ii. 15, 23, iv. 14, viii. 17, xii. 17,
xiii. 35, xxi. 4, xxvi. 56 ; Mark xiv. 49 John xiii. 18, xv. 25, xvii. 12,
;

xviii. 9, xix. 24, 36), are we to understand the statement to be that so

the ivords icere fulfilled^ sometimes, as it would seem, by an accommo-
dation of their meaning, or that the occurrence took place in order that
they might he fulfilled ? To answer this question fully, would lead into
a discussion of the whole scope and meaning of prophecy. But, as a
point of grammar, there seems every reason why the usual meaning of
the telic particles should be retained. It is the expositor's business to
translate in order to interpret ; not to interpret in order to translate. In
some cases, at least, the words quoted could not primarily have had the
meaning attached to them in the New Testament but in their original ;

acceptation they fell into the line of the "increasing purpose" which
runs through the ages, and so revealed their highest significance in
Messiah's day. The true key to the passage is not to be found in a
perverted use of the particle^ but in an accurate comprehension of the
verrh}

See, especially, the transaction recorded John xix. 28-30.

Acts iii. 19 : fxeTavoy^craTe ovv kol iincrTpiil/aTe, tt/so? to i^aXeicjjOrjvaL

v/xiov Ta9 dyaaprtas, Sirws dv 'A-Ocdo-l Kaipol avai(/v$€(j}<s, k.t.A,., can only be
translated, repent ye, therefore, and turn again, that your sins may he

blotted out, that so there may come seasons of refreshing, etc. (R.V.).
The meaning v;hen (A.V.) cannot be sustained. Whatever be the
special reference of Katpol avaif/vico)^;, they are set forth as the purposed
result of the people's repentance, and denote in some way the blessings
of Messiah's kingdom.

(3) As a negative final particle, standing alone after verbs expressing

fear, caution, anxiety, |j.t^ has the force of Ua firj, Sirws p.^.

^ See Olshausen on Matt, i, 22. Grotius, and those who have followed his cri-
ticisms, attach to the verb some such meaning as consummated.
 —

§ 384 (3).] INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. 323

Matt, xviii. 10 : opare \Li\ KaTa4>povi]<rt]T€ €vo? Tu)V jxLKpu)v TovTUiv, see that
ye do not desjiise one of these little ones.

So 2 Cor, viii, 20 ; GaL vi. 1 ; Heb. xii. 15, 16.

After verbs of fearing, fx-q may be translated lest, or that.

2 Cor. xii. 20, 21 : <^o(^ovp.ai yap, |iTJ ttws eXOoiV oi'x olovs 6e\o) ciJpw

v/xa?, K.T.X., for I fear that lohen I come 1 shall not firid you S2cch as I
desire, etc.

Acts xxiii. 10, xxvii. 17.

h. A particle of mtention may be followed by an Indicative

Future (never with ottw?).
The instances of this idiom are few, and most of them are contested
readings. The Future, where admitted, must be taken as conveying the
idea of duration more vividly than the Aorist Subjunctive.

Gal. ii. 4 : Ua rj/xas KaTa8ov\«(rov<riv, that they should enslave us.

Rev. xxii. 14: fiaKapLOt ol 7rXvvovT€<s TO.? o-ToAa.5 avTwv, Xva ia-rai rj l^ovcrta
avTwv, K.T.X., blessed are they icho wash their rohes,^ that theirs may he the
access, etc. In 1 Pet. iii. 1, Rev. xiv. 13, W. H. have Ind. Fut., the
Received Text has Subj. Aor.
|ii^ (TTore) is found with the Indicative Future, Heb. iii. 12 : ^Xcttctc,
ddeA^ot', (1^ TroT€ 'itrrai tv tlvl v/jlCjv Kaphia Trovrjpa aTrKXTta?, take heed,
brethren, lest there should (shall) be in any one of you an evil heart of
unbelief So Col. ii. 8.

The Indicative present or perfect after ix-f} shows the elhpsis, not of IVa, but of
6tl ; i.e., the sentence is not intentional, but objective. Luke xi. 35 : "lest the
light is darkness." Gal. iv. 11 '*
lest I have laboured." :

There are three passages in which the Indicative present seems to be used in
intentional clauses:

1 Cor. iv. 6 : 'iva jxtj ets vir^p evbs <pv(Tiov(T6e Kara toO iripov, that ye he not puffed
up one for another against yet another.

Col. iv. 17 : tpa avrrjv Tr\r]po?s, that thou fulfil it (the ministry).

Gal. iv. 17 : 'iva aiVoL-s ^rjXovTe, in order that ye may zealously affect thern.

It will, however, be noted that all these verbs are of the contracted conjuga-
tion in -ow and it is easier to suppose them examples of an irregularly formed
;

Subjunctive than of a syntax so anomalous as an Indicative would be. 'iva as an

adverb of place, where, is not found either in LXX. or N.T.

^ Note here the various reading, accepted by the best critics (W. H., R.V.).
324 the infinitive. [§ 385.

The Infinitive.

385. a. The Infinitive Mood is a Verbal Substantive, and ex-

presses the abstract notion of the verb.
Like the verb in other moods, it admits the modifications of tense and voice.
It may have a subject, or may govern an object, near or remote and it is ;

qualified by adverbs. Like a substantive, it may be the subject or object of a

verb ; it is often defined by the article, and is employed in the different cases.

h. The Negative Adverb with the Infinitive may be ov or fi^.

Since ov denies as matter of fact, ix-f] as matter of thought, and since the
Infinitive usually depends on some verb or clause implying thought, "will,
design, the latter will generally be the appropriate particle.

Matt. ii. 1 2 : ;;(p7;/xaTicr^€VT€s ..-Y-^ dvaKajixj/ai 7rpo9 'Hpw8r;i/, being divinely

learned not to return to Herod.
Matt. V. 34 : Xeyw vfjlv y.^ 6|io<rai oAoo?, / enjoin you not to sicear at all.

So viii. 28, and many other passages. Where ou is found, it may generally be
connected with the principal verb. (See John xxi. 25.

c. The Infinitive governs the same case as the other parts of

the verb.

Matt. vii. 11 : otSare Sdjiara d-yaOoL 8i8dvat rots t^kvois v/xwv, ye know how
to give good gifts unto your children.

Luke XX. 35 : ol h\ Kara^tcu^evre? tov aiwvos cKctvov tv^civ, koI ttjs dvao"-

Td<r€ws T^9 €/c vcKpcov, they who are deemed worthy to obtain that life and
the resurrection from the dead.

Compare the rules on the use of the cases after verbs.

386. The between the Tenses of the Infinitive is analo-

distinction
gous to that in the Imperative and Subjunctive. The Present marks
continuity; the Aorist, a single act; the Future (very rare in the New
Testament), intention ov futurity; and the Perfect, a completed act.

Matt. xiv. 22 : yvdyKacre rov<: /Aa^r/ra? €|ipT)vai ... kol Trpoaytiv avrov, he

made the disciples embark (a single act), cmd go before him (continuous).

Acts XX vii. 10 : fiiXXeiv 'ia-io-Qai rov ttXow, that the voyage is going to be.

Acts xxvi. 32 : diroXeXvorOai iSvyaro 6 avOp(i)7ro<s ovto<s, this man could

have been set at liberty.
 ;

§ 389, a.] THE- INFINITIVE. 325

The Present lufiuitive might more properly be called the Imperfect Infinitive,
refening, like the Perfect, to state rather than to time. The time is fixed by tht
principal verb.

387. The Subject of the Infinitive, when expressed, is always

in the Accusative Case.
For the explanation of this rule, svith examples, see § 285.

But the Subject of the Infinitive, when the same with that of the
preceding verb, is generally omitted, words agreeing with it being
in the nominative.
Rom. XV. 24 : eATrt'^w SiaTropruojicvos Oedcraa-Oat v/xag, / hojje to see you
(in) passing through.
2 Cor. X. 2 : Seo/xac 8e to firj irapwv Oapprjaai, Imt I piuij that I may not
(when) 'preseid he bold.

388. The Infinitive, with or without the Article, may form the
Subject of a sentence.
Rom. vii. 18: to yap OeXciv TrapaKUTai fxoL^ to 8e KaT€pYa^€o-0ai to koXov
ov, for to will is present icith me, hut to accomplish the good is not.

Gal. vi. 14: kjxoi 8e pJq yeVotTo Kavxao^ai, hut far he it from me to glory!
Eph. V. 12 : ala-xjiov Icttl kol Xiynv, evm to meidion ... is disgraceful.

A peculiar kind of extended subject is formed by the Infinitive with iyevero,

it came to pass that... Thus, Acts ix. 3 : ey^vero avrov eyyl^eiv tq Aafxaa-Kip, it

carne to pass that he was approaching Damascus, lit., "his approach to Damascus
occurred." So Mark ii. 23 Luke vi. 1, 6 Acts iv. 5, xvi. 16, etc. Acts xxii.
; ;

17 has a combination of construction it happened to me wlien I had returned

:

(/tot inro(TTp€\l/avTi) to Jerusalem, ami as I was pi^aying (Trpoo-euxo/iteVou fj.ov, gen.

abs. in the temj^le, that J was {yeviadai. fie) in an ecstasy, etc.

)

The Subject Infinitive may have its own Accusative Subject.

Matt. xvii. 4 : KaAoV ia-Tcv T||jLas wSc €lvai, it is good for us to he here.

1 Cor. xi. 13 : irpk-nov €(TtI yuvaiKa aKaTaKaXvTTTOV tw 0€U) irpo(T€v)(€.(TdcLL

is it becoming for a icoman to pray to God uncovered ?

Matt, xviii. 8 : koXov col Icttlv eto-eX^etv cts r-qv ^wrjv kvKKov rj \<i)k6v, it

isgood for thee to enter iido life maimed or halt, the pronoun o-€ being
understood from crot before ddiXOfiv.

389. a. The Infinitive regularly stands as the Object of verbs

denoting a mental faculty, impression, or act — such as to be able,
326 THE IXFINITIVE. [§ 389, a.

to heai', see, helieve^ know, wish, hope, endeavour, and an asser-

etc. ;

tion of thought or will, as to say, announce, pivclaini, command,

forbid, etc.i

In this connection also the Infinitive may have its own Subject, and may take
er omit the Article.

Matt. vi. 24 : ovScts Svvarai Svarl KvpioLs SovXevciv, no man is able to serve
two masters.
Rom. i. 22 : <}xxcrK0VT€s clvai o-o(f>ol i/xaypdvOrjcrav, professing to be icise,

they became fools.

Phil. ii. 6 : ov\ apiraYjibv fi-yrjo-aro rh elvat laa ©coJ, he esteemed not his
being on an equality loith God an object of eager desire (R. Y., a prize).

Here tlie object Infinitive is defined by the article ; laa 9- is the predicate of
the Intinitive in apposition with the subject (t'ca is adverbial) ; and apirayfiov is
in predicative apposition with the Infinitive itself.

b. The Infinitive may be employed, for the expression of intention

or result, as an adjunct (1) to a verbal predicnte.

Matt. ii. 2 : {j\6op.€v irpoo-Kwrio-ai avTw, ice came to worship him.

Matt. XX. 28 ; 1 Cor. i. 17 ; Rev. xvi. 9, etc.

(2) An Infinitive in this sense may depend upon a Substantive, as in

the frequent phrase 6 ^x"** "'''* aKovetv, he that hath ears to hear. So
Acts xiv. 5 ; Heb. xi. 15, etc.

(3) It may depend upon an Adjective, as Luke xv. 19 : ovkIti dfu

&|ios KXT]0fivai vto'g aov, I am no longer worthy to be called thy son.

So with Swards, Acts ii. 24 ; 2 Tim. i. 12 ; iKavds, Mark i. 7 ; IXtvOcpos,

1 Cor. vii. 39 ; ^toi|ios, Luke xxii. 33, etc. Once with dtSiKos, Heb. vi. 10,

God is not unjust to forget.

390. The with the oblique cases of the Article (sub-

Infinitive
stantivised, ^201, 204) is employed as follows:

a. Genitive.

1. Dependent upon nouns

Luke X. 19 : ScSwKa vpXv t^v l|ov<r£av tov irarciv, k.t.X., I have given to
you the power of treading, etc.

*'
1 Verba sentiendi vel declarandi," etc.
 — —

§ 390, C] THE INFINITIVE. 327

Acts XX. 3 : €y€V€To 7v«|iT]s Tov {nroorTp€'4>€iv, Jie was of the intention of
returning.

Acts xxvii. 20 : iXtris Tracra tov o-wteo-Gai rj/xas, all hoj^e of our being
saved.

Acts xiv. 9; 2 Cor. viii. 11 ; Phil. iii. 21, etc. So with words signifying time
(time /or), Luke i. 57, ii. 6, 21^ xxi. 22 ; 1 Pet. iv. 17; Rev. xiv. 15.

2. Dependent upon verbs that usually take a genitive

Luke i. 9 : '£Ka\i toO 0v|iid(rai, he had obtained the lot of sacrijicijig.

2 Cor. i. 8 : wcrre €|aTrop-q0f)vai 7)/xa? Kat tov tfi^, SO that we despaired

even of life.

1 Pet. iii. 10 (LXX.). So after adjectives, Luke xxiv. 25; Acts xxiii. 15.
Especially, with verbs signifying hindrance, Luke iv. 12; Rom. xv. 22.

3. Expressive of design, like Iva with Subjunctive, or Iv^ko. with

Genitive
Matt. ii. 13 : /xeAAct yap 'HpwSr;? ^rjTeLV to TraiSLOv tov airoXc'crat avTO, for
Herod loill seek the youivj child to destroy it.

So Matt. iii. 13, xxi. 32, xxiv. 45; Luke xxiv. 29; Acts xiii. 47 (LXX.);
Heb. X. 7 (LXX.), etc.

But sometimes the notion of design seems almost or entirely lost in

that of result. See also under Iva (§ 384).

Acts vii. 19 : ovto^ ... iKaKiaaev tovs Trarepa? tov iroi€tv Ta /3pi(f>yj eK^era
avTwv, this man ... ill-treated our fathers, so that they caused their babes
to be exposed.

Compare Acts iii. 12; Rom. i. 24, vii. 3.

b. Dative.

The Dative of Cause. (See § 280^ c.)

2 Cor. ii. 13: ovk ccrxrjKa avecnv . . . t<3 \i^ cvpciv yu,€ Tltov tov d8eA<jf)ov

fiov, I had no rest through my not having found Titus my brother.

In 1 Thess. iii. 3, t<2 (Rec.) should be to (W. H.). The above instance is the
only one.

c. Genitive, Dative, or Accusative, with Prepositions.

A few illustrations of this usage will be sufficient, as the Prepositions

are taken in their ordinary meaning. (See §§ 288-307.)
328 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 390, C.

8ia, with Genitive, "through."

Heb. ii. 15 : 8id Travros tov tTJv, through all their lifetime.

8ia, with Accusative, " on account of."

Matt, xiii. 5 : 8ia to ^^ 'iyjiiv /3d6o<; ... 8td to |i^ (i\tiv pt^ai/, on account of
it:-! havinrj no depth ...on account of its having no root.

So, with ace. subject. Matt. xxiv. 12; Mark v. 4 ; Luke ii. 4, xi. 8, etc.

els, "to the end that."

Matt. XX. 19 : els to k\nral^ai kol fjLao-TtY«o-ai Koi orTavpwcrai, to mock and
scourge and crucifij.

So Mark xiv. 55 ; Luke v. 17, with subject, etc. Both ets and Trpos express
purpose, but Trpos the more emphatically.

Iv, "in, during," especially of time.

Matt. xiii. 25 : kv Se t<3 KaOeuSeiv rov^ dvOpMirov^, and while men slept.

So also Matt, xxvii. 12 ; Mark ii. 15 ; Luke i. 21, etc.

|i€Ta, with Accusative, " after."

Matt. XX vi. 32 : iierd 8e to lyip^r\v(x.\. fie, hilt after I have risen.

So Luke xii. 5, xxii. 20 ; Acts i. 3, etc.

TTpd, " before,'' opposed to /xera.

Matt. vi. 8 : irpb tov {»/xa? oXrr\fra.\. avTov, before ye ask him.

So Luke ii. 21, xxii. 15 ; John i. 48, etc.

irpos, with Accusative, " in order to."

Matt. vi. 1 : irpos to 0€a9f]vat av'rotg, in order to be gazed at by them.

So Matt. xiii. 30, xxvi. 12 ; Mark xiii. 22, etc. Once, m reference to, Luke
xviii. 1.

Once avTi is found, James iv. 15, instead of your saying ; and ^veKa,

2 Cor. vii. 12, for the sake of your zeal being made manifest. ^«s, " until,"

occurs with Gen. inf., Acts viii. 40, until he came.

391. To express result, the particle &(m is often prefixed to the

Infinitive. It should be noted tliat wo-t€ is properly ecbatic, as distin-
guished from telic particles. Compare § 384.

Matt. viii. 24: (rctcryoios /xeyas iyevero . . . cta-n to irXotov KaXviTTeo-Oai,

there arose a great storm^ so that the vessel was being covered.

Matt. xiii. ?)^ : M<rT€ iXQiiv to, Trereti/a, so that thf birds came.
§ 393.] PARTICIPLES. 329

Luke ix. 52 : &<m^ hoi\La.(rai avT<2, so as to make ready for him.

Acts xvi. 26 : «<rT€ o-aXtuG-fivai ra Oe/xeXta, so that the foundatio7is loere

shaken.

So in a great number of passages. Twice only in X.T. is wcrre found

in this meaning with the Indicative ; a construction common in classic
Greek.

John iii. 16 : ovna^i yap yyaTrrjaev 6 ©eo? tov Kocfxov wo-tc tov vlov tov
jxovoyevrj ^8«k€v, k.t.X., God so loved the world that he gave his only-
begotten Son^ etc.

So also Gal. ii. 13.

The proper distinction between the Infinitive and Indicative in this connection
is, that the former expresses the result as the natural and logical consequence
of what has been previously enunciated ; the latter states it simply as a fact
which occurs or has occurred.^

392. In Phil. iii. 16 we find the Infinitive employed for the Impera-
tive ; ets o €(j)Od(jafi€v, rw avT(Z o-Toixetv, ichereto ive have attained^ in the
same direction walk ye.^

The use of xtjiipnv in salutation is similar, " greeting," Acts xv. 23,
xxiii. 26; James i. 1 (2 John 10, 11, suggests an ellipsis here). This
habitual phrase reappears as a more decided Imperative, Rom. xii. 15,
with an antithetic verb : xaLp€iv /xcra ^atpovrwv, KXaUiv /aero, KAatovTcoi/,

rejoice with the rejoici7ig, loeep icith the iveeping.

Participles.

393. The Participles **

partake " the nature of Verbs and of
Adjectives.*

Like they have the modifications of Voice and Tense and may have an
verbs, ;

object, immediate or remote. Like adjectives, they agree with substantives,

expressed or understood and are subject to the exceptional constructions of
;

Synesis, or "rational concord."

On these points, therefore, nothing need be added to the rules already given.

1 W. H. read uj.
" See Bishop Ellicott on Gal. ii. 13.
'^
Ellicott. The rest of the verse (Rec.) is omitted by the best critics.
* The Infinitive is the Verbal Substantive, the Participle the Verbal Adjective.
330 PAKTICIPLES. [§ 393.

The Tenses of the Participle conform in meaning to those of the

Indicative. Their various uses will be seen in the examples given under
the following sections.
The Negatives used with Participles follow the general law. Thus,
ovK ciSoTC9, "not knowing," a*' a matter of fact (a class definite); |i^
ctSores, " not knowing," as a matter of siqjposition (a class indefinite),
such ignorance being presumed as the ground of any further assertion
respecting them. Compare Gal. iv. 8 with 1 Thess. iv. 5 2 Thess. i. 8. ;

As, however, the Participle is generally expressive of some condition, the

negative employed is in most cases iitJ.
When a Participle has a Subject of its own in a separate clause, the
construction is the Genitive Absolute, for which see § 275. The fol-

lowing rules give the use of Participles referring to the Subject or Object
of another verb.

394. Participles (like Adjectives) are predicative or attributive. Their

predicative uses may be classified as follows :

1.After the forms of the substantive verb, a Participle may be

used as a simple or "primary" predicate.
This construction is confined to the present and perfect Pai-ticiples. AVith the
latter, certain parts of the verb to he make regular compound tense-forms, as the
third person plur., perf. and plup. Passive. (See Paradigms.) The usage is
extended, however, to the singular number and to other persons. Luke iv. 16 :

o6 ^v redpafifievos, where he had been brought up. John iii. 28 : direaTaX/xevos ei/j.!.,

I luive been sent. With the present Participle, the substantive verb gives a
continuous sense, forming what are called the *' resolved tenses." (See §§ 362, c,

363, e.)

The resolved tense must be distinguished from the use of the Participle as
secondary predicate. For example, 2 Cor. v. 19 is not to be read, God was
reconciling the toorld in Christ, but God was in Christ reconciling, etc.

Luke xxiv. 32 : ov)(l rj Kaphta yfxwv Kaio|i^vT] ^jv iv rjfuv ; was not our
heart burning within us?
Sometimes this construction appears very nearly equivalent to the simple verb,
as Mark xiii. 2.5 (compare Matt. xxiv. 29). So Acts ii. 2 ; James i. 17, iii. 15.

In other cases there is a greater stress upon the notion of state or duration :—
Pres., Acts xxv. 10 ; Rev. i. 18 ; Matt. x. 26 Luke vi. 43 ; 2 Cor. ix. 12 ; ;

Gal. iv. 24 (not "which things are an allegory," but are allegorised, i.e.,

susceptible of allegorical application, contain an allegory, R.V. ; drtva being

used, not &, see § 349) ; Col. ii. 23 ; 1 Cor. xv. 19; 2 Cor. ii. 17. Impf.,

Matt. vii. 29, xix. 22 ; Mark i. 39 ; Luke i. 22, xv. 1, xxiii. 8 ; Acts xxi. 3 ;

Gal. i. 22, 23. Fut., Matt. x. 22 ; Luke i. 20, v. 10, xxi. 24.
§ 394, 2.] PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 331

In Luke iii. 23, avrbs 9ju 6 'Itjctovs dpxo/xevos waei erCjv rpidKOvra, we must
understand, Jesus himself, icJien he began (to teach), was about thirty years of
age (R.V.) (for gen., see § 266), not "began to be about thirty" (A.V.).

2. Certain verbs, expressive of perception, or the conditions of an

action, are complemented by a Participle, instead of an Infinitive.

If the verb is neuter or passive, the Participle agrees with the Subject ; if

active, with the Object.

Such verbs in the Xew Testament are — (1) neuter : iravofiai, rcXew (8ta-
Xetirw, €7KaK€w), all variously signifying desistence from a thing ; <}>atvo|iai,

to he manifest, and XavOdvu, to he secret, in doing anything ; (2) active :

aKovd), YivwcrKA), opdco, pXeiro), etc.

Luke v. 4 : w? eiravo-aro XoiXuv, when he ceased speal'ing.

Acts V. 42, vi. 13, xiii. 10, xx. 31, xxi. 32 ; Eph. i. 16 ;
Col. i. 9 ; Heb. x. 2.

Matt. vi. 18 : fxr) <j)avfis rots av6pu)7roL<; vT]<rT6vwv, that thou appear not to

men as fasting; ver. 16.

Matt. xi. 1 : ore ereXeo-ev . . . Siardo-o-wv, when he made a7i end of com-
mandi7ig.
Luke vii. 45 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Matt. i. 18 (pass.).

Heb. xiii. 2 : ^oA6y rtvcs ^cvCo-avrcs dyycAov?, some unawares entetiained

(were secret in entertaining) angels}
Luke iv. 23 : ocra -fiKovaraiiev ycvtJp.cva eis r-qv KaTrepvaov/x, ivhatever things
we heard of as done in Capernaum.
Mark xiv. 58 ; Acts ii. 11, vii. 12 ; 2 Thess. iii. 11, etc.

Heb. xiii. 23 : yivwcKcre tov d8eX4>2>v Ty/xwi/ Tt/xd^cov diroXeXv|ji€vov, Jcnoiv

that our hrother Timothy has heen liherated.

Acts viii. 23 ; Heb. x. 25.

Some of these verbs may also be followed by an inf. or by a finite

verb with 8tu Thus compare 2 Thess. iii. 11 with John xii. 18 and 34.
When the predicative Participle is used, the real Object of the verb is in the
noun. In the infinitive construction, the Infinitive contains the Object, and
Srt reduces the thing heard to the form of a proposition.

So 3 John 4 : d/coi5w to. i/Mo. riKva iv tt} akqddq. irepnraTovvTa is, I hear of my
children, that they walk in the trutli.

^ A very common classic idiom.

332 PKEDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. [§ 394, 2.

TrepiiraTelv would have been, I hear of the walking of my children in the

truth.

OTL ir€piwaTov<nv would have meant, the tidings brought to me are these,
that, etc.

Again : 1 John iv. 2 : o/xoXoye? 'Irjaovv Xpiarbv ev capd eXrjXvdora^ confesses

Jesus Christ come in the flesh (not who came, which would have required r^v i\...).

eXrjXvOevai (W. H. marg.) would signify, that Jesus Christ has come. (Comp.
2 John 7.)

So with neuter verbs Sttws (pavQat. rois dv6pu}iroi.i vriarevovTes, tJmt they may
:

appear unto men fasting, i.e., the fasting was real. vrjcrTeveip would have im-
plied that the fasting was only apparent. On the contrary, eiraiTelv aiax^vofj-ai
(Luke xvi. 3) means, / am ashamed to beg ; iiraiTQv would have meant, I am
ashamed of begging.'^

3. A Participle without the Article, and in grammatical concord

with the Subject of the verb, may stand as adjunct to the verbal
Predicate.
These adjuncts may be of various kinds, as
a. Modal, setting forth the manner in which the given action was
performed.
Matt. V. 2 : iSiSaa-Kev avrov? Xiytav, he taught them, saying.

Matt. xix. 22 : dTrrjXOc Xvjtovjxcvos, he loent aioay sorrowful.

Matt. xi. 25, etc. : airoKpiGds cTttcv, he said^ having addressed himself to

reply, " he answered and said."

Matt, xxviii. 19 ; Acts iii. 8, xiii. 45 ; 1 Tim. i. 13. For the Aor. Part,
marking the commencement of the action, see Acts i. 24 ; Rom. iv, 20.

h. Temporal, denoting (i.) a contemporaneous, (ii.) preceding, or (iii.)

consequent fact.

(i.) Pres. Acts v. 4: ov^t |Aevov aoi efxeve ; while it remained did it

not remain thine ?

Matt. vi. 7 ; Acts xxi. 28 ;1 Tim. i. 3, ivhen I was on my way ;- Heb. xi. 21

Rom. XV. 25 [ministering ; he had already entered on his errand of ministry)

1 Pet. i. 8, 9 {while ye see not ...yet believe ... ivhile [also] ye receive).

(ii.) Aor. Acts ix. 39 : iivao-Tds Se IleTpos a-vvrjXOcv aurot?, a7id Peter
having arisen ivent with them, i.e., " arose and went with them."

^ See Rev. T. S. Green'sGreek Testament Grammar," p. 183.

**

- There is here a strong argument for an apostolic journey after Paul's Roman
imprisonment, as no part of the history in the Acts corresponds with this mission
of Timothv.
§ 394, C?.] PKEDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 333

This use of the Aor. Part, is one of the most common idioms in the New
Testament, and may be continually represented in translation "by two verbs — th«
action of the one (the Participle) immediately preceding that of the other. Or
we may render by some such preposition as after, iqyon, with the verbal noun ;
or by a temporal clause with u-keic.

Acts iii. 3 : o? I8«v ... i?|pwTa, who saw ... and asked; or, on seeing ...

asked; or, whe?i he saio . . . asked.

So ver. 4, 7, 12, iv. 7, 8, 13 {.while beholding [pres.] and having ascertained),

15, 18, 19, 21, 23, 36, 87, etc In fact, there is scarcely any usage more
common in the New Testament.

(iii.) Flit. Acts viii. 27: 09 iXr)\vO€L irpoo-KWTio-wv. ct? *Icporo-aX7^/x, ivho

had come to Jerusalem to worship.

This idiom (the Fut. Paxt. to express a purpose) is rare in the New Testa-
ment. (See Acts xxiv. 11.)

c. A Participle often expresses some relation of cause, condition, etc.,

to the principal verb. This relation the general sense of the passage will
show.

Causal. Acts iv. 21 : dTreXvcrav avrov?, firj^lv cdpio-KOvrcs, k.t.X., they

released thein^ as they found nothingy etc.

Concessive. Rom. i. 32 : ol.TLVi<i to StKaiw/xa tov ©eov liri-yvovTCS . . . avra

TToiovo-tv, K.T.X., tcho, though made aware of tloe righteous decree of God ...
do these thiiigs, etc.

Conditional. Rom. ii. 27: KaX Kptvct r^ Ik <f>va-€(i)S aKpo^va-Tia tov vo/jlov

TcXovo-a, K.T.A., and shall 7iot that which naturally is uncirciuncision, if

it fulfil the laiv, judge thee, etc.

Matt. vi. 27 (by anxious care) ; Rom. viii. 23 ; 2 Cor. v. 2 (because

we desire).

d. Intensive, a Hebraism, (Compare § 280, b.) Like the cognate

dative noun, a Participle of the same verb may be employed.

Heb. vi. 14 : ivkoyStv ivkoyi\<rui crc, koI irXiiOvvwv irXTiOvvui o^e, blessing I
will bless thee, and midtipl ying I will multiply thee, (LXX. ; Gen.
xxii. 17.)

So Matt. xiii. 14 ; Acts vii. 34.

A predicative Participle may be qualified by «s, as, as if, declar-

ing the alleged ground of an assertion.
334 PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. [§ 394, d.

Luke xvi. 1 : hi^pkridrj . . . «s Siao-KopirC^wv, fc.r.X., ]i6 Was accused^ as

tliongli u'osting, etc.

Luke xxiii. 14 : Trpoir'qviyKari {xol tov avBpiairov tovtov ws a'Tro<rrp€<j>ovTa

rov AaoV, ye brought before me this man on the charge of perverting the
people.

1 Cor. vii. 25.

In like manner, the particles Kalirep, Kairoi, although, may be employed.

Heb. V. 8 : Kairrep wp vios, although he was a son.
So Heb. iv. 3, with gen. abs. ; vii. 5, i^eXTjXvdoras, in apposition with obj. ;

2 Pet. i. 12.

395. Participles as epithets are used like adjectives,

Acts xxi. 26 : TT] cxof^^vt] rjixepq,, on the next day.

1 Tim. i. 10 : et rt erepov ttj v)7iaivovo-T| SiSao-KoX^ij, di/TtKetrat, if anything
else is opposed to the healthful teaching (of the faith). For other instances
of this participle, see vi. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. 13, iv. 3 ; Titus i. 9, ii. 1.

396. With the Article, the Participle is eq^uivalent to the rela-

tive with the finite verb.

Itmay thus stand in apposition with a noun in any relation to the sentence,
or may be used alone, the substantive being understood.
Matt. i. 16 : 'Ir/crovs 6 Xrydp.€vos Xptorro?, Jesus who is called Christ.

Mark vi. 2 : t] crocf>ia t) 8o0€to-a roirro), the wisdom which is given unto
this man.
Luke xxi. 37 : to 6po<; rh koXovucvov 'EAatwf, to the mount that is called

''
of Olives.''

1 Cor. ii. 7: XaXovpitv ©cov cro^iav ...'ttjv airoK€Kpvjip.€vriV| we speak the

icisdom of God ... that hath been hidden.

1 Thess. ii. 15: twv koI tov K.vptov diroKTcivavrwv . . . kol 7)/xa.<s 4KSi(o|dvT<i>v

KOL 0€{3 \ii\ dpco-KiJvTwv, (of tlic Jcws) u'ho loth slew the Lord ... and drove
us outj arul do not please God.
By a comparison of examples, the distinction between the use of the Participle
with and without the Article will be clearly seen. 6 SiSdcKcov is lie who teaches ;
6 didd^as, he ivlio taught ; whereas diSdcrKujv alone would mean ivhile lie was
teaching, and didd^ai, when he had taught.

The Participle and Article often form a substantive phrase, See

§§ 200, 204 6 oTreipwv, he who sows, a sower.
:
 2 ^

§ 397.1 ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. 335

In some cases the substantivised Participle appears to have lost

all temporal reference.

Eph. iv. 28 : 6 KXeirrwv /AT/KeTt KXeTrreTa), let him that steoletli steal no
more. Here 6 KXci/^a?, he ivJio stole (once), would be too weak in meaning,
while 6 KXiTmj^ would be too strong.
So Heb. xi. 2S. "With an Object we find the same construction
Gal. i. 23 : 6 Siwkiov 7}fjLds irore, our former 2)crsecutor.
1 Thess. i. 10 : 'Itjctouv tov pvofxevov 7)1X0.^, Jesus our deliverer.
Winer quotes also Matt, John xii. 20 Acts iii. 2 Gal. ii, 2
xxvii. 40 ; ; ; ;

Rom. V. 17 1 Thess. v, 24 1 Pet. i. 17.

;
But in some of these passages there
;

may well be a special reference to the time then present. So John xiii. 11 he :

knew TOV irapa8i86vTa avrbv, the r/uiJi then betray ijig him, i.e., who was then at
work for that purpose.
The Present may occasionally be explained according to § 361, d.
IMatt, xxvi. 28: rovro €.<jtl to alfxd /xov ...to Trepl ttoWCjv iK\vvv6]i€V0Vf
this IS my hlood which is being shed {i.e., to be shed) for many. So
8i8o|i€vov, heiny given, Luke xxii. 19; kXwjicvov, 1 Cor. xi. 24.

In other cases, the ordinary meaning of the Present is to be taken.

Acts ii. 47 : ''the Lord was adding daily to the church," tovs <r«tofievovs,
those who were heiny saved, i.e., in the course or way of salvation. 2 Cor.
ii. 15 : "we are of Christ a sweet savour unto God, in those xi:ho are
being saved, and in the perishing" (iv tois o-w^ojievois koI iv tois airoXXv-
|jt€vots). 2 Cor. iii. 13 :
*'
so that the children of Israel could not look to
ths end of that which icas vanishing away" (tov Korap^oviievov), viz., the

glory on the countenance of Moses.

397. I^ some cases a Participle seems to stand alone, the verb to

which it is an adjunct being at a distance from it, or the construction of
the sentence being broken.

Horn. v. 11 : Kavxwucvoi must be connected with o-«0Ti<ro}i66a, ver. 9, we

shall be saved — and not only that, but saved icith joyful consciousness of
the blessing.

1 Pet. ii. 18— iii. 7 : viroTa<r<ro}jL€VOi, viroTacro-dp-evai, d'yaOoiroiovo-ai., |x"^

I <|>opovfi€vai, <rvvoiKo5vT6s,

are adjuncts to Tip-^o-arc, ii.

are not for imperatives, as has
17 : render due honour to all
been supposed, but
... ye servants

1 Stier, Ellicott, Alford.

^ See Winer's collection and explanation of instances, § 45, 6.
836 ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. [§ 397.

hij subjection ...ye wives by subjection^ icell-doinri, fearlessness, ye liusban(h

by dwelling 2vith them, etc.

2 Pet. i. 20 : ^ivwo-kovtcs continues the thought of irpoo-e'xovTtSj depen-

dent on KaXws iroiciTc, ver. 1 9, ye do well in taking lieed, Imoiuing this Jirst.
So ch. iii. 3 ; read with jiviio-Gfjvai, ver 2.

Instances of broken structure (anacolouthon, see § 412) may be found in Acts

xxiv. 5 having found this man, etc., who also endeavoured to profane the temple,
:

ivhom also ice laid hold of, instead of "we laid hold of him." 2 Cor. v. 6, 8 :

being confident —yea, we are confident and lucll pleased ; the sentence, but for the
'
parenthesis of ver. 7, being evidently intended as ' we, being confident, are well
pleased." 2 Cor. vii. 5, where OXl^o/xcpol is really in apposition with the r;^e?s
implied in r/ aap^ ijiiiQiv. Heb. viii. 10, where /cat interrupts the structure of the
sentence. Eph. iv. 1-3 ; Col. iii. 16, etc.
§399, C] ADVERBS. 337

Chaptee YII. adverbs.

398. Adverbs qualify verbs and adjectives as in other lan-

guages.
The rules for the formation of derivative Adverbs, with lists of the Adverbs
most in use, are given, §§ 126-134.
The use of Adverbs ^vith the Article is shown, § 198.

399. Adverbial phrases are very frequent in the Xew Testament,

and are of various kinds.

a. A substantive, with or without a preposition, may be adver-

bially used.(Compare § 126.) The modal dative is adverbial (§ 280, a).

So sometimes the accusative, as t^v apx^v, John viii. 25, essentially

(Alford). Many phrases vrith Kara are adverbial (see § 300, 6). Special
adverbial combinations are : dirb ji^povs, partially, Rom. xi. 25 ; 2 Cor.
i. 14, ii. 5. CK jxepovs, individually, 1 Cor. xii. 27 ;
partially, 1 Cor.
xiii. 9, 10, 12. Kara \Lipo% paiiicidarly, Heb. ix. 5. diro |iids (yvwfxrj^),

"with one consent," ananimously, Luke xiv. 18. els to iravTeXe's, "in any
wise," Luke xiii. 11 ;
" to the uttermost," Heb. vii. 25 ; uttei'ly. Iv dXTiGeiai

"in truth," ^?'wZ?/, Matt. xxii. 16, etc. kv 8iKaio<rvvTj, righteously, Acts
xvii. 31. ev €KT€V€Ca, instantly, "in earnestness," Acts xxvi. 7. k-n dXT]0€tas,

"of a truth," tridy, Luke xxii. 59.

For the force of these and similar phrases, see imder the respective
prepositions.
James iv. 5 : irpoj <pd6vov iTrnrode? to vvevfia 8 KaripKiaev h ijfjuv.^This diffi-
cult passage should probably be rendered, jealously does the Sj)irit which he placed
in us desire (us for his own, Alford), This adverbial force of the substantive
with irp6s is common in classical Greek, though elsewhere without parallel
in the New Testament.

h. For the adjective used adverbially, see § 319.

c. For adverbial notions conveyed by means of participles, see

§ 394, 3.

^ W. H. read interrogatively tihIv ; See R.V. and marg.

338 ADVERBS. [« 399. d.

d. An is sometimes formed by a combination of

adverbial phrase
two verbs. So in the Old Testament often, "He added and spake," or,
" He added to speak," for " He spake again," an idiom copied by the
LXX. from the Hebrew.
Luke xx. 11, 12: irpoa-cOcro ir^ji^/ai, lie added to send; where Mark
xii. 4 reads irdXiv air^o-rciXc, he sent again. Acts xii. 3 : Trpo<r€0€To irvXXa-

pciv, he 'proceided to apprehend^ or, " further apprehended." But Luke

xix. 11, irpoorGels ctirev is the participial construction, he added and spake.

Some expositors have unnecessarily interpreted other verbal combinations as

adverbial Luke vi. 48 icKaxpe koX i^ddvve, " he digged deep " (A. V.), but
; e.g., :

rather, he digged and went deep (R.V.), the second verb being an advance upon
the first. So Rom. x. 20 Isaiah is very bold, and saith, not " very boldly
:

saith " Col. ii. 5: rejoicing (over you) and seeing, not "seeing with joy"
;

(comp. Ellicott's note) James iv. 2 ye murder and envy, not "envy murder-
; :

ously," or " murder enviously " (see Alford). So in many other passages.

400. For a list of the Adverbs used as prepositions governing

cases, see § 133. These may enter into combination with other adverbs,
as Matt. xi. 12 : ^ws Apn, until now. So John ii. 10, v. 17, etc. Matt,
xvii. 17: ^«s ttotc; how long? lit., *' until when?" So Mark ix. 19;
Luke ix. 41 ; John x. 24 : hoio long dost thou keep our minds in suspense ?
(Alford). Matt, xviii. 21, 22 : ^ws lirrdKis, k.tA., until seven tiines, etc.
See also Matt. xxiv. 21 : ?«s tov vvv ; xxvii. 8 : '^ws rfis tr-fwupov. Mark
xiv. 54 : ^ws iarui. Luke xxiii. 5 : iu>s »8€. Acts xxi. 5 : '4<as ii<a, etc. So
Kom. i. 13: &\p\. tov Sevpo, U7dil now, lit.," until the (time) hitherto,"
viii. 22 ; 2 Cor. iii. 14, 15 ; Phil. i. 5.

The use of the Article with the latter Adverb, however, renders it simply
equivalent to a Substantive.

401. Repeated reference has already been made to the distinction

between the negative Adverbs ov and |iTj. Generally speaking, ov denies
as matter of fact, fx-q as matter of thought, supposition, etc. The former,
therefore, is the us2ial negative with the Indicative mood, the latter the

usual negative with the other parts of the verb. Deviations from this
rule are to be explained by the primary sense of the two adverbs. Thus,
John iii. 18:6 TrtcTcvoov cts avrbv ov KptVcrat, he that helieveth on him is
not condemned (the statement of a fact) 6 8c ja^ ttio-tcvcdv, but he that ;

helieveth not (whoever he may be) has already be-en condemned ; on ^^

§ 401.] ADVERBS. 339

7r€7ri(rT€VK€Vy K.T.X.f because he hath not believed (according to the suppo-

sition made).

The same distinction applies to the compounds of oO and firi, as oUde, fi^^Se,

ovk4ti, fjLr]K^Tt., etc.

Two, or even three, negatives in the same clause do not contra^

diet one another, i
but serve to strengthen the negation.
Luke iv. 2 : o^k i<f>ay€v ovSiv, he ate not anything.

Luke xxiii. 53 : ov ovk rjv ovScls oiWr« K€LfX€vo<s, where no one at all had
yet ever lain. John xix. 4L
For special forms of strengthened negation, see §§ 363, d, 377. For the use
of negatives in interrogations, see § 370.

When one of two contrasted statements is intended to qualify

the other, it is sometimes forcibly expressed as an actual denial.
Thus, in Hosea vi. 6, the Hebrew reads, " I will have mercy and not
sacrifice.'* The LXX. translates eAco? Oikoi f\ Ova-tav, " I will have mercy

rather than sacrifice," so conveying the general meaning. Matt. ix. 13,

in quoting the passage, returns to the Hebrew expression, Kal ov Ova-Lav.

Compare Jeremiah vii. 22.

In this idiom the negatived thought, though not absolutely contradicted, is

excluded from view, that its antithesis may make its full impression. Compare
Matt. X. 20 ; Mark ix. 37 ; Luke x. 20 (omit fj.a.\\ov) ; John vii. 16,2 ^ii. 44 ;

Acts V. 4 ; 1 Thess. iv. 8, etc.

Only the context in such cases will show whether the negative is absolute or
comparative. In some instances, where an exposition similar to the above has
been adopted, the meaning of particular words has been mistaken. Thus, in
John vi. 27, ifyyd^eade fxr]T7]u ^puxriv ttjv diroWv/x^vrjv, k.t.X., "labour not for the
meat that perisheth," etc., the verb ifyya^eade does not mean "labour" generally,
but hisy yourselves, referring to the present excitement of the people. 1 Tim.
V. 23 firjKen vSpoTroret is not "drink no longer water," but be no longer a
:

water-drinker, the verb not being precisely equal to Cdup mve, but pointing to
the regular habit.'

^ The usage is thus directly opposed to the English and Latin, where " two
negatives make an affirmative."
2 Winer holds, as it would appear without sufficient reason, that this passage and
Matt. ix. 13 above intend absolute contradiction.
^ Ellicott; R.V.
340 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 402.

Chapter VTTL CONJUNCTIONS.

402. For a classified list of the Conjunctions, see Etymology, § 136.

Conjunctions are, with respect to their place in the sentence, eitYier prepositive,
i.e., placed at the beginning of the clause, as /cat, dWd, 6'ti, or postpositive, i.e.,

placed after some other word or words, as de, yap.

Words connected by Conjunctions are in the same grammatical

regimen.
A clause connected with another by a Conjunction is either co-ordinate
or subordinate. The rules for the chief kinds of subordinate clauses
have been given, §§ 379-384. The following rules, therefore, imply
Co-ordination.

Conjunctions of Annexation, KaC, n,

403. The proper copulative Conjunction, employed as in other lan-

guages, is KaC, and.
Of the special uses of Kai, the following may be enumerated.

a. Sometimes it appears to convey a kind of rhetorical emphasis.

Matt. iii. 14 : Kal av epxy Trpo? /xe; and comest tliou unto me ?

Matt. vi. 26 : Kal 6 Trar^p v/xwt', k.t.X., and {yet) your heavenly Father
feedeth them !

John i. 10 : Kal 6 koct/xos avrov ovk cyi/w, and (yet) the world knew him
not.
See Bruder's Concordance, p. 453, for an interesting collection of instances.
The logical connection of the clauses being strongly apparent in their signifi-
cation, it is sufficient to place the simple copulative between them, the reader's
mind supplying the additional links.

In the enumeration of particulars, both

h. . . . and may be expressed
by Kal Kal, by the postpositive tc with Kal, or
. , .
(rarely) by n ... tc.
Acts ii. 29 : Kal eTeXcvrrja-c Kal iracf)-/), he both died and was buried.

Matt. xxii. 10 : crw^ayov ... Trovijpov^ tc Kal ayaOov^, they collected ...

both bad and good.

 — ;

§ 403, e.] coxju:ngtions of axxexation. 341

Acts i. 1 : div rjp^aro 'It/ctovs TroLetv t€ Kal StSacrKciv, ichick Jesus began
both to do and to teach.

Acts xvii. 4 : twv t€ (re/^o/Jievojv 'FiXXt^viov irXtjOos ttoXv yvvatKwv ts tCjv

7rpu)T0}v ovK oAtyat, both a great multitude of the devout Greeks^ and of the
chief women not a few.

John iv. 11 : o^t€ avrXyj/Jia €;j(€ts Kal to <f>piap icrrl /SaOv, thou both hast

nothing to draw with, and the icell is deep. So 3 John 10.

The difference^ between Kai and re is that /cai unites tilings strictly co-ordinate
re annexes, often with implied relation or distinction. Hence it may sometimes
be read as implying "and this as well as the other," with asceiisive force,
although generally it adds a less important particular.

c. The points of transition in a narrative are frequently marked by

Kat, rendered into English, for rhetorical variety, by then, now, etc.

Luke X. and ivho is my neighbour ? Luke xviii. 26 and icho

29 : :

ran be saved? John ix. 36 (W. H.) and icho is he. Lord, that I should :

believe ? Kai dramatically connects the question with what has just been
said.

Matt. viii. 8. (See Mark iii. 13-26, viii. 10-18, and many other passages.)

d. This conjunction has also an explanatory or "epexegetic" use,

repeating (in thought, or by the aid of a pronoun) something that has
been said, in order to introduce some additional particular.

Eph. ii. 8 :
rfj yap ^dpiTt la-re. (T€cro)(TfJi€VOL 8ta TriVTCtos '
Kal tovto ovk

€^ vjxwv, ®eov TO Swpov for by grace have ye been saved through faith ;
•

and this not of yourselves, it {i.e., your being saved, is) the gift of God.
" You must not suppose, because your salvation was conditioned by your

faith, that therefore you saved yourselves."'^

Luke viii. 41 (pronoun and verb in the epexegetic clause), xxiii. 41 ;

John i. 16 (neither verb nor pronoun) ; 1 Cor. i. 2, ii. 2, vi. 8 (read

ToDro).

e. Without direct connective force, Kai often takes the meaning of

also, even.

^ Winer. " /cai conjungit, re adjungit." Hermann.

^ Some still refer tovto to on the score of gender, by
iricrTetos (quite allowable
synems) ; but this seems against the Apostle's argument. (See Ellicott, Eadie,
Alford.)
342 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANNEXATION. [§ 403, e.

Matt. V. 39 : a-Tpiij/ov avrw Kal rrjv aWyjv, turn to li im also the other
cheek.

Mark i. 27 Kal rots : Trviv/xaaL rots aKaOdpTOL<i lTnTd.(T(T€Ly he lays his

command even upon the U7iclean spirits.

It is evident that the emphasis in such passages arises from the tacit con-
nection and comparison with other objects of thought. The conjunction, there-
fore, is virtually still copulative.

This use of Ka£ is frequent in comparisons.

Matt. vi. 10 : yevrjO-^TU) to Bi\-qp.a. cov ws Iv ovpavio Kal iirl yrjs, thy loill

he done as in heaven so also upon earth.

Johnvi. 57KaOws aTrea-reiXe /xe 6 ^u)v iraTrip, k.t.A., as the living Father
:

sent me^ etc. There are two following clauses with Kai, either of which
might supply the second member of comparison "so / live ... aw6^," or :

(as A.V. and R,V.) ^^ and I live ... so."

Gal. i. 9 : «s irpoapriKafxev Kal apri ttoXiv Aeyoj, as ice have said before^

so now also I say again.

Hence the use of koI to introduce the apodosis after hypothetical and temporal
clauses. Luke ii. 21 then also his iianie was : called Jesus ; 2 Cor. ii. 2 : for
if I grieve you, then ivho is he that gladdens me ? often with ibo(>, then behold ! as
Matt, xxviii. 9 ; Acts i. 10, etc.

In the rising climax, ov |jlovov is generally found in the former clause,

dXXa KaC in the latter.

Acts xxi. 13 : cyw yap ov (lovov h^Orjvai aXXd Kal aTroOaveiv . . . €TOL/Ji(j)<s

l^w, for I am ready 7iot only to be bound, but also to die.

Rom. xiii. 5 : ov jiovov 8ta rrjv opyrju aXXd Kal 8ta ttjv (rvv€L8r)(TLV, not
only on account of the wrath, hut also on account of conscience.

For the combination Kal ^dp, see § 407, d.

Conjunctions of Antithesis, AXXd, SL

404. i. dXXd, but (emphatic as contrasted with Se), is used to mark

opposition, interruption, transition.

a. Opposition, simply. John xvi. 20 : v/acT? Xv-n-TjOrja-ea-Oe, dXX* rj Xvirrj

vp.Q)v €ts )(apav y€vrjcr€Tat, ye shall grieve, bid your grief shall be turned
into joy.
 — — ^

§ 404, i.
(3)] CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. 343

Frequently after negatives

Matt. V. 1 7 : ovk tjXOov KaraXva-ai, dXXd 7r\rjpio(raL, I came not to destroy

but to fulfil.

Rom. iii. 31 : /x^ yeVocro •

dXXd vofxov icrTctvo/xey, (W. H.) assuredly not;
but we establish law.

b. Interruption. 'WTien a train of thought is broken, by some limita-

tion, modification, correction.

John xii. 27 : Trdrep, awaov fJL€ ck t^9 wpas ravr?;? •

dXXd Slo. tovto,
K.T.X., Father, save me from this hour / but for this cause came I unto
this hour.

Often in such connections the conjunction carries with it the force of i\^ay,

especially after questions (Matt. xi. 8^ 9 ; Luke vii. 25).

c. Transition : the point of contrast being that the succeeding phrase

is a new subject, or the same in a different aspect; like our Welly then;
Moreover; Luke vi. 27, xi. 42; Gal. ii. 14, etc.
Special uses of this conjunction are (1) to throw emphasis on the
following clause.
Johnxvi. 2: aTrocrvvaydjyovs TTOL-qo'Ovcnv v/aSs dW tp)(^T at ui pa, K.T.X.y •

they shall cast you out of the synagogues yea, the hour cometh, etc. —
So with a negative
Luke xxiii. 15 : ovh\v €vpov Iv tw dv^pwTru) ... dXX* ouSe 'HpwSrys, I found
no blame in the man ...no, nor yet Herod.

(2) In a conditional sentence, oAAa may stand in the apodosis with

the meaning yet, nevertheless.

1 Cor. ix. 2 : ct aAAot? ovk elpl (ZTro'crToXos, dXXd "ye vfxlv ilfxi, if I am
not an apostle to others, yet at least I am so to you. So Rom. vi. 5, etc.

(3) After a negative (expressed or implied), dXX* ¥\ means other than,

except, but rather.

Luke xii. 51 : ovxh A,€ya> vfuv, dXX* ^ SLafxepta-fxov •

I tell you, nay, but
rather division.

In 2 Cor. i. 13 we find the combination S.Wa ... dXX' ^, other things ... than.
For this idiom after a virtual negative, see 1 Cor. iii. 5 (Received Text), who
thenis Paul and who is Apollos hut ministers ? (dXX* ^ bi.dKovoL). But W. H.
and Rev. Text omit oKK ^.
344 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. [§ 404, ii.

ii. 8e (postpositive) is also most properly adversative, though less

emphatic than dXXd. It is to be carefully distinguished, on the other
hand, from the copulatives Kat, tc, with the latter of which it is, however,
often interchanged in MSS.
Thus, the frequent phrase, fyw SI Xiya* vfuv, marks either a contrast
with what has been said before, or an addition to it ; the antithesis lying
in the thought, "the foregoing is not all, but I add," etc.

It is generally difficult to exhibit the exact adversative force of this

conjunction, and in translation it is often taken as a mere adjunctive.
Thus, in the A.V. it is very frequently rendered and, or then (Matt,
xix. 23), now (xxi. 18), so (xx. 8), or left entirely untranslated
(xxviii. 1). The " 8e resumptive " is especially, perhaps unavoidably,
so treated.

A close attention to this particle in the innumerable instances of its occur-

rence will repay the student, who by its means mark an otherwise
will often
concealed antithesis. The following illustrations are from Winer :

Matt. xxi. 3 : but he will straightway/ send them, i.e., not cavil or hesitate,
but—.
Acts xxiv. 17 : hid I pass on to another part of my history.

1 Cor. xiv. 1 : yet desire spiritual gifts, notwithstanding the supremacy of

love.

2 Cor. ii. 12 : hut when I came to Troas ; M resumptive, from ver. 4.

1 Cor. xi. 2 : hut I praise you, even while I exhort, as ver. 1.

Rom. iv. 3 : hut AbraJiam helievcd God, so far was he from being justified by
works (James ii. 23).

Kal ... $€, together imply yea . . . moreover, assuming what has been
said, and passing on to something more.^
Matt. X. 18, xvi. 18 (and 7iot only so, hut I say unto thee); John vi. 51,
viii. 16, 17, XV. 27 ; Acts iii. 24, xxii. 29 ; 2 Pet. i. 5 ; 1 John i. 3.

The full form of antithesis with jxc'v and 8c is frequent in the

New Testament.2 Compare § 136, b, 4.
Matt. ix. 37 : 6 \i.kv 0€pL(Tfj.o<; ttoXv^, ol Bk ipydrai oXljol, the harvest is
plenteous, but the labourers are few.

Matt. xvi. 3, XX. 23, xxii. 8, xxiii. 27, 28, xxvi. 41, etc.

1 See Alford, Matt. x. 18.

2 Far less frequent, however, than in classic Greek.
 —

§405.] THE DISJUNCTIVES. 345

Sometimes ^v is followed by the emphatic adversative oXXct : Mark

ix. 12; Acts iv. 16; Eom. xiv. 20; also by ttXtjv, Luke xxii. 22; Kai,

Acts xxvi. 4, etc.

In several passages (wv is found without any antithetic particle. This

isto be explained by an interrupted construction of the sentence, or
by virtual antithesis. According to AViner, these cases may be classed
in a threefold way .

The suppressed parallel member of the

1. antithesis is implied in the
clause with fic'v. Rom. x. 1 Col. ii. 23. ;

2. It is plainly indicated under another turn of expression. Rom.

xi. 13.

3. The construction is entirely broken, and the parallel clause is to be

supplied by the general sense of the sequel. Acts i. 1 ; Rom i. 8, iii. 2,

vii. 12 ; 1 Cor. xi. 18, etc.

The Disjunctives.

405. The disjunctives are % or (after a comparative, than); 'i\...%

either ... o?*/ Art ... dn, whether ... whether- . Once, <jtoi ... % whether ...

or (there being no other alternative), Rom. vi. 16.

Matt. V. 17 : /jltj vo/xicrrp'e otl rjXOov KaraXvcraL tov vofxov ^ rovs Trpo-

<^7}Tas, think not that I came to destroy the laic or the prophets.

Matt. xii. 33: f\ Troir^carc to BevSpov KaXov...f\ 7roLrj(raT€ to SevSpov

crairpovy k.t.X., either make the treQ good ... or make the tree coiTupt, etc.

Luke XX. 2 : ev Trota i^ovCLa ravra Trotet?, ^ tl<s ioTLV 6 Sous crot ttjv

i^ovaiav ravTr}v ; in ivhat authority doest thou these things, or zvho is he

that gave thee this authority ? Matt. xxi. 23 has KaL Either conjunction
evidently gives equally good sense.

1 Cor. xi. 27 : o? av IcrOirj tov apTov <\ Trivrf to TroTrjpLOv tov Kvpt'ov,
whoever shall eat the bread or drink the cup of the Lord (whichever he
does, not by any means implying that he is not to do both). The
previous verse has Kat, which is also a var. read. here. (W. H., ^.)

1 Cor. X. 31 : dn ovv iaOuTe dn ttiVctc drt tl 7roL€LT€, whether then ye

eat a)' drink, or do anything (at all).

The combination '^ Ka£, or even, occurs Luke xviii. 11 ; Rom. ii. 15;
2 Cor. i. 13.
^46 INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 405.

The interrogative <i, so called, is no more than the disjunctive with

the former clause understood. ^

Rom. iii. 29 'lovSatW 6 0eos : i^ fxovov ; ovxL kol iOvCjv ; or is he the

God of Jews only ? not of Gentiles also ? Such, the Apostle suggests, is
the alternative of denying the statement made, ver. 28.

See Rom. vi. 3, vii. 1, etc. In 1 Cor. xiv. 36 the former ^ is not coiTelative
with the latter, but refers to the previous train of thought Or, was it that the
:

word of God, etc.? as must he supposed if you deny my authority in these

matters.

Inferential Conjunctions.

406. The chief particles of inference are ofiv, therefore, postpositive,

and &pa, accordingly, postpositive, or, with emphasis, prepositive.

odv is properly the particle of fonnal inference, kindred to the participle of

eifXL, &i>, 6u (quce cum ita sint). &pa, cognate with Apoj, to fit, marks a corre-
spondence in point of fact {ergo).

Matt. iii. 8 : TroirjcraTe. o€v Kapirov aiiov rrjs fJL€TavoLas, yield, therefoi'e,

fruit worthy of your repentance.

Gal. ii. 21 : ct yap 8(.a vo/Jiov BiKatoo-vvr), dpa Xptcrro? Saypeav (XTre^avcr,

for if righteousness is by law, then Christ died in vain.

Both these particles, however, are often found with slighter meaning,
as in our use of the words Then, Well then, in the continuance of narra-
tive or speech, dpayc (Matt. vii. 20, xvii. 26 ; Acts xi. 18 ; xvii. 27) is

emphatic. The combination, dpa odv, is found repeatedly in the Epistles

of St. Paul, as Rom. v. 18 So, therefore, the ovv marking the logical
:

inference, and the apa intimating the harmony between premises and
conclusion.

For S.pa interrogative, see 137, h.

Other inferential particles occasionally found are ^.^vovvyi, yes, indeed,

hut, Luke xi. 28 ;^ Rom. ix. 20, x. 18 roiYapoOv, wherefore then, 1 Thess. ;

iv. 8 ; Heb. xii. 1 roLvw (surely now), therefm^e^ Luke xx. 25 ; 1 Cor.
;

ix. 26 ; Heb. xiii. 13.

^ See Viger's "Greek Idioms," and Hartung, Partikellehre, sub vac. ij.

^ W. H. and Rev. Text read [xivovv, yea rather.

 — :

§ 407, c] CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. 347

Causal Conjunctions, especially -yap.

407. «• The causal .conjunctions are demoristrative and relative.

Of these the latter occur in subordinate clauses, the rules of which have
already been given.

The relative causal particles are on, because; Stdrt, because (not in the Gospels or
Rev.). Similarly used is eTret (properly temporal, ivhen), since, with its emphatic
compounds eireib-fj, siTice now ; eirelirep^ (once, Rom. iii. 30), since indeed ; and
iir€i8r)'7r€p (only Luke i. \), forasniucli as. (See § 137, a.)
For the relative phrases, with prepositions, used as conjunctions e.g.^ i<f> if,

dvd' &v —
see under the Prepositions, §§ 305, 291.

h. The demonstrative causal conjunction, -ydp, always postpositive, is a

contraction of -ye dpa, "verily then;" liencCj in fad, and, when the fact
is given as a reason or explanation, for.
Matt. i. 21 ; ii. 2, 5, 6, 13, 20 ; iii. 2, 3, 9, 15, etc.

Generally, the explanation introduced by -ydp is also a direct

reason. But this need not always be the case. See Matt. i. 18
" Mary, as the fact was, being betrothed." Mark v. 42 :
" She arose
and walked, for she was twelve years old ;'^ xvi. 4 " They saw that the :

stone was roUed away, for it was very great" (an explanation, not of the
fact that it was rolled away, but of the necessity for this being done).
Compare Ps. xxv. 11 "For thy name's sake, Lord, pardon mine
:

iniquity, for it is greaV' (the reason, not why pardon is to be bestowed,

but why it is sought).

The student must beware of translating yap by such words as but, although,
yet peradvcnture, etc.^Rom. v. 7 reads, for scarcely on behalf of a righteous
Tnan will mie die ; for on behalf of the good inan one even dares to die. The ' *

second /or," says Alford, "is exceptive, and answers to I do not press this '

without exception,' understood." The good man and the righteous are not
contrasted as different classes of persons, but the "good" (as the article also
shows) are classed under the " righteous."

In questions and answers especially, vdp is often used in

c. refer-
ence to the words or thought of the other party.

Matt, xxvii. 23 : rt ydp KaKov eTroLrjcre; lohy, lohat evil hath he done?
John vii. 41 ; Acts viii. 31, xix. 35 {he calm! for what man is there "^

etc.)

^ W. H. and Rev. Text read el'Trep, if indeed.

' > See Winer, § 53, 10, 3.
348 CAUSAL COXJUNCTIOXS. [§ 407, G.

John ix. 30 : eV rovri^ ^dp to Oav/jiaa-rov IcTTiv, icliy, herein is the iconder!
In 1 Thess. ii. 20 the Apostle thus answers his own question : yes^ ye
are oar glory and our joy.
In the combination Kal ydp, the true connective is generally Kal,
d.
which resumes in thought the topic of the previous clause ; while yap
appends the explanation or the reason (Lat. etenim).
Matt. viii. 9 : Kal ^dp eyw av6poi7r6<; et/xt, k.t.A.., a7id (this I say) for I
am a man under authority, etc.

So Matt. xxvi. 73 ; Mark x. 45 ; Luke vi. 32, 34 ; John iv. 23 {and [that,'\

because tlie Father, etc.) ; Acts xix. 40 {aiid [this advice 1 2)rcss,'] seeing that, etc.);
1 Cor. V. 7, xii. 13, 14 ; 2 Cor. v. 4, xiii. 4 ; 1 Thess. iv. 10 ; 2 Thess. iii. 10 ;

Heb. V. 12, X. 34, etc. In these cases, koI yap must generally be rendered
simply /or (or/o?*, indeed), except when it is desired by paraphrase to bring out
its fall meaning.

But sometimes -ydp is the connective, and Kai belongs to the second
clause, with the sense of also, even {yap, of course, being placed after it

as a postpositive conjunction). (See Ellicott's note on 2 Thess. iii. 10.)

Rom. xi. 1 : Kal -ydp eyw ^la-parjXtTr]^ ilfXL, for I also am an Israelite.

Rom. XV. 3 : Kal ^dp 6 Xpt(TT6<s ovx cavro) Tjpearev, for even Christ pleased
not himself.

So perhaps Heb. xii. 29 Kal ^dp : 6 ©eos r^ixiiiv irvp KaTavaXtaKov, for
even our God is a consumin<j fire.

Asyndeton.

408. The omission of conjunctions, or asyndeton,'^ often heightens

the effect of a paragraph.

a. The cojmlative may be omitted, as Gal. v. 22 : 6 8e Ka/oTros tov

7rv€V]xaT6<i icTTLV ayair-q, XO-pd., elp'^vrj, ixaKpoOvfxia, XPV^'^^'^^^y ayaOuiavvq,
TTtcrTt?, TrpavTrj<;, iyKparaa, but the fruit of the Spirit is love, joy, peace,

longsuffering, kindness, goodness, faith, meekness, self-control.

h. Kat epexegetic is sometimes dropped. Col. i. 14 : Iv w ex^fiev t'^v

aTToXvTpwcrtv, rrjv acfieaiv Tiov a.p.apTiuiv, in ichom ice have the redemption,
tlie remission of our sins.

^ aaivberov, from d, not, and (rvfdioj, to bind togetlier.

§ 408, c] CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. 349

c. The omission of the antithetic may be marked in passages like

1 Cor. XV. 42-44 :—

CTTCipcTat €v <fi6opa, eyetpcrat ev acfyOapcna.

CTreipcrat iv dn/xta, iyaperat iv Soiy.

CTretperat iv acrOeveia, eyetpcrat ev Svvdfxei.

CTretpeTat awfxa \I/v)(lkov, iyetpcrai cw/xa TTvev/xaTLKov.

d. The causal particle is occasionally dropped. 2 Cor. xi. 30 : et

Kavxacrdat Set, to, t^5 do-^cvet'a? Kavxyo'Ofxai, (for) ?/ / ??zws^ needs glory
I ivill glory of the things that concern my iceakness. So, perhaps, Kev.
xxii. 10, where the Rec. Text supplies 6ti. (But "W. H. and Rev. Text
read 6 Katpos yoLp.)
350 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [§ 409, a.

Chapter IX. OIST SOME PECULIAEITIES IN THE

STRUCTUEE OF SENTENCES.
409. a- The arrangement of words in a sentence indicates the
order of thought. Hence j naturally, the Subject with the words con-
nected takes the leading place, then the Predicate with its adjuncts.
"Words connected in sense are mostly kept together.The Object usually
follows the governing verb a Genitive or Dative, the word on which it
;

depends and an Adjective, the substantive with which it agrees (the

;

article being repeated).

The opposite constructions are emphatic, as — (1) When the Predicate stands
first: see the Beatitudes, Matt. v. 3-11; also Matt. vii. 13-15; John i. 1,

iv. 19, 24, vi. 60 ; Rom. viii. 18, unworthy are the sufferings ; 2 Tim. ii. 11.

(2) The Object before the verb Luke xvi. 11, the true riches who will entrust to
r

youf John ix. 31 Rom. xiv. 1, etc. (3) An oblique case before the governing
;

noun Rom. xi. 13, of Gentiles an apostle ; Rom. xii. 19 (Heb. x. 30) 1 Cor.
: ;

iii. 9 Heb. vi. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 21, etc. (4) An Adjective before its noun Matt.
; :

vii. 13, through the strait gate (the emphasis being on the narrowness) 1 Tim. ;

vi. 12, 14, where good {KoXds) is repeatedly and strikingly emphatic; James iii. 5.
The usual arrangement of Adverbs, Prepositions, and the Particles generally,
has already been sufficiently illustrated.

h. an inflected language like the Greek, it is unnecessary

Since, in
to indicate the grammatical dependence of words by their order,
the arrangement of a sentence may be indefinitely varied for pur-
poses of emphasis and there is, perhaps, not a paragraph in the New
;

Testament in which the collocation of words does not indicate some

subtle meaning or shade of thought, scarcely to be reproduced in the
most accurate translation.
Generally speaking, the emphatic positions are at the beginning and the
end of a clause, especially the former.
c. Constructions that apparently violate the simplicity of speech
may generally also suggest some special emphasis.
1 Cor. xiii. 1 : if tcith the tongues of men I speak, . . . and of the angels.

Heb. vii. 4 : to whom Abraham gave tithe of the spoils ... the patriarch,
i.e., though he bore that sacred char^icter.
 —

§ 410 (2).] PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. 351

1 Pet. ii. 7 : for you^ then^ is the p'eciousness ...icIlo believe^ ^.e., on the
condition that you are believers.

See also Heb. ii. 9

The displacement of a word or phrase, as in the above instances, for the sake
of greater effect, is sometimes termed Hyperbaton, from virep^abut.

410. Elliptical constructions are not infrequent. i\lany have

already been noticed in their place ; as the ellipsis of the Copula, § 166 ;
of the Subject, § 169 ; of Substantives, §§ 256, 316. Two important
elliptical forms of expression are the following :

(1) Aposiopesis, or expressive pause : some look or gesture, or the

mind of the hearer, being supposed to supply the rest.

Luke xiii. 9 : Kdv /jl€v iroLrja-rj Kapirov ... et Se /t>^ye, k.t.X.^ and if it hear
fruit ... hut if not, etc.

Acts xxiii. 9 : ci Se Trvcv/^a IXaX-qcr^v avraJ, t) ayycXos . .

.
, hut if a spirit
spoke to him, or an angel ... (The following words, let us not fight
against God, are regarded by the best editors as an interpolation.)

See also Luke xix. 42, xxii. 42 ; John vi. 62.

(2) Zeugma : a construction in which a verb is joined to two or more

different objects, though only applicable in strictness to one.

1 Cor. iii. 2 : yaXa v/xas liroTura, ov /Spcojua, I gave you milk to drink,
not meat.

See also Luke i. 64 ; Acts iv. 28 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 (where the antithetic verb
must be understood).

In accordance with the primitive simplicity of language, the links

between different clauses are sometimes omitted, being left to the
reader to supply in thought.
Thus, Eom. vi. 17 : thanks he to God that ye were the servants of sin,
hut ye oheyed, etc., i.e., " that although ye were once the servants of sin,
ye have now obeyed."
So 1 Tim. i. 13, 14 : / ohtained mei'cy, because I did it ignorantly
in unbelief, hut the grace of our Lord was exceeding abundant, i.e., "I
obtained mercy, because (while I acted thus) the grace of the Lord
abounded."

Compare also Matt. xi. 25 ; John iii. 19.

352 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [§ 'ill, (^'

411. d' Some forms of expression are apparently redundant. In

these cases a special emphasis may generally be marked.

Instead, therefore, of assuming pleonasm, the careful student will note the
emphatic meaning. Frequent cases are the following: (1) Simple repetitwii of —
a phrase. Rom.
15 "ye received not the sinrit of bondage, Lut ye received
viii. :

the spirit of adoption;" Col. i. 28: "warning every man, and teaching crcz-y
man in all wisdom, that we may present every man perfect in Christ Jesus ;

Heb. ii. 16 "he taJceth not hold of angels, but he taketh hold of the seed of
:

Abraham." (2) Repetition in a contrasted form. John i. 20: "he confessed,

and denied not;" Acts xviii. 9: '^ Speak, and he not silent;" Rom. ix. 1
(1 Tim. ii. 7) "I speak the truth in Christ, I lie not." This idiom is
:

especially frequent in 1 John (see chap. i. 5, 6, 8, 10, ii. 4, etc.). (3) The
mention of CLccompanying circumstaTices, as Matt. v. 2 "he opened his mouth, :

and said" (comp. Acts viii. 35) John xxi. 13 "Jesus cometh, and taketh the
; :

bread, and giveth to them;" where "every separate act of the wonderful
occurrence is designedly specified, and, as it were, placed before the eye."i The
verbs, co7ne, arise, take, stretch forUi (the hand), are frequently found in such
connection.

I). An idiom to be especially noticed is that in which an Accu-

sative object and an Object-sentence are both appended to the

verb.

In this case also the double expression conveys an emphasis the attention ;

being first called to the Object, and then to that which is said about it. For
examples of this idiom, see § 382, d. Other instances are John xi. 31 ; Acts
iv. 13, ix. 20, xvi. 3 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 15 ; Gal. vi. 1.

412. Anacolouthon (aKoXovOeu), to follow, with neg. prefix) is literally

a breach in the continuity of a sentence, and is a term applied to those

numerous instances in which the construction is changed in the course of
the same period.

Many so-called anxicoloiUha are, however, to be explained by laws of

construction already laid down. The deviations from

grammatical strict
construction, excepting in the "book of Revelation, are comparatively few, and
are generally to be paralleled from classic authors.

The most frequent cases of anacolouthon may be classed as fol-

lows :

a. The transition from the indirect to the direct form of speech

^ Winen
 — ) — — —

§ 4l2, e.] PECULIARITIES OF COXSTRUCTION. 353

Luke V. 1 4 : he charged him to tell no man (/xr/Sevt elTrttv), hut go and

show thyself y etc. (dfrcXOwv 86i|ov, k.t.X.).

See also Mark vi. 9, xi. 32 ; Acts i. 4, xvii. 3.

h. The transition from a participial construction to a finite verb

John V. 44 : ttws 8wacr^€ v/xcts Trto-Tcvcrat, So^av trap aXKriXdiV Xaji^d-

V0VT6S, Kttt Tr]v 8o^av . . . ov X'r\rilTi ; 7ioz(? caw ?/e believe, receiving glory one of
another, and the glory ...ye receive not.

Eph. i. 20 €Yctpas avrov : Koi IkcLOktcv, having raised him . . . . . . and he set

him. (But W. H. and Rev. Text read Ka0t<ras.)

See also 1 Cor. vii. 37 ; 2 Cor. v. 6, 8 ; Col. i. 6, 26 ; 2 John 2,

c. The use of nonainative participles in reference to substantives of

any case, standing at a distance in the sentence
Phil. i. 29, 30 : i\i.lv ix^P^^^V "^^ vTrep ILpicTTov . . . 7rd(T)(€LV, rov avrov
dytuva ^x^vt^Sj ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^'^ granted, to suffer for Christ, having the same
conflict. (W. H. by a parenthesis ending at iraa-xeiv connect the parti-
ciple with ver. 28, and avoid irregularity).

Compare § 397.

d. A change of structure in the course of the sentence

Luke xi. 11: riva Se c^ v/awv rov iraripa ah-qcriL 6 vlos IxBvv firj . . . o<^tv

avV(3 €7nS(i)(T€L ; (W. H.) ; lit., fi'om which of you, the father, shall his son
ask a fish ... will he give him a seiyent ?

Compare Mark ix. 20 ; John vi. 22-24 ; Acts xix. 34.

e. The non-completion of a compound sentence ; the second member of

a comparison, for instance, being omitted, or only suggested by the general
sense of the passage
1 Tim. i. 3 : Ka^ws TrapcKaA-ccra crc Trpocr/xetvat cv 'Ec^eVo), as I exhorted
thee to alride in Eithesus (where the A.V. supplies so do, the R.V. so do
I now at the end of ver. 4, without anything corresponding in the
original.^

Rom. V. 12 ashy one man sin entered into the world. The antithesis,
:

Winer thinks, is completed in sense, though not in form, in ver. 15.

Others suppose a long parenthesis from vers. 13-17, inclusive; the
parallel being resumed and completed in ver. 18.
r See also 2 Pet. ii. 4.

To this head may be referred the frequent occurrence of fih without the
corresponding 5c'. (See § 404.

A A
354 RHYTHM AND PARALLELISM. [§ 4X3, a.

413. An attention to sound and rhythm in the structure of sentences

is sometimes observable.
a. Paronomasia, or alliteration, was a common ornament of speech
with Oriental writers. Hence its employment in the New Testament.
Luke xxi. 1 1 : Xoifiol koX Xijiol ctrovTat.

Acts xvii. 25 : t"^v koI ttvoi^v.

Heb. V. 8 : ^|xa9€v a(j> oiv ?ira0€v.

Rom. i. 29 : fxea-rovs <j)Oovov, ^6vov.

These are instances of alliteration proper, there being no connection

between the words in meaning. Where such a connection exists, the
effect of the sentence is rather in the sense than in the sound.

Matt. xvi. 18 : o-u cT neVpos, kol cttI ravrrj rfj ircTpa, k.t.X.

Acts viii. 30 : apd ye •yivwo-KCis a kvayivuxTKiis ',

Rom. xii. 3 : /u,^ vTr€p<|>pov€iv Trap o Set (f>pov€tv, dXAa (j>pov€kv cts to <r«<j>po-

vetv.

1 Tim. i. 8 : KaXos 6 vo|j.os, idv ris avru) vo|xlp,us )(prJTaL.

In the Epistle to Philemon there are probably allusions to the name of

Onesimus, ovrjaifios, j^^ofitable. (See ver. 11, and ovalfnjv^ ver. 20.)

h. As the characteristic of Hebrew poetry is to run in parallel clauses,

it might naturally be expected that in passages of strong and sustained
feeling, the same peculiarity would be found in the New Testament."
There are some decided instances, as 1 Tim. iii. 16 :

€<j>av€p(j)Or) iv aapKL . . idLKatwOr] iv irvcvfJiaTL.

w<fidr) dyyeAots . . . €Kr}pv)(Or] iv eOvecnv.

iTTLCTTevOrj iv Koo'/xu) . . . dv€Xr}(j>6-q cv ^o^yj?

This passage was probably part of a rhythmical creed of the early

Church, or of a primitive Christian hymn. For true hymns, see also
Luke i. 46-55, 68-79, il 29-32; Eph. v. 14; Jude 24, 25; Rev.
V. 12-14, etc.

Rom. ix. 2 : Xvirv] /xot l(Tr\ /xcydXry,

KoX dStdAciTTTOS o^vvq TTj KapSta fxov.

Here we have the tone of strong emotion.

See Jebb's "Sacred Literature," and especially the versions of the Epistle to the
^

Romans by the Rev. J. H, Hinton, a.m., and by the Rev. Dr. Forbes.
^ For another arrangement see W. H., in loc.
§ 413, C (1)] POETIC QUOTATIONS —EHYTHM. 355

For similar rhythmic constructions, see John xiv. 27 Rom. xi. 33 1 Cor. : ;

XV. 54-57 Col. i. 10-12, and many othei^ passages.

; The parallel clauses often
contain strong contrasts, asr John iii. 20, 21 Rom. ii. 6-10, where a long series
;

occurs.

Sometimes the construction is more elaborate ; a second series of

clauses corresponding witli the first, but in reverse order. This is called
"reverted parallelism,'^ or cliiasmus,^ or epanodos (cVavoSo?). See a
simple illustration, § 312, 1. Simpler still is Matt. xii. 22 ""the blind:

and dumb, both spake and saw." Compare Matt. vii. 6.

So Phil. iii. 10 "to know Him,

:

and the power of his resurrection,

and the fellowship of his sufferings,
being made conformable unto his death;
if by any means I might attain to the resurrection of the dead."

John X. 14, 15 : "I am the good shepherd ;

and I know my 0's\ti,

and mine o'wn know me,

even as the Father knoweth me,
and I know the Father ;

and I lay down my life for the sheep."

Other more elaborate harmonies of the kind might easily be traced. The
whole subject connects itself svith the study of the influence of the Old Testa-
—
ment upon the New an important field of inquiry, as yet only very partially
explored.

c. (1) Three quotations of Greek j^oetry \i3LYe heen found in the ]N'ew
Testament, all by the Apostle Paul.

Acts xvii. 28 : tov yap /cat ycVos iafiev •

(the former half of a hexa-
meter), by Aratus, a native of Tarsus, B.C. 270 ; found also with a little

variation (ck aov yap) in Cleanthes, a poet of Troas, B.C. 300.

1 Cor. XV. 33 cf>6apov(TLv rjOr] yp-qc-O^'- opuXiai KaKat, from Menander,

:

an Athenian comic poet, about B.C. 320. (The measure is iambic tri-
meter.)

Titus i. 12 : KpT/rcs del i/^eDo-rai, KaKo. O-qpca^ yaorepes apyaC (a complete

hexameter), by Epimenides, the Cretan bard (see ver. 5), about B.C. 600,

^ From the shape of the letter chi, X,

- W. H. read xP''l<^^°-
356 POETIC QUOTATIONS — RHITJIM. [§ 413, C (2)

(2) There are also apparently unconscious* verses, such as will some-
times occur in prose style.

Compare the anapaestic line

"To preach the acceptable year of the Lord."

And the English hexameter

*'
Husbands, love your wives, and be not bitter against them,"
Also the iambic couplet
*'
Her ways are ways of pleasantness,
And all her paths are peace."

The following have been traced :

Hexameters
Heb. xii. 13 : koX rpoxio.^ 6pOa<; iroLT^a-are^ rots Trofrtv vfiwv.

James i. 17 : rracra Soo'ts ayaOrj kol irav SuyprjiMa TcXcioy,

Iambic measure
Acts xxiii. 5 : ap^ovra toG Xaov aov ovk cpct? KaKw?.

This last is a quotation from the LXX. (Exocl. xxii. 28). It is

possible that the others may be citations also from some unknown poetic
source.

•*
W, H. marg., with Trotetrc in text.
 ;

2 THESSALONIANS I. 1-3. 357

ANALYTICAL EXERCISE ON THE SECOND EPISTLE

TO THE THESSALONIANS.
The following Exercise illustrates the application of many of the fore-
going rules to an extended portion of the Xew Testament. The figures
refer to the Sections, which the student is recommended to consult.
Verbal analysis is not given, as being unnecessary at the present stage.
No word, however, should be left without its stem, declension, conju-
known. The verbs of the Epistle have
gation, etc., being accurately
already been taken as material for an Exercise (Ex. 15).
The Epistle is given as in the Text of Westcott and Hort, with their
alternative readings. iSTo interpretation of difficult passages is attempted.
The duty of the New Testament student is to ascertain the plain
first

grammatical meaning of the text the way to its explanation will then
:

be open.

ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
CHAPTER I.

1 IIATAOS XcKovavo^ koI TcfioOeo^ rfj eKKKr^cria Seaaa-

teal

2 XovLKecov iv 0€a5 Trarpl rjfiodv koX KvpLw ^Irjaov X/atcrrcS X^P^^

•

Chap. I. ver. i. Paul, and Silvanus, and Timotheus, nominatives

the compound subject of the sentence of salutation, some such predicate as "send
greeting " being understood, involved in x^P's, ver. 2. (For the proper names, see
iS9,c,d.) to the church, dat. of transmission, 278 secondary obj. of the implied ;

verb, of Thessalonians, extension of secondary obj. gen. of material (or ;

origin, 248) ; article omitted, 233, because only some in Thessalonica belonged to the
church, in God our Father, further extension of iKKkqalq. ; for iv, see 295, 4;
by apposition, 177; i)/Ji(ov, unemphatic possessive, 333. and the Lord
Trarpi, dat.

Jesus Christ, Kvpicp under the same regimen with 06(^, 'W'ithout the article,
intimating that the union is one and the same with both. See 232, and compare
217, a, b (3) e, note.
Ver. 2. Grace unto you, and peace (the Eastern and Western modes of
salutation), subj. of omitted verb, etrj ; comp. 166, 378, a. from God the
358 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.

iffjLLV Kol elpr}vr} airo 0eo{) iraTpo'; koI Kvplov ^Irjaov

XptCTOl).
^v'^apLarelv o^eiXofiev to3 06o5 iravrore irepX v/jlcjv, aSeXc^ot, 3
Ka6a)<; a^iov eanv, on vTrepav^dvec rj TrlcTTLf; vficov koX ifXeo-
vd^et rj dyaTrrj evo<; eicdarov TrdvTcov v/xcov et? aXXTJXof?, were 4
avTOV<; r)/jLa<; iv v/jllv ivKav^daOaL iv TaL<; iKKkrj(Tiai<; rov 0eou
virep T7J<i vTTo/jLOvrjf; vficov Kal TTtcrrect)? iv iracnv toI<^ BtcoyfjLOL<i

vficov Kal Tai<; 6\iyfre<7LV a*? ^dvej^eaOe,^ evBeiy/JLa ttJ? BcKala^; 5

KpL(7e(o<; Tov Seov, et9 to Kara^LcodrjvaL v/jLa<; Tr]<; I3a<7i\6ia<;
Tov &60V, virep r)<; Kal Tracr^ere, elirep BiKaiov irapa 0eo3 6

Father, extension of subj. ; for d-rro, see 292, 2 (John, in a similar connection,
uses Tapd, 2 Ep. ver. 3 eic ; ismore usual), and the Lord Jesus Christ,
prep, not repeated, 314, to show that the source is one.
Ver. 3. We are bound, 6(p. plur. , as referring to the three in ver. i (some, less
probably, understand the Apostle as speaking of himself, see 239); to thank God,
€VX', inf. in its ordinary use,«385 ; tense as 386 for dat. Qeip, see 278, d. always, ;

adv. qualifying ei^x. concerning you, brethren, voc. for irepi, see 302, a.

as is meet, d^iov, neuter, as referring to the substantivised clause, because

your faith greatly increases {6ti, causal, 407), explanation of the clause
immediately preceding. For virep in composition, see 147, a ; the verb is nowhere
else found in the New Testament, and the love of every one of you all to
one another abounds, evos iKda-rov, possess, gen., 254 (comp. 269); TravT. vfi.,

partitive gen., 261 ;

present tenses as 361, a. For 6ts(dependent upon dydTrj), see 298, 3.
Ver. 4. So that we ourselves boast in you, Coare, 391 V- ai>r. (emphatic), ;

subj. of inf., 285, 387; ev, 295, 4. among the churches of God, for iv, see
295, 2; for the art. with 9, 217, a. for your endurance and faith, vtrep,

303? ^> 3- I'or the one article with the two nouns, see 232, a the endurance and ;

faith combine to form one character, in all persecutions, the your and
afflictions, the article repeated, 232, b. which ye endure, ah, dat. by
attraction (for ibv, as the verb governs a gen. in the New Testament, 2 Cor. xi. i

2 Tim. iv. 3), 346, b; dvixj only middle in the New Testament, act., "to hold up;"
so mid., " to hold oneself up against," 355, i.
Ver. 5. (Which is) a token, nom. (pred. to an implied relative clause, 6 iffriv) ;

the token being the endurance and faith of the Thessalonians. of the righteous
judgment of God, genitives of origin or source, 248 ; article again employed.
in order that ye may be counted worthy, for inf., see 390, c; tense, 386;
vfids, 285. The clause expresses the intent of God's righteous judgment; and hence
its result, in proving the fitness of the faithful for God's kingdom, of the king-
dom of God, /3a(r. gen. after compound of A^io^, 272.
Ver. 6. For the sake of which ye also suffer, for virip, see 303, 2. The
Kal combines into one the thought of the suffering and the being counted worthy.
 2 THESSALOXIAXS I. 7-10. 359

7 avraTToBovvai rol^; OXl^ovciv v/jLa<; OXiyjnv koX vfilv toI<:

$Xi,^oiievoL<; avecnv fieO^ r}/ia)v iv rrj airoKakv-^eL rod Kvpiou

8 'It/ctoi) air ovpavov fieT dyyeXcov Bwdfieco'; avrov ev irvpi
(j)\o'y6<;, 8cS6vTO(; iKSiKTjacv toI(; fjurj elSoac (^eov koI toI<; firj

9 vTraKovovcTLV Tc3 evayyeXiO) rod Kvpiov rj/jLOJv ^Irjaov, otVti^e?

BiKTjv ria-ovaiv oXeOpov alcoviov cltto TrpoacoTrov rod Kvpiov koI

10 OLTTO rr)? 80^779 tt}? tcr^i/09 avTOv, orav eXOr) evho^aadrfvai iv

if truly it is righteous (as it is, implied by -TTtp), copula omitted; bkK. neut.,
because referring to inf. "with. God, for irapa (dat. ), see 306, /3, 2. tO repay
to those who afflict you, affliction, in the verb, airb marks the debt, olvtI

the return ; for the aorist, see 386. (This verb is used both in a good and a bad
sense in the New Testament: to "repay" or to "retaliate," Rom. xii. 19.) For the
art. and participle, see 395 dat. secondary object, and ace. primary object after the
;

verb, 278.
Ver. 7. And to you, the afflicted, ^Xt/S. is passive (not middle). rest
with us, MfTtt, as 301, a, i ; rnxuv, referring to the three, ch. i. I. at (tV, 295, 7)
the revelation of the Lord Jesus from heaven, the time when the
recompense shall take place, referred to avrair., ver. 6; airo, 292, i; ovpavov,
singular, 240, a, note, and without article, 218. with the angels of his
power, compare 258. The angels are the ministers of his power. The art. is
unnecessary before £177., as the following gen. defines it, 208.
Ver. 8. In a fire of flame, e** of investiture, dependent upon k. 'Itjct., 295, 3;
<p\oy6s, gen. of quality or attribute, 257. allotting vengeance, 5i86vtos refers
to 'It^o-ou. (The verb in this connection is unusual.) to those who knOW not
God, dat., 278; art. and part., 395; fxrj, the subjective negative, see 393. and tO
those who obey not, for the repeated article, see 232, b. the gospel, dat.,
278, d. of OUT Lord Jesus, see 270, note.
Ver. 9. Who, the compound relative, denoting character and suggesting the
reason, 349. shall pay (the) penalty, eternal destruction, ace. in
apposition ^\•ith slktjv, 177. (away) from the presence of the Lord, art.

omitted before irpoaibirov, 219. The meaning of dird is doubtful. It may either
refer to the source of the punishment, 292, 3, "inflicted by the presence of the Lord,"
or to the fact of separation, 292, i, this being itself the doom. Probably the latter
meaning is to be adopted, and from the glory of his might, the preposi-
tion repeated, to indicate a distinct conception ; tVxi^oj is the gen. of origin, 248.
The glory is that of God's manifested might, and exclusion from this beatific vision
shall be destruction.
Ver. 10. When he shall have come, ^rav ^\-ith subj., 380 ; fut. perf. force
of subj. aor., 383, § [brav as edv). tO be glorified, inf. of design, 390, 3, note ;

for tense, 386. in (or among, 295, 2) his saints, to be and admired in
(or among) all who believe, aor. part, "already believers," compare 364, e ;

probably ev here is to be taken, not as among simply, but as showing the sphere
(295, 4) in which the glory will be displayed, and from which the admiration will
360 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.

Toi<; wyiot,^ avrov koX Oav/jLao-drjvac iv Traacv rot? irta'Tevaaa'Lv,

OTC i7rc(TT6v6r] TO fiapTVpLOv r)/jL(t)V e^' vfid^;, iv rfj rjfiepa iKelvrj,

Et9 Kal TTpoaev^^^ofieOa ircLVToreireplvpLOiv, Xva vp,d^ a^idnay 11

T?)9 /c\?;(rea)9 o ©eo9 r}p,(bv Kal irXrjpoDo-r} irdaav cvSokIuv
dyaOa)<7vvrj<; koI epyov ivBo^aad^ 12
Trtcrect)? iv Svvd/jLet, oirco^;

TO ovofxa Tov Kvpiov ri/jLCJv ^Irjaov iv v/jllv, koI vfi6i<; iv avTS,

KUTa TTjv X'^P^^ '^^^ ®eoO rjp^cov koI Kvpiov ^Irjcov UpcaTOv.

CHAPTER II.

*EPnTIlMEN Se vpbd^y dBe\(pol, virep ttj^ 7rapovala<; tov 1

Kvpiov \j]P'(fiv^ ^\r)(TOv ^piOTTov, Kal tj/jlcov iTTLavvaycoyrj^; iir

spring, (because our testimony to you was believed), parenthetical

expansion of TncTeixxaaiVy and the one aor. helps to explain the other then, belief :

will have become a fact of the past. i]ix(2v is gen. of origin. For eirl, dependent on
fxapTvpLOv, see 305, 7, 4. in that day, clause dependent on h5o^. koX dav/j,.,
thrown somewhat out of order, compare 409, c. For iv, see 295, 7 ; hdvig, the
emphatic demonstrative, 340, note.
Ver. II. Whereto we
also pray, ets denoting direction, 298,4; 6', rel. pron.
ace. neut.,antecedent in the entire previous sentence, 344 /cai, with reference to the ;

general sentiment of the preceding, we not only indulge the hope, but also express
'
'

it in prayer." always concerning you, 2^3, 2. that (384, note) our God
may count you worthy of the calling, gen., as 272, and for art., see 210.
The meaning of d^iwarj is doubtful : make woi^thy would appear best to suit the
context, but this sense of the verb in the New Testament is unexampled, and
fulfil every good pleasure (see 224, «; 214, c) of goodness, i.e., every
voluntary purpose that can spring from (gen. orig.) goodness (R.V., every desire of
goodness) not God's goodness, for which dyadosavvr} is never used, but goodness as
;

an element of Christian character, so corresponding with the next clause, and

work (also qualified by irdcav, see 318) of faith (248) in pOWer (295, 6),
qualifying ir\r}pJ}<xri, "powerfully fulfil."
Ver. 12. In order that the name of our Lord Jesus, 6Vws, as distin-
guished from 'iva, seems to denote the how as contrasted with the where; but the line
cannot be very clearly drawn, may
be glorified (384, a, l ; tense, 374, note)
in you (see on ver. 10), and you (understand evdo^acdrjre) in him (or in it, i.e.,
the name, but less probably. See Alford, and 295, 4, note), according tO, for
/card, see 300, /S, 5. the grace of our God and the Lord Jesus Christ
(R.V.) (or 0/ our God and Lord Jesus Christ), see 232, a, note on Titus ii. 13, where,
however, the phrases are different. Kijpioi is so often properly anarthrous (217, b)
that the latter of the above renderings is very doubtful. (See Ellicott here.)
Chap. II. ver, i. But (5e transitional, 404; the writer's mind passing from his
own prayers to the duty of his readers) we entreat you, brethren, in
 —

2 THESSALONIANS II. 2-4. 361

2 avTOv, €t9 TO fjLT} Ttt'^^icof; araXevOrjvai vfia^i airo rov voo<; fxrjBe

OpoelaOaL ^rjre hia Trvev/xarof; ^rjre Bia \6<yov fJLrjTe hC eTnaToKij^;

3 0)9 St' 7)/jL(t)V, ft)9 OTC evea-TTjKev rj rj/iiepa rov KvpLov. fii] Tt9 u/ia9
i^airarrja'rj Kara fjLijBeva rpoirov •
on iav /irj eXOrj rj airoaraaia
irpoiTOv Kol diroKoXvcfydfj 6 dv6pcD7ro<; t?}9 ^avo/JLLa<;,^ 6 vlo<; T779
4 dwcoXela';, 6 dvTLK6ifi6vo<; kol vTrepaipofievo'^ eiri iravra Xeyo-
fievov Seov 7) ae^aafia, uxttb avrov eh rov vaov tov 0eou
3 a/xaprlas.

reference to, 303, a, 3 (not by, as if in adjuration. See Alf.). the coming
of our Lord Jesus Christ, and our (gen. obj., 268) gathering to-
gether unto him, for iiri, see 305, 7, 3 (Mark v. 21), not tip to, although the
reference is to the final gathering.
Ver. 2. That ye be not (lit., in order to your not heiTUf) soon shaken,
for ei5, see 298, 4. The purpose of the entreaty was to prevent their being shaken.
For TO, substantivising the inf., see 390; for /i-jj, 385, h ; for u/xas, 285, and note.
from your mind (or conviction), air 6, as 292, i ; the article as an unemphatic
possessive, 215. nor yet be troubled, for iirjbi, disjunctive (not fj.-qre, as rec),
see 405 ; dpoeicrdai, pres. inf., denoting an enduring state, the aor., <ja\evd., referring to
a single effect, 386. neither by spirit nor by word nor by letter, as
by us ; the repeated fx-fyre here breaks up the negation into three parts, and connects
them. For 5td, see 299, a, 2. {Spirit no doubt refers to a pretended prophecy ; word,
to a pretended saying on inspired authority letter, therefore, according to the parallel,
;

should mean a pretended epistle. That the reference is not to the First Epistle, the
wj seems further to indicate.) as that (2 Cor. v. 19 shows that the ws does not in
itself imply deceit, but only that the thing was so represented — " to the effect that").
the day of the Lord is already come imminent, immediately), not (or, is

simply is at hand, for the verb always refers to the present the part. eVearti? ;

expressly signifying the present in distinction from the future (Rom. viii. 38 ;

I Cor. iii. 22); R.V. is now jrresent.

Ver. 3. Let no one deceive you, c^aTr., subj. in imper. sense, 375 ; aor.,

373, b. in (/card, 300, 5) any way, the two negatives strengthen

/3, the denial,
401.because, unless the apostasy, definite, 213. shall first have
come (383, j3, note), and the man of lawlessness {the lawlessness, 214, b)
shall have been revealed, — the Apostle does not conclude the sentence,
see 412, e, but passes on to describe the characteristics of the **man of sin." the
son of perdition (genitives of quality).
Ver. 4. He that withstands, and exalts himself (middle, 355, i).

Obs., the single article shows that the two participles refer to the same subject.
But avTiKeifiepoi cannot take iiri following ; an object must, therefore, be under-
stood Christ. Onthe tense, see 396. above (305, 7, 2, R.V. against) every
one called God, obsei-ve iravra, masc. or an object of worship, 6e6^
9,nd ai^acfxa, accus., iu apposition with iravTo. after copulative verb. 30 that
362 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.

KaOiaaL, aTToheiKVvvra iavTov on ecrrtv @eo9. Ov /JLvrjpLovevere 5

OTL en tbv 7rpo9 vfid<i ravra eXeyov v/jllv ; Kal vvv to Kari'^ov 6
oiSaT€, eh TO airoKaXv^Orivai avTov ev tS avTOv Kacp^ •
to 7
yap jjLvaT7]pLov tJStj evepyeiTai ri}? avofila^ •
jjlovov 6 KUTe^oyv
apTL eci)<; eK fiiaov yevTjTUL. koL TOTe a7roKa\v(f>6^aeTaL 6 8
dvofio<;, ov KvpLO<; \^\r}aov<i\ ^aveXeV roS TrvevfiaTt tov <tt6-

fxaTO^ avTov Kal KaTapyrjaet ttj eiTK^avela r?}? 7rapovala<i

8 dvaXoi.

he sits, for CoffTe, see 391 Kadiaai, intrans. aor., "he took his seat" in tho
temple of God, — literally, into— i.e., "entered into and sits in," construciio
;

prccgnatis, 298, 8. exhibiting himself that he is God, airoSHK., ace. by

avrbv preced,, present, as expressing his habit. For the object and object-sentence,
see 411, h. iari is emphatic.
Ver. 5. Remember ye not, interrog., 369, h, that, introducing object-
sentence, 380. when yet with you, &v, part, in apposition with subj. of
EXeyov ; for irpos, see 307, 7, 2. I used to tell you these things, for
imperf. , see 362, b ; vfuv, 278, h.
Ver. 6. And now ye know that which hinders, vOv temporal (as
when with you I gave you the information, so 7ioiv ye know), or logical, without
reference to time (EUicott) ; rb Kar^x^v, part., substantivised, in order that
he should be revealed in his own time, for ds, see 390,
c. The
liindranceis "in order to " the revelation being made at
the right time, as a barrier
might be said to be for the proper admission of a multitude. For ev, see 295, 7 ;

for the position of avrov^ 229.

Yer. For, 407, explanatory of the hindrance, the mystery of the law-
7.

lessness (or iniquity) is already at work, avoiila^, definite, gen. either of

apposition, 259, "the mystery which is the iniquity;" or of quality, 257, "the
mystery characterised by (the) iniquity;" -fibt), adv. of time, tvepy., middle present,
361, a. only, fiovop, adv. he who hinders, change from neut. to masc. at
present, until he shall have been taken out of the way {midst).
This clause may read, by a slight
either be of words, as dependent
inversion
—
upon the former " is at work only until he who at present hinders be taken out
of the way," the objection to which is the unnatural position of ea>s or by sup- —
posing an ellipsis of a predicate, "only he who hinders (is working, hepydrai, or
i<TTiv, there is one who hinderSy R.V.) as yet, until," etc. In this case, the thought
which yap introduces is in the latter, not the former clause of the verse. Compare
the examples in 410, h. (For, although the mystery is even now working, there w as
yet a "Jiinderer.") For €k fiiaov, see 219.
Ver. 8. And then,
i.e., when the restraining power or person is taken out of tho

shall the lawless one be revealed, 210. whom

way, T&re emphatic,
the Lord (Jesus) will consume by the breath {Spirit), 280, d. of
his mouth, 248. and will destroy by the manifestation of his
coming, 258,
 2 THESSALOXIANS II. 9-13. 363

9 avTOVy ov i(TTtv tj irapovcria Kar ivipyetav rov ^aTava iv

10 Trda-T) hvvdfiei koI <T7jiJL6iOL<; koI repacriv i/reuSof? koI iv irdar)
oLTrdTT) dSLKLa<; rot? dTroWv/jLevot^;, dv6^ wv rrjv dydin^v tt)?

11 dXrfOeia^i ovk iBe^avTO et? to awOrjvac avroix; •

Kal 8td tovto
Tre/jLTret avrol^ 6 0eo9 ivepyeiav 7r\dvr}<; €t9 to iTKTTevaat, avToif<;
12 Tc5 yjrevBeCy iva KptOoicnv ^7rdvTes:~^ ol fir) Trca-TevaavTe^ ttj

13 dXrjOela dWd evhoKTjaavTe^ ttj dStKLa. 'H/xe?9 Be 6(^ei\ofiev

evy^apKTTelv to5 ©ew irdvTOTe irepl v/jlmv, dB6\(f)ol i^yaTrrj/jLevoc

12 diravTes.

Ver. g. Whose coming is, ov, correspondent -witli 6v, ver. 8, relative to
Hvofios. according to the working of Satan, tvefyy. anarth- Kara, as 300, 5 ;

rous, "such working, in general, as Satan would perform." For the gen., Sar., see
20, a. in (of investiture or accompaniment, 295, 3) all power and signs and
wonders, Tdar) in sense belongs to all three nouns, 318, and denotes " every kind
of," 224, a. of falsehood, prob. gen. of origin, 248 (these things being severally
born of falsehood), or perhaps gen. of quality, as A.V., R.Y., hjiiig wonders.
Ver. 10. And
in all {evei-y kind of, as ver. 9) deceit,, parallel to the former
prepositional clause with ev, the two together explanatory of /car. ivepy. Sax. of
iniquity, gen. of quality, for the perishing, dat. incommodi, 279. For
the force of the participle, see 200, note, and 396. because, for dvd' wv, see
291, note, they received not, aorist, viewing their lifetime as past, the
love of the truth, gen. obj., 268. in order that they might be
saved, const, as vers. 2, 6.
Ver. II. And on this account, 299, /3, i.e., because they received not, etc.

God sending, explanatory of the dTroXXu/t^vots. tO them (dat. of transmis-

is
sion) a working of delusion, parallel to evifryeiav above, gen. of characteristic
quality, 257. so that they should believe (the intent, and so the result,
of the deltision, 390, c) the falsehood, dative, 278, d; article of "renewed
mention," 212.
Ver. 12. That they might all be judged, a second intentional clause,
384, growing out of the preced. who believed not the truth, 396 ; for
negative, see 393. but took pleasure, the conduct viewed as past from
the point of view of then- condemnation, in the iniquity, art. as 212 ; dat.,
278, d.
Ver. 13. But we, emphatic pron. 169. are bound to give thanks to
God always concerning you, see on ch. i. 3. brethren beloved by
the Lord [i.e., by Christ, see 217, &), because God (for art., see 217, a) chose
you, e'CKaro, see 97, b, note causal sentence compare the on in ch. 3. from
; ; i.

the beginning, 219 (alt. reading, a firstfi'uit). unto salvation, dependent

upon ei'X. for cts, see 298, 4. in sanctification of the Spirit, iv denoting
;

the sphere (295, 4) in which the salvation \& realised. Trveu/A. is gen. of the author,
248 ; for omitted article, see 217,/. and belief of truth (or, the truth), wlffret,
364 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.

VTTO J^vpLOV, on elXaro vfxa^; o 0eo9 ^air oLp^rj<;'^ et? (TCOTrjplav iv

dyLaa/jLQ) 7rv€v/jLaT0<; koX iriarei aXrj6ela<^, et? o iKoXeaev vp,a<i 14
hia Tov evayyeXtov rjfiSiVy €t9 7r€pC7roL7]acv 86^7)<; rov Kvpiov
rjficov ^IrjcToi) ^pcarov. "A pa ovv, aZe\(^oi, (nrjKere, koX Kpa- 15
T6LTe Ta^ irapaoocrei^; a? €0Loa^o7}T€ are oca \oyov etre ot
eVto'ToX^? rjfiMv. AvTo? Be 6 Kvpio^ tj/jlcov 'iTycrow? ^pLa-T0<i 16
Kal [o] 0609 Trarrjp rjficov, 6 aya7r^cra<i rjfJLa^ Kal 8oif<; irapd-
KK/qaiv alcovlav Kal iXTrlBa dyadrjv iv '^^dpcrc, irapaKaXecrac 17
v/jLa)p Ta9 KapBla^ Kal arr^pL^at, iv iravrl €py(p Kal Xoyw dyaOw.
13 arrapxh^'

without the art., like ay laa-fic^, under the common regimen of ev, 314 see also 208. ;

Truth is abstract, 214, and is used in the utmost generality not so much the ;

specific truth of the Gospel, but the Gospel considered as truth ; the disposition
given being that of harmony with truth in itself, whatever it might be.
Ver. 14. Unto which, (state of salvation), the neuter relative referring to the
whole object of thought ; he called you, aor., as before, of specific
compare 344.
time, by means of, 299, our gospel, i.e., the Gospel as preached by
«, 2.

us, see 270, note, for the attainment of the glory, els, connected with and
explanatory of els a-car. ; do^., gen. obj., 268. (The glory of Christ is regarded as in
a sense the heritage of Christians ; compare John xvii. 24.) of OUr Lord Jesus
Christ, possess, gen., 254.
Ver. 15. Accordingly therefore, for the inferential conjunction, see 406.
brethren, stand fast (derivative of 'icT-qKa, see 108, 4), and hold fast the
instructions, ace. obj. of Kpar., compare 264. which ye were taught, ay,
secondary object, with pass. eSiSdx-, see 284, note, and 356. whether by WOrd,
299, a, 2. or by our (248) epistle. For etre, see 405.
Ver. 16. But our Lord himself, 5^, as usual, adversative, 404 ain-ds, very ;

emphatic, 335. Jesus Christ, and God our Father who loved us,
referring to the last antecedent, God the Father (aor., as referring to a single and
complete act), and gave eternal consolation and good hope, abstract,
anarthrous better rendered without indef. art. in grace, connected with SoiJs,
;

295, 6 and 4.
Ver. 17. Comfort, for opt., see 378 : sing., indicative of the close union between
the Father and the Son ; so the following, your hearts, plur., see 237. and
establish you, supply u/xas from vixCjv, or, as R.V., make KapSias the object of
both verbs, establish them, in every gOOd WOrk and word, iv denotes again
the element ; that in which the confirmation is given.
 2 THESSALONIANS III. 1-5. oiJO

CHAPTER III.

1 TO XocTTov TTpoaeify^eaOe, aheX^oi, irepl rj/jLcjv, tva 6 X0709

2 Tov KVpLov Tpi'^y Kal Bo^d^rjrac Ka6cD<; Koi 7rpo9 vfJLa<;, koI 'iva

pv(TO(t)iJLev CLTTo Tcov aTOTTcov Kol TTOVTjpcjv dv6p(o7ra)v, OX) yap

3 irdvTwv 7] iri<TrL<^. IltcrTo? ^e earLv Kvpco^;, 09 (TTrjpl^eL vfjLd<;

4 Kal ^v\d^€L diro tov Trovrjpov. TreiroiOajJiev he iv Kvpico e^'

5 vfjid^y OTC d TrapayyiWofjuev [/cat] TroLelre Kal iroLrjaeTe. 'O he
KvpL0<; KarevOvvaL vfjLCJV ra? Kaphw eh rrjv dydTrrjv tov (^eov
Kal el<; ttjv vtto/jlovtjv tov '^kttov.

Chap. III. ver. i. For the rest (as to what remains to be said), neut. adj.,
ace. of time (comp. 286, b, 2 ; see also 266, and Ellicott on Gal. vi. 17). pray,
brethren, for us, for wepi, see on i. 1 1 ; also for tVa. that the word of
the Lord may have free course (run) and be glorified, passive,
not (as some) middle, even as also {it adds in thought is) with you, /cat

the Thessalonian Church to the other places where the word achieved success. For
wpos, see 307, 7, 2.
Ver. 2. And that we may be delivered, aor. subj., showing that a specific
deliverance is desired, 374, note; the pres, subj., ver. i, suggesting contimwus
success, 374, note, from the perverse and wicked men, the article
denoting a class, as the hypocrites, Matt. vi. 2, probably specifying the Jewish
party in Corinth, whence this Ep. was written, for the faith, the Christian
faith, see 213 (not faith in general, which in this connection would hardly have
been definite), does not belong to all, lit., "(is) not of all," i.e., is not
*
*
their possession, see 267, note.
Ver. 3.But is denied by so many) faithful is the Lord,
(although the faith
a paronomasia with the preceding clause, 413, a. will establish yOU, who
ref. to ar-npi^ai, ii. 17. and guard (you) from evil, or less appropriately (yet
see Ellicott), the Evil Otie (R.Y.). Comp. the quotations in 316. The neuter sense
is sustained by the close connection through <XTr]pi^. with ^pyui in ii. 17. For diro,
see 292, I.

Ver. 4. But we trust, the adversative 5^ bringing the future just expressed
into antithesis with the present (so Ellicott). in the Lord, 295, 4 (not simply
"in the Lord, who will bring this about by his goodness," but being in him, as the
element of our life and hope, we trust) ;see 99, c, note, also 367.
for -jreiroida, in
reference to you, for iiri, that what we command (you)
see 305, 7, 4.
now, as the verb, is pres. ye both are doing, and will do, for Kal... Katy
see 403. The whole clause from 6'ti depends on ireiroid. as an object-sentence, 381.
Ver. But, again slightly adversative, "though this is
5. the case, yet as a further
blessing." the Lord, i.e., Jesus Christ himself, 217, b, (As Christ is separately
mentioned at the close of the verse, some refer k. here to the Holy Spirit, quoting
2 Cor. iii. 18 ; but the argument is very doubtful.) direct your hearts, opt.,
366 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.

UapayyeWofiev Be vfilv, aBeXcj^oly iv ovo/Jbart rov Kvpiov 6

^ ^ ^\rj(TOV ^ptarov areXXeaOai t'yu-a? airo iravTo^ ahe\<^ov
arcLKTW^; nTepiirarovvTO'^ koI /jlt} Kara ttjv irapdhocnv rjv
^irapeXd^ere^ irap t^jjumv. avrol yap oiBare 7rw9 Bel /jLi/jbeta6aL 7
rjiJLd<;, ore ovk rjTaKTTjaa/Jbev iv v/julv ovBe Bcopeav apTOV ecpofyofiev 8
Trapd TLVo^, dX}C iv kottm koI fioyOfp vvkto<; koX r)fjbepa<; ipya^o-
fievoL 7r/309 TO firj iTTL^aprjaal rcva v/jlcjv •
ov-^ on ovk e'^ofiev 9
i^ovcrlav, dX)C Xva eavTov<; tvttov Boifxev v/jllv eh to ^i^elaOau
6 T^fiCou. irapeKa^oaav.

as in ii. 17; u^wf slightly emphatic from position, into the love of God, for
els, see 298, GeoO objective, 269.
I ; and into the patience of Christ, prep,
repeated, as of a separate object of thought, 314. Xp. is probably gen. of possession,
254, such patience as Christ exhibited " or it may be gen. of author,
'
' ; the patience
'
'

that Christ imparts." The objective sense given in A.V., ^'patient luaiting for,'' is
not supported by the meaning of virofiovri.
Ver. 6. Now, Si, transitional (404, ii). to the preceptive part, we command
you, brethren, for irapay., see ver. 4. in the name of the Lord Jesus
Christ, iv ovbix., dependent upon irap., 295, 5. that ye withdraw your-
selves, object, inf., with ace. subject, 285 a-riW., only mid. in the New Testa-;

ment active, to pid together; mid., to draw oneself together, 355, i

; hence to ;

shrink from, with ace. , as in 2 Cor. viii. 20, or with clto, as here, from every
brother walking disorderly, and not, subjective neg. according to,
300, /3, 5. the instruction (see ii. 15) which ye (var. read they) received,
9iv, obj. of TrapeXa/S., 343. from US, for irapa, see 306, a.
Ver. 7. For yourselves know, emphatic pron. subj. ; yap suggests an
implied thought : "I need not enter into details, for." how ye ought to
imitate us (for the impersonal verbs, see loi), "a brachylogy " (Ellicott),
implying irepLiraTetv, "how ye ought to walk — in fact, to imitate us."
from preced.,
because we were
not disorderly, on gives the reason for /xt/ieto-^at, "we
propose our conduct for imitation, because." among you, 295, 2.
Ver. 8. Nor, slightly ascensive, "nay, and we did not," 404. did we eat
bread, 306, a, 350 (to eat bread is a quasi-proverbial phrase for "to make a
living"), for nought, Scjpedv, an old ace. as adv., 126, a; compare its use in
Matt. X.8, "without an equivalent;" so in other passages, from any one,
306, a.but in (accompaniment, 295, 3) toil and travail (we did so) labour-
ing night and day, gen., 266. Both these clauses depend on itpayoixev, implied.
in order not to be burdensome, for 7rp6s with inf., see 390, c. to any
of you, ace, compare 281, a vfiCov, partitive gen., 262.
for ;

Ver. 9. Not
that, a frequent elliptical formula, correcting a possible misappre-
hension, " do not suppose me to say that" (see Ellicott on Phil. iii. 12). have we
not a right (to maintenance), but (we do so) in order that we may pre-
sent ourselves, SCjjxev, aor. of one definite determination for eauroiJs, see 335, ;
 2 THESSALONIANS HI. 10-15. 367

10 r]fmf;. kol yap ore rj/iev Trpo? vjjba^, tovto irapriyyeWoiiev

11 vpLLVj OTL el Ti<; ov 9e\ei ipyd^eaOat firjBe iadterco. aKovonev
yap TLva^ TTepLTrarovvTa^ iv vjjuv aTdKTa)<;, fjLrjBev ipya^o/jLevov<;
12 dWa 7repL€pya^o/jLevov<; *
rot? Se tolovtoi<; irapayyeWofjiev Kai
irapaKaXovfiev iv Kvplcp ^Irjaov X/oto"To3 Lva fieTa r]av')(^ia^

13 ipya^ofxevoi rov kavroiv dprov iadicocTLV. 'T/Aet? Se, a8eX<^ot,

14 fir] ivKaKr)(r7]T€ Ka\o7roLovvT€<;. el Se rt? ov'^ vTraKovei tco
\oy(p r)fxo}v hid Trj<; eiriG-rokrj^;, tovtov cnj/jLetovaOe, fir) avvava-
15 fiuyvvaOat avrw, Xva evrpairfj •
koI fir) &)? i'^Opov r)yel(T6e,

I,b. an example, secondary predicate, in apposition with eaur. to you, tO

the end that, els as in ii. II, etc. (ye) should imitate us.
Ver. 10. For even, see 407, note, when we were among you, for 7rp6s,
compare ii. 5. we used to enjoin this upon you, impf., 362, b for irapaX- ;

7cXXw and its regimen, see ver. 4, 6. that, introducing objective sentence explana-
tory of TOVTO, but tllro^vn into a quotation form, 382, a ; hence icrd. imper. " if
any one wills not to work," for el, see s^s^ '^ \ for ^eXet, 363, /. " neither
lethim eat," neg., 371.
For, introducing the reason of the command, we hear of SOm©
Ver. II.
that walk, predicative participle, 394. among you, eV as ver. 7. dis-
orderly, doing no work, but being busybodies, participles in
apposition with TreptTr. ; for the paronomasia, see 413, a. The verb irepLepy.
does not again occur in the N.T., although the subst. wepiepyos is found, i Tim.
V. 13.
Ver. 12. But to such as these, pron. definite, 220. we command and
exhort, thedat. obj. belongs grammatically to 7rapa77. as in ver. 4, etc. irapaKaX. , ;

takes the ace. in the Lord Jesus Christ that, working with quiet-
ness, for /jLerd, they eat, subj. by iVa ; tense, 374. Obs. vapayy.
see 301, a, 2.
with the inf., ver. 6 with object
; and obj. -clause, oti, ver. 10, here with the inten-
tional particle. The command is given in order that the result may follow, their
own bread, emphatically, not that of others.
Ver.But ye, emphatic, by way
13. of contrast to those just mentioned.
brethren, be not weary, subj., with imper. force, 375. in well-doing,
pres. part., adjunct to pred., 394, 3, b, "whilst well-doing" being implied; or
causal, as c.

But if any
Ver. 14. one obeys not, 383, a. our word, 278, d. through,
conveyed by, 299, a, 2. the epistle, i.e., this epistle, note this man, for
(tt;/!., middle, see 355, 2, "mark for yourselves." not to keep company
with him, dat. of association, 277, a, double object, 411, b. The pres. imper. in
both cases enjoins the conduct as habitual, that he be ashamed, the purpose,
again, not simply the result.
Ver. 15. And, not adversative, but simply conjunctive another particular of ;

the conduct to be observed, esteem (him) not as an enemy, ws, a particle of

368 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.

aWa vovOereiTe co? aBe\<f)6v. Auto? Be 6 KvpLO<; rr}? elpTjvrj^; 16

8(6r) vfiLV TTjv elp'qvrjv Bca iravTO^; ev iravTi rpoTro). 6 Kvpto<;
/lera ttclvtcov viiSiV.
'O a(T7racr/jLo<; rfj i/xfj ^etpl UavXov, 6 icTTLv arj/jielov ev Trdarj 17
€7n<TTo\rj ' oi/TO)? iypd<f)(o. T) ')(^dpL<; tov KvpLov rjficjv ^Irjcrov 18
^pLO-TOV /JL6Ta TrdvTCOV XJflMV.

apposition connecting ex^P- with tovtov, understood from preced. but admonish
(him) as a brother.
Ver. 1 6. But (the antithesis being between the persons addressed by the Apostle
and those just specified, "as for you," "to return to you") the Lord of (the)
peace, gen. of quality, himself, emphatic pron. give (the) peace to you,
8(^7), opt. in the usual sense and the ordinary const, of the verb. The article before
eip. both times emphatic, recognising peace as the peculiar and well-understood
is

Christian blessing, always, XP^^°^ understood with vavrds, an adverbial adjunct

to difij. in every way. The Lord be, supply eiTj as i. 2. with, 301, a, i.
you all.
Ver. 17. The salutation, nominative, in apposition with ver. 18, as a kind of
title: "This is the salutation." of me, Paul, with my own hand, for
const., see 336 ; x^'P', dat. of instr., 280, d. which, neuter rel. pron., 346, a.
is the sign, pred. omits art., see 206. in every epistle, 224, a. so I
write, the other member of the comparison being omitted, as obvious to the
orig. readers ; compare examples under 412, e. Probably the phrase alludes to
some peculiarity in the handwriting. Compare Gal. vi. 11.
Ver. 18. The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be, eir), as i. 2. with
(301, a, I) you all.
The subscription to the Epistle, The second (epistle) to the Thcssaloiiians was
written from Athens (see also subscription to First Epistle), undoubtedly spurious,
is

and is also incorrect. It arose probably from a careless and mistaken interpretation
of I Thess. iii. i. R. V. omits.
 369

NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.

Probably no two Avords in any language are precisely synonymous^

although many are intercliangeahle. It has already been shoAAii (§ 290)
that words in different languages seldom, if ever, perfectly correspond.
Hence arise some of the chief difficulties of translation. It has often
been unthinkingly suggested that, in the Xew Testament for instance,
the same Greek word should always be rendered by the same English
one. This rule Avould constantly lead to inaccuracies : although, un-
doubtedly, capricious or unnecessary variations should be avoided. In
the Preface to the R.V., the Revisers note as a fault of the A.V. the
intentional and studied avoidance of uniformity in the rendering of the
same words, even when occurring in the same context. This fault the
R.V. largely rectifies. Greek words which recur several times in one
[)assage, which are found in different books in the same context, or which

are characteristic of some particular writer, are rendered by the same

English equivalent. Variations involving inconsistency, or suggestive of
differences which have no existence in the Greek, have mostly disappeared.
Still it will be evident that within these limits there is room for vari-

ations whicli are legitimate and even necessary. The word suffer, for
instance, covers so great an extent of meaning, that we are hardly
surprised to find it employed in the A.V. for ten distinct Greek words,
besides various combinations of the same roots. To 'provol^e, again, occurs
twelve times in the A.V. for eight Greek words the R.V.
diff'erent ;

makes a change in one instance only. To i^ovide

is found eight times,

representing six distinct originals ; in the R.V. we have a different

rendering for three of the six. The verb ordain occurs eighteen times,
once for TrotecD (not in R.V.), which Greek word has in different places
thirty-six English ccjuivalents ; once for ytVo/xat (not in R.V.), the
B B
370 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
various equivalents of which are almost innumerable ; twice for opc^w,
which is translated in four different ways ; once for Trpoopt^oo, which has
three English equivalents (R.V. consistently renders foreordain in every
case) ; twice for Tidyjixi (not in E. V.), a verb translated in fifteen ways ;

twice for rao-o-o), which is rendered by five different words ; thrice for
StaTaa-cro), a verb with five renderings ; thrice for KaOto-rrjfj.L (not in E..V.),
which we find translated in six ways once for Karaa-Kevdlu) (not in R.V.),
;

a verb with four English equivalents once for KptVw, which is rendered
;

in fifteen ways and once for x^tporoi/ea), a word occurring twice, and in
;

each place differently rendered (R. Y. in both cases appoint). In addition

to these, we have to ordain before^ for Trpoypa^w and TrpoeroLfxd^oi (not in
R.V.).
Such instances suggest the largeness of the field that is open to the
inquirer into the so-called Synonyms, whether of the Greek or the
English New Testament. To cover that field, in however perfunctory a
manner, would be plainly impossible in the compass of a few pages. All
that can be attempted is to point out the main distinctions between some
important words in general use, of kindred meaning, and often translated
alike in the A.V. The list might be greatly extended, but enough is
given to excite the student's inquiries. For further detail, the English
reader is referred to Tittmann's "Remarks on the Synonyms of the
New Testament," translated in Clark's Biblical Cabinet, 1833-37 ; to
Archbishop Trench's "Synonyms of the New Testament;" and to the
"Syntax and Synonyms of the New Testament," by the Rev. W.
AYcbster, m.a.
 IsEW TEtSTAME^T SYNONYMS. 371

WORDS ILLUSTRATED.
NO. NO.
dyados, dyadoj(TVV1]
dyairdu},
dyios, dyvos
dydwr
.
1
.

.
.

.
.

.
.21
.19
. 23
daKpi'Oj
derjcris
....
daifjuou, dacf-Loviov

....
•

•
53
20
38
dyvorj/xa . .
39 del. . 12
dyopd^u . . 43 SeiXos, SetXi'a .
33
gdr}$ . 52 deiai8aifji.wi>, deiaidai/xovia 44
&8iK0i, ddiKia
dWios
aiviw, dtpos
.

. . .
.

•
22
58
47
beairtTrjs
dijfxos
diddrjfxa
....
.... .
•
59
73
67
alreo}, alTiqixa . . . 9, 38 dcaKovos, StaKouia, dLanoveu) 36, 60
aiJjv, aiwuLOS
dXeicpo) .
.

dXfjdqs, dXrjdei a, dXridLvbs

. . .

.
.

.
58
18
24
8i.aXeyo/xaL
didvoia
diarayi^
....
....
.

. 49
15
55

dXKos . . . . 76 di5d<TK(j}, 8idu(rKaXos 14, 59

d/xaprdvu),
dfJL(pL(3\7]aTpOV
dvddrjfia,
d/.ta prla, dfxdpTr)fj.a

dvdd e/xa, dvadefiarl^uj

.
.

.
.

.70
.
39

51
diKULOs,
dlKTVOU
56yiia
....
diKaioavvT], ^LKa'.cjfia

....
21, 49

.
• 70
49
dvaKaivow, dpa veou)
dv-qp .
.

.
.

.
.26
. 63
doK€w, 56|a
SovXos .... 6, 4 7
. 60
dvdpWTTOS
dvo/xia .
. . . .

.
63
39 dQfxa ....
5vua/j.ai, bi'vap-LS 45,
.
57
61
dvoxv
dvTiXirrpou
diroKuTpojcns
.

•
31
43
43
'E/Spaios
idvos, edvt}
.... •

•
50
73
dwTo/xai.
dperr)
dpxoLOS
.

.
.
7
21, 47
. 25
eiKdov
eifii
....
elSov, d5os, etSwXoj'

....
.
5,
.
56
56
I

avXri
dipiTjfit, &<p€(ns .
72
42
elwov, eiros
eXeos .... .

•
8
41

68
evdvfia ....
"EXXt;*', 'FtXXTjvKTTifjs •

.
50
66
pdpos
^eXTLOV
(iios
.
.

.
21
54
i^oi'crla
evToX-f) ....
.

exaiueo}, eiraiuos
, . . •

.
57
49
47
^Xeiru), pXe/x/Jic . 5 CTrtcra/xat 4
poaKU
PouXo/xai, (SovX V .... 16
3
62
iinaTdTrjs
ipXOfxai ....
....
•

.
59
10
/3pe0os
^(a/Mos
. .

37
epQ
ipurdu) .... .

9,
8
38

yeevva
yivo/xai
.

.
. 52
I
ia-drjs
erepos ....
. .

evayyeXiov , evayyeXii^w
. .

.
. .

•
66
76
15
yiVUXTKW .
4 euXa/ST/s,evXd^eta, evXa^eofj-ai .
33, 44
ydfios 68 evXoyTjrCs . . . . . 28
372 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.

evae^Tis,
evxofJiaL ....
€i)o"e'j3eia

.
•

.
NO.
44
38
Xidos
Xuyos
....
....
XvTpOV, XvTp6(j), Xl'TpUCLS .

.... 54
^ojri . . . . •
Xi/Xi'os, Xi'x»''a

TjKli}

r)TTT}u.a .... .

•
10
39
fiaKdpios . . . .

dedofxaL
^€\^^)
....
ddvaros, davarou)

....
.

•
54
5
3
fjLaKpo6v/j.ia

....
fxdvTLS, ixavrevoixai
/xdraios
.

deoae^rjs, deoae^eia . . 44 /xeyaXvvcj

QeoTTjs, GetoTT/s

....
depdwojv, deparrevit) .
.

.
34
60 fieXXw ....
fxcXei, fj-cXerdu}

dewpeio
diyydvu ....
....
•

.
5
7
/X€pL/Xvdi>}, /x€pi/.i.va

fiera/xeXofxai .
.

dvrjTOi

....
dprjCFKOs, 6pr)a-K€ia •
54
44 /xopcprj ....
ixeravoeu}, fxerduoia .

dv/ULOS
^i;pa ....
dvaia, dvaiacTTripiov .
.

•
32
71
37
J'a6s ....
veKpbs, veKpoio .

iepevs
tepos, iepoj'
.... .

23, 35
37
VeOS, V€JTT}S
UrjTTLOS
vilTTiO
....
....
l/JLaTLOV ....
iXdcr/coyUai, LXacr^tjs .
•

.66
43 j^oCs, v6r)/xa

....
'lovSatoj, 'lapar]XlT7]s
iox^ij}, tVxt^s . .
50
57
6yK0S
oovpfiSs ....
....
Kadapoi .... , 23
otSa
oiKOS, otVt'a, oiKenjs .

K'aiJ/6s,

Kaipos ....
Kaiu6TT]s . 26
64
OLKOvixivrj
olKTLpflOS
KaKos, KaKia
KaXos ....
....
.

.
22
21
oXokXtjpos, cXoTcXrjS

....
opdoo, bpafxa, 6\poixai, 6\j/is

Kapbla
KaTayyeWii}
.... .
•

•
55
15
opyr)
OCFLOS ....
....
Karrjx^i^
/cei'os .... .

.
14
29
6(p€iX(jJ

ocpuXrifia
....
KXaioj ....
KTjpvaacj, K-qpvyixa

....
.
•

.
15
20
'oxXos

....
KXeiTTTJS
KOCpLVOS
KOafMOS
....
. . . ,
.

.
.

s^
.
74
69
7rat5ei;a;
TTttts,

iraXaibs ....
iraioLOV .

KTiatS
Kvpios
....
Kpdros, Kpeiaaiou

....
21, 57
•

.
49
59
irapd^aais,
irapavoixla
iro^paKorj,

Trapal3oXrj, irapoifjiia .
irapdi: TU/JLU,

XaX^u) ....
.... 8, 15
TTapddoaLS
irdpecris ....
....
Xa/xirds
Xaos
Xarpeuu)
....
....
.

.
.

.
65
73
36
Trarpid
irapopyiafMos
TT^urjs .... .

X^ycjj, X670S . 8 Trepnroi^OjJLai, Trepiiroirjais .

\ctT0i'p76s, XeiTOvpy^ii}, Xei rovpyla, Trerpa, werpos .

\r)<7Tr]s ....
XeiTovpyiKds .

.
36
74
7rXr]/j./ji.€X€ia

irXTjpou), irXrjpujxa .
 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 373

NO.
ij/MVOS ......
......
NO.
48
TTveufxa .

iroL/xaivcj, woi/JiVTj, voi/j.vlov

55
2
16, 72
VTrdpx<^
vwTjpeTrjs
VTTO/XOVTj
....
..... 60
I

31
TTOVTjpos, irovTjpla 22
irpdaao) . 2
^ivofxai ....
..... 6
irpocreiixo/xai, irpoaevxi)
irpodKvviii)
TTpoatpopd
irpoiprjTr)^, irpo(pT)Tei(a
38
36
37
ipavXos
(peyyos
<^/it
.....
.....
22
65
8
15
(fx-Xecj, (pLXavdpuiria, 0tXa5eX0ia 19
TTTiVXOS

irvvddvofiai
. 30
71
9
(poprrlov
(pp^ves
.....
06j3os, (po^eofiaL

.....
33
68
55
^a/3/3i^ •

/jew, pr)^l(l
• •
59
8
(pvXrj
^s,
.....
(ppoveoj, (ppovTi^u

....
(fxacTrip
II
61
65
cayqvrj . 70
crdp^, aapKiKos XapaKTTjp,
55 xo-pa-y/J-a 56
Sarav, Harapas
ae^o/xai, ae^d^ojxai .
53
36
45
Xo-pis
XtTci;'

XP^
..... . 41
66
12
(XKld
(TTrovdri
(Xirvpis
.
56
II
69
Xpi'w,
Xpovos
....
XPV<^t65, xP>?o"'"ot?7?

.....
Xpiaros
. . . • 21
18
64
aT€(pavos, arefM/jLa 67
<rxwa

TCKVOV
.
56

62
xpaXfio^
\j/rjXa(pdo}
.....
.... 48
7
reXo^, reXew. TfXetos, reX 1//1/X77, V^uxtAfos = 54, 55
3, 27
T^pas 45
43 aj5?5 48
374 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS«

I.

Some groups of Verbs in ordinary use, with their related Substantives.

1. To Be, Exist, Become.

dy,i is the ordinary verb of existence ; tcirdpxw implies essential or original con-
dition (Phil. ii. 6), and so is directly contrasted with yivo\i.ai, to become (James i. 22).
See further, Acts xvii. 24 ; Heb. xi. 6.

2. To Do, to Make.
iroveo) seems to denote more sustained effort than irpdco-o), whence the frequent use
of the former for u-cll-doing, the latter for ill-doing. For other senses of irpaaao}, see

Eph. vi. 21 ; Luke iii. 13 (this last compared with Trote'w in Luke xii. 33, xix. 18).

3. To Will, to Desire.
PovXopiai denotes the will rather on " to choose ;" Oe'Xw, will
its intellectual side,

with intent and power to perform. So the latter

used of arbitrary (Li:ke iv. 6) or is

absolute I Rom. ix. 18) authority, the former of determinations where the wisdom and
justice are apparent (Luke x. 22, xxii. 42). Thus, PovX'q is counsel ; 6€XT](jLa, will ;
P3v\T]|ia, plan (only in Acts xxvii. 43 Rom. ix. 19). ^o^Xofiai is also used in
;

recommendations backed by reason (i Tim. ii. 8, v. 14). For a striking instance of

distinction between the two verbs, compare Mark xv. 9, 12, with verse 15, So
Philemon 13, 14. [jl^XXo) indicates futurity, as the result of predetermination, or of
some act or event, "is to be," "is going to," Matt. iii. 7, xi. 14; Luke vii. 2 ;

Heb. i. 14. So in the phrase to. fieWovra, the things to comi (Col, ii. 17),

4. To Know.
ot8a is properly a perfect, " I have seen," and implies the knovdedge which conies
from without, objective knowledge -yivwo-Kw, "I learn," in any way, expresses the
;

knowledge as existing in the mind, subjective knowledge. Hence, when knowledge

involves experience, yivooaKU} always used (Eph. iii. 19 ; Phil. iii. 10 i John ii.,
is ;

iii., iv.) ; eTrio-Taiiai (an old dialectic form of the middle of icplaT-qixi), "to set (the
mind) upon," may either mean simply to be aware of, as in Acts x. 28; xviii. 25,
or to understand (Mark xiv. 68). The distinction between ot5a and tiriaTafiat
may be noted in Jude 10 that between yivib(XKco and iiriffTa/xaL in Acts xix. 15.
;

5. To See.
pXeiro) denotes the act of seeing, and is referred to the organ ; opdw {6\f/oiJ.ai, eWov)
is referred to the thing seen, whether in itself (objectively) or in regard to its im-
pression on the mind (subjectively). The former verb, therefore, may be used
without an expressed object (as Matt. xiii. 13). Both verbs are applied to mental
vision, the former implying greater vividness (Heb. ii. 8, 9). With /xt}, they have
the sense beware ; generally, however, /SX^ttw is used, occasionally with dtro. In
 —

NEW TE3TAMENT SYNONYMS. 375

accordance with the distinction above mentioned, 5pa|ia is a vision; ^\i\i\ia, the
exercise of the faculty of sight; to. ^Xeiro/xeva^ the things seen (2 Cor. iv. 18), i.e., on
which the faculty of immediate discernment is exercised to 6par6v, the visible (Col. ;

i. 16), i.e., in itself considered. Tittmann distinguishes opdu and its derivatives
from eldov, in that the former is objective, and the latter subjective,
being a bxpo/xac

middle term. Compare opa/xa, etSoj, 6^is. It is doubtful, however, if this distinction
can be maintained in the use of the verbs. 6edo)iai (referred to the subject) and
Qewpita (referred to the object) are to look at purposely, or attentively to gaze upon
(Matt. vi. I, xi. 7 John xii. 45 Acts vii. 56).
; ;

6. To Appear.
" expresses the subjective mental estimate or opinion about a matter which
Zok4<o
men it, which may be right (Acts xv. 28
form, their 8<J|a concerning i Cor. iv.
9, ;

vii. 40), but which may be wrong, involving, as it always does, the possibility
of error (Matt. vi. 7 Mark vi. 49 John xvi. 2 Acts xxvii. 13) " <|)aivo|iai
; ; ; ;

expresses how a matter phenomenally shows and presents itself, with no necessary
*
'

assumption of any beholder at all." Trench. This "phenomenon " may represent
a reality (Matt. ii. 7 ; Phil. ii. 15, "appear," not " shine ") or a mere show (Matt,
xxiii. 27, 28).

7. To Touch.
&irTO(Jiai (middle of otttw, to kindle) is the usual word ; 9i-y7dvft) denotes a lighter
touch (compare the two in Col. ii. 21, where, as Archbishop Trench observes, the
order of our translation should be reversed [so R.V.J and see Heb. xi. 28) x)/T]Xa<|>do) ; ;

is to feel (" to feel after," Acts xvii. 27), to handle. Pres. part, palpable, material
(Heb. xii. 18).

8. To Speak, Say.
XoXcb) is simply to speak, to employ the organ of utterance ; Xc'-yw is referred to
the sentiment of what is spoken (compare ^Xeirco and opdoj above) <|>iip.C, pew, ep«, ;

etirov to the words ; pi](ia is a word, in itself considered ; Xd-yos, a spoken 2vord, with
reference generally to that which is in the speaker's mind ; ?iros is only found (Heb.
vii. 9) in the phrase ws ^ttos Both Xeyw and etirou are used for
direlv, so to sjieak.
command; as in the formula (Sermon on the Mount) ^70; 5e Xeyui vixiv. See also
Matt. iv. 3.

9. To Ask.
aiT€w is to ask for something, to beg, pray ; Ipwrdw, to question, to ask in general,
specifically " In that day ye shall ask me no questions ...whatsoever ye shall ask of
:

the Father in my name." Observe, ipuTaw is elsewhere used of Christ's prayers to

the Father (John xvii. 9, 15, 20), never of ours. Compare the two in John xvi, 23,
and in i John v. 16, iruv6dvo)jiai, to ask for information, to inquire.

10. To Come.
Ipxofiai denotes the act, " I am coming " ¥^K<l), the result, " ; I am come." John
viii. 42 : "I came from God, and I am here." See also Heb. x. 9.
 376 NE^V TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.

11. To Care.
<|>pov6a), 4)povTCt«, implies solicitude (Phil. iv. lo ; Titus iii, 8); [isXcraw (and
impers. jie'Xci), solicitude expressed in forethought, or the emplo3mient of means to the
desired result; jiepijivdw, anxious or distracting care. So the substantive \iipi\Lva.
See especially i Peter v. 7. <nrovZr\ (" haste ") is earnestness, dilif/cncc, generally.

12. Ought.
duty or necessity as existing in the thing itself, often used
8€i (impers.) denotes the
for the ought arising from prophecy (Luke xxiv, 26, 46) 6(j>€CX(u refers to the obli- ;

gation as actually imjjosed (John xiii. 14) XP'H (only once in the New Testament,
;

James iii. 10) is connected with xp<^ofiai, and originally differs from dei as the rule of
utility differs from that of abstract right {dec would express Butler's philosophy of
morals ; x/377, Paley's).

13. To Accomplish, Tulfil, Perfect.

riXos expresses the end of a course or scries so rtkioi, to rectch the end ; rcXcioo),
:

to complete ; accomplishment of a plan or purpose, to fulfil ;

TrXT]pdw denotes the
TeXeio gives the finishing stroke (John xix. 30); TrX^jpowadds the completing element:
the former brings the topstone, the latter the keystone. Hence they are often
interchangeable. Compare Acts xx. 24, where the prominent thought is the com-
pleteness of the Apostle's life-work, with 2 Tim. iv. 7, where to this is superadded
the thought of its approaching close. The fulfilment of prophecy is expressed by
irXrjpoo), except John xix. 28, Avhich has TeXeiooj. irXTJp«|i,a is generally active, that
which brings completeness, fulness, to anything (Matt. ix. 16 ; i Cor. x. 26) ; but
may be used passively, that which is filled (Eph. i. 23), or abstractedly, fulness
(Col. ii. 9). .

14. To Teach, Instruct.

SiSdo-Ku is to teach generally ; Karrixew, strictly to teach by word of mouth (Luke

i. 4 ; Rom. ii. 18). Hence catechesis, catechise, of careful, repeated oral instruction

jjLa0T]T€v« is (actively) to make, or (intransitively) to be a disciple, in the former

sense distinguished from didder kio in Matt. x!s.viii. 19. TraiSeiifa) involves the notion of
discipliiu, and is often to be rendered chasten.

15. To Preach.
KT]pv(r(rw is to p>voclaim, as a herald ; K^p\ry)j.a, the proclamation made evayv^Xiov ;

and cvayycXCt" add the further notion of glad tidings ; KaTayY^XXw refers simply to
che delivery of the message. Found with evayyeXl^u), Acts xv. 35, 36 with Krjpvaa-u}, ;

Phil. i. 15, 16. XaXt'w, sometimes rendered preach, means simply to talk (see 8),
and 8taX€'70}iai (Acts xx. 7, 9) implies conference ; '7rpo<j)T]T€va), to forth-tell, and
7rpo4>TlTTis, are used for preachers under the New Testament (Eph. iv. 11 i Cor. ;

\iv. i), as for the prophets of the Old, both being set to declare the Divine will

\j.6.vTL'i, a soothsayer, is of heathen use, and not found in the New Testament,
fjiavTejoiJi'n occurring only Acts xvi. 16. (See Trench.)
 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 377

16. To Peed (a flock).

TToi'xaCvo) is in general to exercise the care of a iroi^i-qv, to tetid the flock (Acts
XX. 28), hence to rule, govern (Matt. ii. 6 ; Rev. ii. 27) ; Poo-km refers to the special
function of providing food, to pasture (Luke xv. 15). Both are included in our
Lord's charge to St. Peter (John xxi. 15-17).

17. To Wash, Bathe.

ttXvvo) is to wash things, as garments, etc. ; XovW; to wash the ^oholc body, "to
bathe ;
" viirrw, to wash a j^^H of the body. See John xiii. 10 ; and remarks by
Archbisho]) Trench.

18. To Anoint.
Xpiw denotes official anointing, as of a king or priest, hence Xpi(7r6s : aX€(<{>(i),

anointing for festal purposes (Luke vii. 46), for health (James v. 14), or for embalm-
ment (Mark xvi. i).

19. Love, to Love.

aYaTrdo) denotes the love of esteem or of kindness, love to character ("diligo") ;

d-yaTni, its cognate substantive, "is a word born within the bosom of revealed reli-
gion. It occurs in the LXX., but there is no example of its use in any heathen
writer whatever ; the utmost they attained to here was (piXavdpuTria and <pi\ade\<pia,
and the indeed, never in any sense but as the love between brethren in blood."
last,
— Trench. Wherever "charity" occurs in the A.V., the original is dydirv, but it
is more generally and better translated "love" (R.V.). <j>iX€a) expresses the loye of

the feelings, instinctive, warm affection ("amo"). The force of tlie two verbs is
very beautifully illustrated in John xxi. 15-17.

20. To Weep.
KXafw is the verb generally employed; SaKptiw, "to shed tears," is found Imt
once, John xi. 35 : "Jesus wept." In Matt, ii. 18, Opijvos W. H.(reading doubtful ;

and R.V. omit), K\avd/j.6s, odvpfjLos, form a climax, "(lamentation,) weeping, and
mourning."

II.

Some important words, chiefly Adjectives and Substantives, expressive

of moral quality.

21. Good.
d^aO^s is good ; SCKaios, right. In the former, the notion of beneficence prevails,
in the latter that of justice. So with d-yaGwo-vvi], SiKatoo-uvt]. Still, the two are
not opposed. In Rom. vii. 12 both are predicated of the Divine law. In Rom. v. 7
the ayadb^ is one of the 5t/catoi (as i)roved by the article and by yap) in Matt, vi, i, ;
378 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.

almsgiving, prayers, and religious fasting.

seq,, 8cKaLoa-{'vrj^ refers to Kak6s contains
the notion oi giving pleasure, " beautiful," " fair," " honourable." It may be inter
changed with dyadds (compare, e.g., i Tim. i. 19 with Heb. xiii. 18), or combined
with it, as Luke viii. 15. (So in classic Greek, KaXoKayados predicates the highest
excellence in morals and manners.) xP'n°"''05, good, gentle (Matt. xi. 30 i Cor. ;

XV. 33), and xP1^'»'oti1S> goodness, gentleness, benignity, are connected with xpcioytiat,
XP'h- The New Testament comparative of dyadb^ is usually KpcCa-o-cDv, Kpeirruv, really
akin to Kparoi, force, and betokening the time when strength and goodness were
too closely identified. (Compare dper-q, "virtue," really courage, found only in the
New Testament, Phil. iv. 8 i Pet. ii. 9, where see 47 2 Pet. i. 3, 5.) PeXriov,
; ;

as an adverb, is found 2 Tim. i. 18.

22. Evil, Bad.

KaKos is bad, generically, including every form of evil, physical and moral. So
KaK^a, badness, especially in its forms of meanness, cowardice, malice; &8i,ko$, dSiK^a
(opposed to diKuio'i, SiKaLoaiJvr]), wrong, irovqpds expresses the more active form
of evil, malignant (so 6 vovrjpds, not 6 KaKbs, for the Evil one, Satan) ; irovrjpCa,

malignity ; <)>avXos is worthless, "good for nothing " like the old Eng. " naughty,''
from "naught."
23. Holy.
80-ios is holy, intrinsically; referred once to the Divine purposes (Acts xiii. 34,
from Isa. Iv. 3), generally to interior purity predicated both of God and of men ;

("pious") &710S, a^vos, are both derived from a root denoting separation, the
;

former, when applied to men, expressing consecration to God (see I Pet. ii. 5, 9),
the latter, purity, chastity ; Upds, very infrequently (except in its neuter substan-
tival form, iepbv, on which see 35), is " dedicated to God," and is only used in the
New Testament of things ; Kadapds, literally clean, free from impure admixture.

24. True.
dXtjOirjs is "true" morally, and is applied to persons or to declarations dXi]Oivds ;

is "genuine," "real." The former epithet, for instance, applied to God, denotes
his attribute of faithfulness (John iii. 33) ; the latter expresses the reality of his
Godhead, as distinguished from false deities (John xvii. 3). The use of dXrjdivos in
the Revelation is an exception to this rule (see xix. 9, 11). The substantive dXi^dcCa
includes the idea of both adjectives, though generally correspondent with the former.

25. Old.
TraXaids "old," as having existed long; dpxatos, "old,"«^ having existed
is

formerly: dpxalos fxadr}Trjs (Acts xxi. 16), one of the original disciples. Compare
2 Pet. ii. 5 liev. xii. 9, xx. 2.
;
iraXaids sometimes connotes the idea of decrepitude,
decay (opposed to Katj/6s, see 26), Matt. ix. 16 ; i Cor. v. 7, 8 ; and for the verb,

Heb. viii. 13.

Undoubtedly the true reading.

 — — ;

KEW TESTAMENT SYXONYMS. 379

26. New.
vios is new in reference to time, having recently come into existence (young)
Kttivos, new (fresh) in reference to qimlity, different in kind. (See Trench on the
words.) So p^a diadriKij (Heb. xii. 24) is "a covenant recently given ;
" Kaiv-rj oiad-qKr}

(Heb. ix. 15), "a

covenant new in character ;" dvaveou (Eph. iv, 23), to renew in
youth ; dpaKuivdw (Col. iii. 10), to renew in character and spirit. So vtoTtys, youth ;
KaivoTTjs, newness, freshness.

27. Perfect.
TcXctos, " means that Avhich has attained the
full-gi-own, " applied to character,
moral tc'Xos —manhood " however it may be true that having reached
in Christ ;

this, other and higher ends will open out before him, to have Christ formed in him
more and more." Trench. The attainment of their highest end is expressed by the
perfect rereXetoj/xat (Phil. iii. 12). oXoKX-qpos is complete in parts, no Christian
grace lacking oXotc'Xtis denotes matm'ity in each separate element of character
;

(I Thess. V. 23).

28. Blessed.
Two different adjectives are translated blessed : fiaKapios, liap2nj, as in the Beati-
tudes, and notably i Tim. i. ii, vi. 15 ; and cvXoyqTos, verbal adjective of the verb
to bless (Mark xiv. 61 Rom. ; i. 25).

29. Void, Vain, Futile.

Kcvds, literally empty, refers to the contents ;
p.dTaios, p)'^^''"poselcss, to the result.
See the two in i "your faith is Kev-q there is no substance in it
Cor. xv. 14, 17 : —
and fxaraia, leads to no happy issue." The latter adjective is also employed (from
the LXX.) fov false, as in the "l}i.ng vanities" of heathendom (Acts xiv. 15).

30. Poor.
ire'vTis (only in 2 Cor. ix. 9) may refer to the poverty of scanty livelihood ; irTwx.os
implies that of utter destitution. See Matt. v. 3, xi. 5.

31. Patience.
viroixov^ {vTro/xevu}) denotes not only the passive, but the active \drtue of endurance,
and may often be rendered persistence, continuance (Luke viii. 15 Heb. xii. i ; ;

James v. 11); |iaKpo6v(i.ia (fxaKpodiifxew) seems always to involve the notion of

tolerance, "long-suffering, bearing with," as God with sinners; dvox.ir| (only in
Rom. ii. 4, iii. 25) is forbearance, the result and expression of the Divine fjUKpodv/jua.

32. Anger.
Ovfjids is the impulse and passion ; dpYirj, the habit and settled pm-pose of ^VTath.
Both (as in Rom. ii. 8) are applied to the anger of God against sinners the latter, ;

however, being the usual word. Both are ranked among the sins of men (as Eph.
iv. 31). Still, there may possibly be a righteous human anger (Eph. iv. 26 compare ;

Mark iii. 5), while the exasperation and bitterness of anger, Trapofyyia/iws, is utterly
forbidden.
380 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
33. Fear.
<f><$Pos, ({>oPeo)iai, are words in themselves indifferent, the fear being sinful, or
reverent and holy, according to the particular reference
but SdXos, 8€i\ia, are ;

always bad and base, "cowardly, cowardice;" €vXdp£ia, €vXap€0)iai, denote appre-
hension generally (see Acts xxiii. lo), but chiefly pious fear (Heb. xii. 28, and
perhaps v. 7).

III.

Some words of theological or ecclesiastical meaning.

34. Deity.
0€iort]S (Rom. i. 20), Deity, in an abstract sense (Gottlichheit) ; ©eorris (Col.
ii. 9), Deity, personally (Gottheit). See Tittmann.

35. Temple.
Upov, the whole sacred enclosure (Matt. xxvi. 55 ; John ii. 14) vaos, the shrine ;

itself, the Holy place, and Holy of Holies (Matt, xxvii. 51 ; John ii. 19; Acts vii.
48 ; I Cor. iii. 16).

38. To Worship.
irpocrKweo) is the generic Avord (primarily expressive of theoc^ "to faAvn," from
k6i>}v) of homage paid to God, to Christ, and (in the Revelation) to the "dragon"
and the "beast;" (r€po|xai (or£pdto|Jiai), of the religious feeling, "to cherish, or to pay
devotion;" XaTptvw, of Divine worship, Phil. iii. 3 (idolatrous in Acts vii. 42);
XeiTovpYcco, of solemn, stated observance. So XeiTovpyia, as Luke i. 23 XeiTovpyiKd^, ;

Heb. i. 14 Xetrovpyos, Heb. viii. 2. But these last words may also apply to the
;

ministry of kindness between fellow- Christians as diaKOPeio, but in a more exalted ;

sense. See 60.

37. Altar, Sacrifice.
Ovo-iao-TTJpiov is the general word, properly —
an adjective that on which sacrifices
are offered ;
pcD|jLds, the altar -stnicture (pvig., " a raised place"), is only found once,
of a heathen altar. Acts xvii. 23 ; 0v<ria is a sacrifice offered by a priest (tepei5s), eitherj
expiatory, in which sense Christ alone is priest, or eucharistic, in which all Christians

are priests alike (i Pet. ii. 5) ; '7rpo(r<|)opd is any offering to God, priestly or otherwise*
In Eph. V. 2 some refer Trpo<r<popdv to Christ's consecrated life, dv<nav to his atoning
death.
38. Prayer, to Pray.
ivyj\ is a prayer (James v. 15) or a vow (Acts xviii. 18) ; ci^x^K-^^^' ^^ P^'^-Yj
or toj
wish strongly (Rom. ix. 3) ; irpoo-evxoiiai, Trpocrevx'nj are restricted to }>rayei' to God,[
the latter denoting sometimes a i)lace of prayer, a building below the rank of
synagogue, "proseucha" (Acts xvi. 13) 8£'T]<ris is in general the expression of lucd,^
;

any urgent request, "supplication." For atT^w, epwrdu}, see 9 al'TT^fia is any par- ;

ticular request ; in phir., the individual ])etitions in the irpoaevxH- See Phil. iv. 6,j
 — ;

NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 381

39. Sin, to Sin.

" Sin," says Archbishop Trench, " may be contemplated as the missing of a mark
or aim it is then djiapria or a{idpTT][ia (d(xapTdv«) the overpassing or transgress-
; :

ing of a line ; it is then irapaPao-is (^irapapaivw) : the disobedience to a voice ; in

which case it is irapaKoi^ (irapaKOvw) : the falling where one should have stood
upright; this will be irapdTrrwjia ignorance of what one ought to have known this
: ;

Avill be d-yvoTina (Heb. diminishing of that which should have been rendered
ix. 7) :

in full measure which is TJTTT)p.a non-observance of a law which is dvop.Ca or

; :
;

7rapavop.ia a discord and tnen it is TrX-r^iiixcXeia and in other ways almost out of
: ; :

number." Note also 64)€iXT]}ia, in the Lord's Prayer (Matt. vi. 12), debt to Divine
justice. Luke has d/uaprt'a (xi. 4).

40. Repentance, to Repent.

[xcrdvoia, iicravoeo), express a change of mind, and hence of the whole life ;

|X€Taji.€Xo|iai, a change of feeling, "to

Godly sorrow
regret." is said to work
fjierdvoLav ajxerafxeX-qTov , "repentance that leads to no remorse" (2 Cor. vii. 10).
Esau found no place of repentance, /xeravoias (Heb. xii. 17), i.e., of changing his
father's mind with respect to the blessing. See Dr. Campbell's Dissertation, in his
"Gospels."
41. Grace, Mercy.
xdpis is free favour, in general, specially of the Divine favour as extended to the
sinful ; <i\ios is mercy, to the miserahle (i Tim. i. 2). The difference between eXcos
and olKTip|j.6s is that, in the latter, pity is the prominent idea ; in the former,

kindness. For the verbs, see Rom. ix. 15.

42. Forgiveness.
d(|>e(ris, d(j>Li]|ii, denote the "remission" of sins, forgiveness, to its full extent,
as promised in the Gospel found only Rom. iii. 25, literally, passiiuj-hy,
; irdpco-is,
" prpetermission," refers rather to the simple withholding of punishment deserved, a
parallel being found in Acts xvii. 30 {inrepiduv).

43. Redemption.
"d-yopd^w, buy, as in a market-place, for a certain price (ti^t?) Xvrpdw, effect ;

deliverance by the payment of ransom and exertion of power Xilrpov is the price ;

paid for releasing any one from captivity, punishment, or death {Xvco, loose), the
buying back by paying the price of what had been sold, or the redeeming what had
been devoted by substituting something in its place. So dvTiXvrpov, with the
further idea "in room of," denoting exchange, the price paid for procuring the
liberation of another by ransom or forfeit Xtirpcoo-is, diroXijTp&xris, the process of ;

deliverance iXa(r|ids, l^tXa<r|i6s, are the same as Xijrpov, with the leading idea of
;

propitiation." Webster. See the use of iXdo-Kojiai in the publican's prayer, Luke
xviii. 13; iXa<rTT|piov, properly an adjective, "propitiatory" of the mercy-seat, in
LXX. and Heb. ix. 5 ; of Christ's sacrifice, Rom. iii. 25 ; ir€pi'iroie'o{iai, ircpiiroCTio-ts,
denote acquirements for one's self, purchase, generally (Acts xx. 28 ; i Fet. ii.
9
Eph. i. 14).
382 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
44. Piety, Religion.
€V(r€pT]S, €v(r€p€ia, denote worsliip or piety righthj directed, in human relations as
well as Divine Scoo-cPtjs, Geoo-c'Ptta, worship directed towards God; cvXapTjS, cvXdpcia,
;

denote the devoutness springing from godly fear; 0pfjo-Kos, OpTjo-KcCa (James i. 26, 27
Acts xxvi. 5 ; Col. ii. 18, only), refer to external worship, religious service ;

(Acts xvii. 22), and 8ei(ri8ai|iovia (Acts xxv. 19), may have a favourable
8ei(ri8aC|ia)v

or unfavourable meaning, " religious" or " superstitious," literally, " devoted to the
fear of deities."

45. Miracle, Sign, "Wonder.

8vva|xis (generally in plur.), applied to Christ's miracles, is a forth-putting of
Divine power ; rcpas is a prodigy, a wonderful act j
(rt^ji-ciov, a sign, authenticating
Christ's mission, and symbolising heavenly truths (Acts ii. 22).

46. Parable.
irapaPoXr), a detailed comparison, "parable," as usually understood; ircLpoi(i.Ca

(literally, a wayside discourse), " a proverb, " John xvi. 25, 29 ; "a comparison,"
2 Pet. ii. 22 John x. 6.
;

47. Praise, to Praise.

alveo), atvos (alVeo-ts), are used only of praise offered to God ; ciraivc'cj, ^iraivos, of
praise, approbation generally where rendered praise (John ix. 24, xii. 43
; 86|a, ;

1 Pet. iv. 11), denotes the recognition of character, " the glory." In i Pet. ii. 9 the
word is d/oerds, virtues ; jic-yaXviva), to magnify, is a yet more exalted word (Luke i. 46).

48. Psalm, Hymn*-

t);aXp.6s is probably used restrictively of the Psalms of the older Scriptures {;)jlvos ;

(not often used, probably from its associations with heathenism) is an ode ot praise to

God : "A psalm might be a de 2'>'rofundis ; a hymn must always be more or less of a
'magnificat.'' — Trench. a>8TJ is a song that might be either psalm or hymn, or a yet
more general expression of Christian feeling (Eph. v. 19 ; Col. iii. 16).

49. Ordinance.
This word is adopted as the rendering of 86-Y|ia, a thing decreed ( Eph. ii. 15; Col.
ii. 14 ; see also Col. ii. 20) ; 8iKai(o|j.a, that which it is right to observe (Heb.
ix. I, 10) ; 8iaTa-YTJ, appointment (Rom. xiii. 2) ; irapd8oo-is (i Cor. xi. 2 ; R.V.,
tradition), instruction or injunction given, elsewhere translated tradition (as 2 Thess.
ii. 15) ; and ktio-is, creation, creature (i Pet. ii. 13). As distinguished from
8iKanlj/xaTa, the tvroXaC are moral precepts (Luke i. 6).

50. Hebrew, Israelite, Jew, Greek, Hellenist.

'EPpaios denotes the Hebrew-speaking Jewish community 'EXXi]vi<rTTJs being a ;

Greek-speaking Jew. The latter word is rendered "Grecian" in the A. V., " Grecian
Jew" in the R.V., in distinction from "EXXrjv, "Greek," or Gentile (Acts vi. i,
ix. 29 ; in Acts xi, 20 the reading should probably he"E\\r]vas [R. V.], though W. H.
 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 383

Tea.d'E\\Tjvca-Tds). *Iov8aios, Jew, originally referred to the tribe of JuJali alone,

had come in the New Testament times to designate the whole people ; while
T<rpai]XCT»is is always a term of honour, "one of the chosen race."

51. Anathema.
dvd6-qp.a, a thing devoted in honour of God (Luke xxi. 5) ; avadi\i.a (originally the
same word), a thing devoted to destruction, "accursed." So the verb avaQi\ia.riX,<i>.

See Acts xxiii. 14. The other occurrences of dvdde/xa are Rom. ix. 3 ; i Cor. xii. 3,

xvi. 22 ; Gal. i. 8, 9.

52. Hell, Hades.

aSris (always rendered "Hades"
is the unseen world, the place of the
in R.V.)
departed, generally (compare Acts ii. 27) by metonymy for death
Luke xvi, 23 ; ;

and destruction (Matt. xi. 23) once only rendered "gi-ave," i Cor. xv. 55 (where the
;

R.V. reads ddvare with W. H.); "the gates of Hades" are the powers of destruction
(Matt. xvi. 18) 7€€vva (Heb. = "Valley of Hinnom " [R.V. always hell^ Avith Gehenna
;

in marg., except Jas. iii. 6]) is the abode of the lost (Matt. v. 22, 29, 30, x. 28,
xviii. 9, xxiii. 15, 33 Mark ix. 43, 45 ; Luke xii. 5 ; James iii. 6, only). See
;

Dr. Campbell's Dissertation, in his " Gospels."

63. Devil, Demon.

The almost uniform translation of SaCjiuv, Saifioviov, by "devil " is unfortunate.
The word (most usual New
Testament in the second or diminutive form)
in the
classically denotes a subordinate divinity, supernatural being. There were /caico-
Saifioves and dyadoSaifioves. In Scripture the word always has its evil sense, and
the demon of R.V. marg. might well have been inserted in the text. 6 SidpoXos
(Heb., from Saraf, Haravd^) is the one arch-spirit of evil. " the devil." In its sense
of calumniator, the word is found (plur. ) i Tim. iiL 11; 2 Tim. iii. 3 Titus ii. 3. ;

IV.

Some common words, chiefly Substantives, which present interesting

points of distinction.

54. Life, Death.

twTJ is life in its principle^ life intrinsic ; P^os, life in its manifestations, life

extrinsic. Hence the former is used especially for life sj)iritual and immortal ; the
latter may denote the duration or manner of life, livelihood. »Jn;X'^ ^^ ^^^^ principle
of animal life," the soul." (See the next article.) Odvaros is death, opposed to ^(a-q ;

V€Kp6s, dead; Ovtitos, mortal. The verbs Oavaroo) (Rom. viii. 13), vcKpoa> (Col.
iii. 5), are both translated mortify ; the former, perhaps, referring rather to the statCy
"death to sin," the latter to the deed, "slay them."
384 NEW TESTAMENT SYl^ONYMS.

55. Soul, Mind, Spirit.

<|/vxT], soul or life, is common to man with the irrational animals (Rev. viii. 9),

hence 5c//'( Matt. xvi. 25, 26), perso7i [Rev. xviii, 13), often the soul as the sqat of
passion or desire, the point of contact between man's bodily and spiritual nature ;

\J/x>Xik6s, "natural" (i Cor. ii. 14, xv. 44, 46 ; James iii. 15 ; Jude 19, only) ; a-(!»\ia.

and rpvxv are jointly elements of what is often called o-dp|, the lower, fleshly nature.
So o-apKiKJS> and the grosser o-dpKivos, as i Cor. iii. i, 3 (see § 142 c, note). But
awfjLa is sometimes used ior jJcr son, Rom. xii. i, " your bodies," i.e., the instruments
or organs of your entire nature. Trv€v[xa, spirit, man's highest nature, the point of
contact between the human and the Divine ; irv^viJiaTiKos, spiritual, as i Cor.
ii. 13, 15 ; <|)p^v€S (only in i Cor. xiv. 20), the understanding ; vovs, the mind,
percipient and intelligent, the reason ; KapSia, the heart, is used not only for the
seat of the emotions, but for that of the intellectual faculties, at KapSiai, /cat to,
vo-jfiara (Phil. iv. 7), "thought at its source and in its manifestations;" Sidvout,
the understanding, as exercised, for good or evil, Eph. ii. 3 ; Matt. xxii. 37.

56. Form, Fashion, Likeness.

cISos is a.pj)earance, that may or may not have a basis in reality ; cUScoXov, a mere
appearance, "an idol ;" )iop4>T|, the/or?^i as indicative of the interior nature ; fryj\\La,f

the form, externally regarded, " the figure, fashion" (see Phil. ii. 6, 7, 8) eiKwv ;

denotes the exact representation, " image ;" (TK^a, the shadowy resemblance (Heb.
X. i) \apo.KTi\p, the hnprcss, as enstamped (Heb. i. 3).
;
Compare xdpct7M«>" stamp,
engraving."

57. Power.
8vva(i.is, used also of miracles (see 45), inherent power, might ; c^ovo-ia, power
employed, authority ; Icrxvis, strength, as an endowment (so lax^^i to be strong,
prevail, more emphatic than bvvaixaC) ; Kpdros, strength as exerted, "force."

58. World.
Koor^ios, the scheme of material things, the world, often in opposition to the
kingdom of heaven aitov has ; reference primarily to duration (probably derived not
from ad ibv, but from at)fii, to breathe; hence life, duration), adj., alwvios, belonging
to the alivv : dtSios is from dei, and means sim2)ly everlasting (only found Rom. i. 20;
Jude 6) ; aiQves (Heb. i. 2), "the
A.V. and R.V., "the worlds," in
ages," or, as
respect to their successive ages olKOvjit'vTj, the earth as inhabited, the world of men.
:

For Koa/xos and oiKovfjiivr}, interchangeable, compare Matt. iv. 8 with Luke iv. 5.

69. Master.
Kvpios expresses lordship in general ownership (correlative with SouXos);
; Sco-rroTt]?,

SiSdo-KaXos (correlative with In James iii. i the meaning seems

/jLad-rjrrjs) is teacher.
to be censors ; €iri(rTdTTis (only in Luke), literally, superinteiulent, is the Greek ^

rendering of the Hebrew pa^pf, found in its original form in iMatt., i\Iark, John.
 '

NEW TESTAMENT SYNO^'YMS. 385

60. Servant.
SovXos, slave, is the lowest word in the scale of servitude {dovXoco, to enslave^

8ov\€6u}, to serve, as a slave); {nrfipeTiis, "under-rower.' expresses in general sub-

servience to another's will (so vwripeTeu}) ; Siolkovos, diaKovia, diaKoveoj, imply service,
ministry, in every form ; 0€pdiT«v, is attendant (only in Heb. iii. 5) ; Gcpairevw
Oepaireia have special reference to healing ; oIk€tt]s, a household servant, Acts x. 7

(so TraTs, see 62).

61. Family, Tribe, House.
4>vXi] is a tribe, as of Israel ; irarpid, family, in the wider sense, descendants of
o.

a common ancestor (only in Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25 Eph. iii. 15 in A.V. a
; ;

different rendering each time, R.Y. consistently /am^/^/) ; oIkos, oiKia, both mean
household, the former referring to the inmates, the latter to the building and that
which it contains (8a>|ia always in the New Testament of the building, with 4x1,
**
house-top.")
62. Child, Infant.
T€Kvov, child by natural descent (from tiktu) ; irais, a boy or girl, a child in legal
relation, also a servant (Luke xv, 26 ; Matt. xii. 18 ; Acts iv. 27, 30) ; iralSiov, a
young child ; Pp€'<j>os, a babe; v-^irtos (from vrj, negative, and elwov), infans, a child
in power and character.

63. Man.
dvOpwiros, a man, member of the human family (homo) ; dvT)p, a man in sex and
age (vir).

64. Time.
Xpjvos, time as duration ; Kaipos, a definite time, with reference to some act or
' '

crisis, opportunity.
'

65. Lamp, Light.

4>«s, light, generally ; <|>«o-nqp, luminary (Phil. ii. 15) ; Xv^vos, a lam2) (John
V. 35), (Xvxvta, a lampstand) Xafiirds, a torch (Matt. xxv.
; i ; Acts xx. 8) ; (jjeyyos,

light in its splendour, " radiance " (Matt, xxiv, 29).

66. Clothes.
ifiaTiov, raiment, generally, also an outer garment, opposed to xitwv, an inner
vest (Matt, v, 40) ; ifrQr\s, apparel, usually applied to what is ornate or splendid ;

2vSv|j,a, anything put on (Matt. iii. 4, vi. 28).

67. Crown.
crT€<j)avos, "a garland," a conqueror's or a festal crown ((rTe)j.(i.a, a sacrificial
garland, Acts xiv. 13) ; 8i.d8i]p.a, "a fillet," a royal crown (Rev. xii. 3, xiii. i,

xix. 12, onlyy.

68. Burden.
Pdpos denotes the pressure of a weight, which may be relieved or transferred (Gal.
vi. 2) ^opriov is specific, the " load " which each must bear for himself (ver. 5) ;
;

Yofios, the lading of a ship (Acts xxi. 3) ; ^^kos, the weight that encumbers (Heb^
xii. I).
C C
386 NEW TESTAMENT S^'^^OI^ I'MS.

69. Basket.
K6(f>ivos, a travelling basket (Matt. xiv. 20) : o-irvpis, a large hamper used for
storage (Matt. xv. t,"] ; Acts ix. 25). The two miracles of feeding are distinguished
in all the accounts by the diflferent word used for basket in each (see Matt,
xvi. 9, 10),

70. Net.
S^KTvov, a net, in general ; dfi.<}>ipXTi<rTpov, a fishing-net flung from the hand
(Matt. iv. 18 ; Mark i. 16) ; o-a^iivTi (Matt. xiii. 47), a large draw-net, "seine."

71. Gate, Door.

6vpa, a door (janua) : ttvXt], a gate (porta) ; iruXwv, a great gate, an outer gate, a
porch.

72. Fold, Flock.

o.vKr\ is fold ; iroi(iVT] (dim. ttoiuviov) is flock. The promise in John x. 16 is, that
there shall be " oneflock and one shepherd" (R.V.), not " onefold,'' as A.V.

73. People.
Four words are so translated : Xaos, people, collectively, with a general reference
to the Jews as the people of God ; ^9vos, nation (plur. , ^dvr], Gentiles) ; Stj^ios, people,
as a municipality ; 6xXos, "irregular crowd, mob."

74. Thief.
KX^irrqs, "thief," one by fraud (liSbt. far) \r\<rrr\ij " robber." one who
who steals ;

steals by violence (Lat. latro). The crucified malefactor and Barabbas probably
belonged to the hordes of banditti which then ravaged the land.

75. Stone.
ircVpa, a rock (Ilerpos, the same word, only with masc. termination to make it a.

proper name), Lat. saxam ; XC6os, a stone, detached or hewn, Lat. lapis.

76. Other.
dXXos denotes numerical, ^repos generic distinction, " diflferent." See Gal. i. 6, 7,
" another (e'repof) gospel which is not another (ctXXo)." There may be various
to
kinds of so-called gospels, but there is really no other than that which the apostle
preached.
VOCABULAEY.
In the following Vocabulary, the Declension of Siibstantwef^ is marked
by the subjoined Genitive termination ; theu* Gender, by the Article.

Of Adjectives, the Feminine and Xeuter forms are given ; in those of

two terminations, the Neuter.

To Verbs, the Future endings, and, where, necessary, other forms, have

been generally appended.

The Hyphen has been freely used, to indicate the formation, not only

of synthetic, but of parathetic compounds. (See §§ 146-148.) For further

etymological details, a larger Lexicon must be consulted.

The Scripture Refei^ences are introduced as fully as space would permit.

In the case of words of frequent occurrence the references are limited to

the illustration of diverse or exceptional usage. But wherever possible,

all the passages are quoted where the word is to be found, and this

is indicated by an asterisk. The Vocabulary thus partially (but only

partially) serves the purpose of a Greek Testament Concordance.

The Vocabulary is founded upon the Received Text, but indication is

given of various readings, orthography, etc., adopted by Westcott and

Hort. For words that occur only in MSS. or in other critical editions,

the student is referred to Grimm's Clavis or to Bruder's Concordance.

 * ;

389

VOCABULARY.

A, a, dX(|>a, alpha; a, the first letter. aYaOds, 77, bv {Kpdacujv, KpaTCffTOs), good,
Numerally, a'=i a,=: looo. For ; intrinsically or beneficially used oi ;

a in composition, see § 147, h, c. both persons and things, to ayadbv,

Fig., TO A, or TO "AXcpa (W. H. ), the the Good, Matt. xix. 17 (W. H.) ; to.

first principleof all things; of the dyadd, goods, wealth, blessings.

Father, Rev. i, 8, xxi. 6 the Son, ; d'yaGwo-vvT], 77?, i], goodness.
13.*
xxii. aYaXXiacris, ews, i), exultation, gladness.
'Aapwv, 6 (Heb.), Aaron. d-yaXXidw, u), dcij}, to leap fur joy;
'ApaSSwv, 6 (Heb., "destruction"), hence, exult, rejoice; generally de-
Abaddon, Rev. ix. 11.* ponent. Followed by Xva (subj.),
d-PaprjS, h
^dpos), icithout weight ;
(cf. John viii. 56 eirl (dat.), Luke i. 47
; ;

hence, "tiot hurdensome, 2 Cor. xi. 9.* or ev (dat.), John v. 35.

'Appa,or 'A^/3d (W. H.), (Heb. in Chald. &-Ya|ios,adj. 0, 17, iLnmarried, i Cor. vii.*
iovm) Father ! only as an invocation, d'yavaKTCO), Co, rjaw, to be indignant, angry,
Mark xiv. 36 Rom. viii. 15 ;Gal. ; vexed. With irepl (gen.). Matt. xx. 24
iv. 6.* or 6tl, Luke xiii. 14.
';Ap€X, 6 (Heb.), Abel. d-yavaKTiiais, ews, 17, indignation, 2 Cor.
*Apta, 6 (Heb.), Abijah, the king, Matt, vii. II.*
i. 7 ; the priest, Luke i. 5. Q.ya'Ko.bi, Co, ri<T03, to love. Syn. 19.
*Apid6ap, 6 (Heb.), Abiathar, Mark ii. d-ydini, t}$, t], love. Syn. 19. Object
26.* with et's, €v, or genitive (§ 269). dydiraL
'AptXT]Wj, ^s, 17, Abilene, a district in (Jude 12; 2 Pet. ii. 13, R.V.), love-
the E. of Anti-Libanus, named from feasts.
Abila, its chief city, Luke iii. i.* d-yaTrqTds, 77, bv, beloved.
'ApiovS, (Heb.), Abiud, Matt. i. 13.* "A-yap, 7] (Heb.), Hagar, Gal. iv. 24, 25.*
'ABpad^, (Heb.), Abraham. dyyapcvo), (Toj (from the Persian), to im-
d-pvcrcros, ov, ij (originally adj. bottom- press into the public service hence, ;

less), abyss, Luke viii. 31 ; Rom. x. 7 ;

to compel. Matt. v. 41, xxvii. 32 ;

Rev. ix. I, 2, II, xi. 7, xvii. 8, xx. Mark xv. 21.*

I, 3-* dyyeiov, eiou, rd, vessel, utensil, Matt.
^ ,
" Agabus, Acts xi. 28, xxi. XXV. 4.*
A-yaPos, ov, 6,
10.* dyycXCa, as, 7^, message, I John i. 5
d'YaOo-ep'yed), cS (or dyadovpy^io), to do (W. H.), iii. II.*
good, I Tim. vi. 18 Acts xiv. 7
; dyycXos, 01^, 0, messenger ; spec, of

^
(W. H.).* God's messengers to men, angel. So
OYaOo-Troieo), €>, (i) to do good to, ace. of fallen spirits. "Angel
of a church"
of pers., Luke vi. 33 (2) to act ivcll. ;
(Rev. i. 20, ii., iii.), either messenger,
aYaBo-iroita, as, rj, iccll-doing, in sense or elder, or a symbolic representation
(2) of preceding, i Pet. iv. 19.* of the spirit, the genius of each church.
d'yaOo-iroids, ov, 6 (orig. adj.), well-doer, dy/os, ous, To^ vessel^ Matt. xiii. 48
I Pet. ii. 14.* (W. H.).*
390 VOCABULARY. \A.yt — a"Y«v

aye, adv. (see 070;), come now, go to, dYvwo-ia, as, 7), ignorance, spec, wilful
James iv. 13, v. i.* ignorance, i Cor. xv. 34 i Pet. ;

d^fX-r], 77s, T), a flock or herd. ii. 15.*

d-'Y€V€a-Xo"YilTos, ov, adj., of unrecorded Ayvwo-tos, ov, unknown. Acts xvii. 23.*
genealogy, Heb. vii. 3.* d'yopd, as, 77 {ayeipu)), a place of public
a-'Y€VT|S, es (cf. yhos), loio-born, base, resort; hence market place or open
"^
1 Cor. i. 28. street ; spec, market, Mark vii. 4 the ;

ayiaXoi, <tu) (see dyLos), to set apart from forum, or place of public assemblies,
common use. Hence, to hallow, or trials, etc., Acts xvi. 19.*
regard with religious reverence to ; d-Yopd^co, 0-07, to purclmse, buy, with gen.
consecrate to religious service, whe- of price, Mark vi. '^y, or tx. Matt,
ther persons or things to cleanse ; xxvii. once iv. Rev.
7, v. 9 ; fig. to
for such consecration ; so to purify, redeem, ransom.
sanctify, oi ayia^ofievoi, those who are d^opaios, ov, adj., belonging to the forum;
being sanctified ; oi riyLaafiivoi, those hence {ryxipai.) court days, Acts xix.
7vho are sanctified. 38 {avdpu)7roL) idlers,
; of the rabble
d'yiao-^jLoSi ov, 6, sanctificatioii, holiness. (R.V.), xvii. 5.*
^yios, a, ou, set apart frovi common use, d-ypa, as, 77 (hunting), fishing, draught,
spec, to the service of God licnce, ; Luke v. 4, 9.*
hallowed, worthy of veneration, holy, d-Ypdiip-aros, ov, adj., unlearned, i.e. in
consecrated, whether persons, places, Rabbinical lore, Acts i v. 13.*
or things, oi ay loi,
'^
the Saints ;" to d-yp-avXew, cD, to remain in the fields,
ayiov, the Temple; to. dyia, the Sanc- Luke ii. 8.*
tuary; ayia aylwv, the Holy of Holies ; d^pcvb), (Tu) (to take in hunting), fig. to
irvevfia dyiov, the Holy Spirit. ensnare, Mark xii. 13.*
d-yioTps, rriTos, i], holiness, Heb. xii. 10 ;
d'Ypi-cXaios, ov, b, wild olive, oleaster,
2 Cor. i. 12 (W. H.).* Rom. xi. 17, 24.*
iCfyiuxrvvT], t/s, ij, holiness, Rom. i. 4 d-ypios, ia, lov, ivild, of honey, Matt. iii.
*
2 Cor. vii.Thess. iii. 1 3.
I ; i 4 ; Mark i. 6 ; of waves, Jude 13.*
jx-yKaXr], t;?, 17, the (curve of the) arm, 'A-yptinras, a, 6, Agrippa, i.e., Herod
only plur. Luke ii. 28.* , Agrippa ir. Sec 'Hp<{;377s.
d-yKto-Tpov, 01', TO, fishhook. Matt, xvii.27.* d^pds, ov, 6, field, spec, tlie country
d^Kvpa, as, i), an anchor. plur., country districts, luimlets.
.d-'yva(t>os, 01', adj. (not fulled or dressed), d"YpvTrv€&), w (uTTi'os), "to be sleepless ;"
?ic2(;,of cloth, Matt. ix. 16 Mark ii. 21.* ; hence, met., to watch, to be vigilant,
ofyvcia, ay, fj,2nirity, i.e., chastity, i Tim. ]\Iark xiii. 33 : Luke xxi. 36 ; Eph.
iv. 12, V. 2.* vi. 18 Heb. xiii. 17.*
;

d-yvC^o), (Tw, to cleanse, purify ; lit. as dYpvirvia, as, 77, watching, i.e., assiduous
John xi. 55 ; fig. as James iv. 8. care, 2 Cor. vi. 5, xi. 27.*
dYVio-^ds, ov, 6, ceremonial purification. &yo>, Iw, 2 a., -rjyayov, trans., to lead,
Acts xxi. 26.* bring; with (ace), ^'ws, ei's, of
Trpos
d-'yvoe'd), Q, qau} (cf yiypuxxKU}), (i) not to destination ; with iiri (ace), of pur-
know, ignorant {ayvodv, ignorant;
to be pose, as Acts viii. 32 to bring before, ;

dyi/oovfj.evos, unknown personally. Gal. for trial.Acts xxv. 17. Also to spend,
i. 22 ignored, disesteemed, 2 Cor. vi.
; as of time to keep, as a particular day,
;

9) (2) not to understand, Mark ix. 32

; ;
Matt. xiv. 6 (not W. H.) Luke xxiv. ;

perhaps Acts xiii. 27 i Cor. xiv. 38. ; 21 (impers.). Fig., to lead the inclina-
dYvd-qpa, aTos, to, a sin of ignorance, tion, induce. 5lid., to go, depart;
error, Heb. ix. 7.* intrans. imper., ^7^, come! subj..
&.yvoKa., aj, 17, ignorance, Acts iii. 17, dyw/xev, let us go! the former being
xvii. 30; Kph. Pet. i. 14.* iv. 18; i used as an adverb.
aYyds, 77, bv, pure, chaste; adv., -ws, Phil. cLytay-f], ijs, 77 (d')a>), manner of life, 2 Tim.

i. 17. iii. 10.*

d-yvdriis, T7;ror, 7), imrity. 2 Coi'. vi. 6, ayuiv, Cbvos, contest, conflict : fig., of the
xi. 3 (W. ][.).* Christian life, as Heb. xii. i..
 —

a'ytovia 6,-0€T€wJ VOCABULARY. 391

d-ywvia, as, -q, contest; emphatically, nature are deceitful, transitorv. Syn.
agony, Luke xxii. 44.* 22.
d^uvttofiai, to strive, as in the public d-8iKos, ov,wicked generally,
unjust,
games to contend with an adversary
; ;
opposed to as Matt. v. 45, or
diKaios,
fig., of Chiistian effort and endurance, to evae^Tjs, as 2 Pet. ii. 9 adv., -ws, ;

*A8d|i, 6 (Heb.), Adam. unjustly, undeservedly, i Pet. ii. 19.

d-SaTravoSi ou, free of charge, gratuitous, d-8dKi|xos, ov (tested, but not approved),
I Cor. ix. 18.* reprobate, rejected, Rom. i. 28 ; i Cor.
'A88C, 6, Addi, Luke iii. 28 (not men- ix. 27 2 Cor. xiii. 5, 6, 7
; 2 Tim. iii, ;

tioned in O.T.).* 8 Tit. i. 16

; Heb. vi. 8.* ;

d8eX<|>r|, Tjs, 77, a sister, (i) lit., (2) fig. of d-8oXos, ov, without fraud, genuine,
Christian friendship. 1 Pet. ii. 2.*
d8€X<|>os, ov, 6, a brother, (i) lit. (see 'A8pa|xvTTT]vos, 17, ov, of Adramyttium,
§ 256), (2) of more general relations, an ^olian seaport. Acts xx^'ii. 2.*
«. felloto-IsraeUtc, Matt. v. 47 ft ;
'A8pias, a, 6, the Adriatic, embracing
fellow-Christian, Matt, xxiii. 8 « ; the Ionian sea. Acts xxvii. 27.*
fclloio-man, ^latt. v. 22-24 ; also ex- d8p6TT]s, TTjros, 77, largeness, abundance,
pressing the relation between Christ 2 Cor. viii. 20.*
and believers, Matt. xxv. 40. The d-8vvaT€a>, Q, to he impossible, with dat.
"brethren of Christ" (Matt. xiii. 55 ;
of pers., Matt.
or Trapd xvii. 20 ;

John vii. 3 Acts i. 14 Gal. i.

; ; 19) ^
(gen.), Luke
37 (W. H,),* i.

are thought by some to have been His d-8vvaTOs, ov, adj,, (i) of persons, act,.
cousins or other near relatives. potvei'less ; (2) of things, pass., im-
d8€X<|>0TT)Si T7]Tos, 77, the brotherhood, i.e., possible, Rom. viii. 3.
the Christian community, i Pet. ii. 17, a8«, 9<rw (contr. from deido)), to sing,
V. 9.* with cognate ace, (fidriv, a song. Rev.
&-8t}\os, ov, not manifest, uncertain., V. 9, xiv. 3, XV. 3 with dat. to sitig ; ,

Luke xi. 44; i Cor. xiv. 8* adv., -ws, ; (praise) Eph. v. 19; Col, iii. 16.*
^0,
uncertainly, i Cor. ix. 26.* OLiCf adv., ahcays ; of continuous time,
d-8Ti\6TT]s, TrjTos, uncertainty, i Tim, unceasingly ; of successive intervals,
vi. 17.* from time to time, on every occasion.
d8i]|iove(D, cD, to he sorely troubled. d€Tos, ov, 6, an eagle, gen. bird of prey,
q,8T]s, 01', and hd- in Idelv), the
6 (d priv. as Matt. xxiv. 28(R.y. n\A\g., vultures).
invisible icorld, HaAes ; fig. of deep d-^v|xos, ov, unleavened, only in plur., se.
degradation, Matt. xi. 23. Syn. 54, Xdyava, cakes, or dproi, loaves; met.,
and TTvXr). the 2)ascJial feast ; fig., incorrupt, sin-
d-8id-KpiTos, 01', either act., not distin- cere, I Cor. V. 7, 8.
guishing, impartial (A.Y,), or pass., *A^«p, 6 (Heb.), Azor, Ma,tt. i. 13, 14;
not distinguishable, unamhiguous, vith- not mentioned in O.T.*
out variance (R.V.), James iii. 17.* "A^wTos, 01', 77, Azotus or Ashdod, Acts
d-8id-Xei'TrTos, ov, 2cithout intermission, viii. 40.*
unceasing; adv., -ws, unceasingly. dTJp, depos, 77, the air, atmosphere ; in
d-8i,a-<|>6op(!a, a?, r,, uncorruptness, purity, Eph. ii. 2, the power of the air (efou-
Tit. ii. 7 (not W. H.).* o-i'a Tov depos) refers to supramundane
d8iK€a), Q}, rfcruj (ddiKos), intrans., to act poweis, not earthly and not heavenly.
unjustly, commit a crime; trans., to d-6avao-ia, as, t) (see ^^dj'oros), immor-
lorong, injure; lientx' to hurt, with- tality, I Cor. XV. 53,54; ITim. vi. 16.*
out any notion of wrong, Luke x. 19, d-Oep.iTos, ov {Se/jLis, laic), unlawful,
and Rev. often pass., to be luronged.
;
criminal, Acts x. 28 ; i Pet. iv, 3.*
d8(KT](j.a, aros, to, a wrong. d-9€os, 01', without (rod, Eph. ii. 12.*
d8iKCa, as, 7), icrong (towards man or d-dco-jjios, 01', adj. (OecTfios, statute), law-
Goil), injustice, iniquity, unrighteous- less, 2 Pet. ii. 7, iii. 17.*
ness, wickedness. In Luke xvi. 9, d-OeWo), w, 770-w (^e- as in TidTjfjn), to sei
"the mammon of unrighteousness" at nought, i.e., persons, to despise,
(d5t/ctas) denotes riches, wliicli in their slight ; or things^ to nullify, contemn.
392 VOCABULARY. [d-6^Trjo-is — al4»v{8ios

d-0eTT]cris, 6a>s, 77, nullification, abroga- or result hence a religious sect or

;

tion^ Heb. vii. 18, ix. 26.* party, party spirit, " heresy."
*A0f]vai, Cjv, at, Athens. alpcT^^o), (TO), to choose. Matt. xii. 18.*
'AGi^vaios, a, ov, AtJicnian, Acts xvii. 21. aipcTiKos, ov, 6, one who acts from party
ddX^o), cD (a^Xov, prize), to contend in the spirit, a factious person, " heretic,"
public games, 2 Tim. ii. 5.* Tit. iii. 10.*
d9X7)o-ts, ecus, -q, contest, as in tlie public aipeo) (irreg., § 103, i), to take, only in
games; only fig. Heb. x. 32.* mid. in N.T., to choose, prrefer.
dOpoi^o),, gather together, Luke xxiv. 33 al'pw (§ 92), (i) to take up, lift, carry,
(W. H.).* used of carrying the cross, lit., Matt,
d-9ujjL€a), a), to lose heart, despond, Col. xxvii. 32 fig. Matt. xvi. 24 so of
; , ;

iii. 21* raising the eyes, the voice, the mind ;

dOuios, undeserving of punishment,

o/', hence (with xjyvxrj^) to keep in suspense,
innocent. Matt, xxvii. 4 (see W. H. ) ;
John X. 24 (2) to take aivay, to abro-
;

with airb, of the crime, ver. 24. * gate a. \au\x, to remove by death; imp.,
ai^fios, 77, 01/ (al^, gfoa^), o/" or belonging afpe, d,pov, Away
with! i.e., to execu-
to a goat, Heb. xi. 37.* tion ;
take away sin, of the
(3) to
al-yiaXos, ov, 6, the shore, beach ; in Gos- redeeming work of Christ, John i. 29 ;

pels, of Gennesaret in Acts, of the ; I John iii. 5.

Mediterranean.* alo-Odvofiai, 2 a. riado/jLrjv, dep., to perceive,
Al-yviTTios, a, ov, Egyptian. comijrehend, Luke 45.*
ix.
AL'yuTTTOS, ov, -q, Egypt. alIcr0T]o-is, ews, 77, perceiMon, accurate
d'£8ios, ov, adj. (det), eternal, everlasting, judgment, Phil. i. 9.*
Rom. i. 20 ; Jude 6.* alo-9T]Ti]ptov, ov, n.,organ of perception,
alSuS; om, 77, 7nodesty, i Tim. ii. 9 ;
faculty of judgment, Heb. v. 14.*
reverence, Heb. xii. 28 (not W. H.).* aliTXpo-KEpSris, es, eager for disgraceful
Al0to\|/, oTTos, 6, an Ethiopian, Acts gain, sordid; adv., -ws, sordidly.
viii. 27.* alcrxpo-XoYCa, as, r}, foul language, scur-
aljia, aros, to, blood, (i) lit., especially of rility. Col. iii. 8.*
blood sAef^, i.e. of animals, victims in alo-xpos, a, ov (orig. deformed, opposed
sacrifice ; so of man, of Christ, con- to KaXbs), base, disgraceful.
nected with which latter meaning the al(rxpoTT]s, TTjTos, 77, obscenity, Eph. v.
word is often used (2) met., of the
death of Christ (3) bloodshed, murder ; ;
alcrxvvT], 77s, 77, shavu, in personal feel-
hence blood-guiltiness, the crime or ing or in the estimation of others.
responsibility of another's destruction ;
ai<rxvvo}Jtai, ovfiai, mid., to feel ashamed ;
(4) natural life, which was believed to pass., to be put to shame, confounded.
reside in the blood, especially with alT€«, w, 770-a>, to ask, pray, require,
(xdp^, I Cor. XV. 20 so human nature ; demand; with two aces., or ace. of
generally hence (5) natural relation-
; thing, and dirb or irapd (gen. ) of person ;

ship ; (6) in Acts ii. 20, etc., the re- mid., to ask for ones self, beg. Syn.
ference is to the colour of blood. 9, 38.
aijiaT-€K-xv(ria, as, ri, shedding of blood, al'TT]|xa, aros, t6, petition, request.
Heb. ix. 22.* alrCa, as, 77, cause, (i) as the reason or
ai(j.oppoe(o, have a flux or issue of
cD, to ground of anything ; (2) inMatt. xix.
blood. Matt. ix. 20.* 10, the state of the case; (3) forensically,
*
Alve'as, a, 6, ^neas. Acts ix. 33, 34. an accusation, a fault.
al!v€o-is, ^(jos, 7), praise, Heb. xiii. 15.* a'lTtafia, aros, to, accusation, charge.
alv€(», Co, ^auiand 770-0), to praise, only of Acts XXV. 7. (W. H. read
alTiwfia.)*
God. Syn. 47. allrios, ta, lov, causative of, used as subst.,
atvi"yfia, aros, t6,obscure intimation, an in masc, tlic cause, author, only Heb.
enigma, riddle, Cor. xiii. 12.* i V. 9 ;in neut., a caitsc, reason, espec.
atvos, 01;, 6, jiraise, only of God. 0/ punishment ; a fault, like am'a.
Alv<iv, -q (Heb.), ^non, John iii. 23.* aiTiw|xa. See alria/j-a.*
aXp€o-i5, ews, 77 (a'pej/uat), choice, its act al<|)vC8ios, ov, uneipedcd, sudden.
 ; ;

alxP'-oXoxria — dKovto] VOCABULARY. 393

aX\\i-a\(i>aria., as, 17, captivity, Rev. xiii. dKavGivos, ov, made of thorns, Mark xv.
10 ;met., a captivity, i.e., a multitude 17 John xix. 5.*
;

of captives, Epli. iv. 8.* &-Kapiros, ov, unfruitful, barren, generally

alxix-CLXtoTevo), era;, to make prisoners of, fig-,
.
to take captive, captivate, 2 Tim. iii. 6. a-KaTa-YVtocTTOs, ov, not to be condemned,
(W. H. read the following.)* ^
Tit. ii. 8.*
al)((i-aXci)Ti^a), (xco, to lead captive. d-Kara-KaXvuTos, ov, unveiled, i Cor. xi.
alx.(i-dXci>TOs, ov, 6, 17, a captive, Luke iv.
18 (from Isa. Ixi. i).* a-Ka.Ta.-Kp\.ro<5fOv,unx;ondem7Uid, Acts xvi.
alwv, -u>vo$, 6 {del), continuous duration, Z7, xxii. 25.*
(i) time limited, an age, gen. in plural, d-Kard-XvTOS, ov, imlissoluble, Heb. vii.
the ages ; before the Messiah (i Cor. x. 16.*
11), or after (Eph. ii. 7); (2) the world, d-Kard-Trao-TOS, ov, unfed, hungry for
considered under the aspect of time, as (gen.), 2 Pet. ii. 14. (W. H. for the
Lukei. 70, espec. 6 alu^v ovtos, this world, following. )*
in contrast with the world to come d-KaTd-iravcTTOSj ov, not to be restrained,
(6 fieWiov, epx6fJ.€vos) in plur., Heb. ; with gen., 2 Pet. ii. 14 (see preceding).*
i. 2, xi. 3 (3) time unlimited, the age
;
d-Kara-o-Tacria, as, 7/, instability ; hence
of eternity, past, as Acts xv. 18 future, ; sedition, tumult, disorder.
2 Pet. iii. 18, especially in the follow- d-Kard-cTTaTos, ov, inconstant, unstable,
ing phrases eh rbv aldva, for ever,
: James i. 8, iii. 8 (W. H.).*
with negative adv. n^ver ; ets rot's d-xaTd-(rx€Tos, ov, unruly, untameable,
atcDvas, a stronger expression, for ever- Jas. iii. 8. (W. H. read preceding.)*
7nore / et's rods alCovas rCjv aldjvojv, 'AKcX-Safid (Heb. in Chald. form, field
stronger still (see § 327, ii.), for ever of blood), Aceldama, Acts i. 19. (W. H.
and ever. Phrase slightly varied, read AKeXdafidx- '
)*
Eph. iii. 21 Heb. i. ; 8 ;2 Pet. iii. 18 ;
d-K€paioS| ov {Kepavvv/jLi), unmixed;
Jude 25 Rev. xiv.
; 11. hence, fig., simple, inn-jcent, guileless.
alwvLos (-ta, only in 2 Tliess. ii. 16 Heb. ; Matt. X. 16 Rom. xvi. 19 ; Phil,
;

ix. 12; or -los), -1.0V, perpetual, lasting, ii. 15.*

(i) of limited duration, with xpovoi., the d-KXivT)s, es, unbending ; hence umoaver-
tivus of old, as Rom. xvi. 25 (2) of ;
ing, steadfast, Heb. x. 23.*
unlimited duration, eternal, everlasting dKfid^ft), aw, to reach the p>oint of perfec-
mostly with fwiy, eternal life, denoting tion ; so, of fruit, to be fully ripe. Rev.
not so much a future duration as a ^
xiv. 18.*
present quality of life, life which in its dK|xir'iv, acc. as adv., up to this pointy
character is essentially eternal, see hitlicrto. Matt. xv. 16.*
John V. 24, vi. 47, xvii. 3. Neut. used , dKoi], Tjs, rj {cLKovw), hearing, (i) the sense
as adv. /or ever, Philem. 15. OY faculty, the ear ; (2) the act of hear-
d-Ka6ap<r£a, as, tj (Kadaipu), U7icleann£ss, 'i''^9 '>
(3) ^^ thing heard, a report,
imjmrity, generally fig. speech, doctrine. aKorj a.Kov€i.v, "to
d-Ka8dpTT]s, T7JT0S, 7], imjnirity, Rev. xvii. hear with hearing," i.e., attentively
4. (AV. H. read the following.)* (a Hebraism), Matt. xiii. 14.
d-KdOapros, ovy adj., unclean, impure, dKoXovQeo), w, T70-W, [i) to accompany, fol-
(i) of ceremonial, legal or religious low, or attend, with dat., or ixerd
defilement (2) of evil spirits, with
;
(gen.), or ottjo-w (gen.), espec. of the
TTvevfMa, Gospels, Acts, Rev. (3) of ;
disciples of Christ; so, met., to obey
human beings, impure, lewd, Eph. v. 5. and imitate ; [2) to succeed, in order of
d-Kaip€0[Jiai., ov/xai, dep., to lack oppor- time, or retribution.
tunity, Phil. iv. 10.* dKOVd), crw or ao/xai, pf., d/cT^/coa, to hear,
d-KaCpws, adv., tinseasonably, 2 Tim. iv. 2. (i) without object, Mark iv. 3, vii. 37
See evKaipoJS.* (2) A^th object (acc. or gen., § 249, a,
&-KaKos, ov, adj., guileless, Rom. xvi. 18 ; I ), to hear, listen heed, understand.
to,
Heb. vii. 26.* 01 cLKovovres, hearers or disciples. In
^Kttvda, 175, i], thonij briar. pass., to be noised abroad.
394 VOCABULARr. [d-Kpao-ia — iiXXo-"Y€v^s

d-Kpa<ria, ay, t), uitemperonce., iiicovfi- homage ; also medicinally, or in om-

iiciice. .Matt, xxiii, 25 ; i Cor. vii. 5.* Imlming the dead.
d-KpaTi^S| e's (KpcLTos), povfrlcss (over dXeKTopo-<j>(»vCa, as, t;, the cock-crou:ing,
one's self), 2 Tim. iii. 3.* between midnight and dawn, .Mark
d-KpaTOS» ov {Kepavvv/xi), unviixed, un- xiii. 35.*
diluted (of strong wine), Rev. xiv. 10.* dXcKTup, opos, 6, a cock. The name
oiKpiPcia, as, 7], precision, strictness, Acts signifies sleepless.
xxii. 3.* *AXeiav8p€vSi ews, 6, an Alexandrian.
aKpi^-qs, accurate, strict, Acts xxvi.
e's,
*AX€|av8ptv6s, 17, 6v, Alexaiulrian.
5 ;* -us, adv., diligcnthj, accuratehj, 'AXc'lavSpos, 01^, 6, Alexander. Four of
perfectly. this name are mentioned, ^lark xv.
aKpi^dw, Q), u}(TU), to inquire rlosely, learn 21 ; Acts iv. 6 ; Acts xix. 33 i Tim. ;

carefully (R.V.), Matt. ii. 7, 16.* i. 20.*

oiKpCsy tSos, i], a locust. dXcvpov, 01', TO, fine meal or flour, Matt.
oiKpoaTi^piov, ioc, n. {aKpodofxat, to hear), xiii. ^;^ ; Luke xiii. 21.*
the place of (judicial) hea^ iny. Acts dXrjOeia, as, 17, truth ; generally, as Mark
XXV. 23.* V. 2,;^ ; freedom from error,
espec, (i)
dKpoaTT|s, ov, 6, a hearer, Rom. ii. 13 ; exactness, as (2) The Truth, or IFord
James 22, 23, 25.*
i.
of God; Jesus is called tJie Truth,
aKpo^voTia, as, i), the foreskin, u.ncir- John xiv. 6 (3) trtUlifuhiess, veracity,;

cu incision ; collective for pagans or sincerity, integrity, o})posed to ddida,

H n circu nicised Gentiles. Rom. ii. 8 ; i Cor. xiii. 6.
d.Kpo-'Ywvkaios, a, ov (with \'Ldos iinder- &Xt]0cv6>, speak the truth, to deal ti'uly,
to
stooil), a corner foundation stane, ref. ^
Gal. iv. 16 Eph. iv. 15.* ;

to Christ, Eph. ii. 20; i Pet. ii. 6.* dX-qOVjs, e's (d, \ad- in Xavddvw), uncon-
oiKpo-OiVkOv, iov, TO, frstfruits, i.e., the cealed, true, valid, s^crc, sincere, iiprigM^
hest of the pioduce, applied (plur.) just. Syn. 24 for comparison ^nth
to spoils taken in l)attle, Heb. vii. 4.* following. -cDs, adv., truly ; in truUt,,

&Kpos, a, ov, outermost, pointed; neiit., really ; in very deed,, certainly.

TO oLKpov, the end, ertreniity. dXT]6tv6s, 77, 6v, real, genuine, contrasted
'AKvXas, 01', 6 (Latin), Aquila. with the fictitious, as Luke xvi. 11 ;

d-Kvpoo), cD, to deprire of power, set aside John i. 9 ; with the typical, as John
(a law). Matt. xv. 6 ; Mark vii. 13 ;
vi. 32 ; Heb. viii. 2, ix. 24. Syn.
Gal. iii. 17. 24.
d-Ka>\vT<DS,adv., freely, without hin- dXrjOo), rjao}, to grind with a handmill.
drance. Acts xxviii. 31.* dXUvs, eojs, 6, a fisherman.
dKwv, ovaa, ov (d, eKfav), unwilling, dXk€Vb>, evau), to fish, John xxi. 3.*
1 Cor. ix. 17.* dXC^o), iaoj, to salt.
dXdpao-Tpov, ov, to, aJabaster, a vessel dXi<ryr]}j,a, aros, to, 2>ollution, Acts xv.
for perfume, Matt. xxvi. 7 Mark ;
20.*"

xiv. 3 Luke vii. 37.*

; dXXd (pro)!, n. pliu'. of dXXos), but, an
dXa^ovCa, as, rj, boasting, show, ostenta- adversative particle. See § 404.
tion, James iv. 16 ; i John ii. 16.* dXXdo-(ru>, d^oj, to alter, exchange.
dXa^wv, ovos, 6, a boaster, Rom. i. 30 ;
dXXa\69€v, adv., from elsewhere, John
2 Tim. iii. 2.* X. I."
dXaXd^fa), dacxj, to raise a cry or loud dXXaxoii, adv., clseu-herc, Maik i. ^"^
sound ; m mourning. Matt. v. 38 of ; ;W. U.).*
cymbals, I Cor. xiii. i.* dXX-T^-yope'b), speak allegorically
w, to
d-XaX-qros, ov, not to be uttered in tvords, ])ass. i>art., iv. 24.* Gal.
Rom. viii. 36.* 'AXX-iiXovta (Hebrew), Hallklujah,
&-XaXos, ov, dumb, making dumb, Mark Praise ye Jrhovah, Rev. xix. I, 3, 4, 6.*
vii. ^7, ix. 17, 25.* dXXT|Xwv, reciprocal pron., gen. plur.
dXas, arcs, to, salt, lit. and fig., as (^ 61, c), one another, each other.
Matt. v. 13. dXXo.-YCVTis, e's, of an of her nation, a strai-
dXcCijxD, \f/(i), to anoint, festally, or in ner, Luke xvii.. iS.*
 ; ;

&XXop.ai — ^*A}jLiva8dpj VOCABULARY. 305

dXXopiai (<lep. ), a\ov/xai, i]\dixr]v , to leap d|xdpTi]^a, aros, to, a sin, error, offence.
up, leap. Acts lo to babble
iii. 8, xiv. ; dfJiapr^a, as, t), (l) sin, as a quality of
up, as water, John iv, 14.* . actions or a principle of human nature ;

dXXos, 1), 0, other, different, another ; oi (2) a sin, sing., as Acts vii. 60 ; plur.
aWoi, the otJiers, tlie rest. Syn. 76. (more freq.), spec, in the phrase
-ws, adv., otlicrwisc, i Tim. v. 25.* cKpievai rds a/jLaprlas, to forgive sins.
aXXoTpio-cirio-Koiros, ov, 6, one who looks In Heb. x. 6, 8, 18, irepi dfiaprias is
at or busies hiinself in the things of sin-offering.
another, a busi/bod//, i Pet. iv. 15. d-fidpTvpos, ov, icithout witness. Acts
(W. H., dWoTpieiriaKOTTOS.)* xiv. 17.*
dXXoTpioSi ia, lov, belonging to another, dfJLapTwXds, ov, {1) sinful, espec. habitu-
fcrreign, strange, alien ; not of one's oicn ally and notoriously (2) often used ;

family, hostile. sul)stantively, a sinner. The Jews

dXXo-<f>uXoS| 01', adj., foreign, of another used the word for idolaters, i.e..
tribe or raee, Acts x. 28.* Gentiles.
dXodo), a), rjcroi, to beat or thresh, as corn, d-fjiaxos, 01', not quarrelsome, i Tim.
1 Cor. ix. 9, 10 ; i Tim. v. 18.* iii. 3 ; Tit. iii. 2.*
d-Xo-yos, ov, without sj>eeeh or reason,
(
I )
dpxLo), w, James v. 4.*
rjcrii}, to reap,
irrational, 2 Pet. ii. 12, Jude 10 dfic'Gvo-Tos, m., an f///ic//<//s^ (supposed
01',

(2) unreasonable, absurd. Acts xxv. to be an antidote against drunkenness.

Hence the name, from d, fxedvu). Rev.
oXoTJ, 17s, 7/, the aloe, John xix. 39.* xxi. 20.*
dXs, aXos, 6, salt. Rec. only in Luke d|icXe<i), Q, rjffb), not to care for, to dis-
ix. 49 (dat.), AV. H. only in ix. 50 regard, neglect gen. or inf.
;
(ace). See aXas.* d'-|i€pLirTOS, ov, icithout blame, faultless
dXvKos, v, 6v (aXs), salt, brackish, James adv., -ujs, unblameably, faultlessly.
iii. 12.* d-p.cpip.vos, free from solicitude or
ov,
*
d-X\nros, ov, free from soiroiv, Phil. ii. 28. anriety, secure, easy.
AXvorts, eojs, 7], a cheiin or manacle. d-p€Td-9€Tos, ov, unchenigcable, Heb. vi.
d-Xv<riT€XT|s, «, icithout gain, unprofit-
able, Heb.
xiii. 17.* d-p€Ta-KivriTos, ov, adj., immoveable, firm,
'AX<|kiios, ov, 6, Alphecus. Two of the 1 Cor. XV, 58.*

name are mentioned, ^lark ii. 14 ; d-peTa-)icXT]Tos, ov, adj., not to be re-
Mark xv. 4 (the latter being called gretted or repented of; hence un-
KXwTrds, John xix. 25 ; another form cheingeablc, Rom. xi. 29 ; 2 Cor. vii.
of the orig. Hebrew name).* 10.*
&Xo>v, wvos, 6, 7], a thresh ing-fioar ; met., d-pera-vd-riTos, ov, adj., unrepentant,
the corn of the threshing -floor. impenitent, Rom. ii. 5.*
dX<&irr]5, (Kos, ij, afox; applied to Herod, d-pcrpos, ov, beyond measure, immoderate,
Luke xiii. 32. 2 Cor. X. 13, 15.*
dXuo-ks, ews, 17, « taking or catching, dpT|v, Amen, a Hebrew adjective, true,
2 Pet. ii. 12.* faithful, used (i) as an adverb, at the
&\ux, adv., at the same time, with or beginning of a sentence, verily, truly,
together with {d&t.) d/ia irpcSC, with the ; indeed ; (2) at the end of ascriptions
dawn, ^latt. xx. i. of praise, etc., optatively, as 7eVotTo, .so
d-}ia9T|s, «, unlearned, rude, 2 Pet. he it; (3) substantively, 2 Cor. i. 20,
iii. 16.* as a name of Christ, the Amen, the
d-)JLapdvTkvos, 01'. adj. (jiapaivofxai), un- faithful witness, Rev. iii. 14.
fading, I Pet. V. 4.* d-pT)T(i>p, opos, 6, 7} (firirrip), icithout
d>(JMipavTos, 01', adj., unfading, i Pet. mother, i.e., in the genealogies, Heb.
.
^-
V
dp-aprdvu, Tri<ru>, to miss a mark, to err,
vii. 3.*
d-pCavTOSf 01' {inalvw), undefiled, sincere,
to sin; with cogn. ace, afiapriav, to pure.
sin a sin, i John v. 16 ; with eis, to 'ApivaSdp, 6 (Heb.), Jminadab, Afatt.
*
sin against. Syn. 39. i. 4 ; Luke iii, 33.
396 VOCABULARY. [&)ji|jLos — ava0€fJLaTt^w M
d|x|JLOs, ov, T), sand, as of the sliore. in "W. H.), Matt, xxvii. 46, Markxv. 8,
djJLvds, ov, 6, a lamb ; fig. , of Christ, Luke ix. 38.*
John i. 29, 36 ; Acts viii. 32 ; i Pet. dva-PoXr), rjs, 77, putting off, delay, Acts
i. 19.* xxv. 17.*
a\Loi.^r], -^s, 7] (dyttet'/Sw), requital, i Tim. dvd^aiov, 01', to, ui^jjcr room, W. H. in
V. 4.* Mark xiv. 15 ; Luke xxii. 12, for Rec.
dixireXos, 01', 17, a vhie, (l) lit. ; (2) fig., avwyeov.*
as John xv. i. dv-ayycXXw, to tell, to declare openly, to
dinreX-ovp-yoSi ov, 6, rj, a vine-dresser, show forth, confess, foretell.
*
Luke xiii. 7.* dva-"Y€vvdcD, w, to beget again, i Pet. 1. 3, 23.
djjLTTcXwv, a vineyard.
Cjvo'i, 6, dva-"yiv«<rK(»), to know again, to know well.
'AjiirXCas, iov, 6, Amplias, Rom. xvi. 8.
*
N.T., to read.
d|xvv6>, tD, only in mid., N.T., to defend, dva-yKa^o), dcrw, to force, to compel by-
assist. Acts vii. 24.* force or persuasion.
d)JL(l>idt(D, clothe, Luke xii. 28 (W. H.).* dva-yKaios, aia, atov, necessary, fit, ser-
d)i<)>t.pdXX(i), cast around, Mark i, 16 viceable ; also close or near, as friends.

^
(W. H.).* Acts X. 24.
d(jL(j>^pXT](rTpov, ov, TO, a fishing net. dva-yKao-Tois, adv., necessarily or by con-
djt<}>i-€'vwfi,i, eo-w, to put on, as a garment straint, I Pet. V. 2.*
to clothe, adorn. dva-yKt], 77J, 7], (
I ) tiecessity, constraint
'Ajwj>t'7roXis, ews, Amphipolis, a city in rj, followed by inf. (with €<jtl understood),
the S. of Macedonia, Acts xvii, i.* there is need to ; (2) distress.
d}i4>-o8ov, OV, n., a place ivhere tivo ivays dva-"yv4Dpit<«>, to make known, aor. pass.,
*
meet, a street, Mark xi. 4. Acts vii. 13.*
d(j.(|>dTcpoi, ai, a, both. dvd-TVftxrts, ews, rj, reading, whether
d-|x(6|XT]Tos, ov, ivithout blame or fault, private or public*
Phil. ii. 15 (W. H., dfiefxirroL) ; 2 Pet. dv-d-yw, to bring, lead, or take up ; to
iii. 14.* offer up, as sacrifices ; pass., to put to
&\i(i)[i.ov, OV, t6, a spice plant. Rev. xviii. 13. sea, to set sail.
without spot ; fig., blameless.
&-[ia)p.os, ov, dva-8e£Kvv|j.i, toshow, as by uplifting, to
'Afiwv, 6 (Heb.), Amon, JMatt. i. 10.* shoiv plainly, Acts i. 24 ; to appoint,
'AjjLws, 6 (Heb.), Amos, Luke iii. 25.* Luke X. I.*
dv, a particle, expressing j^ossibility, dvd-Sei^is, eojs, 17, a showing or public
uncertainty, or conditioncdity See . a2^pearance, Luke i. 80.*
§§ 378, b, 380, 383, 5. dva-8ex,op.ai, dep., to receive with a wel-
dvd, prep. lit. iipon ; in composition,
, , come, .guests, Acts xxviii. 7 ;
promises,
U2), again. See §§ 297 and 147, a. Heb. xi. 17.*
dva-Pa0|ids, oO, 6 (^aivco), means of ascent, dva-8i8cD|ii, to give up, deliver, as by
*
steps, stairs. Acts xxi. 35, 40.* messengers, Acts xxiii. 33.
ava-^aCvd), ^rjaofxai., 2 a. dve^rjv, (1) to dva-^dti), w, to live again, revive (AV. H.
ascend, espec. to Jerusalem, on board only in Rom. vii. 9, and doubtfully
ship (John xxi. 3), to heaven ; (2) to Luke XV. 24).
spring up, as plants, etc., used of a avai-Xi]Ti<», Q, to seek with diligence.
rumour. Acts xxi. 31 ; of thoughts dva-twvvvfjLi, to gird or bind up, as a
coming into mind, Luke xxiv. 38. loose dress is girded about the loins ;
dva-pdXX<i>, mid., to postpoiic, defer, Acts mid. fig., I Pet. i. 13.*
xxiv. 22.* dva-twirupco), Q {irvp), to re-kindle or
dva-Pipdtcj, to draw up, as a net to shore. 7-ousc up ; fig., 2 Tim. i. 6.*
Matt. xiii. 48.* dva-0dXX«, to thrive or flourish again,
dva-pXcirco, {i) to look up, as Mark viii. 24 Pliil. iv. 10.*
(2) to look again, to recover sight, as dvd-Ocfia, arcs, rb, a person or thing
Matt. xi. 5. accursed, an execration or curse. Later
dvd-pX€\|/ts, €cos, rj, recovery of sight, form for dvadij/jia (which see).
Luke iv. 18.* a.vaQi\i.ariX,<a, law, to bind bya curse, to
dva-Pod«), w, to exclaim, cry aloud (not declare on pain of being an anafhnna.
 , ) ;

dva-6ca)peci> — aVa-irrvo-o'ci)] VOCABULARY. 397

dva-Getoplcd, C, to look at attentively, to dva-Xo"yCa, as, 77, proportion, analogy,

consider. Acts xvi, 23 Heb. xiii. 7.*
; Rom. xii. 6.*
dvd-6T]|ia, <tTos, to, anything consecrated ttva-Xo"y£^o}iai, to think upon, consider
and laid by, a, votive offering, Luke attentively, Heb. xii. 3.*
xxi. 5.* See dvddefia and Syn. 51. &v-aXos, ov, ivithout saltness, insipid,
dv-aiScCo, as, -^j shamclessness, impor- ]\rark ix. 50.*
tunity, Luke xi. 8.* dvd-Xv<ris, €(x)s, ri, a loosening of a ship

dvaip^o-is, ews, -q, a taking aivay, i.e., by from her moorings, deimrture, 2 Tim.
a violent death, Acts viii. i.* iv. 6.*
dv-aCp€(D, Q (see § 103, i), to take away, dva-Xvo), to depart, Phil. i. 23 ; to
to abolish, to take off, to kill; mid., return, Luke 36.* xii.
to take up, Acts vii. 21. dv-a|i,dpTr]Tos, ov, without blame, fault-
dv-aCrios, ov, guiltless. Matt. xii. 5, 7.* less, John viii. 7 (W. H. omit).*

dva-Ka6£t<») to sit up (properly trans, dva-p-cvo), to await, 1 Thess. i. 10.*

with eavTou understood). dva-|xi|xvir](rKa), to remind, admonish, two
dva-KaivC^ci), to renew, restore to a former aces., or ace. and inf. ; pass., to re-
condition, Heb. vi. 6.* member, to call to mind, gen. or ace.
dva-Kaivoo), Co, to renev', amend, to change dvd-|iVT](riS{ ews, t), remembrance, a me-
the life, 2 Cor. iv. 16 ; Col. iii. 10.* morial.
dva-KaCvaxris, ewj, 77, a renewal or change dva-v606>, w, to renew; mid., to renew
of heart and life, Rom. xii. 2 ; Tit. oneself, to be renewed, Eph. iv.23.*
iii. 5.* dva-vT|<^«, to recover sobern,ess, 2 Tim.
dva-KoXvirrci), to unveil, make manifest; ii. 26.*

pass., 2 Cor. iii. 14, 18.* 'Avavias, a, 6 (from Heb.), Ananias.

bend or turn back, return.
dva-KdfJLirrft), to Three of the name are mentioned,
dva-Kcipiai, dep., to recline p,t a meal, to Acts V. 1-5, ix. 10, xxiii. 2.
sit at meat ; 6 dvaKeiixevos, one "who dv-avTip-pT|TOS, ov, ivAisputable, not to be
reclines at table, a guest. (W. H. omit contradicted. Acts xix. 36.* Adv., -ws,
in Mark v. 40.) without hesitation. Acts x. 29.*
dva-K€<{>aXai6cD, w, to gather together into dv-d^ios, ov, unworthy, inadeqiiate, I Cor.
one, to sum up lender one head ; pass. vi. 2.* Adv., -(lis, unworthily, un-
Rom. xiii. 9; mid., Eph. i. 10.* becomingly, I Cor. xi. 27 (not in ver.
dva-KX£vo), to lay down an infant, Luke ^
29, W. H.).*
ii. 7 ; to place at table ; mid. to recline, , dvd-iravo-is, ews, 77, rest, refreshment.

as at a feast, like dvaKeifiaL. dva-irav«, to give rest or refreshment;

dva-KOTTTO), to hinder (lit., beat hack). mid., to take rest. (W. H. read in Rev.
Gal. V. 7. (W. H., iyKOTTTO}.)* xiv. 13, dj'a7ra77(Toj'Tat, 2 fut. pass.)
dva-Kpdl^o), to cry out, to shout aloud,. dva-ircCOo), (xo), to ji;c?'S2tfl^c, in a bad
dva-KpCvb), to investigate, inquire, ex- sense, seduce, mislead. Acts xviii. 13.*
amine (judicially), to judge of. Only send back.
dva-Trcji-irft), to 7'emit,
in Luke, Acts, and i Cor. dva-Trr]8da), leap up. (W. H., in Mark
dvd-Kpio-is, eojs, -q, judicial examination. x. 50, forrec, dvla-TryuLi.)*
Acts xxv. 26.* dvd-iri]pos, ov, maimed, having lost a
dva-Kv\C(tf, roll up, Mark xvi. 4. ("W. H., member, Luke xiv. 13, 21.* ("W. H.,
for diroK.)* dvaireipos.
dva-KVTTTO), to raise oneself froin a stoop- dva-m-n-Toj, to fall down ; N.T., torecliTie
ing posture ; fig., to be elated. Sit table.

dva-Xa^pdvo), to take up ; pass., of ava-'rr\r\p6(a, Qi, to fill up ; to fulfil, as

Christ's being taken up to heaven. a prophecy perform, as a precept
; to
dvd-XT]^iS (W.H., -\7]iJ,yl/Ls), 6WS, a being ->7, to occupy or fill a place to supply a ;

taken up, i.e., into heaven, Luke ix. deficiency.

dv-airo-X<JYTlTOs, ov, adj., inexcusable,
av-oXCo-KO), Xibao}, to consume, destroy, Rom. i. 20, ii. i.*
Luke ix. 54; Gal. v. 15 ; 2 Thess. ii. dva-TTTvo-cTto, ^0 unroll, as a volume,
8 (not W. H.).* Luke iv. 17 (not W. H.).*
398 VOCABULARY. [dv -diTTw —&V110OV
av-diTTw, to kitidle, set on fire. dva-\|/vx«, to refresh^ to revive^ 2 Tim.
dv-apL9p,T]Tos, ov, innumerable, Heb. i. 16.*
xi. 12.* 'AvSpeas, ov, 6, Andrew.
dva-o-eib), to stir np, move, instigate, dv8pairo8i<rTTJs, oO, 6, a man-stcalcr,
Mark xv. ii ; Luke xxiii. 5.* I. Tim. i. 10.*
dva-o-Kcvd^o), to 'pervert, unsettle, destroy. dvSpi^ci), tVw, niid.,/o act like a man, to
Acts XV. 24.* Jit' brtrrr. I Coi'. xvi. 13.*
dva-o-irdo), to draic up or hack, Luke 'AvSpdviKos, ov, 6, Aiulroniciis, Rom.
xiv. 5 Acts xi.
;
10.* xvi. 7.*
dvd-<rTa<ris, ews, rj, a rising up, as op- dv8pd-<|>ovos> ov, 6, a man-slayer, mur-
posed to falling, Luke ii. 34 rising, ; derer, I Tim. i. 9.*
as from death or the grave, resurrec- dv c'-yKX-qTOs, ov, not open to accusation,
tion, the future state. unblameahJe.
a.va-<rrar6o>f w, to unsettle, put in com- dv-€K-8ii]"yT)TOS, ov, not to be spoken, in-
motion, as Acts xvii. 6. expressible, 2 Cor. ix. 15.*
dva-o-ravpou, Q, to crucifij afresh, Heb. dv-€K-XdXT]Tos, unutterable, i Pet. i. 8.*
vi. 6.* dv-cK-X€i7rTOs, ov, inexhaustible, Luke
dva-o-Tevd^w, to groan or sigh deeply, ^
xii.^33.*
Mark viii. 12.* dvcKToS; ri, ov, tolerable, sup^wrtable
dva-(rTpe<|>(>),to turn up, overturn, John only in comp.
ii. 15; intrans., to return; mid. (as dv-€Xei^p.u)v, ov, ujiUiout compassion, criiel,
Lat. versari), to he or to live in a place Rom. i. 31.*
or state, to move among, to ^mss one's dve|i£t<*>> ''^ agitate or drive with wind ;
time or be conversant with persons pass., James i. 6.*
generally, to conduct onrsrlf. dve(LO$, ov, 6, th€ wind; tig., applied to

dva-(rTpo4>"<i, tjs, 77, bdaivionr, 'manner (ff empty doctrines, Eph. iv. 14,
lifr. dv-e'v8€KTOs, ov (ej/S^xoM***)) iidj., impos-
dva-Td<r(ro|iai, to dnrw up a nanativc sible, Luke xvii. i.*
(R.y.), Luke i. I.* dv-€^-€p€vvT^TOS (W. H., -pai'/-), ov, adj.,
dva-T€X\«, spring up or rise, as the
to inseruf<(blr, Rom. 33.*
xi.
sun, a star, a cloud of the Messiah, ; dvc^i-KaKOS, ov, jtatient of injury, 2 Tim.
Heb. vii. 14 trans., to cause to rise.
; ii. 24.*

Matt. v. 45. dv-€|-i,xvia<rTOS, ov, that cannot be ex-

dva-TidT](jLi, mid., to place before, declare, jihirfd, inc.umprehensible, Rom. xi. 33 ;

Acts XXV. 14; Gal. ii. 2.* Kpli. iii. 8.*

dvaroXri, tjs, 77, the dawn, dayspring, dv-eir-aiirxvvTos, ov, causing uo shame,
]juke i. 78 generally, tlie east, wliere
;
irreproachnble, 2 Tim. ii. 15.*
the sun rises sing, and ])lur. see
; , dv-em-X-qirTos (W. H., -X'qfiir-), ov, adj.,
ij 240, u. never caugJd doing icrong, blameless,
dva-Tpt'iru), to subvert, overt Jrruu-, 2 Tim. I Tim. iii. 2, v. 7, vi. 14.*
ii. 18 : Tit. i. 11.* dv-cpx.o|iai, to come or go up.
dva-Tpe<|>(i), fo nurse, bring ujt, educate. dvecis, ews, rj (dvirj/xi), relaxation, remis-
dva-<|>aCvw, mid., appear, Luke xix. to stun, as from bonds, burden, etc.
II ; pass., to be shrnm a thing (ace,), dv-€Tdtw, to examine by torture. Acts
Acts xxi. 3.* (W. H. read act., in xxii. 24, 29.*
sense ^0 come in sight of.) dv€v, adv. as ])re]i., with gen., without.
dva-(f>^pa), oiffu, to bear or lead, to offer, dv-€v6€T0S, ov, ineonvenienf. Acts xxvii.
as sacrilice to hear, as sin.
;
12.*
ava-^uivioi, Q, to cry out aloud, Luke dv-€vpt<rK<i), to find by searching for, Luke
i. 42.* ii. 16 Acts xxi. 4.*
;

dvd-xvo-is» fws, 17, a pouring out ; hence av-i\<a, mid., to bear wiOi, forbear, have
excess, i Pet. iv. 4.* pdlirnce u'ifh, endure ; gen. of pcrs. or
dva-\<t>p€(i>, (i, to depart, wilhdrnu\ tbing.
dvd-fj/v|ks> ews, i}, rcfreskmcnt. Acts dvc\(fi($S) ov, 6, a nephew. Col. iv. 10.*
iii. 20.* dvT)6ov, ov^ t6, anise, dill, Matt, xxiii. 23.*
 ^: '

«LVT|K€(i —dvTv-Xryw] VOCABULARY. 399

dv^KCi, impels., it is Jit or jn'oper ; part., d-vo^ia, as, t), transgression of law, lav}-
TO dfTjKOv, TO. avrfKOvra, the beco/iii/Hf. lessness.
dv-'f|^€pos, ov, atlj., not gentle, Jierce, d-vofios, 01', not subject
(i) without lav:,
2 Tim. iii. 3.* X\> the law, 21 I met. ofCor. ix. :

man, in sex and age

dvT|p, dvdpos, 6, {i)a (Icntiles (2) lawhss; as subst., a
;

(^Lat., vie); hence (2) a husbnnd; "malefactor. 6 &vo/j.os, the bnrless mie,

(3) ^ person generally i)lur. voc, ; 2 Tliess. ii. 8. Adv., -ws, vithoiU
&v8p€i, Sirs ! often in apposition Avitli law, Rom, ii. 12.
adjeetivesand nouns, a,sdvTjp d/xapruiXos dv-op6o<i>, d), to make upright or straight
dvrip 'irpo(pr]Tr)s. Syn, 63. iigaiii, to relndld, make strong, Luke

dv6-i<m]fjLi, to oppose, vitli stand., resist, xiii. 13 Acts xv. 16; Heb. xii. 12.*
:

with dat. dvoo-ios. OV, unholy, i Tim. i.

9 ; 2 Tim.
dt'd-oiioXoYcofJiai, ovfxai, to confess, give iii. 2.*

thanks to, dat., Luke ii. 38.* dvoxT|, ^s, -q, forbearance, patience, Rom.
&v6os, oi's, TO, a flower. ii. 4, iii. 25.*
dvOpaKid, as, t), a. heap of live coals, dvT-a"y«vitojjLai, to resist, strive against^
.Tohn xviii. 18, xxi. 9.* Heb. xii. 4.*
dvdpa|, a/vos, 6, a coal, Rom. xii. 20.* dvT-dXXa"Y|xa, aros, to, an equivalent,
dvOpwir-dpccTKOS} ov, desirous of pleasing price, ^latr. xvi. 26 ; Mark viii. 37.*
'nun, Ei>h. vi. 6, Col. iii. 22.* dvT-ava-irXiipoti), u), to make good by sup-
dv6pwirivoS| Iv-q, LVOV, human, belonging plying dfliciency, Col. i. 24.*
to J7U1/t. dvT-airo-SiSwfii, to recompense, requite.
dvOpwiro-KTovos, ov, 6, i], a iMmicide, a din'-a'ir6-8o|xa. aros, to, a recomjience,
mv.rdj'n'r, John viii. 44 ; i John iii. r>qu it'll, Luke xiv. 12 : Rom. xi. 9.*
15.* dvT-airo-Soo-ts, ews, ij. a reward, recmn,-
dv6p(i)iros, 01', one of tin
m., a man, pence. Cul. iii. 24.*
human race. Like
joined in ap- dvT)p, dvT-aTTo-Kpivo^ai, to reply against, con-
position Avith substantives, as Matt, tradict. Luke xiv. 6 ; Rom. ix. 20.*
xviii. 23, xxi. 33. Syn. 63. dvT-€iirov loused as 2 aor. of dvTiKiyu}, see
dv6-viraT€v«, to be j/roronsul, Aets xviii. (piyju), to ccrntradict, to gainsay, Luke
12 (not AV. H.).* xxi. 15 Acts iv. 14.*
;

dv6-viraT0S, ov, 6, a prrcHxtnsul. dvT-€'\w, mid., to hold fast, to adhere to

dv-iT]fjLi, to unloose, let go, cease from : to igt-n.), ^latt. vi. 24; Luke xvi. 13; i

leave, neglect. Tlicss. V. 14 ; Tit. i. 9.*

dv-kXc(i>S, <j}v, without ru'i-fi/. .Tames ii. 13. dvTi, ])re]t. , gen., instead of, for. See
(AV.H. read dveXeos.)* >i<5 291, 147, a.
d-viTTTOs, ov, adj., unvashid. dvTi pdXXw, to throw in turn, exchange
dv-io-THp-i, to raise up one lying or deatl ;
words. Luke xxiv. 17.*
intrans. (in 2 a., \^L and mid.), to risf dvTi-8ia Ti0Ti|jti,mid., /o.<f(7 oneself against,
from a recumbent jtosture, to rise again i>j>pose. 2 Tim. ii. 25.*

from the dead aor. })art., often com-

: dvTi-SiKos, ov, 6, i] (,orig. adj.), an oppo-
bined with other verbs, as "rising wnf at law, an adversary.
{dva(TTds) he went." dvTi-0€<ris, ews, 7}, opposition, i Tini. vi.
"Awa, 7]s, 7j, Anna, Luke ii. 36.*
"Awas, a, 6, Annas, Luke iii. 2 ; John dvTi-KaO lo-T-qfii, to resist, Heb. xii. 4.*
xviii.13, 24 : Acts iv. 6.* dvTk KaXc'ti), to call or invite in turn,
dvoiiTos, ov, foolish, thoughtless. Luke xiv. 12.*
dvoia, as, i], folly, madness, Luke vi. 1 1 dvTk-Kcifiai, to oppose, 'resist (dat.) ; 6
2 Tim. iii. 9.* dvTiKeiij.evos, the adversanj.
dvoi-yo), ^w, to open ; intrans. in 2 }»erf.. dvTiKpv (W. H., S.vTiKpi'^), adv,, aver
dveLoya, to be OjMin. >i gainst, Acts xx. 15.*
dv-oiKo8o|ji«(i>, Co, to build up again, Acts dvTi-XafjL^dvo), mid. to take hold of, help, ,

XV, 16,* shav in 'gen.\

dvoi|ts, cws, rj, opening (the act of), Eph. avTi-Xiyin, (0 sjjeak against, contradict
vi. 19.* (dat.; ; to oppose, deny (^vith yi-q).
400 VOCABULARY. [avTl-X-q^l/is — dir-apv^o|iai

dvTi-X-qxj/ts (W. H., -X-qfixp-), ew5, help; prepp. awo, ck, from the top, as Mark
hence, concrete, a helper, i Cor. xii. XV. 38 John xix. 23 (2) of time,
;
;

^
28.* frcnn the frst, only Luke i. 3 ; Acts
dvTu-Xo'yCa, ay, r], contradiction, cmiten- xxvi. 5. In John iii. 4, 7, again (see
tion, reproach. Gal. iv. 9) ; or, perhaps here also,
avTi-XoiSopeo), to revile or reproach again, from above.
1 Pet. ii. 23.* dvcDTcpiKos, T), ov, uppcr, higher. Acts
dvT£-XvTpov,ov, TO, a ransom-price, 1 Tim. xix. I.*
ii. 16.* dvwT€pos, a, ov (compar. of &vio only ;

dvTt-fJt€Tp€a), tD, measure in return,

to neut. as adv. ), higher, to a higher place,
Matt. vii. 2 (not W. H.) Luke vi. 38.* ; Luke xiv. 10 above, before,
; Heb.
dvTi-p,tcr0£a, as, 7/, rccompence, Rom. i. 27; X. 8.*
2 Cor. vi. 13. dv-&)(|)€XTJs, ^s, unprofitable. Tit. iii. 9 ;

'AvTioxeia, as, t], Antioch. Two places Heb. vii. 18.*

of the name are mentioned, Acts xi. d^ivT|, 7}s, T], an axe. Matt. iii. 9 ; Luke
26, xiii. 14. iii. 9.*
'AvTioxevs, e'ws, 6, a citizen of Antioch, &|tos, t'a, Lov, adj., ivorthy, deserving of,
Acts vi. 5.* suitable to (gen. ). Adv. , -ws, worthily,
dvTt-irap-c'pxofJLai, to pass by on the other suitably to (gen. ).
side, Luke x. 31, 32.* d^iob), Co, to deem worthy (ace. and gen.,
'AvT^iras, a, 6, Antipas, Rev. ii. 13.* or inf. ), to desire, think good.
'AvTiiraTpis, t5os, 17, Antipatris, Acts d-opdros, adj., invisible, unseen.
xxiii. 31.* dx-ayyeXXtu, to report, relate, make known,
dvTi-irfpav (W. H.,dvTi'xepa), adv., 07i the declare.
*
opposite side or s/torc, Luke viii. 26. diT-dyX"? mid., to hang or strangle one-
dyTi-iriirTO), to fall against, resist, Acts self, Matt, xxvii. 5.*
vii. 52.* dir-d-yti), to lead, carry, or take away;
dvTt-(rTpaT€vo|iai, dep., to make war pass., to be led away to execution, to
against, Rom. vii. 23.* lead or tend, as a way.
dvTi-Td(r<ra), mid., to set oneself against, d-TTtttSevTos, ov, adj., uninstructed, igno-
resist (dat. ). rant, 2 Tim. ii. 23.*
dvTt-TviroSf ov, corresponding in form, as dir-aipb>, to take away ;
in N. T. only, i a.
wax to the seal, antitype, Heb. ix. 24 pass, Matt. ix. 15
(subj.). Mark ii. ;

I 21.*
Pet. iii. 20 Luke v. 35.*
;

*AvTi-xpi<rTos, ov, m., opposer of Christ, dir-aiT6to), to ask back, require, reclaim,
Antichrist, 1 John ii. 18, 22, iv. 3 ; 2 Luke vi. 30, xii, 20.*
*
John vii. dTT-aX-yeft), to be past feeling, Eph. iv. 19.*
dvrXe'a), a), to draiv from a vessel, John dir-aXXd<ro-«, mid., to remove oneself
8, 9, iv. 7, 15.*
ii. from, to depart ; pass. , to be set free
AvrX-pfia, aros, to, a bucket, John iv. II.* (with diro).
dvT-o4>8aX[jL€'<«), cD, tolook in the face ; so dir-aXXoTpioo), to estrange, alienate (gen.),
to meet the ivind, Acts xxvii. 15.* Eph. ii. 12, iv. 18 Col. i. 21.* ;

dv-v8pos, without loater, dry.

ov, diraXos, 17, ov, tender, as a shoot of a
dv-vird-KpiTos, 01;, adj., without hypocrisy, tree. Matt, xxiv. 32 Mark xiii. 28. * ;

unfeigned. dir-avrdft), a), to meet, to encounter (dat.).

dv-viro-TaKTos, not subject to rule, of
ov, dir-dvTqo-is, ews, 17, a meeting, an en-
things, Heb. 8 unruly, of persons,
ii. ; countering ; els dxdvrrjffiv (gen. or
I Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 6, 10!* dat. ), to meet any one.
dvo), adv. {avd), up, above, upwards ; ra &Tra^, adv. of time, once. ,

dvoj, heaven or heavenly things, as John d-irapd-PccTos, adj., not passing from, one
viii. 23. to anofh^er,not transient, unchangccible,
dvu-ycov, ov, t6, an upper chamber. See Heb. 24.* vii.
dvdyaiov.* d-Trapa-o-Kevatrros, ov, adj., unprepared^
dv<»6cv,adv. i&vio), (i) of place, from 2 Cor. ix. 4.*
above, as John iii. 31, xix. 11 ; with dTT-apv^lJiai, ovfxai, to deny, disown.
 ) ;

oir-apri — airo>-8€i|is] VOCABULARV. 401

air-apri, adv. of time (see dpn), henceforth.

, dTT-e'vavTi, adv. (gen.), ovct against, in
Rev. xiv. 13. (\\. H. read ciTr' dpn. )* the presence of, in opposition to.
dir-apTi(r|xd$, ov, 6, comjilction^ Luke d-ire'pavTos, ov {wepas), interminable^
^
xiv. 28.* I Tim. i. 4.*
dir-opx-^, rjs, r}, the first fruits, conse- d-irepwriracTTCos, adv. (TreptcrTrdw), vrithout
crated to God (see W. H., i Thess. ii. 13). distraction, i Cor. vii. ;^y.*
d-iras, aaa, av (like iras, § 37), all, all a.'iTipir\i.7\Tos, ov, muiircumcised ; fig.,
together, the whole. Acts 51.*
vii.
*
aira(nrd^o|JLai, see daird^o/xai. dir-€pxo|Jtat, to go or come from one place
dirardw, a), fjcrcj, to deceive, lead into to another, to go aivay, depart ; to go
error. (The intensive form e^airaTao} apart ; to go back, to return ; to go forth,
is more freq. as a rumour.
dirdrr], 7;s, i], deceit, fraud. dir-c'xw, to have in full, Matt. vi. 2 to befat ;

d-irdrwp, opos, 6, i] {waTrjp), without (abs. ordTTo); impers.,d7re%ei, itisenough;

,

father, i.e., in the genealogies, Heb. mid., to abstain from (gen., or dTro).
vii. 3.* dirwrrcw, Q, to disbelieve (dat.) ; to be un-
dir-avryao-^a, aros, to, reflected, splendour, faithful.
effulgence, Heb. i. 3.* oirwrTCa, as, i), unbelief, distrust^ a state
dir-€i8ov(W. H.,a0et6oj'),2aor. of d^opdw, of unbelief, i Tim. i. 13; renuTunation
which see. offaith, apostasy, Heb. iii. 12, 19.
d-ireiOcia, as, i], irilful unbelief, obstiiuicy, d-irioTTOs, ov, not believing, incredulous
disobedience. hence an unbeliever o\ infidel, faithless,
CLtriiQioi, refuse belief, be disobedient.
u), to perfidious ; pass., incredible, only Acts
d-Trci9T|s, es, unbelieving, disobedient. xxvi. 8.
dirciXio), w, rjffo}, to threaten, forbid by d-irXdoS} ovs, rj, ovv, simple, sound. Matt,
threatening, rebuke. Acts iv. 17 i ; vi. 22 Luke xi. 34.* Adv., -ws,
;

Pet. ii. 23.* sincerely, bountifully, James i. 5.*

dirciXTJ, •^s, yj, threatening, Jmrshness, dirXoTrjSi Trjros, t), simplicity, sincerity,
severity. 2)nrity.
&7r-€i)j.i (ct'/Ai, to be), to be absent, as dird, prep, gen.,//'o?;?. See § 292 ; and
I Cor. V. 3. for the force of the prep, in composi-
dirci)JLk {elfii, to go), to go aivay, to de])art, tion, § 147, a.
Acts xvii. 10.* diro-^aCvb) (for ^aivw, see § 94, 1., 6, d ;
dir-€iirov (see elrrov), mid., to renounce, fut., -^rjao/xai), to go or cmne 02it of, as
disown, 2 Cor. iv. 2.* from a ship, Luke v. 2 John xxi. 9 ; ;

d-irc£pa<rTOS, ov, adj., inca.pable of beirig to turn out, result, Luke xxi. 13 ;
tempted, James
13.* i. Phil. i. 19.*
&-ir€4>os, ov, inexperienced,
adj., un- diro-^aXXo), to throw avmy, Mark x. 50 ;

skilful in (gen.), Heb. v. 13.* Heb. X. 35.*

d7r-cK-8cxo|iai., to wait for, expect ear- diro-pXeTTa), to look ai<7«?//;wn, all besides:
nestly or patiently. hence to look earnestly at (et's), Heb.
dir-cK-8vo|iai, to strip, divest, renounce, xi. 26.*
Col. ii. 15, iii. 9.* dird-pXt^Tos, ov, verbal adj., to be thrown
d'ir^K8v<ris, ews, -q, a putting or stripping away, refused, i Tim. iv. 4.*

off,renouiwing, Col. ii. ii.* diro-PoXT|, -^s, rj, a casting away, rejection,
dir-cXavvo), to drive away. Acts xviii. 16.* loss, Acts xxvii. 22 ; Rom. xi. 15.*
*
dir-cXe-yjJK^s, ov, 6 (eXeTxw), refutation, diro-'y£vop.ai, to die, i Pet. ii. 24.
disgrace, disrepute, scorn. Acts xix. 27. * OLiro-ypa^i], rjs, t), a record, register^ en-
dir-cXcvOcpos, ov, 6, 77, made free, i Cor. rolment, Luke v. 37.*ii. 2 ; Acts
vii. 22.* in a register,
diro--Ypd(}>a>, to enrol, inscribe
'AircXXfis, ov, 6, Apelles, Rom. xvi. 10.* Luke ii. i, 3, 5 Heb. xii. 23.* ;

dir-cXirf^ci), cw, Iaj de.sj/air, Luke vi. 35 ; diro-8eiKW|j.i,, to sJimv by proof demon-
A. v., "hoping for nothing again ;" strate, set forth.
R.V. better, "never despairing" (see dird-8ei4kS, ews, ij, demonstration^ proof,
R.Y. marg.).* I Cor. ii. 4.*
D D
402 VOCABULARY. [dTro-8€KaT<J« — diro-Xiuft)

diro-8€KaT(J«, a), (i) to pay the tenth or dTTO-KXcCo), to shut close, as a door, Luke
tithe ; (2) to levy tithes on, ace. xiii. 25.*
diro-8€KTOs, ov, verbal adj., acceptable, diro-KiJiTTw, to smite or cut of; mid.,
I Tim. ii, 3, v. 4.* Gal. V. 12 (see R.V.).
diro-Se'xoiJLat, to receive with pleasure, to . diro-Kpi^a, aros, t6, an answer (perhaps
icelcome. sentence), 2 Cor, i. 9.*
diro-8T]p,€a), Q), to go from one' s own people, diro-KpivofJiai (for aor., see § 100), to
to go into another country ; only in the answer; often used (like the cor-
parables of our Lord, as Matt. xxi. 33 responding Hebrew verb) where the
Luke XV. 13. " answer" is not to a distinct question,
diro-Siiiios, ov, goiu abroad, sojourning in but to some suggestion of the accom-
afar country (R.Y.), Mark xiii. 34.* panying circumstan-ces ; so especially
diro-8i5a)|it, to give from one's self, as in the phrase diroKpidds dwev, an-
due, or as reward or testimony ; to give swered and said, as ISIatt. xi. 25 ;

hack, render, restc. e, recompense, pay, Luke i. 60.

reivard ; to yield (fruit). dir6-Kpi(ris, ews, ij, an answer, reply.
dTTO-Si-opCiiCi), to separate off, i.e., into diro-KpvirTO), to hide, conceal.
parties, Jude 19.* d'ird-Kpt«|)os, ov, hidden, concealed.
diro-8oKkfid^(o, to reject, as disapproved or diro-KTctvw, ev(b, to put to death, kill.
worthless. diro-Kv^'o), cD, to briTig forth; fig., James
d'iro-8oxTJ, ?}?, ri, acceptance, approbation, ^
i. 15, 18.*
I Tim. i. 15, iv. 9.* diro-KuXfw, law, to roll away. Matt,
Mark xvi. *
diro-Gco-ts, ews, t], a putting away, i Pet. xxviii. 2 ; 3 ; Luke xxiv. 2.
iii. 21 ; 2 Pet. i. 14.* diro-Xa[ipdv(o, to receive from any one
diro-9T]KTj, 77s, nf], a repository, granary, to receive back, as requital ; to receive
storehouse. in full, obtain ; mid. , to take aside
diro-BTjo-avpt^o), to treasure up, lay by in with one's self, Mark vii. 33.
store, I Tim. vi. 19.* dird-Xavo'is, ews, 7/ {\avu), to enjoy), en-
diro-GXipu), to2}ress closely, viii. 45.* Luke joyment, 1 Tim. vi. 17; Heb. xi. 25.*
dTro-0VT|(rKa) the simple
{d-n-o, intensive ; diro-XciTra), to leave behind, to
leave, to
6vqaKU) is rare), to die, (i) of natural desert ; pass. to be reserved.
,

death, human, animal, or vegetable diro-X€(x", to lick, as a dog, Luke xvi.

(2) of spiritual death (3) in Epp. of ;
21. (W. H., ^irCKelxo}.)
St. Paul, to die to (dat. ), as Rom. vi. 2. dir-oXXvjjLt (see § 116, 2), to destroy, to
For tenses see dvrjaKco. bring to nought, to put to death; to
diro-KaG-CcTTiiiii, diroKaTacrTriau} (also -Kad- lose ; mid. ,
pass, (and 2nd perf. ), to
lardu) and -dv(j}, see Mark 12 ; Acts
ix. 2)crish, die ; to be lost.
i. 6), to restore, e.g., to health, or as a 'AttoXXvwv, ovros, b (prop, part of
state or kingdom. diroWvu)), Apollyon, the destroying one.
diro-KaXvTrrw, to uncover, bring to light, Rev. ix. II.*
reveal. 'AiroXXwvta, aj, t], Apollonia, a city of
dTro-KdXvxj/iS, ews, t], revelation, manifesta- Macedonia, Acts xvii. i.*
tion, enlightejiment ; apocaljrpse. 'AiroXXc&s, c6, 6, Apollos.
diro-Kapa-SoK^a, as, 17 (/cdpa, head ; dirb, diro-Xo-yedfiai, oO/xai (X6705), to defend
intensive), earnest expectation, as if oneself by speech, to plead, excuse
looking for with the head outstretched, oneself.
Rom. viii. 19 Phil, i, 20.* ; diro-Xcy^a, as, t], a verbal defence,
diro-KaT-aXXdo-crw, to reconcile, change "apology."
from one state of feeling to another, diro-Xovu), mid., to wash away, as sins,
Eph. ii.16 ; Col. i. 20, 22.* Acts xxii. 16 •
I Cor. vi. 11.*
diro-KaTa-o-Tao-is, ews, i), restitution, resto- diro-XvTpcDo-is, ews, r/, redemption, de-
ration,, Acts iii. 21.* liverance.
dir6-Kci|xai, to be laid away, to be reserved diro-Xvo), to release, let go, to send away
for (dat.). spec, to 2^ut away a wife, divorce;
diro-Kc<j>aX£^w (/ce^aX?)), to behead. mid. and pass. , to depart.
 ,; ;

airo-(ia(r<r« — a-irpo5 itos VOCABULARY. 403

diro-jido-o-w, ^w, to wipe of, as Just from diro-CTTOjiaTi^w {aTofia), to provoke to

the feet ; mid., Luke x. ii.* speak, Luke xi. 53.*
diro-ve|ift>, to assign to, to give, i Pet. airo-a-rpi^, to turn away, trans, (with
iii. 7.* diro, as Acts iii. 26) restore, replace, ;

diro-vtirra), mid., to icash oneself, Matt, Matt. xx\'i. 52; mid., to desert, rejeety
xxvii. 24.* ace.
diro-iri'Trrft), to fall from. Acts ix. 24.* diro-cmryca), u), to detest, to abhor, Rom.
diro-irXavdft), w, to lead astray, Mark xii. 9.*
xiii. 22; I Tim. vi. 10.* diro-o-uvdYw-yos, ov, excluded from the
diro-irX^u), evaoj, to sail away. SY'^agogue, excommunicated, John ix.
diro-irXvvw, to wash or riiise, as nets, 22, xii. 42, xvi, 2.*
Luke v. 2. (W. H., ttXi^j^w.)* diro-Td<r<ra),^w, mid., "to set oneself
diro-irvi'Ya), to suffocate, choke. Matt. xiii. apart from ;" to take leave of, renounce,
7 Luke viii. 7, 33. *
; scad away (dat. ).
d-Trop€«, cD (TTopos, resource), only mid. diro-TeXc«, tD, ecrw, to perfect, James i. 1 5 ;

in N.T., ^0 be in doubt, to he per- Luke xiii. 32 (W. H.).*

plexed. d-rro-TiS-qfii, mid. , to lay off or aside, to
diropia, as, t), perplexity, disquiet, Luke renounce.
xxi. 25.* diro-Tivao-o-oj, to shake off, Luke ix. 5 ;
*
dirop-piiTTu), to throw or cast daicn or off. Acts xxviii. 5.
*
Acts xxvii. 43 ; eavrovs understood. diro-Tivw (or -tcw), nVw, to repay, Phile-
dir-op<|>avtt(>> {6p(pavos), " to make or- mon 19.*
phans of ;
" to bereave, separate from^ diro-ToXjidw, C), to dare boldly, Rom. x.
pass., I Thess. ii, 17.* 20.*
diro-o-Keudtofiai, to ])ack aicay, pack xqj. diro-TOfiia, as, -q {refivu, to cut), severity,
Acts xxi. 1 5. ( W. H. eiriaKevd^oiiaL. )* , Rom. xi. 22.*
dTro-o-KCaarfjia, aros, to {(XKla^u}), a shade ; diro-TOfxws, adv., severely, sharply, 2 Cor.
met. , a slight trace, James i. 17.* xiii. 10 i.
;
13.* Tit.
diro-crirdft>, Q, dcroi, to draw out, un- diro-Tpt-iro),mid., to turn aicay frov
sheathe ; to icithdraw, to draw away. shun, ace, 2 Tim. iiL 5.*
diro-cTTcuria, aj, i], defection, dejmrture, dir-o-wr^, as (d7ret/xt), absence, Phil, ii
apostasy, Acts xxi. 21 ; 2 Thess. ii. 3.* 12.*
dtro-CTTdo-Lov, ov, to, desertion, repudia- diro-4>€p«, to bear away from one place
tion, divorce ; met. , bill of divorce, as to another.
Matt. V. 31. d'Tro-4>€vy«, to escap)e, 2 Pet. i. 4, ii. 18,
diro-oTeydtw [cTeyq), to unroof, Mark ,
20.*^
ii. 4 probably to remove the awning
; diro-4>6€Yyop.ai, to speak out, declare.
*
or covering planks of the court. Acts ii. 4, 14, xxvi. 25.*
dTO-<rr€XX<i), to send av:ay, send forth, diro-<|>opTiJ^o|jLai {(popros, a burden), to
send, as a messenger, commission, etc. unlade. Acts xxi. 3.*
spoken of prophets, teachers, and other ews, 7) {dtrb, intens. ), use,
dir<J-xpilo'«'S.
messengers perhaps in Mark iv. 29, ;
consuraption. Col. ii. 22.*
to thrust forth the sickle into corn, but diro-xwp^'w, Co, to go aicay, depart, Matt.
more prob. to send forth the sickle, vii, 23 ; Luke Lx. 39 ; Acts xiii.
i.e., the reapers.
diro-o-Tcpt'o), Ci, 'f}<Tw, to defraud, abs., as diro-x^p^twi io part asunder. Acts xv. 39
Mark x. 19 deprive of by fraud, ace.
; Rev. vi. 14.*
and gen. i Tim. vi. 5., diro->|ruxw, "to breathe out," to faint,
*
diro-cToX'^, TjS, f. , apostleship. as from fear, Luke xxi. 26.
diro-o-ToXos, ov, 6, (i) a messenger; {2) an "Ainrios, ov, 6, Appiiis. "Airtriov (p'jpov,
apostle, i.e., a messenger of Christ to the Apjrian JFay, a road fiom Rome
the world ; used of others beside Paul to Brundusium, constructed by Appius
and the Twelve, Acts xiv. 4, 14 Claudius Cfesar, Acts xxviii. 15.*
I Thess. ii. 6 ; 2 Cor. viii. 23. Christ d-irpos-iTOS, tidj. (irpos, eZ/u), not to be
'^
himself is so called, Heb. iii i. approached,
404 VOCABULARY, [a-Trp<5s-KOiros 6.ppa.^o%

d-irpds-Koiros, ov {kSttto}), act., not caus- number.

dpi0(iLC(i), tD, to

ing to offend, i Cor. x. 32 ; pass. , not dpiOfids, ov, ft number. 6,

caused to offend, without offence, Acts *Api|xa6aCa, as, rj, Arimuthcea.
xxiv. 16 ; Phil. i. 10.* *Api(rTapx.os, ov, 6, Aristarchus.
d-Trpoo-wTTO-XTiirTws (W. H., -Xti/xttt-), dpKTTdci), w, -qcw (Apiarov), to take the
adv., not taken by appea7'a7ice, im- morning meal, Luke xi. 37 ; John
paHially, i Pet. i. 17.* xxi. 12, 15.*
d-irraio-TOS, ov (Trrai'w, to fall), ivithout dpiCTcpoSi d, bv, the left ; 77 dpia-repd
stumbling or falling, Jude 24.* (xet'p), tJie left hand. Matt. vi. 3 ; i^
diTTO), \pu), to kindle, as light or fire ;
dpKTTepwv, on the left, Mark x. 37
mid. , Syn. 7.
to touch. ( W. H. ) ; Luke without e^
xxiii. 33,
A'Tr4>(o, Apphia, Philemon 2
OS, ri, ;
2 Cor. vi. 7. (The more common
perhaps Philemon's wife. * word is evibvvfjios. )*
dir(D0e<d, w, diruffu}, mid., to repulse, to 'ApuTTcJpovXos, ov, 6, AHstobulus, Rom.
reject. xvi. 10.*
dirwXcut, as, 17 {d7r6Wv/ii), consumption, dpio-Tov, 01^, rb, the morning meal. Matt.
waste, of things ; destruction, of per- xxii. 4 ; Luke xi. 38, xiv. 12.* Cf.
sons death by violence ptcrdition.
; ;
beiirvov.
dpd, as, ij, curse, imprecation, Rom. dpKCTos, 77, bv, sufficient. Matt. vi. 34,
iii. 14.* X. 25 ; I Pet. iv. 3.*
dpa, conj., illative, tlierefore, thence, dpK€<i>, cD, to be sufficient for ; mid. or
since. 406. See
dpa, adv. interro-
§ pass., to be satisfied with.
gative, where the answer is negative dpKTOS (W. H., ApKos), ov, 6, ^, a bear,
only Luke xviii. 8 ; Acts viii. 30 ;
Rev. xiii. 2.*
Gal. ii. 17. &pp.a, aros, to, ft chariot. Acts viii. 28,
'ApaP^a, as, Arabia, Gal. i. 17, iv. 25. *
77, 29, 38 Rev. ix. 9.*;

"Apap., 6 (Heb. ), Aram, Matt. i. 3 Luke ; 'App.a7«88«v (Heb., /Ac mountain of

*
iii- 33- Megiddo, see Judges v. 19 ; 2 Kings
"Apa>|/, a/3os, 6, Arabian, Acts ii. ii.* xxiii. 29), Armageddon, Rev. xvi. 16.*
*
Q, to linger, to delay, 2 Pet. ii. 3.
dp-yc'd), dppiOttO} o'Wj *'to fit together;" mid.,
dp^oSf ov (d, epyov), not ivorking, idle. to espouse, to betroth, 2 Cor. xi. 2.*
dpYvpcos, oOs, d, oOj', made of silver. dp)ioS) oO, 6, ft joint, i.e., of limbs in a
dpyvpLov, lof, TO, silver, apiece of silver^ body, Heb. iv. 12.*
a shekel, money in general. dpv€op.ai, oO/xai, <o deny, disclaim, disown.
dpYvpo-Koiros, ov, 6, one who works in dpvLOv, 01', TO (dimin. of dp-qv), a little
*
silver, a silversmith. Acts xix. 24. lamb, John xxi. 15 freq. in Rev., of ;

dpYvpos, ov, b, silver. Christ.

"Apcios ird'yos,ov, 6, Areopagus, or Mars' dpoTpida), a), daio, to plough, Luke xvii.
Hill, an open space on a hill in Athens, 7 I Cor. ix. 10.*
;

where the supreme court was held dporpov, ov, rb, a plough, Luke ix. 62.*
Acts xvii. * ("Apeios is an adj. from dfyiraYH, ^s, (dpTrdfw), the act of plun-
"J?

"A/jT/s, Jfars. dering, extortion. Matt, xxiii. 25 ; Luke

'ApeoTraY^TT^s, ov, 6, a judge of the Areo- xi. 39; Heb. x. 34.*
pagite court, Acts xvii. 34. * dpira'Yp.dSf ov, 6, spoil, an object of eager
dpeoTKCia, as, rj, a jyleasing, a desire of desire, a prize(K.\.), Phil. ii. 6.*
pleasing, Col. i. 10.* dpird^w, do-w (2 aor. pass., -qpTrdyrjv), to
dp^o-Kta), dp^au}, to be jdeasing to, to seek snatch, seize violently, take by force; to
to please or gratify, to accommodate carry off s^iddenly.
oneself to (dat. ). dpira^, a7os, adj., rapacious, ravening^
dp«rT<$S, rj, bv, acceptable, pleasing to. extortionate.
'Ap^Ttts, a, 6, Aretas, a king of Arabia d^papuv, wi'os, 6 (from l^th.), a pledge
Petnea, 2 Cor. xi. 32.* an earnest, ratifying a contract, 2 Cor
dpcrfj, ^s, virtue, energy, courage, I'hil.
77, 22, v. 5 ; Eph. i. 14.*
i.

iv. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 3, 5.* dp^flt^os (W. H.. d/xi0os), ov, not seamed
*
(dprjv) gen., dpvdi, a Jamb, Luke x. 3.* »r scwUy John xix. 23.
 -
, ,

&^pT)v — ^*A<riavds] VOCABULARY. 405

tt^pT]V, ev (W. H., of th€ male

ap<xr]v^ cv), dpX'icpcvs, ewj, 6, (i) tlie high priest; so
sex, Rom. i. 27 Rev. xii. 5, 13.*
;
of Christ; (2) a chief priest, i.e., the
&^pi]Tos, ov, adj., unspoken, unspeakable, head priest in his class. See i Chron.
2 Cor. xii. 4.* xxiv. 4-18.
&ppa>(rTos> o;/, adj. {pwvpvfxi), infirm, sick. dpxi'-'n'oiiJLTJv, evoj, 6, tlie chief sheplierd,
dpCeVO-KoCTqS, 01', 111. {&p<T7}V KOlTTj), O a title of Christ, i Pet. v. 4.*
sodomite. "Apxuriros, ov, 6, ArcJiippus, Col. iv. 17,
*ApT€p.as, a, 6, Artcmas, Tit. iii. 12.* Phileni. 2.*
"ApTtfiis, t5oy or 10%, 7), Artemis (by the dpxi-o'vvd'ywyoSj ov, 6, presiding officer
Latins called Diana), the heathen or ruler of a synagogue.
deity of hunting also, the goddess of
; dpxi-TCKTwv, avos, 6, a master builder,
the Moon. She was worshipped at an architect, i Cor. iii. 10.*
Ephesus as "the personification of dpxt-T€X«VT]s, ov, 6, a chief collector of
the fructifying and all-nouri.shiiig taxes, a chief ^mblican, Luke xix. 2.*
powers of nature," Acts xix.* dpxi-TpCKXivos, ov, 6, a 2i''€sid€nt of a
dpTc'iiwv, oj'os, m. {aprani}, to suspend), feast, John ii. 8, 9.*
prob. the foresail. Acts xxvii. 40.* dpx*^, rule (gen.), only Mark
to reign, to
dpTi, adv. of time, now, already, lately, V. 42 ; Rom.
xv. 1 2 ; mid. , to begin,
well-nigh ; with other particles, as often with infin. dp^dfievos dirb, begin-
Hws &pTi, till noic ; air' dpri, from iioic ning from 287).
(cf. §
or henceforu'ard. dpXCDV, ovTo^, prop, particip., ruler,
6,
apTi-yt'vviiTos, ov, new- or recently born, chief 2)crson, 2yi'ince, magistrate.
I Pet. ii. 2.* dp(i)|xa, aros, to, spicery, an aromatic.
&pTios, OV, adj., 2^<'-Kf^ct, complete, want- *Ao-d (Heb.), Asa, Matt. i. 7, 8.*
ing in nothing, 2 Tim. iii. 17.* d-o-dXcvTos, ov, unshaken, immovable^
dpros, ov, 6, bread, loaf, food ; fig. Acts xxvii. 41 ; Heb. xii. 28.*
spiritual nutriment ; dproi ttjs irpo- d-orpco-Tos, ov, adj. {a^evvvfxi), not to be
d^creus, sJiewbread. q uenchsd, inextingu ishablc.
dprvw (dpw, to fit), to season, to flavour, do-cPcia, as, ?;, impiety, imgodlitiess,
as with salt, Mark ix. 50 Luke xiv. ; wickedness. Syn. 36.
34 fig.. Col. iv. 6.*
; dccpcb), a), 770-0;, to act or live im2nously,
'Ap<|>a|dS, 6 (Heb.), ArpJmxad, Luke iii. wickedly, 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; Jude 15.*
d-o-€p^S, ^s (<T^/3oyuat), impious, ungodly,
dpx-dyycXos, ov, 6, an arch- or chief wicked.
angel, 1 Thess. iv. 16 Jude 9.* ; d-o-eXYcia, as, 77, excess, wantonness,
dpxaios, a, ov, old, ancient. lasciviousness.
'Apx^Xaos, 01', 6, Archdaus, Matt. ii. 22.* d-(rT)(ios, not remarkable, obscure, ignoble,
dpx^, 77s, f., (i )« beginning, of time, space, Aats xxi. 39.*
*
or series the outermost point, Actsx. 11.
;
'
Aff-iip, 6, Asher, Luke ii. 36 ; Rev. vii. 6.
Used of Christ, Col. i. 18 Rev. iii. 14, ; d(r0€V€ia, as, 77, weakness, bodily infir-
xxi. 6, xxii. 13. Adv. phrases aw : mity, sickness ; fig. , mental deprressioii,
apxns, from the beginning ; iv dpxv, ^^^ distress.
t?ie beginning; i^ dpxv^, from the beg in- d(r6€vca>, tD, to be iveak, sick, faint ; fig.
ning orfrom the first; Kardpxds, atthebc- to be fainthearted.
ginning ; ttjv dpxw originally {2)rule, i . aa-9ivr][ia, aros, to, weakness, infirmity ;
pre-eminence, princi2)ality (see a.px<a) : fig., Rom. XV. I.*
espec. in pi., Apxe-i-, riders, magistrates, d-<r0€vif|s, €s {(x 6 ivos, strength), "without
as Luke xii. 11 ; of supramundane strength," weak, infirm, sickly ; fig.,
powers, 2^ri'>^(-'i2^alitics, as Eph, iii. 10. fainthearted, afflicted.
dpx-TjYOS, ov, 6 {dpxv, dyio), the beginner, *Aa-la, as, 77, Asia, i. e. that district in ,

author, captain, prince, Acts iii. 15, the west of Asia Minor afterwards
V. 31 Heb.; ii, lo, xii. 2.* called Proconsular Asia, with Ephesus
dpx-i«paTiK<Js, rji ov, belonging to the its capital.
officeof the high jy^'iest, pontifical. Acts 'Atriavos, ov, 6, belonging to Asia, Acts;
iv. 6.* XX. 4.*
406 VOCABULARY. [' Aorutpx'HS —avryd^d)
'Ao-idpxT]s, ov, 6, an Asiarch, one of ten d-<rv|x<|>'ovos, ov, dissonant, discordant.
appointed to preside over the worship Acts xxviii. 25.*
and celebrations in honour of the d-o-vv€Tos, ov, without understanding,
gods, Acts xix. 31.* foolish.
do-iT^a, as, 7) {alTos, corn), abstinence, a d-<rvv9€Tos, ov, covenant-breaking, treach-
fast, Acts xxvii. 21.* erous, Rom. i. 31.*
drriTOs, ov, fasting, Acts xxvii, 33.* do-<{>dX€ia, as, 77, security. Acts v. 23 ;
dirxco), w, -qau, to exercise onoself, exert 1 Thess. V. 3 ; certainty, Luke i. 4.*
Acts xxiv, 16.*
diligence in, d-<r4>aXT|s, ^s (o-^dXXw, fallo), firm, safe,
•drK^s, ov, 6, a bottle of skin. Matt. sure, Phil. iii. i Heb. vi. 19 certain,; ;

ix. 17; Mark ii. 22; Luke v. 37, Acts XXV. 26. rb dacpaXh, the cer-
38.* tainty. Acts xxi. 34, xxii. 30.* Adv.,
.

uo-fi^vus, adv. (from part, of i]dofMai), ivith -cDs, safely, certainly.

joy, gladly. Acts ii. 41 (W. H. omit) a<r^aKi^<a, cw (mid. ), to make fast, to
Acts xxi. 17.* secure, Matt, xxvii. 64, 65, 66 ; Acts
.(iL-o-o<j)os, ov, not ivise, Eph. v. 15.* xvi. 24.*
do-Trdto^iai, dep., to embrace, salute, to d<rxT]|iov€'a), w, to act improperly or un-
greet (actually or by letter) ; always of seemly, I Cor. vii. 36, xiii. 5.*
persons, except Heb. xi. 13, "having dcrxi]|xo<rvvT], unseemliness, shame,
77s, 77,
;'
embraced ( R. V. gi'eeted ) the promises
,
Rom. i. xvi. 15.*
27; Rev.
to take leave of {only Acts xx. i ; in d-<rxT|(jL«v, ov ((rxT7Atct), uncomely, inde-
xxi. 6, W. H. read (XTraa-Trdfo/xai). corous, I Cor. xii. 23.*
d(ritrao'|JLds, ov, 6, salutation, greeting. d-<rwTia, as, -q (o-w^w), an abandoned
d-(ririXos, 01;, ov ((TTriXos), without spot, course, profliga^cy.
unblemished. d-o-<oTws, adv., profligately, dissolutely,
*
dtrirCs, 1^0$, 77, an asp, a venomous ser- Luke XV. 1 3.
pent, Rom. iii. 13.* draKTcw, Q, to behave disorderly, 2 Thess.
d-tnrovSos, ov {(nrovd-//), " not to be bound iii. 7.*
by truce," implacable, 2 Tim. iii. 3; d-TUKTos, OV (rdo-o-o;), irregular, disor-
Rom. i. 31 (not W. H.).* derly, I Thess. V. 14.* Adv., -ws,
d(r<rdpiov, iov, t6, a small coin equal to disorderly, irregularly, 2 Thess. iii.
the sixteenth part of a denarius, an 6, II.*
as. See § 154, a. d-T6Kvos, OV, 6, 77 {tIkvov), cMldUss, Luke
&<r<rov, adv. (compar. of ^yxOj nearer, XX. 28, 29.*
close by. Acts xxvii. 13.* dTcvft", cw, to look intently upon (dat. or
"A(r<ros, 01;, 77, Assos, Acts xx. 13, 14.* els).

d-o-TaWuj, cD, Tycro;, to be unsettled, to have drcp, adv. as prep, with gen. without,
, ,

no fixed abode, i Cor. iv. 11.* in tJie absence of, Luke xxii. 6, 35. *
dcTcios, ov {6xxrv, city, of. urbane), fair, ar\.\iaX,<a, au, to dishonour, contemn,
*
beautiful, Acts vii. 20 ; Heb. xi.23. whether persons or things, by word
do-W|p, ^po^, 6, a star. or by deed.
d-(mr|piKTos, adj. {cT-qpl^oi), unsettled, dTi|j,{a, as, 77, dishonour, ignominy, dis-
unstable, 2 Pet. ii. 14, iii. 16.* grace, ignoble use.
d-o-TopYos, ov {(TTopyr}), without natural d-Tijios, ov {rifxr}), contemned, despised.
affection, Rom. i. 31 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3.* dTi|i6a), Q (or -dw, W. H. ), to dishonour,
•a-<rTO\^&), u) {<xt6xos), to miss in aim,
*
treat with indignity, Mark xii. 4.
swerve from, I Tim. i. 6, vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. drp-Cs, Ibos, 77, a vapour. Acts ii. 19,
ii. 18.* James iv. 14.
^
'do-Tpair/i, ris, -f), lightning, vivid bright- d-Tojiov, ov, rb {r^jJLvw), an atom of time,
ness, lustre. moincnt, i Cor. xv. 52.*
Ufrrpaino), to flash, as lightning, Luke d-Toiros, ov (rdTTos), misplaced, unbe-
xvii. 24 ; to be lustrous, xxiv. 4.* coming, mischievous.
ido-Tpov, ov, TO, a constellation, star. 'ArrdXcitt, as, 77, Attalia, Acts xiv. 25.
"Ao-v-yKpiTos, ov, 6, Asynerltus, Rom. atryd^o), to shine upon, to enlighten {da,t.),
xvi. 14.* 2 Cor. iv. 4.*
 , )

^^y^ — d<|)-iTi|J.iJ VOCABULARY. 407

avyfj, 17s, ?7, splendour^ daybreak, Acts exclude these forms from the N.T.,
XX. II,* everywhere reading avrov, avrcp, etc.
A^J^ovoTos, ou, 6 (Lat. ), Augustus^ Luke auTO-<|><i>pos, ov {(pwp, a thief), in the v&ry
ii. I .
* Compare ^e^aa-ros. act, John viii. 4, neut. dat. with iirl.
avdd8T]S, es {avTos, TJdo/xai), self-pleasing, See W. H.*
arrogant, Tit. i. 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10.* avTo-x€ip, adj., with ones own hands,
avOaCpcTos, ou {avros, alpeofxac), of one's Acts xxvii. 19.*
own accord, 2 Cor. viii. 3, 17.* avx|AT)p6s, d, bv, dark, dismal, 2 Pet. i.
ov0€VT€w, tD, to exercise authority over 19.*
(gen.), I Tim. ii. 12.* take away, as Luke x. 42 ;
d(|>-aip€(i), to

avXc'ci), Q, Tjo-oi}, to play on a pipe or fute. to take aioay sin, only Rom. xi. 27 ;
avXrj, rjs, ?) (dw, <o hloiv), an open space, Heb. X. 4 ; ^0 smite off, as Matt. xxvi.
court or hall of a house, as Luke xi. 21, 51, and parallel passages.
xxii. 55 ; « sheepfold, John x, i, 16. d-<j>avT|s, ^s {(paivQ}), 7iot appearing, hidden,
avXTiTTJs, OX), 6, a player on a pipe or Heb. iv. 13.*
*
flute. Matt. ix. 23 ; Rev. xviii. 22. d-({>avit(D, to put out of sight, to disfigure.
avX^t^H''"-''' (^0 lodge in the open air,) to Matt. vi. 20; pass., to vanish,
16, 19,
lodge, take up a temporary abode, perish, Acts xiii. 41 James iv. 14.* ;

Matt. xxi. 17; Luke xxi. 37.* d-<|>avio-|x6s, ov, 6, a disajjpearing, Heb.
avXos, oxj, (dw), a flute, pipe, i Cor. viii. 13.*
xiv. 7.* d-<|)avTos, ov, disajjpearing, not seen,
av^dvcD (also aij^o)), av^-qcw, trans., to Luke xxiv. 31.*
make to grow, as i Cor. iii. 6, 7 ; pass. d(|>-€8pwv, G)vos, 6,
^^
draiight,'^ latrine,
to arrive at maturity ; generally in- Matt. XV. 17 ; Mark vii. 19.*
trans. to grow, increase, as Matt. vi. 28.
, d-<|>ei8ia, as, 7) {(peido/uLai), severity. Col.
a^^T](ris, ewj, 77, growth, increase, Eph. ii. 23.*
iv. 16 ; Col. ii. 19.* d<|>6XdTT]s, TTjTos, simjiUcity, sincerity.
*
ai;piov, adv. [aUpa, morning breeze, S.w), Acts 46.
ii.

to-morrow; 77 (sc, rjixipa) aHpiov, the d(j>-eo-is, ews, f (dcpiTjfxL), deliverance ; lit.,
morrow. only Luke elsewhere always of
iv. 18 ;

avtrrripos, d, 6v, (dry,) harsh, austere, deliverance from sin, remission, for-
.

Luke xix. 21, 22.* giveness.

avrapKcia, as, 7), sufficiency, 2 Cor. ix. 8 ; d<})T|, 77s, 7) (dTTTOj, to fit), that which con-
contentment, i Tim. vi. 6.* nects, a joint, Eph. iv. 16 ; Col. ii. 19.'"

avT-dpKT]s, es {dpKicj, sufficient to self), d-(j>6ap(r£a, as, 77, incorrujMon, immor-

content, satisfied, Phil. iv. 11.* I Cor. XV. ; Rom. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i.
tality,
auTo-Kard-KpiTos, ov, self-comlemned, Tit. 10; perpietuity, uncorruptness (R.V.).
iii. II.* Eph. vi. 24; Tit. ii. 7. (AV. H.;
avTop-dros, ov, spontaneous, of its own d(pdopia. )*
accord, Mark iv. 28 ; Acts xii. 10.* il-<f)9apTos, ov {(pdeipoj), incorruj)tible, im-
avT-6im]s, ov, 6, an eye-ivitness, Luke mortal, as God, Rom. i. 23 ; i Cor.
i. 2.* ix. 25, XV. 52; I Tim. i. 17; i Pet.
avTos, »?, 0, pron., he, she, it; in nom. i.^4, 23, iii. 4.*
always emphatic. Properly demon- (see § 112),
d<|>-iT]|xi to send away, as
strative, self, very ; joined ^vith each of {i) to let go, emit. Matt, xxvii. 50 ;
the persons of the verb, with or without Mark xv. 37 dismiss, in senses varying
;

a pers. pron., I myself, thou thyself; according to the obj. ; spec, to dis-
with the article, the same; the same regard, pass by, send away, divorce;
with (dat. ), I Cor. xi. 5. eirl to avro, hence (2) to forgive (dat. pers.), very
ai, the same place or time, together, /card often ; (3) to permit, concede, abs. or ,

t6 airrb, together, only Acts xiv. i. with inf., as Mark x. 14 or ace, as ;

See § 335. Matt. iii. 15 (dat., Matt. v. 40); or

avTov, adv. of place, here, there. IVa, subj., Mark xi. 6 or subj. alone, ;

avTov, ^s, ov, pron. reflex, (contr. for Luke vi. 42 (4) to leave ^ depart fromy
;

eaiToO), of himself, herself, etc. (W. H. abandon, leave behind.

408 VOCABULARY. [a<|>iKv^o|jLai
— paXXw
d<|>iKV€0|xai, ovfxai (2 aor., a(P'iKby.t)v), to go ]\rai-k xiv. 58 ; 2 Cor. v. i ; Col.
abroad, to reach, Rom. xvi. 19.* ii. II.*
a-<j)i\-d7a9os, ov,not loving good7iess(R. V. dxXvs, vos, 77, a thick mist, darkness,
or good men
(A.Y.), 2 Tim. iii. 3.* Acts xiii. II.*
a-<|>tX-dp'Yvpos, ov, not lof'vg money, not d'Xpc^oS) ov, slothful, doing no good,
covetous, I Tim. iii. 3 ; Heb. xiii. 5.* unprof table, Matt. xxv. 30 ; Luke
d<|>i^is, ews, 77, "arrival ;" departure, Acts xvii. 10.*
XX. 29.* d-xpci-ot^ (^Y- H., dxpeooj), pass., to be-
d<|)-i(rTT|(jLi, aToaTT](r(jj, trans, in pres., come useless, Rom. iii. 12.*
imperf., i aor., fut., to lead away, d-Xpii<rTos, ov, useless, unprofitable,
to seduce;
intrans. in perf., plup., Philemon ii.*
2 aor., to go aioay, depart, avoid, dxpi and dxpt-^, adv. as prep., "with gen.,
v'ithdraio from (often with ciTro) to, unto, as far as, whether of place,
mid., to fail, abstain from, absent time, or degree. dxpi-^ o5 or axpis
oneself. alone, with the force of a conjunction,
d<|>v(i), adv., suddenly. Acts ii. 2, xvi. 26, until. See ixexpi-
xxviii. 6.* lx\vpov, ov, TO, cJuiff, strait'. Matt. iii. 12;
d-4>6Pb)s, adv., witlwut fear. Luke iii. 17.*
d<j>-o|xoi,6(i), w, to make like, in pass., d-\j/€v8T|s, €s, free from falsehood, truth-
Heb. vii. 3.* ful. Tit. i. 2.*
d(f>-opda), u) ciTr- or d(p-e'cSou), to look
(2 a., d\|/ivdos, 01', 77, wormwood Rev. viii. 11.*
away from others at (et's) one, to regard d-\|;vxos, ov, without life, inanimate,
earnestly, Heb. xii. 2 ; to see, Phil, I Cor. xiv. 7.*
ii. 23.*

d<j)-opitw, fut. £w, trans., to separate from

(e/c or airb), to sep)arate for a purpose B.
(et's. Acts xiii, 2 ; Rom. i. i or inf., ;

Gal. i. 15) ; <o excommunicctte, Luke B, p, PTJTa, beta, b, the second letter.
vi. 22. Numerally, ^ =2 j3,= 2000. ;

d4>-op|XTi, 17$, 7;, an occasion, opjmrt unity. BdoX, 6, Tj (Heb., blaster), Baal, chief
a^pLt^oi, to foam at tJie 'mouth, ]\Iark deity of the Phcenicians ; the Sun,
ix. 18, 20".* Rom. xi. 4 (fern.), from i Kings
d(f>pos, ov, 6, foam, froth, Luke ix. 39,* xix. 18.*
d-<^po<rvvTi, T}s, 77, foolishness, Mark vii. BaPvXwv, Babylon, lit.. Matt,
wvos, 77,

22 ; 2 Cor. xi. i, 17, 22.* i. II, 12, 17Acts vii. 43, and prob.
;

&-<j>p«v, ovos, 6, 77 {(pprju), univise, incon- I Pet. V. 13mystically, in Rev.*

;

siderate, foolish. Pa9|x($s, ov, 6 (/Satj/w, to step), a step or

d<|>-v7rv<5w, Q {cLTro, intensive), to sleep degree in dignity, i Tim. iii. 13.*
soundly, or perhaps simply fall asleep, Pddos, ous, TO, depth, lit. or fig. 2 Cor. ;

Luke viii. 23.* viii. 2, 77 /card ^ddovi irruxda, their

^.(jxovos, ov, mute, without the faculty of dec]) jwverty.
spjeech : of animals. Acts viii. 32 ; PaOiivb), vvi3, to deepen, Luke vi. 48.*
2 Pet. ii. 16 of idols, i Cor. xii. 2.
; PaOvs, eta, v, deep, John iv. 1 1 in Luke ;

In I Cor. xiv. 10 the R.V. marg. is xxiv. 6p6pov padioi, in the early
I,

probably the correct rendering.* dawn (W. H., /Sa^^ws, adv., or perhaps
"Axat, 6 (Heb.), AcJmz, Matt. i. 9.* a genit. form).
'Axata, aj, 17, AcJuiia, the Roman pro- Batov, 01', Tb, branch, John xii. 13.*
vince of Greece, including Corinth BaXad^, 6 (Heb.), Balaam. name em- A
and its isthmus. blematic of seducing teachers, 2 Pet.
'AxaiiKos, ov, 6, Achaicus, i Cor. xvi. ii. 15 Jude ii Rev. ii. 14.*
; ;

BaXdK, 6 (Heb.), Bakik, Rev. ii. 14.*

d-xdpicTTos, ov, unthankful, Luke vi. 35 ;
PaXdvTiov("\V. H., -XX-), ov, rb, a money-
2 Tim. iii. 2.* hag or purse.
*A\d^, 6 (Heb.), Achim, Matt. i. 14.* PdXXto, /SaXu), fifjSXrjKa, ^^a\ov, to throw,
6.-\i^po "Koiryros, ov, not made by Jmnds, cast, put (with more or less force, as
 .

paTTTi^to — Pa<riX6vsJ VOCABCLARt. 409

modified by tlie context) of liquids, ; Bap-6oXo)JLatos, ov, 0, Bartholomew, sur-

to pour. Pass, peif., with intrans. name (prob.) of Nathanael.
force, as Matt. viii. 6 ("has been Bap-ii]<rovs, ov, 6, Bar-Jesus, Acts xiii. 6.*
cast"), lidh. The verb is intrans., Bap-i(Dvds, a, 6, Bar-jmias, surname of
Acts xxvii. 14, rushed. In Mark Peter, ^latt. xvi. 17.*
xiv. 65 the true reading is prob. eXa^ov. Bap-vdpas, a, 6, Barnabas, "Son of
Generally trans, with aco. and dat., exhortation " or " comfort." See
ore7ri(acc., sometimes gen.), eis, cltto, irapa.K\7)aiS.
iK, and- other prepp. or advv. Pdpos, ovsy TO, vcigM, burden ; onlv
PairTit«)> o'w (in form a frequentative of
^oLTTTU}, see § 144, b), (i) mid. or pass., Bap-(rapds, a, 0, Barsabas. Two are
reflex., to bathe oneself, only in JMark * mentioned. Acts i. 23, xv. 22.
vii. 4 ; Luke xi. 38 ; (2) of the Chris- Bap-Ti|JLaios, ov, 6, Bartirnaius.
tian ordinance, to immerse, submerge, Papvs, era, v (cf. /Sdpos), (l) heavy. Matt,
to baptise. The material ("vvater, fire, xxiii. 4 (2) weighty, important. Matt, ;

the Holy Spirit) is expressed by dat., xxiii. 23 ; 2 Cor. x. 10 ; (3) op>2rressivc

els or iv ; the purpose or result by els. or grievous. Acts xx. 29, xxv. 7 ;
Pass, or mid., to be baptised, to receive I John V. 3.*

baptism; (3) fig., of overwhelming '

Papv-Ti(ios, ov, of great pi'ice. Matt.
woe, Matt. xx. 22, 23 Luke xii. 50. ; I
xxvi. 7.*
pdimorp.a, aros, to, the rite or ceremony Poo-avi^w ^aaavos), to examine, as
(cf.

of baj)tism : fig., for overwhelming \

by torture hence to torment, distress,
;

afflictions. Matt. xx. 22, 23 Luke ; vex, harass : of waves, to buffet.

xii. 50. '

Pao-avicrp.ds, ov, 6, torture, torment, Rev.*

Pairrwrjjtos, ov, 6, the act of cleansing, as . Pao-avi<rTT|s, ov, 6, one v:ho tortures, a
vessels, Mark vii. 4, 8 ("\V. H. omit) ;
tormentor. Matt, xviii. 34.*
of Jewish lustrations, u-ashings (pi.), Pdcavos, 01', 77 (lit., a touchstone), torture^
Heb. ix. 10. For Heb. vi. 2, see torment, ^latt. iv. 24 ; Luke xvi. 23,
§ 260, b, 2, (b).* 28.*^
PaTTTioTTis, OV, 6, one 2cho baptises ; the PacriXcia, a?, 77, a kingdom, royal poicer
surname of John, Christ's forerunner. or dignity, reign. ?? ^aciXeia tov Qeov,

pdiTTft), ^d\p(x}, to dip, dye, tinge, Luke Tov x/wo'ToD, tQv ovpavCbv (the last form
xvi. 24 ; John xiii. 26 ; Rev. xix. only in Matt.), the divine, spiritual
13.* kingdom, or reign of ^lessiah, in the
Bap-, an Aramtean prefix to many sur- world, in the individual, or in the
names, meaning son of. future state, vld ttjs (^aaiXeias, sons
Bap-appds, a, 6, Barabbas. Some of the kingdom, Jews, its original
ancient MSS, and other authorities possessors. Matt. viii. 12 ; true be-
give his name as Jesus (not W. H.). lievers. Matt. xiii. 38. Li Rev. i. 6,
BapaK, 6, Barak, Heb. xi. 32.* V. 10, for j3a(nXe7s /cai, "\Y. H. read
Bap-axicis, 01', 17, Barachias, Matt, ^aatXeiav, a kincjdom consisting of
xxiii. 35. Some think it a surname priests (R.Y.).
of Jehoiada, 2 Chron. xxiv. 20.* PacriXcios, ov, royal, regal, i Pet. ii. 9,
PdpPapos, ov, 6 (prob. onomatop., de- from Exod. xix. 6. to. ^aa-lXeia, as
scriptive of unintelligible sounds), .subst., a regal mansion, palace, Luke
properly adj., a foreigner, barbainan, vii. 25.*
as I Cor. xiv. 1 1 Pao-iXevs, ^ws, 6, a leader, ruler, king,
Pap«<i), w (cf. pdpos), in X.T. only pass. sometimes subordinate to higher
^apeofxai, ovfiai, to be weighM dou'n, authority, as the Herods. Applied
to be opjrressed, as by sleep, Luke to God, always with distinguishing
ix. 32; mental troubles, 2 Cor. i. 8, epithets, Matt. v. 35 i Tim. i. 17, ;

v.^ 4. vi. 15; Rev. XV. 3, xvii. 14: to Christ,

Papcctfs, adv., heavily or with difficulty, Matt. ii. 2 John i. 49, etc.
; to ;

with cLKovu), to be dull of hearing. Matt, Christians, Rev. i, 6, v. 10 (Rec, but

xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27.* see under fiaaiXeia).
410 VOCABULARY. [Pao-iXcvo) — pla
PaciXevci), ei'crw {-eF), to have authority, ov (^a- in ^aivcj,
Ps'Pt^Xos, "that on
to reign, or to possess or exercise domi- which any one may step'), common,
nion ; to be ^acriXevs generally. With unsanctified, profane, of things or
gen. or eTrt (gen.), of the kingdom ; persons.
iiri (ace), of the persons governed. P€pT]X6b), uj, to make common, to profane,
Pa(riXiK($s, 7^, 6v, adj., belonging to a the Sabbath, Matt. xii. 5 ; the temple,
king, royal, John iv. 46, 49 (R.Y. Acts xxiv. 6.*
marg.) ; Acts xii. 20, 21 ; James BccX-tepovX, 6 (Heb.), Beelzebul, "Lord
ii. 8.* of dung," a contemptuous play upon
PatrCXicrcra, tjs, t?, a queen. Beelzebub, " Lord of flies," the Ekron-
Pdcris, ews, prop, a going,
77 {jSaivu}), ite deity (2 Kings i. 2), applied to
*
hence the 7.*
foot. Acts iii. Satan, as the ruler of the daemons.
PacTKaCvo), aj'w, to bewitch, bring under BcXCaX, 6 (Heb., perverscness, malice),
malign influence, ^^ fascinate,'' Gal. or BeKiap (W. H.), perhaps "Lord of
iii. I.* forests" or "thickets," a name for
Pao-rdtw, aaw, to lift, lift up ; often Satan, 2 Cor. vi. 15.*
with the sense of bearing away. Thus, PsXovT], 77s, T}, a needle, Luke xviii. 25
(i) to carry, a burden, as Luke xiv. 27 ;
(W. H.).*
tidings, as Acts ix. 15 (2) to take ; PsXos, ovs, t6 (jSdXXoj), a missile, such
on oneself, as disease or weaknesses, as a javelin or dart, Eph. vi. 16.*
Rom. XV. I ; condemnation. Gal. v. 10; PcXtCcdv, ov, ovos (a compar. of dyados),
reproach. Gal. vi. 17 ; (3) to bear with better ; neut. as adv. 2 Tim. i. 18.* ,

or endure. Rev. ii. 2 (4) to to^A;# away. ;

Bev-iafiCv, 6 (Heb., Ben = son), Be7i-
Matt. viii. 17 John xii. 6. ; jamin.
pdros, ov, 6, 77, a thorn-bush or bramble, Bcpv^Ki], 77s, 7), Bernice.
Luke vi. 44 ; Acts vii. 30, 35. "The Be'poia, as, Bercea, Acts xvii. 10, 13.*
Bush," Mark xii. 26 ; Luke xx. 37, Bepoiaios, a, ov, Bercean, Acts xx. 4.*
denotes the section of the O.T. so BtiG-, a Hebrew prefix to many local
called (Exod. iii.).* names, meaning house or abode of.
pdros, ov, 6 (Heb.), a bath, or Jewish BT]6-aPapd, as, 77, Bcthabara, "house of
measure for liquids containing 7^ the ford," John i. 28. (W, H. read
*
gallons, Luke xvi. 6. Bethany.)*
Pdrpaxos, a frog. Rev. xvi. 13.*
ov, 6, Bi]0-avC(t, as, 77, Bethany, " house of
PaTTo-Xo-Yc'ci), w
(prob. from par-, an dates." There were two places of the
unmeaning sound cf. ^dp^apos), to ; name: (i) John xi., etc. (2) on the ;

babble, talk to no pnirpose. Matt. vi. 7.* Jordan (?), John i. 28. See B77^a/3apa.
'
pSeXv'YHi<i, aros, to (cf. ^deXvaao}), some- Bt]0 co-8d, as, 77, Bcthesda, house of '

thing unclean and abominable, an compassion," John v. 2.*

object of moral repugnaTice, Luke xvi. Bi]0-X€€'fjL, T), Bethlehem, "house of bread."

15 ; spec, (as often in O.T.) idolatry. Bii0-<rai8d, i}, Bethsaida, " house of
Rev. xvii. 4, 5, xxi. 27. "Abomin- himting" or "fishing." There were
ation of desolation," Matt. xxiv. 15; two places of the name one in Galilee, :

Mark 14 (from Dan. ix. 27) refers

xiii. John xii. 21 the other on the east of
;

to the pollution of the temple by some the Jordan, Luke ix. 10.
*
idolatrous symbol. BT]0-<|>a'YTj, 7), Bethphage, "house of
pScXvKTos, rj, 6v, disgusting, abominable, figs."
Tit. i. 16.* Pf]^a, aros, rb (/3a- in ^aivu), a step,
pScXvo-o-cj, |a>, to defile, only mid. ; to a space; ^rjfxa irodds, a space for the
loatJic, Rom. ii. 22 ; and pass. perf. foot.Acts vii. 5 ; a raised space or
part., defiled. Rev. xxi. 8.* bench, tribunal, throne, judgment-seat.
Pcpaios, a, ov, stedfast, constant, firm. PripvXXos, ov, 6, 7}, a beri/l, a gem of
PcPai^u, (2, to confirm, to establish, whe- gi-eenish hue. Rev. xxi. 20.*
ther of persons or things. pCa, as, 7), force, violence. Acts v. 26,
PepaCuo-is, eujs, -q, confirmation, Phil. i. 7 ;
xxi. 35, xxiv. 7 (W. H. omit), xxvii.
Heb. vi. 16.* 41.*
ptdto) — povX^] VOCABULARY. 411

Pkd^o), to use violence ; mid. to enter , look to. Matt. xxii. 16; Mark xii. 14;
forcibly, Avith els, Luke xvi. i6 pass., ;
with 'iva or jx-f], to take care (once
io suffer violence, to be assaulted. Matt, without, Mark xiii. 9) ; -svith airb, to
xi. 12.* beware of ; once with /card (ace),
*
pCaios, a, ov, violent, Acts ii. 2. geographically, to look toicards, Acts
Pta<rTT|s,ou, 6, one who employs force, xxvii. 12. Syn. 5.
a man
of violence. Matt. xi. 12.* PXt]t«)s, ea, eop, a verbal adj. (^aWw),
^ipXapCSiov, 01', a littU book. Rev. x. 2, that ought to be jyut, Mark ii. 22 i^AV. H.
8(not W. H.), 9, 10.* omit) ; Luke v. 38.*
PipXfov, ov, TO (dim. of following), aroll, Boavep'y€s('\V.H. -T/p-), (Keh.,) Boanerges,
,

book, volume, as Luke iv. 17 Rev. v. : "Sons of thunder," Mark iii. 17.
I. /St^Xtoj' dTTOcTTacrtoi', a bill of divorce- Podo), Q i^oTj), to shout for joy. Gal. iv.
ment, ;Matt. xix. 7 ; Mark x. 4. 2y ; to cry for grief, Acts viii. 7 to ;

ptpXos, ou, a uritten book, roll, or

6, jrublish openly, to cry aloud ; vdth. irpos
volume. The word means the inner (ace), to appeal to, Luke xviii. 7, 38.
bark or rind, of -which ancient books PoT|, 7}%, 77, a loud cry, James v. 4.*
were made. PoT|6€ia, as, 77, help, succour, Acts xxvii.
PiPpwo-Kb) (/3po-), perf. ^i^puKa, to eat, 17 ; Heb. iv. 16.*
John vi. 13.* Po7]6€b), Q), to go to the lielp of, to succour
BiOvvto, a:, i], Bithynia. (dat.).
pCos, 01/, 6, (i) life, as Luke viii. 14; Poi]86s, ov, 6, rj (properly adj.), a helper,

(2) means of life, as

livelihood, Luke Heb. xiii. 6.*
viii. 43 ; (3) goods or j^roperty, as Luke PoBwos, ov, 6, a hole, ditch, well,
XV. 12 ; I John iii. 17. Syn. 54. PoX-i^, 77s, 77, a throwing. Xldov jSoXtJ, a
Pioo), w, to pass one's life, i Pet. iv. 2.* stone s throw, Luke xxii. 41.*
p{ci)o-i$, ews, 7], mariner or habit of life, heave the lead, to fathom.
PoXktt*), o'w, to
Acts xxvi. 4.* Acts xxvii. 28.*
PiwTiKos, 17, ov, 0/ or belonging to (this) PoXCs, t5os, 77, a weapon throvm, as a
i^//c, Luke xxi. 34 i Cor. vi. 3, 4.* ; dart or javelin, Heb. xii. 20 .(^V. H.
*
BXap£p6s, adj., hurtful, i Tim. vi. 9.* omit).
pXdirrw (/3Xa/3-), ^\6.\p<j}, to hurt or Boot, 6 (Heb.), Booz or Boaz.
injure, ]\Iark xvi. 18 (AV. H. omit) ; Poppopos, ov, 6, dirt, mire, filthy 2 Pet.
Luke iv. 35.* ii. 22.*

pXao-rdvo) (or ^Xaardw, j\Iark iv. 27, Boppds, a, d {Boreas, the north wind),
"\V. H.). ^XaaTTjaoj, intrans., to sprout, the North, Luke xiii. 29 ; Rev. xxi.
to spring up, put forth huds, Matt,
to
xiii. 26 ; Mark iv. 27 Heb. ix. 4 ; ; Poo-Kb), 77crw, to tend, to tend in feeding,
trans., to bring forth {Kapirov), James as Matt. viii. 33 ; John xxi. 15, 17 ;
V. 18.* mid., to feed, graze, as Mark v. 11.
BXdcTTos, Blastus, Acts xii. 20.*
ov, 6, Boo-6p, 6 (Heb. Bcor), Bosor, 2 Pet. ii. 15.*
,

pXa(r({>T]|xco), w, to speak abusively, to Pordvi], 77$, T) {^b(TK<j}), herbage, pasturage,

rail, abs., as Acts xiii. 45 ; to calum- Heb. vi. 7.*
niate, speak evil of, blasplieme, with Pdrpvs, I'os, 6, a cluster of grapes, Rev.
ace. rarely eis
, often of men or things.; xiv. 18.*
Spec, of God, Rev. xvi. 11 the Holy ; PovX€VTT|s, ov, 6, a cminsellor, a senator,
Spirit, Luke xii. 10; the Divine name Mark xv. 43 ; Luke xxiii. 50.*
or doctrine, i Tim. vi. i. PovXevcu, o-w, to advise, N.T. mid. only ;
pXcur({>T]p.ia, as, 7/, evil-speaking, reviling, (i) to consult, to deliberate, with et,
blasphemy. . Luke xiv. 31 ; (2) to resolve on or
pXd(r^-r)(ios, ov, slanderous; subst., a purpose, with inf., Acts v. 33, xv. 37
reviler. (W. H. in both passages read /3ou\o/iat),
pXep,|jLa, aros, to, seeing, the thing seen, xxvii. 39 ; 'iva, John xi. 53 (W. H.),
2 Pet. ii. 8.* xii. 10 ; ace, 2 Cor. i. 17.*
pXc'iro), xj/u), to see, to have the power of PovXt), r,$, 7], a design, decree, purpose,
seeing, to look at, behold ; with cts, to plan.
412 VOCABULARY. [PovXTjpia y6f^ a

fiov\r\\uifaroi, t6 (jSovXo/xai), the thiiKj ppw^a, aTO'i, TO (see §i^pib<XKU)), food of

vnllcd or purposed, Acts xxvii. 43 ;
any kind.
Rom. ix. 19 i Pet. iv. 3 (W. H.). ; ppw(ri(ios, ov, eatable, Luke xxiv. 41.*
PovXofiai, 2ihI pers. sing. ^ouXci, aug. ,
Ppwcis, ewy, 7), (i) the act of eating, as
with 6 or 7), to unll, as {i)tohe willing, I
I Cor.
viii. 4 ; (2) corrosion, Matt. vi.
to incline to, Mark xv. 15 ; {2) to ;
19, 20; {z)food.
iiitaid, Matt. i. 19 ; (3) <o aim at, pv6£^(D, (TO, to drown, trans, and fig.,
I Tim. vi. 9. Generally with inf., I Tim. vi. 9; mid., to sink, Luke v. 7.*

sometimes understood, as James i. Pv66s, ov, 6, the deep, the sea, 2 Cor. xi.
18 with subj., John xviii.
; 39. !
25.*
Syn. 3. Pvpo-cvs, ^ws, a skin-dresser^ a tanner^
powos, ov, 6, a hill, rising ground, Luke j
Acts ix. 43, X. 6, 32.*
iii.
5 ; xxiii. 30.* 1 Pvo-cLvos, 77, oj', made of byssus, fine
Povs, fioos {of-), 5, T], an animal of the linen, Uev. xviii. I2(W. H.), 16, xix.8,
ox kind, male or female. i
,14-
Ppa^ciov, ov, TO, the prize, in the games, I
Pvor<ros, 01', i], byssus, a species of flax,
I Cor. ix. 24 ; Phil. iii. 14.* j
and of linen manufactured from it,

PpaPevii) (lit., to act as arbiter in the I highly prized for its softness, white-
*
games), rule, arbitrate, Col. iii. 15.* '
ness, and delicacy, Luke xvi. 1 9.

PpaSvvb), vG) {^padvs), to delay, to he slow, p(i)(ios, ov, 6, an altar. Acts xvii. 23.*
1 Tim. iii. 15 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (gen.).*

Ppa8v-irXoc<D, uj, to sail slowly, Acts

xxvii. J.*
PpaSvs, era, v, slow ; dat. of sphere, Luke
xxiv. 25 ; ei's, James i. 19.* r, y, ya\i.\ia, garmna, g hard, the third
PpaSvTris, T77TOS, 7}, tardiness, 2 Pet. iii. letter of the Greek alphabet. In
numeral value, 7=3; 7 = 30CX).
Ppax^wv, ovoi, 6, the arm ; met., strength, Tappaea, 7} (Heb., Chald.' form). Gab-
Luke i. 51 ; John xii. 38 ; Acts xiii. bat fui. ; an elevated place or tribiuml,
17.* John xix. 13. See Xi^6(rr/3a)To>'. *
Ppa^vs, e7a, v, short, httle ; only neut. raPpii]X, 6 (Heb., man of God), the
of time, Luke xxii. 58 ; Acts v. 34 ;
archangel Gabriel, Luke i. 1 9, 26. *
place. Acts xxvii. 28. 5ia ^paxfw, Yayypaivo, 77s, r?, a gangrene, mortifica-
Heb. xiii. 22, in few words, ^paxv ti, tion, 2Tim. ii. 17.*
John vi. 7, of quantity, a little ; Heb. rd8, (Heb.), Gad, Rev. vii. 5.*
6
ii. 7, 9, for a short time, or in a small ra8apt]v6s, 17, 6v, belonging to Gadara.
*
degree. See YepyeaTfvbs.
Pp€<|>os, ous, TO, a child unborn, Luke 70.^0, 7;s, 17 (Persian), treasure, as of a
i. 44
41, ; a babe, as Luke ii. 12, 16 ;
government, Acts viii. 27.*
2 Tim. iii. 15. Fdta, 77s, 7) (Heb. ), Gaza, a strong city
Pp€\a>, ^w, to 'moisten, Luke vii. 38, 44 ;
of the ancient Philistines in the AV. of
to rain, send rain. to Matt. v. 45 ;
Palestine, Acts viii. 26. (The adj.,
Luke xvii. 29 impers. ; , James v. 17; f/577/ios, desert, refers to 656s. )*

intrans., Rev. xi. 6.* 'ya^o-<|>vXdKiov, ov, t6, a place for Vu

PpovT"^, Tjs, 7}. thunder. guard ianship of treasure, treasury; a
PpoX^» ^5' ^ (^P^X(^)y rain. Matt. vii. })art of the temple so called, Mark xii.
25,27.* 41, 43 ; Luke 20.* xxi. i ; John viii.
Pp<iXos, oil, 6, a noose or snare, i Coi'. Fdios, 01', 6 (Lat. ), Gains, or Cains.
vii. 35.* There are four of the name in N.T.,
PpiryfJi^s, ou, 6, a griiuling or gnashing, Acts xix. 29, XX. 4 ; i Cor. i. 14 ;

;is Matt. viii. 12. 3 John 1.

Ppvxw, ^o), to grind or gimsh, as the •ydXa, a/cTos, to, milk, lit., i Cor. ix. 7 ;

teeth, for rage or pain, Acts vii. 54.* tig., for the elements of Christian
Ppv«D, (TO), to send forth, as a fountain, knowledge, i Cor. iii. 2 ; Heb. v. 12,
James iii. ii.* 13 ; I Pet. ii. 2.*
raXdrqs — revvTjo-ap^T] VOCABULARY. 413

raXaTqs, ov, 6, a Galatian, Gal. iii. i.* F€0-<n](iavfi,or -vei (W. H.), 77 (Heb.,
roXarCo, as, rj, Galafia, or Gallogrcccia, Gethsemane, a small field at
oil-press),
a province of Asia Elinor. the foot of the Mount of Olives, over
FoXariKos, 71, 6v, belonging to Galatia, the brook Cedron ; Matt. xxvi. 36 ;

Acts xvi. 6 xviii. 23.* ; Mark xiv. 32.*

^aX^VT], 175, 7), serenity, calm, Matt. viii. 'Y€{t«v, ovos, 6, 71, a neighbour, Luke
26 ; Mark iv. 39 ; Luke viii. 24.* xiv. 12, XV. 6, 9 John ix. 8.* ;

^a\lXaCo^ ay, i] (from Heb. ), Galilee, yfkcLu, Q, daii), to laugh, to be merry, re-
the N. division of Palestine. joice, Luke vi. 21, 25.*
FoXiXaios, aia, aiov, of or belonging to Y^XcDs, wTos, 6, laughter, mirth, James
Galilee. iv. 9.*
roXXCcDv, lovoi, 6, Gallio, a proconsul of 'ycp.i^o), aw, to fill, with ace. and gen.
Achaia, Acts xviii.* (also ciTro or e/c) pass. abs. , to he full^
;

FafioXi^X, 6 (Heb.), Gamaliel, Acts v. Mark iv. 37 ; Luke xiv. 23.

34, xxii. 3.* Y€)i6),only in pres. and impf., to he full
^afjL^w, uj, 770-0), 1st aor. iyd/xTjaa and of, with gen. (e/c, Matt, xxiii. 25 ;

^yrifia, or trans, (with ace), to

abs. perhaps ace, Rev. xvii. 3).
marry ; active properly of the man ; Y€V6d, as, 77, generation, as (l) offsjyringy
pass, and mid. of the woman, with race, descent ; (2) the 2)eople of any given
dat., I Cor. vii. 39; Mark x. 12 ("W. time ; (3) an age of the icorld's dura-
H., 6X\ov for rec. ctXXy) ; but in N.T. tion ; els 7ei'ea$ /cat 7ei'e'a$ (W.H.), unto
the act. also is used of the woman, as generations and generations (R.V.),
I Cor. vii. 28, 34. Luke 50.
i.

^aiiCj^o), or yafXL(TK<i), to give in marriage ytvca-Xo-y^w, cD, to reckona geiualogy or

*
(a daughter), rec. only Mark xii. 25 ;
pedigree, pass, with h, Heb. vii. 6.
\^. H. add ]\[att. xxii. 30 Luke xvii.
; Ycvca-Xcyfct, as, feni., genealogy, N.T.
27, XX. 35 38.*
; I Cor. vii. plur., I Tim. i. 4 ; Tit. iii. 9; proli.
Ya^os, ov, 6, marriage, spec, a marriage of Gnostic speculations on the origin
*
feast, sing, or plur. See § 240. of being.
^dp (7e dpa), " truly then," a causal par- Ycvco-ioL, Cov, rd, the festivities of a birth-
ticle or conjunction, for, introducing day, a- birthday, Matt. xiv. 6 Mark ;

a reason for the thing previously said. vi. 21.*

Used in questions to intensify the yivta-\,s, eus, 77, birtfb, gcnealocfy, Matt. i.
inquiry ; often with other particles. I. (AV. H. add Matt. i. 18," Luke i. 14,
For the special uses of yap, see § 407. for rec. yevvTjcns). James i. 23 to :

7a<rHjp, rpos (sync.) 17, (l) th^ womb, as irpoaioTTOv TTJs yeveaeojs avrou, the coun-
Matt. i. 18 (2) tlic stomach, only Tit.
;
tenance of his birth, or. as A. A'., R.V.,
i. 12 from Epimenides, "idle bellies,"
; "his natural face." James iii. 6 top :

gluttons. rpoxov T7J$ yeveaeus, the wheel of nature

fi, a particle indicating emphasis, at {R.Y.y
least,indeed. Sometimes used alone, 7€V€TTJ, 17s, ij, birth, John ix. i.*
as Rom. viii. 32 i Cor. iv. 8 gener- ;
; Ycvqpxi, aros, to. See yevv7)/xa.
ally in connection with otlier particles, yivvcLOi, Co, Tjffu}, to beget, give birth to,
as aWd, &pa, ei. ei 5e fji.r}ye, stronger produce, effect : pass., to he begotten, horn
than ei Se fxri, if othenvise indeed ; (often in John, of spiritual renewal).
Kaiye, and at least, and even ; Kairoiye, Ycvvi^fio, aros, TO, (i) progeny, genera-
though indeed ; fxevovvye, yea, indeed ; tion, as Matt. iii. 7 (2) produce ;

lxr)Tiyc, "to say nothing o/," i Cor. generally, as Matt. xxvi. 29 ; ing., fruit,
vi.^ 3. result, as 2 Cor. ix. 10. In sense (2)
FcScwv, d (Heb.), Gid.eon, Heb. xi. 32.* W. H. always read yevTjfia.
Fe-^vva, 77s, tJ (Heb., Valley of Hinnom), FcvvTio-aper (Heb., in Chald. form),
met., place of punishment in the future Gcnnesarcth {Chinnereth, or Chinne-
world, Matt. x. 28, etc. Sometimes roth, in O.T.), a region of Galilee,
with Tov irvpos, as Matt. v. 22. Com- with village or town of the same name.
pare 2 Kings xxiii. lo. Used of the adjacent lake, as Luke v. i.
414 VOCABULARY. [ycwtjctis — yvutpLtfii

yivv7]Ti% ews, »}. See y^vecris.* and it came to pass (with /cat, or follow-
"yfvvTjTos, V, ov, verb, adj., horn, brought ing verb, or inf ) also, ixi) y^voiTo, let ;

*
forth, Matt. xi. 1 1 ; Luke vii. 28. it never lutppen ! or God forbid ! (3)
ycvos, ovs, TO, (j) offspring ; (2) Uncage ; With adj. or predicative subst., to
(3) nation ; (4) kind or species. become, where quality, character, or
T€pyi<rr]v6^, rj, 6v, or Tepaarjvds, Gerge- condition is specified ; often in prohi-
sene, belonging to Gergesa or Gerasa. bitions, /XT? y^ve(x6e, become
yivov, fi^
The copies vary between these forms not, as Matt. vi. i6. (4) With the
and radap7]v6s, Matt. \'iii. 28 Mark ; cases of substantives and the prepo-
V. I ; Luke viii. 26, 37.* sitions, the verb forms many phrases,
yepovo-fa, as, rj [yepiov), an assewMy of to be interpreted according to the
elders, senate, Acts v. 21.* meaning of the case or prep. See
yipoiv, ovTos, 6, an old man, John iii. 4. * Syntax. For the distinction between
yivoi, to make to taste, only mid. in ylvofxai and other copulative verbs, see
N.T. ;as abs., to take food.
to taste, Syn. 1.
Acts or with obj., gen., or ace.
X. 10 ; YtvwcTKu), or yiyvudKU} § 94, 8, J), (see
See § 249, a, (2). Fig., to experience, yvivao/jLai, iyvup 2nd
(imper. aor.
as Matt. xvi. 28 once with on, i Pet. ; yvQdL), perf. ^vcoKa, (i) to become
ii. 3. aware of, to perceive, with ace, (2)
yuapyiio, Q, to cultivate or till the earth, to know, to perceive, understand, with
Heb. vi. 7.* ace. or 6tl, or ace. and inf., or rl
^gwp-yiov, ov, t6, a tilled field, fig., i Cor., interrog. "EW-qviaTl y. to understand
; ,

iii. 9.* Greek, Acts xxi. 37 to be conscious of, ;

^ewp-yos, ov, 6, one who tills the ground, by experience, as 2 Cor. v. 21 ; (3) ^0
a husband')nan, a vine-dresser. know Matt. i. 25
carnally (Heb.), ;

^f), 7^j, 7), contr. for y(a or yaia, land Luke 34 (4) specially of the fellow-
i. ;

or earth, as {i)the material soil; (2) the ship between Christians and the Divine
producing soil, the ground; (3) land, Being, i Cor. viii. 3 Matt. vii. 23 ;

as opposed to sea (4) earth, as opposed ;

(negatively) John xvii. 3 ;Heb. viii. :

to heaven, often involving suggestions II Phil. iii. 10, etc.

; Syn. 4.
of human weakness and sin (5) re- ;
yXevKos, ovs, t6, sweet or new wine. Acts
gion or territory. ii. 13.*
YHpcis, (aos), us, TO, dat. -^t, old age, yXvkvs, eta, i/, sicect, James iii. Ii, 12 ;

Luke 1. 36. (W. H. have 777pet fr. of Avater, opposed to "bitter" and
yvpos).* "salt," Rev. x. 9, 10.*
yTipdorKft), or yr^pdw, dacx), to become old, yXwo-o-o, r)s, r/, (i) the tongue; (2) a
John xxi. 18 ; Heb. viii. 13.* language; (3) a nation or jt;eo;)Ze dis-
^Cvofjtai, for yiyvofxai. See § 94, 8, a. tinguished by their language.
yeuTjaofiai, eyevofXTju and eyevrjdrjv, •yXaxrcro-Koixov, ov, neut., a little box or
y^y ova (with pres. force) and yeyhi)- case for money, John xii. 6, 29
xiii.
lx.aL, become, as (i) <o begin to
to be, (orig. from holding the " tongue-
used of persons, to be born, John v. iii. pieces" of flutes, etc.).*
58 of the works of creation, to
; be Yi/"a4>£vs, ius, 6 a fuller, cloth-dresser,
made, John i. 3, 10 ; and of other j\lark ix. 3.*
w^orks, wrought or performed.
to be YVT|<rios, a, ov (sync, from yevrjacos),
So, to pass
of one state into out legitimate, genuine, true, i Tim. i. 2 ;
another, to grov) into, to be changed Tit. i. 4 Phil. iv. 3
; rb yvrjaiov, sin- ;

into, John ii. 9 often with els, Luke ; cerity, 2 Cor. viii. 8.* Adv.. -us,
xiii. 19. (2) Of ordinary or extraor- sincerely, naturally, Phil. ii. 20.*
dinary occurrences, to happen, to take Yv6<|>os, 01;, 6, a dense cloud, darkness,
place, to be done ; of the day, the Heb. xii. 18.* _

night, Mark vi. 2 of thunder, earth- ; Yvw[iT), -qs, 7) {yvo- in yivusaKui), opinion,
quake, calm, etc. of feasts or public ; judgment, intention.
solemnities, hr2d or celebratedto be •yvupC^b), iau) or tuj, (i) to make known, to
frequently in the phrase Kal ^yivero. declare (with ace. and dat., 5ti or t(
 ; ;

yutScrts — AaPiSj VOCABULARY. 415

interrog. , Col. i. 27); (2) intrans., io YpatTTos, v, ov, verb, adj., written, in-
knoiv, only Phil, i. 22. scribed, Rom. ii. 15.*
Yv«<ris, ews, ^j (i) subj., knoicledge, "with Ypa<j)ir|, 77?, 7], (i) a writing; (2) spec,
gen. of obj. (gen. subj., Rom. xi. 33) ; i] ypa<pr] or al ypacpai, the Scriptures,
(2) obj., science, dcctrine, wisdam, as u)ritings of the O.T. ; (3) a particular
Luke xi. 52. passage.
Yww(rrt]S, ov, 6, one icJio knows, an expert. •ypdcJKi), \p(j}, yeypacpa,
to grave, write,
Acts xxvi. 3.* inscribe. yeypairraL. or ye-
€ypd<p7),
"yvoxTTOs, y], ov, verb. a,di].,kncncn, as Acts ypafMfxevov ecTTi, a formula of quota-
ii, 14, iv. 10 knoicahle, Rora. i. 19
;
;
tion. It is tcritten. Often with dat.
notable, Acts iv. 16. ot yvojaroi, ones of pers., as Mark x. 5.
acquaintance, Luke ii. 44 ; ro yvuaTou, "YpawS-qs, €s, {ypavs, fid), old-womanish,
knoicledge, Rom. i. 19. foolish, I Tim. iv. 7.*
•Yoyyvto), iVw, ^0 7?iwr7n2^rin a low voice, 'ypT)Yop€'a>, Q (from eypijyopa, perf, of
John xii. discontentedly, to
32 ; iyelpw), to keep awake, watch, be vigi-
grumble, as i Cor. x. 10, witli ace, lant.
or irepi, gen., irpos, ace, /card, gen. yufjLvd^to {yvjxvo^), to exercise, train, i
Yoyyvo-fJLos, ov, 6, muttering, John vii. Tim. iv. 7; Heb. v. 14, xii. 11 ; 2 Pet.-
12 ; murmuring, Acts vi. i ; Phil. ii. ii. 14.*
14 ; I Pet. iv, 9.* yu|ivao-(a, as, ^, exercise, training, i Tim.
YcyyvtrTTis, ov, 6, a murmurer, com- iv. 8.*
plaiiur, Jude 16.* •yvfiviiTcvft),or -tret/a; (W. H. ), to be naked
y6t]s, riTos, moan), an en-
6 {yodcj, to or poorly clad, I Cor. iv. 11.*
chanter, an impostor, 2 Tim. iii. 13,* YV|xv6s, r\, 6v, (i) naked, ill-clad, having
roX"yo9d(Heb. in Chald. form), Golgotha, only an inner garment ; (2) bare, i.e.,
" the place of a skull " (prob. fiom its open or manifest, Heb. iv. 13 ; (3)
shape) ; Calvary. See Kpaviov. mere, I Cor. xv. 37,
r6px>ppa, as, T], and (jv, to., Gomorrha. YV|iv6ti]s, t7]tos, t], (i) nakedness; (2)
^o^s, ov, 6 (y^fxw), of
{1) a burden, e.g., scanty clothing.
a ship, Acts xxi. 3 ; (2) wares or yuvaiKo-piov, ov, to (dim,), a silly woman,
merchandise, Rev. xviii. 11, 12.* 2 Tiui. iii. 6,*
Yoveus, f'ws, 6 [yeu- hiyiyvo/jun), a parent, ^vvaiKcios, a, ov, womanish, female
only in plural. I Pet. iii. 7, the weaker vessel.*

Yow, aros, TO, the knee; often in plur. yuvTJ, yvvaiKos, voc. 7ui'ai, •^, ( I ) a wom.an;
after ridevai or KafiirTeiv, to put or bend (2) a u'z/c. The voc. is the form of
the knees, to kneel, in devotion. ordinary address, often used in rever-
^ovu-irerco), w {iriirTw), to fall down on ence and honour. Compare John ii.
ones knees, to kneel to (ace. ). 4 and xix. 26.
Ypd)i(ia, oTo?, TO {ypd(p(j)), (i) a letter of r«7, 6, a proper name, Gog. In Ezek.
the al]>hotrt. Gal. vi. 11 : in what xxxviii. 5, king of Magog, possibly
large letters, perhaps noting emphasis ScandinaWa hence, in Rev. xx. 8, of
;

letter, as opposed to spirit, Rom. ii. 29, a people far remote from Palestine,
etc. ; (2) a icnting, such as abill ox an. probably in the N.
epistle, as Luke xvi. 6, 7 ; ret iepu. ywvLo, as, tj, a corner, as Matt. vi. 5, xxi.
ypoLfifxaTa,2 Tim. iii. 15, th£ holy 42 (LXX.) ; met., a secret place. Acts
writings, or the Scriptures; (3) plur., xxvi. 26,
literature, learning genera-llj, John vii.
15-
7pafi|jLar€vs, ^wj, 6, (i) a clerk, secretary,
a scribe, Acts xix. 35 ; (2) one of that
class among the Jews who copied and A, 8, SeXra, delta, d, the fourth letter of
interpreted the O.T. Scriptures (see the Greek alphabet. As a numeral,
5' =
vofiuces) (3) met., a man of learning
; 4 ; 5,= 4000.
generally, i Cor. i. 20 ; Matt. xiii. 52, Aa^iS, also Aavtd, AaveiS (W. H.) 6,
etc. (Heb.), David, king of Israel, '0
416 VOCABULARY. rSai(JiovLto|j.ai — ScKaro'*)

vibs A., the Son of David, an appel- 8ct, impers., see § 101, it needs, one
lation of the Messiah iv A. in David, ; , must, it ought, it is right or jtroj/cr,

i.e., in the Psalms, Heb. iv. 7. with inf. (expressed or implied), as

Saifiov^toK^^ (see daifiuu), 1st aor. part., Matt. xvi. 21 Acts iv. 12 5lark xiii.
; ;

dai/ioviadeii, to be possessed by a demon. 14. Syn. 12.

Saijioviov, lov, t6 (orig. adj.), « demon or Sci-y^, aros {deiKw/xi), an example, a
evil spirit. Saifwpiov ^eiv, to have a specimen, Jude 7.*
demon or to be a demoniac. Syn. 53. SciYiiaTC^a), <T<j}, to make an example ox-

8ai)ioviw8-r]s, resembling a demon,

es, spectacleof (as disgrace), Col. ii. 15,
demoniacal, i2i.ine?>\\\. 15-* Matt. i. 19 (W. H.).*
8a^)jutfv, ovos, 6, 7], in classic Greek, any 8e£Kvv|ii and betKvvio (see § 114), (i) to
spirit superior to man hence often of ; present to sight, to show, to teach (ace.
the inferior deities in N.T., an evil ; and dat.) ; (2) to prove (ace. and e/c), to
spirit, a demon. (W. H. have the word shovj by words {on), Matt. xvi. 21 ;
only in one passage, Matt, viii, 31.) inf.. Acts x. 28.
8aifi6viov is generally used, Syn. 53. 8€lXCo^ as, 17, timidity, 2 Tim. i. 7.*
8dKv«, to bite. Gal. v. '15.* SciXidb), shrink for fear, to be afraid,
u), to
SaKpv, vos, or SaKpvov, vov, to, a tear. John xiv. 27.*
SaKpvfa), au), to irccp, John xi. 35.* SciXos, 77, 6v, timid, cowardly. Matt. viii.
SaKTvXcos, 01', 6 {daKTvXos), « ring for the 26 ;Mark iv. 40 Rev. xxi. 8.* Syn, ;

finger, Luke xv. 22.* 33.

SaKTvXos, ov, 6, a finger, iv daKTvXii} 8€iva, 6, rjy TO, gen. deivos, pron., a. certain
Qeov, met., hg the 2^0 we r of God, Luke jierson, such a one. Matt. xxvi. 18.*
xi. 20. Comp. Matt. xii. 28. Scivus, adv. {Seivos, vehement), greatly,
AaX(iavovOd, 7;, Dalmanutha, a town or vehemently, Matt. viii. 6 Luke xi. ;

village near Magdala. Mark viii. 10.*

c 53-
A(iX^aTlo^ as, i], Dal mat ia, a part of oetirvcw, d), to take the ^etirvov, to banquet,
Illyricuni near Macedonia, 2 Tim. Luke xvii. 8, xxii. 20 i Cor. xi. 25 ; ;

iv. 10.* met., of familiar intercourse, Rev. iii.

SajidtcD, (TO?, to subdue, tame, ^lark v. 4 ;
20.*
James iii. 7,
8.* 8ciirvov, 01', Tj, the chief or evening meal,
SduaXis, a heifer, Heb. ix. 13.*
fws, 17, supper (cf. &pi(TTov) KvpiaKov SeTirvov, ;

Aafiapis, Damaris, Acts xvii. 34.*

i5os, t], the Lord's Suptper, i Cor. xi. 20.
Aa\ui.a-Kr]v6s,v, ov, belonging to Damascus, 8el(^l8al|lovlo^ as, 17, religion, prob. super-
2 Cor. xi. 32.* stition. Acts XXV. 19.*
AafiacKos, ov, 7/, Damascus. 8ei(ri8atp.a)V, ovos {SeiSo), to fear), adj.,
Savct^w, to lend, 34, 35 Luke vi. ; mid., devoutly dis2)osed, addicted to worship.
*
to borroiv. Matt. v. 42.* Acts xvii. 22. See § 323, r.
Sdvciov, ov, TO, a debt. Matt, xviii. 27.* 8cKa, oi, at, TCL, ten; in Rev. ii. 10, a ten
SavtwrTTJs, ov, 6, a lender, a creditor, days' tribulation, i.e., brief.
Luke vii. 41.* 8eKa-8vo (not in W. H.), more frequently
AaviTJX, 6 (Heb.), Daniel, Matt. xxiv. du}8€Ka, twelve. Acts xix. 7, xxiv. ii.*
15: Mark xiii. 14 (not \V. H.).* 8€Kair€VT€, fftcen.
Sairavdo), (2, r)<xu}, to spend, ilark v. 26 ; AcKd-iroXis, ews, 17, Decapolis, a district
trans., to bear r.rpcnse for [iirl, dat.\ E. of Jordan comprising ten towns.
Acts xxi. 24; [vTrlp, gen.), 2 Cor. xii. It is uncertain what they all were, but
15 ^0 consunw- in luxury, to waste,
; they included Gadara, Hippo, Pella,
Luke XV. 14 ; James iv. 3.* and S( ythopolis.
SairdvT], 77s, 17, expense, cost, Luke xiv. 8€Ka-T€<ro-ap€S, a, uv, fourteen.
^28.* 8€KdTT), T/s, T), a tenth part, the fUhe, Heb.
8€, an adversative and distinctive par- vii. 2, 4, 8, 9.*
ticle, but, 710W, moreover, etc. See StKaros, 77, ov, ordinal, tenth, to S^Karov,
§ 404, ii., and /xev. Rev, xi. 13, the tenth part.
S^T](ris, eios, 7], supplication, prayer. Syn. 8cKar6<», Q), to receive tithe if, ace, Heb,
38. vii. 6 ;
pass,, topaytitJic, Heb. vii. 9.*
 ,

ScKTcS — Snn-Ti-yopeft)] VOCABULARY. 417

8€kt6s, 77, bv (verbal adj. from dexo/xai), 4 ; Rev. vi, 10 ; to Christ, 2 Pet. ii. i.

accepted, acceptable, Luke iv. 19, 24 ;

Syn. 59.
Acts X. 35 2 Cor. vi. 2 ;
Phil. iv. ; 8cvpo, adv., (i) of place, here, hither j

iS.* used only as an imperative, come

ScXedtw {SeXeap, a bait), to take or entice, hither, as Matt. xix. 21 (2) of time, ;

as with a bait, James i. 14 ; 2 Pet. ii. only Rom. i. 13.

14, 18.* 8€VT6, adv., as if plur. of hevpo (or contr.
8€v8pov, 01', TO, a tree. from 5eu/)' Ire), come, come hither, as
Sc^io-Xa^os, 01', 6, "holding in the ]\latt. iv. 19, xi. 28.
rif(ht hand;" plur., spcannoif Acts 8€\rT6paios, ata, alov, on tJie second djiy.
xxiii. 23.* Acts xxviii. 13. See § 319.*
8e|i6s, d, 6v, the right, opp. to apicrepbt, 8€VT€p6-Trpu)TOS, adj., the second-first,
the left, i) de^Lci, the right JmhcI ; ra Luke vi. i. See § 148, and note.*
de^td, the rigJit-ltand side ; e/c be^iCjv, 8€VT€pos, a, ov, ordinal, second in num-
an the right (see § 293, i) deltas ; ber, as Matt. xxii. 26 ; in order. Matt.
diSovai, to give the rigJit hnnd, i.e., to xxii. 39. TO 8e{rTepov or de&repov,
receive to friemiship OT/ellowship. adverbially, the second time, again,
Scofiai, 1st aor. tSeridrfv, to have need of as 2 Cor. xiii. 2. So €k SevTcpov, as
(gen.), as mid. of deu) (see 5e?) ; to make Mark xiv. 72 ; iv rip bexnrepii). Acts
request of (gen.) to beseech, j^^'ny, abs.,
; vii. 13.
or Avith et, tVa, or ottws, of purpose. 8€XO}jxii, 1st aor. ide^dfitjv, dep., to take,
Sfov, ovTos, TO (particip. of Se?, as subst.), receive, to receive kindly, to
accept,
the becoming or needful ; with e<TTi = ivelcome, persons, as ^lark vi. 11 ;

Se?. Plur., I Tim. v. 13. things (a doctrine, the kingdom of

St'os, ovs, t6(\V. H.), aive, Heb. xii. 2S * heaven), as Mark x. 15 2 Cor. xi. 4. ;

Aeppaios, ov, 6, of Derbc, Acts xx. 4.* 84ft), to leant. See del anil deo/xai.
Aepp-T], 17s, ij, Derbe, a city of Lycaonla, 8^0), I st aor. , ib-qaa ;
pcrf. , dedcKa ;
pass.
Acts xiv. 6, 20, xvi. i.* dedefj-ai ; 1st aor. pass, inf , deOiivai, to
Sepfjia, aros, t6 (Sepw), an animaVs skin, bind together, bundles, as Acts x. ii ;

Heb. xi. 37.* to swathe dead bodies for burial, as

8€pp.dTivos, 77, ov, made of skin, leathern, John xi. 44 to bind persons in bond- ;

Matt. iii. 4 ; i\Iark i. 6.* age, as i\iatt. xxii. 13; Mark vi. 17 ;

Se'pw, 1st aor. edeipa, 2nd fut. pass. 2 Tim. ii. 9 tig., Matt, xviii. 18. ;

Saprjcrofiai, to scourge, to beat, so as dede/xevos n^ irveu/xaTi, Acts XX. 22,

to flay off the skin, depa depijv, i bound in tJie spirit, under an irresistible
Cor. ix. 26, beating air. impulse.
8€(rp.€vcd, (Tw, to bind, as a prisoner, 8i^, a indicating ccrtaintii or
particle
Acts xxii. 4 as a bundle, Matt,
; reality, augmenting the viva-
and .so

xxiii. 4.* city of a clause or scutrnce ; truly,

Zi(r\).4(a, u), Luke viii. 29.*
to bind, indeed, by all means, therefore. Used
8€'a-jjLT|, a bundle, ^Matt. xiii. 30.*
77s, i), with other particles, S^Trore, S^ttou,
SeVpios, iov, 6, one bound, a prisoner. which see.
8€o-}ji6s, ou, 6 {Seu}), a, bond, sing, only in 8fjXos, 77, ov, manifest, evident. Matt,
Mark vii. 35, 6 dea/xos ttjs yXdjtrarjs, xxvi. 73 ; neut. sc, earl, it is jdain,
and Luke xiii. 16 plur., dea-fioi or (ra)
; with OTL, I Cor. XV. 27 Gal. iii. 1 1 ; ;

8€<T/j.d.bonds or imprisonment. I Tim. vi. 7 (W. H., R.V. omit).*

8€(rfio-(f>vXa|, a/cos, 6, a jailor. Acts xvi. 8i]X6o>, (J, to manifest, to reveal, to bring
23, 27, 36.* to liijht : to imply or signify, i Cor. i.
8ea-|xci>TT|piov, ioc, to, a. prison. Matt. xi. II, iii. 13 ; Col. i. 8; Heb. ix. 8,
2 ;Acts V. 21, 23, xvi. 26.* xii. 27; I Pet. i. II ; 2 Pet. i. 14.*
86<rp.«TT]s, ou, 6, a prisoner, Acts xxviL Arijids, S., 6. Demas, Col. iv. 14; Philem.
I, 42.* 24 : 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
SecnroTqs, ou, 6, a foreign lord or prince, 8T]ji-q-Yop4«, <^» to deliver a public oration
a master, as i Tim. vi. i applied to ; or harangue ; with irpjs, Acts xii,
God, Luke ii. 29 Acts iv. 24 Jude ; ;
21.*
EE
418 VOCABULARY. [Atj^^rpios — SuxKovta
AT)fiTJTpios, ov, 6, Demetrius. Two of 8ta-7oyyv|<i), to murmur greatly, Luke
the name are mentioned, Acts xix. XV. 2, xix. 7.*
24, 38 ; 3 John 12.* 8ia-YpT]Yopca), (3, to be fully or thoroughly
8t])jii-ovpY6s, ov, ("a public worker"), awake, Luke ix. 32.*
one who makes or is the author of any- 8k-d7(>), to lead or pass, as time, life,
thing, Hcb. xi. 10.* I Tim. ii. 2 {^lov)-. Tit. iii. 3 {^lov
8t]p,o9y 01', 6, the pcojylc, a multitude omitted).*
publicly convened, Acts xii. 22, xvii. 8ia-8€xo|iai, to succeed to, Acts vii.
5, xix. 30, ^i.* Syn. 73.
8i]p.6<ri.os, a, ov, public, common, Acts v. 8id-8Tfp.a, aroj, to {S^cj), a diadem, tiara,
18. Dat. fem., as adv., Srjfxoiriq., or crown. Rev. xii. 3, xiii. i, xix. 12.*
publicly, Acts xvi. 37, xviii. 28, xx. Syn. 67.
20.* 8ia-8£86))j.i, to distribute, divide, Luke xi.
8T]vdpiov, iov, t6, properly a Latin word 22, xviii. 22 ; John vi. 1 1 Acts iv. ;

(see § 154, a), denarius. 35 ; Rev. xvii. 13 (W. H., 8iSo}/ji,i.).*

8T|-7roT€, adv. Avith (J5,
at whatsoever time, 8id-8oxos, ov, 6, 77, a successor, Acts
John V. 4 (W. H. omit). xxiv. 27.*
8^-'irov, adv., indecdy truly, verily, Heb. 8ia-t«vvv(it, to gird, to gird ttj), John
ii. 16.* xiii. 4, 5, xxi. 7.*
8id, prep, (cognate with bvo, two; bis, Bia-GTJKT],r;s, 7/ ( Start ^77/xi), (i) a will or
twice),through; ( i ) with gen. through, , testament, a disj/ositio7i, as of property,
during, by Tneans of; (2) with ace, a dispensation. Gal. iii. 15 ; Heb. ix.
through, on account of, for tJie sake of. 16, 17; (2) a compact or covenant be-
See §§ 147, a, 299. tween God and man (cf. Gen. vi., ix.,
8ia-Pa{va>, to 2)fiss through, trans., Heb. XV., xvii. Exod. xxiv. ;Deut. v., ;

xi. 29; or intrans., with irpbs (person), xxviii.). The two covenants men-
Luko xvi. 26 ei's (place), Acts xvi.
; tioned. Gal. iv. 24 that of the O.T. ;

is termed rj -rrpCoTrj d. Heb. ix. 15; that ,

Sia-pdXXw, to accuse, Luke xvi. i.* of the N.T. r)KaLvy) d., Luke xxii. 20.
,

8ia-pepai6cD, uj, m
mid., to ajffi/rm., assert The O.T. itself (17 TraXata 5., 2 Cor.
strongly, i Tim. i. 7 ; Tit. iii. 8.* iii. 14) as containing the first, and the
Sia-pXeiro), to see through, to see clearly, N.T. as containing the second, are
Matt. vii. 5 ; Luke vi. 42 ; Mark viii. each called diadrjKr}.
25(W. H.).* 8i-aCpe(ris, cws, fem., difference, diversity,
8idpoXos, ov, 6 (5ia/3d\Xa;, orig. adj.), as the result of distribution, i Cor.
an accuser, a slanderer, an adversary, xii. 4, 5, 6.*
I Tim. iii. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. ii. 8i-aipeci), Q, to divide, distributCy Luke
3. 6 Std^oXos, the accuser, the devil, XV. 1 2 ; I Cor. xii. 11.*
equivalent to the Hebrew Satan. Sia-KaOapC^o), f. u2, to cleanse thoroughly,
8t-ayy€XXfa), to tell, publish abroad, di- j\latt. iii. 12; Luke iii. 17.*
vulge, Luke ix. 60 ; Acts xxi. 26 ;
Bka-Kar-cXcYxofiai, to confute entirely.
Rom. 17.*
ix. Acts xviii. 28.*
8id-Y€, or did ye (W. H. ),
yet on account 8iaKov^(o, serve or icait upon, espe-
tD, to

of, Luke xi. 8.* cially table ; to supply wants, to

at
8ia--yCvop.ai,, to 2)ass, elapse, of time ; in administer or distribute alms, etc.
N.T. only 2nd aor. part., gen. abs., (dat., pers. ace, thing; occasionally
;

having elapsed, ]\lark xvi. i ; Acts abs. ). Of proi)hets and apostles who
xxv. 13, xxvii. 9.* miiiidprcd the Divine will, i Pet. i.

Sia-yivwo-KW, to examine and knoio 12 2 Cor. iii. 3.

;

thoi'oughly, judicially. Acts xxiii. 15, 8iaKov£a, as, 17, management, as of a

xxiv. 22.* liouschold, Luke x. 40 ; viinistcring
Zia-yvoipiloi, to publish abroad, Luke ii. relief, or tlie relief ministered. Acts
17. (W. 11., yvujpi^u.)* xii. 25 2 Cor. viii. 4 ; ministry or
;

Bid "Yvwo-Ls, ews, 77, judicial hearing, service in the church of Christ, fre-
accurate knowledge, Acts xxv. 21.* quently.
 "

SicIkovos — 8i-apirdt<>>J VOCABULARY. 419

SicIkovos, 01', 6, 7/, a servant, specially at parts, as ]\Iatt. xxvii. 35, etc. to dis- ;

table, as Matt, xxiii. 1 1 ; Mark x. 43 ;

tribute, as Luke xxii. 17 (2) pass, ;

one in God's service, a minister, as with eTTi, to be divided against, be at

Rom. xv. 8 ; one ivho serves in
xiii. 4, discord \\\i\i ; ace, Luke xi. 17 ; dat.,
the church, deacon or deaconess, Phil. xii. 52.
i. I ; I Tim. iii. 8, 12; Rom. xvi. i. 8ia-p.epi(r)Ji6s, ov, 0, dissension, Luke xii.
Syn. 60.
SiaKoo-ioi, ai, a, card, numb., tivo hun- Sia-vefJKo, to divulge, to spread abroad..
dred. Acts iv. 17.*
8i-aKov(i), to hear thoroughly, Acts xxiii. 8ia-veva), to make signs, prop, by nod-
35-* ding, Luke i. 22.*
hia-Kpivia, to discern, to distinguish, make 8ia-v6'r]|JLa, aros, to, a thought, imagina-
a distinction, as Acts xv. 9 ; i Cor. xi. tion, device, Luke xi. 17.*
29. Mid. (aor. ,
pass.), (i) to doubt, to 8id-voia, aj, ri, the mind, the intellect, or
hesitate, as Matt. xxi. 21 James i. 6 ; ;
thinking faculty, as Mark xii. 30 tlic ;

prob. Jude 22 (2) to dispute icith, ;

understanding, i John v. 20 the feel- ;

Acts xi. 2 ; Jude 9. ings, dAspiosition, affections, as Col. i.

8id-Kpio'is, €ws, T), the act of distinction, 21 ;

plur., the thoughts, as wilful, de-
discrimination, Rom. xiv. i ; i Cor. praved, Eph. ii. 3. (In Eph. i. 8,
xii. 10 Heb. v. 14.* ; A. v., the eyes of your wulerstanding
8ia-K(i)\vb), to forhidy to hinder. Matt. (diauoias), W.H. andR.Y. read xapSiay,
iii. 14.* the eyes of your Jieart. )

8ia-XaX^ci), Co, to discuss, Luke vi. 11 ;

Bi-avoiyb), open fully, i.e., the ears,
to
to sjrrcad abroad by speaking of, Luke Mark vii. 34 the eyes, Luke xxiv.
;

31 the heart. Acts xvi. 14

; the Scrip- ;

8ia-Xe-Yb), in mid., to discourse, to reason, tures, Acts xvii. 3.

to dispute, as Mark ix. 34 ; Acts xx. 8ia-vvKT€pev6>, to piass the night through,
7 ; Jude 9. Luke vi. 12.*
8ia-X€iir6>, to cease, to intermit, Luke 8i-avvo>, to perform to the end, complete,
yii. 45.* Acts xxi. 7.*
8id-XcKTOs, ov, Tj, sjyecch, dialect, lan- 8ia-'iravT6s, adv., alivays, continually.
guage. Acts i. 19, ii. 6, 8, xxi. 40, xxii. (W. H. always read 5td wavTos.)
2, XX vi. 14.* 8ia-7rapa-TpipT|, rjs, ij, contention, fierce
Si-oXXatro-o), to change, as the disposi- dispute no purpose, i Tim, vi, 5.
to
tion pass., to be reconciled to. Matt.
;
(W. H. rec. has irapabiarpL^q.)*
;

V. 24.* 8ia-7rcpda), w, daw, to pass, to 7>r(AS

8ia-Xo'Y£to(iai, to reason, to discourse, to through, to jyass over, as Matt, ix, i.
ponder, to reflect, to deliberate, to debate, 8ia-'rrXe6), emoj, to sail through or over.
as Mark ii. 6, 8, viii. 16, ix. 33. Acts xxvii. 5.*
8ia-XoYi(rp.6s, ov, 6, reflection, thought, 8ia-'n-ov€b), C), mid., aor. pass., to grieve
as Luke ii. 35 reasoning, opinion, ; oneself, to be indignant. Acts iv. 2,
as Rom. i. 21, xiv. i dispute, debate, ; xvi. 18.*
as Phil. ii. 14 i Tim. ii. 8. ; 8ia-'Trop€vofJLai, to go or ^;as5 through, as
8ia-Xvta), to disperse, to break up. Acts Luke xiii. 22.
V. 36.* 8i-a'Trop€(D, w, to doubt or ^^c?'-
be in great
dep. mid. to testify ear-
8La-)jLapT-iipo(iaL, , plexlty, Luke xxiv. 4 (W, H.,
ix. 7,
nestly, witness solemnly, as Acts ii. 40, diropeu}) Acts ii. 12, v. 24, x. 17.*
;

viii. 25; I Tim. v. 21 (A.V.; R.V., 8ia-irpaY|jLaT€vopxii, to gain by business or

charge). trading, Luke xix. 15,*
8ia-(idxo|iai, dep. mid, to conteiul or dis- , 8ia-'irpicD {irpiw, to saw), in pass., to be
p)ute ivarmly. Acts xxiii. 9.* saicn right through, to be enraged, to be
8ia-p,€V(», to remain, coivtinue, endure, greatly moved with anger, Acts v. 33,
Luke 22, xxii. 28; Gal. ii. 5
i. Heb. ; vii. 54.*
i. II 2 Pet. iii. 4.*
; Si-apTrdto), to plunder, to spoil by rob-
SuL-^icpC^w, {i) to divide or separate into bery, etc.. Matt, xii, 29 ; Mark iii. 27.
420 V0CA13ULA11Y. [Siap-pTi-^-vvjii — 8td-4>opos
'

Siap-pTj'yvufJLi and Siapprjaacv, ^o), to tear, 8ia-Tapd{r(ro), to trouble greatly, to agitate,

as ganiicnts, in grief or indignation, Luke i. 29.*
Matt. xxvi. 65; Mark xiv. 63 Acts ; 8ia-Td(ro"a), to dispose, to give orders to
xiv. 14 to break asuiuler, as a net,
; (dat, ), arrange, constitute; mid., to
Luke V. 6 ; as bonds, Luke viii. a])point, to ordain, as I Cor. vii. 17
29.* (also with dat. pers.ace, thing).;

8ia-(ra(|>e(i), w, to make fully manifest, 8ka-TeX6(i), CO, to continue, to remain

to tell all. Matt, xviii. 31, xiii. 36 through a certain time. Acts xxvii.
(W. H.).
Sia-o-eCcj, to treat with violence, so as to 8ia-TT]p€0), to guard or keep with care, as
extort anything, Luke iii. 14.* in the heart, Luke
with eavrov, ii. 51 ;

8ia-crKopiri^«, to st rev' oy scatter, as Matt. etc., to guard oneself from, to abstain

XXV. 24 ; to disjierse in con(|uest, as (e/f or d-Ko), Acts XV. 29.*

Luke i. 51 ; to waste or squander, Luke 8ia-T£ or bia tl (W. H.) wherefore? ;

XV, 13, xvi. I. 8ia-Ti0T][ii, only mid. in N.T., to dispose,

8ia-o-ird«, 1st aor. pass. ^Lecnrdadtjv, to as (i) to commit to, appoint, Luke
pull or pluek asunder or in pieces, xxii. 29 (2) with cog, ace, dLadrjKrjv^
;

JNlark v. 4 ; Acts xxiii, 10.* make a covenant with (dat. oT tt/so's,

8ia-(nr€^pfa), 2nd aor. pass. 8i€(nrdp7]v, to ace), Acts iii. 25 Heb. viii, 10, x. 16 ; ;

scatter abroad, as seed so of Chris- ; make a will, Heb. ix. 16^ 17. See
tians dispersed by persecution, Acts dLadrjKT].*
viii. I, 4, xi. 19.* 8ia-Tpipw, to spend {xpovov ov i]fj.epds),
8ia-(r7ropa, as, 17, dis2Jersion, state of being tarry, as Acts xiv. 3, 28 abs., to ;

dispersed. Used of the Jews as scat- sojourn, as John iii. 22.

tered among the Gentiles, John vii. 8ia-Tpo<j)T|, 77?, r/, food, nourishment^
35 ; James Pet. i. i.* i. I ; I 1 Tim. vi. 8,*
8ia-a-T€'XXa), in mid., to give in charge, to St-atJ^dtca, to shine through, to dawn,
command expressly, ]\Iark viii, 15 Acts ; 2 Pet. i. 19.*
XV. 24 ; with negative words, toforbid. 8ia-(j)avT|S; es, shining through, transpa-
Ho prohibit. Matt. xvi. 20 (W. H. rent. Rev. xxi. 21. (AV. H.-, biavyris in
marg.) ]\lark v. 43, vii. 36, ix. 9.
; same signif.)
pass, part., to 8 laar eWo fxev ov ,}ieb. xii. 8ia-<J>€'pw, (i) to carry thraugh, Mark
20, the coiiimand.* xi, 16 ; (2) to bear abroad. Acts
8id-<rTT]p.a, aros, to, an interval of time, xiii, 49, xxvii. 27 (3) to dif'er from ;

Acts V. 7,* (gen.), I Cor. xv. 41 ; Gal. iv. i ;

8ia-(rToXif), rjs, 17, distinction, difference, hence (4) to be better than, to surpass,
Rom. iii. 22, x. 12 ; i Cor. xiv. as ]\Iatt. vi. 26; (5) impers. Sia^epei, ,

witli ovbev, it makes no difference ta

8ia-o-Tp€(J)w, to seduce, turn aioay, Luk(? Vlat. matters nothing to, Gal. ii. 6.
),

xxiii. 2 ; Acts xiii. 8 to pervert.; 8ia-<|>ev-Y(a, to escape by flight. Acts

Acts xiii. 10. Perf. part., pass., xxvii. 42.*
dteaTpaiJ.fj.evos, perverse, vicious. Matt. 8ia-^T]p.£^b>, to report, ^;?iZ>Z't57i abroad,
xvii, 17 Luke ix. 41 ; ; Acts xx. 30 ;
divulge. Matt. ix. 31, xxviii. 15 ;
Phil, ii. 15.* ]\lark i. 45,*
8iao-w^(a, (Tw, to save, to convey safe destroy idterhj, Luke xii. T^y,
8ia-<j>Beip&>, to

through, Acts xxiii. 24, xxvii. 43 ;

Rev. 18 pass., to decay, to
viii. 9, xi. ;

I Pet. iii. 20 pass, to reach a 2)lace ;

, perish, 2 Cor. iv. 16; i Tim. vi. 5.*
in safety, Acts xxvii. 44, xxviii. i, 4; Opp, to dvaKaLv6(3}, to renew.
to heal 'perfectly, ]\Iatt. xiv. 36 Luke ;
8ia-4>dopd, as, rj, decay, corruption,
vii. 3.* i.e., of the grave, Acts ii. 27, 31,
^
8ia-Ta"yir|, ris, rj, a disposing of, ordinance, xiii, 34-37 (LXX.).*
appointment. Acts vii. 53 Rom. xiii. ;
8i.d-<}>opos, ov, (i) diverse, of different
2.* kinds, Rom. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10;
8id-Ta"y|ia, aros, rd, a mandate, a decree, (2) conipar., more excellent than, Heb,
xi. 23.* i, 4, viii. 6.*
Heb.
8ia'(j>vXdo'(rca — SiKalwpa] VOCABULARY. 421

8ia-<|)vXdo-(r«, to guard carefully, pro- 8i-€p|j,T]V€VTTJs, ov, 6, ttu interpreter, i Cor.

tect, defend, Luke iv. io(LXX.).* xiv. 28.*
8ia-xei'p£t<^, mid. N.T., to lay Imnds 8i-cp|iTJv£V(u, to interp)ret, explain, Luke
on, 2^it to death, Acts v. 30, xxvi. xxiv. 27 ; Acts ix. 36 ; i Cor. xii. 30,
21.* xiv. 5, 13, 27.*
8i.a-x.X€vd^(i), see X'^fi'a^w. 8{-£pxo}Jiai, to 2MSS through, ace. or did
Sia-xtopC^b), pass. N.T., "to be sepa- (gen. ), destination expressed by ets or
rated," to leave, to depart from {airo), ^ios ; to 2^<^ss over or travel, abs. , Acts
Luke ix. 33.* viii. 4 ; to spread, as a report, Luke v.
SiSaKTLKOs, '/], OP, apt at teaching ^ i Tim. 15-
iii. 2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24.* 8i-€puTdb), cD, to find by inquiry, Acts
SiSttKTos, Tj, 6v, taught, instructed, Jolm x. 17.*
vi. 45 I Cor. ii. 13.
; 8i-£TTis, es (5ts), oftivoyears,'Ma,tt.\\. 16.*
8i8acrKaXia, as, 17, teaching, i.e., (i) the 8i-6Tia, as, the sjjace of two years.
T], Acts
manner or art of teaching, as Rom. xxiv. 27, xxviii. 30.*
xii. 7 ; or (2) the doctrine taught, pre- 8i-T]'Y«>|iai, ov/xai, to lead through, to
cept, instruction, as ]\Iatt. xv. 9, etc. recount perfectly, to declare the whole of
SiSdo-KoXos, ov, 6, a teacher, especially of a matter.
the Jewish law, master, doctor, as SiTj-yiio-is, ews, 17, narrative or history,
*
Luke ii. 49 often in voc. as a title of
; Luke i. I .

address to Christ, Master, Teacher. 8i-Tiv€K'fis, continuous, peipetual, els

^s,
8i8d(rK(*), f. StSct^w, to teach, to he a teacher, TO adverbial, for ever, Heb.
Si-qveKes,
abs. ; to teach, with ace. of pers., vii. 3, X. I, 12, 14.*
generally also ace. of thing ; also with 8i-0dXacro-os, ov (5ts), washed by the sea
inf. or bTL. on tico sides, Acts xxvii. 41.*
8i8axT|, 17s, T}, doctrine, teaching, i.e., (i) 81-iKveop.ai, ovfjLai, to pass through, as a
the act, (2) the mode, or (3) the thing sword piercing, Heb. iv. 12.*
taught. With
gen., perhaps, in
obj. 8i-£o-TT]p,i, to 2>ut a2Kirt, to inter2mse. Acts
Heb. vi. 2, see § h, note. 260, xxvii. 28, lit. , having inter2)osed a little
8(-8pax.(iov, 01', TO (prop, adj., sc. vo/jnafia, (space), i.e., having gone a little
coin), a double drachma, or silver further; 2 aor., inti-ans., Luke xxii. 59,
half-shekel (in LXX., the shekel). Matt, one hour luiving intervened ; xxiv. 51,
xvii. 24. he icas parted from them.*
A(8v|ios, 77, ov, double, or twin; a sur- 8i-i<rxvp£to[iai, to afiUrm strongly, Luke
name of Thomas the apostle, John xi. xxii. 59 Acts xii. 15.*
;

16, XX. 24, xxi. 2.* 8iKaio-Kpi(ria, as, i], just judgment, Rom.
8£8a)|ii, to give (ace. and dat. ). Hence, ii. 5.*
in various connections, to yield, de- 8CKaios, o-ioi, ov, just, right, U2}right,
liver, sup)ply, commit, etc. When righteous, impartial; applied to things,
used in a general sense, the dat. of to persons, to Christ, to God. Adv.,
pers. may be omitted, as Matt. xiii. 8. -ws, justly, deservedly. Syn. 21.
The thing given may be expressed by 8iKaio<rvvT], 77s, r;, righteousness, justice,
e/c or airb, with gen. in a partitive rectitude, goodness generally.
sense instead of ace. So Matt. xxv. 8iKaid(D, cD, to make just, make righteous;
8 Luke xx. 10.
; The purpose of a also in N.T. in the declarative sense, to
gift may be expressed by inf. as Matt, , hold guiltless, to justify, to 2^''onounce
xiv. 16 ; John iv. 7 Luke i. J^.
; or treat as righteous, as Alatt. xii. 37 ;
hi-iydpoi, to wake up thoroughly, as Luke I Cor. iv. 4.

viii. 24 ; to excite, John vi. 18 tig., ;

8lKa£a)px^ aros, to, a rigldeous decree or
to ytir up, arouse, 2 Pet. i. 13. statute, an ordinance, Luke i. 6 ; Rom.
8i-€v0v(ico}jLat, ou/Atti (W. H.), to reflect. i. 32, ii. 26 ; Heb. ix. i, 10 ; especially
Acts X. 19.* a decree of acquittal, justification (opp.
8i-€'^-o8os, " a crossway of
ov, 77, lit., to KaTCLKpi/xa, condemnation), Rom. v.
exit " so, a meeting -place of roads,
; 16 ; a righteous act, Rom. v. 18 ;

a public spot in a city, Matt. xxii. 9.* Rev. XV. 4, xix. 8.*
422 VOCABULARY. [SiKaCwo-is — 8(J|a

SiKa^bxris, 6WS, 7), acquittal, justification, 8i\(/os, oi's, TO, thirst, 2 Cor. xi. 27.*
Rom. iv. 25, V. 18.* 8£m|/vxos, ov (5is), double-minded, James
SiKao-TTJs, ov, 6, a judge, Luke xii. 14 i. 8, iv. 8.*
(W. H., ; Acts vii. 27, 35.*
KpLT-qs) 810)^110$, ov, 6, persecution.
SCkt], 77s, a judicial sentence, Acts xxv.
7;, 8iwKTT]s, ov, 6, a 2^0'secittor, i Tim. i.

15 f(W. H., KaTaSiKT]) riw or virexi^ ;

13*
diKTjv, to suffer 'punishment, 2 Tliess. 8iwK(d, ^a>, to jncrsue, in various senses
i. 9 Jucle 7 ;
; Vengeance, tlie name according to context ; to folloiv, follow
of a heathen deity. Acts xxviii. 4.* after, press forivard ; to persecute.
8£ktvov, ov, to, a fishing-net. 8d'Yp.a, aros, to {5ok^u), that which seems
Si-Xd-yos, ov (Sis), double-tongued, deceit- good to some one, a decree, edict,
ful, I Tim. iii. 8.* ordiiuince, Luke ii. i ; Acts xvi. 4,
8to, conj. (5ta and 0), therefore, on which xvii. 7 ; Eph. ii. 15 ; Col. ii. 14.*
account, wherefore. Scyfiaritw, trw, to make a decree, to im-
Si-oScvb), journey or jmss thro^ujh,
to pose an ordinance ; mid. , to submit to
Luke viii. i ; Acts xvii. i * . ordinances. Col. ii. 20.*
Aiovvo-ios, iov, 6, Dionysius, Acts xvii. 34.* 8oK^(o, w, So^w, (i) to think, ace. and
Sio-irep, conj., for which very reason, inf. (2) to seem, appear, be evident;
;

I Cor, viii. 13, x. 14, xiv. 13,* (3) boKei, impers., it seems ; it seems
Ato-ircTTis, h, fallen from Zeus or Jupiter, good to or pleases, dat.
Aetsxix. 35.* 8oKi|xdtb>, (Tw, to try, put to the proof,
8i-dp0a)p.a, see KaTopdojfxa. jrrove, as 2 Cor. viii. 22 ; to discern,
8i-dp0w(ris, ews, 17, an ameiulment, reform- interpret, Luke xii. 56 ; to judge fit,
ation, Heb. ix. 10.* approve, as i Cor. xvi. 3.
8i-opvcrora), |w, to dig through, IMatt. vi. 8oKip,a(ria, 17, the act of 'proving, Heb.
19, 20, xxiv. Luke xii. 39.* 43 ; iii. 9(W. H.).*
Aidcr-Kovpoi, (i}v, oi (children of Zeus), 8oKi|ir|, Tjs, T), proof, knowledge acquired
Castor and Pollux, Acts xxviii. 11.* by proof, experience.
Sb-OTi, conj. ( = 5td TovTo, oti), wherefore, 8oKi|jLi,ov, ov, to, a test, a means of trying,
a criterion, *
on this account, because, for. i Pet. i.
7 ; Jas. i. 3.
Aio-Tp€<|)T|s, oOs, 6, Diotrephes, 3 John 9.* 8dKip.os, ov [Sixofj'-a.L), ajiproved, genuine,
StirXoos, ovs, Tj, ovv, double, twofold, acceptable, as Rom. xvi. 10, xiv. 18.
I Tim. Rev. xviii. 6
V. 17 comp.,
; ; 8oKds, ov, 7], a beam of timber. Matt. vii.
StTrXdrepos with gen., Matt, xxiii. 15.* 3, 4, 5 ; vi. 41, Luke 42.*
SiTrXdb), Q), to double. Rev. xviii. 6.* 8dXio$, ia, lov, deceitful, 2 Cor. xi. 13.*
8Cs, adv., tivice. 8oXid6), u), to deceive. Impf., 3rd pers.
(A^s), obsolete nom. for Zevs, gen. Atds, plur. iSoXiovaav, an Alexandrian form
,

ace. Ala, Zens or Jupiter. from LXX., Rom. iii. 13.*

Sio-Tatw, (Tw (5ts), ^0 waver, to doubt, 8dXos, ov, 6, fraud, deceit, craft.
Matt. xiv. 31, xxviii. 17.* 8oXda), w, to falsify, adulterate, 2 Cor.
St-o-TOfJLos, ov (dis), two-edged, Heb. iv. 12; iv. 2.*
Rev. i. 16, ii. 12.* 8d(ia, aTos, to (5t5a»/ii), a gift. Matt. vii.
8i(r-xCXiou, at, a, num., two thousand, II ; Luke xi. 13; Eph. iv. 8; Phil,
^lark v. 1 3. iv. 17.''
Si-vXC^o), to strain off, filter through a 8d|a, as, ij, from doKew, in two main
sieve, Matt, xxiii. 24.* significations: (i) favourable recogni-
8ixat(^, (Tw, to set at varia'uee, divide. tion or estimation, honour, reiunvn,
Matt. X. 35.* as John v. 41, 44 2 Cor. vi. 8 ;

8txo-(rTa<rta, as, i], a faction, division, Luke xvii. 18 and very frequently (2) ;

separation, Rom. xvi. 17 ; I Cor. iii. a seeming, appearance, the manifesta-

3(not W. H.); Gal. v. 20.* tion of that ivhich calls forth praise ; so
8ixo-TOfjL^ft), u), to cut in two or asunder, especially in the freq. phrase i} d6^a
iMatt. xxiv. 51 ; Luke xii. 46.* Tov Qeov, glory, splendour. Concrete
8i\}/db>, w, qau), to thirst for, to desire plur. 56|ai, in 2 Pet. ii. 10 ; Jude 8,
earnestly, ace. ; or abs. , to thirst. dignities, angelic powers.
 ;;

8o^dtu — 8»povJ V0CABT7LARY. 423

8o|dt<<>, <rw, to ascribe glory to, to honmir, 8vva|xd(i), w, 10 strengthen, confirfU, Col,
glorify. i. Heb. xi. 34 (W. H. ).'*
II ;

AopKas, ados, ijy DorcaSy Acts ix. 36, 8vvd<m]s, ov, 6, {i) a potentate, prince,
39-* Lukei. 52 ; i Tim. vi. 15 ; (2) one in
860-is, cws, a givingy Phil. iv. 1 5 ; a gift,
7/,
authority. Acts viii. 27.*
James 17.*
i. 8vvaTcw, w, to be powerful, have poiver to
*
8dTT]s, ov, 6, a giver, 2 Cor. ix. 7. (inf.), 2 Cor. xiii. 3 Rom. xiv. 4 ;

SovX-a-yu-y^id, w, to bring into subjection, (W.^H.); 2 Cor. ix. 8 (W. H.).*

I Cor. ix. 27.* 8vvaTds, rj, ov, able, having power,
SovXeia, as, <7, slavery, bondage. mighty. 6 dwaros. The Almighty,
SovXcvu), <Tw, ( I ) <o 6<3 a ^Zarc, absolutely Luke i. 49. dvvarou, possible.
(2) to be S2ibject to, to obey, dat. Svv<a or dull}, 2nd aor. }8vp, to sink; to
SovXt], r]s, i], a handmaid, a female slave. set, as the sun, Mark i. 32 ; Luke iv.

8ovXo$, (once as adj., Rom. vi. 19),

ov, 6, 40.*
a slave, bondman (opp. to iXevdepos) ;
8vo, num., indecl., except dat., Sucrt,

a servant (opp. to Kvpios, deairoTrjs), so t'/'O.

in the freq. phrases dovXos rod GeoD, 8vs-, an inseparable prefix, implying
8ov\os XpiiTTOv, Syn. 60. adverse, difficult, or grievous.
SovXod), w, axrw, to reduce to boiulage 8vo--pd<rTaKTos, ov, oppressive, difficult
(ace. and dat.) ; pass., to be held sub- to be borne. Matt, xxiii. 4 (not W. H.);
ject to, be in bondage. Luke xi. 46.*
80XTJ, 175, 7/ receiving of
(5^xoA*ciO> ''a- 8v<r-€VT€pCa, as, if (W. H., -iov to), a dys-
ffuests," a banquet, Luke xiv, 13.* entery, a flux. Acts xxviii. 8.*
8paKa)v, ovTos, 6, a dragon or huge ser- 8v<r-€pp.T)V€VTOs, ov, hard to be explained,
*
pent ; symb. for Satan, Rev. Heb. V. II.*
8pdo-(ro}i.ai, dep. , to grasj), take, catch ; 8vo--KoXos, ov (lit., "difficult about
ace, I Cor. iii. 19.* food"), difficult, hard to accomplish,
8pax|JLVj, •^j, 7], a drachma, an Attic silver Mark x. 24.* Adv., -ws, icith diffi-
coin equal to the Roman denarius, or culty, hardly, xix. 23 ; Mark
INIatt.
worth between sevenpence and eight- X. 23 ; Luke xviii. 24.*
pence of our money, Luke xv. 8, 9.* 8v<rp.T|, 77s, 17 (only plur., Sua/xai), the set-
(8p€)i(i)), obs. (see Tp^x^)^ ^^ run. ting of tM sun, the west.
SpcVavov, ov, TO, a sickle or pruning- 8v<r-vdT]TOs, ov, hard or difficult to be
hook, ^lark iv. 29 ; Rev. xiv.* understood, 2 Pet. iii. 16.*
8p6p.o$, ov, 6, a running; fig., course, 8vo--4>T]^(D, to speak evil, defame, i Cor.
career. Acts xiii. 25, xx. 24 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13 (W. H.).*
iv. 7.* 8v<r-<}>T]^£a, as, 7/, evil report, infamy.
Apov(r{XX(i, 77s, i), Drusilla, Acts xxiv. 8w8cKa, indecl., num., twelve, ol 8w5eKa,
24.* the twelve, i.e., the Apostles.
8vva|xai, dep. (see § 109, b, i), to be 8(D8eKaTos, 77, ov, num., ord., twelfth,
able, abs. , or with inf. (sometimes Rev. xxi. 20.*
omitted) or ace. to ; have a capacity 8<D8cKd-({>vXov, ov, t6, the twelve tribeSy
for ; to be strong, as i Cor. iii. 2 to ; Israel, Acts xxvi. 7.
have power to do, whether through 8w(ia, aro^, to, a house, a house-top.
ability, disposition, permission, or Syn. 61.
opportunity. 8(i)p€d, as, 77, a free gift.
8vva|jLi$, ews, 7/, (i) power, might, abso- hmpiaVy accus. of preced., as an adv.,
lutely or as an attribute ; (2) po^ver freely, as 2 Cor. xi. 7 ; without cause,
over, expressed by eh or iirl (ace), groundlessly, John xv. 25 ; Gal.
ability to do ; (3) exercise of p)o^ver, ii. 21.

mighty work, miracle, as Matt. xi. 20; B<apio\iai, ov/xai, to give freely, Mark xv.
(^) forces, as of an army, spoken of the 45; pass., 2 Pet. i. 3, 4.*
heavenly hosts, as Matt. xxiv. 29 8(upi]|JLa, aros, to, a free gift, Rom. v. 16;
(5) force, as of a word, i.e., signifi- James i. 17.*
cance, I Cor. xiv. II. Synn. 45, 57. 8ci)pov, ov, TO, a gift.
424 VOCABULARY, [E—ky-

E. €yyi5<i), fut. att. iyytQ;

, pf., i^yyiKa, to
approach, to draivnear, to be near, abs.,
E e, i\pi\ov, cpsilon, e, the fifth letter. or with dat. or ets, or eiri (ace. ).
As a numeral, e'=:5 ; €^=5000. (W. H., tvy--), to inscribe, infix,
e-y-^pdcfxi)
^a, expressing surprise or com-
interj., 2 Cor. iii. 2 Luke x. 20 (W. H.).*
;

plaint, oh ! alas ! Mark i. 24 ( W. H. ^YY^os, ov, 6, 17, a surety, sponsor, Heb.

omit) ; Luke iv. 34.* vii. 22.*
€dv, or dv, conj. (for e^ 6.v), if, usually used of both place and
e-yyvs, adv., 7iear;
construed with subjunctive verb. time, with gen. or dat.
See § 383. \V. H. have the indie. ey-yviTcpov, comp. of preceding, nearer
fut. in Luke xix. 40 ; Acts viii. 31 ; Rom. xiii. 11.*
pres. in i Thess. iii. 8 ; i John v. 15 eY^iph), iyepQ, pass, perf., eyrjyepfiai, to
(rec. also). Sometimes equivalent arouse, to awaken ; to raise up, as a
to a particle of time, John xii. 32, Saviour to erect, as a building; mid.,
;

when ; after the relative, with an in- to rise up, as from sleep, or from a
definite force, 8s edv, who50cwr, as recumbent posture, as at table. Ap-
Matt. 19, viii. 19; i Cor.
V. xvi. 6. plied to raising the dead used also of ;

iap di Kai, and if also ; eav firj, ex- rising up against, as an adversary, or
cept, unless, Matt. v. 20; but that, in judgment.
Mark iv. 22 ; eav irip^ if indeed, Heb. ^•yepo-is, ews, i], a looking up ; of the
vi. 3. resurrection. Matt, xxvii. 53.*
lavTov, pron. , reflex., 3rd pers., of one- t^K-. Li words beginning thus, W. H.
self; used also in ist (plur. ) and 2nd generally ^wiite evK-.
persons. See § 335. Genitive often ey-KaO-CTOS, ov, adj. (eyKadirjfxi), a spy,
*
for possess, pron.
X^7etv or eiyreTv iu an insidioiLS foe, Luke xx. 20.
€avT<^, to say tvithm oneself; ylveadai c'yKaivia, ioiv, to., a dedication, John x.
or ^pxeadac h
tavT(^, to come to one- 22 of the feast commemorating the
;

self ; irpos iavTov, to one's home, John dedicating or purifying of the temple,
XX. 10, or privately, as Luke xviii. 1 1 after its pollution by Antiochus Epi-
€v eavToh, among yourselves, i.e., one phanes, 25 Chisleu, answering to mid-
with another; Kad' iavrdv apart ; Trap' , December.*
eavrbv, at home. i-^l-KixivCiij), to Heb. ix. 18. x. 20.*
dedicate,
€0,0), (i, edaio ; impf. eicov ; 1st aor., , c'Y-KaK€b), tD, to grow weary, tofaint{W.}i. ).
eiaaa, (i) to jier^nit, inf., or ace. and iy-Kokibi. Q, iaio, itripf'., eveKdXovv, to

inf. ; (2) to leave. Acts xxiii. 32, and summon court for trial, to indict,
to a.

prob. (R.V.) Acts xxvii. 40. pers. dat., or Kara (gen.); crime, in
e^8o(jL-r|KovTa, indecl., num., seventy. 61 gen.
e^SofjLTjKovTa, the seventy disciples, Luke iy-KaTa-XiCTTOi, xj/u), aban-
(i) to desert, to
X. I, 17. don ; (2) to leave remaining, Rom. ix,
^
ip8op.T]KovTdKis, num. di^dy., seventy times, 29.
Matt, xviii. 22.* c-y-Kar-oiK^w, Q, to dicell among {h), 2
'^B8ofjLOs, 77, ov, ord. num., seventh. Pet. ii. 8.*
"Epcp, 6, Ehcr or Heher, Luke iii. 35.* ey-Kavxao}iai, to boast in, 2 Thess. i.
4
'EPpaiKos, T7, bv, Hebrew. (W. H.).*
'Eppaios ( W
H. ,'E. ), ala, atov, also subst.
. c-y-KevTpf^w, to insert, as a bud or graft ;

6, i], a Hebreio ; a Jew of Palestine, in fig., Rom. xi.*

distinction from ol 'E\\r]pi<xTai, or Jews ^7-KXiijia, aTos, t6, a charge or accusation,
born out of Palestine, and using the Acts xxiii. 29, XXV. 16.*
Greek language. 4Y-KO(i.pdo|xai, ovfxai, to clothe, as with an
'Eppats (W. H.,'E.), idos, t}, the Hebrew or outer garment tied closely with knots,
Aramoean language, vernacular in the I Pet. V. 5.*

time of Christ and the Apostles. See c-y-KOTTTi, ^s, i], an impediment, I Cor. i.x.

§150. 12.*
*EPpaio-T£ (W. H. ,'E. ), adv. wi thcHebrew , ky-K6irrbi, xpo), to interrupt, to hinder
language. See preo<'ding. (ace, or inf with rod).
 . ;

^•y-KpaT€ia — cljxC] VOCABULARY. 425

^-Kpdrcia, as, i], self-control, temperance ^ solemn assertions, it may be rendered

continence, Acts xxiv. 25 ; Gal., v. 23 ; by tlutt ... not. ei /jlt) and el (irp-i,

2 Pet. i. 6.* unless, excejjf. el 5e /xr), but if not,

cy-Kparcvofiai, dep., to restrain oneself otherwise, John xiv. 2. et trep, if so
in sensual pleasures ; to be temperate, be. et irios, if possibly. etre . . etre,
I Cor. vii. 9, ix. 25.* v:hether . . . or.
eY-KpaT^js, ^s, having poicer over, sclf- €l8ov. See bpaw, oWa.
cotiirolled, temperate, alstinent, Tit. i. elSos, ovs, TO, outward ajrpcarance, form,
8.* aspect, Lukeiii. 22, ix. 29 John v. ;

ry-Kpfvo), to adjudge or reckon, to a par- 37 ; 2 Cor. V. 7 perhaps species, kind,

;

ticular rank (ace. and dat. ), 2 Cor. x. I Thess. V. 22.*

12.* cl8a)\ciov, 01', TO, an idol-temple, i Cor.
t-y-KpuiTTft), to hide in^ to mix icith. Matt. viii. 10,*
xiii. 33 ; Luke xiii. 2 ("VV. l^.,Kp{nrTw).* €l8u)Xd-6vTOS, ov, sacrificed, to idols ; used
?Y-Kvos, ov, pregnant, Luke ii. 5.* of meats, as Acts xv. 29.
(y-\pi(a, to rub in, anoint, Rev. iii. 18.* elSuXo-Xarpeia, as, t], idolatry.
kyoi, pron., pers,, /; plur., ^yue??, lue. €i8(dXo-XdTpr]s, ov, 6, an idolater.
See § 53. €ll8«)Xov, ov, TO, an idol, a false god
e8a()>C|^a), fut. (Attic), -tw, to lay level worshipped in an image.
with the ground, to raze^ Luke xix. cIkt) or eUfi (W, H. ), adv., to no purpose,
44-* Rom. xiii. 4; i Cor.
in vain, as xv. 2.
*
^8a<|>os, ovs, t6, the ground, Acts xxii. 7. (W. H. and 'R.Y. omit in Matt. v. 22.)
cSpaLOS, am, aiov, stcdfast, firm, fixed, cI'koo-i, indecL, num., tu-cnty.
Cor. vii. 37, XV. 58
I Col. i. 23.* ; d'Kw, to give way, to yield, Gal. ii. 5.*
cSpaCwpia, aros, to, a basis, stay, support, (cI'ko)), whence 2nd perf. ?ot/ca, to
obs.,
I Tim. iii. 15.* resemble; with dat., James i. 6, 23.*
'Et^KCas, 01;, 6, HezeTciah, Matt. i. 9, 10.* '
cIkcuv, 6vos, 7], an image, copy, representa-
lOeXo-BpT^o-Kefa, as, 17, icill-worshi}), Col. tion, likeness.
23.*
ii. clXiKpCveia, as, t), clearness, sincerity,
leeXw. See ^eXw. I Cor. V. 8 ; 2 Cor. i. 12, ii. 17.*
€0£^a), <o accustom; pass., perf. part., clXiKpivT|s, es, sincere, pure, without spot'
neut., t6 ddiafxhov, the accustomed or blemish (perhaps from e'Ck-q, sun-
practice, the custom, Luke ii. 27.* light, and Kpivu, to judge, "capable of
c6vapxi]s, ov, 6, a prefect, lieutenant- being judged in the light," but doubt-
governor, ethnarch, 2 Cor. xi. 32.* ful, for e'tXr) is rather the sun's warmth),
c6vkKos, 17, 6v, natiotuil, of Gentile race, Phil. i. 10 2 Pet. iii. i.*
;

heathen. Matt. v. 47 (W. H.), vi. 7, tWicra-id ("W. H., eXicrffoj), to roll together,
xviii. 17 ; 3 John 7 (W. H.).* Adv., as a scroll, Rev. vi. 14.*
-ws, heathenly, after tlie manner of d\U (see § 110), a verb of existence,
Jieathens, Gal. ii. 14.* (i) used as a predicate, to be, to exist,
20VOS, ovs, t6, the people of any country, to happen, to c&nu to pass; ^^'ith an
a natioiu ra ^dvrj, the nations, the infin. following, ean, it is convenient,
heathen world, the Gentiles'. proper, etc., as Heb. ix. 5 (2) as ;

'^Sos, ovs, t6, a usage, custom, manner. the copula of subject and predicate,
^0«, obs., pf. eiutda, in pres. signif, to be simply to be, or in the sense of to be
accustomed, Matt, xxvii. 1 5 ; Mark like, to represent, John vi. 35 ; Matt.
X. I. t6 eiu)dds avr($, his custom, Luke xxvi. 26 ; I Cor. x. 4. With parti-
iv. 16; Acts xvii. 2.* ciples, it is used to form the "re-
cl, a conditional conjunction (see § 383), solved tenses," as Luke i. 22, iv. 16
if, since, though. After verbs indi- Matt. xvi. 19, etc. With gen., as
cating emotion, d is equivalent to predicate, it marks quality, posses-
oTi, Mark xv. 44. As an interro- sion, participation, etc. ; with dat.,
gative particle, el occurs in both in- property, possession, destination, etc.
direct and direct questions, Mark For its force with a prep, and its case,
XV. 45 ; Acts i. 6. In oaths and see Syntax of Prepositions. The verb,
426 VOCABULARY. [etp-i Sk8t]\os

when copula, often omitted.

is Par- €l<r-KaX^to), w, only mid. in N.T., to call
ticiple, wv, heing to 6v, that which is;
; or invite in, Acts x. 23.*
ol 6vTci, TO, ovTa, persons or things, tJuit cVc-oSos, ov, i], an entrance, a first coming^
are. an admission.
ct|iir, to go, in some copies for elfii, in John €l(r-Trr]8do), w, to leap in, to sp)ring in
vii. 34, 36 (not W. H.).* Acts xiv. 14 (W. H., e/CTT-), xvi. 29.*
ctvcKa, -ei'. See efc/ca, -ev. ci(r-7ropcvo)iai, dep., to go in, to enter;
cCircp, etTTws. See under el. spoken of persons, as Mark i. 21 ; of
clirov(see § 103, 7), (W. H., etTra,) from things, as Matt. xv. 17. elairopevofxai
obs. eTTw, or etwu), to say ; in reply, to Kai eKiropevo/xai, to go in and oiit in
answer; in narration, to tell; in daily duties, Acts ix. 28.
authoritative directions, to bid or com- €l<r-Tp^X.w, 2nd aor. elaiSpa/xov, to run
mand, as Luke vii, 7. in or into. Acts 14.* xii.
clp-r]V6V(i), to have peace, to be at 2^cace, €i(r-(j>cpa) (see § 103, 6), to lead into (with

Mark ix. 50 Rom. xii. 18 ; 2 Cor.

; els), e.g., temptation, as Luke xi. 4;

xiii. II 2 Thess. v. 13.*

; to bring to the ears of, Acts xvii.
clpi]VT], 77s, i], peace, the opposite of strife 20.
peace of mind, arising from reconcilia- tlra, adv., tTien, afterwards.
tion with God. In N.T. (like the €l'Te, conj. See el.

corresponding Heb. word in O.T.), €K, before a vowel, i^, a prep. gov.
or,
eiprjvT) generally denotes a perfect well- geu.,from, out of (the interior). See
being. Often employed in salutations, § 293. In composition, e/c implies
as in Heb. removal, continuance, completion, or is
clpTjviKos, 7), bv, peaceable, James iii. 17; of intensive force.
peaceful, Heb. xii. ii.* ^Kao-Tos, each, every one (with partitive
clp-qvo-TToicft), w, to make peace, reco7icile, ^en.). els eKaaros, every one soever.

Col. i. 20.* €Ka<rTOT€, adv., each time, ahvays, 2 Pet.

GlpT]vo-Troids, 01^, 6, a peacernakeTf Matt. i. 15.*
V. 9.* €KaT<$v, card. num. a hiindred.
,

els, governing ace, into, to (the

prep, €KaTovTacTT]s, es, a hundred years old,
interior). See §§ 124, 298. In com- Rom. iv. 9.*
position, it implies motion into or iKaTovrairXaor^wv, ov, a hundredfold, ace.
towards. -ova, Matt. xix. 29 (not W. H.); Mark
els, /Ai'a, eu, a card, num., one; used X. 30 Luke viii. 8.*
;

distributively, as Matt. xx. 21 ; by CKaTovrdpx'ns (or -01), ov, 0, captain over

way of emphasis, as Mark ii. 7 and ; a hundred men, a centurion.
indefinitely, as Matt. viii. 19; Mark cK-^aCvb), 2nd aor. e^i^rjv (W. H.), to go
xii. 42. As an ordinal, the first, Matt, out, Heb. xi. 15.*
xxviii. I ; Rev. ix. 12. fK-pdXXa>, to cast out, send out, as la-
do- d^w, 2nd aor. eiariyayov, to bring in, bourers into a field ; to send away,
introduce. dismiss, reject ; to extract or take out.
cl(r-aKov(D, to to hear prayer.
listen to, fK-Paoris, ews, ij, a way out, event, end,
Matt. vi. 7 ; Luke
13 ; Acts x. 31 i. ;
I Cor. x. 13 Heb. xiii. 7.*
;

Heb. V. 7 ; to hear so as to obey (gen.),
1 Cor. xiv. 21.*
do-- 8exo|iai, to receive into favour (ace),
2 Cor. vi. 17 ; from LXX.*
cl'(r-€i|ii, impf. darieiv, inf. eiaiiuai {eTfxi),
to go in, to enter (with ets), Acts iii. 3,
xxi. 18, 26; Heb. ix. 6.*
cl<r-^pXO)xai, 2iid aor. ei<xrj\6ov, to
Ik-^oXiq, Tjs, 77, a casting out, as lading
from a ship, Acts xxvii. 18.*
iK-^aiiCtw or -i<rK(t), to give in marriage.
^K-'yovos, ov, sprung from ; neut. plur.,
descendants, i Tim. v. 4.*
CK-Sairavdb), w, to spend entirely ; pass.
reflex., to expend ones energies for
come iti, {i'-rrep), 2 Cor. xii. 1 5.*

to enter (chiefly with els). elff^pxo/J.ai ^K-8^ofJLai, to look out for, to expect {^us),
Kal i^ipxofJ.ai, to come ami go in and to wait for (ace).
out, spoken of daily life and intercourse, ^k8t]Xos, ov, quite plain, conspicuous,
Acts i. 2 1 . Fig. of entrance upon a state.
, manifest, 2 Tim. iii. 9.*
 ;

Ik-8t](JL^(D — €Kov<rios] VOCABULARY. 427

cK-8i]|jL4a), u), to be away from^ ahsemi eK-KXdd), to break off, as branches from a
from, 2 Cor. v. 6-9,* stem, Rom.
xi. 17, 19, 20.*
cK-8£8w}ii, N.T. mid., to let out to farm, Ik-kXciu, (Tw, to shut out, Rom. iii. 27 ;

Matt. xxi. 33, 41 ; Mark xii. i ; Luke Gal. iv. 27.*

XX. 9.* €KKXT|(rCa, aj,ij (e/cAcaXeco), an assembly of

€K-8i-T]-y€0fiai, ov/jLai, dep. mid., to rehearse Acts xix. 32, 39, 41 legally
the people, ;

particularly, tell fully, Acts xiii. 41, or tumultuously gathered. Espec. in

XV. 3.* N.T., the assembly of believers, the
<K-8iKC6>, w, to do justice to, avenge a per- Church as a whole, or a church in one
son (ace. and airo), Luke xviii. 3, 5 ; place, I Cor. xii. 28 Acts xi. 26. So, ;

Rom. ig; to
xii. requital for, demand often plural, as Acts xv. 41.
avenge a deed (ace), 2 Cor. x. 6 ; Rev. «k-kXiv«, to decline, turn away from
vi. 10, xix. 2.* (dTTo), Rom. iii. 12, xvi. 17 ; I Pet.
^K-8CKT]arks, ews, 7), an avenging, vindica- iii. II,*
tion, punishment. CK-KoXv}ipd«, cD, to swim out or avmy,
^K-8iK0S) ov, b, 7), an avetiger, one wJio Acts xxvii. 42.*
adjudges a culprit (dat.) to punishment €K-KO|ii^()), to carry out to burial, Luke
for (irepi) a crime, Rom. xiii. 4 vii. 12.*
I Thess. iv. 6.* «K-KoirT(D, to cut off or down, as a tree,
€K-8i(&Ka), to persecute, to expel by perse- branch, or limb. (In i Pet. iii. 7, to
cuting, Luke xi. 49 i Thess. ii. 15.* ; hinder, W. H. read h-Koirri)},)
€k-86tos, ov, delivered vp, Acts ii. 23.* €K-Kpc)JLa(iai (mid. of iKKpeiJ.dvvvfMi), to
€K-8oxi^> ^s, 17, a waiting for, expectation, hang upon, or to be earnestly attentive
Heb. X. 27.* to, Luke xix. 48.*
€K-8via), to unclothe, to strip off (two aces. ). €K-XaXca>, Co, to speak out, to disclose,
Ikci, adv., there, thither. Acts xxiii. 22.*
cK€i6ev, adv.,//*07?i that place, thence. €K-Xdnirw, to shine out or brightly. Matt.
cKcivos, 77, pron., demonst., that, that
0, xiii. 43.*
one there used antithetically, Mark
; €K-Xav0dvw, in mid., to forget entirely,
xvi. 20, and by way of emphasis, Heb. xii. 5.*
Matt. xxii. 23. See §§ 338, 340. lK-\(y<ii, mid. in N.T., ist aor. e^e-
lK€i<rc, adv., in const, prseg.,
thither, \€^dfir)v, to choose out for oneself, to
Acts xxi. 3, xxii. 5.* elect.
kK-l,r\r4<a, w, to seek out with diligence, CK-Xciiro), 2nd aor. e^eXiTroj', to fail, to
Heb. xii. 17 i Pet. i. 10 ;to seek ; cease, to die, Luke xvi. 9, xxii. 32 ;

after God, Acts xv. 17 ; Rom. iii, 11 ; Heb. i. 12.*

Heb. xi. 6 ; to require, judicially, ckXcktos, t), 6v, (i) chosen, elect; (2)
Luke xi. 50, 51.* choice, approved.
kK-Qa[i^{<a, Q, N.T. pass., to be amazed, €KXoyr], ^s, 17, a choice, selection, as Acts
greatly astonished, Mark ix. 15, xiv. ix. 15 {a vessel of choice, i.e., a chosen
33, xvi. 5, 6.* vessel)', concr., the clwsen ones, Rom.
{K-6a)ipos, ov, surprised, greatly amazed. xi. 7.
Acts iii. II.* €K-Xv6), in pass, or mid., to become weary
?K-8€Tos, ov, cast out, exposed to perish. in body, or despondent in mind.
Acts vii. 19.* lK-\i.a<r<rb>, $w, to wipe, to wipe dry, Luke
€K-Ka6aip(D, ist aor. i^eKadapa, to p2irge vii. John xi. 2, xii.
38, 44 ; 3,
out, to cleanse, i Cor. v.
7 ; 2 Tim. xiii. 5.*
ii. 4.* €K-fiVKrT]pC^(i>,to deride, scoff at (ace),
cK-KaCo), to bum vehemently, as with lust, Luke xvi. 14, xxiii. 35.*
Rom. i. 27.* CK-vc'o) (lit., swim out), or iKvevu (lit.,
Ik-kok^w, w, to faint, to despond through turn by a side motion), to withdraw^
fear. (W. H. exclude the word, reading John V. 13.*
in every case ivK-.) €KvVj<j><t), to awake, as from a drunken
€K-K€VT6a), Q), to picrcc through, to trans- sleep, I Cor. xv. 34.*
fix, John xix. 37 ; Rev. i. 7.* €Kov(rios, ov (e/cwv), voluntary, spon-
428 VOCABULARY. L^K-iroXai —^aiov
tancous, Philem. 14.* Adv., -wr, will- cK-T€V€ia, a J, 7], Acts xxvi.7.*
intentness.
ingly, of ones own accord, Heb. x. 26 ; €K-T€VTis, ^s, intense, vehement, fervent,
1 Pet. V. 2* I Pet. iv. 8 ; Acts xii. 5 (W. H., -ws).*
^K-7raXai, adv. of old, of long standing,
, Adv., -u)s, earnestly,
inteyisely, 1 Pet.
2 Pet. ii. 3, iii. 5.* 1. 22. iKTcv^arepov, comp. as adv.,
CK-ircipdtw, cw, to put to the test, to make more earnestly, Luke xxii. 44.*
trial of, to tcm2)t, j\[att. iv. 7 ; Luke Ik-ti0t]|il (see § 107), put out or
{1) to
iv. 12, X. 25 ; I Cor. x. 9.* expose, as the infant Acts Moses,
cx-ircjiTrw, to soul out or forth, Acts vii. 21 ; (2) to expound. Acts xi. 4,
xiii. 4, xvii. 10.* xviii. 26, xxviii. 23.*
(K-ircpia-o-ws, exceedingly, Mark xiv. 31 €K-Tivd(r(rw, ^w, ojf dust from
^0 s/i«A;e

(W. H.). the feet, Matt. x. 14; Mark vi. 11 ;

^

tK-ircTOLVVViii, 1st aor. e^eTr^raca, to Acts xiii. $1 ',to shake out, Acts xviii.
stretch forth, Rom. x. 21.* 6.*
eK-TTTiSaw, w, 1st aor. i^eir-qbrjcra (W. H. ), Kktos, t), ov, ord. num., sixth.

to spring forth, Acts xiv. 14. €KTos, adv., generally as prep., Anth gen.,
CK-TrCirTW, (i) to fall from (e/c), Mark without, besides, exce2)t. eKrbs d fir},

25
xiii. abs., to
; fall, James i. Ii of ; except, I Cor. xiv. 5. to iKTos, tlie
a ship driven from course, Acts its outside. Matt, xxiii. 26.
xxvii. 17 ; of love, to fail y i Cor. xiii. €K-Tp€irw, mid., to turn from, to for-
8 (2), of moral lapse, Gal. v. 4.
;
sake, I Tim. i. 6, v. 15, vi. 20 ; 2 Tim.
tK-ir\ew, ^v(jii3, to sail out, to sail from. iv. 4 ; Heb. xii. 13.*
Acts XV. 39, xviii. 18, xx. 6.* CK-Tpe'<j)w, <o nourish, nurture, train up,
€K-7rXT]p6a), to fulfil entirely, Actsxiii. 32.* Eph. V. 29, vi. 4 ; Rev. xii. 6
tK-irXripwcrts, ecos, i), entire fulfilment, (W. H.).*
Acts xxi. 26.* ?K-Tpwp,a, aroj, t6, an abortive birth, an,
iK-irXrio-a-ftj, 2nd aor. pass. i^eirXdyrjv abortion, 1 Cor. xv. 8.* '

to strike with astonishment. eK-<j>€pa), bring forth, cari'y out ; espec.

to
CK-irvcw, breathe out, to expire, to
eivcrw, to to burial. Acts v. 6, 9 ; ^0 produce, of
die, xv. 37, 39; Luke xxiii. 46.*
Mark the earth, Heb. vi. 8.
CK-irop€vo|j.ai, dep., to go out {dirb, €k, €K-<|)€tryw, to flee out from, escape (abs., or
wapl, and ets, eVt, Trpos) ; to proceed with eK.) to avoid (ace. ).
;

from, as from the heart or as a. river ; CK-(|>oPe(a, w, to terrify gitatly, 2 Cor. x.

from its source, etc. 9.*
€K-iropv€va), to be given iqy to lewdness, ^K-<}>oPos, OV, terrified, Mark ix. 6 ; Heb.
Jude 7.
' xii. 21.*
€K-TrTvw, to reject as distasteful, to loathe. CK-<|>va), 2nd aor. pass. €^€<f)vr)v, to put
Gal. iv. 14.* forth, as a tree its leaves. Matt. xxiv.
*
€K-pito&), Cj, to root out or root up. Matt. 32 ; Mark xiii. 28.
xiii. 29, XV. 13; Luke xvii. 6; Jude €K-X€w, also iKxvvoj ; fut. cKxeC}, 1st
12.* aor. t^^x^^ (see § 96, c), to jJour out, as
^K-o-rao-is, cws, i}, "ecstasy," [i) trance, Rev. xvi. 1-17 ; money, John ii. 15 ;

as Acts x. 10 ; (2) amazement, as JVIark to shed blood ; fig. , to shed abroad,

V. 42. love, Rom. v. 5 ;
pass. , to run riotously
eK-<rTp^<|)a), perf. pass, i^^arpafjifxai, to (R.V.), Jude II.
turn out of a place, to corrupt, to per- kK-yjmpiui, Q, to depart from, to go out,
vert. Tit. iii, II.* Luke xxi. 21.*
€K-Tapd(r<r«, ^w, to agitate greatly, Acts €K-\|/vxo), to expire, to die. Acts v. 5, 10,
XV i. 20.* xii. 23.*
CK-TtCvft), vQ, 1st aor. i^ereiva, to stretch Ikwv, ov<Ta, 6v, willing,; used adverbially,
out the hand, as Luke v. 13 ; to throw Rom. viii. 20; i Cor. ix. 17.*
out, as anchors from a vessel, as Acts eXaCa, aj, t), an olive tree ; its fruit, tlic
xxvii. 30. olive, rd 6pos tCov eXaiCju, the Mount
Ik-tcXcw, Q, iaij}, to complete, Luke xiv. of Olives.
29, 30.* ^Xaiov, ov, rb, olive oil.
 ;

cXauuv — eXiril^wJ VOCABULARY. 429

eXaiwv, Qvos, 6, an olive grove, Olivet, eXcvOepdw, w, to set free (generally with
Acts i. 12.* ace. and airb) ; with modal dative,
'EXajiCrtis, ov, 6, an Elamite, or inha- Gal. V. I.
bitant of Elam, a region of Persia, ^eu(ris, ews, 17 {^pxofJ-ai), a coming, an
Acts ii. 9.* advent, Acts vii. 52.*
€Xdo-<r«v or -ttu)v, ov, compar. of eXaxi^s €X€<|)dvTivos, 7], ov, m.ade of ivory. Rev.
for fxiKpds, less ; in quality, John ii. 10 xviii. 12.*
(ace, -w contracted for -ova) in age, ; *EXuaK«Cp,, b{'Reh,),Elial€im, Matt. i. 13;

Rom. ix. 12 in dignity, Heb. vii. 7.

;
Luke 30.*iii.
*
eXaTToVy, adv. ^ less, I Tim. v. 9. 'EXU^ep, 6 (Heb.), Eli^zer, Luke iii. 29.*
eXttTTovew, w, to have too little, to lack, 'EXiovS, 6 (Heb.), Eliud, Matt. i. 14, 15.*
2 Cor. viii. 15.* 'EXto-dp€T, 7? (Heb., Elishcha), Elizabeth,
*
eXaTTow, cj, to mahe loiver or inferior, Luke i.

Heb. 7, 9 ; ii. pass., to decrease, John 'EXio-<raios, ov, b, Elisha, Luke iv. 27.*
30.*
iii. IX£(r<r«, i^w, as dXiaaoo. to roll iq), Heb.
cXavvo) (tenses from eXdw), eXdcrcu, eX?;- i. 12; Rev. vi. 14 (W. H.).*
Xa/ca, io f^/'irc, Luke viii. 29 James ; ^Kos, ovs, rb, a ivaicnd, an ulcer, a sore,
iii. 4 ; 2 Pet. ii. 17; to drive a shij), Luke xvi. 21 ; Rev. xvi. 2, 11.*
<o rol6', Mark vi. 48 John vi. 19.*
; cXkoo), Q, to make a sore; pass., to be
eXa(|>pia, as, rj, levity, inconstancy, 2 Cor. full ofs&res, Luke xvi. 20.*
i. 17.* cXkvw, o-w, to <^?-«<7, Acts xvi. 19 to dravj, ;

eXa(j>pds, d, 6v, light, as a bmxlen easily a net, John xxi. 6, 1 1 ; a sword, John
*
borne, Matt. xi. 30 2 Cor. iv. 1 7. ; x\'iii. 10; to rfra?/- over, to 2}crsicade,
eXaxnTTOs, 77, ov, adj. (superl. of eXax^s John 32.*
vi. 42, xii.
for fxiKpos), least, very little, in number, ^Kw (old form of foregoing), impf.
magnitude, importance. d\Kov, James ii. 6 Acts xxi. 30.* ;

cXaxKTTOTtpos, a, ov, a double compa- 'EXXds, d5os, ij, Hellas, Greece = Axo.ta,''
rison, less than the least, Eph. iii. 8.* Acts XX. 2.*
4Xd(i). See eKavvw. "EXXi^v, 77J/0S, 6, a Greek, as distinguished
'EXedtap, 6, Eleazar, Matt. i. 15.* ( I ) from )8d/)/3a/)os, barbarian, Rom. i.

«XeY{jids; ov, 6, reproof {"W. H.), 2 Tim. iii. 14, and (2) from 'louSaios, as Jew,
16.* John vii. 35. Used for Greek prose-
i'Xey^iS, ewj, rj, reproof, 2 Pet. ii. 16.* lytes to Judaism, John xii. 20 ; Acts
t\iy\os, evident demonstration,
ov, by xvii. 4.
proof, Heb. xi. i ; 2 Tim. iii. 16.* 'EXX-qvtKos, 77, bv,Grecian, Luke xxiii.
eXt'Yxw, fw, to convict, reprove, rehuJce. 38 ; Rev. ix. 11.*
tXeeivds, -^j ov, pitiable, miserable, i Cor. 'EXXt^vis, t'Sos, a Greek or Gentile icoman,
XV. 19 ; Rev. iii. 17.* ]\Iark vii. 20 Acts xvii. 12.*
;

i\€&a, Q, to have compassion on, succour 'EXXT]vi<rTTis, oO {€\\t}vl^u}, to Hcllenise,

(ace), to show mercy ; pass., to obtain or Greek manners and language),
rtftoy;<

mercy. a Hellenist, Grecian Jew (R.Y. ); a

eXeT^iioo-iJVT],77s, i), pity, compassion ; in Jew by parentage and religion, but
N.T. ahns, sometimes plur.
, born in a Gentile countiy and speak-
€XeT||x(ov, ov, full of 'piiy^ merciful, com- ing Greek, Acts vi. i, ix. 29, xi. 20.*
jmssionate, Matt. v. 7 Heb. ii. 17.* ; 'EXXtivio-ti, adv., in the Greek language,
2Xcos, ouj. TO (and ov, 6, see § 32, «), j'>«Y?/, John xix. 20 ; Acts xxi. 37.*
mercy, act of compassion. cX-XoYew {ev W. H., -dw), to charge to,
;

cXevOcpCa, as, 17, liberty, freedom, from the to put to one's account, Rom. v. 13
;
Mosaic yoke, as i Cor. x. 29 ; Gal. ii. 4 Philem. 18.*
from evil, as James ii. 12 Rom. viii. 21. ; 'EX|j.(u8dfjL, 6, Elmodam, Luke iii. 28.*
cXevOcpos, a, ov, free, as opposed to the IXirit«, att. fut. eXTTtcD, 1st aor. T^Xxto-a,
condition of a slave delivered from : to <^a7J<rrf (ace. to Ao^6 or inf., or 6'rt) ;

obligation (often with €k, airb) ; at /or (ace.) to in«i (eVi, dat.
; ev, m ;

liberty to (inf.). Once with dat. of once dat. only) ; to direct hope to^i'ards
reference, Rom. vi. 20. (et's, iTTi, ace).
430 VOCABULARY. [eXirts — 4v-a"yKaXiJo|jiat

iXms, exjicctation, hope, secure

iSos, 17, {p.-iraCKTiis, ov, 6, a scoffer, deceiver, 2 Pet.
coitjidoice especially of the Christian
; iii. 13 ; Jude 18.*
hope. Met., {\) the author, as i Tim. Cfi-irtpiiraTcci), Q, rjau}, to walk about in,
i. I (2) the object of hope, as Tit. ii. 13.
; to diccll among (ev), 2 Cor. vi. 16.*
(In Rom. 20 W. H. read icf eXiridi.)
viii. c|i-'TrC|i'n'XT]|JLi and -TrXdw, eynTrX-^aw, ivi-
'EXv)j.as, a, (from Arabic), Elymas,
6 7r\7](ra, part. pres. ifjLwnrXwv, to' fill
i.e., a magus or sorcerer, Acts xiii. 8.* up, as with food, etc. (gen. ).
to satisfy,
'EXwt, My God! Mark xv. 34. The k\L-Triirroi, to fall into or among {eh) fig., ',

word is Hebrew (Ps.

xxii. 2), pro- to incur, as condemnation or punish-
nounced in that language iiKl, and so ment, I Tim. iii. 6 ; Heb. x. 31.
written, Matt, xxvii. 46 (W. H., fXwt). cfi-irXeKO), 2nd aor. pass. iveTrXoLKTjv, to
cfiavTov, of 7nyself, a reflexive
Tjs, ov, entangle, implicate, 2 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Pet.
pron., found only in the gen., dat., ii. 20 (dat. of thing).*

and accus. cases air' i/xavTov, from : cji-irXoK"/), •^s, 7], a plaiting, braiding, of
myself, John v. 30. hair, i Pet. iii. 3.*
l\i-^aiv<a, 2nd aor. eve^rjv, part. f/A/3as, t\i-irvi<a (W. H., evir-), to breatJie out
to go upon, into (els), always of entering (gen.), Acts ix. i.*
a ship except John v. 4 (W. H. omit). €{i-irop€vo}iiai, dep. , to go about ; hence to
4)i.-PaX\a>, to cast into, Luke xii. 5.* trade, to traffic, abs., James iv. 13 ; to
cji-pdiTTw, to dip into, Matt. xxvi. 23 ; make gain o/'(acc. 2 Pet. ii. 3.*
),

Mark xiv. 20 ; John xiii. 26. (W. H., l)i-irop£a, as, tj, trade, mcrcJtandise, Matt,
xxii. 5.*
i\L-^o.riVia, to enter, to intrude, to pry into. c)jL-ir<$piov, ov, TO, emporium, a place for
Col. n. 18.* trading, John ii. 16.*
c)i-pipd^a), to cause to enter, to put on ^(i-iropos, OV, 6, a merchant,
traveller,
hoard. Acts xxvii. 6.* trader. Matt. : Iii. 45 Rev. xviii.*
;

c)i-pXcircD, to direct tJic eyes to anything, to e^-irpi^Oo), aw, to set on fire, to burn,
look fixedly, to consider, to know by Matt. xxii. 7.*
ins2)ection (ace, dat., or eis). ^jJL-irpoo-Gcv, adv., before {eixirpoadev koI
€)i-Pp(,p,do}JLai, Qixai, dep., to be moved 6in<xd€v,in front and behind, Rev. iv.
icith indignation, Mark xiv. 5 ; John 6); as prep, (gen.), before, in presence
xi« 38 (R.V. marg. );
33, to charge of. Matt. x. 32 before, in dignity, ;

sternly (dat. ), Matt. ix. 30 ; Mark i. John 15, 27.

i.

43-* eii-iTTva), (Tw, to spit upon (dat. or eis).

c(i^a>, <3, 1st aor., inf. e/xeVat, to vomit, to ep.-(}>avr|s, is, manifest (dat.). Acts x. 40 ;
spue out. Rev. iii. 16.* Rom. X. 20.*
c|i-(ia£vo(j.ai, to be mad against (dat.), €fjL-<|>avC^&>, law, to make manifest (ace.
Acts xxvi. II.* and dat.) to shoio plainly {on, or
;

'Ejijiavovi^X, 6, Emmanuel, a Hebrew prepp. Trpoj, Tepi, etc.).

word signifying "God with us;" a ^|jL-<|>opos, ov, terrified, afraid.
name of Christ, Matt. i. 23.* cfJL-cpva-dci), Q, to breathe upon, ace, John
'Efi|jLaovS| 7}, Emmaus,
a village a short XX. 22.*
distance from Jerusalem, Luke xxiv. ^|t-<|>vTos, OV, engrafted, James i. 21.*
13.* €v, prep. gov. dat., in, generally as being
€|i-(j,^v(i>, to remain or persevere in (dat. or resting in within, among. ; See
or ev). § 295. ev- in composition has the
*
'E(jLfj.6p, 6, Emmor, orHamor, Acts vii. 16. force of in, upon, into. It is changed
€jios, V, mine, denoting possession,
ov, before 7, k, and x> "ito ey- before ;

power over, authorship, right, etc. /3, IT, <p, and fi, into e/m- ; anu before
See § 336. X, into e\- (but "W. H. prefer tlie
ep,irai"yp.ovTi, mockery, 2 Pet. iii. 3 (W.H.). unassimilated forms). The v is, how-
€ft-Trai"y[i6s,ov, 6, a being mocked or ever, restored before the augment in
derided, Heb. xi. 36.* verbs.
cji-iraC^w, ^oj, to mock, deride, scoff at €v-aYKaX£^o|jLai, to take up into one's
(abs. or dat.). arms, Mark ix. 36, x. 16.*
 ;

cv-dXios — Iv-iirrqju] VOCABULARY. 451

4v-dXios, ov (aXs), being or living in the ^v-8v(ris, ew5, V7, a putting on or wearing
sea, marine, James iii. 7.* of clothes, I I'et. iii. 3.*
?v-avTi, adv., as j)rep. with gen., in the cv-cSpa, as, an ambush, a snare. Acts
i),

2?rcsc)U'c of, before, Luke i. 8 ; Acts xxiii. 16 (W. H.), xxv. 3.*
viii. 21 (W. H.).* €v-c8pcti(tf, to waich, to entrap, to lie in
cv-avfCos, a, ov, over against, contrary, ambush for (ace. ), Luke xi. 54 ; Acts
of the wind, as Acts xxvii. 4 ; adverse, xxiii. 21.*
hostile, as Acts xxvi. 9 ; e^ ivavrias, cv-ciXcd), w, 1st aor. ivdXriaa, to roll up,
over against, Mark xv. 39. Neut., to tvrap in (ace. and dat.), Mark
havTLOv, adv. as prep, with gen., in XV. 46.*
the ji'i'cscncc of, as Luke xxiv. 16 ; ^v-ci,|ii, to be in, to have a place in, Luke

Acts vii. 10. xi. 41, Ttt hbvra, such things as are in
^v-dpxop.ai, to begiHy Gal. iii. 3 ; Phil, [the platter, ver. 39], or such as ye
i. 6.* have, i.e., according to your ability.
Ivaros. See ivvaros. For 6'eo-ri impers., see hi.*
€v-8cTJs, ^s, in want, destitute, needy, Acts ^vcKa or heKev, sometimes etveKev, prep,
iv. 34.* adv. gen. because of, by reason of, on
,
,

2v-8eiY)ia, aros, to, indication, proof,an account of. oi5 Hvckcv, because, Luke

manifest token, 2 Thess. i. 5.* iv. 18 rivos evcKev ; to what end / Acts
;

cv-ScCKvv|j.k, N.T. mid., to show, to mani- xix. 32.

fest. ev-€p7€ia, as, ij, energy, efficacy, effectual
2v8ci^iS, ews, 7], a showing, declaration, operation.
Rom. iii. 25 ; 2 Cor. viii. 24 ; an evi- €V-fpyi<i>, Q, to exert one's power, to work
dent token, Phil. i. 28.* in one, as Gal. ii. 8 trans., to accom- ;

JfvScKo, oi, at, rd, eleven, ol tvdeKa, the p)lis}i, as I Cor. xii. 11 ; mid., to be
Eleven, i.e., apostles. effective, to be in action. Part., hep-
cvS^KUTOS, rj, ov, eleventh. yovfjLevr], James v. 16 (see R.V.).
cv-8cxo(iai, dep., to admit; only imper- cv-cpYHK'^i aros, to, ivorking, effect; pluT.
sonally, ovK evdex^rai, it is not admis- with gen., i Cor. xii. 6, 10.*
sible or jwssible^ Luke xiii. 33.* €v-6p7TJs> ^s, effectual, energetic, i Cor.
^v-STfiiea), Q, to be at ho7ne, 2 Cor. v. 6, xvi. 9 ; Hei). iv. 12 ; Philem. 6.*
8, 9;* €v-€o-Tws, perf. participle of iviaTrj/jn.
kv-hiSvcKiii, mid., to clothe oneself u-ith iv-€v-\oyi<a, Q, to bless, to distinguish by
(ace. ), Luke viii. 27, xvi. 19 ; Mark xv. blessings. Acts iii. 25 ; Gal. iii. 8.*
17 (W. H.).* See ev80vo}. €v-^<D, {i) to hold in, entangle, only in
lv-8iKos, ov, agreeable to justice, right, pass, (dat.), Gal. v. i (2) to set one- ;
*
righteous, Rom. iii. Heb. ii. 3.
8 ; self against (dat.), Mark vi. 19 ; Luke
4v-8o)JLT](ris, ews, 17, a structure, a building. xi. 53.*
Rev. xxi. 18.* ^vOaSc, adv., (i) hither, to this place;
lv-8o|d^(>), o-w, to glorify, to honour, (2) here, in this jilace.
2 Thess. i. 10, 12.* €v-6v[i€0|xai, ovfiai, dej). pass., to revolve
{v-8o|oSt ov, adorned with honour, glo- in mind, to think upon. Matt. i. 20,
rioles, Luke xiii. 17 Eph. v. 27
of ; ; ix. 4 ; Acts X. 19 (W. H., diev-).*
persons, had in honoiir, i Cor. iv. 10 ;
cv-0vp.T]o-is, ews, 17, thought, reflection,
of external appearance, splendid, Luke contrivance.
vii. 25.* 2vi, elliptical for eveaTi, impers. , there is
Iv-8v(ia, aros, ro, a garment, raiment. in, I Cor. vi. 5 (W. H.) Gal. ; iii. 28 ;

cv-8vva)j.6a>, w, to strengthen, to furnish Col. iii. II ; James i. 17.*

with power ; pass., to acquire strength, kviavT6s, ov, 6, a year.
be strong. to be present, to be at hand,^
lv-C<rTT]p.i,
iy-hvva (2 Tim. iii. 6) and ecSiJw, to clothe 2 Thess. ii. 2 2 Tim. iii. i ; perf.
;

or to invest with (two aces.) mid., to ; part. eveaTtjKws, sync, ivearwi, im-
enter, insinuate oneself into (2 Tim. pending), or 2^>'csent, i Cor. vii. 26
iii. 6), to put on, to clothe oneself with Gal. i. 4 Heb. ix. 9. ra ivearurra,
;

(ace.) ; often fig., to invest with. pi'esent things, opposed to to. uAWovra,
432 VOCABULARY. [iv-iorxvki) — c^-a'yopdl^b)

things to come, Rom. viii. 38 ; i Cor. evToXal, the cominandnients, i.e., the
iii. 22.* ten.
kv-\.ayj)u>, to invigorate, to strengthen, cv-TOTTios,oi;, 6 (prop, adj.), an inhabit'

Luke xxii. 43; Acts ix. 19 (see ant. Acts xxi. 12.*
W. H.).* ^ €VTos, adv. as prep., with gen., within^
^wttTOSj 77, ov ("W. H., eVaros), ninth. Luke xvii. 21. to evTos, tJie interior,
evv^a, OL, al, rd, nine, Luke xvii. 17.* Matt, xxiii. 26.*
Ivvev-qKOVTa-cvv^a, ninetij-nine, IMatt. ev-Tpciro), i/zw, 2nd fut. pass., ivrpaTrricro-
xviii. 12, 13 Luke xv. 4, 7 (see W. H).*
; fxai ; 2nd aor. pass., eveTpdirrjv ; to 2)ut
^vvcds, ov(W, H., iv€b%), dumb, speechless, to shame, as i Cor. iv. 14 ; Tit. ii. 8 ;

as with amazement, Acts ix. 7.* mid., to reverence, to be in awe of,

€V-V6vift), to rt6^' or signify by beckoning as Matt. xxi. 37.
(dat. ), Luke 1. 62; Heb. iv. 12; i €V-Tp€<J)w, to nourish in (dat.) ;
pass., fig.,
Pet. iv. I.* I Tim. iv. 6.*
^v-voia, as, i} {vov$), intention, jiu^'pose. ?v-Tpo|ios, ov, terrified, trembling through
^v-vofJLos, ov, lender law, i Cor. ix. 2i ; fear. Acts vii. 32, xvi. 29 ; Heb. xii.
accord ing to laiv, Acts xix. 39.* 21.*
^v-viixos, ov {v6^), in the night, iieut. as cv-TpoTTTJ, ->}?, 7}, a piutting to shame, i

adv., Mark i. 35. (\V. H., h'vvxo..)* Cor. yi. 5, xv. 34.*
€V-oiK€<i>, (S, to dwell in, to inhabit (iv). €V-Tpv<|)d«, tj, to live luxuriously, to ban-
kvorris, T-qros, i) (efs), unity, concord, quet, to revel (with ev), 2 Pet. ii. 13.*
Epli. iv. 3, 13.* Iv-Tv-yxdvo), to come to, to address. Acts
cv-oxXcw, Co, todldarb,
occasion tumult, to xxv. 24 ; w'ith virep (gen. ), to intercede
Heb. xii. 15 Luke vi. 18 (W. H.).* : for, Rom. viii. 27, 34 ; Heb. vii. 25 ;

?v-oxos, ov, guilty of ''gen. of the crime, with KaTo. (gen. ), to plead, against, Rom.
or of that which is violated) ; subject xi. 2.*
to (dat. of court, fi;en. of punishment, €v-TvX£<r<rw, ^w, to wrap in, to ivrap up.
ets of the place of punishment). Matt, xxvii. 59 ; Luke xxiii. 53 John ;

^v-TaX|jLa, aros, to, a comnmndDient, an XX. 7.*

institute, JMatt. xv. 9 ; Mark vii. 7 ;
Iv-Tvirdw, Co, to engrave, sculpture, 2 Cor.
Col. ii. 22.* iii. y.*

prepare for burial, as by

kv-ra^\.6X,<ii, to Iv-vPpt^o), (Tco. to treat contemptuously or
washing, swathing, adorning, anoint- in dcsjiite, Heb. x. 29.*
ing the corpse, Matt. xxvi. 12 ; John €V-virvidtop,ai, dex>. pass., to dream (cog-
xix. 40.* nate ace). Acts ii. 17 ; to conceive
tv-Ta(}>ia<r|i6s, ov, 6, the preparation of a wild or imjjure thoughts, Jude 8.*
corpse for burial, Mark xiv. 8 John ;
cv-virvtov, 01', TO, a dream, Acts ii. 17.*
xii. 7. evwirtov (neut. of evibirios, from iv doiri,
ev-TcXXo), in N.T. only mid. and pass.; in vieio), as prep., with gen., before,
fut. mid., ivTeXov/xai. ;
perf., evreraX- in sight or presence of, Luke i. 17;
fxai, to clutrge, to command, to commit Rev. iii. 9. evdo-jnov too Qeov, in the
(dat. of pers., or irpos with ace). sight of God, Rom. xiv. 22 ; used in
€VTcv6€v, adv. he7ice ; from this place or
,
obtestation, i Tim. v. 21. X^^P'S
cause ; repeated John xix. 18, on this evdbiriov too Qeov (Acts vii. 4), favour

side and that. with God.

€V-Teu|is, eojs, T), prayer, intercession, i 'Evws, 6, Fnos, Luke iii. 38.*
Tim. ii. i, iv. 5.* ev-wT^^oiiai, dep. mid. (ei* arrtois, in the
2v-Tijios, ov, held in renown; precious, ears), to listen to, Acts ii. 14.*
highly esteemed, Luke vii. 2, xiv. 8 ;
*Ev<ox, 6, Enoch, Luke iii. 37 Jude 14.* ;

* See eV.
Phil. ii. 29 ; i Pet. ii. 4, 6. «!, prep.

evToX-^, ^s, T), or prohi-

a divine precept oi, ai, TO., card, num., six..
fe'l,

bition : of Cor.
(rod\'}
I commands, cl-ayYt'XXw, to declare abroad, celebrate,
vii. 19; Christ^ s jJi'ecepts or teachings, I Pet. ii. 9.*
I Cor. xiv. 37 I Tim, vi. 14 ; tradi- ;
€^-a7opdt(*), to buy from, buy back, redeem.
tions of tJie Rabbis, Tit. i. 14. at Gal. iii. 13 (e/c), i^- 5- "^^^ Kaipov, to
ii-6.yo» — c^-opoXo-y^w] VOCABULARY. 433

redeem the ojyportimity from being lost, cI-Ako), to draw out from the right way,
Eph. V. i6; Col. iv. 5.* James i. 14.*
I|-d7w, 2nd aor. i^-fiyayov, to lead out, to €|-epap.a, aroj, to, th^it which is vomited,
send forth (with ^|w, e/c, ei's). 2 Pet. ii. 22.*
£|aip€cu, Q) (see § 103, i), to take or 2)1 uck €|€p€vvda> (W. H., -pav-), to search diligent-
out, Matt. V. 29, xviii. 9 mid., to ; ly, I Pet. i. 10.*
rescue, deliver, Acts vii. 10, 34, xii. 11, €|-€pxopLai (see § 103, 2), to go or to come out
xxiii. 27, xxvi. 17 Gal. i. 4.* ; of (with gen. or eV, airb, e^u, Trapd) ; to
6|-aipcD (see § 92), ^0 take out or away ; go aivay, to depart, to issue or to spring
to expel or excommunicate,
Cor. i from ; to go forth ; of a rumour, to he
V. 2 (W. H., 13.* ai'pw), divulged or s2Jread abroad ; to emanate,
cg-aiTCO), w, N.T., mid., to require^to ask as thoughts from the heart, healing
for, Luke xxii. 31.* power from the Saviour ; to go out,
^-aC^vt]^, adv., suddenly, tinexpectedly. i.e., vanish, as expiring hope, Acts
€|-aKoXov0€ci>, w, ^
follow, to persist in xvi. 19.
foUoiving (dat.), 2 Pet. i. 16, ii. 2, 15.* (i^io-ri, part. (impers. from
neut. i^ov
c^aKocrioi, at, a, six hundred. as Matt. xiv. 4 ; it
e^eLfiL), it is laicful,
c|-aXei(|>a), to wipe out, obliterate^ Rev. is becoming, as Acts xvi. 21 ; it is 2^os-
5 ; Col. ii. 14 ; Acts jii. 19 ; io
iii. sible, as Matt. xx. 15. The part, is
ivipe away. Rev. vii. 17, xxi. 4 {dirb used in the same sense, with or with-
or e/c).* out subst. verb. Matt. xii. 4; 2 Cor.
l5-d\Xo|xai, to Zmj9 forth or 2<2^ Acts iii. xii. 4 (dat. and inf. ).

€|-€Tdt«), to inquire, to ask, to eoeamine

€|-avd-orTao-is> ewj, 17, a resurrection, Phil. strictly. Matt. ii. 8, x. 11 ; John xxi.
iii. II (followed by e/c, W. H.).* 12.*
€^-ava-T€XXcD, to spring up, to shoot forth, dep. mid., to narrate
l|-T]Y€op.ai, ovfjiai,
as plants or corn, Matt. xiii. 5 ; Mark fully and accurately,, as Luke xxiv.
iv. 5.* to eiq)Ound, as a teacher, as John
35 ;

€|-av-icrTTi|xi, (i) trans., to raise up off- ']' ^^^

spring, Mark xii. 19 ; Luke xx. 28 ;
.
€|TJKOVTa, 61, ai, rd, sixty.
(2) 2nd aor. intrans., to rise up, to €|tjs,adv. (exw) next in order, only in the
stand forth. Acts xv. 5.'*
phrase rrj i^rjs (sc. ri/xepq.), on the next
c|-airaTd(tf, w, to deceive utterly, to seduce day. .{rj/xepa is expressed, Luke ix. 37.)
from truth. ^-t]\4(a, w, only in pass., N.T., to be
^Idirtva, adv. ( = i^aicpvr]^), unexpectedly, sounded forth, propagated widely,
Mark ix. 8.* I Thess. i. 8.*
'€^-a-7ropeo|ji.ai, ov/jiai, dep., to he utterly *
'^|ts, ewj, i] iise, Heb. v. 14.
(exw), habit,
ivithout resou7'ce, to he in utmost per- €|-C<rTi][jLi, and -laTdvu) (see § 107),
-Lardco
2)lexity, 2 Cor. i. 8, iv. 8.* "to remove from the natural state,"
ll-airo-arr^XXw, to send forth, send away, (i) trans., to astonish, Luke xxiv. 22 ;
el-aprCtWf ( i ) to complete. Acts xxi. 5 ; Acts viii. 9, II (2) 2nd aor., perf. and
;

(2) furnish thoroughly for

to [irpos, mid., intrans., to be astonished, con-
ace), 2 Tim. iii. 17.* founded, to be beside oneself, as 2 Cor.
€|-a<rTpdirT«, to gleam, as lightning ; of V. 13.
raiment, Luke ix. 29.* I|-i(rxvw, to he perfectly able, Eph. iii. 18.*
€|-avTf]S) adv. (sc. iopas), from that very ^-o8os, ov, 7], "exodus," a going oitt,
time, instantly, as Mark vi. 25 ; Acts Heb. xi. 22 ; departure, as from life,
,
X. 33. Luke ix. 31 ; 2 Pet. i. 15.*
cl-eycCpto, to raise up, as from death, Rom. e|-oXodpeva>, to destroy utterly, Acts iii.
ix. 17 ; I Cor. vi. 14.* 23.*
^-6i(JLi, (et/xt, see § 111), to go out, Acts c^-ofjLoXo7€(», (D, to confess fully, to make
xiii. 42, xvii. 15, xx. 7, xxvii. 43.* acknowledgment of, as of sins, etc. ; in
^^-eifii {eifii). See e^ean. mid., to acknowledge benefits c<mferred,
€|-€X€YX"> '<^ convict, to rebuke sternly, to to praise (with dat. ). Once, to promise,
punish, Jude 15 (W. H., iXeyx^)-* Luke xxii. 6.
434 VOCABULARY. [l^-opK^tw — €ir-dva7KCS

•g-opK^^d), to adjure^ put to oath, Matt, Passover, with its accompanying feast
xxvi. 63.* of unleavened bread, as Luke ii. 41,
one who jnds to oath or
<|-opK«.<rTi^S> ov, 6, xxii. I.

adjures, " exorcist," Acts xix. 13.* €Tr-oYycX£a, as, ij, (i) a message, commis-
cg-opvco-o), |w, to dig out, Gal. iv. 15 ;
sion, Acts xxiii. 21 ; (2) a promise, as
hence, to break uj), Mark ii. 4.* 2 Cor. i. 20, generally plur. ; the
^-ovSevc'o), or i^ovdeviw, Q (ovdeis), to set promises, specially, e.g., to Abraham,
at nought, to treat icith coiUevijit. or those of the Gospel, as 2 Tim. i. i ;
Perf. pass. part, i^ovdev-qixevos, con- (3) met., the thing promised, as Acts
temned, disestcemed, i Cor. i. 28, vi. 4. ii. 33; Heb. xi. 13, 33, 39.
c|-ov8€v6(i), w, as preceding, Mark ix. 12 eir-ayyeXXw, mid. in X.T., except pass..
(W. H., -^w).* Gal. iii. 19, {i) to promise, with dat.,
€|-ov(ria, as, 7/ (e^eo-ri), {\) power, ability, or ace. and dat. or inf. once cognate
, ,

as John xix. 11 ; (2) liberty, licence, ace, I John ii. 25 ; (2) to make pro-
privilege, right, as Rom. ix. 21 ; (3) fession or avowal of (ace), i Tim. ii.
commission, authority, as Matt. xxi. 23 10, vi. 21.
(4) ai i^ovalai, tlie powers, i.e., rulers, €ir-dyY«Xp,a, aros, t6, a promise, 2 Pet.
magistrates, Luke Jcii. 1 1 ; angels, good i. 13.*
4, iii.
and bad, Eph. i. 21, vi. 12. In i Cor. (.TT-ayu), to bring upon, Acts v. 28 ; 2 Pet.

xi. 10, e^ovaiav, emblem of power, or ii. I, 5.*

subjection to the power of a husband, eTr-a7wvtto|iai, to contend or stHve ear-

i.e., the veil. nestly for (dat.), Jude 3.*
c^-ovo-kdtcD, to have right over, to exercise eir-a6po£t<^, pass., to gather together, to
authority over (gen.), Luke xxii. 25 ; croicd, Luke xi. 29.*
I Cor. vii. 4 ; pass., to be under the 'Eir-aCv€T0S| ou, 6, EpwnUus, Rom. xvi.
poiver of {virb), i Cor vi. 12.*
tl-ox'H, rpi V) eminence, distinction ; only €Tr-aiv€w, u), ecrw, 1st aor. eTTT^j'ecra, to
in the phrase Kar i^oxw, i>y '^^ay of commend, praise,
to Luke xvi. 8 ;
distinction, Acts xxv. 23 (§ 300, ^, Rom. XV. II ; I Cor. xi. 2, 17, 22.*
5)-* ^ir-aivos, ov, 6, commendation, as Rom,
€|-virv£tw, cw, to ivake from sleep, John ii. 29 ; praise, as Eph. i. 6, 12, 14 f
xi. II.* Phil. i. II.
2|-virvos, ov, roused out of sleep. Acts £7r-aCp(i> (see § 92), to raise up, as hoisting^
xvi. 27.* a sail. Acts xxvii. 40 ; to lift uj), as
^<i>, adv., abs., or as prep, with gen., the eyes, the hands in prayer, the
without, outside. 61 e^w, those ivithout, head in courage, the heel against, or
as Mark iv. 11 ; i Cor. v. 12, 13. in opposition ; pass., to be lifted up,
Used often after verbs of motion com- tobecome elated, 2 Cor. xi. 20. Of the
pounded with fK. ascension of Christ, Acts i. 9.
^(i)9€v, adv. of place, from without, rb eir-ai<rxvvo|iai, to be ashamed, abs.; to
(^(i}dev, tJie outside, as Luke xi. 39. ol be ashamed of (ace. or eiri, dat. ).

e^ojdev, tJwse from without, as i Tim. lir-atTCft), w, to beg, to ask alms, Luke
iii. 7. As prep, gen., Mark vii. 15 ; xvi. 3, xviii. 35 (W. H.).
Rev. xi. 2. err-aKoXovO^, w, to follow after (dat.) ;
el-wGe'w, a), u}(X(j), to drive out, expel, Acts fig., I Tim. V. 10, 24 ; I Pet. ii. 21 ;
vii. 45 ; to propel, as a vessel, Acts part., attendant, Mark xvi. 20 (see
xxvii. 39 (see W. H. and marg. ).* W. H.).*
c|(tfT€pos, a, ov(comp. of e^w), outer, in eir-aKovw, to hearken to favourably (gen.
the phrase " outer darkness," Matt. pers.), 2 Cor. vi. 2.*
viii. 12, xxii. 13, xxv, 30.* eir-aKpodopiai., w^tac, to hear, listen to (gen.
leiKa. See ef/co;. pers.). Acts xvi. 25.*
(oprdl^o), to keep or celebrate a feast, eirdv, conj. (eTrei Slv), if after that, when,
I Cor. v. 8.* (subj.). Matt. ii. 8*; Luke xi. 22, 34.*
iopTTj, Tjs, 7], a solemn feast or festival. €ir-dva7K€s, adv., of necessity, necessarily
Used of Jewish feasts, especially of the (with art.), Acts xv. 28.*
 ;

^TT-av-aYw — ^tri-pdXXw] VOCABULARY. 435

etr-aV'6Lyci, trans., to jmt (a vessel) out ?ir-€iTa, therciqmi,

adv., thereafter;
to sea, Luke v. 3, 4 ; intians., to return, marking succession of time, as Gal.
Matt. xxi. 18.* i. 18 also of order, as i Cor. xv. 46
;

i7r-ava-|JLi)j.v^<rK6), to reiiiind, put in re- I Thess. iv. 17.

membrance [a-cc), Rom. XV. 15.* eir-cK€iva {/Jt-epv), adv. with gen., beyond,
eir-ava-iravo)JLai, to rest upon {iiri, ace), as to place. Acts vii. 43.*
Luke X. 6 ; to rely, to trust in (dat. ), €ir-€K-Tcfvw, in mid., to stretch forwards
Rom. ii. 17.* to (dat.), Phil. iii. 14.*
€Tr-av-€pxo|iai, to come hack, rctui'n, Luke €ir-€v-8vnis, ov, an upper garment, John
X. 35 xix. 15.*
; xxi. 7.*
4ir-av-Com]ni, N.T., mid., to rise up put on, as an upper
eir-6v-8vw, in mid., to
against {^irl, ace), Matt. x. 21 Mark ; garment, 2 Cor. v. 2, 4.*
xiii. 12.* eir-epxo^i, to come upon, ap2^'oach,
^ir-av-op0(aa-is, fws, t], correction, reforma- arrive at, befall, Jiappcn ; to attack,
tion, 2 Tim. iii. 16.* Luke rd e-jrepxofi^ua, the things
xi. 22.
cir-dvb), adv. abs., or as prep, gen., that are coming on (dat.), Luke xxi. 26.
above, upon ; more than, in price or eir-cpcDTdti), u), (i) to interrogate, to ques-
number ; superior to, in authority. tion (two aces., or ace.and Trepi, gen.,
CTT-apK^o), Co, ^<T(j}, to suffice for, to relieve, or with et, rt's etc.) ; to question;

support (dat.), i Tim. v. 10, 16.* judicially, John xviii. 21 ; to inquire

eir-apx^a, as, i], a province, division of the after God, Rom. x. 20 (2) to request ;

Roman Empire, Acts xxiii. 34, xxv. i.* q/" (ace. and inf.). Matt. xvi. i.
lir-avXis, ews, 17, a dwelling, a habitation. eir-cp(OTT]|JLa, aros, rb (i Pet. iii. 2l),
Acts i. 20.* probably inquii-y after God ; "the seek-
€-Tr-avpu>v, adv., on the moirow. ry ing after God in a good and pure con-
(ijfi^pg.) (Travpiou, on the next day. science " (Alford). See R.V.*
cir-a'UTO-<|>wpa). See dvT6-<f)0}poi. kTr-i\ii>, {i)to apply (the mind) to (dat.),
'E'ira<|)pds, a, 6, Epaphras of Colossse, take heed to, Luke xiv. 7 ; Acts iii. 5 ;
Col. i. 12; Philem. 23 (contr.
7, iv. I Tim. iv. 16 ; (2) to hold out, to exhibit,

from Epaphroditus, but ditferent from Phil. ii. 16 ; (3) "to detain (one-
St. Paul's companion of that name).* self)," to tari-y. Acts xix. 22.*
(ir-a<j>pC^(tf, to foam up or out (ace), cir-i]p€dt<i>, to injure, to treat despitefully.
Jude 13.* Matt. V. 44 (not W. H.), Luke vi. 28 ;
*E'ira<|>pdoiTos, ov, b, Epaphroditus, a to traduce, to accuse falsely (ace. of
Macedonian, Phil. ii. 25, iv. 18.* charge), i Pet. iii. 16.*
lir-cycCpo), to raiseup, to excite against {eirl, eiri, a preposition governing gen., dat.,

aec, or Kara, gen. ), Acts xiii. 50, xiv. 2.* or ace. General signification, u2)on.
lircC, conj., (i) of time, when, only Luke For its various applications, see § 305.
vii. I (W. H., iweidr)); (2) of reason, eirt,-, in composition, signifies motion
siiice, because, seeing tJiat. upon, towards, or against ; rest on,
eirci-Sifj, conj., since truly, inasmuch as, over, or at; addition, succession, re-
as Matt. xxi. 46 ; Phil. ii. 26 ; of time, petition, renewal; and it is often
when, only Luke vii. i ( W. H. ). intensive.
eir€t-8ir]-'n'«p, conj., since verily, forasmuch eiri-pa£v(d, to go ujjon a ship, to mount a
as, Luke i. i.* horse or ass, to come to or into o. country
eir-ct8ov. See e(f)opdco. ace, eis, or simple dat.). Matt. xxi.
(eTTi,
^-cifjLi {elfjLi, 111), to § come after, to 5 Acts XX. 18, xxi. 2, 6 (AV. H., e>i3.),
;

folluiv ; only in part. , iiriibv, ova-a, bv, xxv. I, xxvii. 2.*

folloicing, Acts vii. 26, xxiii. 11. rri ciri-PaXXcD, (i) trans., to cast on or over,
€'irio6ar} (sc. Tj/xepa), on thefollo2cing day. as Mark xi. 7 to put on, as a patch on
;

Acts xvi. II, XX. 15, xxi. 18.* a garment, Luke v. 36 (2) intrans., ;

lireC-ircp, conj., since indeed, Rom. iii. 30. to rush violently on, Mark iv. 37 ; to

^
(W. H., etirep.)* fx the mind stcdfastly on anything,
eir-twr-a-ywy^, ^j, ij, a bringing in, in- Mark xiv. 72; (3) part., iwL^dWuv,
troduction, Heb. vii. 9.* falling to his share, Luke xv 12,
436 VOCABULARY. [^rt-Pap^<i> — ^iri-XafApdvw

hri-^apioi, w, to burdoi ; fig,, 2 Cor. ii. Trept, gen, or inf. ) ; to beg earriestly, to
5 ; I Tliess. 9 2 Thess. iii. 8.*
ii, ; desire.
ciri-P^Pa'^o), to put or to set upon, as on a ^TTi-Gavdrios, ov, a2)poiiUed to death,
beast to ride, Luke x. 34, xix. 35 ; I Cor, iv. 9,*

Acts XX iii. 24.* eir£-06<ris, ewy. i^, a laying on of hands,

liri-pXe'iro), to look upon with favour Acts viii, 18 ; ITim, iv. 14 2 Tim. ;

(with iiri), Luke i. 48, ix. 38 ; James i, 6 ; Heb. vi. 2.*

ii. 3.* ciri-O-uiiEO), a), to desire, to long for, to
2fr£-pXT]|ia, arcs, to, a jjatch on a gar- covet, to lust after. (On Luke xxii. 15,
inent, Matt. ix. 16 ; Markii. 21 ; Luke see § 280, b.
V. 36.* €in-0v|XT]T'^s, od, 6, an eager desirer of,
,

eirCpodb), Q, to cnj aloud, Acts xxv. 24. I Cor, x, 6,*

(W. H., ^odu,.)* €iri-8v|x£a, as, i}, desire, eagerness for
lirt-PovXirj, a design against, a i^lot,
ijs, T], generally in a bad sense, inordinate
an ambush. Acts ix. 24, xx. 3, 19 desire, last, cupidity.
(phir, 30.*
), xxiii. eiri-KaOC^b), to seat upon or sit upon.
c'n'i--ya|ippcv(i), to inarry by 7'ight of affinity Matt, xxi, 7 (rec, iireKa.di.aav, trans.,
(ace), Matt. xxii. 24.* tliey seated [him] W. H,, -€v, intrans., ;

4'rrC-"Y€ios, ov, earthly, belonging to the lie sat).*

earth, to. iTriyeta, earthly things. ^iri-KoXcft), w, ^(Tw, to call ujjon, to call by
ciri-'Y£vo|jiai, to arise or spring up, as a name, to invoke in prayer. Acts
59 vii.
wind, Acts xxviii. 13.* (abs.); Rom. x. 12, 14 (ace); mid,,
ciri-'YivwcTKO), {1) to knoio clearly, under- to appeal <o(acc.), Acts xxv, 11 pass., ;

stand, discern ; (2) to acknowledge ; (3) to be called or sumanfied, Luke xxii.

to recognise ; (4) to learn {6tl), become 3 ; Acts XV. 17.
acquainted with (ace. ). €7ri-KdXvp,}JLa, aros, to, a covering, a cloaky
lirC-Yvwo-is, ews, rj, knowledge, acknoio- a pretext, i Pet. ii. 16.*
ledgment. ciri-KaXvinra), to cover, of sins ; to hide,
iiri-ypa^i\, tjs, tj,an inscription, a siq^er- to give over to oblivion, Rom, iv. 7
scription, as Luke xx. 24, xxiii. 38. ^
(LXX.).*
eiri-'Ypd<f»i), engrave, ivrite
to inscribe, ciri-KardpaTOS, ov, accursed, doomed to
upon, as Mark
Rev. xxi. 12. xv. 26 ; punishment or destruction, John vii.
lin-8ciKvv|ji.i (see § 114), {i) to show, ex- 49 (W. H., eTTciparos) Gal. iii. 10, 13 ;

hibit ; (2) to demonstrate y prove by argu- (LXX.).*

^

ment. eirC-Kciixai, to lie up07i (dat,), John xi.

^iri-Ss'xojiai, to receive kindly, 3 John 9, 38, xxi. 9 so ^0 press upon, as the
;

10.* multitude upon Christ, Luke v. i ; as

w, to sojourn, as foreigners in
C7ri-8T]|xea>, a tempest on a ship, Acts xxvii.
a country, Ax^ts ii. 10, xvii. 21.* 20 fig,, to be laid on, as necessity,
;

ciri-Sia-Tdoro-oixat, to superadd, Gal. iii. I Cor. ix. 16 to be laid or imposed ;

15.* upon, as by a law, Heb, ix. 10 to ;

l7ri,-8(8ci)(ii, to deliver, to give up (ace. be icrgent with entreaties, Luke xxiii.

and dat. ), as Matt, vii. 9 ; Acts xv. 30 ; 23.*
to give ivay to the wind, Acts xxvii. 'E^iKOvpcios, ov, 6, an Epicurean, a fol-
lower of Epicurus, Acts xvii. 18.*
€Tri-8i-op0d(», to set or bring into order, eiri-KovpCa, as, i] {Kovpos, help), assistatu^,
Tit. i. 5.* help, aid, Acts xxvi, 22,*
*
€n-i-8ua>, to set, as the sun, Eph. iv. 26, Itri-Kpivo), to decide, to give judgment (ace.
4irv-£CK€ia, q, clemency, gentleness,
as, and inf.), Luke
xxiii. 24.*
Acts xxiv. 4 ; 2 Cor. x. i.* ciri-Xap-Pdvo), N.T,, mid., to take hold of
£Ti-£iKr|s, <^s, gentle, mild, kind, Phil, iv, (gen,), in kindness, as Luke ix, 47 ;

5 I Tim, iii. 2, 3 ; James iii. 1 7 ;

Acts ix. 27 Heb. ii, 16 to seize, as
; ;

I I'et. ii, 18.* a prisoner, Acts xxi. 30, 33 met., to ;

Q, to seek earnestly or contin-

hru-l,r\r4oi, lay hold of, so as to possess, i Tim.
lously (ace. of pers. or thing ; also vi, 12, 19.
|iri-Xavddvop.ai — ciri-cTTeXXwJ VOCABULARY. 437

liri-XavOdvofiai, dep., to forget (inf., gen. €Tri-iro0i](ris, ews, yj, vehement desire,
or ace. ); part. pert", pass. iiriXeXTjafMevov, , strong affection, 2 Cor. vii. 7, 11.*
forgotten, Luke xii. 6. €iri-Tr60TiTos, ov, greatly desired, longed
^i-X€"Y«, in pass., to be named or called, ^
for, Phil. iv. i.*
John V. 2 ; mid., to choose, Acts xv. eiri-iroGia, a?, 7/, like iinTr6dr](ri.s, strong
40.* desire, Rom.
xv. 23.*
^i-XcCiro), Twt to suffice, to fail, Heb. xi. eTri,-irop€vopxii, dep., mid., to come to
{irpos), Luke viii. 4.*
«iri-XT](rp.ovTJ, tJs, t), forgetfillness, James 4'irip-pd'TrTu), to sew to, or vpon, Mark ii.

25.
i. See § 257.'* 21 {eiri, dat.).*
€ir£-Xonros, ov, remaining, i Pet. iv. 2.* eirip-pCiTTw, to cast, or Jling upon, Luke
^iri-Xvo-is, cws, 7), solution, interpretation, xix. 35 ; of care cast upon God, i Pet.
*
2 Pet. i.(See tStos.)*
20. V. 7 (tTTi, acc).
€irt-Xvti>, to solve, explain, interpret, ^[ark €Tri-(rTi|xos, ov, remarkable, distinguished,
iv. 34 ; to detej-minc on, as a debated in either a bad or good sense, Matt.
*
question, Acts xix. 39. xxvii. 16 ; Rom. xvi. 7.*
en-i-^apTvpea>, Co, to testify earncsthj, I €Tri-o-iTio-[ids, ov, 6, victuals, food, pi^o-
Pet. V. 12.* vision, Luke ix. 12.*
em-|xeX€ia, as, 17, care for, study, atten- cTTi-a-KcirTOfiat, dep., to look upon, to visit,
tion, Acts xxvii. 3.* as Acts vii. 23 ; Matt. xxv. 36, 43 ;
eiri-ficXofxai and 4ofiat, ov/xai, to tnlcc care of God, Acts XV. 14 to look out, for ;

o/(gen.), Luke x. 34, 35 ; i Tim. iii. selection. Acts vi. 3.

5-* (TTi-cTKevd^oixai. See clttock.
.
eiri-fuXus, adv., carefully, diligently, eiri-<rKT]vow, fix ones tabernacle
Co, to
Luke XV. S* upon, to dwell, or remain on (iwi,
eiri-fjLcvb}, {i) to remain, abide, continue ; acc), 2 Cor. xii. 9.*
(2) met., to be constant, or persevering eiri-o-Kidtw, to overshadow (acc. or dat.),
in (dat.). Matt. xvii. 5 ; Mark ix. 7 ; Luke i.

eiri-vevb), tonod, to assent by nodding, to 35, ix. 34 ;^Acts V. 15.*

consent, Acts xviii. 20.* €iri-<rKOTr€w, Co, to act as, eTrlaKOTros, to
liTk-voia, as, 7), thought, device, p)urposc of take diligent care, to superintend, i
mind, Acts viii. 22.* Pet. V. 2 ; fx-q, lest, Heb. xii. 15.*
^i-opK^w, Co, to swear falsely, Matt. v. eiri-CKoirt], ^s, rj, (i) office, charge. Acts
33.* i. 20 ; LXX. ; (2) the office, or wo7'k, of
.
en-£-opKos, ov, perjured, i Tim. i. 10.* one who oversees a church, i Tim. iii.
«ri-ovortos, ov, adj. [oixyia, either in the I ; (3) visitation for kind and gracious

sense of subsistence or existence), purposes, Luke xix. 44 i Pet. ii. 12.* ;

pertaining to subsistence or existence, {irC-o-Koiros, one icho inspects,

ov, 6, (i)
sufficient for support, daily. (Cf. the ov takes care of, of Christ, i Pet. ii. 25 ;
Heb. phrase, Prov. xxx. 8, "the food an overseer of a church, "bishop,"
that is needful for me," R.V. ) Others Acts XX. 28 ; Phil. i. i ; i Tim. iii. 2 ;
with less probability connect the word Tit. i. 7.*
with iweLfxi (elfu) (which see), the bread eiri-<nrdft), w, to become uncircumcised,
which belongs to the following day, I Cor. vii. 18.*
Matt. vi. II Luke xi. 3.*
; €TrC-(rTa|iai. dep., to know loell, to under-
^iri-irtirro), to fall upon {ivi, ace), rusJi stand (acc), to know, with bn, ws,
upon, Mark iii. 10 (dat.) fig., to come ; etc.). Syn. 4.
upon (dat., or ctt:, ace. or dat.), as an liri-cTTdrqs, ov, 6, master, only in Luke,
emotion, etc., Luke i. 12 ; Acts viii. in voc, iTnarara, addressed to Jesus,
16. Rahbi, v. 5, viii. 24, 45, ix. 33, 49,
4iri-'irX'^(r<rw, to rebuke, to chide, i Tim. xvii. 13.* Syn. 59.
v. I.* eiri-cTT^XXft),to send by letter to, to give
iTri-iroOccD, a, to desire earnestly, to long directions by letter, to write. Acts xv.
for or after (inf. or ace), as 2 Cor. v. 2C, xxi. 25 (W. H. ttTToo-T) ; Heb. xiii,
*
2 to lust, abs., James iv. 5.
; 22
 438 VOCABULARY. [cTTl-CTTTJftWV — 4ir-ovo|id^o)

l'iri-a-T'{]}i.(av, ov, skilful, Tcnoiving, James ciri-Ti(j.Ca,as, censure,penalty, 2Cor. ii. 6. *

tj,

iii. 13.* firi-Tp^'Tro), to allow, permit. Matt. viii.

^iri-(rrrjpi^«, to establish, confirm. Acts 21; Heb. vi. 3.
xiv. 22, XV. 32, 41, xviii. 23 (not €iri-Tpo'irrj, tjs, ij, commission, full power,
W. H.).* Acts xxvi. 12.*
4iri-<rToXTJ, Tjt, T), an epistle, a letter. ^irC-Tpoiros, 6, " one who is charged
ov,
4iri-<rTO|j,£J«, to stoj) the mouth of, Tit. i. with," {i) a steward, Matt. xx. 8, Luke
II.* viii. 3 ; (2) a tutor. Gal. iv. 2.*
eiri-0Tp^<|)w, (i) trans., cause to turn
to liri-TVYxdvft), to attain, acquire (gen. or
(ace. and iiri), as to God, or to the ace), Rom. xi. 7 ; Heb. vi. 15, xi. 33 ;

worship of God, Acts ix. 35 ; (2) James iv. 2.*

intrans., to return, to turn hack, either €iri-(|>a£vu), I aor. inf., eirKpdvaL, 2aor.pass.,
to good or evil, Acts xxvi. 18 ; 2 Pet. iir€(f)dv7jv ;appear, as stars in the
{i) to
ii. 21 to return upon, as a refused
; night, Acts xxvii. 20 (2) to shine upon ;

salutation, Matt. x. 13 (eV, eij, -trpbs). (dat.), Luke i. 79 (3)met., to be known, ;

*
6'iri-<rTpo<j)TJ, Tjs, T), a turning, conversion. or manifest, Tit. ii. 11, iii. 4.
Acts XV. 3.* €'Tri-(f>dvcia, aj, ri, appearance, i Tim. vi.
liri-o-uv-dYci), to gather together, into one 14 ; manifestation, 2 Thess. ii. 8 2 ;

place, as Matt, xxiii. 37. Tim. i. 10, iv. i, 8 ; Tit. ii. 13.*
^iri-orvv-aYwyT), ^j, i), a gathering to- €iri-<|)av'^s, ^s, glorious, illustrious, Acts
gether, 2 Thess. ii. i;25.*Heb. x. ii. 20.*
eiri-<rvv-Tpcx.w> to run together, to a place, ciri-(f>avo>, or -(pavaKU), fut. au), to shine
Mark ix. 25.* upon, give light to (dat.), Eph. v. 14.*
«'Tri-<rv-<rTa<ris, ewj, 17 {iiriaTaffts, W. H.), €Tri-(f>epa) (see § 103, 6), to bring to {eiri,
(i) a seditious concourse. Acts xxiv. ace), Acts xix. 12 to superadd {to, ;

12 ; {2) pressure, of business, 2 Cor. xi. by dat.), Phil. i. 16 to bring upon, ;

inflict, as punishment, Rom. iii. 5 ;

etri-o-<|)aX'^S, h, "likely to fall," dan- to bring against, as an accusation,
gerous, Acts xxvii. 9.* Acts XXV. 18 ; Jude 9.*
€ir-icrxv«, to be the more urgent, Luke w, to cry out, or aloud, to
ciri-<{>o)v^(i),

xxiii. 5.* cry against, Luke xxiii. 21 ; Acts xii.

ciri-o-cDpcvo), to heap up, to obtain a 22, xxii. 24 (xxi. 34, W. H.).*
multitude of, 2 Tim. iv. 3.* ciri-4>w(rKo), to shine upon, to dawn, Matt,
^iri-rayfi, rjs, ij, a command, an injunc- xxviii. I ; Luke
54.* xxiii.
tion, 2 Cor. viii. 8 ; Titus ii. 15. lir\.-\fip{oi, Q}, to take in hand, under-
ciri-Tdcro-ft), ^w, to command (abs.), en- take, Luke i. I Acts ix. 29, xix. 13.*
;

join upon {d&t. ofpers., thing in ace. iir\-\i<af to jwur upon, as medicaments
or inf. ), Mark ix. 25 on wounds, Luke x. 34.*
em-rikiui, Q, ^au), to finish, to bring to eiri-xop-Ty^w, w, to supply, 2 Pet. i. 5 2 ;

an end, to perform, as a service, Cor. ix. 10 Gal. iii. 5 ;pass., to be ;

Heb. ix. 6; mid., to come to an end, furnished or siipplied, Col. ii. 19 2 ;

to leave off. Gal. iii. 3 pass., of ;

Pet. i. II.*
sufferings, to be accomplished, i Pet. €iri-xopiiY£a, as, t), a supply, ministra-
tion, Phil. i. 19 Eph. iv. 16.* ;

eiriT'^Scios, a, ov, fit, needful, James ii. 4iri-xp£(D> to rub, or smear iipon [iirl, ace),
16.* John ix. 6, 11.*
mti-tCGthii, put, place, or lay upon
to 4ir-oiKo8o|x4a>, w, to build upon {eiri, ace.
(with ace. and
dat., or eirl, ace. or ordat.), Cor. iii. 10-14 Eph. ii.
iig., i ;

gen.), as the hands (to heal), as 20 ; to build up, edify, Acts xx. 32
stripes, etc. of gifts, to load with.
; (not W. H.) Col. ii. 7 ; Jude 20.*
;

Acts x xviii. 10 mid., to rush upon in ; i-rr-OKiWfa, to force forward, to run (a

hostility, to oppose. Acts xviii. 10. ship) aground, Acts xxvii. 41 (^ttiatAXw,
iTTi-Tifjiub), (3, {i) to rebuke (dat.); (2) to W. H.).*
charge strictly, or enjoin (IVa), ]\Iatt. 4ir-ovo)Mit<^, to name, or call by a name
xii. 16, to admonish, to exhort. of honour, pass, only, Rom. ii. 17.*
 ;

eir-oirTcvw- -^pxojiai] VOCABULARY. 439

eir-OTrT€vw, to he witness off I Pet. ii. 12, Ipt'w, obsolete. See <t)y)id, dirov, and
iii. 2.* § 103, 7.
eir-cJin-qs, ou, 6, a7i eye-wittiess, a he- €pT](j.(a, as, T], an uninhabited tract, a
holder, 2 Pet. i. 16.* desert.
^TTOS, ovs, TO, a tvord ; (is ^ttoj dTr^lv, as I ^pT]px)s, ov, deserted, desolate, waste,
*
may say, Heb. vii. 9. barren. Acts i. 20 ; Gal. iv. 27 used in ;

Mrovpdvtcs, lov, heavenly, celestial, of the fem., as a subst., for a desert, Luke
God, ^latt. xviii. 35 (oupavtos, W. H.) ;
i. 80; epT7/iosT^s'Ioi'5atas, tlie u:ilderncss

of intelligent beings, Phil. ii. lo ; of of Judcca, the tract west of the Dead
the starry bodies, i Cor. xv. 40. So of Sea, Matt. iii. 12 77 ifrn[xos, the desert ;

kingdom, country, etc. Xeut. plur., in which the Israelites wandered.

TO. e-rrovfxivia, heavenly things, or j^laces, epTifjidci), u), to make desolate. Matt. xii.
John iii. 12 ; Eph. i. 3, 20, ii. 6, iii. 25 ; Luke xi. 17; to reduce to nought,
10 ; Heb. viii. 5, ix. 23. Rev. xvii. 16, xviii. 17, 19.*
tirrd, ol, al, rd, card, num., seven, "the cpi^p.(i)(riS, €ws, 7/, desolation, a laying
perfect number." So often symbol, in waste. Matt. xxiv. 15 ; Luke xxi. 20
Revelation, oi cTrrd, //<€ sct'c/i deacons, Mark xiii. 14.*
Acts xxi. 8. cpi^cD (epis), to contend, dispute. Matt. xii.
emraKis, num., adv., seven times, Matt, 19.*
xviii, 21, 22 Luke xvii. 4.* ; epiGeia, as,y) {^pidos, a icorker for wages,

eirraKKTXiXiot, at, a, card, num., seven perhaps connected with epiov), epidia,
thousand, Rom. xi. 4.* \y. H., "the spirit of a mercenary,"
hrbi. See ctTrov and § 103, 7. self-seeking, ox jjarty -spirit, Rom. ii. 8;
"EpaoTOs, ou, 6, ErastuSy Acts xix. 22. Phil. i. 16, ii. 3 ; James iii. 16 14, ;

(p^d^o^ai, ao/jLai, dep., perf. etfyyacrfiai, plur. in 2 Cor. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20.*
pass., (i) abs., to U/'orA:, to labour, to Spiov, ou, rd, ?<;ooZ, Heb. ix. 19 ; Rev. i.

trade; (2) accomplish, perform, do ;

to 14.*
(3) to practise, as virtues, to commit, as 2pis, i5os, 17, contention, strife, quarrel,
sin; (4) to acquire hy lahour, John vi. 27. love of contention.
ep^ao-ia, as, 7^, (i) effort, diligent labour, 6pi<|)iov, ov, TO, and tpKpos, ov, 6, a goat,
Luke xii. 58 (2) working, doing,
;
kid, Matt. xxv. 32, 33 ; Luke xv. 29.*
i.e., the practice or performance of, 'Epiids, a, 6, Hennas (sometimes "\mtten
Eph. iv. 19 (3) tvork, gain by icork,
: "kpixris), Rom. xvi. 14.*
Acts xvi. 16, 19 Acts xix. 24 (4) ;
;
€p|n]V€£a, as, 7/, inteipretation, explana-
trade, craft, Acts xix. 25.* tion, I Cor. xii. 10, xiv. 26.*
Ipydrt]?, ov, 6, a worker, labourer, Ip|x-r]vevb), to interpret, translate, John i.

]\Iatt. ix. 37 applied to workers in

; 39, 43, ix. 7 Heb. vii. 2.* ;

the church, 2 Tim. ii. 15 a doer, of ; 'Epfifis, 01', 6, the Greek deity .0gr77ie5 (in
iniquity, Luke xiii. 27. Latin, Mercury), Acts xiv. 12.*
^p-yov, ov, TO [fepy- so Germ., icerk), a ; 'EpftcyevT^s, ous, 6, Henaogenes, 2 Tim. i.
work, a deed, an enterprise, Acts v. 38 ;

a miracle, John vii. 3, 21 ; act, con- €pireTov, ov, t6, a creeping creature, a re}}-
trasted with \d70s, speech, Luke xxiv. tile. Acts x. 23.* 12, xi. 6 ; Rom. i.

19 ; any action, good or bad, Acts ix. cpvdpds, d, oV, red. epvdpd ddXaaaa, the
36 John iii. ig a thing wrought, by
; ; lied Sea, Acts vii. 36 Heb. xi. 29.* ;

God, Acts XV. 18 by men, Acts vii. ; ^pXopAi (see § 103, 2), to com€, to g^o, of
41 ; by the devil, i John iii. 8. persons or of things ; 6 epxdfxevos, the
epc6C^o) (^pis), to provoke, to to ex- excite, coming one, i.e., the Messiah, Matt,
asperate, 2 Cor. ix. 2 ; Col. iii. 21.* xi. 3 ; Heb.
in Rev. i. 4, 8,
x. 37 ;

cpcCSu, crw, to stick in, to stick fast, Acts iv. 8 ; He who

: to come, after,
is to come
xxvii. 41.* before, to, against, etc., as determined
epcvyopxii, ^ofxai, to utter, Matt. xiii. 35.* by the preposition which follows to ;

cpcuvdw, a), 17<TW (epavvdb}, W. H.), to come forth, as from the grave, i Cor.
search diligcnily, John v. 39 ; Rom. XV. 35 to come back, as the prodigal,
;

viii. 27 ; Rev. ii. 23. Luke XV. 30.

440 VOCABULARY. ripttrdd) — 6v-ap€<rTos

cpwTclw, u), to interrogate, Matt. xxi. 24, oneof another tongue,

erip6-y\uia-cro<s, ov, 6,
/o rt5l-, <o request, to beseech. Syn. 9. or lan(iu(i'jr, i Cor. xiv. 21.*
ecrG-Z^s, ^tos, ri{evvvixi, I aior.,€(Tdr]v),arobe, eT€po-8i8ao-Ka\€&), u), to teach otherwise,
raiment, Luke xxiii. 11 ; Acts xii. 21. to teach a different doctrine, from that
Syn. 66. of the apostle, i Tim. i. 3, vi. 3.*
^<r9T]o-is, ews, r?, raiment, Luke xxiv. 4. €T€po-tv7€a), be yoked imfitly, or
u), to
hcterogeneously 2 Cor. vi. 14.*
,

2nd aor., ecfoayov (see § 103, 3), ^0

^<r0£to>,
ca^, topartake offood, used abs. or with
ace. of food, or e/c, a word like 5omg
being understood with yuerct, gen. to
eat with ; Avith dat. (as Rom. xiv. 6),
to eat to the honour of ; met., to devour,
^Tcpos, distrib. pron., otJier, another;
indefinitely, any other; definitely,
the other ; diverse, different from^ ; adv,
; , -wy, otherwise, differently. Syn. 76.
^Ti, adv., any more, amy longer, yet, still,
even,Luke i. 15 also, Heb. ; xi. 36 ;

to consume, as rust does, James v. 3 ;

implying accession or addition, besides.
or Heb. x. 27.
fire, cTot}idt«, affw, to prepare, make ready.
*E<r\C, EsH, Luke iii. 25.*
6, CTOi|xao-ia, as, i), preparation, j^rompti-
^c-oirTpov, 01', t6, a mirror (of polished tude, Eph. vi. 15.*
metal) James 23 5t' icdirTpov, i Cor.
i. ; ^TOi|xos, or OS, ov, prompt, prepared, of
77

xiii. 12, lit. through a mirror, as the things or persons ev iroifiu} ex^^v, to ;

image appears on the opposite side.* be in readiness, 2 Cor. x. 6 adv., -ws, ;

6<nr^a, as, (prop. adj. with iopa), Luke

-17 in readiness, with ^x'^^ Acts xxi. 13 ;

xxiv. 29 ; the evening, Acts iv. 3, 2 Cor. xii. 14 ; i Pet. iv. 5.

xxviii. 23.* ^Tos, oi;s, TO, a year, Luke iv. 25 /car' ;

'Eo-ptofji, 6, Esrom, Matt, i. 3 ; Luke iii. €Tos, yearly, Luke ii. 41.
33-* €v, adv. (old neuter, from eus), well ;ljvke
t(r\a.ro% rj, ov, (i) the last, remotest, in xix. 17, Eph. vi. 3 eiJ iroielv (ace), ;

situation, dignity, or time, rd eaxarou, Mark xiv. 7, to do good to ; ed irpdacxeLv,

TO, ^fl-xara, as subst, the extremity,
last state ; (2) used predicatively as an
adverb, Mark xii. 6, 22 absolutely, i
Cor. XV. 8 (3) tlie end 0/ what is spoken
;
, to fare well, to prosper, Acts xv.
29 ; used in commendation, well ! well
; done! Matt. xxv. 21, 23.*
E{}a, as, T], Eve, 2 Cor. xi. 3; i Tim. ii. 13.*

of, e.g., the feast, John vii. 37 the ; €v-a'Y7£X£^w, <Tw, eirqyyeKica, evrjyy^Xia fj.ai
world, John vi. 39, 40 (4) spec, of the ;
(
I ) act., to bring glad tidings to (ace. or

Christian dispensation as the last, or dat.), Rev. x. 7, xiv. 6; (2) mid., (0

Za^^cr (days), Heb. i.2; (5) the last (day), announce, to publish (ace. of message),
i.e., the day of judgment, (6) the phrase to annouTUX the gospel (abs. ), to preach
6 TrpQiTos Kol 6 ecrxaros. Rev. i. 1 1, 17, to, evangelise (ace. pers.) pass., to be ;

ii. 8, the first and the last, describes the ajinounced, to have glad tidings an-
eternity of ; God
adv. -ws, extremely, nounced to one. See Matt. xi. 5 ;

i.e., in extremity, iaxdrofs exet, is at Heb. iv. 2.

the last extremity, Mark v. 23. iv-a.'y>{i\\.ov, ov,good tidings,TO, the
t(r(a, adv. of place, within, abs. as Matt, , the gospel. In the
(i) the epistles,
xxvi. 58 with gen., Mark xv. 16
; ;
announcing of the tidings, (2) the
with an the inner ; oi
article preced. , gospel scheme, (3) the work of evan-
^(Tu), those within the Christian pale, gelisation.
o])]). to 61 e^w, I Cor. v. 12. a messenger of good
cv-a-yytXio-TTls, ov, 6,
^cwOcv, adv. of i)lace, from within, vnth- tidings,of the gospel, an evangelist,
in; t6 ^(xcjdev, the i7iterior,i.e.,th.e mind Acts xxi. 8 ; Eph. iv. 11; 2 Tim.
or heart, 2 Cor. iv. 16. iv, 5,*
6<rwT€pos, a, ov (comp. of ecruj), inner, in- €v-ap€(rT€<i), Q, to be well-pleasing to
terior. Acts xvi. 24 Heb. vi. 19.* ; (dat,), Heb. xi. 5, 6; pass., to be
craipos, ov, 6, a companion, comrade, pleased with, Heb. xiii. 16,*
Matt. xi. i6(eTe/5os, W. H.); eTatpe, voc, €v-dp€(rTos, OP, acceptable, ivell -pleasinq.
as in English, my good friend, Matt. Rom. xii. i ; adv. -ws, acceptably^
XX. 13, xxii. 12, xxvi. 50.* Heb. xii. 28.
 ,

B<jpovXos- -6\MrO|P^Cl)] VOCABULARY. 441

EijpovXos, ov, 6, Euhulus, 2 Tim. iv. 2:.* €v-\ap€0|Mii, oO/iai, dep. pass., to fear^
evycvf^s, ^s, well-horn, noble, ingenuous Acts 10 (0o/3ea), "NV. H.) with
xxiii. ;

generous, Luke xix. 12 ; Acts x\'ii. fxi], to take precaution, Heb. xi. 7.*

II ; I Cor. i. 26.* €v-XapT|s, es, cautious. God-fearing, de-

cvSia, ay, (from Zei^s, gen. Ai6s),fair
r? vout, Luke ii. 25 Acts ii. 5, viii. 2, ;

weather, a serene sky, Matt. xvi. 2.* xxii. 12 (AV. H.).*

ev-8oKeci), w, crw, evdoKyjaa and rjvdoKrjaa, f.v-\oyi(ii, w, -qaw, to bless, speak loell to,

to think well of, to be pleased icith. to praise, i.e., God to invoke blessings ;

Matt. xvii. 5; 2 Pet. i. 17 ^0 resolve ; on, i.e., men to bless or to ask bless-
;

benevolently, Luke xii. 32. ing on, i.e., food, Luke ix. 16. So of
ev-8oK£a, as, 17, pleasure, good-will, the Lord's Supper, ilatt. xxvi. 26 ; i
favour, Phil. ii. 13; 2 Thess. i. 11 ; Cor. X. 16. L^sod of what God does,
Matt. xi. 26. to bless, to distinguish loith favour.
€v-€p76(rCa, as, i], a good work done to Hence pass. part. evXoyrifievos, blessed,
(gen. ), a benefit bestoived, Acts iv. 9 ; i favoured of God, Matt. xxv. 34. Syn.
Tim. vi. 2.* 28.
eu-cp-ycTcw, ^o r?o good, to confer kindness, cv-Xo-ytiTos, 6v (verbal adj. from preced.),
Acts x. 38.* worthy of 2^^'<^^se, of blessing, used
€v-cp7enis, ov, b, a he.nefador, a patron, only of God, Mark xiv. 61 ; Luke i.
Luke xxii. 25.* 68 Rom. i. 25, ix. 5
; 2 Cor. i. 3, xi. ;

€iJ-0€Tos, ov, well-placed, fit, useful, Luke ^31 Eph. i. 3

; I Pet. 1. 3.* ;

ix. 62, xiv. 35 ; Heb. vi. 7.* ev-Xo^ia, as, 17, ^'eulogy,'' commendation,
€v0€<»)s, adv. , inwiediaiely, soon, sjjeedily, in a good sense, and in a bad sense
forthvjith, see tvdvs. adulation, Rom. xvi. 18 ; blessing,
€v6v-8pop.e(i), w, io a nm m straight 2)raise, to God, Rev. vii. 12 benedAc- ;

course. Acts xvi. 11, xxi. i.* tion, i.e., wishing or conferring good
6v-0v;x€'fc), w, ^0 he in good spirits, to be upon, Heb. xii. 17 ; bounty, 2 Cor. ix.
cheerful, Acts xxvii. 22, 25 James ; 5 the blessing which the Gospel secures^
;

V. 13.* I Pet, iii. 9.

ci}-Ovp.os, ov, having good cou-
cheerful, €v-fi€Td-5oTOs, ov, ready to distribute, I
rage. Acts xxvii. 36*; adv., -ws, vnth Tim. vi. 18.*
alacrity, cheerfully, Acts xxiv. 10.* EvviKT], 77s, 77, Eunice, 2 Tim. i. 5.*
cvOvvtD, vQ, to nuike straight, John i. 23 ;
iv-voifn, Q, to be ivell affected, to, to be re-
to guide, to steer, as a ship, James iii. conciled to. Matt. V. 25.*
4-* €^'-voia, as, T}, good-icill, benevolence, 1
cvOvs, €ca, V, adj., straight: met., right, Cor. vii. 3 ; Eph. vi, 7.*
true; also adv., of time, straight, i.e., ivvovyJ.X,(t), cui, ei'vovx^crdrjv, pass., to live
iminediately, forthicith, as evdeuis. (The as a eunuch. Matt, xix, 12.*
editions vary much between the two cvvovxos, ov, i), a eunuch. Matt. xix. 12 ;
forms of the adverb.) Acts viii. 27-39.*
6v0irn]s, t7;tos, 17, rightness, rectitv/ie, EvoSCa, as, Euoclia, Phil. iv. 2.*
equity, Heb. i. 8 (LXX.).* (v-o8do), Q, pass, only, to be led in a good
€v-Kaip€b), cD, ^0 /tare leisure or oppor- ^cay, to be tTiade prosperous, Rom. i.
tunity, Mark vi. 31 Acts xvii. 21 ; ;
10 ; I Cor. xvi, 2 ; 3 John 2.*
I Cor. xvi. 12.* €v-'rrdpc8pos, ov. See evirpocredpos.
€v-KaipCa, as, i}, convenient tiTue or oppor- ev-ireiGiqs, ^s, easily entreated, complianty
tunity, Luke xxii. 6.* James iii. 17.*
€i$-Kaipos, ov, u'cll-tiyned, timely, opjwr- cv-TrepC-o-TaTOs, ov, easily besetting, or
tune, Mark vi. 21 Heb. iv. 16* adv., ; ; well circumstanceA, closely clinging ; or
-ws, opportunely, Mark xiv. 11 op- ; admired of many (R.V. marg. ), Heb.
posed to aKaipws, 2 Tim. iv. 2.* xii. I.*
ciS-Koiros, ov, eompar. only
easy, neut. ;
ev-iroita, as, i], welldoing, beneficence,
eiKOTTuyrepov, easier, as Matt. ix. 5. Heb. xiii. 16.*
cv-Xd^cui, as, r?, reverence, fear of God, (i, mid., to
€v-Trop€<«), be tceU-to-do, to he
piety, Heb. v. 7, xii. 28.* "Syn. 33, 44. prosperous, Acts xi. 29.*
442 VOCABULARY. [<v-iropla — €<|>-{(rTr||i.t

cv-iropCa, as, 17, wealth, prosperity^ Acts c{(-(|>i]fios, ov, praiseworthy, of good re-
xix. 25.* port, Phil. iv. 8.*
cv-Trpe'ireia, as, 7/, beauty, gracefuhiesSy ci-<f>op€Q), €), to bear plentifully, Luke
James i. ii.* xii. 16.*
cv-'irp(J<r-8€KTOs, ov, well received, accept- cv-(f>paCva), vC), eixppdvdrjv and rjixppdvdrjv,
able, Rom. XV. 16, 31 2 Cor. vi. 2,
; act., to make glad, 2 Cor. ii. 2 ;
pass.,
viii. 12 I Pet. ii.
;
5.* to be joyful, to rejoice, Luke xii. 19 ;

cv-irpdc-eSpos, 01/, assiduous, constantly Acts. ii. 26 ; Rev. xviii. 20.

attending on, i Cor. vii. 35 (evwdpedpos, Ev(})pdTT]s, ov, 6, tJie Euphrates, Rev. ix.
AV. H.).* 14, xvi. 12.*
cv-irpoo'tD'Trca), cD, ^0 7>i«^c « /air appear- cv(j>po(rvvT], 77s, i], joy, gladness, Acts ii.

ance. Gal. vi. 12.* 28, xiv. 17.*

CvpCcTKO), evpr)(T(i}, euprjKa, exipov, evpeOrju, tv-yapicrrita, d, to thank, give thanks, to
( 1 ) ^0 /;ifZ, to discover, to light upon ; be tJuinkful.
find by computation,
(2) to ascertain, to ev-xapiorria, as, rj, gratitude, thanks-
or by examination, as a judge; (3) to giving, as 2 Cor. ix. 11, 12.
obtain, to get, Heb. ix. 12 ; (4) to fi')id €v-xapi<rTOs, ov, thankful, grateful. Col.
hoiv, to be able ; (5) to contrive or find iii. 15.*

out how, by thought and inventing, «vx^> ^s, -^^ {i)praAjer, James v. 15 (2) ;

Luke xix. 48. a vow. Acts xviii. 18, xxi. 23.*

cvpo-KXv8u)v, u}vo^, 6 (from e5pos, tJie east ci^X^H'-"-'') ^^ i^^^y? 2 Cor. xiii. 9 James v. ;

wind, and k\v5u)v, icave), euroclydon, 16 {for with I'TT^p or -jrepL, gen.); to
a stonmj wind, a hurricame. Acts u'is/fc earnestly. Acts xxvi. 29, xxvii.

xxvii. 14. (W. H. g\\e€vpaKvK(i}v, Lat. 29 Rom. ix. 3

; 2 Cor. xiii. 9 3 ; ;

euraquilo, a north-cast gale. John 2*

cvpv-xtopos, ov, broad, spacious, Matt, e^J-xpiicTTos, ov, useful, very useful, 2
vii. 13.* Tim. iv. II ; Philemon 11.*
cv-(r€p€ia, as, i], piety, godliness, devotion, €v-\|njx€<«>> tS, to 6e i?i (/oor^ spirits, to be
Acts iii. 12 ; 2 Tim. iii. 5. Syn. 44. animated, Phil. ii. 19.*
cv-o-cPco), w, to exercise jriety, to worship, cv-(D8{a, as, i), fragrance, good odour,
to reverence. Acts xvii. 23 i Tim. v. 4. * ; 2 Cor. ii. 15; Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18.*
cv-(r6pT]s, religious, devout, Acts x. 2,
e's, €Vi6vvp.os, ov, left, hand. Acts xxi. 3 ;

7, xxii. 12 (W. H., ei)\a^77s) 2 Pet. ; foot, Rev. X. 2 ; e^ eviovO/xuv (neut.

ii. 9*; adv., -ws, devoutly, religiously, plur. ), on tJie left.
2 Tim. iii. 12 Tit. ii. 12.*
; e(|> dXXofJLai, to leap upon, ivi, ace, Acts
cC-o~r](j,os, ov, significant, distinct, easy to xix. 16.*
*
be understood., i Cor. xiv. 9. c(f>-dira|, adv., once for all, Rom. vi. 10 ;
cd-o-irXaYXVOs, ov, full of pity, tender- Heb. vii.27, x. 10; at once, i Cor.
hearted, Eph. iv. 32 I Pet. iii. 8.* ; XV. 6.*
€v-<rx'np.ovws, adv., honourably, becom- *E4)€(rivos, ov, Ephesian, i.e., church,
i'^i'jly^ gracefully, Rom. xiii. 13 ; i Rev. ii. I.*
Cor. xiv. 14; I Thess. iv. 12.* 'E<|>€<rios, ov, Ephesian, belonging to
iv-crx-qjioo-vvT], 77$, i), decorum, becoming- Ephesus, Acts xix. 28, xxi. 29.*
ness, I Cor. ii. 23.* "E<|)c<ros, 01', 7), Ephesus.
tv-<r\r\^<tiVf ov, reputable,
decoro^is, of 4<|>-cvpcTT|s, ov, 6, an inventor, one who
good standing, xv. 43 Mark
Acts ; finds out, Rom. i. 30.*
xiii. 50, xvii. 12 ; i Cor. xii. 24, to ^<|>.T]fiep£a, as, 7^, a course, a division of
imxny^ov, scemliness.* priests for interchange of service, Luke
cv-T($v(»s, adv., strenuously, earnestly, i.
5,
8.*
,

Luke xxiii. 10 Acts xviii. 28.* ;

c4>-T|^€pos, OV, daily y sufiUcieTit for tlie day,
cv-rpaTTcXCa, as, 17, jesting, frivolous and James 15.*ii.

indecent talk, E])h. v. 4.* e<|>-iKv^o)iai, dep., 2nd aor. e<piKo/jir]v, to

E{}tv\os, ov, 6, Eutyclius, Acts xx. 9.* come to, arrive at, &XP'- or cts, 2 Cor. x.
ev-<j>T])i£a, as, 17, commemlation, good re-
port, 2 Cor. vi. 8.* 44>-£<m]ni, 2nd aor., iiria-Trjv ; perf.
 ;; ;

€<|>-opd<d — ^T]Xda)J VOCABULAKY. 443

part., e^coTwj ; always intrans. or Z.

mid. in N.T. (i) to stand hy or near,
to come in or ')icar ; {2) to coine upon, Z, I, Zr\ra, zeta, the sixth letter, orig. of
with hostile intent (3) to he earnest, ; a mixed or compound sound, as if 5s,
2 Tim. iv. 2 (4) to befall one, as evil
;
now generally pronounced z or ts. As
(5) to he at hand, to be present, a numeral, ^' — J ^, =7,CXX3. ;

i.e., suddenly, unexpectedly, 2 Tim. Za^ovXwv, 6 (Heb.), Zehulon, Matt, iv,

iv. 6. 13, 15 Rev. vii. 8.*
;

4<f>-opd<>), aj, 2iid aor. eTretbov, to look ZaKxai^os, ov, 6, Zacchaus, Luke xix.*
upon, Luke i. 25; Acts iv. 29.* Zapd, 6(Heb.), ^a/-« or Ze rah, Matt. i. 3.*
'E<{>patp,, 6, EjJiraini, a place, John xi. ZaxapCas, ov, 6, ( i ) Zncharias, the father
of John the Baptist, Luke i. (2) ;

€4>4>a6d, an Aramsean verb, imperative, Zechariah, the son of Jehoiada(2Chron.

be opened, ^lark vii. 34.* xxiv. 20), or of Barachiah (Matt, xxiii.
^Opo, as, i), enmity, hatred. Gal. v. 20; 35), slain in the temple, Luke xi. 51.*
Eph. ii. 15, 17. (The prophet of the same name, not
e^Opds, d, 6v, (i) hated, odious to, Rom. mentioned in the N.T., though re-
xi. 28; used as suhst., an enemy; 6 peatedly quoted, was also the son of a
exOp6i, Luke x. 19, the enemy, i.e., Barachiah.)
Satan. Saw, G), ^xis, ^xi, inf., ^v ("\V. H^, f^v)
^i8va, rjs, 7}, a viper, lit., Acts xxviii. 3 fut., ^-qcTw or -o/iai ; 1st aor., i^rjaa ; to
fig., as Matt. iii. 7. live,as (i) to he alive; part., 6 fwc,
^<i), e^w, inipf., etxoj' ; 2nd aor., ^ax^^ >
the Living One, a description of God,
perf. ^axVKc-
,
i'^) to have or possess,
I
as Matt, xvi, 16 (2) to receive or ;

in general, physically or mentally, regain life, John iv. 50 ; (3) to spend

temporarily or permanently ; /xr] ex^iv, in any way. Gal. ii. 14
life 2 Tim. ;

to lack, to he poor, Luke viii. 6 ; i Cor. iii. 12 (4) to live, in the highest sense,
;

xi. 22 (2) ; to he able, Mark xiv. 8 ;

to possess spiritual and eternal life ;
Heb. vi. 13 2 Pet. i. 15 ;(3) with ; (5) met., as of water, living or fresh,
adverbs, or adverbial phrases, ellip- opposed to stagnant, as John iv. 10.
tically, "to have (oneself) in any Zep€oatos, ov, 6, Zebcdee.
manner ;" to he, as xa/ccDs ^X""? ^0 he ill; \ltfrr6%, fj, 6v (fe'co), boiling, hot, fig.,
etrxdTws ^x^"** ^0 he at the last extrem- Rev. iii. 15, 16.*
ity ; (4) to hold, I Tim. iii. 9, 2 Tim. Jcvyos, ous, TO, {i) a yoke {i^e&yvvfjLi, to
i. 13 ; to esteem. Matt. xiv. 5 ; Phil. ii. join), Luke xiv. 19 ; (2) a pair, Luke
29 ; (5) mid., ^x^l^^-h ^0 he near or ii. 24.*
next to, Mark i. 38 ; used of time. Acts ^evKTi^pCa, as, i], a band, a fastening, a
xxi. 26, th^i day coming, the next day ; chain, Acts xxvii. 40.*
TCL ix^f^^va ffitrrrjpias, things joined Z€vs, Aios, ace. Ai'a, Zeus (Lat., Jupiter),
to or pertaining to salvation, Heb. the chief of the heathen deities. Acts
vi. 9. xiv. 12, 13.*
2<i)Siadv., (i) of time, till, until, used as X,iu»,part, f^wv, to boil; fig., to he fervent
conj., also as prep, with gen. ewj o5, or or earnest. Acts xviii. 25 Rom. xii. ;

^wf Utov, until when, Luke xiii. 8 ; (2) II.*

of place, ujy to, or 05 far as, also with ^T^Xcvo), to he zealous, in a good sense,
gen., sometimes with e^j orrpos (ace), Rev. iii. 19 (W. H.).*
Matt. xxvi. 58 Luke xxiv. 50 Acts ; ; tT]Xos, 01;, 6, (i) fervour, zeal, in a good
xxvi. II; (3) spoken of a limit or sense, John ii. 17 ; (2) hearthurning,
term to anything, up to the point of jealousy, in a bad sense Acts xiii. ;

Matt. xxvi. 38 Luke xxii. 51 ; Rom. ; 45 ; anger, Acts v. 17.

ii. 12; (4) wdth particles, ews apn, tT]X6(rt, w, u(TO), (i) to have zeal for or
ews Tov vvv, until now ; ews ciSe, to this against, to desire earnestly (ace), i Cor.
place; ews Trore ; how long ? ews eTrrd/cis, xii. 31 2 Cor. xi. 2 ; Gal. iv. 17 ; (2)
;

until seven times; ^ws dvw, up to tlie to be envious or jealous. Acts vii. 9 ; I
brim, etc. Cor. xiii. 4 ; James iv. 2.
444 VoCAiJULARY. [t'nX.CDTljs T|AtKta

J-qXtoTT)?, ov, ( I ) <z zealot, one very zealous make alive, to cause
Xnao-iroiiia, d, rjacj, to
for (gen.), Acts xxi. 20 (2) as a sur- ;
to live, toquicken, John v. 21, vi. 63 ;
name, Zelotes, Luke vi. 15 Acts i. 13. ; I Cor. XV. 22, 36, 45 ; 2 Cor. iii. 6 ;

See KapavLTTjs. Gal. iii, 21; Rom. iv. 17, viii. 11 ;

|^T])iCa, as, i], damage, loss, Acts xxvii, 10, I Pet. iii. 18.*

21 ; Phil. iii. T,2>.*

^T))jLi6(i>, Q, pass. , to he endamaged, to H.

snfcr loss of (ace. ), Matt. xvi. 26 ;

Phil. iii. 8. H, t], 'Hra, Eta, e, the seventh letter.

Z-qvds, a, Zcnas, Titus 13.* iii. As a numeral, =8 =8,000. ?;' ; 77,

^T)T€a>, Q), TjCTw, [i) to seek, absolutely, as % a particle, disjunctive, or ; interroga-

J\Iatt. vii. 7 ; (2) to endeavour after, to tive, ivhether (see § 405) ; or compa-
seek for (ace. ), IMatt. vi. 33 John v. ; rative, than (see § 320). With other
30 ; (3) <o desire, to icishfor, ]\Iatt. xii. particles, dXX' i), except ; t) koL, or else ;
46, 47 Col. iii. i.
; ijirep,than at all, John xii. 43 ; ijroi ...
|^TT]|xa, aros, Tb, a question, dispute, con- ij,ivhether ...or (excluding any other
troversy (gen. , or irepi, gen. ) ; Acts alternative), Rom. vi. 16 ; 17, ]mrticle
XV. 2, xviii. 15, xxiii. 29, xxv. 19, with fxriv, surely, Heb. vi. 14 (W. H.,
xxvi. 3.*
5TJTTi<ris, ews, question, debate, altercation, T|7€(iovcva), to be governor, as proconsul,
John 25 ; Acts xxv. 20.
iii. Luke ii. 2 ;
procurator, Luke iii. i.*
^il^ttviov, 01;, TO (A. v., R.V., " tares"), T]"y€|iov£a, as, i}, rule, as of an emperor,
darnel, a kind of bastard wheat Matt, ; Luke iii. i.*
25-40.*
xiii. T|"Y€[x«v, 6i>os,governor, as the head of a
ZopopdpcX, 6 (Heb.), Zeruhhahel, Matt, district, 6 ; e.specially the
]\Iatt.
ii.

i. 12 ; Luke iii. 27.* procurator of Judsea, as Pilate, Felix,

|^o<j>os, ov, 6, darkness, thick gloom, 2 Festus.
Pet. ii. 4, 17; Jude 6, 13 (Heb. xii. Tj-y^o^ai, ov/xaL, dep. mid., (i) to be
18, W. H.).* leader, in N.T. only participle, 6
5\ry<is, a yoke, (i) met., of ser-
ov, 6, T^yov/xevos, the leader or cJiief (gen. ), as
vitude, Tim. vi. I (2) fig., of any
I ;
Acts xiv. 12; Heb. xiii. 7, 17, 24;
imposition by authority. Matt. xi. 29, (2) to deem,, regard, reckon, count, as
30 Acts XV. 10 Gal. v. i
; (3) the ; ;
Phil. iii. 7, 8.
beam of a pair of scale^f. Rev. vi. 5.* f|8€C!)S, adv. {ijdvs, sweet), gladly, with
tv|xi], t;?, 17, leaven, Matt. xvi. 6; fig., good-will; superlative, TJStara.
corruptness, I Cor. v. 6, 7, 8. •fjSri, adv. of time, now, already, as IMatt.

tvfJidb), w, to ferment, to leo^ven, Matt. xiii. iii. 10 ; of the immediate future, Rom.

33 ; Luke xiii. 21 ; i Cor. v. 6 ; Gal. i. 10.

V. 9.* TiSovq, •^s, 7], pleasure, i.e., sensual ; hist,

Xfii^ipkia, u) (^a;6s, dyp^u}), **

to take alive," strong desire, Luke viii. 14 Tit. ii. 3 ; ;

to catch, take captive, Luke v. 10 ; 2 James iv. i, 3 2 Pet. ii. 13.* ;

Tim. ii. 26.* iQ8vo<rfjtov, 01', t6 {i]5vs oafir)), mint, Matt.

*
%(ar\, 77s (ef. faw), (i) life, literal, spiritual, xxiii. 23 ; Luke xi. 42.
eternal, ^ujr} alwvios, eternal life; (2) "fjOoS) oi's, TO, as ?6os, manner, custom;
a title of Christ, as fJie source of life, plur., rfdri, morals, i Cor. xv. 33.*
John V. 26. Syn. 54. fJKw, ^(3) (perf., tJk-o, only Mark viii. 3), to
X'itvr\, 77 J, 7], a girdle, Acts xxi. ii a ; be come, to be present (see § 361, rf, note).
pibrsr, for which the girdle usually •HXC, 6 (Heb.), Heli, Luke iii. 23.*
served, Mark vi. 8. 'HX£ (W. H.,'EXa>0, a Hebrew word, my
^wvvv|xi or -vvvw, see § 114, to gird, God, Matt, xxvii. 46.*
John xxi. 18 ; Acts xii. 8.* *HX£as, ov, 6, Elias, i.e., Elijah.
^wo-"yov^«, w, rjCTu, to ])7'eserve alive, Luke i^XiK^a, as, 7/, (i) stature, size, Luke xix. \
xvii. 33 ; Acts vii. 19 ; I Tim. vi. 13, 3; full age, vigour; i/XiKiav
(2) age,
(W. H.).* ^ei, Jw is of age, John ix. 21. So,
t^wov, ov,t6, alivingcrcat}irc,nnimal, beast. prob., Matt. vi. 27 (R.V. marg.).
 ; ;

f|\tKos — 9av[xdt«] VOCABULARY. 445

i^XCkos, 7}, ov, Twiv great, hmv much, how fJTTwv or -^(Tcuv {W. H. ), irreg., com-
little, Col. ii. i ; James iii. 5.*' par. of KUKos, inferior, neut. as adv.,
TJXios, ov, 6, the sun, the light of the sun. 2 Cor. xii. 1 5 TO ^ittov, as subst. th".
; ,

f|Xo$, ov, 6, a nail, John xx. 25.* worse, I Cor. xi. 17.*
^liciS) gen. 'r]ixC}v, dat. i^iuv, ace. ^/iSs, Tjxc'o), u), to sound, as the sea, Luke xxi.

I)lur. of e7w. 25 as brass, i Cor. xiii. i.*

;

iqjjicpa, as, 7], a day, i.e., the time from Jj^os, ov, 6, sound, Heb. xii. 19 Acts ;

sunrise to sunset. ii. 2, fame or report, Luke iv. 37.*

iqiiCTcpos, a, ov, our, our own. TJYos, ovs, t6, soundy noise, Luke xxi. 25
iv^\.^o,vi\%, is, half dead, Luke x. 30.* (W. H.).*-
f]|JLi(rvS| eia, v, gen., ijfxicTovs, half ; in
neut. only, the lialf of, (gen.) plur.
{ijula-T], W. H. V^(rta),Lukexix. 8; sing.,

Mark vi. 23; Rev, xi. 9, 11, xii. 14.*

i\\i.iu>piov, ov, TO, a half-hour. Rev. 0, 9, and ^, OfJTa, theta, th, the eighth
viii. I.* letter. Numerically, 0' = '^ ',
,=
i]viKa, adv., when, whenever, with &u 9,000.
{idv, W. H.), 2 Cor. iii. 15, 16.* 0a88aios, ov, 6, Thaddaaus, a surname
ijircp, see i}. of the apostle Jude (also called Zci-
<jirios, a, ov, placid, gentle, I Thess. ii. ha^us), ]\latt. x. 3 ; Mark iii. 18.*
7 2 Tim. ii. 24.*
; 6dXao-(ra, 77s, 7/, (i) the sea ; (2) sea, as
"Hp, 6 (Heb.), Er, Luke iii. 28.* the Mediterranean, tlie Red Sea ; (3)
^€|jiOs, ov, quiet, tranquil, I Tim. ii. 2.* Hebraistically, for the lake Gennesa-
*Hp«8tis(W. H., -y-), ov, 6, Herod. Four ret, Matt. viii. 24.
of the name are mentioned : (i) Herod 0dXir«, to cherish, nourish, Eph. v. 29
tlie Great, Matt. ii. ; (2) Herod Anti- I Thess. ii. 7.*
pas, or H. the tetrarch. Matt. xiv. ©djxap, T], Tamar, Matt. i. 3.*
Luke xxiii. {^) H. Agrippa, Acts xii.
; Oafipe'o), do, to he astonished, amazed, Acts

(4) H. Agrippa the younger, called ix. 6 (W. H, omit). So pass., Mark i.
only Agrippa, Acts xxv. 27, X. 32; with iiri (dat.), Mark x.
'HpcoSiavoC (W. H., -({}-), Qv, oi, Herod- 24.*
ians, partisans of Herod Antipas, 6d|xPos, ous, TO, astonishment, Luke iv.
Matt. xxii. 16 Mark iii. 6, xii. 13.* ; 36, V, 9 ; Acts iii. 10.*

*Hp<«)8ids(W. H., -y-), ados, i], Herodias. 6avd(ri)j.os, ov, deadly, mortal, Mark xvi.
Matt, xiv. 3, 6. 18.*
'HpwSCwv (W. H., -if-), uvos, 6, Hcrodion, 0avaTT]-(j)dpos, ov, dcath-hringing, James
Rom. xvi. II.* iii. 8.*
*H<raCaSi 01^, 6, Esaias, i.e., Isaiah. Odvaros, ov, 6, death, lit. or fig. ; the
*H(rav, 6 (Heb.), Esau, Rom. ix. 13; cause of death, Rom. vii. 13.
Heb. xi, 20, xii. 16.* Oavarofa), Cj, cicrw, to put to death, pass.,

i^<rvxd$<D, <j<i}, {i)to rest from, work, Luke to he in danger of death, Rom. viii.
xxiii. 56 ; (2) to cease from altercation, 36 ; fig. to mortify, subdue, as evil
,

to he silent, Luke xiv. 4 ; Acts xi. 18 ; passions, Rom. viii. 13 pass., to be- ;

(3) to live quietly, i Thess. iv. 11.* come dead to (dat.), Rom. vii. 4.

•qo-ux^** °-^^ Vj (i) guict, silence. Acts OdiTTU), \j/(i}, 2nd aor, h-a<pov, to huj'y.
xxii. 2 ; I Tim. ii. 11 ; (2) tranquillity, @dpa, 6, Terah, 34.* Luke iii.

quiet, modesty, 2 Thess. iii. 12.* 6appc(u, Co, of good cheer, to

-qau}, to be
Tjo-vxios, ia, lov, quiet, gentle, i Tim. ii. have confidence in, ds or iv. In im-
2 ; I Pet. iii. 4.* jierative, forms from dapaiui are used,
4]Toi, see ij. ddpa€i, 6apaeiT€, take courage.
fJTrdofjLai, pass., (l) to he inferior (abs.), Odpo-os, ovs, TO, courage, Acts xxviii. 15.*
2 Cor. xii. 13 ; (2) to be overcome hy 6avp,a, arcs, to, wonder, amazement, 2
(dat); 2 Pet. ii. 19, 20.* Cor. xi. 14 (W, H.) Rev. xvii. 6.* ;

^rrrifia, arcs, t6, inferiority, diminution, Oavfid^o), crw, or aofxai, to tvondcr, abs.,
Rom. xi. 12 ; loss, i Cor. vi. 7.* with did, ace; em, dat.; irepi, gen., or
446 VOCABULARY. [6av|id(rios — 0Y]pio-[jiax^M

6'ti, ft ; to wonder aty Udinire^ ace. Oco-ccpcia, ay, 7/, 2nety, towards God, i
pass., to he admired or honoured. Tim. ii. 10.*
6avp,d(rkos, la, lov, wonderfalj Matt. xxi. 6€o-(rcpT|S) es, God-woi'shijyping, devout^
15.* ^ John 31.* ix.
Oav)ia<rToS) tJ, 6y, wonderful, marvellous, 0€o-<rTVYi^S» ^s, God-hating, or God-hatedj
Matt. xxi. 42 ; Mark xii. 1 1 ; John ix. Rom. i. 30.*
30; Pet. ii. 9; Rev. xv. i, 3.*
I OeorqSi TT]Tos, 7], deity, godhead, the divine
0€d, a J, a goddess, Acts xix. 27.
T)y culture. Col. ii. 9.* Syn. 34.
dedo^ai, G)ixaL, dep., 1st aor. ideaadfirjv, 0co-<|>iXos, 01', 6, Theophilus, Luke i. 3 ;
pass, ideddrjv, to behold, to contemplate Acts i. I.*
earnestly, to sec, to visit. OcpaircCa, as, ij, (i) service; hence (abs.
Ocarp^to)) to make a
spectacle of, so to ex- for concrete) servants, houscJwld, Luke
pose to contempt, Heb. x. 33.* xii. 42 ; Matt. xxiv. 45 (not W. H.) ;

Qidrpov, ov, t6, (i) a place for public (2) healing, as the service which brings
shows, a theatre. Acts xix. 29, 31 ; (2) health and cure, Luke ix. 1 1 ; Rev.
spectacle, i Cor. iv. 9.* xxii. 2.*
Oclos, eta, €LOv, divine, 2 Pet. i. 3, 4 ; to Ocpaircvo), cvata, {i) to serve, minister to,
*
deiov, perhaps the Deity, Acts xvii. 29. only Acts xvii. (2) to Jieal ; ace. of
25 ;

Ociov, ov, t6, sulphur (from the preced- pers. , and diro or ace. of disease.
magic fume *
ing, '*a "). Ocpdirwv, ovTos, 6, a servant, Heb. iii. 5.

0€£oTT]s, T7JT0S, godhead, deity, Rom.

i], i. Ocpf^o), i<Tia, to reap or gather, as corn,
20.* Syn. 34. lit. or fig,

6€i(iaST]St ey, sulphureous. Rev. ix. 17.* 6€pio-p.6s, ov, 6, harvest, the gathering-time,
6eXT]|ia, aros, rb, will, desire, a lust lit, or fig.

plur., Acts xiii. 22 ; Eph. ii. 3. 6€pi<rTT|s, ov, 6, a rea2)er, Iklatt. xii. 30,
0cXTi<ris, cws, 71, will, pleasure, Heb. 39-*
ii. 4.* BipiiaCvia, avQ, only mid. in N,T,, to
Oc'Xw, impf., ijdeXov ; ist aor., i$i\r]cra ;
warm oneself, Mark xiv. 54, 67 John;

to wish, delight in, prefer, to ivill, in xviii. 18, 25 ; James ii. 16,*
the sense of assent, determination, or OepfiT], 7;s, J), heat, burning. Acts xxviii.
requirement. Syn. 3.
6e[i€XioS) ov, belonging to a foundation, Oepos, oi'j, rb, summer, harvest -time.
fundamental. Hence, masc. (sc. \i6os), Matt. xxiv. 32 ; Mark xiii. 28 ; Luke
a foundation, or to de/xiXiov (Luke), in xxi. 30,*
the same sense. Fig. for the elements 0€(r(raXoviKcvs, ^5, 6, a Thessalonian.
of sound doctrine. 0€<ro-aXov£KT], 7)t, 6, Thessalonica.
*
OcfieXidd), Q, wfl-w, to lay a foundation, to 0cvSds, a, 6, Theudas, Acts v. 36,
found; fig., pass., to be firm and stable. 6cci)p^a>, w, to be a spectator of, to behold, to
Oco-SCSaKTos, ov, taught of God, i Thess. see, to know by seeing, to experience;
iv. 9.* abs,, or with ace. or obj. clause.
Gcd-XoyoS) ov, 6, the divine, or the theo- 6€6>p£a, ay, i], a sight, a spectacle, Luke
logian, of the apostle John in the title xxiii. 48.*
to Rev. (W. H. omit).* Bi\K-t], r)s, 7) {Tidi)jxi), a receptacle, as a
6€o-)iaxe«D, cD, to fight against God, Acts scabbard, John xviii. 11.*
xxiii. 9.* 6T]Xdt()>, {i) to give suck, Matt. xxiv. 19;
Oco-jidxos, ov, 6, a fighter against God, (2) to Slick at the breast, Matt. xxi.
Acts V. 39.* 16.
OciJ-irvcvo-Tos, ov {irviu}), God-breathed, 0fjXvs, €La, V, female, fem,, Rom, i, 26,
inspired by Gud, 2 Tim. iii. 16.* 27 ; neut,, ^latt. xix, 4 ; Mark x. 6 ;

0cos> once 0e^, Matt, xxvii.

ov, 6, voc. Gal. iii. 28.*
46 ( I ) God 6 0e6s, tJie revealed God,
; ; 0^pa, ay, i], hunting, hence a snare, Rom.
Jolin i. I Acts xvii. 24, etc. (2) a god,
;
;
xi, 9.*
generically. Acts vii. 43, xii. 22 2 ; 0Y]p€v<>>, <TU), to hunt, to catch, Luke xi, 54,*
Cor. 4 ; Phil. iii. 19
iv. ; John x. 34 0-r]pio-(iax^<i>, w, to fight with wild beasts,
(quoted from LXX.). I Cor, XV. 32,*
 ,

9T)piov
— 'laKia^] VOCABULARY. 447

B7\piov, ov, TO, a wild beast, as Acts xi. 6 ;

Ovydrrip, rpo'j, t), a daugJUer, a female
freq, in Rev. descendant, Luke xiii. 16 ; met., of the
6i](ravpC^(i), ffWy to treasiLre up, reserve, inhabitants of a place, collectively,
lit. and fig. Matt. xxi. 5.
Or^cravpds, ou, 6, treasure, wealth. OxryaTptov, ov, to (dim. of dvyaTrjp), a
©lyydvw, 2nd aor. idtyov, to touch, handle, little daughter, Mark v. 23, vii. 25.*
abs. vCol. ii. 2i ; with gen., Heb. xi. OvcXXa, r/s, 17, a temjjcst, ivhirlwind,
28, xii. 20.* Heb. xii. 18.*
OXC^o), xpu, to press, to throng, Mark iii. Ovivos, T}, ov, made of the thyiiie tree, a
9 ; fig. , to afflict, 2>rcss with trouble, strongly aromatic and hard-wooded
2 Cor. i. 6 ;
pass. ,
perf. i)art. , redXi/M/xe- tree of Africa, Rev. xviii. 12.*
vos, contracted, nxirrow, Matt. vii. 14. 6vp.Ca)JLa, aros, to, incense, Luke i. lo, 1 1 ;

6Xi\|/is, ews, T}, pressure, affliction, tribula- Rev.

V. 8, viii. 3, 4, xviii. 13.*
tion. OviiiaT^piov, 01*, TO, the censer, or vessel
2nd aor. idavov, to die; in N.T.
Ovi/j(rK(i), in which the materials of incense were
only, perf. r^dprjKa, to be dead. burned, the altar on which the incense
9vT]Tds, 17, 6v, mortal, dying, Rom. vi. 12,. was placed to burn, Heb. ix. 4.*
*
viii. II ; I Cor. xv. 53, 54 ; 2 Cor. iv. 6v|jiid<i), cD, to burn incense, Luke i. 9.
II, V. 4.* 6v)iO)iaxc<i>, w, to be greatly displeased
OopvPatw, to disturb, trouble, Luke x. 41 with (dat.). Acts xii. 20.*
(W. H.).* 6v)jL($s, passion, or violent commo-
OV, 6,
OopvPcw, Q, to disturb. Acts xvii. 5 mid. ; tion of mind, great anger, ivrath.
to make a noise, as of lamentation over 6v)io(i>, w, to pi'ovoke to great anger;
the dead, Matt. ix. 23 Mark v. 39 ; ;
pass., to be greatly angry with, Matt,
Acts XX. 10.* ii. 16.*

OopvPos, 01', 6, noise, iiproar. Ovpa, as, 17, a door, Luke xi, 7 ; Matt,
Opavo), (Tw, to break, bruise, Luke iv. 18.* xxvii. 60 ; met., John x. 7, 9.
6p€p,)ia, aroj, to {Tpi<pw), the young of Ovpcds, OV, 6, a (door-shaped) shield,
cattle, sJieep, etc., John iv. 12.* Eph. vi. 16.*
6pT)vcu), Q, abs. , to wail, lament, to raise a 6vp£s, t'Sos, i], an opening, used for a
funeral cry, Matt. xi. 17 ; Luke vii. window or wicket, Acts xx. 9 2 Cor. ;

32 John xvi. 20
; ; to bewail, ace, xi. 33.*
Luke xxiii. 27.* OvpcDpds, ov, 6, i], a dom'-keeper, porter,
6pf]vos, ov, b, a wailing, Matt. ii. 18 (not Mark xiii. 34; John x. 3, xviii. 16, 17.*
W. H.).* Qv<ria, as, i], (i) the act of sacrificing;
6pT)o-KcCa, external worshi}}, reli-
as, 7), (2) the victim sacrificed, a sacrifice.
gious homage, ritual. Acts xxvi. 5 ; 0vo-ia<rTTJpiov, ov, to, an altar, for sacri-
Col. ii. 18 James i. 26, 27.*
; fices.
dprjo-Kos, ov (prop, adj.), a devotee, reli- 0v«, (Tw, {i) to slay in sacrifice, Acts xiv.
gious person, James i. 26.* 13 (2) to kill animals, for feasting,
;

Opiafipcvo), <TU), to triumph over, to lead in Matt. xxii. 4 ; (3) io slay, generally,
triumph, 2 Cor. ii. 14; Col. ii. 15.* John X. 10.
6p£|, TpLx6s, dat. plur. dpi^i, i], a hair, 0(t>|jLds, a (from Heb. = didv/ios), Thomas.
human or animal. 6wpa|, aKos, masc, a breast-'jjlate, Eph.
Qpo4<a, w, to disturb, terrify by clamour; vi. 14 ; I Thess. v. 8 Rev. ix. 9, 17.* ;

only pass, in N. T. , Matt. xxiv. 6 ;

*
Mark xiii. 7 ; 2 Thess. ii. 2.
6p($p,pos, Of, 6, a clot, large drop, as of I.
blood, Luke xxii. 44.*
6povos, ov, 6, a scat,a.s of judgment. Matt, I, I, *Ic!)Ta, ninth letter. As a
Iota, the
xix. 28 ; a throne, or seat of power, numeral, lo ; i^ = 10,000.
i' =
Rev. iii. 21 met., of dominion. Rev.
; 'Idcipos, ov, b, Jairus,
xiii. 2 concrete, of tJie ruler, or oc-
; *IaK«p, 6 (Heb.), Jacob, (i) the patri-
cupant of the throne. Col. i. 16. arch (2) the father-in-law of Mary,
;

Ovdrcipa, uv, to,, Thyatira. Matt. i. 15.

448 VOCABULARY. ['laKco^os 'Iticovs

'IcLkcoPos, ov, 6, Greek form of preced., of priests, a title applied to Christians,

James, (i) the son of Zebedee (2) ;
I Pet. ii. 5, 9.*
the son of Alpha?us (3) the Lord's ; UpaTcvo), ail}, to officiate as a priest, to
brother. Some identify (2) and (3). perform the priest's office, Luke i. 8. *
KajJia, aros, rb, healing, cure, phir. , i Cor. 'lepEfi^as, iov, 6, Jeremiah. (In Matt,
xii. 9, 28, 30.* xxvii. 9, the quotation is from Ze-
'lafxPoi^s, ov, 6, Jamhres, with 'lawrjs. chariah.
2 Tim. iii. 8.* Upcvs, ^ws, a priest, sometimes the High
'lavvd, 6 (Heb. ), Janiia, Luke iii, 24.* Priest, Acts v. of Christ, Heb. v.
24 ;

'lavvqs, ov, 6. See 'Ia/x./3p^s. 6 (Ps. ex. 4) ; of Christians generally.

ldop.ai, Q/xai, idao/xai, dep., mid. aor. Rev. i. 6, V. 10.
but passive in aor., pert", and fut. to , *l€piX«, 7) ( Heb. ), Jericho.
Jical, to restore to health, of body or Upov, TO (prop. neut. of tepjs), a jjlace
ov,
mind ; with cltto, of malady. consecrated to God, a fane or temple,
'lapis, 6 (Heb.), Jarecl, Luke iii. 37.* used of a heathen temple, as Acts xix.
tacis, ews, 17, a cure, healing, Luke xiii. 27 of the temple at Jerusalem, as
;

32 ; Acts iv. 22, 30.* Matt. xxiv. I and of parts of the ;

Cao-TTis, jasper, a precious stone,

idos, Tj, temple, as Matt. xii. 5. Syn. 35.
Rev. iv. 3, xxi. 11, 18, 19.* Upo-irpeiriis, ovs, adj., becoming or suit-
*Id<rwv, ovos, 6, Jason, Acts xvii. 5 ; able to a sacred character {reverent^
Rom. xvi. 21 perhaps two persons.* ;
R.V.), Tit. ii. 3.*
larpos, ov, 6, a 2)hysician, Upos, d, ov, consecrated, holy, of the
l'8€, or Ide (eUov), imper. act. as interj., Scriptures, 2 Tim. iii. 15; ra lepd,
behold ! often followed by nominative. sacred things, i Cor. ix. 13.*
ISca, as, 7), form, aspect. Matt, xxviii. 3.* 'l£po(r<$Xv|i,a (W. H.,'I. ), wv, ra. See
ifSios, ta, ov, (i) one's oiun, denoting 'lepovaaXyjix.
ownership, Matt. xxii. 5 ; John x. 1 2 ;
*l€po<roXv|jLiTi]S, 01;, 6, one of Jerusalem^
also what peculiar to, Acts i. 19.
is Mark i. 5 ; John vii. 25. *
Hence, ra i'5ta, 07ie's oivn things, home, t€po-<rvX€a>, G), to commit sacrilege, Rom.

nation or people, business or duty ; ol ii. 22.*

18101, one's own j^^ojile, friends, com- icpd-crvXos, ov, robbing temples, sacri-
panions, neut. and masc. contrasted in legious. Acts xix. 37,*
John i. II (2) that which specially
;
Upovp-Ycci), Co {lephv, ^pyov), to minister in
pertains to, and is proper for, as holy things, Rom. xv. 16.*
I Cor. iii. 8 Gal. vi. 9 (3) adver-
; ;
•Itpovo-aX^p, (W. H., 'I.), 7} (Heb.), (for
bially, Kar 'idiav, privately ; idla, indi- form, see § 156), Jerusalem, (i) the
vidually. city ; (2) the inhabitants. In Gal. iv.
i8i«TT]s, Ol", 6, a p)rivate person, one of the 25, 26, 7/ vvv 'I. is the Jewish dispen-
vulgar, an unlettered one. Acts iv. 13 ; sation, and is contrasted with i] avio*l.,
I Cor. xiv. 16, 23, 24 2 Cor. xi. 6.* ; the ideal Christian community ; also
I80U (comp. 'i8e), imper. mid. as interj., called 'I. iirovpavLos, Heb. xii. 22 ; 17

lo ! behold ! used to call attention not KaivT]'!., Rev. iii. 12, xxi. 2.
only to that which may be seen, but Upuo-vvT], T}s, 7], tJie priestly office, Heb.
also heard, or apprehended in any vii. II, 12, 24.*
way. *l€<r<raf , 6 ( Heb. ), Jesse.
*I8ovp.aCa, aj. t], Idumea, the O.T. Edom, (Heb.), Jephthah.
'l€(|>6dc, 6

Mark iii. 8.* 'l€xov£as, ov, 0, Jechonvxs, or Jehoia-

i8pws, cDros, 6, sweat, Luke xxii. 44.* cliin.

*l€^apT|X, T) (H(;b. ), Jezebel, symbolically 'lTi<rovs, ov (see § 25), (i) Jesus, the
used, Rev. ii. 20.* Saviour ; (2) Joshua, Acts vii. 45 ;

'Icpd-iroXis, ews, i], HierapoUs, in Phry- Heb. iv. 8 ; (3) a fellow-labourer of

gia. Col. iv. 13.* Paul, so named. Col. iv. 11 (4) ;

UparcCa, as, r/, the office of a priest, priest- Barabbas is so named in some early
hood, Luke i. 9; Heb. vii. 5.* MSS., Matt, xxvii. 16 {^)nn ancestor :

lcpdT€V|ia, aros, t6, the assembly or society of Joseph, Luke iii. 29 (W. H.).
 *;

iKav^S — ^i<m)jAi] VOCABULARY. 449

iKavos, 17, bv, (i) sufficient, competent to, 'lovSaiKos, Jewish, or Judaical,
r/i ^v,
inf. , or iva
Trpos (ace. ) ; (2) many, 'much, Tit. i. 14*;
adv., Jewishly, in
-ws,
of nunibei- or time. Jewish style, Gal. ii. 14.*
iKavoTTis, "^Tos, 7], sufficiency, ability, 2 'lovSatos, ata, ov, belonging to Judah,
Cor. iii. 5.* Jewish. Often in plur., with subst.
iKavoci), w, to make sufficient or comjjetent, understood, oi 'lovdaioi, the Jctcs.
2 Cor. iii. 6 ; Col. i. 12.* 'Iov8at<r|ios, ov, b, Judarism, the Jewish
iK€TTipia, as, i], supplication, Heb. v. system, Gal. i. 13, 14.*
7-,* 'lovSas, a, 6, Judah, (i) Son of Jacob;
iK|xds, d5oj, 7], moisture, Luke viii. 6.'^
(2, 3) other ancestors of Christ, Luke
'Ikoviov, 01^, TO, Iconium. iii. 26, 30 (4) J2ide, the apostle
;

IXapos, d, 6v, joyous, cliecrful, "hila- (5) Judas

Iscariot ; (6) Judas Bar-
rious," 2 Cor. ix. 7.* sabas, Acts xv. 22 ; (7) a Jew living
tXapoT7]s, TTjTos, i], cliecrfulness, alacrity, in Damascus, Acts ix. 11 (8) a leader ;

Rom. xii. 8.* of sedition. Acts v. 37 (9) a brother ;

iXdcTKop.ai, daofiai, 1st aor. IXdaOrjv, (i) of our Lord, Matt. xiii. 55 perhaps ;

^0 ig 2^'>''^P'^f'^ous to, dat., Luke xviii. identical with (4). See 'Id^w/Sos.
13 ; (2) ^0 wrtA:(J 2^'''^^^^^^^^'^'^ or atone- 'lovXia, as, r), Julia, Rom. xvi. 15.*
ment/or, expiate, ace, Heb. ii,17.* 'lovXios, 01^, 6, Jul' us. Acts xxvii. i, 3.
lXacrp.ds, 01^, 6, « ^/rojntiation, atoning *Iovvias, a, 6, Junius, Rom. xvi. 7.*
sacrifice, i John ii. 2, iv. 10.* 'lovo-Tos, 01', 6, Justus. Three of the
iXa<rTT|ptos, ia, ov, atoning, neut. ,
^)7'o- name are mentioned. Acts i. 23, xviii.
jntiation, Rom. iii. 25 : (sc. ^iridefxa, 7 ; Col. iv. II.*
covering), the mercy-seat, Heb. ix. 5.* e'ws, 6, a horse-soldier. Acts xxiii.
iirirciis,

tXecDS, (Attic form), propitious,

(jjv 23, 32.*
favourable, mercifid, Heb. viii. 12; tinriKov (prop. neut. adj.), cavalry, Rev.
JNIatt. xvi. 22, tXew5 cot (God be) ix. 16.*
merciful to thee God forbid !* ! Vinros, ov, b, a, hoi'se.
'IXXvpiKov, ov, rb, Illyricum. tpis, 'ipidos, 7], tJie rainbow, Rev. iv. 3,
i|xds, o.vro'i, 6, « thong for scourging. X. I.*
Acts xxii. 25 ; thong, latchct of a shoe, 'I<radK, 6 (Hel).), Isaac.

Mark i. 7 Luke iii. 16 John i. 27.*

; ; l<r-dY7€Xos, ov, like or equal to angels,
i^aTit[(i), perf., pass., part., IfxarKr/xevos, Luke XX. 36.*
to clothe, Mark v, 15 ; Luke viii. 35.* l'<rao-i. See 6l8a.
ifjidriov, iov, rb (dim of f/>ta = e?/xa, from 'loraxdp and 'laaax^P (Heb.), Issachar.
evvvixi), (i) clothing; (2) ^Ac outer 'I<rKapi«TT]s, 01', 6, Iscariot, i.e., a man
garment, disting. from x^'''^^- of Kerioth. See Joshua xv. 25.
i\iar\.a-\i6s, ou, b, clothes, raiment. 'teres, 77, ov (or lo-os), like, equal to (dat.),

ip.€(po|xai, have a strong affection for,

to Matt. XX. 12 ; Luke vi. 34 ; John v.
to love earnestly, i Thess. ii. 8. (W. H., 18 ; Acts xi. 17 ; Rev. xxi. 16 alike, ;

6/xeipofxai.. )* consistent, as truthful witnesses, Mark

I'va,conj., t)iat, to t/ie end that ; Xva fxri, xiv. 56, 59 iaa, adverbially, on an
;

that not, lest. See § 384. equality, Phil. ii. 6 tews, adv., per- ;

ivari ; orivari ; (W. H.,) conj., in order ha2)s, Luke xx. 13.*
that what (may happen ? sc. yev-qrat.), to l<rdTT]s, TTjTos, T), eqiLality, 2 Cor. viii.
what endi 14 ; equity. Col. iv. I.*
'liJiriTT), 175, 17, Joppa.. lo-d-Tipios, ov, 2)rizcd equally, of like value,
*Iop8dvT)s, ov, 6, the Jordan. 2 Pet. i. I.*
I'os, 01/, 6, {i) poison, Rom. iii. 13 ; James like-minded, Phil. ii. 20.*
lo-d-vjruYos, ov,
iii. 8 ; (2) rust, James v. 3.* 'I(rpai]X, (Heb.), Israel, met, for the
6
'louSaic, as, i] (really adj., fem., sc. 77)), whole nation of the Lsraelites.
Juild'd,, 'Itrpa-qXiTTis, ov, b, an Israelite. Syn. 50..
conform to Jeivish 2'>'>'acticc,
*Iov8at^a), to ttTTt. See oWa.
to "Judaise," in life or ritual. Gal. to-THjit (in Rom. iii. 31, Rec. has IffTdu),
ii. i^L* W. H. 1<tt6.vu), § 107), trau.s. in pres.^

G G
 450 VOCABULARY. [lO-Toplw — KaQ-C^TjS

imperf., fiit., 1st aor. ; to cause to tors of Jesus, Luke iii. 24^ 26 (W. H.,
stand, to set up, to jiJace, to fix a time, 'Iwfl-Tjx), 30 ; (5) Clary's husband (6) ;

to confirm^ to establish, to put in tJie Joseph of Arimatha?a ; (7) Joseph,

balance, to weigh; iutraus. in perf,, called also Barsabas, Acts i. 23. See
plup. and 2nd aor. to stand, to stand
, , also under 'Iw(T^s.
still or firm, to eiulure, to be confirmed 'I«<rCas, 01', 6, Josiah, ^latt. i. 10, ll.*
or established, to come to a stand, to Iwra, TO, iota, yod, the smallest letter of
cease. the HebreAv alphabet, Matt. v. 18.*
lo-Topeo), cD, to know, ascertain by examina-
tion, Gal. i. 1 8.*
Icrxvpos, a, 6v, strong, migldy, powerful, K.
vehement.
icrxvs, vos, rj, strength, might, p)ower, K, K, Kd-mra, kappa, k, the tenth letter.
ability. As a numeral, /c' == 20 20,000. ; k=
l<rxvw, vaw, to be strong, sound, whole, Kd^w {KafjLoi, Kafie), contr. for /cat e7w
to prevail, to be able (inf.), to liave {koL efioi, Kdi e/x^), and I, I also, even I.
ability for (ace. ). KaOd, adv., contr. from Kad' a, according
'IraXCa, aj, Italy. as, ]\Iatt. xxvii. 10.*
'IraXiKos, 77, bv, Italian, Acts x. i.* Ka6-aip€(ris, ews, r/, demolition, destruction
'Irovpaia, as, rj, Iturea, Luke iii. i.* (opp. to oLKodofjLr), which see), 2 Cor. x.
I\0v8iov, ov, TO (dim. of Ixdvs), a, little 4, 8, xiii. 10.*
fish. Matt. XV. 34 ]\Iark viii. 7.* ; Ka6-aLp€a>, KadeXQ, KadelXov, (l) to take
i\0vs, i/os, 6,a fish. down or away. Acts xiii. 29 (2) ;

I'Xvos, ovs, TO, a footstep, fig. , Rom. iv. demolish, d.estroy, lit., Luke xii. 18,
12 ; 2 Cor. xii. 18 ; i Pet. ii. 21.* or fig. 2 Cor. X. 5.
,

'ItodGajx, 6 (Heb. ),Jotham, ^Matt. i. 9.* KaO-aCpo), apC}, to cleanse, to clear by

'Iwdvva, Tjs, T}, Joanna, Luke viii. 3, pruning, John xv. 2 ; Heb. x. 2. (AV.
xxiv. 10.* H., Kadapi^o).)*
'Iwavvds, a, 6, Joannas, Luke iii. 27. * KaG-dircp, adv., even a<}, truly as.
'IwdvvTis, ov, 6, John, (i) the Baptist ;
KaG-dirro), cti/'w, to fasten upon, intrans.,
(2) the Apostle ; (3) a member of the Acts xxviii. 3 (gen.).*
Sanhedrin, Acts iv. 6 ; (4) John Mark, Kadapi^a), att. fut. Kadapiu), to cleanse,
Acts xii. 12. e.g., a leper, by healing his disease,
*IwP, 6 (Heb.), Job, the patriarch, James ]\latt. viii. 2,
3 from moral pollution,
;

V. II.* Heb. ix. 22, 23 to declare clean, i.e.,

;

'IwVjX, 6 (Heb.), Joel, the prophet, Acts from ceremonial pollution. Acts x. 15.
ii.i6.* KaOapio-fios, ov, 6, cleansing, physical,
*I«vdv, 6 (Heb.), Jonan, Luke iii. 30.* moral, or ceremonial, ^lark i. 44
'Iwvds, a, 6, Jonas, or Jowi.li, (i) the Luke ii. 22, v. 14 ; John ii. 6, iii. 25 ;

prophet, Matt. xii. 39-41 (2) the father ;

Heb. i. 3 ; 2 Pet. i. 9.*
of Peter, John i. 42. KaOapos, d. Of, clean, pure, physically,
*I(opd|x, 6 (Heb.), Joram, or Jehoram, son morally, or ceremonially.
of Jehoslia]>hat, Matt. i. 8. Ka9ap6TT]s, t)to^, t), jmrity, i.e., cere-
'IcripcCfi, (Heb.) Jorim, Luke iii. 29.*
6 monial, Heb. ix. 13.*
'I«(ra<|>dT, 6 (Heb.), Jehoshaphat, Matt, Ka0-c8pa, as, 17, a seat, lit., Matt.xxi. 12 ;

i. 8.* i^Iarkxi. 15 met., a c/irr/?' of authority,

;

*Io)o-fis, ri (or -iiTo^, "\V. H.), loses. Matt, xxiii. 2.*

Four are mentioned (i) Luke iii. 29 : Kadf^o^ai, to sit doirn ; eu or Itti, dat.
(W. H., 'It/o-oO) (2) Mark vi. 3 Matt, ; ; Ka9-€is, adv. (see § 300, ^, 4), one by one.
xiii. 55 (W. H., '1^0-770) (3) Matt, : (W. H., Kad' eh.)
xxvii. 56 (W. H. marg. ), INLarkxv. 40, Ka6-€^fis, adv. (.see § 126, d), in orderly
47 (4) Acts iv. 36 (W. H., '1^0-770).
;
succession), Luke i. 3 ; Acts xi. 4, xviii.
Some think (2) and (3) identical. 23. With art., Luke viii. i, iv t<^ k.,
6 (Heb.), Joseph, (i) tlie patri-
'Iw(rT|c|>, soon afterwards; Acts iii. 24, ol k.,
arch. (2, 3, 4) three among the ances- those that come after *
 ;

lcad-cv8ci) — KaKooiJ VOCABtJLARY. 451

Ka9-€v8a>, to sleep, to be asleep; fig., season, opportunity; time that is in

I Thess. V. 6. any way limited or defined. Syn. 64.
a leader, teacher, vias-
Ka0T]YiTnrjs, ov, 6, Kaicap, apos, 6, Coisar, a title assumed
tcr,Matt, xxiii. 8 (not W. H.), lo.* by Roman emperors, after the dictator
Ka9-T|Kw, used only impers., it is fit, it is Julius Cpesar, as Luke ii. i, xx. 22;
bceomiiuj (ace, inf.). Acts xxii. 22 to ; Acts xi. 28 ; Phil. iv. 22.
KadrjKov, the becoming, duty, Rom. i. Kaio-apcfo, as, t?, Casarea. Two cities
^28.* of Palestine, one in Galilee {Caisarea.
Kd6-T]pLai, 2 p. Kadr} for Kld-qaai, iniper., Fhilippi), Matt. xvi. 13 the other ;

Kadov (see § 367), to he seated, to sit on the coast of the MediteiTanean,

dmni, to sit, to be settled, to abide; with Acts viii. 40.
els, ev, eiri (gen., dat., ace). Ka£-Toi, conj., nevertheless, though in-
Ka6-T]ficpivds, 77, 6v, daily. Acts vi. i.* deed ; so Kairoiye.
KaOi^w. law, (i) trans., to cause to sit Kaib) (a/), pf. ,
pass., KeKavixai, to burn,
down, to set ; (2) intrans., to seat o)ie- to Tcindlc to be on fire;
; pass., fig.,

self, preps, as Kci6r)/j.ai. ; to sit doioi, Luke xxiv. 32.

to be sitting, to tarry ; mid. in Matt. KaKci (/cat txet), and. there.
xix. 28 ; Lukexxii. 30. KaKctOev {koL eKcWev), and thence, ami
Ka6-iT]}jLi, (comp.§112),
1st aor. KadrjKa from that.
to send or Ut down, Luke v. 19 Acts ; KdKEivos, 77, (/vat e/cetj'oj), and he. she,
ix. 25, X. II, xi. 5.* if.

Ka0-ioTT]fii(and KadiaTaco or -avo)), to KaKia, as, ij, of character,

badness, (i)
appoint, constitute, make, ordain, to icicl-edness, Acts
(2) of dis- viii. 22 ;

conduct. Acts xvii. 15 to ap2wint as ; position, malice, ill-v:ill, i Cor. v. 8 ;

ruler o\QV {iiri, gen., dat., ace), (3) of condition, afilietion, evil, ^latt.
Ka9-o, adv. (for Kad' 0), as, according as, vi. 34.
Rom. viii. 26 ; 2 Cor. viii. 12 ; i Pet. KaK0-r|9€ta, as, ij, imdevolencc, Rom.
iv. 13.* i. 29.*
KadoXiKos. ri, 6v, general, \iniversal, KaKO-Xo-ycb), to, to revile, to speak evil of
" catholic " (found in the inscriptions (ace), Matt. xv. 4; Mark vii. 10,
of seven Epistles, but omitted bv ix. 39 ; Acts xix. 9.*
AV. H.)* KaKO-irdOcia, as, t), a suffering of evil,
Ka9-6Xov, adv., entirely: KadoXov fxri, James v. 10.*
Acts iv. 18, not at all* KaKo-iraOew, w, to suffer evil, to endure
KaO-oirXio-w, to arm fully, pass., Luke affiietion, 2 Tim. ii. 3 (AV. H., cvvKaK-),
xi. 21.* 9, iv. 5 James v. 13.*
;

Ka6-opd(i>, u>, to see clearly, pass., Rom. KaKo-iroieo), w, abs., to do injury, ^lark
i. 20.* iii. 4 ; Luke vi. 9 ; to do evil, i Pet.
KaO-oTi, adv., as, according as^ Acts ii. iii. 17:3 John 11.*

45> i^'- 35 ; because that, for, Luke i. 7, KaKo-TToios, 6v, as subst. , an evildoer,
xix. 9 Acts ii. 24, xvii. 31
; (W. H.).* malefactor, John
i Pet. xviii. 30 ;

KaO-ws, adv., according as, even as, as. ii, 12, 14, 15.*iii. 16, iv.
KaCf conj., and, also, even. For the KaKos, 17, ov, evil, wicked, malignant;
various uses of this conjunction, see TO KaKov, wickedness, ^latt. xxvii. 23 ;
i:}
403. also calamity, affliction. Syn. 22.
Kaid4>as, a, 6, CaiapJuis. Adv., -ws, wickedly; KaKws fX^"'? ^^
Katv, 6 (Heb. ), Cain. be or in trouble.
ill,
Ka'ivdv, 6 (Heb.), Cainav. Two are KaK-ovp-yos, ov, as sul)st. a.i evil-worker, ,

mentioned, Luke iii. 36, ;^y.* nuihfactor, Luke xxiii. 32, 33, 39
Katvos, 7], ov, new. Syn. 26. 2 Tim. ii. 9.*
KaivoTT]s, 17x05, 7), newness, renovation KaK-ovxco), u>, only in pass., part,, treated
(moral and spiritual), Rom. vi. 4, ill, harassed, Heb. xi. 37, xiii. 3.*

\ii. 6.* KaKoo), uj, wau, to ill-treat. Acts viL 6,

Ka£-ir€p, conj., although. 19, xii. I, xviii. 10 i Pet. iii. 13 ;
',

Kaip6s, ov, 6, th' fit or critical time, to c^fMspcrate, Acts xiv. 2.*
452 Vocabulary. [KaKwiri^ - -KaTa-^aXXci

KciKwo-is, fw?, T], evil condition, affliction, KavSaKT], 77J, 7), Candacc, Acts viii. 27.*
ill-treatment, Acts vii. 34.* Kavwv, ovot, 6, prep., a measuring rod;
KoXufiT], 7;s, 17, stnhhle, I Cor. iii. 12.* hence, (i) a rnle of conduct, "canon,"
KuXa^jLos, as (i) a reed,
01', 6, a stalk, Gal. vi. 16; Phil, iii, 16; (2, a, limit
growing, ^latt. xi. 7 (2) a reed, as ; or sphrre of duty, 2iroviiKe (RV. ), 2
a mock sceptre, Matt, xxvii. 29 (3) ;
Cor. X. 13, 15, 16.*
a 2)en, 3 John 13 ; (4) a wcasuriiig- Kaircp-vaovji, or Ka<pap^aoi'fi (W. H. ),
rod, Rev. xxi. 15. 7) (Heb.), Capernaum.

K(iX€(i>, C), eaui, K^KX'qKa, to call ; hence, KaTTi^Xtuttf, to be a 2><iiiy trader : hence
(i) tosiimmon. Luke xix. 13 ; (2) to (^\ith ace), to make merchandise of
iiame. Matt. i. 21, x. 25 ; (3) to (R. V. marg. ), or ^exhdi^s adulterate,
invite, John ii. 2 ; (4) to apjwint, or corruj)t,2 Cor. iL 17.*
select, for an office, Heb. v. 4 ; (5) Kairvds, ov, 6, a smoke, a va^wur.
pass., to be called, or accounted, i.e., KairiraSoKCa, as, 17, Cappadocia, Acts ii.
]Matt. v. 9, 19 James ii. 23. *
to be, ; 9 ;I Pet. i. I .

KaXXi-€\aios, ov, i], a good olive tree, KapSia, as, 'h, the Jieart, met., as the seat
*
Rom. xi. 24. of the alfections, but chiefly of the
KaXXftov (compar. of /caXos), better; adv., understanding. Syn. 55. Fig., tJie
KoXKiov, Acts XXV. 10.* Jieart or bowels of the earth, ^latt xii
KaXo-8i8d<rKaXos, ov, 6, i], a teaclier of 40.
what is good. Tit. ii. 3.* Kap8io-'Yvw<rT'r]s, ov, 0, one who knows
KaXol Ai|X€'vcs, Fair Havens, a place of tlic heart. Acts i. 24, xv. 8.*
good harbourage in the island of Crete, Kapirds, ov, 6, fruit, produce, Luke xii.
Acts xxvii. 8. 17 met., for children.. Acts ii. 30
; ;

KaXo-iroi€w, Q, to act well or honourably, deeds, conduct, the fruit of the hands.
*
2 Thess. iii. 1 3. Matt. iii. 8 : effect, result, onolument,
KaXds, 7), 6v, fair ; hence, (i) physically Rom. vi. 21. Praise is called the fruit
beautiful, r/oofZZ?/; (2) morally beautiful, of the lips, Heb. xiii. 1 5.

good, Jwnourable, nobles (3) ejxellent, Kdpiros, Caipns, 2 Tim. iv. 13.*
01', 6,

advantageous : adv., -wj, well, fairly. KapiTo-<|>op'ia), w, Tjcru}, to bring forth fruit,
KdXf|jLua, aros, tj, a covering, veil, 2 Cor. j\Lark iv. 28; mid., to bear fruit to
iii. 13-16.* oneself, to increase, Col. i. 6.
KaXiiirTw, i/zw, to cover, veil. Kap7ro-({>dpos, op, bringing forth fruit,
Ka^e. See Kaydj. fruitful. Acts xiv. 17.*
Kd}iT]Xos, ov, 6, i], a caniel. Kaprepeo), cD, yjatj), to be strong, to endure,
KCLjiivos, 01;, 7;, a furnace. Matt. xiii. 42, Heb. xi. 27.*
50 ; Rev. i. 15, ix. 2.* Kdp(|>os, oi'j, TO, a mote, a splinter, IMatt.
Ka|Ji-}xv(o (/card ami fxvu), to shut, close the vii. 3, 4, 5 42.*
; Luke vi. 41,
*
eyes. Matt. xiii. 15 Acts xxviii. 27.
; Kard, prep., gov. the gen. and accun.
Kdp.vw, KajxQ}, pf. KeKfirjKa, to be weary, cases, down; hence, gen., down from,
faint, to be sick, Htib. xii. 3 Janres ; against, etc. ace. according to, against,
; ,

V. 15; Rev. ii. 3 (\V. H. omit).* etc. (see §§ 124, 147, a). In compo-
KapioC. See KayJo. sition, KOLTd may impo t descent, sub-
KdjiTTTft), xj/o}, to bend, the knee, Rom. jection, opposition, and distribution,
xi. 4, xiv. II Eph. iii. 14: Phil, ; with certain verbs (as of destruction,
ii. 10.* diminution, and the like) is intensive
K&v {koI €&v), and if, Luke xiii. 9 even; = " utterly."
if, though. Matt. xxvi. 35 ; if even, Kara-Pa^vo), ^riao/xai, p^^rjKa, 2nd aor.
Heb. xii. 20; elliptically, if only, Mark KarelSrju, to go or come down, descend,
V. 28 Acts ; V. 15. used of persons and of things, as gifts
Kavd, i] (Heb.), Cana. from heaven, of the clouds, storms,
Kavav£TT]s, ov, 6, a Canaanite (from the lightnings also of anything that falls,
;

Hebrew, meaning the same as Zelotes), Luke xxii. 44 Rev. xvi. 21. ;

Matt. X. 4; Mark iii. 18.* (AV. H. Kara-pdXXo), istaor., pass., Kare^Xi^drjv,

read Kafaj/atos ; Cananaean, R. V. to cast down. Rev. xii. 10 ("W. H.,
KaTa-^ap^o) — Kara-XoXla] VOCABULARY. 453

/SdXXw), mid., to lay, as a foundation, KaT-ai<rxvv«, to put to shame, as i Cor.

Heb. vi. I.* i. 27 ; to dishonour, i Cor. xi. 4, 5 ;

KaTa-Papccu, w, to weigh down, to ojij^ress, to shame, as with disappointed expecta-

2 Cor. xii. 1 6.* tion, I Pet. ii. 6 pass., tobc asJuxvied,
;

KaTa-^apvva), oppress, Mark xiv. 40 as Luke xiii. 17.

(W. H.I.* Kara-Kaib) {af), avau), to burn up, to

KaTa-Pacis, ews, i], descent, declivity, consume entirely, as Matt. iii. 12 ;

Luke xix. 37.* Heb. xiii. ii.

KaTa-ptpdtw, ^0 ^/-/^c; </o?r/«, cast down, KaTa-KaXvirro), in mid., to wear a veil,
ilatt. xi. 23 (W. H., Kara^aivu}), 1 Cor. xi. 6, 7.*

Luke X. 15 (Ree., W. H. niarg. ).* KaTa-Kav\dop.ai, Qfiai, to gloi'y, to rejoice

Kara-PoXT), ijs, 7/, a founding, laying the against, to glory over (gen.), Rom. xi.
foundation of, Matt. xiii. 35 Heb. xi. ; 18 James ii. 13, iii. 14.*
;

II. Kard'Kcifiai, to lie down, as the sick, ^lark

KaTa-ppa^ciiw, to give judgment against i. 30 to recline at ta])le, ^lark xiv. 3.
;

as umpire of the games, to deprive of Kara-KXdw, cD, to break in pieces, Mark

*
due reward, Cal. ii. iS. vi. 41 Luke ix. 16.*
;

KaT-ayYcXcus, ews, 6, a proclaimer, a Kara-KXtio), to shut u]^, confine, Luke

herald. Acts xvii. 18.* iii. 20 Acts xxvi. 10.*
:

KaT-ayyt'XXft), to declare openly, to pru- Kara-KX-ripo-SoTta), w, to give by lot, to

chiim, to p reach. Syn. 15. distribute an inheritance by lot. Acts
Kara-YeXdw, a), to laugh at, dende, gen., xiii. 19. (W. H. read the following. )*
^latt. ix. 24 ; ^lark v. 40 Luke viii. ; KaTa-KX"r]po-vo|i€'a), to assign by lot, Acts
*
c-> xiii. 19 i^W. H.).*
Kara-'ytvwcrKUJ, to condonn, blame, gen. Kara-KX^vo), vC), to cause to recline at
of pers., Gal. ii. 11 ; i John iii. 20, table, j/mke sit doivn, Luke ix. 14, 15
21.* (W. H.) mid., to recline at table,
;

KaT-d-yvvjii, fut. Arared^ci;, to break down, Luke vii. 36 (W. H.), xiv. 8, xxiv.
to break in pieces, Matt. xii. 20 John ; 30.*
xix. 3I-33-* Kara-icXv^w, aoj, to inundate, deluge,
KaT-d-yo), to bring do^vn, as Acts ix. 30 ; l)ass., 2 Tet. iii. 6.*
Rom. X. 6 as a naval term, to bring
; KaTa-KXv<rp.ds, ov, 6, a deluge, flood,
to land, Luke v. 1 1 ; pass. to conu to , ^lart. xxiv. 2^, 39 ; Luke xvii. 27 ;

la ml, Acts xxi. 3, xxvii. 3. 2 Pet. ii. 5.*

KaT-a7wvito|xai, dep., to conteiid against, Kar-aKoXovGcO), iD, ^0 follow closely (abs.
subdue (ace.), Heb. xi. 33.* or dat.\ Luke xxiii. 55 Acts xvi. 17.* ;

Kara-Sc'd), w, to biiul up, as wounds, Luke KaTa-KoiTTfa), ypu}, to wound, Mark v. 5.*
X.34.* KaTa-KpT]p.vi^«, cruj, to cast down head-
Kard-SiiXos, ov, quite evident, Heb. vii. long. Luke iv. 29.*
KaTa-Kpifxa, aros, tj, condemnation, Ro::i.
Kara-SiKato)) to condemn, to pronounce V, 16, 18 viii. i.*
;

sentence against, ^latt. xii. 7, 37 Luke ; Kaxa-Kpiva), vCj, to give judgment against,
vi. 37 ; James v. 6." to adjudge worthy of punishment {gen.
Kara-BiKT], 77s, i], condemnation, Acts xxv. aud dat. ), to condemn, as Matt. xx.
15 (W. H.).* 18 Rom. ii. i, viii. 3.
;

KaTa-SiwKO), to follow closely, to pfursue Kard-Kpio-is, ews, i), t/ie act of condemna-
intcathi, .Mark i. 36.* tion, 2 Cor. iii. 9, vii. 3.*
Kara-SouXoa), tD, wauj, to bring into slavery, Kara-Kvpicvb), to exercise authority ovcr^
2 Cor. xi. 20 Gal. ii. 4.* ; as ^latt. XX. 25 ; to get the mastery of,
KaTa-8vva(rT€wa), to exercise power over, Acts xix. 16 (gen.).
to oppress. Acts x. 38 James ii. 6.* ; Kara-XaXcw, w, speak against (gen.),
to
Kard-Ocfxa, W. H. for KaTavdde/xa, Rev. Jauies iv. ii Pet. ii. 12, iii. 16.*
; I

XX ii. 3.* Kara-XaXia, as. fem., evil-speaking, oblo-

Kara-Q€\iarCl(>>, "W. H. for Karava-, Matt. quy, reproach, 2 Cor. xii. 20. i Pet.
xxvi. 74.* ii. I.*
454 VOCABULARY. [Kara-XoXos Kar-apy(a

Kard-XoXos, ov, 6, ij, a calumniator, Kara-vcvb), to nod, to make signs to, dat.,
detractor, Rom. i. 30.* Luke V. 7. *
Kara-Xajipdvo), \ri\pofxai, to seize or lay Kara voioi, Q, (i) to observe carefully,
hold of, as Mark ix. 18 ; to grasp, as remark, consider ; (2) to Jmve respect to,
the prize in public games, Phil. iii. 12, to regard (acc).

IS', to overtake, i Thess. v. 4 mid., ; KaT-avrdo), a), to come to, to arrive at, to
to compreluiicl, i.e., to hold, with the attain to, with els, as Acts xvi. i Phil. ;

mind ; to j^crceive, to ajq^rchciid, on, iii. II once with dj/TiK-pi;, Acts xx. 15.
;

or ace. and inf., Eph. iii. 18. KaTd-vv|ts, ecjs, 17, stupor, deep sleep,
KaTa-Xt'-yw, to reckon among, pass., i Tim. Rom. xi. 8.*
V. 9.* Kara-vva-cra), ^w, 2nd aor., pass., KaTe-
KaTd-X€ip.[j.a, aros, to, a remnant, a resi- vvy7)v, toprick through, to )nove greatly,
* *
due, Rom. ix. 27 (W. H., vTr6\i/j.iJ.a) pass. Acts ii. 37.
,

Kara-XiliTbi, xj/u, to leave utterly, to depart KaT-a|i6a), w, uxrw, to count worthy of

from, to forsake, to leave remaining, (gen.), pass., Luke xx. 35, xxi. 36;
to reserve, Rom. xi. 4. Acts V. 41 ; 2 Thess. i. 5.*

Kara-XiOd^fa), au), to stone, to destroy by KaTa-iraTc'ft),

cD, to trample on, to tread
stoning, Luke xx. 6.* underfoot (ace), as Luke viii. 5.
KaT-oXXayri, 77s, t), reconciliation, Rom. Kard-iravo-ts, ews, t], rest, place of rest,
V. II, xi. 15 ; 2 Cor. v. 18, 19.* Acts vii. 49 ; Heb. iii. ii, 18, iv. i, 3,
KaT-aXXd<r<r<i), ^w, to reconcile (ace. and 5, 10, II.*
dat.), Rom. 10 i Cor. v. ; vii. 11 ;
Kara-Travw, (i) trans., hold back, re- to
2 Cor. V. 18, 19, 20.* strain, ace. (also too and inf ), Acts /ultj,

Kard-Xonros, ov, })lur. tltc rest, , the resi- xiv. 18 ; to give rest, to cause to rest,
due, Acts XV. 17.* Heb. iv. 8 ; (2) intrans., to rest from,
KaTd-Xv|i,a, aros, to, a lodging-place, an diro, Heb. iv. 4, 10.*
inn, Luke ii. 7 ; a gucst-ch'imber, Mark KaTa-TTCTao-iJta [-ireTavvviuii), aros, to, a
xiv. 14 Luke ; xxii. 11.* veil or curtain, as Luke xxiii. 45.
Kara-Xvu), ucw, to loosen doivn, (i) lit., of Kara-mvci), 2nd aor., KaTeiriov ; ist aor.,
a building, to destroy, ]\Iark xiv. 58 ; ])ass. , KaTeTTudrjv ; to drink up, sicallow^
(2) fig., of law or command, to render ]\Iatt. xxiii. 24 ; fig. to overwhelm, de-
void. Matt. v. 17 (3) met., of beasts ;
stroy, I Cor. XV. 54 ; 2 Cor. ii. 7, v. 4 ;

of burden, to unbind ; hence, to halt, to Hcl). xi. 29 I Pet. v. 4 ; ; Rev. xii.

lodge, Luke ix. 12, xix. 7. 16.*^
KaTa-|Jiav6dv(o, 2n<l aor. KUTi/jLadov, to KaTa-iriirTft), 2nd aor. KaT^ireaov, to fall
consider, to note accurately, Matt. vi. doivn, Luke viii. 6 ("W. H.) ; Acts
28.* xxvi. 14, xxviii. 6.*
KaTa-}i.apTvpca),cD,<o bear testimony against KaTa-irXc'ft) (e/"), eixrofiai, 1st aor. /car^-
(ace. of thing, gen. of pers.). Matt, wXevaa, to sail to, Luke viii. 26.*
xxvi. 62, xxvii. 13 ; Mark xiv. 60, Kara-irovcw, w, in jtass., to be ojyjn'cssedj
*
XV. 4(not W. H.).* distressed. Acts vii. 24 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7.
Kara-fievb), to remain, abide. Acts i. Kara-irovTil^ftj, mid. ov i)3iss., to sink downy
13-*, to be drowned. Matt. xiv. 30, xviii. 6.*
Kara-pidvas (W. H., KaTo. jxovas), adv., Kar-dpa, as, i], a curse, cursing. Gal. iii.
separately, by oneself, innvately, Mark 10, 13; Heb. vi. 8; 2 Pet. ii. 14;
iv. 10 Luke ix. 18.*
; James iii. 10.*
KaT-avd-6e|xa, aro^, to, curse, Rev. xxii. KaT-apdop.ai, w/xai, to imprecate, to devote
3. See KaTade/xa.* to destruction. Matt. v. 44 ("NV. H.
KaT-ava-0€p.aT(J^a), to curse, devote to de- omit) ; ]\Iark xi. 21 ; Luke vi. 28
struction, Matt. xxvi. 74. See /cara- Rom. xii. 14 ; James iii. 9 ;
pass.,
*
de/iiaTi^ci). ])erf part., accursed, ISIatt. xxv. 41.*
Kar-av-aXCa-Ku}, to consume, to devour, as KaT-ap-y^o), Q, -qaw, to render useless,
fire, lleb. xii. 29.* Luke xiii. 7 ; to bring to nought, make
Kara-vapKdfa), idly burden-
Co, rjao}, to be to ira/tr, abolish, as Rom. iii. 3, 31,
some to igcn.), 2 Cor. xi. 9, xii. 73, 14.* and fre(iuently in Paul ; to make to
KaT-api9|i^(i) — KaT-clovo-Ld^w] VOCABULARY. 455

ceasefrom, sever from. {cLTo^, Rom. vii. 2; KaTa-(r<j>pa'Yit(^) o'w, to close, to seal up,
*
Gal. V. 4. as a book, Rev. v. i .

KaT-api0(i€(i), cD, to number among, Acts KaTd-<r\€o-is, ecjs, 17, a p)ossession, Acts
i. 17.* vii.
5; 45-* ,

Kar-apTilb), tVw, to refit, to rej^air, ^latt. KaTa-Ti9T]|ii, drjacj, 1st aor. KaredrjKa,
iv. 21 ; to restore from error or sin, Gal. to deposit, as a body in a tomb, Mark
vi. I ; to perfect, to comjylete, 1 Tliess. XV. 46 (AV. H., TidTjfii) ; mid. Kara-
iii. 10;
Pet. V. 10;
I pass., to be Tideadai x°P'''> io gain favour -with
thoroughly united, i Cor. i. 10. (dat. ), Acts xxiv. 27, xxv. 9.*
KttT-apTicris, ews, 17, a iicrfccting, 2 Cor. KaTa-TOfiT|, Tjs, 7], paronomasia with
xiii. 9.* mutilation, Phil. iii. 2.*
TTfpiToixr],
Kar-aprio-fios, ou, 6, a 'perfedii\g,Yu^\\. iv. KaTa-To|€ii«, to transfb:, Heb. xii. 20
12.* (AV. H. omit).*
Kara-o-ciw, aw, to wave the hand, to IceTcon, KaTa-Tp€'x«, 2nd aor. Kare8pa/xov, to run
Actsxii. 17, xiii. 16, xix. ;^t„ xxi. 40.* down [eiri, ace), Acts xxi. 32.*
KaTa-o-Kdirra*, ;/'a>, to demolish by dig- KaTa-<|>dYW. See Kareadiu}.
ging under, to overthrow, to raze, Rom. KaTa-<^€'pa>, KaTolau}, 1st aor. KaTTjpeyKay
xi. 3; perf. part., pass., ruins. Acts pass. KaTTjvexQriv, to throw dovrn, as an
XV. 16.* adverse vote, Acts xxvi. 10, xxv. 7
Kara-o-Kcvd^to, dcro;, to prepare fully, to (W. H.) ; pass., to be borne down, to
build, to adjust, as Matt. xi. 10 Luke ; fdl. Acts XX. 9.*
i. 17 ; Heb. iii. 3, 4. 2nd aor. Karetpvyov, to flee
KaTa-<|)6V"Y<«'>
KaTa-(rKT]v6fc), w, ibau), to dwell, lodge, for refuge, with ei's. Acts xiv. 6 with ;

Matt. xiii. 32 ^laik iv. 32 ; Luke

; *inf., Heb. vi. 18.*
xiii. 19 Acts ii. 26.*
; KaTa-(|>d£ip(i), pass., perf., KaT€(p6apfxai ;

KaTa-<rKTJV(D(ris, eus, ij, a dwell ing-jdace, 2nd aor., Karecpddprjv, to corrupt utterly,
a haunt, as of birds. Matt. viii. 20 ;
2 Tim. iii. 8 to destroy, 2 Pet. ii. 12
;

Luke 58.*ix. {\\. H., (pOeipw.)*

Kara-o-Kidto)! crw, to overshadoiv, Heb. KaTa-<j>iX€(i), a), to kiss affectionately, or
ix. 5.* rejtcatcdly (ace. ), as I^latt. xxvi. 49 ;

KaTa-o-Koirc'o), tj, to inspect narroicly, to Luke XV. 20.

2)lot against. Gal. ii. 4.* KaTa-4>pove(o, w, to think lightly of,
Kara-o-Koiros, a scout, « spy, Heb. xi. iicghxt, dcs-jnse (gen.), as Matt. vi.
31.* 24.
KaTa-(ro<|>£to)iai, ao/xaL, to deal deceit- KaTa-<}>poviiTT|s, ov, 6, a dcsjyiser, a scoiiier,
fully with, Acts vii. 19.* xicts xiii. 41.*
KaTtt-OTtXXw, \w, 1st aor. KaTeareiXa, KaTa-x€« (ef), tmw, 1st aor. /car^x^'^j
to ajqieasc, restrain. Acts xix. 35, 36.* to pour down up)on. Matt. xxvi. 7 ;

Kara (rTT]|ia, oroj, t6, behaviour, con- Mark xiv. 3.*

duct, Tit. ii. 3.* Kara-x^ovios, ov, subterra7iean, Phil. iL
KaTa-oToXri, f/s, i], raiment, outer cloth- 10.*
ing, I Tim. ii. 9.* KaTa-xpdofiai, Q/xat, to use overmuch, to
Ka7a(rTp€'<|;w, iZ-w, to overthroic. Matt. abuae, Cor. vii. 31, ix. 18 (dat.).*
I

xxi. 12 ;Mark xi. 15.*

; KaTa-v|;vx«5 to cool, to refresh, Luke xvL
KaTa-crTpT]vi,da), u>, aaw, to grow wanton 24.*
against (gen.), I Tim. v. ii.* Kar-ciSwXos, ou. full of idols (R.V. ),
KaTa-crTpo<|)T|, t}?, tj, an overthroic, Acts xvii. 16.*
"catastrophe," 2 Tim. ii. 14; 2 Pet. with gen.,
Kar-e'vavTi, adv., or as prep,
ii. 6.* over againd, before, in presence or in
KaTa-<rTp«wv[i,i, arpiLao}, to strew doicn, sight of.
scatter, to overthrow, I Cor. x. 5.* KaT-€vwiriov, adv., in the very presence
Kara-o-vpu), to drag along, Luke xii.
(f (gen. ).
58.* KaT-e|ov(rid^ft), to exercise authority
KaTa-<r<})d?u), Iw, to slay, to sloAightcr, against or ovrr (gen. ), Matt. xx. 25;
Luke xix. 27.* Mark x. 42.*
456 VOCABULARY. fKaT-cp-yd^oixai —KcSpwv
Kar-cp-ydtofiai, dao/xai, with mid. and KaT-oiKT](ris, eus, t}, a divelling, habitation^
pass., aor. (augm. , el-), to work oitt, Mark V. 3.*
to do fully, Rom, iv. 15 ; Eph. vi. 13 ; KaT-oiKT]TTipiov, ov, TO, a dioelUng-placc,
to ivork, to practise. Eph. ii,Rev, xviii, 2.*
22 ;

Kar-fpyjoiiai, 2nd aor. KaTTJXdov, to de- Kar-OLK^a, as, i], a dwelling, a habitation,
scend, come doio 71 to. Acts xvii, 26.*
Kar-iorQCbi and -^ado} (^lark xii. 40, KaT-oiKttw, to niake to divell, James iv. 5
W, H. ), fut. Kara^dyofJiaL (John ii. 17, (W, H.).*
H. ) 2nd aor. Karecpayov, to eat up,
"VV. ; KaT-oirrpi^fa), mid., to behold, as in a
devour entirely, lit. or fig. Matt. xiii.
to , mirror, 2 Cor. iii. 18.*
4 John ii. 17; Gal. v. 1 5.
; KaT-op9<»)|Jia, aros, t'j, an honournhlc act
KaT-€v9vv«, vQ), to direct ivell, to guide well performed, Acts xxiv. 3 (W. H.,
successfully, Lnke i.
79 ; i Thess. iii, SijpdojiuLa).*
II 2 Thess. iii. 5.*
; KCLTw, adv., dowmvards, down, ^latt. iv.
KaT-€vXoY€a), to bless much, Mark x. 16 6 beneath, ^Mark xiv. 66
; ; with re-
(W. H.). lation to age, comparat, , KarwripLo,
KaT-€<J)-C<rTT)|ii, 2nd aor. Kare-rrecrTrju, to under, jMatt, ii. 16,
rise up
against, Acts xviii. 12.* KaTwrepos, a, ov {Kdru}), lower, Eph, iv.
KaT-ex.Wj /caTacrx7?o-w, to seize on, to hold 9 (on which see § 259).*
fast, to retain, possess, to prevent from Kavfia, aros, rb (Kaiu}), Jieat, scorching
doing a thing {rod fM-rj, with inf.), to Juxit, burning. Rev. vii. 16, xvi. 9,*
repress, Rom. i. 18 ; rb Karexov, the Kav|xaTt^(o, <TU}, to scorch, burn, torture by
hindrance, 2 Thess. ii. 6, 7 ; Kareixov fire, j\[att, xiii. 6 ; Mark iv. 6 ; Rev.
eh rbv alytaXov, they held for the shore. xvi. 8, 9.*
Acts xxvii. 40. Kavo-ts, e(vs, rj, a burning, burning up,
"*"

KOT-t^-yopcw, Q, speak rjau}, to accuse, to Heb. vi. S.

against, abs., or with person in gen. ;
Kavo-d(o, cD, to burn with intense heat,
charge in gen. alone or after irepi or pass., 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12.*
Kara; pass., to he accused; with viro Kavirwv, (i}vos, 6, scorching heat ; perhaps
or Trapd, of the accuser. a hot wind from the E., Matt, xx. 12 ;

Kar-Ti-yopia, as, accusation, a charge,

i], an Luke xii. 55 ; James i. 11 (see Hos.
pers. in gen. alone, or after /card; xii. I, etc.).*
charge also in gen. Ka-uTTipid^d), to brand or sear, as with a
Kar-irj-yopos, 01^, 6, an accuser. hot iron ; fig,, pass., i Tim, iv. 2.*
KttT-TiYwp, 6, an accuser, Rev. xii. 10 Kavxdop.ai, w/xai, 2nd Kavxa<TaL, pers.
(W. H.). fut. rjao/xaL, to glory, to boa^t, to exult,
KaTi^<j>£ta, as, t}, dejection, sorroiv, James both in a good sense and in a bad, i
iv, 9.* Cor. i.. 29 ; Eph. ii. 9 ; followed with
Karpxectf, w, Tjaw, perf., pass., KaT-qxnfJ-o-L prep. , iv, irepl, gen. ; virip, gen. ; iiri,
(^Xos), to instruct orally, to teach, dat.
" catechise ;
" Luke i, 4 Acts xviii. ; KavxT]na, aros, rb, glorying, boasting
25, xxi. 21, 24; Rom. ii. 18; i Cor. met., the object ov ground of boasting,
xiv. 19 ; Gal. vi. 6.* Syn. 14. as Rom, iv, 2,
Kar i8(av, separately, privately, by one- Kttvx.'HO'ts, ews, T], the act of boasting,
self (see t'Stos). glorying.
Kar-ioo), Q (ibs), to consu7ne by rust, Ka<f>apvaov|i (see KairepvaoTufi), Caper-
James v. 3.* naum.
KaT-t(rx.v<i>, to prevail, prevail against Kc-yxpcaC, Cjv, at, Ctnchrem, the port of
(gen.), Matt. xvi. 18; Luke xxi. 36 Corinth, Acts xviii, 18 Rom. xvi, i,* ;

(W. H. ), xxiii. 23.* Kc'Spos, 01', r], a cedar, John xviii. i (not
Kar-oiKccD, tD, (i) intrans., to divell, with W. H.) ;
probably a mistaken reading
*
ev, els (const, prreg. ), eTri, gen. or for following.
adverbs of place; (2) trans., to divell KeSpwv, 6(Heb.,^ar^- or turbid), Cedron,
in, to inhabit, ace. ; fig,, of equalities or a turbid brook between the Mount of
attributes, to abide. Olives and Jerusalem, John xviii, i,*
 ,

KEifiai —KiXiKia] VOCABULARY. 457

KCbp.ai, crai, rat ; impf. , eKdfJirjv, ao, to ;

by trading. Matt. xxv. 16 (W. H.)-22;
io lie, to recline, to be laid, Luke xxiii. to get gain; James iv. 13 to gain, win, ;

53 ; I John v. 19 ; met., to he given, Phil. iii. 8 ; to gain over to a cause,

as laws, I Tim. i. 9. I Cor. ix. 19-22.

KCLpfa, ay, 7}, a hand or a roller of linen, KcpScs, ovs, TO, gain, profit, Phil. i. 21,
John xi. 44.* iii. 7 ; Tit. i. 11.*
K6ip(i>, KepQ), toshear, as sheep, Acts viii. t6 (Keipw), a small j^icce of
K€p[jLa, aros,

32 mid., to shave the head, Acts xviii.

; raoncy, John ii. 15.*
18 I Cor. xi. 6.*
; K€p}i.aTi<rTT|s, ov, 6, a money -clianger,
K€Xcv(r|jLa, arosy to, a shout, a crying out, John ii. 14.*
I Thess. iv. 16.* K£c|>dXaiov, aiov, to, a sum of money.
KcXcuo), (Tw, to command, to hid. Acts xxii. 28 the stem of an argument,;

K€vo-8o^ia, as, 17, vaingloi^y, inordinate Heb. viii. I (see R.V. and marg. ).*
desire for 2)raise, Phil. ii. 3.* K€(|}aXaio<i), Co, doaoj, to smite on the Jiead,
K€vo-8o|os, ov, vainglorious, Gal. v. 26.* Maik xii. 4.*
Kevds, Tj, bv, empty : hence, destitute, Mark K€<})aXT|, ^s, 7}, the head, of human beings
xii, ^ifniitless, Acts iv. 25 fallacious, ; or animals ; for the whole jjerson, Acts
Eph. V. 6 foolish, James ii. 20 ; adv.
;
xviii. 6 the siimmit, or co2)estone, of a
;

-u>s, ill vain, to no purpose, only James building, Luke xx. 17 ; met., implying
iv. Syn. 29.
5. authority, head, lord, i Cor. xi. 3 ;
17, empty disp^iting, useless
K€vo-<|>a)via, a?, Eph. i. 22 ; Col. i. 18.
hahhling, I Tim. vi. 20 2 Tim. ii. 16.* ; KC(t>aXis, i5os, 7], the top of anything, the
K€v6cD, w, wcrw, ^0 empty oneself, rfn-e^^ top or knob of the roll on which
oneself of rightful dignity, Phil. ii. 7 ; Hebrew manuscripts were rolled; hence,
<o 7«a^•c void, render useless, Rom. iv. the roll itself, Heb. x. 7.*
14 I Cor. 1. 17, ix. 15 ; 2 Cor. ix. 3.*
; K-qfJioo), to muzzle, i Cor. ix. 9 (AV. H.
K^vrpov, ov, t6, a goad, a spiTce, a sting, marg.).*
Acts ix. 5 ; I Cor, xv. 55, 56.* KT^vo-os, OV, 6, Latin (§ 154, d), a tax, a
KcvTupiwv, (j}vos, 6, Latin (see § 154, c), 2Joll-tax, Matt. xvii. 25, xxii. 17, 19 ;
a centurion, the commander of a hun- ^lark xii. 14.*
dred foot-soldiers. KfjiTos, ov, 6, a garden Luke xiii. 19 ;

Kipaia, aj, ij, a little horn (the small John xviii. i, 26, xix. 41.*
projecting stroke by which certain KT^TTovpoSfOv, 6, a gardener, John xx. 15.*
similar Hebrew lett*s are distin- KT]piov, 01', TO, a honeycomb, Luke xxiv.
guished, as 1 and n) ; met., the 42 (W. H. omit).*
minutest ^;ar^, Matt. v. 18 Luke ;
a 2iroclaiming, prreach-
KiqpvYjMi, aros, t6,
xvi. 17.* ing, as Matt. xii. 41 ; i Cor. i. 21 2 ;

Kcpafievs, €(js, 6, a 2^otter, Matt, xxvii. Tim. iv. 17. Syn. 15.
7, 10 ; Rom. ix. 21.* KTjpv^, vKos, 6, a herald, a 2>i'eacher, i Tim.
Kcpap-iKos, q, 6v, wade of potter s clay, ii. 7 2 Tim. i. 11
; 2" Pet. ii. 5.* ;

earthen. Rev. ii. 27.* KT]pvio-(rw, ^0}, (i) to proclaim, to pniblish,

Kcpdp-iov, lov, TO, an earthen vessel, a Mark vii. 36; (2) specially, to 2yreacfi the
pitcher, Mark xiv. 13 ; Luke xxii. 10.* Gospel, abs., or ace. and dat. Syn. 15.
K€pa|xos, OV, 6, a tile, of potter's clay, K-qros, ovs, TO, a large fish, a sea monster.
Luke V. 19.* Matt. xii. 40.*
Kepdvvv|jLi (see §§ 113, 114), to mix, to KT)<{>ds, a, 6 (Aramaic, a rock or stone\
prepare a draught. Rev. xiv. 10, xviii. Cc2ihas, i.e., Peter.
6.* KkPcoTos, ov, 7], a hollow vessel, an ark,
Kcpas, aros, to, a horn, as Rev. v. 6 ; of Xoah, or the ark of the covenant.
fig. , for strength, only Luke i. 69 a ; KiOdftt, as, 7), a Iw.rp, a lyre, "guitar."
projecting point, horn of the altar, only KiSapi^ft), to 2)^ay u2Jon a Jtarp or lyre,
Rev. ix. 13. I Cor. xiv.
7 ; Rev. xiv. 2.*
Kcpdriov, iov, to, a 2)od, a kind of sweet Ki6ap(u8os, ov, 6, a harper, lyrist, singer
broad bean, Luke xv. 16.* to the Juirp, Rev. xiv. 2, xviii. 22.*
KcpSatvo), avQ, ist aor. eKepdrjaa, to gain KiXkKia, as, 7], Cilicia.
458 VOCABULARY. [Kiva|i(«>|jLov — Ko8pdvrr]S

(W. H., Kivvd.),ov,

Kivdp.a)p.ov to, cinna- KX^|jii)S, evTos, 6, Clement, Phil. iv. 3.*
mon, Rev. xviii. 13.* KXT)povo}iea>, 0}, -qaw, to obtain bij inherit-

KivSvvevw, acj, to be in danger, Luke viii. ance, to inherit, Gal. iv. 30 ; to obtain,
23 Acts xix. 27, 40 ; i Cor. xv. 30.*
; generally.
kCvSvvos, 01', 6, danger, peril, Rom. viii. KXT]povo|i£a, as, 17, an inJieritance.
35 2 Cor. xi. 26.*
; kXt]pov6}ios, anheir, one who obtai)is an in-
Kiv€o>, w, move, to stir, IVfatt.
Tjau}, to heritance; applied to Christ, Heb. i. 2.
xxiii. 4 to shake the head in mockery, KX-i]pos, 01', 6, (i) a lot. Matt, xxvii.
;
35 ;
Matt, xxvii. 39 ]\Iark xv. 29 to rc-
; ; hence (2) that which is allotted, a por-
7nove, Rev. ii. 5, vi. 14 to excite, Acts ; tion. Acts viii. 21 ; an office, Acts i. 17,
xvii. 28, xxi. 30, xxiv, 5,* 25 ; plur., 2^crsons assigned to one's
KiVTi<rts, ews, motion, commotion, John
i), care, i Pet. v. 3.*
V. 3(W. H. omit).* kXt^poo), «, in mid., to obtain bg lot, Ei)h.
Kis (W. H., Ket's), 6 (Heb.), Kish, father i. II.*
of Saul, Acts xiii. 21.* KXf]<ris, eois, 7}, a calling, in N.T. alwaj^'s
kXoISos, 01', 6, a branch, as Matt. xiii. 32 ; of the Divine call, as Rom. xi. 29 ; Eph.
met., Rom. xi. 16-19. iv. 4.
KXaiio {af), avao), (i) abs. , to wail, to kXt]t<)s, 6v, verbal adj. (AcaXe'co), called,
lament, weej) for(e7rt dat. [W. H. ace.]), , invited, Matt. xxii. 14 ; of Christians,
Luke xix. 41 ; (2) trans., to iccep for the called, Rom. i. 6, 7, viii. 28 of the :

(ace), Matt. ii. 18. Syn. 20. apostolic vocation, Rom. i. i; i Cor. i. i.
kXoLo-is, cws, 17, a breaking, Luke xxiv. 35 ;
kXi^oIvos, ov, 6, an oven, a furnace. Matt,
*
Acts ii. 42.* vi. 30 ; Luke xii. 28.
KXacTfia, aros, to, a piece broken off, aj KXi|Jia, aros, to, a climate ; a, tract of
fragment, as IMatt. xiv. 20. country, a region, Rom. xv. 23 ; 2 Cor.
KXavSr], 7?s, T7, Clamla or Claude, a xi. 10 ; Gal. i. 21.*
small island olf Crete, Acts xxvii. 16.* KXivdpiov, to, a small bed. Acts v. 15
KXavSioL, as, r/, Claudia, 2 Tim. iv. 21.* (W. H.).
KXavSvos, 01', 6, Claudius, the Emperor, kXivt|, 1)$, 7/, a bed, Mark vii. 30 a port- ;

Acts xi. 28, xviii. 2 a military tri- ; able bed, IVIatt. ix. 2, 6 « couch for ;

bune (Lysias), Acts xxiii. 26.* reclining at meals, Mark iv. 21.
KXavdpios, ov, 6 (/cXatoj), weeping, lament- kXiviSiov, 01;, TO (dim.), a little bed or
ation, as Matt. ii. 18. couch, Luke v. 19, 24.*
kXolo), dao}, only with dpTov, to break kXivo), vQ), perf. KCKXiKa, (i) trans., to
bread, in the ordinary meal, Matt. xiv. bow, in reverence, Luke xxiv. 5 ; in
19 ; or in the Lord's Supper, xxvi. 26 ;
death, John xix. 30 to lay down, as ;

fig., of the body of Christ, i Cor. xi. 24. the head, to rest, ]\Iatt. viii. 20 to ;

kXcCs, K\e{.dbs, ace. KXeWa or KXelv,

sing. turn toffight, Heb. xi. 34 (2) intrans., ;

ace. phir. K\elba% or Kkels, ij, a key, the to decline, as the day, Luke ix. 12.
emblem of power, Matt. xvi. 19 ; Rev. KXicCa, as, 7), a table party, a company,
i. 18, iii. 7,ix. i,xx. i; met., Luke xi. 52.* Luke ix. 14.*
kXcio), (tw, to shut, shut up, close. kXottti, i}s, i], theft, Matt. xv. 19 ; Mark
K\i\t.\ia, aros, to (/cXeTrrw), theft, Rev. xi. vii. 22.*
21.* kXvSwv, cjvos, 6, the I'aging of the sea a ;

KXeoiras, a, 6, Cleopas, Luke xxiv. 18.* tvave, a surge, Luke viii. 24 ; James
kXc'os, ovs, to, good rc2)ort, glonj, i Pet. i. 6.*
ii. 20.* KXv8(i)v£top-ai, to be tossed, as waves by
KXeiTTTjs, 01', 6, a thief, as ^latt. vi. 19 ; the wind, Eph. iv. 14.*
met., of false teachers, John x. 8. KXwirds, a, 6, Clopas, John xix. 25.*
Syn. 74. KVT|6(i), to tickle; pass., to he tickled, to
KXe'irTO), i/'w, <y steal, abs., Matt. xix. 18 ;
itch, 2 Tim. iv. 3.
or trans, (ace), Matt, xxvii. 64. Kvi8os, 01', Tf, Cnidus, Acts xxvii. 7.*
KXfi|jLa, aTo<i,TO («-\da>), a branch, a shoot, Ko8pdvTT]s, 6, Lat. (.see ^ 154, a), a
01',

a teiulril, of a vine, etc., John xv. 2, farthing, the smallest coin in use,
4. 5.6.'- Matt, v. 26 Mark xii. 42.*
;
 ;

KOiXCa — K<JirT«] VOCABULARY, 459

KOiXCa, ay, rj, (i) the belly, Matt. xv. 1 7 ;

KoXo<r(ra€vs, fws, phir. KoXocrcraers (W.
{2) the icomh, Matt. xix. 12 (3) ;
fig., H., KoXacrcraers), Colossiuns, only in
the inner man, the heart, John vii. the subscription to the Epistle.
KoXoo-caC, Cjv, ai. Colossal, Col. i. 2.*
Koifida), u), in mid., to fall asleep, Luke KoXiros, ov, 6, the bosom, tJie chest, (i) of
xxii. 45 ; pass., to he asleep, to be the body ; iv t(^ KoXwcf) (or rots koXttois)
asleep in death, John xi. 12. elvai, dvaKe7adai, to be in the bosom of,
KoC|XT](ris, ews, 17, sleep, repose, John xi. i.e.,recline next to, at table; Luke xvi.
13.* 22, 23 (of the heavenly banquet)
KOivos, Tj, 6v, comma)}, i.e., shared by all, John xiii. 23. The phrase in John 1.
Acts iv. 32 unclean, ceremonially,
; 18 implies a still closer fellowship. (2)
Acts X. 15 ; unconsecrated, Heb. x. of the dress, used as a bag or pocket,
29. Luke vi. 38 (3) a bay, a gulf,
;
an inlet
Koiv<$(i>,Q, oKTw, to 7nake common or wn- of the sea. Acts xxvii. 39.*
cfca/i, Matt. XV. 11 ; to profane, to KoXvp.pd<i>, to, 'r}(r(^}, to swim. Acts xxvii.
desecrate, Acts xxi. 28. 43-*
KOkviDVCo), w, Tjo-w, to /wrrc common share KoXv^jL^Tidpa, as, i), a j^ool, ft sivimming-
in, to partake in, Rom. xv. 27 to ; place, a bath.
s/w^trc Gal. vi. 6.
/("///<, KoXwvia, as, t], or KoXwvia, a colony;
KoivcDvCa, as, participation, communion,
17, Philippi is so called, Acts xvi. 12.*
fellowship, as : Cor. x. 16 ; 2 Cor. KOfJidta), cD, to nourish the hair, to wear
xiii. 13 I John i. 3, 6, 7 contribu-
; ; the hair long, i Cor. xi. 14, 15.*
tion, as of alms, Rom. xv. 26 Heb. ; KOfiT], -qs, i], haAr of t/ie head, 1 Cor. xi.
xiii. 16.
KoivwviKos, "»?, 01', ready to communicate, Kop.£^o), (Toj, mid. fut. KOfiiaofiac or
liberal, i Tim, vi. 18.* Ko/jLiovfjiai, to bear, to bring, Luke vii.
Koivwvd^, 17, ov, as subst., a 2>a7'tner, a 37 mid., to bring to oneself, i.e., to
;

sharer u'ith, gen. obj. acquire, to obtain, as a recompense,

koCtt], 7)s, 7), a bed, Luke xi. 7 ; met., Heb. x. 36 to receive again, to re-
;

marriage bed, Heb. xiii. 4 ; sexual cover, Heb. xi. 19.

intercourse (as illicit), Rom. xiii. 13 ;
KO)JL^dTepov (comp. of Kofixpos), better, of
KoiTrjv ^x^iv, to canceive, Rom. ix. 10.* convalescence, adverbially with ?x<«'>
KoiTwv, uvos, 6, a hed-cliamber, Acts xii. John iv. 52.*
20.* K«vida), to ichitewash. Matt, xxiii. 27 ;
KOKKivos, T?, ov, dyed from the kokkos, pass.. Acts xxiii. 3.*
crimson. Ko'vi-oprdsi ov, 6 {opuvfii), dust.
KOKKOs, ov, 6, a kernel, a grain or seed. KOird^b), o-w, to be quieted, to cease, of the
KoXd^cD, (TO}, mid., to chastise, to punish. wind, Matt. xiv. 32 ; Mark iv. 39, vi.
Acts iv. 21 ; pass., 2 Pet. ii. 9.*
KoXaKcCa, as, t}, flattery, adulation, i KOirerds, ov, 6 (kotttoj), vehement lamenta-
Thess. ii. 5.* tion. Acts viii. 2.*
KoXacris, ews, i], chastisement, ])unish- KoirT|, ^s, 17, smiting, slaughter, Heb.
mcnt. Matt. xxv. 46 ; i John iv. 18.* vii. I.*
KoXao-oraC, (av, at. See KoKwyaai. KOTTidb), cD, dau}, to toil, Luke v. 5 ; to
Ko\<x^i\<a, tvith the fist,
(TO}, to strike to be fatigued, or
labour, spejit, with
buffet, to maltreat, Mark xiv. 65. Matt. xi. 28 to labour, in the gospel,
;

KoXXdo), (3, 770-0;, mid. and pass., to cleave Rom. xvi. 6, 12 ; i Cor. xv. 10.
to, to be joined with, to adhere. Kdiros, ov, 6, labour^ toil, trouble, un-
KoXXovpiov, or KoWvpLov, iov, to, eye- easiness.
salve^ "collyrium," Rev. iii. 18.* Koirpia, as, 7), filth, a dunghilly Luke
KoXXvPurnfis, ov, 6 {koWv^os, small coin), xiii. 8 (notW. H.), xiv. 35.*
a money-cJiangcr, Matt. xxi. 12 Mark ; Koirpiov, 01', TO, dung, manure, Luke
xi.15 John ii. 15.*
; xiii. 8(W. H.).*
KoXopdo), uxrw, to cut off, to shorten. Matt. KdiTTw, mid. fut. Koxl/ofMai, to cut doion,
xxiv. 22 ; Mark xiii. 20.* as branches, trees, etc. ; mid., to beat
 460 VOCABULARr. [Kopa| — Kp^fjcrictjs

or met oneself in grief, to bewail, as a basket, a travelling basket^

K($(|>ivo$, OV, 6,
Matt. xi. 17. as Matt. xiv. 20. Syn. 69.
Kopa^, a/cos, 6, a raven, Luke xii. 24.* Kpdpparos (W. H., Kpd^arros), ov, 6, a
Kopdcriov, lov, TO (dim. from Koprj), a couch, a light bed, as Mark ii. 12.
girl, a damsel, as Mark vi. 22, 28. Kpd^b), |w, to cry out, hoarsely, or urgently,
KopPdv (W. H., Kop^dv), (indecl.) and or in anguish.
Kop^avas, a, 6 (from Heb. ), (i) ^t gift, KpaiirdXT], rjs, surfeiting, Luke xxi. 34.*
something offered to God, IVlark vii. Kpaviov, 01*, TO, a skull ; Kpaviov Tottos,
II ; (2) the sacred treasury. Matt, Greek for ToXyodd, Avhieh see, ^latt.
xxvii. 6.* xxvii. 33. Lat., Calvaria, whence our
Kop€, 6 (Heb.), Korah, Jude 11.* Calvary.
Kop€vvv|ii, ecrw, pass. perf. KeKopeafxai, Kpdo-ir€8ov, ov, TO, the fringe, harder^ e.g.,
to satiate ; pass., to be fall, Acts xxvii. of a garment, as Matt, xxiii. 5.
38; I Cor. iv. 8.* Kparaidsj d, bv, strong, mighty, i Pet. v.
Kop{v6ios> iov, Corinthian, a Corinthian, 6.*
Acts xviii. 8 ; 2 Cor. vi. 11.* Kparaido), w, in pass, only, to be strong,
XopivOos, ov, 7], Corinth. to groio strong, Luke i. 80, ii. 40 i ;

Kopvr|\ios> iov, 6, Cornelius, Acts x.* Cor. xvi. 13 Eph. iii. 16.* ;

Kopos, 01*, 6 (from Heb.), a cor, the largest Kpar^o), Q), Tjad), to lay strong hold on, to
dry measure, equal to ten (idroL, Or detain, ace. or gen., or ace. and gen.
nearly fifteen English bushels, Luke (see § 264) to attain to, Heb. iv. 14
; ;

xvi. 7.* Matt. ix. 25; to Jtave poivcr over, M&tt.

xo(r|X€'(o, w, rjCTOj, to set in order, to garnish. xiv. 3 ; to be master of. Rev. ii. i ;

Matt, xxiii. 29 i Tim. ii. 9 ; to trim,

; Acts ii. 24 ; to cleave to. Acts iii. 1 1 ,

as lamps, Matt. xxv. 7 met., to ; Mark vii. 3 ; to retain, of sins, John

adorn, with honour, Tit. ii. 10 i Pet. ; XX. 23.
iii.
5.^
Kpdrio-Tos, Vj 0" (properly superlative of
Koo-p-iKos, rj, 6v. (i) terrestrial, opp. to Kparvs, see Kpdros), most excellent, mOot
eirovpdvios, Heb. ix. I ; (2) worldly, noble, a title of honour, Luke i. 3 ;

i.e., vicious, Tit. ii. 12.* Acts xxiii. 26, xxiv. 3, xxvi. 25.*
Koo-^ios, ov, orderly, decorous, i Tim. ii. Kpdros, ovs, TO, strength, power, dominion,
9, iii. 2* I Pet.iv. II; Heb.ii. 14; /card /cpdros, Acts
Koo-fio-Kparcdp, opos, 6, })rince of the world, xix. 20, greatly, mightily. Syn. 57.
world-ruler (R.V.), Eph. vi. 12.* KpavYd^u), aw, to cry out, to clamour, as
Kocrjxos, ov, 6, (i) ornament, decoration, Matt. xii. 19.
only I Pet. iii. 3 hence (2) t7ie mate-
; Kpav^TJ, rjs, 7], a cry, clamour, as Heb.
rial unioerse, Luke xi. 50, as well y. 7.
ordered and beautiful (3) the world, ;
Kpeas (aros, aoj, contr., Kp^tos), t6, plur.
John xi. 9 the world, in opposition to
; Kpeara, Kpia, flesh, flesh-meat, Rom.
the heavenly and the good, John viii. xiv, 21 I Cor. viii. 13.*
;

23 ; (4) the inhabitavls of the world, KpeCcro-iov, ov, ttivv, ovos, adj. (properly
I Cor. iv. 9 (5) tJie present life, as
;
compar. of Kparvs, see Kpdros), stronger,
distinguished from life eternal (6) a ;
more powerful, better, as Heb. vii. 7,
vast collection, of anything, James iii. xii. 24. Syn. 21.
6 2 Pet. ii. 5.
; Syn. 58. Kp€p.dvvvfj.i or Kpefidoj, cD, fut. dcroj, to
KovdproS) ov, 6 (Latin, see § 159), hang, trans.. Acts v. 30 mid., to ie ;

Quartus, Rom. xvi. 23.* suspended, to depend. Matt. xxii. 40 ;

Kou|xi (a Hebrew imperative fem., in Acts xxviii. 4.

Greek form), arise, Mark v. 41 (W. H. KpT]{xvdS| 01/, 6 (Kpefxdvvv/xi), a, precijiirc,
read Kovfx, the masc. form). i'rom its overhanging, Matt. viii. 32 ;

KovtTTwSCa, as, 17 (Latin, see § 154, c), Mark v. 13 ; Luke viii. }^y*
a guard, J\latt. xxvii. 65, 66, xxviii. Kpif|s, 'r)Tbs, 6, a Cretan, Acts ii. 11 ;

II.* Tit. i. 12.*

Kov(j>C)!'.w, to lighten, as a ship, Acts xxvii. KpT|<rKT]s, evTos, 6 (Latin), Crcsccns, 2
33.* Tim. iv. 10.*
Kp'^nj — KvjJLpaXovJ VOCABtTLARt. 461

Kpir|TT], 77s, i], Crete, now Candia. Luke xxi. 19

xviii. Acts i. 18,
12, ;

KpiOirj, 7js, fern., barley, Rev. vi. 6.* viii. 20, xxii. i Thess. iv. 4.* 28 ;

Kp£6ivoS) y], ov, made of barley ; dproi KTT]|xa, aros, to, anything acquired, a
Kpidivoi., barley loaves, John vi. 9, 2)ossession, Matt. xix. 22 Mark x. 22 ; ;

13.* Acts ii. 45, v. I.

icpCfia,aros, to, a judgment, a sentence, KTfivoSi ovs, TO, a beast of burden (as
condemnation, as i Cor. xi. 29. representing property), Luke x. 34 ;
KpCvov, ov, TO, a lily, Matt. vi. 28 Luke ; Acts xxiii. 24 ; i Cor. xv. 39 ; Rev.
xii. 27.* xviii. 13.*
Kp£v(D, vC}, K^KpLica, 1st aor., pass., KTT]Twp, opos, 6, a possessor, an owner,
eKpidrjv, (i) to judge, todeem, to deter- Acts iv. 34.*
mine, Acts xiii. 46, XV. 19 Rom. ; KTi^o), au), perf., pass., ^KTiafxai, to create,
xiv. 5 ; (2) to form or an express form, compose, physically or spiritually,
opinion of, usually unfavourable, Rom. as Rom. i. 25 ; Ejdi. ii. 10.
ii. I, (3) to try, to sit in judgment
3 ;
KTio-is, ews, T}, creation, (i) the act, Rom.
mi, John xviii. 31 ; pass., to be on i. 20 ; (2) the thing created, creature,
trial, to be judged ; mid,, to appeal to Rom. i. 25 creation, generall)% Rom.
;

trial, i.e., to have a laiv-suit, i Cor. viii. 19-22; (3) met., institution, i Pet.
vi. 6. ^ii. 13.
KpivTis, ews, '/;, opinion, formed and
(i) KTi<r|ia, aros, to, a thing created, a
expressed ; (2) judgment, the act or creature, i Tim. iv. 4 James i. 18 ;
;

result of condemnation ; (4) a

; (3) Rev. V. 13, viii. 9.*
tribunal. Matt. v. 21, 22 {5) justice. ;
KTiomqs, 01', 6, one who makes or founds^
Matt, xxiii. 23 (6) the divine law. ;
the Creator, i Pet. iv. 19.*
Matt. xii. 18, 20. Kv^eia, as, t), gambling, fraud, Eph.
Kpio-iros, ov, 6, Crispus, Acts xviii. 8 ;
iv. 14.*
I Cor. i. 14.* Kvp€'pvT|cris, ews, tj, governing, dii'cction,
KptTT|piov, ov, TO, {i)a tribunal, a court of I Cor. xii. 28.*
justice, I Cor. vi. 2, 4 (see R.Y.); Kvp€pvT|TT]s, ov, 6, a stccrsman, a pilot.
James ii. 6.* Acts xxvii. Rev. xviii. 17.* II ;

KpiTT|s, 01', TO, a judge; of the O.T. kvk\€v(>), encircle, surround, Rev. xx. 9
" Juilges," Acts xiii. 20. (W. H.).*
KpiTiKos, 7), ov, apt at judging, quick to kvkX60€v, adv. {kvkKos), from around^
discern, gen. obj., Heb. iv. 12.* round about, gen.. Rev. iv. 3, 4, 8,
Kpovw, (Tw, to knock at a door for ^v. II (notW. H.).*
entrance, Luke xiii, 25. kvkXos, ov, 6, a circle. Only in dat.,
KpviTTT], T7S, T), " crvpt,^' an underground, kvk\u}, as adv., abs., or with gen.,
cell, a vault, Luke xi. 33.* round about, around.
KpuTTTos, ij, ov, verbal adj. {kputtto)), hid- kvkXoo), tD, to encircle, surround, besiege,
den, secret, unknown, Matt. x. 26 ;
Luke xxi. 20 John x. 24 ; Acts xiv, ;

Rom. ii. 16. 20 Heb. xi. 30

; Rev. xx. 9 (see ;

KpviTTw, \p(j}, 2nd aor., pass., iKpv^rjv, to KVKkevw).*

hide, conceal, to lay up, to reserve, as KvXi<rp.a, aroj, to (W. H., KvXiafws,
Col. iii. 3. 6), a pdace for walloicing, 2 Pet. ii.
Kpvo-TaXXi^a), to be clear^ like crystal. 22.*
Rev. xxi. II.* KvXCb) (for KvXivdu)), to wallow or roll,
KpvcTTaXXoS} 01^, 6, crystal. Rev. iv. 6, ^lark ix. 20.*
xxii. I.* KvXXos, 17, 6v, crippled, lame, especially
Kpv<|>atos, a, ov, hidden, secret. Matt. vi. in the hands, itatt, xv. 30, 31, xviii.
18 OV. H.).* 8 ^lark ix. 43.*
;

Kpv(j>TJ, adv., in secret, secretly, Eph. v. KV(xa, aros, neut., a wave, a billow, as
12. Matt. viii. 24 ; Acts xxvii. 41 ; Jude
KTaofjLii, uffxai, fut. TjcrofJLaL, eKTrjadfxrjv,
dep., to acquire, procure (price, gen., KV|ipaXov, 01', TO {KVfi^os, hoUoiv), a
or iK), (see § 273,) Matt. x. 9; cymbal, I Cor. xiii. i.*
46^ VOCABlJLAtlt. [Kv)itvov — Xa|ipdv(i>

Kv^ivov, ou, TO (from Heb.), cumin, Matt. A.

xxiii. 23.*
Kvvdpiov, 01', TO (dim. of kiiojv), a little A, X, Adp.pSa, Lambda, I, the eleventh
dog, a ai7', Alatt. xv. 26, 27 ]\laik ; letter. As a numeral, X' = 30 ;

vii. 27, 28.* X/ = 30,cxx).

Kvirpios, ov, 6, a Cyprian or Cypriot. Xa^xa-vto), 2nd aor. ^Xaxov, trans., to
Kvirpos, ou, 17, Cyprus. obtain by lot, to obtain, ace.or gen.,
KviTTO), iZ/w, <o ftc7?(i?, ^0 stoop dowu, Mai'k Luke i.
9 ; Acts i. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. i ;
i. 7 John viii. 6, 8 (W. H. omit).
; abs., to cast lots, to draw lots, irepi,
EvpT]vaios, ou, 6, a Cyrenian. gen., John xix. 24.*
KvpTjvii, 77s, r;, a prop, name, Cyrene, a Ad^apos, ov, 6, Lazarus, (i) of Bethany,
city of Africa, Acts ii. 10.* the parable, Luke xvi, 20-25.
(2) in
Kvp^vios, 01', 6, a prop, name, Cy renins XdOpa (W. H., \d6pa), {Xavddfo},) secretly
or Quiriiiwi, Luke ii. 2.* as John xi. 28.
KvpCa, as, 7], a lady, 2 Johni. 5. (W. H., XaiXax}/, a7ros, r/, a tvhirlwind, a violent
Kup/a, Cyria, a proper name.)* storm, Mark iv. 37 ; Luke viii. 23 ;

KvpiaKOS, 77, 01', o/" or pertaining to tlie 2 Pet. ii. 17.*

Lord Christ, as tlie supper, i Cor. xi. XaKco), XrjK^oi}, and XaaKta, to burst loith a
20 the day, Rev. i. 10.*
; loud report. Acts i. 18.*
Kvpicvb), eva<j}, to have authority, abs., XaKT^^o) (Xa^, adv., vnth the heel), to
I Tim. vi. 15 ; to rule over (gen.), kick. Acts ix. 5 (W. H. omit), xxvi.
Luke xxii. 25. 14.*
EvpioS) iov, 6, (i) rt lo7'd, possessor of, XaXe'cD, Q, -qaw, (i) to speak, absolutely ;

and having power over, a title of {2) to speak, to talk, with ace. of thing
honour. Sir, i Pet. iii. 6 (2) The ;
spoken, also with modal dat. and dat.
LoPwD (Heb., Jehovah) ; (3) The Lord of person addressed. Hence, according
(employed in the Epp. constantly of to the nature of the case, met., to
Christ [see § 217, h]). declare, by other methods than viva
Kvpiorqs, rjTOi, i], lordship, dominion voce, as Rom. vii. i ; to preach, to pub-
collective concr., lords, princes,Eph. lish, to announce. Synn. 8, 15.
i. 21 ; Col. i. 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10 Jude ; XaXkd, as, 17, (i) speech, talk, John viii.

K
KvpdcD, Q}, toconfirm, ratify, 2 Cor. ii. 8 ;
43 hence, (2) report, John iv. 42 ;
;

(3) manner of speech, dialect, Matt,

Gal. iii. 15.* xxvi. 73 Mark xiv. 70 (AV. H. omit).*
;

Kvcov, Kvvo^, 6, i], a dog, Luke xvi. 21 ;

Xa|xd, or Xa/x/xd (Heb.), why. Matt, xxvii.
fig., of sluimcless 2)ersons, Phil. iii. 2. 46 (W. H., Xefxd) Mark xv. 34 (Ps. ;

KwXov, 01', TO, a limb, N.T. plur. only, xxii. i).*

Heb. iii. 17, the carcases.* Xap,pdv(i), X7)\po/xai (W. H., Xrnxxl/ofxai),
Ka)Xv(D« <TU), to restrain, forbid, hinder, eiXr](pa, ^Xa^ov, (i) to take, as in the
withhold, ]\Lark ix. 38. hand. Matt. xiv.
19 hence, (2) to ;

K(0)iT], i;5, T}, a village, unwalled, or lying receive, obtain, of things material or
open, Matt. ix. 35. spiritual, to accept, "take up," Matt.
K(i>|j.6-iroXis, ews, i], a, large, city -like X- 38 (3) to take by force, seize, Matt,
;

village, without walls, Mark i. 38.* xxi. 35 (4) to take away, by violence
;

a feasting, a revelling, among

Kta^ios, ov, 6, or fraud. Matt. v. 40 (5) to choose. ;

the heathen, in honour of Bacchus, Acts XV. 14 (6) to receive or accept, ;

Rom. xiii. 13; Gal. v. 21; i Pet. as a friend, and as a teacher (7) in ;

certain periphrastic expressions Xaja- —

K(ov(>)\(/, wTTos, 6, a gnat. Matt, xxiii. ^dv€iv dpxWi to begin ; X. Xrjdrjv, to
forget ; X. virofivqcnv, to remember
Kois, cD, T), Cos, Acts xxi. i.* X. irdpav, to experience ; X. vpoawirov,
Kwcrdu, 6 (Heb.), Cosam, Luke iii. "to accept the person," i.e., to be
28.* partial. The preposition "from,"
K(«()>os, 77, bv {kottto}, lit., blunted), dumb, after this verb, is expressed by ^/c,
Mitt. ix. 32, ^;^ \ deaf, Matt. xi. 5. dirb, irapa {Oird, 2 Cor. xi. 24).
 :

Ad|i.cx — XlpavosJ VOCABULARY. 463

Ad)jL6x, 6 (Heb. ), Lamech, Luke iii. 36.* he left, to he lacking, to he destitute of,
Xa^irds, ados, 17, a lamj^, a torch. Syn. 65. James i. 4, 5, ii. 15.*
Xaiiirpos, resplendent, shining,
d, 6v, XeiTovp-yto), to serve puhlicly in
w, {i)
gorgeous; adv., -ws, gorgeously, sump- sacred th ings, Acts xiii. 2 ; Heb. x. 1 1 ;

tuously, only Luke xvi. 19. (2) to minister to, pecuniarily, Rom.
Xa|nrpdTi]s, ttjtos, i}, splendour, bright- XV. 27.* Syn. 36.
ness. Acts xxvi. 13.* XciTovp-yfa, as, t), {i) a puhlic ministra-
Xdp.'irfa), \l/u}, to give light, to shine, Matt. tion or service, Luke i. 23 Phil. ii. ;

V. 15, 16, xvii. 2. 17 ; Heb. viii. 6, ix. 21 {2) a friendly ;

XavOdvo), 2iul aor. iXaOov, (i) to he con- service, as rendering aid or alms to,
cealed, abs., Mark
24 Luke viii. vii. ;
Phil. ii. 30 2 Cor. ix. 12.* Syn. 36.
;

47 {2) to he concealed from, unknown

;
XciTovpYiKos, 7), bv, rendering service to,
to (ace), Acts xxvi. 26; 2 Pet. iii. 5, Heb. i. 14.* Syn. 36.
8 (3) for particip. constr., see §394,
;
XeiTovp-yos, ov, 6, a minister or servant
2 Heb. xiii. 2.*
; to, gen. obj., Rom. xiii. 6, xv. 16 ;
Xa-|€VT6s, bv, heivn out of a rock,
n, Phil. ii. 25 Heb. i. 7, viii. 2.* ;

Luke 53.*
xxiii. Syn. 36.
Aao8iK€ia, aj, r/, Laodicea. Xc'vTiov, ov, TO (Lat., see § 154, e), a
AooSiKc'vs, ^ws, 6, a Laodicean. napkin or towel, John xiii. 4, 5.*
Xaos, ov, 6, (i) a 2^cople, spec, of ^^ Xciris, tSos, i), a scale or crust. Acts ix. 18.*
people of God (2) <A^ common pcojile.
;
Xcirpa, as, i), tlie leprosy.
Syn. 73. Xcirpds, ov, 0, a leper.
Xdpvy^, i'77oj, 6, ^7*tf throat, "larynx," Xeirrdv, ov, prop. verb. adj. (sc. vofiifffia),
Rom. iii. 13.* from X^TTw (to strip off, pare down), a
Aa<ra£a, as (W. H., Aaor^a), 7/, LasoM, mite, one eighth of an as, the smallest
Acts xxA-ii. 8.* Jewish coin, Mark xii. 42 ; Luke xii,
Xdo-Kw. See XaKio). 59, xxi. 2.*
Xa-Toft^w, u), /o 7^CM' stones, to cut stone, Acvt or Aei'is, 6, Levi. Four are men-
^latt. xxvii. 60 Mark xv. 46. * ; tioned (i) son of Jacob, ancestor of
:

Xarpcfo, as, ri, worship, Service rendered, the priestly tribe (2, 3) ancestors of ;

to God, John xvi. 2 Rom. ix. 4, xii. ; Jesus, Luke iii. 24, 29 (4) the apostle, ;

I Heb. ix. i, 6.*

; also called Maithcic (W. H., i, 2 and
Xarpevo), {i) to worship, to serve ; (2)
(ra>, 3, Aei'et, 4, Aei'ei's).
as a priest.
to officiate Syn. 36. Acvt-rqs, a Levite.
01', 6,
Xdxavov, 01', rb, a lierb, a go^rden plant, AtviTiKOS, Levitical,I{eb. vii. ii.*
77, bv,
Matt. xiii. 32. XevKaivo), avi^, ist aor. iXevKava, to make
Ac^paios, ov, 6, Lchhccus, ^^att. x. 3 white, Mark ix. 3 Rev. vii. 14.* ;

(not W. H.). See Oaddaios.* XcvKos, f), bv, (i) white, as Matt. v. 36 ;

Xrytwv (W. H., Xeynvv), Qvos, 6 (Lat., John iv. 35 ; (2) hright, as Matt,
see § 154, c), a legion, Matt. xxvi. 53; xvii. 2.
Mark v. 9, 15 Luke viii. 30 in N.T. ; ; XcW, oj'Tos, 6, a lio7i ; fig., for a tyrant
times containing proba1)ly 6,826 n)en.* 2 Tim. iv. 17 ; of Christ, Rev. v. 5.
Xfyw, only j)res. and impf! in X.T., (i) to X-^O-q, 77s, ij, forgcffulncss, 2 Pet. i. 9.*
speak, used also of writings, as John XT]Ke'a). See Xa/f^w.
xix. 37 ; (2) to say, to discourse ; (3) to Xt^vos, oO, 6, i), a wine-press. Matt. xxi.
relate, to tell, Luke ix. 31, xviii. i ; 33 fig. in Rev. xiv. 19, 20, xix, 15.*
;

(4) to call, pass., to he called or named X-qpos, 01;, 6, idle talk, Luke xxiv. 11.*
(5) pass., to he chosen or appointed. XT)<rTTJs, ov, 6, a robber, Mark xi. 17 ;

Dat. of person addressed. Syn. 8. John X. I, 8. Syn. 74.

Xci(i)i.(i, aros, rb (XeiTrw), a remnant, Rom. X^^is (W. H., XTiixxpi^), ews, 17 [Xa/x^avu),
xi. 5.* a receiving, Phil. iv. 15,*
Xctos, eta, etov, smooth; plain, level, Luke X£av, adv., very much; with adj. or ad^^.,
iii. 5 (LXX.).* very. Matt. iv. 8 Mark xvi. 2.
;

XcCircD, i/zw, to leave, to he wanting, Luke XC^avos, ov, b, frankincense, Matt, u- II ;

xviii. 22 ; Tit. i. 5, iii. 13 ;
pass., to Rev. xviii. 13.*
464 VOCABULARY. [X 1$ av ci)t6s — AovKciS

XiPavcoTos, oO, 6, a censer for burning something spoken, in N.T.,

Xo-yiov, ov, TO,
frankiiu'cnse, Rev. viii. 3, 5.* of communications, e.g., the
divine
Aipeprtvos, 01', 6 (Lat., a freed-man), Old Testament, Acts vii. 38 Rora. iii. ;

Libcrtiiu, Acts vi. 9. Probably Jews 2 ; and the doctrines of Christ, Heb. v.
who had been slaves at Rome, after- 12 ; I Pet. iv. II.*
*
wards freed. Xd-yios, ov, eloquent, Acts xviii. 24.*
AiPvT], 77s, 71, Libya, Acts ii. 10.* XoYio-fxds, ov, 6, reasoning, thought,
XtGdtw, (Tw, to stone, to execute by stoning. iuiaginntion, Rom. ii. 15 ; 2 Cor,
XiBivos, 77, ov, made of stone, John ii. 6 ;
X. 5.*
Rev. ix. 20. *
^
2 Cor. iii. 3 ; \oyo [layjio), Q, to strive about tvoi'ds, 2
Xi6o-PoX6(D, Co, 7]aot}, to throiv stones at, so Tim. ii. 14.*
as to wound or kill, to stone. Matt, Xo"yo|xax£a, as, i], contention about ivords,
xxiii. 37 Mark xii. 4 (W. H. omit).
;
" logomachy," i Tim. vi. 4.*

X£8os, ov, 6, a stone, i.e., (i) loose and Xd-yos, ov, 6, {i) a speaking, a saying, a
lying about. Matt. iv. 3, 6 (2) built ;
loord, as the expression of thought
into a wall, etc., Mark xiii. 2 (4) « ;
(whereas ^ttos, 6vofxa, fjrjfxa refer to
precious stone, Rev. iv. 3, xv. 6 (R.V. ) words in their outward form, as parts
(5) a statue or idol of stone. Acts xvii. of speech), Matt. viii. 8 ; (2) the thing
29. Syn. 75. spoken, j\Iatt. vii. 24, 26 — whether
Ai0o-a-Tpu)Tov, 01', rb (prop. a.iX]., strewed doctrijie, i Tim. iv. 6 ;
jyrojihecy, 2
with stones), the Pavenunt, part of a Pet. question, Matt. xxi. 24
i. 19 ; ;

Roman xix. 13.*

court of justice, John ft common saying or p^i'overb, John iv.

XiKjidu), w, Tjcrw, to scatter, as corn in win- 37 ; a precept, a command, John viii.

nowing, to reduce to particles that may 55 ; the truth, Mark viii. 38 convers- ;

be scattered,Matt.xxi.44; Luke xx. 18.* ation, Luke xxiv. 17 teaching, i Cor. ;

Xinr|v, ^vos, 6, JuirboiLT, haven, Acts xxvii. ii.4 ft ; narrative, Acts i. i « 2)ublic ;

8, 12.* rumour. Matt, xxviii. an argu-

15 ;

XffivT], 77s, 7}, a lake, e.g., Gennesareth, ment. Acts ii. 40 ; a charge or accus-
Luke V. I. ation. Acts xix. 38 ; (3) reason, Acts
Xtp-ds, ov, hunger, 2 Cor.
6, (i) xi. 27 ;
xviii. 14 (4) account, reckoning, Heb.
:

(2) ct famine, Matt. xxiv. 7. iv. 13 ; Acts XX. 24 ; Matt, xviii. 23 ;

\Lvov, ov, TO, flax, linen made of Jlax, Acts Ad7os is used by John as
X. 29.
Rev. XV. 6 (W. H., \ldos) ; a lamii- a of Christ, the wokd of God,
name
wick. Matt. xii. 20.* i.e., the expression or manifestation of
Alvos (W. H., Aij/os), ov, 6, Linus, 2 Tim. his thoughts to man, John i. i, etc.
iv. 21.* Syn. 8.
Xnrapos, a, 6v, sumptuous, precious, deli- Xdyxi* ^5) V, « lance, a spear, John
cate. Rev. xviii. 14.* xix. 34.*
\irpa, ay, 17, a piound weight, John xii, XoiSopcfa), C), to revile, to rail at, to re-
3, xix. 39.* proach, John ix. 28 ; Acts xxiii. 4 I ;

X£\|/, \i/3j5, 6, ^/tc aS'. JV. wind. Acts xxvii. Cou iv. 12 I Pet. ii. 23.* ;
"
12. (To look " down the S. W. wind XoiSopia, as, 77, reproach^ reviling, i Tim.
is to look toward the north-cast.)* V. 14 ; I Pet. iii. 9.*
Xo"y£a, as, i), a collection, i.e., of money, XokSopos, ov, 6, one ivho rails at, a reviler,
I Cor. X7i. I, 2.* I Cor. V. II, vi. 10.*

Xo-yr^onai, (ro/xai, dep. with mid. and Xoifids, 01', 6, a plague, pestileTice, Matt,
pass, aor., {i) to reckon; (2) to 2}lace xxiv. 7 (W. H. omit), Luke xxi. 11; j
to the accoimt of, to charge with, ace. Paul so called, Acts xxiv. 5.* I
and dat., or with et's (see § 298, 6) ; Xoiirds, 77, 6v, remaining, the rest, ]\Iatt.

(3) to reason, argue, to infer, conclude, XXV. II adv., t6 Xonrbv, as for the rest,
;

compxite, from reasoning ; (4) to think, moreover, finally, hencefortli, I Cor. i.

sunpose. 16 Heb. x. 13 ; tov Xoiirov, from
;

AO^iKds, 7), 6v, rational, i.e., belonging to Gal. vi. 17.

Jiencfforth.
the sphere of the reason, Rom. xii. i ;
AovKGis, a, 6 (from XovKav6%, see § 150,
1 Pet. ii. 2.* d), Luke,
 ;

AovKios — |JLaKpdv] VOCABULARY. 465

AovKios, iov, 6 (Latin), Lucius, Acts xiii. Aw'Cs, i5os, 7], Lois, 2 Tim. i. 5.*
I ; Rom. xvi. 21.* AwT, 6 (Hel3. ), Lot, Luke xvii. 28-32;
Xovrpov, ov, TO, a bath, a icashing, Eph. 2 Pet. ii. 7.*
V. 26 Tit. iii. 5.*
;

Xovb), (Til}, to bathe, to wash, Acts ix. M.

37, xvi. 33 ; to cleanse, to jJUi'ifi/, Rev.
i. Syn. 17.
5. M, [1, |iv, mtc, m, the twelfth letter. As
AvSSa, 17, Lydda, Acts ix. 32, 53.*
77s, a numeral, yu,' = 40/xi; =40,ckx).
AvSia, as, if, Lijdia, Acts xvi. 14, 40.* Made, (Heb.), Maath, Luke iii. 26.*
6
AvKaovia, as, 17, Lycaonia, Acts xiv. 6.* Ma-ySaXd, 17 (Heb., Chald.), Magdala,
AvKaoviorrC, adv., in the speech of Ly- Matt. XV. 39 (W. H. and R.V.,
caonia, Acts xiv. II.* 'Mayaddv).*
AvK^a, as, 17, Lycia, Acts xxvii. 5.* Ma78aXT]VT|, rjs, t), Magdalene, i.e., a
XvKos, 01*, 6, a wolf ; iig., Acts xx. 29. woman of Magdala, as Matt, xxvii.
*
Xv|iaivo|xai, to ravage, Acts viii. 3. 56, 61.^
Xvireo), u), to grieve ; pass., to be grieved, |jLa-Y€£a(W. H., fxayla), as, i), magic, plur.,
saddened, ]\latt. xxvi. 22, ^y ; i Pet. i. 6; magic arts, Acts viii. 11.*
to be aggrieved or offemied. Matt. xiv. [kayevia, era;, to irractise magic arts, Acts
9 ; Rom. xiv. 15. viii. 9.*
XviTTj, 77$, i], grief, sorroiv, aversion, 2 Cor. (id^os, OV, 6, (i) magus, Persian astro-
ix. 7; cause of grief, 1 Pet. ii. 19. loger, ]\Iatt. ii. I, 7, 16 ; (2) a sorcerer,
*
Avo-dvias, 01', 6, Lysanias, Luke iii. i.* Acts xiii. 6, 8.
Avo-£as, 01', 6, Lysias. Mav»7, 6 (Heb.), Magog. See Vwy.
Xvo-is, ews, 17, ft loosening, divorce, I Cor. MaSidv (W. H., ^labidfi), 6 (Heb.),
vii. 27.* Madian or Midian, Acts vii. 29.*
Xvo-t-TcXcw, w (lit., ^0 j^rty taxes), im- liae-qTctlw, (TO), (i) trans., to make a dis-
pers., -et, t^ is prof table or preferable ci2>le of {a.cc.), to iJistruct,^la,tt. xiii. 52 ;

and ij), Luke xvii. 2.*

(dat. xxviii. 19 ; Acts xiv. 21 ; (2) intrans.,
Avo^pa, as, 17, or wi/, rd, Lystra, Ac Is to be a disciple, Matt, xxvii. 57 (W. H.,
xiv. 6, 8. however, read the passive, with active
Xvrpov, ov, TO, a ransom jjrice, Matt. in margin).* Syn. 14.
XX. 28; Mark x. 45.* Syn. 43. (jLa0T]TT]s, ov, 6 {/xavddvoj), a disciple,
XvTp<J«, uffio, in N.T. only, mid. and Matt. ix. 14, x. 24, xxii. 16; oi /xadrjTai,
pass., to ransom, to deliver by })aying specially, the twelve, Matt. ix. 19.
a ransom, Luke xxiv. 21 ; Tit. ii. 14 ; \iaQi\Tpia, as, i], a female disciple, Acts
I Pet. i. 18 (ace, pers. ; dat., price, ix. 36.*
and dTTo or U)* Syn. 43. Ma9o\)(rdXa, 6 (Heb.), Methuselah, Luke
XvTpcDo-is, ews, T], deliverance, redemjMon, iii. 37.*

Luke i. 68, ii. 38 ; Heb. ix. 12.* Ma'ivdv, 6 (Heb.), Mainan, Luke iii. 31.*
Xvrpwnqs, ov, 6, a redeemer, a deliverer. (laivofiat, dep., to be mad, to rave, John
Acts vii. 35.* X. 20 ; Acts xii. 15, xxvi. 24, 25 ;

Xvxvia, as, 17, a lamp-stand. Matt. v. 15 ; I Cor. xiv. 23.*

tig., of a church, Rev. ii. i, 5 of a ; (laKap^^A), fut. -lCj, to jironounce hapjjy,
Christian teacher, Rev. xi. 4. Syn. 65. congratulate, Luke i. 48 James v. 11.*
;

Xv^vos, 01', 6, a lamp. Matt. v. 15, vi. 22. liaKdpios, icL, lov, happy, blessed, Matt. v.
Used of John the Baptist, John v. 35 3-11 ; Luke i. 45, vi. 20 ; I Cor. vii. 40.
of Christ, Rev. xxi. 23. Syn. 65. Syn. 28.
Xvo>, (Tin), to loosen, as (i) lit., to unbind, |iaKapio-|xds, ov, 6, congratulation, a pro-
Mark i. 7 ; Rev. v. 2 (2) to set at ;
nouncing happy, Rom. iv. 6, 9 ; Gal.
liberty; (3) to ])ranou)ice 'not binding, iv. 15.*
e.g., a law. Matt, xviii. 18 ; (4) to dis- MaKcSov^a, as, i], Macedonia.
obey or nullify the Divine woid, John MaKcSuv, oj'os, 6, a Macedonian.
vii. 23, X. 35 ; is) to destroy, e.g., the (jidKcXXov, ov, TO, a slaughter-house,
temple, John ii. 19 ; (6) to disjniss, i.e., slmmbles, i Cor. x. 25.*
an assembly, Acts xiii. 43. |iaKpdv, adv. (ace. of fiaKpos, sc. odop),

H H
466 VOCABULARY. [fjiaKpoOcv liaraio-Xayla

a/ar, afar off, Luke xv. 20 ; eh pre- (i.avT€vo}iai, dep. , to utter responses, pro-
ceding, Acts ii. 39 ; airb following, phesy, Acts xvi. 16.* Syn. 15.
Acts xvii. 27. |iapaiv(i), avu), fut. pass. /xapaudrjaofMai,
|jLaKpo6€v, adv. afar, I^Iark
,
from viii. 3 ;
to iviihcr, to fade aiuay, James i. ii.*
with dTTo, as Matt. xxvi. 58. (jiapdvd0d (tAvo Syro-Chaldaic words),
|iaKpo-6v|JLea>, Co, rjaco, to suffer long, to our Lord cometh (R.V. marg. ), i Cor.
have patie7ice, to be forbearing, i Cor. xvi. 22.*
xiii. 4 ; delay, Luke xviii. 7
to to ; [iap'yapi'rqs, 01;, 6, a 2>earl, Matt. xiii. 45,
wait patiently for, ei's or (irl, dat, 46.^
Heb. vi. 15. MapGd, 7;s, i], Martha.
(iaKpo-Ov|j.£a, as, t), forbearance, long- Mapia, Mapid/A (indecl., Heb.,
as, or
suffering, patience. Syn. 31. Miriam), 77, Mary. Six of the name
}jLaKpo-6vp.<os, adv., patiently, indul- are mentioned: (i) the mother of
gently. Acts xxvi. 3.* Jesus (2)
;
the Magdalen (3) the ;

jxaKpds, a, 6v, long; of place, distant, Luke and Lazarus (4) the
sister of Alartha ;

XV. 13, xix. 12 ; of tm\G, prolix, only in wife of Cleopas (5) the mother of ;

the jihrase /xa/cpd irpocrevxecrdai, to make John Mark (6) a Christian woman in ;

long prayers. Matt, xxiii. 14 (W. H. Rome, Rom. xvi, 6.

omit); Mark xii. 40 Luke xx. 47.* ; MdpKos, 01', 6, Mark.
[laKpo-xpovios, ov, long-lived, Eph. vi. 3.* |jtdpp,apos, ov, 6, 7], marble. Rev. xviii.
^oXaK^a, as, t}, softness, weakness, in- 12.*^
firmity. Matt. iv. 23, ix. 35, x. i.* p,apTvpccD, Co, 770-0;, to be a ivitness, abs., to
(jLoXaKos, 17,of garments. Matt,
6v, soft, testify {irepi, gen.), to give testimony {to,
xi. 8 ; Luke vii. 25 ; disgracefully dat. of pers. or thing), to commend;
effeminate, i Cor. vi. 10.* pass., to be attested, i.e., honourably,
MaX€X€T|\, (Heb.), Maleleel, or
6 Maha- to be of good report.
laleel, Luke
iii. 37.* (lap-rupia, as, ij, testimony home, i.e.,
p-dXioTa, adv. (superl. of [xoKa, very), judicially, Mark xiv. 56, 59, or gene-
most of all, especially. rally, honourable attestaiion, John v.
(jidXXov, adv. (comp. of /xaXa), viore, 34. With obj. gen., as Rev. xix. 10.
rather ; -rroXXip /xaWov, much more. [AapTtipiov, 01^, TO, testimony, Alatt. viii.
Matt. vi. 30 ; Troau) /jlcLWov, hoiv much 4 {to, dat. ; against, eiri, ace).
more, Matt. vii. 11 jxaXKov ij, 7)iore ;
ji,apTvpo|jLai,dep., to call to witness. Acts
than. Matt, xviii. 13. (xaXKov is often XX. 26 Gal. v. 3
; <o exhort solemnly, ;

of intensive force, e.g., ]\Iatt. xxvii. F.ph. iv. 17 I Thess. ii. 11 (W. H.).*
;

24 ; Rom. viii. 34. See § 321. ^ jidpTvs, vpos, dat. plur. /xaprvai, 6, a
MdXx.oSi ov, 6, Malchus, John xviii. 10.* icitness, i.e., judicially, Matt, xviii.
agrandmotlier, 2 Tim. i. 5.*
|idp.|JL-r], 7;s, 7], 16 one who testifies from what he has
;

H., /jLafxcovcis), a, 6, mam-

[jLap.|i(uvds (AV. seen and known, i Thess. ii. 10 Luke ;

mon, gain, ivealth {fvom Chald.), Matt, xxiv. 48 ; a martyr, witnessing by his
vi. 24 ; Luke xvi. 9, 11, 13.* death, Acts xxii. 20 ; Rev. ii. 13,
Mava-^v, 6 (Heb.), Manaen, Acts xiii. i,* xvii. 6.
Mava(r<rT|s, gen. and ace, i], 6, Ma- |xa(ra-do|jLai, Co/xai, to bite, to gnaw^ Rev.
nasseh, (i) Son of Joseph, Rev. vii. xvi. 10.*
6 (2) Matt. i. 10.*
;
|jia<rTi"y6a), Co, Coaco, to scourge, Matt. x.
|xav9dvci), jxaO-qaofjiaL, 2nd aor. ifxadov, 17 ; fig., Heb. xii. 6.
perf. fjLe/xddrjKa, to learn, to under- [lao-Ti^a), to scourge. Acts xxii. 25.*
stand, to know, to be informed, to com- (idcTTi^, 170s, a whip, a scowrge. Acts
17,

prehend. Used abs., or with ace. xxii. 24 ; Heb. xi. 36 fig., sharp pain, ;

(ttTTo, irapd [gen.], with the teacher, ev disease, affliction, 5lark iii. lo, v. 29,
with example, i Cor. iv. 6). 34 ; Luke vii. 21.*
fiavCa, as, i}, madness, insanity. Acts jtao-Tos, ov, 6, the breist, the paps, Luke
xxvi. 24.* xi, 27, xxiii. 29 ; Rev, i. 13.*
)idvvo^ T6(Heb.,deriv. uncertain), manwa, liaraio-XoY^o^ as, i], vain talk, empty,
the food of the Israelites iu the desert. fruitless couvcrsat ion, i Tim. i. 6.*
 ; ;;

)iaTaio-X<$YOS — jicXeraw] VOCABULARY. 467

|uiTaio-XoYos, ov, 6, a vain, empty talker^ full-grown, inien^e. Matt. ii. 10, xxviii.
Tit. i. lo.* 8 wonderful, 2 Cor. xi. 15 noble, of
; ;

(jLaraios (ai'a), o-iov, vain, fruitless, empty, high rank. Rev. xi. 18, xiii. 16 ;
1 Cor. XV. 17 ; James i. 26 ; rd fidraia, applied to age, 6 fxel^wy, the elder,
vanities, spec, of heathen deities, Acts Rom. ix. 12, /x^yas indicates the size
xiv. 15 (and O.T.). Syn, 29. of things, their measure, number, costy
(laraioTqs, ttjtoj, 17, (i) vanity, 2 Pet. ii. and estimation ; fxeyaXr] -Tj/x^pa, a high,
18 (2) perverseness, Eph. iv. 17 ; (3)
;
day, John xix. 31.
*
frailty, Rom. viii. 20 |ify£dos, ov^, -rd, greatness, vastness, im-
fiaraioo), w, to render vain or foolish, to mensity, Eph. i. 19.*
deprave; pass., Rom. i. 21.* fieyKTTdvts, dviov, ol, jrrinccs, great men
)idTT)v, adv., 2'?i vain, fruitlessly, Matt (sing,, fieyicTTdv, only in LXX., Sirach
XV, 9 ; Mark vii. 7.* iv. 7), lords, Mark vi. 21 Rev, vi. 15, ;

MaTOaios, ov, 6 (W. H., Ma^^atos), xviii, 23,*

Matthew, the apostle and evangelist ^c6-€p(iT]V€vo>, to translate, to interpret,
also Aevt. pass, only, ^lark v. 41 John i. 42. ;

Maxedv, 6 (Heb.) (W. H., yiadddv,) (uSt], 7/s, t], drunkenness, drunken frolic

Matthan, Matt. i. 15.* or riot, Luke xxi. 34 Rom. xiii. 13 ; ;

MorediT, 6 (Heb.), (W. H., Madedd,) GaL V. 21.*

MattJmt, Lnke iii. 24, 29.* (uO-C(m]p.i (and fied-iardvu), I Cor. xiii.
Mare^as, a (6), (W. H. , Ma(9^ias,) Mat- 2, W. H.), fj.€Ta(rTr}(X(A), 1st aor., pass.,
thias, Acts i. 23, 26.* /j.€Tearddr)u, lit., to change tlie place of
MaTTaOd, 6 (Heb.), Mattatha, Luke iii. hence, to remove, translate, i Cor. xiii.
2 Col. i. 13
; to seduce or draw over.
;

MarraOias, ou, 6, Mattathias, Luke iii. Acts xix, 26 to remove from office,
;

25, 26.* e.g., a king. Acts xiii. 22 or a steward, ;

|i.d\aipa, as and ?;?, 17, a sword ; met., for Luke xvi. 4,*
strife. Matt. x. 34 ; fig., of spiritual (icO-oScCa (-o5ia, W, H, ), as, t), fraudu-
weapons, Eph. vi. 17. lent artifice, a trick, a stratagem, Eph.
)idxT], 77s, T), contention,
strife, dispute, iv. 14, vi. II.*
2 Cor. 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; Tit. iii.
vii. 5 ; (leO-iipios, bordering on; rd fxedupta,
9 ; James iv. i.* borders, confines, Mark vii. 24 (W. H.,
(Aaxofiai, to fght, contend, dispute, John opia).*
vi. 52 ; Acts vii. 26 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24 ;
|jLc6tiarKa), to make drunk; pass., to be
James iv. 2.* drunk, Luke xii. 45 Eph, v. 18 ;

p^'yoX-avxco), Q, to boast great things, to I Thess. V. 7.*

be arrogant, James iii. 5. (W. H., fUOvoros, ov, 6 (prop, adj.), a drunkard,
fieydXa avx^t-)* 1 Cor. V. II, vi. 10.*
(lE'yaXcios, eia, etov, grand, inagnificcnt, \LiQv(a, to be drunken, Matt, xxiv. 49 ;

wondrous, Luke i. 49 (W. H., /xeydXa) ;

Acts ii. 15 ;met., Rev. xvii. 6.
Acts ii, II.* \Liit,<av, comp. of fieyas, which see. It
(iCYCLXcidrqs, tt/tos, t], greatness, majesty, has itself a comparative, fMei^orepos,
inagnificcnce, Luke ix. 43 ; Acts xix. 3 John 4 (see § 47).
27 ; 2 Pet, i. 16.* fic'Xav, aj/os, t6 (/iAas), ink, 2 Cor. iii. 3 ;

IM-yaXo-irpcinfis, h, gen. oOy, fitting for 2 John 12 ; 3 John 13.*

a great man, magnificent, excellent, (ic'Xas, aiva, av, black. Matt. v. 36 ; Rev.
2 Pet. i. 17.* vi, ^5, 12.*
(iryaXtiva), vC), {i) to enlarge. Matt, xxiii. McXcds, a, 6, Melea, Luke iii. 31.*
5 ; {2) to magnify, extol, celehratc with (jLcXci, impers. (see § 101), it concerns,
praise, Luke i. 58 ; Acts v. 1 3. Syn. 47. dat, of pers,, with gen. of object, as
IxrydXcDS* adv., greatly, Phil, iv. 10.* I Cor, ix. 9; or trepi, as John x, 13 ;

^ryaXtixrvvT], ?;?, 17, magnificence, majesty, or 5ti, as Mark iv, 38. Syn. 11.
Heb. i. 3, viii. i ; Jude 25* (icXerdcD, 0), Tjtra;, to th'nk upon, to revolve in
Iti^as, fJieydXT], (see ^ 39), comp.
fiiya m'nd^ to jrremcditate, ^lark xiii, 11 (not
fiei^uy, sup. ncyiaros, great, in si;:e, W. H.) Acts iv. 25 i Tim. iv. 15.*
; ;
 468 VOCABULARY. [\i.(Ki (JL^TOS

jjlIXi, lto?, t6, honey, ^latt. iii. 4 ; Mark distinguish, pass., to differ, i Cor. vii
i. 6 ; Rev. x. 9, 10.* 34 ; (3) to distribute, Mark vi. 41, ace.
(jLcX^o-crios, a, ov, made
of honey, Luke and dat.
xxiv. 42 (W. H. omit).* )i€pi,p.va, 7;s, 7), care, anxicti/, as dividing,
McXCttj, 77s, 17, Jlclita, now Malta, Acts distracting the mind. Matt. xiii. 22 ;
xxviii. I.* Luke viii. 14.
(leWo), Tjo-o), to be about to do, to be on the p.epifjivdco, Q, to be anxious, distracted
point of douKj, with iiitiu., generally abs., with dat., Trepl (gen.), ace. The
I
the present infin., rarely aor. ; the various constructions may be illus-
flit, infin. (the regular classical use) trated from Matt. vi. abs., vers. 27, :

occurs only in the phrase fieWeiu 31 ace, ver. 34(Rec.

; see also i Cor. ;

^(Teadat (only in Acts) the verb may ; vii. 32-34) gen., ver. 34 (W. H. ) dat.,
;
;

often be ade(iuately rendered by our ver. 25 ets, ver.

; 34 irepi, ver. 28. ;

auxiliaries, will, sliall, mud; to delay, Syn. 11.

only Acts xxii. 16. The participle is |X€pis, ibos, 7], a ^ja/'^ or division of a
used absolutely : to /j-eWov, the future, country. Acts xvi. 12 ; a share, portion,
Luke xiii. 9; to, fxeWovra, things to Luke X. 42 ; Acts viii. 21 ; 2 Cor. vi.
come, Rom. viii. 38. See § 363,/, and 15 ; Col. i. 12.*
Syn. 3. |jL6pi(rp.ds, dividing, the act of
ov, 6, a
(JieXos, a viember of the body, a
ovs, TO, dioiding, 12 Heb.
distribution, iv. ;

limb, as Matt. v. 29, 30 Rom. xii. 4; ; gifts distributed, Heb. ii. 4.*
fig., I Cor. vi. 15. (i€pi(rTT|s, ov, 6, a divider, an arbiter,
MeXx^ (W. H., -ei), 6 (Heb.), Melchi. Luke xii. 14.*
Two are mentioned, Luke iii. 24, 28.* ovs, TO, a 2)art ; hence, (i) a jwrt,
fjicpos,
MeXxio-cScK, 6 (Heb., king of righteous- as assigned, share. Rev. xxii. 19 ;

ness), MclcJiizcdek, Heb. v., vi. , vii.* fellowship, John xiii. 8 a business ;

*
^C)j.Ppdva, 7;s, r;, parchment, 2 Tim. iv. 13. or calling. Acts xix. 27 ; (2) a piart,
p.€fjL(|>o|xai, xl/ofiai, dep.,
comj/laiu, to
to as the result of division, John xix.
censure, abs., Mark vii. 2 (W. H. 23. Li adverbial phrases, fxipos ti,
omit); Rom. ix. 19; abs. or dat., 2)artly, in some part ; ava. ixipo^, alter-
Heb. viii. 8 (W. H., ace, with dat. nately ; airb fjL^povs, partly ; e/c jxipovs,
marg. ). * individually, of persons, partially,
^€(i.\)/C-|xoipos, ou, adj., discontented, com- imperfectly, of things /card fxepos, ;

jdaining, Jude 16,* particularly, in detail, Heb. ix. 5.

|ji€v, antithetic particle, truly, indeed \it<r r]\i.^pia., as, ij, midday, noon, the
(see § 136). south, Acts viii. 26, xxii. 6.*
^cv-ovv, conj., inoreover, therefore, but. p,€<rtT€va), (Tio, to mediate, to interpose,
ft€v-ovv-'Y€, conj., yea rather, yea truly, Heb. vi. 17.*
nay but, Luke xi. 28 (W. H., ix^vodv) ; |X€<rCTTis, ov, 6,a mediator, i.e., one who
Rom. ix. 20, X. 18 Phil. iii. 8 (W. H., ; interposes between parties and recon-
fih ovv). See § 406.* ciles them, Gal. iii. 19, 20 i Tim. ;

|ji^v-Toi, conj., yet truly, certainly, never- ii. 5 mediator, or perhaps guarantee,
;

theless, however, John iv. 27. in the phrase fieaiTTjs diadrjKrjs, mediator
Y.iv(a, ixevCo, ^/j-eiva, (i)intrans. to remain, , of a covenant, Heb. viii. 6, ix. 15, xii.
to abide. So («) of i)lace, to dwell. 24.*
Matt. X. II ; to ludge, Luke xix. 5 ;
jjL€(ro-vvKTiov, iov, TO, midnight, as Luke
{b)of state, as Acts v. 4 to continue ; xi. 5.
firm and constant in, John xv. 4 to ; Meo-o-iroTaixia, as,i), Mesopotamia, the
e7idure, to last, to be permanent, i Cor. region between the Euphrates and the
iii. 14; (2) trans., toawait, icait for, Tigris.
to expect, only Acts xx. 5. p.^oros, Vyou, middle, of time or place,

p,€pCt<<^, (Tw, {i) to divide, separate, mid., in the midst of (gen.), as Matt. xxv.
to share {/J-eTa, gen.), Luke xii. 13 ;
6 ; John i. 26, xix. 18 Acts i. 18, ;

j)ass. , to be divided, to be at variance, xxvi, 13 nout., rd fiiaov, the middle

;

.Matt. xii. 25, 26; I Cor. i. 13; (2) to part, used chiefly in adverbial phrases,
 ;
)

|ie<ro-TOixov — pfroxos] VOCABULARY. 469

with prepositions (art. generally oni.), mind, ^latt. xxi. 29, 32 Heb. vii.
;

€K fjL^aov, from anion (f, av:ay ; iv ij.€(ti{}, 21 ; to repent, to feel sorrow for, regret,
among ; dva /xicrov, through the Midst, Matt, xxvii. 3 ; 2 Cor. vii. 8. Syn.
among, hcticeen ; also "with Std and ets. 40.*
|i€<rd-Toi\ov, 01', TO, a middle icall, a p,CTa-)jLop<j>6(i), Q,to change Vie form, mid.,
separation, Eph, ii. 14.* to alter ones form or aspect, ^Matt.
|jt6<r-ovpdviipLa, aros, to, mid-heaven, Rev. xvii. 2 ; ^Mark ix. 2 ; 2 Cor. iii. 18 ;

viii. 13, xiv. 6, xix. 17.* hg., to he changed in mind, Rom.

(leo-oo), Q), to he in the middle or midst, xii. 2*
John 14.*
vii. |j.€Ta-voe«, change ones views
tD, ricru, to

Mco-(rCas, ov (from Heb., anointed), smd j^U'pose, as Matt. iii. 2;

to repent,
Messiah, the same as Gr. XpiCTos, Acts viii. 22. Syn. 40.
John i. 41, iv, 25.* (icra-voia, as, 7), change of mind, re-
(iciTTOs, 77, oV, full, filed uitJi, gen. 2)cntanre, as Matt. iii. 8. Syn. 40.
(ico-Tdb), Q, to fill ; pass., to he full of, H6Ta-|v {cvv or ^vv), adv. of time, mean-
gen., Acts ii. 13.* 2chile, John iv. 31 afterwards, peril., ;

|j.€Td (akin to /i^o-os), prep., gov. the Acts xiii. 42

§ 298,(see 7, h). As
gen. and accus. Gen., ^cith, among l)rep., with gen., between, of place,
ace, after (see§ 301). In composition, JNIatt. xxiii. 35.
/lerd denotes particijmtion, nearness, (tCTa-ire'iiirw, in nud. to send for to one- ,

change, or succession (often like the self, to su/nmon, Actsx. 5, 22, 29, xi.
Latin prefix trans-, as in the ^vords 13 : xxiv. 24, 26, XXV. 3 pass., x. ;

transfer, translate). 29.*

p.€Ta-Paivw, to go or 2^f^^s over, to i)<^s H€Ta-(rTp£<|>a) (with 2nd fut. and 2nd aor.
away, to depart, Luke x. 7 Matt. ;
pass.), to tarn, to change. James iv. 9;
xi. I. Acts ii. 20; tojjervert, to con'upt. Gal.
|jL€Ta-pdXX(o, in mid., to change ones i. 7.*
mind. Acts xx viii. 6.* transform, Phil,
jjL€Ta-o-XTifJi.aTi^a), icru), to
fi€T-d-y«,to move or turn about, as iii. mid., to assume th^ appearance
21 ;

horses, ships, James iii. 3, 4.* of anyone, 2 Cor. xi. 13, 14, 15 fig., ;

fjL€Ta-8£8fa>|JLi, to im2Mrt, to communicate, to transfer, i.e., to speak by icay of

Luke iii. 1 1 ; Rom. i. 11; i Thess. accommodation, i Cor. iv. 6.*
ii. 8 ; Eph. iv.28 6 /ieraSiSoi's,
; (leTa-TtB-qiJLi, to transjwse, Acts vii. 16 ;

a distrihutor of alms, Rom. xii. to transfer, to translate, Heb. vii. 12,

8.* xi. 5 mid., to transfer oneself i.e., to
;

)LCTd-6€(ris, eojj, t}, {i) a removal, a trans- go over or to fall away, Gal. i. 6 to :

lation, Heb. xi. 5, xii. 27 ; (2) a 2)ervert, Jude 4.*

change, or substitution, Heb. xii. 12.* (jLCT-e'irtiTa, adv., afterwards, Heb. xii.
p.cT-aipw, to remove, in trans., to depart, 17;*
Matt. xiii. 53, xix. i.* ]ieT-€\<a, /xeracrxijcrw, 2nd aor. fieTeaxov,
^CTa-KoXcw, ui, in mid., to call or send to be 2>a rtakcr tf, to share in, to enjoy,
for, to invite to oneself Acts vii. 14, x. I Cor. ix. 10, 12, X. 17, 21, 30 ; Heb.
32, XX. 17, xxiv. 25."* ii. 14, V. 13, vii. 13.*
ficra-Kiveo), uj, to move aicay, pass., to he fiCTcwpC^b), in mid., to he in sn32)cnse, to
removed, Col. i. 23.* be of doubtful mind, Luke xii. 29.*
^CTa-Xa^jL^dvo), to take a share of. Acts ii. (iCT-okKco-ia, as, -q, cJuinge of abode,
46 partake, gen., 2 Tim. ii. 6 ; to
; migration (of the Babylonian exile),
ohtain (ace), Acts xxiv. 25. Matt. i. II, 12, 17.*
(iCTd-\T]4'iS ( W. H. , -\7]fi\pi.s), €u)s, i], ]Kir- |iCT-oiK£t(^, to change one's habitation, to
ticijxition ; els /jl., to he received, i Tim. migrate. Acts vii. 4, 43.*
iv. 3.* ^eToyJ\, Tjs, Tj, a 2Mrtaking, a consorting
jjieT-ciXXdorcrfc), to change one thing (ace. with, conimunion, 2 Cor. vi. 14.*
for {iv, eis) another, Rom. 25, 26.*
i. }Jt€Tox.os, ov, 6, ri, a partner, a C(rm2)aiiion,
pLcra-^Xop-ai, fjLeXrjaofjLai, 1st aor. /xcre- an associate, Heb. i. 9 Luke v. 7 a ; ;

p.€\rj6rjv, dep., pass., to change one's partaker, Heb. iii. i, 14, vi. 4. xii. 8.*
470 VOCABtTLARY. [)icrp4u — (JLiKpos

|i€Tp^(D, w, to Dieasure, Matt. vii. 2 ; met. \Lr\v, jji-qvos, 6, (i) a month, as Acts vii.
to estimate, to judge of, 2 Cor. x. 12. 20 ; (2) the new moon, as a festival,
(iCTpt^TTis, ou, 6, "a measurer," a liquid Gal. iv. 10.
measure (72 sextarii) containing nearly |jfqvv<i), to show, declare, Luke xx. 37 ;
eight and a half English gallons, firkin Joliii xi. 57; Acts xxiii. 30; i Cor. x.
(A. v., R.V.), Johnii. 6.* 28.*
licrpio-iraO^o), u), to treat with gentle- p,-?! ovK, an interrogative formula, ex-
ness, hear gently with (R.V.), Heb. pecting the answer "yes," Rom. x.
V. 2.* 18, 19 I Cor. ix. 4, 5.*
;

p.cTp£a)S, adv., moderately^ a little. Acts p,T|-iroT€, adv., no longer, Heb. ix. 17.
XX. 12.* As conj., lest ever, lest perhaps, whether
p.€Tpov. ov, Tu a, measure, of capacity, indeed, if so be, Luke iii. 15 ; John vii.
Mark iv. 24 of length, Rev. xxi. 15
; ;
26.
a measure assigned, Matt, xxiii. 32 ;
p,T| irou, lest anywJierc, Acts xxvii. 29
adv. phrases, ex /xerpov by measure, (W. H., for Rec. ij.r)irit)s).

sparingly, John iii. 34 €v /J-erpCf}, in ; pTJ-irw, adv., not as yet, not yet, Rom. ix.
due Pleasure, Eph. iv. 16. II ; Heb. ix. 8.*
(jL^T-wirov, ov, TO (<^\p), the forehead. Rev.* p-TJircos, conj., lest in any way, lest per-
(jtc'Xpi or M^xpts, adv., as prep, with gen., haps, as Acts xxvii. 29 (\V. H., fxy irov),
unto, time. Matt. xiii. 30 Mark xiii. ; 1 Thess. iii. 5,

30 ;
place, Rom. xv. 19 degree, 2 ; p.T]pds, ov, 6, the thigh. Rev. xix. 16.*
Tim. 9 ii. ; Heb. xii. 4. As conj., pT|T€, conj., differing from ovre as fxy
until, Eph. iv. 13. from ov (see § 401) ; and not, used after
jiTJ, a negative particle, not. For dis- a preceding fiy or firiTe, neifher...7ior;
tinction between /x??, ov, see § 401 ;
in Mark iii. 20, not even, W. H. read
elliptically, lest, see § 384 ; interro- /xyde.
gatively, see § 369. For the combi- p.TJTT]p, Tp6s, y, a mother; met. , a mother
nation ov fx-f), see § 377. city. Gal. iv. 26.
H'i'j-'Yc, in the phrase et 5e p.T)ye, but if p-^JTi, adv., interrogatively used, is it?
not, emphatic. whether at all ? generally expecting a
)jkT]8a)ici>s- adv., by no means. Acts x. 14, negative answer ixryr^ye not to say ; ;

xi. 8.* then? I Cor. vi. 3.

|iT]84, compare and see § 401 not
ov54, ; pT|Tis (W. H., ixy Tis), ])ron. interrog.,
even, Mark
2 i Cor. v. 1 1 generally
ii. ; ;
has or is any one J whether any one?
used after a precetling firi, and not, John iv. 33.
neither, but not, nor yet, as Matt. vi. p.TJTpa, as, 17, tlie womb, Luke ii. 23 ;

25, vii. 6. Rom. iv. 19.*

|ii]8cCs, fnjSefxia, fx-qSev (efs), differing from p-TlTp-aXiwas (W. H., -oXcjias), ov, 6, a
ovdeis as jxrj from ov (see
not one, § 401) ; matricide, i Tim. i. 9.*
no one, no person or thing, nothing. pia, feni. of eh, one.
Matt. viii. 4 Mark v. 26 Gal. vi. 3.
; ; piaivci), avQ), perf. pass, fxefxiacr /xai, to
fitiSc'-iroTC, adv., never, 2 Tim. iii. 7.* stain, 2^oUute, defile, John xviii. 28 ;

jA-qSe'-ira), adv., not yet, Heb. xi. 7.* Tit. i. 15 ; Heb. xii. 15 Jude 8.*
;

Mt]8os, 01', 6, a Mede, Acts ii. 9.* p^acrpa, aros, t6, pollution, defilement,
p.T]K£'Ti, adv. {^tl), no more, no longer, 2 Pet. ii. 20; "miasma."*
lest further. p.ia(rp.os, 01^, 6, pollution, defilement,
(i.f]KOs, ov$, TO, length, Eph. iii. 18 ; Rev. 2 Pet. ii. 10.*
xxi. 16.* p^Ylxa, aroj, to, a mixture, John xix. 39.*
|jLT)Kvva>, to make long ;mid., to grow U}), p.tYvup.1, fxi^o}, cfii^a, ])erf. ])ass. /x^/xiy/xai,
as plants, Mark iv. 27.* to mingle. Matt, xxvii. 34 ;
)ni.r, to
(jiT]XwT"<], ?)j, y, a fleece, a shee2)^s skin, Luke Rev. viii. 7, xv. 2.*
xiii. i ;

Heb. 37.*
xi. piKpos, a, ov, little, small, i.e., in size,
^Li]v, a part, of strong affirmation, N.T., Matt. xiii. 32 ([uantity, i Cor. v. 6 ; ;

only in the combination fi fiyv, assuredly, number, Luke xii. 32 time, John vii, ;

certainly, Heb. vi. 14 (W. H., el fi-^v).* S^ dignity, Matt. x. 42.

;
 ;

M LX"»]tos — |JLo vo-'Y€vy|s

J
VOCABULARY. 47l

M£Xt]tos, 7], Miletus.

ov, )jLvi](ia,aros, to, a memorial, a monu-
^iXiov, TO (Latin, mille passiuini,
I'ou, ment, a tomb, Mark v. 5 Luke xxiii. ;

i,ooo paces), a mile (about 80 yards 53 less frequent than the following.
;

less than our mile), Matt. v. 41.* jiVTi|uiov, 01*, TO, a tomb, a grave. Matt.
piL(i^(iai, ovfjLaL, dep. mid., to imitate, to viii. 28 John xi. 31.;

follow the example 2 Thess.

of, iii. 7, |iVT||n], T/s, T), remembrance, mention ; .

9 ; Heb. xiii. 7 ; 3 John 11.* fxv7)fj.rji/ troidcrdai, to make riiention,

|jii.|x-i^TT|s, od, 6, an imitator, a folloicer, 2 Pet. i. 15.*
as I Cor. iv. 16. ^VT]|JLOv6v(o, to remember {6tl), recollect,
lii^vTJo-KO) iiJJ'a-), mid., with fut. in pass. call to mind (gen. or ace), Matt. xvi.
form /xuTjcrdTjcrofiai, I aor. ifiv-qcdt^u, 9 ;Acts XX. 31 to be mindful of, ;

perf. fjL€fivT]fxat, to call to mind, to Heb. xi. 15 to make vuntion of {gen., ;

remember, gen. pers. or thing, Matt. or Trepi, gen.), Heb. xi. 22.
xxvi. 75 Luke xxiii. 42 pass. to be
; ;
, |ivT]n6<rwov, ov, TO, a 7ncmorial, honour-
remembered, to be had in mind, only able rememlrrance fame. Matt. xxvi. ,

Acts X. 31 Rev. xvi. 16. ; 13 Mark xiv. 9 Acts x. 4.*

; ;

|Xk<rc<u, Co, i7<rw, to hate, to detest, to abhor. }jiVTi<rT€v«, to ask in marriage; mid., to
Used in antith. with dyaTrdn>}, to love u'oo ; pass. , to be betrotlied, Matt. i. 1 8
less, not to lore, to slight, Matt. vi. 24 ; Luke i. 27, ii. 5.*
John xii. 25. (lO'yi-XdXost 01', one who can scarcely
jii<r6-airo-8o(ria, as, 17, recompense, as (i) speak, a stammerer, Mark vii. 32.*
reheard, Heb. x. 35, xi. 26 ; {2) punish- (1.6-yis, adv. (like yuoXts), with difficulty,
ment, Heb. ii. 2.* scarcely, hardly, 39.* Luke ix.
IxiorO-airo-SoTTis, ov, 6, a reicarder, Heb. fjLoSios, ov, 6, a dry measure (16 sextarii),
xi. 6.* containing about a peck a modius, ;

^£(r6ios, ov, as subst., a hired.

hired, bushel, Matt. v. 15 ; Mark iv. 21 ;
servant, a hireling, Luke xv. 17, 19.* Luke xi. 33.*
[iKrdos, ov, 6, hire, ivages, recompense, }jLoixaX£s, iSos, i], an adulteress, Rom.
requital. Matt. xx. 8. Used
of reicard. vii. 3 ; hg. for departure from God,
Matt. V. 12, 46 ; of punishnunt, 2 Matt. xvi. 4 ; James iv. 4.
Pet. ii. 13. |jLOixdo|i.ai, wyLtat, to commit adultery, to
|ii(rddci>, (D, a'(ra>, to hire out mid. to ; , be guilty of adultei^j. Matt. v. 32.
hire, to engage to labour for ivages, (loixcCo, as, T], adultenj, Matt. xv. 19.
Matt. XX. I, 7.* \ko\.\iV(a, aoj, to commit adultein/, abs.
|jLC(rd(i)|jia, aros, to, hire, rent; met., (ace. Matt. v. 28); fig. of forsaking
anything rented, as a house, Acts God, Rev. ii. 22.
xxviii. 30.* fioixos, ov, 6, an adulterer, Luke xviii.
|iko-6(i)Tds> ov, 6, servant, one v:ho a hired 1 1 ; I Cor. vi. 9 ; Heb. xiii. 4 ; James
serves for icages, Mark i. 20; John x. ^iv. 4(not W. H.).*
12, 13.* [jLoXis,adv. (like /J-oyis), with difficulty^
MtruXTjvi], 77s, r], Mitylene, the capital of scarcely,hardly. Acts xiv. 18, xxvii.
Lesbos, Acts xx. 14.* 7, 8, 16 ; Rom. V. 7 i Pet. iv. ;

MixaVjX, 6 (Heb., who is like God?), 18.*

Michael, an archangel, Jude 9 Rev. ; MoXdx, 6 (Heb.), Moloch, Acts vii. 4^,
xii. 7.* LXX.*
(ivd, as, 7}, cC mina, silver moneys 100 (loXvvw, wtD, to pollute, Cor.
to defile, 1
5pdxp-ai, or about 3/. 155. ; rendered viii. 7 ; Rev. iii. 4, xiv. 4.*
pound, Luke xix. 13-25.* p-oXvo-pios, ov, 6, pollution, defilement^
uvdo|xai. See /xi/JLvrjaKU}. 2 Cor. vii. I.*
Mvdo-ftjv, wfos, 6, Mnason, Acts xxi. jw)n<j>ir), ^s, complaint, ground of com-
7),

16.* jjlaint, Col. iii. 13.*

pvcCo, as, 17, remembrance, recollection, jiovii, 77$, 7), a place of abode, a dwelling-
Phil. i. 3 ; I Thess. iii. 6 ; fiveiav jilace, John xiv. 2, 23.*
iroLciadaL, to mention, to bear in mind, |xovo-7€VT|s, ^$, gen. ovs, only begotten,
Rom. i. 9. Luke vii. 12, viii. 42, ix. 38 ; Heb.
4:1-2 VOCABUIiARY. [(idvos — Naljap^i

xi. 17 ; of Christ, John i. 14, 18, p.vpioi, at, a, ten thousand. Matt, xviii.
iii. 16, 18 ; I John iv. 9.* 24 ;
ixvploL, iai, ia, innumerahlc, i Cor.
)i($vos, 77, ov, only, alone, single, Lnke iv. 15, xiv. 19.*
xxiv, 12, 18 ; solitary, ivithout com- (xvpov, 01;, TO, a perfumed ointm,ent. Matt,
pany or help, ]\Iark vi. 47 ; forsaken, xxvi. 7.
desolate, John viii. 29 adv., (xbvov, ; Mv(ria, as, y], Mysia, Acts xvi. 7, 8.*
only. |j,vo-TTJpiov, lov, rb, a mystery, anything
|xov-o(}>6a\(jLos, having hut one eye, Matt, hidden, a secret, Matt. xiii. 11 Rom. ;

xviii. 9; Mark 47.* ix. xi. 25. In classical Greek, ra /xvarripia

|jLovo(D, u), to leave alone ; pass. , to he left are hidden rites and knoicledge, revealed
alone or desolate, i Tim. v. 5.* only to the initiated (like the Masonic
|xop(f>T], -^s, Tj, outward ap2')earance, form, secrets) hence the word is used in
;

shape, Mark xvi. 12 ; Phil. ii. 6, 7. N.T. of the truths of the Gospel as
Syn. 56.* mysteries partly hidden, partly re-
|iop(|>ob), tD, cicrw, to form, to fashion, Gal. vealed, Eph. iii. 9 ; Col. i, 26, iv. 3 ;

iv. 19.* 1 Tim. iii. 16.

|iop(j)a)o-is, 6WS, 7], formation, external |xu«irdt<», to ivink, to he dim-sighted, 2
appearaiice, 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; form, rule, Pet. i. 9.*
system, Rom. ii. 20.* ^(oXto\)/, wTTos, 6, the mark of a stripe;
*
[ioo-xo-TTOie'co, (3, ^0/or»i ^/tc image of a met. , 'pnii^, anguish, i Pet, ii. 24.
calf, Acts vii. 41.* p.(i>[JLdo|xai, uifxaL, dep,, mid. and
aor.,
(iotrxos, 01;, b, 7], a- calf, a young hullock, pass., to hlariw, to find fault with,
Luke XV. 23, 27, 30; Heb. ix. 12, 19; 2 Cor. vi. 3, viii. 20.*
Rev. iv. 7.* p.wp.os, ov, b, a s2)ot, a hlemish ; met.
p,ovo-iKos, 77, bv, skilled in music, a disgrace, 2 Pet. ii. 13.*
7nusician, Rev, xviii. 22.* litopaivb), avQ>, to infatuate, to make
jioj^Gos, ov, 6,tvearisome labour, toil, with foolish, I Cor. i. 20; pass., to become
pain and sorrow, 2 Cor. xi. 27 ; i Thess. foolish, Rom. i. 22 ; to become insipid,
ii. 9 ; 2 Thess. iii. 8.* tasteless, like spoiled salt. Matt. v. 13 ;
*
p.v€Xds, ov, 6, the nnarroio, Heb. iv. 12.* Luke xiv. 34.
p,v€'(«), cD, to instruct, to initiate into, Phil. p.(i)pia, 7], folly, absurdity,
as, contempt-
iv. 12.* iblcness, i Cor. i. 18, 21, 23, ii. 14, iii.
|jiv6os, ou, 6, (i ^cord ; hence, a tale, fahle, 19.*
"myth," I Tim. i. 4, iv. 7 2 Tim.
; jAwpo-Xo^Ca, as, ^, foolish talking, babble,
iv. 4 ; 2 Pet. i.
Tit. i. 14 ;
16.* Eph. V. 4.*
[ivKoioiiai, low, to helloiv, as a
cD//.at, to p,<wpds, a, bv, stiqyid, foolish, Matt. vii.
bull to roar, as a lion. Rev. x, 3.*
; 26, xxiii. 17, 19 (on Matt. v. 22,
\LVKTr]pil<a, to contract the nostrils in see § 153, ii.) to fucpbv, foolishness, ;

contempt, to moek, sneer, or deride. foolish thing, i Cor. i. 25, 27.

Gal. vi. 7.* Mft)<rf]S (W. H., Moji^o-tJs), ^ws, dat. et
(ivXiKos, 17, 6^, pertaining to a viill ; with or 77 ace. -Ijv (once ^a, Luke xvi. 29 ;
;

Xt^os, millstone, Mark ix. 42 (not AV. H., -qv), b, Moses, met., the books
W, H.) ; Luke
H.).* xvii. 2 (AV. of Moses, the Pentateuch, Luke xvi.
jivXtvos, in sense of foregoing, Rev. xviii. 29 2 Cor. iii. 15.
;

^21 (W. H.).*

^vXos; ov, b, a millstone, as Matt, xviii. 6.
(ivXwv, Civos, b, a mill-house, the place N.
where corn was ground, Matt, xxiv, 41
(W. H., ixv\os).* N, V, Nv, Nu, n, the thirteenth letter. A&
(JLvpids, a5os, 17, a myriad, ten thousand, a numeral, v' = 50 ; p, = 50,000.
a vast multitude, Luke xii. i Acts ; Naao-orwv, 6 (Heb.), Naasson, Matt. i.

xix. 19, xxi. 20 Heb. xii. 22 Jude ; ; 4 Luke iii. 31.*

;

14 Rev. V. II, ix. 16,*

;
Nayyai, 6 (Heb.), Naggce, Luke iii. 25.*
livpC^o, o'o;, to anoint for burial, I\Iark Nal^ap^T, -pir or -pi (W. H. have all the
xiv. 8.* forms), 77, Nazareth,
 y

l^Ta^apTivos — VT]<rT6Ca
J
VOCABULARY. 473

NatapT]voS) ov, 6, a Nazarene, as ^lark vcKpoxris, ewj, rj, death, a being put to
i. 24. death, 2 Cor. iv. 10 deadness, impo- ;

Na^wpaios, 01', 6, a Xazarcnc, an appel- tency, Rom. iv. 19.*

lation of Christ. Christians are called V€0|JiT|via. See vovfx-qvla.
61Nafwpatoi, Acts xxiv. 5. V€'os, a, ov, (i) new, fresh, ^latt. ix. 17 ;

NaGdv, b{]:\eh.),Xathan, Luke iii. 31.* new^ in disposition and character (2) ;

NaGavaTiX, 6, XatJumad, probably the young, of persons, Tit. ii. 4. Com par.,
same a,s Jjartholomew. veJjTepo^, younger, Luke xv. 12, 13.
vai, adv., altirniing, yes, Matt. ix. 28 ; Syn. 26.
even so, ]\latt. xi. 26 ; Luke x. 21 ; V€o<ro-os, ov, 6, the young of birds, a
Rev. xxii. 20 ; yea, strongly affirming, youngling, a chicken, Luke ii. 24.*
Luke vii. 26. vc6tt]s, "qTo^, 77, youth, youtltfulncss,
Natv, Kain, Luke vii. ii.*
7], Luke xviii. 21 ; i Tim. iv. 12.
vaos, ov, 6 {valu}), a temple, a shrine, or v€6-<j>vTos, nevjly planted; fig.,
ov, a
small model of a temple, the abode of recent convert, novice^ "neophyte," I

deity, pretended, Acts xix. 24 the ; Tim. iii. 6.*

temple, Matt, xxiii. 16 ; used of Jesus vcvo), <T03, to nod ; so, to beckon, to signify
Christ, John ii. 19, 20 ; of Christians John xiii. 24 ; Acts xxiv. 10.*
generally, i Cor. iii. 16 ; 2 Cor. vi. V€<}>€Xt], 7;s, Tj, a cloud.
16. Syn. 35. N€<|>0aX€ip,, 6 (Heb.), Naphthali, Matt.
Naov^., 6 (Heb. ), Nahum, Luke iii. 25 iv. 14 ; Rev. vii. 6.*
(not the prophet).* V€(}>os, oi'j, TO, a cloud; met., a initl-
vdpSos, ov, 7), nard, spikenard, a costly titude, a great comjjany, Heb. xii. i.*
ointment, Mark xiv. 3 ; John xii. 3.* vc(|>pdsi ov, 0, the kidney, plur., the reins,
NapK^o-o-os, ov, 6, XarcissKs, Rom. xvi. used (as Heb. for the secret thoughts,
)

II.* desires, and ati'ections, Rev. ii. 23.*

vav-aY^w, w {dyvv/xL), to make shi^ncreck, vew-Kopos, ov, 0, 7] {vaos and Kop^w, to
to be shipwrecked, 2 Cor. xi. 25 ; fig., siceep), "temple-sweeper," a temple-
I Tim. i. 19.* keeper, a designation of the people of
vav-KX-rfpos, ov, 6, a ship-master, or Ephesus, Acts xix. 35.*
o^vner, Acts xxvii. 11.* vcwTcpiKos, TJ, bv, youthful, juvenile, 2
vavs, vib}^, ace. vavv, t], a ship, Acts Tim. ii. 22.*
xxvii. 41.* V€«T£pos, a, ov (comp. of vios, which see),
vavTi]s, 01', 6, a sailor. Acts xxvii. 27, younger, inferior in rank, more humble,
30 Rev. XV iii. 17.*
; Luke xxii. 26.
Naxwp, 6 (Heb.), Nalwr, Luke iii. 34.* VT], adv., of affirmative swearing, by,
vcavias, ov, 6, a young man, a youth, with ace, I Cor. xv. 31.*

Acts vii. 58, XX. 9, xxiii. 17, 18, 22 VTjGo), to sjnn, Matt. vi. 28 ; Luke xii. 27.*
(notW. H.).* vrjiridtw, to be like a child, I Cor. xiv.
V€avi<rKos, ov, 6, a young man, Matt. xix. 20.*
20 plur. of soldiers, ^lark xiv. 5 1
;
,
; VT^irtos,ia, lov, infantile; as subst., an
of the middle stage in the divine life, infant, a babe, a child, iNlatt. xxi. 16 ;
I John ii. 13, 14. I Cor. xiii. 1 1 ; used of an age below

NtdiroXis, em, ?), Keapolis, Acts xvi. 11.* manhood. Gal. iv. i ; fig., oi unlearned,
Necfidv ("\V. H., 'Saifxav), 6 (Heb.), Xaa- unenlightened persons, Matt. xi. 25 ;
man, Luke iv. 27.* Rom. ii. 20. Syn. 62.
vcKpds, d, ov, dead, (i) lit., as Matt. xi. Nt]P€vs, ^ojs, 6, Kerens, Rom. xvi. 15.*
5 oi v€Kpoi, the dead, generally
; (2) ; NripC, 6 (Heb.), Keri, Luke iii. 27.*
fig., dead, spiritually, Eph. ii. i dead ; vr\a-iov,ov, t6 (dim. of vrjaos), a small
to (dat.), Rom. vi. ii inactive, ; in- island, an islet, Acts xxvii. 16.*
opieraiive, Rom. vii. 8. Syn. 54. vfjo-os, ov, swim), an island.
7) {vi(j}, to
vcKpdo), tD, to 2nd to death ; fig., to mortify, VTio-Ttia, as, a fast, Matt.
7), fasting,
to deprive of ^;o?t"cr, to render weak xvii. 21 ("W. H. onut) Acts xiv. 23 ; ;

and impotent, Rom. iv. 19 ; Col. iii. tho day of aionenicnt, tlie chief Jewish
5 Heb. xi. 12. Syn. 54.*
; fast-day, Acts xxvii. 9.
474 VOCABULARY. [vi]crT€vw vov-[i.'t\vla

VTjorT€vc«), ffu, to abstain from food, to in latv, Tit. iii. 13 « teacher of the ;

faM, I\ratt. vi. 16-18. Mosaic law. Matt. xxii. 35.

Vno-Tis, los, plur. vrjareis, 6, 17, fasting, vofJttfiws, adv., laufully, agreeably to rule,
Matt. XV. 32 ; Mark viii. 3.* I Tim. i. 8 2 Tim. ii. 5.*
;

Vi]4>dXios or -Xeos, ou, sober-minded, v6[it<r|JLa, aros, t6, money, coin, whose
temperate ; Tim.iii. 2, 11 ; Tit. ii. 2.*
I value is settled by law, ^latt. xxii.
VTJ(|>cD, xj/u}, to be sober, temperate, fig., 19.*
I Thess. V. 6, 8. vopio-SiSdo-KaXos, ov, 6, a teacJier or in-
N£"y€p, 6 (Lat.), Niger, Acts xiii. i.* terpreter of tlic law, Luke v. 17 ; Acts
NiKavup, opos, 6, Nicanor, Acts vi. 5.* V. 34; I Tim. i. 7.*
viKao), a), Tjo-w, i!o prevail, abs. Rev. iii. , vo(io-9€(r£a, as, i), legislation, the laics
21 ; to conquer, overcome (ace), Luke given, i.e., the Mosaic law, Rom.
xi. 22 ; John xvi. 33. ix. 4.*
vCkt], 77s, 77, victory, i John v. 4.* vofio-OeWw, 03, to sanction, to establish for
NiKd-8T]|ios, Nicodcmus, John iii. i.
01', 6, a law, Hel3. viii. 6 pass., to Jmve a ;

NiKoXa'txTjs, a follower of Nicolaus,

01', 6, law established, Heb. vii. 11.*
Nicolaitan (probably a Greek equiva- vo(io-0^Tr]s, ov, 6 {Tldryxi), a law-giver^
lent for Balaam), Rev. ii. 6, 15,* legislator, James iv. 12.*
NiKo-Xaos, ov, 6, Nicolaus, Acts vi. 5 {v^fJLU), to apjjortion), a law,
vd|JLos, ov, 6
(not to be confounded with preced.).* an a decree, a statute, Luke ii.
edict,
NtKo-iroXis, ews, •^, Nicopolis, Tit. iii. 12. 22 a. standard of acting or judging,
;

Several cities of the name existed ; this Rom. iii. 2"] a written law, Rom. ii.
;

was probably in Macedonia.* 14 the Mosaic economy. Matt. v. 18

; ;

viKOSi ov$, TO, victory; els v?kos, from Rom. X. 4 the Christian dispensation
;

LXX., to a victorious consummation, Rom. xiii. 8

or doctrines, Gal. vi. 2
; ;

utterly, Matt. xii. 20 ; i Cor. xv. 54. met., the books containing the
for
55> 57-,* Mosaic law, i.e., the five books of
Niv€vt, 7} (Heb.), Nineveh, Luke xi. 32 Moses, Matt. xii. 5 and for the Old ;

(W. H. read following).* Testament generally, John x. 34. On

NtvevC'rr]s(W. H.,-etT7;s), ov, b,a Xincvite, the article Avith vo/jlos, see § 234.
j\latt. xii. 41 ; Luke xi. 30, 32 vdos. See vovs.
(W. H.).* votTfta, Q), to be sick ; fig., to have a dis-
VMTTTip, Tjpos, 6, a basin for loashing, eased appetite or craving for, irepL
*
hands or feet, John xiii. 5. (ace), I Tim. vi. 4.*
vCirrci), xpo), to ivash (ace), mid., to wash v6(rr\[i.a, aros, to, a, disease, a sickness^
oneself, ace. of part, as Mark vii. 3. John V. 4 (W. H. omit).*
Syn. 17. vd<ros, ov, 6, a sickness, a disease, a dis-
vo€w, u>, understand,
-qco}, to to perceive, tcmper. Matt. iv. 23, 24.
abs., or with ace, or 'otl. vo<r(rtd, as, rj, a brood of young birds,
vot]p.a, aros, to, (i) a thought, purpose, Luke xiii. 34.*
device, 2 Cor. ii. ii, x. 5 ; Phil. iv. 7 ; voo-o-iov, 01', t6, a young bird, ]\Iatt.

(2) th^ mind, i.e., the 2auierstanding xxiii. 37.*

or intellect, 2 Cor. iii. 14, iv. 4, xi. 3.* vo<r(rds. See veocrcos.*
v69os,7;, ov, bastard, spurious, Heb. xii. 8.* vo<r<j>£t<»>, in mid. , to secrete for oneself, to
vo^T|, 77s, 7) {vifiw, to apportion, as pasture purloin. Acts v. 2, 3 Tit. ii. 10.* ;

to cattle), (i) pasturage, John x. 9 ;

voTos, 01', 6, the south wind, Luke xii.
(2) met., a feeding, spreading, as of a 55 the southern quarter, Luke xi. 31.
;

gangrene, 2 Tim. ii. 17.* vov-Oco-fa, as, i}, a warning, admonition,

V0)i.iX,(a, (rw (vd/ios), (i) to be wont, to do counsel, I Cor. x. 1 1 ; Eph. vi. 4 Tit. ;

by custom, only Acts xvi. 13 (but see iii. 10.*

W. H. and R. V. ) (2) to think, to reckon, ;

vov-0£T€o), u), to warn, to admonish, to
to expect, as the result of thinking. counsel, Acts xx. 31.
Matt. V. 17, XX. 10. vov-[Lr\via (W. H., veo-), as, ^7, the neio
vojjLiKos, 77, 6v, pertaining to lav),' legal. moon, or month, as a festival, Col. ii.

Tit. iii. 9 ; as subst., a j^crson skilled 16.*

 —

VOVV-€X"S" ^] VOCABULA'Rf. 475

vow-€X«*S> adv., iinderstandingly, icischj, |€vta, as, 17, hosjntaJity, entertainment, a

judiciously, Mark xii. 34.* lodging, Acts xxviii. 23; Philem. 22.*
vovs, or vob%, vov, vot, voDv, 6, the mind, ^tviX,(i}, (Tw, {i) to receive as a guest (ace),

i.e., the liiidcrstanding or intellect, Acts X. 18, 23, 32, xxviii. 7 Heb. ;

Luke xxiv. 45 ; Rom. xii. 2 ; Phil. iv. xiii. 2 pass., to be entertained, to

7. Hence, any afectioii of the mind — ;

lodge as a guest u'ith, Acts x. 6. xxi.

as moiles of thought inclinations, or 16; (2) to ap2)car strange to (ace),
dispositions, Rom. xiv. 5 ; i Cor. i. 10; Acts xvii. 20; pass., to think strangely
2 Thess. ii. 2 ; more ^\'idely, the rational of, to be surprised at (dat. ), i Pet. iv.
soul, with powers and affections,
its 4. 12.*
Rom. vii. 25. Syn. 55. |€vo-8ox€'«, w, to entertain guests, to
Nvp^ds, a, 6, Xijmphas, Coh iv. 15.* 2)ractisc hospitality, i Tim. v. 10.*
vvp.<|>t], 77s, 17, a bride. Rev. xviii. 23 ; a |€vos, 17, ov, strange, foreign. Acts xvii.
daughter-in-law. Matt. x. 35. 18 Pet. iv. 12 ; with gen., Eph. ii.
; I

wp|>£os, ov, 6, a bi'idegroam, John iii. 29. 12

; as subst., a stranger, a guest, a
wp.(^wv, wi'oj, 6, a bridal chamber; oi host, Matt. xxv. 35-44 Rom. xvi. 23. ;

viol Tov vvfi(pu)vos, the so7is of the bridal |«m^S, ov, 6 (the Latin sextariu.s), a
chamber, bridesmen. Matt. ix. 15 ^lark ; measure, about a pint and a half
ii. 19 ; Luke v, 34.* English met., ; a cup or pitcher, of
vvv and vvvl, adv., (i) of time, iio^v, i.e., any size, Mark vii. 4, 8.*
the actually present ; noic, in relation ^poivo), avC), 1st aor., act., i^rjpdva ;

to time just past, just noio, even nmr ; I aor., Jftass., i^rjpdvdriv ; perf., pass.,
vow, in relation to future time, just e^TjpafjL/xai (3 s., i^ripavTai, Mark xi. 21 ),
at hand, even nov:, immediately ; 6, 17, to dry., to make dn/, to icither, James
TO, vvv, tJic prcsent,\\\\\\ subst. or(neut.) i. II ;
pass., to be or become dry,
without ; (2) of logical connection, witJiered, Matt. xiii. 6 ; to be dried up.
iw^c, i.e., ".seeing that things are so," Rev. xvi. 12 to be ripened, as corn. ;

2 Cor. vii. 9 ; iio^c tJien, i.e., implying Rev. xiv. 15 to pine away, Mark ix. 18. ;

the rise of one thing from another, |i]p6s, d, ov, dnj, v:ithered, of a tree, Luke
1 Cor. xiv. 6. (3) In commands and xxiii. 31 ; of a useless limb, Matt,
appeals, vvv is emphatic, Matt, xxvii. xii. 10 ; Mark iii. 3 (W. H. ) ; Luke vi.
42 James iv. 13, at this instant.
; 6, 8 ; John v. 3 ; of land, Heb. xi.
vv|, vvkt6s, i], the night, night-tiDic, lit. ; 29 ; 7} ^rjpd (sc. yrj), dry land, Matt,
often fig., a time of darkness and xxiii. 15.*
ignorance^ Rom. xiii. 12 ; i Thess. |vXivos, iv-q, ivov, wooden, 2 Tim. ii. 20 ;
Rev. ix. 20.*
vv<r<rft), ^a>, to stab, to pierce, John xix. ^vXov, 01', TO, wood, e.g., timber in build-
34-* ing, I Cor. iii. 12 or for burning ; ;

WfnaXoi, ^w, nod, as asleep, to be

to anything made of wood, e.g., the stocks.
drovjsy. Matt. xxv. 5 fig., to delay, ; Acts xvi. 24 a staff, Matt. xxvi. 47, ;

2 Pet. ii. 3.* 55 a cross or gibbet. Acts xiii. 29

; ;

vvx^-^IAtpov, ov, TO, a day and a night, Gal. iii. 13 n living tree. Rev. ii. 7.;

twenty-four hours, 2 Cor. xi. 25.* |vpdii), a, ri<T(j}, perf. pass, i^vprj/nai, to
N«€, 6 (Heb.), Noah. shear or shave, e.g., the locks and the
Vb>8p<$s, d, 6v, slow, dull, stupid, Heb. v. beard. Acts xxi. 24; i Cor. xi. 5, 6.*
II, vi. 12.*
vwTos, 01', 6, the back of men or animals,
Rom. xi. 10.* o.

O, o, 8 (iiKpdv, omlcron, short 0, the

a- fifteenth letter. As a numeral, 0' = 70 ;
0^=70,000.
B> i> i^i ^h the double letter a; ( = 75, ks, 6, 71, TO, the definite article, the, origin-
or X5)> the fourteenth letter. As allv demonstrative. For its uses, see
numeral, ^' = 60 ; t, = 6o,cxx). §§ 193-234.
476 VOCABULARY. [o-ySoTiKOVTa — oiK-ovpos

o-ySoTlKovTa, num., indecl., eighty. Acts X. 7 ; Rom. xiv, 4 ; i Pet. ii. iS,
^-ySoos, 77, ov, ord., eighth ; on 2 Pet. ii. Syn, 61.*
5, see § 331. oiKco), (i), Tjaio, to inhabit, to dwell in,
67KOS, ov, 6, a iceight, an impediment, Rom. viii. 9 ; i Tim. vi. 16.
Heb. xii. i, Syn. 68.* ol'KT]p,a, aros, to, a dwelling, used of a
iJSc, Tjde, Tode, demon, proii., this, that prison, Acts xii. 7.*
(here). See § 339. oiKT|TT|piov, a domicile, habitation,
Oil, TO,
oScvb), to 2MSS along a ivay, to journey, 2 Cor. V, 2 Jude 6.* ;

Luke X. 33.* olKia, as, (i) a hmcse ; (2) met,, a

17,

oS-T^Yc'cD, cD, -qaw, to lead along a way, to household, a family, goods, i.e., a house
conduct, to guide, Matt. xv. 14 ; Luke and all that is in it. Syn, 61.
vi. 39 John xvi. 13 Acts viii. 31
; ; ;
oUiaKos, OV, 6, one of a family, Avhether
Rev. vii. 17.* child, relative, or servant, ^latt. x.
oS-T^Yos, ov, 6, a leader. Acts i. 16 fig,, ;
^25, 36.*
of instructors, Matt. xv. 14, xxiii. olKO-8c(r'rroTe(o, Co, to govern a household,
16, 24 Kom. ii. 19.*
; I Tim. 14.*
V.
oSoi-iropeci), Co, to travel, to j^ursue a way. olKO-8€<nrdTT]s, ov, 6, a householder, a
Acts X. 9.* head of a family. Matt, x, 25.
o8oi-7ropCa,as, a journey, a journey-
t], olKO-8o|Jk€'a), a), to erect a building, build,
ing, Johniv. 6; 2 Cor. xi. 26.* Luke xiv, 30 fig., of the l)uilding up
;

686s, ov, i], (i) a way, a road, a highway. of character, to build uj), edfy, i Cor.
Matt. ii. 12 ; (2) a going, a jrrogress, X. 23 to embolden, i Cor. viii. 10.
;

^lark vi. 8 ; (3) ft journey, a day's or olKo-8op.T|, 77s, Tj {5efx(x}), the act of building
a Sabbath day's, Luke ii. 44 Acts i. ; a building, lit,, Matt. xxiv.
structure,
12 (4) fig., manner of action, method
;
I of the spiritual body, 2 Cor. v. i ;
;

of 2»'occeding, Acts xiii. 10 Matt. ; of the church, Eph. ii. 21 ; met,,

xxi. 32 especially (5) the Christian
; edification, sjnritual advancement, Rom.
way, Acts ix. 2 2 Pet. ii. 2 (6) used ; ;
xiv, 19, XV, 2,
of Christ himself, the IFay, John xiv. 6. olKo-8ofiCa, as, 17, edification, i Tim. i,
4
680VS, oSjvtos, 6, a tooth. Matt. v. 38. (W, H., oLKouofxia).*
o8vvda), w, in mid. and pass., to be in an olKo-8dp.os, ov, 6, a builder. Acts iv, 1

agony, to be tormented, to be greatly (W. H,),*

grieved or distressed, Luke ii. 48, xvi. olKo-vofJi^cD, u), steward, Luke xvi, 2,
to be
24, 25 Acts XX. 38.*
; olKovo|Jiia, management of family
OS,
oSvvT), 77 J, 17, ^>ai«, distress, of body or afiairs, stewardship, Luke xvi. 2-4
mind, Rom. ix. 2 I Tim. vi. 10.* ;
dispensation, i Cor. x. 17.
68vp^ds, 01;, 6, lamentation, wailing, olKo-vd(ios, 01' {p^fxu}), a house-manager,
Matt. ii. 18 ; 2 Cor. vii. 7. Syn. 20."* a steward, Luke xvi. 1-8 ; of the
'Ollas, ov, Uzziah, Matt. i. 8.* Christian stewardshi}), i Cor, iv, 1,2;
6X,<a, intrans. , to stink, be offensive, John I Pet, iv, 10 Tit, i. 7, ;

xi. 39.* oIkos, 01', 0, a house, a building, for any

60€v, adv. whence, of place or source.
, purpose (gen,); met., a family resi-
6Q6vr\, Tjs, 7], a linen cloth; hence, a sheet. dent in one house, a family perpetuated
Acts X. II, xi. 5.* by succession, the house of God, i.e.,
oGoviov, 01', t6 (dim. of odovr]), a liiien the temple tlie family of God, i.e.,
;

swathe, a bandage, Luke xxiv. 12. the church, Syn. 61.

ot8a {fid-), Attic ])lur. (lafxev) tore (Heb. olKovp,€vi], 77s, pres. })art., pass., fern, of
xii. 17*), i'oraa-t (Acts xxvi. 4*), I know oLKiu) (sc. 7^), tlie inhabited land, or
(see 5; 103, 4, and Syn. 4). icorld ; (i) the liovuin empire; (2)
oiKCiaKos. See oliaauos. prob. the Syrian 2)rovince, Luke ii. i ;
oiKcios, a, ov, domestic, l)elonging to a house. (3) the world at large; (4) met., tfie
Gal. vi. 10 Eph. ii. 19; i Tim. v. 8.* inhabitants of the world; (5) a state,
;

olKCTcia, as, 77, household (W. H.), Matt. or economy, Heb, ii, 5, Syn. 58.
XXIV, 45.* olK-ovpds, ov, 6, 7) {ovpos, keej^cr), a house-
oUfcrT]s, ov, 6, a domestic, Luk« xvi. 13; manager, Tit. ii. 5 ("W. H., oiKovpyCs).*
olKTctpW 6|JL01<{t»^s] VOCABULARY. 477

olKTcipo), Tjcw, to pity, to have compassion, 6Xo-KavT(l)(JL0^ to {Kaiu}), a W'hole

aroj,
Rom. ix. 15; LXX.* burnt- offering, the whole being con-
oiKTipfids, ov, 6, comjmssion, mercy, Rom. sumed, "holocaust," Mark xii. 33;
xii. I ; 2 Cor. i. 3 ; Pliil. ii. i ; Col. Heb. x. 6, 8.*
iii. 12 ; Heb. x. 28. Syn. 41.* oXo-KXrfpCa, as, i], perfect soundness. Acts
oIkt^PIJlwv, ovos, b. t), 'pitiful, compassion- iii. 16.*

ate, merciful, Luke vi. 36 ; James v. 6Xd-KX-r]pos, ov, luhole in every part, sound,
II.* perfect, i Thess. v. 23 ; James i. 4.
ot|xai. See otofxaL. Syn. 27.*
olvo-iroTTiS) 01', 6, a wine-hihher, one icho oXoXvi^w, as from the cry, o\-o\ ! to howl,
drinks to excess, Matt. xi. 19 Luke ; to yell, to lament aloud, James v. i.*
vii. 34.* 6X0S, T), ov, all, the whole (see § 225) ;

olvos, ov, 6, wine, Mark ii. 22 ; met., duil\.,-<j3s,ivholly, altogether; with n eg.
the vine. Rev. vi. 6 ; fig., of tliat preced., not at all.
Avhich excites or inflames, Rev. xiv. oXo-tcXtjs, e's, perfect, complete, I Thess.
10, xvii. 2. V. 23. Syn. 27.*
oivo-<|>\\rYia, as, 17 (0\jyw, to he hot), the 'OXv|nrds, a, 6, Olympas, Rom. xvi.
state of being heated with wine, drunken- 15.*
ness, I Pet. iv. 3.* 6Xvv0os, ov, 6, an unseasonable fg (one
otofiai and olfxai, to think, to sujypose, which, not ripening in due time, hangs
ace. and inf. , or on, John xxi. 25 ;
till neai'ly winter). Rev. vi. 13.*
Phil. i. 16 ; James i. 7.* o^Ppos, 01', 6, a heavy rain, Luke xii.
olos, a, ov, rel. pron., correl. to tolovtos,
of what kind, such as. 6|i€£po|iai, to long for, i Thess. ii. 8
oiia. See (pepio. (W. H.).*
OKvc'b), a), fiacj, to he slothful, to delay, to 6|JiiXe(i>, aj, Tjaw, to he in comjMny with,
be loth. Acts ix. 38.* to associate with (dat. ), to talk witfi
oKVT^pos, a, ov, slothful, indolent, tedious, {irpbs,ace), Luke xxiv. 14, 15; Acts
Matt. XXV. 26 ; Rom. xii. 1 1 ; Phil. XX. II, xxiv. 26.*
iii. I.* 6p.iXCa, as, 17, intercourse, converse, dis-
oKTa-i^p-epos, ov, 6, ij, of or belonging to course, I Cor. XV. 33; "homily."*
tfie eighth day, Phil. iii. 5.* 6)iiXos, ov, 6, a crowd, company, Rev.
oKTw, num., indecl., eight. xviii. 17 (not W. H.).*
5Xe6pos, ov, 6, destruction, 2^crdition, opLfX^I* '/^j ^> ^ mist, 2 Pet. ii. 17
muery, i Cor. v. 5 ; i Thess. v. 3 ; (\\. H.).*
2 Tliess. i. 9 ; I Tim. vi. 9.* Sfifta, aTos, TO, an eye. Matt. xx. 34
oXi-yoirio-rCa, 17, little faith, Matt. xvii. (\\\ H.) ; Mark viii. 23.*
^
20 (W. H.).* 5|JLKU|iiand dfivvu}, ofibau) (see § 116, 3),
oXi-yo-irnTTos, ov, 6, ij, of little faith, to swear, to take an oath, Mark xiv. 71 ;
Alatt. vi. 30. to pjromise with an oath, ^lark vi. 23.
6\iyos, r), ov, (l) little, small, brief; (2) 6p.o-9v|xa8dv, adv., with one mind, unani-
in plur., feiv, sometimes with gen. ; mously, with one accord, only in Acts
(3) neut. as adv., oXiyov, of time, and Rom. xv. 6.
50071; of space, a little ivay ; (3) with ofJLoidto), a<j), to be like, Mark xiv. 70
prepositions preced. in various phrases, (not W. H.).*
as eV oXiyij}, in a short time, or witfc ofioio-Tradris, oCs,6, t), being affected like
little trouble, Acts xxvi. 28. another (dat. ), having like passions or
oXi-yd-xIruxos, adv., small-souled, faiiit- feelings, Acts xiv. 15 ; James v. 17.*
hearted, i Thess. v. 14.* iifioios, Ota, similar to, re-
01.0V, like,
dXiY-topco), w, to make little of, to despise sembling (dat.), of equal rank, Matt,
(gen.), Heb. xii. 5 ; LXX.* xxii. 39. Once with gen., John viii.
6Xo0peuT^s, ov, 6, a destroyer, i Cor. x. 55. Adv., -ws, in like manner, like-
10.* wise.
6Xo9pcv(o, to destroy, cause to perish, Heb. ojioidrqs, -qTos, 7], likeness, similitude,
xi. 28.* Heb. iv. 15, vii. 15.*
478 VOCABULARY. [6)ioi6(i> — oirrao-la

ofioioo), w, (i) to render like; pass., to he dvCvT]p.i, to be of use to ; mid. aor., opt.,
like, or to resemble, Matt. vi. 8, xiii. ouaifxijv, may I have help or joy frum,
24 ; Acts xiv. II ; (2) to likeii, to conn- Philem. 20.*
2Mre, ]\Iatt. vii. 24 ; Mark iv. 30 ; with 5vo|xa, aros, to, a name, almost always
ace. and dat. of persons; in N.T., as in O.T., the
6)Jkoi(d|JLa, aros, to, likeness, similitude, name of a person is a mark of what he
Rom. i. 23, V. 14, V 5, viii. 3 ; Phil, himself is ; the name expresses the
ii. 7 ; Rev. ix. 7.* character, Matt. i. 21 Mark iii. 16, ;

b\iol(a<ri<s, ews, 17, likeness, resemblance, v. 9 Luke i. 31 hence the expres-

; :

James iii. 9.* sions TTOtetv Ti eirl ry ovbfxaTi., iv r<^

op.o-Xo'yca), tD, ijcra;, 1st aor. w/xoXoyrjaa, ovbfxaTL, Sia tov ovofiaros ; the name is
to speak the same thing; hence, {i) to often introduced by ovofxaTi, by name,
confess, in the sense of conceding or once by ToCvo/na fr6 6vo/xa], Matt,
admitting, generally with on (2) to ;
xxvii. 57 ; fame, reputation, Eph. i.
profess, or acknowledge openly, ace, 21 Phil. ii. 9.
;

or with iv, Matt. x. 32 Luke xii. 8 ; ;

6vo\LaX,<a, (TO), to give a name to, Luke
John ix. 22 ; (3) as (^ofioXoyiu}, to vi. 13, 14 ; to mention, Eph. v. 3 ; <o
praise to give thanks (dat. ), Heb. xiii. call upon or profess the name of, 2
Tim. ii. 19.
o(j.oXoYia, as, i], a 2^rofession, 2 Cor. ix. ^vos, ov, 6, 77, an ass.
13 ; I Tim. vi. 12, 13 ; Heb. iii. i, iv. SvTws, adv. (5»', neut. part, ofel/xi), really,
14, X. 23.* in very deed.
6p.o\o70v|X6va)S, adv., by coiisent of all, fi|os, ous, t6, vinegar; in N.T., a poor
confessedly, without controversy, i Tim. wine, mixed with water, a common
iii. 16.* drink of Roman soldiers.
6|i.d-T€xvos, ov, of the same art or craft, d|vS| eta, i5, ( I ) sharp, as a weapon, Rev.
Acts xviii, 3.* {2) swift, eager, Rom. iii. 15.*
ofiov, adv., together, at the same pilace or OTTTJ, Tjs, 7), an
opening, a cavern, James
time. iii. II ; Heb. xi. 38.*

6|id-<|>p(Dv, oj'oj {(pprjv), of the same mind, SiTKrOcv, adv., behind, after, at the back of.
I Pet. iii. 8.* dirC(r6>, adv. behind, after, of place, Luke
,

Ofidb). See ojulw/jll. vii. 38 of time, Matt. iii. 11

; abs., ;

8nw9, adv., yet, nevertheless, Cor. xiv. i or with gen. rot oiricu, those things
;

7 Gal. iii. 15 ;
; with fxivroi, notwith- that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 et's rd ;

standing, John xii. 42.* oTTio-w,backward, John xviii. 6.

Svap, TO, indecl., a dream; Kar 6vap, in 6ir\£t«, (Tw, N.T., mid., to arm oneself
a dream, Matt. i. 20, ii. 12, 13, 19, with, ace, fig., I Pet. iv. i.*
22, xxvii. 19.* dirXov, ov, t6, an instrument, perhaps
evdpiov, iov, t6 (dim. of 6vo%), a young Rom. vi. 13 (see R.V. and marg.) ;
ass, an ass's colt, John
xii. 14.* hence, plur., an^s, armour, John xviii.
ovckSC^u), <T(3), to reproach, revile, upbraid, 3 ; Rom. 2 Cor. vi. 7, x. 4.*
xiii. 12 ;

Mj,tt. xi. 20
xvi. 14. ; Mark OTTotos, oia, pron., of what
otov, relat.
6v£k8k(r|i<$s, ov, 6, reproach, reviling, con- kind or manner, correl. to roioOroy,
tumely, Rom. XV. 3 ; i Tim. iii. 7 ;
Acts xxvi. 29 ; i Cor. iii. 13 ; Gal. ii.
Heb. X. 33, xi. 26, xiii. 13.* 6 I Thess. i. 9
; James i. 24.* ;

^vciSoSi ovs, TO, reproach, Luke i. 25.* oiroTC, adv. of time, when, Luke vi. 3
*OvV]<rijjLos, ov {profitable), Oiiesimu^, Col. (W. H., 5re).*
iv. 9 ; Philem. 10.* Sirov, adv. of place, where, whitlier
'OvTi<rC-<|>opos, ov, 6, Onesijihorus, 2 Tim. wJicre, referring to state, CIol. iii. 11 ;

i. 19.*
16, iv. whereas, i Cor. iii. 3.
^iK($s> "n, 6v, pertaining to an ass ; fiv\o$ dirrdvw, in pass., to appear. Acts i. 3.
6uiKos, a millstone turned by an ass, See bpan>}.*
i.e., the large upper millstone, Matt. dirxao-Ca, aj, t], a vision, a supernatural
xviii. 6; Luke xvii. 2 (not W. H.) ;
appearance, Luke i. 22, xxiv. 23 Acts ;

Markix. 42 (W. H.).* xxvi. 19 2 Cor. xii, i.*

;
 , ;;

DITTOS — 6<rdK IS
J
VOCABULARY. 479

*
6Trr6s,v,6v, roasted, broiled, Luke xxiv. 42. dpOpCtw, to rise early, to do anything n
See opdw.
SiTTft), diTTOfxai. early morning, Luke xxi. 38.*
OTT-wpa, as, 7) (perhaps otto'j, juice), (he opSpivds, T}, 6v, belonging to early morn-
autumn, autumnal fruits. Rev. xviii. ing, Luke xxiv. 22 ( W. H. ) Rev. ;

xxii. i6(not AV. H.).*

^irttfs, rel. adv., how, Luke xxiv. 20. 6p6pios> ^a, 1.0V, adj., early in the morn-
As conj., m 5z<c^ mannc' that, to the ing, Luke xxiv. 22 (W. H. read
end that, so that; with dv. Acts iii. preceding).*
19 (see § 384, 2). After verbs of be- 6p8pos, ov, masc, morning tivilight, early
seeching, and the like, with demon- dawn, daybreak, Luke xxiv. i John ;

strative force, that, Matt. ix. 38 ; viii. 2 (W. H. omit) Acts v. 21.* ;

Mark iii. 6. 6pil<a, aoj (comp. "horizon"), to define,

SpoLfJia, aros, a spectacle, Acts
to, (i) determine, Rom. i. 4 Heb. iv. 7 to ; ;

vii. 31 (2) a vision. Acts ix. 10, 12.

;
appoint, to decree, as Acts xvii. 26
SpdcriSy ews, ^, ajyj^earance, asjject, Acts pass., perf., part., wpia-fx^vos, decreed,
ii. 17; Rev. iv. 3, ix. 17.* Actsii. 23 neut., decree, Luke xxii. 22.
;

opaTos, 7), 6v, visible, seen, plur., neut., 6piov, plur., the borders oi a place ;
iov, t6,
Col. i. 16.* hence, districts, territory.
eupaKa, elSov (see § 103,
6pd(t), Q, 6\po/uLaL, opKC^o), to adjure by, to charge solemnly
4), (i) to generally; {2) to look
see, by, with double ace, Mark v. 7 Acts ;

upon or contemplate ; {^) to see, and so xix. 13; I Thess. v. 27 (\V. H.,
*
to participate in, Luke xvii. 22; John h'OpKl^U)).
iii. 36 ; (4) to take heed, Heb. viii. 5 ;
iipKos, OV, 6, an oath. Matt. xiv. 7, 9 ;

Alatt. viii.4 with fxij or equiv., ; to a jjramise u'ith an oath. Matt. v. 33.
heicare, Matr. xvi. 6 (5) pass., to ;
be opK-wfioo-ia, as, 17, an oath, Heb. vii. 20,

seen, to appear to, to present oneself to 21, 28.*

(dat.). Syn. 5. 6p|xdcj, (D, (T(j}, X.T. intrans., to rush,
,

dpYT|, anger, indignation.

rjs, T}, Often Matt. viii. 32 Acts vii. 57 (ei's, or iiri,
;

of the wrath of God, and its manifest- ace).

ation. Syn. 32. opfiTj, ^s, T), a rush, a violent assault,
opyiX^ia, crw, to irritate; pass., to be Acts xiv. 5 ; James iii. 4.*
angry, abs. ; to be enraged icith, dat. bp)JLT]|Jia, aros, to, a rushing on, violence.

or eiri, dat. Rev. xviii. 21.*

op-yCXos, prone to anger. Tit. i. 7.*
Tj, ov, 6pv£ov, ov, TO, a bird of prey, a fowl, Rev.
opYvui, as, 17, a fathom, the length from xviii. 2, xix. 17, 21.*
hnger's end to iinger's end with both 6pvi.S} i^os, 6, rj, a fowl. Matt, xxiii. 37 ;

arms stretched outwards, Acts xxvii. Luke xiii. 34.*

6po-0€<ria, as, 17, a setting bounds or
optyta, to mid., to reach
stretch out; limits. Acts xvii. 26.*
after, to desire or long eagerly for, 6pos, ous, rb, a mountain, highland.
gen., I Tim. iii. i, vi. 10; Heb. xi. 16.* opvccTb), ^w, to dig, to dig out. Matt. xxi.
opcivds, -ff, 6v, mountainous, hilly, Luke 33, XXV. 18; Mark xii. i.*
i-
39, 65.* dp<^dvdsi T?, bv, bereaved, "orphan,"
5pc|is, ews, i], strong desire, lust, Rom. John xiv. 18 ; as subst., James i. 27.*
i. 27.* dpxe'o^iai,, oD/iat,
-qao/xai, dep., mid., to
6p6o-iro8c(i>, w, to walk in a
straight leap, dance, Matt. xL 17, xiv. 6
to
course, fig., to icalk ujjrightly, Gal. ii. Mark vi. 22 Luke vii. 32.* ;

H-* ds, 77, 6, relative pronoun, who, which

dpdds, v, 6v, upright. Acts xiv. 10 ; (see §§ 58, 343-348 ; for 6s &u, 6s iuv,
straight, Heb. xii. 13 ;* adv., -wj, whoever, see § 380). As denionst. in
rightly, Mark vii. 35 Luke vii. 43, ; the phrase, 5s fxtv..M 54, that one...
x. 28, XX. 21.* this one, as 2 Cor. ii. 16.
dpdo-TO|i€w, G) {rifjivu}), to cut straight or 6<rdKis, rel. adv., how many timts, as
rightly, to manage or administer rightly, often as, always with edj/, i Cor. XL 2^,
2 Tim. ii. 15.* 26 Rev. xi, 6.*
;
480 VOCABULARY. [S(rio« — ovpttV(5s

($0*10$ (la), lov, lioly, of human beings, of ovtt, interj., ah! aha! derisive, Mark
Christ, and of God ; to. oaia, tJie holy XV. 29.*
promises, Acts xiii. 34 ; adv., -ws, ovai, interj., woe ! alas ! uttered in grief
holily, only i Thess. ii. 10. Syn. or indignation. Matt. xi. 21 i Cor. ;

23. ix. 16 ; 77 oval, as subst.. Rev. ix. 12,

6<ridTT]s, rjTos, rj, holiness, godliness, Luke the woe, the calamity.
i. 75 ; Eph.
24.* iv. ov8ap.cas, adv., by no means, not in any-
0(r|iT|, 77s, 7), an odour, savour, lit., John wise. Matt. ii. 6.*
xii. 3 fig., 2 Cor. ii.
; 14, 16; Eph. ov-Se, conj., disj. neg., but not, nor yet
V. 2; Phil. iv. 18.* (cf. firjde), neither, nor, not even (see
60*0$, 1), ov, relat. pron., how much, how ^§401).^
great, (i) of time, how long, as long as, ov8-€is, ovbe-jxla, ovb-ev (ovde e'ls), neg.
Rom. Repeated, the meaning
vii. i. no one, none, nothing, of
adj., not one,
is intensified, Heb. x. 37 i-rn fxiKpov : no moment, of no value, vain.
bcov 6(Tov, yet a littU, a very, very ov8€-TroT€, adv., not ever, never, i Cor.
little; (2) of quantity, of number, how xiii. 8, Matt. vii. 23.
much, plur., hoio many, Mark iii. 8 ;
ov8€-'ira», adv., 710/. ever yet, not yet, never,
John Acts ix. 13 ; as many as.
vi. II ; Luke xxiii. 53.
Matt. xiv. 36 with av, iav, as many ; ovOeis, ei's), no one, nothing.
ovdiv {ovT€
as, whatsoever. Matt. vii. 12, xxi. 22 ;
Acts xxvi. 26 (W. H.) I Cor. xiii. 2, ;

(3) of measure, degree, Heb. vii. 20. 2 Cor. xi. 9(W. H.).*
8or-ir€p, Tj-TTcp, 6-wef), the very one ivho, ovK-€Ti, adv., no further, no more, no
Mark xv. 6.* longer.
oo"T^ov, contr. oarovv, ov, to, a bone, ovK-ovv ^ a,A\\, not so then? hence, in
John xix. 36. ordinary classic usage, an affirmative
JJo'-Tis, i]-TLs, oTi, compound relat., ^vho- adverb, therefore (whereas ou/cow retains
soever, whichsoever, whatsoever (see its negative force, 7iot tlierefore) inter- ;

§§ 58, c, 349) ; the addition of av, idv, rogative, John xviii. 37, art thou then
gives indefiniteness. a king ?*
ooTpaKivos, rj, ov, made of earth, earthen, ov }*.•{], an emphatic negative (see § 377).
2 Cor. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 20.* ovv, conj., therefore, then, Matt. xii. 12.
6(r(|>pT](ris, ecus, the sense of smell, the Employed espec. ( i ) in arguing, i Cor.
organ of smell, i Cor. xii. 17.* iv. 16 ; (2) in exhortation, J\latt. xxii.
o<r<j>vs, vo$, Matt. iii. 4
i], the loins. 9, 17, 21 (3) in interrogation. Matt,
;

Acts ii. 30; to ''have the loins girded" xiii. 27 ; Gal. iii. 19, 21 (4) to resume ;

was to have the robes gathered up so an interrupted subject, Mark iii. 31 ;

as to be ready for work, Luke xii. 35 ;
John xi. 6 (5) to indicate mere
;

fig., I Pet. i. 13. transition from one i)oint to another,

6rav (ore, &v), rel. adv., ivhen, ivhen- most frequently in John, as viii. 13.
soever always with subj. except
; oiJ-iro), adv., 710^ yet.

Mark iii. 11 Rev. iv. 9, viii. i (W.H.).

;
ovpd, as, 77, the tail of an animal.
8tc, rel. adv., when. ovpdvios, ov, Jieavenly, celestial, in or per-
8ti, conj., (i) that, after verbs of de- taining to lieavcn, as Luke ii. 13 ; Acts
claring, etc., introducing the object- xxvi. 19.
sentence ; sometimes as a mere quot- ovpavo9cv, adv., from Jieaven, Acts xiv.
ation mark. Matt. ii. 23 ; (2) because 17, xxvi. 13.*
(see § 136, 6). ovpavos, ov, 6, heaven, (i) the visible
8tov (gen. of 6crTis), ^ws 6tov, until, heavens (l)oth sing, and plur.), through
whilst, as Luke xxii. 16. their whole extent, the atmosphere,
ot, adv. (gen. of 6s), where, whither ; ov the sky, the starry lieavens ; (2) tlie
idv, whithersoever ; also used of time, spiritual heavens, the abode of God and
token, in the jihrases, d0' ov, since, holy beings. Matt. vi. 10 2 Cor. xii. ;

AXP'S, ^ws, fi^xP'-^ oi5, until. 2; *'the third heaven," above the
ov {ouK before a vowel, ovx if the vowel atmospheric and the sidereal ; met,
is aspirated), no, not (see §§ 134, 401). for the inhabitants of heaven, Rev.
 . ;
;

Ovp^avos — iraYts] VOCABULARY. 481

xviii. 20 ; especially for God, Luke o<|>6aX}«)Sf ov, 6, eye ; fig. of the eye an ,

XV. 1 8. as the receptivechannel into mind and

Ovp^av^s, oO, 6, Urban, Rom. xvi. 9.* heart, Matt. vi. 23 (comp. Mark vii.
*
OvpCas, ov, 6, Uriah, Matt. i. 6. 22 Matt. XX. 15) ; fig., the eye of the
;

ovs, wrds, TO, (i) the ear, Matt.

27 x. ;
mind, i.e., the understanding. Acts
(2) met., t?ie faculty of apprehensian. xxvi. 18.
Matt. xi. 15. 6<j)ts, ews, 6, a serpent. Matt. vii. 10 ; an
ovo-Ca, as, r/ {wv, par-tic, dixl), substance, emblem of wisdom, Matt. x.16 of ;

wealth, Luke xv. 12, 13.* cunning. Matt, xxiii. 33 ; used sym-
o<J-T€, conj., and not; neither, nor, with bol, for Satan, 2 Cor. xi. 3.
a negative preced. ovre ... ovre, nei- ; d(j>pvs, I'os, T), the eyebrow ; the brow of a
ther ... nor. (The readings often vary mountain or hill, Luke iv. 29.*
between oih-e and ou5e.) oxXc'to), u), to disturb, to vex, only in pass.,
o5tos, ai)T7], TovTo, demonstr. pron., this Luke vi. 18 (W. H., evoxX^w), Acts
(near), appl. to persons and things, V. 16.*
sometimes emphatic, Matt. v. 19 oxXo-TTowto, Q, to gather a croicd, Acts
sometimes contemptuous, this fclloiv, xvii. 5.*
Matt. xiii. 55 (see §§ 338-342 ; also ^xXos, ov, 6, a crowd, the common people,
e/cctj'os and oSe). the iiiultitude, plur., crowds. Syn. 73.
©{Jtws (and before a consonant sometimes 6\vp(a\i.a, aros, to, a fortress, a strong
oiiTot), adv., thus, in thisicise, so, (i) in 2jlacc of defence, 2 Cor. x. 4.*
reference to antecedent or following oYj/dpiov, 01*, TO (a relish with bread), a

statement ; (2) correlative with cLs or little fish, John vi. 9, 11, xxi. 9, 10,
Kaddjs, so ... as (3) qualifying adjec- ;

tives, adverbs, or verbs, 5o,Heb. xii. 21 d\j/€, adv., late, in the evening, IMark xi.
Matt. ix. 33 ofh-ws ... ovtws, I Cor.
; II (AV. H.), 19, xiii. 35 ; at the end of
vii. 7, in this manner . . i7i that. after, gen.. Matt, xxviii. i.*
ov\C, adv., (i) an intensive form of ov, 6\|/k)ios, ov, latter, of the rain, James v.
John xiii. 10, by no inea)is, no, nay ;
(2) mostly interrog., as Matt. v. 46, 5\{;ios, ia, Lov, late, Mark xi. 11 (not
expecting an affirmative answer. W. H. marg. ) as subst., ri d\pia,
; see ;

o<|>£iXcTT]s, ov, a debtor. Matt, xviii. 24 ;

evening, i.e., the former of the two
on£. who owes onorally, i.e., obedience evenings reckoned among the Jews,
to the law. Gal. v. 3 a delinquent, ; Matt. viii. 16 the latter evening is ;

sinner, Luke xiii. 4. mentioned, Matt. xiv. 23 ; comp.

0({>ciXV), Tjs, 71, a debt, a duty. Matt, xviii. ver. 15.
^

32 ; Rom. xiii. 7 ; i Cor. vii. 3 oxj/is,ews, 7], the aspect, the co^cntenance,
(W. H.).* John xi. 44 ; Rev. i. 16 ; external
o(|>€C\T]|Jia, aros, to, a debt, what is justly a2)pearancc, John vii. 24.*
due, Rom. iv. 4; fig., an offence, a dt{/(oviov, ov, TO, lit., relish, sauce, like
fault, a failure in duty. Matt. vi. 12. 6\pa.pLov, the rations oi &o\-
(i) plur.,
Syn. 39.* diers, their wages, Luke iii. 14 ; i Cor.
o(j>c£X(i), {i) to owe (ace. and dat.). Matt, ix. 7. Hence, {2) recompense, generally,
xviii. 28 ; t6 dipeiXSfieuov, the due, Rom. vi. 23 ; 2 Cor. xi. 8.*
Matt, xviii. 30 (2) to ;
be binder obliga-
tion. Matt, xxiii. 16 ; hence, to sin
against, Luke xi. 4. Syn. 39. n.
8«|>€Xov (see §378), mtQvi., that! I wish!
would that ! followed by indicative, IT, IT, xt, pi, p, the sixteenth letter. As
I Cor. iv. 8 Gal. v. 12 Rev. iii. 15.*
; ; a numeral, tt' = 80 ; ir, = 80,000.
£({>cXos, ouj, t{> (60AXw, to increase), ira-YiScuw, (rw, to ensnare, to lie in wait
profit, iitility, i Cor. xv. 32 ; James for, fig., Matt. xxii. 15.*
ii. 14, 16.* ira-Yts, t'Sos, 7/, a snare, a trap, Luke xxi.
o(|>6aXpLo-8ov\€Ca, as, t), eye-service, Eph. 35 Rom. xi. 9
; ; i Tim. iii. 7, vi. 9 j
vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22.* 2 Tim. ii, 26.*
II
482 VOCABULARY. [iraYOs ir&vrxi

inxYOS, 01', 6, a hill ; only with the adj. man, i.e., man
in his old, unrenewed
"Apetos, Mars Hill, Ai'eojJagus, Acts nature, Rom.
6; (2) u'orn out, as a
vi.
xvii. 19, 22.* garment. Matt. ix. 16 ; corrupt, viti-
TrdO-qjia, aros, t6, ( I ) suffering, affiiction, ated. Syn. 25.
Rom. viii. 18 ; (2) affection of mind, iraXaidTiis, tjtos, 17, age, oldncss, Rom.
2)assio7i, Rom. Gal. v. 24.
vii. 5 ; vii. 6.*
Tra6T]Tos, rj, 6v, destined to suffer, Acts TraXaido), w, to make old, Heb.
(b<TU}, viii.
xxvi, 23.* 13 ;
grow old, to hecome
pass., to obso-
TrdGosi oi^s, TO, suffering, emotion, in lete, Luke xii. 33; Heb. i. 11, viii.
N.T., of an evil kind, conciqnscence, 13.*
Rom. i. 26 i Thess. iv. 5 Col. ; ; irdXt], Tjs, 7], a wrestling, a struggle, Eph.
iii. 5.* vi. 12.*
iraiS-a-ywyos, ou, 6, a hoys' leader or 'iraXiY-'Y€V€(rCa (W. H , 7raXt»'7-), as, r/, a
guardian, a slave who had the charge neiv birth, renovation, regeneration.
of the boys of a family dnring their Matt. xix. 28 Tit. iii. ;
5.*
nonage, i Cor. iv. 15 ; Gal. iii. 24, 25 ; irdXiv, adv., again, back, used of place
"paedagogue."* or of time ; a particle of continuation,
iraiSdpiov, iov, to (dim. of irah), a hoy, again, once 'more, further ; and of anti-
a lad. Matt. xi. 16 (W. H., Traibiov) ;
thesis, as 2 Cor. X. 7, on the other
John vi. 9.* hand.
iraiSefa, ay,
ii, training, of children and iraji-irXTiOef, adv., all at omcc, the whole
youth, Eph. \'i. 4 hence, instruction, ; crowd together, Luke xxiii. 18.*
2 Tim. iii. 16 cliastisement, correc- ; irdjx-iroXvs, TrafnrdWrj, irafxiroXv, very
tion, Heb. xii. 5-1 1.* great, vast, Mark viii. i (not W. H.).*
iratSevTTJs, ov, 6, \i) an instructor, a pre- IIa(i<j>vXCa, as, i], Pamphylia.
ceptor, Rom. ii. 20 ; (2) a corrector ^ a irav-Sox^iov, ov, to, a khan, a caravan-
chastiser, Heb. xii. 9.* serai, or Eastern inn, Luke x. 34.*
iraiSevo), cw, to train a child ; hence, (i) irav-8ox€vs, ^ws, 6 {8ix°f^°-'-)> i^^^ keeper of
to instruct, to admonish ; (2) to correct, a khan or caravanserai, a host, Luke
to chasten. Syn. 14. X. 35-*
iraiStdOev, adv., /ro/i childhood, Mark ix. irav-Ti'Yvpis,tSos, i] {ayelpw), a general
21.* assembly, a 2^uhlic convocation, Heb.
iraiSiov, iov, to (dim. of Trats), a little xii. 23.*
child, an infant. Matt. ii. 8 « child ; -irav-oiKf, adv., tvith one^s whole house-
more advanced, Matt. xiv. 21 ; fig., hold or family. Acts xvi. 34.*
I Cor. xiv. 20. Syn. 62. iravoirX^a, as, rj, complete armour,
iraiS^o-KT), -qs, 7} (fem. dim. of Trais), a young " panoply," Luke xi. 22 ; Eph. vi.
girl, a female slave, a hondmaid. II, 13.^
play, as a child, to dance,
Trailo), ^ofiaL, to irav-ovp-yCa, as, ^, shrewdness, skill;
as in idolatrous worship, i Cor. x. 7.* hence, cunning, craftiness, Luke xx.
iraiS} 7rat5ds, 6, 17, (i) a child, a hoy or 23 I Cor. iii. 19 ; 2 Cor. iv. 2, xi. 3 ;
;

girl ; (2) a servant, a slave, as Acts iv. Eph. iv. 14.*

27 (R.V. ) 6 Trats roG 0eoO, ^/le servant
; irav-ovpYOS, ov {epyou, fepy-), doing every-
of God, used of any servant, Luke i. thing, cunning, crafty, 2 Cor. xii. 16.*
69 of the Messiah,
; Matt. xii. 18. iravrax'tJ) adv., everyiohere. Acts xxi. 28
Syn. 62. (W. H.).*
irafw, aio, to strike, to smite, with the iravraxoGcv, adv., from all sides, Mark
fist,Matt. xxvi. 68 Luke xxii. 64 ; ;
i.
45 (W. H., iravTodep).*
with a sword, Mark xiv. 47 John ; iravTaxov, adv., in every place, every
xviii. 10 as a scorpion with its stiiig,
; 7vhere.
Rev. ix. 5.* iravTcXTjs, ^s, gen. oi/$, comj)lete ; eis rb
TToXai, adv. of old, formerly, long ago,
, iravTeXis, jjerfcclly, the uttermost,
to
Ileb. i. I. Heb. vii. 25 ; the same jdirase, with
TraXaids, d, 6v, (i) old, former, ancient; firi,in no wise, Luke xiii. ii.*
c 7ra\at6s AuOpioTos, the old or former irdvT-j], adv., in every tvay. Acts xxiv. 3.*
wdvTO0<v — 7rap-akWo)JLak] VOCABULARY. 488

irdvTO0€v, adv., from every place, Mark iropa-Y^voitai, to come beside, come near,
i. 45 ("NV. H. ) ; Luke xix. 43 Heb. ix. ; co7)ie, come against [eiri, trpos], Luke
4.* xii.51, xxii. 52 ; John iii. 23 ; Heb.
iravTO-KpaTwp, opos, 6, the Almighty. ix. II.
iravTOTC, adv., always, at all times, ever, irap-dYcj, to pass by, Matt. xx. 30 ; to
Matt. xxvi. II. depart. Matt. ix. 27 to pass aivay, ;

irdvTws, adv., wholly, entirely, i Cor. v. act. I Cor. vii. 31 ; mid., only i John
10 ; in every way, by all means, Rom. ii. 8, 17.
iii. 9 ; assuredly, certainly. Acts xviii. irapa-SciYiiaT^^w, to make a public ex-
21. amptle of, to expose to ignominy, Alatt.
irapd, prep., gov. the gen., the dat., i. 19 (AV. H., 5ei7/iaTtfw) Heb. vi. 6.* ;

aud accus., beside. With a gen, (of irapdSeicos, Persian word,

ov, 6 (a
person), it indicates source or origin ; "garden," "park"). Paradise, Luke
with a dat., it denotes presence with ; xxiii. 43 2 Cor. xii. 4 ; Rev. ii. 7.* ;

with an accus., it indicates motion irapa-Sexop-ai, dep., mid., to receive,

towards, or alongside, and is employed admit, apjyrove, Mark iv. 20 Acts xv. ;

in comparisons, beyond. For details see 4 (W. H.), xvi. 21, xxii. 18; i Tim.
§ 306. In composition, irapd retains V. 19 ; Heb. xii. 6.*
its general meaning, besides, sometimes iropa-Sta-TpipTJ, -^s, r/, useless occupation,
denoting nearness, sometimes motion or agitation about trifles, i Tim. vi. 5
by or past, so as to miss or fail occa- ; (W. H., bLairaparpL^n).*
sionally also stealthiness {by tJie way), irapa-8(8a))jLi, ace. and dat., {i) to deliver
as in Trapeiadyu. over, as to prison, judgment, or punish-
trapa-^aivoi, 2nd aor. irapi^T}v, to go ment, Matt. iv. 12 ; to betray, spec, of
aside from, to desert. Acts i. 25 to ; the betrayal by Judas (2) to surrender, ;

transgress, Matt. xv. 2, 3 ; 2 John 9 abandon oneself, Eph. iv. 19 ; (3) ^0

(W. H., irpodyu)).* hand over, entrust, commit, deliver, as
iropa-pdXXo), " to place side by side," Matt. XXV. 14 Luke i. 2 Acts vi. ; ;

( I ) ^0 comjjare, Mark iv. 30 (not W. H. ); 14 (4) to commend to kindness, Acts

;

{2) to betake oneself any whither, arrive, xiv. 26 (5) to give or prescribe, as
;

Acts XX. 15.* laws, etc.. Acts vi. 14; (6) prob. to
irapd- Pao-iSi €u}s,i), a transgression, Rom. permit, in Mark iv. 29, ichen the fruit
ii. 23. Syn. 39. jyermits or allows.
Trapa-jSdrqSjOi', 6, a transgressor, Rom. ii. •irapd-8o|os, ov, strange, wonderful, Luke
25, 27 ; Gal. ii. 18 ; James ii. 9, V. 26 ; "paradox."*
II.* irapd-Soorts, ews, r/, an instruction, or
irapa-Pid)^op.ai, to constj'ain by persua- tradition, Matt. xv. 2 ; i Cor. xi. 2 ;
sion, Luke xxiv. 29 ; Acts xvi. 15.* 2 Thess. ii. 15, iii. 6. Syn. 49.
irapa-PoX£iio|iak, to expose oneself to peril, irapa-^TiXou), a), to excite to emulation,
to be regardless of life, Phil. ii. 30 Rom. xi. II, 14 ;jealousy,
to Rom. x.
(W.H.).* 19 io anger, i
; Cor. x. 22.*
irapa-PoX-q, t)^, ij, "a. placing side by irapa-9aXd(ro-ioS) ta, i.ov, by the seaside.
side," (i)a comparison, Heb. ix. 9; (2) Matt. iv. 13.*
a parable, often of those uttered by our irapa-dcupcb), Q, to overlook, neglect. Acts
Lord ; (3) a proverb, an adage, Luke vi. I.*
iv. 23 ; (4) possibly in Heb. xi. 19 a ; Trapa-9T|KT],77s, t). a deposit, anything
crisisof danger (see Trapa^oXevofxai). committed to one's charge, i Tim. vi. 20
Syn. 46. (AV. H.) 2 Tim. i. 12, 14 (W. H.).*
;

irap-a-yycXia, as, a command, a charge.

i], irap-aiveu, w, to exhort, admonish. Acts
Acts v. 28, xvi. 24 i Thess. iv. 2 ;
; xxvii. 9, 22.*
I Tim. i. 5, 18.* irap-aiTwixai, ov/xai, dep., mid., to beg
irap-ayyeXXa), to notify, to command, to off, 'make excuse, refuse, reject, Luke
charge, Luke ix. 21 2 Thess. iii. 4 ; ; xiv. 18, 19 ; Acts XXV. ii ; i Tim. iv.
dat. of pers., ace. of thing, or on, 'iva 7, v. II ; 2 Tim. ii. 23; Tit. iii. 10;
or inf., I Tim. vi. 13. Heb. x'i. 19, 25.*
484 VOCABULARY. [Trapa-KaOti^w^ — irapa-(rK«v'l^

Trapa-KaO^t", intrans., to sit by the side irapa-Xo7^to|^cL^' dep., to impose upon, to

of, Luke X. 39.* delude, ace, Col. ii. 4 ; James i. 22.*
irapa-KoX^o), to, {i) to send for, in-
^crw, Trapa-XvTiKos, 17, 6v, 2)alsied, " paralytic,"
vite, Acts xxviii. 20 ; (2) to beseech, in the whole or a part of the body.
entreat, Mark i. 40 ; (3) ^0 exhort, ad- irapa-Xvci), to relax, to enfeeble, only perf.,
monish, Acts xv. 32 ; i Tim. vi. 2 ; part., pass., wapaXeXviJ.ei'os, enfeebled,
(4) to comfort, 2 Cor. i. 4 ;
pass. , to be " paralysed."
comforted, Luke xvi. 25. rcnfiain by (dat., or
irapa-|i6V(d, fxeuQ, to
irapa-KoXvTrTw, to veil, to hide, Luke ix. ace), to abide ivith, i Cor. x\i.
TTpo's,

45.* 6 (W. H., Karaixivu)) Phil. i. 25 ;

Trapa-Kara-Oi^Ki], t;?, a trust, a deposit,

t), (W. H.); fig., to remain constant in,
1 Tim. vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 (in both James i. 25 ; to continue, Heb. vii.
passages W. H. read irapadrjKr)).* 23.*
•Trapa-KeC|xai, to be at hand, be 2>rcsent ivith irapa-|iv6eo|Jiai, ov/xai, dep., mid., to speak
(dat.), Rom. vii. 18, 21.* kindly to, to cheer, to comfort, John ix.
irapd-KXT)o-is, a calling for, "a
ews, i), 19, 31 Thess. ii. 11, v. 14.*
; I

summons to one's side." Hence, (i) irapa-iivOda, as, rj, encouragement, comfort^
exhortation, Heb. xii. 5 ; (2) entreaty, I Cor. xiv. 3.*

2 Cor. viii. 4 ; (3) encouragemeiit, Phil, irapa- [JLvGiov, tou, to, comfort, Phil. ii. I.*
ii. I ; (4) consolation, Rom. xv. 4 irapa-voixeo), w, abs., to act contrainj to
met., of the Consoler, Luke ii. 25 ; late. Acts xxiii. 3.*

(5) generally, of the powor of impart- irapa-voixCa, as, 77, violation of laiv, trans-
ing all these. Acts iv, 36. grcssio7i, 2 Pet. ii. 16.*

irapd-KXTjTOs, ov, 6, (i) an advocate, in- irapa-TTiKpaCvo), avQ, 1st aor. Tapeirt-
tercessor, I John ii. I ; (2) « consoler, Kpdva, to provoke {God) to anger ; so,
comforter, helper, John xiv. 16, 26, to rebel, Heb. iii. 16.*
XV. 26, xvi. 7; "paraclete."* Trapa-TTixpaa-pids, ov, 6, pt'^'ovocation (of
irap-aKOTi, t^j, y\, disobedience, Rom. v. God) ; so, rebellion, Heb. iii. 8, 15.*
19 2 Cor. X. 6 ; Heb. li. 2.*
; 2nd aor.
irapa-TriTrTw, irap^irecrov, to fall
7rap-aKoXov6^(i>, cD, ri(TO), to follow closely, away, Heb. vi. 6.*
to accompany (dat.), Mark xvi. 17 (not irapa-irXea), Q {f), eiffofiai, to sail ^xist,
W. H. see marg. )
; to follow so as to ; ace, Acts XX. 16.*
trace out, to examine, Luke i. 3 ; to irapairXTio-iov, adv. near , to (gen. ), Phil.
follow teaching, i Tim. iv. 6 ; 2 Tim. ii. 27.*

iii. 10.* irapairXTio-Cws, adv., likewise, in like

^ap-aKovio), to hear negligently, to dis- manner, Heb. ii. 14.*

regard. Matt, xviii. 17 ; Mark v. 36 Trapa-Trop€vo}iai, dep. , mid. , to pass by, to

(W. H.).* 2MSS along by.
Trapa-KviTTw, \}/03, to stoop, Luke xxiv. 12, •irapd-irTwp.a, aros, to (ttitttw), a falling
John XX. 5, II fig., with 6is, to search
;
away or aside, a transgression. Syn.
into, James i. 25 ; i Pet. i. 12.* 39.
irapa-Xap-pdvo), \rj\poixaL (W. H., -\-f][ji\p-), irapap-p^b) {Pj, pedaofiai, 2nd aor., pass.,
(i) to take to oneself, to take loith one, irapepp&qv pass., to drift away from
,

to assume, obtain ; (2) to take upon (R.Y.), to lose, Heb. ii. i.*
oneself, to engage in; fig., to receive '7rapd-<rr]p.os, ov, marked on the side
intellectually, to learn, Mark vii. 4 ;
{u-ith, dat.), Acts xxviii. Ii.*
to assent to, to acknowledge, to seize, to irapa-o-Kcvdtw, au, perf., mid., irape-
take, to carry captive. aKcvaafiai, to prepare, to make ready,
Trapa-Xc'Yft), N.T., in mid., to lay one's Acts X. 10; mid,, to prepare oneself,
course near, in sailing, to coast along. I Cor. xiv. 8 ; to be in readiness, 2 Cor.
Acts xxvii. 8, 13.* ix. 2, 3.*
^
Trap-dXios, ov, adjacent to the sea, on the irapa-iTKcvTi, a preparation, i.e.,
^s, -f],

coast, Luke vi. 17.* the time immediately before a Sabbath

irap-aXXa^Ti, 779, i], change, variableness, or other festival, the eve, the Pixpara-
James i. 17.* tion (R.V.), Matt, xxvii. 62 Mark ;
 ; ;;;;

irapa-Tcivo) — Trap-i(rTT]p.t] VOCABULAHY. 485

XV. 42 ; Luke xxiii. 54 ; John xix. 14, irap-eior-(|>€pa), to bring in besides, add,
31, 42.* 2 Pet. i. 5.*
irapa-Tiivutf to extenci' to prolong ^ Acts irap-cKTos, adv., on the outside, besides
XX. 7.* TO. irapeKTos,things in addition, the
irapa-nipcco, tD, 770-0?, {i) to observe nar- things that are without, 2 Cor. xi. 28
roivly, ivatch, ^laxkiii. 2; (2) to observe (see R.Y. marg.). AVith a gen. fol-
scrupulously, Gal. iv. 10. lowing, except, JNIatt. v. 32 Acts xxvi. ;

•n"apa-TT]pT]<ris, ewj, 77, a close watching, 29 see also Matt. xix. 9, W. H. marg.*
;

observation, Luke xvii. 20.* •ira.p-€jx-Po\TJ, 77s, T) (/SaWw), (i) « ca.wp,

irapa-Ti9ii}i.i (see § to place near
107), (i) Heb. xiii. 11, 13; (2) soldiers' quar-
or by the side of, as food, Luke xi. 6 ; ters, Acts xxi. 34, 37 (3) the encamp- ;

(2) to set or lay before, as instruction, ments of Israel in the wilderness, Heb.
spec, to propound, to deliver, as a xiii. II; (4) an army in array, Heb.
parable, ^latt. xiii. 24 ; mid., to give xi. 34.
in charge to, to entrust, Luke xii. 48 ;
irap-cv-oxX-e'w, w, to cause disturbance to,
to commend, to recommend (ace, and to disquiet (dat.). Acts xv. 19.*
dat. , or Acts xiv. 23.
et's). Trap-eiri-S-qiios, ov,residing in a strange
irapa-T\ryxdv«, to fall in with, chance to country; as subst., a stranger, fo-
meet. Acts xvii. 17.* reigner, Heb. xi. 13 ; i Pet. i. i,
irap-avrCKa, adv. , instantly, imvicdiatcly; ii. II.*
TO TrapavTiKa iXacppbv rrjs ^Xti^ews, the irap-cpxo[iat (see § 103, 2), (i) to 2')ass by,
momentary lightness of our ajflict ion, 2 Avith ace. of pers. or place (2) to i)ass, ;

Cor. iv. 17.* elapse, as time

pass aivay or ; (3) to
irapa-({>ep(i> (see § 103, 6), to remove (ace. perish, become nugatory; (4) to piaas
and airo), Mark xiv. 36 ; Luke xxii. from any one (5) to j^ass carelessly,
;

42 pass., to be driven about, agitated,

;
i.e., to disregard, neglect, transgress.
Heb. xiii. 9 (W. H.) Jude 12 (W. H.).*
; irdp-co-is, ews, 7/ {'Irjf^i-), passing over,
irapa-({>pov^ci), w, to be beside oneself, pircdermission, Rom. iii. 25. Syn. 42.*
2 Cor. xi. 23.* irap-txw, c'^w, 2nd aor. irdpecxov (dat.
irapa-(}>povia, a?, being beside oneself,
ri, and ace), (i) to exhibit, to present,
madness, folly, 2 Pet. ii, 16.* afford, Luke vi. 29 ; Acts xxii. 2
irapa-xei(idt(*>} dcrw, to icinter, to spend the espec. the phrase irap€x<^ kottovs, to
winter. Acts xxvii. 12, xxviii. ii; i cause trouble. Matt. xxvi. 10 (2) in ;

Cor. xvi. 6 Tit. iii. 12.*

;
ndd., to 2»'esent, manifest. Tit. ii. 7;
irapa-xciixao-ia, as, t), a wintering, a to bestow. Col. iv. I.

sj^eiuling the icinter, Acts xxvii. 12.* -irap-Ti-yopta, as, 77, solace. Col. iv. ii.*
irapa-xpf]|jLa, adv. (lit., in the very thing), irapOevia, as, i], virginity, Luke ii. 36.*
instantly, immediately. irapOe'vos, ov, 17, a virgin, a maid ; hence
irdpSaXis, cws, 77, a leopard, a 2mnt]ier, one who is chaste. Rev. xiv. 4, applied
Rev. xiii. 2.* to the male sex.
irap-c8p€V(D, to wait upon (dat. ), i Cor. ix. IldpGos, ov, 6,a Parthian, Acts ii. 9.*
13 (W. H.).* irap-iT]ji,i, pass by or over, to relax
to
irdp-ckfik ("VOj near, to be present
io be j)ass., perf., part., irapeifiipos, weary,
part., present; to irap'jv, tJtc
irapdip, Heb. xii. 12.*
present time ; to. iraowTa. possrs.sian.s. Trap-£crT7]|j.tor irap-iaTdvu} (Rom. vi. 13,
7rap-ci(r-d7ci), ^w, to introduce, to bring in 16 ; see § 107), (i) trans, in act., pres.,
clandestinely, 2 Pet. ii. i.* imp., fut., and 1st aor., to place near
7rap-€Co--aKTos, ov, brought in clandes- or at hand, to have in readiness, pro-
tinely, surreptitious. Gal. ii. 4.* vide, Acts xxiii. 24 ; to 2^^(^cM, to
irap-cior-Svo), or -vvw, vcw, to conie in by offer, Rom. 13, 16; specially, to
vi.
stealth, to enter secretly, Jude 4.* dedicate, consecrate, devote, Lukeii. 22;
irap-6i(r-epxo)iai (see § 103, 2), (i) to enter to cause to ajypear, to devionstrate^
clandestinely, Gal. ii. 4 ; (2) to come Acts xxiv. 13 ; (2) intrans., perf.,
in addition^ to be superadded, Rom. plup., 2nd aor., and mid., to stand by,
V. 20.* Mark xiv. 47, 69, 70 Luke xix. 24
;
486 VOCABULARY. [Ilapficvas — ifaTpo-irapd-SordS

to have come, Mark

stand by,iv. 29 ; to verbial phrases are 5ta7rai'r6s (which
i.e., for aid or support, xvi. 2; Rom. see), always ; iv Travri, iv vdaiv, in
to stand in hostile array, Acts iv. 26. everything ; and iravra (ace. neut.
,

napp.€vds, a, 6, Parmenas, Acts vi. 5.* plur. ), altogether.

Trdp-o8os, ov, i], a passing by or through, irdcrxa, rb (Heb., in Chald. form), the
I Cor. xvi. 7.* piaschal lamb, the passover feast ; appl.
dwell in (eV or ets, const.
irap-oiKco), Q, to to Christ, I Cor. v. 7.
pr?eg.)a5 a stranger, Luke xxiv. 18; {tt(x.Q-, see§ 94, i. 7), to he affected
irdcrxft)
Heb. xi. 9.* with anything, good or bad so, to ;

irap-oiK^a, as, ?), a sojourning, a tern- enjoy good, Gal. iii. 4 more commonly, ;

jyorai-y dicelling, Acts xiii. 1 7 ; i Pet. to endure suffering, Matt. xvii. 1$ to ',

1. 17.* suffer (ace. of that suffered, air6 or vtro,

irdp-oiKOS, ov, sojourning, temporarily gen., of persons inflicting).
resident, generally as subst., Acts vii. IZdrapa, dpwv, rd, Patara, Acts xxi. I.*
6, 29 Eph. ii. 19 ; i Pet. ii. 11.*
; Trardo-o-w, ^a>, to smite, to strike, to smite
irap-oi(iia, as, 77 (oi^tos, a way), (i) a com- to death, to afflict^ Matt. xxvi. 31 ;
mon or trite saying, a proverb, 2 Pet. Acts xii. 23.
ii. 22 ; (2) an obscure saying, an iraT€ft», tD, 770-0?, to treads, to trample on,
enigma, John xvi. 25, 29 ; (3) a jyara- Luke ig to press by treading, as
X. ;

ble, a comparative discourse, John x. gi-apes, Rev. xiv. 20, xix. 15 fig., to ;

6. Syn. 46.* tread doivn, Luke xxi. 24 Rev. xi. 2.* ;

irdp-oivos, ov, given to ivin^, intemperate, iraTirjp, rpds, 6 (see § 30, ii.), a father;
1 Tim. iii. 3 Tit. i. 7.*
; often of God as the Father of men.
irap-oCxop-ai, to pass aivay, of time, Acts Matt. V. 16, 45 as the Father of the ;

xiv. 16.* Lord Jesus Christ, Matt. vii. 21 as ;

'T7ap-o[Loia.X,<»,to resemble, Matt, xxiii. 27.* the First Person in the Trinity, ]\Iatt.
Trap -6|Jioios, ov, similar, Mark vii. 8 xxviii. 19 as the Source of mani-
;

(W. H. omit), 13.* fold blessings, 2 Cor. i. 3. Secondary

irap-oliiva), to stir up, to irritate, in pass., meanings are (i) a remote progenitor, :

Acts xvii. 16 ; I Cor. xiii. 5.* tlie founder of a race, an ancestor ; (2)
Trap-o|v(rp.os, ov, 6, (i) incitement, Heb. a senior, a father in age, i John ii. 13,
X. 24 ; (2) sharp contention. Acts xv. 14 (3) the author, or cause, or source
;
*
39, "paroxysm." of anything, John viii. 44 Heb, xii. ;

Trap-opY^^a), tcD, to provoke greatly, ex- 9 (4) a spiritual father, or means of

;

asperate, Rom. x. 19 Eph. \\. 4.* ; converting any one to Christ, i Cor.
'Trap-op"yicr|x<Js, ov, 0, eo:asp)eration, wrath, iv. 15 ; (5) one to whom resemblance is
Eph. iv. 26. Syn. 32.* borne, John viii. 38, 41, 44.
Trap-OTpvvci), to stir 2(p, to instigate. Acts ndrjios, Patmos, Rev. i. 9.*
01', T},

xiii. 50.* iraTp-aXwas (W. H., -o\<^as), ov, 6, a

Trap-o\)(r(a, as, i) {djii), (i) presence, only p)arricide, I Tim. i. 9.*
2 Cor. X. 10, Phil. ii. 20 elsewhere, ; Trarpid, as, t), a family (in O.T,, mediate
(2) a coming, an arrival, advent, often between the tribe and the household),
of the second coming of Christ. Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25 Eph. iii. 15 ;

7rap-o\|/£s, i-^os, t], a dish for food ov sauce, (on which see § 224). Syn. 61.*
Matt, xxiii. 25, 26.* Trarpi-dpxiis, ov, 6, head or founder of
-n-ap-p-qo-Ca, as, ^, freedom, openness, a family, "patriarch," Acts ii. 29,
especially in speaking, boldness, con- vii. 8, 9 ; Heb. vii. 4.*
fidence ; Trapprjalqi, iv Trapprjffiq., or fiera TrarpiKos, i], ov, patern/il, ancestral. Gal.
ira^prjaias, boldly, openly. i. 14.*
irap-pT^o-id^ofiai, dep., mid., ist aor. iraTpCs, l^os, 7], one^s native plcvcc, father-
eTra^pTjcnaadixrjv, to speak freely, boldly, land. Matt, xiii, 54 ; Heb. xi. 14.
plainly, to be confident. Ilarp^Pas, Patrobas, Rom. xvi. 14.*
a, 6,
the whole,
ird$, Trdaa, irav (see § 37), all, TraTpo-irapd-SoTos, ov, handed down, ob-
every kiiuo (See § 224, and for
of. tained by tradition from ancestors, l
negative in phrases, § 328, iii.) Ad- Pet. i. 18.*
 ;; e

irarptSo^ — '"'^Pj
VOCABULARY. 48?

irarpwos, a, ov, paternal, hereditary, iTEipdco, (J, only in mid. , to attempt, essay.
Acts xxii. 3, xxiv. 14, xxviii. 17.* Acts ix. 26 (W. H., Treipd^w), xxvi.
IlavXos, ov, 6, Paul, (i) Sergius Pauliis, 21.*
Acts xiii. 7 (2) the Apostle of the ; ircia-fiovT], ijs, r/, persuasion, conviction.
Gentiles. (See§159, c.) Gal. V. 8.*
iratw, aio, to cause to cease, to restrain, ireXdYosi oPs, rd, //«<; .9ca, the deep. Matt.
I Pet. iii. 10 generally mid., to cease,
;
xviii. 6 ; Acts xxvii. 5.*
desist, refrain, Luke v, 4, viii. 24. ireXeKi^to {weXeKvs, an axe), to behead,
nd<|>os, ov, 7), Faj)hos, Acts xiii. 6, 13.* Rev. XX. 4.*
Traxvvw (iraxvs), to fatten, to make g ross TTcjiirTos, V, ov, num., ord., the fifth.
pass., fig., to become gross or stupid. irc'p.'irw, \poj, (i) to s<:nc?, of persons, to
Matt. xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27.* despatch a message, spoken of
on
iriSr], 7JS, 7], a shackle, a fetter for the teachers, as John Baptist, John i. 33 ;
*
feet, Mark v. 4 ; Luke viii. 29. of Jesus, John iv. 34 of the Spirit, ;

ireSivds, 77, ov, level, open, Luke vi. 17.* John xiv. 26 of apostles, John xiii. :

ire^cvo) (Trends), to travel on foot or on land, 20 j (2) to send, of things, to transmit,

Acts XX. 13.* Rev. xi. 10 to send among or upon,;

ir€^]5,adv., on foot, or &?/ fen^?, Matt. xiv. 2 Thess. ii. II perhaps to thrust in ;

13 ; Mark vi. 33.* the sickle, Rev. xiv. 15, 18 (but

ir€i0-apx^«, w, (i) to obey a rider or one probably to "send the sickle" is to
in autlwrity, Acts v. 29, 32 Tit. iii. ;
" send forth the reapers").
I {2) to obey, or conform to advice,
;
TTcvTis, 77TOS, 6, ri, poor, needy, 2 Cor. ix.
Acts xxvii. 21.* 9. Syn. 30.*
irw,0ds (W. H., Triads), 77, ov, persuasive, ir6v0€pd, ay, rj, a mother -in-laio, i.e., a
winning, i Cor. ii. 4.* wife's mother.
ireiGw, Treicrw, ^0 2Jersuade, but in the pres. ir6v0€pds, ov, 6, a father-in-lavj, i.e., a
and imperf. rather persuading, to 6e wife's father, John xviii. 13.*
i.e., to endeavour to convince, Acts ircvdew, w, tjo-w, (i) to mourn, intrans.;
xviii, 4 to injiiience by persuasion.
; (2) to mourn for, trans., 2 Cor. xii. 21.
Matt, xxvii. 20; to incite, to instigate. ircvOos, ous, TO, mourning, sorrow, James
Acts xiv. 29 to appease, to render ; iv. 9 ; Rev. xviii. 7, 8, xxi. 4.*
tranquil, i John iii. 19 ; to conciliate, irevixpds, d, 6v, poor, needy, Luke xxi.
to aspire to the favour of. Gal. i. 10 2.*
pass. to be confident of, to yield to per-
, ircvrdKis, adv., num.,^re times, 2 Cor.
suasion, to assent, to listen to, to obey, xi. 24.*
to follo^v. Acts v. 36, 37 ; the 2nd ir€VTaKto--x^Xioi, at, a, num.. five thou-
perf. , intrans. to be confident
TTeirot.Oa, is , sand.
of, to trust, to rely on, to j^lace Jwpe in. ircvTaKocriot, at, a, num., five hundred,
Matt, xxvii. 43 Rom. ii. 19. ; Luke ^^i. 41 ; i Cor. xv. 6.*
iTEivdo), w, dew, inf. ireivav, (i) to be irivTi, num., indecl., ^'rc.
hungry ; hence, (2) to be needy ; {3) ir€VT€-Kat-8€KaTOS, num., ord., fifteenth,
to desire earnestly, to long for, ace, Luke iii. i.*
" to pine." •rr€VTf\K0VTa, num., m<\ec\., fifty.
U6tpa, as, r/, trial, experim&)it ; with Jli^nr\KO(rrf\, [lit., fiftieth), Pent
rjs, t)

Xafji^dpw, to make trial of, attemj^t, cost, the feast beginning the fiftieth
Heb. xi. 29, 36.* day after the second day of the Pass-
frcipdtw, trw, (i) to attempt (inf.); (2) to over, i.e., from the sixteenth day of
tempt, to make trial of, to prove, to the month Nisan, Acts ii. i, xx. 16 ;

put to tJte proof (ace.) ; (3) to tempt to I Cor. xvi. 8.*

sin ; 6 ireLpd^uv, the tempter, i.e., the ireiroiOa. See veidu.
devil. •rmroCQr\a-is, ews, i}, trust, confidence,
ircipoo-^ids, ov, 6, a trying, proving, i with CIS or h.
Pet. 12 iv. iii. 8 a tempting
; Heb. ; irep, an enclitic particle, cognate with
to Matt. vi. 13
sin, calamity, sore ; irepi, only found joined to pronouns or

afiiiction, as trying men, Acts xx. 19. particles for intensity of meaning, as
 488 Vocabulary. [ircpav — ir6pi-TraT€ci»

eduirep, ettrep, if iTtdecd ; eTeivep, since ircpi-epxoiiai (see § 103, 2), to go about,
indeed; Kaiwep, arid really; ocrwep, Acts xix. 13 ; I Tim. v. 13 ; Heb. xi.
the very one ivho. 37 ; as a ship, Acts xxviii. 13.*
to tack,
ircpav, adv., ovc)', on the other side, be- irepi-c'xw, encompcLSS ; so, to contain,
to
yond, with article prefixed or genitive as a writing, Acts xxiii. 25 (W. H.,
following. exw) ; intrans., to be contained, I Pet.
ircpas, aros, to, a limit, tJie extremity, ii. 6 ; to seize, as astonishment, Luke

in space, as Matt. xii. 42 ; or time, V. 9.*

Heb. vi. 16. ir6pi-t«vvv(ii (see § 114), to gird oneself
nep7ap.os, 01/, r/, Pcrgamus or Per- around, mid. or pass. ; pass. perf. ,

gcnnt/m, Rev. i. 11, ii. 12.* part., girt, Luke xii. 35.
rEtpYT], 77s, 7), a prop, name, Perga, Acts irepi-Geo-is, ew?, 17, a putting around, i.e.,
xiii. 13. ornaments, I Pet.3.* iii.

TTtpi, a prep., governing the gen. and irepi-to-niiJLi (see §107), in intrans. tenses
accus. With
gen., about, i.e., con- of act. to stand around, John xi. 42
,

cerning or respecting a thing ; with Acts xxv. 7 mid. to stand aloof from ; ,

accus., about, around, in reference to (ace), 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit. iii. 9,*
(see § 302). In composition, irepi de- ircpi-KaOapp.a, aros, to, refuse, oj'scouritig,
notes round about, on account of, I Cor. iv. 13.*

above, beymid. irfipi-KaXvirTO), to cover round about, to

irepi-ct'yw, trans., to lead or take about, cover, as the face, Mark xiv. 65 ; Luke
I Cor. ix. 5 ; intrans., to go about xxii. 64 ; Heb. ix. 4.*
(ace, or irepi, ace), Matt. iv. 23, ix. ir6pi-Kei|xai, to lie about, s^trround, dat.,
35, xxiii. 15; Mark vi. 6; Acts xiii. or Trep:, ace, Mark ix. 42 ; Luke xvii.
II.* 2 ; to encompassed or surrounded
be
irepi-aipeo), a) (see § 103, 2), to take from ivith, ace, Acts xxviii. 2c; Heb, v. 2,
around, take entirely away, lit., Acts xii. I.*
xxvii. 20, 40 {to cast q^' anchors, R.Y. ) ircpi-KC({>aXaia, a?,i], a helmet, Eph. vi.
fig., of the removal of sin, 2 Cor. iii. 17; Thess. V. 8.*
I

i6; Heb. x. 11. irtpi-KpaTTJs, ^s, being entire master of,

ircpi-diTTw, to kindle, Luke xxii. 55 Acts xxvii. 16.*
(W. H.).* irepi- KpvTTTw, to hide entirely, Luke i.
Trepi-aoTpdirTw, to lighten around, to flash 24.*
around (ace, or trepl, ace), Acts ix. 3, ircpi-KVKXdb), w, to enxyircle, surround,
xxii. 6.*
*
Luke xix. 43.
ircpi-pdXXw, ^aXw, §i^\r}Ka, to cast ircpt-XdfjLirw, to shine around, Luke ii.
around (ace and dat.), Luke xix. 43 ; 9 ; Acts xxvi. 13.*
to clothe, Matt. xxv. 36; for const., ircpi-XeCirw, to leave; pass., to be left,
see § 284 ;mid., to clothe oneself, to be I Thess. iv. 15, 17.*
clothed, ^latt. vi. 29. irepi-Xviros, ov, greatly sorrowful. Matt.
irepi-pXe'irw, X.T., in mid., look around, to xxvi. 38 ; 34 ; Luke
]\Iark vi. 26, xiv.
abs., Mark v. 32, ix. 8, x. 23 to look ; xviii, 23, 24 (W. H. omit).*
round iqwji, ace, Mark iii. 5, 34, xi. ir€pi-|X€vo), to await (ace). Acts i. 4.*
II ; Luke vi. 10.* ircpCI, adv., round about. Acts v. 16.*
TTcpi-poXaiov, 01', TO, (i) clothing, ves- 7r€pi-oiK6b). G), to dwell around, to be
ture, Heb. i. 12; (2) a veil, 1 Cor. xi. neighbouring to (ace), Luke i. 65.*
I5-* ircpC-oiKos, ov, neighbouring, Luke i. 58.*
irepi-Siu), to bind round about, pass., irepi-ovo-ios, ov, superabundaid, costly,
plup., John xi. 44.* treasured; hence, specially chosen. Tit.
TTEpi-Spcfici). See irepLTpex'^' ii. 14 (LXX.) " a people /or his own ;

TTcpi-cp'yd^oiiai, to overdo, to be a busy- possession," R.V.*

body, 2 Thess. iii. 11.* ircpi-oxi], rjs, ij (see Trepi^w), a section or
*
irepC-sp-yos, ov, act., overdoing, intermed- jKissagc of Scripture, Acts viii. 32.
dling, I Tim. V. 13 ; pass., to, irep'upya, ircpi-iraTcw, w, -^(rw, to walk, to walk
curiQus arts, Acts xix. 19.* about, to roam; fig., as Heb., to pass
 ;;

ircpi-rreCpw — iri^paj VOCABULARY. 489

one's life, to conduct oneself (adv. or irepi-Tpeiru), to turn about, to convert to

noin. pred.), to live according to {iv, (ei's) madness. Acts xxvi. 24.*
dat. Kara, ace).
; 2nd aor. wepiedpa/xov,
•ir€pi-Tp€'x<«), to run
TTipi-irdpta, to pierce through, transfix, around (ace), Mark vi. 55.*
fig., I Tim. vi. lo,* irepi-(j>€pta, to hear or carry around, to
•trtpi-Triirrbi, to midst of (dat.),
fall into tJie carry about in oneself, Mark vi. 55 ;
robbers, Luke x, 30 temptations, : ,2 Cor. iv. 10 pass., fig., to be carried
;

James i. 2 ; to light ^/jjan a place, **

about, carried away by false teaching,
Acts xxvii. 41.* Eph. iv. 14 ; Heb. xiii. 9 Jude 12 ;

ircpi-iroUft), (3, N.T., in mid., to get for (\V. H., Trapa(f)ep(j}).*

oiuself, acquire, gain, jnarhase, Luke '7repi-4>pov£a), Q, to look down upon, to
xvii. 33 ( W. H. ) Acts xx. 28 i Tim.
; ; contemn, to despise, Tit. ii. 15.*
iii. 13. Syn. 43.* ir£pi-Xb>pos, ov, circumjacent ; only as
irfpi-TTOttio-is, ews, 7], {i) a gaining, a jws- subst. (17, sc. 777), the region round
scssing, i Thess. v. 9 2 Thess. ii. ; about ; the inlmbitants of such a region,
14 Heb. x. 39
; i Pet. ii. 9 (2) «
; ;
]\Iatt. iii. 5.
2)osscssion, Eph. i. 14. Syn. 43. ir£pi-t{/T][ia, aros, tj, scrapings, offscour-
Trepip-pTiTwiii, to tear off, as garments, ings, Cor. iv. 13.*
I

Acts xvi. 22.* '7r€p'ir€p€vo}jLat, dep., intrans., to vaunt,

ircpi-tnrdw, w, to drag around; hence, I Cor. xiii. 4.*

iig., pass., to he distracted in mind, Ilfpo-is, iSos, i], Persis, Rom. xvi. 12.*
Luke X. 40.* iT-fipvo-i,adv., during the year just passed
Trepto-o-cia, aj, 17, abundance, sujicrfluity, dirb vepvai, a year ago, 2 Cor. viii. 10,
Rom. V. 17 ; 2 Cor. viii. 2 James i. ; ix. 2.*
21 ei's irepiaadav, as adv., abundantly,
; 'n"£Tdo(Jtai, CjjxaL, or Trero/xaL (W. H.), to

2 Cor. X. 15.* fly, as a bird, Rev.*

TTcpio-o-evp.a, aTos, to, abundance, affluence, 7r£T€iv6v, ov, TO, a bird, a fowl ; only in
superfluity, Matt. xii. 34 Mark viii. ; plur., the birds.
8 Luke vi. 45 2 Cor. viii. 14.*
; ; irfiTOjiat. See weTdo/xai.
irepwro-cvift), (i) to he more than enough, TTfTpa, a?, ij, a rock, any large block of
to be left over, to abound richly ; rb stone ; Avith art, , the rock, i. e. , the rocky
irepiaaevou, ]\Iatt. xiv. 20, the residue; substratum of the soil ; met., for
(2) to redound to, els, 2 Cor. viii. 2 ;
caverns, Rev. vi. 15 ; fig., Rom. ix.
pass., to be in abundance, to be aug- 33see also Matt. xvi. 18,
; Syn. 75.
mented. Matt. xiii. 12 ; 2 Cor. iv. IlfiTpos, ov, 6, Peter, Greek for the Heb.
15- (Chald. ) kepha, rock. Same with ireTpa,
ircpwro-os, r], ou, abundant, remaining but with the termination of a masc.
over and above ; "-6 irepia-a-ov, excellence, name.
jne-eminence, Rom. iii. i ; adv., -Cos, TrfiTpwSris, es, rocky, stony. Matt, xiii, 5,
exceedingly, veliemently. 20 Mark iv, 5, 16.*
;

ircpio-croTcpus, adv. (compar. of TreptcccDs), TTTiYavov, ov, t6, rue, Luke xi. 42.*
more abundantly, more earnestly, more "TTY^} ^s, T), a fountain, source, well
vehemently. fig.of "the water of life"; a flow of
ircpwTTcpd, as, a dove, a pigeon.
ij, blood, Mark v. 29.
'n'€pi-T€'|ivw, tocut around, to circumcise ; TTTJ'yvvp.i, tttJIw, to fix, as a tent, Heb.
mid., to undergo circumcision, to cause viii. 2.*
oneself to he circumcised. miSdXiov, lov, TO, the rudder of a ship,
ir6pi-T£6T]|ii, to place, or put about or Acts xxvii, 40 James iii, 4.* ;

around (dat. and ace.) ; fig., to bestow, TrriX^KOs, 17, OV, how great, Heb. vii. 4 ;

to attribute, i Cor. xii. 23. large. Gal. vi. 7 (see ypd/x/xa). *

how
ir£pi-Top.TJ, ^s, i], circumcision, i.e., the iniXoSi ov, 6, clay, 7nire, mortar, John
act, the custom, or state ; with art., ix, 6-15 ; Rom, ix, 21,*
the circumcision, i.e., the Jews fig., ; TT^pa, as, 17, a bag, wallet, for carrying
for spiritual purity, Rom. ii. 28, 29 ; provisions, Matt, x, 10 ; Mark vi. 8 ;
Col. ii. II. Luke ix. 3, x. 4, xxii. 35, 36.*
m VOCABUIARY. [ifTlX^S — irXarvs

irfixvs, ews, 6, cubit, the length from ti, credit to, dat. ; to have confidence in, to
the elbow to the tip of tlie middle trust, believe, dat., et's, cv, iiri (dat.) or
finger, Matt. vi. 27 Luke xii. 25 ; ;
iwi (ace), often of Christian faith, in
John xxi. 8 Rev. xxi. 17.* ; God, in Christ to entrust something ;

iridtw, ffw, to lay hold of. Acts iii. 7 ; to (ace.) to any one (dat.); pass., to be
take, as in fishing or in hunting ; to entrusted with (ace).
arrest, Jolin vii. 30. iricTTiKos,77, bv, genuine, piuve, of oint'
TTit^ft), press down, as in a measure,
to ment, Mark xiv. 3 John xii. 3.* ;

Luke 38.* vi. TTio-Tis, ews, T], (i) favh, generally, ab

iriGavo-XoYia, as, tj, persuasive or plaus- 2 Thess. ii. 13 ; Hub. xi. i the object ;

ible speech. Col. ii. 4.* of the faith is expressed by obj. gen.,
TTiKpaCvcD, avC}, to render hitter, lit.. Rev. or by et's, iv, irpos (ace); (2) fidelity,
viii. II, X. 9, 10 ; to embitter, fig.. Col. good faith, Rom. iii. 3 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; ;

iii. 19.* (3) ^ pledge, a promise given, 2 Tim.

TTiKpia, as, T), bitterness, fig., Acts viii. iv. 7 (4) met., for the whole of the
;

23 ; Rom. iii. 14 ; Eph. iv. 31 ; Heb. Christian character, and (generally

xii. 15.* with art.) for the C%ristian religion.
iriKpos, a, acrid, malignant,
6v, bitter, irKFTos, 6v, (i) trusticorthy, faithful,
17,

James iii. 11, 14;* adv., -ws, bitterly, in any

relation or to any promise, of
of weeping, Matt. xxvi. 75 ; Luke things or (generally) persons ; (2) be-
xxii. 12.* lieving, abs., as ol^Trtarot, the folloioers
IltXdTOS or IliXaros (W. H., ITeiXaros), of Christ, or with dat.
01', 6 (Lat., pilatus, "armed with iricTTdw, w, to muke faithful ; N.T., only
javelin "), Pilate. in pass., to be assured of, 2 Tim. iii.

iri|X7rXT]fiL (7r\e-). See TrXrjdio. 14.;

•iri(A7rpT]jii (Trpa-), pass., inf., Tri/xirpaaOai, irXavdw, Co, -fjcru}, to lead astray, to cause
*
to be flamed, to stvell, Acts xxviii. 6.
ill to wander ; fig., to deceive ; pass., to he
irivaK£8tov, iov, to (dim. of Triva^), a misled, to err, to mistake.
toMetfor ivriting, Luke i. 63.* irXdvT), 175, T), waiidering ; only fig., de-
irCva^, a/cos, 6, a plate, 2)latter, dish. ceit, delusion, error.
irivo), fut., wiofxai, -eaai, -erat ;
perf., irXavTiTT^s, ov, 6, wandering ; darrip
TretrojKa ; 2nd aor., eiriou (inf., ttc^p, Tr\avqTT)s, a wandering star, Jude 13
W. H.), to drink, abs. or with ace. , ("planet").*
of thing drunk (sometimes e/c or dTrJ), irXdvos, ou, causing to wander, deceitful,.
to imbibe, as the earth imbibes rain ; I Tim. iv. I as subst., an impostor,.
;

fig., to receive into the soul, to partake Matt, xxvii. 63 2 Cor. vi. 8 2 John: ; ;

of.
irwJTTis, TTjTos, Tj, fotiicss, richiiess, as of xXd|, a/c6s, y], a tablet to icritc on, 2 Cor.
the olive, Rom. xi. 17.* iii. 3 ; Heb. ix. 4.*
imrpdcrKW (Trpa-), perf., TreirpaKa ; 1st aor, irXdo-p-a, a thing formed or
aros, t6,
pass., eTrpddrjv ;
perf. pass., Treirpa/xaL, fashioned, Rom. ix. 20.*
to seir. Matt. xiii. 46 ;
pass., with vwo, TrXd(r<rw, dew, to form, fashion, mould,
to be sold under, to be a slave to. as a potter his clay, Rom. ix. 20
miTTW (Trer-, see § 94, i. 8, d), (i) to fall I Tim. ii. 13.*
(whence, by diro or €k whither, by ; TrXa<rTOs, 77, bv, formed, moulded ; fig.,
tiri or et's, ace); hence, (2) to fall deceitful, 2 Pet. 3.* ii.

prostrate, as of persons, to die, to irXaT€ia, as, 7/ (fem. of TrXari/s, broad, se

perish ; of structures, to fall in ruins ; 656s), a street.
of institutions, to fail ; (3) to fall to, irXdros, oi's, rb, breadth, Eph. iii. 18 ;

as a lot (4) to fall into or under, as

;
Rev. XX. 9, xxi. 16.*
condemnation. irXarvvft), vCj, to make broad, to enlarge,
ni.<ri8Ca, as, tJ, Pisidia, Acts xiv. 24, Matt, xxiii. 5 ; pass., fig., to be en-
xiii. 14, where W. H. have adj. form.* larged, iu mind or heart, 2 Cor. vi. 11,

irtoTCvc* (seebdieve, § 74), to be per- 13.*

suaded of a thing (ace. or 8tl) ; to give irXarvs, eTa, v, broad, Matt. vii. 13.*
 ;

irX^-yH-^ — irXir)<r<rw] VOCABULARY. 491

anything inter-
irXcYfxa, aros, to (ttX^xw), TrXTJKTTis, OV, 6, a striker, a contentious
woven, braided hair, i Tim. ii. 9.* 2)crson, I Tim. iii. 3 Tit. i. 7.* ;

tXciotos, rj) oj', superl. of TroXi^s, the 7rXT]p.|j.vpa, as (W. H., -7;s), t]^ a flood, an
greatest, the most, very great; to inundation, Luke vi. 48.*
TrXeitxTov, adv., mostly, at most, I Cor. irXi^v, adv. (akin to irXeov, hence it adds
xiv. 27. a thought, generally adversative, some-
irXcCwv, dov (for declension see § 44), times partly confirmatory), besides, buty
com par. of ttoXi's-, more, greater, in nevertheless, howbcit, of a truth. Matt,
number — magnitude — comparison ; ol xi. 22, xviii. 7, xxvi. 39, 64 ; irXrqv 6ti,
irXeioves, oi wXeiovs, tlic more, tJie 'most, except tluit, Acts xx. 23 ; as prep, with
the many, majority, 2 Cor. ii. 6; irXehv gen., besides, cxcejJting, Mark xii. 32 ;

or ttX^ov, as adv., more, John xxi. Acts viii. I.

1 5 ; fTTt irXuov, further, longer, Acts irX-ppT]?, es, ( I ) full, abs. , Mark iv. 28 ;

iv. 17. {2) full of igen.), abounding in.

irXe'cco, ^w, <o iveavc together, to plait, w {(pepio), to bring to the
•7rXT]po-<})opcw,
Matt, xxvii. 29 ; Mark xv. 17 ; John full, to fulfil, 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; pass., of
xix. 2,* things, to be fulfilled, Luke i. I, " the
irXeov. See irXdwu. things fulfilled among us," i.e., fully
irXcovd^b), (Tw, intrans, to have more
, accomplished; 2 Tim. iv. 17, ''that
tJian enough, tosiq^eraboimd ; trans., the proclamation may be fulfilled," i.e.,
to increase, to cause to abound, i Thess. made everywhere known ; of persons,
iii. 12. to be fully assured, Rom. iv. 21, xiv.
irX€ov-€KT€<«), {^x^)f i^ have more than
Q) 5; CoL iv. 12 (W. H.).*
another, to desire to have more ; hence, TrXT]po-<})opia, as, i], fulness, entire
to overreach, take advantage of (R.Y.), possession, full assuraiKe, Col. ii.

2 Cor. vii. 2, xii. 17, 18; i Thess. iv. 2; I Thess. i. 5; Heb. vi. 11, x.
6 ;
pass., to he taken advantage of, 22.*
2 Cor. ii. II.* irX-qpdw, cD, wo-w, to fill with (gen.), to fill
irX€ov-€KTT]s, ov, 6, a covetous or avaricious up, to pervade, to complete, either time or
jjcrson, I Cor. v. lo, ii, vi. lo ; Eph. number to bestoio abundantly, to fur-
;

V. 5.* nish liberally, Phil. iv. 18 ; Eph. iii.

irXeov-elCa, aj, ij, covetousness, avarice. ig ; to accomplish, to perform fully,
irXcvpd, as, 17, the side of the human body, as prophecies, etc. ; pass., to be full
John xix. 34. of, 2 Cor. vii. 4 ; Eph. v. iS to be ;

irXc'o). See irXyjOio. made full, complete, or perfect, John

ttXcw (/), impf. e-rrXeou, fut. TrXeva-o/xai, iii. 29 Col. iv. 12 (W. H. read pre-
;

to sail, Luke Acts xxi. 3,

viii. 23 ; ceding). Syn. 13.
xxvii. 6, 24; Rev. xviii. 17 (W. H.) irX'<]p(upLa, aros, t6, fulness, plenitude,
with ace. of direction. Acts xxvii. 2 i.e.,that which fills, i Cor. x. 26, 28 ;
(but W. H. readc/s).* so, the fill number, Rom. xi. 25 the ;

TrXt]Yrj, rjs, i] (ttXtjcto-w), a stroke, a stripe, completion, i.e., that which makes full,
a wound, Acts xvi. 33 Rev. xiii. 14 ; the fulfilment, Matt. ix. 16 ; Rom, xiii.
an aJjUiction, Rev. ix. 20. 10 ; the fulness of time. Gal. iv. 4, is
irX-qOos, oi's, TO, a multitude, croivd, the completion of an era the fulness ;

throng ; with art., the multitude, the of Christ, Eph. i. 23, that which is
whole number, population. Acts xiv. 4 ;
filled by Christ, i.e., the Church the ;

a quantity, Acts xxviii. 3. fulness of the Godhead, Col. ii. 19 (see

irXi]0vva), vQ, ( i ) intrans. , to increase ; Lightfoot's note), all Divine attributes.
(2) trans., to multiply, augment; pass., irXT]<rCov,adv., near, near by, with gen.,
to be increased. John iv. 5 ; with the art., 6 tXtjo-Iov,
irXT|9a) (or TrifnrXT)ixi), ttXtjo-w ; 1st aor., a neighbour.
pass., eirX-qadriv ;
(i) to fill with (gen.); 'irXT]<r|j.ovVj, Tjs, iq,full satisfying, indul-
fig., of emotions, as Luke iv. 28 or ;
geru^e. Col. ii. 23.*
of the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4 ; (2) pass., ttXtjo-o-o), ^<j), 2nd aor. pass. iirX-fffrfv, to
to befulfillcd^ of time, Luke i. 23, 57. smite, Rev. viii. 12.*
492 VOCABULARY. lapiov
[irXoid — iroios

•xrXoidpiov, iov, to (dim. of irXoTov), a subst. (sc. X'''"'^'')* ^ ^(y^9 robe. Rev. i.

small boat, as the fishing-boats on the 13.*

lake of Galilee, TToBe'v, adv., interrog., lohence, of place,
irXoiov, 01^, TO, a shij), a vessel, large or Matt. XV. 33 suggestive of cause, ;

small. how, Matt. xiii. 27 of surprise, or ad- ;

irXdos, ous, gen. ov or o6s, sailing, voyage. miration, as Luke i. 43 ; also of strong
Acts xxi. 7, xxvii. 9, 10.* negation, Mark xii. 37.
irXovo-tos, t'a, lov, rich, ahcunding in (ev) iroCa, as, r/, grass, herbage, according
adv., -ws, richly, abundantly, Col. iii. to some, in James iv. 14 but more ;

16. probably the word here is the fem. of

^ ' "*
irXotrreo), cD, yjau), to become rich, to be rich, TTotoj, ' ofichat nature is your life ?

to abound in. iroieo), w, ijcrw, {i) to make, i. e. , to form,

irXovTi^o), to onake rich, to enrich, to cause to bring about, of to cause; si)oken
to abound in, I Cor. i. 5 ; 2 Cor. vi. religious festivals, etc., to observe, to
10, ix. II.* celebrate ; of trees and plants, to ger-
irXovTOs, ov, 6 (see § 32, a), riches, localth, m inate, to produce ; to cause to be
abundance ; spiritually, enrichment^ or to become. Matt. xxi. 13 ; to declare
Rom. xi. 12. to be, John 53 to assume. Matt,
viii. ;

wash, as garments, Luke

trXvvcD, vu), to xii. 33 ;
generally to do, i.e. y
(2) to do, ;

V. 2 (W. H.); Rev. vii. 14, xxii. 14 habitually, to perform, to execute, to

(W. H.). Syn. 17.* exercise, to practise, i.e., to j^ursuc a
irv6vp,a, aTos, to, (i) properly, the wiiul, course of action, to be active, to tvork,
or the air in motion, John iii. 8 ; to spend, to 2y(iss, i.e., time or life. Acts
hence, (2) the human spirit, dist. from XV. 33. Syn. 2.
aCJixa and ^vxn, i Thess. v. 23 ; (3) <TroiT]p.a, aTos, to, a thing made, ivoy^knian-
a temper or disjjosition of the soul, ship, Rom. i. 20 Eph. ii. 10.*
;

Luke ix. 55 ; Rom. viii. 15 ; (4) any •iroiT](ris, a doing, James i. 25.*
ews, t/,

incorporeal being, as [a)

intelligent, iroiiiTi^S, ov, 6, {i) a maker, doer, Rom.
the human separated from the
spirit, ii. 13; James i. 22, 23, 25, iv. 11 ;

bod}^ the undying soul; {b) angels, (2) a poet, Acts xvii. 28.*
good and bad (c) God, the immaterial;
ttoikCXos, Vf ov, various, of different
One, John iv. 24 {d) the Holy ;
colours, diverse.
Spirit (see § 217, /). Used of the in- TTOijJLaivw,avQ, {i) to feed a flock, Luke
fluence of which the Holy Spirit is the xvii. 7; hence, fig., (2) to be shepherd of,
author, in respect of Jesus, Luke iv. i ;
to teiul, to feed, cherish. Matt. ii. 6 ;
Acts X, 38, in respect of prophets and John xxi. 1-6 ; Acts xx. 28 ; i Cor. ix.

apostles and in respect of saints

;
7 ; I Pet. V. 2 ; Jude 1 2 ; Rev. vii.
generally, Eph. i. 17. Syn. 55. 17 ; (3) in Rev., ''to be shepherd of,
irvevjiaTiKos, n, ov, spiritual, relating to with a rod of iron," i.e., to rule, ii. 27,
that which is im})arted by the Spirit, xii. 5, xix. 15. Syn. 16.*
or is allied to the spiritual world, iroifJLTJv,ho$, 6, (i) a shepherd; (2) fig.,
I Cor. ii. 13 (see § 316), 15, xv, 44 ;
of Christ as the Sliephcrd, Heb. xiii.
rd irvev/xaTiKd, spiritual things, Rom. 20 I Pet. ii. 25 ami of his ministers
; ;

XV. 27 ; spiritual gifts, i Cor. xii, i ;

as pastors, Eph. iv. 11.
adv., -ws, spiritually, i.e., (i) mysti- iroCjivT], 77s, ^, ( I ) a flock of sheep or goats,
cally, Rev. xi. 8 {2) by tlie spiritual ;
Luke ii. 8 i Cor. ix. ; 7; (2) fig., of
faculty (opposed to \pvx^K6s), i Cor. ii. Christ's followers. Matt. xxvi. 35
14. John X. 16. Syn. 72.*
7rv€(o (f ), ei/trw, to blow, as the wind. 7ro£|ivi.ov, iov, t6 (dim. of irolfivrj), a little
•nviya*, to choke, to seize by the throat, flock; only fig., Luke xii. 32; Acts
Matt, xviii. 28 Mark v. 13.* ; XX. 28, 29 ; Pet. V. 2, 3.*
I

irviKTos, strangled.
77, ov, iroios, TToia, ttoTov, an interrog. pron. cor-
irvoi], ris, T], (i) breath, Acts xvii. 25 ; responding with otos and Toioi, of trhat
(2) a breeze or blast. Acts ii. 2.* kind, sort, species I what f wJmt one ?

Tro8^pT)s, €s, reaching to the feet ; as irhich ? In Luke v. 1 9, sc bdov.

 ; j
,

iroXcji^b) — irop<|)vp€OsJ VOCABUIARY. 493

iro\i\U<a, Co, rjffu), to make war, to contend irdjia, aros, t6, drink, I Cor. x. 4 ; Heb.
with {h-^tol, gen.). ix. 10.*
iroXcp-os, ov, 6, (i) war, a war ; (2) a irovTipia, as, i], evil dAgjMsition, vnckcd-
battle ; (3) strife. ncss, Matt. xxii. 18; Luke xi. 39; Rom.
iroXis, ews, 7}, a city, a walled town i. 29; I Cor. V. 8; Eph. vi. 12 plur., ;

met., inhabitants of a city ; with

tlie malignant 2^<^ssions, iniquities, ^lark
art., the city Jerusalem, the heavenly vii. 22 Acts iii. 26. Syn. 22.*
;

city, of which Jerusalem was a sym- things

TTOViipos, d, ov [ttovos), evil, bad, of
bol. or persons wicked, depraved, spec.
;
^
woXiT-dpx'qs, ov, 6, the ruler of a city, malignant, opp. to d7a^6s. 6 irovqpos,
a city magistrate, "politarch," Acts tlie Wicked One, i.e., liatan; to irovrjpov,
xvii. 6, 8.* evil. Syn. 22.
iroXireta, as, ^, ( i ) citizenship, Acts xxii. irovcs, 01', 6, (i) labour. Col. iv. 13
28 ; (2) a state or commonwealth, Eph. (W. H. ); (2) pain, sorrow, anguish,
ii. 12.* Rev. xvi. 10, II, XXL 4.*
iroXiTcvpia, aros, rb, a community, as novTiKos, 17, 6v, belonging to Pontus,
of a city, a commonwealth, Phil. iii. Acts xviii. 2.*
20.* IIovTios, iov, 6, Pontius, the praenomen
iroXiT€vw, in mid., to he a citizen ; hence, of Pilate.
to live, i.e., to order ones life. Acts IIovTos, OV, 6, Pontus, Acts ii. 9 ; i ?et.
xxiii. I Phil. i. 27.*
; i. I.*

iroXiniSj 01', 6, a citizen, Luke xv. 15, IloirXtos, ov, 6, Publius, Acts xxviii. 7, 8. *
Acts xxi. 39 ; \dt\\ gen., avrov, a TTopcia, as, 17, ivay, a journey, Luke
a
fclloic-citizcn, Luke xix. 14 ; Heb. xiii. 22 ; \cay or course of life, James
viii. II OV. H.).* i. II.*
iroXXoLKis, adv., many times, often. iropevop.ai, ao/jLai, dep., with pass. aor.
iroXXa-irXao-(wv, ov, gen. 01*0?, mani- eiropevd-nv, to go, to go away, to deptart,
fold, many times more, Matt. xix. 29 io journey, to travel, often (as Heb.) to
(W. H.); Lukexviii. 30.* take a
course in life.
iroXv-Xo-yia, as, i], much speaking, loqua- lay 2vaste, ha'cass, persecute
iropOc'o), Tjcrw, to
city, Matt. vi. 7.* Acts ix. 21 Gal. i. 13, 23.*
;

7roXv-(j.£pws, adv., in many parts, by iropio-fios, ov, 6, gain, i Tim. vi. 5, 6.*
divers 2)0 rtions (R.\.), Heb. i. i.* IXopKios, ov, 6, Porciu», the praenomen
ttoXv-ttoCkiXos, ov, very varied, Tnanifold, oi Festus, Acts xxiv. 27.*
Eph. iii. 10.* xopvcia, as, i], formication, lewdness ; fig.
iroXvs, iroWrj, iroXv (see § 39, 2), many, in Rev., iclolatnj.
numerous; iroXv, much, greatly, as •iropv€v«, (xoj, to commit fornication ; fig.
adv. ; TToWoi, many, often with par- in Rev., to icorship idols.
titive genitive, or e/c ol ttoXXoi, the ; TTopvT), ^s, 7}, a harlot, a prostitute; fig.
many (see § 227) woWd, in like; in Rev. , a7i idolatrous community.
manner, much, very much, often, TTopvos, ov, 6, one who prosUtutes himself,
many iroWQ, by 7;i«cA, joined
tivfies ; a fornicator.
with comparatives ctti irokv, for a ; TToppb), adv., far, far off. Matt. xv. 8;
great while, Acts xxviii. 6 iv ttoXX^J, ; Mark vii. 6 ; Luke xiv. 32 ; comp.,
altogether. Acts xxvi. 29. iroppuiT^po} (or -Tepov, W. H.), Luke
iroXv-oTrXa'YXvos, ov, very comjoassionate, xxiv. 28.*
of great mercy, James v. 11.* TToppwOev, adv., further, from afar, far
TToXv-TcX'^^s, ^$, very costly, very pi-ecious, off, Luke xvii. 12 ; Heb. xi. 13.*
Mark xiv. 3 i Tim. ii. 9 ; i Pet. iii.
; 7rop4>vpa, as, tj, a jmrple or crimson gar-
4.* ment, indicating wealth or rank, ^lurk
iroXv-Tijios, ov, 6, T], of great value, very XV. 17, 20 Luke xvi. 19 Rev. xvii.
; ;

costly, Matt. xiii. 46 John xii. 3 ; ; 4 (AV. H. read following), xviii. 12.*
compar., i Pet. i. 7 (W. H.).* <rrop<|>vp€os, ovs, a, ovv, pnirple or crimson,
iroXv-Tp6ir«s, adv., iii various ways, Heb. John xix. 2, 5 Rev. xvii. 4 (W. H.),
;

i. I.* xviii. 16.*

494 VOCABULARY. [irop<j>upd-'TrwXts —wp«(rPvT«pos
irop4>vp6-'/ra)Xis, ewj, tj, a seller of jiW'jjle Mark xv. 16 ; John xviii. 28, 33, xix.
or crimson cloth. Acts xvi. 14.* 9 so at Caesarea, Acts xxiii. 35 ; ^A«
;

iroo-aKis, adv., interrog. hcnv , many quarters of the ptrmtorian army in Rome,
times? how often? Matt, xviii. 21, Phil. i. 13.*
xxiii. 37 Luke xiii. 34. *
; irpdKTwp, opos, 6, an officer employed to
iroo-is, eojs, r/, drink', John vi. 55 ; Rom. execute judicial senUnces, Luke xii.
xiv. 17 ; Col. ii. 16.*
TTocros, 7], ov, pron., interrog., how much ? irpd^is, f ws, T), (
I ) « doing, action, mode
hoiv great ? plur., hoio many? irdau), as of act i 071, ^latt. xvi. 27 ; Luke xxiii.
adv. with comparatives, by how much ? 51 ;
Acts xix. 18 ;
plur., deeds, acts,
iroraixos, ov, 6, a river, torrent, flood. Rom. 13; Col. iii. 9; and in
viii.
iroTajio.ijxjpTiTos, ov, carried away by a inscription to the Acts of the Apostles
flood. Rev. xii. 15.* {2) function, office, Rom. xii. 4.*
iroTairos, rj, ov, adj., interrog., of what irpdos, a, ov, rec. in Matt. xi. 29 for
kind of what manner ? how great ?
] 7^pal''s(W. H.).*
iroTC, adv. , interrog. ichen ? at lohat , irpadnis, rec. for irpavT-rjs (W. H. ) in I
time ? till when ? hoio long ? ttot^, Cor. iv. 21 ; 2 Cor. x. i ; Gal. v. 23,
enclitic, at some time, at 07ie time or vi. I Eph. iv. 2 Col. iii. 12; i Tim.
; ;

other (see § 129). vi, II (W. H., TrpauTrd^ta) ; 2 Tim. ii.

iroTcposi pron., interrog., which of the 25 ; Tit. iii. 2.*

two? N.T. only neut. as adv., tvhether, irpao-Ca, as, i], a company formed into
correlating with ij, or, John vii. 17.* square, Mark vi. 40. For constr., see
*
troTTipiov, iov, TO, a drinking-cup, the § 242.
contents of the cup ; fig., the portion Trpd(r<rw or wpoLTTU}, ^a>, pf. iriirpaxa,
which God allots, whether of good or Treirpayfiai, (i) to do, perform, accom-
ill, commonly of the latter. plish, with ace. (2) with advs., to be ;

iroTitw, (TO), to cause to drink (two aces.) in any condition, i.e., to fare, Acts xv.
to give drink to (ace. ) ; fig. , to minister 29; Eph. vi. 21 (3) to exact, to require. ;

to, generally, i Cor. iii. 2 to water ; irpav-ira6cia (or la), as, rj (W. H.), meek-
or irrigate, as plants, i Cor. iii. 6-8. ness, I Tim. vi. II.*
IIoTioXoi, (j}v, oi, Futeoli, Acts xxviii. irpaus, gen. -eos or -ews (W. H.), pi. -e?s,
meek, gentle, Matt. v. 5, xi. 29 (see
iroTos, ov, 6 (see ttLvw), a drinking bout, Trpgx)s), xxi. 5 ; I Pet. iii. 4. The form
drunkenness, i Pet. iv. 3.* wpavs (with iota subscript) has little
irov, adv. , interrog. , where ? ivhither ? or no authority.*
Matt. ii. 4 ; John vii. 35. irpavTT]s, TTjTos, T], meekness, gentleness,
TTov, enclitic, an indef. particle of place James i. 21, iii. 13 i Pet. iii. 15 and ; ;

or degree, somewhere, soiiuwhere about, AV. H. in the passage quoted under

*
Heb. ii. 6, 16 (W. H., see Stjttou), iv. 4 ;
TrpaoTrjs.
Rom. iv. 19 (see § 129).* irpcVu), to become, be fitting to (dat. ), i Tim.
IIov8t]s, bevTos, 6, Pudcns, 2 Tim. iv. ii.10; Tit. ii. i ; Heb. vii. 26; impers.
21.* (see § 101), it becomes, it is fitting to.
iroiis, TToSos, 6, the foot ; met., for the Matt. iii. 15 ; i Cor. xi. 13 ; Eph. v.
person journeying, Luke i. 79 ; vtrb 3 Heb. ii. 10.*
;

Tovs irodas, under the feet, i.e., entirely irpcorpcia, as, 17, an embassy, ambassadors,
subdued, as Rom. xvi. 20. Luke xiv. 32, xix. 14.*
irpd'YiJLa, aros, to,a thing done, a fact, a Trpio-^ivo), CO} (lit., to be aged, elder men
thing, a business, a suit, as at law. being chosen for the office), to a£t as
irpay\i.aril<x (W. H., -Wa), as, 17, a busi- ambassador, 2 Cor. v. 20; Eph. vi. 20.*
ness, an affair, 2 Tim. ii. 4.* Trpeo-pvTc'ptov, iov, t6, an assembly of
•7rpa7|iaT€vo|iai, cofiai, dep., to transact elders, tlie Sanhedrin, Luke xxii. 66
husiiicss, to trade, Luke xix. 13.* Acts xxii. 5 officers of the church ;

irpaiTwpiov, Iov, t6 (from Lat., praetor), assembled, jn-rsbytcry, i Tim. iv. 14.*
the nalace at Jerusalem occupied by irp£<rpuT€pos» Tepa., repov (compar. of
the Roman governor, Matt, xxvii. 27 ; irp^a^vs, old), generally used as subst,.
'irp€o-pvrr)S — iTp{J-0€<rts] VOCABULARY. 495

elde^', (i)in age, Acts ii. 17 ; i Tim. irp(jpaTOV, ov, rb (Tpo^aivw), a sheep ; fig.,

V. i; plur., often, ancestors, as Heh. a follower of Christ.

xi. 2 (2) as subst.,ari elder,in dignity
;
irpo-Ptpd^o), ffio, to put foncard, Matt,
*
and office, whether of the Jewish com- xiv. 8 ; Acts xix. 33.
munity, Matt. xvi. 21 ; or the Chris- 'irpo-pX€ir«, N.T., in mid., to foresee or
tian, Acts XX. 17, 28; "presbyter"; jjrovide, Heb. xi. 40.*
in Rev., of the twenty-four elders. TTpo-'ytvop.ai, to be or be done before,
Trpta-^vrr]s, ov, 6, an old man, Luke i. Rom. iii. 25.*
18; Tit. ii. 2; Philem. 9.* irpo-'yivwo-Kw, beforehand, Acts
to know
Trp€o-pvTis, i5oj, T], an old u'omaii, Tit. xxvi. 5 ; of the Divine
2 Pet. iii. 17 ;

ii. 3.* foreknowledge, Rom. viii. 29, xi. 2 ;

irp-qv-fis, 4s, prone, falling headlmig. Acts I Pet. i. 20.*

TTpo-Yvwo-is, fws, T], forekno^uledge. Acts ii.

irpi^o) or Trpi'w, ist aor. pass. eirplcB-qv, 23; I Pet. i. 2.*
to to saio asunder, Heb. xi. 37.*
saw, irpo-'yovos, ov, 6, a j^rogenitor, plur.,
*
TrpCv, adv., of time, before, as conj. in ancestors, i Tim. v. 4 ; 2 Tim. i, 3.
X.T., with or without ^, sooner than; Trpo-yp6.^<a, \j/u}, to ivrite before, in time,
generally with ace. and inf., Matt. Rom. XV. 4 ; Eph. iii. 3 ; to write uj),
xxvi. 34 but after a negative we find
; any one. Gal.
exhibit before iii. i ; to
*
irpiv 6.V with subj. where the principal pre-ordain, Jude 4.
verb is in a primary tense, Luke ii. 26 ;
irpd-SiiXos, ov, manifest to all, evident,
irplv with opt. Avhere it is in a his- I Tim. V. 24, 25; Heb. xii. 14.*
torical tense, Acts xxv. 16. 7rpo-8£8b))ii, {i) to give before, Rom. xi.
HpicKa, and dim. ITptc/ciXXa,
r?s, 7], as, 35 (2) to give forth, betray; see follow-
;

a proper name, Prisca or Priscilla. ing word.*

irpo, prep., gov. the gen., before, i.e., of Trpo-8oTris, ov, 6, a betrayer, Luke vi. 16;
place, time, or superiority (see § 294). Acts vii. 52 2 Tim. iii. 4.*;

In composition, it retains the same irpd-Spojios, 01^, 6, 7/ (see irporpex^), cl pre-

meanings. cursor, forerunner, Heb. vi. 20.*
T^poo.ym, to bnng oid, Acts xvi. 30 gen. ;
<7rpo-€i8ov, 2nt^aor. of wpoopdcj.
intrans., to go before, to lead the way, irpo-eiTTov, 2nd aor. of Trp6<p7]fj.i, perf,
to precede, in place. Matt. ii. 9 ; in irpoeipTjKa.
time, Mark vi. 45; part., irpodyiov, irpo-cXm^ci), to hope before, Eph. i. 12.*
preceding, previous, i Tim. i. 18; Heb. irpo-ev-dpxoixai, to begin before, 2 Cor,
vii. 18. viii. 6, 10,*
irpo-aipco), G), N.T., in mid., to propose irpo-err-ayyiWoi, in mid., to pi'omise
to oneself, resolve, 2 Cor. ix. 7.* before, Rom. i. 2 ; 2 Cor. ix. 5 (W.
irpo-aiTido[xai, Qijul, to lay to one's charge H.).*
beforehand, Rom. iii. 9.* irpo-6pxop.ai, (see § 103, 2), (i) to go
irpo-aKovb), ^0 hear before, Col. i. 5. * forward, advance ; (2) to go before, pre-
TTpo-ajiapTavo), to sin before, 2 Cor. xii. cede, in time or place (gen. or ace).
21, xiii. 2.* irpo-cToiixdtw, <x(j}, to appoint beforehand,
irpo-avXtov, ov, to, the coiirt before a to predestine, Rom. ix. 23 Eph. ii. ;

building, the parch, Mark xiv. 68.* 10.*

irpo-Paivw, to go forward, Matt. iv. 21 ; irpo-cv-ayycXC^ofiai, to foretell good tid-
]Mark i. 19; pf. part. , irpo^efiTjKws ev ings, preach the gospel beforehand. Gal.
i]fj.€pats, advanced in life, Luke i. 7, 1 8, iii. 8.*
ii. 36.* xpo-€'x«, in mid., to hold oneself be-
irpo-PoXXo), to put forth, as trees their fore, to be superior, Rom. iii.
9 (see
leaves, Luke xxi. 30 ; to thrust foricard. '§ 358).*
*
Acts xix. 33. '7rpo-T]'y€'o|i,ai, ov/xai, to lead onicard by
irpoPariKos, "n, ^v, pertaining to sheep, examjile, or to consider before, prefer,
John V. 2.* Rom. xii. 10.*
irpopdriov, dim. of follo\ving, John
01', TO, irpd-Gco-ts, ews, rj {TiOrjfXL), (i) a setting
xxi. 16-17 (W. H.).* before ; oi dproL rr,s npodicreus, the luaves
496 VOCABULARY [irpo-O^crjJiios — Trpo(r-avaXt<rK<*

of the presentation, or the shewhread, irpo-iiapTiipojxai, to testify beforeJiand, to

compare Heb. ix. 2 (2) a predetermi- ;
predict, I Pet. i. 11.*
nation, p)urposc, Acts xi. 23. irpo-jicXtTaw, w, to care for beforehand,
•n-po-Oco-jitos, la, lov, set hcforcliand, aj)- to premeditate, Luke xxi. 14.*
pointed hcfore, Gal. iv. 2.* 7rpo-|i€pi^.vd(i), w, to be anxious or solicit-
irpo-Ov|i£a, as, t), alacrity, willingness, ous beforehand, Mark xiii. 11.*
Acts xvii. II ; 2 Cor. viii. 11, 12, 19, irpo-voe'cD,u), to perceive beforehand, to
ix. 2* provide for, gen., i Tim. v. 8 in mid., ;

irp6-0v(ios, ov, willing,

eager, ready, to provide for mieself, to practise, ace,
Matt, xxvi. 41 Mark xiv. 38 to ; ; Rom. xii. 17; 2 Cor. viii. 21.*
TrpodvfMov, alacrity, Rom. i. 15 adv., ; irpd-vota, ay, i), providence^ Acts xxiv.
3 ;

-ws, readily, with alacrity, i Pet. care for {gQw.), Rom. xiii. 14.*
V. 2.* Ti-po-opdb), cD, 2nd aor. irpoei^ov, to see
irpoi|JLOS (W. H. for Trpm'fxos). , beforehand, Acts ii. 31, xxi. 29 Gal. ;

irpo-to-TTiiii, N.T. only in trans., act., iii. 8 ; mid., to Imve before ones eyes,

2nd aor. and perf., and mid., (i) to Actsii. 25 (LXX.).*

preside over, to rule, gen. Rom. xii. 8 ,
;
irpo-op£t<^, to predetermine, to j^re-ordain.
1 Thess. V. 12 i Tim. iii. 4, 5, 12,
; Acts iv. 28 ; Rom. viii. 29, 30 ; i Cor.
V. 17 (2) maintain or profess, gen.,
;
ii. 7 ; Eph. i. 5, 11.*

Tit. iii. 8.* Trpo-Traa-yja, to suffer beforehand, i Thess.

irpo-KaXcw, Q, in mid., to provoke, stimu- ii. 2.*
late. Gal. V. 26.* irpo-irdTwp, opos, 6, a forefather, Rom.
trpo-KaT-aYycXXw, to announce beforehand, iv. I (W. H.).*
to promise. Acts iii. 18, 24 (not W. H. ), to sold forward, to accom-
•irpo-'ir€p.Tra),
*
vii. 52 2 Cor. ix. 5 (not W. H. ).
; pany, bring one on his way.
to
TTpo-KaT-apTC^Wj to make ready hefore- irpo-ircTTJs, ^s {iriirTw), precipitate, head-
*
hand, 2 Cor. ix. 5.* long, rash, Acts xix. 36 ; 2 Tim. iii. 4.
irp6-K£i|jLai, to lie or he placed before, to irpo-iroptvoixai, (to/mxl, in mid., to pre-
he proposed, as duty, example, reward, cede, to 2MSS on before (gen.), Luke
*
etc., Heb. vi. 18, xii. 1,2; Jude 7 to ; i. 76 ; Acts vii. 40.
he at hand, to he present, 2 Cor. viii. Trpos (see § 307), prep., gov. gen.,
12.* dat., and accus. cases, general signif.,
<irpo-KT]pv<ror«, ^oj, to announce ov preach toivards. In composition, it denotes
beforehand, Acts iii.20 (not W. H. ), motion, direction, reference, nearness,
xiii. 24.* addition.
•irpo-Koir^, urging forward, fur-
^s, 7], irpo-o-dpPaTov, ov, to, the day before tlie

therance, progress, Phil. i. 12, 25 ; i sabbath, Mark xv. 42.*

Tim. iv. 15.* irpoc-aYopcva), to address by name, to
irpo-KOTTTw, to make progress in (dat. or designate, Heb. v. 10.*
iv) ; toadvance to {iiri, ace.) of time,
; bring to, to bring
irpoo'-d'ya), (i) trans., to
to he advanced or far spent, Rom. xiii. near. Matt, xviii. 24 (W. H.) ; Luke
12. ix. 41 ; Acts xvi. 20 ; i Pet. iii. 18 ;
irpo-Kpi.|xa, aros, to, a forejudging, preju- (2) intrans., to come to or toivards, to
dice ; or perhaps a judging one thing approach. Acts xxvii. 27.*
before another, preference, I Tim. v. irpo(r-a'y«"yirj, ijs, 17, apjjroach, access,
21.* Rom. V. 2 ; Eph. ii. 18, iii. 12 (ei'j,

Trpo-Kvpoo), (i, to establish or ratify be- irpos, ace.).*

fore. Gal. iii. 17.* Trpoo-aiTto), w, to beg, to ask earnestly,
irpo-Xa|ipdvu>, to take before, anticipate, Mark 46 (not W. H. ) Luke xviii.
x. ;

Alark xiv. 8 ("she hath anticipated 35 (not W. H.); John ix. 8.*
the anointing," i.e., hath anointed irpo(r-a{'rr]s, 01;, 6, a bcqgar, Mark x. 46
beforehand); i Cor. xi. 21 pass., to ;
(\\. H.); Johnix. 8 0V. H.).*
* irpocr-ava-PaCvo), to go up to (a more
be overtaken or caught, Gal. vi. i .

irpo-X^Y^, to tell beforehand, forewarn, honourable place), Luke xiv. 10.*

2 Cor. xiii. 2 Gal. v. 2 i Thess. iii.
: : irpocr-avaXCo-Ku), to spend in addition,
4.* Luke viii. 43.*
irpo(r-ava-'Tr\T]pow — Trpo(r-(i.€VO)J VOCABULARY. 497

irpocr-ava-irX'qpdft), a), to fill up by adding Trpd(r-Kaipos, ou, for a season, tcmj)orary,

to, to supply, 2 Cor. ix. 12, xi. 9.* transient. Matt. xiii. 21 ; Mark iv. 17 ;
irpo<r-ava-Ti0-r]|xi, to lay ^ip over and 2 Cor. iv. 18 Heb. xi. 25.*
;

above; in mid., {i) to communicate or irpotr-KaXew, cD, N.T., mid., to call to

impart in addition (ace. and dat, ), oneself, to call for, to summon ; fig. , to
Gal. ii. 6; (2) to confer with (dat.), call to an office, to call to the Christian
Gal. i. 16.* faith.
'7rpoo--a'ir€iX€w, w, to utter additional irpo<r-KapT€p€w, Co, to 2Jer severe in, to
threats, Acts iv. 21.* continue stedfast in (dat.). Acts i. 14,
'irpo(r-8aTravd«, a), 770-0;, to spend in ii. 42; to ivait upon (dat.), Mark iii. 9 ;

addition, Luke x. 35.* Acts X. 7.

Trpocr-Seop.at, to luant more, to stand in Trpo(r-KapT€pTi<ris, ews, 7/, perseverance,
need of {gen.). Acts xvii. 25.* Eph. vi. 18.*
irpo(r-8exo|i.ai, dep. mid., {i) to receive to 7rpo<r-K€4>dXatov, ov, a cushion for the
one's company, Luke xv. 2 (2) to ;
head, a pillow, Mark 38.*
iv.
admit, allow, accept, Heb. xi. 35 ; (3) irpocr-KXTipdw, w, to adjoin by lot or
to aivait, to ezpect (ace. ), Mark xv. 43. choice; pass., to consort with (dat.),
*
'irpo(r-8oKd<o, u), to look for, C7:pcct, antici- Acts xvii. 4.
pate, whether witli hope or fear. Trpocr-KXCvw, to incline towards, Acts v.
upoo--8oKCa, as, y], a looking for, expecta- 36(W. H.).*
timiy anticipation, Luke xxi. 26 ; Acts irpdo'-KXio-is, ecus, ij {k\iv(o), a leaning
xii. II.* toicards, 'partiality, i Tim. v. 21.*
irpoor-€du), cD, to permit or suffer further. Trpoo-'KoXXdw, w, ri<Tii}, pass., to join one-
Acts xxvii. 7.* self to (dat.), as a companion, Acts v.
trpoa-- iyyil<a, to ajjproach, to come near 36 (W. H., TrpoaKXivw) ; to cleave to
*
to (dat. ), Mark ii. 4. (tt/x^s, ace), as husband to wife. Matt.

Trpo(r-€8p€i)c»), to ivait ujwn, to minister to xix. 5 (W. H., KoWdw) ; Mark x. 7 ;

(dat.), Cor. ix. 13 (W. H., irapebpevu)).
I Eph. V. 31.*
Trpoo--€p'Yd^o|iat, dep. mid., to gain by irpd(r-KO|xp.a, ros, re, a stumbling-block,
labour in addition, Luke xix. 16.* offence, an occasion of falling, Rom.
'irpoo--€pxo|Jiai 2), (i) gene-
(see § 103, xiv. 13, 20 I Cor. viii. 9 ; i Pet. ii.
;

rally, to come or
go to, abs. or dat. to , 8 ; with Xt^os, a stone of sturnbling
of place or person, to visit, to Jucve (R.Y.), Rom. ix. 32, 33.*
intercourse icith ; (2) specially, to Trpo(r-KOTrT|, 77s, 7/, offence, an occasion of
approach, to draw near to, God or offence or stumbling, 2 Cor. vi. 3.*
Christ, Heb. vii. 25 ; (3) to assent to, '7rpoo--KdTrT«, to strike the foot against,
concur in, i Tim. vi. 3. Matt. iv. 6 ; so, to stumble, to take
Trpoo--€vxTi, 7)^, (i) prayer to God
-17, (2) ; offence, I Pet, ii. 8.
a place where prayer is offered, an irpoo--KvXift), to roll to, or (eTrt, ace), iqwn
oratory, only Acts xvi. 13, 16 (see ^latt. xxvii. 60 xv. 46.*
; Mark
§ 268, note). Syn. 38. irpoo--Kvv€w, to boio doivn, to prostrate
Trpo(r-6tixo|Jiai, dep. mic}., to pray to God oneself to, to ivorship, God or inferior
(dat. ), to offer prayer, to pray for (ace. beings, to adore (dat. or ace). Syja.
of thing, virep or irepi, of person, iVa 36.
or oTrojs, of object, occasionally inf). 'irpo<r-Kvvii'H]s, ov, 6, a worshipper, John
Syn. 38. iv. 23.*
irpoo--ex,w, to apply, with vovv expressed Trpo(r-XaX€a), Q, to S23eak to, to converse
or understood, to apply the mind, to with (dat.),Acts xiii. 43, xxviii. 20.*
attend to, dat. with aird, to beware of;
; Trpoo'-Xap-Pdvo), N.T., mid., to take to one-
also, to give heed to, inf. with fi-q. self, i.e., food, companions, to receive
•irpoo--T]\<5w, a, to affix with nails, nail to felloioship, Rom. xiv. i.
to. Col. ii. 14.* irpdcr-XTnl/ts (W. H., -X-qfi^f/Ls), eojs, 17, a

irpoor-T|\vTOS, 01', a " pro-

6, t} (^pxofj.aL), taking to oneself, a receiving, Rom.
selyte," a convert to Judaism, Matt. xi. 15.*
xxiii. 15 ; Acts ii. 10, vi. 5, xiii. 43.* •irpo<r-|x^vw, to continue ivith or 171, to

KK
498 VOCABULARTT. [irpoT-opfxi^cD — irpo-4)'»]T6vw

adhere to (dat.), to stay in {^v) a Trpoo--(j>wv€a), a), to call to (dat.), to cry

place. aloud, to call to oneself {a,cc.).
irpocr-opii^tb) (opfMos), mid,, to come to Trp6<r-\va-is, eojs, i) (x^oj), an affusion, a
anchor, to clraio to shore, Mark vi. sjrrinkling, Heb. xi. 28.*
53-* irpo<r-\|/avw, to touch lightly, Luke xi.
irpo(r-o<j)€iXw, to oive besides or m addi- 46.*
tion, Pliilem. 19.* Trpoo-wiro-X'q'TrTeci) (W. H. , -Xryxv-T-), cD, to
'irpoa--o\QC'i,o) (ox^ew), to he grieved or accept the person of any one, to show
offended loith (dat.), Heb. iii. 10, 17 jMrtiality, James ii. 9.*
(LXX.).* irpo(ra)'7ro-XTi'rrTT]S (W. H., -\rjfX7rr-), ov, 6,
irpdcr-Treivos, ov (ireTva), very hungry, a respecter of persons, a ^ja?'^i«^ one,
Acts X. 10.* Acts X. 34.*
to fasten, applied
Trpoo--'jrT|-yvv|xt, to affix, 'irpoorci)'tro-XT|\|/£a (W. H., -Xrjfxrp-), as, ij,

to Christ's being fastened to the cross, respect of persons, partiality, Rom. ii.

Acts ii. 23.* 1 1 ; Eph. vi. 9 ; Col. iii. 25 ; James

irpocr-TriTrTw, (i) to fall downheforc (dat., ii. I.*
_ or irpds, ace.) ; (2) to heat against (dat.), Trpdo-wTTOv, Of,TO {&\p), (i) the face, the
'
Matt. vii. 25. countenance in antithesis with Kapdia,
;

irpoor-iroieo), cD, in mid., to fashion one- mere ajjpearance ; (2) tlie surface, as of
self to ; hence, to pretend (inf.), Luke the earth, Luke xxi. 35; of the heaven.
xxiv. 28 John viii.
; in 6, perhaps, to Matt. xvi. 3.
regard (W. H. omit).* Trpo-Td<r<ra), ^w, to app)oint before. Acts
irpoa-TTOpevofiai, to come to, ajyproach xvii. 26 (W. H., irpodTaactj}).*
(dat.), Mark x. 35.* Trpo-T£ivw, to stretch out, to tie up for
irpo(r-pT|YVV(xi, to dash against, as waves, scourging, Acts xxii. 25.*
Luke vi. 48, 49.* irpdrepos, ^pa, epov (comparative of irpo),
<irpoo--Tdo-(ra), ^w, abs. or ace, and inf., former, Eph. iv. 22 Trporepov or to ;

to enjoin (ace.) upon (dat.). irpoTepov, as adv., before, formerly.

irpo-oTTdTis, ibos, t}, a patroness, sue- trpo-TiGTiixi, N.T., mid., to set forth, per-
courer, Rom. xvi. 2.* haps Rom. 25 to purpose, to de-
iii. ;

7rpo(r-Ti0T](ii, to 2}lcice near or by the side sign beforehand, Rom. i. 13 Eph. ;

of, to add to (dat. , or eri, dat. or ace. ) i. 9.*

mid. , with inf. , to go on to do a thing, irpo-Tpcirw, in mid., to exhort. Acts xviii.

i.e., to do again, Acts xii. 3 ; Luke 27.*
XX. II, 12; so 1st aor., pass., part., •7rpo-Tpe)((»), 2nd aor. irpoedpa/j-ov, to run
Luke xix. 11, irpoadels elirev, he S2)ake before, Luke xix. 4 John xx. ;
4.*
again (see § 399, dJ). TTpo-vTrdpxo), to he formerly, with parti-
irpotr-Tpexo), 2nd aor. irpoaedpa/j-ov, to run ciple, Luke xxiii. 12 ; Acts viii. 9.*
to, Mark ix. 15, x. 17 ; Acts viii. 30.* 'irpd-(j)a(ris, ecus, 17, a pretext, an excuse ;
Trpo(r-<|>a,7iov, ov, to, anything eaten dat., adverbially, in apjjearance, j;rc-
loith bread, as fish, meat, etc., John tence.*
xxi. 5.* •7rpo-c}>€po), to bring forth, Luke vi. 45.*
'irp6-o-(j)aTos, ov (from acpa^o), to slaugh- Trpd-<j)T]|Xi, fut. irpoepQ, perf. irpoeiprjKa,
ter, "just slain"), recent, ncio, Heb. 2nd aor. wpoecTrov, to say before, i.e.,
x. 20;* adv., -wj, recently, Acts xviii. at an earlier time. Gal. i. 9 in an ;

2.* earlier part of the discourse, 2 Cor. vii.

'Trpo(r-<}>6'p«, to bring to, dat. ; to offer, to 3 or prophetically, ]\[ark xiii. 23.
;

present, as money, Acts18 ; spe- viii. irpo-<j)7|T€Ca, as, v,{i) the gift of prophecy;
cially, to offer sacrifice ; mid., to bear (2) the exercise of the gift ; plur,, ;?ro-
oneself towards, to deal vnth, Heb. 2)hecies.
xii. 7. irpo-<j)T]T€tia), (TOJ, to be a prophet, to pro
Trpo<r-<J)iXTJs, es, ^?^crt5Migr, loveable, Phil, phes]!, to forth-tell, or s])cak of Di-
iv. 8* vine things ; (the meaning foretell is
jrpoo--<f>opd, as, t}, an offering, a sacri- secondary and accidental) of false ;

fice, an oblation. Syn. 37. piophets, Matt. vii. 22; to diving

 ; .

trpo-^-firri^
— ttvXt]
J
VOCABULARY. 499

used ill mockery, Matt. xxvi. 68. th£ first-born, Heb. xii. 23, of saints
Syn. 15. who died before Christ's coming.
7rpo-<|>"i]TT]s, ou, 6, (i) a projihet, i.e., one •jTraici), acj, intrans., to stumble, to fall,
who has insight into Divine things to err, Rom. xi. 11 ; 2 Pet. i. 10;
and speaks them forth to others James ii. 10, iii. 2.*
plur., tlie pro2j1tetic books of the 0.2\; irrepva, as, rj, the heel, John xiii. 18.*
(2) a poet, a 7ninstrel, Tit. i. 12. Syn. iTTepvrytov, ov, t6 (dim. irr^pv^), the ex-
15. tremity, as a battlement or parapet,
irpo-<|)f)TLK6s, 77, tv, prophetic, uttered by Matt. iv. 5 ; Luke iv. 9.*
irrophds, Rom. xvi. 26 ; 2 Pet. i. 19.* TTTepv^, iryos, i], a wing, a jjinion.
'n-po-<^f]Tts, t5os, T], a prophetess. Luke ii. irn^vos, 71, ov (Trero/ioi), winged, to.
*
36 ; Rev. ii. 20. TTTTjvd, birds, Cor. xv. 39.*
fowls, i

<7rpo-<})0dva), to anticipate, to be beforehand, TTTOECi), Co, to terrify, Luke xxi. 9, xxiv.

-TT *
with participle, Matt. xviL 25.* '
/
Trpo-X€iptto[iai, to ap2)oint, to choose, to •TrTOT](ris, ews, 7/, terror, consternation, i

destine. Acts iii. 20 ("W. H.), xxii. 14, Ptt.iii. 6.*

xxvi. 16.* riToXejiaCs, "t5os, r/, Ptolemms, Acts xxi.
7rpo-\€ipo-TOV€«, w, to fore-appoint, to 7.*
choose beforehand, Actsx. 41.* TTTiiov, OV, TO, a fan, a winnoicing -shovel.
IIpoxopos, ov, 6, Prochoi'us, Acts vi. 5.* Matt, iii. 12 Luke iii. 17.*
;

irpvjiva, as, rj, the hinduiost part of a TTT-upo), to terrify, Phil. i. 28.*
ship, the stern, Mark iv. 2>^ ; Acts irTv<r(xa, aros, to, spittle, saliva, John
xxvii. 29, 41.* ix. 6.*
irpcot, adv., early in the rtioming, at TTTvo-crco, ^oj, to fold, to roll up, as a scroll,
daicn; with advs. ajxa irpojt, \iau irput, , Luke iv. 20.*
venj early in the moriiing. TTTtJa). (Tw, to spit, Mark vii. 33, viii. 23 ;

Trp&)t|xos, 77, ov, early, of the early rain, John ix. 6.*
James v. 7 (W. H., irpjCfioi,.* TTTwiJia, aros, to {titttcj), a body fallen in
irpttjivos, adj., belonging to the morning, death, a carcase, ]\Iatt. xxiv. 28.
of the morning star, Rev. ii. 28, xxii. TTTcoo-is, ecos, lit. or fig., Matt.
7], tt fall,
16.* vii. 27 34.*
; Luke ii.

•n-pwtos, ta, ov, of the morning ; fem. (sc. tn(a)(iia, as, i], poverty, leant, 2 Cor. viii.
wpa), morning, Matt, xxvii. i, xxi. 18 2, 9 Rev. ii. 9.*
;

(W. H., Trpwt); John xviii. 28 (W. H., TrT&)X€vw, (jw, to be in poverty, 2 Cor.
* *
Trpwi), xxi. 4. viii. 9.
irpcopa, as, ri, forward part of a ship,
the TTToxos, reduced to beggary, poor,
7], ov,
the proi/j, Acts xxvii. 30, 41.* destitute, sp)irituaUy poor, in a good
Trpwrevft), to have pre-eminence, to be sense. Matt. v. 3 ; in a bad sense,
chief, Col. i. 18.* Rev. iii. 17. Syn. 30.
irp&)T0-Ka9-€8p£a, as, r/, a chief or upper- '"^K^'H, ^s» 7/ (ti/^), ^/^^ fist, Mark vii. 3
most scat. (see R.V. and niarg.).*
irp&)TO-KXi<ria, as, 17, the chief place at a IIvOwv (W. H., TTvdojv), covos, 6, Python,
banquet. a divining demon ; called after a name
irpcoTOs, r), ov (superlative of irpo), first, of the heathen deity Apollo, Acts xvi
m place, time, or order like irporepos ; i6jseeR.V.).*
with folloAnng gen., before, only John i. iruKvos, n, ov, frequent, i Tim. v. 23 ;

1 30; -jrpQrov, as adverb, first, Mark iv.

5, neut. as adverb, often,
plm*. irvKva,
28; with gen., before, John xv. 18; Luke V. 33 so irvKvorepov, more fre-
;

TO -rrpCoTov, at the first, John x. 40. quently, Acts xxiv. 26.*

irpuTo-oTdnis, ov, 6, a leader, a ring- irvKTcvw [ttv^), to box, fight, I Cor. ix.
leader. Acts xxiv. 5.* 26.*
7rp«T0-T(JKLa, i(3}v, TOL, the rights of the 77s, T), a door or
ttuXti, gate iroXai adov,
first-bom, the birthright, Heb. xii. 16.* the gates of Hades, i.e., the powere
irpwTo-TOKOS, ov, first-born ; 6 irpcoToTOKos, of the unseen world, Jklatt. xvi. 18.
specially a title of Chuist. Plur., Syn 71.
500 VOCABUTJ^RY [ttvXwv — fia^C^

"jTuXcov, u)voi, 6, the entrance to a liousc, implying a strong negative. Matt,

Acts X. 17 ; rt gateway, porch, Matt. xxvi. 54 Acts viii. 31. Often (N.T.)
;

xxvi. 71. Syn. 71. in indirect interrogations (classical,

7n)v6dvo|xai, 2nd aor. eTrvdofirjv, (i) to oTTws), Matt. vi. 28, etc.
ask, asl' from {irapd, gen.), to inquire ;

(2) to ascertain by inquiry, only Acts

xxiii. 34. Syn. 9.
irvp, TTvpSs, TO, fire generally ; of the P.
heat of the sun. Rev. xvi. 8 of Ught- ;

ning, Luke ix. 54 God is so called, ; P, pw, rho, r, and as an initial always,
p,
Heb. xii. 29 ; fig. for strife, Luke xii. p, the seventeenth letter. As a
rh,
49 ; trials, i Cor. iii. 13 ; of the numeral, p' = 100 ; p,— 100,000.
eternal fire, or future punishment, 'Padp, or 'Paxd/3, t] (Heb.), Italiab.
Matt, xviii. 8. •PappC (W. H., 'Pa;S/3eO, (Heb.,) " Rab-
injpd, as, 7], a heap of fuel burning, a bi," my
master, a title of respect in
fire. Acts xxviii. 2, 3.* Jewish schools of learning ; often
irvp-yos, 01^, 6, a toiver, a lofty building, a applied to Christ. Syn. 59.
fortress (comp. burgh). 'PappovCor'Paj9|8owt'(W. H., 'Pa^^ovvei)
TTupeo-cru), to be sick of a fever. Matt. (Heb.,) like 'Pa/S^Si, but of higher
viii. 14 ; Mark i. 30.* honour, my great master, Mark x. 51 ;

iruperos, ov, 6, a fever. John XX. 16.*

irupivos, f], ov, fiery, glittering. Rev. papSi^o), io-io, to scourge, to beat with
ix. 17.* rods, Acts xvi. 22 ; 2 Cor. xi. 25.*
irvp6(a, Q, N.T., pass., to be set on fire, pdpSos, ov, ij, a waiul, rod, staff, JMatt.
to burn, inflamed, to glow with
to be X. 10 I Cor. iv, 21 ; Rev. xi. i; a rod
;

heat, as metal in a furnace, to be tried of authority, a scejHre, Heb. i. 8.

vnth fire. pap8-ovx,os, ov, 6 {^0}), the holder of
irvppdtw, to be fire-coloured, to be red, the rods, a Roman officer, lictor,
Matt. xvi. 2, 3.* Acts xvi. 35, 38.*
iruppos, d, ov, fiery-red, £re-coloured, 'Pa-yav, 6 (Heb.), Eagau, Luke iii. 35.*
Rev. vi. 4, xii. 3.* po.Si-ovp'ynP'a, aros, t6 {pd8ios, easy, and
irvpoxris, ews, 7/, a burning, a confla- ^pyov, "an easy or careless deed"),
gration, Rev. xviii. 9, 18 ; severe trial, an act of villany. Acts xviii. 14.*
as by fire, i Pet. iv. 12.* paSi-ovp-yCa, as, 17, craftiness, villany,
*
irw, an enclitic particle, even, yet, used Acts xiii. 10.
only in composition ; see jx-qiru, 'PttKd (Heb., Chald. form), Raca ! a
fi7]8^Tro}, oviro), ovd^iroj. term of contempt. Matt. v. 22 (see
TrwXeo), a), rjao), to sell, to trade, Matt. ^^§153, ii.).* ^

xxi. 12. pdKos, ous, rb {prjyvv/xi), a remnant torn

trwXos, ov, 6, a youngling, a foal or of, a piece. Matt. ix. 16 ; Mark ii.

colt,as Matt. xxi. 2. 21.*

irw-iroT€, adv., at any time, used only 'Pap.d, i] (Heb.), llama. Matt. ii. 18.*
after a negative, not at any time, pavrC^b), ia-o), to sprinkle, to cleanse cere-
never. monially (ace. ) by sprinkling, to purify
irwpoa), w, acj, fo harden, to render from (d7r6), Heb. ix. 13, 19, 21, x.
callous, fig. 22.*
ircopcixris, ews, r/, hardness of heart, pavTi(rp,<$$, ov, 6, sprinkling, purification,
callousness, Mark iii. Rom. xi, 25 Heb. xii. 24; i Pet. i. 2.*
5 ; ;

Eph. iv. 18.* pairC^b), iao), to smite witJi the hand (as
irws, an enclitic particle, in a maimer, distinguished from pa^di^w), IVIatt.
by any means. V. 39, xxvi. 67.*
ir«s, interrog., how? in what
adv., pdiri(r(Jia, aros, t6, a blow with tJie open

manner? by what means? Also in hand, Mark xiv. 65 ; John xviii. 22,
exclamations, as Luke xii. 50 John ; xix. 3.*
xi. 36 with subj. or opt. {&.v),
;
pa(|>is, /5os, T^, a needle., Matt. xix. 24 ;
'PaxAp— 2] VOCABULARY. 501

Mark x. 25 ; Luke xviii. 25 (W. H., 30, xxvii. 5 ; Luke iv. 35, xvii. 2 ;

Acts xxvii. 29.* 19,

'Paxdp. See 'Pad^. 'PoPodjJi, 6 (Heb.), liehohoam, Matt. i. 7.*
'Pax^X, (Heb.), i2«(^/«^Z, Matt. ii. 18.*
r/
'P68t], 77s, 7} {Rose), Rhoda, Acts xii.
'P€p€KKa, Tjs, i], Eebekah, Rom. ix. lo.*
p€'8a or pedrj, rjs, i], a chariot, Rev. xviii. 'Pd8os, Rhodes, Acts xxi. 2.*
Of, T/,

13.* poit"»i8dv, {po7^os, roaring, as of

adv.
'P€}i4>dv or '?€(pdv {\y. H., "Pofxcpd), 6, waves), with a great noise, 2 Pet. iii.
a Coptic word, liemjyhan, the Saturn 10.*
of later mythology, Acts vii. 43 (Heb., ds, ij, a sword, as Rev. i. 16
po[JL(|>aia, ;

Chiun, Amos v. 26).* piercing grief, Luke ii. 35.

lig.,
p€ft) (f), pevaoj, to flow, John vii. 38.* 'PovPt|v, 6 (Heb.), Reuben, Rev. vii. 5.*
pe'to (see ^t^^i, etTroj'). From this obs. •PovO, 7? (Heb.), i?i<^7?, Mark i. 5.*
root, to say, are derived: act. perf., 'Pov<|)os, 01' (Lat.), Rufus, (i) Mark xv.
eiprjKa ;
pass., eXp-qixai ; 1st aor. pass., 21 ; (2) Rom. xvi. 13, perhaps the
ip^jedrju or ipprjOrju; part., prjdeis; espec. same person.*
the iieut. TO prjOev, that which was a narrow street, a lane. Matt.
pti}ii], 77s, 17,

spokoi by (l-tto, gen.). vi. 2 Luke xiv. 21 Acts ix. ii, xii.
; ;

'P-^Yiov, 01', TO, lihegium, now Rheggio, 10.*

Acts xxviii. 13.* pvo|xai, aoimai, dep. mid., 1st aor., pass.,
pflYjia, aros, to (prjyvv/xi), what is hroTcen, ippvadTjv, to draw or snatch from
*
a crash, a ruin, Luke vi. 49. clanger, to deliver; 6 pvo/j-evos, the
pTiYwiii (or as Mark ix. 18),
prjcrcru}, Deliverer.
prj^o}, to break, to rend, to hurst, to dash Rev. xxii. ii (AV. H.).*
p\nraCv<i), to defile,
against the ground, to break forth, as Rev. xxii. ii
p\nrap€vo[JLai, to be filthy.
into praise, Matt. vii. 6, ix. 17 ; Mark (\\. H. marg.).*
ii. 22, ix. 18 Luke v. 2>7j ^^- 42 ; ;
pvirapia, as, r/, j^Z^/t, 2^ollution, James i.

Gal. iv. 27.* .

21.*^
pT]|ia, aros, Tb, a thing spoken; (i) a pinrapds, d, oi', sordid, filthy, defiled,
word or saying of any kind, as coon- James ii. 2; Rev. xxii. 11 (W. H.).*
mand, report, jn'omise ; (2) a thing, pviros, ou, 6, ^Z^7t, filthiness, i Pet. iii.

a matter, a business. Syn. 8. .

21.*
'PT]<rd, 6 (Heb.), Rhesa, Luke iii. 27.* pvirdto), a), to he filthy, Rev. xxii. 11
pT|<r<r(«). See prfyw^ii. ^^(not W. H.).*
pT|To>p, opos, 6, an orator, Acts xxiv. pv<ris, ecjs, 7) (pew), a flux, issue, Mark v.
I.* 25 ; Luke viii. 43, 44.*
pi]T(os, adv., expressly, in so many words, pvTts, t'5os, 7], a wrinkle; fig., asjnritual
I Tim. iv. I.* defect, Eph. V. 27.*
pit^a, 7)^,7), {1) a root of a tree or a plant; 'P«|xaiK6s, Tj, bv, Roman, Luke xxiii.
met,, tJie anything;
oi'igin or source of 38.*
fig., constancy, perseverance; (2) that 'PwfjLatos, 01', 6, a Roman, a citizen of
which comes from the root, a descen- Rome.
dant, Rom. XV. 12; Rev. v. 5. *Pfa)|jLai(rTi, adv., in the Roman or Latin
pi^do), cD, c6(7-a>, ^0 roo< ; perf., pass., tongue, John xix. 10.*
part., ippL^ufxevos, firmly rooted, fig., 'PwfjL-q, 77s, 7], Rome.

Eph. iii. 17 Col. ii. 7.* ; ptovw[ii, pucru), to strengthen ; only perf.,
piTTTi, 77s, T7 {piTTTU}), jcrk, rt tivinklc,
tt pass., imper., ^ppujao, ^ppwade, fareiccll.
*
as of the eye, i Cor. xv. 52. Acts XV. 29, xxiii. 30 ("SV. H. omit).*
piiritb), iau), to move, as waves by the
*
wind, James i. 6.
piiTTco), u), <o throw off or away, Acts
xxii. 23.*
pCiTTw, t/'w, 1st aor., ^ppLxpa; part., pii/^as; 2, <r, final s, alftia, sigma, s, the
to throw, throw doicn, throw' out, eighteenth letter. As
a numeral,
thro^a apart, scatter, ^latt. ix. 36, xv. </ = 200 ;
0-, — 200,000,
502
o-aPaxeavC (W. }L, -ei), iC\\ald.,)sabach-
tJuini, thou hast or hast thou forsaken
me ? Matt, xxvii. 46 Mark xv. 34
from the Clialdee rendering of Ps.
VOCABULARY. [<raPax6av£ —Hapovx
2dp,os, 01', T), Samos, Acts xx. 15.*
21ap.ov^X, 6 (Heb.), Samuel.
; ;
Sap.\|;wv, 6 (Heb.), Samso7i, Heb. xi. 32.*
o-avSdXiov, oi', rd, a sandal, Mark vi. 9 ;

xxii. I.* Acts xii. 8.*

o-apaw9 (Heb. ), sahaoth, Jiosts, armies, o-avis, tSos, •i7, « plank, a hoard, Acts
in the phrase, "the Lord (Jehovah) xxvii. 44.*
of hosts," Rom. ix. 29 ; James v. 4,* SaovX, (Heb.), ^a2(Z, (i) the king of
6
o-aPPaxto-fJids, ov, 6, a keeping of sabbath, Israel (2) the apostle, only in direct
;

a sabbath rest {R.Y.), Heb, iv. 9.* address (see SaOXos).

crdppaTov, ov, to (from Heb.), dat., crairpos, d, ov, rotten, hence useless ; fig.,
phir., (Tdl3(3aai{u), (i) the sabbath; (2) corrupt.
a jieriod of seven days, a u-eck. In both "ZaTT^dpT], 7]s, 7], Sappihira, Acts v. i.*
senses the phiral is sometimes used. o-d7r4>€ipos, 01', 6, a sapphire, Rev. xxi.
o-a-yrivTi, 77s, 7/, a drag-net. Matt. xiii. 47. 19.*
Syn. 70.* crap7dvT], 77s, 17, « basket, generall}' of
SaSSovKaios, ov, 6, a Sadducee. Phir., twisted cords, 2 Cor. xi. 33.*
of the sect in generaL Prob. derived SdpScis, o)v, dat. €at.{v), at, Sardis, Rev.
from the Heb. word for just, righteous. i. II, iii. I, 4.*

SaSwK, 6 (Heb.), iSoflok, Matt. i. 13.* (rdpSivos, ov, 6 (Rcc. in Rev. iv. 3 for
craivw, to 'move, disturb, pass., i Thess. following).
ni.3-* ,
<rdp8iov,iov, TO, a sardine stone, blood or
o-aKKos, 01', 6, sackcloth, a sign of mourn- fresh coloured ; or carnelian. Rev. iv.
ing. Matt. xi. 21 Luke x. 13 ; Rev. ;
3 (W. H.), xxi. 20.*
vi. 12, xi. 3.* <rap8-ovv^, I'xos, v, a sardonyx, a pre-
2a\d, (Heb.), Sala,
6 Luke iii. 35.* cious stone, white streaked with red,
2aXa0iTiX, 6 (Heb.), Salathiel, Matt. Rev. xxi. 20.*
i. 12.* SdpcTrra, o:v, to., Sarepta, Luke iv. 26.*
2aXa[i,£s, tfo^, v, Salamis, Acts xiii. 5.* (rapKiKos, carnal, whether
77, 6v, fleshly,
SaXcifji, T], Salim, John iii. 23.* (i) belonging to human nature in its
o-aXcvd), (TO), to shake, to cause to shake, bodily manifestation, or (2) belonging
as ]\Iatt. 7 Heb. xii. 27 so, to
xi. ; ; to human nature as sinful, Rom. xv.
excite, as the populace, Acts xvii. 13 ; 27 I Cor. iii. 3, ix. 11
;
2 Cor. i. 12, ;

fig., to disturb in mind, 2 Thess. ii. 2. X. 4 I Pet. ii.

; 11 ; for Rec. capKiKos,
2aXT][j., 7/ (Heb.), Salem, Heb. vii. i.* W. H. substitute aapKivos, in Rom.
SaXfjLwv, 6 (Heb.), Salmon, i\Iatt. i. 4.* vii. 14 Cor. iii. i ; Heb. vii. ; and
; I

2aXjiw;/T], 77s, 7/, Salmonc, Acts xxvii. 7.* av6p(i)iros in i Cor. iii. 4. Syn. 55.*
o-a.\.os, 01^, 6, tlie rolling of the sea in a (rdpKivos, 77, ov, (i) feshy, constituted of
tciiipcst, Luke xxi. 25.* flesh, opp. to Xidivos, 2 Cor. iii. 3 ; (2)
ordXiri'y^, tyyos, 17, a trumpet. fleshly, carnal (W. H. in the passages
<raXir£^«, iVw (class., -t7|w), to sound a quoted under capKLKos). Syn. 55.*
trumpet. For impers. use, i Cor. o-dp|, aapKos, i], flesh, sing., Luke xxiv.
XV. 52 (see § 171). 39 ;
plur. , James v. human body,
3 ; the
craXirto-TTlsj ov, 6 (class., -LyKTTjs), a man; the human nature of man as
tridiipcter. Rev. xviii. 22.* distinguished from his divine nature
SaVtoiir], 77s, -^, Salome, Avife of Zebedee, {Kvevtxa) Jmman nature, as sinful
; ;

Mark xv. 40, xvi. i.* TrScra (xdp^, every man, all men; KUTa
2afj.dp€ia, as, 77, Samaria, either (i) <7ic adpKa, as a man ; adp^ Kat alfia, flesh
district, (2) or </ic ciY?/, afterwards and blood, i.e., man as frail and
calletl Sebastc. simple ;
^rjv, TrepnraTe'iv «:arA adpKa, to
2a|xap6tTT]s, ov, 6, a Samaritan. live, to u-alk ctftcr flesh, of a carnal,
2a|xap€iTis, tSos, 7/, a Samaritan ivoman, unspiritual life. The word also denotes
.lolin iv. 9.* kinship, Rom. xi. 14. Syn. 55.
Sa[xo-9paKT], 77J, 17, Samothracc, Acts Sapovx, 6(Heb.), (W. H.,2fpoi5x,)'S'«'/"«cA
Avi. n.* or Seruch (Serug), Luke iii. 35.*
 ;)

(rapoci) — 2£(iwvj VOCABULARY. 503

capow, wcrw, to sweep, to cleanse with

(j), 2t|0, 6 (Heb.), Seth, Luke iii. 38.*
a broom, Matt. xii. 44 ; Luke xi. 25, 2t||i, 6 (Heb.), Sliem, Luke iii. 36.*
XV. 8.* (rrip^aivo), avCj, ist aor. ia-q^Ava, to
Sdppa, as, 7], Sarah. signify, intimate.
Sdpwv, cjj/os, 6, Saron, Acts ix. 35.* <n]p.€iov, ov, t6, a sign, tlmt by which a
Sardv, 6 (Heb. ), and Saravas, a, tJie thing is known, a, token, an indication,
Adversary, Satan, the Heb. proper of Divine presence and poAver, i Cor.
name for the Devil, 5ta/3oXos met., for ; xiv. 22 Luke
xxi. 7, 11.
; Hence,
one who would do (consciously or uncon- especially, a miracle, whether real or
sciously) the work
of the Adversary, unreal. Syn. 54.
Matt. xvi. 23 33. Syn. 53.
; Mark viii. o-T]iicid(i>, Cj, in mid., to mark for oneself

©"dTOv, ov, TO (see fwdios), a seah, a to note, 2 Thess. iii. 14.*

measure equal to a modius and a o-TJ|x€pov, adv., to-day, at this time, now
Matt. xiii. 33
half, Luke xiii. 21.* ; i] {ijfjLepa) ari/iepov, this vei'y dMy, Acts
SavXos, 01;, 6, Saul, the apostle, gene- xix. 40.
rally in this form (see TlaovX). o-iri'ircu, to make rotten; 2nd perf. (riarjira,
o-pe'vvvfjii, (T^eaoj, (i) to extinguish, to to become rotten, perish, James v. 2.*
quench; (2) fig., to restrain. crripiKos, v, ov (W. H., aipiKos), adj.,
(TcaTov, ov (only masc. in N.T.), a
•^s, silken, neut. as subst., silk. Rev. xviii.
reflex, pron,, of thyself ; dat., aeavrQ, 12.*
to thyself ; ace, aeavrov, thyself. (TTJs, (xrjTos, 6, a moth, ^Matt. vi. 19, 20 ;

0-epdtop.ai, dep., pass., to stand in aive Luke xii. 33.*

of, to icorshi2). Syn. 36. o-qrd-PpwTOs, ov, moth-eaten, James v. 2.*
o-i^a(r\i.a, aros, to, an of religious
object a-Q^6(ji, Q, to strengthen, to confirin, I Pet.
icorship, Acts xvii. 232 Thess. ii. 4.*
; V. 10.*
crcPaoTos, "n, 6v, venerated, august, a (TiaydiV, ovos, rj, the clicck or jawbone,
title of the Caesars, Augustus, Acts Matt. V. 39 ; Luke vi. 29.*
XXV. 21, 25. Hence, secondarily, (Ti-ydw, w. rj<TU}, to keep silence ; to keep
Augustan, imperial. Acts xxvii. i.* secret, Luke ix. 36 ;
pass., to be con-
(rePop-ai, dep., to reverence, to u'orship cealed, Rom. xvi. 25.
God, Mark vii. 7 ot ce^oixevoL, the ; (TiYTJ, ^J, 7?, silence. Acts xxi. 40 ; Rev.
devout, "proselytes of the gate," Acts viii. I.*
xvii. 17. Syn. 36. o-i8t|P€os, e'a, eov, contr., oOs, a, ovv, made
(Teipd, as, 17, a chain, 2 Pet. ii. 4 (\V. H. of iron, Acts xii. 10, Rev.*
read follo\\'iug).* o-i5t|pos, 01;, 6, iron. Rev. xviii. 12.*
(Tcipds, ov, 6, a pit, 2 Pet. ii. 4 (W. H.).* 2i5wv, tDvos, 17, Sidon.
o-€ior[JLds, ov, 6, a shaking, as an earth- 2i8wvios, ia, 6v, Sidonian, inhabitant of
quake. Matt. xxiv. 7 a sto?'7?i ai sea, ; Sidon.
Matt. viii. 24. o-iKdpios, lov, 6 (Lat.), an assassin. Acts
cretw, (7(0, to shake ; fig. , to agitate. ^xxi. 38.*
SeKovvSos, oi', 6 (Lat.), Secundas, Acts (riK€pa, TO (Heb., Chald. form), strong
XX. 4.* drink, Luke i. 15.*
SeXevKeta, as, i), Seleucia, Acts xiii. 4.* SiXas, dat. a, ace. av, 6, Silas, contr.
o-£Xt|vi], 77s, 7), tJic moon. from Silvanus,
or£XT]vidtop.ai, to be lunatic, to suffer from 2iXo\javds, ov, 6, Silvanus.
periodical disease, as epilepsy, Matt, SiXwdfj., Siloani or Siloah, Luke xiii.
6,
iv. 24, xvii. 15.* 4 John ix. 7, ii.*
;

Scjict, 6 (Heb.), Shimci, Luke iii. 26.*
(Tcp-CSaXis, ews, T], flour. Rev. xviii. 13.*
o^epiVds, 17, ov, (i) ve7ierable, serious, of
men, i Tim. iii. 8, 1 1 Tit. ii. 2 ; (2)
honourable, of acts, Phil. iv. 8.*
(ri|iiKivdiov, iov, TO (Lat., semicinctium),
an apron, woi"n by artisans, Acts xix.
12.*
; SCfiwv, wvos, 6, Simon. Kine persons of
the name appear to be mentioned ( i :

<r€[jiv6TT]s, TTjros, 7}, dignity, seriousness, the Apostle Peter ; (2) the Apostle
I Tim. ii. 2, iii. 4 ; Tit. ii. 7.* Zelotes (3) brother of Jesus, Mark vi.
;
*
Dip-yios, oi», 6, Scrgius, Acts xiii. 7. 3 ; (4) Simon of Cyrene ; (5) father of
504 VOCABULARY. [s iva- rKOTtlVOS

Judas Iscariot ; (6) a " certain Phari- o-KTivT], ^5, i], a tent, an abode or dwell-
see," Luke Simon the leper,
vii. 40 ; (7) ing, the tabernacle reared in tlie wilder-
Matt. xxvi. 6 (8) Simon Magus, Acts ; ness, an idolatrous tabernacle.
viii, 9 (9) Simon the tanner. Acts
; (TKTjvo-inTyia,, as, ry (lit., tent-fixing), the
ix. 43. Possibly (2) and (3) were iden- feast of tabernacles, John vii. 2. *
tical see also (6) and (7).
; (rKTivo-TToios, OV, 6, a tent-maker, Acts
Sivd, TO (Heb.), Sinai. xviii. 3.*
o-ivairi, ews, to, mustard, mustard-seed. (TK-qvos, 0175, t6,of the a tent; fig,,
crivSwv, oi'os, 17, linen, a linen cloth. human 4.*
body, 2 Cor. v. i,
o-tvid^w, to sift, as corn, to prove by trials o-KT|vow, tD, wcrw, to frame or spread a
and Luke xxii. 31.*
affl,ictions, tent. Rev. vii. 15 met., to dwell, ;

(TipiKos. See arjpiKos. John i. 14 Rev. xii. 12, xiii. 6,

;

o-tT€VT<$s, v, ov,fed with corn, fatted, Luke xxi, 3.*

xy. 23, 27, 30.* (rKTivw|ia, aTos, to, a tent pitched, a divell-
(TiTiov, ov, TO, grain, corn, Acts vii. 12 ing, Acts vii. 46 ; fig. , of the body,
(W. H.).* 2 Pet. i. 13, 14.*
criTio-Tos, nourisJicd ;
f), 6v, to, fed, (TKio, as, a shadow, a thick dark-
T], (i)
aiTLara., faflings, Matt. xxii. 4.* ness, Matt. 16 (LXX. ) (2) a faint
iv. ;

(riTo-|X€'Tpiov, iov, TO, a corn-ration, Luke delineation. Col. ii. 17. Syn. 56.
xii. 42.* (TKipTdo), w, -/jCb), to lea}) for joy, exult,
(TITOS, 01;, 6, wheat, corn ; to. aiTa, grain. Luke 41, 44, vi. 23.*
i.

Sixdp. See ^I'xap. (rK\7]po-Kap8Ca, as, i), hardness of heart,

2i(ov, 6 or TO, Sion, the mountain ; met. pcrvcrscncss. Matt. xix. 8 ; Mark x. 5 ;
(fem.), for the cit7j Jerusalem ; and xvi. 14.*
fig., fo; the church, the spiritual (TKXiipos, a, ov, Imrd, violent, as the
Jerusalem. wind, James iii. 4 ^g., grievous, pain- ;

(Tiwirdtu, Q, whether
rjau, to be silent, ful. Acts ix. 5 (W. H. omit), xxvi. 14;
voluntarily or from dumbness to be- ; Jude 1 5 stern, severe, Matt. xxv. 24
;

come still, as the sea, Mark iv. 39. John vi. 60.*
o-Kav8a\itw, iaoj, to cause to stumble, o-KXT]pdTT)s, TrjTos, 7), fig., luirdncss of
2)crvcrt, (ace); pass., to
to grieve heart, obstinacy, Rom. ii. 5.*
stumble, to be inovoked, to be indignant. <rKXT)po-Tpd\T]\os, ov, hard- or stiff-necked;
o-KavSaXov, ov, to, a snare, a stumbling- fig., perverse, Acts vii. 51.*
blocJc ; fig., a cause of offence or i^cr- (TKXiipvvctf, WW, fig., to make hard, to
vcrsion. harden, as the heart, Rom. ix. 18 ;
o-KdirTO), xj/oj, to dig, Luke vi. 48, xiii. 8, Heb. iii. 8, 15, iv. 7 mid., to harden ;

xvi. 3.* oneself, to become obdurate. Acts xix. 9 ;

crKd<|)T], 7;s, i], a boat, a skiff {siS excavated Heb. iii. 13.*
from a tree). Acts xxvii. 16, 30, 32.* (TKoXids, d, ov, crooked, Luke iii. 5 5 fi&- >
cKcXos, ovs, TO, the leg, John xix. 31, 32, perverse, morose. Acts ii. 40 ; Phil. ii.
15 ; I Pet. ii. 18.*
o-KCTracrfia, aTo^, to, clothing, I Tim. vi. cKoXox)/, OTTOS, 6, ft thorn ; fig. , a sJuirp
8.* infliction, 2 Cor. xii.7.*
2K€\jds, a, 6, Sceva, Acts xix. 14.* a-KOTTio), Qi, {i) to look at, to regard atten-
0-K6V1], ^s, Tj, furniture, fittings, Acts tively; (2) to take heed (ace. ), bcicare{ii-q).
xxvii. 19.* o-Koirds, ov, 6, a mark aimed at, a goal
0-K6V0S, OVS, TO, (i) a vessel or utensil, to KaTOL CKOTTov, in accordance with the
contain a liquid, or for any other pur- goal, i.e., aiming straight at it, Phil,
pose fig., of recij)ielits generally, a
; iii. 14.*
vessel of mercy, of wrath, P.om. ix. 23, (TKopirL^w, (Tu), to disperse, to scatter abroad,
32 an instrument by which anything
; as frightened sheep, John x. 12 to
;

is done domestic goods. Matt. xii. 29;

; distribute alms, 2 Cor. ix. 9.
of a ship, the gear, Acts xxvii. 17 ;
o-KopiTLos, iov, 6, a scorpion.
fig., of God's servants, Acts ix. 15 ;
<rKOT£ivds, 77, ov, dark, Mark vi. 23
2 Cor. iv, 7. Luke xi. 34, 36.*
 ; ;

TKOTia — (rmXosj VOCABULARY, 505

iTKOTia, as, 7/, darkness. Matt. x. 27 (ro<f>ktU) make icise, to enlighten,

t'o'w, to
tig., spiritual darkness. 2 Tim. 15 pass., to be devised
iii. ;

o-KOT^^a), (Tw, ill pass., to he darkened, as skilfully, 2 Pet. i. 16.*

the suii, Matt. xiii. 24 ; tig. , as the <ro4>ds, 77, ov, wise, either (i) in action,
mind, Rom. i. 21. (2) in acquirement, learned, skilful,
(TKOTOs, oi's, TO (masc. only in Heb. xii. able ; (3) in philosophy, profound..
18, Avheie "\V. H. read f60os), dark- Siravia, as, f?, Sjjain, Rom. xv. 24, 28.*
ness, physical, Matt, xxvii. 45 moral, ; (Tirapdo-o-w, ^a>, to tear, to convulse, to
John iii. 19. throir into spasms, Mark i. 26, ix.j,20
{TKOTOw, tD, pass, only, to he darkened, (not W. H.), 26 ; Luke ix. 39.'"
Eph. iv. 18 ; Rev. ix. 2 (AV. H.), xvi. (TirapYavdw, w, ihaw, perf., pass., part.,
10.* eaTrapyavojfxevos, to sicatlic, to icrap in
(TKvPaXov, 01', t6 (perhaps from kv<tI suv.ddling clothes, Luke ii. 7, 12.*
/SdWetv, to cast to the dogs), refuse, o-iraToXdci), a), rjcru}, to live extravagantly OT
dregs, Phil. iii. 8.* luxuriously, i Tim. v. 6 James v. 5.*
;

2kv0i]s, 01', 6, « Scfjthian, as typical of {Tirdw, Q, d<T(jj, mid., to draw, to draw

the uncivilised, Col. iii. 11.* out, as a SAvord, Mark xiv. 47 ; Acts
o-Kv0p-«Tros, 6v, sad-countcMinced, stern, xvi. 27.*
grim, Matt. vi. 16 Luke xxiv. 17.* ; <rir€ipa, 77s, 17, (i) « hand, or cohort of
(TKvXXcD, XtD, pass., perf., ecr/cuX/xat, to soldiers, the tenth part of a legion,
trouble, harass, tire, Matt. ix. 36 Acts X. I ;(2) a military guard, John
(W. H. ) ; Mark v. 35 ; Luke vii, 6, xviii. 3, 12.
viii. 29.* (Tircipfc), (TTrepu), 1st aor. , ecireipa', perf.,
CKvXov, ov, TO, spoil taken from a foe, pass., eairap/jiai pass., ; 2nd aor.,
Luke xi. 22.* eairdprjv, to as seed ;
soiv or scatter,
CKcoX'qKd-ppwTOS) ov, eaten by icorms, ^0 spread, or scatter, as the -word of
Acts xii. 23.* God. Applied to giving alms, 2 Cor,
o-k«Xt]|, -qKos, 6, a gnaicing icorm, Mark ix. 6 ; to bmial, i Cor. xv. 42, 43 ;
ix. 44 (W. H. omit), 46 (\X. H. omit), and to spiritual effort generally.
48.; Gal. vi. 8.
(r|xapd'y8ivos, 1V77, ivov, tnade of enuraldy (TireKovXdTwp, opos, 6 (Lat.), a body^
Rev. iv. 3.* guardsman, a soldier in attendance
(TfjidpaYSos, ov, 6, an emerald. Rev. xxi. upon royalty, Mark vi. 27. (Sec
19.* §154, c.)*
(T^vpva, Tjs, T], myrrh. Matt. ii. 11 ; John cnrt'vSu), to pour out, as a drink offering,
xix. 39.* to offer in sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17; 2 Tim.

Hfxvpva, rjs, T], Smyrna. iy. 6.*

2)|xvpvaios, ov, 6, -q, one of Smyr)ia, a o"Tr€p|ia, aTos, to, a seed, pi^oduce, ^latt.
Sinyrncean, Rev. ii. 8 (not "NV. H.).* xiii. 24-38 ; children, offspring, pos-
(TY-v^vCCfiiy to mingle tvith myrrh, Mark terity, John vii. 42 ; a rcvmant, Rom.
XV. 23.* ix. 29.
Z68op.a, wj/, TO., Sodom. (TircpjipO-XoYos, T}, a trifcr. Acta
01', 6,
2oXo|jLwv or -fiwy, Qvtos or Qvos, Solo- xvii. 18 ; one who picks tip
I.e.,
mon. trifles, as birds do seed.*
o-opds, ov, 6, a bier, an open coffin, Luke (nr€v8«, <TU}, (i) to hasten, in trans.,
vii. 14.* often adding to another verb the
<rds, <t6v, a poss.
(Tri, pron., thy, thine notion of speed, Luke xix. 5, 6
(see §§56, 255). (2) to desire earnestly (ace), 2 Pet.
o-ovSdpiov, iov, TO (Lat.), a napkin, hand- iii. 12.
kerchief. <nrf|Xaiov, ov, to, a cave, aden,lleh. xi. 38.*
Sovo-dwa, 77 J, i], Susanna, Luke viii. <nriXds, a rock, occasioning
d5os,
ij,

3-: shipwreck of false teachers, a hidden

;

o'o4>ia, ay, i), wisdom, insight, skill, rock (R.V.), Jude 12.*
human, Luke xi. 31 ; or divine, i Cor. (rmXos, ov, a spot; fig., a blot, Eph,.
ie 21, 24. v. 27 2 Pet. ii. 13.*
;

L L
 506 VOCABULARY. [ (TiriXow — (m^pC^w
enriXow, cD, to stain, to contaminate, xii. I ; Mark ii. 23, iv. 28 ; Luke vi.
James iii, 6 ; Jude 23.* I.*
o-irXdYXva.} wi/, rd, bowels, only Acts i. Sxttxi'S, I'os, 6, Stachys, Rom. xvi. 9.*
18 elsewhere, fig.,
; tlic affections, com- o-Tc'-yT), 7?s, r; (lit. , a cover), a flat roof of
jmssion, the Jicart, as Col. iii. 12 a house, Matt. viii. 8 ; Mark ii. 4
1 John iii. 17. Luke vii. 6.*
a"tr\ay\vC'C,o\ia\., dep., with ist aor., (rriy<a, to cover, to conceal, to bear with,
pass., eairXayxfl'O'dw, to feel com- 1 Cor. ix. 12, xiii. 7 ; i Thess. iii.
passion, to have x>ity on (gen., or im, I, S-*
dat. or ace, once irepi, Matt. ix. 36). (TTcipos, a, ou, barren, not hearing chil-
(TTrd-yyos, ov, 6, a sponge, Matt, xxvii. dren, Luke i. 7, 36, xxiii. 29 Gal. ;

*
48 Mark xv. 36 ; John xix. 29.
; iv. 27.*
(TTToSos, ou, 7), ashes. Matt. xi. 21 Luke ; CTTeXXw, to set, arrange ; hence, to set
X. 13 Heb. xi. 13.*
; close together, repress, check; and so in
oriropd, ay, 7), seed, I Pet. i. 23.* mid., to avoid, 2 Cor. viii. 20 ; to
o-iropifios, bv, sown; neut. plur., to, withdraw from {drro), 2 Thess. iii. 6.*
cnrdpL/xa, cornfields, ^latt. xii. i ; Mark <rTc'[JLp.a, aros, to, a crown, a garland,
ii. 23 ; Luke vi. i.* Acts xiv. 13. Syn. 67.*
(Tirdpos, ov, 6, seed for solving. CTCva-yixos, ov, 6, a groaning, Acts vii.
oirovSd^w, hasten, to give dili-
dcrw, to 34 ; Rom. viii. 26.*
gcDce, to be in earnest (mth inf. ). o-T€vdtw, |w, to groan, expressing grief,
o-irovSaios, aia, alov, diligent, earnest, 2 anger, or desire.
Cor. viii. 17, 22 ;* adv., -ws, earnesthfi <rT€vds, 77, ou, narrow, strait, Matt. vii.
Luke vii. Tim. i. 17 (W. H.); Tit.
4; 2 13, 14 ; Luke xiii. 24.*
iii. 13 ;* compar. ad vs., CTrovdaLOTepov, <rT€vo-xa)p€«, uj, in pass., to be straitened,
2 Tim. i. 17 (not W. H. ), and -repws, to be distressed, 2 Cor. iv. 8, vi. 12.*
Phil. ii. 28.* (TTevo-xwpCo, as, rj, great distress or
o-itouSt), Tjs, 7;, (i) speed., haste; (2) dili- straits, Rom. ii. 9, viii. 35 ; 2 Cor. vi.
gence, earnestness. Syn. 11. 4, xii. 10.*
o-irvp£s (W. H., acpvpls), idos, t], a basket. o-T€p€ds, d, 6u^ solid, as food, Heb. v. 12,
Syn. 69. 14; fig., firm, stedfast, 1 Pet. v. 9;
(TTaSiov, ov, TO, plur. (TTadioi, oi, (l) « 2 Tim. ii. 19.*
stadium, the eighth part of a Roman (rrepcow, cD, uxrw, to strengthen, confirm,
mile, John xi. 18 ; (2) a racecourse, establish. Acts iii. 7, 16, xvi. 5.*
for public games,
Cor. ix. 24. i (rT€pcu)^a, aroT, to, firmness, constancy,
CTdfivos, 01', 6, or vase, for
T], an urn Col. ii. 5.*
the manna, Heb. ix. 4.* ST£4>avds, a, 6, Stephanas.
(rTa<ria<rTT)s, 01^, 6, an insurgent, Mark (rT€'<})avos, a croivn, a garla'nd, of
on, 6,
XV. 7 (W. H.).* royalty, of victory in the games, of
(TTao-is, eojj, 17 (i<rrr)/xi), a standing, lit. festal joy often used fig. ; Syn. 67.
only Heb. ix. 8 ; elsewhere, a riot, 2Te'4)avos, ov, b, Stephen, Acts vi., vii.
sedition, contention, Mark xv. 7 ; Acts o-T€<^avdw, cD, ih(T(j}, to crotcn, to adorn, to
XV. 2. decorate, 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; Heb. ii. 7, 9.*
OPTttT-qp, ^po9, masc, a
stater, a silver (TTfjdos, ov^, TO, the breast.
coin equal to the SidpaxfJ-ov (which omrJKw ['icTrjixi, ^aTrjKa), to stand, in the
see), Matt. xvii. 27.* attitude of prayer, 25 ; gene- Mark xi.
oTavpds, ou, 6, a cross ; met. often of , rally, to stand firm, standfast, as Rom.
Christ's death. xiv. 4 ; I Cor. xvi. 13; Gal. v. i.

OTttvpdw, w, Jjacj, to fix to the cross, to <rT»]piY}j.ds, ov, 6, firmness, fixedness, 2

crucify ; Hg. to mortify, destroy, the
, Pet. iii. 17.*
corrupt nature. frTy\pLX,bi, l^u) or la-u, pass., perf., iari^-
(rTQ<J)v\TJ, 77s, 7), a grnpr, a cluster or pLj/xai, (i) to fix, to set firmly, Luke ix.
bunch of grapes, Matt. vii. 16 (W. H. 51, xvi. 26 ; (2) to strengthen, to con-
plur.); Luke vi. 44 Rev. xiv. 18.* ; firm, to s^ipport, as Luke xxii. 32
crrdxvs, I'oy, 6, an ear of corn, Matt. Rom. i. II.
 —

(TTi^ds-^ frvy'-Ka^'-y\^ij VOCABtiLAR-r. 507

(TTtPas. See o-rot/Sds. dTp&ToirtB-dpxilS, 6, the 2^^'(fect, or ov,

(TT^'Yp.o, aros, to, a mark or hraiid, Gal. commander of emperor's guards^ the
vi. 17 ; of the tokens of the Apostle's Acts xxviii. 16 (W. H. omit).*
*
suiferings for Christ. <rTpaToiT€8ov, ov, TO, an cncam^icd army^
o-Tt7|XT), 77s, ^, a point of time, on instant, a host, Luke xxi. 20.*
Luke iv. 5.* <rTpepX6b)j w, to rack, to piervert, to icrest^
cTTiXpw, <o shine, to glisten, to he resplen- as words from their proper meaning,
* 6-*
dent, Mark ix. 3. 2 Pet. iii. 1

. (TTod, as, 7], a colonnade, a portico, a porch, <rTp£<j)w, xj/u}, 2nd aor. pass. i(rTpd(pr]v, to
John V. 2, X. 23 ; Acts iii. 11, v. 12.* turn, trans., Matt. v. 39 Rev. xi. 6 ;

(TTOipds, dSos, 17 ("\V. H., <rri/3ds), « {to clmnge into, eh) intrans. Acts vii. ; ,

hough, a branch of a tree, Mark xi. 8.* 42; mostly in pass., to turn oneself, io\\\\
<rTOtx.cia, u»v, rd, elements, rudiments. XX. 14 to he converted, to he changed
;

Gal. iv. 3, 9 Col. ii. 8, 20 ; Heb. v.

; in mind and conduct, Matt, xviii. 3.
12 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12.* <rTpT]vidw, cD, d(T(j3, to live voluptuously,
(TTOixcw, u), 170-0;, to walk, always fig. of Rev. xviii. 7, 9.*
conduct to walk in (local dat. ), Acts
; luxury, voUqi-
o-Tpijvos, ovs, t6, 2)rofl.igate
xxi. 24 Rom, iv. 21 ; Gal. v. 25, vi.
; tuousness, revel, riot. Rev. xviii. 3.*
16; Phil. iii. 16.* crrpovOCov, Lov, t6 (dim. of arpovdos), «
Tjs, i], a rohe, i.e.,
(ttoXtj, the long outer small hird, a s2)arroiv, Matt. x. 29, 31 ;

garment which was a mark of distinc- Luke xii. 6, 7.*

tion, Luke XV. 22. CTptovvvft) or -vvv/xi, (TTpuxTio, pass., perf.,
o-TO[jia, aros, t6, (i) the month, generally ; ioTpufxai, Matt. xxi. 8 to
to strew. ;

hence, (2) sjjcech, sp>cakin<j ; used of make a Acts

34 ; pass., to he
hed, ix.
testimony, Matt, xviii. 16 ; eloquence strewed or covered, i.e., the couches at
or pcnver in speaking, Luke xxi. 15 ;
table with the usual tapestries hence, ;

(3) applied to an opening in the avdyaiov iarpojpLevov, an iqjper room

parched earth, Rev. xii. 16 (4) the ;
furnished, Mark xiv. 15 ; Luke xxii. 12.
cd.ge or ptoint of a sword, Luke xxi. 24. OT-u-yTjTos, ov, hateful, odious, Tit. iii. 3.*
<rTO|iaxos, 01;, 6, the stomach, 1 Tim. CTTtryvd^w, daw, to hccome gloomy, Mark
V. 23.* X. 22 of the sky, Matt. xvi. 3.*
;

KTrpartia, as, 17, icarfare, military ser- o-TvXos, 01', 6, a pillar. Gal. ii. 9 i Tim. ;

vice ; of Christian warfare, 2 Cor. iii. 15 ; Rev. iii. 12, x. i.*

X. 4; I Tim. i. 18.* o-t«ik6s, 17, ov, stoic, plur., the Stoics

(rTpdTeu|JLa, aroy, to, (i) an army ; (2) a (philosophers of the Porch, arod). Acts
detachment of troo^ys, Acts xxiii. 10, xvii. 18.*
27 plur., Luke xxiii. 11.
;
<rv, aov, col, ere, plur. , vjxds, thou, yc, tlic
(rTpaT€vo|xai, aofxac, dep. raid., to wage pers. pron. of second person (see § 53).
war ; fig., of the warring of lusts o-uyy-. In some words commencing thus,
against the soul, James iv. i ; to serve W. H. prefer the unassimilated form
as a soldier, of Christian work, i Tim. avvy-.
i. 18 2 Tim. ii. 4.
; (TV'y.'yeveia, as, t),kindred, family, Luke
orTpaT-Ti^ds, ov, 6 (dyu), (i) a leader of i. 61 ; Acts vii. 3, 14.*
an army, a general; {2) a magistrate or <nry.'Y6VTis, e's, akin, as subst., a kinsman,
ruler, Acts xvi. 20-38; (3) the captain relative, a fellow-countryman, Rom.
of the temple, Luke xxii. 4, 52 ; Acts ix. 3.^
iv. I, V. 24, 26.* (Ttry-'yevCs, ISos, 17, a kinsicoman, Luke i. 36
o-Tpartd, as, ij, an army; met., a host (W. H.).*
of angels, Luke ii. 13 ; the host of (Tvy-YvwuT], 77s, 71, permission, leave,
*
heaven, Acts vii. 42. I Cor. vii. 6.*

cTTpaTiwrrjs, ov, 6, a soldier, as Matt, o-u-yK-. Inwords commencing thus, W. H.

viii. 9 ; fig. , of Christian teachers, prefer the unassimilated form <xvvk-.
2 Tim. ii. 3. cnry-KdO-TifjLai, to he seated with (dat. or
(TTpaTo-XoYc'w, Q, tjclo, to collect or levy fxerd, gen.), Mark xiv. 54 ; Acts xxvi.
an army, to enlist troops, 2 Tim. ii. 4.* 30.*
508 VOCABULARY. [(nJ7-Ka0tt« — (TvX-Xajipdvw

<rvy-KaQit,(a, (to;, {i) to cause to sit down <rvy-xa£pa), 2nd aor. in pass, form, crvue-
icith, Eph. ii. 6 ; (2) to sit doicii xd/)7;i', to rejoice with (dat. ), Luke i. 58,
together^ Luke xxii. 55.* XV. 6, 9 ; I Cor. xii. 26, xiii. 6 ; Phil,
o-iry-KaKO-iraOew, w, to suffer evil or ii. 17, 18.*
hardship ivith, to he 2)artaker of Jiard- <rvY-X€w(/'), also avyx^^ ^^^*^ (rvyxovaj,
ship, 2 Tim. i. 8, ii. 3 (W. H.).* perf., pass., avyKix^j^dt.^ to confound,
<r\ry-KaKoux€w, to suffer hardsJiipf luith, confuse, i.e., (i) to startle, amaze. Acts
Heb. xi. 25.* ii. 6 ; (2) to stir up, to throiv into con-
a~vy-Ka\i<a, w, e'crw, to call together; mid., fusion. Acts xix. 32, xxi. 27, 31 (3) ;
*
to call together to oneself. toconfute in argument. Acts ix. 22.
o-vy-KaXvirTO), xj/o}, to conceal closely, to onry-xpdo|Jiai, cD/iai, to have felloivship or
*
hide wholly, Luke xii. 2.* dealings ivith (dat. ), John iv. 9.
o-vy-KdixiTTft), xj/u), to bow doion wholly, <rv'Y-x.v<rts, ews, r}, confusion, commotion,
to opjrress, Rom. xi. 10 (LXX.).* uproar. Acts xix. 29.*
onry-KaTa-Paivo), to go down ivith any <ru-^dw, cD, -qau}, to live together with (dat. ),
one, as from Jerusalem to C?esarea, Rom.vi. 8; 2Cor. 3; 2Tim. ii. 11.* vii.
Acts XXV. 5.* orv-t€VYVv(j.i, 1st aor. avvi^ev^a, to conjoin
<rvY-KaTd-9€<ris, ews, ^, consent, agree- (ace. ), to unite, as man and wife, Matt,
*
ment, 2 Cor. vi. 16.* xix. 6 ; Mark x. 9.
crv"y-KaTa-T(07]|it, in mid., to give a vote (TV-J-qT^w, a), -qaoi, to ask one another, to
with, to assent to (dat. ), Luke xxiii. 51.* discuss, dispute, with dat., orTrpos, ace.
<rvY-KaTa-tJn]<})tt«> ^^ pass., to he voted (Tv-^TJTqcris, ew5, r/, questioning, dispu-
or classed ivith {ixeTo), Acts i. 26.* tation. Acts XV. 2 (W. H., ^77x770-15),
cnry-Kcpdvvvjii, daoj, 1st aor., avveKepaa-a; 7 (W. H., ^77x770-15), xxviii. 29 (W. H.
pass., perf., avyK^Kpa/xai, to mix ivith, omit).*
to temper, i Cor. xii. 24 ;
pass., to he on)-5TiTT]TTJs, ov, 6, a disputer, as the Greek
mixed with, Heb. iv. 2.* sophists, I Cor. i. 20.*
(rvy-Kivi<a, w, rjao}, to move together, to <rv-tv7os, ov, 6, Tj, a yoke-felloiv, a co-
put into commotion, stir up. Acts vi. adjutor, Phil. iv. 3 (possibly a proper
12.* name, Syzygus).*
o-v-y-KXcCft), cw, to inclose, to shut in, as cv-^wo-iroicto, Q, ist aor. ffvue^ojoiroiriaa,
tishes in a net, Luke v. 6 ; to shut one to make alive with, to quicken together
up into or under [virb, ace.) sonie-
(ei's) with, Eph. ii. 5 ; Col. ii. 13.*
tliing, to inaJcc subject to, Rom. xi. 32 o-uKd|xivos, ov, 7], a sycamorc-trec, Luke
Gal. iii. 22, 23.* xvii. 6.*
crxry-KX-qpovdiiOS, ov, 6, a joint-heir, i.e., <rvKT], rjs, 7} (contr. from -e'a), a fig-tree.
a joint possessor or co-partner, Rom. (rvKo-|ia>paia, aj, ^ (W. H., -e'a), a syca-
viii. 17 ; Eph. iii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; i more-tree, Luke xix. 4.*
Pet. iii. 7.* <rvKov, ov, t6, a fig.
o-vy-Koivwve'w, Ci, to he a joint partaker o-vKo-4>avTcw, Q, riffio, to accuse falsely, to
with, have fellowship with, Eph. v. 11 ; defraud, Luke iii. 14, xix. 8 (gen.
Phil. iv. 14 Rev. xviii. 4.*
; pers., ace. thing).*
cnry-Koivwvos, od, b, ij, a partaker ivith, o-vX-a'Ya>-YC(o, tD, to plunder, to make a
*
a co-partner, an associate. prey of. Col. ii. 8.
£nry-KO(iCtw, to hear away together, as in o-vXdo), uj, t/}(xu}, to rob, to plunder, 2 Cor.
burying a corpse, Acts viii. 2.* xi. 8.*
<rv\-Kp£vw, LvC}, to place together in order (TvXX-. In words commencing thus, W. H.
to judge of, to compare (ace, dat.), to prefer the unassimilated form <rvv\-.
estimate or explain by com2)arison, i trvK-\aXi<a, ist aor. crvveXdXrjcra, to con-
Cor. ii. 13 2 Cor. x. 12.*
; verse with{da.t, ), fierd (gen. ), Trpds (ace. ),
(nry-KviTTw, to he hoived together or bent Matt. xvii. 2 ; Mark ix. 4 Luke ; iv.
doable, Luke xiii. 11.* 36, ix. 30, xxii. 4 ; Acts xv. 12.*
<rvY<vp£a, ay, i}, a coincidence, a concur- (TuX-Xafipdvo), (Tv\\r}xpo/xai, (TVP€i\r)<pa,
rence ; Kara. ffvyKvpiav, by cJiance, Luke (jvviXa^ov, \i) to take together, to catch,
X. 31.* to seize; (2) to conceive, as a female;
 ;

oi>X-Xfy« — <rv(i-irp€<rPvT6pos] VOCABULARY. 509

(3) mid., apprehend (ace), to help <ru|i-|xeToxos, ov, jointly partaking, Eph.
(dat.). iii. 6, V. 7.*
(TvX-Xc^u), $w, to collect, to gather. cruji- |xi|jLT]T^s, ov, 6, a joint-imitator, a co-
(rvX-Xo-yCtoixai, cro/xai, to reckon together, follourr, Phil. iii. 17.*
to deliberate, Luke xx. 5.* o'V|JL-p.op<|>i^w. See cri'yu/io/j^ow.
<ruX-Xvireo|iai, ov/xai, pass., to be greatly (rv|i-(iop<i>o$, ov, conformed to, gen., Rom.
grieved {iirl, dat.), Mark iii. 5.* viii. 29 ; dat., Phil. iii. 21.*
o-v(ip-, o-v|Xfi.-, omnir-, <ru}i<|)-. In some (rv\j.-\iop^6oi, w, to conform to (dat.),
words commencing thus, "W. H. prefer Phil. iii. 10 (W. H., avixfiopcpl^w, in
the unassimilated form avp^-, avv/x-, same sense).*
crwir-, avP(p-. (rujt-'Tra0€'w, w, tJo-o;, to sympcdhise with
(rufJL-PaCvb), -^rjcro/jLai, 2nd aor. cvve^rju, (dat.), Heb. iv. 15, x. 34.*
to happen, to befall, to occur; perf., <ru(i-Tra0T|s, es, sympcdhising, comjias-
part., TO avfx^e^rjKos, an event. sionatc, i Pet. iii. 8.*
(rv|JL-PdXXci), 2nd aor. cvve^aXov, to put (Tuji-irapa-'yivonat, to come together {to,€Ti,
together, hence, to ponder, Luke ii. 19 ; ace), Luke xxiii. 48 to stand by one,
;

to come vp with, to encounter, with or to su]yport (dat. ), 2 Tim. iv. 16 (W. H.,
without hostile intent (dat.), Luke Trapayivo/xai).*
xiv. 31 ; Acts xvii. 18, xx. 14 ; mid., (rvfJL-irapa-KaXeo), Q, in pass., to be com-
to confer, consult with. Acts iv. 15 to ; forted Rom. i.
togetlier, 12.*
contribute, help to (dat. ), Acts xviii. 27.* o-vfi-Trapa-XajJLpdvcD, 2nd aor. cv^itrapi-
(ru|i-^(riX6va), aoi, to reign with, i Cor. Xa^ov, to take with oneself, as compa-
iv. 8 2 Tim. ii. 12.*
: nion, Acts xii. 25, xv. 37, 38 Gal. ii. i.* ;

(rvp.-pipdt(», daw, (i) to unite, or knit <rv}JL-7rapa-}JL€v«, to remain or continue

together Col. ii. 2, 19 ; {2) to pxd to- with (dat.), Phil. i. 25 ("\V. H., jrapa-
gether in reasoning, and so, to conclude, /J.€V(i}).*

jyrove. Acts ix. 22 ; (3) to teach, in- (rvfi-Trdp-eifii, to be present ivith. Acts
struct, I Cor. ii. 16. xxv. 24.*
(Tv^-PovXevb), to advise (dat.), John xviii. (ruji-irdo^w, to sniffer together with. Rem.
14 ; Rev. iii. 18 mid., to take coxmsel; viii. 17 ; I Cor. 26.*
xii.
together (tVa or inf.), Matt. xxvi. 4 ; <rv}JL-'ircjnrtD, to send with, 2 Cor. viii.
John xi. 53 (W. H., ^ovkevoixai) ; Acts 18, 22.*
ix. 23.* (rv|i-irepi-Xap.pdva), Acts xx. 10.*
o-v|i-povXiov, lov, t6, (i) midual consult- orufi-irivw, 2nd aor. cvve-Ktov, to drink
ation, united counsel; Xnu^dvu), ttoicw with, Acts X. 41.*
avfi^ovXiov, to take counsel together, (rv^-trL-TTra), to fall together, Luke vi. 49
Matt. xii. 14, xxii. 15, xxvii. i, 7, xxviii. (AV. H.).*
12; Mark iii. 6, xv. i 2) a council, a ; 1 <rv|JL-irXTipow, Cj, to fill, to fill up, to fill
gathering of counsellors, Acts xxv. 12.* fully, Luke viii. 23 pass., to be fully ;

o-v|x-PovXos, ov, 6, a counsellor, Rom. xi. come, Luke ix. 5 1 Acts ii. i * ; .

34-* OT^fi-irvi'Ya), to choke, as weeds do plants,

2v}i€«v, 6 (Heb. ), Simeon or Simon (see Matt. xiii. 22 Mark iv. 7 Luke viii. ; ;

ilifnov). The Apostle Peter is so called, 14 to throng, to suffocate by crowding,

;

Acts XV. 14 2 Pet. ; I i ; and four to throng u^jon (ace), Luke viii. 42.*
others are mentioned : (
i ) Luke ii. 25, <ru}i-'iroX£'rt]S| ov, 6, a fellow -citizen, Eph.
34 ; (2) Luke iii. 30 ; (3) Acts xiii. i ii. 19.*
(4) Rev. vii. 7.* <rvp.-iropeuonai, (i) to accompany, to go
<ru(i-|ia8iiWjs, ov, 6, a felloic -disciple, John u'ith (dat.), Luke vii. 11, xiv. 25,
xi. 16.* xxiv. 15 ; (2) intrans., to come together,
(rup.-|iaprvp€a), Q, to bear witness together to assemble, Mark x. i.*
with, to testify along with, Rom. ii. 1 5, <ruft-ird<riov, ov, to (ti'vw), a table party,
viii. 16, ix. I ; Rev. xxii. 18 (not a festive company, a feast ; ^la.rk vi. 39,
W. H.).* avfiiroaia av^Trbcia, by co'niptanies*
(rup.-|upi^o), in mid., divide icith,
to o-u(i-irp€o-pvT€pos, 01', 6, a fello^c-eideTf
partake with (dat.), i Cor. ix. 13.* I Pet. V. I.*
510 VOCABULARY. [o-vjj,-<|>dYCiD — (rvv-airo-O'TA.Xw

a-v\i.-^a,y<i}. See ffvueffdiio, (dat. of thing), Phil. i. 27 ; or vMh

<rv\L-^ip(a, aw-queyKa, to bring
1st aor., (dat. of person), Phil. iv. 3.*
together, to collect, only Acts xix. 19 ; 0^v-a9poitw, (Tit), to gather or collect
generally intrans., and often inipers., Acts xii. 12, xix. 25
together. pass., ;

to conduce to, to he x>rofitahle to, i Cor. to throng together, Luke xxiv. 33

X. 23 ; 2 Cor. xii. i ; part. rh avficpipov, , (W. H., ddpoi^w).*
good, 2}rqfit, advantage, i Cor. vii. 35. orvv-aCpw,to reckon togetJier, to take
o-v|jL-<|)Ti|ii, to assent to, Rom. vii. 16.* accoimt ivith, Matt, xviii. 23, 24
<ri>|JL-<j>opos, a, ov, profitable, i Cor. vii, 35, xxv. 19.*
X. 33 (W. H., for <xvfX(pepov).* <rvv-aix[i,dXci>TOS, ov, 6, a felloiv-captive
one of the same tribe,
<rv|j,-<})vX€TT]s, ov, 6, ov p)risoner, Rom. xvi. 7 ; Col. iv. 10;
a fellow-countrynutn, i Thess. ii. 14.* Philem. 23.*
(rv(x-<|>vTOS, ov, grown together, planted crvv-aKoXovOca),cD, ijau}, to follow with,
together, united vjith (R.V.), Rom. vi. to accompany, Mark v. 37, xiv. 51
(W. H, ) ; Luke xxiii. 49.*
o'V(JL-(|>va>, pass., 2nd aor., part., cv^jl- <rvv-aXitw, in pass., to be assembled
(pveh, pass., to groio at the same time, together with (dat.), Actsi. 4.*
Luke viii. 7.* <rvv-aXXd(r<rw, to reconcile. See cvv-
o-v{JL-<j>(i)vea), Q, -qaw, to agree with, agree eXaijvii},
together, arrange with (dat., or ixerd, o-uv-ava-Paivo), to go up ivith (dat.),
gen.), of persons, Matt, xviii. 19, Mark xv. 41 ; Acts xiii. 31.*
XX. 2, 13 Acts v. 9 ; of tilings, to be
; o-vv-avd-KeL|jLai,, to recline 2vith, as at a
in accord ivith, Luke v. 36 ; Acts xv. meal, to sup ivith (dat.) ;
part., 61
(TvvavaKei/xevoi, the guests, Mark vi.
o-v|x-<}>wvT](ris, ewj, i], accord, unison, 2 22, 26.
Cor. vi. 15.* CPVv-ava-}iC'YVV|Jii, pass., to mingle to-
<rv|i-(f>(ov^a, as, t], a concert, or sym- gether ivith, to keep company with (dat. ),
phony, of instruments, music, Luke 1 Cor. V. 9, II ; 2 Thess. iii. 14.*

XV. 25.* o-uv-ava-iravojiai, (TOfxai, to find rest or

<rv|j,-<j)a)vos, ov, harmonious, agreeing refreshment together with (dat. ), Rom.
loith ; eK <yv/x(pd)vov, by agreement, i XV. 32.*
Cor. vii. 5.* cw-avrdft), tD, rjcw, {i) to meet with, to
o-v|i.-\|/T]<}>{tw, to compute, reckon up, Acts encounter (dat.), Luke ix. 37, xxii.
xix, 19.* 10; Acts 25; Heb.
X. vii. i, 10;
<rv|x-\(/vxos, adj., like-minded, Phil. ii. 2.* (2) of things, to happen to, to befall
o-vv, a prep. gov. dative, ivith (see TO. avvavT-qaovra, the things that shall
§ 296). In composition, g^v denotes befall. Acts xx. 22.*
association with, or is intensive. (rvv-dvT't]<ris, ews, i), a meeting ivith, an
The final v changes to 7, X, or jx, or encountering, Matt. viii. 34 (W. H.,
is dropped, according to the initial virdvTriais).*
letter of the word with which it is <rvv-avTt-Xa|xpdv<o, mid. , lit. , to take hold
compounded (see§ 4, d, 5) ; but W. H. on the other side together ivith ; to
prefer the unassimilated forms. assist, help (dat.), Luke x. 40 ; Rom.
(Tvv-d'Yw, d^w, {i) to bring together, to viii. 26.*
gatJier, to assemble ; pass., to he assem- cruv-air-d7a>, in pass,, to be led or
bled, to come together ; (2) to receive carried away in mviui, Rom. xii. 16
hospitably, only Matt, xxv. 35, 38, (see R.V. marg.) ; Gal. ii. 13 ; 2 Pet.
43- iii. 17.* .

o-wa-ywy/j, ^j, i), an assembly, a congre- orvv-aTro-OvTJo-Kw, to die together ivith

gation, synagogue, either the place, (dat.), Mark xiv. 31 ; 2 Cor. vii. 3;
or the people gathered in the place. 2 Tim. ii. 11.*
(rvv-a-YcovC^oiiai, aofxai, to strive together o-vv-air-iJXXvjii, to perish with
in mid.,
with another, to aid (dat.), Rom. (dat.), 31.*
I lei), xi.
XV. 30.* (Tw-airo-o-T^XXft), to send together (ace),
<rvv*-aOX^a), u), 170-0;, to strive together for 2 Cor. xii. 18.*
(rvv-op|JLO-XoY^« — o-vv-T^0€ta] VOCABULARY, 511

tD, in pass., to he joined

(rvv-apjio-Xo-Y^ft), crvv-cXavvw, -eXdcw, to co^mjyel, to per-
fitly or harmoniously together, Eph. suade (ace. and et's), Acts vii. 26
ii. 21, iv. i6.* (W. H., cvvaWdaau)*
on;v-apirdtW| cw, to seize, or di'ag by (Tvv-cTri-ixaprupcw, w, to hear joint witness,
force (dat. ), Luke viii. 29 ; Acts vi. Heb. ii. 4-* .

12, xix. 29, xxvii. 15.* mid., to joinin assailing.

o-uv-tiri-T^Orifti,
<ruv-av|dv<«), in mid., to grow together, Acts xxiv. 9 (AV. H., for (rvvTidrjfit).*
Matt. xiii. 30.* (rvv-iiro\t.ai, to attend, to accompany [([0,1.),
orvv-8€<r}ios, ov, 6, which binds to-
that Acts XX. 4.*
gether, a hand, a bond. Acts viii. 23; o-uv-«p7€'a), w, to co-operate with (dat.),
Eph. iv.
3 Col. ii. 19, iii. 14.*
; to u-ork together, I Cor. xvi. 16 ; Rom.
<rvv-8€«, in pass., to be boinul vith viii. 28.
any one, as fellow-prisoners, Heb. xiii. crvv-cp-yos, ov, co-%i'crrking, heljnng ; as a
3-* subst., a joint-helper, a co-worker,
<ruv-8o^dtw, daco, to glorify with {(tvv), gen. of person, obj. with ei's, or dat.,
pass., Rom. viii. 17.* or (met.) gen., 2 Cor. i. 24.
<rvv-8ovXos, ov, 6, a felloiv-slave, afelloiv- <r\)v-€pxo(iai (see § 103, 2), to come or go
servant, Matt, xviii. 28-33 J of mini- ivith, to accompany ; to come together,
sters, the fellow-servants of Christ, a to assemble ; used also of conjugal in-
colleague, Col. i. 7. tercourse, to come or live together.
<njv-8po[jtT], Tjs, 7), a running together, a cvv-eo^iw, 2nd aor. avvecpayov, to eat
concourse. Acts xxi. 30.* with, to in familiar intercourse
live
a-vv-iydpo), epQ, ist aor., (Tw-qyeipa ; with (dat,, or fierd, gen.), Luke xv. 2 ;

pass., (TvvTjyepdrjv ; to raise together, to Acts X. 41, xi. 3 ; I Cor. v. 11; Gal.
raise ivith, Eph. ii. 6; Col. ii. 12, ii. 12,*
iii. I.* <rvv-€(ris, ecos, i] {'iv/J-t), a initting together,
<rw-€8piov, ov, t6, a council, a tribunal, in mind, discernment ; mat., the
\\q\\cq
Matt. x. 17 specially, the Sanhe-
; understanding, the source of discern-
drin, the Jewish council of seventy ment.
members, presided over by the high <rw-€Tos, Tj, 6v {ir)fj.L), intelligent, jrrudent,
priest the couiu:il-hall, where the
; w-ise. Matt. xi. 25 ; Luke x. 21 ; Acts
Sanhedrin met, Acts iv. 15. xiii. 7 ; I Cor. i. 19.*
<ruv-€i8Ti<ris, ews,i), prop., self-conscious- crvv-6v-8oKe'w, w, to approve together ; to
ness, theconsciousness man has of consent to (dat. ), Luke xi. 48 ; Acts
himself in his relation to God ; the con- viii. I, xxii. 20 ; to he of onemindicith
sciciKe, Rom. ii. 15 ; i Pet. ii. 19 ; the (dat.), Rom. i. 32; to be content to (inf.),
sentence pronounced by the conscience, I Cor. vii. 12, 13.*
2 Cor. iv. 2, V. II. oruv-€-u«x€«, tD, in mid., to feast icith, to
onn'-€i8ov, 2nd aor. of obs., present, to revel u'ith, 2 Pet. ii. 13 ; Jude 12.*
be conscious or aivare of, to consider. orvv-€<j)-i(rTT]fjLi, to rise together against
Acts xii. 12, xiv. 6 perf., avvoLda, ;
(/card), to attack, Acts xvi. 22.*
part., (TwetStis, to be privy to a design. <rvv-€X(i), Iw, (i) to pi'ess together, con-
Acts V. 2 ; to be conscious to oneself strain; (2) hold fast, as a prisoner,
to
(dat.) of guilt (ace), i Cor. v. 4.* to stop, as the ears, the mouth (3) ;

<rvv-6ip.i, to be with (dat.), Luke ix. 18 ;

to hem in, Luke viii. 45 ; (4) pass., to
Acts xxii. II.* he straitened, or repi'cssed, as by an un-
go or come
(rvv-ei|ii (ctjui), part., cvviuv, to accomplished purpose, Luke xii. 50 ;

with, to assemble, Luke viii. 4.* (5) to be pressed or occupied with a

<ruv-€i(r-6pxojj,ai, to go in, or come in, with work, Acts xviii. 5 ; (6) to he held fast
any one {diaX.), John xviii. 1$; to em- by sickness, 38. Luke iv.
hark with, John vi. 22.* oruv-iq8o[iai, to delight in (dat. ), Rom. vii.
<rw-€K-8'r](i.os, ov, 6, rj, a fellow-traveller, 22.*
Acts xix. 29 2 Cor. viii. 19.*
; (Tvv i]Qiia, as, 7), a custoiu, a usage, John
(tvv-ckXcktos, 7], 6v, elected together icith, xviii. 39; I Cor. viii. 7 (AV. H. ), xi.
I Pet. V. 13.* 16.*
512 VOCABULARY. l^o^v-iiXiKiwTTjs — <rvi(r-(rr]|iov

oruv-iiXiKicoTTis, ov, 6, one of the same age, Luke V. 38 (W. H. omit) ; (2) to lay
Gal. i. 14." lip in mind, Luke ii. 19.*
orvv-OdirTw, ^J/io, 2nd aor., pass., cvveTd- <ruv-T{0T]ji,t, in mid., to set or ptlace to-
(pr)v, in. pass., to be buried icith, Roin. getJier, as in agreement between two
vi. 4 ; Col. ii. 12.* or more persons, to agree, Luke xxii.
o-uv-OXdto, Q, flit., pass., (rwdXaad-qaoixai., 5 ; John ix. 22 ; Acts xxiii. 20 ; to
to break, break in pieces, Matt. xxi.
to assent. Acts xxiv. 9 (W. H., avveiri.-
44 ; Luke
xx. 18.* Tidrjfxi).*
(rvv-0\tp(o, to throng, topress closely 7ipon, o~uv-Td|x«s, adv., concisely, briefly. Acts
Mark v. 24, 31.* xxiv. 4.*
orw-Gpti'irTw, to break down ; fig. , with a-vv-Tpeyja, 2nd aor. avp^Spafiov, to run
KapSiav, to take away one's fortitude, togetJwr, as a multitude, ^lark vi. 33 ;

Acts xxi. 13.* Acts iii. II ; to run tuith, (fig.), I Pet.

a'vv-iy]\i.i, inf., crvwieuai, part., (twiQp or iv. 4.*
avviei^ ; flit., ffvpfjaci}; 1st aor., avvrJKa; (rvv-rpC^(a, xpco, 2nd aor., pass., avve-
to put together, hence, to in mind ; Tpi^r]u, to break by crushing, to break
consider, uiulerstand (ace), to be in pieces, Luke ix. 39 ; Rom. xvi.
aioare {oTi.)y to be 2vise, to attend to 20 ; pass. ,
perf. , part. , crvvrerpififievos,
(eTTi, dat.). bruised. Matt. xii. 20.
<rvv-ia"rr\\Li,also (TwicrTciud} and avvicrTacj, <rvv-Tpi(Ji|i.a, arcs, to, crushing; fig.,
to place together; to constitute, prove, destruction, Rom. iii.16 (LXX.).*
approve, commend, Gal. ii. 18 Rom. ; o-vv-Tpo4)os, ov, 6, one brought up ivith, a
iii. 5, V. 8; perf. and 2nd aor.,intrans., foster-brother, Acts xiii. i.*
to stand together, stand with, Luke ix. (ruv-T\ry\dva), 2nd aor. (TvviTvxov, to fall
32 ; Col. i. 17 ; 2 Pet. iii. 5. in ivith (dat.), Luke viii. 19.*
o-vv-oScviw, to journey with, to accom- SwrvxT], -jys, t], Syntyche, Phil. iv. 2.*
jmny (dat.), Acts ix. 7.* o-vv-viro-Kptvoiiai, dep. , ist aor., avvvire-
<rvv-oS£a, as, rj, a company travelling to- Kpidr]v, to dissemble ivith. Gal. ii. 13.*
gether, a caravan, Luke ii. 44.* <ruv-\nr-ovp'Y€«, w, to help together ivith, 2
(TuvoiKco), to divell together, as in
a), Tjaii}, Cor. i. II.*
marriage, Pet. iii. 7.*
i (Tvv-wSCvci), to travail in pain together^
o-uv-oLKo-8o|i€'tt), in pass., to be built up Rom. viii. 22.*
*
together, Eph. ii. 22. <rvv-o)jio<r£a, as, t), a conspiracy by oath.
*
<rvv-o|jiiX€w, Q, to talk with (dat.), Acts Acts xxiii. 1 3.

X, 27.* "ZvpaKovarai, Qv, al, Syracuse, Acts xxviii.

(rvv-o|xopea>, w, to adjoin (dat.), Acts 12.*
xviii. 7.* Evpia, as, i], Syria.
<ruv-ox,TJ, 17s, 7/, constraint ofmind ;
Svpos, a Syrian, Luke iv. 27.*
01', 6,
hence, distress, disquiet, Luke xxi. 2vpo-<|)oivi<r<ra (W. H., Si^po-^oiJ't/ctcro'a ;

25 2 Cor. ii. 4.*

; marg., Si^pa ^oivlKKxaa), as, tj, an
<ruv-Td(r<ro), ^w, to arrange with, to charge, appellative, a Syrojihenician ivoman,
*
command. Matt. xxi. 6 (W. H.), xxvi. Mark vii. 26.
19, xxvii. 10.* Svpris, ews, ace. lv, tj, {a quicksand) the
o-uv-TtXeia, as, i], a finishing, a consum- Syrtis Major, Acts xxvii. 17.*
nuition, an end. Matt. xiii. 39, 40, 49, (Tvpw, to draiv, to drag, John xxi. 8 ;
xxiv. 3, xxviii. 20 ; Heb. ix. 26.* Acts viii. 3, xiv. 19, xvii. 6; Rev.
O'vv-Tfkiu, Q, iau), {i) to bring completely xii. 4.*
to an end. Matt. vii. 28 (W. H., reX^w); a-va--. In some words commencing thus,
Luke iv. 2, 13 Acts xxi. 27 (2) to
; ;
W. H. prefer the uncontracted form
fulfil, to accomplish, Rom. ix. 28 ; cvva-.
Mark xiii. 4 Heb. viii. 8.*
; (ru-<r'irapd<r<ra), ^a>, to convulse violently
frvv-ri^vta, to cut short, to bring to swift (ace), Mark ix. 20 (W. H. ) ; Luke ix.
fulfil inent, Rom. ix. 28.* 42.*
OT;v-TT)p€w, w, (i) to preserve safely, to <rvo--(rT](i.ov, ov, t6, a concerted signal, a
*
keep safe, Matt, ix. 17 ; Mark vi. 20 ;
token agreed upon, Mark xiv. 44.

i
 ;

<rv<r-<r«fios — (rw^iaTiKosl VOCABULARY. 513

(ru(r-ar«nos (W. H., cvvafjJixos), ov, miifcd (r<j>pa7is, rSos, t/, (

i ) « seal, the instrument,
ill the same body; fig., of Jews and Rev. 2; (2) the imp)ression, whether
vii.
Gentiles, in one church, Eph. iii. 6.* for security and secrecy, as Rev. v. i ;

(Tv-o-Tao-taa-TTJs, ov, 6,a fcllow-itisurgent or for designation, Rev. ix. 4 {2,)t1ie ;

(W. H., GTa(yLa(TT7)s), Mark xv. 7.* motto of a seal, 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; (4) that
c-v-o-TttTiKos, •)?, 6v, commendatory, 2 Cor. ivhich the seal attests, the proof, i Cor.
iii. I.* ix. 2.
(Tu-o-Tavpod), w, to crucify together with (r(})vpis. See crirvpis.
(ace. and dat. ) ; lit., as Matt, xxvii. o-<j>vpdv, ov, TO, the anJcle-bone.
44 fig., as Gal. ii. 19.
; a-\ih6v, adv., nearly, almost, Acts xiii.
o-v-<rT€\X« (see (rTeX\w),(i ) to torap round, 44, xix. 26 ; Heb. ix. 22.*
to swathe, as a dead body, Acts v. 6 ; o-XTiH-tt, to, fashion, Jmbit, i Cor.
aros,
(2) to contract, perf,, pass., part., con- vii. 31 form, ap2)ea7'ance, Phil. ii. 8.
;

tracted, shortened, i Cor. vii. 29.* Syn. 56.*

crv-<rT€vdtW| to groan together, Horn. viii. <r\Ct,(a, icroj, to rend, to divide asunder,
22.* i.e., rocks, Matt, xxvii. 51 pass., to
;

(Tu-o-Totx^ci), w, ^0 Jg in the same rank be divided into jmrties. Acts xiv. 4.

with ansiver to (dat.). Gal. iv. 25.*
; to <r\C(r\i.a, aros, to, a
as in a gar- rent,
cru-OTpaTt«TT]s, 01', 6, a fellow -soldier, ment, Mark ii. 21 a division, a ;

i.e., in the Cliristian service, Phil. ii. dissension, "schism," i Cor. i. 10.
25 ; Philein. 2.* crxotviov, ov, TO [axo'ivo^, a rush), a cord,
<rv-<rTp4<})«, \p(j}, to roll or gather together. a rope, John ii. 15 Acts xxvii. 32.* ;

Matt. xvii. 22 (W. H. ) ; Acts xxviii. (rxoXd^w, aaw, to be at leisure; to be

empdy or unoccupied, ^latt. xii. 44 ;

o-v-<rTpo4)TJ, a gathering together, a

Tjs, 7], to be at leisure for (dat, ), give oneself
concourse. Acts xix. 40 a conspiracy, ; to, I Cor. vii. 6.*
Acts xxiii. 12.* ctxoXtj, ^s, Tj, leisure ; the studies of
in mid. or pass., to con-
(rv-a-\r]\LarCt,<ti, one's leisure, espec. philosophy ; the
form oneself, or to be assimilated to place where such studies were carried
(dat.), Rom. xii. 2 i Pet. i. 14.* ; on hence, a school. Acts xix. 9.*
;

2vx.dp (AV. H. ), or Stxap, 7/, Sychar, o'co^o), (Tiber 03, perf., cricruKa ;
pass.,
John iv. 5.* cr^(rwcr/iai ; ist aor., pass., iawdrjv ;

2aix^M'5 (0 Shechem, the prince. Acts

Oj {i) to save, from evil or danger, Matt,
vii. 1 6 ( W. H. and R. V. read ev 2i;xe/i, viii. 25, xvi. 25 ; (2) to heal. Matt,
in Shechem, for the Rec. rod Zvx^/j-, the ix, 21, 22 ; John xi. 12 ; (3) to save,
father of Shechem) ; (2) ij, Shechem., the i.e., from eternal death, i Tim. i. 15 ;

city. Acts vii. 16.* part,, pass., 61 coi^bixevoi, those who

<r<}>aYf|, 17s, V, {1) slaughter, Acts viii. 32 are being saved. Acts ii. 47, i.e., who
Rom. viii. 36 (LXX.) (2) perhaps ; are in the way of salvation.
met., a feast, or feasting, James v. 5, orw^a, aros, to, a body, i.e., (i) any
but the meaning (i) is more probable.* material body, plants, sun, moon,
<r<j>d7tov, ov, t6, a slaughtered victim in etc. ; (2) the living body of an animal,
sacrifice. Acts vii. 42.* James iii. 3 ] or of a man, as i Cor.
o-(j>dt<o, ^w, pass., perf., eacpay/jiat ; 2nd xii. 12, espec. as the medium of human
aor., €(T(pdy7}v, to kill by violence, to life, and of human life as sinful ; the
slay, I John iii. 12, and Rev.* body of Christ, as the medium and
(r({>68pa, adv., exceedingly, greatly, vehe- witness of his humanity ; awfiaTa,
mently, as Matt. ii. 10. Rev. xviii. 13, slaves ; (3) a dead body,
o-(|>o8po>s, adv., vehemently. Acts xxvii. a Acts a com-
corpse. ix. 40 ; (4) fig.,
18.* 7nunity, the church, tJie mystic body of
a-^payCi,<a, tVw, to seal, to set a seal upon, Christ, Col. i. 24 (5) met., for the;

(i) for security, Matt, xxvii. 66; (2) entire man, the self, Rom. xii. i ; (6)
for secrecy, Rev. xxii. 10 (3) for ; substance, opp, to shadow. Col. ii. 17-
designation, Eph. i. 13 or (4) for ;
(ra>|iaTiKos, 77, 6v, of or pertaiiiing to the
confirmation, Rom. xv. 28. body, I Tim. iv. 8 bodily corporeal,;
 514 VOCABULARY. [Zctfirarpos — TapaxVj

Luke iii. 22 ; adv., -ws, corporeally^ in TttYjAa, aroj, t6, an order or series, a
hudihj raanifestatioii. Col. ii. 9.* regular method, I Cor. xv. 23,*
Swirarpos, ov, 6, Sopatcr or Sosijoatcr, TttKTos, v, ov, ajypointed, set, Acts xii.
Acts XX. 4 (cf. Rom. xvi. 21).* 21.*
cra)p€v«, (TO), <o /^m;; up, to load, Rom. TaXaiir(dpea>, Q, ijcrw, to be distressed, to
xii. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 16.* be in affliction, to be miserable, James
2a)o-0€VT]s, ou, 6, Sosthcnes, Acts xviii. 17 ;
iv. 9.*
ICor. i. I. It is uncertain whether ToXanrcDpCa, ay, 7?, affliction, distress,
the .reference is to the same person.* misery, Rom. iii. 16 ; James v. i.*
iSbxriTrarpos, ov, Sosipatcr or Sopater,
6, raXaCirupos, ov, distressed, miserable,
Rom. xvi. 21 (cf. Acts xx. 4).* Rom. vii. 24; Rev. iii. 17.*
<rft)Tt]p, Tjpos, 6, a saviour, deliverer, pre- ToXavTiaios, am, aiov, of a talent weight,
server ; a name given to God, Luke Rev. xxi. 21.*
i.
47 ; I Tim. i. i, ii. 3, iv. 10 Tit.
; rdXavTOv, ov, to, a talent, of silver or
1. 3, ii. 4 Jude 25
10, iii. ; ; elsewhere gold. The Jewish talent weighed
always of Christ. 3,000 shekels (Ex. xxxviii. 25, 26),
<rwTT]pia, aj, welfare, piroapcrity, de-
y], the shekel being about \ oz. avoir-
liverance, preservation, from temporal dupois.
evils, Acts xxvii. 34 Heb. xi. 7 ;
;
TaXi0d, 7} (Chald.), a damsel, Mark v.
Acts vii. 25 2 Pet. iii, 15 specially
; ;
41.*
salvation, i.e., deliverance from spirit- Tap.€iov, 01% TO, a storehouse, a secirt
ual and eternal evils, and the attain- chamber. Matt. vi. 6, xxiv. 26 ; Luke
*
ment of a perfect well-being, the real- xii. 3, 24.
isation of the highest and completest Tavvv, adv. (ra vvv, the things tliat now
life. are), note, or in present circumstances,
<ra)TT]pios, ov,saving, liealthful, bringing accm-ding to present necessity; only in
salvation, Tit. ii. 1 1 neut., rb auiT-qpLov, ;
Acts. ( W. H. always write to. vvv. )

salvation, Luke ii. 30, iii. 6 ; Acts Tcl^is, ews, -q, order, i.e., (i) regular
xxviii. 28 ; Eph. vi. 17.* arrangement, Col. ii. 5 ; (2) appointed
(ra>({>pove(t>, w, -qao}, (i) to he of souiul succession, Luke i. 8 ; (3) rank, Heb.
mind, Mark v. 15 ; (2) to be sober- V. 6.
minded, Rom. xii. 3 ; Tit. ii. 6, rairtivos, 77, 6v (down-trodden), humble,
<r<u<|>povtt<«>) to make sober-minded, to teach, loU'ly, in condition or in spirit; in N.T.
to train, Tit. ii. 4.* in a good sense.
(ru<{>povi(rp.os, ov, b, soundness of mind, TaTr€ivo-<|>po(rvvT], 779, 77, lowliness of
sobriety, 2 Tim. i. 7.* mind, humility, real, as Phil. ii. 3 ;

adv., soberly, ivith prudence,

o-(i)(|>pov(os, or aflected, as Col. ii. 18.
moderation. Tit. ii. 12.* Tair€ivo-<}>pft)v, OV, humble, I Pet. iii. S
o-(i)(|>poo-vvi], -qs, i], souiulness of miml, (W. H. for <pL\6(ppo)v).*
sobriety, moderation, discretion, Acts Taireivdw, w, wacj, to make or by^ing loiv,
xxvi. 25 ; I Tim. ii. 9, 15.* Luke iii.
5 to humble, humiliate, to
;

o-w-<|>pa)v, ov {ados, orws [sound'\, and lower in esteem, 2 Cor. xii. 21 ; pass.,
4>pw)i of sound mind, sober-minded, to be humbled, Luke xviii. 14; mid.,
discreet, modest, i Tim. iii. 2 ; Tit. tohumble oneself, to make oneself lowly,
i. 8, ii. 2, 5.* James iv. 10.
TaTTCivwo-is, fws, 7], humiliation, in cir-
T. cumstances, Luke i. 48 ; in spirit,
James i. 10.
T, T, the nineteenth letter.
Tttv, tau, t, Tapdo-o-ft), ^w, to agitate, as water in a
As a numeral, r' = 300 j = 300,000. ;
pool, John v. 4 (W. H. omit), 7 to ;

rapcpvai, Qv, ai (Lat. ), taverns; Acts stir up, to disturb in mind, with fear,
xxviii. 15, I'res T'aberTice, the three grief, anxiety, doubt.
Taverns, a place on the Apj)ian Waj'.* Tapaxi^, ris, rj, a stirring, John v. 4
Tapi0a, 77 (Chald.), Tabitha, Acts ix. (W. H. omit) a commotion ov tumult,
;

36, 40.* Markxiii. 8 (W. H. omit).*

Topaxos —T^prvXXos] VOCABULARY. 515

Topaxos, ov,
6, a disturbance, Acts T€Kvo-Tpo4>€a), w, ^0 bring np children,
xix. 23 ; constcrnaticm, Acts xii. 18.* I Tim. V. 10.*
Tapo-cvs, ^ws, 6, one of Tarsus, Acts T€KTo)v, o^/os (compare Texvrj), an artificer,
ix. II, xxi. 39.* a carpenter, Matt. xiii. 55, Markvi. 3.*
Tdpo-oSi ov, ?7, Tarsus, Acts ix. 30. xeXcios, eta, e?ov, perfect, as ( i ) complete
Taprapow, w, wcw, ^0 thrust down to in all its parts ; (2)^111 grown, of full
Tartarus, 2 Pet. ii. 4.* age; (3) specially of the complete-
rdo-crw, ^w, (i) to constitute, arrange; ness of Christian character, perfect;
(2) to determine ; mid., to a2)/}oint. adv., -us, 'perfectly, only i Pet. i. 13.
ravpos, 01', 6, a bull, a bullock. Syn. 27.
xavrd, by crasis for to, avrd, the same TcXeioTtis, T7)Tos, v, 2)erfectn£ss, perfection,
things. Col. iii. 14: Heb. vi. i.*
ravra. See ouros. TeXeiob), w, loaoj, (i) to complete, to finish,
Ta4>^, 7)5, •?) {daTTTO)), a burial, a sejml- as a course, a race, or the like (2) to ;

ture, Matt, xx^'ii. 7.* accomplish, as time, or prediction, Luke

a burial -place, a sepulchre,
Td<|)os, ov, 6, ii. 43 John xix. 28 (3) to make per-
; ;

as Matt, xxiii. 27. fect, Heb. \\\. 19 ;

pass., be perfected,
rdxa, adv., quickly ; perhaps, Rom. v. 7 ; Luke xiii. 32 ; to reach the perfect
Philem. 15.* state, Phil. iii. 12. Syn. 13.
Tttxews, adv. (toxics), soon, shortly, Gal. TcXei&wris, fws, v, complexion, fulfilment,
i. 6 ; hastily, Luke ;:iv. 21 ; Jolin Luke i. 45 pjcrfection, Heb. "vdi. 11.*
;

xi. 31. reXeitoTTJs, ou, 6, one who makes perfect, a

Tttxivos, -q, shortly to happten,
6v, sicift, finisher, Heb. xii. 2 (comp. Heb. ii.

2 Pet.i. 14 ii. i.* ; 10).*

rdxos, ous, t6, quickness, speed, only in T€X€o--<|)op€w,(i, to bring to maturity, as

the phrase iv rdx^i- ; quickly, speedily, grain, Luke viii. 14.*

shortly. TcXcvrdu), 0), to end, to finish, e.g., life ;

Tttxvs, quick, sicift, only James

e7a, TV, so, to die, Alatt. ix. 18 ; to be 2^ut to
i. 19 Tax^, corapar. rdx^ov (W. H.,
; death, Mark vii. 10.
rdx^t-ov), superl. Tdxtora, adverbially, Tikevrf], T]s, 7), end of life, death. Matt. ii.

swiftly ; more, 'uiost, speedily. 15.*

Tc, couj. of annexation, ami, both (see Tikioif Q, i(T<j}, TCTeXcKa, TereXea-ixai,
§ 403). iTeXeadrf, {i) to end, to finish ; (2) to
T61X0S, ovs, TO, a wall of a city, Acts fulfil, to acccrni])lish, to go through;
ix. 25. ( 3 ) ^0 pay of in full. Syn. 13.
a sign, a certain proof.
TCK(i.irjpu>v, 01', TO, T€'Xos, oi's, TO, (i) an end ; (2) an accom-
Acts 3.*
i. plishment, Luke xxii. 37 ; (3) event or
T€KViov, 01', TO (dim. of TeKvov), a little issue.Matt. xxvi. 58 (4) the siim, the ;

child, John xiii. 33 Gal. iv. 19 ; ; principal end or sco2)e ; (5) an impost
1 John ii. I, 12, 28, iii. 7, 18, iv. 4, or tax [see reXew (3)!, Matt. xvli. 25 ;

V. 21.* Rom. xiii. 7. Syn. 13.

T6Kvo-'Yov€w, Q), to bear children, i Tim. TcXwvTis, ov, 6, a toll-gatfierer, a collector
V. 14.* of customs, one who farms taxes, a
TCKvo-yovCa, as, 77, child-bearing, i Tim. *' publican."

ii. 15.* TcXwviov, ov, TO, a toll-house, a tax-

T6KVOV, 01;, TO {tIktu}), a child, a descend- collcctoi-^s ojHce, ^Matt. ix. 9 ; Mark ii.

ant ; fig. of various forms of intimate 14 Luke v. 27.*

;

union and relationship, a disciple, Tcpas, aros, to, a wonder, a portent ; in

a folloiver, Philem. 10 hence such ; N.T. only in plur., and joined with
phrases as T€Kva r^s cro0tas, TCKva (TTj/xela, signs and wonders. Acts vii.
viraKOTjs, T^Kva tov (pojTos, children of 36 ; John iv. 48. Syn. 45.
wisd&ni, obedience, the light, and espee. Teprtos, 01', 6 (Lat.), Tertius, Rom. xvi.
riicvaTov Qeov, children of God, Rom. 22.* *
viii. 16, 17, 21 ; I John an inhabitant, ; Tc'prvXXos, ov, 6, Tcrtullus, Acts xxiv.
Luke xiii. 34. Syn. 62. 1,2.*
516 VOCABULARY. [T€<ro-apdKovTa toiovtos

T€<r(rapdK0VTa, forty. tC9t]|ai (see § 107), {i) to 2)l(ice, set, lay,

T€o-(rapaKovTa-€Tirjs, of forty years, e?, jnit forth, 2'>iit down, put away, put
age or time, Acts vii. 23, xiii. 18.* aside; mid., to cause to put, or tojJut
T€(r(rap€S, riaaapa, gen., wv, four. for oneself ; (2) to constitute, to make, to
T€(r(rap€S-Kai-8€KaTos, ord. num., four- render; mid., to assign, determine.
teenth, Acts xxvii. 27, 33.* TiKTo), re^o/xai, 2nd aor., treKov ; ist aor,,
TCTapraios, a.la, aiov, of the fourth (day); pass., Irex^riv ; bring forth,
to bear, to
TeTapraTos iariv, he Jmth been dead four of women to ; produce, of the earth to be ;

*
days, John xi. 39. in travail, John xvi. 21.
TCTapTOS, 77, ov, ord. num. fourth. ,
t(X\{«), to pluck, to pluck of, ^latt. xii.
T€Tpd-7«vos. ov, four-cornered. Rev. xxi. I ; Mark 23 Luke vi. i.*
ii. ;

16.* Ti^aios, 01', 6, Timccus, Mark x. 46.*

TtTpdSiov, lov, t6, a quaternion, or Tifidd), w, 970-0), {i) to estimate, to value at
guard of four soldiers. Acts xii. 2.* a price, Matt, xxvii. 9 ; (2) to honour,
T€TpaKi(r-xi^.>'Oi, at, a,four thousand. to reverence.
T€TpaK(icrioi, at, a, four hundred. Tifi-fj, ^s, rj, {i)
a p)rice ,value. Matt, xxvii.
TeTpd-|j.T]vos, ov, offour months; sc. xpo^o^, 6, 9 ;
preciousness, i.e., great value, i
a. period of four months, John iv. 35.* Pet. honour, a state of honour,
ii. 7 ; (2)
T€Tpa-irX6os, ovs, ij, ovv, fourfold, Luke Rom. ix. 21 ; an honourable office, Heb.
xix. 8.* v. 4 ; an honourable use, 2 Tim. ii. 20.
T€Tpd-irovs, ovv, o5os, four-footed, Acts 21.
X. 12, xi. 6 ; Rom. i. 23.* T£|iios, la, lov, of great pirice, preciotis,
T£Tp-apx€w (W. H., Terpaapxeoj), Q, to honoured.
rule over as a tetrarch (gen.), Luke Ti|xioTT]s> Tr]Tos, 7), prcciousness, costli-
iii. I.* ness, Rev. xviii. 19.*
TeTp-dpxT]? (W. H., Terpaapxil^), ov, 6, a Ti(id-0€os, ov, 6, Timotlieus or Timothy.
ruler over a fourth x>art of a kingdom, Tt|xwv, 03V0S, Timon, Acts vi. 5.*
a tetrarch, applied to rulers over any Tificapco), Q, to punish (ace. ), Acts xxii. 5,
part. Matt, xiv, i. xx\i. II.*
T€v\w. See Tvyx^^^^' Ti|x(opCa, a J, 97, punishment f retribution,
T€(|>pob), 0), ci(rw {recppa, ashes), to reduce Heb. X. 29.*
to ashes, 2 Pet. ii. 6.* tCvw. See riw.
Ti\vr\, 7]s, 17, (i) art, skill. Acts xvii. 29 ; Tis, Ti, gen. Tij/os (enclitic), indef. pron.,
(2) a7i art, craft, a trade, Acts xviii. 3; any one, some one (see § 352).
Rev. xviii. 22.* T^S ; tL ; gen. TiVos ; an interrogative
r€\viTr]% ov, 6, an artificer, craftsinan. pron., U'/w.? lohich? wluit? (see §350).
Acts xix. 24, 38 Rev. ; xviii. 22 ; of t£tXos, ov, 6 (Lat.), title, superscription,
the Divine artificer, Heb. xi. 10.* John xix. 19, 20.*
TT|K(«>, to melt, pass., 2 Pet. iii. 13.* Titos, ov, 6 Titus.
TTjX-axrywSi adv. {TrjXe, afar, a^^w, to Tiw or TLvoj, rlao}, to pay; in N.T. only
shine), hrilliantly, clearly, Mark viii. in the phrase rtw 8iK7)v, to pay justice,
25.* i.e., to suffer punishment, 2 Thess.
TTjXiKovTOS, avrri, ovto, dem. pron., so i. 9.*
great, 2 Cor. i. 10 Heh. ii. 3 James ; ; Toi, an
enclitic part., truly, indeed. See
iii. 4 ; Rev. xvi. 18.* KuiToiye, fievroi, roiyapovv, roivvv.
TTipc'w, u), Tjau), (i) to watch carefully, Toi-Yap-ovv, consequently, therefore, i

with good or evil design (2) to guard; ;

Thess. iv. 8 ; Heb. xii. i.*
(3) to keep or reserve; (4) to observe, TOi-"y€, although (in KatTo/7e).
keep, enactments or ordinances. ToC-vvv, indeed now, therefore, Luke xx.
TT|pT]<ris, ews, 7], (i) a p)lcLC<i of wairl, a 25; I Cor. ix. 26; Heb. xiii. 13;
'prison. Acts iv. 3, v. 18; (2) observ- James ii. 24.*
ance, as of precepts, i Cor. vii. 19.* Toid<r-86, ToidSf, roioVSe, demonst. pron.,
*
TiPepidsy aSoy, 7/, Tiberias, John vi. i, of this kind, such, 2 Pet. i. 1 7.
23, xxi. I.* TOIOVTOS, roiaimt), tolovto, demonst.
Tipepio^, ov, 6, Tiberius, Luke iii. i.* denoting quality (as roaodros dejiotes
 ;

TOiXOS TpOTTOs] VOCABULARY. 517

quantity, and o5tos simply determines), Tpdx'nXos, 01', 6, the neck, as Luke xv. 20
of such a kind, such, so, used either met, for life, Rom, xvi, 4.
>vith or without a noun. (The corre- rpaxvs, da, v, rough, uneven, as ways,
sponding relative is ofos, as, only ]Mark Luke iii. 5 ; as rocks in the sea, Acts
xiii. 19 ; I Cor. xv. 48 ; 2 Cor. x. xxvii, 29,*
1 1 ; once oiroios, Acts xxvi. 29. ) For Tpax<«>viTis, tSos, rj, Trachonitis, the
ToiovTos with the article, see § 220. ]Sr,E. of the territory beyond Jordan,

TOIXOS, ov, 6, a icaU of a house, Acts Luke iii. i.*

xxiii. 3 disting.
; from relxos, a ivall Tp€is, Tpla, three.
of a city.* Tp€p.(u, to tremble, to be afraid, Mark v.
TOKOS) ov, 6 {a bringing forth), interest, T,2, ; Luke viii, 47 ; Acts ix. 6 (W. H.
usury. Matt, xxv, 27 Luke xix. 23.* ; omit) ; 2 Pet. ii. 10,*
ToX(idto, w, ^<TU}, (i) to dare, to venture Tpe<{>0) dpex/zu}, perf,, pass., T^dpa/x/jLai,
(inf.); (2) to have courage. to feed, to nourish, to sustoAn, Matt.
ToX)Jii]p6Tcpov (comp. of ToX/xrjpQs, adv., vi. 26 ; Acts xii. 20 ; James v. 5 ;

boldly), the more boldly, Rom. xv. 15.* to bring up, rear, Luke iv, 16.
ToXp.T]T^S, ov, 0, a daring oiic, one over- Tpcxwj 2ud aor. edpafiov, (i) to run, as
bold or presumptuous, 2 Pet. ii. 10.* in a race, i Cor. ix, 24 ; Rom. ix. 16 ;
Top,6s, y], ov, sharp, keeiiy comp., ro/Awre/Jos, (2) to run, or spread, as a rumour, 2
Heb. iv. 12.* Thess. iii. i.

t6|ov, ov, TO, a boiv. Rev. vi. 2.* rpfjiia, aros, to, a hole, the eye of a needle.
*
Toirdtiov, iov, TO, theto2MZ, Rev. xxi. 20.* See TpviidkLo..
TOTTOS) ov, 6, (i) a place, i.e., a district xpidKovTa, indecl., thirty.
or region, or a particular spot in a Tpia-Koo-uoi, at, a, three hund.red, Mark
region; (2) the place one occujncs, xiv. 5 ; John xii. 5.*
the room, an abode, a seat, a sheath for TptPoXos, 6, a triple-thorned shrub,
01;,

a sword ; (3) a passage in a book ; (4) a Matt. vii. 16; Heb. vi. 8.*
thistle.
state, condition; (5) opporttmity, possi- rpCpos, 01', 17, apathv:orn, a road, a beaten
icay. Matt. iii. 3 ; Marki. 3 Luke iii. 4.
*
bility. (See under Kpavlov.) ;

ToorovTOS, Toaaim], to(tovto, demonst. Tpi-erCa, as, tj, a sjiace of three years,
prou. denoting (quantity (cf. tocovtos), Acts XX. 31.*
so great, so much, so long; plur., so Tp£t«, to grate, to gnash, as the teeth,
many. Markix. 18.*
t6t€, demonst. adv., then, Tpt-jj,T]vos, OV, of three months, neut. as
TOvvavTiov, for to ivavTiov, on the con- subst,, Heb. xi. 23.*
trary, 2 Cor. i). 7 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Pet. rpis,num. adv., thrice.
iii. 9.* rpi-oTeyos, ov, having three floors; neut.,
Toiivojia,for to ovofxa, by name. Matt, the third floor or storey. Acts xx, 9.*
xxvii. 57.* Tpio-'XiXioi, at, a, three thousand, Acts
tovtcVti, for tovt €<ttlv (W. H. prefer ii. 41.*
the uncontracted form), that is; " z.c," rptros, t], ov, ord. num., third.; neut,,
Acts 19
i. Rom. x. 6, 7, 8.
; TO Tplrov, the third pa.rt, Rev. viii. 7 ;

Tovro, neut. of ovto^, which see. the third time, Mark xiv, 41 e/c rplrov, ;

Tpd-yos, 01^, 6, a he-goat, Heb. ix. 12, 13, tlie third time, Matt. xxvi. 44; t^tpIttj

19, X. 4.* (sc. Tj/xepg.), on the third day, Luke

Tpdirc^a, 77s, 77, a table, (i)/or food and xiii. 32,
banqueting; (2) for money -changing Tpix€S, plur, of dpi^, which see.
or business. rpCxtvos, Vi ov, made of hair. Rev. vi.
Tpai^^Cnis, ov, 6, a money-changer, a 12.*
banker. Matt. xxv. 27.* rpofios, ov, 6, a trembling, e.g., from fear.
TpavpA, aros, to, a wound, Luke x. 34. * rpcirVj, 77?, T], a tiLrning, James i. 17 (sec
Tpav|xaT{^(>i, ie(jj, to wound, Luke xx. 12; R.V.).*
Acts xix. 16.* TpoTTOS, OV, 6, (i) manner ; 6v rpbirov, in
rpax-qXf^w, lata, in pass., to be laid bare, like manner as, as. Matt, xxiii, 37 ; (2)
*
to bt laid opejit Heb. iv. 1 3. course of life, disposition, Heb. xiii, 5.
518 VOCABULARY. [Tpoiro-<j>op^w ij^pii

Tpoiro-<j>op€'w, tD, 770-0?, to bear with the a thing, a pattern, "type"; (3) an
disposition or cimractcr of others, Acts emblem, an example; (4) tJie form or
xiii. 18, where perhaps the true read- contents of a letter ; (5) a form, a rule
ing is eTpo(po(f>6p7](Tei', he hare them as of doctrine.
a nurse.* Tvirro), xj/u}, to beat, to strike, as the
Tpo<|)T|, 7;s, i], food, nourishment, niaiii- breast in grief, Luke xviii. 13 ; to
tniancc. punishment. Acts xxiii. 3
inflict to ;

Tp6(|)i|jLos, 01', 6, Trojihimus. wound or offend the conscience, i Cor.

*
Tpo<j)6s, 01', r/, a nurse, i Thess. ii. 7. viii. 12.
Tpo({>o-((>opEO). See TpoTro<pope(t} (not W. Tvpavvos, ov, 6, Tyrannus, Acts xix.
H.);*
rpoxta, as, i], the track of a wheel, a Tvppdtw, agitate or disturb in mind,
to
2Kith, fig., Heb. xii. 13.* Luke X. 41 (W. H., eopifd^oj).*
rpoxds, ov, 6, a track of a ivheel, a
circle, Tvpios, ov, of Tyre, Tyrian, Acts xii.
* 20.*
a course, James iii. 6.
rpupXiov, lov, t6, a dish, a platter, Matt. Tvpos, Tyre, a city of Phenicia.
ov, y],

xxvi. 23 Mark xiv. 20.*

; Tv<i)Xos, blind, (i) physically,
-f], ov,
TpvYcLw, CO, rjaci}, to gather, as the vintage, (2) mentally, i.e., ignorant, stupid,
Luke vi. 44 ; Rev. xiv. 18, 19.* dull of apprehension.
Tpv-ywv, ovos, 7) {rpv^o}), a turtle-dove, TV(}>X<Jw, Q), uxToj, fig., to make blind or
Luke ii. 24.* dull of apprehension, John xii. 40
Tpvp,aXid, as, i], the eye of a needle, Mark 2 Cor. iv. 4 i John ii. 11.* ;

X. 25; Luke xviii. 25 (W. H., Tprjfxa).* Tv<|>dw, a), wcrcj, to raise a smoke ; pass.
TpiiirT]p,a, aros, to, a hole, the eye of a fig., to be pro2(d, to be arrogant and
needle. Matt. xix. 24.* conceited, i Tim. iii. 6, vi. 4 ; 2 Tim.
Tpv({>aiva, 77s, 17, Tryphccna, Rom. xvi. iii. 4.*
12.* TV(j)w, in pass., part., smoking, dimly
Tpv«}>dw, cD, luxuriously, to
ri<T(i}, to live burning, Matt. xii. 20.*
take one's fill of pleasure, James v. 5.* TV(})wviKds, 77, ov, violent, tempestuous,
*
Tpv(|>T|, -^s, ^, luxury, Luke vii. 25 ; 2 like a whirlwind. Acts xx vii. 1 4.
Pet. ii. 13.* TvxiKOs, 01/, 6 (or Tux"^o'5)> Tychichus.
Tpv<j)«(ra, 77s, IT), Tryphosa, Rom. xvi. Tv^dv. See ri'7xdi/w.
12.*
Tpcods, 6.ho%, 7j, Troas, a city of JMysia,
properly Alexamlria Troas. Y.
TpwyvXXiov, 01^, t6, Trogyllium, Acts
XX. 15 (W. H. omit).* Y, V, v\|/iXov, upsllon, n, the twentieth
TpcG-yto, to eat. Matt. xxiv. 38 ; John vi. letter. As a numeral, v' — 400; ,v —
54-58, xiii. 18.* 400,000. At the commencement of
Tiryxdvo) [rvx- or rei^X")? ^ut, Te^^ofiai , ;
a word, v is always aspirated.
2nd aor., ^tvxov perf., t^tvxo. (i) ;
', vaKCvGivos, 17, ov, "hyacinthine," of the
to obtain, to get possession of enjoy colour of tlie hyacinth, dark purple,
(gen.), Luke xx. 35; Acts xxiv. 3; Rev. ix. 17.*
(2) to fall out, to happen, to happen to MKivdos, 01;, 6, "hyacinth," a j^urjde or
he ; ei ri^^ot,should chance, it may
if it blue gem, "jacinth," perhaps sopjs/iirc,
be, px^rluips, 1 Cor. xiv. 10; 2nd aor., Rev. xxi. 20.*
part., Tvx<iv, ordinary, commonplace. vdXivos, "n, ov, glassy, trans2}arent. Rev.
Acts xix. II neut., tvx^v, tchat may
; iv. 6.*
be, perhaps, i Cor. xvi. 6. iiaXoS) a transparent stone like glass,
01', 7),

death
TviiiravCtu), tVw, to beat or scourge to Rev. xxi. 21.*
crystal.
when stretched on a ivheel, Heb. xi. 35.* vppCt<*), cw, to treat with insolence or
TviriKwSi adv., typically, in figitres, contumely, to abuse.
"I Cor. X. II (W. H.).* iSPpis, ewj, 17, ( I ) insolence, injury, 2 Cor.
TVTros, 01;, 6, (i) « mark, an impression, xii. 10 (2) darnage,
;
loss, Acts xxvii.
produced by a blow ; (2) the figure of 10, 21.*
 ;; * ^;
,

iPpuTTi^S — inr€p-pdXX«J VOCABULARY. 519

iPpuTTTis, ov, 6, an insolent, injurious 30 ; Mark xiv, 26 ; Acts xvi. 25 ;

man, Rom. i. 30 ; i Tim. i. 13.* Heb. ii. 12.*

{ryiaCvo), to he ivell, to he in health, Luke ^i|ivos, ov, 6, a hymn, a sacred- song, Eph.
V. 31, XV. 27 ; fig., to he sounds in V. 19 ; Col. iii. 16. Syn. 48.*
{ev) faith, doctrine, etc., Tit. i. 13 ; away, to take oneself aivay
vir-d-yw, to go
part., vyiaivojv, healthful, wholesome, imperat., sometimes an expression of
of instruction, i Tim. i. 10. aversion, hegone, Matt. iv. 10 ; some-
vyiTis, es, (i) sound, ivhole, in health ; times a farewell only, Matt. viii. 13,
(2) fig., wholesome, of teaching. Tit. 32 to die, Matt. xxvi. 24.
;

vir-aKOT), Tjr, 17, obedience, Rom. vi. 16.

{rypdsi d, moist, of a tree ; green,
6v, viTT-aKovft), (xu), [i) to listen, as at a door,
i.e., full of sap, Luke xxiii. 31.* to find who seeks admission, only
vSpCa, as, 71, a water-pot, John ii, 6, 7, Acts xii. 13; (2) to hearken to, hence
iv. 28.* to obey (dat.).
iiSpo-iroTew, u), <o 5c a ^vater -drinker, i5ir-av8pos, ov, under a husband, mar-
1 Tim. V. 23.* ried, Rom. vii. 2.*
vSpo-iriKos, ^j 61*, dropsical, Luke xiv. vrr-avTaw, tD, -qaw, to meet (dat.), Matt,
2.* viii. 28.
OSwp, uSaroy, to, icater ; vdara, ivaters, vTr-(xvTT]o-is, ews, i), a meeting. Matt. viii.
streams, also a hody of icater, as 34 (W. H.), XXV. I (W. H.) John xii.
;

Matt. xiv. 28 ; vbwp ^wv, living or 13-

riinning water ; fig. , of spiritual truth, viraplis, ewr, 17, goods, substance, property.
John iv. 14. Acts ii. x. 34.*
45 ; Heb.
v€t6s, ov, 6 rain), rain.
{voj, to {rTr-dpx<i>, tobegin to he ; to be originally,
vio-Qio-la, as, r), adoption, sonship, into to subsist; hence generally, to he, Luke
the Divine family, Rom. viii. 15, 23, viii. 41 ; Acts iii. 6 ; with dat. of pers.,
ix. 4 ; Gal. iv. 5 ; Eph. i. 5.* to have, to possess ; part, neut., jjI.,
vios, ov, 6, a son, a child. Matt. xvii. 25 TO. virdpxovTa, things which one pos-
a descendant; the offspring or young sesses, goods, property. Matt. xix. 21.
of an animal. Matt, xxi. 5 an ; Syn. 1.
adopted son, Heb. xi. 24 of various ; vTr-e^Kw, to yield, to submit to authority,
forms of close union and relationship Heb. xiii. 17.*
(cf. TeKvov) a disciple or follower.
; vir-€vavTios, t'a, iov, ojjposite to, adverse,
Matt. xii. 27 ; who resemhles
one Col. ii. 14; as subst. , an adversary
(gen. ), Matt. v. 45 one who partakes
; Heb. 27.* X.
of any quality or character, Luke x. vTTc'p, prep., gov. gen. and aocus with :

6 ; John xii. 36 6 vlbs rod dvdpdo-Kov, ; gen., over, for, on behalf of; with
Son of man (once only without art., accus., above, superior to (see § 303).
John V. 27), very often used by our Adverbially, above, more, 2 Cor. xi. 23.
Lord of himself (only once by another In COMPOSITION, virep denotes superi-
of him. Acts vii. 56) ; in reference to ority (above), or aid (on behalf of).
Dan. vii. 13 [sotis of men denote men virep-a£p(tf, in mid., to lift up oneself, to
generally in Mark iii. 28, Eph. iii. 5, exalt oneself, to be arrogant, 2 Cor. xii.
only). For vlbs Qeov, Son of God, see 7 2Thess. ii. 4.*
;

,
§ 217, c. vrrcp-aKiios, ou, j^ast the acme or flower of
I'Xt), 77s, T), wood, fuel, James iii. 5.* life, I Cor. vii. 36.*
vfitis, plur. of crv, which see. inrep-dvo), adv. (gen. ), above, Eph. i. 21
I }Jt€vatos, 01^, 6, Hymenceus, i Tim. i. 20 iv. 10 ; Heb. ix. 5.*
2 Tim. ii. 17.* vir€p-av|dva), to increase exceedingly, 2
{)(i€Tepos, possess, pron., your, as be- Thess. i. 3.*
longing to, or as proceeding from. itrep-^aivo),to go beyond, to over -reach,
(For the use of the article with the 1 Thess. iv. 6.*
word, see § 223.) {crrep-PaXXdvTws, adv., beyond measure,
&|JLV€a>, w, Tjcru), {1) tosing or recite hymns 2 Cor. xi. 23.*
to (ace.) ; to sing praise. Matt. xxvi. vtrep-pdXXw, intrans., to surpass; N.T.,
620 VOCABULARY. [virtp-PoXTJ — vird-KpiO'is

only pres. participle, surpassing ex- vTT-TJKoos, OV, listening to, obedient to
ceeding^ 2 Cor. iii. lo, ix. 14 ; Eph. i. (dat. submissive, Acts vii. 39 ; 2 Cor.
),

19, ii. 7, iii. 19.* ii. 9; Phil. ii. 8.*

vircp-PoXTJ, 7]%, i], excess, exuberance, sur- vir-TipcTcw, Q, to minister to, to serve
passing excellence, lyre-emitience, 2 Cor. (dat), Acts xiii. 36, xx. 34, xxiv.
iv. 7, xii. 7 ; Kad' VTrep^oXrjv, as adv. 23.*
exceedingly, Rom. vii. 13 ; i Cor. xii. ov, 6 {ip^rrjs, a rower), a ser-
{nr-T)p€'Ti]s,

31; 2 Cor. i. 8; Gal. i. 13; Ka6' vant, attendant, specially (i) an officer,
virep^o\T]v ds vTrep^oXrjv, more and more a lictor ; (2) an attendant in a syna-
exceedingly (R.V. ), 2 Cor. iv. 17.* gogue ; (3) a minister of the Gospel.
vTrep-eiSov (see ddov), to overlook, to hear Syn. 60.
ivith, 30.*
Acts xvii. iJirvos, ov, 6, sleep ; fig.spiritual sleep. ,

virtp-iKiiva, adv., beyond, farther, 2 Cor. VTTo, prep., gov. gen. accus., under and
X. 16.* with gen., by, generally signifying
{nrcp-cK-ircpto-crov, adv., beyond all mea- the agent ; with accus., under, beneath,
sure, in the highest possible degree, Eph. of place, of time, or of subjection to au-
iii. 20; I Thess. iii. 10, v. 13.* thority (see § 304). In compo.sition,
{nr€p-6K-T€Cvw, to stretch out overmuch, VTTO denotes subjection, diminutiony
2 Cor. X. 14.* concealment.
{nrcp-tK-xwa), pass. , to he poured out over, viro-pdXXw, to suborn, to suggest M'hat is
*
to overfioiu, Luke vi. 38. false. Acts vi. 11.*
{iTrcp-cv-Tvyxdvw, to intercede for, Rom. v'Tro-'Ypap.|xds, ov, 6, a pattern, an example,
viii. 26.* I Pet. ii. 21.*
virep-ex'^j ^^ excel, to sur^MSS (gen.), to be vird-SctYixa, aroj, t6, (i) an example for
supreme; N.T. only participle, Rom. imitation, or for warning, John xiii.
xiii. I ; Phil. ii. 3, iv. 7 ; i Pet. ii. 15 ; Heb. iv. 11 ; 2 Pet. ii. 6 James ;

13 part, neut., to virepexov, excellency,

;
V. 10 ; (2) a typical representation,
super -eminence, Phil. iii. 8.* pattern, copy, Heb. viii. 5, ix. 23.*
i)Tr£p-T]<}>avia, ay, rj, pride, arrogance, viro-8€iKvv|jii, to show plainly, as by
*
]\Iark vii. 22. placing under the eyes, to warn (dat.),
{)'Tr€p-T|<})avos, ov {(paiuco, r) connective), Matt. iii. 7 ; Luke iii. 7, vi. 47, xii. 5 ;
p)roud, arrogant, James iv. 6. Acts ix. 16, XX. 35.*
adv., very much, pr6-e7ni7iently,
ii-rrep-Xiav, {nro-8€xop,ai, to receive as a guest, to
2 Cor. xi. 5, xii. 11.* entertain (ace), Luke x. 38, xix. 6;
*
vircp-viKda), to, to be more than conqueror, Acts xvii. 7 ; James ii. 25.
Ron., viii. 37.* inro-Seo), Co, rjau), in mid., to bind on onc^s
vTr€p-o"YKos, tumid, boastful, of language, sandals, be shod with (ace. ), Mark vi.
2 Pet. ii. 18; Jude 16.* 9 ; Acts xii. 8 ; Eph. vi. 1 5 (lit. , shod
vfrep-oxTJ, ^s, ^, eminence, superiority, as to yoicr feet).*
I Cor, ii. I ; I Tim. ii. 2.* {nrd-8T]|jia, aros, t6, a sandal, shoe.
{nr£p-Tr€pi(ra-€{iw, to superahound, Rom. vird-SiKoS) ov, subject to judgment, under
V. 20 ; pass. , to he very abundant in penalty to (dat.), Rom. iii. 19.*
(dat.), 2 Cor. vii. 4.* xiTTo-^tJ-ytov, ov, t6, an animal under
vnr€p-'Tr£picr(r«s, adv. , superabundantly, yoke, an ass. Matt. xxi. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii.
*
(above measure, Mark vii. 37, 16.*
vTrtp-irkiovaXfia, to sujjerabouoid, I Tim. i. inro-twvwixi, to undergird, as a ship for
strength against the waves, Acts xxvii.
{nrep-anj/oo), Q, to highly exalt, Phil. ii. 9.* 17.*
{i7r£p-<|>povcb>, Q>, to think over -highly of viro-KaTW, adv., underneath (as prep.
oneself, Rom. xii. 3.* with gen.).
{nrtpwov, ov, t6, the upper part of a house, viro-Kp^vonai, dep., to act under a, mask,
an ujjpcr chamber, Acts i. 13, ix. 37, to personate, to feign (ace, inf.), Luke

39, XX. 8.* XX. 20.*

vir-c'xw, to submit to, to undergo (ace), viird-Kpio'is, ews, i], lit., stage playing
* Tim.
Jude 7. hypocrisy, dissembling, i
&iro-KpiTT|s — v\|/T]Xo-(J>pov^(«)] VOCABULART. 521

a stage ^^Zaycr; a
viro-KpiTT|S, ov, 6, lit., viro-o-rpeclM*), i/'w, to turn back, to return,
hypocrite, a dissembler, Matt. xvi. 3. intrans.
viro-XafJLpdvw, 2nd aor. vrreXa^ou, (i) viro-o-Tpwvvup.t or -wvvtjii), to strew under,
to take from under, up, Actsi. to receive Luke xix. 36. *
9 (2) to take uj) a discourse, to answer,
;
viro-Ta7'^, "^^j "^^ subjection, stibmission,
Luke X. 30 ; (3) <o think, to judge, to 2 Cor. ix. 13 ; Gal. ii. 5 ; i Tim. ii.

suppose, Luke vii. 43 ; Acts ii. 15 ; (4) II, 4.* iii.

to receive, welcome, 3 John 8 ("W. H. ).* viro-Tao-o-ft), ^w, 2nd aor. , pass. , vireTa.-yT]v,

viro-Xeifxp-a (or -Xi/i^ua). aros, to, a rem- to place under, to subject; mid., to
nant, Rom. ix. 27 (W. H.).* submit oneself, to be obedient.
VTTO Xeiiru), to leave behind, pass., Rom. to set or put tinder, to lay
i5iro-Tt0T]p.i,
down, Rom. xvi. 4 mid., to suggest ;

viro-Xrivtov, t6 {\r]v6s), a wine-vat,

ov, to, put in mind i Tim. iv. 6.* ;

wine-press, dug in the ground, Mark •uiro-Tpex.co, 2nd aor. virebpaixov, to o'un
xii. I.* under lee or shelter of, Acts xxvii. 16.*
{nro-Xi|nrJi.vo), to leave, to leave behind, tiro-Tuirwo-is, v, pattern, cxamjjle,
ewj,
I Pet. ii. 21.* I Tim. 2 Tim. i. 13.*
i. 16 ;

viro-p.€va), (i) ^0 bear up under, to endure vTro-^4p<ji, 1st aor. VTrrjveyKa, to bear up
(ace.) ; (2) <o persevere, to reviain con- under, to sustain, to endiire, i Cor. x.
stant. Matt. X. 22 ; (3) io reviain or 13 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; i Pet. ii. 19.*
5^^?/ bcJtind, Luke ii. 43. oiro-x.wpeco, Q, tjcto}, to icithdraw quietly,
v'iro-fi.i}JLVT|o-Kc»), vwofMurjaoj, 1st aor. pass. to retire, Luke v. 16, ix. 10.*
vire/xvTjadrjv, to remind (ace. of pers. ), vir-o)Tridt«, to strike under the eye ; hence,
John xiv. 26mid., ^0 caZZ to mind,
; {i) to bruise ; fig. , to buffet, Cor. ix.
i

to remember, only Luke xxii. 61. 27 ; (2) to iceai-y out, by repeated ap-
{nr6-p.vT]<ris, ews, rf, (i) remembrance, plication, Luke xviii. 5.*
recollection, 2 Tim. i. 5 ; (2) a putting £s, vbs, 6, 7], a hog, boar, or sow, 2 Pet.
in mind, 2 Pet. i. 13, iii. i.* ii. 22.*
viro-iiovTJ, Tjs, 7), a bearing up under, t/, hyssop, a stalk or stem of
i'cro-w'Tros, ov,
endurance, perseverance, patient wait- hyssop, John xix. 29 ; a bunch of hys-
ing for (gen.). sop for sp)rinkling, Heb. ix. 19.*
viro-vo€<«), u), to conjecture, to suspect. Acts vo^€p€«, Q), TJaio, to be behind ; abs., to
25, xxv. 18, xxvii. 27.*
xiii. be lacking, to fall short, John ii. 3 ;
vird-voia, as, i), a surmising, suspicion, Avith obj., to be lacking in, to fall short
I Tini. vi. 4.* of, ace, Matt. xix. 20 ;
gen., Luke
{nro-irXcw {F), ist aor. vTreirXevca, to sail xxii. 35 ; airb, Heb. xii. 15 ; to be
under shelter of (ace), Acts xxvii. lacking to, ace, Mark x. 21 ;
pass.,

.
4, 7-: to lack, to come short, i Cor. i. 7, viii.
viro-Trv€'w (/), 1st aor. vireirvevca, to 8 ; to suffer need, Luke xv. 14.
bloiv gently, of the wind, Acts xxvii. vtnipr\\LO., fxaros, to, (i) tfiat which is
lacking from (gen.), Col. i. 24 i ;

{nro-iroSiov, ov, to, a footstool. Thess. iii. 10 ; (2) need, poverty, Luke
vtrd-o-Tao-is, ews, 17, that ivhich underlies ; xxi. 4.
hence (i), the substance, the reality vo-T€'pii(ris, (ojs, ij, poverty, penury, Mark
underlying mere appearance, Heh. i.
3, xii. 44 ; Phil. iv. ii.*
perhaps, Heb. xi. i (R.V. niarg. ) ; (2) compar., latter, only, Tim.
i;o-T€pos, a, ov,
support, confidence, ass^trance, 2 Cor. iv. Iand Matt. xxi. 31 (W. H.) neut. ;

ix. 4, xi. 17 ; Heb. iii. 14 ;

perhaps as an adv., last, afterwards, with gen.,
^
Heb. xi. I (R.V.).* Matt. xxii. 27 Luke xx. 32. ;

viro-(rT€XX«, eXcD, 1st aor. viricrTeCKa, to v<|>avTdsi 77, ov (vcpaivu), to weave), woven,
draw back, Gal. ii. 12 mid., to shrink, ; John xix. 23.*
to draw oneself baxk from [tov fxrj, ij»jrr]Xds, v, ov, high, lofty, lit. or fig. ra ,

with Acts xx. 27

inf.), Heb. x. 38.* ; v\f/7)\d, things that are high, Rom. xu.
viro-o-ToXTi, ijs, 7], a shrinking, a drawing 16 ; e;/ vxpriXoh, on high, Heb. i. 3.
hacky Heb. x. 39.* v\[/'qXo-<{>pov€a), w, to be high-minded.
522 VOCABTJLARY, [•Utl/HrTOS (j>€p(i>

proud, assuming, Rom. xi. 20 (W. H., 4>avovT|X, 6 (Heb.), Phanucl, Luke ii.

v\l/7]\a (fypbvei) I Tim. vi. 17.* ;

i!\}/i<rTos, T), ov (superlat. of v\pL, highli/), <})avTdt<«), /o raj/sc ^0 ap2)ear ; pass. ,

part.,
highest, most elevated; iieut., plur., the TO (pavTa^dfievov, the sj^ectacle, Heb.
highest ^;?rtc^.9, the heights, i.e., the xii. 21.*
heavens, Luke ii. 14 6 I'l^icrros, the
; ^avTaa-ia, a?, •:7, shou', jMmp, Acts xxv.
Most High, i.e., God, Luke i. 32, 35,
76. <|)dvTa(r(JLa, aros, to', a plmntom, an ap-

i$\{/os, oi's, opp. to jSddos, £pli.

TO, height, parition, Matt. xiv. 26 Mark vi. 49.* ;

iii. 18 Rev. xxi. 16

; t^ vxj/ovs, from ; c|>dpa'y|, 07709, T], a valley, dell, or gorge,
on high, i.e., from God, Luke i. 78, Luke iii. 5.*
xxiv. 49 ; so eis v\pos, to God, E])h. iv. <l>apaw, 6, Pliaraoh, the title of ancient
8 fig., exaltation, James i. 9.*
; Egyptian kings.
v^oiii, Q), doao}, (i) to raise on high, to (Heb.), Phares,. Matt. L 3 Luke
<l>ap€s, 6 ;

elevate, as the brazen serpent, and 33.*

iii.

Jesus on the cross; {2) to exalt, to set ^aptoraios, 01', 6, (from the Heb. verb,
on high, Actsii. 33 (3) to elevate, i.e., ; to separate), a Pharisee, one of the
to raise from a lowh^ to a dignified Jewisli sect so called.
condition (4) to exalt in estimation,
;
(j>ap|JLaK€ia (W. H., -da), aj, t], magic,
iMatt. xxiii. 12. art, sorcery, enchantment. Gal. v. 20 ;

{i\}/(*)(jLa, aro^, to, height, Rom. viii. 39 ; Rev. ix. 21 (AV. H., cpap/xaKos), xviii.
citadel (fig.), 2 Cor. x. 5.* 23.*
(f>app.aK£vs, e'ws, 6, a magician, sorcerer,
enchanter. Rev. xxi. 8 (W. H. read fol-
lowing).*
<}>app.aK69, 01', 6, a magician, sorcerer,
the twenty-first letter.
4», 4>» 4>i> 7'^'^7^^^; enchanter. Rev. xxi. 8 (W. H. ), xxii.
As a numeral, 0' = 500 0, = 500,000. ;

<{>d'yos, 01', 6, a glutton, j\Iatt. xi. 19 ;

<}>d(ris, fws, ^, report, tidings. Acts xxi.
Luke vii. 34.* 3I-*
<^Y<i>, only used in fut. (pdyofxai, and , <})d<rKa) (freq. of (p-nixl), to assert, to affirm,
2nd aor. ^(payov. See eaOioj.
, to Acts xxiv. 9, xxv. 19
profess. ;

4>aiXovTis, ov, 6 (W. H., (peXourji), (Lat. Rom. i. 22 ; Rev. ii. 2 (W. H. omit).*
prenula,) a cloak, 2 Tim. iv. 13.* <})dTVT], 77?, 7/, rt manger, a crib, Luke ii.
2nd aor., pass., ecpavrjv, (l)
<|raCva>, cpavCj, 7 ; a stable, Liike xiii. 15.
trans., ^0 s/to^f, in N.T. only mid. or <j)avXos, 77, ov, vile, wicked, base, John iii.

pass., to ajjpear, to be seen, to seem; 20, V. 29 ; Rom. ix. 1 1 ( W. H. ) ;

TO. <paivopi€va, things which can he 2 Cor. V. 10 (W. H.) ; Tit. ii. 8
seen, Heb. xi. 3 ; (2) intrans.. to James iii. 16. Syn. 22.*
shine, to give light, John i. 5, v. 35. <|>£yYOS, OI'S, TO, brightness, sjilcndovr,
Syn. 6. Matt. xxiv. 29 ; Mark 24 Luke
xiii. ;

4»dX€K, 6 (Heb.), Peleg, 35.* Luke iii. xi. T,T, (W. H., 0a)s). Syn. 65.*
<}>avep6s, d, bv, apparent, manifest ; h <f>€i8o|xai, (peiffofiaL, dep., (i) /o .<?;wr/7

T(j (pavepi^, as adv., manifestly, openly, (gen.), Acts xx. 29; (2) to forbear
Matt. vi. 4, 6 ; externally, outwardly, Cor. xii. 6.
(inf.), 2
Rom. ii. 28 ; adv., -tDs, clearly, Acts adv., sparingly,
(|>€i,8o|jLe'v()>s, ^wrsnno-
x. 3 ;
2^^'bliclyy Mark 45. i. niously, 2 Cor. ix. 6.*
JcLVipooi, Q, ibau), to nmkc apparent, to <J)€X6viis. See (f>ai\6vr]s.
manifest, to disclose ; pass., to he mani- (|)ep(<>, otVo;, 7Jv€yKa, ijvix^W (sPP § 103)»
fested, made manifest, i Tim. iii. 16 ;
to as (i)
bear, /o produce fruit; (2)
2 Cor. V. II. /o carry, as a burden ; (3) to bring
^av^paxris, ews, i], a ma,nifestation (gen. endure, to bear vulh, Rom. ix.
(4) <o
obj.), I Cor xii. 7 2 Cor. iv. 2* ; 22 (5) to bring forivard, as charges,
;

(|>avos, 01', 6, a torch, a lantern, John John xviii. 29 ; (6) to uphold, Hcli. i.
xviii. 3.* 3 (7) pass., as nautical term, to be
;
 ;

<|)€VY<«> — <}>lX.0-CPT0p70S
j
VOCABULARY. 62S

dHvcn, Acts xxvii. 15, 17; (8) mid., cjjiX-avGpwirws, adv., kindly, Acts xx\di.
*
to rush (bear itself on), Acts ii. 2
-,
tn go ;

on ov advance, iii learning, Heb. vi. i. (j>iX-ap'Yvpia, as, 17, love of money, covet-
^€vy(a, ^0/j.ai, ecpi^yov, to Jice, to cscajJC, to ousncss, I Tim. vi. 10.*
shun (ace. or diro). <|>iX-dpYvpos, ov, money-loving, covetous,
^r\K[^, iKos, 6, Felix. Luke xvi. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 2.*
<|)T|fjLT], 7;s, 7], a rum 0117% fame, Matt. ix. <|>iX-avTos, ov, self-loving, selfish, 2 Tim,
26 ; Luke iv. 14.* iii. 2.*
(j)T]ji,i, imi)f. and 2nd aor. e^u (for other <j>iXc(D, w, ri(xw, (i) to love ; (2) with inf.,
tenses, see elirov, tpecj), to say, mtli to a classical usage perhaps
be v:ont,
oTi, dat. of ])ers. , irpJs (ace), with found in Matt, vi, 5 ; (3) to kiss.
pers., ace. of thing (once ace, inf., Matt. XX vi. 48, Syn. 19.
Rom. iii. 8). Syn. 8. (|>iXi], 77s, i], a female friend (see 0iXos),

<l>fjc-Tos, 01', 6, Festus. Luke XV. 9.*

(|>ddv(o, (pddau}, perf. e<pdaKa, (i) to he <j)iX-T|8ovos, ov, pleasure - loving ; as
before, to precede, i Thess. iv. 15 ; /o subst., 2 Tim. iii. 4.*
come sooner than c.rpcctcd, ^latt. xii. ^iXT)|xa, ares, to, a kiss.
28 Luke xi. 20
; 2 Cor. x. 14 ; ; 4»iXT|p,a>v, ovos, 6, riiilemon, Philem, i.*
I Thess. ii. 16 ; (2) to arrive, attain <±>iX'r]T03 or ^i\y]T6s, Philetus, 2 Tim.
to {els, axpi), Rom. ix. 31 ; Phil. iii. ii. 17.*
16.* (f>iXia, as, 7], friendshi}), love, James iv,
<j)6apTos, 0, ov ((pdelpo)), corr7tptibIe, 4 (gei|- obj.),*
perishable, Rom. i. 23 ; i Cor. ix. 25, <l>LXnr'irT]o-ios, ov, b, a Fhilipjuan, Phil.
^y- 53, 54; I Pet. i. 18, 23.* iv. 15.*
())0€Yyo}iat, y^o/mai, dep., to speak aloud, ^^iXiiriroi, o}v, 01, Philippi.
to utter, Acts iv. 18 ; 2 Pet. ii. 16, «i>iXfinroS; 01', 6, Philip. Four of the
18.* name are mentioned : (i) John i. 44-
iJ)G6ipa), (pdepQ, 2nd aor., pass., i(pda.p7}v, 47 ; (2) Acts vi. 5 ; (3) Luke iii. i ;
to corrupt, physically or morally, to (4) Matt, xiv, 3.
'^poit, to destroy. 4E*tXd-0€os, 01', b, V, a lover of God,
{^Otvo-irwpivos, autumnal, Jude 12.* 2 Tim. iii. 4.*
<j)06yyos, 01', 6 {(pdeyyofxaL), a sound, 4>iX6-Xo'yos, ov, b, Philologus, Rom, xvi.
Rom. X. 18 ; i Cor. xiv. 7.* I5-*
4)0ov€a), Co, 7](T(o, to envy (dat.), Gal. v. (|>iXo-v€iKia, as, 7], love of diS2)ute, con-
26.^ ten 1 'on, strife, Luke xxii. 24,*
(|>Oovos, ov, 0, envy. <|)iXd-v€tKOs, ov, strife-loving, contentio2is,
(|>6opd, as, T) {(pdeipcj), corruption, destruc- 1 Cor. xi. 16.*
tion, physical or spiritual. <|>iXo-^€via, as, 7/, hosjn'tc/lity, love of
<})idXT], 77J, 7], a bowl, broad and flat. strangers, Rom. xii. 13 ; Heb. xiii.
2.'"'

Rev.* <j>iX6-|€vos, ov, b, hospitable, i Tim. iii.

4>tX-d7a0os, cv, loving goodness (R.Y.) 2 ; Tit. i. 8 ; I Pet. iv. 9.*
or loving good men (A.V.), Tit. i. 8.* <j)iXo-Trpu>T€-uft), to love the first ^jZrtcc, to
*
<l>iX-a8€'X4)€ia, as, 17, Philadelphia, Rev. affect j>re-eminence, 3 John 9.
i. II, iii. 7.* ()>iXos, ov, either act. loving, or pass.
77,

(f>iX-a8£X<|>ia, aj, brotherly love, love of ij, dear in N.T. as subst,, a friend, a
;
Christian brethren, Rom, xii. 10 loved, coynjtanion or associate with (gen.
I Thess, iv, 9 ; Heb, xiii. i i Pet. ; or dat. ).
i. 22 ; 2 Pet, i. 7.* (|>iXo-(ro({>Ca, as, 17, 'p^^^^osophy, in X.T.
4>iX-d8€X(|>os, ov, loving the brethren, of the Jewish traditional theology.
°"^
I Pet, iii. 8.* Col. ii. 8.*
(|>iX-av8poS) 01', -^, loving one's husband, <}>iXd-<ro<|>os, 01', 6 (prop, adj.), vjisdom-
Tit, ii, 4,* loving, in IS^.T. of Greek philosophers,
4>i.X-av0p(i>^Ca, as, i], love of man, bene- Acts xvii. 18.*
volence, "philanthropy," Acts xxviii. <j>iXd-(rTop7os, ov, tenderly loving, kindly
2; Tit, iii, 4,* affectionate to (et's), Rom, xii, 10.*
524 VOCABDLARY. |^<|)lX<J-T«KVOS ^pQVpitA

<|>iXo-Tikv6§, ov^ child-hving, Tit. ii. 4.* ((>dpos, 01), {(f)ipu}), a tax on persons
<piXo-Ti|JLeo|JLUi., dep., to make a ovjxai, (distinguished from riXos, a tax an
thing ones ambition, to desire very tnerchandise), Luke xx. 22, xxiii. 2 ;
strongly (inf.), Rom. xv. 20; 2 Cor. Rom. xiii. 6, 7.*
V. 9 ; I Tliess. iv. 11.* <j)opTi^w, pass., perf., part., weipopTKr-
4)iXo-<j)povft)S, adv., in a friendly or fievos, to load, to Intrdcn, to a(fiict.
hospitable manner, courteously, Acts Matt. xi. 46.* 28 ; Luke xi.
xxviii. 7.* <|>opTicv, 01', TO, a burden, Matt. xi. 30 ;

<{)iX6-(j>p(i>v, friendly -minded,ov, hos- tJic freight of a ship, Acts xxvii. 10

pitable, courteous, i Pet. iii. 8 ("\V. H., (W. H.) ; th4!. burden of ceremonial
TaTreLv6(f)p(i}v).* observances, JMatt. xxiii. 4 Luke xi. ;

4>i|jL6a), (2, wa-w, to muzzle, I Cor. ix. 9 ; 46 tJie burden of responsibility, Gal.
;

to silence, Matt. xxii.

reduce to ; 34 vi. 5. Syn. 68.*
pass. reduced to silence, to be silent,
, to be <j>dpTos, ov, 6, load, a ship's cargo. Acts
Matt. xxii. 12 ; of a storm, Mark iv. xxvii. 10 (W. H. read ^opriov).*
39- ^opTovvciTos, ov (Lat. ), Fortunatus, I

^\iy(av, ovo%, 6, Phlegon, Rom. xvi. 14.* Cor. xvi. 17.*

4>Xo'Yitto, ^0 inflame, to fire with passion, <j)pa7€XXiov, £01', TO (Lat.), a scourge, a
James iii. 6.* whip, John ii. 15.*
ciXol, 0Xo7'j?, 7j, aflame. <}>pa76XXd&), cD, to flagellate, to scourge
<j)Xvap€w, a, to prate, to talk idly against v:i(h whips, Matt, xxvii. 26; Mark
any one (ace. ), 3 John 10.* XV. 15.*
c|)Xvapos, OP, prating ; as subst., an idle <|)pa7[ids, OV, 6, a hedge, Matt. xxi. 33 ;

talker, I Tim. v. 13.* Mark xii. i ; Luke xiv. 23 ; fig., 2mr-

4>oPepo$, d, 6v, fearful, dreadful, Heb. tition, Eph. ii. 14.*
X. 27, 31, xii. 21.* (f>pdt(i>, dcroj, to tell, exp)lain, interpret.
<{>oPe<o, Q>, rjo-i^, to make afraid, to terrify Matt. xiii. 36 (not W. H.), xv. 15.*
in N.T. only passive, to be afraid, to <{>pd<ra-a), ^w, 2nd aor,, pass., €(f)payqv,
be terrified, sometimes with cognate to stop, to stay, Rom. iii. 19 ; 2 Cor.
ace, Mark iv. 41 to fear {q,cc.). Matt. ; xi. 10 ; Heb. xi. 33.*
X. 26 to reverence, Markvi. 20 ; met,,
; <|)pcap, (ppearos, to, a jjit, a loell, John
to cherish piety towards (ace), Luke iv. II, 12.
i. 50. Syn. 33. <|)p€v-aTraTd<«), w, to deceive the mind, to
<}:opTiTpov (W. H., -9pov), ov, ro, a terrible impose upon (ace). Gal. vi. 3.*
*
sight, a jwrtent, Luke xxi. 1 1 . 4>p€v-aTrdT'r]S, ov, 6, a deceiver, impostor.
(}>6pos, 01', 6, ( I )fear, terror, alarm. Matt, Tit. i. 10.*
xiv. 26 {2) the object or cause of fear,
;
ij)pT)v, (ppevos, T) (lit., diaphragm), plur.,
Rom. xiii. 3 ; (3) reverence, awe, re- al (ppeves, the intellect, i Cor. xiv. 20.
spect ; (4) met. for piety, Rom. iii. 18; Syn. 55.*
I Pet. i. 17. Syn. 33. <|>pio-(rw, ^w, to shudder, James ii. 19.*
^oi^r], Phabe, Rom. xvi. i.*
7)s, i), 4>pov€fa), Ci, mind, to
Tjaoj {(ppifjv), (i) to
4>oiviKT], 77s, r/, Phenicc or Phenicia. think (abs.); (2) to think, judge (ace);
4)otvt^, LKos, 6, a palm-free, a ])alm branch, (3) to set the mind and affections on
John xii. 13 Rev. vii. 9.* ; (ace) (4) to observe, a time as sacred,
;

4^oivt|, i/coy, 17, a proper name, Phenice, Rom. xiv. 6; (5) with virep, to care for,
a city of Crete, Acts xxvii. 12.* Phil. iv. 10. Syn. 11.
<|)0V6vs, ^ctJ9, 6, a murderer, a man- ({>p6vT]^a, aros, to, thought, regard, care
slayer. for, Rom, viii. 6, 7, 27, vii. 27.*
fSov€va», (Tw, to murder, to kill. <j)pdvT|o-is, ecus, i), understanding, wisdom,
4»ovos, ov, 6, micrder, bloodthirstiness. Luke i. 17 ; Eph. i. 8.*
<j)op«a), u), i(Tb}, to bear about, to wear, (f>pdvifxos, OP, intelligent, wise, pruderit
Matt. xi. 8 ; John xix. 5 ; Rom. xiii. adv., -a)s,p7'ude?itly, only Luke xvi. 8.
4 ; Cor. XV. 49
I James ii. 3.* ;
^povrClb), to take care, to be anxious, inf.,
<j)dpov, ov, t6 (Latin), the forum (see Tit. iii. 8. Syn. 11.*
"ATTTTtoj), Acts xxviii. 15.* <|>povp^(», Q, to watch, to keep, as by f
 ; ;;

^pv^nrco) — <|)«Ticr(i<JsJ VOCABULARY. 525

military guard, lit., 2 Cor. xi. 32 ;

pensity, Eph.
ii. 3 ; (3) long-cbtahlished

fig.,Gal. iii. 23 (as if in custody) ;

custom, Cor. xi. 14
I (4) ^native ;

Phil. iv. 7 (in security) ; i Pet. i. 5 qualities, or properties, Gal. iv. 8.

(in reserve).* <[>v(r£ci)cris, ewj, i}, inflation of mind.
<|>pvdo-(r(i», ^w, to rage, as in a tumult, boasting, 2 Cor. xii. 20.*
Actsiv. 25 (LXX.).* <}>vT€£a, as, 7], a plant. Matt. xv. 13.*
<|>pv'Yavov, ov, t6, a di'y stick, a faggot <})VT6'Uft), c(j}, to j)lant, to set, abs. or with ,

stick, for burning, Acts xxviii. 3.* ace. ; fig., of introducing the Gospel,
<l»p\rY£a, as, i), Phrygia. 1 Cor. iii. 6, 8.

4>vY€\Xos (W. H., -eXos), ov, 6, Phygelhts, 4>vo, (xu), 2nd aor., pass., ecp&rjv ;
part.,
2 Tim. i. 15.* <pveis ; produce ; N. T. only intrans.,
to
<j)v^, 7js, 7j, flight, Matt. xxiv. 20 ; Mark to sjyring up, Heb. xii. 15 pass., to ;
*
xiii. 18 (W. H. omit).* groic, Luke viii. 6, 8.
<j>v\aKTi,ijs, T], (i) a keeping guard, a <|>a)X€d$, ov, 6, a burrow, a hole. Matt,
watching, Luke ii. 8 espec. of the ; viii. 20.*
four luatchcs into which tiie night <|>b)ve(D, cD, Tjcrw, (i) to sound, to utter a
was divided, Matt. xiv. 25, Luke xii. sound or cry espec. of cocks, to crow
;
38 ; (2) a guard, or men an guard, (2) to call to, to invite (ace); (3) to
a watch. Acts xii. 10 (3) a prison. ;
7iame, to denominate, ace. (nom. of
Matt. V. 25 ; (4) an imprisonment, 2 title), John xiii. 13.
Cor. vi. 5. ^oivr\, (i) a sound, musical or
ijs, T),

<|>vXaK£^(i), to imprison, to deliver into otherwise, freq. in this sense in Rev. ;

custodi/, Acts xxii. 19.* (2) an articulate sound, a voice, a cry ;

(j>vXaKTirjpui, u}p, TO, (phir. of adj.), a safe- (3) ft language, dialect, i Cor. xiv. 10.
guard, amulet, or charm, a phylactery, <|)<as, (puiTos, TO, contr. from cpdos (0a-, to
or slip of parchment, with Scripture show, whence (palvo}, (pv/^i-), (i) lit.,

words thereon, and worn by some of light;a saui'ce of light ;j)hu\, torches, Acts
the Jews as protective, Matt, xxiii. xvi. 29 ^ T(p 0a>Ti, jmhlicly, Matt.
;

5.* x. 27 ; (2) fig., light, as the symbol of

(|>vXa|, a/foj, 6, a keeper, sentinel. Acts truth, righteousness, purity, the ele-
V. 23, 19.*
xii. 6, ment or medium of the Divine life ;

<|)vXd(r(ra), ^w, {l)to keep guard, or watch so applied to Christ as the source of
over; (2) to keep in safety; (3) to this Divine life, John i. 4, 5 and to ;

observe, as a precept (4) mid., to keep;

God as Himself the Light, i John i.
oneself from (ace. or ciTro), Luke xii. 5. Syn. 65.
15 ; Acts xxi. 25. 4)a)o-Tiqp, ripos, 6, (i) ft luminary ,V\\W.. ii.

<|>vXt|, Tjs, 7}, [i) a tribe, of Israel ; (2) 15 (2)

;
brightness, splendour, Rev.
race, or people. Syn. 61. xxi. II. Syn. 65.*
<|)vXXov, ov, TO, a leaf. ov, light-bearing,
<|>(i)(r-<|>dpos, radiant
<|>vipa(Jia, inass kneaded into
aroj, rb, a the name
of the morning star, Fhos-
consistency, a lump, as of dough or pJiorus (Lat., Lucifer), the day-star,
clay, Rom. ix. 21, xi. 16 ; i Cor. v. 2 Pet. i. 19.*
6, 7 Gal. V. 9.*
;
(jxoTCivds (W. H., -Tivos), -f], ov, bright,
<{>v(rtKOs, T), ov, natural, as (i) according luminous, fill of light, lit., Matt,
to nature, Rom. i. 26, 27 ; (2) merely xvii. 5 fig.. Matt. vi. 22
; ; Luke xi.
animal, 2 Pet. ii. 12 adv.,, -ws, ;
34; 36.*
physically, naturally, Jude 10.* <|)WTLt«, icru, pass., perf., irecpdoTia-fxai ;

([>v<ri($o), w, to inflate, to puff up, i Cor. 1st aor., €(f>u)Tiadr]v ;

{i) to enlighten,
viii. I. ; pass., to he inflated, arrogant, to shed light upon, lit. or fig. (ace, but
I Cor. iv. 6, 18, 19, V. 2, xiii. 4 eVt in Rev. xxii. 5); (2) to bring to
Col. ii. 18.* light.
(|>vcris, ewj, 17, generally, nature; spe- 4>b>Ticr(ids> ov, 6, light, lustre, illumina-
cially, (i) natural birth, Gal. ii. 15 ;
tion, 2 Cor. iv. 4, 6.*
(2) natural disposition, instinct, pro-
526 VOCABULARY. [X — xcipo-iro It]tos

X. forgive (dat., pers. ace. thing), 2 Cor. ,

xii. 10 ; Eph. iv. 32 ; Col. ii. 13.

X, x> X^> ^^^j ^'''' guttural, the twenty- Xdpis, i-Tos, ace. X'^P''' andxcipi^'a (W. H.,
second letter. As a numeral, x' = 600 ; in Acts xxiv. 27; Jude 4), 17, (i) ob-
;^ = 600,000. jectively, agreeableness, acceptahlcncss,
\aip(ii, xap7;croyu.ai, 2nd aor., exo-fyqv, to Luke iv. 22 ; (2) subjectively, inclina-
rejoice, to he joyful, tohe glad ; imp., tion toicards, favour, kindness, liberal-
XaFpe, hail! farewell! inf.,
x^^P^'^^i ity, thanks. Luke i. 30, ii. 40, 52; Acts
Xaipeiv, greeting, Acts xv. 23. ii. 47, xxiv. 27; x^P'" ^X^'"? ^0 thank;
XdXal^a, as, rj, hail, Rev.* Xo-pi-f^ ^X"'' Trpjs, to be in favour icith ;

XoXdw, u), dao}, ist aor., pass., ex'^^'^- XctptJ', adverbially used, with gen. (lit.
0-^771', down, to loiver, Mark ii. 4 ;
to let with i)icUnation toicards), for the sake
Lukov. 4, 5 Acts ix. 25, xxvii. 17,
; of, on account of; espec. of the grace
30 J 2 Cor. xi. 33.* of God or of Christ, i.e., the spon-
XaXSatos, 01;, 6, « Chaldcean, Acts vii. taneous unrestrained kindness shown
4.* to men. Syn 41.
XoXcirds, 6v,[i)hard, diffirult, grievous,
77, Xdpio-jia, arcs, to, a gift from God to
2 Tim. i ; (2) harsh, fierce. Matt.
iii. man, Rom. i. 11, v. 15, 16, vi. 23, xi.
viii. 28.*^ 29, xii. 6 Cor. i. 7, vii. 7, xii. 4,
; I

yaXiv-aybiyioi, Q, to bridle, to curb, James 9, 28, 30, 31 2 Cor. i. II ; i Tim. iv.

;

i. 26, iii. 2.* 14 2 Tim. i. 6 ; I Pet. iv. 10.*

;

XaXivos, ov, 6, a bridle, a curh, James XapiToo), Co, to favour, bestow freely on
iii. 3 ; Rev. xiv. 20.* (ace), Eph. i. 6 ; pass., to be favoured,
XdXK€os, ous, Tj, ovv, oiiade of brass or Luke i. 28.*
copper. Rev. ix. 20.* Xappdv, T) (Heb.), Cliarran or Haran,
XciXK€vt, ews, 6, a worker in brass or Acts vii. 2, 4.*
copper, a coppersmith, 2 Tim. iv. 14.* XdpTTjs, 01', 6 (Lat., charta), j[?«^(?r, 2 John
*
XaXKT^ScGv, oVos, 6, a gen, including 1 2.
several varieties, a chalcedony. Rev. Xd(rp,a, aros, to, a gap, a gulf, " chasm,"
xxi. 19.* Luke xvi. 26.*
XoXkCov, ov, to, a brazen vessel, Mark vii. X€iXos, ovs, TO, a lip ; plur., language,
4-* dialect, I Cor. xiv. 21 tig., .ihrrc, ;

XoXKo-X^pdvov, 01', TO, meaning uncer- Heb. xi. 12.

tain, perhaps fine brass, burnished X6i}id^u), in pass., to be storm-beaten, or
brass, or frankincense {\l(3avos) of a tempest-tossed. Acts xxvii. 18.*
gold colour, Rev. i. 15, ii. 8.* X€i|JLappos, 01', 6, a storm-brook, a icintry
XclXkos, ov, 6, copper, brass ; money. torrent, John xviii. i.*
Xa|xaC, adv. on or tc the ground, John \a\i<i>v, u)uos, 6, (i) a storm^ a tempest,
*
ix. 6, xvii 6 foul iceather, Acts xxvii. 20 (2) ;

Xavadv, 7/, Canaan. winter, tJie rainy season, Matt. xxiv.

Xavavaios, at'a, aiov, Canaanitish, Matt. 20.
XV. 22.* Xctp, OS, a hand; met., for any exer-
i],

Xapd, as, joy, gladness;

7), a source of tion of power ; espec. in the phrases
juy, I Tliess. ii. 19, 20. the hand of God, the hand of the Lord
Xdpa-yiia, arcs, to, sculpture, Acts xvii. for help. Acts iv. 30, xi. 21 ; for
29 ; engraving, a stamp, a sign, Rev. puuishment, Heb. x. 31.
Syn. 56.* X€ip-a7w"y€a), tD, to lead by the hand, Acts
XapaKTT|p, vpo^, o, an impress, a perfect ix. 8, xxii. II.*
likeness, Heb. 1. 3. Syn. 56.* Xcip-a-ywYos, ov, one who leads by the 6,
Xdpa|, a.KO%, 6, a palisade, a mound for hand. Acts ii.* xiii.
besieging, xix. 43.* Luke X€ipo-7pa<|)ov,oi', T6(ha)id-irriting),abond;
mid., pass, fut.,
Xap^toH^oLi, iao/jiaL, dep., lig. of the Mosaic law. Col. ii. 14.*
,

Xapi(r^i7cro^ai, {i) to give freely, Luke X€ipo-TroiT]Tos, Of, made with hands,
vii. 21 I Cor. ii. 12 ; (2) to show
; Mark xiv. 58 : Acts vii. 48, xvii. 24;
favour to (dat.), Gal. iii. 18; (3) to Eph. ii. II ; Heb. ix. 11, 24.*
 ;

XCipO-TOV^W — XP^^^I^*] VOCABULARY. 527

\€i,po-TOV€ft), w (retVo;), to elect hy stretching Xopds, ou, 6, a dance with singing,

out the hand, to choose hy "'ote, to appopit, "chorus," plur., Luke xv. 25,*
Acts xiv. 23 ; 2 Cor. viii. 19.* Xoprdtw, to feed, to satisfy with (gen. or
yjiipoiv, ov, coinpar. of KaKos (which see), diro).
worse, ^Slatt. xii. 45 ; icorse, severer, XopTd<rp,a, aros, to, food, sustenance.
Heb. X. 29 ; els to x^^po'', icorse, Mark Acts vii. II.*
V. 26, i-jrl rb x^'P<"'j icorse and worse, XopTos, ov, 6, grass, herbage, ^latt. vi.
2 Thii. iii. 13. 30 springing grain, Matt. xiii. 26.
;

XepouPtp, (W. H., Xepov^eiv), HebreAV Xov^ds, a, 6, Chuza, Luke viii. 3.*
phnal of cherub, the cherubim, the Xovs, 06s, 6, ace. xo^^i dust, ]\larkvi. 11
gokleii lisjures on the mercy-seat, Rev. xviii. 19.*
Heb. ix. 5> Xpdop.ai, QifxaL, xp^o'^at, dep. (prop. mid.
XTjpa, as, i), a widow. of XP°'-^)^ io use (dat.), to make use of
v0€s (AV. H. ix&^s), adv., yesterday. to treat. Acts xxvii. 3 ; 2 Cor. xiii. 10
XtXt-apxos, ov, 6, a commander of a (dat. om.).
thousand men, a military tribune. Acts Xpdwjor KLXPVP-h XPM<^, fo lend, Lukexi.
xxi.-xxv.
XiXtds, ciSos. 7], a thousand (subst.). Xpe^a, as, i], (i) use, necessity, need, plur.,
vlXioi, ai, a, a thmisand (adj.). necessities ; ^x^ XP^'-^^i to need; (2)
Xios, 01', i], Chios, Acts xx. 15.* business, Acts vi, 3.
XiTwv, wj/oj, 6, a vest, an inner garment. Xp€-w<})€tX€'TT]S (W. H., xpf-o0'Xfr77s), ov,
Syn. 66. 6, a debtor, Luke vii. 41, xvi. 5.*
X^wv, ovos, 7], snoiv, ^latt. xxviii. 3 ; XPTJ, irapers., it needs, it behoves (ace.

Mark (W. H. omit) Rev. i. 14.*

ix. 3 ; and inf. ), James
Syn. 12.* iii. 10.
X^afivs, vdos, rj, a cloak worn by Roman XPTlt«5 io have need
need (gen. ). of, to
officers and magistrates, most fre- XpTifia, aros, to, "a thing of use,"
quently scarlet, Matt, xxvii. 28, 31.* money, sing., only Acts iv. 2>7 plur., ;

xXevdtw, to )nocl-, scoff' (ahs.). Acts ii. 13 riches, wealth.

(W. H., StaxXei'd^w), xvii. 32.* XpT]|iaTi^(i), iau}, to transact business;
xXiapds, d, ov, icann, lukewarm, Rev. hence, {1) an aracle, to give a
to utter
iii. 16.* Divine teaming, Heb. xii. 25; pass.,
XXoT], 77s, Chloe, I Cor. i. 11.* to receive a Divine response, he warned
5(^Xcopds, ct, ov, {i) green, verdant; Mark of God, Matt. ii. 12, 22 Luke ii. 26 ; ;

vi. 39 Rev. ; viii. 7, ix. 4 ; (2) j^nle. Acts X. 22 ; Heb. viii. 5, xi. 7 ; (2) to
Rev. vi. 8.* bear or take a na7ne, to be called.
x|r', six hundred and sixty-six. Rev. xiii. Acts xi. 26 ; Rom. vii. 3.*
18 (W. H. write in full).* XpTHiaTio-fJids, ov, 6, an oracle, Rom.
j^oiKos, Vi ov, earthy, made of earth, i xi. 4.*
Cor. XV. 47-49.* Xpt]<ri|ios, 77, ov, useful, 2^rof table, 2 Tim.
)(^oivi|,iKos, i], a cluenix, measure con- ii. 14.*
taining two sextarii (see ^ear-qs), Rev. XpTJtris, use, manner of
eojs,
i], using,
vi. 6.* Rom. 26, 27.*
i.

)(^oipos, 01',6, cc pig ; plur., sivine. XpTio-Tcvojiai, dcp., to he kind, i Cor.

)(jo\a.o), Q, to be angry, to be incensed at xiii. 4,*
(dat.), John vii. 23.* XpTicrTO-Xo7ia, as, 17, a kind address; in
%p\i\, Tjs, (i) gall, fig.,
23 (2) Acts viii. : a bad sense, fair sjjcaking, Rom. xvi.
bitter herbs, such as wormwood, Matt, 18.*
xxvii. 34.* XpT]orTds, T], ov, useful, good, gentle,
)(dos, see xoi^^- ki)id ; TO xp'H^^Tov, goodness, kindness,
Xopa^tv (W. H., Xopa^eiv), ij, Chorazin, Syn. 21.
Matt. xi. 2113.* ; Luke x. XpTicTTOTTis, TT^ros, T}, (i) goodncss, gene-
\op-T]yi<a, C){ayui) (properly, to supply or rally, Rom. iii. 12 ; (2) specially,
furnish a chorus for the Gk. games), benignity, gentleness.
hence, to furnish, to supply, to give, Xpio-fjia, aros to, an anointing, an
2 Cor. ix. 10; I Pet. iv. 11.* unction, i John ii, 20, 27.*
528 VOCABULARY. [XpwTTidvds — 4''n^*4**^**

XpicTidvos, a Christian, Acts xi.

ou, 6, Xwp^s, adv., separately, by itself, only
26, xxvi. Pet. iv. 16.*
28 ; I John XX. 7 ; as prep. gov. gen. , apart
Xpio-Tos, ov, 6 (prop, verbal, adj. from from, ivithout, John xv. 5 Rom. iii. ;

Xptw), the Anointed, the Messiah, the
Christ (see § 217, e).
XpCw, aw, to anoint, to consecrate by
anointing, as Jesus, the Christ, Luke
iv. 18 ; Acts iv. 27, x. 38 Heb. i. 9
21 ; besides, exclusive of. Matt. xiv. 21.
Xcopos, OV, 6 (Latin, " Caurus "), tlie
N. JF. ^vind ; met., of that quarter of
the heavens. Acts xxvii. 12.*
; ;

applied also to Christians, 2 Cor. i.

21. Syn. 18.* ^.
\^oviX,<a, to delay, to defer, to tarry. Matt.
xxiv. 48, XXV. 5 ; Luke i. 21, xii. 45 ; ^, \|/, \(/i, psi, ps, the twenty-third letter.
Heb. x. 37.* As a numeral, = '/oo; ^^^ = 700,000.
\l/'

Xpovos, ov, (i) time, generally; (2) a \|/dXXft), i^aXcD, to chant, accom-
to sing,
particular time, or season. Matt. ii. 7 ; panied with instruments, to sing
Acts i. 7. Syn. 64. psalms, Rom. xv. 9 i Cor. xiv. 15 ; ;

Xpovo-TptPe'ft), Q, to spend time^ to luear Eph. V. 19; James V. 13.*

aicay time, Acts xx. 16.* \}/aX|x6s, OV, a psalm, a song of praise ;
Xpvcrcos, ov$, T), ovv, golden. ])lur., the book of Psahns in the Old
Xpvo-iov, ov, TO (dim. of xP^'^'^^)y ^ piece Testament, tlie Hagiograplm, or divi-
of gold, gold, a golden ornament. sion of the Scriptures in which this
\pv<ro-8aKTvXios, ov, gold-ringed on the book stands first, Luke xxiv. 44.
fingers, James ii. 2.* Syn. 48.
Xpvcrd-XiOos, ov, 6, a golden stone, a gem \{/ev8-d8eX<|>os, ov, 6, a false brother, a
of a bright yellow colour, " a chry- inetcnded Christian, 2 Cor. xi. 26
solite," or topaz, Rev. xxi. 20.* Gal. ii. 4.*
Xpv(r6-Trpa<ros, 01;, 6, a gem, of a greenish, il/euS-airoo-ToXos, ou, 6, a false or ^Jrc-
golden colour, "a chrysoprase," Rev. tended apostle, 2 Cor. xi. 13.*
xxi. 20.* \{/ev8T|s, ^s, false, deceiving, lying. Acts vi.
Xpvo-os, ov, anything made of
6, gold, 13 ; Rev. xxi. 8.*
ii, 2,
gold, gold coin, or money. \|/€v8o-8i8d(rKaXos, ov, a false teacher, a
Xpvcrott), w, to deck with gold, to gild, teacher of false doctrines, 2 Pet. ii. i.*
Rev, xvii. 4, xviii. 16.* \|f6v8o-X5"YOs, ov, false-speakiiuj, i Tim.
Xpws, xp^'^^^i o> i^^e *^^^i niet., the * iv. 2.*
body. Acts xix. 12.* v)/€ii8o|iai, dep. , aofxai, 1st aor., exf/evcrdfiTjv
XwXos, rj, ov, laiyie, crippled in the feet. to deceive, to lie, to speak falsely, to lie
Xwpa, as, Tj, {i) a country, or region ; (2) to (ace. ), Acts v. 3.
the land, opposed to the sea ; (3) the i}/ev8o-)j.dpTvp, or -us, vpo^, 6, a false wit-
country, dist. from town ; (4) plur. ness, Matt. xxvi. 60; Cor. xv. 15,* I

fields, John iv. 35. \l;€v8o-|xapT\;p€(<>, w, to bear false witness.

X(*>p€b), Q), make room ; hence, (i)
lit., to \|/€v8o-(iapTvpta, as, 7/, false testimony.
tomake room for, receive, contain. Matt. Matt, XV. 19, xxvi. 59.*
xix. II, 12; John ii. 6, xxi. 25; 2 ^€u8o-'n'po<|)TiTT]S, ov, 6, a false prophet,
Cor. vii. 2 ; impers., to he room for, one who in God's name teaches what
Mark ii. 2 (2) to make room by de-
; is false.
parting, to go. Matt. xv. ij to have , falsehood, lying, a lie.
\j/£v8os, ovs, TO,
free course, John viii. 37 (see R.V. and ov, 6, a false Christ, a
\j/€v86-xp<'0"Tos,
marg. come, 2 Pet. iii. 9.*
) ; to pretended Messiah, ]\Iatt. xxiv. 24.
\(apLX,(a, to put apart, to separate.
iau}, x)/cv8a). See xl/evdofxai.
Matt. xix. 6 ; mid. (ist aor. pass.), to \i/£v8-wvv[ios, ov, falsely named, falsely
separate oneself, to depart, to go away called, I Tim. vi.20.*
(diro or e/c), Acts i. 4, xviii. I. \|/€V(ru,a, aros, to, falsehood, perfidy, Rom.
X'jipiov, ov, TO, a place, afield, a farm, a iii. 7.*
possessio7i ; plur. ,
possessions, Acts iv. \|/€v<rTT]s, ou, 6, a deceiver, liar.
34, \|/7]Xa({>da), Lo, touch, to feel, to handh
 ;; ;

4't]<j>t^<o — aJc-Tcl VOCABULARY. 529

(acc), Luke xxiv. 39 ; Heb. xii. 18 ;

simple address, and once in admira-
I Jolin i. I ; to feci after, as persons tion, Rom. xi. 33.
blind, or in the dark, tig., Acts xvii. 'fiptjS, 6, Obed, Matt. i. 5 ; Luke iii.

27. Syn. 7.*

t|n]4>£^(u, tVw, to reckon, to compute, Luke (iSc, adv., of place, hither, here. So in
*
xiv. 28 ; Rev. xiii. 1 8. this life, Heb. xiii. 14 herein, in this ;

>|rf](|>os, 01', 7), a small stone, a pebble, matter, Rev. xiii. 10 wSe ^ cD5e, here ;

used as a counter, and for voting cr there, Matt. xxiv. 23.

hence, a vote, Acts xxvi. 10 ; a token, cuStj, 77 j, t), an ode, a song, a hymn.
Rev. ii, 17.* Syn. 48.
()/i6vpio-[i6s, ov, 6, a whisperi7ig, a detrac- wSiv, Ivos, 7), the pain of childbirth, acute
20.*
tion, 2 Cor. xii. jjain, severe calamity. Matt. xxiv. 8 ;

i|/i0vpi<mrjs, ov, a whisperer, a slan- 6, Mark xiii. 8 ; Acts ii. 24 ; i Thess.

derer, a detractor, Rom. i. 30.* V. 3.*
ilri^Cov, 01', TO, a crumb. Matt. xv. 27 ; a>8(v(u, i.vC}, to be in th€ throes, or pains of
Mark \\i. 28; Luke xvi. 21 (W. H. childbirth, Rev. xii. 2 ; tig., Gal. iv.
omit).* 19, 27.*
4/vxTJ, Tjs, 77, (i) the vital breath, the wjios, 01;, 6, a shmdder, Matt, xxiii. 4
animal of animals, Rev. viii. 9,
life, Luke XV. 5.
xvi. 3, elsewhere only of man (2) ;
(dV€0)iai, oCfJLttt, TJaofxai, to buy (gen. of
the human soul, as distinguished from price), Acts vii. 16.
the body ; (3) the soul as the seat of wov (W. H., (fwV), ov, TO, an egg, Luke
the affections, the will, etc. (4) the ;
xii. 12.*
self (like Heb.), Matt. x. 39; (5) a copa, as, 7), (i) a definite space of time,
human person, an v.idividual. Synn. a season ; (2) an hmir ; (3) the par-
54, 55. ticular time for anything, Luke xiv.
^jru^^iKos, 77, 6v, animal, natural, sensual, 17 Matt. xxvi. 45.
;

I Cor. ii. 14, XV. 44, 46 ; James iii. (opaios, ai-o., aiov, fair, comely, beautiful,
15 ; Jude 19.* Matt, xxiii. 27 ; Acts iii. 2, 10 ; Rom.
t)rO)(os, CVS, TO, cold. X. 15.*
»|rux^p6s, d, 6v, cold, cool. Matt. x. 42, dep., mid., to roar, to hoicl, as
tt>pvo(j.ai,

(sc, vdaros) ; tig., cold-hearted, Rev. a beast, i Pet. v. 8.*

iii. 15, 16.* a>Si an adv. of comparison, as, like as,
xjru)^ft), 2nd fut. pass., xj/vyijaofxai, to cool about, as it were, according as, 2 Pet.
pass., tig., to be cooled, to graio cold. i.
3 ; to wit, 2 Cor. v. 19 ; hoic, Luke
Matt. xxiv. 12.* viii. 47 ; hmc I Rom. x. 15 ; as particle
)]/(Dp.Ct(i>,to feed, Rom. xii. 20 ; to spend of time, when, ichilst, as soon as; as
in feeding, i Cor. xiii. 3.* consecutive particle, so that (inf. ), Acts
t|/(i>p.£ov, lov, a bit, a morsel, John xiii. XX. 24 ; ws ^TTOs diretv, so to speak,
26-30.* Heb. vii. 9.
xj/wX^o), to ruh, to break in pieces^ as ears 'no-awd, interj., Hosanna ! (Heb., Ps.
of corn, Luke vi. i.* cxviii. 25) Save now ! a word of joyful
acclamation, Matt. xxi. 9, 13; Mark
xi. 9, 10 ; John xii. 13.*
«<r-avTws, adv. , in the same way, in like
a manner as, likeicise.
(o<r-c£, adv. , as if, as though like, as, with
numerals, about.
fl, CO, w p-^ci, omega, 0, the twenty- *12o-T]€, 6, Hosea, Rom. ix. 25.*

fourth letter. As a numeral, w' = oio-.-rrep, adv., just as, as, Matt. xii. 40 ;

800 ;
,w = 800, cxx). T^'ft, a name of I Cor. viii. 5.
the Eternal (cf. under 'A), Rev. i. 8, adv., just as if, as it werc^
ttKT-irep-cC,
II (W. H. omit), xxi. 6, xxii. 13. I Cor. XV. 8.*
w, iiiterj., used before the vocative where «<r-T6, conj., so that (inf., see
f 391),
the appeal is emphatic ; sometimes in therefore^
530 VOCABULARY. [urdpiov — w4>Ai|xos

wTctpiov, iov, TO (dim, of oSj; cf. TratSdptov), w({>eX^ci>, w, ?]cra>, <o profit, to benefit, to
(III car, Mark xiv.
47 (W. H.) ; Jolm help (ace, also ace. of definition) ;

xviii. 10 (W. H.).* pass., to be profited, to have advantage.

wTiov, iov, TO (dim. of ads,an car), an Matt. xvi. 26.
ear. Matt. xxvi. 51 ; Luke xxii. 51;
b)(}>£Xi(jLos, ov, pi^ofitable, beneficial, dat.
John xviii. 26 ; see also the passages of pers., Tit. iii. 8 ; tt/m's (ace), of
*
under wTapiov (rec. ). obj., I Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim, iii,
«<|>e'X€ia, aj, r/, profit, advantage^ gain, 16.*
Kom. ill. 1; Jud3 16,^'
 ;

631

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
[The references are to the Pages, not to the Sections.
For convenience, each letter in Greek is placed under the corresponding one in English.
K and X are under C $, ^, with n, under P and 0, with T, under T.]
; ;

Ablation, by the genitive . .210 of relation, 220; with infinitive, 326;

Abstract nouns, in connection with the adverbially used, 269 comparative, ;

article, 183 ; in the plural number, with genitive . .211 . .

quality
Accents, the, 7.
.....
202 ; in the genitive, to express
213
Accentuation of the
Adverbs, the cases of nouns as, 135
derivative, 136; negative, 139, 338;
in composition, 151 ; preceded by
several classes of words, and of the article, 175 ; of time, with genitive,
forms of declension and conjugation, 217 ; used as prepositions, 138, 338 ;

under the proper sections. adverbs after f x^, 292 adverbial ;

Accessory clauses .172 . . . phrases and combinations, 241, 249,

Accessory circumstance, by dative, 226 ; 269, 2Z7
by participle . . . -332 Adversative conjunction, 5e 344 . ,

Accusative, like nominative in neuter Affirmative answers 308 . . .

nouns, 16 ; its general senses, 229 Agent, after passive verbs, 295 by ;

......
;

case of the object, 15, 229 ; subject of UTTO, 253 ; apparently expressed by
the infinitive verb, 232, 325 double ; dative 227
accusative (nearer and remoter ob- Alexander's conquests, their efiect on
ject), 231 ; accusative, Avitli passive language 155
verbs, 295 cognate accusative, 230
; ;
Alexandrian, or compound aorist 97 .

accusative of definition, 231 ; ad- Alexandrian version of Old Testa-

verbial, 135 in elliptical construc-
; ment . . . . . .156
tions, 233 accusative of the infinitive
; Alford, Dean, 191, 209, 219, 272, 273,
verb, 327. For other uses of tlie case,
see 229, sg., and under F rep osit ions. .....
Alliteration
297,305,311,338,344,347
354
" Accusative middle "
Active voice, the, 55, 291
292
not always
.

;
. .

word ......
Alphabet, the Greek, i ; meaning of the
2

middle .....
distinguishaye in sense from the

Adjectives, in three forms, 34

293
of two ;
Also, even,
Alternative
tions
by

......
/cai .

expressions,
288
.

290
.

;
.341
ques-

terminations, 35 ; comparison of, 40 ; Angus's "Handbook of the English

classes of, 146 agreement of, with
; Language," 55, 218; "Bible Hand-
substantive, 267
substantives, 350
stantive, 267
usually placed after
;

with omitted sub-

with several substan-
;
;
book " .

Anacolouthon ....
. .

Annexation, conjunctions of
204
336, 352
340
. .

.
.

tives, 269 adjective, with article,

; Antecedent, attraction of the, 28^ ;

176, 268; of plenty, etc., with geni- omission of the .

.317 . .

tive, 210; of worthiness, etc., with

genitive, 220 ; adjective, with genitive
Antithesis,
omitted .....
conjunctions of, 342
348
;
532 ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

Aorist, the first and second generally d-, togetherin composition . 151 •

identical in meaning, 8i ; first, act, dyaOds, comparison of 42 . . •

and mid., 96; first and second, d7d7r77, with genitive in different rela-
pass., 98; second, 81, 94; aorists tions . . . . .219 .

of deponent verbs, 100 force of the ; d77AXa7, conjugated . . .87

aorist, 303 distinguished from im-
; dye, dyw/xeVf intransitive. . . 292
perfect, 299 ; distinguished from per- dyvvfjLL, augment of , . . .97
fect, 304 ; aorist imperative, 310 ;
dyu, conjugated . . .78, 94
subjunctive (and optative), 303, 311, d8€\(p6sy ellipsis of . . . .213
312 ; as future perfect, 318 ; infinitive, 957;s (pSoLi, with et's) . . . . 213
324 ;
participle, 334 ; indicative, with AdcKos, with infinitive . . . 326
dv, in conditional sentences . . 318 -dfoj, verbs in . . » , .148
Apiece, how expressed in Greek
Apocalypse, grammatical anomalies
.

156, 352
242
in,
atSws, declined
al/xa, plural
-aivw, verbs in
..... .

.
,

.
,

.
.27
.148
I9

Apodosis 317 aipeoj, defective . . . .102

Aposiopesis
Apostrophe, the
.

Apposition, 170; by genitive

....
. . .

.
•

.
35^

214
3
atpio, conjugated
aiffxpos, comparison of
alcby, declined.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.87
.41'
-25
Appropriative middle . . .
293 alQves, plural use of . . . 203
Aramaean dialect, 155 words in ; the oLKovu, future of, 96 ;
perfect, 99 ; with
New Testament . . . .156 genitive 208
Aratus (or Cleanthes), quoted by St. aX-Qd-qs, iSf declined. . . -39
Paul 355 d\\d 342
Arrangement of words . . -350 dXXos and erepos, 54 ; with article . 194
Article, the, 15 ; declined, 16 ; syntax afxapravb) . . . .
-93
of the, 174, sq. ; originally a demon- dy, potential with optative, 314 ; with
strative pronoun, 174 always signi- ; relatives or conjunctions, requires sub-
ficant, 178 ; often neglected in E.V., junctive, 314 ; in conditional sen-
181 with the Divine names, 186
;

position of article, 195 ; repetition of

the, 196 ; article in enumerations,
;

dpd. ......
tences, with indicative

dvar^Wio, transitive use of

. 319

.
•

.291
242

198 ; omission of the, 199 article ; dvTfp, declined. . . . .27

with infinitive, 326 ; with parti- &v6po)iros, declined . . . .18
ciples
Aspirate, the .....
Association, by dative . . 223
.
334
3
dyd' uv
dvoiyo}, augment of
236 with infinitive
Slvt'i, :
. . .

.
236, 347
.98
. 328
Asyndeton 348 d|ios, with genitive, 220 ; with infini-
Attic Greek contrasted with that of tive 327
the New Testament . . .156 diro, 237 ; and 262 ; and
did, e/c, 262;

Attic augment . . . 94, 97 adverbial phrases with . -337

Attic future 95 d-rrodidcj/xi, active and middle . . 294
Attraction, of the relative to the pre- 'AttoXXwj, declined . . . .24
dicate, 284 ; to the antecedent,
284 ; of the antecedent to the rela-
tive 285
dpaye
"Aparp, declined
......
&pa and dpa, and ovv

.
.

.
.

.
.

.26
346
346

Attributive use of participles, 330, 334 dpKio}, future of . . . '95

Augment, 58 ; Attic or double, 94, 97 ; dpas 32
irregularities in
Augustus, in Latin and Greek.
Author, or source, by genitive
. . .

.
.98
.

.
163
208
dpTL-, incomposition
&PXV^, adverbial
av^dyw, transitive use of
.... .

.
.

.
•

.291
15^
337

avTos, T), 6, declined, 49 used for third ;

A- declension, the (first) . 19 personal pronoun, 277 ; emphatic

d^, intensive in composition 151 nominative, 166 meaning self, 278
; ;

d-, negative in composition with ai'ticle, the samc^ 192 ; coniple-

 ;

ALPHABETICAL tSD^t 533

mentary
rpiTos
aiVou
....
to the relative,

and avrov
286; avTos
276
50
Conimands by future tense
Common gender
.

....
301

Comparative in -cov, paradigm, 41 ; com-

7
.

a.<pir)ixiy conjugated . . 118 parative with genitive, 211, 270;

acpiKv^o/xai • 93 elliptical, 271 ; emphatic comparative,
future of
d<popi^o}^ . . 96 42, 272 ; comparative notion, by pre-
-dw, verbs in . . 148 positions . . . . .271
Comparison of adjectives. . . 40
Comparisons, Kai in . . . 342
B. Complements of the simple sentence 171
Completeness, marked by aorist 305 .

Benefit or injury, by dative . . 225 Compound imperfect, 301 ; future, 302 ;

Bengel, Dr. J. A 209 perfect and pluperfect . . . 330
Both ...and, how
Breathings, the
Burgon, Rev. J. "\V.,
....
ex\)Tesii(id .

" Inspiration and

.
340
2
Compound relative
Compound sentences
Compound words
.

.
.

.
.

.
-53
172, 173
.150
Interpretation " . . 204
. .
Concessive use of participles 333 . .

Concord, the first, 167 ; the second,

^aiuu) . . . .93. 94 .
170, 267 the third
; 283 . . .

/3d\\w, transposition of stem-letters in, 98 Concord, rational. See S}Tiesis.

pairTKTfiQv Si8axv^ . . • 215 .
Conditional sentences .317, 343 .

^airrl^oj, future of . . . .96 Conditional use of participles 333 . .

^acriXevs, declined . . . .28 Conjugations of verbs, the, 58 ; the

ment ......
(iacriXevu, transitive in the Old Testa-
291
second conjugation .104
Conj mictions, or pronominal adverlis,
. .

^ouXei/o;,
digm
/3ou\o/iat,
......
why
augment
not

of
chosen

.
as

.
a para-

'97
61
137 ; the conjunctions classified, 140 ;
with &v followed by subjunctive, 314
syntax of the ....
340
/SoOy, declined . . . . .29 Consonants, division of, 4 ; changes in,
^pex^t. (called impersonal), true subject
5, 6 ; changes in mute verbs 73 .

of 167 Constructio ad sensum. See Synesis.

Constructio praegnans, 241, 245, 255, 256,
C. 257, 264
Constructions, unusual, for emphasis, 351
** Canaanite," surname of Simon 161 . Contracted substantives, 23 ; adjectives,
.44
Cardinal numbers, the
Cases of nouns, 1 5, 234
prepositions, 131, 234
as used vrith
cases of the
.

;
.
35 ; pure verbs
Contraction of vowels
Contrast, emphatic, by negative
71, sq.
.

3
339
.

... .

infinitive, 326 case-endings, old, with

; Copula, the, 164 ; omission of .165
adverbial force -135
. . . Copulative verbs .171
. . .

Causal conjunctions, 347 ; omitted 351 . Coronis, the . . , . 4, 51

Causal use of participles
Causal middle
Causative verbs
....
333
293
.148
.
.

.
.

.
.

Crasis
Creeds,
......
CoiTelative pronouns, 54; adverbs

rhythmical, in the
137
4
early
.

Cause or motive by dative 226 . . church 354

Chiasmus 355 Customary actions by imperfect tense.
Cities, plural names of . . .186 298
Cleanthes (or Aratus), quoted by St.
Paul
Climax, the rising
355
342.... -K-,
K.T.X.
in the first aorist
.
114
10
Coins, Latin names of .158
Coins, measures, etc., with numerals 276
Collective nouns, with plural adjective,
. .

Kadij/jLat
Kad' vrep^oXriv
....
Kadapi^u), future

ets VTrepfioX^v
96
"5
264
170; with plural verb .168 . . Kal, 340 with re, 340 with
; ; 5^, 344;
Combination of consonants 5 . . Kai yap, 348 ; Kai omitted .
34»
hu ALPHABETICAL IN^DEX.

Kaicrap, Csesar, to Avliom applied in the Declensions, of substantives, the three,

New Testament . . . .163 15 similarity of the first and second,
;

Kaloj, stem and fntnic . . .96 19; nouns of variable 32 . . .

KaKo^, comparison of . . .42 Defective verbs ..101 . .

KaXeo), fiitnre of, 95 ; transposition of Delil)erative subjunctive .312 . .

stem-letters . . . .98 Demonstrative pronouns, 51, 281 with ;

Ka\6s, comparison of
KCL/jLVLo, stem and second
Kara, 248, sq.; sometimes supposed with
.

aorist.
. -41
.
93 clause ......
the article, 191 ; as equivalent to a

Dependent clauses . .
282
.314 .

accusative of dpfinition, 231 ; adverbial Deponent verbs 75? imte, 100

. •

combinations with . . .
337 Design, expressed by genitive of infini-

KaTLOTCpa
KeifxaL
with genitive
K:aT7;7opea;,

.
....
. .
.

.
.

.
.210
42? 214
'115
tive,
328.
Derivation
327

.....
; by
See Intentional.
infinitive with cis, Trpo's,

149
Kepdvvvixi
/ce'pas, K'peas,
KepSaivco, future
.

and
.

stems and declension of

.

first aorist
.

of
.125

.
32
97
De AVette,
Diaeresis
Difficulties
...... Dr

of interpretation, 173, 218

231
4

KTipv^, declined . . . .26 Digamma, the, 44 in substantives, 31

; ;

KXaid}, stem and future . , .96 in verbs, 96. See under Y.

/cXdo), future . . . . -95 Diminutives . .17 . . .

Ko/jLL^u}, future . . . . .96 Diphthongs, 2 ; regularly long, but often

KopevvvpLL . . . . '125 counted short for accentuation, 20,
Kpefxafxai
Kpivu),
tives,
conjugated, 87
.

and compounds
.

;
.

its
.

root,
.
-US
deriva-
-153
Disjunctives, the ....
345
Distributive numerals, 47 pronouns, 54 ;
22, 97

Kpipo/jLai, middle force of . . . 294 Divine names, with the article 186 .

KvpLos, with the article . . . 187 Donaldson, Dr. 207, 222, 229, 232
.

Kvcjv, irregular . . . •32 Double names of persons .161 .

Dress, Latin names of, in the New Testa-

Xaipeiv, as imperative . . . 329 ment 159
XaXao}, future . . . .
•95 Dual number, the . . . -15
Xet'p, omitted with adjective . . 267
X^w, stem, future, and aorist . . 96 baKvw, stem .
93
Xpdo/xaL, future of, 95 governs ;
dative, bavel'^ijo, active and middle 294

XPV
Xptcrros,
...
with article
.

.
.

.
.101
.188
227 5e, conjunction of antithesis
5e?, impersonal
deiKvv/jiL, conjugated
344
lOI
121
Xpvaovs {eos), tj, ovv, declined . . 35 devrepoTrpcoTOS 153
drjXooi}, conjugated 72
.

Slo., 245 and e/c, 261 and diro 261 a.nd

; ;

D. els, 262 and iu, 262 ; and irepi, 265

; ;

with genitive and accusat ve distin-

Dative case, the (singular always in -i), guished 247
16; its general senses, 15, 222; obso- diddaKOj, future
lete forms of, as adverbs, 135 dative ; 5i'5w/xi, conjugated .

of association, 223
223 ; of reference, 225
226 of time, 228
;
of transmission,
of accessory,
may be inter-
;

;
;
diKaios, aia, atof,
AtOTreTT^s
Atos, Aia
.... declined

clianged with h (dat.), 263 with eh ; dioTi, relative causal particle

(ace), 264; usually placed after doKeX, impersonal
governing word
" Dative middle "
Dativus commodi vel incommodi
-350
293
225
....
. . .

.
doK^o),
do^a, declined
dvpa/xaL
future of

....
D atli of Christ, prepositions respecting, Si'varos, Avith infinitive .

252, 265 5vyUf stem and second iiorist

 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 535

Svo, declined . . , . '45 etytii, conjugated, 116; as copula, 165;

8v(T-, in composition
5(j}5€Kd(pv\op . .
.

.
.

.
.152
• 153
as predicate, 165
with dative ....
with genitive, 217;
;

223
dwfia (or oIkos, ot/ct'a), ellipsis of .213 el/it,

dirov
as,
to (JO
......
compared with ev and 5td,
242 ;
. . . . '117
102

262, 263 with irpbs, 265 with eTrt,

; ;
E.
264 with simple dative, 264 with
; ;

infinitive, 328 ; adverbial combina-

Ecbatic and fin'*.] particles

Elision of voAvels
321, 328
4
EUicott, Bishop, 193, 198, 211, 220, 230,
.... .

e?s,
tions
fjila,declined, 44
pronoun, 275 for irpwros
.

as indefinite
ev,
275
.

;
. .

;
•

.
,
-^

.
337

234, 278, 298, 304, 321, 329, 339, 348 €K, ef, 237 ; compared with 261 ; did,
Ellipsis, ^vitll nominative, 206 ; -with with diro, 262 ; adverbial combina-
accnsative, 233 ; of words of kindred
before genitive, 212 of substantives,
with adjective, 267 ; of measures and
; etre
tions

(EKacxTos,
. . .

anarthrous
eiVe
.192
..... . .
337
345

coins, with numerals, 276 of the ;

ineLvos, with article, 191 refers to ;

antecedent, with relative, 285 with ; remoter antecedent, 281 may refer ;

the subjunctive, 311 with the opta-

tive, 313 ; before iva
Elliptical questions, 308
.312
construc-
;

;
.
to the nearer, 282 ; the emphatic
demonstrative
€Kd>v, eKovaa, €k6v, declined
28c
37
.... . .

tions . , . . . -351 eXawoj, stem and future . .

-93
Emphasis, by particles, 141 l)y inser- ;
e'Xaxto-rorepoj, double comparative 43 .

tion of pronominal subject, 166 by ;

eXeos, of variable declension 32 . .

the article, 180 by the order of ; eXevdepos, with dative, 226 ; with infini-
words, 350 by repetition or pleon-
;
five 326
asm" 352 eXTTi'fw, future of . . . .96
Emphatic comparison of adjectives, 42 ;
tfxaiTov, -r)s, declined . . -5°
verbs, 148 indefinite pronoun, 2S9 iu, compared Avith eis, did, 262,
;
;
239 ;

negatives, 302, 312 future 303 ; .

264 interchanged with dative, 263 j
;

Enclitics
English rendering of Greek letters
Enumerations, with article, 198
.

; by
8
9
adverljial combinations,
infinitive
evuvfjn .
337 ; with
328 .....
. . . . .125
Kol ... re . . . . . 340 e^eari, impersonal . . . .101
Epanodos . . . . •
3S5 -eos, -oi's, adjectives in . . . 147
Epexegetic, \'at, 341 omitted
; . 341 (Traipcu), future of . . . -95
Epiccene gender . . . .17 fTret, temporal or causal . . .
347
Epimenides, quoted by St. Paul
Epistolary aorist, the
Ethical future, the .... . .
.

.
355
304
302
(Treidri
eireLbrjirep
tirdirep .
..... . . .
.347
347
347
Even, also, by Kai .341 compared with in
. . .
eirl, 254 ; ets, 264 ;

Exhortations, substituted for state- adverbial combinations . .

337
ments by New Testament tran- iTri<jTa/j.aL . , . . -US
scribers

edv, for dv, 314

.

;
.

for ei &v
. . .311

. 318
epxojxaL, 102
iadloj
ia-Tws,
......
Coca,
;

ws,
and tjku) .

participle for kar-qKihs,

. . 298
102

eaiTov, -ijs, declined . 50 declined . . . . • 38

fdw, future of
iyevero ....
^ypaxpa, epi.stolary aorist
•

.
95
325
304
erepos
cTOLfMos,
€v-, as prefix, 151
and dXXos
with infinitive
how ;
. .

augmented
.
. 54,
.
194
326
97
eyih, rjixets, declined 49 €vpi(7KU}, stem. . . . .93
«', in conditional sentences, 317 ; inter- -ei's,substantives in . . -145
rogative use of 308 . . . . -euw, verbs in . . . . .148
-eta and -da, terminations of nouns, 144 f0' V 347
556 t^lpsabetical index.

exw, alternative stem, 93

of, with adverbs
-4u}, verbs in .
....
. .
; construction

. .159
292
350 genitives in different relations
;

with the same noun, 221 ; genitive

absolute, the, 222, 330 ; prepositions
^'ws, in combination with other adverbs, governing the genitive, 236 geni- ;

338 ; \sith infinitive . , . 328 tive after 5ia, compared with accu-
sative, 247 ; objective genitive, by
ij, particle of comparison, 270 ; inter- possessive pronoun, 277 ; genitive in
changed with Kai ov, 339 ; disjunc- apposition with possessive pronoun,

i]KU}
tive,

^/J-ai-
and
345 ;

epxofJ-ai
interrogative
.... . . 346
298
115
280 genitive of infinitive, 326 ex-
;

pressing design or result

Goodwin, Dr., "Greek Grammar,"
327 .
:

r]/j.ipa, declined, 20 ellipsis of 267 ; . 133, 143

Tj/Mi.-, in composition

-rjs, -«, adjectives in .

. 151
147, 148
.

.
• Gospel,
senses.
Greek in Palestine
with
.....genitive

-155
. .
in

.
different
219

Greek names in the New Testament 162

F. Greek ]X)etry, quoted by St. Paul 355 .

Green, Rev. T. S. . 205, 305, 321 .

Festivals, names of, in plural 203 . . Grotius on fulfilment of prophecy 322 .

Final, or intentional clauses 320 . .

First declension, paradigms

Forbes, Rev. Dr., on the Romans 354
Foreign elements in New Testament
. '19
.
Tap
y^ypaTTTai
yeXdct), future of
..... .
347, sq.
305
. . '95
Greek 155 yevos, declined . . . .29
Forgetting, verbs of, with genitive 210 . yevo/j-ai, with genitive or accusative 209
Frequentative verbs 148 . . .
y7j, ellipsis of .
. . 267 . .

Fulness, w^ant, etc., by genitive. 210; ylvofjLai., stem and forms 94, loi . .

by dative or els .227 . . . yivwa-KU), stem and forms. 94 . .

Future time, tenses expressing 57 . yovv, irregular substantive . -32

Future tense, its characteristic, 60 ; in yprjyop^u). . . . . .149
liquid verbs, 86 ; in pure verbs, 95 ; yvvTj, irregular substantive, 32 ; ellii)sis
Attic future, 95 ; second future, 84 ;
of 213, 267
future imperfect, 302 ; future perfect
(paulo-post future), 79, 100 ; see also
318 ; force of the future, 301, sq.; H.
with ov fXT], 302 indicative, with tVa, ;

323 ; infinitive, 324 participle, 333 ; ;

Hackett, Dr., on the Acts . .218
futuce auxiliary verbs 302 . . . Hamilton, Sir W., "Logic" . .179
Futurity, certain, by present 298 . . Hebraisms, so-called, often to be re-
jected 275
Hebraistic use of plural of blood, 203 ;

G. superlative, 274 use of els, 276 of

; ;

relative and ai)T6s, 286 ; causal sense

Galilee, or Tiberias, the lake of .221 in intransitive verbs, 291 ; use of
Gender of nouns, 15 rules for deter-
; participles, 333 ; combination of
mining, 17 ; variable in some sub- verbs . . . _
. .^ .33^
stantives . . . . '32 Hebrew, as spoken in Palestine,
155 ;

General for particular statements 204 . words, 33 names in the New Testa-
;

Genitive case, the (plural always in ment, 160; poetry, parallelism 354 .

ojv), 16 ; exhibits the stem in the Hendiadys {^v dia dvolv, one idea in two
third declension,

possessive, 277
25 adverbially
used, 135 ; of personal pronouns for
genitive after the ;
;

Hiatus
Hinton, Rev.
......
words), unnecessary, 214 (§ 258)

H., on theJ.
338

Romans 354
.

article, 175 different uses of the,; Historic present, the . . . 297

207, sq. ; usual position of the, 215, Historical and principal tenses, 57, 297
 ;

ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 537

Hort. See Westcott. 53,287 particles, 139, 141

; ; forms,
Hymns in the New Testament 354 307 ^5, 346 yo-p
; . ; . .
347
Hyperbaton . . . .
351 Interrupted statements, by o.Wd . 342
Hypothesis, fourfold form of . 317 Investiture, by ev . . . . 240
Irregular substantives . . 21, 32
Irregular comparisons . . .42
I.
-ia, substantives in . . . -144
Imparisyllabic declension, the 19 . Idoixai, future of . . .
-95
Imperative mood, the, 55, 309 tenses
; 'lepoadXiifxa, or 'lepov<Td\rj/x . .
33
iu, 309; subjunctive used for, 311 ; -ifcj, verbs in . . . . .148
infinitive, 329 ; future indicative in iTjyut, conjugated (in d0i77/it) . . Ii8
prohibitions . . . .301 'Irjaovs, declined, 24 ; with article . 188
Imperfect tense, the, 94, 298 ; distin- iKavos, with infinitive . . . 326
guished from aorist, 299 ; in con- •LKos, -tKT], -iKov, adjcctlvcs in
147 . .

ditional sentences, with av , .319 -ifjios, -ou, adjectives in 147 . . .

Imperfect tenses, properly so called. 57 -IVa, with subjunctive for imperative,

Impersonal verbs, loi j singular and 312 intentional, 320
; explanatory, ;

plural, 166 ; often improperly so 320 is it ever ecbatic ? 321

; distin- ;

called
Improper prepositions, the
Inchoative acts, by imperfect
167
138, 253
.

. 300 .
iVa Ti, or ivari
iva ir\rip(Ji}dT}
....
guished from oTi, 320 from Sttws, 320

..... 287
322
;

Inchoative or inceptive verbs . 93, 148 -ij/os, -IvTjy -(.uov, adjectives in . -147
Indeclinable proper names . 33 . -Lov {-dpLou, -idiov), substantives in . 144
Indefinite article, the . . 275 . -LOS, -ia, -LOV, adjectives in .146 .

Indefinite pronouns, the . 54, 286, 288 -L<TKos {-i<TK7]), substantives in . . 145
Indefinite tenses, the . . .57 XcxT-qixL, conjugated, 106 ; its two aorists,

Indefiniteness by omission of article, 199 114; transitive and intransitive tenses,

Indicative mood, 55 ; the objective part 292 ; its compounds . . . 307
of the verb, 298 ; in indirect inter- Ix'^vs, declined . . . .27
rogation, 315 ; interchanged with
optative, 316 ; in conditional sen-
J.
tences, 318 ; ajrparcnt in intentional
clauses, 323 ; with ibare^ 328 com-
;
Jacob, Rev. Dr 231
pared \vith infinitive . . .
329 Jebb's " Sacred Literature "
Indirect form changed to direct
.
354 .

Indirect interrogation
Indirect quotation .
.

.
.

.
'315
'315
.
352 Jehovah, equivalent of the term in
the Apocalypse 206
Judicial words, Latin, in the New Testa-
....
Individual acts in plural expressions 204
ment 159
Inferential conjunctions . . . 346
Infinitive mood, the, 56 ; a verbal
substantive, 324; with article, 177; K.
•with accusative subject, 232 ; as sub-
ject, 325 ; as object, 325 ; expressing Kiihner's *' Greek Grammar," ed. by
result, 326 ; oblique cases of, 326 Jelf 209
with {1}(7T€, 328 ; for imperative, 329 ;
in modern Greek . . . .321 L.
Inseparable declensions, the
Instrument, by dative
Instrumental, ev .
.

.
.

.
.

.
19
227, 253
240 .
Lachmann
Languages of Palestine .
....
307, 316
.155 .

Intensive use of participles .

333 . Languages not verbally coincident 235 .

Intentional or final clauses, 320 par- ; Latin influences on New Testament

ticles 321, 322 Greek, 156 words in the New Tes-
;

Interjections . . . .142
. tament, 158 ; names in the New
Interrogative, its sign, 10 ;
pronovvus, Testament . , , , , 162
N N
538 ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

Lee, Dr., on "Inspiration" . 204 . /jLavdduu}, stem of . . .

'93
Letters, names of the, neuter, 33 as ; /mpTvs, irregular in declension. . 32
numeral signs . . . .44 fieyas, declined, 38 ; comparison of. 41
Lightfoot, Bishop . .321 . . fj-ei^uiv, comparative, declined, 41 ; double
Likeness, unlikeness, etc., by dative, 223 comparative from . . -43
Linus, possibly a Briton . .162 . fi^Xei,impersonal . . . .101
Liquid verbs, 86, sq. ; change of short fx^Wu), auxiliary future verb . . 302
vowel in the stem

cusative .....
Local genitive, 217 ;
.

dative,
.

228
.98
; ac-
233
fji€v and
ixevovvye
jxivij},
......
5^,

stems and forms of

344 ; without d^ . .

'93
345
346

......
.

Luther's version of the New Testa- MecrcTias . . . . "157

ment 305 jueTct, 250, sq. ; distinguished from ci!fu,
250 with infinitive (accusative)
; 328 .

96 ; perfect .....
Xafi^dvoj , stem and present, 93

\avddvu}, with participle . .

; future,

.
99
331
fi7} and 01),

308
139 /ii? in questions,

with imperative, 309

;

optative, 313 ;
139,
;

with
negative intentional
;

XeiTTw, second aorist of . . .84 particle, 322 ; after verbs of fear-

XevKabu}, future and first aorist of .
97 mg . 323 •

\^u}v, declined. . . . -27 p.T] yevoiTO 313 •

Xi/w, why not chosen as paradigm . 61 fiVTVP, ellipsis of 213 .

fjirp-i, interrogative . 308 .

-fXL, verbs in . 104 .

M. fxiyvvfj-i . 124 .

fjLiKpos, ct, 6u, declined, 34 ; comparison

Mad vig's " Greek Syntax " . .313 of . . . 42 .

Measures, coins, etc., with numerals, 276 /xi/xvTjffKOfiai, stem of 94 •

jNIediation, expressed by did 246 . , -/juis, substantives in 144 .

Menander, quoted by St. Paul 355 . -fiiov, -fiov^ adjectives in . 148

Mental affection, verbs of, with geni- Mwarjs, declined • 33
tive, 208 ; with dative 224 . . fiv<TTTf]p{,ov, predicated of Christ . 284
Meyer, Dr 218, 321
Middle voice, the, 55 ; its meaning,
292, sq. ; not always distinguishable N.
in sense from active, 293 often indis- ;

tinguishable in form from passive, 297 Names, proper, in the New Testament,
Middleton, on the article with names of various languages, 160 ; use of the
of Christ, 188 on 2 Tim. iii. 16
; 193 . wdth
article .185 . . .

Military terms, Latin, in the New Neander on irpocrevxh .218 • •

Testament . . . . '159 Negative adverbs, 139, 338 joined to ;

Minister of another's will, by bid 253 . predicate, 275 emphatic, 302, 312; ;

Modal dative, 226 participle; 332 . . with infinitive, 324 with participle, ;

Monadic substantives 179, 190

. . 330 followed by aWct, 342 ; com-
;

Moods, the . • 55, 60, 298

• bination of negatives . . -339
"Most
to
highest," corresponding idiom
.43
Negative indefinite pronoun
Negative questions
290
308 .... . .

Motive
sative ......
or cause, by 5ta, with accu-

...
Mutes, the, classified
253
5
Neuter, forms alike in, 16 plural sub-
ject, with singular verb, 167 pre-
dicate, with masculine or feminine
;

Miiller, Max, Professor 59, 207, 212 . subjunctive. . . . '171

Neuter verbs, 55. See Intransitive.
-ixa {-/xaT-), substantives in . . 145 Nominative, the case of the subject, 167,
/jLadrjTevo}, transitive and intransitive 291 205 of personal pronouns omitted,
;

p.ad-r)Tr]s, declined . . . .20 277 ; predicate after copulative verbs,

/xdWov, in comparisons . . 42, 271 171 ; for vocative, with article, 195,
/ia/i/Awvas . . . . '157 206 suspended, 206 elliptic
; 206 ; .
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 539

Number
Numbers,
of nouns, 15, 202
compound and
; of verbs 57
distributive,
8d€
o'lKeioL,
....
ellipsis of . .
51, 191, 281
. .213
47 ol/cos, ellipsis of (or ok;a) . .213
Numerals, the, 44, 275
216 ; adverbs .... ; with genitive,
137
CWiifiL
6\os, with
. .

article
.

.
.

.
.

.
.124
'194

P i<p€\KV<TTlK6v
V, inserted in stems .
.... .
4
93, 104
ofivv/xi
OPivTJfML
ovofia, use of
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.125
.114
. 206
pd, in the modern Greek infinitive 321 o^vs, -eia, -V, declined . . -2^
peavLas, declined . . . .20 Sttws and tva, distinction of 320 . .

pofMos, with and without article . 200 opdw, defective, 102 ; augment of 94 .

6s, rj, 0, declined, 52. See Relative.

vovsj declined, 23 ; irregularities in 32
-oSi neuter (stem, -cs), substantives
in . . . . .145 .

oari^eov), ovv, declined . . .23

O. ocrrtSjTJTis, 6,ti, declined, 52, 286. See
Compound relative.
Object of verbs, direct (or nearer, pri- -oavv-T},substantives in . . .144
mary), indirect (or remoter, second- 6'Tt,particle introducing object-sentences,
s-ry)? by ditierent cases, 224, 231 ; 314 ; relative causal particle 347 .

direct object of a transitive verb in ov, the objective negative particle, in

accusative, 229 ; may be omitted, 230 ;
questions, 308 ; distinguished from
"internal," 230; object (direct or
indirect) of active the subject of pas-
P-V, 139,, ZZ^ ; OX)
fwvop ... ctXXd Kai ....
.....
/x/7, 302, 312 ; cv
342

....
sive, 294 ; object usually placed after
governing verb 350
Object of comparison in genitive, 211,
odv and dpa
ovpavoi, jilural
oSros, declined,51
....
with article, 191 ;
346
2C4
;

270; or by ^, 270 may be omitted, 271

; demonstrative force, 281 may refer to ;

Object -sentences, 314, sq. ; sometimes

found with accusative object, 317, 352
Objective genitive . . . 218, sg.
the more distant antecedent
oCtos ... IVa
6<f)€\op, as particle
.....
281
320
. . .
.

•3^4
Oblique cases, why so called . -15 -6u, verbs in 148
Occasion, the, sometimes by dird, 237, 253
Old Testament, its influence on the J>, with vocative .
interjection, 207 .

New, 355. See Hebrew, Hebraistic. ws, a particle of comparison, with pre-
Olshausen on fulfilment of prophecy, 322
Omission of article in defined i)hrases, dxrei ......
dicative participles . . -333
276
179 ; to mark indefiniteness, 199 ; of
logical links between clauses, 352.
Ellipsis.
See indicative .....
ware, ecbatic, with infinitive, 328 ; with
329

Opposition, by aXXd . 342 . .

Optative mood, the 56 subjeV^tive, 298;

; P.
in independent sentences, 312; in in-
direct interrogation, 315 ; optative Parallelism, Hebrew . . '354
and indicative combined, 316 ; in con- Parathetic compounds . . .150
ditional sentences . . .318 Parisy liable declension . . .19
Oratio obliqua . '315
Ordinal numbers, the, 45 ; cardinal used
for
. .

275
Paronomasia
Paroxytone .....
.

Partaking, verbs of, with genitive

8
216
. . . -354
.

Origin, by genitive
Ostervald's version quoted
Oxytone words ....
. .

.
.

.231
207

8
finite verb .....
Participial constructions changed for tha

Participles, the, 56 ; in -up, declension

353

of, 37 ; in -ws, 36 ; tenses of, 56, 334 ;

"0, 7?, t6. See Article. with article, 176 as relative and ;

0- declension, the (second) ^9 finite verb, 176, 197, 334; general use
540 ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

of 329, 55-.; predicative, 330 aJjuuct to ;

Predicate, the, 164; anarthrous, 178;
predicate, 332 attributive, 330
;
ad- ;
with article, 178 ;
participles with,
330. «9-
verbial, 332 ; in broken constructions,
335, 337 Predicative verbs . . . .165
Particles, 140 emphatic sutiixes,
the, ;
Prepositions, use of, 1 31, 234: table of,

separable in composition, 151 236 with genitive, 131, 236 ; with da-
;
53 ; 5

inseparable, 151. See Conjunctions. tive, 132, 239; with accusative, 132, 242;
Partitive genitive
Partitive plural
Parts of speech
.

....-14
.

.
2\^, sq.
203
.
.

.
with genitive and accusative, 131, 245;
with genitive, dative, and accusative,
132, 254; table of, 133; in compo-
Passive voice, the, 55, 294 sometimes ;
sition, 151 combined, 152; preposi-
;

ditticult to distinguish from the middle, tion and after article,

case,175
295 adverbially used, 135, 337 ; inter-
-57
'^

Past time, tenses expressing .

change of prepositions, 235,^261, sq. ;
Paul and Saul . 161, 163 . .
governing several words, 265 ; with
Paul, St., his name, with the article, 185 infinitive, 327 corresponding adverbs, ;

Perfect state, tenses expressing 57 . 138; adverbs as "improper preposi-

Perfect tense, the, 99 of liquid verbs, ;
tions" .138
Prepositional phrases, without article,
87 ; second perfect, 85, 99 third per- ;

son plural in -av, 99 ; perfect passive, 190

100 ; force of the perfect, 309 ; dis- Present time, tenses expressing 57 .

tinguished from 305 aorist aorist, ;

Present tense, its stem, as modified,
may sometimes be rendered by, 303 ; 82, 86, 92 force of the tense, 297, sq.;
;

" present-perfect,' 306; perfect im- aorist rendered by, 303 ; present-
perative
Perispomenon
Permission, by imperative
.... . .
309
8
309
perfect, 306 present and aorist dis-
tinguished in imperative,
sul)junctive, 311 ; in infinitive
309
;

in
324 .
;

Price equivalent, etc., by genitive 221

Person, in verbs -57 .

....
. . .

Personal endings, in verbs, origin of 59 Principal and historical tenses 57, 297
Proclitics, the 8
Personal pronouns, 49, 277 ; nominative
subject, when unemphatic, omitted, Prohibitions, by future indicative, with
ov, 301 ; by subjunctive aorist, with
277 genitive of, for possessive pro-
;

noun, 212, 277 ; pleonastic use, 278 ;

fit]
. .311
278 Pronondnal subject, its omission and
auTds for third person . . .

insertion , 166, 277

Peter, St., his name, with the article 185
Place, by genitive, 217
by accusative
Pluperfect tense, the, 99,
....233
306 ; its
; by dative, 228 ;
Pronouns, the, 49, 277
277
personal, 49,
possessive, 50, 280 ;
;

strative, 281 ; relative, 283

demon-
inter- ;

notion expressed by aorist 304 . . rogative, 287 ; indefinite. J 6, 287 ;

distributive i)ronouns, with geni-

Plural verb in general expressions, 166 ;

tive 216
neuter nominative with singular verb,
.

167 ; verb with collective subject, Proparoxytone . _

•

168 ; with several subjects, 169 ; of Proper names, with article 185, sq.
Properispdmenon 8
substantives, how used, 202, sq.; plural . .

forms with singular force 203 . . .

Prophecy, Old Testament . 322
10
Political terms, Latin, in the New Tes- Punctuation .
. . . •

Pure verbs, uncontracted, 70; con-

tament . . . • -159
212, sq. tracted • 71
Possessive genitive . .
. . •

Possessive ])ronouns, the, 50, 280 un- ;

emi)hatic, by article, 185 ; with the Tra??, declined . . . « • 8

for objective genitive, 277 waKiv-, in composition . . ^5' •
article, 192 ;

Postpositive particles 34° . . .

irapd 259, sq.
300 iras, declined, 37 its use ^^^t.h article,,
Potential by imperfect . . .
;

192 in Hebraistic negative, 275

Prayer, its object, by Trepi or vTr^p, 265 ;
; j

bylVa 320 rai'- in composition . • • 'Sfl

 . .

ALI^HABETICAL IKDEX. 541

TTOLT-qp, declined, 27 ; ellipsis of 213 R.

Tavofiat,
participle
veido} coujugated
....
perfect passive of, 1 00

.
with
331
78
Rational Concord. See Synesis.
Reciprocal force of middle 293 . .

TretJ'daj,future of .
95 Redundancy, apparent 278, 282, 352 .

ireLpdofiai, future of. 95 Reduplicated stems, 94 ; of verbs in -/xi,

frepi,
virip
250
.....
; compared \viih. did, 265 with
265 Reduplication, 58 ; varieties of
105
99
TTTTx^s, genitive plural
TrifJ.Trpr}/Xi.

irivu}, j^resent
....
and second
injx'^''^ •

aorist of,
37
114
92;
Reflexive middle
Reflexive pronouns
Regimen, combined
.
49, 278
292

265
future, 96 ; first aorist passive 98 Relation, by genitive 219
TriiTTO}, stem of, and second aorist 94 Relative pronoun, the, 52 ; compound or
TTLaTevo), conjugated 61 indefinite, 286relative and antece-
;

-rrXeoj, stem of, and future 96 dent, 283 ; case of relative, how deter-
irXriaau). second aorist passive . 98 mined, 283 ; relative in apposition
ttXoOtos. of variable declension 32 with a clause, 283 ; relative and dv, 314
TTveO/xa dyioy, Avith article 190 Remembrance, verbs of, with genitive,
xv^cj, stem of, and future 96 iio
TTOLix-qv, det;lined 27 Renewed mention, by article . .181
TToXis, deslined 27 Repetition for emphasis 352 . . .

TToXi's, declined, 38 ; comparison of. 42; Resolved tenses 301, 302, 330
. .

with
Torepos
irpdaau},
.....
article.

f^cond perfect of
^95
288
85
by
Revelation,
wcrrc .....
Result, by geniti^'e of infinitive, 327 ;
32S
the IJouk of, anomalous
TTpavs, or Trpaos (or a) 38 forms and constructions in, 156, 352
Trpeirei, impersonal . lOI Revised Version .^jas5i'7;i
. .

TTpo, 239 : with infinitive 328 Rhetorical we . . 202 . . .

TTpos. 260, ifq. ; compared with ds, 266; Rhythm in sentences 354 . . .

with infinitive (accusative) . 328 Roberts, Dr., "Discussions on the Gos-

irpbs ^dbvop, adverbial 337 pels" 155
irpoaevxy}. ''uecial sense of
Trpo(T€x^. ellipticaluse of
7rpo(pTjT€u(v^ augment of .
218
230
97
Romans, Epistle
parallelism .....
to the, expounded by
357

TTvXr], declined

<f)alvofjLai, with participle

7 peu),
priyvvfxi
pT]/j.a,
....
stem and future

declined
.

•
96
125
25
331
adjectives in
-pos, -pa, -pov, 147
<p€pu},defective 102 •

(pevyu, future of
077/u
(pddvoiy
....
stem of
96
114
pwvvvfu ....
pvofxai, augment of 94.
•
98
125

93
(piXeoj, conjugated . 72
S.
future of
(pop^cj, 95
\^^\a0du> . . . 209
Saul and Paul 161, 163
Second declension, paradigms 22, sq. .

Second tenses, the, 83. See Aorist,

Future, Perfect.
Q.
Sentences, simple and compound, 164,
172; how to analyse, 173; qualified
**
Quarterly Review," the, Januaiy, by article, 177 objective, 314 con-
; ;

1863 189 . ditional, 317; intentional, 320;

Quirinus, governor of Syria 269 , . changed structure in, 353 ; non-com-
Quotations, with article prefixed 177 . pletion of compound
353 . . .

Quotation, direct and indirect. 315 . Separable declension . . '19

542 ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

Separation, verbs of, with genitive 210 . -o-tr, substantives in 145 •

Sejjtuagint version of the Old Testa- aKia, declined 20 .

ment 156 cKOTos, of variable declension 32 •

Shakespeare . -43 . . . o-Trei'pw, stem and forms

94, 97 .

Singular number, the, 202 singular ; arrjKU} 114, 149, 307

verb, with neuter plural nominative, CTp^cpu}, transitive and intrans tive 291
167 ; singular for collective, by arpiovvvfu 126
article. . . . . .180 (TV, v/xeis, declined .
49
Smith's " Dictionary of the Bible" 269 cri) \^7ei$, formula of affirmation 308
Source or author, by genitive . . 208 (r6v, 241 distinguished from fxerd
; 242
Space by accusative . . .
233 (Tw^w, first aorist and perfect passive
Speaker using the plural of himself, 202 of 98
"Sphere," the, by dative, 228; by iu, ffdocppojp, declined . . . .40
240
Stem, the, 14 ; verbal, 58 modifications ;

of . . 81, 92, 105, 143, 144 T.

Stier, Dr 335
Stuart, Dr. M., "New Testament "Taxing," the, in Luke ii. 2 . 269 .

Syntax " 204 Telic and ecbatic particles 321, 328 ,

Subject, the (nominative), 164 with ; Temporal augment, the '59 . .

article, 178 ; of the infinitive (accusa- Temporal use of participles 332 . .

tive), 232, 325 of passive verbs

; 294 . Tenses, scheme of, 56 principal and ;

Subjunctive mood, the, 55 anomalous, ; historical, 57 ; characteristic letters,

from verbs in -ow, 323 strictly sub- ; 60 expressive of time and state, 296 ;
;

jective, 298 ; in inde})eudent clauses, tenses of the indicative, 296, sq.

311 ; after relatives or particles with of the imperative, 309 ; of the sub-
dv,
315
314
;
in indirect interrogations,
;

as future perfect, 318 ;

aorist
junctive, 311 of the infinitive, 324;
of the participles
;

330 ....
tentional clauses ....
in conditional sentences, 317 ; in in-
320
Substantives, genders of, classified, 144 ;
Than, by genitive after comparative,
211, 270 by ^ ;

Third declension, paradigms, 25, sq. ;

270 . . . .

declensions of, 17, sq.; s)mtax of, 202, terminations of nominatives. 26 .

sg. ; number,
202
prepositions, 234
tive, 326
case, 205

adverbially used
;
with
followed by infini-;

337
;

.
;

.
Time, by genitive, 217
by accusative
Tischendorf .
....
.
;

.
by dative, 228

.
233
311, 316
;

Substantive verb, the, as copula, 164 ;

Transition, particles of . • 341 343,

with dative
Substantivised phrases
.....
as ]nedicate, 165 ; with genitive, 217
223
.178, 334 .
;
Trench, Archbishop

ravrd and ravra

. . 204, 304

51, 192
Superlative degree, the, 40 M'ith geni- ; Taxvs, comparison of . 41
tive, 216; use of, 273 Hebraistic, 274 ; T€, with Kai, ascensive • 341
Synesis, or Rational Concord {constructio
ad sensum)y in verbs, 168 in ad- ;
reX^w,
ciples ....
future

....
of, 95 ;
with parti
. 332

the relative
Synthetic compounds
.....
jectives, 171, 268 ; in ai)rds, 279 in
283
150, 152 . .
; T^pas
re'aaapes, -a, declined
rrjXe-, in composition
•

•
32
45
151
Syro-Chaldaic dialect . I55 . • -TT]p and substantives
-Tojp, m • 145
-T7]s, -TrjTos, substantives in . 145
-?, appended to ovtu), ix^xPh ^XP*- • 4 -T-qs, -Tov, substantives in • 144
cd'^^arov, of variable declension 32 . ridrjfjLi, conjugated . . 106
jaXiri^u}, future of, 96 elliptical use of, 166
;
Ti/Ltdw, conjugated . . 72
adpKivos and aapKiKOS '147 . . TLfjLt^, declined . . 20
aeavTou, 775, declined, 50 ; iavrou used tIs ; tI ; interrogative . 287
for 279 indefinite
Tij, Ti, . 289
arjfiaiywy first aorist of . . -97 Totyapovv • 346
 ;

ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 54a

roipvv . » . . . • 346 prepositions, 266 ; complemented by

ToaovTos . . . . • . 192 j)articiples, followed by infinitive,
331 ;

TpeTj, rpia, declined • 45 325 ; combined with adverbial force,

Tp^0w, perfect, active and passive . 100 338 ; verbal forms as adverbs 137
T/)€'xw, defective . 103 Verbal adjectives in ros, re'oj 61
rpi^u), conjugated . . 78 Vocative case, the . 206
-rpov, substantives in . 144 Voice, the distinction of 55: 291 .

T&TTTU}, second aorist forms . 84 Vowels, the . 2

Vowel aorist, the .
94
dav/iid^o}, future of . . . .96
de\(v,
future
Geos,
......
how augmented,

with and without article.

93 em^^liatic

.
302
186
Vau, V,a lost letter of the Greek alpha-
bet, called,from its shape, f, Digavima,
/"being an old form of the gamma 44
^tTYdi/a;, with genitive . . . 209 F, as influencing the declension of nouns,
dvrjaKb), stem and forms . . -93 31; the conjugation of verbs . 96
6pavw, 2)erfect passive . . .100
W.
U.
Want, fulness, etc., by genitive . 210
Unconscious versification • 356 Watts, Dr 186
Webster, Rev. W. 234, 300, 321
. .

vdcop, omitted after certain adjectives 267 Webster and Wilkinson's "New Testa-
vios, ellipsis of . . . .212 ment" 180
vlbs Qeov, with article . . .187 Westcott, Canon, and Dr. Hort's edition
-vucj, verbs in 148 of the Greek Testament passim, .

virep,
252
i>Tr6
251,
; from
sq. ;
irepi ....
distinguished from dvri,
265
253, sq.
Wilderness of the temptation
Winer's "New Testament Grammar,"
181, 199, 203,
.180

220, 236,
.

247, 249,
270, 272, 273, 278, 294, 300, 301,

V. 339, 345, 347, 352

Wish, expressed by optative . .313
Words, formation of . . -143
Vaughan, Dr. C. J. . .214, 297
Words of one language not precisely
Verb, the, 55, 291 ; verbal stem, the,
coincident with those of another 235 .

58 denominative verbs, 148 classes

; ;

of verbs, 148; verbal predicate, 165;

concord of, 167, sq. ; ti'ansitive, with Z.
accusative object, 229 some verbs both ;

transitive and intransitive, 229 ; verbs Zeugma . • 351

with modal dative, 226 ; with cognate Zumpt, Dr. A. W., on Quirinus . 269
accusative, 230 ; vriih double accusa-
tive object, 231 ; verbs with genitive fdw, infiniti\e f^y, future . 96
of secondary object, 20<S, sq., 216- Zei/s,genitive, Ai6s . 32
with dative, 223, sq. ; com])ounded with ^wvvvjxt., conjugated . 121
 544

INDEX OF SCRIPTFEE PASSAGES.

[The letter s prefixed denotes the number of the paragraph in the chapter on Synonyms.]

I.— OLD TESTAMEXT, CHIEFLY THE SEPTUAGINT.

Genesis. I Kings. Proverbs.

OH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
2. 7 244 1.43 29171 30. 30 274
24 244 18. 44 183
9. 24 274?i 45 183 Isaiah.
25 274
6. 10 321
22. 17 333
2 Kings. 7. 14 182
9. 1 234
Exodus. 1. 2 .... 157 14. 14 214
3 .... 157 30. 33 157
4. 19
16. 15
204
157
23. 10 ... . 157 40. 4 244
8 203
22. 28 356 41. 4 165
I Chronicles. 61. 1 224
65. 1 227
Leviticus.
23. 31 ... . 32
7. 1 22071 Jeremiah.
U. 2 2207t
Nehemiah. 22
220?^
7. 339
15. 32 31 157
19. 18 279 5. 18 ... . 242
Ho-.ca.
J^itmhers.
Fsah?is. 6. e . . . . 339
6. 13 . . . . 2207^
2
21 ... . 220?/-
9.
10
• 43
213, 245
Amos.
31. 12 ... . 231M
16.
22. 1 158 f). 26 • 157
9. 12 286, 296
25. 11 347
Deuteronomy. 51. 4 294
68. 18 231 Jonah.
6. 5 .... 263 103. 2 276 4. 8 183
118. 5 237?'
22 244, 285
Joshua. Micah.
23 258, 269
15. 25 ... . 161 25 . 158 239
 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 545

II. -NEW TESTAMENT.

Matthcio. Matthew. Matthew.
CH. VER. PAGE CH. YER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
1. 1 . . . 179, 189 4. 4 • • -241,255 5. 39 . . 166, 268,
6 . . . 213 . 7 . . . 301 286, 342
11 . • 255 . 8 . . . .58 40 . '^66, 294, 303
16 .
334 10 . . . 225 41 . ...
159
....
• • •

17 . . . 46 . 11 . . 224, 299 42 294

18 . . 191 H, 222, 14 . . 322 . 44 . 166, 252, 309
ZZ^^ 347 15 . .
234 . 45 . . . . 291
20 . , . 222, 249 17 . .
237 . 46 . ... 287
21 . I 66, 237, 279, 18 .-970, 264 47 . ... 287
301 > 347 21 .212, 229 48 , ... 301
22 . [76, 246, 322?^ 23 219/;, 280 6. 1 S5,s2i,26i,328
23 . . . 182, 250 24 .269, 292 2 .
297, 312, 314
2. 1 . I 81, 190, 222, 5. 1 . 182, 242 3 . ...
312
239, 241 1-16 . . 12 4 .... 230
2 . 2 25> 326, 347 2 . •
332, 352 5 . ... 301
3 . 3 3, i6on, 193 3 . .5 30, 228, 301 6 . ... 310
4 . 2 05, 258, 299 3-11 • • 350 7 . . s6, 332 .

5 . . I75> 347 4 . . 176 8 . ... 328

6 . 2 39, 347, 516 4- 8
."

. . 166 9 . ... 277

7 . . 181, 56 5 . I 65, 178, 301 9-11 ... 310
8 . . 320
. 6 . . 184 10 • 254, 277, 342
9 . . 383
.
8 . . 228 12 . ... 539
10 . • • 231 9 . . 171 13 .
237, 242, 268
11 . . . 242 10 •
184, 301 16 • •320, 331 •

12 . • . 324 11 . . 166 17 . ... 293

13 . 222, 302, 13 179, 240, 18 • • 241, ZZi •

327, 347 253, 287 22 . ... 178

14 . . . 217 15 . 159, 175, 182, 24 . 157, 194,217,
15 . • . 322 253, 256 275, 326
18 . . . 20
5- 16 • • 197, 310 25 . . . 224, 316
20 . 2 04, 305, 347 17 • 312, 343, 345 26 . 211, 243, 340
23 . • . 322 18 • . -33, 166, 27 • • • • 333
3. 1 . . . .
297 275, 312 28 . 566, 224, 251,
2 . . • . 347 19 . ... 314 288, 291
3 . • •
347 20 . . 166, 270, 34 . • .175,245
4 . . s66, 251 312, 314 7. 1 . ... 309
5 . . . . 160H 21 . . 166, 228, 2 . ... 263
7 . s 3> 216, 257, 264, 301 3 . . 196, 230,
287, 56 22 552, 158, 166, 277, 288
8 . . • 220, 347 225, 264 6 . 176,224,355
9 . . • 238, 347 25 • • .
'

52 7 . . 224. .

10 . . • • 297 26 ... 158 8 297• .

11 . . • 263, 265 27 ... 301 9 232, 308.

12 . . . 227, 286 28 ... 166 11 324 •

13 . . • 237, Z^y 29 . . .s'52, 216 13 350 .

14 . . • 3oo> 340 30 . . . 552 13-1 350

...
•

15 . .
347
• .
32 166 14 288 .

16 . . 225
• • 33 ... 301 15 230, 286
17 . 2 06, 237, 305 34 166, 241, 324 16 262, 308
4. 1 . . i8o7i, 253 37 ... 268 20 346 •

3 . I 87, 318, 320 38 • . . 236 21 276 .

546 INDEX OS* SCRIPTURE PASSAGfiS.

Matthew. Mattheiv. Matthew.

CH. VKR. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
7. 22 ... 308 10. 24 . . . • 253 13. 20-23 , 282 ,

23 , . 206
. . 25 . . . . 321 24 .
305
24 208, 256, 286 26 . . • . 330 25 ,242, 328
25 ... 99 27 . . . . 285 25-40 . 159
26 ... 286 28 . . .552,230 26 . i8j
28 ... 314 29 . . . . 275 29 . 139
29 ... 170 31 . . . . 211 30 . 328
8. i ... 278 42 . . . 205, 267 31 . 170
3 . . 315 • 11. 1 . . . . 331 32 .211, 328
4 .
243, 312
. 2 . . . 188 35 . 322
8 ... 341 3 . . . 176, 180 38 .165 282
9 . •
348 . 5 . S30 267, 295 39 . 178
10 ... 166 7 . . 55, 180 47 . 570
11 . 166, 190
. 8 . 125 232, 343 52 . 291
16 ... 166 9 . . . 343 56 , , 260
17 ... 322 10 . . . 239 14. 3 . 216 304
18 ... 251 11 . . . 272 6 . . 203
19 ... 275 12 . . . . 338 13 . . 249
24 ... 328 14 . .
n, 303 17 . 204
25 • 292, 309
. 16 . . . 19471 21 . 276
26 ... 288 21 . . . 319 22 . 324
28 • 237, 324
. 23 . . • 552 26 . 237
29 . . 226 . 25 . .
332, 352 27 . 165
32 ... 248 26 . . . 195 29 . 256
9. 1 ... 281 28 . . . 260 31 .217 ,288
3 . . . 216 . 29 . . . 237 15. 1 204
4 . ... 287 30 . . . S2I 4 ^ 226 ,

5 ... 288 12. 3 . . 169, 250 11 .282 180

6 . ... 191 7 . . . 319 12 . 204
8 . . 204 . 10 . . 210, 308 16 . . 135
9 ... 223 12 . . . 211 24 . . 215
11 ... 287 13 . . . . 98 25 . 224
13 305, 339, 339« 17 . . . 322 26 . 182
15 ... 258 18 . . . 562 28 . 20/
16 513,5^5, 256 20 . . . . 97 32 . 205, 257
17 ... 125 22 . . . 355 37 . 216
22 . . . :.37 23 . . . 309 16. 3 . 344
28 . . 307, 315 24 . . . 157 8 , , 288
29 . ... 249 26 . . . 318 9,10 . S69
34 . ... 241 29 . . . 180 14 . 275
35 . 21971, 269 33 . . . 345 16 • 179, 187
36 ... 251 33 . . . 180 18 552, 165,
37 ... 344 36 205, 241 344, 354
10 1 ... 218 41,42' .iS ^,199,250 19 . 27
2 ... 175 13. 3 . . 176, 224 22 .302, 313
3 ... 161 4 . . 177, 233, 24 . . 303
4 ... 161 241, 259 25 •S55, 303
10 . . 220 . 5 . . . 328 26 .555, 194
15 . .241,271 8 . . . 299 28 . . 314
18 243, 344, 344?^ 13 . . . ss 17. 1 . 198
20 ... 339 14 . . • 333 4 • 225, 325
21 ... 167 15 . . . 321 5 . 196
22 . 247, 282, 302 20 . . . 208 9 . 190.- 222
 INDEX OP SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 547

Matthew. Matthew. Matthew.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER, PAGE
17. 11 . . . . 298 21. 8-11 . . 299 24. 45 . 327
12 . . . . 302 9 . 158, 180 25. 1 S65 287
17 . . . . 338 12 . . 182 4 . . 250
20 . . . . 318 16 . . 293 5 . 299
22 . . . . 302 18 • . 344 8 , 297
24 . . . 182 19 . . 203 14 , 28171
25 . . . 159 23 • 297, 345 15 , 281
26 . . • 346 26 • • 225 37 , 307
27 . . 236, 243 31 . . 288 40 , 258
18. 1 . . . 272 32 • . 327 26. 2 243 259 298
6 . . . 251 40 . . 312 8 , 204
7 . . . 237 42 244, 258, 12 .255 328
8 . . 271, 325 268, 285 16 276
9 . . 552, 271 22. 2 . . 305 17 . 203
.

10 . . • 323 5 . 174, 28171 22 . 308

12 . .
47, 223 8 . . 344 23 .241 282
13 . . . 271 10 340 25 .308 ,309
17 . . . 180 16 337' 26 io6n 179
21 . . . 338 17 159 28 179 ,335
22 . .
^zi, 338 20 287 32 •233 328
23 . . . . 305 23 297 33 . 318
24 . . . 275 29 180 35 . 241
26-34 . . 294 35 275 41 .
344
28 . . . 158 37 SSS, 263, 45 • .
309
19. 4 . . . 190 265, 301 46 , 292
5 . . 167, 244 39 . .301 50 266
8 . . 190, 260 42 . .188 53 159 271
11 . . . 276 43 . . 240 54 . 312
13 . 280 299, 320 23. 2 . . 303 55 S35 ,249 257
14 . . . 191 7 . 158
. 56 . 322
16 . . 275 . 15 .552, 176 59 . 19471
17 . . .268, 318 17 . 288
. 61 .
247
18 . . 177 • 19 . . 288 63 . 248
19 . . 279 • 24 . . 182 64 . 308
22 . . .
332 • 27 56 223, 344
,
69 275
23 . . .
344 . 28 • s6, 344 73 156, 348
26 . . .258 . 31 . 225
. 27. 4 . 301
28 . 151 254, 257 33 . S52
. 5 . 292
20. 3 . . . 239, 251 34 . 260
. 6 . 157
6 . . • 233 37 . . 176 8 . 338
8 . . . • 344 39 . 180, 237 11 . 308
9 . . . 242 24. 1 . 204
. 12 233 328
10 . . . . 242 2 .256, 312 17 288
12 . . . 183, 223 6 . 302
. 21 , 288
19 . . 229,. 328 9 . 302
. 23 . 347
21 . . 237, 275 12 95 247, 328
,
24 . 301
22 . 288 293, 302 16 . 264
. 26 . 159
23 . . 177,.
344 18 .245, 264 27 , 159
28 . . 236,. 326 21 •i75> 338 29 . 238
30-34 . . . 204 22 . 276
. 33 . 157
21. 3 . . . . 344 27 . 190
. 37 . 204
4 . . . • 322 29 .565, 330 38 . 275
8 . . . 168, 264 40 .27 5,297 40 .
335
548 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.

Mattheiv. Mark. Mark.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
27. 44 ... . 204 1
5. 9 . . .
159, 170 9. 37 . . . 256, 339
46 158,287 11 . . . . 260 40 . . . . 252
48 204, 275 13 . . . 248, 276 41 . . .
189, 3"
51 • *'35 14 . . . • 297 42 . . . 42, 271
54 . 187 ]5 . . .
159, 297 43 . . . •
*'S2
57 6-5, 291 21 . . . • 257 43-47 . . . 271
62 . 175 22 . . . • 275 45 . . . 6-52
65 • 159 23 . . . 292, 312 50 . 240
. . .

66 159, 250 29 . . . • 315 10. 8 . 244

. . •
•

28. 1 139, 217, 33 . . . . 182 13 .166, 280, 300

276, 344 35 . . . • 213 17 . 275
. . •

2 . . 304 41 . . . 158, 279 18 . 268

. . .

6 . 306 42 . . . 226, 347 37 . 275

. . •

7 . 306 6. 2 . . . • 334 45 •
348
. . •

9 . 342 4 . . . . 265 46-52 204

. . .

11 • 159 7 . . . 47, 218 51 . . . . 158

19 SI4, 244. 256, 9 . . . • 353 11. 2 . . . . 216
279, 291, 332 .11 . . . . 253 7 . . . . 307
16 . . . . 285 8 . . . • 265
21 . . . 203, 228 9 . . . . 158
Mark. 25 . . . . 250 10 . . . . 158
27 . . . • 159 14 . . . • 313
1. 1 . . . . 189 38 . . . . 204 18 . . . . 299
2 . . . 239 40 . . . 206, 242 22 . . . . 218
4 . . 219 45 . . . . 166 25 . . . . 248
7 . 286, 326 49 . . . . s6 27 . . . • 297
13 . . iSoii 50 . . . 165 32 . . .
317,353
16 . syo, 265 56 . . . 3H 12. 4 . . .
338
•

24 . . 176 7. 4 .
159, 292, 294 5 . . 174
.

27 . . 344 11 . . • 157 10 . . 244

•

29 . . 212 17 . . . 204 14 . . 254, 312

33 . . 194U 22 . . . 202 17 . .
175
•

36 .
• 175 25 . . . 286 18 . . 297
.

2. 1 . .
247 27 . . . 182 26 . . 255
•

4 .
• 159 31 . . . 242 28 . . 274
.

15 . . 328 34 . . . 158 30 . . 263, 265

19 . . . 241 35 . . •
299 31 . . 279
.

23 .
• • 325 36 . . . 42 34 . . 317
.

3. 2 . . . 316 8. 2 . . • 205 38 . . • 230

5 . • . -^32 10-18 . . 341 42 . . 158, 275
13-26 • . 341 15 . . • 230 13. 1 . . . 204, 269
17 . • . 157 25 . . . • 151 4 . . 302 . .

18 . . . 161 34 . . . . 303 8 . . 249 . .

21 . •258,315 35 . . • • 303 9 . . 279 . .

4. 12 . • . 321 36 . . . . 194;^ 14 . . 264 . .

19 . • . 251 38 . . . . 229 16 .
245, 265, 312
21 .
• • 309 9. 1 . . . . 209 20 . 276, 319
. .

24 . . . 230 7 . . . 208 22 . . 328 . .

28 . . . 269 12 . . • 257, 345 25 . 302, 330

. .

31 . . . 211 19 . . . • 338 14. 3 . . 248 . .

39 . • • 310 20 . . . •
353 4 . . 287 . .

5. 4 . . . 328 21 . . • • 135 5 . . 276 . .

7 . . . 226 34 . . . . 272 6 . . . . 241

 IXDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 549

Mark. Luke. LiiJce.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE

14. 19 . 47, 139, 249 1. 19 . 260, 297/i, 303 4. 5 . . 558
. .

25 . . 312. • 20 . . 236. 302

. 6 . . .
^3 •

28 . . . • 177 21 . . 328 . 1
13 . . 192
. .

31 . . . 302, 313 23 . . .36 14 . . 248

. .

35 . . . • 255 29 . . 316 16 . .
330
. •

36 . . . I 57, 206 31 . . 301 18 . 100, :'-97'f, 306

49 . . . • 322 33 . . 20 3,257 23 . . . . 331
54 . . . • 338 35 . . 187H 25 . . . • 254
55 . . . • 328 37 275 34 . . . . 142
58 . . .
247, 331 41 . . 189 42 . . . • 327
60 . . . . 308 42 . . 274 43 . . . 194, 297/1
61 . . . • 175 46 . . S47 5. 1 . . . • 165
68 . . . . S4 46-55 .
354 4 . . .
331
71 . . . • 125 50 . .
244 5 . . .
247, 255
IS. 1 . . . . 199 51 . . 240, 305 6 . . . . 300
6 . . . . 298 53 . . 210, 305 10 . . .
175,302
9 . . . • S3 57 . . . 327 14 . . .
• 353
12 . . . • S3 59 . . 300 17 . . . 328
15 . . . ' 159 62 . . 177 19 . . . . 217
16 . . . . 284 64 . .
351 27 . . . . 250
17 . . . • 232 67 . . 189 32 . . .
• 305
21 . . . . 190 68-79 .
354 33 . . •
293
22 . . . . 157 74 . . •
233 6. 1 . .
153, 325
24 . . . . 316 76 . . 239 6 . . • 325
29 . . . 142 79 . . • 97 12 . . 182, 218
34 . . . . 158 2. 1 . . 163 15 . . . 161
36 . . . . 204 2 . 269, 274 16 . . . 213
39 . .
159, 187
. 4 . 287, 328 20 . . •
243
44 .
159, 3C5> 316 5 . • 294 23 . . . 192
45 . . .
• 159 6 . . 326 25 . .
96
47 . . . • 213 8 . . 231 26 . . 192
16. 1 . . . • 213 10 . 193, 297/i 27 . . •
343
2 . . . 276
. 12 . . 199 32 . . • 348
4 . . .
347• 13 . . 268 34 . 294 320, 348
5 . . .
295• 18 . . 251 35 . .
257, 294
6 . . . 306• 20 . 285 . 37 . . • 313
9 . .aS, 266, 276 21 .
3 26, 328, 342 38 . . • • 263
12 . . 190. 25 . 189, 191 43 . . • 330
29-32 354
•
44 . . . 26^, 281
."
31 . 193, 249 47 . . . 288
37 . •47 48 . . • 338
Lid(
39 . I 75, 248, -304 7. 2 . . • ^2, 302
41 . . . 248 13 . . . .
257
].. 1 . 141, 303. 347 48 . • 98, 303 19 . . . . 290
2 . . . . 190 i
49 . . 213, 288 25 . . • . 343
3 . . • •
274 3. 1 . . . 163 39 . . . • 319
4 . . . . S14 2 • • 255 45 . .
• • 33^
5 . . . . 289 5 . . . 244 43 . . . S18 .

6 . . • • ?49 13 . • S2, 259 47 . . .

195, 286
9 . . • . 327 16 . 263,
. 286 8. 1 . . . 249 .

13 . . • • 301 18 . 224 269, 29771

, 6 . . . 98 .

if) . . •
33, 158, 19 . . . 285 8 . . . 98 .

189, 275 4. 2 . • 339 10 . . • ' 321

550 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.

Luke. Luke, Luke.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
8. 13 . . • 254 11. 35 . 323 16. 10 . . . . 196
15 . . 521, 6-31 36 19471 11 . 157, 350
23 . . . . 299 42 • 343 13 . • 157
29 . . . 228 12. 1 241, 279 16 . . 298/1
30 . . . 159, 168 3 . 236 19 . • 232
33 . . . 248 5 552, 328 22 . . 203
39 . . . 248 6 158, 275 23 . 552, 203
41 . . . . 341 7 . 211 25 . 176, 281
45 . . . . 242 10 205, 243 26 . . 256
49 . . . . 315 11 . 198 30 . . 289
54 . . . 195, 2l6 20 207, 287 17. 2 . 271, 321
9. 3 . . . . 242 22 224, 316 3 . 230, 279
7 . . . . 290 24 . 211 4 . . 217
8 . . , 290 26 . 224 8 . .96
13 . i8i, 270, 3i8?i 33 52 12 . 289
.

14 . . . . 242 39 . 319 15 . 315

.

16 . . . . 181 44 . 255 23 . 166

.

23 . . . . 303 47 . 261 30 . 192

.

24 . . . • 303 48 . 285 32 . 210

.

25 . . 19471 51 •
343 34 . 298
.

27 . . . . 209 •
54 82 190, 298 35 . 258, 302
28 . . • • 205 55 . 183 18. 1 . 328
.

30 . . . . 287 13. 2 ••
259 4 . 258
.

31 . . . . 302 4 . 46 7 . 217
.

35 . . . . 208 9 • 351 8 . 141, 307

41 . . • 338 11 . 32>7 11 .
345
•

44 . . . . 302 16 ' 47 12 . 217, 306

45 . . . . 321 18 . 223 13 . • 6-43
46 . . . 177,272 19 • 244 14 . 271, 281
52 . . • 329 22 • 293 17 . •
313
10. 1 . .
47, 242, 29 190, 292 26 . . 341
269, 302 32 771 35-43 . 204
7 . . .i8o . 14. 3 . 229 35 . • 307
14 . . 180 . 6 • 154 19. 3 . , 2
^37^, 317
19 . 302, Z^Z. 326 7 230, 299 8 . 216, 297
20 . .
339 • 17 . 170 11 . . 338
22 . . . S3 . 18 304, 337 18 . 52
23 . . 166 . 19 • 304 20 . •
159
24 166 24 37 68," 260, 268
. . . . 209 . I

27 . . 279 . 30 . 191 40 . 81, 100

1^9 . . . 341 31 • 239 42 . •
351
35 . . 258, 286 15. 4 • 47 44 . 236, 255
36 . . . 216 7 . 271 48 . 316
37 . . • 250 15 516, 223 20. 2 .
34:;
39 . . . 281 19 . 326 11 . 338
40 . . 152, 251 25 190, 208 12 . 338
41 . . . 251 26 . 562 16 . . 3^3
42 . . : 27471, 293 27 . 298 17 . .
244, 285
1?.. 4 . . . *39 29 • 233 20 . . 154, 233
8 . . . . 328 16. 1 . 334 21 . . 204 .

11 . . . . 353 3 • 332 25 . . 346 .

13 . . . . 189 213,253 35 . 197, 216, 324

28 . . . . 346 157, 278, 293 39 . . .204 .
 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 551

Luke. Luke. John.

PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
. . . SSI 24. 25 ... 327
. 3. 5 . 189, 265, 318
255 26 . S12
. 6 . . . . 178
354 27 265, 300 10 . . . . 181
239 29 . 327
•
14 . . . 180
.

306 32 . 299, 330 15 . . . 276

.

327 34 228, 306 16 . . . 276, 329

. 165 35 . 228
. 18 . . . 338
.

265 39 . 209
. 19 . . • • 351
279 41 . . 23771 20 . . • • 355
334 46 . . SI2 21 . . . • 355
177 47 • ' 234 28 . . . . 330
169 29 . . . . 226
226, 328 33 . . . . 524
277, 335 John. 36 . . . . 297
250, 328 4. 4 . . . . 246
. 345 1. 1 . . . 178, 190 7 . . . . 238
. . 272 260, 350 11 . . . 170, 341
. . 326 2 . . . . 190 14 . . • 285, 313
. . 289 4 . . . 179 18 . . . . 286
. . 177 5 . . . 293 19 . . • . 350
• 233 6 . . 206 . 22 . . . . 182
. 53, 351 10 . . 340 . 23 . . . 265, 348
. 240 13 . • 203 . 24 . . . • 350
. . 275 14 . 171, 210, 258 25 . . . . 157
. 207 15 . 270?^ 272, 274 27 . . . . 250
. • 337 16 . .236,341
. 35 . . . . 3^7
. . 204 18 . . 282 . 36 . . . . 321
. • 313 19 . . . 307 . 40 . . . . 181
. • 313 20 . . 352 . 42 . . . 278, 31m
. . 308 26 . . 263 . 43 . . . . 181
248, 338 29 . . 297 . 44 . . . . 281
. . 316 30 . . 274 • 52 . . • • 233
. . 260 33 . 263, 282
. 53 . . . 169, 19471
. . 334 40 .
' 233
• 0. 5 . . • • 233
227, 343 41 . 281, 28171 6 . . • • 3P3
. 287 42 . 157,284 8 . .
• 311
- 153 48 . . 328 11 . . . 282
. 190 2. 2 . . . 169 13 . . •
53
157, 190 4 . 226, 298 16 . . •
299
. 341 5 . . . 286 17 . . • 338
. 187 6 . . 242 18 . . . 281
• 257 7 . . . 210 22 . . • 193
. 197 8 . . • 311 29 . . . 220
241, 339 9 . . . 20971 30 . . . 280
. 276 10 . . . 338 35 . . • -S65
. 204 12 . . 169, 233 36 . . . . 270
. 306 14 . . • 535 40 . . .
. 303
. 213 15 . . • 159 42 . . .
219,317
. . 168 16 . . • 3" 44 . . .
• 353
. . 206 17 . . . 218 46 . . . • 319
. 161 20 . . 47. 228 47 . . . 307, 318
. 242 21 . . . 214 3. 1 . . . . 221
233 d. 3 . . . 318 2 . . , 169, 254
552 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.

John. John. John.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER PAGE CH. VER P>GP.
6. 6 302
. 8. 58 165 12. 27 • 343
204
. 59 188 54 188, 331
9 204, 275 9. 2 321 40 • 321
10 231
• 3 167 43 547; 271
10 •
^ZZ 16 191 44 . 339
20 165, 309 22 294 45 • 55
22 304, 353 24 S47 46 . 276
24 188, 3S3 30 348 13. 4 • 159
27 339
•
31 350 5 159, 182
28 312
. 33 319 6 •
307
31 157, 180 36 341 8
37 313
•
40 10 10 S17, 293
39 276
. 41 319 11 •
335
42 191, 282 10. 1 282 14 . 512
45 204
. 3 208 16 . 211
46 282
. 4 168 18 . 322
49 • 157 5 313 27 , 272
51 203, 344 6 46
6' 28 . 287
57 247, 342 16 572 31 .
305
58 157,203 22 203 14. 3 . 298
60 350
• 24 338 6 . 246
62 • 351 27 168 7 . 320
66 . 238 28 Z^Z 13 . 286
71 . 212 30 169 15 • 310
4 • 318 32 265 16 . I52;i
6 . 192 33 265 17 190
14 •
299 35 180 22 . 302
16 • 339 11. 1 263 26 \2il. 19c, 232
17 • 303 4 252 27 ^97> 355
22 . 265 6 233 28 319
23 194, 321 8 204 15. 1 170
24 • 231 11 307 4 239
27 • 317 12 318 6 166
34 . liytL 13 300 8 320
35 . 220 15 321 9 278
36 . lljll 17 292 16 286
38 • 205 18 46 17 282
41 • 347 21 319 18 274
42 . 263 30 304 20 318
45 . 282 31 352 22 319
49 . 170 32 319 25 322
8. 4 . 98 34 307 26 190
9 • 249 35 20
6- 27 344
16 • 344 38 243 16. 2 .6-6.
343
17 •
344 44 310 4 190
25 •
3,2>7 47 312 13 18: 190
29 304, 305 51 188 16 298
40 306 . 12. 1 239 20 24^, 342
42 319
6-
10, 4 204 23 .v9
44 [90 280, 303 13 158 24 293
51 18 331 25 546
•
Z^2,
52 160, 200 20 27 2s8
535
53 . 287 23 321 29 S46
 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 553

John. John. Acts.

PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
. 321
. 20. 5 243
. 2. 29 239, 340
1 1 171, 218 11 260
. 31 213,245
S24, 320 12 260, 275 36 103
14 315
• 38 89, 244, 250
99 • 16 158
. 39 293
sg . 17 298
. 45 314
192 194, 280 19 276
. 46 249
322 . 22 189
. 47 335
69, 268 25 194, 3n 3. 1 169
. 178 28 . 196 io6?i, 166,
• sg 30 . 269 298, 335
•
239 21. 6 • 237/1 3 ZZZ
•

. 182 •
37 4 333
'

165
. 10 . 2^7
. 5 289
.

165
. 11 .
47, 210 7 215, 333
165, 188 13 .
352
• 8 332
•

. 322 14 .
306
. 10 317
•

. 169 15 . 211, 212 11 268

.

. 260 15-17 5i6, S19 12 327, 333

. 241 16 . 212 13 . 282
. 288 17 . 212 19 . 322
•
304 18 .
304 24 •
344
. 213 19 .
304 25 . s6i
•
319 23 . 298 4. 5 •
325
. 302 25 . 324 7 266 269, 333
• 279 8 189, 333
•
309 Acts. 9 . 218
238, 308 13 333, 352
196 1. 1 207, 274, 285, 15 •
333
. 272 293: 341, 345 16 •
345
•
157 2 . 224 17 226, 257
•
157 3 247, 328 18 •
333
159,204 4 208, 353 19 270, 333
•
159 5 189, 263 20 . 166
311,322 7 • 199 21 •
333
133, 161, 10 • 342 22 214,271
2i3» 258 13 161,213 23 •
333
213 16 . 207 25 . 287
SI3 18 167, 229 27 . 562
322 19 •
157 28 •
351
204 22 282, 285 30 562
.

513 2. 1 -13 10 32 289

.

97, 168 1 • 258 35 314

•

97, 274 2 •
330 36 333
•

. 322 4 . 189 37 333

•

181, 339 10 •
249 5. 1 22
48, 181, 11 •
ZZ'^ 2 293
.

243, 276 17 96, 237 4 288 332, 339

166, 265 21 . 296 294
•

[69 194, 243 22 545, 285 9 288

.

• 300 24 .326 13 293

•

4171, 136, 25 •243 15 216 289

243, 269 27 552, 213. 24s 16 268
.
554 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.

Ads. Acts. Acts.

H. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH, VER. PAGE
5. 19 . . . . 247 9. 16 . . • 252 13. 47 327
21 . . . 132, 254 20 . .
. 352 50 266
28 . . . . 226 21 . . . 296 14. 2 248
30 . . . . 188 29 . . . . 550 4 174
32 . . . . 221 31 . 21 '

228, 248 5 326

35 . . .
279, 302 33 . . • 238 8 228
36 . i6i 225, 289 39 . . ' 293, 332 9 327
37 . . • 225 42 . . . 248 10 186
41 . . . 252 10. 1 . . 22 12 32
42 . .
249, 331 3 . . 181,233 13 S67, 32, 239
6. 1 . . . sso, 260 6 . . • 259 16 228
3 . . 189, 254 7 . . . s6o, 216 19 .233
5 . . . 162 16 . . . 258 21 229, 291
9 . . 159,265 18 . . • 316 23 .306
13 . . . 331 22 . . 181,218 27 .250
7. 1 . .
292, 308 32 . . • 171 15. 1 .226
9 . . •
294 37 . . . . 248 4 .250
12 . .
• 331 11. 6 . . . • 300 12 . 169
14 . . •
239 10 . . . . 258 14 . i6o?i
16 . . . 212 13 . . . . 181 17 284, 286, 296
19 . . • 327 15 . . . . 190 21 . 249
20 . . . 275 16 . . . 190, 263 23 281, 329
21 . . 244, 278 18 . . . 346 28 s6.

26 . . . 287 19 . . . • 256 35 515 230, 269

30 . . . 180 20 . . . 550, 187 36 6-15,284,
34 . . • 333 23 . . . . 226 289 292,317
35-38 . . 282 26 . . • • 194 16. 2 •295
40 . . . 205 28 . . • 163, 255 3 171, 352
42 . . 536, 292 29 . . . . 283 4 .299
43 . . • 157 30 . . . . 283 9 .
247
48 . . • S35 12. 2 . . . . 227 12 159, 287
56 . . • 55 3 . . • • 338 13 538, 218/1
59 . . . 298 6 . . - • 239 15
8. 1 . . . 248 7 . . . 10771 16 S15 293, 325
,

5 . . . 280 14 . . . . 237;^ 25 249•

9 . . . 289 15 . . • 175 26 329•

11 . . . 228 18 . . . . 316 31 169.

12 . . . 251 21 . . • * 254 17. 1 182.

15 . . 189, 287 23 . . . . 236 2 64/t

17 . . . . 189 13. 9 . . . . 162 3 188, 353
18 . . . 189 10 . 207 308, 331,
4 . 341
20 . .
• 313 13 . . • • 175 10 247, 287
21 . . . 223 If) . . . 207. 11 • 316
23 . .
• 331 20 . . . 228. 12 . 216
26 . . . 281 21 . . i6on, 233 15 136, 274
27 . .
333• •
22 . . • 244. 18 266, 303
30 . 141 307» 354,
23 . . . . 188 21 igsn, 272
31 .
314, 347
. 31 . . • . 258 22 6-44, 272
35 . .
352• • 33 . . . . 188 23 S37, 199
40 .
245, 328
. • 34 . . • . i'23 25 354
•

9. 3 . .
325• .
40 . . . . 204 27 s7, 209,316,364
7 . . 209. . 42 . . . . 245 28 174,355
14 . . 296. . 45 . . • • 332 30 542
.
 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 55r.

Acts. Acts. Acts.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER, PAGE CH. AEK PAGi:
17. 31 .
240,302,337 21. 37 307
. 26. 4 345
32 ... 174 38 i!;o. 179, 182 5 6-44
18. 3 • 231 22. 2 •155 6 307
9 • • 352 9 209
. 7 153 286, 337
,

10 . 230 11 . 23771 12 283

13 • 259 12 • 295 14 155
14 • 207, 319 16 294, 302 16 282
15 • 301 17 325
• 17 284
18 . S38 20 293
• 24 185, 195
25 272, 295 21 243
• 25 274
26 . 272 25 308
. 29 314
19. 2 . 308 29 344
• 30 169
3 • 244 30 177, 294 32 324
7 46, 194 23. 5 301, 356 41 344
12 • 159 6 • 165 27. 3 227
14 . 290 9 • 351 8 273
15 S4, 165 10 ^33> 323 9 32
17 • 193" 13 . 271 10 324
19 276 14 551, 226 13 56, 136, 273
24 •
293 15 233, 327 14 248
25 251 23 . 290 16 227
26 • 191 26 274, 329 17 323
27 .
244 30 • 254 18 293
29 . 194W 31 • 247 20 327
32 . 272 32 . 182 25 207
34 •
353 24. 3 i35> 274 34 53, 260
35 268, 347 5 336 37 194
39 • 318 6 192 39 319
40 210, 348 11 71 284, 333 43 210
20. 3 • 327 14 . 282 28. 4 184
4 . . 162 17 247, 344 6 114
6 . 181 18 . 283 15 159
7 . 615,276 19 254, 3^9 16 249
8 . 565 20 97 18 287
9 s 15, 182, 237/i 22 . 273 20 232
13 . . 181 23 . 182 26 313
18 . . 19271 26 223 27 321
24 . s 13. 293 25. 6 • 254 30 194
28 . s 16. 281, 293 7 269
31 . • 331 8 • 163
33 . 209 9 • 254 Rcmmns,
35 . . 271 10 273> 330
21. 3 . 568 17 • 293 1. 1 212
5 . • 338 19 . 544 2 . 22071
11 . . 28( 21 . 163 4 88n, 205
13 245. 342 22 . 300 5 . 218
16 . 525, 285 23 • 249 7 . 187
26 • 334 25 . 163 8 194, 345
28 306, 332 26 154,254 9 . 293
30 . 19471 27 • 97 10 •
25s
31 . 194 26. 2,7 • 199 11 . 224
32 • 331 2 • 254 13 •
338
33 . 316 3 234, 248 16 202, 229
556 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.

Romans. Romans. Romans,

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER, PAGE
1. 17 ... . 173 4. 20 . . . 226, 332 8. 18 . . 261, 350
20 . . • S34, S58 22 ... . 244 20 . . 256
•

22 . . . . 326 5. 1 . . 238, 246, 22 . .

338
•

25 . 5 28, 203, 259 311, 31m 23 . 50, : 2i4«, 333

26 . . . 213, 259 2 .... 311 24 . . 227
.

29 . . • 227, 354 3 .... 311 25 . . . 318

.

32 . .
. •
333 5 . . . . 219 26 . . 152, 177,
2. 1 . . . . 207 6 . . .
249, 252 192, 316
4 . . .531, 173 7 . . S2I, 252, 27 . . . • 249
5 . . . 241 .
267, 347 31 . . . . 252
6 . . . 283 . 8 .... 252 32 . . .
.
53
6-10 . • 355 • 9 • ... 335 33 . . . . 307
8 . . .532, 238 10 . 262, T,iin
. . 34 . . . • 307
9 . . . 202 . 11 ... 335 . 35 . . . . 219
10 . . . 202 . 12 .184, 256, 353 36 . . . . 219
12 . . . 200 . 13 ... 184 . 39 . . . 219
13 . . • 259 13-17 ... 353 9. 1 . . .
190, 352
14 . . • 199 •
15-19 ... 195 2 . .
. 354
15 . .
345 15 .318,353 3 .
300, 338,551
....
• • . .

16 . . 220^1, 246 17 335 5 . . 203, 254

18 . . . SI4 . 18 .220, 346, 353 8 . . 191, 244
.

19 . . • 233 • 19 .... 171 9 . . . . 217

21-23 . • 307 •
20 . . . 152, 201 11 . . . . 321
23 . . . 200 . 6. 2 . 225, 287, 313 12 . . . . 272
25 . . . 200 . 3 . .
243, 346
. 14 . . . • 308
26 . . . 244, 280 4 . .
243, 306
. 15 . . 541
27 .
333
. • • 5 . . 318, 343
. 18 . .
. «3
3. 2 .2 32, 29s, 345 8 . . 242, 31171
. 19 . . S3, 307
4 . .
294
. . 10 .... 258 20 . .
154, 346
9 . .
297
. . 13 .... 310 29 . .
158,319
18 . . 219
. . 14 . . .
253, 301 30 . .
. 197
20 . 200, 276, 302 15 ... .
313 10. 1 . . 280, 345
22 . 264 . . 16 .... 345 2 . . . 218
23 . 210, 304 . 17 . .285,351
. 4 . . . 201
25 . .542, S49, 20 .... 226 13 . . 296 .

263, 293 7. 1 . . .258,346 14 . . 296 .

26 . .531, 263 2 . . . 220, 223 16. . . 225, 276

28 . . . 200
. 3 .... 327 18 . . 346 .

29 . . .
346
. 7 . 178, 301, 307 20 . 227, 338
.

30 . . . 261, 347 9 . . . . 201 11. 1 . .

348. .

31 . • • 200, 343 10 .... 282 7 . . 184. .

4. 1-16 . . . II 12 . .521,345
. 9 . . 244. .

1 .
173 13 .... 313 13 . 215, 345, 350
.... 147
• • •

2 . . . . 318 14 17 . . 318. .

3 . . 167, 180, 18 .... 325 18 . . 318. .

244, 344 24 . . . 207, 214 24 . . 264. .

5 . . .
244
. 25 . . . 34,278 25 . .
337• •

9 . .
244 8. 3 . 196, 234, 251 31 . .
277, 321
....
. .

11 . . .
214, 262 9 190 33 . .. •
207, 354
13 . . . 208
. 10 ... 240
. 36 . . . 262
.

14 . • 238
• 11 .... 247 12. 1 . .
. «55
•

18 . • •
259
• 13 . . . S54, 302 3 . .
. 247, 354
19 . , . 276
. 15 . . . 157, 352 5 . . • 195, 249
 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 55i

Romans. I Corinthians. I Corinthians.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
12. 9 . . .' . 268 1. 29 . . . . 276 7. 25 . . • •
334
15 .* 1 166, 186 28
. • . 329 2. . . . . . • • 305
16 . .
243» 259 2 . .
234«, 373 31 . . . 227
19 . . • 350 3 . . . 166
. 32-34 . . . 224
13. 2 . . S49, 307 4 . . . 190
. 34 . . . . 228
3 . . 220, 303 7 . . • 186, 334 37 . . •
353
5 . . • 342 8 . .
. . 319 39 . . • 326
9 . 177 279, 301 13 . .95 5, 190, 267 40 . . 56, 190
10 . . 201 . 14 . . • • S55 8. 13 . . 313,318
11 . . 271, 283 15 . .
• • 555 9. 1 . . . 308
14 . .
293• 3. 1 . 5Ci5> 147, 166 2 . . . 343
."
14. 1 . .
350• 2 . • . 351 6 . . . 169
4 . .
307•
4 . . • 555, 2^0 12 . . 218, 227
5 . .
259• 5 . . • 246, 343 14 . . . 238
15 . .
249• 6 . . • 291, 299 15 . 227, 241, 304
20 . .
345•
7-9 . . . 186 17 . . 232, 294
15. 3 . .
348• 7 . . . 289, 291 24 . . • 309
4 . i8o, 208, 277 9 . . • 215, 350 26 . . • 346
5 . .
313•
10 . . . 186, 199 10. 1 . . • 193
.
6 . . . 198 15 . . . . 246 2 . . 244, 294
8 . . 252• 16 . . • • S35 3 . . • 300
11 . . 310• 20 . . • 187, 317 4 . . 300
13 . . 190. 21 . . . . 217 11 . . 168. 261
15 .
247, 272, 304 4. 4 . . • • 225 13 . . . 183
16 . .
190. 5 . . • 183, 239 14 . . • 230
22 . .
327• 6 . . • • 323 16 . . . 285
24 . .
233, 325 8 . . • 125,314 17 . .
195, 216
25 . . .
332• 9 . . . . s6 19 . . . 289
26 . .
293• 17 . . • . 304 21 . . . 216
27 . . 216. 21 . . . 240, 288 25 . . • 159
16. 6 . . 287. 5. 4 . . . . 242 26 . . •
S13
9 . . . i62;i 5 . . . . 282 29 . . . 287
12 . . . 287 7 . . • *'25, 348 30 . . . 226
14 . . . 162 8 . . . . 240 31 . . .
• 345
15 . . . 162 9 . 18 3, 224, 304 33 . . .
195
21 . . . 162 13 . . . . 301 11. 1 . . • 344
23 . . . 19471 6. 1 .
25 4, 289, 294 2 . . 549, 344
25 . . 21971, 228 2 . . . 221. 318 4 . . 132, 248
4 . . . .282 9 . . . 248
5 . . . . 242 12 . . . 248
I Corinth ians.
6 . . • • 283 13 . . . • 325
1. 1 . . .
18s 8 . . •
283, 341 14 . . . . 184
2 . .
296, 341 11 . . 171, 283, 18 . . 289, 345
3 . . . 187 289, 304 22 . . • 312
9 . . . 246 16 . . • 167, 244 23 . . .
. 300
10 . . . . 32 18 . . • • 230 24 .
243, 277, 334
11 . . . . 213 19 . . 217 25 . .
^37, 250
13 . .
244, 307 7. 5 . . 258 26 . . .
• 137
17 . . • 326
. 10 . .
233 27 . .
•
345
18 . . . . 215 11 . .
233 30 . . • 307
19 . . . 12571 15 . .
309 31 . . .
• 319
21 . . 183, 262 16 . . 316 12. 2 . . . • 314
25 . . . . 270 19 . . 171 3 . . . 551
558 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.

I Corinthians. i
I Corinth ians. 1 2 Corinthians.
CH. VER. PAGE CH. VEK. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
...
1

12. 8 . . . 262 . 15. 27 . 166 2. 17 . . .

330 195,
9 . . 262
. . 29 . . . 205, 252 3. 1 . . . 279 .

13 . .
244, 348
. 30 . . . . 166 3 .
147, 170, 190
14 . . 348
. . 31 . . . .
277 5 . . . 263 .

15 . . 259
. • 32 . . .
• 311 6 . . . 200 .

16 . . 259
. • 33 . . . «2i, 355 11 . . . 262 .

25 . . 224
. 34 . . . • 3" 12 . . . 227 .

27 . .
337
. •
37 . . . . 318 13 . . ro67?, 335
31 . . 272
. . 39 . . . . 276 14 . . . 287 .

13. 1 . . 184, 350

. 41 . . . . 211 15 . . .
257 •

2 . . 193
.
•
43 . . . • 349 17 . . .
179 .

4 . . 184
. . 44 . . .
555, 349 18 . . . 226
8 . . 292 . 45 . . . . 244 4. 2 . . 192
9 . .
337 . •
46 . . • sss 6 . . 214
10 . .
337 . •
49 . . . . 3II71 17 . . . 264
11 . . 298
. . 50 . . . . 169 18 . . ss
12 . 246, 260, 337 52 . . . . 166 5. 1 . . . 214, 221
13 . . 212 . . 54-57 . .
. 355 2 . . •
333
14. 1 . . .
515, 344 55 . . . . 552 4 . . 321, 348
4 . . . 200 16. 2 . . . . 276 '
5 . .
157, 214
5 . . 270, 3187? 5 . . . 298 6 . .
336, 353
9 . . • 302 10 . . . 312 7 . . . 336
10 . . . 3'8 15 . . • 352 8 . .
3i^, 353
11 . . . 241 17 . . • 277 10 . . 246
13 . . . 320 21 . . . 280 11 . . 219
15 . .
32, 31 171 22 , . S51, 158 13 . . 225
16 . . . 183 14 . . 219, 252
19 . . 190, 272 15 . 252 304, 306
20 . . 555, 228 2 Corinthians. 16 . . 318 •

22 . . 244
. 18-21 . 187
23 . . . I94?i 1. 3 .... 198 19 . 240 280, 330
25 . . 190 4 . . . 285 6. 2 . . . 167
27 . . 132, 242 5 . . . 246 14 . . • 223
28 . . 190 . 8 . .
253, 327 18 . . •
244
30 . . 274 . 9 . 154, 256, 321 7. 1 . . 219
35 . 190, 303
. 10 . .
52 • 4 . . 227
36 . . 346 . 12 . .
275 • 5 . . • 336
38 . . 309 .
13 . 320, 343, 345 8 . . . 183
15. 3 . . 252 • 14 . .170,337 9 . . •
249
4 . . 306 . 16 . . 262 . 10 . . 6-40, 249
6 . 258 272, 276 17 . . 227 . 11 . . . . 249
8 . . . 183 22 . .157,214. 12 . . .
304, 328
9 . . . 216 2. 2 . . 342
. . 13 . . . 256
10 . . 227, 242 3 . .
257, 304 14 . . . .31^
12 . . . . 317 4 . .238, 304
• 16 . . .202
14 . . . . 529 5 . .318, 337 8. 2 . . .248
15 . . . . 248 6 . . 191, 272
. 7 . . . .312
16 . . . . 318 9 . .
304
• . 9 . . . .282
17 . . . . 529 10 . . 296
. . 10 . . • • 135
19 . . • • 330 12 . .
243, 344
• 11 . . . • 327
21 . . . . 184 13 . .
327
• • 14 . . .
244
24 . . . . 198 14 . . 202
. . 20 . . • • 323
26 . . . . 298 15 . .
176,335
. 23 . . . . 252
 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 559

2 Corinthians. Galatians. EphesiiITIS.

R. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
. 135 2. 11 . . 249• 1. 3 . . . 176, 198
• 304 12 . . 300• 5 . . . . 246
. , . 256 13 .
154 329, 329n 6 . . . . 214
. . • 530 U . . 148, 343 10 . . • ^ 175
. . . 291 16 . . 200, 276 13 . . . . 227
• 330 17 . . 141, 307 14 . . • •
S43
233, 325 19 . . 201. 16 . .
• • 331
. 218 20 . .
197, 252 20 . .
•
353
. . 167 21 . .
346.
21 . . •
253
• 153 3. 1 . . 207, 249 23 . , . S13
.

• 139 2 . . 200. 2. 1 . . 263

•

. 314 5 . . 200. 3 . . .
555, 228
253 6 . . • 244 4 . .
247
•

. 138 9 . . . 238 5 . . . 227

.

. 208 10 . . . 200 8 . . 227, 246,

. • 349 13 . . • 252 283, 341
. 198 16 . 167, 254, 284 9 . . • 321
.98 18 . . . 201 12 . . . 210
• 239, 247, 282 21 . .
197, 319 15 . . . . S49
317
. 27 . . •
244 20 , . 198 .

317
. 4. 1 . , 181, 211 21 . .
193 •

208
. 6 . . • 157 3. 8 . .
43, 212
253
• 8 . . • 330 10 . . 321 .

180
. 10 . . •
293 15 . .561, 193
.

228
. 11 . . .
317, 323 18 . 198 278, 293,

^ 252, 281 17 . . • 323 19 . 54 219, 227??-

, 227, 323 19 . . . 284 4. 1 . . 221 .

• 323 20 . . • 300 1-3 .

. 336
• 255 22 . .
174, 275 6 . . . 262
219, 348 24 . . • 330 8 . .167, 231
. 279, 317 25 . . . 177 9 .
177, 214, 273
171, 320 26 . . . 287 10 . . • 253
31 . . . 200 11 . .
515, 174
5. 12 . . . 314 16 . . 220, 293
Galatiains. 14 . . . 301 17 . . 268, 282
17 . . . 321 18 . . . 268
246, 261 22 . . • 348 23 . . . 526
• 251, 252, 265 24 . . • 175 26 . . • -^32
. 576, 297 25 . . . 318 28 . . • 335
. 576 6. 1 . .
323, 352 30 . . . . 245
. . SSI 2 . . . s68 31 . . • S32
. .<?5i,342 3 . . . 289 32 . . . 240
. . • 225 5 . . , 568, 302 5. 2 . . . SZ7
. 298 ?i 9 . . 281,331 3 . . • 223
. . 240 11 . 53, 304, 30471 5 . . . 198
• 330 12 . . . 226 6 . . . 280
330, 335 14 . . • 325 12 . . . 280, 325
. 247 15 . . . 289 14 . . . . 10771
>
•
335 17 . . 135,217 16 . . . 165, 293
: . .
• 323 18 . . . . 190
'

. 289 19 . . . S43, 226

Ephesiiins.
J.
232, 294 21 . . . . 219
) . . . . 283 1. 1 . . . 246 22 . . . . 2817?
560 INDEX OF SClilPTURE PASSAGES.

^ ihesians. PhiUppians . Colossians.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
5. 25 . . . . 252 3. 9 ... 280 3. 1-4 ... 189
31 . 244, 302 10 54,355 3 .
242, 306
.

...
• .

33 . 312 12 S2f, 304, 318/1 5 ... 554

6. 2 , - . 240 Id • • 233
• 16 . • ^'43, 336
9 . . 215 15 . 289
. 4. 10 . . . 526
10 . . 296 16 ... 329 12 ... 162
14-16 . 214 20 . ,187, 284 15 . . . 162
16 . . 268 21 •301, 327 17 - :^^7, 323
18 . . 190 4. 2 . . . 162 18 ... 280
21 , 52 5 228
22 . . • 304 6 538
23 . . 187 7 ^55 I Thessalonians.
9 220
10 SII 1. 5 . . . 265
PhiUppians. 13 193 7 ... 199
18 258 8 . . 179, 199
1. 2 . . . . 265 22 163 10 • •
335
•

4 . . • 293 2. 1 • . 317
•

5 . • • 338 3 ... 238

9 . • 320 4 . • 232, 294
10 . .
154, 245
Colo.f.'imMf}.
6 ... 263
11 . . 231, 246 12 . . 221
.

12 . . • 273 1. 6 . • . 353 14 . . . 192

.

13 . • 159 7 . . . 162 15 .
' .
334
.

15 . SI 5, 265, 290 8 . . . 190 20 . ... 348

16 . • 174
-515, 9 • -231,331 3. 3 . ... 327
17 . ... 174 10 . . . 221 4 . . .
302, 302n.
18-23 189 . 10-1 2 . • •
355 11 .
313 .

18 . . 226 . 11 . ... 214 12 .

313 .

21 .
177 • 13 . . . 214 4. 1 . ... 177
22 288, 293, 316
. 14 ... 348 5 . ... 330
23 . . 42 . 15 • • • 193 7 . ... 256
27 . . 221 . 16 55, 194, 306 8 . •
339, 346
•

28 . . 283 . 17 ... 239 9 . ... 278

29 . .
353 • 23 .
.193, 208 10 . ... 348
30 . .
353 • 26 • • •353 15 .
179, 241, 313
2. 2 . , 321 . 27 ... 284 16 . . . 176, 200
4 .
54 • 28 . • .352 17 .
. 242
6 . 6-1 556, 326 29 . . -283 5. 3 . ' ' • 313
7 . . • 556 2. 1 .
. • •
53 6 . ... 311
8 . . . 556 5 . ... 338 10 . . 242
12 . • 50 8 . . • 323 14 . . . 260
...
.

13 . . . 252 9 . . .513,534 16-22 309

15 . , , s6, 565, 12 . .208, 218 23 . . . 527
138, 284 13 . . .242, 263 24 .
• . 335
25 . ... 215 14 . . . . 549 25 . • . 251
27 . . 139 15 . ... 279
28 . . . 272 18 . .
544, 218
30 . , . 221 19 . • 231, 275 2 Tlicssalonians.
3. 2 . . •230 20 . . .
549, 242
3 c S36, 165, 184 21 . ... 57 1. 8 . . 199, 330
5 . . . 200, 238 22 . . . 198, 283 10 .
232
8 . . . ' 304 23 . 260, 330, 345 11 . ^20
,
 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 561

2 Thessaloniaiis. I Timothy. Titus.

CH, VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
1. 12 . . . 198, 320 5. 24 , . . . 290 2. 14 ... 218
2. 1 . • 252
• 6. 3 • . •
334 3. 5 ... 151
2 . • 246, 307 4 • 169, 251 6 . . 246
.

3 . . 183
. 5 ... 232 7 . . 227, 282
9 . . . 181 12 183, 231, 350 8 . . 511, 209
10 . • • 236 13 . .194, 254 10 . . 276
.

11 . . . 181 14 • • 350
• 11 ... 154
13 . . . 190 15 . .S28, 274 12 . . . 162
15 . . >-49 , 232, 295 13 . . . 162
3. 1 . • 320
.

3 . . 268
. 2 Timothy.
5 . • 219, 313 Philemon.
10 . . - 348 1. 12 . . .
245, 326
11 .
• • 331 13 . • •363 1. 4 ... 255
14 .
293 17 . • •273 5 ... 263
17 . . . 280 18 . • 136, 273 10 ... 147
2. 5 . . .318 11 • • 147, 354
8 . . 22011, 306 13 . . S3, 252
I Timothy. 11 . . 165, 178, 20 ii4, 313, 354
304, 350 22 ... 320
1. 3 . . .332,353 18 . . . . 287 23 ... 169
2 . . S41 19 . . 187 24 . . 163, 169
4 . • 353 24 . . 282
6 . . 211 26 . . 282
8 . • 227, 354 3. 3 .
. «53
10 .
334
• 9 . . 282 Hchrcics.
11 . S28, 232 15 .
• 193
13 .
332, 351 16 .
. 193 1. 2 S58, 200, 255
14 .
351 •
4. 3 . •
334 3 .556, 51, .

16 . i92n, 193 6 . • 307 214, 239, 293

17 . • 244 7 . S13 4 • • 259, 272
...
•

18 . . 240 10 . . 196 5 244

19 . 621, 251 13 . 159 6 . . . 19371
2. 6 .
234, 281 15 . •
293 8 . . . 196 .

7 . • 352 16 .
313 9 . • -196, 232
8 . S3, 232 17 . 98 14 . • • 53, S36
3. 5 . . 209 21 . 164 2. 1 , . . . 272
11 . • 553 3 . ... 52
13 . • 293 5 . . . . 224
14 . • 273 Titus. 7 . . .257.289
16 . 2 28," 284, 354 8 *5, 194
....
.
.

4. 3 .
• 351 1. 3 281 9 . • • s5> 209,
10 . . • 256 7 . . 215 252, 351
14 . . • 250 9 . .
334 10 . ... 248
5. 3 . . • 197 11 . .
194 13 . . . . 206
5 . • 256 12 . .
355 14 . . . 216, 306
8 . . 211 2. 1 . .
334 15 . • • 247, 328
11 . .
• 303 3 . .
553 16 .
• 352
14 . .
• S3 4 . . 176 3. 3 . ... 259
19 . . •
255 5 . . 28l?l 5 . . . . s6o
21 . .
• 154 9 . . 28171 12 . • 220, 323
22 . . . 216 11 . . 196 13 . ... 289
23 . . 227, 339 13 . 198 4. 1 . . . . 222
562 INDEX OF SCllIPTURE PASSAGES.

Hebrews. Hebrews. Hebrews.

CH. VKR, PAGE CH. VER PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
4. 2 . . . . 29871 9. 23 205, 259 13. 12 . . . . 240
3 . . • • 334 25 . 240 13 . . . . 346
4 . . . . 167 10. 1 • 556 18 . . . . S2J
6 . . . . 298H 2 258, 331 19 . . . • 273
8 . . • 319 6 251
• 20 . . . . 196
9 . . . . 225 7 96 289, 327 21 . . . . 203
12 . . • 153,253 8 251
. 23 . . .
273, 331
5. 1 . . . . 252 9 10 274, 298
2 . . . . 232 10 . 258
4 . . . . 181 18 . 251
7 . .
•533, 237 19 . 240 James.
8 . 2 86, 334, 354 25 . 331
11 . . . . 283 26 . 251 1. 1 . . 329. .

12 . . • 247, 348 27 . 289 5 . . 210. .

13 . . . . 220 30 • 350 6 . . 223. •

20 . . . . 209 34 . 348 11 . 183, 304

.

6. 1 . . . . 214 37 . 180 13 . . 220. .

2 . . . . 215 39 . 217 17 . 269 330, 356

3 . . . . 3ini 11. 2 262, 295 18 . . 289 .

4 . . . . 209 4 . 259 22 . . SI
5 . . . . 209 6 SI 24 . . 304
•

10 . . • • 326 8 . 302 25 . . 197,213

13-16 . . . 248 9 . 245 26 . . 544, 215
14 . • • 333 10 . 183 27 . . . S44
.

16 . • . 350 12 . 283 2. 1 . . 202

7. 1 . . . 191 13 249
. 2 . . 181
2 . . 263
. 15 319,326 3 . . 181
4 . 53, 263, 350 17 300
. 4 . . 213
5 . • 334
• 20 199
•
19 . . 167
9 . . . s8
. 21 332
• 20 . . 303
16 . . 147
•
26 209, 218 22 . . 300
20 . . 174
• 28 n,
335 23 . . 344
21 . • 174, 187 35 183. 25 . . 228
22 . . 215
. 37 240. 3. 1 . . 559
24 . = 185
. 39 262. 4 . . 52
25 . . 337
. 12. 1 31 s68, 346 5 . . • 53,350
27 . . 258
. . 2 215, 236 6 . . . 552
.

8. 2 . . 536 , . 5 209. 10 . . . S12, 115

5 . 167, 295
• 10 216. 11 . . • 199, 267
10 . • 336 . • 13 356 • 15 . . • ''>'55, 330
11 . . 102, 313 . 15 323 • 17 . . . . 154
12 . • 313 . •
16 . 323 •
18 . . 225
13 . • S25 . • 17 .S40, 250 4. 2 . . 338
9 1 . .
549 . . 18 . 57, 209 5 . . . 337
3 . . 203, 250, 274 20 . 209
. 8 . . 223
4 . . 157 . . 24 . 526, 259 11 . . 201
5 . • S43, 157, 27 . 177
. 13 . . 138, 191??,
253, 337 28 • • -^33 281 , 292, sun
7 . • • '^-39, 217 29 . . 348 15 . . . 328 .

10 . • ••'''49,213 13 . 2 • . ZZ^ 5. 1 . . . 138, 292

12 .
97, 203, 258 5 . . 312 3 . . . 225, 244
15 . . . . S26 6 . . 187 4 . . • . 158
21 . . . . 220 8 . 165, 203 6 - . . 151
 nTDEX TO SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 563

Jam€s. I Feler. I John.

CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER PAGE CH. \'i:r. PAGE
5. 9 . • . 239 5. 1 239 2. 19 319
11 . 2 239 21 276, 304
12 . • • 239 7 SII 3. 1 54, 321
14 . . . SI8 12 3 .
51
15 . • . 538 4 179
17 . . 167, 226 10 168
2 Tetcr, 12 268
4. 2 54, 332
I Tder. 1. 1 i6o'/i, 198 8 178, 304
2 • 313 10 184, 251
1. 1 . . . 215 3 . 227 11 170, 318
2 . . . 190 4 •
273. 16 219
3 . . 194, 198 5 5-21,344 17 250, 321
8 . . 226, 332 10 98 293, 313 19 219
9 . .
332 12 334
. 5. 3 70 219, 321
10 . . • 197 14 304
•
6 262
14 . . . 196 18 197
. 16 59
17 . . 296, 335 19 272 291, 336 19 19471, 268
18 . . . 227 20 281, 336 20 298
20 . . •
255 21 190
23 . . . 266 2. 1 • 152
25 . . 187, 197, 4 •
353 2 John
203, 298^1 5 .9
25, 276
2. 1 . . . i93»i 6 . 214 1 . 284
2 . . 151 11 •
273 2 .
353
5 . . S23, 537 15 . 228 3 . 301
7 . 181 285, 351, 20 167, 318 7 .. 281
9 . . S2I,S23, 22 .s'46, 175 8 . 279
543^ 547 3. 1 154, 284 10 . 190
13 . . .549 2 221, 336 11 , 216
17 . . •335 3 255^ 336 12 . 159, 260
18 . . .335 5 261
19 . . .218 11 . 202
21 . . .252 14 . 227
23 . . . •
299 18 •
244 3 John.
24 . . 286, 299
3. 1 . . 28 in, 323 2 132
5 . . .28in I John. 4 283
7 . . •
335 5 283
10 . . 292, 327 1. 1 190, 209, 306 6 221
14 . . 231.- 319 2 190 7 252
17 . . • 319 3 344 9 279, 304
19 . . • 197 5 352 13 246, 303
20 . .
197, 215 6 352 14 . 260
21 . .
350•
8 352
4. 1 . 100 211, 292 10 352
5 . . 292. 2. 1 54, 15271
6 . . 298. 2 251, 28o?i Jude.
8 . . 185, 239
• 4 352
11 . . 547, 203 5 219 1 213
12 . . . 226. 13 268 6 197
13 . . . 216. 14 268 9 273
17 . . 'J2'^ 15 2IQ 10
564 INDEX TO SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.

Judc 1
Revelation. 1 Revelation.
CH. ^^;R. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
14 .... 239 4. 13 . . . 183, 254 14. 15 . . . 240, 327
18 . . • 255 6. 1 . . . 276 15. 2 . . . 275
19 . . . . 190 3 . . . 276 6 . . 251
24 . .
• 354 6 . . . 221 16. 9 . . 326
25 . .
• 354 8 . . . 240 14 . . 19471
16 . . . 254 18 . . 52
7. 11 . . . 202 17. 1 . . 195
Revelation. 12 . . . 183 10 . .
275
14 . , 170, 183 18. 4 . . 168
1. 4 . . . 180,206 17 . . . 242 6 . 125
8 .
33,180 8. 3 . . 1 1 171 9 . 96
10 .
190,240 7 . . 216 13 .
555,159
13 . . 260 8-18 . 216 17 . 192
18 . • 27,330 9 . . 555 21-23 313
2 10 . . . 183 13 . • 275 22 . 276
14 . . . 232 9. 12 . . 301 19. 1 .
'5?
16 . . . 240 15 . 245
. 3 . 158
17 . . . 157 10. 5 . • 243
• 4 . 158
20 . . , 1 1871 11. 2 . • 47,197 6 . . 158
26 . . , 205 5 . . . 31871 9 . . 524
27 . . . S16 15 . . . 268 11 . . 524
3. 3 . . . 233 16 . . . 202 12 . . 567
10 . I94n, 214 12. 3 . . . S67 16 . 274
12 . .205, 278 9 . .5 25, 194'i 20. 2 . • S25
15 . . . 314 12 . . . 204 21. 1 . . 165
21 . • 205, 239 17 . . . 225 13 . . 190
4. 1 . ..
'
• .
-
99 13. 1 . . . s6^ 16 . 258
4 . , . 47 5 . . . 47 17 . •
37
8 . . 180, 242 10 . , . 240 21 . 242
9 . . . 254 16 . , . IIITI 22. 10 . •
349
10 . . . 254 18 . . , . 44 11 . • 309
11 . . . 183 14. 10 . . . . 125 14 . • 323
12 . . . 183 13 . . - . 323 16 . • 304
12-14 ^ . 354
1

I-"ardon and Son", Printers, Wine Office Court, Fleet Street, London, E.C.
i
 V,

''•/-

ri:

4. ^.

{ •

(*>\v

v^«

•« '»
K

.^:*fA

fj;/^'^-'^

^•^.^
'w ^v •-
 *^.r%^«^

PA Green, Samuel GosnelL 1822-

813 1905.
.G7 Handbook to the grammar of
1885 the Greek testament :

IMS

PONTIFICAL INSTITUTE
OF MEDIAEVAL STUDIES
59 OUEEN-S PARK
Toronto 5, Canada